A SCREAM IN

THE NIGHT
M. SEAN MOLLEY
Adventure Designer
Adventure Code: CORE 1-1

Melvaunt is a city of merchants and metalsmiths. The docks are constantly

filled with ships from Hillsfar, Mulmaster, and more distant ports. The
northern coast of the Moonsea is an inhospitable place, and its people
have a reputation for being rough and unfriendly. But they don’t go around
murdering one another in the streets. At least, not usually.
Was that a scream you just heard? Part One of The Chaos in Melvaunt.

A four-hour adventure for 1st-4th level characters

Producer: Baldman Games

Core Administrator: Shawn Merwin
Editing and Layout: Encoded Designs
Cartography: Andrew Smith
Organized Play: Chris Lindsay
D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall,
Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks, Alan Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster
Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League, all other Wizards of the Coast product names, and their respective
logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive likenesses
are property of Wizards of the Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America.
Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the express written
permission of Wizards of the Coast.
©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31,
2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK.
 INTRODUCTION
Welcome to A Scream in the Night, a D&D Adventurers
League adventure, Part one of The Chaos in Melvaunt Trilogy

“We adore chaos because we love to produce order.”

— M. C. Escher
This adventure is designed for three to seven 1st-4th level characters, and is optimized
for five 1st-level characters. The adventure is set in the Moonsea region of the
Forgotten Realms, in the city of Melvaunt.

The D&D Adventurers League
This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of
the D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure,
players track their characters’ experience, treasure,
and other rewards, and can take those characters
through other adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a
store event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a
DCI number. This number is your official Wizards of
the Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have
a number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to
use to create and advance their characters. Players
can continue to play their characters after the
storyline season has finished, possibly participating
in a second or third storyline with those same
characters. A character’s level is the only limitation
for adventure play. A player cannot use a character
of a level higher or lower than the level range of a
D&D Adventurers League adventure.
For more information on playing, running
games as a Dungeon Master, and organizing games
for the D&D Adventurers League, please visit the
D&D Adventurers League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Preparing the Adventure
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
• Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
• Read through the adventure, taking notes
of anything you’d like to highlight or remind
yourself while running the adventure, such as a
way you’d like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d
like to use in a combat.
• Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
• Gather together any resources you’d like to
use to aid you in running this adventure--such
as notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and
battlemaps.
• If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.

C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
2 INTRODUCTION
Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
• Character name and level
• Character race and class
• Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most
common passive ability check
• Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, etc.)
Players that have characters outside the
adventure’s level range cannot participate in
the adventure with those characters. Players
with ineligible characters can make a new 1st-level
character or use a pregenerated character. Players
can play an adventure they previously played or
ran as a Dungeon Master, but not with the same
character.
Ensure that each player has an official
adventure logsheet for his or her character (if not,
get one from the organizer). The player fills out
the adventure name, session number, date, and
your name and DCI number. In addition, the player
also fills in the starting values for experience, gold,
downtime, renown, and number of permanent
magic items. He or she fill in the other values and
write notes at the conclusion of the session. Each
player is responsible for maintaining an accurate
logsheet.
If you have time, you can do a quick scan of
a player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing
looks out of order. If you see magic items of very
high rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you
can ask players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict
item use or ask them to use a standard ability
score array. Point players to the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and
it’s the beginning of an adventure or episode,
they can declare their activity and spend the days
now. Alternatively, they can do so at the end of
the adventure or episode. Players should select
their characters’ spells and other daily options
prior to the start of the adventure, unless the
adventure specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread
3 INTRODUCTION
the adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, you may see sidebars
to help make adjustments for smaller/larger
groups, and characters of higher/lower levels than
the optimized group. Most of the time, this is used
for combat encounters.
You may adjust the adventure beyond the
guidelines given. For example, if you’re playing
with a group of inexperienced players, you might
want to make the adventure a little easier; for
very experienced players, you may want to make
it a little harder. Therefore, five categories of
party strength have been created for you to use
as a guide. Feel free to use a different adjustment
during the adventure if the recommended party
strength feels off for the group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of
five 6th-level characters. To figure out whether
you need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
• Add up the total levels of all the characters
• Divide the total by the number of characters
• Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round
fractions of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table:
DETERMINING PARTY STRENGTH
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very Weak
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very Strong
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
 Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment
of the game for the players. You help guide the
narrative and bring the words on these pages
to life. The outcome of a fun game session often
creates stories that live well beyond the play at the
table. Always follow this golden rule when you DM
for a group:
Make decisions and adjudications that
enhance the fun of the adventure when
possible.
To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
• You are empowered to make adjustments to
the adventure and make decisions about how the
group interacts with the world of this adventure.
Doing so is especially important and applicable
outside of combat, but feel free to adjust the
adventure for groups that are having too easy or
too hard of a time.
• Don’t make the adventure too easy or too
difficult for a group. Never being challenged
makes for a boring game and being
overwhelmed makes for a frustrating one.
Gauge the experience of the players (not the
characters) with the game, try to feel out (or
ask) what they like in a game, and attempt to
give each of them the experience they’re after
when they play D&D. Give everyone a chance to
shine.
• Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game
session moving along appropriately. Watch for
stalling, since play loses momentum when this
happens. At the same time, make sure that the
players don’t finish too early; provide them with
a full play experience. Try to be aware of running
long or short. Adjust the pacing accordingly
• Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free
to modify the text as you see fit, especially when
dialogue is present.
• Give the players appropriate hints so they can
make informed choices about how to proceed.
Players should be given clues and hints when
appropriate so they can tackle puzzles, combat,
4 INTRODUCTION
and interactions without getting frustrated over
lack of information. Doing so helps to encourage
immersion in the adventure and gives players
“little victories” for figuring out good choices
from clues.
In short, being the DM isn’t about following
the adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about
facilitating a fun, challenging game environment
for the players. The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has
more information on the art of running a D&D
game.
Downtime and Lifestyle
At the beginning of each play session, players must
declare whether or not they are spending any days
of downtime. The player records the downtime
spent on the adventure logsheet. The following
options are available to players during downtime
(see the D&D basic rules or the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for more information):
• Catching up
• Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
commit to crafting a single item)
• Practicing a profession
• Recuperating
• Spellcasting services
• Training
Other downtime options might be available during
adventures or unlocked through play, including
faction-specific activities.
In addition, whenever a character spends
downtime days, that character also spends the
requisite expense for his or her lifestyle. Costs
are per day, so a character that spends ten days
of downtime also spends ten days of expenses
maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some downtime
activities help with lifestyle expenses or add
lifestyle expenses.
Spellcasting Services
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can
provide some spellcasting services. Characters
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
need to be able to travel to the settlement to obtain
these services.
Spell services generally available include
healing and recovery spells, as well as information-
gathering spells. Other spell services might be
available as specified in the adventure. The number
of spells available to be cast as a service is limited
to a maximum of three per day total, unless
otherwise noted.
SPELLCASTING SERVICES
Spell Cost
Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
Identify 20 gp
Lesser restoration 40 gp
Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
Remove curse 90 gp
Speak with dead 90 gp
Divination 210 gp
Greater restoration 450 gp
Raise dead 1,250 gp
Acolyte Background
A character possessing the acolyte
background requesting spellcasting
services at a temple of his or her faith
may request one spell per day from the
Spellcasting Services table for free. The
only cost paid for the spell is the base price
for the consumed material component, if
any.
Melvaunt is a large city where any
acolyte can find a friendly shrine or temple.
Disease, Death, and Recovery
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might
not have the same characters return from session
to session, here are the rules when bad things
happen to characters.
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating Effects
A character still affected by diseases, poisons,
and other similar effects at the conclusion of an
adventure can spend downtime days recuperating
5 INTRODUCTION
until such time as he or she resolves the effect to
its conclusion (see the recuperating activity in the
D&D Basic Rules).
If a character doesn’t resolve the effect
between sessions, that character begins the next
session still affected by the debilitating effect.
Death
A character who is killed during the course of
the adventure has a few options at the end of the
session (or whenever arriving back in civilization)
if no one in the adventuring party has immediate
access to a raise dead or revivify spell, or similar
magic. A character subject to a raise dead spell is
affected negatively until all long rests have been
completed during an adventure. Alternatively, each
downtime day spent after raise dead reduces the
penalty to attack rolls, saving throws, and ability
checks by 1, in addition to any other benefits the
downtime activity might provide.
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any
of the other options, the player creates a new
character. The new character does not have any
items or rewards possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing
any vital organs and is mostly whole) and the
player would like the character to be returned to
life, the party can take the body back to civilization
and use the dead character’s funds to pay for a
raise dead spell. A raise dead spell cast in this
manner costs the character 1,250 gp.
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As
above, except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for
the raise dead spell is paid for by the party at the
end of the session. Other characters are under no
obligation to spend their funds to bring back a
dead party member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to
4 and a member of a faction, the dead character’s
body can be returned to civilization and a patron
from the faction ensures that he or she receives a
raise dead spell. However, any character invoking
this charity forfeits all experience and rewards
from that session (both those earned prior to and
after death during that session) and cannot replay
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
 that episode or adventure with that character
again. Once a character reaches 5th level, this
option is no longer available.
Adventure Background
Melvaunt is a city of merchants and craftsmen
on the northern coast of the Moonsea. The open
market at the center of the city boasts a selection
of goods as impressive as anything found in
Waterdeep or Amn, with a particular focus on
metalwork. Between the sacking of Zhentil Keep
and the recent troubles in its two biggest rival
cities of Mulmaster and Hillsfar, Melvaunt has been
relatively undisturbed for a number of years.
Modrons are creatures of absolute law and
order. They are native to the plane of Mechanus,
where they tend its eternal gears and follow the
dictates of Primus. However, one group of modrons
have recently gone rogue after they were exposed
to an influx of pure chaos energy. Under the malign
direction of this chaotic impulse, the modron
hierarchy has decided to invade Melvaunt. Unlike
the Great Modron March, which happens every
289 years and is a reconnaissance mission, these
rogue modrons are planning to conquer or destroy
the city. They have constructed a portal from
Mechanus and are readying their invasion force.
C1e7i5 is a quadrone, a mid-ranking modron.
Quadrones are typically used as officers in the
modron armies, since both their physiology and
their moderate intelligence make them suitable to
a variety of combat roles. C1e7i5, like all modrons,
is accustomed to obeying orders it receives from
those above it in the hierarchy. It has diligently
been preparing to play its part in the upcoming
invasion of Melvaunt just like every other modron.
However, the chaos energy warped C1e7i5 a little
bit more than the others. C1e7i5 gained strange
new abilities and, most disturbingly, it gained…
ideas. Normally a modron that evolves beyond
its rank would be destroyed, but the hive mind is
currently malfunctioning in a variety of ways due
to the chaos that has overtaken the modrons.
C1e7i5 has independently decided that its
proper role in the modron hierarchy is to bring
6 INTRODUCTION
about the war between Mechanus and Melvaunt by
leading the attack. To this end, the modron entered
Melvaunt through the portal and is killing people.
However, its modron instincts for law and order
cannot be completely suppressed, even under the
influence of chaos. It is incapable of simply walking
into the town square and randomly slaughtering
people. C1e7i5 has therefore constructed an
elaborate (but in its mind, entirely logical) series of
puzzles and riddles identifying a series of people
it intends to murder. C1e7i5’s plan is to carry
out these killings, leading the city watch from
murder scene to murder scene before racing back
to the portal to Mechanus with the city guard of
Melvaunt in hot pursuit. The portal only opens at
specific days and times, so the entire sequence is
choreographed such that C1e7i5 and its pursuers
should arrive at just the right moment. Once the
rest of the modrons see a group of armed humans
enter Mechanus, the war must surely begin and
C1e7i5 will have fulfilled its purpose to perfection,
which is all any modron really wants.
C1e7i5 surreptitiously delivered a note to
the Melvaunt City Watch earlier this evening
identifying the time and place of its first planned
killing. (Modrons are readily identifiable creatures,
but quadrones are bipedal, so a cloaked and
hooded C1e7i5 is able to move around during the
night hours unnoticed as long as nobody studies it
too closely.)
Unfortunately, the overworked sergeant on
duty, Eledstra, did not discover the note until a
few minutes before the appointed time. Eledstra
solved the puzzle hidden in the text, realized to her
horror what was about to happen, commandeered
a detachment of city guards, and is frantically
racing across Melvaunt. Eledstra cannot get to the
scene in time to stop C1e7i5 from carrying out the
first murder. Coincidentally, the player characters
happen to be in the area, and this is where the
adventure begins.
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:

Playing the Adventures Out of Order
The Chaos in Melvaunt trilogy is best
experienced in the published sequential
order. However, there is no real harm in
playing them out of order. The adventures
do take place in chronological sequence
(1-1 followed by 1-2 followed by 1-3).
Therefore, the easiest way to deal with the
situation if some or all of the characters
have already played either 1-2 or 1-3
is simply to say that this adventure is a
flashback for those characters. Here are a
few points to consider:
• Those who have already played one
or both of the later adventures know
that the killer is a modron; take these
players aside and ask them not to
spoil the secret for the other players
at the table. If anyone reveals this fact
in character during the adventure, the
NPCs react with disbelief – and in any
case, what matters is stopping the killer,
not who the killer is.
• Characters who have favors of
Sergeant Eledstra or other Melvaunt
NPCs earned in the later adventures
cannot use those benefits in this
adventure.
Beyond that, there shouldn’t be any
information in the later adventures that
would compromise anyone’s experience of
playing this adventure.
Overview
This adventure is divided into a brief introduction,
five encounters, and a conclusion.
Introduction. The characters are on the streets
of Melvaunt at night when they hear the sounds of
a fight from a nearby alley.
Encounter 1 (Combat). A group of sailors
are brawling in the alley behind a seedy tavern.
The adventurers may choose to intervene or not,
7 INTRODUCTION
as they see fit. C1e7i5 instigated the brawl as a
distraction to cover its first murder, which takes
place down the opposite alley. The characters are
unable to prevent this murder, but they hear the
victim’s scream. When they (presumably) go to
investigate, they find a body, but are ambushed
by strange constructs before they can investigate
further.
Encounter 2 (Roleplaying/Investigation).
As the characters examine the body of the
murder victim, Sergeant Eledstra arrives with a
detachment of guards. They received a mysterious
note at their patrol station telling them that a
murder was to take place in this very spot – and
here are the adventurers, standing over a dead
body!
It isn’t difficult for the characters to explain
what really happened (especially with the sailors
as potential witnesses, albeit drunken and
unreliable ones). The constable is a sincere woman
who wishes to prevent any further bloodshed. A
note on the victim’s body gives a clue as to who
the next target is. The killer has promised to
strike every hour on the hour, so there’s no time
for bureaucratic niceties. Eledstra authorizes the
adventurers to carry out an investigation and
apprehend the perpetrator (dead or alive, but alive
preferred).
Encounter 3 (Exploration/Combat).
Depending on how successful the characters were
at deciphering the cryptic note, they may know the
full identity of the next victim, or they may only
know that they are looking for a blacksmith. The
marketplace of Melvaunt is home to the city’s best
smiths and metalworkers. Although the market
is far more active during the day than at night,
commerce never stops, so there are more than a
few people in the market. The adventurers must
search the area as quickly as possible to locate the
next victim.
C1e7i5 stages another ruse to try and
draw attention away from its target. A gnomish
artificer’s constructs suddenly break free of their
owner’s control and begin rampaging through
the area. During the commotion, the killer strikes,
this time from range. Whether the characters are
able to save the blacksmith or not, they find the
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
 next note on the end of the crossbow bolt (likely
embedded in someone).
Encounter 4 (Exploration/Combat). C1e7i5’s
third and final note leads the adventurers to the
temple of Loviatar where the rogue modron has
targeted a priestess. The characters’ first challenge
is convincing the self-sufficient and haughty
priestess that she needs their protection in the
first place. Depending on how this conversation
goes, the characters may be able to stand guard
inside the temple, or they may be forced to remain
outside and keep watch as best they can.
C1e7i5 can fly, so it comes in over the rooftops.
The chaotic power infused into C1e7i5 gives it
the ability to open up small dimensional rifts,
through which it pulls some allies. In response,
the priestess summons devils to her defense.
These creatures make no distinction between the
adventurers and the assassin, leading to a chaotic
fight. Once it is convinced that the characters will
pursue, C1e7i5 flees, flying over the rooftops of the
city with the adventurers in hot pursuit.
Encounter 5 (Combat/Chase Scene). As
C1e7i5 races across the darkened rooftops of the
city, it continues to tear open small planar rifts,
which spill out obstacles and monsters to slow the
characters down. This scene takes the form of a
series of vignettes rather than a single drawn-out
tactical encounter.
The chase ends when the killer reaches the end
of the docks, where a lighthouse called the Finger
of the Gods shines its light across the Moonsea.
Just when it seems the adventurers have cornered
their adversary, a much larger portal appears,
and C1e7i5 prepares to step through. Through
the portal the characters can see what looks like a
plane of whirling gears and other machinery. Any
characters who were able to keep up during the
chase scene have one chance to attack.
Conclusion. C1e7i5 escapes through the portal
but the characters’ efforts are not entirely in vain,
as it loses control at the last moment and the portal
slams shut, shearing off part of the killer’s body.
Instead of the expected bloodstain, the characters
discover that the severed limb is actually made
of metal! This evidence combined with the portal
apparently leading to Mechanus suggests that
8 INTRODUCTION
they have been pursuing a modron – a most
unusual identity for a serial killer. Unfortunately,
the characters do not have the ability to reopen
the portal themselves, so they have no choice but
to return to Eledstra. This leads into the events of
CORE 1-02 A Cog in the Wheel.
Adventure Hook
The characters are in Melvaunt for reasons of
their own devising. Potential hooks include the
following:
• There is always work for sellswords in
Melvaunt. The northern Moonsea is a dangerous
place. Merchant ships and overland caravans
have a constant need for guards. The characters
might have recently arrived in the city and
completed their last assignment, or they might
have come here looking for employment.
• Melvaunt has one of the largest open markets
in this part of the world. As the saying goes, “If it
isn’t for sale in Melvaunt, you don’t want to buy
it!” A character could have come here seeking a
rare item to buy, or in hopes of locating a buyer
for a particular item of their own.
• Some of the finest blacksmiths and
metalworkers in all Faerun ply their trade in
Melvaunt. A character might be looking for a rare
ore, an unusual special material like adamantine,
or a renowned crafter, either to have a specific
item made or in hopes of studying their
technique.
• Within the last few years, major troubles have
hit the cities of Phlan, Mulmaster, and Hillsfar,
all of which are reasonably close to Melvaunt.
The adventurers may have come here looking for
family members, friends, or others who fled the
unrest in those cities. Melvaunt has been largely
unaffected by the turmoil in the Moonsea region,
making it a relatively safe place for refugees.
• Because it is a major trade hub, all sorts
of information and material passes through
Melvaunt. The city’s authorities have a very
hands-off attitude when it comes to “legal”
versus “illegal” trade, up to and including slavery.
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
 The characters might have been sent here at
the behest of their faction leaders to check on
specific rumors, seek out certain items, or look
for missing people. Zhentarim characters in
particular might be interested in the ruins of
Zhentil Keep, which are not far from Melvaunt.
Introduction
Regardless of why they are in Melvaunt, the
characters find themselves exiting the Winking
Narwhal, a tavern near the docks. If time permits,
you can improvise a full scene where the
adventurers are introduced to one another inside
the tavern, or they might simply all have decided to
leave the tavern at the same time to head back to
their individual lodgings in the city.
If any of the players insists that his or her
character would absolutely not be in a seedy tavern
in the docks district, that character happens to be
walking down the street when everyone else comes
out of the Winking Narwhal. Once the adventure
starts, things move quickly, and the killer’s timeline
is unforgiving, so there’s no good opportunity to
fetch characters from locations around the city.
You can have the players introduce their
characters while everyone is in the tavern, or
if you want to get into the action more quickly,
there’s another good opportunity to do character
introductions at the end of Encounter 1.
9 INTRODUCTION
Read or paraphrase the following:
Although the sailors and dockworkers
crowding the Winking Narwhal will no doubt
continue carousing into the wee hours, just
before eight bells is your stopping time for
this evening. You’ve heard enough drunken
rumors about sea monsters in the Moonsea,
orc armies approaching the city gates, and
giants killing merchants along the Phlan Path.
As you exit the tavern, the stench of
stale beer and sweaty bodies is replaced
by the scent of burning coal and scorched
metal. They say that the forge-fires of
Melvaunt never stop burning, and the local
atmosphere is proof enough of that. The stars
are faintly visible in the night sky thanks to the
haze that shrouds the city. Still, Melvaunt’s
emphasis on trade and metalworking makes
it prosperous enough, a rarity in the harsh
lands north of the Moonsea.
No matter what business you were
planning to be about, you can’t help but
overhear the distinctive sounds of a brawl
coming from the nearby alley behind the
tavern.
Some of the characters might choose to investigate
the brawl; others may prefer to ignore it. The
entrance to the alley is about 30 feet away from the
door of the tavern, and the sounds of a fistfight are
clearly audible. It doesn’t sound like anyone is in
immediate danger of dying, but these things have a
tendency to turn ugly if they aren’t stopped.
Find out what each character wants to do, and
then proceed to Encounter 1.
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
 PART 1.
MURDER
During the first phase of the adventure the goal
is to introduce the mysterious killer as an unseen
figure who has decided to taunt the authorities with
cryptic messages before each kill. The adventurers
are drawn onto the trail by accident, but it quickly
becomes clear that they are the only ones who can
stop the murders.
Encounter 1: The Scream
The alleys near the Winking Narwhal are shown on
Map 1. Those characters who wish to investigate the
brawl start in the area marked A while those who
do not go down the alley instead start in the area
marked B.
For those who wish to investigate the sounds of
fighting, read or paraphrase the following:
A group of scruffy men rolls in the filth of
the alley, punching and biting each other
furiously. They seem to be fighting over
something, although between the darkness
and the muck it’s hard to tell what. “I seen it
first!” “No you didn’t!” “It hit me in the head!
The gods want ME to have it!”
There are a half-dozen drunkards brawling behind
the tavern. They do not attack the adventurers,
but are AC 10, can be knocked unconscious with a
single point of damage, and are at disadvantage on
all saving throws due to intoxication. (If any of the
adventurers decide to become a mass murderer
at this point, it almost doesn’t matter what C1e7i5
does after that, so presumably the characters will
choose to subdue the brawlers nonlethally.)
It should not take long for the adventurers to
clean up the mess. On a DC 13 Wisdom (Perception)
check, a character notices a torn purse and some
gold and silver pieces scattered in the muck of the
alley. This money is what precipitated the brawl.
10
C1e7i5 waited until a group of sailors came outside
to “get some fresh air” and then dropped the coins
into their midst, with the intention of creating a
distraction just in case anybody might be around
who could interfere with the murder the modron
is about to commit down the alley on the opposite
side of the street. This happened just before the
characters exited the tavern. Since the sailors had
no reason to look up and C1e7i5 can fly, no one saw
anything. The money just fell from the sky!
Give the characters a round or two to settle
matters, but don’t let this scene take too long. Just
when the players seem to think that the excitement
is over, that’s when you want to hit them with the
real encounter.
Although C1e7i5 is corrupted by chaos, the
modron is still bound to its logical, orderly ways. It
has been observing the patterns of various people
in the city, and it knows that there is a dockworker
who takes a shortcut down a particular dark alley
every evening at the same time. Precisely when
the clock tower finishes striking eight bells, the
murderer acts. C1e7i5 swoops down, plunging a
dagger into the victim’s back, killing the unfortunate
man but ensuring that he has time to scream (the
modron wants its note to be discovered). Leaving
the dagger buried in the man’s back and pinning
the note, the modron then scatters caltrops around
the alley and flies to the rooftop to make sure that
someone comes to investigate. All of this occurs
before the adventurers can reach the scene.
This scene can be very entertaining if you
portray the clock tower yourself, monotonously
chiming out all eight bells. This takes just long
enough to lull the players into a bit of boredom
before you launch into a blood-curdling scream at
the end. BONG … BONG … BONG … BONG … BONG …
BONG … BONG … BONG … SCREAM!
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 1
Read or paraphrase the following:
The elaborate mechanical clock tower near
the temple of Gond is audible from most
places in the city. Right on cue, it begins to
chime eight bells. As the final peal fades into
silence, you hear a scream from the opposite
side of the street.
Across the Street
If you have not already done so, now is a good time
to put the characters into initiative order. Anybody
who did not go into the alley to investigate the brawl
is much closer to the source of the scream and
therefore likely to end up triggering the trap left by
C1e7i5.
The murder scene is the area marked C on
Map 1. When a character enters this area, read or
paraphrase the following:
Very little natural light makes it into this
narrow passageway. A heavyset man
dressed in the clothes of a laborer lies face-
down in the middle of the alley. A dagger is
buried up to the hilt in the man’s back and
blood rapidly pools beneath his body. Further
details are difficult to discern from here.
In the darkness, it is difficult to tell from the
entrance of the alley whether the man is alive or
dead. A character with darkvision can make a DC
10 Wisdom (Medicine) check from a safe distance,
or any character can make the same check next to
the body, to determine that he is dead. The rapidly-
pooling blood suggests that the killing blow must
have been struck within the last minute or so.
The alley is filled with caltrops, but they are
difficult to see in the darkness. A character with low-
light vision or darkvision, or one who specifically
wants to examine the alley for danger before
rushing forward, may attempt a DC 13 Wisdom
(Perception) check to notice the faint glint of metal
from the hundreds of caltrops that C1e7i5 scattered
around the body.
A character who moves into the area of the
caltrops (marked on the map) at any speed without
11
being aware of them, or one who moves through the
area at greater than half speed, must succeed on a
DC 15 Dexterity saving throw or stop moving and
take 1 piercing damage. The character’s base speed
is also reduced by 10 feet until it regains at least 1
hit point. A character can clear a 5-foot square of
caltrops as an action, or a character who is aware of
the caltrops can move through the area at half speed
without needing to make the saving throw.
As soon as any character takes damage from the
caltrops or uses an action to clear a square of the
caltrops, their magic activates and they attack. Read
or paraphrase the following:
The tiny caltrops scattered around the alley
begin to vibrate. Suddenly, they fly up into
the air, forming deadly swarms of sharpened
metal!
Creatures. The characters are attacked by three
swarms of animated caltrops. If the characters
did not notice the caltrops before triggering combat,
then the monsters surprise them.
Tactics. The swarms are mindless, and simply
attack the nearest creature. However, the swarms
avoid each other’s spaces, choosing different targets.
Adjusting the Encounter
Swarms can be difficult for low-level characters
to deal with because of their damage
resistance. Even if the party is of Average
strength, if they don’t have more than one or
two characters who can deal full damage to the
swarms, consider using the adjustments for a
Weak party for this encounter.
• Weak party: Reduce the swarms’ hit
points from 22 to 15
• Strong party: Add two more swarms (for
a total of 5)
• Very strong party: Also increase the
swarms’ damage from 5 (2d4) to 10 (4d4).
The swarms continue to deal full damage
even when reduced below half their hit
points
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 1
 Development
Once the characters trigger the caltrops, C1e7i5
is satisfied that someone will find its note and
therefore its plan can continue. The modron silently
moves to the far edge of the roof and flies away into
the night. Only a character with a passive Wisdom
(Perception) score of 21 or higher has any chance
to notice the small dark shape that briefly flits
overhead before disappearing into the city, and
even if someone did see the shadow, they have the
problem of the animated caltrops to deal with, by
which time C1e7i5 is long gone. In summary, there is
no way for the adventurers to try and interact with
the modron at this stage of the adventure.
Once the characters defeat the animated
caltrops, the alley is safe to move through, and
they have a moment to examine the body. They can
determine the following information:
• The victim is a human male, mid-20s, with the
build and dress of an ordinary dockworker.
• The victim was killed with a single knife thrust
from behind. The expression on his face suggests
that he was taken completely by surprise.
• Wisdom (Medicine) DC 10: The warmth of
the body, the pooling of the blood, and the fact
that the characters heard the scream all confirm
that the murder took place within the last few
minutes.
• Wisdom (Medicine) DC 15: However, the
killer turned the dagger in such a way that the
victim had a chance to cry out before he died.
Given the strength of the blow and its precise
placement, it is very likely that the murderer
could have avoided allowing the victim to make
any noise. Did the killer want someone to hear
that scream?
• The murder weapon is a dagger of ordinary
make, the sort that anybody could buy for 2 gold
pieces in any weapon shop around Melvaunt. It
has no distinctive characteristics or smith’s mark
that would suggest anything special about it.
• The dagger was stabbed so hard into the
victim’s back that none of the blade is visible,
only the hilt. If a character pulls on the dagger
or inspects it closely, the edges of a folded
piece of paper can be seen. This note is pinned
12
to the victim’s back by the murder weapon. If
the adventurers retrieve the note, give them
Handout 1.
Within moments after the characters retrieve the
note (or finish their examination of the body, if they
decide not to pull the dagger out), the authorities
arrive. This is exactly the sort of inconvenient
coincidence that always seems to happen to
adventurers. Proceed to Encounter 2.
Encounter 2: Symbolic Study
Shortly after the adventurers destroy the animated
caltrops and retrieve the body of the murder victim,
a detachment of the Melvaunt City Watch arrives.
The patrol consists of eight guards led by Sergeant
Eledstra. Read or paraphrase the following:
You hear the shrill noise of a watchman’s
whistle and the sound of booted feet
clomping on the cobblestones. A
detachment of city watch surrounds the
alley at both ends, their halberds crossed to
prevent you from leaving.
An older woman in the uniform of an
officer steps carefully into the alley, avoiding
the blood and the caltrops. She studies the
area with keen blue eyes and runs a hand
through her unruly white hair. “Hmm, well,
now, what do we have here,” she murmurs,
as if to herself. “It seems that note was telling
the truth after all. But we didn’t get here
by eight bells. Missed our appointment for
murder! I’d have expected the killer to be
long gone. And yet…”
She looks expectantly at you, awaiting
an explanation.
The characters should not have a difficult time
explaining the situation to Sergeant Eledstra. She’s
a veteran officer and has investigated murders
before. Melvaunt isn’t a lawless city by any stretch
of the imagination, but it’s full of merchants, sailors,
laborers, and travelers at the edge of civilization, not
to mention the political machinations involving the
Council of Lords. There’s rarely a shortage of bodies
floating in the harbor (or worse). She has a Wisdom
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 1
(Insight) bonus of +8 and makes a show of writing
down everything the characters say.
Roleplaying Sergeant Eledstra
Eledstra is a human of late middle age. She’s a
decent woman who takes her job of protecting
Melvaunt’s ordinary citizens seriously. Eledstra
is tall, thin, and lanky with a shock of unruly
white hair through which she runs her fingers
constantly whenever she’s trying to think. She
is very bad at playing political games, which is
why she is only a Sergeant despite her many
years of service in the City Watch.
Quote: “You know, in another life, you’d have
made an excellent criminal.”
As long as the adventurers don’t lie to her, the
evidence on the scene supports their story. The
drunken sailors can possibly be retrieved from
the other alley (depending on exactly what the
characters did to them) to provide an alibi for the
moment of death, and any number of other patrons
of the Winking Narwhal can provide the adventurers
with an alibi for most of the evening. After hearing
the characters, Eledstra asks for their theory about
who did kill this unfortunate man.
The characters may also have noticed that
Eledstra was muttering about a note when she
arrived. This would be the most logical time for the
characters to show the sergeant the bloody note
they found on the body (she pulls out the dagger
and retrieves the note if they had not already done
so; if they had, she admonishes them gently about
disturbing evidence but is more interested in the
note than in a lecture).
Let’s Compare Notes
As it turns out, Eledstra has one additional piece of
information that the characters lack, and this would
give her a reason to believe them even if nothing
else about their story was plausible. She explains
the following:
• Earlier this evening, a note was delivered to
the City Watch station. Unfortunately, the desk
sergeant did not notice who left the note or
exactly what time it was. Early evening is when
13
a shift change takes place, and things are a bit
hectic while the duty roster is being checked and
patrol assignments doled out.
• The note was strangely addressed: the outside
of the envelope simply said “give this to your
superior.”
• Tonight the ranking officer on duty happens to
be Eledstra. By the time the note reached her, it
was well past seven bells.
• Eledstra found the note to contain a rambling
discourse, barely making sense. It did threaten
a murder, promising to kill someone this very
night, but it didn’t say who or where.
• Eledstra was about to dismiss the note as
the ravings of a madman when she noticed
something peculiar: some of the letters were
capitalized even in the middle of words. Reading
just the capitalized letters spelled out a hidden
message.
• The hidden message said EIGHT BELLS BY
NARWHAL. There’s only one building in town
named for a narwhal: the very tavern where the
adventurers began their evening.
• When Eledstra realized that she might have
a chance to stop a murder, she grabbed a
contingent of guards and raced from the Watch
station across the city, but obviously they arrived
too late.
• Eledstra believes that the note found on
the murder victim must contain a clue to the
killer’s next target. She doesn’t know why, but
this murderer seems to want an audience… or
someone to play along with his twisted game.
• If the characters offer to take on the
investigation, Eledstra agrees to deputize them
for the evening, and hastily scrawls out a writ of
authority for them. They are more experienced
than her patrol of raw recruits, and frankly,
Eledstra herself isn’t a young woman anymore.
She’s afraid of missing another one of the killer’s
“appointments” and being responsible for
another murder. She already feels deeply guilty
about not getting here in time.
• The Watch can offer the characters normal pay
plus a hazard stipend, and Eledstra promises
that if they can prevent any more murders, she’ll
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 1
 see to it that they are commended by the Council
of Lords, which is a big deal in Melvaunt.
• All that remains is to decipher the second note!
Troubleshooting: Players and Puzzles
The puzzles in this adventure aren’t designed
to be terribly difficult, but they do require a
little bit of thought and effort to solve. Some
players aren’t terribly good at solving puzzles
while others just don’t like them. There’s no
reason for either of these things to cause the
adventure to become derailed.
• Asking for Help: Sergeant Eledstra can
help the adventurers solve the note from
Encounter 1, while either Boltac (if he
survives) or Ellywicket Klemwocket (the
gnomish tinker) can help solve the note
from Encounter 3. Use NPCs to give hints as
much as possible rather than just telling the
players the answer.
• “Get a Clue” Checks: The players
might be stumped, but that doesn’t mean
the characters have to be. You can use
Intelligence (Investigation) and Wisdom
(Insight) checks to give hints (with more
direct hints available for higher check
results). Again, it’s better if the players
solve (or at least finish) the puzzle
themselves, rather than you just telling
them what the answer is, but showing them
how to get started is better than having
them give up in disgust.
• Failing Forward: In a worst-case
scenario, the characters can hear about the
subsequent murders not long after C1e7i5
commits them, and then go to the scene of
the crimes. They still have to fight whatever
rampaging monsters are left in the area, but
at least the trail of breadcrumbs continues.
Remember, C1e7i5 wants someone to
follow it back to the portal to Mechanus.
14
Deciphering the Bloody Note
It’s possible that a player could solve the puzzle
on Handout 1 faster than you can wrap up the
roleplaying scene with Sergeant Eledstra. If so, that’s
fine: when the characters show Eledstra the answer,
she congratulates them and says that they are
clearly the right people for the job, then sends them
on their way. For everyone else, here are the steps to
decipher the message (you can also use these steps
as hints if the players get stuck along the way):
• The first thing to notice is that the note is
written in a very stilted style, with precise
lettering (almost inhumanly precise). Eledstra
confirms that the handwriting matches that of
the note she received earlier in the evening.
• The blockiness of the letters is most
pronounced at the beginning and end of each
sentence; these letters are a little bit larger than
the rest.
• Reading the first letter of every sentence spells
out part of the message: TURN NUMBERS
• Reading the last letter of every sentence
spells out the other part of the message: INTO
LETTERS
• TURN NUMBERS INTO LETTERS implies that
there must be some numbers to find elsewhere
in the message.
• There is an obvious number in every line,
written using numerals (for example, the
number “4” in the second line).
• The following numbers are written as numbers
in the message, in this order: 1, 4, 1, 13, 1, 14, 20,
9, 14, and 5.
• Less obviously, there is also a “number word”
hidden in every line. Some of them stand on
their own, like the word “one” in the third line,
while others are hidden between two or more
words, like the word “twenty” hidden in the
phrase “ouT WENT Your” in the ninth line.
• The following number words are hidden in the
message, in this order: 2, 12, 1, 3, 11, 19, 13, 9,
20, and 8.
• How might one “turn numbers into letters” to
complete the message?
• There are twenty-six letters in the Common
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 1
 alphabet. If the first letter is 1, and the second
letter is 2…
• There are two distinct groups of numbers,
though: the numerals and the number words.
They should probably be read separately for the
message to make sense.
• Converting the numbers into letters spells out
the words ADAMANTINE (using the numerals)
and BLACKSMITH (using the hidden number
words).
• The next victim must be a blacksmith who
specializes in working with adamantine! The
text of the note also contains some additional
clues as to the victim’s identity, such as the fact
that the victim is a male dwarf. This information
can be used to narrow down the search.
Note that the characters can get on the right track
even if they only decipher the first part of the
message (the obvious numerals that spell out
ADAMANTINE). Eledstra encourages them to look
a little bit deeper if they seem inclined to stop after
only discovering the first part of the message, but if
they want to dash off anyway, they can: they’ll just
have a harder time stopping the next murder.
15
Once the characters decipher some or all of
the message and are ready to proceed, read or
paraphrase the following:
The Sergeant combs her fingers through
her hair so furiously it’s a wonder she’s not
completely bald. “Yes, yes, that must be
right,” she says, half to you and half to
herself. “Now where would one find… ah,
yes, of course! The marketplace at the
center of town. It’s the only place you’d find
adamantine ore for sale at this hour. You
must go quickly! The note promises another
killing at nine bells, which doesn’t give you a
lot of time. We already know what happens
when we’re late.”
Development
It takes an hour to complete a short rest, which is
more time than the adventurers have (since the next
murder is scheduled to take place at nine bells and
it is already well past eight.) If the characters did not
attempt to lie to her earlier, and she believes them to
be trustworthy, Sergeant Eledstra offers two potions
of healing that she carries with her on patrol.
Proceed to Encounter 3 when everyone is ready.
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 1
 PART 2.
THE ANGEL OF DEATH
In this part of the adventure, the characters pursue
the killer across Melvaunt. The modron’s first target
is Boltac, a dwarven blacksmith who specializes in
crafting adamantine. The next target is Zellani, a
priestess of Loviatar. The characters might be able to
save both of these NPCs if they are smart and quick.
Encounter 3: Uninvited Guests
The characters make their way from the docks
toward the marketplace at the center of town. The
streets are not empty, but it is easier to make good
time at this hour than it would be during the height
of day, and nothing interrupts the characters’ travel.
The adventurers arrive at the marketplace
about a quarter-hour before nine bells, meaning
they don’t have a lot of time to locate their target.
Fortunately, the “livestock pen” (Melvaunt’s
infamous slave market) is currently closed, so the
only people in the marketplace are buyers and
sellers of goods rather than people.
Read or paraphrase the following:
It takes about twenty minutes for you to
make your way from the docks to the large
marketplace in the center of Melvaunt.
Although the hour is late and many stalls
have closed for the night, the plaza is far
from deserted: you see plenty of buyers and
sellers haggling over an impressive variety of
goods and services. Unfortunately, there’s
no time for shopping. You have to locate the
killer’s next target.
The Search
The characters do not have enough time to conduct
an exhaustive search of their entire marketplace,
even with the reduced number of people here at
night. They need to be efficient in order to find the
target before nine bells.
16
Depending on how much information they
gleaned from the note found on the first victim, the
characters may know some or all of the following:
• The target is a male dwarf.
• The target is somehow identified with
adamantine.
• The target is a blacksmith.
Go around the table and ask each player what his or
her character is going to do in order to assist with
the search. Then have that person make a skill check
using an appropriate skill. Here are some examples:
• Look for a person who meets the description:
Intelligence (Investigation) or Wisdom
(Perception)
• Ask other vendors or their customers if they
know of a person who meets the description:
Charisma (Intimidation or Persuasion).
• Study the layout of the marketplace and look
for indications of the right kind of business
(smoke from a forge, signs of shops that all deal
in the same kind of wares, etc.): Intelligence
(Investigation) or Wisdom (Insight).
• Cause a commotion or try to draw a crowd in
hopes of confusing the killer or attracting the
target to come to them: Strength (Athletics) or
Charisma (Performance)
The basic DC for each character’s check is 15.
Grant a +5 bonus on the check if the player makes
a convincing argument for how to make use of
one or more of the pieces of information about
the victim that the characters have learned. If two
characters want to do the same thing, then they can
make a single check between the two of them, using
whichever bonus is higher and with advantage.
However, this reduces the total number of checks
available, so it could be a risky strategy.
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 2
 To determine whether the characters find
Boltac in time, and where they are all positioned in
the market when the clock strikes nine bells, refer
to Map 2: The Marketplace and use the following
outcomes to set everything up.
Option 1: Found Him!
If more than half of the characters succeed on their
individual skill checks, then whichever character
(or team) got the highest individual check result
is the one who discovers Boltac, and it happens a
few minutes before nine bells. The characters have
time to talk to Boltac and set up whatever defensive
arrangements they think appropriate. They don’t
know from where the attack will come, but at least
they’ll be ready for it.
All of the characters start in the location marked
A, and they may position themselves and Boltac (if
he’s listening to them; see below) however they see
fit.
Option 2: Last-Second Save
If less than half (but more than zero) of the
characters succeed on their individual skill checks,
then they find Boltac, but it happens mere seconds
before the clock tower begins to chime nine bells.
The characters have only a few seconds to explain
the situation to the irascible dwarf, and they may be
somewhat scattered throughout the marketplace
when the assassin strikes.
Boltac, along with the character or team who
found him, starts in the location marked A on the
map. Any other character who succeeded on his or
her check starts in area B, and any character who
failed his or her check starts in area C.
Option 3: Too Late…
If none of the characters succeed on their individual
skill checks, they don’t find Boltac before the clock
strikes nine bells. Boltac starts in the location
marked A on the map. Any characters who
succeeded on their individual checks begin in area B,
while those who failed their checks begin in area C.
Meeting Boltac
If the characters find Boltac before nine bells (either
Option 1 or Option 2), read or paraphrase the
following:
17
You see a dwarf, obviously getting on in
years but still strong enough to stand in a hot
forge all day. Arranged on the table in front
of him are a number of weapons forged
from adamantine. He seems to be expecting
someone, and perks up as you approach.
“Ah, Callanwolde, I presume? I have the
samples you requested right here. You’ll not
find better quality this side of Mithral Hall, I
can assure you of that!”
Note that only the characters who are in location A
may interact with Boltac at this time. Everyone else
is too far away to be part of the conversation.
What happens next depends on how much time
the characters have and how persuasive they can
be. If the characters are following Option 2, they
have just enough time to say a few words to Boltac,
so they’d better make it good. If they are following
Option 1, then the conversation can be a little bit
longer.
Boltac has no idea that someone intends to
kill him (and is initially skeptical of the notion). He
would not normally be in the marketplace at this
hour, but he was contacted by a representative of a
merchant interested in purchasing a large quantity
of adamantine arms and armor, and the deal had
to be done tonight. He does not want to close shop
until he meets his contact (who, of course, does not
exist: C1e7i5 arranged the deception to ensure that
its target would be in the right place at the right
time).
The characters must succeed on a DC 20
Charisma (Persuasion) check to convince Boltac that
they are telling the truth. However, the DC of this
check is reduced by 5 for each of the following:
• Showing Boltac the bloody note from the first
murder victim
• Displaying the writ from Sergeant Eledstra
If the characters succeed on the check, then Boltac
agrees to listen to them.
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 2

Roleplaying Boltac
Boltac is in his late middle age and is
cantankerous even by dwarven standards, but
once someone earns his respect, he is a loyal
friend and steadfast ally. His knowledge of
ancient techniques for refining and working
with adamantine is unmatched.
Boltac prefers the taste of wine to the taste
of ale, but he would never admit that to other
dwarves. If anyone questions the wineskin
that he keeps by his side, he insists that using
elven wine to quench hot steel in the forge is a
special technique that only he has mastered.
Quote: “Don’t make me give you a live
demonstration of my wares! There’s no discount
for your medical expenses.”
If the characters convince Boltac to listen to
them, he follows their orders during the combat
encounter. If they do not, then he simply picks up an
adamantine longsword and prepares to defend his
property against all comers.
The characters might also bypass the need for
the Charisma (Persuasion) check entirely if they can
convince Boltac, however briefly, that one of them
is his contact, but this requires a DC 20 Charisma
(Deception) check, and that DC cannot be lowered.
Alternatively, a character might decide to just go full-
on bodyguard and tackle Boltac or otherwise try to
physically move him out of danger. The dwarf does
not react kindly to this, but on a successful DC 15
Strength (Athletics) check, a character can wrestle
the dwarf to a safer position before combat starts.
Expect the Unexpected
Once the characters have had their moment
to interact with Boltac (or not, as the situation
warrants), the clock tower peals nine bells.
C1e7i5 has been observing the dwarf for some
time, but its sense of order compels it to wait until
precisely nine bells to attack, because that’s what it
said it would do. This time, rather than attempting
to engage its target in melee, C1e7i5’s plan is to
strike from range using a crossbow. The arrival
of the adventurers is a complication, but not an
insurmountable one.
18
One of the stalls adjacent to Boltac’s belongs
to Ellywicket Klemwocket, a gnomish tinkerer
and proud purveyor of what she calls “Gondsmen”
– small magical constructs that are useful for
performing a wide variety of household tasks.
Thanks to its newfound chaos powers, C1e7i5 has
a limited ability to control other constructs, which
it uses to cause Ellywicket’s “merchandise” to go
haywire. Read or paraphrase the following:
One of the stalls near Boltac is filled with
what look like four-foot-tall mechanical men.
Gears clank and servos whir as they walk to
and fro, demonstrating their ability to carry
heavy objects and perform other mundane
tasks. “Gondsmen, get your Gondsmen,”
calls out the proprietor, a female gnome
with bright red hair. She wears a holy symbol
of Gond, the god of artificers and tinkerers.
“They can lift, they can fetch, they never
get tired, and they don’t eat! The perfect
domestic servants!”
A puff of blue smoke comes out of the
back of one of the golems. It topples over on
its side, seemingly inert. “Oh, buckets,” says
the gnome. “Not in front of the customers!
Gondsman five, reset!”
The creature glows briefly and lurches
back to life, staggering to its feet. “There, you
see?” says the gnome excitedly. “Even when
they have a little hiccup, getting them back
to normal is easy-peasy. Wouldn’t you like to
take one home?”
The newly-rejuvenated golem does not
return to its previous duties, however. Instead,
it lurches forward, crashing through the thin
wooden panel separating the gnome’s stall
from Boltac’s. “Hey, it’s not supposed to do
that! Gondsman five, I said RESET!”
Suddenly, all the remaining constructs
begin to glow with the same reddish light,
and they too lurch forward. You realize that
every single one of them is headed directly
for the dwarf, ignoring their former mistress’s
commands.
Creatures. The characters face six lesser
Gondsmen. Boltac is present as an ally, while
Ellywicket is available as a healer in case any
characters are knocked unconscious (but she can’t
bring herself to destroy her own creations so she is
otherwise a noncombatant).
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 2
 Tactics. The constructs follow C1e7i5’s
telepathic orders. The modron does not necessarily
need to use the golems to kill Boltac: it has a
crossbow bolt ready for the dwarf. However, to
ensure a clear shot, any characters adjacent to
Boltac need to be distracted or removed, so the
constructs focus on attacking those characters. If
necessary, use the bull rush action to displace the
dwarf’s defenders long enough for C1e7i5 to get a
shot off.
Adamantine Assets. Boltac’s collection of
adamantine weapons could come in very handy for
the characters if they think to take advantage of this
resource. Any type of melee weapon found in the
Player’s Handbook can be located among Boltac’s
wares using an action. A character wielding an
adamantine weapon ignores the damage resistance
of the lesser Gondsmen. If Boltac sees a character
make an attack that is reduced by the constructs’
damage resistance, the dwarf calls out for the
characters to use his weapons.
Boltac: AC 15; HP 22; Attack: melee weapon
(adamantine warhammer), +4 to hit, range 5 ft., one
target. Hit: 7 (1d8+3) bludgeoning damage.
Elly: AC 11; HP 15; Action: cure wounds (3 slots;
touch; heals 1d8+4 hit points) or spare the dying
(cantrip; touch; stabilizes 1 dying target)
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for scaling this
combat encounter. These are cumulative.
Remember that if the characters are having
trouble with the constructs’ damage resistance,
Boltac’s adamantine weapons are available.
• Weak party: Remove two lesser
Gondsmen (leaving 4)
• Strong party: Add two lesser Gondsmen
(making 8 total)
• Very strong party: Increase the hit
points of each lesser Gondsman from 11 to
18, and increase their damage from 4 (1d6
+ 1) to 5 (1d8 + 1)
19
The Assassin Strikes
During the battle, C1e7i5 watches from a safe
distance for an opportunity to take a shot at the
dwarf. C1e7i5 acts on an initiative count of 20,
losing all ties. It spends the first two rounds aiming.
Beginning with the third round, C1e7i5 readies an
action to fire if the dwarf is not prone and does not
have any allies within 5 feet. Should this condition
trigger, read or paraphrase the following:
A heavy crossbow bolt streaks across the
marketplace from an unseen shooter. The
dwarf is caught unawares and groans in pain
as the bolt thuds into his neck. He falls to the
ground, gurgling as blood gushes from the
wound.
Boltac suffers an automatic critical hit, takes 22
damage, and is reduced to 0 hit points. He now has
to start making death saves unless he is stabilized
or healed (this has to come from one of the player
characters; don’t use Ellywicket to bail them out
of the plot in this instance). After taking its shot,
C1e7i5 leaves to set up for its third and final attack
of the night.
The next note is attached to the crossbow bolt.
If C1e7i5 never gets to take a clear shot during the
battle because the characters are never separated
from him, it instead fires the bolt into whichever
adventurer is closest to Boltac before leaving the
area. This does not require an attack roll, but also
does not automatically score a critical hit. The target
takes 1d10+2 piercing damage.
Unlike earlier, when the killer’s note was
pinned to the victim using a dagger, this time there
is no obvious note. The crossbow bolt is hollow
and contains a sheaf of tightly-rolled squares
of parchment. A character can discover this by
examining the bolt without needing to make a
skill check. If the players don’t think to check the
bolt for evidence, and Boltac is alive, he angrily
grabs the bolt and breaks it in half, revealing the
note. Otherwise you may need to have them make
Intelligence (Investigation) checks to get the right
idea.
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 2
 After the Battle
The characters may suspect (or even accuse)
Ellywicket of complicity in the attempt to murder
Boltac, but she denies everything, and it’s obvious
that she is telling the truth. Elly is very distraught
over the behavior of her Gondsmen. “Nothing like
this has ever happened before,” she insists. “I just
don’t understand what made them do that!” The
adventurers can console her by explaining the
situation or not, as they see fit. She mournfully
collects the bits and pieces of her destroyed
constructs and heads back to the temple of Gond.
She casts any remaining cure wounds spells on the
characters (or Boltac) before she leaves.
Roleplaying Ellywicket (“Elly”)
Klemwocket
Ellywicket is a bright young gnome priestess
of Gond. She got her love of tinkering from her
uncle Glimnock, who used to be an adventurer
many years ago and filled her head with stories
of the wonders of ancient Lantan when Elly
was a youngster. She takes great pride in her
work and is very upset about the events at the
marketplace.
Quote: “Why would you do it yourself when you
can build something… or someone… to do it for
you?”
If Boltac is still alive, he thanks the characters
profusely and promises to reward them properly
once the murderer has been dealt with. Anybody
who wants to borrow one of his weapons for the
remainder of the adventure is free to do so. Boltac’s
wares are magically protected against theft. Each
weapon has a smith’s mark that is attuned to a
specific anvil in Boltac’s forge. Unless the dwarf
deactivates the smith’s mark (which he only does
upon receipt of payment) then the weapon teleports
back to the anvil if it is ever taken more than a
mile from the anvil’s location. This is an effective
safeguard in case any of the adventurers “forget” to
return any weapons that they borrowed. Anybody
who tries to steal from Boltac is ineligible for the
Chunk of Adamantine Story Award at the end of the
adventure.
20
About fifteen minutes after the end of the fight,
Sergeant Eledstra and her contingent of guards
arrive at the marketplace. If the adventurers have
already left (which is a very reasonable thing for
them to do, considering the time pressure) then
Eledstra gets the story of what happened from the
survivors, perhaps including Boltac himself. The
characters can safely assume that the guards arrive
once they are alerted, so the adventurers don’t have
to worry about continuing to guard Boltac (or his
body) as opposed to deciphering the next note and
continuing to pursue the killer.
The characters must figure out where to go and
reach that location before the killer’s next scheduled
strike at ten bells, and the clock is ticking. Proceed
to Encounter 4 when everyone is ready.
Encounter 4: Love and Pain
This encounter takes the characters farther across
Melvaunt to the Temple of Loviatar, where the
modron plans to commit its final murder of the
night before leading its pursuers back to the portal
to Mechanus. Even if the modron failed to kill its
target in the previous encounter, its plan is still
proceeding in an acceptable fashion.
The characters must decipher the next note in
order to figure out where they need to go.
Yet Another Note
The “note” in this case is a sheaf of nine thin
parchment pieces rolled up inside the crossbow bolt
that C1e7i5 fired into the last battle. Give the players
Handout 2 when they examine it. The individual
small sheets have a mixture of numbers and letters
on them. (If possible, it would be best for you to
cut the puzzle pieces out ahead of time, since the
players are unlikely to have a pair of scissors on
them at the game table.)
As before, this puzzle reveals the location and
time of the next murder, along with a clue to the
specific identity of the victim. The following steps
and hints can be used to help guide the players
through solving the puzzle if they require assistance.
Boltac and/or Ellywicket can offer suggestions, or if
the characters wait long enough, they can show the
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 2
puzzle to Sergeant Eledstra and get her opinion, but
this takes a full fifteen minutes.
• This puzzle has two clear parts: the numbers in
the corner of each puzzle piece, and the letters.
• Each of the pieces is the same size. This suggests
that they can probably be assembled into a larger
shape. What clues might there be about how to fit
the pieces together?
• The message is likely hidden within the
letters on the puzzle pieces, which means that
the numbers are probably a guide for how to
assemble the pieces.
• The numbers at the corners of each piece are
not all unique. Some of them even seem to match
the numbers on other pieces.
• Assemble the nine smaller pieces into a single
larger shape by matching the numbers in the
corners. Where more than two pieces come
together, they all have the same value on the
matching corner.
• Numbers that don’t match any other puzzle
piece must go on the outside corners.
• The largest quantity of identical numbers is
four, and there are four such numbers. If four
pieces come together in four places, this means
that the final shape must be a 3x3 square formed
using the nine puzzle pieces.
• Once you have assembled the square, you
should be able to read the message. You are
looking for the place and time of the murder, and
some clue as to the identity of the victim.
• There seem to be some extraneous letters,
unless you think it’s likely that the murderer
wrote a message consisting of a lot of Q’s and X’s.
• Reading across the middle of the completed
shape reveals the words HALF ELF.
• The word TEMPLE is visible reading across the
top, starting with the center piece and continuing
onto the upper-right piece (bending downward).
• There are three large temples in Melvaunt:
Gond, Sune, and Loviatar. Do any of those names
appear anywhere in the message?
• Reading clockwise around the “ring” and
ignoring the extraneous letters, the message
spells TEMPLE OF LOVIATAR TEN HOURS. All
21
of the previous messages have specified a time,
so that probably means ten bells tonight, not ten
hours from now.
There is only one Temple of Loviatar in Melvaunt. It
is located back in the direction the characters came
from earlier, on the edge of the docks district, but
the distance they have to travel is a little greater. It
takes about twenty-five minutes to reach the temple
from the marketplace. Even adding in the time to
recuperate after the battle and examine the note, the
characters can reach the temple with time to spare.
Optional Challenge: Solving Time
Realistically speaking, if Boltac survived the
previous encounter and the adventurers
don’t wait around for the city watch to show
up, they can make it from the marketplace to
the Temple of Loviatar with plenty of time to
spare. Since they don’t have to search a large
area, there’s no reason to think that they will
arrive at the last possible moment like they did
before.
One way to add a bit of extra pressure
is to use the amount of real-world time the
players take to solve this puzzle as a proxy
for how long it takes their characters in the
game world. Our test-solving indicated that
it takes about ten to fifteen minutes for most
groups to solve the puzzle. If you think that
your group falls within that range, based on
their performance on the first puzzle, and if the
players seem to be enjoying the puzzles, then
you can use their solving time to determine
how quickly they reach the temple.
Track the number of minutes it takes the
players to solve the puzzle and subtract that
number from 20. That’s how many “extra”
minutes before ten bells they have when they
reach the temple. If they take more than 20
minutes to solve the puzzle, then the battle is
already in progress when they arrive, but the
priestess is still alive, so the characters haven’t
failed their mission. (Some players might be
pretty bored if it takes them 20 minutes to
solve the puzzle, so be careful.)
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 2
 The Resting Place of the Whip
As it turns out, there is only one half-elven priestess
at the Temple of Loviatar, and one of her tasks is
attending to the shrine each night at ten bells.
Read or paraphrase the following:
The temple is a two-story stone building,
larger and wider than the more ramshackle
structures on either side of it, but not
otherwise out of place in the district.
Apart from a few statues and a holy
symbol over the door, there’s not much
here to suggest the presence of a place
of worship. This might be due to some of
the misunderstandings that commoners,
especially sailors, tend to have about the
teachings of Loviatar. From here you can see
the glow of the lighthouse all the way down
at the other end of the docks.
The door is closed, although a bit of
light escapes from within through the narrow
glass windows. It does not appear that the
temple is open to supplicants at this late
hour, but neither does the building seem to
be uninhabited.
The adventurers have any number of options,
assuming they arrived with some time to spare.
They can present themselves at the temple, or
they can set up outside and try to intercept the
assassin before he gets inside. Since they don’t
know precisely what they are looking for, the second
option is perhaps more uncertain, but has the
advantage of not needing to explain themselves to
anybody. Unfortunately, C1e7i5 is already inside the
temple, biding its time until ten bells.
The Diplomatic Approach
If the characters use the bell pull at the front door
or otherwise politely announce themselves, the
priestess on duty comes to investigate.
22
Read or paraphrase the following:
A metal slat in the center of the door slides
open, revealing the face of a half-elven
female with jet-black hair. A deep scar mars
one side of her otherwise beautiful face. “I’m
sorry,” she says politely, “but the temple is not
open for services at this hour. You can see
our schedule posted on the notice boards to
either side of the door.”
This is Zellani, the assassin’s next target. The
characters have only a brief moment to interrupt
her before she closes the window and goes back
to her duties. On a successful DC 10 Charisma
(Persuasion) check the characters can get her to
listen to what they have to say. The DC rises to 15
if the characters try intimidation (priestesses of
Loviatar are not easily cowed) or Deception (she is
already suspicious). The characters gain advantage
on their Persuasion check for showing Zellani the
murderer’s note or the writ from Sergeant Eledstra
(although Zellani correctly points out that the
authority of the City Watch does not extend to the
right to enter the city’s temples whenever they
want).
Roleplaying Zellani
The half-elven priestess of the Maiden of
Pain is tall and muscular with black hair. She
has a scar on one cheek that looks like it was
made by a sword rather than a whip, which
she gained during her younger days as a
mercenary, but she does not speak of her past.
Loviatar’s temple is one of the largest in
Melvaunt, and Zellani is working her way up
the ranks. She adheres to Loviatar’s teachings
but considers herself above the ordinary folk
because of her duty to administer pain and
torment. As a result, she is overconfident,
potentially making her an easier target for
C1e7i5.
Quote: “I shall give you the pain you so richly
deserve.”
If the characters persuade Zellani to listen, she
keeps the window open but does not yet open the
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 2
door. She is unaware of the disturbances earlier
this evening, but even if what the characters say is
true, the safest place for her is inside the temple. In
any case, she is not willing to abandon her duties.
Phrases like “let us search the temple” definitely do
not make her happy. The best the characters can
hope for is to offer to guard her for the evening (or
really, for the next few minutes, since the attack will
happen at ten bells). In this case, she reluctantly
invites them into the sanctuary but warns them not
to leave the main hall. She then goes back to her
work of tending to the shrine.
If the characters are unable to persuade Zellani
to listen to them at all, or if they don’t manage to
sign up for guard duty, she closes the door. At that
point they either have to wait outside the temple
and hope to spot the assassin, or try to sneak into
the temple themselves. There is a side door that can
be picked open with a DC 15 Dexterity check using
thieves’ tools. This lets the characters into the back
of the sanctuary, but they have to be careful not to
draw attention to themselves or Zellani sounds the
alarm and calls the watch on them, which might be
tough to explain to Sergeant Eledstra. Fortunately,
there are some curtains they can hide behind, as
shown on Map 3: Temple of Loviatar.
Ten Bells
Once you have established where the characters are
positioned at the moment the clock strikes ten, what
the characters see depends on where they are.
Read or paraphrase the following if the characters
are outside the temple when the attack begins:
The clock tower chimes the hour, predictable
and steady as always. Just like your
adversary, who has been nothing if not
consistent. Sure enough, as the last bell fades
away, you hear the sound of breaking glass
and shouts of battle from inside the temple.
The front door is locked, but the characters can
force it open with a DC 15 Strength (Athletics) check
or someone with thieves’ tools can pick it open with
a DC 15 Dexterity check.
23
Read or paraphrase the following if the characters
are inside the temple when the attack begins:
As the last of ten chimes fades away,
you brace for the inevitable attack. Your
adversary has been nothing if not consistent.
The priestess looks up in surprise as a faint
scratching sound begins to echo around the
sanctuary. “What’s that? Who’s there?”
Thin strips of yellow light appear in the
air, as if someone… or something… were
slicing through the very fabric of reality with
a sharp knife. Swirling motes of chaotic
energy burst through the rifts, followed by
stick-like figures whose shapes twist and
waver, constantly changing form. Even
their shadows don’t stay still, writhing and
stretching across the floor.
“You dare invade the sanctum of
Loviatar? You may think me defenseless,
but I am not!” shouts Zellani. “I call upon
the servitors of the Maiden of Pain to taste
the delicious agony of your suffering!” She
gestures, and more flashes of light herald the
arrival of a number of devils throughout the
temple. It appears that the odds are more
even than the situation first appeared. And
yet, of the assassin himself, there seems to be
no sign.
C1e7i5 has summoned a legion of creatures of
pure chaos, while Zellani is defended by lawful evil
lemures and imps bound to Loviatar. For the most
part, these creatures fight one another separately
from the adventurers, so that the adventure doesn’t
bog down into a dice-rolling battle between a bunch
of unimportant NPCs. Only the specific foes listed
below need to be tracked on the battle map: you can
describe the battle taking place throughout the rest
of the temple in cinematic terms.
Creatures. The characters and Zellani are
attacked specifically by four chaos blights and two
chaos bolters.
Tactics. The chaos creatures are uncontrollable,
and C1e7i5 makes no attempt to control them.
They attack recklessly and without any sort of
coordination or organization. The devils are more
organized, being creatures of law, but the characters
are not really any more welcome here than the
chaos creatures. Occasionally one of the devils
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 2
 breaks ranks and attacks the adventurers (but never
the priestess or any character who is a worshipper
of Loviatar).
Zellani prefers to fight in melee with her whip.
She used up all of her spell slots to trigger the
effect that summoned the devils, so she only has
her sacred flame cantrip remaining. Try to keep her
positioned near the altar of Loviatar during the fight
so that she is underneath the skylight when C1e7i5
crashes through (as detailed under “Catch Me if You
Can”).
Zellani: AC 13; HP 25; Speed 30 ft.; Attack: melee
weapon (thorn whip), +4 to hit, reach 5 ft. or 10 ft.,
one creature; Hit: 7 (2d4 + 2) piercing and slashing
damage. Action: sacred flame (cantrip, DC 12, 1d8
radiant damage).
Devils in the Details
At the end of each adventurer’s turn, roll 1d6. On a 6,
one of the nearby imps makes a fly-by attack against
that character. Don’t attack the same character two
rounds in a row with this effect. Worshippers of
Loviatar are not subjected to these attacks.
Flying Imp Sting: Melee Weapon Attack, +5 to hit,
one target; Hit: 5 (1d4 + 3) piercing damage. If the
APL is greater than 2, then a target struck by this
attack must also make a DC 11 Constitution saving
throw, taking 10 (3d6) poison damage on a failed
save, or half as much damage on a successful save.
24
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for scaling this
combat encounter. These are cumulative.
• Weak party: Remove one of the chaos
bolters (leaving 1) and one of the chaos
blights (leaving 3)
• Strong party: Add one chaos bolter (for a
total of 3) and two chaos blights (for a total
of 6)
• Very strong party: Add two more chaos
blights (for a total of 8), add a chaos slasher,
and increase the chaos bolters’ hit points
from 11 to 18
This is the last fight of the adventure. The players
might think that they need to hold back so that
they can take a shot at the assassin when he finally
shows himself, but they aren’t going to be able to
fight C1e7i5 in this adventure. If the characters are
having an easy time and still have a lot of resources
remaining, throw a few extra chaos creatures at
them to make things interesting.
Catch Me If You Can
As the fight progresses, C1e7i5 watches from
above. There is a large glass skylight directly over
the altar that provides a good view of the inside
of the sanctuary (at least, for a creature that can
fly and has truesight, which C1e7i5 does). At this
point the modron’s goal has shifted from carrying
out its third and final murder to ensuring that its
greater plan of luring the adventurers through the
portal to Mechanus succeeds. C1e7i5 waits until
the characters have defeated the last of its chaos
creatures and then makes its dramatic entrance.
This works best if the priestess is by the altar,
directly underneath the skylight.
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 2
Read or paraphrase the following:
As the final chaos creature dissolves into a
puddle of swirling color, the priestess looks
around triumphantly. “You see!” she shouts
at the heavens. “You thought to bring me
death and instead I have brought you
exquisite pain. Now show yourself and feel
the sting of my whip!”
From above the altar, a quiet voice
whispers two words: “Very well.”
The glass skylight that arches over the
sanctuary shatters. A rain of broken glass
cascades down upon you. Zellani cries out in
pain and drops to one knee. A massive shard
has impaled her shoulder.
Floating above you in the wreckage
of the once-beautiful window is a spindly,
cloaked figure. You cannot make out its
face or features, but its arms and legs are
very thin. It carries a bow, nocked with a
single black arrow, aimed at the heart of the
priestess of Loviatar.
This is, of course, the final and most glorious stage
of C1e7i5’s perfect plan. Allow the characters to take
one action apiece. For most of them this will be a
ranged attack or a spell (as the modron is flying at a
height of 30 feet, well out of melee range).
C1e7i5 has AC 16 and in order to prevent the
death of Zellani the characters must deal a total of at
least 20 points of damage during this single round
of actions. (In no event can they kill the modron
here, but they can do enough damage to throw off
its aim.)
A character who wishes to shield the priestess
instead of making an attack may do so; this counts
as 10 points of damage toward stopping the
modron’s killing blow.
25
Saving the Priestess
The target of 20 points of damage in a
single round is based on an assumption of 5
characters at APL 1. The base formula is 4 x
(number of characters in the party). However,
the multiplier goes up at higher APLs.
• APL 2: The target is 5x the number of characters.
• APL 3: The target is 7x the number of characters.
• APL 4: The target is 10x the number of characters.
So, if there are 7 characters in the party and the
APL is 1, the target is 28 points of damage. If
there are 4 characters in the party and the APL
is 3, the target is also 28 points of damage. This
number obviously can’t be perfect; a single
character scoring a critical hit or a series of low
damage rolls could swing the outcome either
way. This is intended to be cinematic rather
than mechanically rigorous.
If the characters succeed, read or paraphrase the
following:
The cloaked figure recoils from the strength
of your attacks, its aim ruined. The black
arrow skips harmlessly off the marble floor.
You notice that there does not seem to be
another note attached to it. The assassin flies
back up out into the night sky through the
broken skylight, but his movement is slow.
Through clenched teeth, the priestess
says, “Door … to the roof. Behind the curtain.
Hurry. Get that bastard for me.” She will live,
but she has lost too much blood to join you
in the final pursuit. If you hurry, perhaps you
can intercept the assassin on the roof and
bring him to justice for all the crimes he has
committed tonight.
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 2
 If the characters fail, read or paraphrase the
following:

Your attacks bounce harmlessly off the

cloaked figure’s defenses. The black arrow
flies straight and true, taking the priestess in
the side. As she slumps to the marble floor,
her blood spreading across the altar of the
Maiden of Pain, she gasps her final words.
“Door … to the roof. Behind the curtain. Get
that bastard … for … me.”
Her body goes limp and her breath stills.
The assassin, seemingly complacent in his
triumph, lazily spirals back toward the night
sky through the shattered skylight. If you
hurry, perhaps you can intercept him on the
roof and gain some measure of vengeance
for all of tonight’s victims.

Regardless of the outcome, the assassin has just fled

to the rooftops, and for the first time all night, the
characters have an opportunity to pursue. Assuming
they take advantage of it, proceed to Encounter 5.

C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
26 PA RT 2
 PART 3.
MURDERER
Whether it succeeds at killing its intended victims
or is thwarted by the adventurers, C1e7i5’s final
action is to lead the characters on a chase across
the rooftops of the city, culminating at the portal to
Mechanus.
Encounter 5: Separation
Assuming the characters don’t dawdle after C1e7i5
tries to kill Zellani, they have no trouble finding the
secret door behind the heavy black curtains in the
sanctuary. This leads to a storage area with a ladder
that allows access to the roof via a one-way trap
door. The door is hinged so that it opens easily when
someone is climbing out of the temple, but does not
open at all from the other side.
When the characters get to the roof, read or
paraphrase the following:
The cloaked figure takes off toward the glow
of the lighthouse at the far end of the pier.
The warehouses, taverns, and other buildings
in this area are built so close together that
you can actually run along the rooftops
all the way down the length of the docks
district.
Although he is flying, the assassin doesn’t
seem to be moving all that fast. Maybe you
got a few good shots in there after all. You
might even be able to catch him.
Then the creature reaches lazily into
the air. As its arm emerges from beneath
the billowing cloak you catch just a glimpse
of how thin it is. The skin seems strange…
almost metallic. There’s no time to ponder
the implications, however, because as the
assassin touches the air, glowing energy
erupts, creating small planar rifts. Some
of these vortexes wink harmlessly out of
existence immediately after they form,
while others… linger. The rooftops have just
become an obstacle course of mythical
proportions.
27
This is a chase scene, but it’s intended to be
cinematic rather than tactical. There’s no battle map
for the encounter. Simply visualize a series of zones
or checkpoints, each of which represents a section
of the rooftops between the Temple of Loviatar and
the Finger of the Gods (the lighthouse).
To traverse a zone, the characters must
overcome an obstacle specific to the plane
associated with that zone. They may use ability
checks, skill checks, attacks, and spells as you deem
appropriate (some suggestions are provided for
each obstacle, but feel free to allow any solutions
that you deem appropriate to work).
You should go around the table in initiative
order and track which zone each character is in,
so that they can work together to overcome the
obstacles (and do things like use the Aid action or
cast spells on each other), but don’t track movement
in the sense of five-foot squares or even the total
number of feet moved. The lead character is always
one zone behind the assassin until finally reaching
the lighthouse after traversing a total of four zones.
Time Check. If you are running short on time
for the game session when you reach this encounter,
it’s okay to shorten the chase. Run a couple of
obstacles and then proceed to the final scene at
the lighthouse. If you have more time, then you can
run four zones, and perhaps even improvise a few
scenes of your own.
Speed Bonus. Characters who have a high base
speed (or can Dash as a bonus action, or are willing
to spend all their actions on movement) are often
able to break chase scenes that are played out on
a battle map. These scenes are abstract, meaning
that a character with an extra 20 feet of movement
rate doesn’t really have a direct advantage and
a character with a walking speed 10 feet slower
doesn’t really have a disadvantage. To acknowledge
these differences in at least some game-mechanical
way, characters gain a +1 bonus on all their skill
checks for a given obstacle for each 10 feet of
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 3
 movement they have above 30 feet per round while
encountering that obstacle.
Adjusting the Encounter
You don’t really need to make scaling
adjustments to this encounter. If the characters
are having a very easy time making the skill
checks, feel free to bump up the DC by a point
or two, but the goal is for this to be cinematic
more than tactical, and higher-level or more-
skilled characters should have an easier time
overcoming the challenges.
Getting to Mechanus
C1e7i5 is on a pretty tight timeline to reach the
lighthouse before the portal to Mechanus opens.
Despite the chaotic corruption that has affected
the modrons, the plane’s inner workings remain
as precise and orderly as ever. The portal is
controlled by a complicated series of magical gears
and is subject to timing restrictions involving the
movement of a variety of celestial bodies. All of
which is to say, when it opens, it opens, and when
it closes, it closes. C1e7i5 is attuned to the portal so
it can sense the exact timing, but it cannot directly
control the opening and closing of the portal.
It is possible that the characters will be
completely bogged down by an obstacle and too far
behind. The timing of this encounter expects that
the characters won’t spend more than 1-2 rounds
(either individually or collectively) dealing with
specific obstacles. If things get too difficult for the
characters, the planar rifts in their current zone
disappear, allowing them to proceed. A character
trained in Arcana can also try to destabilize the
planar rifts in his zone as an action. On a successful
DC 15 Arcana check, every other character in the
same zone has advantage on their checks made to
overcome the obstacles in that zone this round.
Planar Obstacles
C1e7i5 has the power to open small planar tears
as a result of its infusion with chaotic energy. It
doesn’t always know what will come through on
the other side, so you can roll randomly for the
type and order of the obstacles if you don’t want to
28
choose. Each obstacle is associated with one of the
planes mentioned in the Dungeon Master’s Guide,
but contains only an echo of the plane’s true nature.
This isn’t a comprehensive list of planes, so feel free
to turn to the DMG for inspiration to create some of
your own planar obstacles.
Table: Planar Obstacles
D8 Plane (Obstacle)
1 Ethereal (Ether Cyclone)
2 Feywild (Rampant Growth)
3 Shadowfell (Despair)
4 Limbo (Pure Chaos)
5 Beastlands (Hunter’s Maze)
6 The Abyss (Corruption)
7 Hades (Larva)
8 Limbo (Power of the Mind)
Ethereal. The planar rifts on this rooftop blast
out the howling energies of an ethereal cyclone.
These serpentine columns exert a tremendous
wind-like force. Characters in this zone must
succeed on a DC 10 Strength (Athletics) check or fail
to make progress through this obstacle this turn.
Feywild. Verdant growth bursts forth from
the planar rifts, covering the rooftop in clinging
vines that try to drag the characters off track.
Each character in this zone must succeed on a DC
10 Dexterity (Acrobatics) check or fail to make
progress through this obstacle this turn. On a failed
check the character also takes 3 (1d4 + 1) poison
damage from being impaled by poisonous thorns.
Instead of making the Dexterity check, a character
can cut or burn a path through the foliage by making
an attack that deals at least 7 points of damage with
a slashing weapon or 3 points of fire damage.
Shadowfell. When these portals open, the
characters are blasted with negative energy. Ghostly
hands reach out of the portals, sapping the life and
will of all those they touch. Characters in this zone
must succeed on a DC 10 Wisdom saving throw or
stop moving, overcome by despair. The character
may repeat this save at the start of each of his or
her subsequent turns. Any character overcome by
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 3
despair who stops moving in this zone also takes 3
(1d6) necrotic damage per round under the effect.
Limbo. As the characters race across this zone,
the planar vortex opens to reveal a group of chaos
bolters (the same creatures the adventurers fought
in the Temple of Loviatar). Each character in this
zone is subjected to a single chaotic bolt attack (see
the stat block for the chaos bolter for details). If this
attack hits, the character must also succeed on a DC
10 Constitution saving throw or grow an extra limb.
The extra limb is of a completely different species
than the character’s own body parts and flails about
of its own accord, making it useless. It disappears at
the end of the character’s next turn.
Beastlands. A howl echoes through this zone
and the sounds of a thundering herd shake the
building on which the characters stand. The wild
patterns of sound and color make it difficult to
stay on the path. Each character in this zone must
track their way forward by succeeding on a DC 10
Wisdom (Animal Handling, Perception, or Survival)
check to stay on the true path and avoid the
stampeding animals, which vanish almost as quickly
as they appear.
The Abyss. This zone is filled with gruesome,
horrific obstacles – pools of blood and ichor,
bones that reach from the ground to grab at the
characters, and worse. The characters are subjected
to the terrible corruption upon their own bodies,
beginning to hallucinate mouths eating their arms,
a paranoid sense that they are being betrayed by
their allies, mad ambition and wild bloodlust, or
temporary possession by a minor demon. Each
character in this zone must succeed on a DC 10
Charisma check or spend the round trying to throw
off the effects of the corruption. Give each character
a different type to keep things interesting.
Hades. The rifts that open up to the Three
Glooms spill out an endless stream of vile larvae.
The sky appears ashen and everything about the
city appears gray and colorless. The moon and
stars disappear. The mindless larvae pour forth,
attempting to devour the characters. Each character
is subjected to an attack: +3 to hit, dealing 3 (1d4 +
1) piercing damage on a hit. More dangerously, any
character hit by a larva is restrained, and additional
larvae continue to pile on, seeking to bury the
29
character. The character must succeed on a DC 9
Strength (Athletics) or Dexterity (Acrobatics) to
break free and continue moving through the zone.
Limbo. When the characters enter this zone
they suddenly stop moving. Their limbs no longer
exert force. Only the power of the mind allows
motion here. As an action, a character in this zone
can make a DC 10 Intelligence check to move a
different character in the zone or a DC 15 check
to move itself. A total of two successful movement
checks are required for any character to exit the
zone, so a character who gets trapped here alone
might be stuck for a while, floating in random
directions while trying to focus his or her thoughts.
Reaching the Lighthouse
When a character exits the final planar zone, reality
snaps back into place around that character. Looking
back, the character sees nothing but ordinary
rooftops (across which any remaining adventurers
are still struggling, but with no visible adversaries
or obstacles). The planar effects can only be felt and
observed by those who are caught within them.
Meanwhile, C1e7i5 also reaches the lighthouse,
and the portal to Mechanus is about to open right on
schedule. Allow for the next few characters to make
checks to try and complete their last zone so that
they can also be present for the final revelation, but
any characters who are more than two zones behind
won’t make it in time.
Read or paraphrase the following:
The massive lighthouse known as the Finger
of the Gods stands before you, its beacon
visible far across the Moonsea. You reach
the end of the last rooftop just a few paces
behind the floating, cloaked figure, which
slowly turns to face you. As the hood of its
cloak falls away, you see… a square, cubical
face, with swirling eyes and metallic skin. No,
not just a face… the creature’s entire body
is essentially a perfect cube about the size
of a man’s torso. It has no neck or head; its
face peers at you from the front of the cube.
It is bipedal, but its arms and legs are skinny
and elongated and seem to attach to the
sides of the cube. It moves with a surprising
quickness for something so strangely
proportioned.
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 3
 Any character who succeeds on a DC 10 Intelligence
(Arcana) check recognizes this creature as a
modron, a creature native to the plane of Mechanus.
On a DC 15 the character identifies this creature
specifically as a type of modron called a “quadrone,”
and remembers that in the hierarchy of modrons,
the more sides a creature has, the higher its rank.
Modrons are supposed to be creatures of absolute
law and order. They occasionally go rogue, and
there are stories of a periodic event called the Great
Modron March, but finding a modron behaving in
this fashion is extremely strange.
Nevertheless, there is no time to ask the
creature to explain itself, because the portal to
Mechanus opens at just the right moment. Read or
paraphrase the following:
You hear the familiar sound of the clock
tower striking. But that can’t be right: it hasn’t
been anywhere near an hour since you left
the Temple of Loviatar. Then you realize that
the noise isn’t coming from somewhere back
in the city, it’s coming from directly in front of
you. From the lighthouse. A massive portal,
easily fifteen feet in diameter, opens up in
the side of the Finger of the Gods. Through
the portal you see a realm of clockwork
gears, all interlocking, all moving in time,
performing a calculation so vast and so
complicated that not even the minds of the
gods can fathom its purpose.
The modron … the machine … the
murderer … bows slightly in your direction
and turns to enter the portal.
Let the characters announce whatever actions they
wish: making attacks, starting a grapple, etc. Then
continue with the following:
Your weapons and spells strike true: your
efforts are not in vain. As the modron falls
into the portal, a look of absolute bliss on its
face, there is a wrenching sound and one
of its arms rips completely out of the socket!
The creature starts to scream, but before the
sound reaches your ears, the entire portal
snaps shut with an audible POP. You are left
holding one very strange severed limb and
precious few answers.
30
Concluding the Adventure
Although the characters were unable to apprehend
the rogue modron, they have put a stop to its
murder spree and learned valuable information
about its nature and where it came from. Sergeant
Eledstra is at the Temple of Loviatar assessing the
damage when the characters return. She asks the
characters for a report. It’s up to them whether they
turn the modron’s severed arm over, but their story
has more credibility if they do, and the sergeant asks
for it if the characters mention it.
Once the characters have made their initial
report, the sergeant thanks them and tells them
to go get some rest. There’s nothing else they can
do tonight, and it’s going to take some time for
her to make a coherent report to the appropriate
authorities.
The Day After
Depending on how well they did in preventing
the additional murders of the blacksmith and the
priestess, the characters receive rewards and favors
from these NPCs and from the city guard, including
the following:
• If Boltac survived, he rewards each character
with a chunk of adamantine ore and offers to
forge that ore into a weapon, either now or in
the future after the character has had time to
gather more. Characters saving Boltac earn the
Chunk of Adamantine Story Award.
• Elly thanks the characters for not destroying
her Gondsmen “too much,” despite the
provocation. She says that she’s already working
on a new scheme to improve the command and
control function of the automata, whatever that
means.
• If Zellani survived, then the characters
have earned both her personal gratitude and
the gratitude of the Temple of Loviatar. The
characters gain the Favor of Zellani Story
Award, and may be able to leverage this favor
in the future, as Loviatar’s followers are
surprisingly influential in Melvaunt.
• Finally, if the characters prevented both of the
additional murders, Sergeant Eledstra informs
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
PA RT 3
 the characters that their worthy deeds have been Rewards
brought to the attention of the ruling Council of
Lords, whose three families are always on the
lookout for up-and-coming adventurers to aid Make sure players note their rewards on their
in their schemes and advance their interests. adventure logsheets. Give your name and DCI
She doesn’t know what might come of that (and number (if applicable) so players can record who
she isn’t sure she wants to know) but Eledstra is ran the session.
certain that the adventurers are destined to do Experience
great things in Melvaunt, and she’s pleased to
have made their acquaintance. The players may Total up all combat experience earned for defeated
mark Two Points of Influence in Melvaunt on foes, and divide by the number of characters present
their logsheets. in the combat. For non-combat experience, the
rewards are listed per character. Give all characters
in the party non-combat experience awards unless
After all the rewards have been handed out and you otherwise noted.
are wrapping up the session, read or paraphrase the
following:
Combat Awards
It looks as though the strange matter of the
modron serial killer has come to an end, for Name of Foe XP per Foe
now. There’s something strange about the Swarm of Animated Caltrops 50
whole thing, though. Modrons are creatures Lesser Gondsman 25
of absolute law and order. Occasionally
they go rogue, but for one to plan and carry
Chaos Blight 25
out a series of premeditated murders seems Chaos Bolter 50
even beyond what rogue modrons have Chaos Slasher 200
done in the past. Then there’s the matter of
the severed arm which somehow seems to
be connected to the portal to Mechanus. Non-Combat Awards
Where there’s one crazy murderous modron,
could there be more? You have a feeling Task or Accomplishment XP per Char.
that you, and Melvaunt, may find out the Solving the “Blacksmith” puzzle 25
answer to that question much sooner than
Solving the “Loviatar” puzzle 25
you would like.
Chasing the modron to the portal 50

The story continues in CORE1-2 A Cog in the Wheel.
The minimum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 225 experience
points.
The maximum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 300 experience
points.

Treasure
The characters receive the following treasure,
divided up amongst the party. Characters should
attempt to divide treasure evenly whenever
possible. Gold piece values listed for sellable
gear are calculated at their selling price, not their
purchase price.

C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
31 PA RT 3
 Consumable magic items should be divided
up however the group sees fit. If more than one
character is interested in a specific consumable
magic item, the DM can determine who gets it
randomly should the group be unable to decide.
Permanent magic items are divided according
to a system. See the sidebar if the adventure awards
permanent magic items.
1 chunk – dagger, light hammer, sickle
2 chunks – handaxe, javelin, mace, spear, scimitar,
shortsword, trident
3 chunks – battleaxe, flail, longsword,
morningstar, rapier, war pick, warhammer
4 chunks – glaive, greataxe, greatsword, halberd,
lance, maul, pike

An adamantine weapon has the same game statistics

Treasure Awards as a normal (non-magical) weapon of its type, but its
attacks can bypass the damage resistance of certain
Item Name GP value types of creatures.
Total reward from Eledstra 100 In addition to voiding the certificates needed to
Adamantine chunk (if sold) 50 create the item, you must also pay the item’s normal
Total reward from Zellani 100 market price as listed in the Player’s Handbook.
Record the transaction on your logsheet. The item
you forge does not have its own certificate and
Potion of Greater Healing
therefore is not tradable.
Potion, uncommon
A description of this item can be found in the Downtime
Dungeon Master’s Guide. Each character receives five downtime days at the
conclusion of this adventure.

Story Awards
During the course of play, the characters have the DM Rewards
opportunity to earn the following story awards: You receive 100 XP, 50 gp, and five downtime days
Favor of Zellani. You save the life of Zellani, a for running this session.
priestess of the Maiden of Pain. To show her thanks,
she has offered to perform standard spellcasting
services (detailed earlier in this adventure) at a
25% discount. She may also help in other ways in
subsequent adventures set in Melvaunt.
Chunk of Adamantine. For rescuing dwarven
master-smith Boltac Thurdingard from the assassin,
he gave you this chunk of raw adamantine ore. You
can sell this chunk for 50 gp, or you can use the ore
to craft a new weapon (it cannot be retroactively
applied to an existing item). If you have multiple
copies of this certificate, then you may combine
them to forge a larger item.
Only the items listed on this certificate may
be forged using this certificate. Each item costs
the listed number of chunks (each copy of this
certificate represents one chunk and all certificates
used must be voided at the same time; note the
transaction on your logsheet).

C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
32 PA RT 3
Appendix: Important NPCs
The following NPCs are featured in this adventure:
C1e7i5 (“Cletis” CLEE-tiss)
A rogue modron that believes that it has been
chosen to start a war between Melvaunt and the
modron hive on Mechanus. C1e7i5 is a quadrone
(see MM 225) but it has been possessed by a strange
chaotic energy that gives it powers not available to
ordinary modrons.
Guard Sergeant Eledstra (eh-LED-strah)
The unfortunate duty officer on the night of C1e7i5’s
killing spree. A decent woman who takes her job of
protecting Melvaunt’s ordinary citizens seriously.
Eledstra is tall, thin, and lanky with a shock of
unruly white hair. She is very bad at playing political
games, which is why she is only a Sergeant despite
her many years of service in the City Watch.
Boltac Thurdingard (BOWL-tack THUR-din-
guard)
A dwarven craftsman who specializes in working
adamantine. One of the targets of C1e7i5’s
murderous rampage. Boltac is in his late middle age
and is cantankerous even by dwarven standards, but
once someone earns his respect, he is a loyal friend
and steadfast ally. Boltac prefers the taste of wine
to the taste of ale, but he would never admit that to
other dwarves. If anyone questions the wineskin
that he keeps by his side, he insists that using elven
wine to quench hot steel in the forge is a special
technique that only he has mastered.
33
Ellywicket Klemwocket (ELL-ee WICK-et KLEHM-
wah-khet)
A bright young gnome priestess of Gond. She got
her love of tinkering from her uncle Glimnock, who
used to be an adventurer many years ago and filled
her head with stories of the wonders of ancient
Lantan when Elly was a young girl. She takes great
pride in her work. Lately she has been building small
automatons that she calls “Gondsmen” although she
knows that they are nowhere near as elaborate as
the works done by artificers in the past. She hopes to
improve her craft to someday be able to craft a true
Gondsman and have it imbued with the spirit of life.
Zellani, Priestess of Loviatar (ZELL-ah-nee)
A half-elven priestess of the Maiden of Pain. Zellani
is tall and muscular with black hair. She has a scar
on one cheek that looks like it was made by a sword
rather than a whip, which she gained during her
younger days as a mercenary, but she does not
speak of her past. Loviatar’s temple is one of the
largest in Melvaunt, and Zellani is working her way
up the ranks. She adheres to Loviatar’s teachings but
considers herself above the ordinary folk because
of her duty to administer pain and torment. As a
result, she is overconfident, potentially making her
an easier target for C1e7i5.
C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
APPENDIX
 Appendix: Chaos Blight
Small aberration, chaotic evil
NPC / Monster Statistics Armor Class 13 (natural armor)
Hit Points 4 (1d6 + 1)
Swarm of Animated Caltrops Speed 20 ft.
Medium swarm of Tiny constructs, unaligned STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Armor Class 12 (natural armor) 6 (-2) 13 (+1) 12 (+1) 4 (-3) 8 (-1) 3 (-4)
Hit Points 22 (5d8) Skills Stealth +3
Speed 0 ft., fly 30 ft. Condition Immunities blinded, deafened
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Senses blindsight 60 ft. (blinded beyond this
5 (-3) 15 (+2) 10 (+0) 2 (-4) 4 (-3) 4 (-3)
radius), passive Perception 9
Damage Resistances bludgeoning, piercing, Languages understands Common but can’t speak
slashing Challenge 1/8 (25 XP)
Condition Immunities blinded, charmed, deafened,
exhaustion, frightened, paralyzed, petrified,
Actions
poisoned, prone, restrained, stunned Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
Senses blindsight 10 ft., passive Perception 7 one target. Hit: 3 (1d4 + 1) piercing damage.
Languages –
Challenge 1/4 (50 XP) Chaos Bolter
Antimagic Susceptibility. The caltrops are Medium aberration, chaotic evil
incapacitated while in the area of an antimagic Armor Class 12 (natural armor)
field. If targeted by dispel magic, the caltrops must
Hit Points 11 (2d8 + 2)
succeed on a Constitution saving throw against
the caster’s spell save DC or fall unconscious for 1 Speed 30 ft.
minute. STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
False Appearance. While it remains motionless, this 12 (+1) 12 (+1) 13 (+1) 4 (-3) 8 (-1) 3 (-4)
creature is indistinguishable from a pile of normal Condition Immunities blinded, deafened
caltrops.
Senses blindsight 60 ft. (blinded beyond this
Swarm. The swarm can occupy another creature’s radius), passive Perception 9
space and vice versa, and the swarm can move
Languages understands Common but can’t speak
through any opening large enough for a Tiny
creature. The swarm can’t regain hit points or gain Challenge 1/4 (50 XP)
temporary hit points. Actions
Actions Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
Cloud of Pain. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach one target. Hit: 6 (1d4 + 1) piercing damage.
0 ft., one creature in the swarm’s space. Hit: 5 (2d4) Chaotic Bolt. Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit,
piercing damage, or 2 (1d4) piercing damage if the range 30/60 ft., one target. Hit: 8 (2d6 + 1) damage
swarm has half its hit points or fewer. of a random energy type (roll 1d6: acid, cold, fire,
lightning, poison, thunder).

C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
34 APPENDIX
Chaos Slasher Gondsman, Lesser
Medium aberration, chaotic evil Medium construct, unaligned
Armor Class 13 (natural armor) Armor Class 16 (natural armor)
Hit Points 36 (8d8) Hit Points 11 (2d8 + 2)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
11 (+0) 13 (+1) 11 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 13 (+1) 13 (+1) 12 (+1) 12 (+1) 1 (-5) 3 (-4) 1 (-5)

Skills Stealth +3 Damage Immunities poison, psychic

Damage Resistances bludgeoning, piercing, Damage Resistances bludgeoning, piercing,
and slashing from nonmagical attacks that aren’t and slashing from nonmagical attacks that aren’t
adamantine adamantine
Damage Immunities poison Condition Immunities blinded, charmed, deafened,
Condition Immunities blinded, charmed, deafened, exhaustion, frightened, paralyzed, petrified,
exhaustion, frightened, paralyzed, poisoned, poisoned
unconscious Skills Athletics +6
Senses blindsight 60 ft. (blinded beyond this Senses blindsight 30 ft., passive Perception 6
radius), passive Perception 10 Languages understands Common
Languages understands Common but can’t speak Challenge 1/8 (25 XP)
Challenge 1 (200 XP)
Actions
Actions Slam. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
Multiattack. The chaos slasher makes two claw target. Hit: 4 (1d6 + 1) bludgeoning damage.
attacks.
Claw. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
target. Hit: 6 (2d4 + 1) slashing damage. If the target
is a creature, it must succeed on a DC 11 Wisdom
saving throw or be frightened until the end of the
chaos slasher’s next turn.
Terrifying Glare. The chaos slasher targets
one creature it can see within 30 feet of it. If the
target can see the chaos slasher, then the target
must succeed on a DC 11 Wisdom saving throw
or be magically frightened until the end of the
chaos slasher’s next turn. The frightened target is
paralyzed.

C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
35 APPENDIX
 Handout 1: The First Puzzle

There’s 1 thing it would be fair of me to admit. I

Ultimately fall 4 what twelve scholars caN
Readily put on every dwarf’s mind: 1 may find iT
Newsworthy – with reeking smell, 13 bodies gO
Nearby. should 1 ever kneel? even without help i wilL
Usually try 14 times. when i was nineteen wE
Meandered thru 20 realms and thirteen planes. buT
Believe you me, it was asinine. at 9 bells things geT
Extremely deadly. out went your 14 body bags. thE
Reality is that putting a dead male on a sleigh to 5 oR
So funerals would be a bit much, even for dwarveS

C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
36 HANDOUT 1
Handout 2: The Second Puzzle

4 O 8 3 L 4 11 E 3
I V X A T A X T R
9 Q 15 10 H 9 16 Q 10

2 O 7 1 D 2 12 O 1
L F Q L F E Q H A
4 L 8 3 I 4 11 N 3

13 Q 5 6 Q 14 5 D 6
X R S P L X T E M
12 U I 2 E 7 1 A 2

C O R E 1 - 1 / A S C R E A M I N T H E N I G H T:
37 HANDOUT 2
 A COG IN
THE WHEEL
PIETER SLEIJPEN
Adventure Designer
Adventure Code: CORE 1-2

With the identity of a murderer confirmed, heroes are needed to track it

down to its home. As it turns out, it might be a longer journey than first
imagined. Part Two of The Chaos in Melvaunt.

A four-hour adventure for 1st-4th level characters

Producer: Baldman Games

Core Administrator: Shawn Merwin
Editing and Layout: Encoded Designs
Cartography: Andrew Smith
Organized Play: Chris Lindsay
D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall,
Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks, Alan Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster
Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League, all other Wizards of the Coast product names, and their respective
logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive likenesses
are property of Wizards of the Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America.
Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the express written
permission of Wizards of the Coast.
©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31,
2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK.
 INTRODUCTION
Welcome to A Cog in the Wheel, a D&D Adventurers League
adventure, Part Two of The Chaos in Melvaunt Trilogy
This adventure is designed for three to seven 1st-4th level characters, and is optimized
for five 2nd-level characters. The adventure is set in the Moonsea region of the
Forgotten Realms, in the city of Melvaunt.

The D&D Adventurers League Preparing the Adventure

This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of
the D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure,
players track their characters’ experience, treasure,
and other rewards, and can take those characters
through other adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a
store event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a
DCI number. This number is your official Wizards of
the Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have
a number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to
use to create and advance their characters. Players
can continue to play their characters after the
storyline season has finished, possibly participating
in a second or third storyline with those same
characters. A character’s level is the only limitation
for adventure play. A player cannot use a character
of a level higher or lower than the level range of a
D&D Adventurers League adventure.
For more information on playing, running
games as a Dungeon Master, and organizing games
for the D&D Adventurers League, please visit the
D&D Adventurers League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
• Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
• Read through the adventure, taking notes
of anything you’d like to highlight or remind
yourself while running the adventure, such as a
way you’d like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d
like to use in a combat.
• Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
• Gather together any resources you’d like to
use to aid you in running this adventure—such
as notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and
battlemaps.
• If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.
Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
• Character name and level
• Character race and class
• Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most
common passive ability check
• Anything notable as specified by the adventure

CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:

2 INTRODUCTION
 (such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, etc.)
Players that have characters outside the
adventure’s level range cannot participate in
the adventure with those characters. Players
with ineligible characters can make a new 1st-level
character or use a pregenerated character. Players
can play an adventure they previously played or
ran as a Dungeon Master, but not with the same
character.
Ensure that each player has an official
adventure logsheet for his or her character (if not,
get one from the organizer). The player fills out
the adventure name, session number, date, and
your name and DCI number. In addition, the player
also fills in the starting values for experience, gold,
downtime, renown, and number of permanent
magic items. He or she fill in the other values and
write notes at the conclusion of the session. Each
player is responsible for maintaining an accurate
logsheet.
If you have time, you can do a quick scan of
a player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing
looks out of order. If you see magic items of very
high rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you
can ask players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict
item use or ask them to use a standard ability
score array. Point players to the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and
it’s the beginning of an adventure or episode,
they can declare their activity and spend the days
now. Alternatively, they can do so at the end of
the adventure or episode. Players should select
their characters’ spells and other daily options
prior to the start of the adventure, unless the
adventure specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread
the adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, you may see sidebars
to help make adjustments for smaller/larger
groups, and characters of higher/lower levels than
the optimized group. Most of the time, this is used
3 INTRODUCTION
for combat encounters.
You may adjust the adventure beyond the
guidelines given. For example, if you’re playing
with a group of inexperienced players, you might
want to make the adventure a little easier; for
very experienced players, you may want to make
it a little harder. Therefore, five categories of
party strength have been created for you to use
as a guide. Feel free to use a different adjustment
during the adventure if the recommended party
strength feels off for the group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of
five 2nd-level characters. To figure out whether
you need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
• Add up the total levels of all the characters
• Divide the total by the number of characters
• Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round
fractions of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table:
DETERMINING PARTY STRENGTH
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very Weak
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very Strong
Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment
of the game for the players. You help guide the
narrative and bring the words on these pages
to life. The outcome of a fun game session often
creates stories that live well beyond the play at the
table. Always follow this golden rule when you DM
for a group:
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
 Make decisions and adjudications that
enhance the fun of the adventure when
possible.
To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
• You are empowered to make adjustments to
the adventure and make decisions about how the
group interacts with the world of this adventure.
Doing so is especially important and applicable
outside of combat, but feel free to adjust the
adventure for groups that are having too easy or
too hard of a time.
• Don’t make the adventure too easy or too
difficult for a group. Never being challenged
makes for a boring game and being
overwhelmed makes for a frustrating one.
Gauge the experience of the players (not the
characters) with the game, try to feel out (or
ask) what they like in a game, and attempt to
give each of them the experience they’re after
when they play D&D. Give everyone a chance to
shine.
• Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game
session moving along appropriately. Watch for
stalling, since play loses momentum when this
happens. At the same time, make sure that the
players don’t finish too early; provide them with
a full play experience. Try to be aware of running
long or short. Adjust the pacing accordingly
• Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free
to modify the text as you see fit, especially when
dialogue is present.
• Give the players appropriate hints so they can
make informed choices about how to proceed.
Players should be given clues and hints when
appropriate so they can tackle puzzles, combat,
and interactions without getting frustrated over
lack of information. Doing so helps to encourage
immersion in the adventure and gives players
“little victories” for figuring out good choices
from clues.
In short, being the DM isn’t about following
the adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about
facilitating a fun, challenging game environment for
the players. The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has more
information on the art of running a D&D game.
4 INTRODUCTION
Downtime and Lifestyle
At the beginning of each play session, players must
declare whether or not they are spending any days
of downtime. The player records the downtime
spent on the adventure logsheet. The following
options are available to players during downtime
(see the D&D basic rules or the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for more information):
• Catching up
• Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
commit to crafting a single item)
• Practicing a profession
• Recuperating
• Spellcasting services
• Training
Other downtime options might be available during
adventures or unlocked through play, including
faction-specific activities.
In addition, whenever a character spends
downtime days, that character also spends the
requisite expense for his or her lifestyle. Costs
are per day, so a character that spends ten days
of downtime also spends ten days of expenses
maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some downtime
activities help with lifestyle expenses or add
lifestyle expenses.
Spellcasting Services
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can
provide some spellcasting services. Characters
need to be able to travel to the settlement to obtain
these services.
Spell services generally available include
healing and recovery spells, as well as information-
gathering spells. Other spell services might be
available as specified in the adventure. The number
of spells available to be cast as a service is limited
to a maximum of three per day total, unless
otherwise noted.
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
 Spellcasting Services
Spell Cost
Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
Identify 20 gp
Lesser restoration 40 gp
Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
Remove curse 90 gp
Speak with dead 90 gp
Divination 210 gp
Greater restoration 450 gp
Raise dead 1,250 gp
Acolyte Background
A character possessing the acolyte
background requesting spellcasting
services at a temple of his or her faith
may request one spell per day from the
Spellcasting Services table for free. The
only cost paid for the spell is the base price
for the consumed material component, if
any.
Disease, Death, and Recovery
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might
not have the same characters return from session
to session, here are the rules when bad things
happen to characters.
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating Effects
A character still affected by diseases, poisons,
and other similar effects at the conclusion of an
adventure can spend downtime days recuperating
until such time as he or she resolves the effect to
its conclusion (see the recuperating activity in the
D&D Basic Rules).
If a character doesn’t resolve the effect
between sessions, that character begins the next
session still affected by the debilitating effect.
Death
A character who is killed during the course of
the adventure has a few options at the end of the
session (or whenever arriving back in civilization)
5 INTRODUCTION
if no one in the adventuring party has immediate
access to a raise dead or revivify spell, or similar
magic. A character subject to a raise dead spell is
affected negatively until all long rests have been
completed during an adventure. Alternatively, each
downtime day spent after raise dead reduces the
penalty to attack rolls, saving throws, and ability
checks by 1, in addition to any other benefits the
downtime activity might provide.
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any
of the other options, the player creates a new
character. The new character does not have any
items or rewards possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing
any vital organs and is mostly whole) and the
player would like the character to be returned to
life, the party can take the body back to civilization
and use the dead character’s funds to pay for a
raise dead spell. A raise dead spell cast in this
manner costs the character 1,250 gp.
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As
above, except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for
the raise dead spell is paid for by the party at the
end of the session. Other characters are under no
obligation to spend their funds to bring back a
dead party member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to
4 and a member of a faction, the dead character’s
body can be returned to civilization and a patron
from the faction ensures that he or she receives a
raise dead spell. However, any character invoking
this charity forfeits all experience and rewards
from that session (both those earned prior to and
after death during that session) and cannot replay
that episode or adventure with that character
again. Once a character reaches 5th level, this
option is no longer available.
Adventure Background
Melvaunt is a city of merchants and craftsmen
on the northern coast of the Moonsea. The open
market at the center of the city boasts a selection
of goods as impressive as anything found in
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
 Waterdeep or Amn, with a particular focus on
metalwork. Between the sacking of Zhentil Keep
and the recent troubles in its two biggest rival
cities of Mulmaster and Hillsfar, Melvaunt has been
relatively undisturbed for a number of years.
Modrons are creatures of absolute law and
order. They are native to the plane of Mechanus,
where they tend its eternal gears and follow the
dictates of Primus. However, one group of modrons
have recently gone rogue after they were exposed
to an influx of pure chaos energy. Under the malign
direction of this chaotic impulse, the modron
hierarchy has decided to invade Melvaunt. Unlike
the Great Modron March, which happens every
289 years and is a reconnaissance mission, these
rogue modrons are planning to conquer or destroy
the city. They have constructed a portal from
Mechanus and are readying their invasion force.
In the previous adventure CORE1-1 A Scream
in the Night, a chaos-soaked modron malfunctioned
and went on a killing spree to gain the attention of
the Melvaunt authorities. Adventurers chased the
modron back to the portal, but the portal closed,
leaving only the modron’s arm behind as evidence
of its presence in the city.
Now, the authorities of Melvaunt are trying to
decided how to manage the portal and the threat
that it poses to the city.
Overview
The adventurers start in the city of Melvaunt,
where they are hired by the newly promoted
Captain Eledstra to hunt down the modron
assassin and enter the portal to see what threat
lies on the other side. The portal leads to the plane
of Mechanus, a relatively safe place, not known to
generate as much trouble as places like the Abyss
or the Nine Hells.
When the characters step through the portal,
they enter a battle between a group of modron and
several chaos slashers. Part 1 deals with the fight
and its aftermath. Characters learn that some of the
modrons are malfunctioning, and the lone survivor
of the fight thinks the characters are modrons as
well.
6 INTRODUCTION
After the fight, the characters spot a modron
army compound in the distance, and a small
group of humans observing them. If they go to the
humans, the adventurers find two curious mages
studying the modrons. The mages are happy to
discuss science, providing important information.
Regardless, the trail of the assassin leads to the
modron camp. Part 2 describes the environment
and provides the details on the two mages.
Part 3 involves infiltrating the modron camp,
retrieving the plans of the modron, and potentially
dealing with the assassin. This encounter is rather
freeform, and the characters have to plan on how
to get inside and find what they are looking for.
At some point the characters trigger an alarm,
and the characters have limited time before they
are overrun by an army of modrons. Fleeing from
the camp with the modrons hot on their trail is
described in Part 4.
When returning through the portal back to
Melvaunt, the characters find a group of modrons
guarding it. Alerted to the intruders by their
leader, they try to stop the adventurers from
leaving Mechanus in Part 5. Depending on how
the characters did in Part 4, reinforcements might
arrive. Hopefully the characters leave through the
portal before they are overwhelmed to report their
findings to the Melvaunt authorities.
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
 Law of Averages
An optional rule in the Dungeon Master’s
Guide states that creatures in Mechanus
always use the average damage results,
rounded down, for attack and spells. As
a DM, you should use this rule for the
monsters throughout the adven-ture. Some
players really love rolling dice, but at the
same time using the rule strengthens the
alien feel of the place. Only enforce the
rule on the players if it is more fun for
everybody involved. If you use it, determine
the average damage for the typical attacks
made by the characters in advance and
have the players write it down.
Note that you could wave the rule in
Part 1 due to the influence of the chaos
slashers, and use it later when dealing with
the modrons.
Adventure Hooks
Characters who played the first adventure of the
trilogy, CORE1-1 A Scream in the Night, naturally
progress into the second part. Forty-eight hours
have passed since the adventurers watched the
modron assassin, C1e7i5, escape through the
portal, sans its arm. Sergeant Eledstra has been
promoted to Captain, and the Superintendent
of the Melvaunt City Watch has placed her in
charge of the investigation. Eledstra has consulted
with a sage and determined the portal will open
again, very briefly, in a few hours. She asks the
adventurers to continue the investigation by going
through the portal.
New characters are approached by their
faction contacts or other friends and patrons. They
are told that a captain in the City Watch is in over
her head in an investigation and is looking for help.
Characters native to Melvaunt might
alternatively have heard about the grisly murder(s)
and have volunteered to help capture the culprit.
Although, depending on the background, it might
simply have been an order from a superior.
7 INTRODUCTION
Briefing
Whether the adventurers are continuing the story
from the previous adventure or coming into the
trilogy fresh, they are called into the office of the
newly promoted (against her wishes) Captain
LeCampe Eledstra. Just 48 hours ago she was a
sergeant, but she was promoted by the leader
of the City Watch, Superintendent Lahn Joden,
because of her work in dealing with the assassin in
the city.
When the adventurers enter the office of
Captain Eledstra, read:
An older woman tugs uncomfortably at a
new captain’s uniform as you enter. [If they
played CORE1-1 A Scream in the Night, she
welcomes the adventurers by name, then
continues.]
“To make a very long story short,
Melvaunt has a potential problem,” she sighs,
running her fingers through her unruly short
gray hair. “There is a magical doorway in the
city. The experts are calling it,” she consults
a notebook on her desk, “an asynchronous
intermittent interdimensional portal. I guess
that means a magical door to other worlds
that is sometimes there and sometimes isn’t.
I call it a probable end to my career and a
certain threat to the city.”
She itches the back of her head
thoughtfully, ponders the ceiling, and then
continues. “I am in charge of studying the
doorway, assessing the threat, and making
sure it doesn’t get worse. Right now, the
problem is this: the threat seems to be on the
other side. So I need a group willing to enter
this doorway, assess the threat, and report
back. And, if possible, to bring back the
creature that was killing cityfolk here.”
If the adventurers did not play CORE1-1 A Scream in
the Night, use these bullet points to explain the story
so far:
• A note was delivered to the City Watch
describing a murder about to take place. When
Eledstra arrived at the scene, the murder had
already happened. Another note warned of
another murder in an hour.
• Adventurers on the scene were deputized
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
 to investigate. After two more murders (or
attempted murders), these adventurers chased
the killer to a magical portal in the side of the
Finger of the Gods, a lighthouse near the docks.
• The killer escaped through the portal as it
closed, but an appendage of the killer was left
behind, which turned out to be a thin metal arm.
Now Eledstra picks up with new information:
• A local sage knowledgeable in magic and the
planes has been consulted, and she believes that
the portal leads to Mechanus, a relatively safe
outer-plane of absolute law and order. As long
as visitors don’t break any laws, the natives are
likely to leave them alone.
• The natives are modrons, creatures with
a hive-like mind and strict hierarchy. They
maintain the gears of Mechanus and usually
show little interest in other places, although
there always have been exceptions.
• The murderer fled through the portal, but it
left behind a piece of torn metal. According to
divinations it is part of its body. The captain
provides an ensorcelled item that always points
toward the culprit.
• The natives of Mechanus should be helpful in
tracking down criminals, although care should
be taken. The murderer might have been under
orders or may have killed under circumstances
that would not be considered a crime in
Mechanus. Mechanus is a place of pure law, not
of good or evil, and if a law allows the act, it is
perfectly fine.
• Characters should not stick around too long
in Mechanus, since it is likely to influence their
personalities toward law and order.
• The characters gain official papers, stating they
work under orders of the authorities of Melvaunt
with the intent to capture criminals. The captain
is willing to change the exact wording. She is
well aware the nature of the documentation
impacts how the natives react to the characters’
presence.
• Orc warbands have been sighted moving
toward Melvaunt from the badlands of Thar.
While this is not uncommon, the Melvaunt
Council of Lords wishes to keep the City Watch
8 INTRODUCTION
on alert. That means adventurers are Eledstra’s
only recourse to reconnoiter the portal.
• The characters are offered 500 gp total as a
reward.
Roleplaying Captain Eledstra
LeCampe Eledstra is a human of late middle
age. She’s a decent woman who takes her job
of protecting Melvaunt’s ordinary citizens
seriously. Eledstra is tall, thin, and lanky with
a shock of unruly white hair through which
she runs his fingers constantly whenever
she’s trying to think. She is very bad at playing
political games, which is why she is only just
got promoted to captain despite her many
years of service in the City Watch. She knows
this promotion means that if anything goes
wrong, she is the one who will take the political
fall. And she suspects that she is expected to
fail.
Quote: “Just a few more years and I would have
had a nice pension. Now I have to deal with this.”
Any Questions?
The adventurers might have some questions.
Unfortunately, Captain Eledstra has very few
answers. She was given the use of a “half-mad sage”
and the budget of a few hundred gold pieces to
investigate a huge threat that for political reasons is
being treated as a minor inconvenience. She is out of
her depths, and she is hoping that the adventurers
can save the day, as adventurers did for her in
dealing with the assassin.
Roleplay that sense of frustration from Captain
Eledstra, and get across the point to the characters
that they are expected to make the best of the
situation with the resources they have.
Before they leave the office, Captain Eledstra
does offer each adventurer one potion of healing,
saying that she wishes she could do more. She asks
them to follow her to the portal, where they will
meet the sage and begin the excursion.
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
Instability
As the adventurers leave the City Watch station with
Captain Eledstra, a short and powerfully built half-
orc runs toward the group. Allow the adventurers to
react as if being attacked, then have Captain Eledstra
calm them.
Captain Eledstra smiles in the direction of an
approaching half-orc, but it is difficult to say
what emotions hide behind the smile. “This is
our sage. Everyone, meet Truushee.”
The half-orc, barely 5 feet tall but
built like the burliest dwarf, practically runs
through others to reach Captain Eledstra.
Truushee puts her face within inches of the
captain’s and speaks in a far-too-loud voice.
“Captain, the intermittent nature of the
portal has manifested! It’s trans-dimensional
vector now manifests the portal in the
northern part of the city! Follow me!”
The smile drains from Eledstra’s face. “I
don’t know what she just said, but it doesn’t
sound good.”
Roleplaying Truushee the Sage
Truushee is a young half-orc, no more than
20 years old. She looks more orc than human,
which is disconcerting to many citizens,
especially with the orc-infested lands of Thar
so close. Truushee was found as a baby by a
sage travelling between Melvaunt and Phlan,
and she raised Truushee as her own. When the
old sage recently passed away, Truushee took
over. Truushee’s social skills are significantly
lacking, rendering concepts like personal space
and small talk nonexistent. Truushee learned
a great deal from her foster mother and has a
knack for understanding incredibly complex
information.
Quote: “The complexities of the multiverse
dictate that the only constant is change, and
even that constant is only true and valid in the
exact moment of divergence from an infinite
number of other constants.”
9 INTRODUCTION
The Portal
Truushee leads the adventurers and Captain
Eledstra on a run through the city, until they arrive
in a run-down neighborhood near the city wall:
Hanging in the air, about two feet off the
ground, is a circular swirling field of energy.
The field is perpendicular to the ground,
and it is roughly a foot in diameter. Truushee
points to it. “If my latest calculations are
correct, it should remain in this location for
several days, at least. Perhaps longer. My
calculations predict the portal widen in a
few minutes, and it will be our only chance to
send an expedition through.”
Convey the following to the adventurers:
• When the portal widens, they will be able to
step through. The portal should stay widened
for 2 hours and 17 minutes. They need to be
back through the portal in that time, or they risk
being stuck on the other side until the portal
opens again, whenever that might be.
• That estimation relies on the information at
hand. Other factors, on this side or the other,
could cause the portal to change, move, or
disappear.
• Using the piece of the assassin left behind,
Truushee has crafted a device. It acts as a
compass, pointing in the direction of the former
owner of the arm. [She gives the compass to the
adventurers. Be sure to note who carries it.]
Captain Eledstra wishes the adventurers good
fortune and thanks them for their service to the
city. When they step through the portal, proceed to
Part 1.
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
 PART 1.
WRECKED
A Step Through The Portal
Read or paraphrase the following once the
adventurers step through the portal:
Your vision explodes in a kaleidoscope of
bright geometrical patterns, constantly
changing. An intense sense of vertigo
assaults you. Moments later you step out
on the other side. Suppressing the urge to
vomit, you notice the ground is moving
slowly beneath your feet. Numerous gears,
varying in size from merely large to gigantic,
comprise the ground and sky. All steadily
move, smelling faintly of metal and grease.
The gear you occupy is one of the smaller
ones, only the size of a large mansion.
Regaining your senses, you quickly
realize combat takes place right in front of
you. A large number of oddly geometrically
shaped, grim-looking metal constructs
fight creatures that keep changing in
appearance from one horror into another.
The monstrosities groan, growl, and howl.
The constructs are oddly silent except for
the grinding sounds of their gears, metal on
metal, and short commands befitting highly
disciplined soldiers.
The adventurers have entered Mechanus, which
looks like the inside of a huge metal clockwork
machine. It is a collection of gears, cogs, and pulleys
linked together. The only green is that of tarnished
copper. Instead of blue sky there are an infinite
number of interlocking cogs from small to gigantic.
The cogs are always moving, some slowly and others
insanely fast. There is no apparent light source, yet it
is as bright as during noon in Toril.
The characters stand on a flat smooth round
metal gear with a diameter of 100 feet. Behind them
stands the brass square arch, 10 feet high, 10 feet
wide, that forms the borders of the portal. Of course,
the areas directly around a chaos slasher keep
10
changing constantly.
The metal constructs are various types of
modrons. This squad (16 monodrones, 8 duodrones,
4 tridrones, 2 quadrones and 1 pentadrone) was
stationed as guards at the portal, with orders to
question creatures coming through, as well as
observe and memorize the motions of the nearby
gears. These modrons were surprised by a group
of chaos slashers. Natural enemies, the two sides
immediately began fighting.
The modrons are perfectly willing to ignore the
new arrivals. The chaos slashers, however, have no
such inclination, and two chaos slashers turn their
attention to the characters while the rest fight the
modrons. At the moment, it is unclear which side is
winning, but the characters’ arrival does bring much
needed relief to the modrons.
For ease of running the fight, assume the larger
battle between the modrons and chaos slashers
takes place on the side. In this case, the characters’
arrival saves the life of pentadrone SL33P13-773P
(see Development below). Each dying chaos
slasher explodes with a burst of chaos, killing
several modrons. The adventurers are apparently
unaffected by the chaotic surge, likely because they
are not native to Mechanus.
Important Note: The portal the characters used
is closed for a return trip. As such, the adventurers
cannot simply flee back. Although the characters
don’t know it, the portal’s closing is the result of
ever-changing patterns in Mechanus, and within a
couple of hours it will open again.
Modron Appearance
The drawings of the modrons in the Monster
Manual are rather cute. The different
description in the boxed text above is on
purpose. In this campaign, modrons are not
cute or friendly. (continued)
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
PA RT 1
 They are alien single-minded beings of law and
order who intend to invade the city of Melvaunt
to make the universe a better place (in their
eyes). They are not evil or murderous, but they
follow their orders to their letter. Hence their
description: comprised of dark metal with
angular sharp edges, cold mechanical eyes, and
lipless mouths with lethal barbed weapons.
It is fine if the interaction with SL33P13-
773P (see below) turns out to be humorous.
Humor is great as long as the players are aware
that modrons are not cute little toys.
Characters who succeed at a DC 10 Intelligence
(Arcana) check recognize the shifting horrors as
chaos slashers. These creatures are native to Limbo,
and their presence in Mechanus is highly unusual.
Note that while there is no cover, and gravity is
directional toward the gears. The characters could
easily rush to the edge of the gear and either step on
to the next one.
Adjusting the Encounter
The modrons are a great tool to modify the
difficulty up or down while running this
encounter. They can take a hit or two for the
characters or do some damage to the chaos
slashers. Here are recommendations for
adjusting this combat encounter. These are not
cumulative.
• Very weak party: There are two lesser
chaos slasher at 50% of their hit points.
• Weak party: There is one lesser chaos
slashers.
• Strong party: There are three more chaos
slashers.
• Very strong party: There are four more
chaos slashers.
11
Development
Regardless of how well the characters do, each dying
chaos slasher turns more modrons into twisted
bundles of steel in the explosions of chaotic energy.
Oddly enough, none of the modron disintegrate
(as they normally would), leaving the battlefield
covered with ragged torn debris. All but one of the
modrons die, and assuming the characters don’t fail,
all the chaos slashers perish.
The single surviving modron, the pentadrone
squad leader, loses consciousness early in the battle.
At a first glance it appears nonfunctional. When
the battle ends, however, the pentadrone regains
consciousness and stands.
It looks at the adventurers and in its
malfunctioning state believes they are a group of
decatons, who are superior to pentadrones in the
modron hierarchy. Decatons are usually charged
with the care and maintenance of modrons.
When the battle ends, read:
Amid the wrecked and twisted metal of
modron corpses, a whirring grunt can be
heard. A creature stands, shedding bits of
rusted metal. The being is a large starfish-
shaped construct made of dark-gray steel,
standing on five steel legs attached to its
central body and a mechanical eye and
mouth in each of its five arms. The back of its
arms are covered with spikes. It is covered
with patches of rust, and many of its plates
are bent and torn. “SL33P13-773P reporting
for duty. Systems are functional, but some
damage is detected. All chaos creatures
have been rendered inactive. What are our
orders?”
SL33P13-773P is happy to share information if
asked:
• It and Squad 327-Q8 were here to guard the
portal and deal with any arrivals as necessary.
Chaos slashers came through and attacked,
leading to the battle that the adventurers joined.
• A human envoy with a handful of underlings
are at the nearby modron camp as well. These
humans have a badge that allows them to move
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
PA RT 1
 around freely. The envoy was interested in the
portal. SL33P13-773P does not know more
about these humans.
• While waiting, the modrons were also to
observe the patterns of the portal (such as when
it becomes one way, when two ways, and so on)
and the nearby gears, noting exactly when things
change and to memorize the pattern in the
process.
• It knows nothing about the assassin the
characters are looking for. It remembers seeing
a modron missing an arm pass through the
portal approximately 200,000 seconds ago. Since
that modron was damaged, it is either at the
maintenance area being repaired, or it has been
destroyed.
At some point the characters need to decide what to
do next. SL33P13-773P offers a great opportunity
to get into the modron compound. Other modrons
might want to arrest the characters, but SL33P13-
773P outranks most modrons at the compound and
can keep them from bothering the characters.
SL33P13-773P follows the characters as long
as they order it to, and it follows their commands
to the letter. If no commands are given, it sets out to
the camp to get repaired and report the incident at
the portal. Proceed with Part 2.
12
SL33P13-773P
SL33P13-773P, or “Sleepie,” or whatever
nickname the characters settle on, looks like a
typical pentadrone. It is a large starfish-shaped
construct made of dark-gray steel, standing on
five steel legs attached to its central body and
a mechanical eye and mouth in each of its five
arms. The back of its arms are covered with
spikes. Unlike most pentadrones, it is covered
with patches of rust and many of its plates are
bent and torn.
While the encounter with the chaos
slasher unhinged SL33P13-773P, it still is a
modron. It has no sense of self (yet). There
is only “we,” which right now includes the
characters. It does not ask questions beyond
what is needed to clarify orders. In reality, it is
slowly beginning to become an individual, so
as the adventure progresses it may start asking
questions that go beyond the orders. First it
just wants to know why specific orders are
given, but later this turns into a curiosity about
the world at large.
Regardless, it remains a lawful neutral
creature. It wants to know the rules so that
it can follow the rules. Note that it is not
particularly stupid, and while the characters
might fool it into following some silly orders/
laws, it should not be taken to extremes.
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
PA RT 1
 PART 2.
A DIFFERENT GEAR
From The Portal
From the portal the characters can see two points of
interest.
• There is a small camp on the middle of a
copper gear about 400 yards away. The tents are
inhabited by humans, and in the middle stands
an observation platform.
• There is a large walled military compound on
a steel cog about 2 miles away. The camp is built
near an even bigger black iron cog. The iron cog
has gate-sized holes that touch the steel cog. The
hole currently at ground level glows blue. The
camp walls and buildings appear to be made out
of metal. It is hard to see from this distance, but
it seems to be a modron compound. The path
to this compound is made up of smaller, faster
moving gears.
• As the adventurers move from gear to gear,
especially those leading from the portal to the
compound, make a show of describing how that
trying to move across or between these smaller,
faster moving gears could be dangerous if done
too quickly. They can be crossed slowly without
concern, but it involves moving carefully and
waiting for the gears to reach certain alignments.
Note: Everybody understands one another while in
Mechanus. There are no language differences. Secret
languages and codes only befuddle if the message
is hidden behind an ordinary meaning. People still
speak their native language. It is just that others
simply understand what is said.
13
Imposing Order
Any creature in Mechanus feels an imposing
sense of order. Urges to do the unexpected are
mostly suppressed. Mention the sense of order
and the impact it has on their characters, but
leave it to the players whether they want to
do something with it. It can be fun to suddenly
have the brash unpredictable adrenaline-junky
rogue be calm and patient, but it is not for
everybody and can lessen the fun when taken
to extremes. Reward Inspiration liberally for
good roleplaying.
Note that in the unlikely case the
characters take a long rest in Mechanus each
adventurer must make a DC 10 Wisdom saving
throw at the end of the rest. On a failed save,
the creature’s alignment changes to lawful
neutral. It shifts back after spending at least
one day in a plane other than Mechanus.
Moignos and Other Creatures
There is virtually no wildlife, no plants and no rocks
in Mechanus. Unless described otherwise the cogs
and gears are bare smooth metal. In fact, animals
are uncomfortable in this place of the rigid law and
act accordingly. Besides the modrons at the steel cog
and humans at the observation platform there are
two other groups of “living” creatures in the area:
the moignos and razorvine.
Moignos are two-dimensional mathematical
constructs that flitter in small groups like flocks
of birds. They act as calculators for the modrons,
especially in regards to gear movement. They are
not specifically loyal to the modrons and, unless
working under direct orders, they begrudgingly help
others solve various calculations. Their true passion
lies with finding the absolute value of pi.
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
PA RT 2
 Lacking any true sentience, they are of little use
outside of numerical equations. Still, the characters
might have some fun interacting with these living
calculators. One potential good use is asking them
to observe the smaller gears and cogs between the
portal cog and the steel cog and report their findings
when the characters return. They do so even if the
adventurers are clearly in some kind of conflict
with the modrons. Feel free to give the characters
advantage or even automatic successes when
rushing past these cogs in Part 4.
Razorvine is a weed that grows almost
everywhere, including in Mechanus. It grows in wild
tangles, looking like brown ivy. The modrons try to
remove the patches as part of their maintenance
work, but they are only partially successful.
As the name implies, the edges of its leaves
are razor sharp. When a creature comes into direct
contact with razorvine for the first time on a turn,
the creature must succeed on a DC 10 Dexterity
saving throw or take 5 (1d10) slashing damage.
The patches are easy to spot and avoid unless one is
moving particularly fast. They might come into play
in Part 4.
Observation Platform
The human camp on the copper cog consists of
eight large green canvas tents standing around a
10-foot-high wooden platform. A ladder leads to
the platform, which contains several mounted brass
telescopes, two large desks including writing gear,
and a single cabinet with books and papers.
The camp is occupied by the twins Inefi Kapp,
a pale-skinned human woman with long silver
hair, and Halaash Kapp, a dark-skinned human
with glowing blue eyes. Both are wizards studying
the modrons. They believe the universe is an
orderly place, with modrons being the perfect
representations of that order. Understanding
modrons helps understand the universe. The twins
are curious, studying for studying’s sake. They are
lawful and approach life and study with careful
planning. Inefi is the more outgoing and humorous,
while Halaash is the silent observer making notes
during a conversation.
14
The twins are accompanied by five human
servants and twenty-five human soldiers. The
servants wear expensive green and white livery,
and the soldiers wear similarly colored uniforms.
All the servants and soldiers have similar features
and might be hard to differentiate for the characters.
They are all polite and unfazed by anything,
although the soldiers are quick to react with
violence to protect themselves and their charges.
The twins have observed the fight with the
chaos slashers, and they would love a report from
the participants. They have a strict policy of non-
interference though. A scientist should not interfere
with their study object. They are cautious but very
happy to talk. They want a detailed account of what
went on and what kind of dealings the characters
have had with modrons before. They clearly
admire modrons but don’t react with anger when
confronted with another opinion. They see it as a
reason to debate, philosophize, and educate.
As long as the characters are willing to talk, they
freely offer the use of their telescopes and answer
any questions the adventurers might have about
modrons:
• They have been here since the modrons
arrived in this area. The twins set up camp half
a turn of the big wheel ago. Since they are not
from Toril, they have no idea how that relates to
the characters’ clock.
• There is one brigade stationed at the
modron camp right now, which means 4,688
monodrones, 2,344 duodrones, 1,100 tridrones,
736 quadrones, 427 pentadrones, and 1 decaton
for a total of 9,296 modron, give or take a few
considering the recent fight.
• This brigade is part of the 9th Army. The 9th
is one of the unassigned armies used either as
reinforcements or in foreign operations.
• There is a small number of humans at the
modron camp, an envoy of some kind and his
servants. The man prefers black clothing. These
humans likely have a badge or pass that allows
free travel over the cog. The leader certainly had
an interest in the portal. (continued)
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
PA RT 2
 • More modrons are constantly arriving, which
excites the two wizards immensely. It looks
almost like the start of a Great March (every
17 Mechanus years a large army of modron
marches across all the outer planes), but it is
too early for one. They are curious what the
modrons are planning.
• The twins know the basic of modron as
detailed in the Monster Manual. Of importance
to the players is that modron are strictly
hierarchical. They follow orders of their
superiors to the letter even if said superior
might have gone rogue or when it seems to
contradict an earlier order. Military structure
does apply, so an order from a direct superior
takes precedence of that from another when
there is a conflict. Of course, there is never a
conflict since the modron are perfect.
• The decaton is the rank above the pentadrone
and the highest ranking modron at the camp.
Decaton are intelligent, powerful spellcasters
that look like mechanical beholders.
• Modrons tend to react predictably to
certain behavior, and even a pentadrone is
not particularly intelligent. Infiltrating the
compound should not be too hard as long as the
characters avoid the decaton and look and act
like they belong.
• The twins know the pattern of the portal the
adventurers used and the big gate behind the
modron camp. They can help the PCs set up the
infiltration so that they can sneak in, punish the
murderer and acquire the necessary information
with time to spare to get through the portal back
to Melvaunt.
• If a character mentions that the portal they
used is a bit small and functioning somewhat
irregularly, the twins react like proud parents.
Everything follows a pattern in Mechanus, but
the modrons can actually change those patterns.
The twins don’t know exactly how, or even if that
is the modrons’ intention, but if the characters
want to know if that is the modrons’ intent they
need to enter the camp and look for whether
the tools are there. Note that as stated in Part 1,
SL33P13-773P has never been directly involved
in these plans, and as such can neither confirm
15
nor deny these speculations.
• As a final note, the twins state that some of
the modrons seem to be acting strangely, and
they point to SL33P13-773P as an example.
Something larger than anyone realizes might be
happening in the camp, and the twins are very
excited about that.
Note: It is unlikely the statistics of these NPCs are
needed, but in a pinch use the guard stats (MM page
347) for the soldiers and the archmage stats (MM
page 342) for the two mages.
Modron Camp
The portal gear is about 2 miles away from the
compound on the steel gear. It is a perfectly square
camp with towers on each corner and a gate in the
middle of each wall, with watchtowers behind them.
Tent-like structures, each exactly the same as
the others, stand in a regular pattern inside. Wide
paths lead from the gates to a square in the center,
where there are several larger square structures.
The only smoke visible is rising from one of these
central buildings, which might be a forge of some
kind. There are no campfires, no kitchens, and
no fields for animals. There is a lot of movement
though, as groups of modron march around.
At the back rises a black iron cog with holes
instead of teeth. The holes are at least the size of a
big city gate. While the black iron cog turns around
slowly, it is not connected to the steel one. The
moment the hole is level with the steel cog, the hole
glows blue. These holes are gates to the central
domain of the modrons. It is impossible to see
from this distance without aid, but when the gates
activate, more modrons march through.
There are no other structures on the steel
cog, giving the characters a clear view. Modrons
patrol the cog, although they are not particularly
vigilant, since it is possible to see for miles here.
The patrols follow predictable patterns. Allow the
characters who observe the cog for an hour a DC
10 Intelligence check to determine the pattern and
avoid patrols. Characters with a military background
succeed automatically.
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
PA RT 2
 A patrol consists of 8 monodrones, 4 duodrones,
2 tridrones, and 1 quadrone. Fighting the group is
a deadly challenge even for a group of six 4th-level
characters. As long as the characters patiently wait
for the patrol’s arrival and provide non-hostile
logical answers to the quadrone in charge, there is
no problem. In fact, if the group has SL33P13-773P
with them, the pentadrone can simply order the
patrol to move along.
More information on the camp can be found
in Part 3. Note that a character trained in military
matters would estimate that camp could hold up to
at least 50,000 human soldiers. And since modrons
don’t need sleep or food, the camp could probably
hold a significantly higher number of modrons
without a problem.
16
Troubleshooting
The players may be discouraged when they
realize there is an army of modrons between
them and their goals. If that happens, impress
on them, preferably through the twins, that
modrons are not typical opponents. Infiltrating
an enemy camp might normally be hard,
but it is different with modrons, especially if
they have befriended SL33P13-773P. In fact,
considering the potential threat the modrons
pose to Melvaunt, learning the modrons’ plans
is vital.
Still, if they observe the modrons instead
of entering the compound, let them. Another
group of modrons sets up camp at the portal
after a brief time passes. The adventurers have
to fight them to get back through the portal,
as discussed in Part 5. If the players choose
not to enter the camp, the adventure is going
to be over sooner than planned, and it might
be somewhat boring, but that is their choice.
Adventurers are expected to take risks, why
else become one?
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
PA RT 2
 PART 3.
INTO THE STATION
To achieve their goals, the adventurers must enter
the modron camp. They can find the assassin at the
maintenance facility, and they can find the invasion
plans at the camp headquarters. Several paths
are available to the characters to reach that goal.
The following section provides you the necessary
information to adjust the adventure based on the
characters’ actions.
Decaton General
Modrons follow a strict hierarchy. Pentadrones
are the highest ranking base modrons. The next
step up is the decaton. The decatons are the lowest
rank of the hierarch modrons, the highly intelligent
modrons that rule the race.
Decatons are large spherical creatures with
ten tentacle-like extensions, each ending in one
eye. They float in the air and look like mechanical
beholders except for the lack of a large central
eye. Their most important task is maintaining the
well-being of the modrons, and they are powerful
healers. Each has the spell abilities of a 10th-
level cleric, in addition to an almost unlimited
ability to instantly heal up to ten nearby modrons
of all damage. Decaton have the capability to
communicate telepathically with all pentadrone
within 44 miles. The conversations are initiated
by the decaton, and no underling has the ability
to contact the decaton except through the more
mundane method of sending a messenger.
(SL33P13-773P is currently not receiving those
orders from the local decaton.)
Currently there is one decaton in the camp,
which is in charge of this operation. The decaton
has an intelligence of 14 and it is extremely busy. As
a result, unless the characters purposely look for a
confrontation or do something stupid, they are not
going to meet the decaton. It should be highlighted
as a constant threat in the background, because it is
17
virtually impossible to fool and it has every reason
to dispose of the adventures. The characters might
be able to defeat it in a direct confrontation if they
were very lucky and it was just against the decaton.
In reality, it is never alone and can summon any
modron within 44 miles just with a thought.
Important: If the adventurers do confront the
decaton directly, it does not stay around. Its
destruction would be problematic to the modrons’
plans, more so than the potential damage the
characters could cause. Instead, it simply retreats
and sends in wave after wave of modrons.
Infiltration
There is no day and night on Mechanus. Modrons
do not need sleep. The characters cannot disguise
themselves as modrons, and magical disguises are
easily pierced with a modron’s truesight.
There are a few things that makes things easier on
the characters:
• The vast majority of modrons are not
particular bright. They are automatons
operating within a set of parameters. Even the
more intelligent quadrones and pentadrones
lack imagination and a sense of self.
• The higher-ranked modrons are still sentient
creatures who react accordingly. As a result
there is some leeway, but the adventures cannot
simply blow things up and not expect a camp-
wide alarm. At least some thought must be given
to any infiltration attempt.
• The characters hopefully joined forces with
SL33P13-773P. It might be broken, somehow
thinking the adventurers are its superiors,
but no lower-ranked modron would even
contemplate questioning its orders. The
difficulty with this path is getting SL33P13-773P
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
PA RT 3
 to give those orders and keep to a script that is at
least somewhat believable to other pentadrones, A Note on Dice Rolls
especially those at the gates. For the adventure to succeed, it is vital the
• There is a small group of humans present in characters get inside the camp and at least
the camp. As such, a wandering organic being get into the maintenance area to confront the
inside the camp would not draw much attention. murderer and/or get into the headquarters
In other words, once the characters are inside, to learn of the modrons’ plans. Dice rolls are
they can do a lot without risking retaliation. important to D&D, but be careful when asking
• Give the players some time to design a plan for a roll while getting into the camp. A roll
and use your judgement on how to proceed should have consequences, and before making
from there. Err on the side of the players, and a check you should be ready to accept the
try to avoid a violent confrontation. If possible, consequences.
try to add some kind of interaction/tension, but There are multiple paths into the camp,
remember that for the adventure to proceed the so simply blocking one based on a check is
characters need to at least to get to the center of one thing, although there is always the chance
the camp. all paths are blocked through bad dice rolls.
Once you ask for one roll, you are more or less
Diplomats forced to do so in similar future situations to
It is possible the characters decide to act as official remain consistent. The characters are nowhere
legal representatives of a recognized government. near strong enough to face a whole brigade of
They might march to the gate and demand to speak modron, so violence should not be a reaction
with the modron leaders. If it happens, the modrons this early.
detain the characters and bring them to their There is nothing wrong with granting an
superiors, to have them deal with the issue. auto-success to characters trained in the right
If the characters try this tact, simply have the skills or who present a well-thought out plan.
guards at the gate allow SL33P13-773P to escort the
adventurers into the camp. That way they can move
about unhindered.
Modron Camp
See Appendix II for a map of the camp.
The modron compound is a relatively simple
encampment with ten-foot-high walls and twenty
feet high square watchtowers at each corner. Each of
the walls is pierced by a simple double-doored gate
without towers and a wall blocking straight access
to the camp. Any military expert would recognize it
as a temporary camp.
Inside four wide lanes lead to the middle,
dividing the camp in four quarters. The middle
of the camp consists of a large open area and a
selection of buildings that fulfill support roles
such as the forges, repair shops, supplies, and the
headquarters. Everything, tents included, is made of
thin dull gray iron sheets instead of cloth and wood.

CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:

18 PA RT 3
1. Gates
Each gate is twenty-feet wide and closed with a
large double door. An extension of the exterior wall
behind the gate forces visitors to make a sharp right
and left turn to enter the camp. There are no towers
or catwalks across the entrance. The gates are
usually closed. The gate nearest the modron portal
(area 10) is open when the portal is active, seeing
a lot of use by messengers, supply caravans, and
reinforcements.
Each gate is permanently guarded by a single
patrol: 8 monodrones, 4 duodrones, 2 tridrones,
and 1 quadrone. The quadrone intercepts the
adventurers who tries to enter, asking them their
business. Unless the adventurers really bungle
the interaction, they should be able to get in, as
described earlier.
2. Walls
The walls of the fortress are 10 feet high and
10 feet thick and made of smooth iron sheets.
They are hollow with no access to the inside. A
simple low parapet offers some cover to those
walking on top. Climbing the wall without a rope
is impossible without magic, but doing so with a
grappling hook and rope is easy. No modron patrol
the wall, although climbing over unseen from the
watchtowers or the gates is impossible without
some distraction.
3. Corner Watchtowers
These square towers are twenty-feet high with a
flat roof and two floors inside. Each floor consist
of a single open empty room. A patrol is stationed
at each tower, keeping an eye on the surrounding
area. While the door into a tower is big enough for a
pentadrone, the ladder up is not. The other modron
can and can be found on any of the floors.
4. Troop Quarters
Modron are not living creatures, and nowhere is
this clearer than in the four troop quarters. The
area consists of square tents made of thin metal
sheets, each exactly the same. A tent would provide
eight humans a sleeping place, but modron do not
need beds nor much space to maneuver. There is
no furniture inside, and modrons resting are simply
standing shoulder to shoulder staring into space.
19
Modrons need no sleep, but they need periodic rest.
Many are simply waiting to go through the portal
when the gate is in the correct alignment. There are
row upon row of regularly spaced tents with enough
space between for two pentadrones to pass one
another (20 feet).
Modrons in these areas have been ordered to
rest, and they ignore visitors completely, barring
a direct attack or act of sabotage. If a camp-wide
alarm is sounded, they spring into action.
5. Assembly Square
The square is simply a large open space where
groups of modron gather to receive orders or report
to headquarters. The modrons have no need for
speeches, inspections, or training, so there are
no platforms or training equipment. It is one of
the busiest parts of the camp, and there is always
modron active in the area.
6. Forge
The square building is one large open area under
a sloped roof. There are several forges, all neatly
arranged with coal in tidy heaps at one side, iron
bars stacked on another, and tools carefully put
away in their proper places. The area is hot and
filled with smoke, extremely uncomfortable for most
living creatures.
Modrons continually work here, with
monodrones and duodrones keeping the bellows
operating and forges burning while tridrones and
quadrones do the actual smithing: all under the
supervision of a single pentadrone. Most work
consists of making and repairing tools, weapons,
and body parts for the modrons. As long as visitors
make sure they are not in the way of the workers,
they are ignored.
7. Maintenance Area
The repair shop is a sixty by sixty foot square
enclosed building. It has the same dimensions as
the forges. It has no windows and two large sliding
doors. The inside contains several workbenches, a
pulley, and several modrons. It is the location where
the characters find the assassin from CORE1-1
A Scream in the Night. More details can be found
below in Capturing an Assassin.
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
PA RT 3
 8. Depot
A long, narrow building encloses a single space.
Several large doors give access to the building, and a
wide open corridor passes through headquaters on
the assembly square beyond. The doors are locked,
but there are no guards.
The area contains crates filled with supplies.
There is no food, drink or much fuel. Instead there
are supplies for the forges, spare weapons, tools,
and modron body parts.
Vault: One area in the depot is enclosed by thick
steel walls and a locked door. The door is protected
by a glyph of warding, requiring a DC 12 Intelligence
(Investigation) check to find. If triggered it explodes
in a 20-foot-radius, dealing 9 (2d8) thunder damage.
A successful DC 12 Dexterity saving throw halves
the damage. Of course, the explosion alerts any
nearby modron. The door can be opened with a
DC 10 Dexterity (Thieves’ Tools) check. Inside the
characters find valuables (see Treasure below).
Treasure
Several small gold ingots worth a total of 200 gp can
be found here.
9. Headquarters
See Appendix III for a schematic layout of the
headquarters.
The headquarters are a long narrow building
with steel walls and a slanted roof. It stands at
the edge of the assembly square with the depot
at its back. It is two stories high with windows
overlooking its surroundings. The doors are big
enough for pentadrones. The building has ramps
instead of stairs.
The doors and windows are locked unless
otherwise noted. It requires a DC 10 Dexterity
(Thieves’ Tools) check or a DC 12 Strength
(Athletics) check to open. Using weapons to open
them is automatic, but unless the characters take
the necessary precautions through a successful
Dexterity (Stealth) check, doing so makes noise and
alerts the modrons.
It is in this building that the characters can
find the information they are looking for about the
modrons’ plans.
20
1. Briefing Room. The large room is mostly empty
except for a large desk and large wooden board.
There are no chairs. There is a map of the camp,
the cogs in the area, and Melvaunt pinned to the
wooden board. Colored pins on Melvaunt seem
to highlight points of interest, mostly defensive
structures and temples, but there are a few odd
spots as well whose nature is not immediately
obvious. The portal has its own golden colored pin.
At the moment the room is hardly used except as a
passage for the decaton.
2. Document Processing. The doors into the
room are always open. Monodrones constantly
deliver various documents, which are processed
by duodrones and tridrones under the careful
supervision of a quadrone. Archive cabinets line the
walls, and desks stand in the middle. The constant
noise is loud enough to at least dampen some of the
sounds characters might make in other spots of the
building.
Acquiring any good information in this area is
impossible. Such information is hidden among a
huge amount of minutia. As far as the characters
are concerned, there is no clear labeling. More
importantly, the modrons working here do not
accept any interference. They kick interlopers out
of the room, and if the culprit objects they react
by calling superiors, which eventually ends with
violence and an alarm.
3. Decaton Office. The large room contains a desk
(no chair), a cabinet, and a large table with chairs.
There is a large cushion in one corner, a resting
place for the decaton. Otherwise the room is empty
and all its doors locked. It is a clean room, and
everything in the cabinet and desk is neatly stacked
and well-ordered. It is here that the characters can
find the plans of the modron inside the cabinet
clearly labeled as such. The decaton cannot even
imagine spies infiltrating its camp, and it has taken
no precautions against theft. See Information
below for more details.
4. Archives. This large windowless room is filled
with file cabinets. Medium-sized creatures can move
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
PA RT 3
around with some difficulty, but Large-sized ones
get stuck. As with the document processing room,
there is too much useless information here for the
characters to find much.
5. Guest Quarters. The invasion of Melvaunt is a
project in cooperation with a group of humans. A
pale gaunt man with short black hair and a goatee
in black is the group’s liaison and envoy. His yellow
snake eyes are his most distinct features though. He
goes by the name of Black. He and his human guards
(two scouts) and servants live in this single room.
It is a spartan room, but there are at least beds,
a brazier for heat, and a small kitchen. The walk-in
closet in one corner contains food. More details on
the humans can be found below in the Information
section.
10. Modron Portal
At the edge of the steel cog rises another large cog,
which manages the gate to the modron’s central
community in a different part of Mechanus.
There is always a squad of modrons (sixteen
monodrones, eight duodrones, four tridrones,
two quadrones and one pentadrone) on guard.
These guards react violently to the presence of
non-modrons, considering it an invasion of their
territory. The adventurers are ordered to leave
immediately if they approach the portal or the
guards.
When the portal is open, troops and supplies
are moved through. It often requires direct oversight
by the decaton. It offers both an opportunity for the
characters and a risk: an opportunity because the
modrons are distracted and the decaton is likely to
be away from the headquarters, and a risk because
a lot of modrons are active, and there is always
the chance to run across the decaton who would
instantly recognize the adventurers as intruders.
Always give the players information they need to
avoid the place.
21
Capturing an Assassin
The primary goal of the characters is capturing the
assassin that has hunted the streets of Melvaunt.
The modron responsible has been damaged during
its mission and it is currently in the maintenance
area. The modron compass the characters carry
points them directly to the repair shop. The culprit
has no intention to quietly surrender though.
The shop consists of a single sixty by sixty foot
room with two 10 foot sliding iron doors opposite
one another. These doors can be bolted from
the inside or outside. The locking mechanism is
operated from the headquarters as well. The ceiling
is twenty feet high. Inside are several workbenches,
and all the tools and supplies needed to repair metal
constructs. There are two pulley systems attached
to the ceiling. All the objects are neatly arranged,
giving at least some room to maneuver.
There are four monodrones and one
duodrone at the shop, plus the assassin C1e7i5,
which is a quadrone. (C1e7i5 is currently unable
to attack, although it is conscious and can talk to
the adventurers). These are all damaged, reacting
rather unpredictably especially to non-modron. At
first they might be inclined to ignore the characters,
but something suddenly changes after which
they initiate the attack. They fight until they are
disabled. The most likely moment is any aggressive
confrontation with the assassin.
If a fight starts and no alarm has been sounded yet,
the following happens:
• Round 1-3. No alarm. There is a lot of noise
coming from the forges across.
• Round 4. If the fighting is still going on at
the end of the third round, a quadrone rushes
toward the shop to check what is going on.
• Round 5. The quadrone arrives at the end
of the round. If the fighting has stopped, the
adventures might be able to talk their way out of
the situation, since these modrons were known
to be damaged. DC 10 Charisma (Deception)
checks can be the baseline. If the fighting is still
going on, an alarm is sounded. See Alarm below
for the consequences.
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
PA RT 3
 After the alarm is sounded, each round of fighting
simply brings in more reinforcements.
• Round 1. Nothing special happens.
• Round 2. Two new monodrones arrive on the
scene.
• Round 5. Four monodrones and one duodrone
arrive.
• Round 8. A full patrol (eight monodrones,
four duodrones, two tridrones and a quadrone)
arrive.
• Round 10. The decaton arrives.
Reinforcements can be blocked by closing and
locking the doors, although unless sabotaged by
the characters, the doors can be opened from the
headquarters. If the characters wait too long before
fleeing, getting out of the building might also be
hard, since those modrons that cannot enter, simply
wait outside.
If SL33P13-773P is present, assume it is too
confused to do anything. The broken modrons do
not listen to its commands anyway. At this point
it starts realizing something is amiss with it. The
characters can try and convince it to come with
them instead of facing destruction. Good roleplaying
gets it to stay around. See the sidebar SL33P13-
773P’s Fate.
During or after the fight, C1e7i5 simply watches
the fight with an odd grin on its metal face. At some
point, before or after the battle, read:
The armless quadrone that caused the
havoc in Melvaunt is suspended from a
chain. In addition to its arm, it is missing
several other parts. It smiles when it sees you,
an odd look for a modron. “You are here,
and that means the war has started. My
mission was a success.” With that, its head
splits open and a black sapphire pops out.
Treasure
The black sapphire is very small but still worth 300
gp.
22
Short Rest. Note that at this time it is impossible
for the characters to take a short rest. The
modron in the camp are in constant motion, and
the adventurers cannot hope to stay unopposed
for one hour. Eventually modrons come across
evidence that something is wrong, resulting in an
alarm as discussed below. If the players insist, give
them a warning through behavior of the modrons
about halfway through the rest. The characters
might be questioned by modrons, there might be
a commotion at the repair shop, and so on. If they
ignore it, the alarm is triggered some time later.
Adjusting the Encounter
The fight itself is an Easy encounter. The real
challenge is in disabling the opponents quick
enough without raising an alarm. If an alarm
has already been sounded, it is more about
time. The longer the characters take, the more
reinforcements arrive.
Here are recommendations for adjusting
this combat encounter. These are not
cumulative.
• Very weak party: Remove the duodrone.
• Weak party: Remove two monodrone.
• Strong party: Add two monodrone.
Instead of regular weapons, they grabs
nearby chains. They keep the same attack
rolls, but deal 5 (1d8 + 1) bludgeoning
damage instead.
• Very strong party: Add two monodrone
and a tridrone. Instead of regular weapons,
they grabs nearby chains. They keep the
same attack rolls, but deal 5 (1d8 + 1)
bludgeoning damage instead.
Information
The characters should be worried about the
presence of a large army with direct access to
Melvaunt. Except for the portal into Melvaunt, there
are no other obvious interesting objects in the area.
The army’s presence can only be due to the portal.
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
PA RT 3
The intent of the modrons is unlikely to be friendly
since they would have send envoys otherwise. At
this moment in time, though the portal is too small
and inactive for a successful invasion, so there must
be some kind of plan in place.
At the decaton’s office, the adventurers find
a neatly stacked set of documents detailing the
immediate plans of the modrons with regards to
the Melvaunt portal. The documents are in the filing
cabinet in his office, filed under M.
The documents are written in Modron, which
poses no problem while in Mechanus. A quick
glance shows the modron are planning an invasion
of Melvaunt. The first step in the plan is to observe
the portal and determine exactly when the portal
will be stable enough and large enough to send the
entire army through. The purpose is to stabilize
the environment and protect Mechanus against
dangerous instability. Large amounts of chaos
energy are leaking into Mechanus at the site of the
portal, and that chaos originates in Melvaunt.
Before the characters can do much, they are
interrupted by Black, the human envoy, and his two
bodyguards (two scouts). He is a bit early for his
appointment with the decaton, planning to double-
check a thing or two in the plans. If an alarm has
been sounded, Black is actually waiting here to
prevent the plans from falling in the wrong hands.
If the characters took proper precautions, they
should be alerted and with one or two appropriate
skill checks manage to get away without a
confrontation. Of course, Black immediate notes the
missing papers and trigger an alarm (see Alarm
below for what happens next). Otherwise Black
catches them in the act.
Black is extremely surprised, giving the
characters one surprise round. If Black is allowed
to recover without a fight, he becomes curious,
trying to get the characters to reveal who they are
and why they are here. He is a proud, polite man
who does not hide his disdain for the characters.
He is not stupid though, and he is not about to
risk his life fighting several unknown adventurers
who managed to get into the camp unopposed. He
answers no questions beyond giving his name and
saying that he is a friend of the modrons. He does
try to delay the characters, hoping for the decaton to
23
return.
If his delaying tactics do not work, he orders
his guards to cover his retreat, while he fetches
reinforcements. If necessary, he is not above
jumping through a window. It might get him killed,
but it will alert the modron.
The same thing happens here during a fight as
in Capturing an Assassin above. The first three
rounds are fine, but soon after reinforcements
arrive, and then finally an alarm is sounded.
Adjusting the Encounter
A direct confrontation with Black and his
bodyguards is a medium fight. Black does not
stick around though, trying to get help. If he
succeeds, dealing with the two guards is easy.
If the characters block his path, things become
more difficult here, but somewhat easier in
Part 4.
Here are recommendations for adjusting
this combat encounter. These are not
cumulative.
• Very weak party: Replace the scouts
with two guards.
• Weak party: Remove a scout.
• Strong party: Replace the stats of Black
with a cult fanatic.
• Very strong party: Add one veteran.
Alarm
No amount of skill is going to allow the characters
to remain undetected forever. Even if they don’t
accidentally trigger an alarm, at some point their
presence is noted.
When the modrons become aware of the
characters’ presence, a camp-wide alarm is
triggered. This should happen after the adventurers
have found the assassin and the modrons’ plans.
A single loud gong is sounded. At that point the
decaton flies up, and through telepathy contacts
pentadrones near obviously visible trouble spots,
quickly focusing on the source and reacting
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
PA RT 3
 accordingly. As a result distractions are quickly
dealt with. If the modron are aware of the presence
of intruders, they start to hunt the characters
down. Otherwise things settle down, providing the
adventurers with only a short reprieve.
Assuming a hunt is started, proceed with Part
4. The exact starting point depends on time and
location the alarm is triggered. Under the best
of circumstances, the adventurers managed to
deal both with the assassin and acquire the plans
without triggering an alarm. Start the chase in Part
4 with the characters at the Wall/Gate.
It is possible the alarm is triggered either at
the maintenance area or the headquarters. If the
adventurers have been at both spots, or simply
decide it is time to leave, start the chase in Part 4
with the characters Crossing the Camp. If they still
need to get to one area, start with Into the Building
instead. Changes to those encounters are detailed
above in Capturing an Assassin and Information.
In the unlikely case an alarm is triggered before
even achieving one goal, and the adventurers
decide to press on, proceed with Through the
Camp in Part 4. If they decide to retreat, start at an
appropriate spot. If it happens outside, it should be
easier to retreat since the modrons are not nearby
in sizable numbers. Half the consequences of a failed
check in Part 4.
24
SL33P13-773P’s Fate
If the adventurers are still with SL33P13-773P,
at some point they need to decide what to do
with the now rogue modron. Without outside
influence, SL33P13-773P simply stays behind
at the repair shop awaiting its fate, which is
destruction.
If the characters interacted regularly
with the modron up this point, talking about
the world and/or what it means to be an
individual, SL33P13-773P expresses both
curiosity and concern. It does not want to
be destroyed but does not understand this
emotion (or the concept of emotions for that
matter). At that point characters can greatly
influence what happens. They effectively
decide whether to abandon SL33P13-773P
and leave it behind or take it along back to
Melvaunt.
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
PA RT 3
 PART 4.
RUNAWAY TRAIN
Triggering an alarm is unavoidable but most likely
happens after the adventurers acquire what they
were looking for. Regardless, once the alarm is
sounded, the modrons start their hunt for the
characters. Since the adventurers are not powerful
enough to face a whole army, all they can do is run
and flee through the portal back to Melvaunt.
Note: All modrons have truesight. Illusions and
similar magic only work at more than 120 feet
distance.
On the Run
As discussed in Part 3, the location of the
characters depends on when the alarm is sounded.
If everything went well, they are at the gates of the
compound. If things did not go according to plan,
they are elsewhere.
If the characters are still in the camp, and
nobody has yet spotted them, they can try to
keep hidden. Some kind of distraction can be a
great boon. Use your judgement on how effective
a particular distraction is. If they are at the gates
or outside them, hiding is not an option. All the
characters can do is run. When the adventurers are
located, roll initiative and start the chase.
The chase can be divided in up to seven phases
based on the areas the characters have to cross.
These areas are described below. The characters
have to cross each area to finally reach the portal
home.
For simplicity’s sake, assume the characters
require a Dash action plus normal movement to
cross any area (1 full round of movement), except
the steel cog, which requires 3 Dash actions (3
full rounds of movement). The exact speed is not
important since it is assumed faster characters
help the slower and because it is more of a
representation of time rather than actual movement.
25
In reality it takes more time and considerably
more distance. Feel free to give bonuses to check
for characters who have faster speeds or greater
movement.
The chase assumes the characters make a more
or less direct run for the portal. The terrain makes
hiding challenging. Time is not on the characters’
side, since any delay on the part of the adventurers
gives the modrons the opportunity to place more
guards at the portal. Besides, running in another
direction does not make getting away any easier. If
the characters insist, allow them to flee in another
direction, adjusting the chase as necessary. In
that case the chase stops with Stealth checks as
described in the Dungeon Master Guide page 251 as
soon as the characters leave the steel cog and enter
a region with many smaller cogs. The characters can
then take an extended rest and return to the portal
afterward. Increase the number of modron posted at
the portal in Part 5 to make it a deadly fight.
SL33P13-773P
If SL33P13-773P is with the characters, it can
remove one opportunity attack made by a modron
per round.
Ending the Chase
The chase obviously ends when the characters reach
the portal back to Melvaunt. Note down the amount
of rounds the slowest character needed. See Part 5
for the effects.
Regardless of the results, adjust the encounter
as necessary to make it a fun experience for the
players by adding specific complications (as long
as they fit the setting), making things a bit easier or
reduce the time necessary to reach the portal.
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
PA RT 4

Adjusting the Encounter
The chase is supposed to drain resources. Treat
it as an easy to medium encounter, but don’t
make things harder just because the players
roll well.
• Very weak party: Halve the damage
caused by a failed check.
• Very strong party: Increase the damage
caused by a failed check by 2.
Through the Camp (1 full round)
It is unlikely the characters trigger the alarm while
moving through the camp towards the center. If
it happens, taking the diplomatic route may be a
good option. As long as the characters don’t become
violent, the modrons are unsure on what to do and
simply take the PCs to headquarters for a talk with
the decaton. This gives them the chance to escape
later.
If the PCs insist on simply running, instead of
using the complication table, a character should
make a DC 10 Dexterity (Stealth) check at the end
of the round. They have advantage on the check if
they cause some kind of significant distraction. On
a success the characters avoid any complication,
reaching their target without trouble. On a failure,
they trigger an opportunity attack by a modron (+3
to hit; 1d6 + 1 piercing damage).
Into the Building (1 full round)
If an alarm is sounded, but the adventurers
still attempt to get into one of the buildings
(maintenance area or headquarters), the doors are
closed, locked and guarded by two monodrones.
The characters can decide to fight their way through
or in case of headquarters try avoiding them by
using a window.
If they use a window, each character must make
a group DC 10 Dexterity (Stealth) check at the end
of the round. If half or more of the characters are
successful, they remain undetected. If more than
half fail, two monodrones arrive and attack the
characters.
26
If caught in a fight, nothing happens if the
two monodrones are disabled by the end of the
first round. If the monodrones are still alive and
able to make noise at the end of the round, two
more monodrones arrive. The next round four
monodrones and one duodrone arrive. If the
characters are still not inside with a closed door
after this they face a full patrol (8 monodrones, 4
duodrones, 2 tridrones and 1 quadrone).
Alternatively, they can run away and return
some time later, see Through the Camp above.
Or they could split up, one group making a lot of
commotion while giving the stealthy characters the
opportunity to get in. Doing so is a good idea in the
case of headquarters, since Black does enter the
office. He and his men stay at his room for now to
avoid misunderstandings. Getting the murderer in
the repair shop might be hard for a small group of
characters though.
Out of the Building (1 full round)
Except for as described in Part 3, the modron prefer
to avoid a confrontation inside a building. Assuming
the characters do not wait for a mass of modron to
surround a building, they have two options: Rush
past the modron blocking the door or stealthy try to
leave through a window.
If done quickly enough, rushing past the
modron simply triggers an opportunity attack (+3
to hit; 1d6 + 1 piercing damage). If the characters
waited too long they also need to make a path
through the gathered modron by making a path,
either by disabling 1d4 monodrones or by bull
rushing through which requires a DC 10 Strength
check. On a failure, the character has to wait till the
next round for another opportunity. An opportunity
attack is triggered regardless of the results unless
the characters use some kind of area of effect spell
that disables several monodrones.
The characters can use a window in which case
a DC 10 Dexterity (Stealth) check avoids detection.
On a success the character gain advantage on any
check made in the next phase. On a failure they are
detected, but can avoid opportunity attacks for now.
If the characters wait too long, this path is blocked
as with the doors.
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
PA RT 4
Crossing the Camp (1 full round)
At this point in time, quietly running past the tents
is the best path for the characters. The characters
can choose to remain relatively undetected by
making a DC 10 Dexterity (Stealth) check or simply
rush through the modron with a DC 10 Strength
(Athletics) or Dexterity (Acrobatics) check. On
a success there is no problem. On a failure the
character can choose to take an opportunity attack
(+3 to hit; 1d6 + 1 piercing damage) or lose a round
and try to get to the wall/gate in the next round.
Over the Wall/Through the Gate (1 full round)
While rushing through one of the gates is
theoretically an option, doing so requires the
characters to rush past a full squad of modron (16
monodrones, 8 duodrones, 4 tridrones, 2 quadrones,
and 1 pentadrone).
Getting over a wall is a lot easier. The characters
just need to run past a few monodrones and
jump down on the cog below. If they ignore the
monodrone, they trigger an opportunity attack (+3
to hit; 1d6 + 1) piercing damage. Alternatively one
of the characters can try to bull rush one (or more)
monodrone out of the way with a DC 10 Strength
(Athletics) check or use a spell for similar effect
and prevent these attacks. Of course, casting a spell
costs an action. Jumping down requires a DC 10
Strength (Athletics) or Dexterity (Acrobatics) check.
A failed check causes the character to take 3 (1d6)
bludgeoning damage and land prone. Characters can
use a rope, which might even be a free action if they
prepared for such an eventuality or use a grappling
hook. Doing so provides advantage on the climb
check. Whether the character can retrieve the rope
and/or grappling hook afterwards is up to you.
Participants may spend inspiration to negate the
result. Alternatively you can opt for one check at
the start of the round that affects one or more of the
characters during the round.
Hopping the Little Cogs (1 full round)
The last part of the chase is past the smaller,
fast-turning cogs between the steel cog and the
portal cog. Spells and special abilities that allow a
character to bypass a short distance grant advantage
on any Dexterity check. Long range abilities allow
a character to completely bypass the problem. You
might allow other ideas have similar effects. Others
are at more risk.
Getting past the crushing cogs unharmed is
a matter of understanding the pattern and quick
action. A character who successfully studied the
cogs earlier in the adventure has advantage on one
check during this phase of the chase. Characters
passing over the cogs need to make a DC 12
Dexterity saving throw. On a failed check they take
5 (1d10) bludgeoning damage and loose one round
before getting past the obstacle, in addition to the
round it already takes.
One or more characters can opt to study the
cogs at the cost of 1 full round for that character. The
character makes a DC 10 Intelligence (Investigation)
check. On a success the cogs deal 2 (1d4)
bludgeoning damage instead, or gives one other
character advantage on their next Dexterity saving
throw.

Past the Steel Cog (3 full rounds)

The steel cog is mostly open terrain. Running over
it is more a matter of speed and endurance with
some quick maneuvering to avoid patrols. Barring
complications it should take the characters 3 full
rounds of movement to get across.
During this phase of the chase each adventurer
rolls on the chase complications table at the end of
its turn. Complications affect the next participant in
the initiative order, not the participant who rolled.

CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:

27 PA RT 4
 Table: Chase Complications
1d20 Complication
1 A moignos swarm crosses your path. While the moignos do not attack, they still block sight and hinder
movement. Make a DC 10 Intelligence or Wisdom (perception) check (your choice) to get through unscathed.
On a failed check, you do not make any progress this move.

2 Your path takes you near a patch of razorvine. Make a DC 10 Dexterity saving throw or use one movement
(your choice) to avoid the razorvine. On a failed save, you take 5 (1d10) slashing damage. If you go through
the razorvine, you gain one bonus move action.

3 The ground beneath your feet is slippery with some kind of oil. You can choose to go over it or around it. If you
go through, you must make a DC 10 Dexterity (acrobatic) check. On a success you gain a bonus move since the
modron are delayed. On a failure you fall prone, losing one move in the process. If you move around nothing
happens.

4 A group of modron blocks your path. You can run around them, costing you one move, or try to dash through
them. If you go through them, make a DC 10 Charisma (deception) check. On a success the modron are too
surprised to act and actually hinder those chasing you, giving you a free move this round. On a failure they
take an opportunity attack (+3 to hit; 1d6 + 1 piercing damage) against you.

5 The steel cog makes a sudden move. All characters must make a DC 10 Dexterity saving throw
or fall prone.

6 A group of flying modron starts shooting at you. You suffer one attack (+3 to hit; 1d6 + 1 piercing damage).
The attack is at disadvantage if you succeed at a DC 10 Wisdom (perception) or Intelligence check (your
choice) by moving around unpredictable.

7 A large slab of steel suddenly bursts from the ground (the result of an angry cog spirit, something comparable
to a dryad except tied to the cog instead) and you are forced to make a sharp turn to avoid colliding with
it. Make a DC 10 Dexterity saving throw to navigate the turn. On a failed save, you collide with it and take 2
(1d4) bludgeoning damage.

8 For a few moments you find the perfect stride. Make a DC 10 Intelligence or Wisdom check. On a success you
manage to exploit this and gain a bonus move. On a failure you falter, gaining no benefit.

9 The cog spirit is curious what is going on, suddenly appearing before you and questioning you on events.
Ignoring him makes it harder, costing you a move and causing you to make further checks during the chase
at disadvantage. Spending an action to talk causes it to leave you alone. A DC 10 Charisma (persuade) check
convinces it help you, giving you an immediate double move (effectively giving you 1 bonus move).

10+ No complication.

CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:

28 PA RT 4
 PART 5.
BROKEN TRACK
On The Portal Cog died to create an opening, they do swarm said
character. Their aim is to prevent the characters
from fleeing. Killing is the most certain way to do
Read aloud the following once the characters step so, but they are not above grappling one or more
upon the portal cog. characters. Of course, characters can always try to
shove a modron out of the way (or even through the
When you step upon the portal cog, you portal) at the risk of opportunity attacks by adjacent
immediately note two things. The portal
modrons.
is shining brightly and it is clearly active,
although whether it leads to Melvaunt or
some other place remains an unsettling Depending on how many rounds it took for the
question. The second thing is that the portal
is blocked by steel plates and a group of
characters to arrive at the portal, reinforcements
modron. More modron are certainly hot on might arrive soon.
your trail, but you don’t know how much time • End 8th round from the start of the alarm:
you actually have. What do you do? Black and his bodyguards (see Part 3) arrive if
they are still alive. If they are seriously wounded
The portal is about 120 feet away at this point. or dead, nothing happens.
Removing the metal plates covering the portal • End of the 10th round from the start of the
requires an action and a DC 10 Strength (Athletics) alarm: six monodrones and two duodrone
check, a DC 10 Dexterity (Sleight of Hand), or a DC arrive on the scene.
15 Intelligence check. Alternately you can allow • End of the 12th round from the start of the
character to use a suitable tool proficiency (such as alarm: Four monodrones, two duodrones, and
smithing or thieves’ tools) instead. two tridrones arrive on the scene.
The portal is guarded by six monodrones, • End of the 14th round from the start of
two duodrones and one tridrone. They start the the alarm: A pentadrone and two quadrones
combat at the portal, blocking access to the ten-foot- arrive on the scene.
wide portal and ready to fight the characters. They
know SL33P13-773P went rogue and do not listen
to it. SL33P13-773P is conflicted at the moment
and refuses to fight his former companions at first.
However, the tridrone tells SL33P13-773P that it
is going to be decommissioned for assisting the
organic creatures. This prompts SL33P13-773P into
action. He does not use his full abilities, but he uses
the Aid action to assist his new friends.
The modrons do not leave the portal even when
attacked with ranged attacks. They do return fire
with their javelins or start dodging. They know
reinforcements are on the way and their lives mean
nothing to the collective. If one or more characters
get close to the portal, especially if enough modrons

CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:

29 PA RT 5
 Adjusting the Encounter
The fight itself is a Deadly encounter if the
characters stick around till all opponents are
dealt with, and that is excluding potential
reinforcements. The characters do not need to
finish the fight, though and they can opt to flee
through the portal as soon as there is a path
open. If the characters do so early on while
still going strong, have some of the modron
follow through the portal unless characters
consciously stay behind to delay any pursuers,
but baring stubbornness from the players it
should not be more challenging than a Medium
to Hard encounter. If present, SL33P13-773P is
a good tool to make the fight easier.
Here are recommendations for adjusting
this combat encounter. These are not
cumulative.
• Very weak party: Remove the tridrone,
one duodrone and two monodrones.
• Weak party: Remove the tridrone.
• Strong party: Replace the monodrones
with one pentadrone.
• Very strong party: The guards consists
of three quadrones and one pentadrone
instead.
30
Conclusion
Stepping through the portal, the characters reach
the safety of Melvaunt:
When you step upon the portal cog, you
immediately note two things. The portal
is shining brightly and it is clearly active,
although whether it leads to Melvaunt or
some other place remains an unsettling
question. The second thing is that the portal
is blocked by steel plates and a group of
modron. More modron are certainly hot on
your trail, but you don’t know how much time
you actually have. What do you do?
If any other modrons, apart from SL33P13-773P,
came through the portal, they were killed by the
guards. SL33P13-773P is treated as an enemy
unless the adventurers intercede on its behalf with a
simple “hold your fire!”
Any adventurers who died or were left behind
in the final combat or during the chase are also
tossed through the portal. There are notes of
warning pinned to them, relaying the information
that the modrons are coming through soon to take
control of Melvaunt and rid it of the toxic chaos that
has infected it.
Captain Eledstra asks for a debriefing of all that
happened. The adventurers can give their report,
as well as hand over any plans. The black sapphire
that came out of C1e7i5’s head might also hold
information, so the adventurers are paid for that.
SL33P13-773P is also questioned, but it is obviously
very confused and can help a little, but knows
nothing of the overall battle plans of the modrons.
If the characters brought SL33P13-773P with
them, they earned a friend for life. Make a note of it
on the adventure log.
CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:
PA RT 5
Rewards possible. Gold piece values listed for sellable
gear are calculated at their selling price, not their
purchase price.
Make sure players note their rewards on their
Consumable magic items should be divided
adventure logsheets. Give your name and DCI
up however the group sees fit. If more than one
number (if applicable) so players can record who
character is interested in a specific consumable
ran the session.
magic item, the DM can determine who gets it
Experience randomly should the group be unable to decide.
Total up all combat experience earned for defeated Permanent magic items are divided according
foes, and divide by the number of characters present to a system. See the sidebar if the adventure awards
in the combat. For non-combat experience, the permanent magic items.
rewards are listed per character. Give all characters
in the party non-combat experience awards unless
otherwise noted. Treasure Awards
Item Name GP value
Combat Awards Total reward from Eledstra 500
Gold ingots 200
Name of Foe XP per Foe Black sapphire 300
Chaos Slasher 200
Monodrone 25
Duodrone 50 Potion of Healing
Tridrone 100 Potion, uncommon
Quadrone 200 A description of this item can be found in the
Man in Black 100 Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Cult Fanatic 450
Veteran 700
Scout 100 Story Awards
During the course of play, the characters have the
Non-Combat Awards opportunity to earn the following story awards:

Task or Accomplishment XP per Char. Friendship of S133P13-773P. You have brought

back to Melvaunt the malfunctioning modron
Retrieve the modron plans 25
S133P13-773P. It is gaining an independent
Retrieve the black sapphire 25
consciousness, and it hopes that you will help it
Get everyone back to Melvaunt alive 25
learn to be a great individual.
The minimum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 450 experience Downtime
points.
Each character receives five downtime days at the
The maximum total award for each character conclusion of this adventure.
participating in this adventure is 600 experience
points.

Treasure DM Rewards
The characters receive the following treasure, You receive 200 XP, 100 gp, and five downtime
divided up amongst the party. Characters should days for running this session.
attempt to divide treasure evenly whenever

CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:

31 PA RT 5
 Appendix: throws against being charmed or frightened.
Spellcasting. The cult fanatic is a 4th-level
NPC / Monster Statistics spellcaster. Its spellcasting ability is Wisdom (spell
save DC 11, +3 to hit with spell attacks). Black has
the following cleric spells prepared:
Man in Black
Cantrips (at will): light, sacred flame,
Medium humanoid (human), neutral evil thaumaturgy
Armor Class 12 (studded leather) 1st level (4 slots): healing word, guiding bolt,
Hit Points 18 (4d8) shield of faith
Speed 30 ft. 2nd level (3 slots): hold person, spiritual weapon
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 14 (+2) 11 (+0) Actions
Multiattack. The fanatic makes two melee attack.
Skills Arcana +2, Deception +2
Dagger. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit,
Senses passive Perception 12
reach 5 ft. or range 20/60 ft., one creature. Hit: 4
Languages Common (1d4 + 2) piercing damage.
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
Spellcasting. Black is a 2nd-level spellcaster. His
spellcasting ability is Wisdom (spell save DC 12, +4 Duodrone
to hit with spell attacks). Black has the following Medium construct, lawful neutral
cleric spells prepared: Armor Class 15 (natural armor)
Cantrips (at will): light, sacred flame, Hit Points 11 (2d8 + 2)
thaumaturgy Speed 30 ft.
1st level (4 slots): healing word, guiding bolt, STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
shield of faith 11 (+0) 13 (+1) 12 (+1) 6 (-2) 10 (+0) 7 (-2)
Actions Senses truesight 120 ft., passive Perception 10
Quarterstaff. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach Languages Modron
5 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d8) bludgeoning damage. Challenge 1/4 (50 XP)
Axiomatic Mind. The duodrone can’t be compelled
to act in a manner contrary to its nature or its
Cult Fanatic (Man in Black) instructions.
Medium humanoid (human), neutral evil Disintegration. If the duodrone dies, its body
Armor Class 13 (leather armor) disintegrates into dust, leaving behind its weapons
Hit Points 33 (6d8 + 6) and anything else it was carrying.
Speed 30 ft. Actions
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Multiattack. The duodrone makes two fist attacks
11 (+0) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 10 (+1) 13 (+1)
14 (+2)
or two javelin attacks.
Skills Arcana +2, Deception +4, Persuasion +4 Fist. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
Senses passive Perception 11 target. Hit: 2 (1d4) bludgeoning damage.
Languages Common Javelin. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit,
Challenge 2 (450 XP) reach 5 ft. or range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d6
+ 1) piercing damage.
Dark Devotion. The fanatic has advantage on saving

CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:

32 APPENDIX
Chaos Slasher Monodrone
Medium aberration, chaotic evil Medium construct, lawful neutral
Armor Class 13 (natural armor) Armor Class 15 (natural armor)
Hit Points 36 (8d8) Hit Points 5 (1d8 + 1)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 30 ft., fly 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
11 (+0) 13 (+1) 11 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 13 (+1) 10 (+0) 13 (+1) 12 (+1) 4 (-3) 10 (+0) 5 (-3)

Skills Stealth +3 Senses truesight 120 ft., passive Perception 10

Damage Resistances bludgeoning, piercing, Languages Modron
and slashing from nonmagical attacks that aren’t Challenge 1/8 (25 XP)
adamantine Axiomatic Mind. The monodrone can’t be
Damage Immunities poison compelled to act in a manner contrary to its nature
Condition Immunities blinded, charmed, deafened, or its instructions.
exhaustion, frightened, paralyzed, poisoned, Disintegration. If the monodrone dies, its body
unconscious disintegrates into dust, leaving behind its weapons
Senses blindsight 60 ft. (blinded beyond this and anything else it was carrying.
radius), passive Perception 10
Actions
Languages understands Common but can’t speak
Challenge 1 (200 XP) Dagger. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 3 (1d4 + 1) piercing damage.
Actions Javelin. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit,
Multiattack. The chaos slasher makes two claw reach 5 ft. or range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d6
attacks. + 1) piercing damage.
Claw. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
target. Hit: 6 (2d4 + 1) slashing damage. If the target
is a creature, it must succeed on a DC 11 Wisdom
saving throw or be frightened until the end of the
chaos slasher’s next turn.
Terrifying Glare. The chaos slasher targets one
creature it can see within 30 feet of it. If the
target can see the chaos slasher, then the target
must succeed on a DC 11 Wisdom saving throw
or be magically frightened until the end of the
chaos slasher’s next turn. The frightened target is
paralyzed.

CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:

33 APPENDIX
 Pentadrone Quadrone
Large construct, lawful neutral Medium construct, lawful neutral
Armor Class 16 (natural armor) Armor Class 16 (natural armor)
Hit Points 32 (5d10 + 5) Hit Points 22 (4d8 + 4)
Speed 40 ft. Speed 30 ft., fly 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
15 (+2) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 13 (+1) 12 (+1) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 11 (+0)

Skills Perception +4 Skills Perception +2

Senses truesight 120 ft., passive Perception 14
Languages Modron
Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Axiomatic Mind. The pentadrone can’t be
compelled to act in a manner contrary to its nature
or its instructions.
Disintegration. If the pentadrone dies, its body
disintegrates into dust, leaving behind its weapons
and anything else it was carrying.
Actions
Multiattack. The pentadrone makes five arm
attacks.
Arm. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) bludgeoning damage.
Paralysis Gas (Recharge 5-6). The pentadrone
exhales a 30-foot cone of gas. Each creature in that
area must succeed on a DC 11 Constitution saving
throw or be paralyzed for 1 minute. A creature can
repeat the saving throw at the end of each of its
turns, ending the effect on itself on a success.
Senses truesight 120 ft., passive Perception 12
Languages Modron
Challenge 1 (200 XP)
Axiomatic Mind. The quadrone can’t be compelled
to act in a manner contrary to its nature or its
instructions.
Disintegration. If the quadrone dies, its body
disintegrates into dust, leaving behind its weapons
and anything else it was carrying.
Actions
Multiattack. The quadrone makes two fist attacks
or four shortbow attacks.
Fist. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
target. Hit: 3 (1d4 + 1) bludgeoning damage.
Shortbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, range
80/320 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing
damage.

CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:

34 APPENDIX
Scout Actions
Medium humanoid (human), lawful neutral Multiattack. The tridrone makes three fist attacks
Armor Class 13 (leather armor) or three javelin attacks.
Hit Points 16 (3d8 + 3) Fist. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
Speed 30 ft. target. Hit: 3 (1d4 + 1) bludgeoning damage.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Javelin. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit,
11 (+0) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 11 (+0) 13 (+1) 11 (+0) reach 5 ft. or range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d6
+ 1) piercing damage.
Skills Nature +4, Perception +5, Stealth +6, Survival
+5
Senses passive Perception 15 Veteran
Languages Common Medium humanoid (human), lawful neutral
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP) Armor Class 17 (splint)
Keen Hearing and Sight. The scout has advantage Hit Points 58 (9d8 + 18)
on Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on hearing Speed 30 ft.
and sight. STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
16 (+3) 13 (+1) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 10 (+0)
Actions
Multiattack. The scout makes two melee attacks or Skills Athletics +5, Perception +2
two ranged attacks. Senses passive Perception 12
Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 Languages Common
ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing damage. Challenge 3 (700 XP)
Longbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, ranged
150/600 ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d8 + 2) piercing Actions
damage. Multiattack. The veteran makes two longsword
attacks. If it has a shortsword drawn, It can also
make a shortsword attack.
Tridrone Longsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5
Medium construct, lawful neutral ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d8 + 3) slashing damage, or 8
Armor Class 15 (natural armor) (1d10 + 3) slashing damage if used with two hands.
Hit Points 16 (3d8 + 3) Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5
Speed 30 ft. ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) piercing damage.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Heavy Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to
12 (+1) 13 (+1) 12 (+1) 9 (-1) 10 (+0) 9 (-1) hit, ranged 100/400 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d10)
piercing damage.
Senses truesight 120 ft., passive Perception 10
Languages Modron
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
Axiomatic Mind. The tridrone can’t be compelled
to act in a manner contrary to its nature or its
instructions.
Disintegration. If the tridrone dies, its body
disintegrates into dust, leaving behind its weapons
and anything else it was carrying.

CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:

35 APPENDIX
 Appendix II: Modron Camp

CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:

36 APPENDIX II
Appendix III: HQ Map

CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:

37 APPENDIX III
 Appendix IV: Mechanus

CORE 1-2 / A COG IN THE WHEEL:

38 APPENDIX IV
 A Hole in the World
Threats from outside Melvaunt and within push heroes to the brink as a terrified populace
counts on the bravery of a few heroes to avert total disaster. Part Three of The Chaos in
Melvaunt.

A four-hour adventure for 1st-4th level characters

Christopher Sniezak
Adventure Designer
Adventure Code: CORE 1-3

Producer: Baldman Games

Core Administrator: Shawn Merwin
Development, Editing, and Layout: Encoded Designs
Cartography: Andrew Smith
Organized Play: Chris Lindsay
D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall, Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks, Alan
Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League, all other Wizards
of the Coast product names, and their respective logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive likenesses are property of Wizards of the
Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America. Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the
express written permission of Wizards of the Coast.

©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31, 2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4 The Square,
Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK.
Introduction
Welcome to A Hole in the World, a D&D Adventurers
League adventure, Part Three of The Chaos in
Melvaunt Trilogy.
This adventure is designed for three to seven 1st-
4 level characters, and is optimized for five 3rd-
th
level characters.
The adventure is set in the Moonsea region of the
Forgotten Realms, in the city of Melvaunt.
The D&D Adventurers League
This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of the
D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure,
players track their characters’ experience, treasure,
and other rewards, and can take those characters
through other adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a store
event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a DCI
number. This number is your official Wizards of the
Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have a
number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to use
to create and advance their characters. Players can
continue to play their characters after the storyline
season has finished, possibly participating in a
second or third storyline with those same characters.
A character’s level is the only limitation for
adventure play. A player cannot use a character of a
level higher or lower than the level range of a D&D
Adventurers League adventure.
For more information on playing, running games
as a Dungeon Master, and organizing games for the
D&D Adventurers League, please visit the D&D
Adventurers League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Preparing the Adventure
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
 Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
 Read through the adventure, taking notes of
anything you’d like to highlight or remind yourself
while running the adventure, such as a way you’d
like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d like to use
in a combat.
 Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
 Gather together any resources you’d like to use to
aid you in running this adventure--such as
notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and
battlemaps.
 If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.
Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
 Character name and level
 Character race and class
 Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most common
passive ability check
 Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, etc.)
Players that have characters outside the adventure’s
level range cannot participate in the adventure
with those characters. Players with ineligible
characters can make a new 1st-level character or use
a pregenerated character. Players can play an
adventure they previously played or ran as a
Dungeon Master, but not with the same character.
Ensure that each player has an official adventure
logsheet for his or her character (if not, get one from
the organizer). The player fills out the adventure
name, session number, date, and your name and DCI
number. In addition, the player also fills in the
starting values for experience, gold, downtime,
renown, and number of permanent magic items. He
or she fill in the other values and write notes at the
conclusion of the session. Each player is responsible
for maintaining an accurate logsheet.
If you have time, you can do a quick scan of a
player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing looks
out of order. If you see magic items of very high
rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you can
ask players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict item
use or ask them to use a standard ability score array.
Point players to the D&D Adventurers League Player’s
Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and it’s
the beginning of an adventure or episode, they can
CORE 1-3 A Hole in the World 2
declare their activity and spend the days now.
Alternatively, they can do so at the end of the Running the Adventure
adventure or episode. Players should select their As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
characters’ spells and other daily options prior to most important role in facilitating the enjoyment of
the start of the adventure, unless the adventure the game for the players. You help guide the
specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread the narrative and bring the words on these pages to life.
adventure description to help give players hints The outcome of a fun game session often creates
about what they might face. stories that live well beyond the play at the table.
Always follow this golden rule when you DM for a
group:
Adjusting the Adventure Make decisions and adjudications that enhance
Throughout this adventure, you may see sidebars to the fun of the adventure when possible.
help make adjustments for smaller/larger groups, To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
and characters of higher/lower levels than the following:
optimized group. Most of the time, this is used for
 You are empowered to make adjustments to the
combat encounters.
adventure and make decisions about how the
You may adjust the adventure beyond the
group interacts with the world of this adventure.
guidelines given. For example, if you’re playing with
Doing so is especially important and applicable
a group of inexperienced players, you might want to
outside of combat, but feel free to adjust the
make the adventure a little easier; for very
adventure for groups that are having too easy or
experienced players, you may want to make it a little
too hard of a time.
harder. Therefore, five categories of party strength
have been created for you to use as a guide. Feel free  Don’t make the adventure too easy or too difficult
to use a different adjustment during the adventure if for a group. Never being challenged makes for a
the recommended party strength feels off for the boring game and being overwhelmed makes for a
group. frustrating one. Gauge the experience of the
This adventure is optimized for a party of five players (not the characters) with the game, try to
3rd-level characters. To figure out whether you feel out (or ask) what they like in a game, and
need to adjust the adventure, do the following: attempt to give each of them the experience
they’re after when they play D&D. Give everyone a
 Add up the total levels of all the characters chance to shine.
 Divide the total by the number of characters  Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game session
 Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round moving along appropriately. Watch for stalling,
fractions of less than .5 down since play loses momentum when this happens. At
the same time, make sure that the players don’t
You’ve now determined the average party level finish too early; provide them with a full play
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party experience. Try to be aware of running long or
strength for the adventure, consult the following short. Adjust the pacing accordingly
table:  Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free to
modify the text as you see fit, especially when
Determining Party Strength dialogue is present.
Party Composition Party Strength  Give the players appropriate hints so they can
3-4 characters, APL less than Very Weak make informed choices about how to proceed.
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak Players should be given clues and hints when
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average appropriate so they can tackle puzzles, combat,
5 characters, APL less than Weak and interactions without getting frustrated over
5 characters, APL equivalent Average lack of information. Doing so helps to encourage
5 characters, APL greater than Strong immersion in the adventure and gives players
6-7 characters, APL less than Average “little victories” for figuring out good choices from
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong clues.
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very Strong In short, being the DM isn’t about following the
adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about
facilitating a fun, challenging game environment for

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 3
the players. The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has more Divination 210 gp
information on the art of running a D&D game. Greater restoration 450 gp
Raise dead 1,250 gp
Downtime and Lifestyle
At the beginning of each play session, players must
Acolyte Background
declare whether or not they are spending any days A character possessing the acolyte background requesting
of downtime. The player records the downtime spellcasting services at a temple of his or her faith may
spent on the adventure logsheet. The following request one spell per day from the Spellcasting Services table
for free. The only cost paid for the spell is the base price for
options are available to players during downtime
the consumed material component, if any.
(see the D&D basic rules or the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for more information):
Disease, Death, and Recovery
 Catching up
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
 Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might not
commit to crafting a single item)
have the same characters return from session to
 Practicing a profession session, here are the rules when bad things happen
 Recuperating to characters.
 Spellcasting services
 Training Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating
Other downtime options might be available during Effects
adventures or unlocked through play, including A character still affected by diseases, poisons, and
faction-specific activities. other similar effects at the conclusion of an
In addition, whenever a character spends adventure can spend downtime days recuperating
downtime days, that character also spends the until such time as he or she resolves the effect to its
requisite expense for his or her lifestyle. Costs are conclusion (see the recuperating activity in the D&D
per day, so a character that spends ten days of Basic Rules).
downtime also spends ten days of expenses If a character doesn’t resolve the effect between
maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some downtime sessions, that character begins the next session still
activities help with lifestyle expenses or add lifestyle affected by the debilitating effect.
expenses.
Death
Spellcasting Services A character who is killed during the course of the
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can adventure has a few options at the end of the session
provide some spellcasting services. Characters need (or whenever arriving back in civilization) if no one
to be able to travel to the settlement to obtain these in the adventuring party has immediate access to a
services. raise dead or revivify spell, or similar magic. A
Spell services generally available include healing character subject to a raise dead spell is affected
and recovery spells, as well as information-gathering negatively until all long rests have been completed
spells. Other spell services might be available as during an adventure. Alternatively, each downtime
specified in the adventure. The number of spells day spent after raise dead reduces the penalty to
available to be cast as a service is limited to a attack rolls, saving throws, and ability checks by 1, in
maximum of three per day total, unless otherwise addition to any other benefits the downtime activity
noted. might provide.
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
Spellcasting Services character is unwilling or unable to exercise any of
Spell Cost the other options, the player creates a new character.
Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp The new character does not have any items or
Identify 20 gp rewards possessed by the dead character.
Lesser restoration 40 gp Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing any
Remove curse 90 gp vital organs and is mostly whole) and the player
Speak with dead 90 gp would like the character to be returned to life, the
party can take the body back to civilization and use

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 4
the dead character’s funds to pay for a raise dead
spell. A raise dead spell cast in this manner costs the
character 1,250 gp.
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As above,
except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for the raise
dead spell is paid for by the party at the end of the
session. Other characters are under no obligation to
spend their funds to bring back a dead party
member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to 4
and a member of a faction, the dead character’s body
can be returned to civilization and a patron from the
faction ensures that he or she receives a raise dead
spell. However, any character invoking this charity
forfeits all experience and rewards from that session
(both those earned prior to and after death during
that session) and cannot replay that episode or
adventure with that character again. Once a
character reaches 5th level, this option is no longer
available.
Adventure Background
Davol Port, one of the Merchant Lords of Melvaunt,
has made a deal with Zarhaug, the Orc Baron of Thar.
The deal is simple but terrible: Davol will facilitate
the orc army’s entrance into Melvaunt so Zarhaug’s
forces can sack the city. In exchange, Baron Zarhaug
has assisted Davol’s workers in securing several
mining deposits in the West Galena Mountains, while
destroying any competition in the area.
Meanwhile, a modron army in Mechanus is
gearing up to emerge through a portal in Melvaunt
to attack the city. To make matters worse, any
attempts to eliminate the portal are met with
resistance by Thomas Druat, another of the
Merchant Lords. He wishes to use the portal to open
trade with far-away lands.
Melvaunt is caught between a rock and a hard
place, but a group of adventurers who’ve found
themselves caught up in something larger than they
expected – and a Red Wizard interested in studying
portals and the planes – might be the last hope for a
city under siege from without and within.
Adventure Overview
The adventurers attend a meeting of the Merchant
Lords of Melvaunt. If they played either of the
previous adventures in the series (CORE1-1 A
Scream in the Night or CORE1-2 A Cog in the Wheel)
they have been invited by Captain Eledstra of
Melvaunt. If not, they are invited by friends or
faction allies to attend the meeting.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
After relating their story (or hearing the story
from others), the adventurers watch as the Merchant
Lords decide the walls will hold the against the orcs,
making the portal the priority problem. The Council
decides to consult a Red Wizard currently residing in
Melvaunt, who may be able to assist with the
problem posed by the portal.
Once the meeting is over, Captain Eledstra asks
the adventurers to look some orcs who have been
seen around the city. Davol Port, one of the Merchant
Lords of Melvaunt, pulls the adventurers aside and
asks them to instead look into the Red Wizard whom
the council is planning to consult, believing the
controversial Red Wizards might not have the best
interests of Melvaunt at heart.
From there the adventurers either look into the
orcs or the Red Wizard. Their choice has
consequences as the problems in the city escalate. A
timer ticks down as the orc army approaches and
the portal slowly widens. Stopping the orcs first
means dealing with the modrons later, while dealing
with the portal first means dealing with more orcs
later.
The final encounter involves a battle in the streets
of Melvaunt for the city. Maybe the orcs sack
Melvaunt? Maybe the modrons gain a foothold in the
city? Maybe those clever adventurers will figure out
how to get the modrons and orcs to fight each other
and save the people from a terrible fate? This
determines the city’s immediate future.
Adventure Hooks
If any of the adventurers have played CORE1-2 A Cog
in the Wheel, they know what is happening in
Mechanus and have already reported to Captain
Eledstra, who invites them to a meeting of the
Merchant Lords of Melvaunt to report their findings.
If none of the adventurers have played the
previous adventure, read:
You have an adventurer friend who sent you a message
asking you to meet her at the Blank Board Inn. You arrived
there and let the innkeeper know who you were looking for.
He hands you a message:
“Sorry I couldn’t be there to meet you in person. Things
are about to go a little crazy in Melvaunt. I know people who
know people, and they are telling me that multiple threats
are bearing down on the city. There is a meeting of the
Merchant Lords this morning. Make sure you attend, because
there will certainly be work there.”
CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 5
Alternatively, you could ask a player the following
questions before reading the passage:
 You have a friend in Melvaunt. What’s their name?
 You owe them a favor for saving your life. What
did they save you from?
Part 1 – A Meeting of Lords
Purpose. This meeting allows the characters to
relate what they learned about the modrons’ plans
to the Council of Lords, hear what the Lords’ plans
are, learn about the approaching orc army, get the
request from Captain Eledstra about the orc sappers,
and hear the other request from Merchant Lord
Davol Port about the Red Wizard.
When this encounter is over, the adventurers
should know their options.
The Meeting of Lords
Read or paraphrase the following:
The hall of the Council of Lords is filled with decorative
polished wooden chairs and long semicircular tables on
several levels, creating an amphitheater centering on the
seat of the Lord of Keys. Many of the seats are filled with
well-dressed merchants of the city. Some you’ve seen, while
others you know by reputation only. All are wealthy to one
degree or another.
Captain Eledstra is there and beckons you to her side.
“Thank you for being here. Once we get things going, I’ll need
you to tell the council what you learned. You can sit here
until then.”
The meeting begins with the Lord of Keys, Trethon Bruil,
entering the room and standing at his chair, illuminated by
the morning light streaming in through the windows. “We’re
going to dispense with normal proceedings because we have
several pressing problems to deal with.”
The Lords murmur at this, uncomfortable with the break in
protocol. The Lord of Keys continues. “We have an orc army
approaching.” There are more murmurs and some grumbling.
“We also have another problem. A portal to another plane of
existence is inside Melvaunt’s walls, and it also is a threat. I’m
told these adventurers have been to the other side of the
portal and back again. Would you please care to let us know
what dangers threaten us from within our walls?
The Lord of Keys gives the floor to the adventurers
so they can tell the council what they found. Use the
Lord of Keys, Davol Port, or Thomas Druat to ask
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
questions that help fill in any gaps in the story they
miss.
If none of the adventurers at your table played the
previous adventure, another adventurer steps forth
to provide the details.
The meeting continues after this and the following
points are made and agreed upon:
 An advance guard of the orc army will be at
Melvaunt just after sundown.
 The orcs won’t be able to break through the walls
as long as Melvaunt’s forces are waiting for them.
 The portal is the more serious problem at the
moment.
 There is a Red Wizard in Melvaunt who is said to
be knowledgeable in planar matters, and she
might be able to assist in gauging the portal’s
threat.
 The council decides to approach the Red Wizard
for help, and Council member Thomas Druat will
take the lead on gaining the Red Wizard’s
assistance.
The Lord of Keys then adjourns the meeting and the
Lords disperse.
Where are S133P13 and Truushee the Sage?
In the previous adventure, the characters may have made the
acquaintance of a malfunctioning quadrone called S133P13
and a half-orc sage called Truushee. Both of them are still in
Melvaunt. Captain Eledstra thought that bringing a modron
and a half-orc to a meeting discussing threats posed by
modrons and orcs might be counterproductive. They are
being kept in a safe location for the time being.
The Captain’s Request
Captain Eledstra pulls the adventurers aside and
asks them if they can help with a problem that she
doesn’t want to make public.
Last night a group of orcs were found within the
city walls, trying to sabotage one of the walls with a
magical scroll. Although the orcs were killed, it
appears they were waiting for a signal to destroy the
wall. That signal would probably be the arrival of the
orc advance guard.
Captain Eledstra strongly believes that more orcs
are hiding within the city, waiting to sabotage the
wall from the inside. Superintendent Lahn Joden of
the City Watch believes that the threat has been
averted and instead has his forces doing other tasks.
Eledstra asks the adventurers to search for more
orcs in the city. Their first step is to find Lieutenant
Drake Liston, one of the watch members stationed at
CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 6
the North Gate guard post. He’s running down leads
and can provide the adventurers with more
information. Eledstra cannot pay the adventurers
now, but if the lead turns out to be true, she can pay
them a reward later. She cannot commit to an
amount.
Roleplaying Captain Eledstra
LeCampe Eledstra is a human of late middle age. She’s a
decent woman who takes her job of protecting Melvaunt’s
ordinary citizens seriously. Eledstra is tall, thin, and lanky
with a shock of unruly white hair through which she runs her
fingers constantly whenever she’s trying to think. She is very
bad at playing political games, which is why she only just got
promoted to Captain despite her many years of service in the
City Watch. She knows this promotion means that she will be
the scapegoat if things go terribly wrong.
Quote: “Between the politicians and the external threats, I
have no idea how Melvaunt is still standing.”
Davol Port’s Request
After the adventurers are done talking with Captain
Eledstra, Davol Port asks if he may speak with them
for a moment. Davol asks if the adventurers would
look into the Red Wizard who is being asked to help
with the portal. He doesn’t believe any Red Wizard
has the best interests of the city of Melvaunt in mind,
and he will pay the adventurers 200 gp right now to
discover if the Red Wizard has any nefarious plans.
Roleplaying the Davol Port
Davol is a fit man, stout, well-groomed and finely clothed,
with a deep voice. He’s warm and yet forward about what he
wants or would like people to do for him. He doesn’t mince
words but is a businessman first, treating most things in life
as a transaction: payment for service and service for
payment.
Conclusion
When this encounter is over, the adventurers should
know the following:
 It’s still morning.
 There’s an orc army on its way, and it will be here
soon.
 They have been requested to deal with orc
sappers in the city.
 They have been requested to discover if the Red
Wizard has any ill intentions for the city of
Melvaunt.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Choices
The choices the adventurers make here influence
how things play out in the final confrontations. Also
the countdown clock begins, putting pressure on the
adventurers to act quickly and decisively.
Paths
There are two paths the adventurers can take during
this part of the adventure. They can hunt down the
orc sappers or they can look into the Red Wizard and
the portal. They can even jump back and forth
between the two paths, but if they do they’ll
probably not have enough time to handle everything
before the orc army arrives and the modrons attack
through the portal.
The Timer
There is a map at the back of this adventure that has
several circular spaces on it, depicting a path leading
to the city of Melvaunt. Please put this on the table
now and put a marker in the farthest outlying circle.
That is the orc army tracker.
From now on, at the end of every encounter, move
the orc army one step closer to the city. Reminders
are within the encounters, but if an encounter comes
up that is unexpected and you have to improvise,
then at the end of that encounter move the orc army
one step closer to the city
If the adventurers want to take a short rest, move
the orc army one step closer to the city. As events
unfold and the characters foil the plans of even the
most experienced adventure designer and DM, feel
free to adjust the counter as needed to make the
adventure both fun and tense for the players.
When the orc army reaches the city, it’s time to
move to Part 4: Battle in Melvaunt.
Advice
There are a lot of ways for this adventure to play out.
While it can be a straight run, some groups might get
clever and start splitting their resources. Here are
some things you should do so they understand the
stakes at hand.
Tell them this is a timed scenario when you place
the map timer on the table, and explain how the
timer works. Tell them when the marker gets to the
city of Melvaunt an event triggers. Just don’t tell
them what the event is.
If the adventurers want to split the party, tell them
that’s their choice. The marker only moves after both
of the split groups finish an encounter, but any
opposition they run into isn’t going to be easier just
CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 7
because there are fewer of them. This is a situation
with few correct choices, and they’re just trying to
make the best of a tough spot.
If they split the party, cut back and forth with each
group, spending a few minutes with one group then
switching over to the other and spending a few
minutes. It is difficult even for an experienced DM to
run a split group effectively, so do your best.
If the party is split and one group gets into an
encounter that needs initiative, run through their
initiative and then spend some time with the other
group before moving back to the group in initiative.
Of course you should use your best judgement and
do whatever you feel is best for the table, but keep
the pace in mind and keep an eye on the players and
their engagement.
If they split up, do not go easy on them. They made
that choice and should deal with the consequences
of that action.
Part 2 – The Orcs
1. The North Gate
Purpose: To let the adventurers know how much
trouble the city is in and point them toward another
orc group in the city.
The Conflict: The encounter is about controlling the
fires, saving Drake Liston, and saving the armory,
which can affect Part 4.
You arrive at the North Gate and find people, wagons, and
goods flowing back and forth through the gate, which is
flanked by two 40-foot-tall towers. The walls are 30 feet tall.
It seems like nothing could breach those massive walls.
A number of guards of the City Watch patrol the area and
occupy the towers. Others check people and goods entering
the city.
Before you can start your inquiries, an explosion nearly
knocks you off your feet. Part of a two-story building near the
north wall is now aflame, and the side of the building is gone.
It is on fire, and the first begins spreading to other areas.
When this happens, everyone freezes for a second,
looking at the explosion, and then the panic sets in.
People run and scream, hurting each other to get
away from what is now clearly buildings in flames
and a significant breach in the wall.
While people panic, one of the soldiers looks at the
destruction, yells “Drake,” and runs in that direction.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
The Situation
There is a building on fire, and the fire is spreading
to surrounding buildings. The people in the streets
panic. The person the adventurers were supposed to
meet was in the building that exploded, and one of
the buildings that the fire is spreading toward is a
city militia armory that houses equipment the militia
needs in order to field an effective army.
The Burning Building
The building that exploded is still on fire. On the
second floor, which is exposed because the walls
have been blown out, the adventurers see a charred
human soldier fighting an equally burnt orc. The
human matches the description of Drake Liston.
Rules for the Fire
At the end of every round of initiative, the fire can
spread to surrounding buildings and will make the
armory fire worse if not dealt with.
Every adventurer gets to act once in a round, in
any order. If players have trouble keeping track of
actions, just go into initiative.
If the characters can control the fire (see below),
there is a chance they can save the gear in the
armory. If no one controls the fire after a round, add
one to the inferno track on the armory.
To control the fire, ask the adventurers what they
wish to do, or give them the following options:
 Hit some part of the building with a cold or water
spell. If it’s an attack spell, AC 12 is the target. The
fire makes saving throws at +0.
 Find a spot where a part of the building can be
collapsed by attacking a support with a melee
weapon attack or some kind of force magic, thus
keeping the fire contained instead of spilling
outward. A DC 12 Wisdom (Perception) or
Intelligence (Investigation) check can find the
perfect spot. If it’s a melee weapon attack to do the
damage, the adventurer must make a DC 12
Dexterity saving throw to avoid 7 (2d6) fire
damage from the fiery rubble falling on them.
 Any other action that seems like it would help uses
DC 12 as a base, or AC 12 if an attack roll would be
required.
Helping Drake
Drake is caught in a fight with an orc on the 2nd floor
of the exploded building. It collapses at the end of
the third round and kills him if the adventurers can’t
help.
CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 8
 The orc is injured and has only 5 hp remaining.
The orc’s AC is 16 because of the smoke, and the
adventurers begin 120 feet away. Once the orc is
dead, Drake can attempt to escape. However, the 20-
foot jump from the building would kill him.
The adventurers must find a way to help him. A
variety of methods could save him: pull a wagon of
hay next to the building, spreading out a blanket to
catch him, etc. Any other idea or clever use of a
resource the adventurers come up with should be
entertained. Unless the plan is foolproof, use a DC of
12 as a base, and assign advantage or disadvantage
as you see fit.
The Armory
Burning pieces of the building that exploded are on
the armory’s roof, which is ablaze. Soldiers try to get
supplies out of the building before it collapses. The
adventurers can help contain the fire or help get the
weapons out.
Goal: If 10 units of gear get out of the armory before
the armory collapses, they are successful.
Rules for the Armory Collapsing
 The armory collapses when it has 5 inferno
counters on it.
 The armory starts with 2 inferno counters on it.
 The armory gains an inferno counter at the end of
every round.
 The armory can also gain an inferno counter from
the burning building at the end of every round.
Rules for Keeping the Fire Under Control
To control the fire, ask the adventurers what they
wish to do or give them the following options:
 Hit some part of the building with a cold or water
spell. If it’s an attack spell, AC 12 is the base. The
fire makes saving throws at +0.
 Any other action that seems like it would help uses
DC 12 as a base.
Rules for Getting the Armory Gear Out
 At the end of every round roll a d20. On a 10+, two
units of gear are brought out by the soldiers. On 9-,
only 1 unit of gear is brought out.
 If an adventurer helps, they can bring a unit of
gear out but must make a DC 10 Dexterity saving
throw or take 7 (2d6) points fire damage.
 Bringing out 10 units of gear provides this part of
the militia enough gear to arm themselves for the
coming conflict.
Advice
This is a complex encounter, so here’s the
breakdown of what the adventurers can or should
be doing:
 Helping Drake
 Managing the Building Fire
 Managing the Armory Fire
 Bringing out Gear from the Armory.
When tracking what is going on, make sure these
things happen in order every round:
 Make sure every adventurer gets to take an action.
 Put inferno counters on the armory.
 Check to see if it’s the 3rd round to see if Drake
dies from the collapsing building.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this encounter.
These are not cumulative.
Very weak party: The armory collapses when it has 6
inferno tokens and it starts with 1 inferno token on it. Halve
the damage done to the adventurers.
Weak party: The armory collapses when it has 6 inferno
tokens on it. 
Strong party: Add an inferno token to the armory to start.
Double all damage done to the adventurers
Very strong party: As Strong Party, and the floor Drake is
on collapses after 2 rounds instead of 3.
Concluding the Encounter
Once the fates of the armory and Drake Liston are
decided, go through the following checklist:
 If the adventurers save the armory, note that the
armory was saved on the tracking sheet in the
Notes section.
 If Drake was saved, write that in the Notes section.
 Move the orc army token on the track.
Roleplaying Drake Liston
Drake is fairly young to be a Lieutenant in the City Watch.
He’s brash but not over-confident, athletic but short in
stature. He’s boyish and tends to wear a grin, even if he’s just
been almost killed. Drake has an adventurer’s soul but he
loves the city of Melvaunt, the city that raised him and that
he now protects as best he can.
Roleplaying Tara Sorkin
Tara is close to Drake, having grown up with him, so if Drake
is dead she’s not happy - but it’s anger more than sadness
that drives her at the moment.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 9
 She’s a tough young woman with a little muscle on her, a
good head on her shoulders, and a drive to keep people safe.
She’s a little more level headed and risk averse than Drake,
but she has a good heart and a deep care for the people of
Melvaunt.
After the encounter one of the soldiers, Tara Sorkin,
(or Drake Liston if he’s still alive) comes to the
adventurers to thank them for their assistance,
regardless of success or failure. They know the
adventurers are working with Captain Eledstra.
Once the adventurers explain themselves, Drake
or Tara can let them know they’ve caught one of the
orcs trying to escape. They’re talking to the orc right
now. This leads to Encounter 2 – Discovering The
Plan.
If the adventurers want to know what happened,
Drake or Tara can explain on the way. As best they
can tell, a group of orcs placed magical scrolls on the
walls inside of the building. When Drake spotted
them and entered the building, one of the orcs set off
the scrolls prematurely, killing most of the orcs and
a number of soldiers.
2. Discovering the Plan
Purpose: To let the adventurers know where the orc
leader of this sapper force is.
Conflict: There’s a chance they take very little time
learning the information, so the orc army track
doesn’t move up.
The Situation
There is one orc captive. The orc is going to give up
the information – it’s just a matter of how long it
takes. If Drake Liston is still alive, substitute him for
Tara Sorkin. Read or paraphrase the following:
Tara Sorkin has brought you to the guard tower, where the
City Watch has secured the orc prisoner to a chair.
“We need to know where their leader is so we can find out
if more orc sappers are planning to bring down the city wall.
We don’t have anyone who’s skilled at extracting information
present. I think I can get the orc to talk eventually, but I was
hoping one of you might be better suited to doing the task
quickly.”
Getting Information
The adventurers can use Charisma (Intimidation or
Persuasion) at DC 13. If they pass they get the
information quickly. If they fail, it takes a while and
the orc army tracker advances by one at the end of
the encounter. Also, the first time the adventurers
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
get information from the orc, he lies and gives them
a false location. This can be discerned with a DC 12
Wisdom (Insight) check. If the adventurers fall for
his lie, advance the orc army tracker by one.
However, this tracker should only be advanced one
space at the end of this encounter, not twice, even if
the adventurers fail at both checks.
If the orc, Tundrok, was saved from the collapsing
second floor of the burning building, then that’s the
orc who is captured, and he’s willing to tell the
adventurers everything to pay them back for saving
him: no check required. This is the same as passing
the check.
What is Discovered?
Tundrok tells the adventurers their war chief on this
mission is Seeth Vainscore, and the general
description he gives is enough for Tara Sorkin to
piece together that Seeth is in a building near the
wall in the northwest portion of the city.
Tara tells the adventurers she’ll round up some
militia members to go there, but it’ll take some time
with what’s happened here. She asks the
adventurers if they can get there as soon as possible.
She promises to be there as quickly as she can with
reinforcements.
Advice
If you have time and want to play this section out as
an actual interrogation, you can. You can also easily
draw a veil over that part of play by just letting the
adventurers tell you if they got the information by
being kind and making a deal with the orc, or by less
enjoyable methods and having them make the check.
The important part is how long it takes them to get
the information. If it is done within the first couple of
skill checks, do not advance the orc army tracker. If
it takes more than two, advance it one.
3. Seeth Vainscore
Purpose: To learn where the rest of the orc sapper
groups are.
Conflict: A fight with Seeth Vainscore and his
minions, to see if they get the plans from him or not.
Also to see if they learn of Davol’s involvement with
the orcs.
The Situation
Seeth and his 7 orcs are in the building, and they
have it rigged to explode. Seeth also has the plans for
where several other groups of orcs in the city are
planning to blow up the walls.
CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 10
 The building is two stories tall, and the side closest
to the city wall has a half-dozen magical scrolls
plastered on it. Seeth is on the second floor, and his
minions are spread out within the building.
Use the map in Appendix II to describe or draw
the building for the players. If the adventurers
survey the building, they can learn a little, or a lot,
depending on their rolls. A DC 12 Wisdom
(Perception) or Intelligence (Investigation) check
reveals the location of 3 of the normal orcs, but not
Seeth or the others. A DC 16 check reveals the
location of Seeth and all the orcs.
If they make more than one attempt to case out
the building, advance the orc army tracker one space.
On the Lookout
While the adventurers might be watching the
building, the orcs are watching back. Unless the
adventurers use stealth or some sort of trickery
when casing or approaching the building, the orcs
are ready and waiting for the adventurers.
The Fight
Once the adventurers enter the house, which can
happen through any of the windows or doors on the
map, the battle begins.
At the end of Seeth’s third turn, he sets off the
magical scrolls in the building, described below.
General Features
The building has the following features:
Doors. They are locked but only require a DC 8
Strength (Athletics) check to break open or DC 8
Dexterity (Thieves’ Tools) check to pick the locks.
The Windows. An adventurer breaking through a
window makes a DC 12 Dexterity saving throw or
they take 1d4 slashing damage from the broken
glass.
Tactics
As the battle progresses, the orcs realize what’s
going on and move from hiding to fighting to fleeing,
since they know Seeth plans to set off the scrolls. If
Seeth is dead, the orcs surrender if half their group
or more is defeated. They’re not cowards, but they
don’t want to die. Seeth, on the other hand, happily
blows himself up.
For Seeth to set off the runes, he simply needs to
touch the activation rune and speak the command
word (“ignite” in Orcish) as an action. The activation
rune is on a scroll Seeth holds. The activation rune
must be within 100 ft. of the other runes (spread
around the house) to work.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
If the Building Explodes
If Seeth sets off the runes, anyone within 15 feet of
the north wall of the building must make a DC 18
Dexterity saving throw. Those who fail take 22
(4d10) force damage, with half damage on a success.
Anyone who is in the building or near it must instead
make a DC 12 Dexterity saving throw or take 14
(4d6) force damage, with half damage on a success.
In the aftermath of the building exploding, the
adventurers can manage to find the maps of the
locations of the other orc sapper groups in the
debris. It just takes longer to find them and piece
together their locations.
Move the Orc army marker one space on the track
if the building does not explode, and two spaces if it
does.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this combat
encounter. These are not cumulative.
Very weak party: Replace Seeth with an orc, and remove 4
orcs. Quarter the damage done by the explosion.
Weak party: Remove 4 orcs. Halve the damage done by the
explosion.
Strong party: Replace Seeth with an orc war chief.
Very strong party: As Strong Party, and add 3 orcs to the
group.
Treasure
Seeth has maps and papers on a table in the second-
floor room where he’s stationed. The maps show the
location of every orc group in the city. These maps
and papers have elegant writing on them, and a
couple of notes in the papers indicate that they came
from people connected to Davol Port.
If the adventurers succeed in this part, they are
given 200 gp by Captain Eledstra at the end of the
adventure.
Concluding the Scene
The first thing you need to do when concluding the
scene is move the orc army tracker along the track,
as indicated earlier.
Once the fight with the orcs is over, Tara or Drake
shows up with reinforcements. Once the information
is found about where the orc sappers are in the city,
the watch can move with their people to stop the
orcs from blowing up the wall any further.
If the adventurers have the information about
Davol Port, they can inform someone, but it’s not
information that will help with this adventure.
If the orc army tracker is at position 5, move
immediately to Part 4. If not, calculate where the
CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 11
progress would be in Part 3 and allow the
adventurers to move there.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 12
Part 3 – The Portal
1. Spying on a Red Wizard
Purpose: Let the adventurers know the Red Wizard
isn’t actually evil, and is rather interested and skilled
when it comes to dealing with portals and
extraplanar travel.
Also, let the adventurers know the portal is
widening, which means the threat of the modron
invasion is imminent.
Conflict: Are they caught or noticed while spying on
the Red Wizard, and how much time does it take to
learn the information?
The Situation
Leona Krystal is a Red Wizard. Her superiors sent
her to the Moonsea area to act as a representative
and ambassador for their group, reporting back her
findings about opportunities for expansion in the
area, to keep an eye on the activities of the factions,
etc.
Leona is in Melvaunt specifically because she
divined there would be interesting planar activity
within the city. She is fascinated by portals to other
planes of existence.
She recently rented a two-story house in the
neighborhood where the portal currently sits. Her
work and experiments are on the first floor of the
building, and her living quarters are on the second.
She has an assistant named Cort and a blink dog
guardian called Jaymes.
You shouldn’t need them, but if you do, use mage
stats for Leona, noble stats for Thomas Druat, and
knight stats for Druat’s guard.
Roleplaying Leona, Cort, and Jaymes
Leona is brilliant when it comes to portals and loves to talk
endlessly about portals and the planes of existence. She’s
also very protective of her companions. She’s a human,
wears glasses and carries herself as if she’s older than her 27
years.
Cort is tall, lanky, thin, and Leona’s assistant. He helps with
some of the very fine crafting work because of his thin and
dexterous hands. He speaks well but quietly and takes his
cues from Leona.
Jaymes is a blink dog, very smart, and likes to sleep by
warm fires. He would do anything for Leona. Leona seems to
be able to understand him, and Jaymes understands
everything and everyone.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Development
Leona is having a meeting with Thomas Druat
concerning the portal when the orc army marker is
in the spot numbered 1.
While the meeting is going on, Jaymes and Cort
remain in the kitchenette and sitting room, making it
much easier for the adventurers to sneak around
and hunt for information. If the orc army marker is
anywhere other than on number 1, the meeting has
already happened. If the marker is on number 2,
Leona and her companions are moving about the
house, making it difficult to sneak in. At number 3
and beyond, Leona has left to investigate the portal.
If the adventurers were not present to save her, she
died at the hands of the modron assassination unit.
Finding Information
This is about getting information.
Speaking with Leona. If the players want to speak
with Leona while the orc army marker is in the first
space, they’re told by Cort she’s busy until later.
They can come back then or schedule an
appointment. If the orc army marker is not in the
first space, she’s happy to speak with the
adventurers.
Breaking In. Breaking into the house is about
being quiet and searching without getting caught.
The windows have silent alarm spells on them, and
all have curtains pulled over them on the 1st floor.
The 2nd floor has many of the curtains open, but the
back door doesn’t. A DC 12 Intelligence (Arcana)
check or any kind of detecting of magic reveals the
spells on the windows. The door is locked and
requires a DC 12 Dexterity (Thieves’ Tools) check to
pick the lock. Jaymes the blink dog is napping in the
house by the back door. Failure means Jaymes wakes
but doesn’t alert the adventurers to the fact he’s
awake. He pretends to sleep to observe the fools
who are breaking into his home.
Other Ideas. If the adventurers come up with any
other ideas for quietly breaking into the house, use
DC 12 as a base. The consequence for failure is that
someone in the house, either Cort, Jaymes, or Leona,
is alerted to their presence.
The House
The first floor is comprised of two rooms, with some
of the interior walls having been knocked out to
make space for the lab.
1st Floor
CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 13
 The Smaller Room. There are a lot of shelves with
material components for spells on them. Jaymes the
blink dog sleeps in the corner of the room.
The Lab. There is a magic circle, several more
shelves with items and books on them, and a long
table with two chairs with papers, books, and notes
all over it.
2nd Floor
Kitchenette and Sitting Room. This space has a
small stove, a cabinet for keeping dry foodstuffs, and
a table for eating.
Bedrooms. The left bedroom is Leona’s and the
right is Cort’s. They have beds and chests for their
clothing and personal goods, and a night stand with
a candle on it. Leona has an adventure novel called
The Planechasers on her night stand.
The Bathroom. There is a bathroom between the
two bedrooms.
Learning About Portals and Wizards
If the adventurers get into the lab, they can spend
time looking over the information and magical
experiments within. Use the bullet points to dole out
information.
Intelligence (Investigation) DC 12
 The notes are all about portals: not just how to
open them, but how to manipulate them once
they’re open.
 There are some specific notes for how to change a
permanent portal that leads to one place to
different place. It’s pretty theoretical stuff.
 There’s nothing nefarious in the lab concerning
Melvaunt at all; in fact, the notes are all very
scientific and well written.
 There is work here that indicates that Leona has
discovered a way to move a permanent portal
from one location to another.
Intelligence (Arcana) DC 12
 The magical formula that are within the notes
shows how the Weave has recently converged on
Melvaunt as a nexus of chaos power.
 The magic invented here is cutting edge, and some
of it is theoretical but looks like it could be used to
manipulate portals.
 There are some rituals being developed here that
look like you can take a permanent portal and
change where it could lead to, but the magic looks
like it’s nowhere near complete.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
 The magic circle on the floor and the notes and
formula related to it are astounding. Using this
magic, someone could theoretically move a
permanent portal.
Taking the Notes
If the adventurers take the notes, someone who is
able to use magic and is highly skilled in Arcana
could use the magic to shrink or possibly move a
portal as a ritual.
Spying on the Meeting
If the adventurers spy on the meeting, they need to
first explain how they plan on doing that. Use DC 12
as a base for Perception and Stealth checks, or any
other plans the adventures might come up with.
What they Hear
Relate the following information if they eavesdrop
successfully:
 Leona expresses that there is a gathering of chaos
energy in the area. It has nothing to do with the
portal directly, but it is disturbing nonetheless.
 The portal within the city is growing, and unless
something is done, it will continue to grow.
 Thomas Druat wants Leona to control the portal
but not close it. He wants to establish trade with
far-away places using the portal. Druat tells her
that he will work hard in the Council to get favors
for her and the Red Wizards if she will consider
his wishes when dealing with the portal.
 Leona agrees that if she is given access to the
portal and has time to study it and use it, she can
probably alter it to allow connections to other
locations in Faerûn, as well as other planes.
 Leona, hearing about the modron army from
Thomas, says she can probably shrink the portal
to the point where only one Modron at a time
could come through, making it easier to defend.
Development
If the adventurers are discovered in the house, or
obviously eavesdropping, things are tense as Cort
has a wand of binding that he’s more than willing to
use (DC 17 Wisdom saving throw) to resist hold
person.
Remind the adventurers that murdering people in
the city is against the law if they decide to start a
fight. It’s why Cort is using the wand of binding. He
also shouts for Leona and Jaymes.
If the adventurers are discovered, and Thomas
Druat and his guard are there, Thomas offers to have
CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 14
them arrested. Leona would rather find out why
they’re there. If the adventurers tell Leona the truth
(or some variation of it) in front of Thomas Druat,
make a note that the adventurers have earned the
Thomas Druat has His Eye on You Story Award on
the notes section of the tracking sheet.
If they lie and fail at a DC 15 Charisma (Deception)
check, Leona lets Thomas arrest them. Captain
Eledstra gets them out of prison, but the orc army
tracker is moved 3 spots on the tracking sheet.
Once Leona and Thomas’ meeting is over, move
the orc army tracker one spot on the track.
If the Adventurers Waited
If the adventurers waited to have the meeting, Leona
tells them about her work and lets them go through
it to prove she’s not interested in hurting Melvaunt.
She is willing to reveal the information that
Thomas Druat gave her and talk about the deal she
made with Thomas, as it doesn’t violate any law
she’s aware of.
After the adventurers have this discussion with
Leona, move the orc army tracker one spot on the
track.
Advice
There are a lot of ways this could go, but it starts
with the choice of the adventurers either breaking
into Leona’s house or waiting to speak with her.
After that you just play out the situation and
remind them that killing people in a city is illegal and
punishable by imprisonment or death.
If in doubt about something the adventurers want
to try, ask them to tell you why they think they can
make that work. If it seems reasonable, set the DC at
12, assign a skill, and have them roll. If it’s
unreasonable, try to find a middle ground or just
make them roll with disadvantage.
The important information you need to get to the
adventurers is as follows:
 The portal is a widening, which is one of the
indicators from the modron plans from CORE1-2
that the modron attack is imminent.
 Leona is neither good nor evil to any great extent.
She’s just a Red Wizard with an interest in portals.
2. Modron Attack
Purpose: To let the adventurers know that Leona is
seen as a threat by the modrons to reinforce that her
skills are important to the portal.
Conflict: Modrons try to kill Leona and everyone
with her.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
The Situation
The modrons and whoever is behind them have
learned about Leona and have sent a hit squad to
take her out. This occurs when the orc army tracker
is on the second spot (or third spot if the
adventurers waited and then talked with Leona).
Leona packs her gear and asks to be taken to the
portal, which the adventurers can do since they are
there. After leaving the house and heading into the
streets, dozens of modrons appear out of nowhere.
They do something that disables Leona and then
they try to kill her.
Cort and Jaymes move to handle one set of
modrons, while the adventurers are forced to deal
with three quadrones and six duodrones.
Tactics
The modrons’ orders are to kill Leona and then any
other living creatures with her. The duodrones
speak as they fight, saying “Kill the Red Wizard” in
mechanical, cold, and calculating voices. One
duodrone draws an opportunity attack so the others
can flow past any of Leona’s protectors that just
used their reaction.
While incapacitated, Leona is out in the open and
cannot move on her own. Her AC is 10, and she has
50 hit points. The modrons the adventurers face
attack her if they can get to her. The quadrones fire
missile at her unless she is provided cover by an
adventurer.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this combat
encounter. These are not cumulative.
Very weak party: Remove two quadrones and three
duodrones.
Weak party: Remove one quadrone and three duodrones.
Strong party: Add one quadrone and three duodrones.
Very strong party: Add two quadrones and three
duodrones.
Development
Once the battle is over and assuming Leona lived,
she is quite grateful to the adventurers for their help.
Make a note that the adventurers who saved her
have earned the Leona’s Gratitude Story Award.
After everyone gather’s themselves post fight and
they have a conversation, advance the orc army
tracker one space on the track.
If Leona Dies
If the modrons kill Leona, they attack others until
dead. The modrons weren’t ordered to take anything
CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 15
except lives, so Leona’s notes are still available. The
half-orc sage Truushee can still try to affect the
portal, but not with the same success as Leona could
have.
If the adventurers are not there, Leona is killed.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 16
3. The Portal
Purpose: To learn the portal can’t be closed and to
make a decision about what to do with the portal.
Conflict: The portal is growing ever bigger and
wider, and the adventurers need to choose to shrink
it down so only one modron can come through at a
time, or to do the risky thing and move it, which can
only be done by Leona. How much time passes while
they do so is part of the challenge.
The Situation
The portal can’t be closed. It can only be shrunk, but
any adventurer who is magically trained, or
proficient in Arcana, or is just intelligent, needs to
realize that. If they do it quickly, they don’t waste a
lot of time and can then make the decision. The
portal cannot be shrunk and then moved—it is one
or the other.
If Leona is dead, Truushee the half-orc sage might
be able to help the adventurers at least shrink the
portal, although moving the portal is well beyond
their combined capabilities.
Learning Information
The adventurers can choose one of their group to
study the portal, or they can assist Leona if she’s still
alive. A DC 14 Intelligence (Arcana) skill check is
needed. Truushee can aid this check, providing
advantage to the adventurer.
If the check is successful, the options for the portal
are quickly learned, and the bulleted information
can be provided.
If the check is unsuccessful, it takes a while. Move
the orc army tracker one space. Here is the
information learned:
 The portal cannot be closed There is some sort of
rare chaos magic that is keeping it open.
 The portal can be shrunk down small enough so
that only a modron or two can get through at a
time, but this place stills need to be defended.
 If Leona is there, she suggests she could possibly
move the portal. This will take some effort, the
adventurers and some of the city guards will need
to help.
 The portal will reach its max energy at about the
same time as the orc army reaches the city.
Making a Choice
Now that the adventurers know what’s going on they
can make a choice.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Shrinking the Portal
If Leona is alive she can shrink the portal and it
doesn’t cost the adventurers any time. If Leona is not
alive, the adventurers can consult with Truushee the
half-orc sage to perform a ritual using Leona’s notes:
advance the orc army tracker one space.
Moving the Portal
This option is only available if Leona is alive. If the
decision is to move the portal, setting up the ritual
could cost so much time that the orc army token
move once on the track. Leona knows (and can let
the adventurers know) the risks of moving the
portal and having the modrons come through in
force while they’re moving it.
 If there are two spots open on the track, they need
move quickly but have some room for error.
 If there’s one spot open, then they better be
perfect or it’ll most likely open while they’re
moving it.
 If there are no spots open, then they should just
shrink it.
The Most Important Question
Where do you move the portal?
Getting the Portal Ready to Move
Moving the portal requires them to get a large 15 ft.
by 15 ft. piece of cloth (it’d be better with a
constructed board but they don’t have that kind of
time) and then paint a number of arcane symbols
similar to ones found on Leona’s notes, then with a
final enchantment they can anchor the portal to the
cloth. At that point they can move it by picking up
the cloth, but they need to keep the cloth as stable
and sturdy as possible.
If they choose to do this, they have two tasks to
complete. Painting the cloth and enchanting the
cloth.
Painting the Cloth
Painting the cloth to the specifications of the notes
requires a DC 12 Dexterity (Sleight of Hand) check
and can be aided by someone trained in Perception.
Also, anyone who has a background with something
having to do with art can make their check with
advantage. Success means you didn’t lose any time,
while failure causes the orc army tracker to advance
one.
Enchanting the Cloth
Once the cloth has been painted, the enchanting can
begin. To enchant the cloth quickly one would make
CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 17
a DC 12 Intelligence (Arcana) check, which can be
aided by someone giving up a spell slot of magical
power of either divine or arcane nature. Success
means you didn’t lose any time, while failure causes
the orc army tracker to advance one.
Lifting the Portal
Once all the magical preparations are complete, read
or paraphrase the following:
The cloth has been painted with the reds, purples, blues, and
blacks of the language of Mystra. Four guards the Captain
was able to spare after hearing your plan stand at each
corner of the cloth. Leona steps to the cloth and places her
hand on it a final time, and whispers a few words. The runes
begin to shimmer and the portal begins to shimmer. At first
they’re out of sync but after a few moments the shimmers
start to match. Once that happens Leona lifts her head and
signals to the guards, who all lift the cloth. It rises easily and
the portal rises with it.
“Hold it tight. If you drop it, I’ll be able to reset it but it will
take time which is something we don’t have much of.”
The guards being to walk with the cloth, atop it a portal to
another world, one shimmers and the other wavers in the
wind.
Now the portal can be moved. If the portal is moved
use Encounter 4 Moving the Portal.
4. Moving the Portal
Purpose: To move the portal wherever the
adventurers think it should go, preferably outside
the city walls.
Conflict: Seeth Vainscore and his orcs see the portal,
think it’s some kind of attack against them, and try
and stop it.
The Situation
The portal is moving and everything is going well. A
couple of modrons trying to come out but guards kill
them. Unfortunately, orcs have decided to attack.
Setup
Use the Streets of Melvaunt Map. Set the cloth and
the guards next to the building just south of the
gazebo, this is when the orcs spring their attack.
Before Seeth Vainscore and his 7 orcs attack
check the passive Perception of the adventurers. Any
of them with an 11 or lower are surprised.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Tactics
The 7 orcs and Seeth Vainscore aren’t the brightest
and don’t think to attack the cloth. They go after the
4 guards holding a corner of the cloth, who are all
surprised.
Leona/Truushee can’t help either, as every time
she takes her eye off the portal a modron tries to
come out of it. Cory and Jaymes, if present, hang back
to guard Leona and do not factor into combat.
The Portal
If a corner of the cloth is ever not in someone’s
hands for a full round, then the spell collapses and
the portal crashes to the ground. This causes an
explosion of energy. Everyone in the area must make
a DC 15 Strength saving throw or be pushed back 10
feet and knocked prone from the wave of planar
energy released.
If an adventurer is holding a corner of the cloth,
then they have one hand they can use to do things
but are considered restrained while holding the
cloth.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this combat
encounter. These are not cumulative.
Very weak party: Replace Seeth with an orc, and remove 4
orcs.
Weak party: Remove 4 orcs.
Strong party: Replace Seeth with an orc war chief.
Very strong party: As Strong party, and add 3 orcs to the
group.
Concluding the Encounter
If the portal is lost from the cloth, it’ll take Leona
time to set the spell up again so that they can
continue moving. Advance the orc army tracker one
space.
If this means the orc army marker reaches the end
of the track, there’s nothing she can do. The portal
opens wide and the modron army marches into
Melvaunt.
If the adventurers keep the portal from falling to
the ground, then they can bring the portal outside of
the walls of Melvaunt or to some other advantageous
location.
Part 4 – The Battle for
Melvaunt
Depending on what happened in Parts 2 and 3, there
are many potential situations happening
simultaneously:
CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 18
 If the adventurers dealt with the orcs successfully
in Part 2, they now need to deal with the modrons
in the city. Leona was killed, leaving the portal a
major threat. Play Modrons in the City below.
 If the adventurers dealt with the portal
successfully, either by shrinking it or moving it
outside the city, they only need to deal with the
orcs in the city. The orc sappers were successful in
breach defenses, making the orcs a large threat.
Play Orcs in the City below.
 If the adventurers didn’t deal with either side
successfully, they have to deal with both sides in
the city. Play Orcs and Modrons in the City
below.
 If the adventurers got the portal outside the city,
then they only need to deal with a few orcs inside
the city, as the modrons and orcs kill each other
outside the walls. Play The Portal is Outside the
City below.
Regardless of the outcomes above, the adventurers
must deal with the remaining threats in the streets
of Melvaunt. This fight the adventurers undertake is
a microcosm of happenings around the city. Each
encounter uses the Streets of Melvaunt Map.
Treasure
As the adventurers are moving to deal with the
threat in this part, they come across a priestess of
Loviatar named Zellani. Any characters who have the
Favor of Zellani Story Award from CORE1-1 A
Scream in the Night is provided with a potion of
greater healing.
Also, as this part plays out, regardless of which
encounter the adventurers play, they find loose
coins, gems, and jewelry on enemies or scattered in
the street worth a total of 500 gp.
Modrons in the City
Purpose: To see how much of the city the modrons
control after the battle for Melvaunt
Conflict: Adventurers versus the modron forces.
The Situation
The modron army is in the streets of Melvaunt. Read
or paraphrase the following:
The orc threat has been mitigated through your efforts.
However, no one was able to effectively deal with the portal.
Even at this distance away, you see the growing portal
shimmer blue and purple. The sound of metallic marching
echoes through the streets. The modron army is here!
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
They’re orderly, moving systematically through different
neighborhoods. You hear the sounds of fighting, with metallic
voices ordering the people of Melvaunt to obey the law and
order of Mechanus.
You have nowhere to go. There are orcs outside the walls
and the modrons are advancing on your location. There are
citizens here. People are scared, looking to you for. What will
you do?
Setup
The adventurers can put themselves anywhere on
the southeast part of the map, or if you’re playing
without a map they can describe how they have
positioned themselves. If they want to build some
quick barricades in the street or something similar,
they had some time to do that and they can be drawn
in.
This encounter has the modrons coming in three
waves over five rounds.
 Start on the map: a tridrone and 4 duodrones.
 Round 3: 2 quadrones and 2 duodrones
 Round 5: a pentadrone and 3 tridrones
Each group appears from around the corner at the
end of the last modron’s turn of the round listed.
They break formation as soon as they see the enemy,
following orders from the highest-ranking modron
in the vicinity.
The Tracking Sheet
The Armory. If the armory was saved, remove 1
quadrone from the Round 3 wave.
Drake. If Drake was saved, remove 1 tridrone
from the Round 5 wave.
Tactics
The modron orders are to ask for obedience to the
new order and subdue any hostile forces. They deal
with obvious threats first, like the adventurers,
before moving on to the citizenry. If the adventurers
are not a threat, the modrons start going into the
houses and pulling people out, asking for obedience.
Any citizens who resist at all, either physically or
verbally, are killed.
The duodrones try to swarm opponents and will
use the Aid action to assist their higher commanding
modrons. The tridrones launch all three of their
spears with their first actions against the target who
is least armored and not behind cover, then wade
into battle against the closest opponent.
The quadrones target opponents with ranged
weapons and use flight to keep away from any melee.
CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 19
The pentadrone uses its paralytic gas only if it can
target two enemies in it. It doesn’t care how many
duodrones it hits with the attack. Otherwise it just
uses its five attacks on the opponent it is closest to.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this combat
encounter. These are not cumulative.
Very weak party: Remove the tridrone from wave 1, a
quadrone from wave 2, and the pentadrone from wave 3
Weak party: Remove 2 duodrones from wave 1 and the
pentadrone from wave 3
Very strong party: Add a pentadrone to wave 3
Concluding the Encounter
If the adventurers win the fight, they’ve held the line
at this part of the city, and the modron threat is
eliminated.
If the adventurers lose this fight or choose to run
away, the City Watch is outflanked and the modrons
successfully occupy a portion of the city.
Orcs in the City
Purpose: To see if the city is sacked by the orc
forces.
Conflict: Adventurers versus the orc Forces
The Situation
The orc army is in the streets of Melvaunt. Read or
paraphrase the following:
The portal has been dealt with, but the walls of Melvaunt
have been breached. In the distance you can hear the battle
cry of orcs and the screams of the people of Melvaunt. The
orcs are savage and chaos incarnate, flowing though the city
like a fast spreading fire: razing and killing and looting. Drums
beat and the sound of battle comes closer.
The city is breached and you have few options as the orcs
are advancing on your location. There are citizens here.
People are scared and looking to you for help from their
windows and doors. What will you do?
Setup
This uses the City Map or Map #3. This encounter
has the orc forces swarming in over the course of
two waves.
 Start on the map: 3 orcs and an orog
 Round 3: 2 orcs and an orc Eye of Gruumsh.
The orcs appear on the south part of the map. At the
end of the orcs turn the next wave appears on the
southernmost part of the map.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
The Tracking Sheet
Leona. If you have Leona’s gratitude, she has
ordered Jaymes to stay with the adventurers to
grant them assistance. This removes one orc from
each wave.
Tactics
The Orcs don’t really have tactics. They just try and
kill people but they’re more willing to break off and
start fires in the surrounding buildings. They have
the extra action:
 Start Fire. As an action the orc starts a building it
is adjacent to on fire
The orog looks for the toughest looking adventurer
because it thinks killing that adventurer will prove
his worth.
The Eye of Gruumsh enters the fight with his
spiritual weapon already cast and casts bless on the
orog if the orog is still alive, himself, and one other
orc. Otherwise he just casts it on himself and the two
orcs with him.
The orcs just attack the closest adventurer or start
a building on fire. Every round a fire burns
unchecked make a mark on the building. If there are
three marks on a building, it burns uncontrollably
and is eventually destroyed.
Putting out Fires
Putting out the fires requires an action and some
way to extinguish them - water, a spell, or something
similar . There’s no check. It automatically happens
as long as an appropriate action is used.
Very weak party: Replace all creatures with orcs, and
remove 1 orc from each wave
Weak party:  Replace the orc Eye of Gruumsh with an orc
Very strong party: Add one orc to each wave
Concluding the Encounter
If the adventurers win the fight, they’ve held the line
at this part of the city. The orcs do only minimal
damage to the city and its population.
If the adventurers lose this fight or choose to run
away, the orcs run rampant through this part of the
city. The city is sacked completely, many lives are
lost, and much damage is done.
Orcs and Modrons in the City
Purpose: To survive a fight that is going to wreck
the city of Melvaunt and save as many people as
possible.
CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 20
Conflict: Adventurers stand between the citizens of
Melvaunt and the attacking orcs and modrons.
The Situation
The orc army and the modron army are in the
streets of Melvaunt. Read or paraphrase the
following:
It’s all gone wrong. The portal is huge, shimmering blue and
purple, visible even above the buildings. The walls are blown
to bits. Orcs and modrons are everywhere in the streets
fighting each other, killing or subjugating or looting the city.
People are being killed left and right. It’s chaos.
You’ve managed to herd some innocent city-folk safely
into a building. They look at you, knowing that you’re the
only thing keeping them safe. That’s when the wall explodes
to your right as fire fills the building. What do you do?
Setup
This uses the city map. The adventurers are in the
building just north of the gazebo with around 20
citizens.
Outside of the building an orc just blew up the wall
with a vial of alchemist’s fire, which started the
building on fire. There is a force of orcs who are
trying to retreat into the building to find cover from
the modron force they’re fighting. The adventurers
are between all this and the citizens in the building.
Place 4 orcs, an orog, and an Eye of Gruumsh on
the map at the hole in the building. Place 6
duodrones, 2 tridrones, and a pentadrone
surrounding them.
Get some kind of marker for the citizens to remind
you they’re in the building as a mob.
Enemy Forces
The purpose of this encounter is not to kill the
adventurers (they have already had a pretty rough
time of it if they are playing this encounter). Instead,
only throw a couple of enemies at the adventurers
every other round to give the idea of threat. Let the
enemy forces kill each other, let the adventurers
fight a few and save the citizens in the process.
Putting Out the Fire
There’s a fire in the building. Putting out the fire
requires an action and some way to extinguish it -
water, a spell, or something similar. There’s no check.
It automatically happens as long as an appropriate
action is used.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Every round the fire isn’t put out after the second
round, 1d4 members of the citizenry catch fire and
die.
Calming the Citizens
A DC 12 Charisma (Persuasion or Intimidation)
check calms the citizens that the adventurers are
trying to protect. Every round after the second that
they are panicking, 1d4 do something silly, like run
into the street, and are killed.
Concluding the Encounter
The adventurers just need to battle through and
survive. The city is going to be destroyed. There’s
nothing they can do about it. What they can do is
save as many people as they can. For each citizen
that survives the fight they get experience points.
The Portal is Outside the City
Purpose: To shore up the defenses of the city so
whichever army wins can’t get in.
Conflict: Fortify the defenses before the fight comes
to the city.
The Situation
The orc army and the modron army are clashing
outside the city. The walls have blown up, and they
need to be reinforced as fast as possible to help
defend against whichever army wins and then turns
on the city.
It’s going to plan. The portal is outside the city, but the walls
are a wreck. Captain Eledstra has found you.
“Good work with that crazy plan, but we’re in a spot. The
walls are in bad shape and we need your help. Please help us
patch them up as fast as possible since I’m pretty sure
whoever wins is coming after us next.”
Fixing the Walls
A lot of fixing the walls is about moving stones and
rubble in place to make sure the wall is at least
defensible. These are Strength (Athletics) checks
 DC 14 gains a counter towards being done.
 DC 19 gains two counters towards being done.
 Less than 9 loses a counter as someone made a
mistake and destroyed part of the wall.
Anyone can use the Aid action by narrating how they
aid in the effort, and if it makes sense they designate
someone they aid to make the check.
CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 21
 Any clever ideas for actions to help reinforce the
walls that use skill checks are at the same DC ratings
as the Strength (Athletic) checks.
Any clever ideas or use of magic or powers that
are resources can provide a counter towards success.
The Adventurers need to acquire 12 successes to
finish the wall before five rounds have elapsed.

Adjusting the Encounter

Very weak party: Lower the DCs by 4
Very strong party: Increase the DCs by 2

Procedure
Ask each adventurer what action they wish to take,
let them take it, check for complications, and then
start over.

Complications
End of Round 1: An orog is wrecking the
battlements the adventurers are trying to make. If
they don’t kill the orog by the end of any subsequent
round remove a success. Each round the orog is alive,
remove 1 success. For a very weak party, replace the
orog with an orc.
End of Round 3: Someone on the battlefield is
launching boulders. All adventurers are attacked.
+4 to hit; (8) 1d8 + 4 bludgeoning damage. Halve
damage for a very weak party; double damage for a
very strong party.
End of Round 5: Another orog attacks and another
boulder volley attacks.

Concluding the Encounter

The modron army eventually wins the field. If the
adventurers can gather enough successes before the
end of round 5 they succeed and their part of the
wall is held.
If the adventurers fail, then the modron army
breaks through their defenses into the city and
occupies part of it.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 22
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 23
Conclusion Non-Combat Awards
Task or Accomplishment XP per Character
How this adventure ends is highly dependent on the
Saving the Armory 100
adventurers’ choices and successes. You’ll need to
Saving Drake 100
narrate what the city looks like based on the way
Saving Leona 100
things played out. If the adventurers succeeded in
Shrinking the portal 100
their encounters, they earn the Hero of Melvaunt
Moving the portal outside 200
Story Award.
Saving the walls 200
Defending the walls 100
Scenario 1
The modrons may occupy part of the city, depending
The minimum total award for each character
on how the adventurers faired in Modrons in the
participating in this adventure is 900 experience
City.
points.
The maximum total award for each character
Scenario 2
participating in this adventure is 1200 experience
The orcs either sacked the whole city or only a small
points.
part of the city, depending on how the adventurers
faired in Orcs in the City. Treasure
Scenario 3 The characters receive the following treasure,
The orcs and modrons combined to destroy divided up amongst the party. Characters should
Melvaunt, leaving it a war zone. attempt to divide treasure evenly whenever possible.
Gold piece values listed for sellable gear are
Scenario 4 calculated at their selling price, not their purchase
The modron army has set up a small foothold price.
outside the city depending on how the adventurers Consumable magic items should be divided up
fared The Portal is Outside the City. however the group sees fit. If more than one
character is interested in a specific consumable
magic item, the DM can determine who gets it
Rewards randomly should the group be unable to decide.
Make sure the players note their rewards on their Permanent magic items are divided according to
adventure logsheets. Give your name and DCI a system. See the sidebar if the adventure awards
number (if applicable) so players can record who permanent magic items.
ran the session.
Potion of Greater Healing
Experience Potion, uncommon
Total up all combat experience earned for defeated A description of this item can be found in the
foes, and divide by the number of characters present Dungeon Master’s Guide.
in the combat. For non-combat experience, the Treasure Awards
rewards are listed per character. Give all characters
Item Name GP value
in the party non-combat experience awards unless
Total reward from Davol 200
otherwise noted.
Total reward from Eledstra 200
Combat Awards Part 4 Treasure 500
Name of Foe XP per Foe
Orc 100 Renown
Orog 450
All faction members earn one renown point for
Eye of Gruumsh 450
participating in this adventure.
Duodrone 50
Tridrone 100 Downtime
Quadrone 200
Pentadrone 450 Each character receives five downtime days at the
conclusion of this adventure.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 24
Story Awards
During the course of play, the characters have the
opportunity to earn the following story awards:

Hero of the Battle of Melvaunt. Historians will in

time write of this event: the day brave heroes fought
a battle on two front, against the mechanical menace
that came through the portal while at the same time
beating back an orc horde. Thanks to your help
Melvaunt survived. While in Melvaunt, you receive
free comfortable lifestyle when using downtime days
after adventures set in Melvaunt.

Leona’s Gratitude. You have saved Leona’s life, and

the Red Wizard is in your debt. She will make you
one common or uncommon potion for no charge.
This may only be used once, but the award may
come into play in later adventures.

Thomas Druat has His Eye on You. Council of Lords

member Thomas Druat is keenly aware of your
presence in the city. Right now that could be a good
thing or a bad thing. But you will definitely meet him
again.

DM Rewards
You receive 200 XP, 100 gp, and five downtime
days for running this session.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 25

Appendix 1 – DM Advice
The Time Line
Space Event
One The first building explodes and the meeting
between the Red Wizard and Thomas Druat.
Two The portal starts to widen and an assassin crew
of Modron’s kills Leona.
Three The Orc Prisoner tells what he knows.
Four The Walls Explode and the Portal Widens.
Five The Orc Army Arrives and the Modron’s Attack.
Each of the following happens when the orc army
tracker moves to a track space if the adventurers
don’t intervene.
One. When the orc army tracker is on this space the
building explodes in Part 1 – The North Gate. The
meeting between Leona and Thomas is also
happening at the same time.
Two. The portal starts to widen and grow. The
guards alert the Captain, who sends a runner to alert
the adventurers. If the adventurers aren’t there the
modrons kill Leona in their assassination attempt.
Three. If the adventurers weren’t there the orc
prisoner finally spills on where Seeth Vainscore is.
Four. The orc army arrives outside the gates and the
portal reaches its apex of power.
Five. The walls explode signaling the orc army to
attack, and the modron army attacks the city at the
same time.
A Little Advice
Here’s where you can make this adventure sing. One
of the themes is that time and events are spiraling
out of control, and the adventurers can only mitigate
so much of it. With a little cleverness they can handle
a lot of it, but one of your objectives here is to make
them understand things are happening outside of
their control, and event grow to a point where all of
the nine hells are going to break loose. So how do
you do that?
There’s a timeline. You can use that to let the
adventurers know about the other things happening
in the city. You need some way to deliver
information to them and let them know what’s going
on. Here are some tools.
Captain Eledstra. The Captain is constantly
looking for updates to keep the adventurers
informed of what’s going on. You can use Tara from
earlier as the runner to find and provide the
adventurers information. Now the adventurers
might not be easily found. If that’s the case, then
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
that’s ok, don’t drop people on them if it doesn’t
make sense.
Here’s an example. If the adventurers are
investigating Leona, it might be harder for the
Captain to keep them informed unless the
adventurers stay in touch or let the Captain know
what they are doing. If they’re dealing with the orc
threat, then the Captain is more easily able to find
them to let them know what’s going on with the
portal, such as the Red Wizard was murdered or the
portal is widening.
Really Noticeable Stuff. The building exploding
and the portal widening and growing are great
indicators of a city starting to spiral out of control.
You also have the track on the table, which is a bit of
a meta piece, but it will help increase the tension.
If the adventurers are looking into Leona, then the
building exploding is also a great way to make them
feel like things are happening in the city. Decide if
you want it to explode during or at the end of that
section. It’s cool. We trust you to do the right thing.
The portal itself starts to grow at some point and
become more noticeable. That’s another piece you
can use to show things are moving toward an end
point.
Crossing Over
If the adventurers feel like one problem is more
important than the other to deal with during the
scenario, let them cross over. Here are some good
points to let them do that, but you’ll probably need
to use your best judgement for where they can drop
into the other path if they switch.
The city is big, so move the orc army marker the
each time they decide to switch paths.
 After the first building explodes and they choose
or don’t choose to deal with the situation, they can
flip to Leona if they think the Captain and their
crew can handle the orcs.
 After Leona has been killed and they learn about it,
they might be more interested in seeing her lab
and her work. You can relate that she had work on
portals and the planes in her lab through the
Captain’s runner or the Captain herself if present.
CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 26
 Jaymes the Blink Dog. Jaymes is a blink dog, very
Appendix 2 – NPC Summary smart, likes to sleep by warm spaces, and would do
The following NPCs appear or are mentioned in this anything for Leona. Leona seems to be able to
adventure. understand him and Jaymes understands everything
and everyone.
Davol Port (DAY-vall). Human male. Fit, stout, well-
groomed and clothed, and has a deep voice. He’s Thomas Druat (drew–AUT). Human male. Chubby,
warm and yet forward about what he wants or tall, clean shaven and comfortably dressed. His tenor
would like people to do for him. He doesn’t mince voice is light and filled with promises and honey.
words but is a business man first and treats most He’s crafty, seemingly kind, and imposing when he
things in life as a transaction. Payment for service desires and like to get people to think it was their
and service for payment. One of the merchant lords idea to agree with his plans. He plays the game of
of Melvaunt. political maneuvering and business well. One of the
merchant lords of Melvaunt.
LeCampe Eledstra (eh-LED-strah). Human female.
Late middle age. She’s a decent woman who takes
her job of protecting Melvaunt’s ordinary citizens
seriously. Tall, thin, and lanky with a shock of unruly
white hair through which she runs her fingers
constantly whenever she’s trying to think. Very bad
at playing political games, which is why she only just
got promoted to Captain despite her many years of
service in the City Watch.

Drake Liston (LIS-tun). Male human. Young, dark

skinned, Lieutenant to Captain Eledstra. A bit brash
but confident, fit, athletic and a little on the short
side. Boyish and tends to wear a grin, even if he’s
just been almost killed. Has an adventurer’s soul but
he loves the city of Melvaunt, which he now protects
as best he can.

Tara Sorkin (SORE-kin). Female human. Tough

young woman with a little muscle on her, a good
head on her shoulders, and a drive to keep people
safe. She’s a level headed. Take measured actions but
will take risks when absolutely needed. Has a good
heart and a deep care for the people of Melvaunt.
Lieutenant to Captain Eledstra.

Leona Krystal (lee-OH-nah KRIS-tall). Leona is a

Red Wizard and a brilliant expert on portals and
planar travel. She’s also very protective of her
companions. She is a 27-year-old human who wears
glasses and carries herself as if she’s older.

Cort. (KORT) Cort is tall, lanky, thin, and Leona’s

assistant. He helps with some of the very fine
crafting work because of his thin and dexterous
hands. He speaks well but quietly and takes his cues
from Leona.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 27
Appendix 3 – NPC/Monster Greataxe. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 14 (1d12 + 4 plus 1d8) slashing damage.
Statistics
javelin. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +6 to hit,
Orc reach 5 ft. or range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 7 (ld6 +
Medium humanoid (orc), chaotic evil
4) piercing damage.
Armor Class 13 (hide armor)
Hit Points 15 (2d8 + 6) Eye of Gruumsh
Medium humanoid (orc), chaotic evil
Speed 30 ft.
Armor Class 16 (ring mail, shield)
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
16 (+3) 12 (+1) 16 (+3) 7 (-2) 11 (+0) 10 (+0) Hit Points 45 (6d8 + 18)
Speed 30 ft
Skills Intimidation +2
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 10 STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Languages Common, Orc 16 (+3) 12 (+1) 16 (+3) 9 (-1) 13 (+1) 12 (+1)
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
Skills Intimidation +3, Religion +1
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 11
Aggressive. As a bonus action, the orog can move up to Languages Common, Orc
its speed toward a hostile creature that it can see. Challenge 2 (450 XP)

Actions
Greataxe. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 9 (1d12 + 3) slashing damage.
javelin. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +5 to hit,
reach 5 ft. or range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d6 +
3) piercing damage.
Aggressive. As a bonus action, the orog can move up to
its speed toward a hostile creature that it can see.
Gruumsh's Fury. The ore deals an extra 4 (ld8) damage
when it hits with a weapon attack (included in the
attacks).

Orog (Seeth) Spellcasting. The ore is a 3rd-level spellcaster. Its

Medium humanoid (orc), chaotic evil spellcasting ability is Wisdom (spell save DC 11, +3 to
hit with spell attacks). The ore has the following cleric
Armor Class 18 (plate)
spells prepared:
Hit Points 42 (5d8 + 20)
Speed 30 ft Cantrips (at-will): guidance, resistance, thaumaturgy
1st level (4 slots): bless, command
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA 2nd level (2 slots): augury, spiritual weapon (spear)
18 (+4) 12 (+1) 18 (+4) 12 (+1) 11 (+0) 12 (+1)
Actions
Skills Intimidation +5, Survival +2
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 10 Spear. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +5 to hit,
Languages Common, Orc reach 5 ft. or range 20/60 ft., one target. Hit: 11 (ld6 +
Challenge 2 (450 XP) 3 plus ld8) piercing damage, or 12 (2d8 + 3) piercing
damage if used with two hands to make a melee attack.

Aggressive. As a bonus action, the orog can move up to

its speed toward a hostile creature that it can see. Duodrone
Medium construct, lawful neutral
Actions
Armor Class 15 (natural armor)
Multiattack. The orog makes two greataxe attacks.
Hit Points 11 (2d8 + 2)
Speed 30 ft.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 28
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Javelin. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit,
11 (+0) 13 (+1) 12 (+1) 6 (-2) 10 (+0) 7 (-2) reach 5 ft. or range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d6 +
1) piercing damage.
Senses passive Perception 10
Languages Modron, Common
Challenge 1/4 (50 XP) Quadrone
Medium construct, lawful neutral
Axiomatic Mind. The duodrone can't be compelled to Armor Class 16 (natural armor)
act in a manner contrary to its nature or its instructions. Hit Points 22 (4d8 + 4)
Disintegration. If the duodrone dies, its body
Speed 30 ft., fly 30 ft.
disintegrates into dust, leaving behind its weapons and
anything else it was carrying. STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
12 (+1) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 11 (+0)
Actions
Multiattack. The duodrone makes two fist attacks or Skills Perception +2
two javelin attacks. Senses truesight 120 ft., passive Perception 12
Fist. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft., one Languages Modron, Common
target. Hit: 2 (1d4) bludgeoning damage. Challenge 1 (200 XP)
Javelin. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit,
reach 5 ft. or range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d6 +
1) piercing damage. Axiomatic Mind. The quadrone can't be compelled to
act in a manner contrary to its nature or its instructions.
Disintegration. If the quadrone dies, its body
Tridrone disintegrates into dust, leaving behind its weapons and
Medium construct, lawful neutral anything else it was carrying.

Armor Class 15 (natural armor) Actions

Hit Points 16 (3d8 + 3) Multiattack. The quadrone makes two fist attacks or
Speed 30 ft. four shortbow attacks.
Fist. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA target. Hit: 3 (1d4 + 1) bludgeoning damage.
12 (+1) 13 (+1) 12 (+1) 9 (-1) 10 (+0) 9 (-1) Shortbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, range
Senses truesight 120 ft., passive Perception 10 80/320 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing damage.
Languages Modron, Common
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
Quadrone
Medium construct, lawful neutral
Axiomatic Mind. The tridrone can't be compelled to
Armor Class 16 (natural armor)
act in a manner contrary to its nature or its instructions.
Disintegration. If the tridrone dies, its body Hit Points 32 (5d10 + 4)
disintegrates into dust, leaving behind its weapons and Speed 40 ft.
anything else it was carrying.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Actions 15 (+2) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 13 (+1)
Multiattack. The tridrone makes three fist attacks or Skills Perception +4
three javelin attacks.
Senses truesight 120 ft., passive Perception 14
Fist. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
Languages Modron, Common
target. Hit: 3 (1d4 + 1) bludgeoning damage.
Challenge 2 (450 XP)

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 29
Axiomatic Mind. The pentadrone can't be compelled
to act in a manner contrary to its nature or its
instructions.
Disintegration. If the pentadrone dies, its body
disintegrates into dust, leaving behind its weapons and
anything else it was carrying.

Actions
Multiattack. The pentadrone makes five arm attacks.
Arm. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
target. Hit: 5 (ld6 + 2) bludgeoning damage.
Paralysis Gas (Recharge 5- 6). The pentadrone exhales
a 30·foot cone of gas. Each creature in that area must
succeed on a DC 11 Constitution saving throw or be
paralyzed for 1 minute. A creature can repeat the
saving throw at the end of each of its
turns, ending the effect on itself on a success.

Guard
Medium humanoid (human), Neutral

Armor Class 15 (chain shirt)

Hit Points 11 (2d8 + 2)
Speed 30 ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA

13 (+1) 12 (+1) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 10 (+0)

Skills Perception +2
Senses passive Perception 12
Languages Common
Challenge 1/8 (25 XP)

Actions
Spear. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit,
reach 5 ft. or range 20f60 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d6 +
1) piercing damage.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 30
Appendix 3 – Tracking Sheet

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE1-3 A Hole in the World 31
 Tales of Good & Evil
As the City of a Thousand Forges perseveres in the face of threats both internal and external,
the effects of the planar portal continue to make everyone uneasy. When unusual individuals
are drawn to the city because of the portal’s power, heroes are asked to keep the peace and
ferret out anyone intending to bring harm to Melvaunt. A D&D Adventurers League
adventure set in Melvaunt.

A 4-hour adventure for 1st-4th level characters

JAMES INTROCASO
Adventure Designer
Adventure Code: CORE 2-1

Producer: Baldman Games

Core Administrator: Shawn Merwin
Editing and Layout: Encoded Designs
Organized Play: Chris Lindsay
D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall, Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks, Alan
Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League, all other Wizards
of the Coast product names, and their respective logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive likenesses are property of Wizards of the
Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America. Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the
express written permission of Wizards of the Coast.

©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31, 2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4 The Square,
Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 1
Introduction
Welcome to Tales of Good & Evil, a D&D Adventurers
League adventure, Part One of the Misaligned
Trilogy.
This adventure is designed for three to seven 1st-
4th level characters, and is optimized for five 3rd-
level characters.
The adventure is set in the Moonsea region of the
Forgotten Realms, in and around the city of
Melvaunt.
The D&D Adventurers
League
This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of the
D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure,
players track their characters’ experience, treasure,
and other rewards, and can take those characters
through other adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a store
event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a DCI
number. This number is your official Wizards of the
Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have a
number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to use
to create and advance their characters. Players can
continue to play their characters after the storyline
season has finished, possibly participating in a
second or third storyline with those same characters.
A character’s level is the only limitation for
adventure play. A player cannot use a character of a
level higher or lower than the level range of a D&D
Adventurers League adventure.
For more information on playing, running games
as a Dungeon Master, and organizing games for the
D&D Adventurers League, please visit the D&D
Adventurers League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Preparing the Adventure
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
 Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
 Read through the adventure, taking notes of
anything you’d like to highlight or remind yourself
while running the adventure, such as a way you’d
like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d like to use
in a combat.
 Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
 Gather together any resources you’d like to use to
aid you in running this adventure--such as
notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and
battlemaps.
 If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.
Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
 Character name and level
 Character race and class
 Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most common
passive ability check
 Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, etc.)
Players that have characters outside the adventure’s
level range cannot participate in the adventure
with those characters. Players with ineligible
characters can make a new 1st-level character or use
a pregenerated character. Players can play an
adventure they previously played or ran as a
Dungeon Master, but not with the same character.
Ensure that each player has an official adventure
logsheet for his or her character (if not, get one from
the organizer). The player fills out the adventure
name, session number, date, and your name and DCI
number. In addition, the player also fills in the
starting values for experience, gold, downtime,
renown, and number of permanent magic items. He
or she fills in the other values and writes notes at the
conclusion of the session. Each player is responsible
for maintaining an accurate logsheet.
CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 2
 If you have time, you can do a quick scan of a
player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing looks
out of order. If you see magic items of very high
rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you can
ask players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict item
use or ask them to use a standard ability score array.
Point players to the D&D Adventurers League Player’s
Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and it’s
the beginning of an adventure or episode, they can
declare their activity and spend the days now.
Alternatively, they can do so at the end of the
adventure or episode. Players should select their
characters’ spells and other daily options prior to
the start of the adventure, unless the adventure
specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread the
adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, you may see sidebars to
help make adjustments for smaller/larger groups,
and characters of higher/lower levels than the
optimized group. Most of the time, this is used for
combat encounters.
You may adjust the adventure beyond the
guidelines given. For example, if you’re playing with
a group of inexperienced players, you might want to
make the adventure a little easier; for very
experienced players, you may want to make it a little
harder. Therefore, five categories of party strength
have been created for you to use as a guide. Feel free
to use a different adjustment during the adventure if
the recommended party strength feels off for the
group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of five
3rd-level characters. To figure out whether you
need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
 Add up the total levels of all the characters
 Divide the total by the number of characters
 Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round
fractions of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table:
Determining Party Strength
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very Weak
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very Strong
Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment of
the game for the players. You help guide the
narrative and bring the words on these pages to life.
The outcome of a fun game session often creates
stories that live well beyond the play at the table.
Always follow this golden rule when you DM for a
group:
Make decisions and adjudications that enhance
the fun of the adventure when possible.
To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
 You are empowered to make adjustments to the
adventure and make decisions about how the
group interacts with the world of this adventure.
Doing so is especially important and applicable
outside of combat, but feel free to adjust the
adventure for groups that are having too easy or
too hard of a time.
 Don’t make the adventure too easy or too difficult
for a group. Never being challenged makes for a
boring game and being overwhelmed makes for a
frustrating one. Gauge the experience of the
players (not the characters) with the game, try to
feel out (or ask) what they like in a game, and
attempt to give each of them the experience
they’re after when they play D&D. Give everyone a
chance to shine.
 Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game session
moving along appropriately. Watch for stalling,
since play loses momentum when this happens. At
the same time, make sure that the players don’t
finish too early; provide them with a full play
experience. Try to be aware of running long or
short. Adjust the pacing accordingly
 Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free to
modify the text as you see fit, especially when
dialogue is present.
 Give the players appropriate hints so they can
make informed choices about how to proceed.
Players should be given clues and hints when
CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 3
 appropriate so they can tackle puzzles, combat,
and interactions without getting frustrated over
lack of information. Doing so helps to encourage Spellcasting Services
immersion in the adventure and gives players Spell Cost
“little victories” for figuring out good choices from Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
clues. Identify 20 gp
In short, being the DM isn’t about following the Lesser restoration 40 gp
adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
facilitating a fun, challenging game environment for Remove curse 90 gp
the players. The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has more Speak with dead 90 gp
information on the art of running a D&D game. Divination 210 gp
Greater restoration 450 gp
Downtime and Lifestyle
Raise dead 1,250 gp

At the beginning of each play session, players must Acolyte Background

declare whether or not they are spending any days
of downtime. The player records the downtime
spent on the adventure logsheet. The following
options are available to players during downtime
(see the D&D basic rules or the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for more information):
 Catching up
 Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
commit to crafting a single item)
 Practicing a profession
 Recuperating
 Spellcasting services
 Training
Other downtime options might be available during
adventures or unlocked through play, including
faction-specific activities.
In addition, whenever a character spends
downtime days, that character also spends the
requisite expense for his or her lifestyle. Costs are
per day, so a character that spends ten days of
downtime also spends ten days of expenses
maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some downtime
activities help with lifestyle expenses or add lifestyle
expenses.
A character possessing the acolyte background requesting
spellcasting services at a temple of his or her faith may
request one spell per day from the Spellcasting Services table
for free. The only cost paid for the spell is the base price for
the consumed material component, if any.
Disease, Death, and Recovery
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might not
have the same characters return from session to
session, here are the rules when bad things happen
to characters.
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating
Effects
A character still affected by diseases, poisons, and
other similar effects at the conclusion of an
adventure can spend downtime days recuperating
until such time as he or she resolves the effect to its
conclusion (see the recuperating activity in the D&D
Basic Rules).
If a character doesn’t resolve the effect between
sessions, that character begins the next session still
affected by the debilitating effect.

Spellcasting Services Death

A character who is killed during the course of the
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can
adventure has a few options at the end of the session
provide some spellcasting services. Characters need
(or whenever arriving back in civilization) if no one
to be able to travel to the settlement to obtain these
in the adventuring party has immediate access to a
services.
raise dead or revivify spell, or similar magic. A
Spell services generally available include healing
character subject to a raise dead spell is affected
and recovery spells, as well as information-gathering
negatively until all long rests have been completed
spells. Other spell services might be available as
during an adventure. Alternatively, each downtime
specified in the adventure. The number of spells
day spent after raise dead reduces the penalty to
available to be cast as a service is limited to a
attack rolls, saving throws, and ability checks by 1, in
maximum of three per day total, unless otherwise
noted.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 4
addition to any other benefits the downtime activity
might provide.
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any of
the other options, the player creates a new character.
The new character does not have any items or
rewards possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing any
vital organs and is mostly whole) and the player
would like the character to be returned to life, the
party can take the body back to civilization and use
the dead character’s funds to pay for a raise dead
spell. A raise dead spell cast in this manner costs the
character 1,250 gp.
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As above,
except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for the raise
dead spell is paid for by the party at the end of the
session. Other characters are under no obligation to
spend their funds to bring back a dead party
member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to 4
and a member of a faction, the dead character’s body
can be returned to civilization and a patron from the
faction ensures that he or she receives a raise dead
spell. However, any character invoking this charity
forfeits all experience and rewards from that session
(both those earned prior to and after death during
that session) and cannot replay that episode or
adventure with that character again. Once a
character reaches 5th level, this option is no longer
available.
the walls, bands of orcs and modrons still roam the
area, occasionally attacking the weak spots. While
the orcs and modrons are no longer a threat to the
city itself, citizens and travelers in the area have
been killed. Occasionally groups of modrons,
trapped away from their home, still attempt to
follow their last orders of taking over Melvaunt. A
pentadrone called “Sleepie” (SL33P13-773P) has
broken away from the modron collective and is
assisting the City Watch in dealing with the modrons
in the area.
Then there are the Lords. Political power has a
way of moving hands in the wake of disastrous
events. The Lord of Keys and The Lord of Waves
have declared themselves the temporary rulers of
Melvaunt, but murmurs are already starting to
cascade around the Merchant’s Council. Is this just a
temporary situation or a power play by the two
Lords to wrest all the power and wealth of Melvaunt
for themselves? To make matters worse, a Red
Wizard of Thay was killed during the recent events,
and the Red Wizards don’t approve of their own
being killed. An emissary of the Red Wizards has
been sent to determine what happened and who
might be to blame.
While Melvaunt has dodged the executioner’s axe
this time, the city’s head still looks like it might be on
the chopping block.

The Situation in Melvaunt

The walls of Melvaunt resemble Swiss cheese, but
the city still stands. While the Orc Baron of Thar and
his forces assaulted the city, a portal that was part of
a modron plot to take over Melvaunt was
miraculously moved outside the walls by a brave
group of adventurers with the assistance of
Truushee the Sage. That portal unleashed the
modron legion into the orc forces just after the
marauders breached the city walls in several
locations. The ensuing battle between the orcs and
modrons allowed the forces of Melvaunt to
successfully defend the city.
In the aftermath of the battle, Melvaunt is in
turmoil politically. The City Watch has been
depleted, with many of their best and brightest
killed in the recent events. The people of Melvaunt
have hastily patched up the walls and are doing their
best to repair them to their former strength. Beyond

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 5
Adventure Background
Melvaunt, the City of a Thousand Forges, is on edge.
A mysterious planar portal recently appeared in the
region. While the portal is temporarily at peace,
there’s no telling when it could open again, exposing
the Moonsea to threats from beyond this world.
At the same time, the Orc Baron of Thar decided to
advance on Melvaunt. Adventurers managed to
momentarily halt the advance, but Thar still poses a
threat to the entire region.
Amid the chaos, various factions began to vie for
power within Melvaunt. The Lord of Keys and the
Lord of Waves have taken total control over the city.
They do not wish to return that power to the Council
of Iron. Meanwhile the various guilds in Melvaunt
are having trouble moving their goods via land
because there is so much danger in the region.
Many mysterious visitors recently arrived in
Melvaunt. A family of hard-drinking gnomes, a group
of monk scholars, a mad mage, a Mulmasterite
ambassador, an influential cleric of Waukeen, and a
ghost ship raise the suspicions of the city’s already
overworked City Watch. Are these newcomers
harmless tourists? Drawn to the city by the power of
the portal? Spies for the Orc Baron of Thar? Taking
advantage of Melvaunt’s citizens during a time of
trouble? One thing is clear. Their intentions must be
uncovered for the safety of Melvaunt’s terrified
public.
Overview
This adventure is divided into six parts. It begins
with an introduction where the players meet
Lieutenant Liza Tarheels, a lieutenant in the City
Watch of Melvaunt, who pays them to investigate the
mysterious visitors. The players can meet with the
visitors in any order they choose.
Part 1. Brea Salvadine, an ambassador from
Mulmaster, refuses to leave Asberyth Square with
her entourage. She came to Melvaunt to convince the
merchants to lower the price of their goods for the
people of Mulmaster, since their city was razed
during the events of the Princes of the Apocalypse
storyline. While the characters talk with her, an
angry ex-beastmaster from Mulmaster’s arena
attacks with his animals, seeking retribution for his
unfair firing.
Part 2. Mericor Tasgaf, a con man pretending to
be a cleric of Waukeen, leads expensive retreats in a
seaside cave outside the city for merchants. The
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
characters can expose Mericor’s fraud once they
brave the hazards of the cave.
Part 3. Parabald the Maimed sits by the dock
playing chess with his imaginary friends. The
dragonborn mage challenges the adventurers to a
game then reveals his true intentions. He has a score
to settle with the followers of Cyric.
Part 4. The adventures investigate the
Cloisternook gnomes in a camp outside a defunct
diamond mine called Darkglitter Depths. The hard-
drinking family loves inventing as much as their
moonshine. The gnomes’ patriarch explains they
intend to reopen the mine, since there could still be
diamonds within. While the characters talk to
Fizzlebottom Cloisternook, one of his inventions, a
large drill, goes haywire.
Part 5. The Order of Wandering Tales is a group of
monks that records interesting stories for history.
They came to Melvaunt to record accounts of recent
events. Before the characters share their own tales
with the monks in a popular tavern, an enraged
merchant and his thugs break down the door,
seeking vengeance against the order for exposing his
extramarital affair.
Part 6. A ghost ship appears every night in the
harbor of Melvaunt. The characters board the vessel
to find it filled with skeletons who pay them no heed
at all. The glass-bottomed vessel is home to a
runaway Red Wizard who studies the effects of the
portal on sea life.
Adventure Hooks
Adventurers Wanted. Characters looking for
places where they can help or earn a copper know of
Melvaunt’s recent troubles and travel there. A
posting from Lieutenant Tarheels promises a chance
to aid the city and make money with some
potentially dangerous work.
Heroes of Melvaunt. Characters who have
adventured in Melvaunt and the surrounding region
have ties there. They maintained their presence in or
returned to the area to either keep a vigilant eye out
for danger or assist with the region’s recovery
efforts. A posting from Lieutenant Tarheels promises
any interested a chance to aid the city in a time of
need.
Faction Directive. The Factions know there is
much work to be done in the City of a Thousand
Forges. They directed the adventurers to Melvaunt
to fortify their position should the portal open or the
forces of Thar become active again. This is
particularly applicable to members of the Lords’
CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 6
Alliance, the Order of the Gauntlet, and the Harpers.
They are told to check in with Lieutenant Liza
Tarheels about any work that might need to get done
in the region.

Passive or Secret Wisdom (Insight) Checks

There are many NPCs in this adventure that are hiding
something from the characters. Asking for a Wisdom (Insight)
check can tip the players off that an NPC is hiding something.
Even when Wisdom (Insight) checks fail, the players know
something is up after being asked to make the check in the
first place.
If you prefer to avoid asking for Wisdom (Insight) checks in
such situations, here are two methods you can try.
 At the beginning of the adventure, ask for each character’s
passive Insight score. To calculate a character’s passive
Insight score simply add 10 to the character’s Wisdom
(Insight) modifier. Use this score as the result of a
character’s Wisdom (Insight) check. Share only the results
of successes with the players.
 At the beginning of the adventure, ask for each character’s
Wisdom (Insight) modifier. Roll Wisdom (Insight) checks
for the character in secret. Share only the results of
successes with players.
If a player wants a character to make a Wisdom (Insight)
check, allow them to do so as normal. Only use passive scores
and secret rolls in situations where characters are being
deceived and the players don’t suspect it.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 7
Introduction: A
Lieutenant’s Plea
Lieutenant Liza Tarheels’ Office
Expected Duration: 10-15 minutes
The adventurers find themselves in the office of
Lieutenant Liza Tarheels. They came because they
saw a posting in which the Lieutenant offers a
chance to help the people of Melvaunt and make
some money. (See Handout 1.)
General Features
The following general features pertain to Liza
Tarheels’ office:
Sounds. A murmur of activity can be heard in the
halls outside the office as law enforcement officials
chat about the start of the day and the end of the
nightshift.
Surrounding Activity. Law enforcement officials
preparing for the day suit up in armor, check
equipment, and chat about what’s on their agendas.
Night shift officers gather their belongings, file last-
minute reports, and head home.
A bright sun burns through the dusty window on the wall
opposite the door in Lieutenant Liza Tarheels’ cramped office
in Asberyth, Melvaunt’s government campus. A large desk
dominates the tiny room, covered in disorganized piles of
letters, warrants, and reports. A din of activity mumbles
through a closed door as Melvaunt’s finest start their shifts.
That din grows to a quiet roar as the door swings open. A
haggard middle-aged human woman with an unkempt nest
of gray-brown hair, dark skin, and bags under her eyes
lurches to sit behind the desk as the door shuts behind her,
quieting the noise of the hall. She is dressed in the wrinkled
regalia of Melvaunt’s Lieutenant. Without speaking Liza
Tarheels motions for all of you to sit.
Once you’re settled she says, “You here about the job?”
and hands you a piece of paper that you’ve already seen
posted throughout the streets of the city.
At this point give the players Handout 1. Inform the
characters this is the same posting they saw that
drew them to Liza’s office in the first place. Once
they’ve had time to look it over, proceed by reading
the following boxed text:
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
The tired Lieutenant looks up at you. “Here’s the deal. We’re
overworked. A nearby portal has everyone in Melvaunt more
scared than a sun elf in a city of drow. It doesn’t help that the
Orc Baron of Thar decided to march on us Moonsea folk
either. Even though the portal is closed and the Baron is
halted, people haven’t calmed down. We’ve got our hands
full trying to keep the peace. Now all these mysterious
strangers are showing up.” Liza rummages through the
papers on her desk, muttering about needing a second
assistant, before she hands you another paper.
Give the players Handout 2 and then continue by
reading the following boxed text:
“My assistant is checking your references. Frankly we need
this job done yesterday, so I don’t care if your
recommendations come from Asmodeus. You’re hired.” The
Lieutenant grabs a cup of day-old tea from her desk and
swigs it down before continuing.
“I need you to find out why everyone on that list is here in
Melvaunt. They’ve done nothing illegal, but they’re poking
around, asking questions, demanding meetings with
influential leaders, and making the city’s people more
paranoid than they already are. Even that weird boat isn’t
doing anything wrong, but it is giving folks the willies.
“I want a thorough questioning of each of these
newcomers by tonight. Find out why they’re here. If they’re
up to no good, arrest ‘em. Do that and 250 pieces of gold are
yours to split. Everything I know is in the document. Your first
newcomer on the list is right outside.”
Before you leave, Liza makes clear the exact location of all
six groups she has asked you to investigate.
Liza truly doesn’t know much other than what’s
contained within Handout 2. She can tell the
characters the legend of the Bloody Dawn if they ask
about it as described in Part 6, but she thinks it is a
bunch of hogwash.
Roleplaying Liza Tarheels
She is overworked, assertive, and blunt. Many long hours
have left her a little jaded and a lot exhausted, but she’s good
at what she does and has the safety of Melvaunt’s people at
heart. While roleplaying Liza Tarheels, you might:
 Lean back in your chair.
 Sigh before answering a question.
 Rub your face like you’re tired.
 Speak in a loud, boisterous voice.
CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 8
Part 1. Mulmaster
Ambassador
Expected Duration: 20-30 minutes
The adventurers talk with Brea Salvadine, an
ambassador from Mulmaster, in Asberyth Square.
While they chat, an angry animal wrangler with a
score to settle attacks Brea and her entourage.
Asberyth Square
General Features
The following general features pertain to Asberyth
Square:
Light. Sunshine or moonlight fills the area with
bright light.
Smells and Sounds. Brea and her retinue of
nobles chant protests in the square, demanding to be
seen by the Council of Iron. The square is outdoors
and smells of Melvaunt’s forges and metalwork.
Surrounding Activity. Government officials and
employees walk through the square on their way
from one duty or meeting to another. Some citizens
of Melvaunt with government business (e.g.
registering a guild, filing for a marriage license, etc.)
wait to be seen.
Asberyth is Melvaunt’s square-shaped government center.
The central plaza is a large open area called Asberyth Square.
“The Unnamed Merchant,” an iron statue of a trader
traveling with a cart of goods, stands proudly in the middle of
the square. As you enter, your nose burns with the reek of
smelting and metallurgy that are a staple of the City of a
Thousand Forges. The air tastes of industry.
In front of the statue, a dozen human men and women
dressed in noble finery chant protests. “The council must see
us! The council must see us!” they cry. A noblewoman in her
thirties dressed in purple robes leads the crowd. Her auburn
hair falls down her shoulders as she raises her hands to quiet
the mob. She begins singing Mulmaster’s city anthem in a
clear voice as the rest of her group joins in.
Brea Salvadine and her eleven friends (all LN
nobles) are from Mulmaster. If the characters start a
conversation with Brea, she breaks away from the
rest of the group to talk with them while her friends
continue to demonstrate and protest.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Roleplaying Brea Salvadine
Brea, a human in her mid-30s, is a natural leader, but she
hasn’t always used her talents for good. Before the Cults of
Elemental Evil exploded devastation orbs in Mulmaster, Brea
used her talents for personal gain, climbing the ranks of
Mulmaster’s nobility without care for anyone else.
The destruction of the City of Danger changed her. Brea
now cares for others, and her fiery passion for her people
keeps her honest, energetic, and voracious. While roleplaying
Brea, you might:
 Sit forward in your chair and listen to what others say
intently
 Speak very quickly and passionately
 Be quick to anger when something offensive is said
 Be overly grateful for favors
Brea Salvadine
Brea freely shares the following information with
the characters:
 She is an ambassador from Mulmaster. Her city
still lies in ruin after the attack of the Cults of
Elemental Evil.
 The citizens of Mulmaster desperately need goods
from Melvaunt to rebuild. The merchants of the
City of a Thousand Forges raised their prices to
take advantage of Mulmaster’s predicament.
 Brea and her band of nobles came to Mulmaster a
tenday ago to petition the Council of Iron,
Mulmaster’s governing body, for cheaper goods.
No one has seen them yet. They are protesting in
the square until a meeting is granted.
 Brea mentions one excuse has been given for not
being able to meet with the Council of Iron: many
of their number are away on an inspirational
retreat led by Mericor Tasgaf, a moon elf cleric of
Waukeen, goddess of trade.
While interacting with Brea, a DC 13 Wisdom
(Insight) check reveals she feels guilty when
speaking about the current state of Mulmaster. A DC
13 Charisma (Persuasion) check convinces Brea to
share why she feels this way:
 Brea didn’t always have the best interest of
Mulmaster at heart. She rose through the nobility
by investing heavily in the city’s gladiatorial arena.
 The night the Cults of Elemental Evil razed the City
of Danger, Brea watched her fellow citizens perish.
She remained safe behind guards and walls
purchased with gold she gained from the deaths of
hundreds of gladiators. She realized she was no
better than the cultists razing the city.
CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 9
 After the attack, Brea took her money out of the
arena, gave it to survivors displaced by the
destruction, and invested in a few morally sound
businesses to keep funds flowing. Now she gives
all she can to the rebuilding efforts but feels
nothing can undo the damage she’s already done.
 For that reason, Brea will stay in Asberyth Square
until the Council of Iron agrees to see her.
Hecklo Prett
While or immediately after the characters speak to
Brea, read or paraphrase the following boxed text:
A sudden, ear-splitting roar drowns out the chorus of
protestors. An enormous tiger crouches menacingly in one of
Asberyth’s archways. Another throaty sound brings your
attention across the square to the opposite arch where a
white bear lumbers forward on its hind legs, jaw snapping.
Before you have time to comprehend, bestial laughter draws
your eyes to a pair of enormous orange apes climbing down
the side of Asberyth.
The nobles in the square panic, running in every direction
as a humanoid figure clad in leather armor painted with tiger
stripes appears on top of Asberyth. He calls down to the
nobles, “Brea Salvadine, you ruined my life. Now I’ll take
yours!”
Hecklo Prett, a male half-elf scout with a +6 bonus to
Wisdom (Animal Handling) checks, lost his job as an
animal wrangler when Brea stopped funding the
arena. Hecklo and his animals started a new life in
Melvaunt as street performers, but so far they have
barely scraped by. He heard Brea was in town and
decided this was his moment for vengeance. Hecklo
attacks with his longbow from the roof while his two
apes, polar bear, and tiger pounce. The animals are
trained to go after the purple-clad Mulmaster nobles,
but if a character deals damage to an animal or gets
in its way, the beast attacks the character. The
animals are trained to fight to the death. Hecklo
Prett tries to flee if all of his animals die.
Animal Control. A character can attempt to calm
an animal who can see and hear it. As an action the
character chooses a beast and makes a Wisdom
(Animal Handling) check and so does Hecklo (as a
reaction, provided the beast can see and hear him). If
the character succeeds, the animal does nothing on
its next turn other than take the Dodge action.
If the animal can’t see or hear Hecklo, a DC 12
Wisdom (Animal Handling) check convinces the
animal to stop attacking people. The animal takes
the Dodge action, backs away from the fight, and
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
returns to its cage out in a nearby street as Hecklo
trained it to do. If the animal takes damage or is
commanded to attack by Hecklo, it rejoins the fray.
Nobles. Roll initiative for the twelve nobles. At
first they run in random directions, taking only the
Dash action and panicking.
Walls of Asberyth. Asberyth’s walls can be
climbed with a DC 10 Strength (Athletics) check.
Asberyth is 30 feet tall.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this combat
encounter. These are not cumulative.
 Very weak party: Remove the apes and tiger and replace
the polar bear with a black bear
 Weak party: Replace the tiger with a panther and the
polar bear with a black bear
 Strong party: Replace the tiger with a saber-toothed tiger
 Very strong party: Replace the tiger with a saber-toothed
tiger and replace the scout with a bandit captain
Part 1 Interview Assessment
After speaking with Brea, it should be clear to the
characters she’ll do no harm to Melvaunt’s citizens.
Her peaceful protests will end once the Council of
Iron meets with her. This report satisfies Lieutenant
Tarheels.
XP Awards
If Brea Salvadine survives the encounter, award each
character 30 XP.
Treasure
If Brea Salvadine survives the encounter, she thanks
the characters for protecting her by giving them 50
gp.
The characters could feel moved to help Brea meet
with the council. Lieutenant Tarheels is their best
connection to Melvaunt’s governing body. If they
promise Brea to convince Liza to put in a good word,
Brea thanks the characters by giving them a potion
of healing she keeps on her person in case of
emergency.
CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 10
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 11
Part 2. Waukeen’s Retreat
Expected Duration: 40-50 minutes
Mericor Tasgaf leads his religious retreat in a
seaside cave outside of Melvaunt. The characters
must brave the cave’s dangers and find out what
Mericor’s intentions are. If they discover the truth,
that he is a con man, it is up to the characters what
to do with Mericor.
C1. Seaside Cave Entrance
General Features
The following general features pertain to the seaside
cave entrance:
Ceiling. The ceiling is 10 feet high.
Light. Sunshine or moonlight fills the cave
entrance with bright light.
Smells and Sounds. Salty air is thick in this cave,
since it is filled with seawater lapping lazily at the
rocks. The smell of garbage and industrial waste is
also prevalent here.
Surrounding Activity. Crabs climb on the rocks.
Small fish and crustaceans swim in the water.
Water. The water is 10 feet deep and opaque. The
cave is close to the City of a Thousand Forges and
the industrial pollution dumped into the sea gets
caught here, making it difficult to see through.
Creatures submerged in the water are blinded.
This seaside cave reeks of salty spray and industrial waste. A
lake of seawater and pollution fills most of the cave, with a
five-foot-wide ledge of glistening black rock poking above the
murk on the cavern’s eastern side. At the north end of the
room, a portcullis covers a narrow opening less than four feet
wide, allowing the water to flow into a dark cavern where the
sun cannot reach.
through the bars of the portcullis and used to pull
the lever to raise the gate.
A character standing on the slippery rock next to
the portcullis can try to lift the gate with a successful
DC 20 Strength check. The portcullis has AC 19 and
27 hit points and is immune to psychic and poison
damage.
The portcullis only goes 5 feet under the water. A
Medium or smaller creature could swim below the
portcullis, come out on the other side, and pull the
lever. Any movement in the water of area C2 alerts
the four reef sharks there, which attack.
Shark Attraction. A creature who swims in the
water in this area has a 50% chance of attracting
1d4 reef sharks from area C2 each round spent in
the water.
Slippery Rocks. The 5-foot-wide ledge in the cave
is wet, algae-slick rock. A creature walking on the
ledge must succeed on a DC 10 Dexterity
(Acrobatics) check or fall into the water.
Underwater Combat
Under water the following rules apply:
 When making a melee weapon attack, a creature that
doesn’t have a swimming speed (either natural or granted
by magic) has disadvantage on the attack roll unless the
weapon is a dagger, javelin, shortsword, spear, or trident.
 A ranged weapon attack automatically misses a target
beyond the weapon’s normal range. Even against a target
within normal range, the attack roll has disadvantage
unless the weapon is a crossbow, a net, or a weapon that
is thrown like a javelin (including a spear, trident, or dart).
 Creatures and objects fully immersed in water have
resistance to fire damage.

Mericor takes his patrons into the cave via canoe, the
only boat narrow enough to navigate the opening
blocked by the portcullis. Other boats, including
rowboats, are too wide. Canoes can be purchased in
Melvaunt for 100 gp each. A single canoe is 3 feet
wide, 15 feet long, 50 pounds, can hold up to three
Medium or Small creatures, has AC 11 and 30 hit
points and is immune to psychic and poison damage.
Portcullis. The portcullis here is activated via a
lever on the opposite side of the gate to the west of
the portcullis (see area C2). The lever itself is hidden
in the darkness of area C2 and can only be seen by a
creature who can see in the dark or with a light
source. A 10-foot pole (or similar object) can be slid

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 12
C2. Shark Alley
General Features
The following general features pertain to shark alley:
Ceiling. The ceiling is 30 feet high.
Light. This part of the cave is so far from the sun
that it is shrouded in darkness.
Smells and Sounds. Salty air is thick in the cavern
and so is the smell of garbage and industrial waste.
The water laps against the boulders in this room.
The occasional loud splash can be heard as a shark
momentarily breaks the surface.
Surrounding Activity. Crabs climb on the rocks.
Sharks hunt small fish and crustaceans in the water.
Water. The water is 10 feet deep and opaque
thanks to pollution. Creatures submerged in the
water are blinded.
A series of wet boulders, slick with algae, rise above the
surface of the cloudy water. These rocks dot the way to a
larger stone dock where three canoes painted with symbols
of Waukeen are tied. Beyond the boats and platform, a 20-
foot-high natural wall rises. The cave continues in the
darkness above.
If the characters haven’t already encountered the
four reef sharks here, add:
Somewhere in this cavern there is a momentary, furious
thrashing in the water, like a desperate animal drowning. As
soon as it begins, it stops. Something is lurking beneath the
surface.
Characters who are in canoes are safe from the
sharks as they navigate the waters here. Characters
without a vessel must either swim or try to cross the
water by hopping from rock to rock. The sharks
attack anyone who swims in the water.
Canoes. The three canoes tied to the stone dock at
the end of this cavern belong to Mericor Tasgaf. He
uses them to transport his patrons to the cave.
Untying or cutting a canoe loose is an action.
Slippery Rocks. Each boulder can hold only one
Medium or Small creature at a time.
Jumping from one boulder to another or onto the
dock requires two ability checks. First, a Strength
(Athletics) check is made to determine if the
character can clear the distance between the two
boulders. The DC of the check is equal to the number
of feet between the boulders. You can use the map in
the Appendix to determine the distance between
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
boulders, but if a character wants to simply hop
from one boulder to the next closest to get to the
dock, a DC 10 Strength (Athletics) check is required.
If the character fails that check, one of their jumps
lands short and they fall in the water.
After a successful Strength (Athletics) check, a
character must succeed on a DC 10 Dexterity
(Acrobatics) check or lose their balance on the
slippery surface, and fall into the water.
Slippery Wall. The 20-foot-high wall is slick with
water and algae. Climbing it requires a DC 15
Strength (Athletics) check. A character who fails this
check by 5 or more falls, taking 3 (1d6) bludgeoning
damage per 10 feet fallen (rounded down) and
landing prone as normal. At the top of the wall there
is a curled-up rope ladder that can be thrown down
as an action. Climbing the rope ladder requires no
check.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this combat
encounter. These are not cumulative.
 Very weak party: Remove two reef sharks
 Weak party: Remove one reef shark
 Strong party: Add three reef sharks
 Very strong party: Replace the four reef sharks with three
hunter sharks
C3. Trapped Corridor
General Features
The following general features pertain to the
trapped corridor:
Ceiling. The ceiling is 10 feet high.
Light. This part of the cave is shrouded in
darkness.
Smells and Sounds. Salty air is thick in the cavern,
and so is the smell of garbage and industrial waste.
The indistinguishable words of a person giving an
impassioned speech can be heard beyond the door at
the end of the corridor.
A small natural doorway leads into this short corridor that
ends in a newly installed steel door emblazoned with the side
profile of the goddess of trade. Above the door the words
“REMEMBER DWARVISH GOLD,” are painted in bright red
letters. Beyond the door, you can make out the muffled
sounds of a single voice giving an impassioned speech. You
can also hear the occasional chorus of cheers, jeers, and
applause punctuating the speaker’s performance.
CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 13
Mericor’s cons have been profitable. He hired a team
of the city’s best smith’s to install the door and a
cleric to cast the glyph of warding spell on the floor
before the door. The cleric who cast the spell made
some mistakes while drawing the glyph, so it isn’t as
powerful as normal.
Once in the hall, any character who turns around
notices the phrase, “REMEMBER DWARVISH GOLD,”
is also painted above the doorway leading from this
corridor into area C2. This phrase serves as a way of
reminding retreat goers to speak the password for
the glyph of warding before leaving or entering area
C4.
Glyph of Warding. A nearly invisible, 10-foot-
diameter glyph of warding sits directly in front of the
door. The glyph can be detected with a DC 13
Intelligence (Investigation) check. Any character
proficient in Arcana or Religion immediately
recognizes the glyph for what it is, though they note
it is poorly drawn.
The glyph is triggered when a creature walks over
the rune without saying aloud the password, “Gorol,”
the Dwarvish word for gold.
When triggered, the glyph erupts with magical
energy in a 20-foot-radius sphere centered on the
glyph. Creatures in the area must make a DC 13
Dexterity saving throw. A creature takes 11 (2d10)
cold damage on a failed saving throw, or half as
much on a successful one. Once the glyph is
triggered the spell ends.
Locked Door. The steel door leading to area C4 is
locked from the other side with a deadbolt switch
anyone can turn. On this side of the door a key is
required to enter. A DC 15 Dexterity (thieves’ tools)
check picks the lock. A character trying to work
around the glyph of warding makes this check at
disadvantage. On a roll of 1, the character drops the
thieves’ tools into the glyph of warding and
accidentally triggers it, if it is still active.
The door can be forced open with a DC 18
Strength check, though a character must stand on
the glyph of warding to get the proper leverage to
attempt the check. The door has AC 19 and 18 hit
points and is immune to psychic and poison damage.
Mericor holds the key to this door. If the
characters knock on the door, no one in area C4 can
hear them over his speech. If they set off the glyph of
warding or attack the door, Mericor calms his
followers and makes a show of going to check out
the disturbance himself. His actual plan is to try to
bribe any potential troublemakers into going away,
and failing that, be the first to get to the canoes if
things get violent.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
C4. Shrine of Waukeen
General Features
The following general features pertain to the shrine
of Waukeen:
Ceiling. The ceiling is 20 feet high.
Light. The cavern is filled with bright light from
torches in wall sconces and the fire walk.
Smells and Sounds. The smells of smoking coals
and sweat permeate this chamber. Mericor’s voice
booms through the cavern, enhanced by his
prestidigitation spell. The small crowd of nobles
cheers and applauds him at appropriate moments.
The smells of smoke and body odor sting your eyes as you
open the door to this large cavern. Torches light the room.
You can see many bedrolls, chamber pots, and mess kits piled
to one side. On top of a natural platform, a pale-skinned elf
with a glorious pompadour and dressed in the robes of
Waukeen’s clergy booms with magically enhanced speech.
“If you find Waukeen’s light, you can walk across the fire,
just like Yenassa! Yenassa, the lessons you have learned
today and the faith you have found will protect you. Cross
the fire and accept Waukeen’s light into your soul.”
A dozen perspiring merchants cheer as a human woman
walks barefoot across a long bed of low-burning. She moves
quickly and when she gets to the end, the applause is
thunderous. The woman’s smile is genuine.
The elf continues his sermon amid the cheers. “Good
business will come your way, Yenassa. The seed you’ve
planted in Waukeen’s name will grow strong and reap you a
bountiful harvest.”
Mericor Tasgaf is not really a cleric of Waukeen at all.
He is a con man (a CN spy) able to cast the
prestidigitation cantrip thanks to his high (moon) elf
heritage. He has convinced the twelve merchant
nobles in this room that his expensive retreat is a
religious investment that pays back many times over.
Technically, Mericor is committing fraud by taking
money from his marks in return for a good or service
(the blessing of Waukeen) that he is not actually
providing.
When the adventurers first enter the chamber,
allow any character proficient in Religion to make a
DC 15 Intelligence (Religion) check. Success means
the character knows fire walks aren’t a normal part
of Waukeen’s religious rituals.
CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 14
Mericor Tasgaf Fire Walk. A barefoot fire walk, while an
If the characters ask to speak with Mericor, the impressive visual trick, is actually a simple task of
merchants are annoyed at the interruption, but keeping your feet moving. A creature walking over
Mericor cheerfully chats with the adventurers out of the 15-foot-long, 5-foot-wide area of coals takes 1
earshot of his patrons. Mericor tells the characters fire damage only if it ends its movement there.
he is a cleric of Waukeen who has come to Melvaunt
to aid the merchants impacted by recent events. The
Roleplaying Mericor Tasgaf
roads are unsafe and trade is slow. This answer is Mericor Tasgaf oozes charisma. He’s charming, attractive,
enough to satisfy Lieutenant Tarheels, but there’s a and knows how to make people feel good. The con man uses
good chance the characters can figure out what’s his personality to seduce those susceptible to his charms and
keep those suspicious of him disarmed. While roleplaying
really going on.
Mericor, you might:
When Mericor lies to the characters, he makes a
Charisma (Deception) check against the characters’  Wear a big, genuine smile, even when insults and
Wisdom (Insight) checks. Characters who succeed accusations are slung.
know that Mericor is hiding something. They can try  Give compliments freely and often.
to quiz Mericor about the religion of Waukeen by  Stay cool under pressure.
making Intelligence (Religion) checks against his  Redirect the conversation when things get uncomfortable.
Charisma (Deception) check.
Suspicious characters might demand Mericor Part 2 Interview Assessment
perform magic for them. He uses prestidigitation to After speaking with Mericor, the characters discover
snuff out torches and create smells, sparks, and he is a con man or he cons the adventurers into
symbols of Waukeen. Any character proficient in thinking he is a cleric of Waukeen. Either
Arcana can make a DC 10 Intelligence (Arcana) explanation satisfies Lieutenant Tarheels, provided
check to realize the spell being cast is not one the characters at least tried to arrest Mericor if they
normally available to clerics. Any character who report the truth.
knows the cantrip already has this knowledge.
If Mericor thinks the characters are onto him, he XP Awards
tries to redirect the conversation. The con man tells If the characters capture and arrest Mericor Tasgaf,
them he’s heard the merchants mention a family of award each 30 XP.
gnomes recently purchased the mines known as
Darkglitter Depths. It seems odd to him since these Treasure
mines have been closed and defunct for years. The characters could leave the cave with a bribe
Mericor suggests (lies) that the gnomes could have from Mericor. If they arrest him and bring him to
purchased the mine for more nefarious reasons, like Lieutenant Tarheels, she pays the characters an
carrying out some strange magic ritual or to bury the extra 50 gp for helping with his arrest.
bodies of the people they plan to murder inside.
If the characters confront Mericor about lying, he
bribes them by offering 25 gp for them to look the
other way. If the characters refuse, he increases the
amount of his bribe to 50 gp.
If the characters try to arrest Mericor, he attempts
to flee out of the cave, surrendering if he is reduced
to 13 hit points or less. Mericor’s followers are
confused if he is placed under arrest, but they do not
interfere if the characters make it clear the action is
done with the authority of the Lieutenant of
Melvaunt.
If the characters leave peacefully (either because
they believe Mericor or because they take his bribe)
he offers them the use of the canoes to exit the
seaside cave and sends one of the merchants with
them to collect the canoes when they are done.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 15
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 16
Part 3. The Cloisternook
Clan
Expected Duration: 30-40 minutes
The Cloisternook gnomes have set up camp outside
Melvaunt, near their closed diamond mine,
Darkglitter Depths. The characters can speak with
the hard-drinking, inventive family, discover their
innocent intentions, and contend with a dangerous
mining creation gone haywire.
Cloisternook Camp
General Features
The following general features pertain to the seaside
cave entrance:
Light. The camp is in a small clearing filled with
bright light from the sun or the moon and some
small campfires, depending on the time of day.
Smells and Sounds. The smells of hard liquor and
grease are readily apparent in the camp. Hammers
ping and gears grind as the Cloisternooks tinker
away.
Surrounding Activity. Gnomes around the camp
drink moonshine, tinker with inventions, and chat
with one another.
This small clearing just outside of the defunct mines known
as Darkglitter Depths is utterly mundane except for the
colorfully dressed gnomes sitting outside of their tents,
tinkering with odd inventions and drinking clear alcohol.
Many of the contraptions built by the gnomes look made to
extract material from the earth.
At the center of the camp, a wheeled, cylindrical device
made of iron stands fifteen feet tall and sits as big around.
The behemoth invention sports arms equipped with
automated drills, picks, hammers, and shovels. You have
never seen anything quite so odd in an area quite so normal.
“Ah, admiring Big Billy, are ya?” says a kindly, intoxicated
voice behind you. It comes from an old gnome with a pointy
white goatee and long handlebar mustache. He holds two
jugs in his hands. “This moonshine was for him, but seeing as
you’re my guests, what do you say we pour a few glasses and
get ourselves primed before we fire up my new toy?” He
laughs and leads you to a table at the back of the camp.
The characters are about to sit down with
Fizzlebottom Cloisternook, (a CG commoner) the
patron of the Cloisternook clan. He leads the other
twenty gnome commoners in the camp.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Cloisternook Gnomes
Cloisternook gnomes are commoners with an Intelligence of
15. Each has proficiency in at least one set of artisan’s tools
(DMs choice).
Fizzlebottom Cloisternook
Fizzlebottom Cloisternook is happy to speak with
the characters about what he’s up to. Any character
who takes the offered moonshine (which smells like
paint thinner and tastes about the same) has
advantage on any Charisma checks made to
influence Fizzlebottom. Characters who drink must
also succeed on a DC 15 Constitution saving throw at
the end of the conversation or become poisoned for
one hour. Fizzlebottom shares the following
information freely:
 The Cloisternooks came to Melvaunt because they
recently purchased Darkglitter Depths. The family
owned the mine generations ago, then sold it to
the city of Melvaunt when the diamonds ran out.
The city never did anything with the mine.
 The gnomes bought the mine back because the
new mining inventions they’ve created,
particularly Big Billy, can dig deeper and further
than ever before to find new pockets of diamonds.
 The entrance to Darkglitter Depths is collapsed.
Once up and running, Big Billy can break through
and open Darkglitter Depths.
 Fizzlebottom hasn’t gotten Big Billy to work, but
after a conversation over a game of chess with a
dragonborn mage named Parabald the Maimed
down at Melvaunt’s docks, he thinks he can rig the
invention to work using the gnome’s homemade
moonshine, Recipe 44, as its fuel source.
 Fizzlebottom’s twin daughters, Mollo and Dollo,
are working on a new moonshine, Recipe 45, that’s
going to be even stronger than the stuff he’s
drinking with the characters.
While interacting with Fizzlebottom, a DC 12
Wisdom (Insight) check reveals he is not saying
everything he knows to the characters. A DC 12
Charisma (Persuasion) check convinces
Fizzlebottom to share the following information in
his drunken haze:
 Before the Cloisternooks sold Darkglitter Depths
to the city of Melvaunt, they collapsed the
entrance. There is an object inside the mine the
gnomes wished to keep hidden.
 The Cloisternooks repurchased Darkglitter Depths
to mine diamonds, but they also came to recover
the object. The family is worried that the Moonsea
CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 17
 region’s recent troubles make the mines a bad
hiding spot for the object and plan to move it out
of the area.
Fizzlebottom does not share more information than
this with the characters. (More about this object is
discussed in CORE2-2 Songs of Law and Chaos.)
Roleplaying Fizzlebottom Cloisternook
Fizzlebottom Cloisternook is old, kind, smart, and often
intoxicated. When it comes to his family’s secrets, he’s rather
tight-lipped, but when he’s drunk, he can’t resist dropping a
few hints. While roleplaying Fizzlebottom, you might:
 Speak in a gravelly, slightly slurred voice.
 Tell a lot of corny jokes.
 Laugh very loud and slap your knee when something funny
happens.
 Whisper conspiratorially when sharing hints about the
Cloisternook family’s secrets.
Big Billy
Read the following text when the conversation with
Fizzlebottom ends:
Two gnome women, who look exactly alike dressed in the
same blue garb, walk toward the table in perfect matching
stride. They carry large jugs of moonshine. Both have their
long yellow hair twisted up in intricate, matching braids and
their blue eyes shine with happy intoxication. Those of you
who drank with Fizzlebottom think you’re seeing double,
until one speaks.
“Hi! I’m Mollo. This old man’s smartest daughter,” says
one in a high-pitched voice as she bows.
“And I’m Dollo,” says the other in a huskier tone. “I’m the
good-looking one,” she adds with a wink. Both erupt into
gales of drunken laughter before continuing.
“Father,” Mollo squeaks, “we just loaded Big Billy up with
Recipe 45. He’s ready for a test run.”
Fizzlebottom starts with excitement as he turns to you.
“Come, new friends. It would be your honor to witness this
test!” The old man giggles as he moves away, not waiting for
an answer. “Turn on Big Billy!” he cries to another gnome
standing next to the device. That gnome pulls a lever on the
side of the enormous creation and suddenly all of its drills,
picks, hammers, shovels, and other tools whir to life.
“It works! Look at him go… Wait! Why?…” Fizzlebottom
looks concerned and then scared as the machine whirs faster,
all of its dangerous weapons flying about. Whirling death
spins around the camp. Gnomes drunkenly sprint-stumble
out of the invention’s path as it tears down tents and
destroys campfires.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
As Big Billy tears up the camp, Fizzlebottom calls for
aid, yelling for the rest of the Cloisternooks to save
his prized invention. The other gnomes panic and
simply try to stay out of the way. Big Billy does the
following each round on initiative count 20:
 The invention moves 15 feet in a random direction.
Roll a d8 to determine the direction Big Billy
moves. 1 is north, 2 is northwest, 3 is west, 4 is
southwest, 5 is south, 6 is southeast, 7 is east, and
8 is northeast.
 Creatures and objects in Big Billy’s path and that
the invention moves within 10 feet of must
succeed on a DC 13 Dexterity saving throw or take
3 (1d6) bludgeoning and 3 (1d6) piercing damage.
 When a creature moves within 10 feet of Big Billy
for the first time, or starts its turn that close to the
invention, it must succeed on a DC 13 Dexterity
saving throw or take 3 (1d6) bludgeoning and 3
(1d6) piercing damage.
The characters can try to stop Big Billy. If they attack
the invention, Fizzlebottom calls out to them, asking
that they don’t destroy it completely.
 A character within 5 feet of Big Billy can make a
DC15 Dexterity (thieves’ tools) check as an action
to disable the device. The first success causes Big
Billy to stop dealing bludgeoning damage as half
its arms go limp. The second success shuts down
the invention completely.
 Reducing Big Billy’s hit points to 0 disables the
device but also shuts it down. Big Billy is a Huge
object with AC 19 and 39 hit points. It is immune
to poison and psychic damage.
 Reducing the hit points of Big Billy’s wheels to 0
disables the device so it stops moving. It’s arms
still spin wildly out of control, but as long as
everyone stays away from the invention it can’t do
any harm and runs out of fuel in one hour. Big
Billy’s wheels have AC 15 and 27 hit points. They
are immune to poison and psychic damage.
When Big Billy has been put out of commission,
Fizzlebottom thanks the characters (grudgingly if
they destroyed the invention). As the old gnome
scratches his beard trying to figure out what went
wrong, Mollo and Dollo come over and admit their
mistake. Big Billy had been calibrated for Recipe 44
Cloisternook moonshine, but they loaded it with
Recipe 45. Fizzlebottom berates them if any gnomes
or characters died in the incident, or simply laughs if
everyone survived.
CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 18
Part 3 Interview Assessment
After speaking with Fizzlebottom, it should be clear
to the characters the Cloisternooks are not in the
area to harm Melvaunt’s citizens. If anything, the
gnomes are on the side of good and hope to remove
an object that could attract evil forces in the area.
This report satisfies Lieutenant Tarheels.

XP Awards
If the characters disable Big Billy, award each 50 XP.

Treasure
If the characters stop Big Billy without destroying it,
Fizzlebottom gives them a spell scroll of color spray
as thanks.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 19
Part 4. The Maimed Mage
Expected Duration: 20-30 minutes
Parabald the Maimed, a dragonborn mage, sits by
Melvaunt’s dock talking to a crew of imaginary
friends and playing chess with strangers. He
challenges the characters to a game. If he thinks they
would be strong allies, Parabald reveals his true
intentions to destroy the cults of Cyric.
Melvaunt Dock District
General Features
The following general features pertain to Melvaunt’s
dock district:
Light. The docks are bathed in bright light by the
sun or moon on this clear day.
Smells and Sounds. The air is thick and humid
with salt. The sea, the barks of dockworkers, the
ringing of boat bells, and calls of vendors fill all ears.
Surrounding Activity. Dockworkers go about
their business loading and unloading vessels.
Newcomers arrive in Melvaunt. People see loved
ones off before long journeys.
At the edge of the dock a blue-scaled dragonborn in green
robes grins as you approach. He sits at a large table opposite
you. Fourteen chairs, seven on either side, line the table’s
longer edges. The thirteen chairs not being used by the
dragonborn are empty. On the table between the chairs are
seven chessboards.
The dragonborn turns to his right, leaning across the table
to speak to an empty chair two seats away. “You’re right,
Baron Rebouvie… I think we have some new challengers!”
The madman turns to the chair immediately to his left and
laughs. “Oh no, Dutchess Reidrana Martwyth III, they don’t
look like much, but don’t judge a book by its cover.” The odd
being gives a glare back to the right and scolds, “Princess
Marabelle Nessia the Biting, hold your tongue.” Finally, he
stands and turns to regard you, the sleeve of his right arm
hanging empty at his side. “You’ll have to forgive her
Highness,” the dragonborn says. “She’s still learning her
manners.” He glares back at the princess’s empty chair
before continuing.
“Oh! And I seem to have forgotten mine. I’m Parabald, and
these are my good friends Lady Vanderblight, Baron
Rebouvie, Princess Marabelle Nessia the Biting, Dutchess
Reidrana Martwyth III, Grand Alchemist Riya Yang, and of
course High Chancellor Rizmeck Gobo needs no introduction.
Won’t you join us for a game?”
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Parabald (a one-armed CG mage) won’t speak to the
adventurers about anything else until they agree to
sit down and play a game of chess. The mage yells in
horror if the characters try to occupy any of the
chairs on his side of the table, as that is where his
imaginary friends sit.
Parabald the Maimed
When the characters sit down to play chess with
Parabald, he places himself at the center board. The
mage controls the pieces of other boards using mage
hand, a spell he has mastered so well that he can cast
it without verbal or somatic components. The hand
Parabald conjures when he casts the spell is invisible.
The mage is constantly looking around,
complimenting the players and his imaginary friends
on their moves.
Parabald is on a dangerous mission of revenge in
Melvaunt (see Parabald’s True Intentions), but he
doesn’t want his cover blown. The extremely
intelligent dragonborn feigns madness, hoping it
makes him seem harmless as he engages travelers
fresh off the boat in games of chess. During those
games, he asks questions and gauges how people
treat him and his “friends.”
Parabald’s purpose at the docks is twofold. He
hopes to find powerful, good-hearted adventurers
who could serve as allies in his fight against the
followers of Cyric, and he wants to keep an eye on
the docks to see if he recognizes any cultists arriving
in Melvaunt. During the game, Parabald asks the
adventurers the following questions:
 “Yes, Riya, that is an excellent question. Where are
you from?”
 “I agree High Chancellor. I’m just dying to know
why you would come out to Melvaunt during such
a time of trouble.”
 “Princess Marabelle Nessia the Biting, I disagree.
They look like very capable heroes. Please, tell the
princess some of your past deeds.”
 “Oh Baron Rebouvie, you are so deep. I should
pose that question to our guests. When is killing
another justified?”
 “Yes, yes, yes, Lady Vanderblight, you do prattle on
so. I know what you did this morning already. I
was there. I’d like to hear what our guests have
done with themselves this fine day.”
 “Goodness Dutchess! That is a personal question.
But it is a delicious one. Have any of you ever
treated a past lover poorly?”
CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 20
 “Have you met those fantastic monk scholars in
Brogan Summer Shack? If not, you should!
Delightful tales they tell!”
If time permits, allow each character to answer
every question, or simply direct a single question to
only one or two characters. As the adventurers
answer, Parabald actively makes Wisdom (Insight)
checks with a +4 bonus. If he catches the characters
in a lie more than once, or if what he hears makes
him think the adventurers are less-than-pure-of-
heart, he doesn’t call them out on it, but he doesn’t
reveal his true purpose for being in Melvaunt to
them (see Parabald’s True Intentions).
If asked about his own reasons for being in
Melvaunt, Parabald responds that he and his “friends”
travel the Moonsea region hoping to meet
interesting people who love chess. A DC 13 Wisdom
(Insight) check reveals that Parabald isn’t telling the
entire truth, though if pressed he won’t reveal
anything during the game. A DC 15 Wisdom (Insight)
check reveals Parabald is more lucid than he seems.
At the end of the conversation, have each
character make an opposed Intelligence check with a
chess set against Parabald (the mage’s modifier for
this check is +6). Characters who succeed beat
Parabald and he rewards them with a blue quartz
gem worth 10 gp. Creatures who fail are beaten by
Parabald and get nothing.
Read or paraphrase the following text if Parabald
decides he can trust the adventurers:
The dragonborn smiles wide at all of you. “Why don’t we
leave my friends here to sulk in their defeats and celebrate
their victories? Come with me. I want to show you
something.” The mage leads you to a secluded sailing vessel
that appears to be empty at the moment. The name
Admiral’s Delight is painted on the side. He climbs aboard
and uses a key to open the door to the captain’s quarters.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Admiral’s Delight Captain’s Quarters
General Features
The following general features pertain to the
Admiral’s Delight captain’s quarters:
Light. The sun comes through dust-covered
windows filling the room with dim light.
Sounds. All is quiet on the empty, secluded ship.
Even the sounds of the dock are far behind here.
Shadow Demon Ambush
Read or paraphrase the following text when the
characters enter the captain’s quarters of the
Admiral’s Delight:
A small bed, a desk covered with a marked map of the
Moonsea region, a table, and a leather bound spellbook are
all the room contains.
Parabald closes the door and his entire demeanor changes.
The jovial madman from the docks is gone. The dragonborn
before you is serious and tired. “I hope you forgive the ruse
outside, but I had to be sure you could be trusted. We’ll be
safe here. The captain of this vessel is a friend of mine, and
he’s loaning me the room during his time ashore.”
Before the mage can say more, a black, horned shadow
with long, wicked claws flies through the cabin wall and flings
Parabald against the wall. The dragonborn crumples and
doesn’t move. The shadow turns towards you, grinning and
throwing its incorporeal wings out wide in a challenge.
This shadow demon was summoned by a cult of
Cyric to kill Parabald. The demon was ordered to kill
the mage and any of his allies. Believing the
characters are Parabald’s friends, the demon turns
on them, fighting to the death with glee.
The mage lies crumpled on the floor, unconscious.
Parabald wakes up and joins the fight if a character
uses an action to heal him.
Door. If a character opens the door to the cabin,
the cabin is bathed in bright light. This is bad for the
shadow demon given its Sunlight Sensitivity feature.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this combat
encounter. These are not cumulative.
 Very weak party: Parabald does not fall unconscious and
the door stays open letting bright light in
 Weak party: Parabald does not fall unconscious
 Strong party: Add one shadow demon
 Very strong party: Add one shadow demon and two
dretches
CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 21
Parabald’s True Intentions Part 4 Interview Assessment
Once the demon is slain, if Parabald is awake and
After speaking with Parabald, it should be clear to
alive, he shares his story with the adventurers.
the characters the mage is not in the area to harm
 Parabald is the oldest son of a pair of Harpers, Melvaunt’s citizens. The dragonborn is there to
Rella and Elandor Dresnasia, who fought against remove a force of evil from the city. This report
the cults of Cyric. He had a younger brother named satisfies Liza Tarheels, who promises to look into the
Jalong. cult.
 When the dragonborn was twelve, the Cyric’s
followers murdered his parents and brother in the XP Awards
same attack that cost the mage his arm. If Parabald reveals his true self to the characters,
 Parabald has dedicated his life to wiping out award each character 30 XP.
Cyric’s cults since.
 The mage heard whispers that members of a cult Treasure
are in Melvaunt. The shadow demon confirms Each character who defeats Parabald at chess gains a
their presence. He’s not sure why they’re here, but blue quartz gem worth 10 gp.
he assumes it has something to do with the portal
and recent events in the region.
 He asks if the adventurers trust Lieutenant
Tarheels or anyone else in the Melvaunt City
Watch. If they say yes, he asks them to pass along
the information about followers of Cyric.
 Parabald plans to find a new place to stay in
Melvaunt immediately, since the followers of Cyric
are apparently aware he’s staying on the Admiral’s
Delight.
Roleplaying Parabald the Maimed
Parabald the Maimed is intelligent, crafty, and serious. Yet he
is a completely different person when the adventurers first
meet him, pretending to be a jovial, mad mage who thinks
himself a fancy noble. While roleplaying Parabald the
Maimed during the first half of this part of the adventure,
you might:
 Speak in a high voice and over-enunciate your words.
 Constantly laugh at, scold, and respond to your imaginary
friends.
 Take an interest in what others say, but take none of it too
seriously.
 Smile constantly.
While roleplaying Parabald the Maimed during the second
half of this part of the adventure, you might:
 Speak in a low voice with a gravely tone.
 Be very cautious in your dealings with others.
 Remember your family with anger and sorrow.
 Rarely smile.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 22
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 23
Part 5. Order of Wandering
Tales
Expected Duration: 40-50 minutes
The pacifist Order of Wandering Tales came to
Melvaunt to record the story of the Moonsea’s
people during this time of chaos. When the
characters arrive to investigate the monks, they find
an angry merchant and his thugs beating the
pacifists. If the adventurers deal with the thugs, the
order’s leader, Ara Kaitar, shares their purpose in
the City of a Thousand Forges with the adventurers.
Brogan Summer Shack
General Features
The following general features pertain to Brogan
Summer Shack:
Light. The inn is filled with bright light from
hanging lanterns and a fireplace at night and
sunlight from large windows during the day.
Smells and Sounds. At first the sounds of battle as
thugs beat on the monks. Later the sounds of the
fireplace crackling and monks talking in low voices
to subjects as they scribble notes on parchment. The
smell of Brogan’s famous pulled pork is always
pungent.
Surrounding Activity. The Brogan twins, Jara and
Zed, stand behind the bar. Jara serves drinks while
Zed obsesses over the pork. During the fight they are
out of the inn, having run to get the authorities.
Order of Wandering Tales Monks
All of the Order of Wandering Tales monks are commoners
with +2 bonuses to Intelligence (Arcana), (History), and
(Investigation) checks.
Brogan Summer Shack is a cozy inn famous for the hospitality
of Jara and Zed Brogan. The twins pride themselves on
keeping their establishment peaceful and clean while serving
the best pulled pork in the Moonsea region. The smell of
meat draws you toward the seaside cabin. A sudden shout
from within pulls you even closer.
“This is a warning,” an angry man’s voice cries. “Don’t ever
pry in my business again. Today you get black eyes. Come
into my life once more and it’s a knife in the belly. Have at
‘em!”
As you get closer to the inn, a violent sight plays out
through its windows. Monks in brown robes cower
defenselessly as a human man in purple finery shouts for a
rough group of men and women to beat the monks to a pulp.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
The steel merchant Mervo Galat, a noble, directs his
eight thugs to beat the eight Order of Wandering
Tales monks, commoners. Mervo is furious at the
scribes for exposing an affair that caused his
husband to leave.
If left undisturbed, the thugs use their maces to
hurt the monks, knocking the scribes unconscious
but not killing them. Mervo prefers to give orders as
his henchmen do the dirty work. Order of
Wandering Tales monks are pacifists with a point to
prove. They do not fight, nor do they flee. They take
the Dodge action on their turns.
If the characters intervene, the thugs turn to fight
them and ignore the monks, while Mervo joins the
fray. If the characters use lethal force to kill one of
them, the thugs and Mervo start killing too. The
thugs and Mervo flee when only three of their band
remain standing.
When Mervo and the thugs are defeated, Jara and
Zed Brogan arrive with eight guards, who transport
any prisoners or bodies away while the monks tend
to each other’s wounds. The characters are acting
with the authority of Lieutenant Tarheels and that
includes a license to kill.
Bar and Tables. It costs 5 feet of extra movement
to get on top of or down from the bar or one of the
tables in the inn. Creatures standing on top of one of
these surfaces gain advantage on attacks against
creatures who are standing on the floor.
A creature next to a table can flip it as an action
with a DC 13 Strength check. The DC for this check is
15 if another creature stands on top of the table. Any
creatures on top of a table once it is flipped must
make a DC 13 Dexterity saving throw. Creatures who
fail land prone next to the table. Creatures who
succeed land on their feet next to the table. An
overturned table provides half cover.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this combat
encounter. These are not cumulative.
 Very weak party: Replace the eight thugs with six bandits
 Weak party: Remove two thugs
 Strong party: Replace the eight thugs with four berserkers
 Very strong party: Replace the eight thugs with four
berserkers and replace the noble with a bandit captain
CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 24
Master Ara Kaitar Roleplaying Ara Kaitar
Read or paraphrase the following text when the Ara Kaitar is a patient, inquisitive listener. She puts others at
fighting is over: ease with a calm, welcoming attitude and encourages them
to open up to her. Her interest in hearing new stories is
As the Brogan Summer Shack recovers from battle, a female genuine. This is more than a job. Meeting new people is a
dwarf with tan skin and a long red braid dressed in the brown thrill for her. While roleplaying Ara, you might:
robes of the Order of Wandering Tales approaches you. She  Speak in an even tone with warm words.
bows deeply. “Master Ara Kaitar of the Order of Wandering Tales  Ask pointed questions without demanding the person
at your service.” answer them.
 Nod along as others talk.
 Look people right in the eye when you address them.
If the characters defended the monks from Mervo
and his thugs and killed no one, Master Ara Kaitar (a
LN commoner) is grateful, and the characters have Part 5 Interview Assessment
advantage on all Charisma ability checks while After speaking with Ara Kaitar, it should be clear to
talking to her. the characters that the Order of Wandering Tales is
If the characters ask Ara about the fight or why the not in the area to do harm to the citizens of Melvaunt.
Order of Wandering Tales has come to Melvaunt, she They are pacifists who observe and report. This
shares the information -- but only after she has report satisfies Lieutenant Tarheels.
heard a story from each of the characters. She sits at
a table, grabs a quill and ink, and says, “Each of you XP Awards
tell me an exciting story about yourself that none If the adventurers defeat Mervo Galat and his
here already know. It will go on record.” henchmen, award each character 25 XP.
Allow each character to tell a story to Ara. As they
describe their tale, she scribbles furiously, jotting Treasure
down every word with incredible speed. Ara might Mervo carries a coin purse with 50 gp. If the
ask a question or two for clarity, but allow the characters do not take this money, the guards pat
characters a chance to shine as they tell their stories. down the prisoner and give the gold to the
Characters who do not wish to share a story can characters as a reward.
convince Ara they do not need to be heard with a DC
10 Charisma (Persuasion) check.
After each character shares a story, Ara shares the
following information with them:
 The Order of Wandering Tales is a group of monk
scholars who believe all stories should be shared.
They observe, record, report, and archive personal
stories about impactful events.
 The monks put out a free newsletter whenever
they have enough information to fill it.
 They are trained to be pacifists in even the most
violent situations. They do not take sides during a
conflict.
 They came to Melvaunt given the recent events to
gather people’s stories about the portal and Thar
invasion.
 During their investigations they uncovered
Mervo’s affair and printed the story in their latest
newsletter. His husband left, and Mervo wants
someone to pay.
 The story that vexes Ara the most is that of a ghost
ship appearing in the harbor each night. This ship
is supposedly the Bloody Dawn come again, but
what could possibly make that happen?

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 25
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 26
Part 6. Bloody Dawn
Expected Duration: 45-50 minutes
As night falls over Melvaunt, a red-sailed ship
resembling the infamous Bloody Dawn enters the
harbor each night and sails off before sunrise. The
adventurers must get to the ship and discover what’s
happening aboard.
Legend of the Bloody Dawn
An old legend tells of a red-sailed pirate ship called
Bloody Dawn that sank off the coast of Melvaunt a
century ago. Its ruthless crew and captain are said to
be so evil even the Nine Hells and Abyss won’t take
them, so their restless spirits roam the waters.
This used to be a story told to scare children, but
now it seems real. The characters can learn the
basics of the legend from any citizen of Melvaunt or
immediately know the tale if they are proficient in
History.
Getting to the Boat
Once the sun goes down, the ship appears in the
harbor. Read or paraphrase the following text when
the characters are in Melvaunt’s dock district at
night:
At the edge of the harbor, a large red-sailed ship is bathed in
moonlight. The vessel is still and silent as death against the
clear night sky. The small rowboats Liza Tarheels has reserved
for you bob at the dock, waiting to carry you to the
mysterious ship.
The City Watch loans the characters three rowboats
to get to the red-sailed ship. Read or paraphrase the
following text once characters arrive near the ship:
As you get closer to the ship, you can hear its hull creak.
Waves gently lap against the belly of the boat. No sailors
voices can be heard, but a boat this big certainly needs a
crew to sail it. The words Bloody Dawn are painted in
Common on the back of the ship. Several fish corpses float on
the surface of the water near the ship.
The characters can easily climb aboard the ship,
using ropes along its hull.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Bloody Dawn – Upper Deck
General Features
The following general features pertain to the upper
deck of the Bloody Dawn:
Light. The upper deck is bathed in bright light by
the moon.
Smells and Sounds. The night air is salty and cool,
while the boat smells of fresh stained wood and new
ropes. The creaking of the boat and gentle lapping of
the sea can be heard as the skeletons go about their
chores.
Surrounding Activity. The skeletons move
methodically around the deck, making their rounds
and doing chores.
As you climb over the side of the rail, a horrifying site greets
you. Skeletons methodically walk across the deck. Long
boney fingers pull ropes, check sails, and patrol the boat. All
are dressed in the garb of pirates, with swords strapped to
their hips and bows on their backs.
At the back of the ship, a handle for a trap door peeks out
behind a skeleton in a three-cornered hat manning the
wheel. Occasionally the skeleton turns the wheel too far to
one side and its hand pops off. The skeleton simply grabs the
appendage with its other hand and reattaches it when this
happens.
The twelve skeletons here do not attack the
characters, unless the adventurers attack first in
which case the undead fight to the death. Otherwise
the skeletons go about their business, even if the
characters attack the trap door.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this combat
encounter. These are not cumulative.
 Very weak party: Reduce the number of skeletons to
three
 Weak party: Reduce the number of skeletons to nine
 Strong party: Add three skeletons
 Very strong party: Add one minotaur skeleton
Skeleton at the Wheel. A character can grab the
skeleton’s hand when it pops off the wheel with a DC
12 Dexterity (Sleight of Hand) check. On a success
the character has the skeleton’s hand (which can be
used to open the trap door). On a failure the
character takes 1 point of piercing damage as the
skeleton’s boney fingers jab for the hand at the same
time and the skeleton grabs the hand back first.
CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 27
 Trap Door. The five-foot-square trap door behind
the skeleton driving the boat is locked with an
arcane lock spell. A character who can cast this spell
recognizes the effect immediately after interacting
with the door. Only Zarabi Thar’khul, the
necromancer and captain of the Bloody Dawn, and
her skeletal crew can open the trap door.
A DC 25 Strength check is required to force open
the door. Each unsuccessful attempt at forcing the
door open activates the tiny shock trap (see below).
The door has AC 15 and 18 hit points and is
immune to poison and psychic damage. Each time
the door takes damage, the tiny shock trap is
activated (see below). Skeletons do not attack
characters for attacking the door.
The hand of a skeleton can be used to open the
door.
Once the door is opened, a disembodied
threatening female voice says, “Turn back now! You
know not what horrors the crew of the Bloody Dawn
has in store for you below! This is your last warning
before we eat your entrails!” The voice is Zarabi’s.
The door reveals a ladder that leads down to the
area B2, which stinks of dead fish.
Tiny Shock Trap. Each time the trap door is
touched or takes damage, it lets out a small burst of
tiny blue lightning bolts. Each creature that is not
undead within 5 feet of the door must succeed on a
DC 15 Dexterity saving throw or take 3 (1d6) points
of lightning damage.
Bloody Dawn – Observation Deck
General Features
The following general features pertain to the
observation deck of the Bloody Dawn:
Ceiling. The ceiling is 10 feet high here.
Light. The observation deck is filled with bright
light by a magic orb in the ceiling.
Smells and Sounds. The smell of dead fish is
strong in this chamber and the boat’s wood ceiling
creaks.
Surrounding Activity. Sea life swims around the
boat and dead fish float by.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
An orb in the ceiling glows with a soft blue light, illuminating
this chamber. As you look around, the first thing you notice is
that the walls and floor of the ship here are made of
impenetrable blackness! A few more seconds of hard staring
reveals the truth. This level of the ship is made of glass. The
impenetrable blackness around you is actually the Moonsea,
as evidenced by the frequent fish, squid, or jellyfish
swimming by. A small desk with parchment and books spread
everywhere sits opposite the ladder on the other end of this
deck. A bedroll is rolled up next to the desk on one side and
on the other stand two tall barrels. Caddy corner to the
barrels is a long lab table that holds several surgical
instruments and piles of dead fish.
Suddenly, the ceiling begins to move. Small, grey,
disembodied hands that were clinging to the ceiling begin to
fall around you. Their dead, humanoid digits move with
surprising quickness, drawing themselves toward you with
malicious, grotesque purpose.
The same female voice you heard when the door opened
speaks again. “This is your last chance. You are trespassing.
Turn back now or face horrors unknown!”
Zarabi Thar’khul (a CN mage) controls the twenty
crawling claws surrounding the characters. The
necromancer watches everything in this room
transpire in an extradimensional space thanks to the
rope trick spell she cast right before the characters
came down. The undead do not attack the
adventurers if they flee immediately.
If the characters make a stand, the creatures
attack. Zarabi makes the claws deal only
bludgeoning damage and knock characters
unconscious instead of dealing a potentially lethal
blow. Once the characters are defeated or the
number of crawling claws is reduced to five, Zarabi
comes out of the extradimensional space and
demands the characters leave.
Barrels. The barrels next to the desk contain
thirty gallons of fresh water each. The barrels weigh
three hundred pounds.
Desk. The top of the desk has all of Zarabi’s notes
and research about fish dying in the Moonsea. A
quick glance through the materials reveals books
about marine biology, the study of portals and
conjuration magic, and notes observing the number
of dead fish in the Moonsea increasing once the
planar portal became active.
Inside the desk’s drawers are thirty days’ worth of
rations.
Glass Floor. The boat’s smooth floor makes
moving difficult. Any creature that moves more than
CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 28
15 feet on its turn must succeed on a DC 12
Dexterity saving throw or fall prone. Creatures with
a climb speed, including the crawling claws, are
immune to this effect.
Magic Orb. Zarabi also controls the magic orb in
the ceiling. Before combat breaks out, the orb just
gives off bright light in a 30-foot radius and dim light
for an additional 30. If combat breaks out, on
initiative count 0 the orb gives off a brilliant burst of
light. Any creature that is not undead within 30 feet
of the orb that can see must make a DC 12
Constitution saving throw or become blinded until
the end of its next turn. The orb has an AC of 15 and
18 hit points and is immune to poison and psychic
damage.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this combat
encounter. These are not cumulative.
 Very weak party: Reduce the number of crawling claws to
eight
 Weak party: Reduce the number of crawling claws to
sixteen
 Strong party: Add one specter
 Very strong party: Add two specters
Zarabi Thar’khul
Read or paraphrase the following text when the
Zarabi Thar’khul leaves the extradimensional space
appears:
The remaining disembodied hands fall back defensively as a
small length of rope appears out of thin air, stretching from
inches above the ground to the ceiling. Sliding down the
perfectly vertical piece of hemp is a thin woman with dark
skin wearing gray robes. Tattoos adorn her bald pate and
arms.
“Excuse me, but you are trespassing! What is the meaning
of this?”
Zarabi Thar’khul’s Spells
Zarabi Thar’khul has these spells prepared instead of the
ones in the mage’s stat block:
Cantrips (at will): chill touch, light, mage hand, shocking
grasp
1st level (4 slots): detect magic, ray of sickness, mage armor,
sleep
2nd level (3 slots): detect thoughts, rope trick
3rd level (3 slots): animate dead, dispel magic
4th level (3 slots): arcane eye, blight
5th level (1 slot): scrying
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
If the characters attack, Zarabi defends herself, but
she keeps trying to convince them to stop. She
initially refuses to talk with them.
The characters can convince Zarabi to have a chat
with them in several ways:
 A DC 13 Charisma (Intimidation) or (Persuasion)
convinces her to have a chat with the characters.
 If the characters explain they are on official
business from Melvaunt’s City Watch, Zarabi talks
with them.
 A DC 10 Intelligence (History) check determines
Zarabi has the shaved head and tattoos of a Red
Wizard of Thay. Mentioning this to her makes her
feel the need to share her story.
Once the characters convince Zarabi to speak with
them, she offers the following information freely:
 Zarabi, a necromancer, used to be a Red Wizard. It
took the murder of her husband at the hands of a
rival to realize how cruel and malicious Thayans
can be. She fled the country soon after that rather
than seek vengeance.
 Zarabi created all the undead aboard the ship. She
harvested the materials from bandits who tried to
hijack her on the road.
 The mage has come to Melvaunt to study the
effects of the planar portal. When she first arrived
in the port city, she noted many dead fish floating
in the harbor. Wondering if this might be some
side effect of the portal, she used her fortune to
construct this boat to better study the marine life.
 Zarabi knows the story of the Bloody Dawn. She
painted the Bloody Dawn to look like the infamous
pirate vessel because she thought it would afford
her some privacy during her studies. She knows
that people may not trust her, given that she’s a
necromancer from Thay, but her intentions really
are academic.
 The mage hasn’t gathered much conclusive
evidence about the fish yet. She knows once the
portal appeared, the number of dead fish
increased. This could have something to do with
the portal’s magic, but her theory is that many
merchants didn’t feel safe leaving the city to dump
their waste once the portal was discovered and
Thar marched, so more traders have been
dumping into the harbor.
A DC 15 Wisdom (Insight) check reveals Zarabi has
more to say, but is hesitant about it. A DC 15
Charisma (Intimidation) or (Persuasion) check gets
her to reveal the following information:
CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 29
 Zarabi tells the characters she can sense a dark
force of necromancy gathering near Melvaunt. She
can’t pinpoint the exact location, but those who
serve evil are definitely drawn to the region.
 After revealing the information above, Zarabi feels
the need to protect the characters in some way.
She doesn’t like the idea of them getting hurt
because of information she shared (now that she
sees they meant no harm in trespassing). She gives
them a potion of necrotic resistance.
Roleplaying Zarabi Thar’khul
Zarabi Thar’khul is excited, confident, and brilliant. It may
take her a few moments to open up the characters, but once
she does, the necromancer is more than happy to yammer on
about her research and her past. While roleplaying Zarabi,
you might:
 Speak slowly at first and gather steam, speaking faster and
faster.
 Be confident and direct in questions and answers.
 Get excited when others share new revelations with you.
 Sit up straight and tall in your chair.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Part 6 Interview Assessment
After speaking with Zarabi Thar’khul, it should be
clear to the characters the necromancer is not in the
area to do harm to the citizens of Melvaunt. Some
characters could take issue with her use of
necromantic magic, but Melvaunt has no laws
against such practices. A report about the truth of
what Zarabi is doing satisfies Lieutenant Tarheels.
XP Awards
If the characters can convince Zarabi to calm down
and have a conversation with them, award each
character 25 XP.
Treasure
If the characters convince Zarabi to tell them about
the dark force gathering in Melvaunt, she gives them
a potion of necrotic resistance.
CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 30
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 31
Conclusion
Read or paraphrase the following when the
characters return to Lieutenant Tarheels with their
report:

An exhausted Liza Tarheels sits behind her desk, rubbing her

face with her hands. She looks up as you enter. “Please give
me some good news,” she pleads.

The characters can give Liza Tarheels whatever

report they’d like about their subjects. If they tell her
the truth about everyone, she breathes a sigh of
relief and thanks the characters while paying them.
If the characters tell her to be suspicious of any of
the groups she asked them to investigate, Liza rubs
her temples as she contemplates what it could mean
for Melvaunt. That NPC or group winds up the
subject of further investigation of Melvaunt’s
authorities. For most of the NPCs, Liza digging
deeper into their pasts has little meaningful outcome.
If investigated, Mericor Tasgaf gets arrested and
Zarabi Thar’khul gets chased out of town.
This story continues in CORE 2-2 Songs of Law &
Chaos.

XP Award
If the characters talk to every group before morning
the next day, award each 50 XP.

Treasure
As promised earlier in the adventure, Lieutenant
Tarheels pays the adventurers 250 gp.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 32
Rewards
Make sure players note their rewards on their
adventure logsheets. Give your name and DCI
number (if applicable) so players can record who
ran the session.
The minimum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 900 experience
points.
The maximum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 1,200 experience
points.

Experience Treasure
Total up all combat experience earned for defeated The characters receive the following treasure,
foes, and divide by the number of characters present divided up amongst the party. Characters should
in the combat. For non-combat experience, the attempt to divide treasure evenly whenever possible.
rewards are listed per character. Give all characters Gold piece values listed for sellable gear are
in the party non-combat experience awards unless calculated at their selling price, not their purchase
otherwise noted. price.
Consumable magic items should be divided up
Combat Awards however the group sees fit. If more than one
Name of Foe XP per Foe character is interested in a specific consumable
Ape 100 magic item, the DM can determine who gets it
Bandit 25 randomly should the group be unable to decide.
Bandit Captain 450 Permanent magic items are divided according to
Berserker 450 a system. See the sidebar if the adventure awards
Black Bear 100 permanent magic items.
Commoner 10
Crawling Claw 10 Treasure Awards
Guard 25 Item Name/Location GP Value
Hunter Shark 450 Asberyth Square (Part 1) 50
Mage 2,300 Seaside Cave (Part 2) 50
Minotaur Skeleton 450 Melvaunt Docks (Part 4) 50
Noble 25 Brogan Summer Shack (Part 5) 50
Panther 50 Liza’s Office (Conclusion) 250
Polar Bear 450
Reef Shark 100 Potion of Healing
Saber-Toothed Tiger 450 Potion, common
Scout 100 A description of this item can be found in the Player’s
Shadow Demon 1,100 Handbook and Dungeon Master's Guide.
Skeleton 50
Specter 200 Potion of Necrotic Resistance
Spy 200 Potion, uncommon
Tiger 200
Thug 100 A description of this item can be found in the
Dungeon Master's Guide.
Non-Combat Awards
Task or Accomplishment XP per Character
Spell Scroll of Color Spray
Scroll, common
Protect Brea Salvadine (Part 1) 30
Arrest Mericor Tasgaf (Part 2) 30 This scroll contains a single color spray spell. A
Disable Big Billy (Part 3) 50 description of this item can be found in the Dungeon
Gain Parabald’s trust (Part 4) 30 Master's Guide.
Defeat Mervo and thugs (Part 5) 25
Get Zarabi to talk (Part 6) 25 Renown
Question all groups (Conclusion) 50 Each character receives one point of renown.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 33
Downtime DM Rewards
Each character receives 10 downtime days at the For running this adventure, you receive 300 XP, 150
conclusion of this adventure. gp, and ten downtime days.

Story Awards
Characters have the opportunity to earn the
following story awards during this adventure.

Criminal Punch Line. If the characters do not arrest

Mericor Tasgaf, word spreads throughout
Melvaunt’s criminal population that they are
pushovers. As a result, Melvaunt’s criminals don’t
take them seriously. As long as you possess this
story award, you have disadvantage on Charisma
(Intimidation) checks made to influence any of
Melvaunt’s criminals. Additionally, Melvaunt’s law
enforcement officials learn about your soft
reputation among the city’s less savvy. As long as
you possess this story award, you have disadvantage
on Charisma (Persuasion) checks made to influence
any of Melvaunt’s law enforcement officials.

Friend of Mulmaster. Characters who appeal to

Lieutenant Tarheels on behalf of Brea Salvadine find
themselves in the good graces of the people of
Mulmaster. For as long as you possess this story
award, you have advantage on Charisma
(Persuasion) checks made to influence people from
Mulmaster. In addition, merchants from Mulmaster
offer you 20% off the sale price of any mundane
good or service in the Player’s Handbook less than
500 gp.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 34
DM Appendix: NPC
Summary
The following NPCs appear or are mentioned in this
adventure.
Liza Tarheels (LIE-zuh TAR-heels). Human female.
Melvaunt’s Lieutenant is overworked, assertive, and
blunt. Many long hours on the job have her a little
jaded and a lot exhausted, but she’s good at what she
does and has the best interest of Melvaunt’s people
at heart.
Brea Salvadine (bray-UH SAL-vah-deen). Human
female. Brea is a natural leader but she hasn’t always
used her talents for good. The destruction of the City
of Danger changed her. She has come to Melvaunt to
convince the Council of Iron to lower the price of
their goods as Mulmaster rebuilds.
Mericor Tasgaf (mer-eh-CORE taz-GAFF). Moon elf
male. He’s charming, attractive, and knows how to
make people feel good. The con man pretends to be a
cleric of Waukeen who leads expensive religious
retreats for Melvaunt’s merchants.
Fizzlebottom Cloisternook (FIZ-el-BOT-um CLOY-
stir-nook). Gnome male. The old, kind, smart, and
often intoxicated patriarch of the Cloisternook
family. The Gond-worshipping clan has more than a
few secrets and Fizzlebottom knows them all.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Mollo and Dollo Cloisternook (MO-lo, DOE-lo CLOY-
stir-nook). Gnome females. Twin daughters of
Fizzlebottom, they are the clan’s best inventors
(other than their father) and accomplished
moonshiners.
Parabald the Maimed (par-uh-BALD THE
MAYMDUH). Dragonborn male. A one-armed mage
who feigns madness while hunting cults of Cyric.
Mervo Galat (murk-VO guh-LOT). Human male. A
noble merchant who sells steel. His husband left him
when the Order of Wandering Tales exposed his
affair.
Ara Kaitar (AHR-uh KAY-tar). Dwarf female. The
master of the Order of Wandering Tales. She puts
others at ease with a calm, welcoming attitude and
encourages them to open up to her.
Zarabi Thar’khul (zay-RAH-bee thar-KULL).
Human female. Zarabi is an ex-Red Wizard who fled
the country after her husband was murdered. She
came to Melvaunt to study the effects of the planar
portal on sea life.
CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 35
Appendix. NPC/Monster Bandit Captain
Medium humanoid (any race), any non-lawful
Statistics alignment
Armor Class 15 (studded leather)
Hit Points 65 (10d8 + 20)
Ape Speed 30 ft.
Medium beast, unaligned
Armor Class 12 STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
15 (+2) 16 (+3) 14 (+2) 14 (+2) 11 (+0) 14 (+2)
Hit Points 19 (3d8 + 6)
Speed 30 ft., climb 30 ft. Saving Throws Str +4, Dex +5, Wis +2
Skills Athletics +4, Deception +4
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
16 (+3) 14 (+2) 14 (+2) 6 (-2) 12 (+1) 7 (-2)
Senses passive Perception 10
Languages any two languages
Skills Athletics +5, Perception +3 Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Senses passive Perception 13
Actions
Languages –
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP) Multiattack. The captain makes three melee attacks:
two with its scimitar and one with its dagger. Or the
Actions captain makes two ranged attacks with its daggers.
Multiattack. The ape makes two fist attacks. Scimitar. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
Fist. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft., one one target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) slashing damage.
target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) bludgeoning damage. Dagger. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +5 to hit,
Rock. Ranged Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, range 25/50 ft., reach 5 ft. or range 20/60 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d4 +
one target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) bludgeoning damage. 3) piercing damage.

Reactions
Bandit
Medium humanoid (any race), any non-lawful Parry. The captain adds 2 to its AC against one melee
alignment attack that would hit it. To do so, the captain must see
the attacker and be wielding a melee weapon.
Armor Class 12 (leather armor)
Hit Points 11 (2d8 + 2)
Speed 30 ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA

11 (+0) 12 (+1) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0)

Senses passive Perception 10

Languages –
Challenge 1/8 (25 XP)

Actions
Scimitar. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 4 (1d6 + 1) slashing damage.
Light Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit,
range 80 ft./320 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d8 + 1) piercing
damage.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 36
Berserker Commoner
Medium humanoid (any race), any chaotic alignment Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
Armor Class 13 (hide armor) Armor Class 10
Hit Points 67 (9d8 + 27) Hit Points 4 (1d8)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 30 ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
16 (+3) 12 (+1) 17 (+3) 9 (−1) 11 (+0) 9 (−1) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0)

Senses passive Perception 10 Senses passive Perception 10

Languages any one language (usually Common) Languages any one language (usually Common)
Challenge 2 (450 XP) Challenge 0 (10 XP)
Reckless. At the start of its turn, the berserker can gain
advantage on all melee weapon attack rolls during that Actions
turn, but attack rolls against it have advantage until the Club. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
start of its next turn. target. Hit: 2 (1d4) bludgeoning damage.

Actions Crawling Claw

Greataxe. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft., Tiny undead, neutral evil
one target. Hit: 9 (1d12 + 3) slashing damage.
Armor Class 12
Hit Points 2 (1d4)
Black Bear Speed 20 ft., climb 20 ft.
Medium beast, unaligned
Armor Class 11 (natural armor) STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
13 (+1) 14 (+2) 11 (+0) 5 (−3) 10 (+0) 4 (−3)
Hit Points 19 (3d8 + 6)
Speed 40 ft., climb 30 ft. Damage Immunities poison
Condition Immunities charmed, exhaustion, poisoned
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
15 (+2) 10 (+0) 14 (+2) 2 (−4) 12 (+1) 7 (−2) Senses blindsight 30 ft. (blind beyond this radius),
passive Perception 10
Skills Perception +3 Languages understands Common but can’t speak
Senses passive Perception 13 Challenge 0 (10 XP)
Languages — Turn Immunity. The claw is immune to effects that turn
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP) undead.
Keen Smell. The bear has advantage on Wisdom
(Perception) checks that rely on smell. Actions
Claw. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
Actions target. Hit: 3 (1d4 + 1) bludgeoning or slashing damage
Multiattack. The bear makes two attacks: one with its (claw’s choice).
bite and one with its claws.
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing damage.
Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
target. Hit: 7 (2d4 + 2) slashing damage.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 37
Dretch Guard
Small fiend (demon), chaotic evil Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
Armor Class 11 Armor Class 16 (chain shirt, shield)
Hit Points 18 (4d6 + 4) Hit Points 11 (2d8 + 2)
Speed 20 ft. Speed 30 ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
11 (+0) 11 (+0) 12 (+1) 5 (−3) 8 (–1) 3 (−4) 13 (+1) 12 (+1) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 10 (+0)

Damage Resistances cold, fire, lightning Skills Perception +2

Damage Immunities poison Senses passive Perception 12
Condition Immunities charmed, exhaustion, poisoned Languages any one language (usually Common)
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 9 Challenge 1/8 (25 XP)
Languages Abyssal, telepathy 60 ft. (works only with
creatures that understand Abyssal) Actions
Challenge 1/4 (50 XP) Spear. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit,
reach 5 ft. or range 20/60 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d6 +
Actions 1) piercing damage.
Multiattack. The dretch makes two attacks: one with
its bite and one with its claws. Hunter Shark
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft., one Large beast, unaligned
target. Hit: 3 (1d6) piercing damage.
Armor Class 12 (natural armor)
Claw. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
Hit Points 45 (6d10 + 12)
target. Hit: 5 (2d4) slashing damage.
Speed 0 ft., swim 40 ft.
Fetid Cloud (1/Day). A 10-foot radius of disgusting
green gas extends out from the dretch. The gas spreads STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
around corners, and its area is lightly obscured. It lasts 18 (+4) 13 (+1) 15 (+2) 1 (-5) 10 (+0) 4 (-3)
for 1 minute or until a strong wind disperses it. Any
creature that starts its turn in that area must succeed Skills Perception +2
on a DC 11 Constitution saving throw or be poisoned Senses blindsight 30 ft., passive Perception 12
until the start of its next turn. While poisoned in this Languages –
way, the target can take either an action or a bonus Challenge 2 (450 XP)
action on its turn, not both, and can’t take reactions.
Blood Frenzy. The shark has advantage on melee attack
rolls against any creature that doesn’t have all its hit
points.
Water Breathing. The shark can breathe only
underwater.

Actions
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
target. Hit: 13 (2d8 + 4) piercing damage.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 38
Mage Minotaur Skeleton
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment Large undead, lawful evil
Armor Class 12 (15 with mage armor) Armor Class 12 (natural armor)
Hit Points 40 (9d8) Hit Points 67 (9d10 + 18)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 40 ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
9 (−1) 14 (+2) 11 (+0) 17 (+3) 12 (+1) 11 (+0) 18 (+4) 11 (+0) 15 (+2) 6 (−2) 8 (−1) 5 (−3)

Saving Throws Int +6, Wis +4 Damage Vulnerabilities bludgeoning

Skills Arcana +6, History +6 Damage Immunities poison
Senses passive Perception 11 Condition Immunities exhaustion, poisoned
Languages any four languages Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 9
Challenge 6 (2,300 XP) Languages understands Abyssal but can’t speak
Spellcasting. The mage is a 9th-level spellcaster. Its Challenge 2 (450 XP)
spellcasting ability is Intelligence (spell save DC 14, +6 Charge. If the skeleton moves at least 10 feet straight
to hit with spell attacks). The mage has the following toward a target and then hits it with a gore attack on
wizard spells prepared: the same turn, the target takes an extra 9 (2d8)
piercing damage. If the target is a creature, it must
Cantrips (at will): fire bolt, light, mage hand, succeed on a DC 14 Strength saving throw or be
prestidigitation pushed up to 10 feet away and knocked prone.
1st level (4 slots): detect magic, mage armor, magic
Actions
missile, shield
2nd level (3 slots): misty step, suggestion Greataxe. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
3rd level (3 slots): counterspell, fireball, fly one target. Hit: 17 (2d12 + 4) slashing damage.
4th level (3 slots): greater invisibility, ice storm Gore. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
5th level (1 slot): cone of cold target. Hit: 13 (2d8 + 4) piercing damage.

Actions
Noble
Dagger. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
reach 5 ft. or range 20/60 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d4 +
2) piercing damage. Armor Class 15 (breastplate)
Hit Points 9 (2d8)
Speed 30 ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA

11 (+0) 12 (+1) 11 (+0) 12 (+1) 14 (+2) 16 (+3)

Skills Deception +5, Insight +4, Persuasion +5

Senses passive Perception 10
Languages any two languages
Challenge 1/8 (25 XP)

Actions
Rapier. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 5 (1d8 + 1) piercing damage.

Reactions
Parry. The noble adds 2 to its AC against one melee
attack that would hit it. To do so, the noble must see
the attacker and be wielding a melee weapon.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 39
Panther Polar Bear
Medium beast, unaligned Large beast, unaligned
Armor Class 12 Armor Class 12 (natural armor)
Hit Points 13 (3d8) Hit Points 42 (5d10 + 15)
Speed 50 ft., climb 40 ft. Speed 40 ft., swim 30 ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
14 (+2) 15 (+2) 10 (+0) 3 (−4) 14 (+2) 7 (−2) 20 (+5) 10 (+0) 16 (+3) 2 (−4) 13 (+1) 7 (−2)

Skills Perception +4, Stealth +6 Skills Perception +3

Senses passive Perception 14 Senses passive Perception 13
Languages — Languages —
Challenge 1/4 (50 XP) Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Keen Smell. The panther has advantage on Wisdom Keen Smell. The bear has advantage on Wisdom
(Perception) checks that rely on smell. (Perception) checks that rely on smell.
Pounce. If the panther moves at least 20 feet straight
Actions
toward a creature and then hits it with a claw attack on
the same turn, that target must succeed on a DC 12 Multiattack. The bear makes two attacks: one with its
Strength saving throw or be knocked prone. If the bite and one with its claws.
target is prone, the panther can make one bite attack Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
against it as a bonus action. target. Hit: 9 (1d8 + 5) piercing damage.
Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
Actions
target. Hit: 12 (2d6 + 5) slashing damage.
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing damage.
Reef Shark
Claw. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
Medium beast, unaligned
target. Hit: 4 (1d4 + 2) slashing damage.
Armor Class 12 (natural armor)
Hit Points 22 (4d8 + 4)
Speed 0 ft., swim 40 ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA

14 (+2) 13 (+1) 13 (+1) 1 (-5) 10 (+0) 4 (-3)

Skills Perception +2
Senses blindsight 30 ft., passive Perception 12
Languages –
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)

Pack Tactics. The shark has advantage on an attack roll

against a creature if at least one of the shark’s allies is
within 5 feet of the creature and the ally isn’t
incapacitated.
Water Breathing. The shark can breathe only
underwater.

Actions
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
target. Hit: 6 (1d8 + 2) piercing damage.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 40
Saber-Toothed Tiger Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5
Large beast, unaligned ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing damage.
Longbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, ranged
Armor Class 12
150/600 ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d8 + 2) piercing
Hit Points 52 (7d10 + 14)
damage.
Speed 40 ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Shadow Demon

18 (+4) 14 (+2) 15 (+2) 3 (−4) 12 (+1) 8 (−1)
Medium fiend (demon), chaotic evil
Skills Perception +3, Stealth +6 Armor Class 13
Senses passive Perception 13 Hit Points 66 (12d8 + 12)
Languages — Speed 30 ft., fly 30 ft.
Challenge 2 (450 XP)
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Keen Smell. The tiger has advantage on Wisdom 1 (−5) 17 (+3) 12 (+1) 14 (+2) 13 (+1) 14 (+2)
(Perception) checks that rely on smell.
Pounce. If the tiger moves at least 20 feet straight Saving Throws Dex +5, Cha +4
toward a creature and then hits it with a claw attack on Skills Stealth +7
the same turn, that target must succeed on a DC 14 Damage Vulnerabilities radiant
Strength saving throw or be knocked prone. If the Damage Resistances acid, fire, necrotic, thunder;
target is prone, the tiger can make one bite attack bludgeoning, piercing, and slashing from nonmagical
against it as a bonus action. attacks
Damage Immunities cold, lightning, poison
Actions Condition Immunities exhaustion, grappled, paralyzed,
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft., one petrified, poisoned, prone, restrained
target. Hit: 10 (1d10 + 5) piercing damage. Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 11
Claw. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft., one Languages Abyssal, telepathy 120 ft.
target. Hit: 12 (2d6 + 5) slashing damage. Challenge 4 (1,100 XP)
Incorporeal Movement. The demon can move through
other creatures and objects as if they were difficult
Scout
terrain. It takes 5 (1d10) force damage if it ends its turn
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
inside an object.
Armor Class 13 (leather armor) Light Sensitivity. While in bright light, the demon has
Hit Points 16 (3d8 + 3) disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on Wisdom
Speed 30 ft. (Perception) checks that rely on sight.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Shadow Stealth. While in dim light or darkness, the
11 (+0) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 11 (+0) 13 (+1) 11 (+0) demon can take the Hide action as a bonus action.

Skills Nature +4, Perception +5, Stealth +6, Survival +5 Actions

Senses passive Perception 15 Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
Languages any one language (usually Common) creature. Hit: 10 (2d6 + 3) psychic damage or, if the
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP) demon had advantage on the attack roll, 17 (4d6 + 3)
Keen Hearing and Sight. The scout has advantage on psychic damage.
Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on hearing or
sight.

Actions
Multiattack. The scout makes two melee attacks or
two ranged attacks.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 41
Skeleton Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5
Medium undead, lawful evil ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing damage.
Hand Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit,
Armor Class 13 (armor scraps)
range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing
Hit Points 13 (2d8 + 4)
damage.
Speed 30 ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Tiger

10 (+0) 14 (+2) 15 (+2) 6 (−2) 8 (−1) 5 (−3)
Large beast, unaligned
Damage Vulnerabilities bludgeoning Armor Class 12
Damage Immunities poison Hit Points 37 (5d10 + 10)
Condition Immunities exhaustion, poisoned Speed 40 ft.
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 9
Languages understands all languages it knew in life but STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
17 (+3) 15 (+2) 14 (+2) 3 (-4) 12 (+1) 8 (-1)
can’t speak
Challenge 1/4 (50 XP)
Skills Perception +3, Stealth +4
Actions Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 13
Languages –
Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5
Challenge 1 (200 XP)
ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing damage.
Cunning Action. The tiger has advantage on Wisdom
Shortbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, range
(Perception) checks that rely on smell.
80/320 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing damage.
Pounce. If the tiger moves at least 20 feet straight
toward a creature and then hits it with a claw attack on
Spy the same turn, that target must succeed on a DC 13
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment Strength saving throw or be knocked prone. If the
Armor Class 12 target is prone, the tiger can make one bite attack
Hit Points 27 (6d8) against it as a bonus action.
Speed 30 ft.
Actions
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
10 (+0) 15 (+2) 10 (+0) 12 (+1) 14 (+2) 16 (+3) target. Hit: 8 (1d10 + 3) piercing damage.
Claw. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
Skills Deception +5, Insight +4, Investigation +5,
target. Hit: 7 (1d8 + 3) slashing damage.
Perception +6, Persuasion +5, Sleight of Hand +4,
Stealth +4
Senses passive Perception 16
Languages any two languages
Challenge 1 (200 XP)
Cunning Action. On each of its turns, the spy can use a
bonus action to take the Dash, Disengage, or Hide
action.
Sneak Attack (1/Turn). The spy deals an extra 7 (2d6)
damage when it hits a target with a weapon attack and
has advantage on the attack roll, or when the target is
within 5 feet of an ally of the spy that isn’t
incapacitated and the spy doesn’t have disadvantage
on the attack roll.

Actions
Multiattack. The spy makes two melee attacks.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 42
Thug
Medium humanoid (any race), any non-good alignment
Armor Class 11 (leather armor)
Hit Points 32 (5d8 + 10)
Speed 30 ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA

15 (+2) 11 (+0) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 11 (+0)

Skills Intimidation +2
Senses passive Perception 10
Languages any one language (usually Common)
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
Pack Tactics. The thug has advantage on an attack roll
against a creature if at least one of the thug’s allies is
within 5 feet of the creature and the ally isn’t
incapacitated.

Actions
Multiattack. The thug makes two melee attacks.
Mace. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
creature. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) bludgeoning damage.
Heavy Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +2 to hit,
range 100/400 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d10) piercing
damage.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 43
Handout 1: Public Notice – Help Wanted

HELP WANTED

Lieutenant Liza Tarheels offers easy money for those who can
handle themselves in a scrap. Adventurers interested in helping
protect the city of Melvaunt should report to the Lieutenant’s
office in Asberyth at six bells tomorrow.

--Posted by the Melvaunt City Watch

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 44
Handout 2: List of Newcomers

Mysterious Newcomers
1. Brea Salvadine – An ambassador from Mulmaster refusing to
move her entourage from the Asberyth Square until she is seen
by the Council of Iron.
2. Mericor Tasgaf – A moon elf cleric of Waukeen providing
expensive business seminars and retreats for struggling
merchants in a sea cave outside Melvaunt.
3. Cloisternook Gnomes – A family of hard-drinking gnomes with a
camp near a defunct diamond mine outside of Melvaunt.
4. Parabald the Maimed – A mad dragonborn mage who plays
chess with imaginary friends by the docks each day.
5. Order of Wandering Tales – This odd group of monk scholars
asks everyone probing questions and stays at Brogan Summer
Shack near the docks.
6. Ghost Ship – A red-sailed vessel appears in the harbor every day
just after dusk and sails off right before dawn. This ship appears
to be the fabled ghost ship Bloody Dawn. Rowboats are at the
dock for you.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil 45
 SONGS OF LAW & CHAOS
Omens speak of an old and forgotten power located within a played-out diamond mine in the
foothills of Thar, and some believe that might be a solution to the current problems facing
Melvaunt—or possibly the cause of them. With danger closing in, someone has to investigate.

A 4-hour adventure for 1st-4th level characters

ALAN PATRICK
Adventure Designer
Adventure Code: CORE 2-2

Producer: Baldman Games

Core Administrator: Shawn Merwin
Development, Editing and Layout: Encoded Designs
Cartography: Jay Africa
Organized Play: Chris Lindsay
D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall, Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks, Alan
Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League, all other Wizards
of the Coast product names, and their respective logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive likenesses are property of Wizards of the
Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America. Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the
express written permission of Wizards of the Coast.

©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31, 2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4 The Square,
Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 1
Introduction
Welcome to Songs of Law & Chaos, a D&D
Adventurers League adventure.
This adventure is designed for three to seven 1st -
4 level characters, and is optimized for five 3rd
th
level characters.
The adventure is set in the Moonsea region of the
Forgotten Realms, in and around the city of
Melvaunt.
The D&D Adventurers
League
This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of the
D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure,
players track their characters’ experience, treasure,
and other rewards, and can take those characters
through other adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a store
event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a DCI
number. This number is your official Wizards of the
Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have a
number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to use
to create and advance their characters. Players can
continue to play their characters after the storyline
season has finished, possibly participating in a
second or third storyline with those same characters.
A character’s level is the only limitation for
adventure play. A player cannot use a character of a
level higher or lower than the level range of a D&D
Adventurers League adventure.
For more information on playing, running games
as a Dungeon Master, and organizing games for the
D&D Adventurers League, please visit the D&D
Adventurers League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Preparing the Adventure
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
 Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
 Read through the adventure, taking notes of
anything you’d like to highlight or remind yourself
while running the adventure, such as a way you’d
like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d like to use
in a combat.
 Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
 Gather together any resources you’d like to use to
aid you in running this adventure--such as
notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and
battlemaps.
 If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.
Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
 Character name and level
 Character race and class
 Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most common
passive ability check
 Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, etc.)
Players that have characters outside the adventure’s
level range cannot participate in the adventure
with those characters. Players with ineligible
characters can make a new 1st-level character or use
a pregenerated character. Players can play an
adventure they previously played or ran as a
Dungeon Master, but not with the same character.
Ensure that each player has an official adventure
logsheet for his or her character (if not, get one from
the organizer). The player fills out the adventure
name, session number, date, and your name and DCI
number. In addition, the player also fills in the
starting values for experience, gold, downtime,
renown, and number of permanent magic items. He
or she fill in the other values and write notes at the
conclusion of the session. Each player is responsible
for maintaining an accurate logsheet.
CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 2
 If you have time, you can do a quick scan of a Determining Party Strength
player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing looks
Party Composition Party Strength
out of order. If you see magic items of very high
3-4 characters, APL less than Very Weak
rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you can
ask players to provide documentation for the 3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict item 3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
use or ask them to use a standard ability score array. 5 characters, APL less than Weak
Point players to the D&D Adventurers League Player’s 5 characters, APL equivalent Average
Guide for reference. 5 characters, APL greater than Strong
If players wish to spend downtime days and it’s 6-7 characters, APL less than Average
the beginning of an adventure or episode, they can 6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
declare their activity and spend the days now. 6-7 characters, APL greater than Very Strong
Alternatively, they can do so at the end of the

Running the Adventure

adventure or episode. Players should select their
characters’ spells and other daily options prior to
the start of the adventure, unless the adventure
specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread the
adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, you may see sidebars to
help make adjustments for smaller/larger groups,
and characters of higher/lower levels than the
optimized group. Most of the time, this is used for
combat encounters.
You may adjust the adventure beyond the
guidelines given. For example, if you’re playing with
a group of inexperienced players, you might want to
make the adventure a little easier; for very
experienced players, you may want to make it a little
harder. Therefore, five categories of party strength
have been created for you to use as a guide. Feel free
to use a different adjustment during the adventure if
the recommended party strength feels off for the
group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of five
3rd-level characters. To figure out whether you
need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
 Add up the total levels of all the characters
 Divide the total by the number of characters
 Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round
fractions of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table:
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment of
the game for the players. You help guide the
narrative and bring the words on these pages to life.
The outcome of a fun game session often creates
stories that live well beyond the play at the table.
Always follow this golden rule when you DM for a
group:
Make decisions and adjudications that enhance
the fun of the adventure when possible.
To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
 You are empowered to make adjustments to the
adventure and make decisions about how the
group interacts with the world of this adventure.
Doing so is especially important and applicable
outside of combat, but feel free to adjust the
adventure for groups that are having too easy or
too hard of a time.
 Don’t make the adventure too easy or too difficult
for a group. Never being challenged makes for a
boring game and being overwhelmed makes for a
frustrating one. Gauge the experience of the
players (not the characters) with the game, try to
feel out (or ask) what they like in a game, and
attempt to give each of them the experience
they’re after when they play D&D. Give everyone a
chance to shine.
 Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game session
moving along appropriately. Watch for stalling,
since play loses momentum when this happens. At
the same time, make sure that the players don’t
finish too early; provide them with a full play
experience. Try to be aware of running long or
short. Adjust the pacing accordingly

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 3
 Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free to Spell services generally available include healing
modify the text as you see fit, especially when and recovery spells, as well as information-gathering
dialogue is present. spells. Other spell services might be available as
 Give the players appropriate hints so they can specified in the adventure. The number of spells
make informed choices about how to proceed. available to be cast as a service is limited to a
Players should be given clues and hints when maximum of three per day total, unless otherwise
appropriate so they can tackle puzzles, combat, noted.
and interactions without getting frustrated over
lack of information. Doing so helps to encourage
Spellcasting Services
immersion in the adventure and gives players Spell Cost
“little victories” for figuring out good choices from Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
clues. Identify 20 gp
Lesser restoration 40 gp
In short, being the DM isn’t about following the
Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about
Remove curse 90 gp
facilitating a fun, challenging game environment for
the players. The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has more Speak with dead 90 gp
information on the art of running a D&D game. Divination 210 gp
Greater restoration 450 gp
Raise dead 1,250 gp
Downtime and Lifestyle
At the beginning of each play session, players must Acolyte Background
declare whether or not they are spending any days A character possessing the acolyte background requesting
of downtime. The player records the downtime spellcasting services at a temple of his or her faith may
spent on the adventure logsheet. The following request one spell per day from the Spellcasting Services table
options are available to players during downtime for free. The only cost paid for the spell is the base price for
(see the D&D basic rules or the D&D Adventurers the consumed material component, if any.
League Player’s Guide for more information):
 Catching up Disease, Death, and Recovery
 Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
commit to crafting a single item)
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might not
 Practicing a profession
have the same characters return from session to
 Recuperating
session, here are the rules when bad things happen
 Spellcasting services to characters.
 Training
Other downtime options might be available during Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating
adventures or unlocked through play, including Effects
faction-specific activities. A character still affected by diseases, poisons, and
In addition, whenever a character spends other similar effects at the conclusion of an
downtime days, that character also spends the adventure can spend downtime days recuperating
requisite expense for his or her lifestyle. Costs are until such time as he or she resolves the effect to its
per day, so a character that spends ten days of conclusion (see the recuperating activity in the D&D
downtime also spends ten days of expenses Basic Rules).
maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some downtime If a character doesn’t resolve the effect between
activities help with lifestyle expenses or add lifestyle sessions, that character begins the next session still
expenses. affected by the debilitating effect.

Spellcasting Services Death

Any settlement the size of a town or larger can
provide some spellcasting services. Characters need
to be able to travel to the settlement to obtain these
services.
A character who is killed during the course of the
adventure has a few options at the end of the session
(or whenever arriving back in civilization) if no one
in the adventuring party has immediate access to a
raise dead or revivify spell, or similar magic. A

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 4

character subject to a raise dead spell is affected
negatively until all long rests have been completed
during an adventure. Alternatively, each downtime
day spent after raise dead reduces the penalty to
attack rolls, saving throws, and ability checks by 1, in
addition to any other benefits the downtime activity
might provide.
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any of
the other options, the player creates a new character.
The new character does not have any items or
rewards possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing any
vital organs and is mostly whole) and the player
would like the character to be returned to life, the
party can take the body back to civilization and use
the dead character’s funds to pay for a raise dead
spell. A raise dead spell cast in this manner costs the
character 1,250 gp.
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As above,
except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for the raise
dead spell is paid for by the party at the end of the
session. Other characters are under no obligation to
spend their funds to bring back a dead party
member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to 4
and a member of a faction, the dead character’s body
can be returned to civilization and a patron from the
faction ensures that he or she receives a raise dead
spell. However, any character invoking this charity
forfeits all experience and rewards from that session
(both those earned prior to and after death during
that session) and cannot replay that episode or
adventure with that character again. Once a
character reaches 5th level, this option is no longer
available.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
The Situation in Melvaunt
The walls of Melvaunt resemble Swiss cheese, but
the city still stands. While the Orc Baron of Thar and
his forces assaulted the city, a portal that was part of
a modron plot to take over Melvaunt was
miraculously moved outside the walls by a brave
group of adventurers with the assistance of
Truushee the Sage. That portal unleashed the
modron legion into the orc forces just after the
marauders breached the city walls in several
locations. The ensuing battle between the orcs and
modrons allowed the forces of Melvaunt to
successfully defend the city.
In the aftermath of the battle, Melvaunt is in
turmoil politically. The City Watch has been
depleted, with many of their best and brightest
killed in the recent events. The people of Melvaunt
have hastily patched up the walls and are doing their
best to repair them to their former strength. Beyond
the walls, bands of orcs and modrons still roam the
area, occasionally attacking the weak spots. While
the orcs and modrons are no longer a threat to the
city itself, citizens and travelers in the area have
been killed. Occasionally groups of modrons,
trapped away from their home, still attempt to
follow their last orders of taking over Melvaunt. A
pentadrone called “Sleepie” (SL33P13-773P) has
broken away from the modron collective and is
assisting the City Watch in dealing with the modrons
in the area.
Then there are the Lords. Political power has a
way of moving hands in the wake of disastrous
events. The Lord of Keys and The Lord of Waves
have declared themselves the temporary rulers of
Melvaunt, but murmurs are already starting to
cascade around the Merchant’s Council. Is this just a
temporary situation or a power play by the two
Lords to wrest all the power and wealth of Melvaunt
for themselves? To make matters worse, a Red
Wizard of Thay was killed during the recent events,
and the Red Wizards don’t approve of their own
being killed. An emissary of the Red Wizards has
been sent to determine what happened and who
might be to blame.
While Melvaunt has dodged the executioner’s axe
this time, the city’s head still looks like it might be on
the chopping block.
CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 5
Adventure Background
There are growing concerns among the people of
Melvaunt that the strife of the Moonsea may soon be
upon them – or that it already is. The Maimed
Virulence laid siege to Phlan, and though it was
rebuffed, the damage will be evidenced for years.
Demons assaulted Hillsfar and the surrounding
region. Mulmaster has been brought low by
elemental cults and is now firmly under the thumb
of the nation of Thay.
A gnomish family called the Cloisternooks recently
re-purchased one of their old mines, Darkglitter
Depths, from the city of Melvaunt under the guise of
introducing new methods of extracting diamonds
from the tapped-out veins. However, the old
patriarch – Fizzlebottom Cloisternook –knows more
than he let on, and he took right away to establishing
an arcane teleportation engine deep inside
Darkglitter Depths. Further exploration revealed an
open vent that leads deep into the Underdark, letting
the gnomes tunnel through solid stone in some
places and muddy rooms in others. Unlike most
mining operations, there was no consistent
environment – and this typically represents both
danger and the potential of great, unnatural riches!
Fizzlebottom is no fool, though, and has backup
plans for his backup plans.
Meanwhile, a cult of Cyric seeks to bring an avatar
of that mad god into the world. They have learned of
Fizzlebottom’s new creation and wish to pervert it
for their own uses; they believe that if they can twist
the runic engine to their own ends, they may be able
to open a portal that will allow the God of Deceit to
walk the world once more. Their methods are
desperate and made all the more dangerous for it.
Should the faithful of Cyric gain unrestricted
access to the engine, Melvaunt may be in for a world
of trouble.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Overview
This adventure is divided into multiple parts.
Part 1. By chance or divine fortune, the characters
come upon Fizzlebottom Cloisternook, a cranky old
gnome that recently purchased the defunct diamond
mine Darkglitter Depths. He is drunk out of his mind
and babbling about “the cur” and “wormy little splat.”
Once sober he begs for help from the characters,
saying that cultists of Cyric have taken his children
and nephews hostage and that nobody in Melvaunt
will listen.
Part 2. The land surrounding the mine is
shrouded in permanent illusions and enchantments
that hide the true location and condition of the mine
from prying eyes and passers-by. Once the maze can
be navigated, though, the true nature of the area
becomes apparent: the mine is active and slowly but
surely excavating diamonds and other valuable ores.
However, the automatons that provide the labor
send the materials deeper into the earth, and no
wagons or trade caravans are present.
As they descend into the depths, the characters
quickly find that others have been here recently. A
petrified cultist of Cyric and the appearance of an old
friend provides strength for Fizzlebottom’s earlier
comments (or a hook for those that may have
otherwise missed his conversation). Dodging cave-
ins and horrific beasts, the adventurers must find
their way to the end of the complex!
Part 3. Now deep within Darkglitter Depths, the
characters find that Fizzlebottom’s teleportation
apparatus has been tampered with and that
something is attempting to enter this world.
Seemingly powered by the life energy of the gnomes
and the enthralled cultists of Cyric, this arcane
engine represents a glimpse of a fate much worse
than death.
CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 6
Adventure Hooks
Played CORE 2-1. Characters that have already
played CORE 2-1 are contacted by Parabald the
Maimed. He has spotted Fizzlebottom Cloisternook,
the eldest of the Cloisternook gnomes, sprawled
upon the steps to the Purple Portals, the primary
temple to Gond in this region. The gnome is drunk
(more so than normal, which is no small feat) and
babbling about the abduction of his family.
Worshipers of Gond. While paying their respects
to the Wonderbringer in Melvaunt, the characters
are asked to remove a drunken and disorderly
gnome from the front steps of the temple.
Wealthy or Aristocratic Lifestyle. Characters that
have wealthy or aristocratic lifestyles have heard
that the Cloisternook gnomes are seeking to reopen
their recently-acquired diamond mine, Darkglitter
Depths. More information can be had at the temple
of Gond the Wonderbringer, where it is said that the
gnomes often congregate.
Keepin’ it Weird. Some characters may not be in
the city at all or meet the above hook notes. In that
case skip Part 1 “My God Says…” and proceed
directly to Part 2. Please note that this may cause
some players to have a less-than-satisfactory
experience, so you are strongly encouraged to move
the roleplay notes and background information into
the rest of the adventure as needed. NOTE: this hook
may work well for time-sensitive environments like
convention play, or for tables that have expressed a
lessened interest in roleplaying.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Designer’s Notes
This adventure plays best when your players have
already experienced CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil. If
they have not, or if they are intending to play that
adventure after this one, some story elements may
be lost on the players. It is strongly recommended
that you pay close attention to the sidebars in the
roleplay encounters here, and that you favor
character-centered events and comments over the
prescribed text in these encounters.
Using this adventure as a framework from which
you build a customized experience for your group of
players is not only expected, but it is highly
encouraged!
Lastly, this adventure deals with a very niche deity
of the Forgotten Realms: Kezef the Chaos Hound.
The final encounter features an agent of this
nefarious being, but the focus should be on the
matter-at-hand, not the history of the deity itself. In
short: Kezef seeks to devour the souls of those that
revere one deity above all others; characters that are
more accepting or freely worship at multiple
temples are simply less appealing.
CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 7

Part 1. My God Says…
The Purple Portals: Science for Fun
and Prophet
Expected Duration: 30 minutes
Fizzlebottom Cloisternook, a very drunken gnome, sits
upon the stairs to the Purple Portals, the temple of
Gond. This building serves many purposes, including
lecture hall, library, research laboratory, magical
academy (of sorts), but most importantly as a place
where citizens and visitors can worship Gond the
Wonderbringer, god of artifice, craft, and construction.
General Features
The general features of Melvaunt are as follows:
Light and Visibility. There is a permanent low-
hanging smog cloud around this city thanks to the
plethora of blacksmith shops and smelters. Though
this is considered normal light, everything is covered
in soot and grime.
Smells and Sounds. The city smells of sweat,
burning metal, industry, and grime. The cursing calls
of warehouse workers can be heard all over the city,
and the streets ring with the clack of wagon wheels
and trade.
A dirty, drunken gnome sprawls across the steps that lead to
the doors of the Purple Portals. Though this place is a temple
to Gond the Wonderbringer, the language that the gnome is
spouting is not divine in any sense; he utters curses and
threats while choking back tears. For someone who is lying
down, his volume is actually quite impressive. A large
brownish splash can be seen on the steps, with a broken mug
in the middle.
Characters that choose to listen to the gnome’s rant
can hear the following:
 (In Gnomish) “Those stinking sons of… have my
chil’ren!”
 (In Common) “Help! Neee’ heeeeeeeeeeellllp… !”
 He sings snippets from a gnomish funeral dirge.
 (In Common) “Cyric be damned. DAMNED! Needs
to be put down, I tell ya, PUT DOWN!”
 Create appropriate babble as befitting a
belligerent, drunken gnome
Any character that played through CORE 2-1 Tales of
Good & Evil will likely have interacted with
Fizzlebottom Cloisternook and recognize him
immediately. He looks pretty bad off, even for him. The
cranky old gnome has been crying for quite some time;
his eyes are puffy and red.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Give the characters time to consider their options. If
the characters fail to interact with the gnome, or simply
spend too much time debating on what to do, read the
following:
Three humans clad in scale mail and sporting razor-sharp
longswords approach the gnome. While he plays at being a
deadweight, two of the men lift him by his arms, causing his
feet to dangle helplessly. The third man proceeds to read him
a list of violations:
“Gnome, you are hereby placed under arrest for the
following transgressions: disturbing the peace, disturbing the
faithful, street-calling without a permit, being drunk in public,
defacing a holy temple, truancy, verbal assault, harassment,
and being a nuisance. Perhaps a trip to the Livestock Pens will
clear your head.”
They walk away, the gnome’s legs spinning as if he is trying
to run but unable to touch the flagstones. He catches your
eyes and mouths “help me” while giving his most pitiful face.
Those that witness this interaction should make a
DC 10 Wisdom (Insight) or Intelligence (History)
check. If they succeed, they can tell that this is a
trumped-up list of charges, and the “guards” are not
official representatives of any power group in
Melvaunt. All characters also know that the
“Livestock Pens” in Melvaunt are not actually for
livestock, but rather for open-air slave sales and
auctions.
In the rare circumstance that the characters allow
Fizzlebottom to be taken to the Livestock Pens, they
earn the Enmity of the Cloisternooks story award;
do not hand this out until the end of the game
session. The adventure does not end here, though –
simply proceed to Part 2 and advance as though the
characters had taken the Keepin’ it Weird story
hook. It is a safe assumption that the characters
would leave Melvaunt eventually, and finding a holy
symbol of Cyric on the road should garner some
attention from intrepid adventurers!
Should the characters choose to intervene, the
“guards” are willing to release Fizzlebottom for the
cost of 25 gp; the gnome nods his head no matter the
cost and blurts out that he will “make it worth their
while!”.
This is not intended as a combat encounter, but
these fake guards are followers of Cyric, and they
want to take the gnome for their own purposes.
They unceremoniously drop the gnome and attack
the characters if it looks like any opposition is going
to be put forward. They use the stats of bandit
captains and use longswords instead of scimitars.
Characters should be informed that combat with
these men is likely to be dangerous and life-
CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 8
threatening; very strong tables can offer double the
stated ransom to avoid combat, but only during the
first turn of combat.
Tactics
Should the characters attack the guards, they bellow
out “For the glory of the Black Sun!” and attack. No
Religion check is needed for the characters to know this
is a reference to Cyric, the God of Trickery and Lies.
If the Cyric worshippers defeat the adventurers, they
simply leave the unconscious characters on the street.
Fizzlebottom is escorted away.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this combat
encounter. These are not cumulative. Fizzlebottom
Cloisternook is too drunk to fight.
 Very strong party: the guards seek to kill the characters,
informing citizens in the area that “these foul cultists must
be put down”
 All other parties: the guards deal nonlethal damage and
attempt to run away when possible
But *I* Worship Cyric, Too!
If one or more of the characters worships Cyric, they
can take possession of Fizzlebottom by simply flashing
their holy symbol and crafting an appropriate lie about
why he is important to their plans. Allow the worshiper
of Cyric to make a DC 10 Intelligence (Religion) or
Charisma (Persuasion/Deception) check; they have
advantage on this roll. On a failure, the guards attack,
saying “Your deception is simpler than a child’s!” Even
on a success, Fizzlebottom does not trust this character
and may be slow to trust the other characters in this
encounter.
Development
Once Fizzlebottom’s freedom has been secured and he
sobers up a bit, he can give the following information to
the characters:
 A dozen well-dressed nobles showed up at the
mine yesterday, promising great riches if he would
sell them the mine. When he refused, the men
simply told him “A Dark Sun rises over this place.”
and took him and his family hostage.
 He managed to escape by wriggling out of their
grip and running to the ore transporter deep
inside the mine, but he is ashamed that he could
not protect his family. The men spoke of “breaking
the egg” and held a scroll inscribed with arcane
formulae that seemed to have a dual focus of
teleportation and conjuration (he slurs out that he
was a wizard until he learned better).
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
 “Get to the ore transporter – the machine, you’ll
know it when you see it - and follow the sigils. No
magic needed! I made it so that any thick-skulled
dwarf could use it.” He goes on to explain that ‘the
machine’ teleports ore and gems from the mine
directly to the workshops within the Purple
Portals, and that a set of instructions for the sigils
can be found in the foreman’s office at the mine.
 DC 16 Charisma (Persuasion): “The machine sits
upon a nexus of energies, deep within the world. I
plan to use it as a node to interface with other
teleportation circles around the world. Just
imagine the ores in the Underdark that we could
harvest with the just the click of a button! The
good that we can do!”
Fizzlebottom promises riches to the characters if they
can recover his family and secure his mine. He blurts
out “diamonds!” if the characters ask him for specifics
about these riches. He can describe the location of the
mine and tells the characters how to quickly navigate
the illusions surrounding the place.
Should any of the characters admonish him for
endeavoring to establish a teleportation network so
close to Melvaunt – and well-hidden – he responds
simply with “Gond’s plan protects us all.”
Roleplaying Fizzlebottom Cloisternook
Fizzlebottom Cloisternook is old, kind, smart, and often
intoxicated. When it comes to his family’s secrets he’s rather
tight-lipped, but when he’s drunk, he can’t resist dropping a
few hints. While roleplaying Fizzlebottom, you might:
 Speak in a gravelly, slightly slurred voice.
 Tell a lot of corny jokes.
 Laugh very loud and slap your knee when something funny
happens.
 Whisper conspiratorially when sharing hints about the
Cloisternook family’s secrets.
Fizzlebottom rummages into his pockets and
produces three beautiful obsidian stones, saying
“these are yours, and more where they came from—
just get my family back”.
XP Awards
If the characters successfully negotiate for the
peaceful release of Fizzlebottom Cloisternook, award
each character 100 XP.
Treasure
Fizzlebottom’s three pieces of obsidian are worth
100 gp each. The guards carry no valuable treasure,
though each of their longswords has a holy crest of
Cyric set into the pommel.
CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 9

Part 2. Darkglitter Depths
Mine or Hole in the Ground, it’s
Home!
Expected Duration: 3 hours total
The adventurers arrive at Darkglitter Depths, a
diamond mine owned by the Cloisternook Gnomes.
General Features
The land surrounding Darkglitter Depths has the
following characteristics:
Light and Visibility. The sun shines brightly in
the late morning sky. Visibility is normal on this very
comfortable, casual day.
Sounds. Generic wildlife calls can be easily heard.
Characters that pass a DC 15 Wisdom (Insight) check
realize that the sounds of the wildlife are actually on
a repeated loop.
The road continues in a generally eastern direction away
from Melvaunt, with nothing seemingly out of the ordinary –
until you notice the etched sigil of Cyric, god of lies and
betrayal, in the center of the road. Roughly hewn, it is
unmistakable in design and is oriented in such a way to
indicate passage off the road.
If the characters have encountered the Cloisternook
gnomes in CORE 2-1 Tales of Good & Evil or received
instruction from Fizzlebottom Cloisternook earlier
in this adventure, read the following:
The home of the Cloisternook gnomes is nearby, and the
presence of the holy symbol of Cyric is particularly
troublesome. You quickly navigate the mundane and
repeated trees and paths as you trek away from the road
towards Darkglitter Depths. After nearly an hour, you arrive
in the camp.
If the characters have not spoken with Fizzlebottom,
have not played CORE 2-1, or otherwise find
themselves out here with no other explanation, read
the following:
Once you leave the road, the terrain becomes unfamiliar very
quickly. Oddly, though, for every several dozen steps you
take you find that you are looking at similar environments to
those you just walked through; you see the same trees and
hear the same animal calls over and over. It is as if someone
has gone to great trouble to place a significant number of
illusion spells over this place.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Allow the players some creative license here; if they
have inventive skill checks or wish to use spells, you
should not only confirm that they are indeed
walking through illusory terrain, but that they are
walking in circles. If they simply proceed in a
straight line to the north, they will find the
operations area of Darkglitter Depths – and further
evidence of the cultists of Cyric – after one hour.
Otherwise, it takes them four hours of travel (and
causes them to very likely be incredibly bored).
Operations and the Surface
Expected Duration: 20 minutes
Colorful tents dot the area here, and only one building has
been erected. Beyond those, a huge circular pit has been
painstakingly dug into the ground. It is easily a quarter-mile
across, and you can see the screw-like path that winds down
into the depths, clinging to the side of the pit. This must be
Darkglitter Depths.
A DC 15 Intelligence (Nature) check can be made
here; on a success, that character recognizes the size
of the mine to indicate that it is quite old, and this
sort of appearance often indicates that it has been
tapped out. Any character that has experience as a
miner or is a dwarf automatically succeeds on this
check. Additionally, anyone that played CORE 2-1
spots the tip of a large drill poking from one of the
tents; this is Big Billy, the drilling rig that the gnomes
engineered to be fueled by a special moonshine
concoction. It appears to have been mostly repaired,
but is still non-functional for the purposes of this
adventure.
An investigation of the tents and surrounding area
reveals little of value. The symbol of Cyric has been
marked on the door of the foreman’s building, and
another one has been constructed by assembling
rocks near the edge of the pit. Inside the foreman’s
office, the characters automatically find Handout 1.
This is an arcane schematic that details a modified
teleportation circle; a spellcaster can record this
information by taking the schematic (or coming back
later) and spending 1 downtime day studying the
runes and sigils. If they do, and they have already
found the physical location of the circle deep
underground, they can mark this in their adventure
log as a teleportation circle for future use. If they do
not spend a downtime day, this schematic serves no
purpose.
There are four bottles marked Recipe 44 and one
wax-sealed bottle marked Recipe 45 in the
CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 10
foreman’s office. While being close in quality to
moonshine, these potent alcohols are also extremely
flammable and can be used as alchemist’s fire if so
desired. Five sets of climbing gear can be recovered
from the office, as well as a healer’s kit (only three
uses remain) and an ornate holy symbol of Gond
worth 15 gp if the characters choose to take it.
In each of the tents and in several other places
around the camp, signs of a struggle can be plainly
seen. The tracks – human and gnomish – lead to the
pit. Characters that succeed on a DC 10 Wisdom
(Survival) check can tell that four humans and five
gnomes made these tracks about two days ago, and
that they were accompanied by a large number of
scampering kobolds.
Optional/ Variable Encounter
If the characters arrived here without first speaking with
Fizzlebottom Cloisternook in Melvaunt, they may need some
convincing that this mine is worthy of their investigative
efforts. If the characters are a strong or very strong party,
run one of the following encounters, even if they spoke with
the gnome already:
 Melee-strong party: one bandit captain and two cult
fanatics of Cyric
 Magic-strong party: two bandit captains, two cultists of
Cyric, and three kobolds.
 Evenly-balanced party: one bandit captain, one cult
fanatic of Cyric, four cultists of Cyric
All of the humans wear the sign of Cyric of upon their robes
and armor, and the bandit captains function the same way as
the guards in Part 1. None of these enemies carry any
appreciable wealth, and they have standard holy symbols of
Cyric.
Descending Beneath the Earth
When the characters decide to descend into the
depths, read the following:
Peering over the edge into Darkglitter Depths, the wind lets
out a mournful howl. The scent of something foul wafts up to
greet you, and the yawning hole in the earth seemingly
beckons you to come down.
Following the winding path around the mine’s edge
and into the depths isn’t particularly taxing, though
the dirt is quite loose – particularly near the edges. If
the characters wish to walk around the path, there is
no challenge presented but it does take two hours. If
the characters decide to expedite the trip and move
from the top of the mine directly toward the mine
entrance nearly 100 ft. below, they can – but they
will each need to succeed on a DC 14 Dexterity
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
(Acrobatics) check or else lose their footing in the
loose stones, sending them tumbling 2d6 x 10 ft. and
taking necessary falling damage. Any character using
climbing gear or taking necessary precautions
(typically involving the expenditure of resources)
has advantage on this check.
Development
Once the characters reach the bottom of the pit, they
can enter the mineshaft directly with no further
issues.
Sublevel One
Expected Duration: 30 minutes
Darkglitter Depths, now that you’ve entered it, is a much
prettier name than the location. An unmistakable smell of
stale dust mixes with the foul, oily smell of poorly-
extinguished torches. The mine is dark, and the path extends
into the distance. From somewhere far off, the echoing
rumble and groan of a cave-in rise to greet you.
The timber-lined wide passageway is dotted every
twenty feet by low-quality torches that appear to
have been hastily extinguished; the carbon and
creosote buildup from the pine tar upon them causes
the stench.
Several rooms dot this level, including a staging
chamber, excavation chamber one, excavation
chamber two, and the sorting room.
General Features
The general features of the Darkglitter Depths are as
follows:
Light. There is no natural light in the mine, but if
a character uses anything brighter than a torch (such
as a light spell), the diamond dust embedded in the
walls sparkles wildly, casting beautiful rainbows of
reflected and refracted bright light throughout the
entire area. This effect is more pronounced the
deeper they go in the mine.
Visibility. Due to the recent cave-ins, the mine has
a cloud of stale dust everywhere. Vision is limited to
20 feet, and anything between 20 ft. and 30 ft. away
is considered to be so concealed by the dust that
ranged attacks against them are made at
disadvantage. Nothing is visible beyond this range.
Smells and Sounds. The stink of stale dust and
the sharp tang of burning carbon and creosote
residue from old, poorly-made torches permeates
the mine. The characters occasionally hear the
scraping of rocks and small clicks of tiny stones
contacting each other.
CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 11
Darkglitter Staging Chamber
A number of warning posters cover one wall, and several
wooden crates are piled atop the three tables in the middle
of this large room. Many shovels and picks can be seen.
If the adventurers inspect the posters, they can
plainly see the following (all written in gnome):
 “Safety first! Listen for stones, and heed their
warnings!” Above the text appears to be a
cartoonish pile of large stones falling on a silly
gnome’s head.
 “Excavation Chamber Two is dangerous. Stay quiet,
stay alive!” Above this text is a large skull and
crossbones symbol.
 “Respect the automatons!” Above this text are six
empty suits of armor, swinging picks and shovels.
 One of the posters is a clearly-marked map of the
mine.
The crates hold basic climbing kits, crowbars, 200
feet of iron chain, 500 feet of hemp rope, three dozen
candles, three sets of flint & tinder, two hooded
lanterns, and five flasks of oil. Another crate holds
three pouches of gnomish rations, which smell like
an oddly delicious mix of chocolate and mushrooms.
Each pouch contains 10 days of rations.
Excavation Chamber One
This round chamber has smooth walls, and upon first glance
it appears that six miners have stopped moving in mid-swing.
You soon realize that these aren’t miners – they’re constructs
capable of swinging picks. Six very large piles of rubble and
debris dot the chamber, likely the material that these
machines have pulled from the walls and floor.
The six animated armors were excavating ore and
gemstones from the walls but have fallen into disuse.
These armors are not magically animated, though;
they are clockwork creations. They have not been
wound in several days and will not be able to work
again until this happens. Unfortunately, the key is
missing. Characters that attempt to make
Intelligence (Arcana or Investigation), or other
similar checks, learn that these are clockwork
creatures and that their repair is outside the ability
of the characters at this time.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Treasure
Each pile of rubble contains roughly 300 cubic feet
of material and takes thirty minutes per person to
search. If the characters choose to dedicate time to
searching the piles, the following can be found by
rolling a d6 (re-roll if duplicate results are found):
 1: 20 gp worth of diamond dust
 2: silver flakes worth 10 gp
 3: six roughly spherical orbs of tiger eye (worth 10
gp if polished and retained as a set)
 4: a fist-sized but poor quality chunk of hematite
worth 10 gp
 5: coal, worth 0 gp
 6: a tiny piece of quartz that looks like a cat’s paw,
worth 10 gp
Excavation Chamber Two
The ceiling in this chamber has begun caving in, likely in the
last two ten-days or so. The edges of the rocks are still sharp,
and the quiet of the room is pierced by the menacing sound
of settling and scraping stones from above.
This room provides nothing of value for the
characters early in the adventure. If they choose to
dig into the pile of rubble or dally in this place for
more than a few minutes, warn them a second time
about the groaning stones. A DC 8 Intelligence
(Nature) or Wisdom (Survival) check confirms that
another cave-in is imminent, and it would likely
dwarf the one that already happened. Continued
activity triggers the collapse of the chamber, which
quickly cascades into the hallway beyond – sealing
the rest of the mine and further sublevels. Short of
magic or many hundreds of gold worth of explosives,
the characters cannot proceed. While the cave-in
gives plenty of warning (thus requiring no saving
throws), this results in the players being trapped
outside of the lower levels… or in the unfortunate
position where they may be trapped in the lower
levels with no other escape route. If the characters
are trapped inside the mine, you are strongly
encouraged to allow the characters creative license
in their escape methods; asking them to use ten days’
worth of rations each (or risking starvation) is not
out of the question. This should not be a character-
killing event though.
Later in the adventure, the characters may desire
to trigger the cave-in in order to seal the lower areas
of the mine from prying eyes. This is a perfectly
viable tactic at that time but likely requires some
careful negotiation with Fizzlebottom later on.
CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 12
Sorting Room
Many long sorting tables line the walls here, with a belt-
driven mechanized apparatus that appears to shake and
presort much of the rubble that is placed upon its tray in the
middle of the room. Though it is not currently active, two
men are inspecting it and seem at once impressed and
disdainful.
Unless the characters are taking great care to move
stealthily, the cult fanatic of Cyric and cultist of
Cyric here are not surprised. They have a loyal
phase spider as well, which is currently in the
ethereal plane. The cultists fight to the death, but the
spider flees into the ethereal plane to escape if
reduced to 10 hp or less.
If the characters subdue either of the faithful of
Cyric and attempt to question them, they soon find
that the cultists are utterly devoted to their god.
They blurt out curses and quips, often saying that
“The Dark Prince would have his hound devour us
all!” or “The Dark Sun has risen o’er you!”. They
provide no useful information.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this combat
encounter. These are not cumulative.
 Very weak party: remove the phase spider
 Strong party: Replace the cultist of Cyric with one more
cult fanatic of Cyric
 Very strong party: as Strong party, and add one more
phase spider
Treasure
The cultists each carry a potion of healing, as well as
an obsidian and silver holy pendant of Cyric worth
10 gp.
Moving On
There is a platform equipped with a rope & pulley
system along one side of the room. It can be
operated by those riding on it, and descends to
Sublevel Two.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Sublevel Two
The stone of this lower section of Darkglitter Depths seems
much more structurally stable, with tiny web-like veins of
precious metals running as far as you can see.
This portion of the mine does not have timber or
additional supports. The tunnels are carved from a
single massive stone – impossibly huge, but a single
stone nonetheless. A DC 10 Intelligence (Nature)
check confirms that the tunnels are indeed
structurally sound (though any dwarf character
knows this automatically). A DC 15 Intelligence
(History) check brings to mind some ancient legends
about how some of the mythical titans would
become a single piece of stone when they died;
further checks in this mode of thinking do not reveal
any additional information.
Several rooms dot this level, including a
malachite cavern, mud pits, and the massive
cavern. Lastly, the characters will need to open the
passage to Kezef’s sanctuary.
General Features
The general features of the Darkglitter Depths are as
follows:
Light. As Sublevel One.
Visibility. As Sublevel One, but visibility is slightly
increased. Anything between 40 ft. and 60 ft. away is
considered to be so concealed by the dust that
ranged attacks against them are made at
disadvantage. Nothing is visible beyond this range.
Smells and Sounds. The stink of stale dust has
largely been replaced but the smell of wet earth and
corroded copper, but the sounds of falling stones –
both large and small – can still be occasionally heard.
Darkglitter Malachite Cavern
Massive stalactites hang from the ceiling of this place, their
faces a swirl of deep green and light-sucking black. Several
have been broken and reveal that these formations are
indeed huge pieces of malachite.
An elevator – really just a simple wooden platform
with a rope and pulley system – can ferry the
characters back up to Sublevel One.
Hidden behind one of the stalactites is the body of
Parabald the Maimed, a one-armed dragonborn
mage that the characters may have encountered in
another adventure. If the characters spent one hour
or less at the mine, Parabald is hiding in fear; if the
characters have spent two to four hours at the mine,
he is injured but still has 5 hp remaining. Otherwise,
CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 13
he has turned to stone due to bites from the
cockatrices that infest this space; this effect will
naturally heal in 24 hours unless the characters have
alternate means that they can employ to remove his
condition. If Parabald is alive, the characters can
hear his whimpers and ragged breaths on a Passive
Perception score of 10 or above.
If the characters move to interact with Parabald or
spend more than three rounds in this space, four
cockatrices emerge from the holes in the walls and
streak out to attack!
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this combat
encounter. These are not cumulative.
 Very weak party: remove one cockatrice
 Strong party: add one more cockatrice
 Very strong party: as Strong party, and the entire chamber
is sloped down towards the pit (instead of only the
indicated portion on the map)
After the combat, should the characters revive him
or interact with him, Parabald tells them that he had
bluffed his way into the entourage of the cultists of
Cyric when he learned of their desire to “bring out
the hound”, and while he believes this to be a
reference to some sort of extraplanar summoning
ritual he is not exactly certain what it means. He
adds that they became aware of his status as a
Harper, and had laced his rations with a mild
psychotropic drug which caused him to start hearing
voices while the walls trembled. The cultists merely
laughed at his reaction and left him here,
presumably to die.
Roleplaying Parabald the Maimed
Parabald the Maimed is intelligent, crafty, and serious. His
family had been killed by cultists of Cyric, and he sought to
become a Harper so that he could protect others from similar
events. He is unwilling to speak about his missing limb, other
than stating “Sometimes there is a price that must be paid for
the good we do.” While roleplaying Parabald the Maimed in
this adventure, you might:
 Speak in a low voice with a gravely tone.
 Be very cautious in your dealings with others.
 Remember your family with anger and sorrow.
 Rarely smile.
Of course, he is affected by a mild mind-affecting drug during
his time in Darkglitter Depths and may not be entirely
coherent.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Once he has been comforted appropriately, Parabald
may be willing to share the following with the
characters – especially if any of them are Harpers:
 The cult of Cyric believes that they have found a
way to summon and bind an agent of a lesser deity
named Kezef the Chaos Hound.
 Worship of Kezef is not common in the Realms, as
he primarily busies himself with prowling the
planes and devouring the souls of “The Faithful” –
those that revere one deity above all others.
 The cultists believe that if they can harness one of
Kezef’s emissaries in this world, they could set it
loose in the temples of the gods that oppose Cyric.
 In order to summon the emissary, they needed a
powerful teleportation engine; essentially, a vastly
more powerful teleportation circle. By perverting
the purpose of this device, they could reach into
the far planes and capture an agent of the Chaos
Hound. He does not know where this may be
located, though.
Parabald is in no condition to walk out of the mine,
but is also unable to accompany the characters. He
begs them to stop the cultists. In the unfortunate
circumstance where he may already be dead when
the characters find him, all of the above information
is conveniently scribed inside his journal (along with
some elegant and complex chess gambits).
Treasure
There are four cockatrice eggs among the statues.
They won’t hatch, but are worth 10 gp each in a
major city like Melvaunt, Hillsfar, or Mulmaster as an
exotic spell component.
Mud Pits
Several very smelly pits of bubbling, muddy liquid churn and
sputter on the floor of this cavern. The walls appear to be
sweating, and this cavern is easily twenty degrees warmer
than the corridor outside and the previous chambers.
A dozen kobolds frolic in the filthy liquid and do not
immediately take notice of the characters. If the
characters attack immediately, they gain a surprise
round. If they delay one round or more (or attempt
to open the very squeaky unlocked gate), the
kobolds become aware and combat proceeds as
normal. They gleefully fling handfuls of the thick and
slightly acidic mud at each other, the walls, and the
characters (dealing 1d3 points of damage to
characters but none to kobolds), and chirp away in
Draconic about how much they hate gnomes.
CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 14
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this combat
encounter. These are not cumulative.
 Very weak party and weak party: the characters are
granted surprise regardless of the number of rounds they
use to prepare
 Strong party: add two more winged kobolds
 Very strong party: as Strong party, and the kobolds are
aware of the characters immediately (no chance of
surprise round)
Treasure
The mud can be bottled up and serves as a slightly-
weaker vial of acid for the rest of the adventure,
dealing 1d3 points of damage on a hit. Once the mud
has spent more than one hour out of the pits, though,
it loses its potency and becomes inert, normal
(though smelly!) mud.
Massive Cavern
This huge open chamber sports a nearly forty-foot tall ceiling
and measures nearly a hundred feet wide, while measuring
almost twice that in distance. The flat floor is dotted with
crates, hand tools, and sorting tables; this must have been
the most recent worksite for the Cloisternook gnomes.
Scaffolding covers the walls and it can be plainly seen where
the miners had been digging.
The center of the chamber is open and free of clutter.
There is a small depression here, but the contents – if any –
cannot be spied from the entryway.
When the characters enter this chamber, a couple of
different things may take place:
 If the characters have been in the mine four
hours or less: two cultists of Cyric stand near the
center of the room, and are accompanied by two
kobolds and one winged kobold.
 If the characters have been in the mine for
more than four hours: there is a dead cultist in
the depression, surrounded by the corpses of two
dead kobolds and one winged kobold. The
remaining cultist is hiding in one of the mining
crates, and has used minor illusion to create the
image of a pile of raw ore on top of herself
(attempts made to find her are made at
disadvantage unless she reveals herself by talking
or casting spells with a verbal component).
The depression in the center of the room has a large
locked grate (DC 15) at the bottom. The lock used is
non-standard, though, and requires a holy symbol of
Cyric in order to unlock the grate (this can be found
earlier in the mines, or upon the hiding cultist; there
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
is a chance that a character may have one as well
from another source). Using a holy symbol in this
way destroys it. Once the grate is unlocked and
moved aside, a steel ladder can be easily seen
descending further into the depths and towards the
next section. A clattering, whining sound can be
heard far below.
The cultist is named Li Tansu and, once hidden, is
not eager to fight the characters, much preferring to
stay hidden and safe until such time as she can leave
the area. If discovered, she verbally stumbles into
every apology she can think of: she was tricked into
joining the clergy of Cyric; she regrets everything;
she never meant to hurt anyone; she is quitting
“RIGHT. NOW.” If the characters let her live, she
follows through with this – she leaves the Moonsea
and travels to Neverwinter where she hopes that she
can disappear quietly and enjoy the rest of her life.
In the rare situation that she may be placed in
combat with the emissary of Kezef (see Part 3: Feast
of the Hound), she uses the stats for a cult fanatic of
Cyric but the emissary ignores her – in truth, her
twin allegiances to Deneir and Cyric keep her safe
and hidden from the beast. Before she leaves the
characters, she tells them that the cultists took “the
egg” below, and that it is apparently some kind of
holy relic – “but it’s so squirmy and gross; it scares
me.”
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this combat
encounter. These are not cumulative.
 Strong party: add one more winged kobold
 Very strong party: as Strong party, and change the cultists
of Cyric to cult fanatics of Cyric
Roleplaying Li Tansu
Li is a woman of few summers but many stories. While she is
slow to trust, she instinctively knows that there is more to
the world than she has seen – and she wants to understand it
all! Formerly from Neverwinter (by way of the Hordelands),
she is not eager to fight. She has spent much of her life in
study and pious reflection, but recently forsake her oaths to
Deneir, the god of literature. She still feels his call and is torn
between her twin allegiances.
Treasure
The cultists each carry a black and silver holy
symbol of Cyric worth 10 gp, though if the cultist in
the depression is already dead when the characters
arrive, his holy symbol is gone – claimed by the
remaining cultist that is hiding elsewhere in the
chamber.
CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 15
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 16
Part 3. Feast of the Hound
Kezef’s Sanctuary
Expected Duration: 30 minutes.
General Features
The general features of Kezef’s sanctuary are as
follows:
Light and Visibility. As with other portions of
Darkglitter Depths, this space is dark. Light sources
cause the diamond veins to sparkle brightly.
Sights. The walls, floor, and ceiling here are rough,
natural stone that are marbled with glittering veins
of low-grade diamonds. An arcane machine stands in
the center of the chamber.
Smells and Sounds. The stark aroma of wet earth
and the scent of corroded copper coins permeates
this space.
The rough-hewn walls of the mine open into a large natural
cavern. The diamond veins are pushing through the walls
here and glitter madly when light hits them. Half a dozen
humanoid figures can be seen, their shoulders slumped as
they stare listlessly at an alien, whirring apparatus that spins
crazily in the center of the room.
The center of the room is dominated by the presence
of the clacking and whirring relic of Kezef the Chaos
Hound. This ancient deity is currently trapped
elsewhere, but the cultists of Cyric have perverted
the invention of the Cloisternooks that was
originally intended to allow for moving ore from the
depths of the mine directly back to Melvaunt. This
machine is highly technical but is aided by complex
teleportation rituals.
The breaking of the teleportation rituals allowed
for the emissary to enter this world, but its power
quickly overcame the cultists and it is now setting
about to harvest them in order to more permanently
open the portal so that Kezef himself may come
through.
The noise of the arcane machine is a severe
detractor from Perception checks. Wisdom
(Perception) checks made in the area are made at
disadvantage, and Passive Perception scores are
lowered by 5. As the machine whirs and spins in its
maddening rhythm, strange symbols can be faintly
seen. If the characters state that they are checking
the symbols, they must succeed on a DC 10
Intelligence (Religion) check. If they do, they can
identify the symbols as those of Kezef the Chaos
Hound, a rarely discussed deity that feasts upon the
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
souls of the “faithful” (i.e. those that revere one deity
above all others) in the upper plane known as the
Beastlands.
There are 3 gnomes and 3 cultists here (they all
use the stats of a commoner for simplicity),
entranced by the machine. They have been prepared
by the emissary of Kezef, and their hit points have
been reduced to 1 point each. The characters should
be aware that these six survivors all appear to be in
terrible shape, and although they are standing they
are otherwise unresponsive.
If the adventurers make it a point to stare at the
apparatus while the symbols take shape (whether or
not they attempt the Religion check), they are
surprised when the emissary of Kezef attacks.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this combat
encounter. These are not cumulative.
 Very weak party: As Weak party, and the emissary of
Kezef only has half of its maximum hp
 Weak party: The emissary of Kezef cannot use its
legendary actions
 Strong party: Add a 2nd emissary of Kezef
 Very strong party: As Strong party, and increase arcane
bolt damage to 2d4 + 2
Tactics
The emissary spends the first two rounds of combat
harrying the characters, in an attempt to drive them
closer to the arcane machine.
Any character that begins their turn adjacent to
the arcane machine must make a DC 10 Constitution
saving throw or their maximum hit points are
reduced by 5 (10 for strong or very strong parties)
as the machine attempts to drain their life energy.
Clerics and paladins make this saving throw at
disadvantage, as the magic of the machine has been
perverted by the combined magic of Cyric and Kezef.
CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 17
Interacting with the Machine
The characters can use their actions to delay the machine’s
transformation throughout the combat. These options should
be made clear to the characters:
 Eliminate a sigil of Kezef: there are a number of sigils
equal to twice the number of party members. If all sigils
are destroyed, it shuts down
 Damage the machine: AC 8, hp 70; resistant to damage
from weapons; immune to poison, disease, sleep, and
psychic damage and conditions.
Interacting with the machine using the above methods
prevents it from using its arcane bolt ability on the next turn
in which it would normally do so.
Round 3 and Beyond
The machine shudders and screeches as it picks up speed.
The symbols flare into clearer view, and tendrils of wispy
white and black energy leap out from the center of the
machine to every living creature in the room!
Tactics
The emissary fights to the death. Its sole purpose
here on Faerûn is to harvest souls for Kezef, and it
does not stray from its mission.
Due to the tendrils of energy in the room,
invisibility and similar effects do not function as
expected: while a creature affected by invisibility
cannot be seen, there is a visual cue marking their
position. Mechanically speaking, such characters
should be granted a modified three-quarters cover
(+5 AC) for the duration of that effect. Note that if a
creature is not considered to be living, the tendril
does not connect; characters with the Touched by
the Mists story award are also unaffected by the
tendrils.
Escalation/Round-by-Round
At the beginning of the fourth round of combat,
every living creature adjacent to the machine must
make a DC 10 Constitution saving throw. On a failure,
their maximum hit points drop by 10 as the machine
drains their life force (note that this means that
dying characters may still be affected, as they are not
yet dead). Additionally, one of the entranced gnomes
or cultists dies as their maximum hit points are
reduced to 0.
When the arcane machine successfully drains for
the 20th time, it goes into overload mode. The
emissary of Kezef howls with glee as it gains the
reckless attack feature as if it were a barbarian and
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
must use it every turn, and, on initiative count 20
(losing ties), the machine sends out two randomly-
targeted arcane bolts (no attack roll, living targets
only; 1d4 + 1 force and necrotic damage) against
targets within 10 feet of it. As above, characters with
the Touched by the Mists story award cannot be
targeted by this attack.
XP Award
If the adventurers complete this encounter without
allowing any of the survivors to die to the emissary
or the corrupted machine, grant them an award of
500 XP. If they instead save the lives of either all of
the gnomes or all of the cultists, grant them an
award of 100 XP (this does not stack with the
previous reward of 500 XP). Any of the gnomes or
cultists that die in this encounter cannot be raised,
as Kezef has consumed their souls.
If any of the characters die due to their maximum
hit points being reduced to 0, they earn the Feast of
the Hound story award if they are ever returned to
life.
Destroying all of the sigils of Kezef that are
inscribed upon the apparatus earns the characters a
reward of 100 XP each.
Treasure
Unfortunately, the diamond veins embedded in the
walls are outside the ability of the characters to
extract – these are very rough and, although pretty,
of exceedingly low quality. An investigation of the
area shows a number of dead bugs and what appears
to be a crudely-made, leathery sack that has been
split open.
Conclusion
Once the characters have erased all of the sigils of
Kezef, they can use the symbols from Handout 1 to
activate it appropriately and teleport whatever is on
the pad directly to the Purple Portals in Melvaunt.
Fizzlebottom Cloisternook waits there patiently,
hoping that his daughters will be returned to him!
If the characters destroyed the machine, they will
need to return to Melvaunt on foot and explain to the
drunken gnome what happened down in the mines,
including the status of his beloved machine. He may
shed a gnome-ly tear if the characters are not
delicate in their delivery of this news.
Returning Parabald the Maimed to Melvaunt is
likely to earn the characters some good will,
especially among the Harpers. If Parabald is
returned to the city, the characters each have
CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 18
advantage on the next Charisma-based skill check
they attempt with him.
If Li Tansu was discovered and yet lives, she may
play a role in later adventures. If the characters ask
about her upon their return to Melvaunt, they learn
that she was last seen leaving the city and heading
west toward Phlan with a group of Denieran
scholars. She had mentioned eventually heading to
Neverwinter.
Lastly, the local priests and clerics know nothing
about the religious significance of “the egg”. If any of
the characters worship Cyric, they have a sensation
that bad things are in the works (though they may
revel in this fact). If, during the course of the
character’s inquiry, they mention that “the egg” is
something that the cultists of Cyric have been using,
other clerics and sages may be able to respond that
oftentimes an egg represents the promise of new life
– but as with anything pertaining to the God of Lies,
this is likely nothing more than the first of many
tricks.

That night, as you lay down to rest, an image comes

unbidden to your mind: a large, leathery egg splits open and
spills forth a gout of insects and worms. A silver skull lies
inside, radiating waves of solid black flame. It is quickly
encompassed in a swirl of ghosts, spirits, and other
incorporeal menaces.

Treasure
Fizzlebottom follows through with his offer from
earlier in the adventure. He presents the characters
with a sack filled with 250 gp worth of raw
diamonds. If the characters have never met
Fizzlebottom before, he insists that they take the
gems anyways, or else he will “donate it to those
dirty, dirty Harpers”.
He also asks about the holy symbol of Gond in the
foreman’s office at Darkglitter Depths, saying that it
is a family heirloom and very special to him. If the
characters took it and do not take this opportunity
to return it, they earn the Enmity of the
Cloisternooks story award.
If he had previously been taken to the Livestock
Pens, he has gotten free but he really does not want
to talk about how this happened. If the characters
had previously earned Enmity of the Cloisternooks
due to his capture, but have successfully returned
his daughters, the characters lose that story award.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 19
Rewards
magic item, the DM can determine who gets it
randomly should the group be unable to decide.
Make sure players note their rewards on their Permanent magic items are divided according to
adventure logsheets. Give your name and DCI a system. See the sidebar if the adventure awards
number (if applicable) so players can record who permanent magic items.
ran the session.
Treasure Awards
Experience Item Name/Location GP Value
Fizzlebottom’s offer 300
Total up all combat experience earned for defeated Holy Symbol of Gond 15
foes, and divide by the number of characters present Diamond Dust 20
in the combat. For non-combat experience, the Silver Flakes 10
rewards are listed per character. Give all characters Set of Tiger’s Eye Orbs 10
in the party non-combat experience awards unless Hematite 10
otherwise noted.
Coal 10
Combat Awards Quartz Catspaw 10
Name of Foe XP per Foe Cyric Holy Pendant 10
Animated Armor 0 Cockatrice Eggs 10
Cultist of Cyric 25 Cyric Holy Symbol 10
Cult Fanatic of Cyric 450 Raw Diamonds 250
Phase Spider 700
Cockatrice 100 Emerald Kidgloves (Gloves of Thievery)
Kobold 25 Wondrous item, uncommon
Winged Kobold 50
These delicate, goatskin gloves are colored with a
Emissary of Kezef 1,100
bright green pigment and slip onto the wearer’s
hands effortlessly. While wearing these gloves, the
Non-Combat Awards wearer experiences irresistible generosity,
Task or Accomplishment XP per Character expressing compliments to those around them and
Saved Parabald the Maimed 100 spending coin for the benefit of others without
Saved all 6 survivors 500 hesitation. Unlike conventional gloves of thievery,
Saved all 3 gnomes 100 these gloves do not turn invisible when worn, but
Saved all 3 Cultists 100 shrink or grow to accommodate a small or medium
Destroyed sigils of Kezef 100 wearer’s size.

The minimum total award for each character Potion of Healing

participating in this adventure is 900 experience Potion, uncommon
points. A description of this item can be found in the Player’s
The maximum total award for each character Handbook.
participating in this adventure is 1,200 experience
points. Renown
Treasure Each character receives one point of renown.

The characters receive the following treasure, Downtime

divided up amongst the party. Characters should
attempt to divide treasure evenly whenever possible. Each character receives 10 downtime days at the
Gold piece values listed for sellable gear are conclusion of this adventure.
calculated at their selling price, not their purchase
price.
Consumable magic items should be divided up
however the group sees fit. If more than one
character is interested in a specific consumable

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 20
Story Awards DM Appendix: NPC Summary
Characters have the opportunity to earn the
following story awards during this adventure. The following NPCs appear or are mentioned in this
adventure.
Enmity of the Cloisternooks. You have done
something to grievously wound the gnomish
Fizzlebottom Cloisternook (FIZ-el-BOT-um CLOY-
Cloisternook family. Perhaps you insulted their
stir-nook). Gnome male. The old, kind, smart, and
honor, or perhaps you caused irreparable damage to
often intoxicated patriarch of the Cloisternook
Darkglitter Depths. Maybe you even sold one of them
family. The Gond-worshipping clan has more than a
into slavery. Word travels fast in the gnomish
few secrets and Fizzlebottom knows them all.
communities, though, and as a result you have
disadvantage on all social skill checks when dealing
Parabald the Maimed (par-uh-BALD). Dragonborn
with Cloisternook gnomes and clerics of Gond.
male. A one-armed mage who feigns madness while
hunting cults of Cyric.
Feast of the Hound. The corrupted machine deep in
the Darkglitter Depths drew in your essence, and in
Li Tansu (LEE tahn-SOO). Human (Shou) female. A
those terrifying final moments you saw something:
woman of roughly 30 years, but wise beyond her
an emaciated hound, gargantuan in size, feasting
years. While slow to trust, she has set out in the
upon the souls of those that arrived before you. It
world to develop a deeper understanding of
gleefully tore them asunder, and then turned to you.
“everything”. She recently broke her oaths to Deneir
As its teeth sank into your metaphysical flesh and
and took up with the cult of Cyric for reasons known
you felt the hot stink of its breath wash over you,
only to her, but still feels the call of her former
you were pulled back to the world – but not without
patron.
a reminder: you have the scars of a dog’s bite
somewhere on your body, and sometimes those
scars stink and fester when in the presence of clerics
and paladins.

DM Rewards
For running this adventure, you receive 300 XP, 143
gp, and ten downtime days.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 21
Appendix. NPC/Monster Cockatrice
Small monstrosity, unaligned
Statistics Armor Class 11
Hit Points 27 (6d6 + 6)
Speed 20 ft., fly 40 ft.
Bandit Captain STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Medium humanoid (human), neutral evil 6 (-2) 12 (+1) 12 (+1) 2 (-4) 13 (+1) 5 (-3)
Armor Class 15 (studded leather) Senses darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 11
Hit Points 65 (10d8 + 8) Languages –
Speed 30 ft. Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Actions

15 (+2) 16 (+3) 14 (+2) 14 (+2) 11 (+0) 14 (+2)
Saving Throws Str +4, Dex +5, Wis +2
Skills Athletics +4, Deception +4
Senses passive Perception 10
Languages Common, Gnome
Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Actions
Multiattack. The captain makes three melee attacks:
two with its longsword and one with its dagger. Or the
captain makes two ranged attacks with its daggers.
Longsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 6 (1d8 + 2) slashing damage.
Dagger. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +5 to hit,
reach 5 ft. or range 20/60 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d4 +
3) piercing damage.
Reactions
Parry. The captain adds 2 to its AC against one melee
attack that would hit it. To do so, the captain must see
the attacker and be wielding a melee weapon.
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
creature. Hit: 3 (1d4 + 1) piercing damage, and the
target must succeed on a DC 11 Constitution saving
throw against being magically petrified. On a failed
save, the creature begins to turn to stone and is
restrained. It must repeat the saving throw at the end
of its next turn. On a success, the effect ends. On a
failure, the creature is petrified for 24 hours.
Cult Fanatic of Cyric
Medium humanoid (human), neutral evil
Armor Class 13 (leather leather)
Hit Points 33 (6d8 + 6)
Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
11 (+0) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 13 (+1) 14 (+2)
Skills Deception +4, Persuasion +4, Religion +2
Senses passive Perception 10
Languages Common
Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Dark Devotion. The cult fanatic of Cyric has advantage
on saving throws against being charmed or frightened.
Spellcasting. The cult fanatic of Cyric is a 4th-level
spellcaster. Its spellcasting ability is Wisdom (spell save
DC 11, +3 to hit with spell attacks). The cult fanatic of
Cyric has the following cleric spells prepared:
Cantrips (at will): light, sacred flame, thaumaturgy
1st level (4 slots): command, inflict wounds, shield of
faith
2nd level (3 slots): hold person, spiritual weapon
Actions
Multiattack. The cult fanatic of Cyric makes two melee
attacks.
Dagger. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit,
reach 5 ft. or range 20/60 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d4 +
2) piercing damage

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 22
 Kobold
Cultist of Cyric Small humanoid (kobold), lawful evil
Medium humanoid (human), neutral evil Armor Class 12
Armor Class 12 (leather leather) Hit Points 5 (2d6 - 2)
Hit Points 9 (2d8) Speed 30 ft.
Speed 30 ft. STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA 7 (-2) 15 (+2) 9 (-1) 8 (-1) 7 (-2) 8 (-1)
11 (+0) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 10 (+0) Senses Darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 8
Skills Deception +4, Religion +2 Languages Common, Draconic
Senses passive Perception 10 Challenge 1/8 (25 XP)
Languages Common Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the kobold has
Challenge 1/8 (25 XP) disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on Wisdom
Dark Devotion. The cultist has advantage on saving (Perception) checks that rely on sight.
throws against being charmed or frightened. Pack Tactics. The kobold has advantage on an attack
Actions roll against a creature if at least one of the kobold’s
Longsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., allies is within 5 feet of the creature and the ally isn’t
one target. Hit: 4 (1d8) slashing damage. incapacitated.
Actions
Commoner Dagger. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment one target. Hit: 4 (1d4 + 2) piercing damage.
Armor Class 10 Sling. Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 30/120
Hit Points 4 (1d8) ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d4 + 2) bludgeoning damage.
Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Kobold, Winged
10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) Small humanoid (kobold), lawful evil
Armor Class 13
Senses passive Perception 10 Hit Points 7 (3d6 -32)
Languages any one language (usually Common) Speed 30 ft.
Challenge 0 (10 XP)
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
7 (-2) 16 (+3) 9 (-1) 8 (-1) 7 (-2) 8 (-1)
Actions
Senses Darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 8
Club. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
Languages Common, Draconic
target. Hit: 2 (1d4) bludgeoning damage.
Challenge 1/4 (50 XP)
Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the kobold has
disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on Wisdom
(Perception) checks that rely on sight.
Pack Tactics. The kobold has advantage on an attack
roll against a creature if at least one of the kobold’s
allies is within 5 feet of the creature and the ally isn’t
incapacitated.
Actions
Dagger. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 5 (1d4 + 3) piercing damage.
Dropped Rock. Ranged Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, one
target directly below the kobold. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3)
bludgeoning damage.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 23
 Actions
Phase Spider Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
Large monstrosity, unaligned target. Hit: 8 (3d4 + 1) piercing damage plus 7 (3d4)
Armor Class 13 (natural armor) poison damage.
Hit Points 32 (5d10 + 5) Caustic Spittle (1/Day). The emissary spews forth a
Speed 30 ft., climb 30 ft. gruesome shower of spit and vomit in a 30-foot cone.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Each creature in that area must succeed on a DC 12
15 (+2) 15 (+2) 12 (+1) 6 (-2) 10 (+0) 6 (-2) Dexterity saving throw or take 1d6 acid damage at the
start of each of the emissary’s turns. A creature can
Skills Stealth +6 repeat the saving throw at the end of each of its turns,
Senses Darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 10 ending the effect on itself on a success.
Languages - Infestation Spores (1/Day). The emissary releases
Challenge 3 (700 XP) spores that burst out in a cloud that fills a 20-foot-
Ethereal Jaunt. As a bonus action, the spider can radius sphere centered on it, and the cloud lingers for 1
magically shift from the Material Plan to the Ethereal minute. Any flesh-and-blood creature in the cloud
Plane, or vice versa. when it appears, or that enters it later, must make a DC
12 Constitution saving throw. On a successful save, the
Spider Climb. The spider can climb difficult surfaces,
creature can’t be infected by these spores for 24 hours.
including upside down on ceilings, without needing to -
On a failed save, the creature comatose but frozen in
make an ability check.
place. While infected in this way, the creature can’t be
Web Walker. The spider ignores movement restrictions re-infected, and it must repeat the saving throw at the
caused by webbing. end of every 24 hours, ending the infection on a
Actions success. On a failure, the infected creature’s body is
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft., one slowly taken drained of all vital energy, and after three
creature. Hit: 7 (1d10 + 2) piercing damage, and the such failed saves, the creature dies and rises 1d4 hours
target must make a DC 11 Constitution saving throw, later as a shadow.
taking 18 (4d8) poison damage on a failed save, or half Legendary Actions
as much damage on a successful one. If the poison The emissary can take 2 legendary actions, choosing
damage reduces the target to 0 hit points, the target is from the options below. Only one legendary action
stable but poisoned for 1 hour, even after regaining hit option can be used at a time and only at the end of
points, and is paralyzed while poisoned in this way. another creature’s turn. The emissary regains spent
legendary actions at the start of its turn.
Emissary of Kezef Bite. The emissary makes a bite attack.
Large monstrosity, neutral evil
Devour Faith. The emissary absorbs faith and spell
Armor Class 15 (natural armor) energy from a creature within 10 feet of it, regaining
Hit Points 75 (10d10 + 20) 1d8 + 2 hit points unless that creature sacrifices an
Speed 30 ft. unused spell slot of 1st level or higher. This ability has
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA no function against creatures with no spell slots
12 (+1) 10 (+0) 14 (+2) 13 (+1) 15 (+2) 10 (+0) (creatures that have used all of their spell slots are not
Damage Immunities poison immune).
Condition Immunities poisoned
Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 12
Languages Abyssal, telepathy 60 ft.
Challenge 4 (1,100 XP)
Legendary Resistance (1/Day). If the emissary fails a
saving throw, it can choose to succeed instead.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 24
Handout 1: Instructions for the Machine

Our plans proceed apace.

Stay at your post and watch over the goods.

We make our move when the protestors’ cries
echo throughout the city. I will be at the
Outcast’s Sanctuary, preparing something
special for the occasion.

Lord Yestral is incredibly pleased with the

progress we’ve made. When the smoke clears,
your rewards will exceed anything you can
imagine.

By the full moon’s glow,

E.M.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 25
Player Handout 2: Emerald Kidgloves
Emerald Kidgloves (Gloves of Thievery)
Wondrous item, uncommon
These delicate, goatskin gloves are colored with a bright green pigment and slip onto your hands effortlessly.
Although these act as gloves of thievery, these gloves do not turn invisible when worn, but shrink or grow to
accommodate a small or medium wearer’s size.
While wearing these gloves, you gain a +2 bonus to Dexterity (Sleight of Hand) checks and Dexterity checks made
to pick locks. Additionally, you feel a sense of irresistible generosity, expressing compliments to those around them
and spending coin for the benefit of others without hesitation.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-2 Songs of Law & Chaos 26
 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY
With land trade threatened, the city of Melvaunt is relying on sea trade to get goods into and out
of the city. An island rises out of the Moonsea just outside of Melvaunt Harbor, and initial
exploration indicates the island is a threat. The origins and nature of the island must be
ascertained before trade is shut down completely.

A 4-hour adventure for 1st-4th level characters

DEREK MYERS
Adventure Designer

Adventure Code: CORE 2-3

Producer: Baldman Games

Core Administrator: Shawn Merwin
Development, Editing and Layout: Encoded Designs
Cartography: Jay Africa
Organized Play: Chris Lindsay
D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall, Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks, Alan
Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League, all other Wizards
of the Coast product names, and their respective logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive likenesses are property of Wizards of the
Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America. Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the
express written permission of Wizards of the Coast.

©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31, 2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4 The Square,
Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 1

Introduction
Welcome to Edicts of Neutrality, a D&D Adventurers
League adventure.
This adventure is designed for three to seven 1st -
4 level characters, and is optimized for five 4th
th
level characters.
The adventure is set in the Moonsea region of the
Forgotten Realms, in and around the city of
Melvaunt.
The D&D Adventurers
League
This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of the
D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure,
players track their characters’ experience, treasure,
and other rewards, and can take those characters
through other adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a store
event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a DCI
number. This number is your official Wizards of the
Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have a
number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to use
to create and advance their characters. Players can
continue to play their characters after the storyline
season has finished, possibly participating in a
second or third storyline with those same characters.
A character’s level is the only limitation for
adventure play. A player cannot use a character of a
level higher or lower than the level range of a D&D
Adventurers League adventure.
For more information on playing, running games
as a Dungeon Master, and organizing games for the
D&D Adventurers League, please visit the D&D
Adventurers League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Preparing the Adventure
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
 Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
 Read through the adventure, taking notes of
anything you’d like to highlight or remind yourself
while running the adventure, such as a way you’d
like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d like to use
in a combat.
 Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
 Gather together any resources you’d like to use to
aid you in running this adventure--such as
notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and
battlemaps.
 If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.
Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
 Character name and level
 Character race and class
 Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most common
passive ability check
 Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, etc.)
Players that have characters outside the adventure’s
level range cannot participate in the adventure
with those characters. Players with ineligible
characters can make a new 1st-level character or use
a pregenerated character. Players can play an
adventure they previously played or ran as a
Dungeon Master, but not with the same character.
Ensure that each player has an official adventure
logsheet for his or her character (if not, get one from
the organizer). The player fills out the adventure
name, session number, date, and your name and DCI
number. In addition, the player also fills in the
starting values for experience, gold, downtime,
renown, and number of permanent magic items. He
or she fill in the other values and write notes at the
conclusion of the session. Each player is responsible
for maintaining an accurate logsheet.
CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 2
 If you have time, you can do a quick scan of a
player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing looks
out of order. If you see magic items of very high
rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you can
ask players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict item
use or ask them to use a standard ability score array.
Point players to the D&D Adventurers League Player’s
Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and it’s
the beginning of an adventure or episode, they can
declare their activity and spend the days now.
Alternatively, they can do so at the end of the
adventure or episode. Players should select their
characters’ spells and other daily options prior to
the start of the adventure, unless the adventure
specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread the
adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, you may see sidebars to
help make adjustments for smaller/larger groups,
and characters of higher/lower levels than the
optimized group. Most of the time, this is used for
combat encounters.
You may adjust the adventure beyond the
guidelines given. For example, if you’re playing with
a group of inexperienced players, you might want to
make the adventure a little easier; for very
experienced players, you may want to make it a little
harder. Therefore, five categories of party strength
have been created for you to use as a guide. Feel free
to use a different adjustment during the adventure if
the recommended party strength feels off for the
group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of five
4th-level characters. To figure out whether you
need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
 Add up the total levels of all the characters
 Divide the total by the number of characters
 Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round
fractions of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table:
Determining Party Strength
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very Weak
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very Strong
Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment of
the game for the players. You help guide the
narrative and bring the words on these pages to life.
The outcome of a fun game session often creates
stories that live well beyond the play at the table.
Always follow this golden rule when you DM for a
group:
Make decisions and adjudications that enhance
the fun of the adventure when possible.
To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
 You are empowered to make adjustments to the
adventure and make decisions about how the
group interacts with the world of this adventure.
Doing so is especially important and applicable
outside of combat, but feel free to adjust the
adventure for groups that are having too easy or
too hard of a time.
 Don’t make the adventure too easy or too difficult
for a group. Never being challenged makes for a
boring game and being overwhelmed makes for a
frustrating one. Gauge the experience of the
players (not the characters) with the game, try to
feel out (or ask) what they like in a game, and
attempt to give each of them the experience
they’re after when they play D&D. Give everyone a
chance to shine.
 Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game session
moving along appropriately. Watch for stalling,
since play loses momentum when this happens. At
the same time, make sure that the players don’t
finish too early; provide them with a full play
experience. Try to be aware of running long or
short. Adjust the pacing accordingly
 Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free to
modify the text as you see fit, especially when
dialogue is present.
 Give the players appropriate hints so they can
make informed choices about how to proceed.
CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 3
 Players should be given clues and hints when maximum of three per day total, unless otherwise
appropriate so they can tackle puzzles, combat, noted.
and interactions without getting frustrated over
lack of information. Doing so helps to encourage Spellcasting Services
immersion in the adventure and gives players Spell Cost
“little victories” for figuring out good choices from Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
clues. Identify 20 gp
In short, being the DM isn’t about following the Lesser restoration 40 gp
adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
facilitating a fun, challenging game environment for Remove curse 90 gp
the players. The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has more Speak with dead 90 gp
information on the art of running a D&D game. Divination 210 gp
Greater restoration 450 gp

Downtime and Lifestyle

Raise dead 1,250 gp

At the beginning of each play session, players must Acolyte Background

declare whether or not they are spending any days
of downtime. The player records the downtime
spent on the adventure logsheet. The following
options are available to players during downtime
(see the D&D basic rules or the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for more information):
 Catching up
 Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
commit to crafting a single item)
 Practicing a profession
 Recuperating
 Spellcasting services
 Training
Other downtime options might be available during
adventures or unlocked through play, including
faction-specific activities.
In addition, whenever a character spends
downtime days, that character also spends the
requisite expense for his or her lifestyle. Costs are
per day, so a character that spends ten days of
downtime also spends ten days of expenses
maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some downtime
activities help with lifestyle expenses or add lifestyle
expenses.
A character possessing the acolyte background requesting
spellcasting services at a temple of his or her faith may
request one spell per day from the Spellcasting Services table
for free. The only cost paid for the spell is the base price for
the consumed material component, if any.
Disease, Death, and Recovery
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might not
have the same characters return from session to
session, here are the rules when bad things happen
to characters.
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating
Effects
A character still affected by diseases, poisons, and
other similar effects at the conclusion of an
adventure can spend downtime days recuperating
until such time as he or she resolves the effect to its
conclusion (see the recuperating activity in the D&D
Basic Rules).
If a character doesn’t resolve the effect between
sessions, that character begins the next session still
affected by the debilitating effect.

Spellcasting Services Death

A character who is killed during the course of the
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can
adventure has a few options at the end of the session
provide some spellcasting services. Characters need
(or whenever arriving back in civilization) if no one
to be able to travel to the settlement to obtain these
in the adventuring party has immediate access to a
services.
raise dead or revivify spell, or similar magic. A
Spell services generally available include healing
character subject to a raise dead spell is affected
and recovery spells, as well as information-gathering
negatively until all long rests have been completed
spells. Other spell services might be available as
during an adventure. Alternatively, each downtime
specified in the adventure. The number of spells
day spent after raise dead reduces the penalty to
available to be cast as a service is limited to a
attack rolls, saving throws, and ability checks by 1, in

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 4
addition to any other benefits the downtime activity
might provide.
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any of
the other options, the player creates a new character.
The new character does not have any items or
rewards possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing any
vital organs and is mostly whole) and the player
would like the character to be returned to life, the
party can take the body back to civilization and use
the dead character’s funds to pay for a raise dead
spell. A raise dead spell cast in this manner costs the
character 1,250 gp.
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As above,
except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for the raise
dead spell is paid for by the party at the end of the
session. Other characters are under no obligation to
spend their funds to bring back a dead party
member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to 4
and a member of a faction, the dead character’s body
can be returned to civilization and a patron from the
faction ensures that he or she receives a raise dead
spell. However, any character invoking this charity
forfeits all experience and rewards from that session
(both those earned prior to and after death during
that session) and cannot replay that episode or
adventure with that character again. Once a
character reaches 5th level, this option is no longer
available.
The Situation in Melvaunt
The walls of Melvaunt resemble Swiss cheese, but
the city still stands. While the Orc Baron of Thar and
his forces assaulted the city, a portal that was part of
a modron plot to take over Melvaunt was
miraculously moved outside the walls by a brave
group of adventurers with the assistance of
Truushee the Sage. That portal unleashed the
modron legion into the orc forces just after the
marauders breached the city walls in several
locations. The ensuing battle between the orcs and
modrons allowed the forces of Melvaunt to
successfully defend the city.
In the aftermath of the battle, Melvaunt is in
turmoil politically. The City Watch has been
depleted, with many of their best and brightest
killed in the recent events. The people of Melvaunt
have hastily patched up the walls and are doing their
best to repair them to their former strength. Beyond
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
the walls, bands of orcs and modrons still roam the
area, occasionally attacking the weak spots. While
the orcs and modrons are no longer a threat to the
city itself, citizens and travelers in the area have
been killed. Occasionally groups of modrons,
trapped away from their home, still attempt to
follow their last orders of taking over Melvaunt. A
pentadrone called “Sleepie” (SL33P13-773P) has
broken away from the modron collective and is
assisting the City Watch in dealing with the modrons
in the area.
Then there are the Lords. Political power has a
way of moving hands in the wake of disastrous
events. The Lord of Keys and The Lord of Waves
have declared themselves the temporary rulers of
Melvaunt, but murmurs are already starting to
cascade around the Merchant’s Council. Is this just a
temporary situation or a power play by the two
Lords to wrest all the power and wealth of Melvaunt
for themselves? To make matters worse, a Red
Wizard of Thay was killed during the recent events,
and the Red Wizards don’t approve of their own
being killed. An emissary of the Red Wizards has
been sent to determine what happened and who
might be to blame.
While Melvaunt has dodged the executioner’s axe
this time, the city’s head still looks like it might be on
the chopping block.
Adventure Background
As more chaos energy infuses the land around
Melvaunt, strange happenings continue. Now an
island has mysteriously appeared in the harbor
outside of Melvaunt, threatening sea trade, just as
the roving bands of modrons and orcs threaten land
routes.
Followers of Cyric have received visions of these
occurrences, bringing them to Melvaunt to seek out
their destinies in service to their mad deity. On the
island, priests of Cyric plan to use souls bound by the
mad god into weapons to fuel a ritual that will bring
an avatar of Cyric into the world.
A team of soldiers goes to the island, but the
guardians of the place kill all but their leader. He
swims back to Melvaunt, barely alive, and asks the
adventurers to quickly investigate.
Overview
This adventure is divided into multiple parts.
Part 1. The adventurers come upon Xavier Deveno,
a naval officer whose patrol was attacked as they
CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 5
investigated the island. He begs the adventurers to
quickly go to the island.
Part 2. Arriving on the island, the adventures are
attacked by guardians of the beach. They find a
cavern that leads to passages beneath the island.
Part 3. The adventurers come across some of the
lost souls that the cult of Cyric hoped to use to fuel
their ritual.
Parts 4 and 5. The adventurers learn more about
the lost souls and the ritual the followers of Cyric
hope to perform.
Part 6. The adventurers can interrupt the
summoning of the avatar of Cyric before it is
completed.
Part 7. With their mission (hopefully) successful,
the adventurers must decide what to do with the lost
souls and then collect their reward.

Adventure Hooks
This adventure does not rely on previous adventures
to get into the action. The adventurers happen upon
Xavier Deveno, and they can either respond to his
plea for help or not.

Designer’s Notes
Who’s Your Deity?
At the beginning of the adventure, ask all the players
to indicate if their character worships any particular
deity. Characters playing clerics, paladins, or
characters with the Acolyte background must
declare a deity before the adventure begins. Other
characters are not required to do so, but it might
behoove them, as characters who worship a
particular deity may gain special benefits during this
adventure. Encourage them to pick one if they
haven’t already.
A list of Forgotten Realms’ deities can be found in
the Player’s Handbook in Appendix B or the Sword
Coast Adventurers Guide in Chapter 1.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 6
Part 1: Trouble in
the Water
Expected Duration: 15 minutes
When the players are ready to begin, read the
following. Change as needed to fit the party:
The Giant Jinx is a dock-side tavern where the patrons bet on
anything from the flip of a coin to the last man standing in a
bar brawl. So when a halfling named Marnus and a dwarf
named Agarak decided to see who could drink more in the
name of their respective races, a lot of money exchanged
hands. No one could have predicted that the aroma from
your meals would cause one of the participants to throw up.
And no one could have predicted that your party would have
to defend themselves against angry gamblers who lost a
small fortune by betting against the wrong short race.
When the brawl ended you were none the worse for wear,
but the proprietor of the Giant Jinx insisted you leave and not
come back for at least a month. As you exited the premises
you could hear people betting on when you’d actually return,
if at all.
With the night still young and nothing but free time on
your hands, you are a party in search of a new watering hole
or some other distraction to occupy your time this evening.
While walking along the docks, you hear a deep male voice
call out for help from the water. It would seem your sudden
ejection from the Giant Jinx put you in the right place at the
right time; almost as if the gods wanted you here at this
exact moment.
The adventurers see a man in a naval uniform
clinging to the edge of the docks, barely able to keep
his head above water. When pulled from the water,
he is obviously badly wounded and suffering from
exhaustion.
He is grateful for their assistance, but he insists
they help him get to the Tower of the High Sails
immediately so he can report back to The High Sail.
Intelligence (Medicine) DC 12: His wounds are
fresh and without medical attention possibly life-
threatening. If the check succeeds by 5 or more the
adventurers notice markings near his wounds that
would indicate he’d been grabbed and crushed,
not attacked with weapons.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Intelligence (Medicine) DC 10: The adventurers
can bandage the wounds and stabilize him. If the
adventurers use a healer’s kit, they gain advantage
on the roll. If they administer any magical healing,
he automatically stabilizes.
Intelligence (History) DC 10: Based on what’s left
of his uniform, he’s a lieutenant in the Melvaunt
navy. You don’t reach his position without a lot of
experience at sea and in combat. Whatever did
this to him must have been powerful.
As the adventurers administer aid to the wounded
man, he tells them his name is Xavier Deveno. Read
the following:
The man you pulled from the water is freezing, exhausted,
and wounded. As you try to help him he rambles on. “They’re
dead. My men are all dead,” he says. “It was awful. They
didn’t stand a chance.”
“I took a squad of new recruits in a long boat to check out
the island that appeared in the harbor. We were ordered to
circle around it, look for any signs of inhabitants, and return. I
told them there wasn’t any real danger. This was just a
chance to give the rookies some time at sea. I should have
trusted my gut. I should have known there was danger.”
“When we approached the island, something attacked our
vessel from beneath the waves. We took on water fast, so I
ordered the men to abandon ship and swim for shore. Setting
foot on the island was the beginning of the end. Giant crabs
swarmed the beach along with a monstrous aquatic
crustacean. We fought valiantly, killing one of the giants and
badly wounding the other, but their numbers quickly
overwhelmed us.”
“I watched as my men were slaughtered. I couldn’t save
them. I jumped back in the water and swam for the harbor. I
was the only one who managed to get away.”
He pauses to catch his breath. His shivering continues and
he looks like he’s about to pass out. “We weren’t alone on
the island. During the battle I saw ghastly men with white
eyes lurking in the shadows. I think they might have been
controlling the creatures, forcing them to attack us.”
“Before we left Melvaunt I’d heard rumors that a cult of
Cyric had gone to the island, but I dismissed the talk. I now
wish I’d listened more carefully. Those eyes, those white eyes
pierced the darkness like stars at night. It was unnatural. I’ve
never seen anything so terrible. The High Sail must be told
what happened. We must return to the island.”
The scene on the dock does not go unnoticed as a
pair of sailors recognizes the wounded man’s
uniform. They rush to help, addressing him as
Lieutenant. He commands them to go to the Tower
CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 7
of the High Sail and get a medic. They obey without
hesitation.
“This failure will haunt me. It will ruin the names of the men
who sailed with me to that island. They deserved a better
fate.”
He looks to the stars momentarily, closes his eyes, and
then in a moment of complete clarity opens his eyes again
and addresses you. “I don’t believe in coincidence. I believe
that the gods put you in this place at this time for a reason.
I’m in no shape to return to the island, but you are. Would
you be willing to go to the island? If any of my men live,
they’ll be wounded and need aid. And if they’re all dead
someone must retrieve the remains so they can receive a
proper burial.”
“More importantly someone needs to find the white-eyed
men and stop them. Cyric’s agents must be stopped. Will you
do it? Will you help the weak and wounded, and oppose the
agents of evil?”
Due to his grievous wounds and his exhaustion he is
in no shape to accompany them on this journey, no
matter how much healing the adventurers may be
able to provide.
“When I tell the High Sail what happened he will eventually
send more sailors to the island to investigate, but knowing
him and the politics involved, it will likely take days. If my
men live they need help now.”
“We fought and wounded those monsters. If you head
there now you’d have a good chance of killing the monsters
and eliminating that threat this very night. You’d be heroes!
And the Melvaunt navy would be obligated to compensate
you for this service. I’d see to that personally.”
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Assuming the adventurers agree to head to the
island, Lt. Deveno tells them where they can find a
man named Jorvens, who will take them to the island.
“Tell him ‘The fire burns underwater,’ and he’ll know I sent
you. He’ll bring you wherever you ask him to, and he won’t
ask questions. Thank you and may the gods smile upon you.”
The sailors return, accompanied by four other men
in naval uniforms, one of whom is clearly a medic.
They thank you for your assistance and tell you
they’ll take it from here. They administer first aid
and provide Lt. Deveno with a healing potion if he
still needs it. If the adventurers used healing magic
on Deveno, he gives them the potion of healing
instead as an aid on their mission.
The adventurers can accompany them as far as the
Tower of High Sails but are not allowed to enter. The
adventurers have no problem finding Jorvens, and as
long as they use the phrase Lt. Deveno provided,
they can leave for the island as soon as they’re ready.
There is ample time for the adventurers to
purchase any standard equipment they feel they
may need for their quest.
CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 8
Part 2: Monsters
on the Shore
Expected Duration: 45 minutes
Jorvens is a quiet, competent sailor. When you told him what
you needed, he made his boat available to you without
question or hesitation. By the time you’ve finished your
preparations, he’s ready to cast off as the sun is cresting the
eastern horizon.
The journey across the bay to the island was quick and
uneventful. As you approach the shore, Jorvens tells you
after he drops you on the island he’s returning to port. He’ll
come back for you tomorrow at first light. Hopefully you
don’t get into too much trouble in just one day.
If the adventurers ask Jorvens to take them around
the island he is willing to do so. They don’t spot any
signs of life or monsters. They are not attacked. The
island isn’t very large. Where the rocky edges of the
island meet the water it is quite steep and would be
nearly impossible to climb from the water onto the
rocks without getting crushed by the waves
pounding the island.
There seems to be only one spot where it’s
possible to gain access to the island: a small
shoreline with a beach of small crushed rocks and
pebbles. Jorvens gets about 50 feet from the shore
and tells the adventurers they’ll have to wade the
rest of the way. He’s concerned that the bottom of
his boat may scrape against unseen rocks below the
water. Try as they might, the adventurers are unable
to convince him to get any closer to shore. If they
threaten violence, he reminds them that Lt. Deveno
is a powerful man in Melvaunt and wouldn’t like it if
his friend were to be harmed.
The adventurers easily wade to shore safely. Read
the following when they get to shore:
The rising sun casts long dark shadows across the beach.
Debris from Lt. Deveno’s ship has washed up on shore. In the
center of the beach is the carcass of large, dead crab-like
monster. There are no signs of any of the sailors.
Allow each adventurer to take one round of actions
when they arrive on the beach. Most likely they’ll
want to explore the area. See Exploring the Beach
below.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
After they all take one turn the wounded chuul
and two giant crabs emerge from the water to
attack the party, triggering initiative. Read:
Your trip to the shore did not go unnoticed. A giant
crustacean, similar to the dead one lying on the beach,
emerges from the water and approaches. Trailing behind it
are two giant crabs. You notice that the large creature is
wounded, as there are signs of cracks and breaks in its hard
outer shell, and one of its large pincers hangs limply at its
side. It is aggressive and moves to attack.
General Features
Light. The adventurers arrive shortly after dawn
so there is daylight, but there are also long shadows
cast on the beach.
Smells. The beach smells of salt water and rotting
fish as the dead chuul has started to decompose.
Once the sun rises, the smell will become even more
pungent.
Terrain.
 Beach. The sandy beach does not impede
movement.
 Rocks on the beach. There are three large rocks
on the north end of the beach. They are about 5 ft.
tall and 5 ft. around. These are big enough to climb
(no check required) or hide behind. Large
creatures must squeeze to move between them.
 Large Rocks. There are large rocky outcroppings
at the north and south end of the beach. They are
10 ft. high and can be climbed. They are slick and
sharp so climbing requires a DC 10 Strength
(Athletics) check to climb. Once on top of the
rocky area, an adventurer must make an
immediate DC 10 Dexterity save or slip and fall. An
adventurer who falls suffers 1d6 piercing and
bludgeoning damage from the sharp rocks and the
impact.
A cavern entrance is difficult to spot in the morning
shade. Adventurers only see it if they move within
20 ft. of the opening, or if they spot it during their
one round of investigation. It is unguarded, and
adventurers can enter without hindrance if they
notice it.
Tactics
The chuul is wounded and slow out of the water. See
Adjusting the Encounter below for more details. If
a chuul poisons an adventurer, it immediately drops
that adventurer and moves on to another victim.
CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 9
 The chuul tries to stay within 20 ft. of the Wisdom (Perception) DC 12: A character searching
shoreline. If the adventurers flee, the chuul only the southern end of the beach spots the cavern
remains on the beach for two rounds. If attacked entrance. It’s masked by the morning shadows and
from range, it returns to the water. If left alone, it otherwise unnoticeable.
dodges for two rounds and then returns to the water.
When the adventurers move to the southern end of
The giant crabs flee if the chuul leaves.
the beach read the following.
Clever adventurers may realize the chuul won’t
venture too far from the safety of the water. Reward You notice the entrance to a cavern. This must be where the
clever tactics. Award full XP for defeating the chuul white-eyed creatures Lt. Deveno spoke of stood when the
and giant crabs if the adventurers take advantage of
sailors fought. There is no sign of them now.
the situation and head into the cavern without
Just past the cavern on the beach there are numerous
killing them.
mounds of dirt. They look out of place.
ADJUSTING THE ENCOUNTER
Intelligence (Investigate) DC 10: On top of each
Here are the recommendations for adjusting this combat mound a symbol has been drawn in the sand. Each
encounter. These adjustments are not cumulative. mound has one of four different symbols drawn on
 Very weak party: Reduce the chuul’s hit points to 33. It it.
only gets one pincer attack that deals 1d6+2 damage. Its Intelligence (Religion) DC 10: These are burial
tentacle no longer contains poison. Add two giant crabs. mounds.
 Weak party: Reduce the chuul’s hit points to 43. It only Intelligence (Religion) DC 12: The symbols on the
gets one pincer attack that deals 1d6+2 damage. Its mounds are those of various deities, both good
tentacle recharges its poison on a 6. Add one giant crab.
and evil. If the check succeeds by 5 or more the
 Average party: Reduce the chuul’s hit points to 53. It only
adventurers can identify the symbols as those of
gets one pincer attack. Its tentacle recharges its poison on
Lathander, Shar, Leira, and Helm. Clerics, paladins,
a 5-6.
and characters with the Acolyte background
 Strong party: Reduce the chuul’s hit points to 53. It only
gets one pincer attack. Its tentacle recharges its poison on automatically know this information and do not
a 4-6. Add one giant crab. have to make the check.
 Very strong party: Reduce the chuul’s hit points to 53. It The remains of Lt. Deveno’s men are buried beneath
only gets one pincer attack. Its tentacle recharges its the mounds. Each was laid to rest with care and
poison on a 3-6. Add two giant crabs. precision. Limbs that were severed or torn off during
combat have been buried with the bodies. When the
Searching the Beach adventurers are ready to enter the cave, proceed to
Searching the beach reveals the following details. Part 3: Strangers in the Cavern.
Each PC earns 25 XP if they show reverence and
Intelligence (Investigation) DC 10: An adventurer
respect for the bodies of the fallen sailors. They can
who heads inland notices numerous mounds
earn this reward if the dig up the bodies, but they
tucked safely away from the shore. They don’t
should do so with care and replace the bodies when
look like they formed naturally.
they are done.
Wisdom (Survival) DC 10: Tracks on the beach that
lead away from the shore. The tracks show
humanoids wearing boots have walked into and
out of the cavern and along the secluded area of
the beach.
Wisdom (Survival) DC 10: Signs of the fight
between the sailors and the monsters are present.
There is fresh blood on the beach but no bodies.
Wisdom (Perception) DC 10: There are weapons
and spent ammunition on the beach, but nothing
that’s still usable.
Wisdom (Perception) DC 12: An adventurer who
declares they’re watching the water for
approaching monsters spots the chuul as it nears.
Adventurers gain +2 to their initiative.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 10
Part 3: Strangers in
the Caverns
Expected Duration: 30 minutes
When the adventurers enter the cavern, read:
The temperature drops sharply once you venture more than
20 ft, into the cavern. The passage slopes noticeably
downward, and after another 30 ft. it forks in two directions.
General Features
Light: The passage is dark and adventurers will
need to generate their own light source if one is
required.
Terrain: The passages are only 5 ft. wide and 5 ft.
high, so adventurers will need to travel single file.
Once inside the tunnel the adventurers can make the
following checks.
Wisdom (Survival) DC 10: The adventurers notice
signs of tracks going into and out of the tunnel.
Numerous humanoids wearing boots came this
way. If the check succeeds by 5 or more they can
determine that tracks are less than one day old.
Intelligence (Investigation) DC 10: There is no
sign of blood anywhere inside the passage. None
of the wounded sailors came this way or were
carried this way.
The caverns veer off in different directions with
offshoots every 30-50 feet. If the adventurers are
trying to follow the tracks, they quickly discover that
it doesn’t help them. The tracks lead down most of
the passages. Some passages are dead ends and in
many instances the tracks go to the end and then
turn around, almost as if the person who made them
was unsure of where they were going.
DM’s Note: A map of the passages is not provided.
If the characters want to try and create a map or
mark their course, allow them to do so, but don’t
belabour the point. Maps are only provided for key
areas of the tunnels and caverns.
After wandering the passages for about 20-30
minutes you hear the sounds of combat from the
passage ahead.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
When you round the bend you see four humanoids
fighting shadows. Before you can pick a side, or even call out
to the combatants, one of the humanoids holds up a disk
shaped like a sun and shouts, “Be gone! May the sun’s light
destroy you!” As the disk briefly radiates a bright flash of
light, the shadows cringe and flee, flying away down another
passage to the safety of the darkness.
With the shadows banished for the time being, one of the
humanoids turns and notices the party. The strangers call out
to you, “Come forth from the darkness. It’s safe now. The
foul undead are gone.”
The strangers provide assurances that they won’t
harm the adventurers. When they get within 10 ft. of
the strangers, they immediately realize all the
humanoids have white eyes.
When asked to identify themselves, the strangers
cannot. They don’t know who they are, where they
came from, or why they’re here. Aside from their
white eyes they all have one other thing in common:
they all have holy symbols prominently displayed on
their persons.
Intelligence (Religion) DC 10: Each symbol is that
of a prominent deity. Clerics, paladins, and
characters with the Acolyte background
automatically know this information and do not
have to make the check. Adventurers who make
the check and succeed by 5 or more also know the
deity’s exact alignment.
 Lathander: God of dawn, spring, and birth
(Neutral Good)
 Shar: Goddess of darkness, night, caverns, and
dungeons (Neutral Evil)
 Helm: God of vigilance and protection (Lawful
Neutral)
 Leira: Goddess of illusions and deception (Chaotic
Neutral)
The two males wear the symbols of Lathander and
Shar, while the two females wear symbols of Helm
and Leira.
Intelligence (History) DC 18: The white-eyed
strangers are champions of their faith who died
decades ago. Clerics, paladins, and characters with
the Acolyte background who worship any of the
four deities represented automatically know the
identity of the hero associated with their faith and
do not have to make the check. See Appendix 1
for more details on these NPCs.
CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 11
Wisdom (Insight) DC 10: These strangers are being  They wandered the maze of caverns for hours and
truthful about their predicament. Success by 5 or were attacked by shadows numerous times.
more also reveals that they are all ill at ease about  They eventually found their way to the surface.
their own lack of knowledge but confident in their When they reached the beach, the chuul and giant
own abilities. crabs defeated the last of the sailors. Before the
Charisma (Persuasion) DC 10: An adventurer can creatures could consume the bodies or drag them
explain what the holy symbols represent and out to sea, the four souls scared them off.
educate them on the edicts of their respective  They sailors were all dead, so the souls gathered
faiths. If they identified their true identity, the the remains, performed last rites, and buried the
characters can reveal that information to them as bodies.
well. Success by 5 more makes all subsequent  They could have tried to leave the island, but they
Charisma checks to interact with them easier and felt compelled to stay. Each felt they had a task to
made with advantage. complete here before they could leave. They felt
Wisdom (Medicine) or Investigation they must confront the cultists. So they rested on
(Intelligence) DC 10: None of the four white-eyed the beach and at dawn headed back into the
strangers are alive. Yet they don’t seem to be tunnels.
undead either. None of them were affected when  Despite their aimless wandering the day before,
the shadows were turned. they’re confident they can lead the party to the
Intelligence (Religion) DC 15: This check should area where the cultists are gathered. Together
be made only after it’s discovered that the they may be able to defeat Cyric’s followers, free
white-eyed strangers are not alive. Clerics and the others, and leave the island.
paladins proficient in Religion or characters with
the Acolyte background make this check with
advantage. The humanoids are neither living nor
dead. They died but their souls have not been able
to pass beyond the physical realm upon their
deaths. They are living souls given physical form.
If the strangers cannot be identified they will
respond to the names of their deities once the
adventurers identify the symbols.
They share the following information with the
party:
 They remember waking up a few days ago in cages
with others like themselves. There were 16
prisoners – eight men and eight women. Each cage
held four prisoners, two men and two women.
 They were guarded by shadows like the ones that
just fled. The shadows took orders from humans
dressed in purple and black. The humans spoke of
their deity: Cyric.
 Despite not knowing who they are, the white-eyed
strangers all instinctively know that Cyric is evil
and they must oppose his followers.
 Yesterday the cultists of Cyric opened the cages
and took prisoners from two cells, four men and
four women. After they left, Shar managed to get
the shadow guards close together and Lathander
used his holy symbol to turn them. Helm and Leira
worked together to force open their cage. Before
they could free the other prisoners, the cultists
returned to investigate the noise. These four fled.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 12
Part 4: Scared of
Your Own Shadow
Expected Duration: 45 minutes
When the adventurers move into the passages with
the souls, read:
Navigating the caverns is difficult. Following the tracks of the
living souls isn’t very helpful since they were wandering
throughout the caverns for hours before the party
encountered them.
The passage you’re moving through curves to the right and
as you round the bend the passage widens briefly in two
spots.
The soul of Shar suddenly calls out to the party, “We’re not
alone; the shadows are near. I can feel them.”
Before the adventurers can take any actions six
shadows attack.
Two shadows attempt to hide in the cracks of the
alcoves the party is passing. They were aware of the
party’s approach and had ample time to hide in the
cracks and shadows. Roll their initial Stealth check
with advantage. The shadows have surprise if their
Dexterity (Stealth) check exceeds any adventurer’s
Passive Perception. Adventurers who detect the
shadows can act normally during the first round.
Four other shadows attack the procession – two
from the front and two from the rear. These
shadows made no attempt to hide.
The souls have faced the shadows before but only
a few at a time. The only way they’ll defeat this many
and avoid capture is to ensure the adventurers are
victorious. The Souls use the Help action to assist the
adventurers during the combat. The souls use the
commoner statistics but they have an improved AC
and weapons (already noted in the stat blocks).
General Features
Light. The passages are completely dark unless the
adventurers provide their own light source.
Terrain. The passages here are 10 ft. wide and
ceiling height varies from 6-8 ft.
Tactics
The two hidden shadows attack the adventurers
during the first round (possibly with advantage
because the adventurers were surprised). In the
second round, all six shadows work together.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
 Two shadows block the passage so that the
adventurers cannot advance. They attack the lead
adventurers, but remain side-by-side.
 Two shadows attack random adventurers within
reach.
 Two shadows attack the living souls.
The shadows never focus on the same target,
preferring to attack different foes and weaken
everybody.
ADJUSTING THE ENCOUNTER
Here are the recommendations for adjusting this combat
encounter. These adjustments are not cumulative.
 Very weak party: Reduce each shadow’s hit points to 8.
 Weak party: Reduce each shadow’s hit points to 12.
 Strong party: Increase each shadow’s hit points to 20.
 Very strong party: Increase each shadow’s hit points to
24.
If a shadow successfully strikes a soul, the soul
winces in pain. Do not track the souls’ hit points.
Instead when a soul is hit, it must make a DC 10
Constitution saving throw. Success means nothing
harmful happens, while failure results in the soul
becoming incorporeal. When that happens read the
following:
As a shadow’s claws rake deeply into the soul of Leira’s
champion, there is a flash of light and her physical body
becomes incorporeal. The soul looks at you as its ghost-like
form is drawn away down the passage. You see the horror on
its face as if it realizes that something terrible is about to
happen to it. As the soul is pulled more rapidly away from
you, it yells “HEEEEELP!”
The other souls fighting beside you seemed frightened by
their friend’s fate. “We must follow her. She’s being pulled
back to the cages. We cannot allow the cultists to imprison
her again.”
Before you can give chase, another shadow tries to strike a
deadly blow against one of the adventurers. The living soul of
Helm’s champion blocks the attack with his body, protecting
you but suffering the full force of the shadow’s attack in the
process. The shadow’s dark claws rip through the soul,
destroying it. Again, there is a brief flash as the soul’s body
becomes incorporeal and is pulled away down the passage.
The shadows try to block your passage so that you cannot
follow the souls as they are being forcefully returned to the
cultists.
Getting Past the Shadows
CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 13
The adventurers have 5 rounds to catch up to the
incorporeal souls before they are pulled away from
them. The shadows do whatever they can to slow
down or stop the adventurers.
The shadows were instructed to find the escaped
living souls and strike them down, which forces
them back to their cages. They were also told to stop
any strangers from finding the cultists.
The shadows engage the party in combat,
preferring to attack the living souls whenever they
can. Two shadows always stand side by side to
prevent anyone from getting past them in the maze
of tunnels.
When a shadow is destroyed or whenever an
adventurer manages to get past them, the shadows
reposition themselves ahead of the adventurers to
block their progress.
There are cracks all along the walls in the tunnels.
The shadows can enter the cracks in the walls and
travel parallel to the corridors undetected. This
allows them to get around adventurers without
provoking too many opportunity attacks.
Although a map of this section of the tunnels is
provided, it may be easier to forego the maze map
and just focus on the immediate section the
adventurers are in. The passages are a honeycomb of
twists and turns. Following the souls is difficult,
which is why they have to pursue within 5 rounds.
If the shadows manage to delay the adventurers
for 5 full rounds, the party is too far away from the
incorporeal souls to follow them back to the cages.
On the shadows’ turn in round 6, they disengage,
move into the cracks in the walls, and disappear.
The Living Souls
The souls have a fly speed of 30 ft and dash every
round. The souls are incorporeal and cannot be
stopped or slowed by physical barriers. The have
resistance to all damage and cannot be harmed.
Reward creativity if the adventurers can think of
ways to slow down the souls.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Forced Movement
The easiest way to ensure the flying souls don’t get
too far ahead of the adventurers is for them to
simply force their way past the shadows. The
adventurers can try to move the shadows out of
their path by forcefully moving them. This can be
accomplished by using spells (such as
Thunderwave) and class abilities (such as a fighter’s
Pushing Attack Maneuver) that push creatures. All
characters can take shove actions. See Shoving a
Creature in the Player’s Handbook, pg. 195 (copied
in the sidebar below).
The shadows contest shoves using their Dexterity
(Acrobatics) which is only +2.
Shoving a Creature
Using the Attack action, you can make a special melee attack
to shove a creature, either to knock it prone or push it away
from you. If you’re able to make multiple attacks with the
Attack action, this attack replaces one of them.
The target of your shove must be no more than one size
larger than you, and it must be within your reach. You make a
Strength (Athletics) check contested by the target’s Strength
(Athletics) or Dexterity (Acrobatics) check (the target chooses
the ability to use). If you win the contest, you either knock
the target prone or push it 5 feet away from you.
Remember that shoving an enemy does not provoke
an opportunity attack, but if an enemy is pushed and
then an adventurer tries to move past the enemy,
they will provoke and opportunity attack from that
enemy.
At the end of round 5, or when the adventurers
defeat all the shadows, proceed to Part 5: Caged
Souls.
CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 14
Part 5: Caged
Souls
Expected Duration: 30 minutes
If the adventurers managed to get past the shadows
and follow the incorporeal souls back to the cages by
the end of round 5, proceed to You Found It below.
If the adventurers were not able to get past the
shadows by the end of round 5, they were unable to
follow the incorporeal souls and got lost in their
haste to keep up. Proceed to You’re Lost below.
Lost adventurers may ask any remaining souls still
with the party which way to go. Remaining souls are
distraught and distracted from the recent combat
and are unable to provide directions with certainty.
The adventurers may suggest destroying a soul
deliberately to create a new incorporeal essence,
thereby giving the party a new soul to follow.
The souls are reluctant to allow this but can be
convinced of the value of doing this with a successful
DC 15 Charisma (Persuasion) check. Reward good
roleplaying and rational arguments the players
make to support this plan.
Any attempts to convince the souls using Charisma
(Deception) or Charisma (Intimidation)
automatically fail unless the die roll is a natural 20.
If a soul agrees to be destroyed, the same thing
happens as before. The body is destroyed, there is a
brief flash, and the incorporeal essence is pulled
away. The adventurers have no difficulty following it
this time and no additional shadows appear. Proceed
to You Found It below.
You Found It
You’ve reached your destination. You managed to follow the
soul despite the shadows’ attempts to stop you. The passage
opens into a larger cavern, approximately 40 ft. wide and 60
ft. long, with another passage leading out of this chamber on
the opposite side.
The room contains four cages, each large enough to hold
four prisoners. All of the cages are empty except one. On the
floor of the closest cage you see the newly reformed physical
bodies of the souls that were destroyed by the shadows a
few minutes earlier lying unconscious on the floor.
On the far end of the chamber you see numerous boxes,
barrels, and sacks placed neatly against the cavern wall. In
front of that are two humans dressed in purple and black
robes. Two shadows stand beside them.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
The return of the soul a moment earlier has alerted
the two acolytes. The acolytes were told that the
souls would return if the shadows caught them. They
did not expect for real people to appear as well. They
are not prepared to battle the adventurers, but the
two shadows are there to assist.
Tactics
The acolytes begin dodging when the adventurers
enter the room. They command the shadows to kill
the intruders. The acolytes fight for one round, using
Sacred Flame and targeting the adventurers wearing
the heaviest armor.
As soon as they take damage they surrender if
given the opportunity to do so. If one of the acolytes
is killed or knocked unconscious, the adventurers
have advantage on any Charisma check made to
convince the other acolyte to surrender.
The shadows fight to the death. If any of the
shadows the adventurers faced in the last encounter
fled, then these are the same shadows. Adjust hit
points to reflect whatever damage they may have
already sustained.
When the fighting ends, the adventurers can freely
Search the Chamber and Interrogate the
Prisoners if any acolytes are still alive. See below.
ADJUSTING THE ENCOUNTER
Here are the recommendations for adjusting this combat
encounter. These adjustments are not cumulative.
 Very weak party: Reduce each shadow’s hit points to 8.
 Weak party: Reduce each shadow’s hit points to 12.
 Strong party: Increase each shadow’s hit points to 20.
 Very strong party: Increase each shadow’s hit points to
24.
CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 15
You’re Lost
If the adventurers were unable to follow the souls
destroyed by the shadows in the previous encounter,
read:
You let the soul get too far ahead of you and you were
unable to follow it. You wander the tunnels for almost 10
minutes before you finally arrived at your destination.
The passage opens to a larger cavern approximately 40 ft
wide and 60 ft long with another passage leading out of this
chamber on the opposite side.
The room contains four cages, each large enough to hold
four prisoners. All of the cages are empty. On the far end of
the chamber you see numerous boxes, barrels, and sacks
placed neatly against the cavern wall.
Although no one is in this chamber now, you get the
distinct impression that if you’d gotten here sooner someone
would have been.
The souls returned to their cage a few minutes
before the adventurers arrived. The bodies
rematerialized and fell limp to the floor. Two
acolytes that were on guard here collected the
unconscious bodies and carried them off to the
Ritual Chamber.
The good news is that the acolytes don’t know the
adventurers are on the island so they made no effort
to hide anything they left behind. The adventurers
are free to begin Searching the Chamber.
General Features
Light. The cavern is lit by torches crudely affixed
to the cavern walls.
Cages. The four cages are exactly the same. The
lock on one is damaged.
Summoning Symbol. An eight-pointed star is
drawn on the ground in the centre of this chamber.
The cages are located at the star’s longest points. In
the centre of the star a skull is drawn on the ground.
Searching the Chamber
Intelligence (Religion) DC 10: The symbol on the
floor is that of Cyric, the deity of lies, madness,
strife, and deceit (Chaotic Evil).
Intelligence (Religion) or Intelligence (Arcana)
DC 12: This symbol is part of a summoning and
binding ritual. The souls in the cages were likely
bound to remain prisoners within until the
summoner released them or the sigil was broken.
Intelligence (Investigation) DC 12: The sigil was
disrupted near the cell with the broken lock. This
could explain how the souls were able to escape.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
The boxes, barrels and sacks contain provisions and
survival gear. There’s enough here to sustain a
dozen humans for two weeks. There are also
numerous packs that contain personal items.
In eight of the packs the adventurers find unholy
scripture dedicated to Cyric. In one of those packs
the adventurers discover a book bound in purple
vellum. On its cover is a symbol of Cyric similar to
the one etched on the floor. Any good aligned
character who opens the book takes 1d6 psychic
damage unless they say a prayer in praise of Cyric
before they open it.
Inside the book are numerous sermons dedicated
to Cyric. It is one of the most horrific and disturbing
things any of the adventurers have ever read. Some
blasphemies cannot be unheard or unseen.
While reading through the book the adventurers
find illustrations of a room like the one they’re
standing in now. Further reading reveals that this is
part of a special ritual that will grant Cyric’s most
faithful servants the Dark Sun’s blessing.
It will take the adventurers an hour to read
enough of the unholy book to fully understand
what’s going on. See Deciphering the Ritual below.
This can be done during a short rest.
Interrogating the Prisoners
Acolytes that were captured reveal everything they
know with a simple DC 10 Charisma (Intimidation)
or Charisma (Persuasion) check. Unfortunately, they
are the lowest ranking cultists here and are quite
clueless.
 They only recently became followers of Cyric.
They came to Melvaunt because leaders from their
cult claimed that Melvaunt was about to play an
important role in Cyric’s plans.
 The priests of Cyric had visions that an island
would appear in the harbor and they were to
conduct an ancient ritual here once it did.
 They had lookouts watching the bay, and on a
moonless night the island rose from the sea floor.
As soon as it did the cultists were ready. They had
boats prepared to ferry them across to the island
and within an hour they’d landed 12 cultists.
 The chuuls and giant crabs tried to attack the
boats, but the pilots managed to get away from the
coastline without incident. The cultists ignored the
monsters and ventured into the caves.
 It took a while for the priests to find the right
cavern, but eventually they found this room. They
spent hours carving the sigil into the floor and
CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 16
 then began the ritual. Before they began they
placed weapons on the floor of each cage; two
swords and two daggers in each. When it ended a
soul emerged from each blade.
 The next day the priests found another chamber
where they started the whole thing all over again.
This time the sigil they carved was twice the size.
 Yesterday the priests had the acolytes escort the
prisoners from this room to the room where
they’re preparing to do the next ritual.
 That’s when four souls escaped. The priests were
furious. They instructed the shadows to find the
escapees and return them here. The acolytes were
told to stay here until the souls returned. They
haven’t been allowed back into the larger chamber
since the souls escaped yesterday, so they don’t
know what’s going on now.
 These acolytes realize that they’ve become part of
something terrible and evil and they want out.
They beg the adventurers to help them get off the
island and back to the mainland.
 They won’t leave this room or participate in any
combat. However, they are willing to draw the
adventurers a rough map of the larger summoning
chamber and provide directions on how to get
there.
Interrogating the Souls
Any souls that still accompany the characters
confirm the following information.
 This was the place where they first woke up.
 Many cultists came and went from this room. It
seemed that they were looking for another
chamber in which to complete another ritual. It
sounded like they found what they were looking
for yesterday.
 The priests ordered the acolytes and shadows to
bring the prisoners to the new chamber where the
ritual was to take place. That’s when these souls
made their escape.
The characters can take a short rest before moving
on. If they try to take a long rest they are attacked by
shadows every 90 minutes.
Deciphering the Ritual
The cultists use the souls of Cyric’s enemies to
empower the ritual. These living souls are the
physical manifestations of each deity’s most faithful
followers. In life, each was a devout cleric or paladin
who wronged Cyric in some way. All were killed by a
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
devout follower of Cyric using a special ritualistic
blade that trapped their soul.
Cyric’s faithful have been collecting these souls for
decades. The ritual required a series of events to
take place before it could begin. For the past few
months Cyric’s most devout followers had prophetic
dreams which led them to Melvaunt. The emergence
of this island meant the time was right to perform
the Dark Sun’s blessing.
First the cultists had to release the trapped souls.
They’ve completed that part already. Second they
had to place the souls in a very specific arrangement
around the symbol of Cyric. When they did, eight of
Cyric’s most faithful servants would recite the ritual.
The ceremony would create a dark pillar that would
siphon the divine essence of the captured souls and
allow Cyric to manipulate it.
The souls need to be arranged in key positions
based on their alignment, but the ritual doesn’t
provide specific details on this part. When done
correctly the cultists could manipulate the powers of
good and evil, law and chaos, to mask their own evil
hearts. Once shielded they could commit
unspeakable acts of evil in Cyric’s name and remain
undetected. The souls will be utterly and
permanently destroyed if the ritual succeeds.
Once these details are discovered, the souls
present begin to regain their memories. Hearing the
details of the ritual seemed to trigger their
memories like an instinctual reaction to danger.
They begin to catch glimpses of their own past again.
They understand who they are and what’s at stake if
they fail.
Disrupting the Ritual
Based on what the adventurers learn from reading
Cyric’s unholy book, they can disrupt the ritual in the
following ways.
 Kill or knock out the cultists performing the ritual.
 Move the cultists off of their designated spots on
the star symbol.
 Move the living souls off of the star symbol.
 Kill the living souls. See Killing the Living Souls
below.
 Heal the souls. Any healing magic provided to a
soul insulates them from the draining effect for
one round per level of the spell cast or one round
if a potion of healing is administered.
 Cast a Silence spell.
CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 17
Killing the Living Souls Treasure
Killing the living souls isn’t easy. The adventurers The Cyric unholy manuscript could be sold to a
already witnessed what happens when the soul’s scholar or collector for 100 gp. It could be sold by an
body is killed: they return to their cages. evil character to an evil-aligned church for 200 gp. If
Now that the souls are beginning to remember brought to a good-aligned ch,urch they would gladly
their pasts and their religious teachings, they can destroy the foul text free of charge.
explain how to put the souls to rest permanently, If the adventurers destroy the Cyric unholy
thereby denying the cultists the life-forces they need manuscript immediately or if they agree to bring it
to complete their ritual and ensuring that these to a church where it can be destroyed, award each
champions of the faith are allowed to pass on to the adventurer 50 XP.
afterlife. If the adventurers decide to bring the Cyric unholy
If none of the souls are present, then a cleric, manuscript to a good-aligned church where it can be
paladin, or any adventurer who is proficient in studied and/or destroyed, award each adventurer
Religion or who has the Acolyte background must 100 XP.
make a successful DC 20 Intelligence (Religion)
check to gain this information.
The only way to destroy the souls permanently is
to recite a blessing of their faith before taking an
action that reduces them to 0 hit points. Characters
can make a DC 15 Intelligence (Religion) check (no
action) on their turn to recall the appropriate prayer.
Each adventurer can only make one such check each
round, and the player must declare what deity/faith
they’re trying to remember. Once a prayer is
remembered and recited aloud, all other
adventurers capable of hearing can repeat the
prayer without making a new check.
Characters who worship a deity represented here
automatically know the prayer for their own faith.
Characters with the Acolyte background or
proficiency in Religion have advantage on all
Intelligence (Religion) checks to remember the
prayer.
If any of the souls are present, the adventurers
may suggest killing them now. The souls are
agreeable to this but would prefer to stay and help if
they can.
After the adventurers have completed their short
rest they should proceed to Part 6: The Ritual
Chamber.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 18
Part 6: The
Summoning
Chamber
Expected Duration: 60 minutes
The adventurers will arrive at the Summoning
Chamber from different entry points depending on
what happened in Part 4.
If the adventurers made it to the chamber of caged
souls before the acolytes left, and they were able to
interrogate them, they are told how to approach
from the south passage.
If the characters did not make it to the chamber of
caged souls before the olytes left, they approach
from the northwest passage.
Northwest Passage
If the adventurers approach from the northwest,
read:
Voices echo faintly from the tunnel ahead of you. The path
widens, and as you round the next bend you see a dim light
emanating in the distance. Continuing onward toward the
light you come to a large cavern.
The cavern is dimly lit by torches affixed to the wall around
the chamber. The voices you’re hearing are numerous people
speaking together as one. Based on the blasphemy they’re
reciting, these are Cyric’s faithful.
As you take in the entire chamber, you recognize the eight-
pointed star with a skull in the center etched on the floor as a
symbol of Cyric. It’s similar to the one in the previous room
but much larger.
At each of the star’s eight points, humans dressed in
purple and black are chanting as they perform the ritual.
At the lower vertices of the star’s points, eight living souls
stand frozen. Eight shadows stand outside of the star near
the cultists. They’re watching the ritual and the room, but do
not seem to be part of the ritual itself.
A pillar of shadowy darkness originates from the skull
symbol at the center of the star. Dark tendrils reach out and
wrap themselves around the living souls as the cultists
continue their chanting. Each time a cultist recites their
prayer, the nearest soul fades momentarily and the dark
pillar pulses with power.
Have all adventurers make a DC 15 Intelligence
(Religion) check. Characters trained in Religion or
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
who have the Ritual Caster feat/ability make the
check with advantage. Success reveals that the
voices are indeed in the midst of performing a ritual,
and from the sound of it the ritual is reaching a
crescendo. If the adventurers plan to interfere or
stop the ritual, they don’t have a lot of time.
If the adventurers remain quiet and out of sight,
no enemies approach them until they advance. They
can attempt a DC 10 group Dexterity (Stealth) check
to gain surprise when they enter the chamber. If the
check fails, the two closest shadows move toward
the adventurers to confront them. When the
adventurers enter the chamber or engage any
cultists or living souls participating in the ritual,
proceed to Stop the Unbelievers below.
South Passage
If the adventurers approach from the south, read:
Voices echo faintly from the tunnel ahead of you. The path
widens, and as you round the next bend you see a dim light
emanating in the distance. Continuing onward toward the
light you come to a large cavern.
The cavern is dimly lit by torches affixed to the wall around
the chamber. The voices you’re hearing are numerous people
speaking together as one. Based on the blasphemy they’re
reciting, these are Cyric’s faithful.
As you take in the entire chamber, you recognize the eight-
pointed star with a skull in the center etched on the floor as a
symbol of Cyric. It’s similar to the one in the previous room
but much larger.
At each of the star’s eight points, humans dressed in
purple and black are chanting as they perform the ritual.
At the lower vertices of the star’s points, eight living souls
stand frozen. Eight shadows stand outside of the star near
the cultists. They’re watching the ritual and the room, but do
not seem to be part of the ritual itself.
A pillar of shadowy darkness originates from the skull
symbol at the center of the star. Dark tendrils reach out and
wrap themselves around the living souls as the cultists
continue their chanting. Each time a cultist recites their
prayer, the nearest soul fades momentarily and the dark
pillar pulses with power.
There is a cage to your left in an alcove to the northwest,
similar to the ones you saw in the last chamber. There are
four more living souls trapped inside. Standing in front of the
cage are two acolytes dressed like the ones you recently
faced. They are completely fascinated by the spectacle and
don’t immediately notice you when you enter the chamber.
CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 19
Have all adventurers make a DC 15 Intelligence
(Religion) check. Characters trained in Religion or
who have the Ritual Caster feat/ability make the
check with advantage. Success reveals that the
voices are indeed in the midst of performing a ritual,
and from the sound of it the ritual is reaching a
crescendo. If the adventurers plan to interfere or
stop the ritual, they don’t have a lot of time.
Because the adventurers approach from the south
passage, their presence isn’t initially considered
problematic. The shadows have been told not worry
about anyone entering the chamber from this
passage, and the cultists are too busy performing the
ritual to notice. Until the adventurers do something
to draw attention to themselves, they remain
undetected.
If the adventurers remain quiet and out of sight,
no enemies approach them until they advance. They
can attempt a DC 10 group Dexterity (Stealth) check
to gain surprise when they enter the chamber. If the
check fails, the two closest shadows move toward
the adventurers to confront them.
If the adventurers wait, the acolytes guarding the
cage spot them at the beginning of round three. They
command the shadows to attack and then cast
Sacred Flame on the adventurers from a safe
distance. If the adventurers move towards the cage,
move towards the ritual area, or attack anyone, the
cultists move into action. Proceed to Stop the
Unbelievers below.
Stop the Unbelievers
Once the adventurers make their presence known,
the cultists performing the ritual realize something’s
amiss and act accordingly.
General Features
Light. The cavern is dimly lit by torches crudely
affixed to the cavern walls.
Summoning Symbol. An eight-pointed star is
drawn on the ground in the center of this chamber.
In the center of the star a skull is drawn on the
ground.
Dark Pillar. Emanating from the skull on the floor
is a pillar of darkness. It blocks line of sight and line
of effect. Adventurers who move into the pillar of
darkness take 2d6 psychic damage when they enter
and 1d6 psychic damage at the beginning of each
turn they’re inside. The souls, shadows, and cultists
are immune to these effects.
Cage. The cages seem to be identical to the cages
the adventurers discovered in the previous chamber.
Living Souls. The souls are positioned around the
dark pillar in a very specific order based on their
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
deity’s alignment and the soul’s gender. See
Appendix 1 for the exact positioning.
Participating in the ritual are 4 priests (all female)
and 4 cult fanatics (all male).
Once the cultists realize the adventurers are in the
room, 1 priest and 1 cult fanatic break away from
their spots in the ritual star and attack the
adventurers. The remaining cultists work diligently
to complete the ritual. Read:
Two cultists break away from the ritual to engage you
directly. “Brothers and sisters, the ritual nears completion.
We are moments away from receiving the Dark Sun’s
blessing. Focus on the goal while we take care of these
unbelievers.”
The remaining 3 priests and 3 cult fanatics continue
with the ritual and do not engage in combat initially.
Each time a cult fanatic is dropped to 0 hit points,
another breaks away from the ritual to engage the
adventurers. None of the other priests stop their
part of the ritual, even if they’re attacked directly.
There should never be more than 2 cultists engaging
the party directly. They believe that there is a
greater reward coming to them when the ritual is
completed, so they remain focused at all costs.
See Completing the Ritual below.
Tactics
The priest moves into melee and attacks a
spellcaster or an unarmored hero if possible. She
casts Spiritual Weapon in the first round as a bonus
action and uses it to attack a different opponent than
the one she’s adjacent to. Each time she hits with a
melee attack, she uses her Divine Eminence and
expends a level 1 spell slot.
The cult fanatic casts Spiritual Weapon during the
first round and then targets the adventurer wearing
the heaviest armor with Sacred Flame. In round 2 he
casts Shield of Faith. In round 3 he moves into melee
and casts Inflict Wounds.
The cultists don’t like each other. The cult fanatics
and priests don’t help each other, and target
different adventurers whenever possible.
Only two shadows engage the party initially. The
others stay near the priests participating in the
ritual, acting as bodyguards. At the beginning of each
subsequent round, another shadow will join the
combat if a) a shadow was destroyed, b) it sustained
any damage in the previous round, or c) a priest or
cult fanatic was killed or knocked unconscious.
Clever players may realize that if they focus their
efforts and take the cultists and shadows out one by
one, the combat will likely be a lot easier for them.
CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 20
ADJUSTING THE ENCOUNTER The Outcome of the Ritual
Here are the recommendations for adjusting this combat
If the cultists complete the ritual, read:
encounter. These adjustments are not cumulative.
As the final blasphemous prayer to Cyric is spoken, magical
shadow cult priest # of darkness emanates from the skull etched on the floor. The
HP fanatic HP Prayers living souls are absorbed into the pillar of darkness. Dark
HP required finger-like tendrils reach out from the pillar and wrap
Very weak party 8 23 17 30 themselves around the cultists still standing on the eight-
pointed star. The cultists make no sounds and seem pleased
Weak party 12 28 22 25
to be engulfed by the darkness.
Average party 16 33 27 20 The skull etched on the floor moves and speaks in a raspy
Strong party 20 38 37 18 voice “Let my most faithful be masked from all prying eyes.
They will follow my edicts and do as I command without fear
Very strong party 24 43 47 16
of detection. Now go forth and do as evil demands. The Dark
Completing the Ritual Sun protects you.” The dark tendrils withdraw and the skull
becomes an etching on the floor once again. The cultists have
For the ritual to be completed at this point, the vanished, along with any remaining shadows.
cultists need to complete 20 successful prayers. For
each priest or cult fanatic to complete a prayer on The cultists cannot complete the ritual if they are all
their turn the following conditions must be met: killed or knocked unconscious, or if all the souls are
removed from the ritual star. When this happens
 The cultist must spend an action to recite the read the following:
prayer aloud.
 The cultist must be standing on one of the vertices The skull etched on the floor moves and speaks in a raspy
of the eight-pointed star. voice “You were among my most faithful. I offered you my
dark blessing and you failed. Feel my wrath.” The pillar of
 Each time a prayer is recited, it drains the essence
darkness vanishes. The skull becomes an etching on the floor
of one of the living-souls. Each soul can only be
once again and any remaining shadows disappear. The living
tapped in this way once per round, and only while souls who were part of the ritual are hurled away from the
they’re at their designated point of the star. All ritual star. A few seconds later they awaken and stand up.
souls recharge at the beginning of each new round. The blasphemous ritual is broken. The followers of Cyric
 If the adventurers cast a Silence spell, it makes the failed to complete whatever task their dark lord bade of
prayers less effective. The DM must roll a die for them. The threat has subsided and the realms are safe once
each cultist reciting a prayer in silence – if the again from the forces of evil, due in no small part to your
result is odd the prayer was successful despite the actions here today.
silence, if the result is even the prayer was
unsuccessful. Any remaining cultists attempt to flee. They do not
engage in melee, preferring to disengage, dash, or
The adventurers can interfere or attempt to disrupt dodge. If they manage to escape the chamber, they
the ritual based on the information they learned in know the path through the maze of tunnels to escape.
the previous encounter. Unless pursued they get away. If captured, they
Living Souls as Allies realize they’re outmatched and do not resist, nor do
they talk, despite attempts to convince them to do
It is possible that some living souls still otherwise.
accompanying the party. They can participate in the Any acolytes beg the adventurers for forgiveness
combat, providing the Help action to the adventurers. and agree to do anything they ask if they’ll just get
The souls always go last in the initiative order. them back to the city and away from the cultists.
Any souls that the adventurers free from the ritual
are too weak to provide any assistance. However, Treasure
when a soul is removed from the ritual star, the link
to Cyric is broken and radiant energy comes pouring The cultists are not carrying any treasure or material
back into the soul. An adventurer adjacent to the wealth. However, near the cage are the 16
soul regains 10 hit points. If more than one PC is ceremonial weapons that once imprisoned the souls.
adjacent when this happens, the players can decide The magic is gone, but the blades could be sold for
who gets the healing. 50 gp each. There is also a total of 200 gp in mixed
coins and small gems.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 21
Part 7: The
Aftermath
Expected Duration: 15 minutes
Any living souls remaining in the chamber after the
ritual is completed or foiled immediately regain all
knowledge they possessed in life. They know who
they are and who they worship. They thank the
adventurers for their help.
Each soul has been trapped for a long time and
each wishes to pass on to the next life. They tell the
adventurers that to pass on they must be slain. The
souls recite the necessary prayer before having an
adventurer destroy their form. Each disappears
when struck.
If the ritual was stopped, each adventurer gains
the story award Friend of the Gods.
When the adventurers return to the surface they
are greeted by Lt. Deveno and a dozen sailors. When
Lt. Deveno told his superiors that adventurers went
to the island to clean up the navy’s mess, it spurred
the High Sail into action. He ordered a contingent of
sailors to go to the island and seize control by any
means necessary. He doesn’t want the event of the
past day to become public, so he’s agreed to pay the
adventurers a handsome reward for their actions,
provided they give a detailed accounting of what
happened and then promptly forget everything the
did.
The sailors accompanying Lt. Deveno retrieve the
bodies of their fallen comrades and return the
remains to their families.
Once back in Melvaunt if the adventurers provide
a detailed description of what happened they are
each rewarded with 100 gp and the gratitude of The
High Sail.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 22
Rewards Treasure
Treasure Awarded
Make sure to note their rewards on their adventure Item Name GP Value
logsheets. Give your name and DCI number (if Cultists’ wealth 200
applicable) so players can record who ran the Cyric’s Bible 100 or 200
session. Cyric’s Ceremonial Blades 50 each (800 total)
The High Sail’s Reward 100 per character
Experience
Total up all combat experience earned for defeated
foes, and divide by the number of characters present Downtime
in combat. For non-combat experience, the rewards
are listed per character. Give all characters in the Each character receives 10 downtime days at the
party non-combat experience awards unless conclusion of this adventure.
otherwise noted.

Renown
Combat Rewards
Name of Foes XP per Foe
All faction members earn one point of renown for
Wounded Chuul 550
participating in this adventure.
Giant Crab 25
Shadow 100

Story Awards
Acolyte 50
Priest 450
Cult Fanatic 450
The characters have the opportunity to earn the
following story award during the course of play.
Non-Combat Rewards
Task or Accomplishment XP per Character Favor of the Gods. For their part in stopping Cyric’s
Showing respect to the buried dead 25 ritual and for allowing the trapped souls to achieve
Each Acolyte captured 25 final rest, the adventurers gain the Favor of the Gods.
Destroying Cyric’s Bible 50 During future adventures if they visit a church
Giving Cyric’s Bible to a good aligned 100
during play and make a donation equal to 10 gp x
church
their level they gain inspiration. They can earn
Donating part of the treasure to the 50
families of the fallen sailors’ families
inspiration this way four times before they lose this
boon.

The minimum total award for each character

participating in this adventure is 1275 experience DM Rewards
points.
You receive 200 XP, 100 gp, and ten downtime days
The maximum total award for each character for running this session.
participating in this adventure is 1700 experience
points.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 23
Appendix 1
Deities & Souls
CELL #1
Lathander
(NG) Dawn, Renewal
Soul’s real name: Quinn Blake
Human (M), short, heavy, short fair hair
A man of the people and a teacher to all. Quinn was the
pillar of his community; promoting prosperity and
helping the people achieve it. When Cyric’s minions
attacked his town with an undead army, he rallied the
people and led them to victory. His heroics encouraged a
generation of heroes who battled and defeated Cyric’s
forces.
Prayer: “When the dawn comes the sun’s light will
vanquish what hides in darkness.”
Leira
(CN) Illusions, Deception
Soul’s real name: Neelia Ghostah
Human (F), short, confident smile, long dark hair
A great illusionist and con artist, Neelia duped many of
Cyric’s followers into believing that she was Cyric’s
mortal offspring. Once bamboozled, she manipulated her
marks into exposing their faith to Cyric publically. In all
cases the marks were imprisoned or executed.
Prayer: “Never trust the world around you; your senses
can be manipulated by illusion as easily as I’ve
manipulated these words.”
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Helm
(LN) Vigilance, Protection
Soul’s real name: Jess Dovill
Human (F), tall, strong, short fair hair.
Lieutenant of the guard for a noble family, Jess
performed her duty without fault for years. When the
family’s youngest son was kidnapped and eventually
killed, she swore to destroy those responsible – agents of
Cyric. After she caught and killed the kidnappers she felt
it her duty to protect everyone from the evils of Cyric.
She captured or killed more of Cyric’s agents and priests
than any of Helms faithful.
Prayer: “One must be ever vigilant, ever aware, and ever
prepared for one’s enemies.”
Shar
(NE) Darkness, Secrets, Loss
Soul’s real name: Dirk Noj
Human (M), tall, average build, bald head with short
goatee.
One of the most despicable men to ever walk the Realms,
Dirk was a remarkable assassin. Under the cover of
darkness, he struck against Shar’s enemies. He never
took payment for killing Cyric priests. He believed any
act that provided so much pleasure must be a blessing of
Shar herself – he considered it a privilege to receive
these contracts against Cyric.
Prayer: “In the darkness good and evil can do what is
necessary without the judgment of watchful eyes upon
them.”
CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 24
CELL #2

Mystra Kelemvor
(NG) Magic (LN) Death

Soul’s real name: Xushu Ranno Soul’s real name: Rak Grebmann
Human (F), average height, wise blue eyes, long dark Human (M), short, skinny, long dark hair.
hair A former Cyric cultist himself, Rak had a gift for finding
Xushu dedicated her life to uncovering new magic that and converting Cyric’s most faithful to Kelemvor
would help make the average man’s life easier. She teachings.
discovered vile texts sacred to Cyric’s faithful and Prayer: “Death is but an inevitable step along a greater
manipulated and transformed the harmful effects into path.”
tremendously positive magic.
Prayer: “The weave allows even the humblest individual
to make the impossible possible.”
Mask Auril
(CN) Thieves (NE) Winter

Soul’s real name: Kave S’rem
Human (M), average height and build, medium-length
light-brown hair.
Unassuming and forgettable, Kave was a remarkable
pick pocket and social chameleon. He stole a powerful
relic from the cult of Cyric and turned it over to the
church of Lathander to ensure it was destroyed – just for
the challenge and the fun of it.
Prayer: “Ownership is fluid; it should reflect one’s desire,
not one’s needs.”
Soul’s real name: Aureen Flynn
Human (F), mature, heavy, white/silver hair
Outcast from her own people, Aureen preached of Auril
to barbarian tribes in the frigid north. By following these
teachings, the tribes flourished. When agents of Cyric
stole offerings to Auril entire tribes were killed by fierce
winter storms. Afterwards Aureen ensured none of
Cyric’s agents ever had safe passage through the north
during winter months again.
Prayer: “Winter's chill brings darkness that makes us
yearn for yesterday.”

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 25
CELL #3
Selûne
(CG) Moon
Soul’s real name: Zhinou
Human (M), slight build, short bristly dark hair.
Lycanthrope hunter who sought to cure those inflicted
rather than kill them. Husband to a werewolf who
renounced Cyric and helped Zhinou find and destroy
others of her kind.
Prayer: “When in darkness, look up and the moon will
show you the path.”
Talona
(CE) Poison, Disease
Soul’s real name: Lady Beller
Human (F), short, loud, overweight, long dark hair.
Words that spouted from Lady Beller’s mouth were a
social disease. Uncouth and unfiltered, her words were
poison. She revealed secrets and ruined reputations
without any forethought. Her direct nature was
appreciated by some, until they too became victims of
her jabs and revelations. She caused one of Cyric’s
strongest underground churches in Neverwinter to be
discovered and destroyed.
Prayer: “Disease and sickness are required to thin the
herds and demonstrate that poison affects kings and
beggars alike.”
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Ilmater
(LG) Suffering, Martyrdom, Perseverance
Soul’s real name: Hawn Lorker
Human (F), short, average build, dark hair
The epitome of self-sacrifice, Hawn allowed herself to be
captured by a cult of Cyric to save others. She withstood
torture and torment for years before escaping. She then
roused an army and made it her life’s mission to wipe
out Cyric’s followers and ensure no one else ever
suffered her fate.
Prayer: “We sacrifice our own well-being freely so others
will not have to enduring the evils of the world.”
Bane
(LE) Tyranny
Soul’s real name: Krag of the Southern Lands
Human (M), large and stocky, short red hair.
The real power behind a noble family of Athkatla in Amn
for decades, Krag plotted and schemed his way to power
and never let anyone get in his way. His most notable
victory was the utter disgrace and destruction of a noble
family of Cyric cultists that had been in power for over a
century.
Prayer: “The strong have a right and a duty to rule over
the weak.”
CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 26
CELL #4
Sune
(CG) Love, Beauty
Soul’s real name: Mela’Kai
Half-Elf (F), light skin and fiery red hair, exceptionally
beautiful.
Mela’Kai spent her life helping former evil doers who
turned over a new leaf to lead good lives, especially
former Cyric cultists. Her lessons of love and forgiveness
were so moving that even the most hardened criminals
would reconsider their choices and turn to a life filled
with goodness and love.
Prayer: “Love one and all as you would love yourself.”
Talos
(CE) Storms
Soul’s real name: Ray Quinpar
Human (M), tall, overweight, covered in tattoos, long
unkempt hair and beard
A fierce pirate and seaman, Ray lived for the storms and
the seas. He delighted in attacking and sinking ships,
even if it meant the death of the crew and the loss of
bounty. He deliberately targeted any ship bearing a flag
or symbols of Cyric.
Prayer: “The perfect storm that will destroy everything
in its path; be like the storm.”
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Torm
(LG) Duty, Loyalty
Soul’s real name: Heath Tenesen
Human (M), tall, skinny, muscular, dark hair.
Heath began life as a diplomat and politician. He sought
to make the world better by using the laws to ferret out
corruption among the upper classes and nobility. His
vigilance to acquire iron-clad evidence to make
convictions resulted in Cyric’s agents being exposed and
removed form key positions in five major cities.
Prayer: “It is one’s duty to find the truth and expose
those who seek to subvert it for their own gains.”
Lolth
(LE) Spiders
Soul’s real name: Petulance
Drow Elf (F), tall, slender, bald
Feared and hated among the Drow, she epitomized the
very essence of her race. She demanded respect and
obedience. Foolishly, agents of Cyric who’d enjoyed a
beneficial alliance with Petulance tried to kill her. She
unleashed her wrath and her house upon Cyric’s faithful.
Cyric’s priests have since avoided all contact with any
Drow.
Prayer: “Death is strong, but Lolth is stronger.”
CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 27
NEUTRALITY OF THE LIVING SOULS

CHAOTIC GOOD NEUTRAL GOOD LAWFUL GOOD

Selûne (M) Lathander (M) Ilmater (F)

Sune (F) Mystra (F) Torm (M)

CHAOTIC NEUTRAL LAWFUL NEUTRAL

Mask (M) Helm (F)

Leira (F) Kelemvor (M)

CHAOTIC EVIL NEUTRAL EVIL LAWFUL EVIL

Talona (F) Auril (F) Bane (M)

Talos (M) Shar (M) Lolth (F)

The living souls representing the deities listed in bold text are the ones positioned around the pillar of darkness in
Part 6.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 28
Monsters
Chuul Giant Crab
Large Aberration, chaotic evil Medium beast, unaligned
Armor Class 16 (natural armor) Armor Class 15 (natural armor)
Hit Points 93 (11d10 + 33) Hit Points 13 (3d8)
Speed 20 ft., swim 40 ft. Speed 30 ft., swim 30 ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
19 (+4) 10 (+0) 16 (+3) 5 (−3) 11 (+0) 5 (−3) 13 (+1) 15 (+2) 11 (+0) 1 (−5) 9 (−1) 3 (−4)

Skills Perception +4 Skills Stealth +4

Damage Immunities poison Senses blindsight 30 ft., passive Perception 9
Condition Immunities poisoned Languages —
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 14 Challenge 1/8 (25 XP)
Languages understands Deep Speech but can’t speak Amphibious. The crab can breathe air and water.
Challenge 4 (1,100 XP)
Amphibious. The chuul can breathe air and water. Actions
Sense Magic. The chuul senses magic within 120 feet Claw. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
of it at will. This trait will otherwise work like the detect target. Hit: 4 (1d6 + 1) bludgeoning damage, and the
magic spell but isn’t itself magical. target is grappled (escape DC 11). The crab has two
claws, each of which can grapple only one target.
Actions
Multiattack. The chuul makes two pincer attacks. If the
chuul is grappling a creature, the chuul can also use its
tentacles.
Pincer. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 10 ft.,
one target. Hit: 11 (2d6 + 4) bludgeoning damage. The
target is grappled (escape DC 14) if it is a Large or
smaller creature and the chuul doesn’t have two other
creatures grappled.
Tentacles. One creature grappled by the chuul must
succeed on a DC 13 Constitution saving throw or be
poisoned for 1 minute. Until this poison ends, the
target is paralyzed. The target can repeat the saving
throw at the end of each of its turns, ending the poison
on itself on a success.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 29
Shadow Living Soul (Commoner)
Medium undead, chaotic evil Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
Armor Class 12 Armor Class 16 (breast plate, shield)
Hit Points 16 (3d8 + 3) Hit Points 4 (1d8)
Speed 40 ft. Speed 30 ft., fly 30 ft. (only while incorporeal)

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
6 (−2) 14 (+2) 13 (+1) 6 (−2) 10 (+0) 8 (−1) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0)

Skills Stealth +4 (+6 in dim light or darkness) Senses passive Perception 10

Damage Vulnerabilities radiant Languages any one language (usually Common)
Damage Resistances acid, cold, fire, lightning, thunder; Challenge 0 (10 XP)
bludgeoning, piercing, and slashing from nonmagical
attacks Actions
Damage Immunities necrotic, poison Longsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
Condition Immunities exhaustion, frightened, grappled, one target. Hit: 5 (1d8) slashing damage, or 6 (1d10)
paralyzed, petrified, poisoned, prone, restrained slashing damage if used with two hands.
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 10
Languages —
Acolyte
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
Amorphous. The shadow can move through a space as
narrow as 1 inch wide without squeezing. Armor Class 10
Hit Points 9 (2d8)
Shadow Stealth. While in dim light or darkness, the
Speed 30 ft.
shadow can take the Hide action as a bonus action.
Sunlight Weakness. While in sunlight, the shadow has STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
disadvantage on attack rolls, ability checks, and saving 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 14 (+2) 11 (+0)
throws.
Skills Medicine +4, Religion +2
Actions Senses passive Perception 10
Strength Drain. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach Languages any one language (usually Common)
5 ft., one creature. Hit: 9 (2d6 + 2) necrotic damage, Challenge 1/4 (50 XP)
and the target’s Strength score is reduced by 1d4. The Spellcasting. The Acolyte is a 1st-level spellcaster. His
target dies if this reduces its Strength to 0. Otherwise, spellcasting ability is Wisdom (spell save DC 12, +4 to
the reduction lasts until the target finishes a short or hit with spell attacks). He has the following cleric spells
long rest. prepared:
If a non-evil humanoid dies from this attack, a new
shadow rises from the corpse 1d4 hours later. Cantrips (at will): light, sacred flame, thaumaturgy
1st level (3 slots): bless, cure wounds, sanctuary

Actions
Club. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
target. Hit: 2 (1d4) bludgeoning damage.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 30
Cult Fanatic Priest
Medium humanoid (any race), any non-good alignment Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
Armor Class 13 (leather armor) Armor Class 13 (chain shirt)
Hit Points 33 (6d8 + 6) Hit Points 27 (5d8 + 5)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 25 ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
11 (+0) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 13 (+1) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 12 (+1) 13 (+1) 16 (+3) 13 (+1)

Skills Deception +4, Persuasion +4, Religion +2
Senses passive Perception 10
Languages any one language (usually Common)
Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Dark Devotion. The fanatic has advantage on saving
throws against being charmed or frightened.
Spellcasting. The fanatic is a 4th-level spellcaster. Its
spellcasting ability is Wisdom (spell save DC 11, +3 to
hit with spell attacks). The fanatic has the following
cleric spells prepared:
Cantrips (at will): light, sacred flame, thaumaturgy
1st level (4 slots): command, inflict wounds, shield of
faith
2nd level (3 slots): hold person, spiritual weapon
Skills Medicine +7, Persuasion +3, Religion +4
Senses passive Perception 13
Languages any two languages
Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Divine Eminence. As a bonus action, the priest can
expend a spell slot to cause its melee weapon attacks
to magically deal an extra 10 (3d6) radiant damage to a
target on a hit. This benefit lasts until the end of the
turn. If the priest expends a spell slot of 2nd level or
higher, the extra damage increases by 1d6 for each
level above 1st.
Spellcasting. The priest is a 5th-level spellcaster. Its
spellcasting ability is Wisdom (spell save DC 13, +5 to
hit with spell attacks). The priest has the following
cleric spells prepared:

Actions Cantrips (at will): light, sacred flame, thaumaturgy

Multiattack. The fanatic makes two melee attacks.
Dagger. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit,
reach 5 ft. or range 20/60 ft., one creature. Hit: 4 (1d4
+ 2) piercing damage.
1st level (4 slots): cure wounds, guiding bolt, sanctuary
2nd level (3 slots): lesser restoration, spiritual weapon
3rd level (2 slots): dispel magic, spirit guardians
Actions
Short Sword. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5
ft., one target. Hit: 3 (1d6) slashing damage.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 31
Maps
Map #1 – The Beach

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 32
Map #2 – The Maze

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 33
Map #3 – The Chamber of Caged Souls

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 34
Map #4 – The Summoning Chamber (Players’ Copy)

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 35
Map #4 – The Summoning Chamber (DM’s Copy)

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . CORE 2-3 EDICTS OF NEUTRALITY 36
 THARAERA LOST
A criminal band known as “Suldran’s Dark” who is active all over the Moonsea region and especially on the waters of
the Moonsea itself, recently seized a caravel out of Phlan carrying trade-bars of smelted copper and “batons” of steel
ready to be hammered into swords. Along with all of the cargo, the Dark seized six passengers for ransom. Little did
they know that one of the passengers was a Harper agent. A rescue taking the party deep into the Cormanthor forest
is now needed. Part One of the Gamehole Con 2016 adventure arc.

A 2-hour adventure for 5th-10th level characters

Ed Greenwood & Alex Kammer

Adventure Designers
Thomas Valley
Editing and Layout

Adventure Code: DDALGHC-01

Organized Play: Chris Lindsay

D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Mike Mearls, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall, Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks,
Alan Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League,
all other Wizards of the Coast product names, and their respective logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive
likenesses are property of Wizards of the Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America. Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material
or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the express written permission of Wizards of the Coast.

©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31, 2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4
The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Tharaera Lost 1
 Introduction
Welcome to “Tharaera Lost,” a D&D Expeditions
adventure, part of the official D&D Adventurers
League organized play system and the Gamehole Con
2016 adventure arc. This adventure is designed for
three to seven 5th-10th level characters, and is
optimized for six 7th-level characters. Characters
outside this level range cannot participate in this
adventure. The adventure is set in the Moonsea region
of the Forgotten Realms.
The D&D Adventurers
League
This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of the
D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure, players
track their characters’ experience, treasure, and other
rewards, and can take those characters through other
adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a store
event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a DCI
number. This number is your official Wizards of the
Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have a
number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to use to
create and advance their characters. Players can
continue to play their characters after the storyline
season has finished, possibly participating in a second
or third storyline with those same characters. A
character’s level is the only limitation for adventure
play. A player cannot use a character of a level higher
or lower than the level range of a D&D Adventurers
League adventure.
For more information on playing, running games as
a Dungeon Master, and organizing games for the D&D
Adventurers League, please visit the D&D Adventurers
League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
Preparing the Adventure
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
 Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
 Read through the adventure, taking notes of
anything you’d like to highlight or remind yourself
while running the adventure, such as a way you’d
like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d like to use in
a combat.
 Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
 Gather together any resources you’d like to use to
aid you in running this adventure--such as
notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and battlemaps.
 If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.
Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
 Character name and level
 Character race and class
 Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most common
passive ability check
 Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, and so on
Players that have characters outside the adventure’s
level range cannot participate in the adventure
with those characters. Players with ineligible
characters can make a new 1st-level character or use a
pregenerated character. Players can play an adventure
they previously played or ran as a Dungeon Master,
but not with the same character.
Ensure that each player has an official adventure
logsheet for his or her character (if not, get one from
the organizer). The player fills out the adventure
name, session number, date, and your name and DCI
number. In addition, the player also fills in the starting
values for experience, gold, downtime, renown, and
number of permanent magic items. He or she fill in the
other values and write notes at the conclusion of the
Tharaera Lost 2
 session. Each player is responsible for maintaining an
accurate logsheet.
If you have time, you can do a quick scan of a
player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing looks
out of order. If you see magic items of very high
rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you can ask
players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict item
use or ask them to use a standard ability score array.
Point players to the D&D Adventurers League Player’s
Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and it’s the
beginning of an adventure or episode, they can declare
their activity and spend the days now. Alternatively,
they can do so at the end of the adventure or episode.
Players should select their characters’ spells and other
daily options prior to the start of the adventure, unless
the adventure specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread
the adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, sidebars provide
information to assist you in making adjustments for
smaller or larger groups and characters of higher or
lower levels than the adventure is optimized for. This
is typically used exclusively for combat encounters.
You may adjust the adventure beyond the guidelines
given in the adventure, or for other reasons. For
example, if you’re playing with a group of
inexperienced players, you might want to make the
adventure a little easier; for very experienced players,
you might want to make it a little harder. Therefore,
five categories of party strength have been created for
you to use as a guide. Use these as a guide, and feel
free to use a different adjustment during the
adventure if the recommended party strength feels off
for the group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of seven
5th to 10th level characters. To figure out whether
you need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
 Add up the total levels of all the characters
 Divide the total by the number of characters
 Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round fractions
of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
Determining Party Strength
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very weak
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very strong
Average party strength indicates no recommended
adjustments to the adventure. Each sidebar may or
may not offer suggestions for certain party strengths.
If a particular recommendation is not offered for your
group, you don’t have to make adjustments.
Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment of
the game for the players. You help guide the narrative
and bring the words on these pages to life. The
outcome of a fun game session often creates stories
that live well beyond the play at the table. Always
follow this golden rule when you DM for a group:
Make decisions and adjudications that enhance the
fun of the adventure when possible.
To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
 You are empowered to make adjustments to the
adventure and make decisions about how the group
interacts with the world of this adventure. Doing so
is especially important and applicable outside of
combat, but feel free to adjust the adventure for
groups that are having too easy or too hard of a
time.
 Don’t make the adventure too easy or too difficult
for a group. Never being challenged makes for a
boring game and being overwhelmed makes for a
frustrating one. Gauge the experience of the players
(not the characters) with the game, try to feel out
(or ask) what they like in a game, and attempt to
give each of them the experience they’re after when
they play D&D. Give everyone a chance to shine.
 Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game session
moving along appropriately. Watch for stalling, since
play loses momentum when this happens. At the
same time, make sure that the players don’t finish
too early; provide them with a full play experience.
Tharaera Lost 3
 Try to be aware of running long or short. Adjust the specified in the adventure. The number of spells
pacing accordingly available to be cast as a service is limited to a
 Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free to maximum of three per day total, unless otherwise
modify the text as you see fit, especially when noted.
dialogue is present.
 Give the players appropriate hints so they can make SPELLCASTING SERVICES
informed choices about how to proceed. Players Spell Cost
should be given clues and hints when appropriate so Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
they can tackle puzzles, combat, and interactions Identify 20 gp
without getting frustrated over lack of information. Lesser restoration 40 gp
Doing so helps to encourage immersion in the Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
adventure and gives players “little victories” for Remove curse 90 gp
figuring out good choices from clues. Speak with dead 90 gp
In short, being the DM isn’t about following the Divination 210 gp
adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about facilitating Greater restoration 450 gp
a fun, challenging game environment for the players. Raise dead 1,250 gp
The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has more information on
the art of running a D&D game.
Acolyte Background
Downtime and Lifestyle A character possessing the acolyte background requesting
spellcasting services at a temple of his or her faith may request
At the beginning of each play session, players must one spell per day from the Spellcasting Services table for free.
declare whether or not they are spending any days of The only cost paid for the spell is the base price for the
downtime. The player records the downtime spent on consumed material component, if any.
the adventure logsheet. The following options are
available to players during downtime (see the D&D
basic rules or the D&D Adventurers League Player’s
Guide for more information): Character Disease, Death, and
 Catching up Recovery
 Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
commit to crafting a single item) poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might not
 Practicing a profession have the same characters return from session to
 Recuperating session, here are the rules when bad things happen to
 Spellcasting services (end of the adventure only) characters.
 Training
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating
Other downtime options might be available during Effects
adventures or unlocked through play, including A character still affected by diseases, poisons, and
faction-specific activities. other similar effects at the conclusion of an adventure
In addition, whenever a character spends downtime can spend downtime days recuperating until such time
days, that character also spends the requisite expense as he or she resolves the effect to its conclusion (see
for his or her lifestyle. Costs are per day, so a character the recuperating activity in the D&D Basic Rules).
that spends ten days of downtime also spends ten days If a character doesn’t resolve the effect between
of expenses maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some sessions, that character begins the next session still
downtime activities help with lifestyle expenses or add affected by the debilitating effect.
lifestyle expenses.
Death
Spellcasting Services A character who is killed during the course of the
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can provide adventure has a few options at the end of the session
some spellcasting services. Characters need to be able (or whenever arriving back in civilization) if no one in
to travel to the settlement to obtain these services. the adventuring party has immediate access to a raise
Spell services generally available include healing dead or revivify spell, or similar magic. A character
and recovery spells, as well as information-gathering subject to a raise dead spell is affected negatively until
spells. Other spell services might be available as all long rests have been completed during an
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Tharaera Lost 4
 adventure. Alternatively, each downtime day spent
after raise dead reduces the penalty to attack rolls,
saving throws, and ability checks by 1, in addition to
any other benefits the downtime activity might
provide.
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any of the
other options, the player creates a new character. The
new character does not have any items or rewards
possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing any
vital organs and is mostly whole) and the player would
like the character to be returned to life, the party can
take the body back to civilization and use the dead
character’s funds to pay for a raise dead spell. A raise
dead spell cast in this manner costs the character
1,250 gp.
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As above,
except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for the raise
dead spell is paid for by the party at the end of the
session. Other characters are under no obligation to
spend their funds to bring back a dead party member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to 4
and a member of a faction, the dead character’s body
can be returned to civilization and a patron from the
faction ensures that he or she receives a raise dead
spell. However, any character invoking this charity
forfeits all experience and rewards from that session
(both those earned prior to and after death during that
session) and cannot replay that episode or adventure
with that character again. Once a character reaches
5th level, this option is no longer available.
Adventure Background
Travel and trade on the Moonsea have always been
hazardous. One of the many criminal bands operating
on these waters is known as Suldran’s Dark. Ten
nights ago on the Moonsea, Suldran’s Dark intercepted
and boarded a metals ship (Elviir’s Kraeken
[pronounced “Ell-VEER’s KRAY-ken”], a caravel out of
Phlan carrying trade-bars of smelted copper and
“batons” of steel ready to be hammered into swords).
The Dark is a gang of pirates, brigands, and
weapons-runners headed by the crooked financier
Suldran (a Sembian whose current whereabouts is
unknown to the general public, and who defends
himself by means of hulking bodyguards and a drider
ring that can summon 2 of 4 driders at any one time; if
any are near death, he “swaps them out” for a healthy
one).
Suldran wasn’t along on the raid, which was carried
out by a dozen Dark thugs aboard their tiny but fast
cutter Waveraker. The thugs were armed with darts
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
tipped with a “swiftsleep” spider-venoms-blend
poison they’d just covertly purchased, and were trying
out. The swiftsleep worked like a charm, and in short
order the Dark had not just the crew snoring, but all
six paying passengers as well, with little fighting and
no alarm raised.
The Kraeken was making a fast night voyage to
Hillsfar, in part because it was secretly carrying
another cargo: two chests of raw gemstones (one
containing 2,400 rubies and the other 2,200
emeralds). The Dark removed these chests to their
cutter, then sailed the Kraeken on a new course, east
past Elventree. They intended to scuttle it on the
rocky, harborless coast between Elventree and
Elmwood, drowning the crew, demasting the ship, and
leaving it just underwater, about a hundred yards
offshore, for later shallows-diving salvage of the
metals. They would treat the six passengers as the
Dark always does: hooded, bound, and taken into
hiding in one of the ancient elven “hideholds” the Dark
has discovered (and now makes frequent use of) to see
if these captives could be ransomed or tortured to
reveal what properties they own and what wealth they
have hidden, that the Dark can extort and seize.
It all went off without a hitch, except for one tiny
detail. Brelvar Hamdrel, one of the Kraeken’s junior
crew members, a “rigger” (young boy who climbs the
masts and spars to adjust sails) was wearing a family
“good luck charm” that unbeknownst to everyone,
including himself, was an amulet of water breathing.
He “woke up” underwater aboard the scuttled ship, the
sole survivor of the crew, and remembered the pirate
attack (up until the moment he succumbed to the
swiftsleep). As he’d been acting as a servant to the six
passengers, he was able to recount everything that
happened (along with the names and likenesses of the
passengers) two days later, when he reached
Elventree. Hamdrel did so in several taverns, in return
for drinks and meals, until he could hire on as crew on
another ship (the coaster Halavaun’s Dream, which has
since sailed for Melvaunt with a cargo of fruits and
vegetables).
Hamdrel’s tale was overheard on three occasions by
old salts drinking in the taverns who happen to be
“ears” for the Harpers. They recognized Hamdrel’s
description of the most beautiful of the Kraeken’s
passengers—a distinctive woman of small build who
has one emerald green eye and one sky-blue eye, and
was going by the name “Tharaera Vrelhand”—as a
Harper agent. Among Those Who Harp, Tharaera is
better known as “Latrace.” She was on her way south
to a Harper rendezvous in upcountry Sembia from the
city of Telos, where she had been working as a spices
and preserves provender merchant while covertly
trying to identify spies and agents of the Red Wizards
and the Cult of the Dragon (both active in the area).
Tharaera Lost 5
 She succeeded, but things got too hot for her. It’s vital
the Harpers learn what she uncovered. Quickly.
Accordingly, the adventurers will be contacted by a
jovial merchant calling himself “Furjur the Flippant.”
He is, of course, a Harper agent who will seek to hire
the adventurers to find and recover their lost agent,
Latrace.

Adventure Hook
Before the adventure begins, any character who is a
member of the Harper faction has received a personal
invitation/summons to meet a Harper operative
known as “Furjur the Flippant” at the Cloverwall
Roadhouse near Hillsfar.
If there are no Harper faction members in the party,
any faction member will have received the invitation,
passed to them by their faction contacts as a favor to
the Harpers (with the understanding that the Harpers
now owe them one).

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Tharaera Lost 6
 Part 1:
A Tempting Offer
The Cloverwall Roadhouse is a ramshackle two-story
inn a day’s ride northwest of Hillsfar. It offers
reasonably-priced meals and lodging, and the
innkeeper operates an amateur smithy that can shoe
horses and repair armor as needed.
Beside the road, across a muddy and well-trampled inn yard,
sprawls a rambling wooden mansion with an uneven tiled roof,
a sagging across-the-entire-front porch with similarly out-of-
true balcony above, and a yard surrounded by a palisade that is
visibly leaning in places. The open arched gate of the palisade
sports a large and grand gilded carved wooden road sign
proclaiming the place to be THE Cloverwall Roadhouse.
The sign is the most impressive thing about the
establishment, but there’s the reassuring din of a smith’s forge
hammer coming from around back, an agreeable smell of roast
boar drifting out of the place, and several horses and mules tied
to hitching-bars in front of the main doors of the roadhouse,
watched over attentively by several bright-eyed, eager children
who seem to belong to the place.
The main doors stand ajar, and you can hear laughter from
inside; mens’ mirth, but easygoing rather than drunken or
uproarious.
It’s coming, you can see through the gap, from a few locals
facing the main source of laughter: a well-to-do looking
merchant in a long cloth coat and expensive above-the-knee
leather riding boots, who’s sitting facing the door with a large
tankard in one hand, and an unlit clay pipe in the other that
he’s waving for emphasis as he tells some tale or other. He’s
pot-bellied, and his broad and easy smile rides a jutting-chinned
face framed by large and bushy black “daggerboard” sideburns.
He chortles out his words, chuckling almost constantly except
when he gives vent (swiftly and often) to louder laughter.
“Furjur the Flippant am I,” he calls cheerfully, “and I’m
looking for adventurers!”
“Furjur the Flippant” is obviously an assumed name—
being as that moniker belongs to a legendary jovial but
sly and pranksome merchant who flourished very
colorfully in the 1340s and 1350s DR. However, this
Furjur seems amiable and friendly enough that the
half-dozen older local rustics sitting listening to him
have obviously either swallowed whatever
explanation he gave for bearing such a notorious
name, or have decided not to call him on it. Probably
because he’s paid for their ale.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
Furjur is welcoming, and calls for a fresh round of ale—or wine,
or “whatever’s your pleasure!”—for everyone in the inn’s
dining room, including the arriving adventurers. Two middle-
aged and rather worn-looking but smiling women will bustle to
fill those orders, though the Roadhouse hasn’t a deep cellar.
If characters deny being adventurers, Furjur will cheerfully
respond, “Nonsense! I can spot adventurers half a day’s ride
off! You’re adventurers!”
He will loudly and cheerfully tell the adventurers he wants to
hire them, because “Time’s a-wasting, and you look like just
what I need!”
Then he will beckon the adventurers to accompany him to a
table in a corner of the room, away from the old local rustics
he’s been drinking with, and tell the adventurers what he wants
to hire them for.
Note: All of the six rustics are undercover Harpers not
half as old, drunk, or relaxed as they seem (treat them
all as Veterans).
If the adventurers rough up or threaten Furjur,
they’ll pull loaded and ready handbows (hand
crossbows) loaded with darts coated with the same
“swiftsleep” the Dark just experimented with out from
their laps, under the table, and fire at the adventurers,
then charge with similarly-coated longswords (each
has a non-poison-coated shortsword as backup).
These Harpers won’t try to kill, but will attempt to
overcome the adventurers, who will awaken facing a
Furjur regretful at what happened, and still wanting to
negotiate, with the Harpers waiting right behind the
adventurers, ready to stab with swiftsleep darts and
quell any violence.
Swiftsleep (Injury)
Creatures subjected to this blend of three spider venoms must
make a DC 15 Constitution saving throw or fall asleep instantly,
their unconsciousness lasting 1 hour unless wounded awake
(mere shaking won’t rouse).
Furjur can lower his voice and act serious for
moments at a time. He’ll do so long enough to tell the
adventurers he’s willing to pay very handsomely, and
on top of coin, provide all of them with any sworn
alibis they need, any (forged) papers and credentials
they desire to adopt Sembian or Cormyrean identities
not their own, and memberships in several trading
coasters, too—if they’ll undertake a “straightforward
adventuring task” for him.
Furjur wants the adventurers to find and recover
Tharaera, alive and unharmed if possible, and all parts
of her body (“every hair from her head”) if not.
He doesn’t say anything about her being a Harper or
give her Harper name, but recounts everything about
the fate of the Kraeken, and what Suldran’s Dark is.
Instead, Furjur claims Tharaera is heir to substantial
holdings in Sembia and Cormyr that he himself is
Tharaera Lost 7
 tasked with watching over, by Vrelhand kin who
urgently want Tharaera restored to them. He dare not
act openly, because he’s made such enemies of the
Dark that they’ll kill her just to spite him, the moment
they discover his involvement. Hence the adventurers.
(This is all true, except that the real Tharaera is an
invalid who lives in seclusion in her own mansion, and
the Harper agent using her name isn’t her.)
Furjur tells the adventurers the Dark has “but one
armor chink, but it’s a good one,” who can help the
adventurers find where Tharaera has been taken and
is being held: Garorn, an ex-pirate living in Elventree,
who was once a member of the Dark but now hates
them, and for the right price will probably help the
adventurers. If Garorn just wants coin, Furjur can
provide it, but Furjur suspects he’ll want the
adventurers to go and get something “the procuring of
which is now sadly beyond him.”
If adventurers ask about why this is now beyond
Garorn, Furjur will say grimly, “You’ll see, you’ll see.”
Furjur will volunteer little about Garorn beyond the
fact that “anyone can find him, he’s well-known. Red
hair, scar down right side of his face, likes his ale. Ask
at the Red Tankard, or Drassauva’s Den of Delights.”
(He will add, if asked, that the Tankard is a dockside
“dive” of a tavern, and Drassauva’s is a festhall. He will
also say to the adventurers if the deal is agreed-upon:
“chalk this symbol on the back alley wall of the
Tankard or the Den of Delights, or both, if you need to
contact me.” He’ll dip a finger in his ale and draw the
symbol on the table in front of him, then wipe it away
again; the symbol is two circles of the same size
transfixed by a vertical line, and bracketing two equal-
sized diamonds of the same size also transfixed by the
same vertical line.)
Furjur is generous with his coin, and will pay the adventurers up
to 50 gp each to seal the deal, and up to 50 gp more, each, if
they bring back Tharaera alive (to him, at the Roadhouse).

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Tharaera Lost 8
 Part 2: The Useful
Retired Pirate
The adventurers travel uneventfully to Elventree,
where they readily find Garorn at the Tankard.
The Red Tankard has a wooden sign out front carved and
painted to look like a red metal tankard. It is the only painted
part of the ground-floor-only, silver-weathered (except where
rot has made it black, or crude repairs have been made with
mismatched, slightly-newer salvaged wood from shutters,
wagons, and wrecked ships) sagging old building.
Inside, the place is dimly lit (by candlewheel lanterns,
chained to the exposed roof-beams of the low overhead) and
stinks of mildew, stale spilled ale, and worse. Only one man is
sitting drinking in the place. He’s being served by a dirty, skinny
young girl wearing an over-the-head lizardfolk festival mask to
conceal her face. She doesn’t speak—and is, in fact, as Garorn
will explain, a mute.
The man sitting drinking has to be your quarry, Garorn, being
as he has bright red hair and a scar down the side of his face
(and is the only man to be seen). He has rough, calloused hands
and shoulders and arms that bulge with corded muscle, but he
looks old, his hairy arms and sideburns all pepper-and-salt. He
has bright, shrewd emerald-green eyes, thinning hair on top
but ample sideburns, and bears no visible weapons. There are
four empty tankards on the table in front of him, but he shows
no signs of drunkenness.
Garorn is warily friendly as the adventurers approach,
and will freely give his name.
Garorn proves to be wry and amiable, but is no chuckler, and
has a sharper tongue than Furjur.
He fears nothing and no one, and the adventurers will rapidly
discover that the ex-pirate has retired to a life of daily drinking
because he has no legs; Garorn is a tattooed old drunkard in
constant pain because of these amputations—which (as Garorn
will readily admit) were a “pirate punishment” administered by
Suldran (for Garorn’s hiding some loot for himself, for later—
“And why not? All the others were doing it!”).
Garorn now gets around by lying on his belly on a cart and
“paddling” along the cobbles with his hands, hence his
hardened hands and prodigiously strong shoulders and arms.
He’s used to drinking heavily to quell his constant pain.
Garorn knows who Tharaera really is, and will tell
readily the adventurers she’s a Harper—and so is
Furjur—and all about Latrace’s mission in Telos.
Garorn sometimes works with the Harpers (for pay),
but is no “keep all secrets” loyal Harper, and doesn’t
believe in deceit and secrecy (“Open piracy, now, that’s
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
mere luck of the blade, but spare me all this trickery
and lies, lies, lies!”).
He confirms all the details of the Dark and the fate of
the Kraeken that Furjur gave the adventurers, and says
that for the right pay, he’ll reveal who the adventurers
should go after, to trace the missing Tharaera to where
she’s being held.
Just as the rustics drinking in the Roadhouse were undercover
Harpers keeping watch over Furjur, 8 of the topers in the
Tankard are undercover Harpers (again, treat as “Veterans,”
with handbows firing swiftsleep darts, then charging with
longswords) who will rush to protect Garorn if the adventurers
mistreat him, their attacks intended to start negotiations with a
fresh start, not kill adventurers or derailing the process of hiring
them]. Those Who Harp find Garorn a very useful go-between
with pirates, smugglers, and forgers, and want him kept alive
and functioning just as he is.
Garorn can’t be magically coerced into revealing anything.
He has a natural spell immunity brought about by incidents in
his past that cause him ongoing physical and mental trauma.
Garorn wants the adventurers to go south into the
forest (Cormanthor, still known as “the Elven Court” in
Elventree—which back in the 1350s and 1360s DR
was the only place where the elves traded with
humans) and harvest for him some “bluemoss—wild
bluestar moss.” He shows them a handful of dry,
crumbled moss, and tells them that the live stuff,
which they must keep moist, is a deep, rich blue, and
glows silver-blue in darkness and dim light. He needs a
least “a fistful, and two fistfuls would be better!”
Garorn needs the bluemoss to make a paste he chews
to dull his pain (he constantly feels a burning,
throbbing agony in his missing legs); if they bring this
to him, he’ll tell them who to tail out of Elventree, or
where to head to intercept them, and what to watch
for, to find the “secret place” they’ll head for, that
should lead them to Tharaera and the rest of the
Kraeken captives.
Bluestar moss is rare, and found only where springs come to
the surface in the vast Cormanthan forest. Garorn can tell them
what trails to take to enter the Elven Court, but warns them
that thieves use the forest to hide things in, and both trap and
guard those hiding-places, and that the adventurers will have to
go in “much deeper” and leave the trails to find any bluestar.
Tharaera Lost 9
 Part 3: A Forest
Welcome
Characters venturing into the woods will be sniped at
by bandits with crossbows, who wait behind pit traps
and a variety of snares (adventurers charging them
directly will fall afoul of these hazards). They are the
aforementioned independent villainous users of the
forest as hiding-places, and have nothing at all to do
with the Dark or Tharaera (and know little about the
gang, and nothing about her).
They also have no bluemoss, there’s no bluemoss
anywhere near the areas they’re guarding, and none of
them even know what bluemoss is; if the characters
ignore their initial crossbow attacks and continue on,
all 3 encounters will be avoided. If the adventurers
fight briefly and then move on, only the last of the
three (Thruldran) will pursue.
These three ner’do’wells are all loners, guarding
their own separate little hiding places in the forest, so
the adventurers will face a sequence of three separate
encounters, as follows (see Appendix for NPC Stats):
One-Eyed Drukk
Drukk will fire once with his light crossbow and then
drop it and use his scimitar from then on (also has 3
daggers: 2 at belt, one strapped openly to right bicep).
Drukk is a battered-looking, burly man of middling years and
average height. He is indeed missing one eye—his left—and
wears an eyepatch that has three rotting worms pinned to it, an
adornment he made and renews because he’s found that
people (notably including foes he’s crossing blades with) find it
very distracting.
Drukk is an unlovely man sporting several large warts on his
chin and jaw, and is close-mouthed, wary, and always alert to
anyone nearby, especially anyone who might be getting around
behind him…
Drukk announces his presence to the adventurers
by loosing a bolt from his crossbow at the most
formidable-looking character he can get a good shot at,
without warning. Then he scurries to his “refuge”
between two massive old dead trees, a small closet-
like space defined by the two huge (thick-as-a-cottage,
each) old tree trunks, and a wall, behind him, of an
impenetrable 20-foot-thick tangle of interwoven
thorny branches, so adventurers can only get at him
one at a time—through a three-foot-wide opening.
Drukk takes a stand there with his scimitar, bringing
his crossbow with him but not reloading or readying
it, and if the characters use ranged weapons at him, he
can retreat behind a sheltering root of one of the
gigantic trees and hunker down for shelter. Atop his
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
cache of food and his treasure, which are two coffers
in a two-foot-deep hole, under an old piece of bark: a
coffer of old cheese and two skins of wine, and a coffer
of 150gp and three small 50-gp-each-value
moonstones.
Right in front of Drukk’s hidey-hole is a pit trap,
concealed with an old brown woven carpet artfully
strewn with forest loam, dead leaves, and a scattering
of dead twigs so it looks like the rest of the forest floor.
Perception DC:15 to spot; the pit is 10 feet deep and its
bottom is lined with a vicious array of fire-hardened
wooden spikes (1d6 bludgeoning [falling] damage plus
2d10 piercing damage). Drukk is adept at skipping
past the edges of the pit without falling in, but anyone
who clearly sees him doing this will be aware that he’s
avoiding a patch of ground. If he has as much as a ten-
foot lead on the nearest PC, however, he’ll be able to
whip around one of the trees that brackets his hidey-
hole and be in his preferred spot “beyond” it before
they can see how he gets past the pit trap.
If the adventurers don’t come after him, or retreat
from where he makes his stand, Drukk will remain in
his hidey-hole for days if need be; he won’t come
creeping after the adventurers to snipe at them,
because guarding his hiding-place is all he cares about;
if he thinks a group of strangers all knows where it is,
he’ll lie low and then relocate later to a new hiding-
place.
Ralaera Blacktalons
Ralaera will fire down at adventurers from a perch up
in the trees with her light crossbow and then run
along branches and a rope “handrail” line to another
perch farther along the trail and then fire again, then
leave the crossbow aloft there and swing on a
descending line that she’ll let go of to drop into the
heart of a dense stand of pine trees.
Where, out of sight of the adventurers, she’ll land on
a pad made of piled-up pine boughs, slither down off
of it, and into a dirt tunnel, dragging some of the
boughs after her to plug her entrance. Ralaera hides
her treasure (two large, heavy canvas sacks of 300 gp
each) in the loose dirt walls of this winding tunnel,
which is an old bear lair. She’ll remain down in the lair,
still and silent, attacking only if someone “drops in” on
her.
Which the characters may well do, because the
tunnel runs from the hole with the pine boughs out to
the surface, but along the way, no less than three pit
traps fall down into it. Ralaera is in the habit of
running down and stabbing any “drop ins” with her
scimitar. She also sports 4 daggers: 1 at her belt, one
down either boot, and one sheathed at the back of her
neck, hidden by her long unbound hair, its belt
Tharaera Lost 10
 forming a neckband that supports a gorget-plate over
her throat.
All three of the traps are located inside the stand of
pine trees—in all three of the places where there’s
enough of a gap between pine boughs for someone to
stand without getting pricked. They are all pit traps
concealed with loose-woven mats carefully covered
with forest loam, dead leaves, and a lot of pine needles
so as to look like the rest of the forest floor (Ralaera
keeps three stout saplings and two belts to lash them
together with, stood upright amid the boughs of some
of the pines, to serve her as a pit-spanning platform
she can lie on as she rakes and rearranges the forest
litter to conceal a mats.
Pit Traps
Perception DC 15 to spot; each pit is 20 feet deep, plus Ralaera
will pounce as fast as she can.
Ralaera is a stocky, hard-faced middle-aged woman in
dirty, supple-soft leather armor. Her name comes from
the elbow-length black soft leather gloves she wears at
all times. She had long, tangled, unbound black hair,
going white at the temples, and moves very quietly,
catlike and graceful. She looks . . . dangerous.
In Elventree, Ralaera makes a living “skimming”
cargoes: stealing a little of this and a little of that, for
resale, from passing shipments in the warehouses. She
is patient and shrewd, and the adventurers just
happened to catch her out in the forest checking on
her life savings…about which she is paranoid (they
took her a long, careful time to build up, and she
greatly fears losing them).
The 4-foot-wide open end of Ralaera’s tunnel is
guarded by dozens of poison darts. To get in and out
unharmed, traversers should brace themselves so as
to walk on the lower sections of the walls, and the
floor where it meets the walls, and nowhere else on
the floor. Stepping on the floor more than a boot’s
thickness away from the walls will depress a hidden
pressure plate; there are a row of three such plates,
one filling a five-foot-square area in front of the tunnel
mouth, one filling the adjacent five feet of floor at the
tunnel mouth and just within, and one filling the next
five feet of tunnel floor. The plates and the dart-tube
holes are both concealed by dirt-cloaked fine netting
hung along the walls and laid on the floor. Each
pressure plate unleashes 8 darts: the plate outside the
tunnel attracts darts firing out of the edges of the
tunnel-mouth in crisscross fashion, spaced high and
low, and the others fire straight across the tunnel, high
and low.
Poison Darts x8
DC 15 Investigation to spot, DC 15 Dexterity Check with Thieves
Tools to disable, each dart is a +8 bonus ranged attack for 2
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
(1d4) piercing damage and DC 15 Constitution save: successful
means 5 (1d10) poison damage, failure means 10 (2d10)
damage.
Shields will intercept these darts; Ralaera uses 2
shields, hidden elsewhere in the forest, to trigger them
all when she wants to renew the poison and reload
them all.
Thruldran
Thruldran will fire once with his heavy crossbow and
then drop it and use his mace from then on (also has 2
daggers: 1 at belt, 1 sheathed down left boot), and a
hand axe elsewhere in the forest he can fetch to chop
things after the fight.
Thruldran will try to wound or take down any
character that looks like a spell-caster (robes, wizard
hat, wand) with his crossbow, then attack, retreating
to where he hopes to lure the adventurers in under his
net (he’ll rush to bash anyone caught in it with his
mace).
The net is stretched between two trees overhead,
hidden by thick foliage, and is brought down by
triggering a trip wire three inches off the ground that’s
hidden by heaped-up leaves (Thruldran easily clears it
because he knows exactly where it is); DC 10 Wisdom
Check to spot, DC 15 Dexterity Check using thieves’
tools to break trip wire harmlessly; if lacking thieves’
tools, an edged weapon or tool can serve, but a check
with disadvantage must be made; if failed, net is
triggered.
Thruldran will turn to confront the adventurers,
snarling and brandishing his mace, as if he’s fled into a
dead end and is now turning at bay, with the 10-foot-
square net-drop area right in front of him.
Adventurers who close with him are likely to be
trapped under the net as it falls (restrained if failing a
DC 15 Dexterity save, and knocked prone). Trapped
adventurers can use action to make a DC 10 Strength
check to free themselves or another within-reach
creature. The net is AC 10 and has 20hp (dealing the
net 5hp of slashing damage destroys a 5-foot-square
section, freeing anyone in that section).
Thruldran will enthusiastically bash anyone netted,
but will flee if spells are hurled his way and he
survives them—and he isn’t trapped in a dead-end at
all, he has his own little escape trail behind him. If the
battle goes against Thruldran, he’ll flee along it—and it
runs back into many trees and hooks around a large
duskwood. Thruldran knows to grab a broken-off stub
of bough and swing himself hard around to the left,
against the trunk of the duskwood; any character who
doesn’t do the same will blunder straight into
Thruldran’s waiting pit trap.
Tharaera Lost 11
 Pit Trap
The pit trap is concealed by a woven twig and bough wattle laid
flat and strewn with forest loam, dead leaves, and a scattering
of dead twigs so it looks like the rest of the forest floor.
Perception DC 15 spot; the pit is 10 feet deep and its bottom is
lined with a vicious array of fire-hardened wooden spikes (1d10
bludgeoning [falling] damage plus 2d10 piercing damage).
If not slain, Thruldran will flee but skulk after the
adventurers, shadowing them and waiting for any
chance to polish off a wounded or separated-from-the-
rest character; he wants no survivors to know of his
net and pit. He has no treasure, but was planning to
bury a lot of wealth right beside the pit, very soon.

Adjusting the Encounter

Here are the recommendations for adjusting these combat
encounters. They are not cumulative.

 Very Weak Party: Drukk – AC:12 HP: 32; Ralaera – AC: 12

HP: 30; Thruldran – AC:11 HP: 32
 Weak Party: Drukk – AC:12 HP: 40; Ralaera – AC: 13 HP: 45 ;
Thruldran – AC:11 HP: 40
 Strong Party: Drukk – AC:15 HP: 55; Ralaera – AC: 16 HP: 60;
Thruldran – AC:15 HP: 55
 Very Strong Party: Drukk – AC:15 HP: 62; Ralaera – AC: 16
HP: 70; Thruldran – AC:15 HP: 65

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Tharaera Lost 12
 Part 4: Naga Cave
After fighting off or escaping the bandits and heading
deeper into the ancient forest, the trail the party has
been following fades away. A DC 13 Survival/Wisdom
check is required to keep going in the right direction. If
the party fails the check, they become lost, losing all
sense of direction under the deep and unrelenting
boughs of Cormanthor.
If the party is lost, there is a 50% chance they will
stumble into a patch of brambles concealing Xander, a
werebear who is currently asleep. He will not be at all
happy at being awakened, and will immediately attack
(the lead party member can attempt a DC 18
Perception or Survival to spot and avoid).
Xander is unfortunately more than a little insane and will fight
to the death. While werebears aren’t traditionally known for
such ferocity or suicidal tendencies, Xander has been away
from civilization for too long and his more bestial nature has
long since taken over. The bear inside him fights constantly
with the human, and that fight has created a morass of
confusion and despair. He’ll see the adventuring party as
interlopers and maybe (a little) as saviors.
An hour after encountering the bear, the party may
make another DC 13 Wisdom (Survival) check to
rediscover the trail and eventually find their
destination. (If it fails, another check is allowed an
hour later; any success at these checks means the
party finds the trail, and doesn’t have to face
additional checks to lose their way again.)
The hours of taking great care to try to follow a barely
perceptible path though the deep, all but impenetrable forest is
starting to wear on everyone’s nerves. The combination of
fighting off bandits, being scratched and cut by innumerable
thorns, tramping through the hot and still wildwood and the
claustrophobic feeling that you are being slowly crushed by the
heavy canopy of shadowtops, hemlocks, and duskwoods, have
led even the most charitable among you to actively speculate
what Garorn’s life would be like if he were missing more than
just his two legs.
Just when the pooling sweat in the small of your back, all the
bruises and scratches and the incessant forest have you on the
verge of quitting this fool’s errand, the path before you
suddenly slopes down into a natural hollow, where the mouth
of a large cave can clearly be seen. Beyond being able to see a
bit of sky for the first time in hours, you notice the startling
silence of this place. It is as if the entire forest is suddenly
holding its breath.
This shallow forest cavern is home to a spirit naga.
From this lair, the naga plots and schemes with the
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
most dangerous criminal gangs operating out of
Elventree, such as Dzetharl’s Serpent and the
Mahlaxlurs. There are springs of drinking water in the
caves…and some bluestar moss! A DC 13 Perception
check will reveal the faint sound of running water
emanating from the caves. A DC 10 Nature/Wisdom
check will inform a character that a dark cave with
running water would be an excellent place for moss to
grow.
The adventurers can’t get anywhere near the moss,
which is in a cleft where the naga keeps its treasure
(four potions of greater healing, bone-tube-encased
spell scrolls of arcane eye, Evard’s black tentacles,
legend lore, and scrying, and a small 50-gp-value
carved ivory hand-coffer containing 6 black pearls,
each worth 500 gp), without killing the naga.
The naga will back up into the cleft. There is a pit
trap in the floor of its cave, far to its right, and the naga
will cast a minor illusion of a treasure chest atop this
pit trap before any adventurers enter the cavern.
When any character sees the naga, it will feign
“hurrying to guard the chest,” but will not move onto
the pit trap, instead moving in behind it and
pretending to be enspelled to guard the chest “by a
dragon who watchesss you even now!”
Pit Trap
Perception DC 18 to spot; 40 feet deep and its bottom is lined
with a vicious array of fire-hardened wooden spikes (4d10
bludgeoning [falling] damage plus 2d10 piercing damage.
The naga, Yarlryx, hopes to increase its treasure by
gaining weapons and wealth from the adventurers,
and will use its lightning bolt and other spells to give
them a real battle. It can’t quite believe they can defeat
it, and knows it can come back from death anyway,
and will neither surrender nor retreat. It’s not above
using its charm, hold, and dominate spells to try to
force adventurers into the pit trap.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are the recommendations for adjusting these combat
encounters. They are not cumulative.
 Very Weak Party: Remove the spirit naga; replace with bone
naga
 Weak Party: Reduce spirit naga’s total hp to 60
 Strong Party: Remove the spirit naga; replace with guardian
naga
 Very Strong Party: Remove the spirit naga; replace with
guardian naga and add a pet carrion crawler
Tharaera Lost 13
 Conclusion: Return
to the Tankard
If the adventurers return to Garorn and give him the
moss, he tells them to seek Drassauva (proprietress of
the Den of Delights), find the “secret passage from her
bedchamber,” and follow her on one of the “every
tenday or so” occasions when she uses it, to vanish
overnight.
That, the ex-pirate tells the adventurers, is when she
goes to report to Suldran, and take him his fifth-share
of all the Den’s takings, and receive her latest “spy on
so-and-so, watch out for this thing, and do this to such-
and-such” orders. Beware her, Garorn warns; she
carries poison. She’ll be heading for Skulljaw Hill, deep
in the Elven Court, where there’s “some sort of lair,
whose entrance I could never find.”
So ends Adventure One.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Tharaera Lost 14
 Rewards
Make sure note their rewards on their adventure log Treasure Awards
sheets. Give your name and DCI number (if applicable) Item Name GP Value
so players can record who ran the session.
Drukk’s Treasure 200
Experience Ralaera’s Treasure
Yarlryx’s Treasure
600
3500
Total up all combat experience earned for defeated
foes, and divide by the number of characters present
in the combat. For non-combat experience, the
4 x POTIONS OF GREATER HEALING
rewards are listed per character. Give all characters in Potion, uncommon
the party non-combat experience awards unless A description of this item can be found in the Dungeon
otherwise noted. Master's Guide.

SPELL SCROLLS
Combat Awards Arcane Eye, Evard’s Black Tentacles, Legend Lore, and
Name of Foe XP Per Foe Scrying
Drukk 700
Ralaera
Thruldran
700
700
Renown
Xander/Werebear 1800 All faction members earn one renown point for
Spirit Naga 3900 participating in this adventure.
Garorn 3000

The minimum total award for each character Downtime

participating in this adventure is 2,250 experience
points. Each character receives 5 downtime days at the
conclusion of this adventure.
The maximum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 3,000 experience
points. DM Rewards
You receive 450 XP, 225 gp and 5 downtime days for
Treasure running this session.
The characters receive the following treasure, divided
up amongst the party. Characters should attempt to
divide treasure evenly whenever possible. Gold piece
values listed for sellable gear are calculated at their
selling price, not their purchase price.
Consumable magic items should be divided up
however the group sees fit. If more than one character
is interested in a specific consumable magic item, the
DM can determine who gets it randomly should the
group be unable to decide.
Permanent magic items are divided according to a
system. See the sidebar if the adventure awards
permanent magic items.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Tharaera Lost 15
 Appendix: Monster/NPC
Light Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, range
80/320ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d8+2) piercing damage.

Statistics Scimitar. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5ft., one

target. Hit: 5 (1d6+2) slashing damage.
One-Eyed Drukk (Veteran) Dagger. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5ft., one
Medium Humanoid, Chaotic Neutral
target. Hit: 4 (1d4+2) piercing damage.
Armor Class: 17 (splint)
Hit Points: 45
Speed: 30ft. Thruldran (Veteran)
Medium Humanoid, Chaotic Neutral
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Armor Class: 17 (splint)
16 (+3) 13 (+1) 14 (+2) 10 11 10
Hit Points: 45
Speed: 30ft.
Skills: Athletics +5, Perception +2
Senses: Passive perception 12
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Languages: Common
16 (+3) 13 (+1) 14 (+2) 10 11 10
Challenge: 3 (700 XP)

Actions Skills: Athletics +5, Perception +2

Senses: Passive perception 12
Multiattack. Drukk makes two Scimitar attacks in melee. Languages: Common
Challenge: 3 (700 XP)
Light Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, range
80/320ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d8+1) piercing damage. Actions
Scimitar. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5ft., one Multiattack. Thruldran makes two Mace attacks in
target. Hit: 4 (1d6+1) slashing damage. melee.

Dagger. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5ft., one Heavy Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit,
target. Hit: 3 (1d4+1) piercing damage. range 100/400ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d10) piercing
damage.

Mace. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5ft., one

Ralaera Blacktalons (Veteran) target. Hit: 5 (1d6+2) bludgeoning damage.
Medium Humanoid, Chaotic Neutral
Armor Class: 17 (split) Dagger. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5ft., one
Hit Points: 50 target. Hit: 4 (1d4+2) piercing damage.
Speed: 30ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA

16 (+3) 13 (+1) 14 (+2) 10 11 10

Skills: Athletics +5, Perception +2

Senses: Passive perception 12
Languages: Common
Challenge: 3 (700 XP)

Actions
Multiattack. Ralaera makes two Scimitar attacks in
melee.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Tharaera Lost 16
 Xander, Werebear Spirit Naga
Medium humanoid (human, shapechanger) neutral good Large Monstrosity, chaotic evil
Armor Class: 10 in humanoid form, 11 (natural armor) in Armor Class: 15 (natural armor)
bear and hybrid form Hit Points: 75 (10d10+20)
Hit Points: 135 (18d8+54) Speed: 40ft.
Speed: 30ft. (40ft., climb 30ft. in bear or hybrid form)
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA 18 (+4) 17 (+3) 14 (+2) 16 (+3) 15 (+2) 16 (+3)
19 (+4) 10 17 (+3) 11 12 (+1) 12 (+1)
Saving Throws: Dex +6, Con +5, Wis +5, Cha +6
Skills: Perception +7 Damage Immunities: poison
Damage Immunities: bludgeoning, piercing, and slashing Condition Immunities: charmed, poisoned
damage from nonmagical weapons that aren’t Senses: darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 12
silvered. Languages: Abyssal, Common
Senses: passive Perception 17 Challenge: 8 (3,900 XP)
Languages: Common (can’t speak in bear form)
Challenge: 5 (1,800 XP)
Rejuvenation. If it dies, the naga returns to life in 1d6
days and regains all its hit points. Only a wish spell can
Shapechanger. The werebear can use its action to prevent this trait from functioning.
polymorph into a Large bear-humanoid hybrid or into a
Large bear, or back into its true form, which is humanoid. Spellcasting. The naga is a 10th-level spellcaster. Its
Its statistics, other than its size and AC, are the same in spellcasting ability is Intelligence (spell save DC 14, +6 to
each form. Any equipment it is earing or carrying isn’t hit with spell attacks), and it needs only verbal
transformed. It reverts to its true form if it dies. components to cast its spells. It has the following wizard
spells prepared:
Keen Smell. The werebear has advantage on Wisdom
(Perception) checks that rely on smell. Cantrips (at will): mage hand, minor illusion, ray of frost
1st level (4 slots): charm person, detect magic, sleep
Actions 2nd level (3 slots): detect thoughts, hold person
Multiattack. In bear form, the werebear makes two claw 3rd level (3 slots): lightning bolt, water breathing
attacks. In humanoid form, it makes two greataxe 4th level (3 slots): blight, dimension door
attacks. In hybrid form, it can attack like a bear or a 5th level (2 slots): dominate person
humanoid.
Actions
Bite (Bear or Hybrid Form Only). Melee Weapon Attack:
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 10ft., one
+7 to hit, reach 5ft., one target. Hit: 15 (2d10+4) piercing
target. Hit: 7 (1d6+4) piercing damage, and the target
damage. If the target is a humanoid, it must succeed on a
must make a DC 13 Constitution saving throw, taking 31
DC 14 Constitution saving throw or be cursed with
(7d8) poison damage on a failed save, or half as much
werebear lycanthropy.
damage on a successful one.
Claw (Bear or Hybrid Form Only). Melee Weapon Attack:
+7 to hit, reach 5ft., one target. Hit: 13 (2d8+4) slashing
damage.

Greataxe (Humanoid or Hybrid Form Only). Melee

Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5ft., one target. Hit: 10
(1d12+4) slashing damage.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Tharaera Lost 17
 SKULLJAW HILL
The search for the missing Harper agent has brought you to the small coastal town of Elventree on the south shore
of the Moonsea. With important clues in hand and after a stop at a local festhall, you will be forced to brave further
challenges found in the depths of the Cormanthor forest. Part Two of the Gamehole Con 2016 adventure arc.

A 2-hour adventure for 5th-10th level characters

Ed Greenwood & Alex Kammer

Adventure Designers
Thomas Valley
Editing and Layout

Adventure Code: DDALGHC-02

Organized Play: Chris Lindsay

D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Mike Mearls, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall, Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks,
Alan Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League,
all other Wizards of the Coast product names, and their respective logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive
likenesses are property of Wizards of the Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America. Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material
or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the express written permission of Wizards of the Coast.

©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31, 2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4
The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Skulljaw Hill 1
 Introduction
Welcome to “Skulljaw Hill,” a D&D Expeditions
adventure, part of the official D&D Adventurers
League organized play system and the Gamehole Con
2016 adventure arc. This adventure is designed for
three to seven 5th-10th level characters, and is
optimized for six 7th-level characters. Characters
outside this level range cannot participate in this
adventure. The adventure is set in the Moonsea region
of the Forgotten Realms.
The D&D Adventurers
League
This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of the
D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure, players
track their characters’ experience, treasure, and other
rewards, and can take those characters through other
adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a store
event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a DCI
number. This number is your official Wizards of the
Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have a
number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to use to
create and advance their characters. Players can
continue to play their characters after the storyline
season has finished, possibly participating in a second
or third storyline with those same characters. A
character’s level is the only limitation for adventure
play. A player cannot use a character of a level higher
or lower than the level range of a D&D Adventurers
League adventure.
For more information on playing, running games as
a Dungeon Master, and organizing games for the D&D
Adventurers League, please visit the D&D Adventurers
League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
Preparing the Adventure
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
 Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
 Read through the adventure, taking notes of
anything you’d like to highlight or remind yourself
while running the adventure, such as a way you’d
like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d like to use in
a combat.
 Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
 Gather together any resources you’d like to use to
aid you in running this adventure--such as
notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and battlemaps.
 If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.
Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
 Character name and level
 Character race and class
 Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most common
passive ability check
 Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, and so on
Players that have characters outside the adventure’s
level range cannot participate in the adventure
with those characters. Players with ineligible
characters can make a new 1st-level character or use a
pregenerated character. Players can play an adventure
they previously played or ran as a Dungeon Master,
but not with the same character.
Ensure that each player has an official adventure
logsheet for his or her character (if not, get one from
the organizer). The player fills out the adventure
name, session number, date, and your name and DCI
number. In addition, the player also fills in the starting
values for experience, gold, downtime, renown, and
number of permanent magic items. He or she fill in the
other values and write notes at the conclusion of the
Skulljaw Hill 2
 session. Each player is responsible for maintaining an
accurate logsheet.
If you have time, you can do a quick scan of a
player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing looks
out of order. If you see magic items of very high
rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you can ask
players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict item
use or ask them to use a standard ability score array.
Point players to the D&D Adventurers League Player’s
Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and it’s the
beginning of an adventure or episode, they can declare
their activity and spend the days now. Alternatively,
they can do so at the end of the adventure or episode.
Players should select their characters’ spells and other
daily options prior to the start of the adventure, unless
the adventure specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread
the adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, sidebars provide
information to assist you in making adjustments for
smaller or larger groups and characters of higher or
lower levels than the adventure is optimized for. This
is typically used exclusively for combat encounters.
You may adjust the adventure beyond the guidelines
given in the adventure, or for other reasons. For
example, if you’re playing with a group of
inexperienced players, you might want to make the
adventure a little easier; for very experienced players,
you might want to make it a little harder. Therefore,
five categories of party strength have been created for
you to use as a guide. Use these as a guide, and feel
free to use a different adjustment during the
adventure if the recommended party strength feels off
for the group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of seven
5th to 10th level characters. To figure out whether
you need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
 Add up the total levels of all the characters
 Divide the total by the number of characters
 Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round fractions
of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
Determining Party Strength
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very weak
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very strong
Average party strength indicates no recommended
adjustments to the adventure. Each sidebar may or
may not offer suggestions for certain party strengths.
If a particular recommendation is not offered for your
group, you don’t have to make adjustments.
Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment of
the game for the players. You help guide the narrative
and bring the words on these pages to life. The
outcome of a fun game session often creates stories
that live well beyond the play at the table. Always
follow this golden rule when you DM for a group:
Make decisions and adjudications that enhance the
fun of the adventure when possible.
To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
 You are empowered to make adjustments to the
adventure and make decisions about how the group
interacts with the world of this adventure. Doing so
is especially important and applicable outside of
combat, but feel free to adjust the adventure for
groups that are having too easy or too hard of a
time.
 Don’t make the adventure too easy or too difficult
for a group. Never being challenged makes for a
boring game and being overwhelmed makes for a
frustrating one. Gauge the experience of the players
(not the characters) with the game, try to feel out
(or ask) what they like in a game, and attempt to
give each of them the experience they’re after when
they play D&D. Give everyone a chance to shine.
 Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game session
moving along appropriately. Watch for stalling, since
play loses momentum when this happens. At the
same time, make sure that the players don’t finish
too early; provide them with a full play experience.
Skulljaw Hill 3
 Try to be aware of running long or short. Adjust the spells. Other spell services might be available as
pacing accordingly specified in the adventure. The number of spells
 Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free to available to be cast as a service is limited to a
modify the text as you see fit, especially when maximum of three per day total, unless otherwise
dialogue is present. noted.
 Give the players appropriate hints so they can make
informed choices about how to proceed. Players SPELLCASTING SERVICES
should be given clues and hints when appropriate so Spell Cost
they can tackle puzzles, combat, and interactions Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
without getting frustrated over lack of information. Identify 20 gp
Doing so helps to encourage immersion in the Lesser restoration 40 gp
adventure and gives players “little victories” for Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
figuring out good choices from clues. Remove curse 90 gp
In short, being the DM isn’t about following the Speak with dead 90 gp
adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about facilitating Divination 210 gp
a fun, challenging game environment for the players. Greater restoration 450 gp
The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has more information on Raise dead 1,250 gp
the art of running a D&D game.

Downtime and Lifestyle Acolyte Background

At the beginning of each play session, players must
declare whether or not they are spending any days of
downtime. The player records the downtime spent on
the adventure logsheet. The following options are
available to players during downtime (see the D&D
basic rules or the D&D Adventurers League Player’s
Guide for more information):
 Catching up
 Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
commit to crafting a single item)
 Practicing a profession
 Recuperating
 Spellcasting services (end of the adventure only)
 Training
A character possessing the acolyte background requesting
spellcasting services at a temple of his or her faith may request
one spell per day from the Spellcasting Services table for free.
The only cost paid for the spell is the base price for the
consumed material component, if any.
Character Disease, Death, and
Recovery
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might not
have the same characters return from session to
session, here are the rules when bad things happen to
characters.

Other downtime options might be available during
adventures or unlocked through play, including
faction-specific activities.
In addition, whenever a character spends downtime
days, that character also spends the requisite expense
for his or her lifestyle. Costs are per day, so a character
that spends ten days of downtime also spends ten days
of expenses maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some
downtime activities help with lifestyle expenses or add
lifestyle expenses.
Spellcasting Services
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can provide
some spellcasting services. Characters need to be able
to travel to the settlement to obtain these services.
Spell services generally available include healing
and recovery spells, as well as information-gathering
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating
Effects
A character still affected by diseases, poisons, and
other similar effects at the conclusion of an adventure
can spend downtime days recuperating until such time
as he or she resolves the effect to its conclusion (see
the recuperating activity in the D&D Basic Rules).
If a character doesn’t resolve the effect between
sessions, that character begins the next session still
affected by the debilitating effect.
Death
A character who is killed during the course of the
adventure has a few options at the end of the session
(or whenever arriving back in civilization) if no one in
the adventuring party has immediate access to a raise
dead or revivify spell, or similar magic. A character
Skulljaw Hill 4
 subject to a raise dead spell is affected negatively until
all long rests have been completed during an
adventure. Alternatively, each downtime day spent
after raise dead reduces the penalty to attack rolls,
saving throws, and ability checks by 1, in addition to
any other benefits the downtime activity might
provide.
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any of the
other options, the player creates a new character. The
new character does not have any items or rewards
possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing any
vital organs and is mostly whole) and the player would
like the character to be returned to life, the party can
take the body back to civilization and use the dead
character’s funds to pay for a raise dead spell. A raise
dead spell cast in this manner costs the character
1,250 gp.
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As above,
except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for the raise
dead spell is paid for by the party at the end of the
session. Other characters are under no obligation to
spend their funds to bring back a dead party member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to 4
and a member of a faction, the dead character’s body
can be returned to civilization and a patron from the
faction ensures that he or she receives a raise dead
spell. However, any character invoking this charity
forfeits all experience and rewards from that session
(both those earned prior to and after death during that
session) and cannot replay that episode or adventure
with that character again. Once a character reaches
5th level, this option is no longer available.

Adventure Background
The legless ex-pirate Garorn knows that Drassauva,
proprietress of the Den of Delights festhall in
Elventree, works for Suldran and can lead adventurers
to a hidden lair of the Dark deep in the Elven Court.
The party hopes to track down the missing Harper
agent, Tharaera, who has been kidnapped by the
criminal band, Suldran’s Dark. In the previous
adventure, Tharaera Lost (DDALGHC-01), Garorn
identified Drassauva as being a known associate of
Suldran and that following her might lead the party to
the pirate leader’s lair.
What Garorn doesn’t know is that Drassauva is
really a Weretiger, who will change shape and try to
get away (and then send a fighting band of Dark
members to ambush the adventurers) if she detects
the adventurers following her.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Skulljaw Hill 5
 Part 1: Shadowing
the Lady of Delight
The party finds themselves in the ancient sylvan
community of Elventree located in the West Branch of
the Moonsea in the forest of Cormanthor. Yesterday
was a trying and event-filled day culminating in a
nasty fight with a terrible naga deep in the
Cormanthor
Today is a new day. And that is a good thing, given the trials
and tribulations of yesterday. The forest challenged each and
every one of you, leaving you with a healthy respect for the
ancient Elven Court.
Following the directions of the ex-pirate Garorn, you are now
headed towards the Den of Delights, a house of pleasure run by
a woman named Drassauva whom Garorn identified as an
associate of Suldran, head of the criminal gang Suldran’s Dark.
Like just about every structure in Elventree, the Den of Delights
is a ramshackle but large old two-story mansion. The sign
affixed over its front door bears flowing script in flaking gold
paint confirming that you’ve found the right place. The crimson
ground floor window-curtains are drawn tight, and the front
stoop is clean and empty.
The wide front door proves unlocked. Entering the Delights,
you find it to be no gaudy, sleazy pleasure-palace, but rather a
grand house with gleaming-polished wood paneling, crimson
tapestries depicting sinuous dragons (fanciful things, not a
specific species you recognize), and red carpeting. You are
immediately struck by the heavy, cloying scent of honeysuckle
mixed with some sort of strong but unfamiliar spice. The large
entrance hall is filled with well-worn and ornate furniture well
past its prime. The Delights seems to be doing a brisk business
despite the hour; most of the couches hold scantily clad men
and women engaging rougher-looking clientele in flirtatious
conversation.
Just as you are beginning to get your bearings, you are
approached by a petite brunette woman of obvious elven
heritage—large eyes, delicate features, slightly pointed ears,
slender build—and striking beauty, who says warmly,
“Welcome to the Delights, travelers. How can we serve you
today?”
This woman’s name is Ehrendil, and presents herself
as Drassauva’s “right-hand matron.” While she does
not openly display her surprise at seeing a fully armed
adventuring party enter the Delights, she obviously
believes the party is there for reasons other than the
Den’s usual attractions. Fortunately for the
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
adventurers, it seems Ehrendil is no friend to
Drassauva. If pressed by the adventurers in a friendly
and sympathetic manner, she intimates (almost admit,
without baldly stating matters) that she longs for
Drassauva to be gone so she can operate the Delights
in the way she likes as well as to enjoy all the profits
herself. She also hints that she resents Suldran’s
influence over Drassauva, and wishes to be free of it.
Roleplaying Ehrendil
Ehrendil is not merely beautiful; she is smart and capable. She
is also practical above all else, which supports her self-serving
nature. She is quick and to the point, not interested in flirtation
or badinage, and frequently says things like “What does that
have to do with me?” and “Why would I do that, as it does
nothing for me?”
She is also an excellent judge of character and can usually tell
when someone is lying to her (Insight +8).
If the adventurers attack her, she will quickly trigger a secret
door or trapdoor in the floor that will swallow her and lock in
place behind her, preventing the adventurers from pursuing.
In the unlikely event that the party decides to fight her, and
she’s somehow unable to use the trapdoor or otherwise
escape, her stats are detailed in the Appendix.
When the party asks after Drassauva, Ehrendil’s
curiosity will be piqued. She will quickly escort the
party to an empty parlor where she is confident that
they will not be overheard and get right to the point,
asking briskly, “What business do you have with
Drassauva?”
The moment she gets the merest whiff that the party
is not allied with Drassauva, Ehrendil will boldly state,
“Well, maybe I can help you—if you can help me.”
A successful DC 13 Persuasion check will convince
Ehrendil to help the party. She will explain that
Drassauva will be in sometime this evening, and that
this happens to be one of the nights when she visits
Suldran. Ehrendil will take the adventurers up to
Drassauva’s bedchamber to show them where the
secret door is and how it works: a pocket door behind
a decorative crimson silk curtain on one wall that
opens to reveal a steep set of stairs, with a handrail
descending into darkness. Drassauva’s bedchamber
has a “Lady Drassauva” knocker adorning its lone,
never-locked hallway door; it is luxuriously furnished
like an office (as that’s what she uses it for; if she
needs to sleep or have real privacy, she goes to a
nondescript house she owns several streets away) that
just happens to have a crimson-curtained four-poster
bed in one corner.
Ehrendil then offers to hide the adventurers in a
little-used storage room until after Drassauva departs
for her meeting, whereupon she will lead the party
back to Drassauva’s bedroom so they can pursue her.
Any reasonable Insight roll will reveal that Ehrendil is
Skulljaw Hill 6
 being honest with the party and earnestly hopes that
they succeed. Ehrendil will warn the party, “Beware of
Drassauva; she is dangerous. She bears herself with a
confidence that tells me she has some abilities or
powers that are not obvious. She is not what she
seems.” (If the adventurers press her about this,
Ehrendil will shrug and say, “I can prove nothing. But
there are stories. Some say she can turn into a snake,
or a dragon, or a snarling rat. Others say she can
summon monsters, or works with them. Or that her
bite is poisonous. Not all of these stories can be true.”)
Ehrendil will lead the way to a ground-floor back
storage room filled with dilapidated and broken
furniture and instruct the adventurers to stay quiet
and sit tight until she comes for them.
True to her word, she returns in a few hours, leads
the party upstairs to Drassauva’s (one end of the
upper floor) bedchamber, exhorts them to “Hurry
now; she just left!” and opens its soundless, well-oiled
door.
(If the adventurers don’t open up to Ehrendil, she
will assume they are members or hirelings of the Dark
here to do some covert business with Drassauva, and
will still ask them to wait in the storage room until
“the Lady Drassauva returns. I’ll take you to her
bedchamber then.” As she says this, she’ll point at the
ceiling, in the direction of the back corner of the upper
floor where Drassauva’s bedchamber is located. Then
Ehrendil will take the adventurers to the storage room
and lock them in—not being obvious about the
locking—so they’ll make enough noise busting out to
alert her that they’re now on the move. If they so
emerge, she will stay out of their way and will have
arranged that no clients or staff of the Den are out and
about in the hallway that leads from the storage room
to a back outside door in one direction, and a back
stair in the other. That spiral back stair arrives on the
upper floor right beside Drassauva’s room. If the
adventurers stay put in the storage room, Ehrendil will
come and lead them to Drassauva’s bedchamber as
promised.)
No matter how the adventurers reach Drassauva’s
bedchamber, they will find it deserted: Drassauva has
just closed the door of her secret passage behind her
and hurried down its dark stair.
Carrying a large wicker basket of food (for the
prisoners), Drassauva will hasten down the steps,
which descend steeply some 80 feet, into some ancient
dank and pitch-dark cellars littered with moldering
casks and crates. One crate stands open, and
characters traversing the cellars will see that it
contains a wooden seat, and manacles for wrists,
ankles, waist, and throat of whoever was fastened
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
inside, sitting on the seat. (The rest of the crates are
closed, and all of them are empty and in disintegrating
condition.)
As the adventurers are traversing the cellars, they
will hear (on a successful DC 17 Perception check) the
distant sound of a door being closed.
One cellar leads into the next, and after six cellars,
that slope upwards as the party continues on, the last
cellar gives into a narrow passage that ends in a flight
of ten stone steps, ascending to a door in the ceiling.
It is a trapdoor, concealed from view from the top or
forest side by some living bushes whose roots are
anchored in it (they were deliberately wired in place
and fertilized; the rest of the door is covered in the
earth surrounding them). The trapdoor has no lock,
and a bolt only on the inside (cellar side), but is heavy
(thanks to the dirt atop it).
The closing-door sound the adventurers may or may
not have heard was Drassauva closing this trapdoor in
the forest floor. She then walked—unharmed—past
the (trained to leave her and anyone with her alone)
Grick Alpha guardian stationed in the trees within
easy reach of the trapdoor and headed through the
forest to Skulljaw Hill. Any character reaching the
steps up to the trapdoor will see a simple bolt
mechanism on the underside of the trap, in the open
position. When the lead party member shoves up the
door and steps up into the forest, they will be
immediately attacked—with surprise—by the Grick
Alpha. (It will try to destroy all of the adventurers.)
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are the recommendations for adjusting these combat
encounters. They are not cumulative.
 Very Weak Party: Remove grick alpha; replace with
shambling mound.
 Weak Party: Remove grick alpha; replace with giant ape.
 Strong Party: Remove grick alpha; replace with treant.
 Very Strong Party: Remove grick alpha; replace with young
red dragon.
Skulljaw Hill 7
 Part 2: The Sentinel
carefully searching the area or examining the stones).
If a human who does not look like Drassauva, or who is
not accompanied by Drassauva or a Drassauva

on the Hill
The party already knows Drassauva is headed to
Skulljaw Hill, and there is a faint trail from the
trapdoor heading into the forest, which is gently
rolling terrain of dead leaves underfoot and many
living trees, that only substantially rises in one
direction, which is the way the trail heads—so
adventurers will have no trouble finding Skulljaw Hill.
The trees are far enough apart in this part of the forest
that sunlight or moonlight (depending on the time of
day when the adventurers emerge from the
underground passage) lances down between them in
many places, to light the scene.
Far ahead in the distance, more than a bowshot away, you see
a lone human figure—probably Drassauva, given the feminine
gait, shape, and long unbound hair—carrying a large wicker
basket and walking away from you along the trail, where the
land rises and the trees thin. That must be Skulljaw Hill.
You reach the base of the hill in time to see the figure you’re
pursuing walk into a cluster of standing stones about two thirds
of the way up the slope; weathered, rough old irregularly-
shaped stone pillars, each about 15 feet tall by five feet thick.
As you study this cluster of standing stones, you do not see
anyone come out on their far side.
lookalike, approaches within 5 feet of the gate, the
stone golem will attack, seeking to destroy or drive
out all such intruders from the stone circle (it will not
pursue out of the circle, and cannot be lured from
within the stones).
This stone golem has been damaged; its hit points
are reduced from its normal max of 178 to 140 and its
AC from 17 to 15. It otherwise functions like a normal
stone golem in all other respects.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are the recommendations for adjusting these combat
encounters. They are not cumulative.
 Very Weak Party: Remove stone golem; replace with stone
giant.
 Weak Party: Remove stone golem; replace with stone giant.
 Strong Party: Remove stone golem; replace with normal
stone golem.
 Very Strong Party: Remove stone golem; replace with
normal stone golem.

No matter how long the adventurers wait, they will not

see Drassauva emerge from the stones; she has
entered an ancient elfhold through an invisible gate
between two of the central monoliths.
There are nine standing stones in the cluster: an
oval ring of seven monoliths, surrounding a central
pair of side-by-side stones that have about a four-foot-
wide gap between them. There’s no sign of any human
with a basket, and no birds, insects, or small scuttling
forest life can be seen within the ring, though all such
forest life are active and plentiful around it. Perception
checks will not reveal anything other than Drassauva’s
tracks leading into the standing stones; her personal
trail leads right between the two central stones—
where her footprints mysteriously end.
This invisible gate is guarded by a well-hidden
stone golem; it is standing flush with its back against
the right-hand stone flanking the gate. In the dappled
light, it looks like part of that weathered monolith (but
a DC 16 Perception check will alert any character that
this stone shape is something other than a natural part
of the monolith; lower this to DC 12 for any character

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Skulljaw Hill 8
 Part 3: Into the
over each other and things and blundering about in a
foolhardy fashion. Which doesn’t mean they aren’t
dangerous to the adventurers! Their angry, startled,

Elfhold
If the adventurers survive the Stone Golem guardian,
they can enter the elfhold by simply walking between
the two central standing stones as indicated by
Drassauva’s tracks. (The gate will not work if they step
between the stones in the other direction, even if they
immediately turn around and step in the right
direction; any being doing so must move at least ten
feet away from the central stones before “trying
again.”)
Nothing about the gate is dangerous to any sort of
living being or non-living material—merely moving
into the right spot causes a momentary flash of blue
radiance (in the mind of the gate activator only, not
visible to others; to them, the gate activator simply
vanishes) and sensation of silently falling, and then a
gate activator is simply “standing elsewhere,” in their
new location.
All gates within the elfhold work like this: invisible
and silent, one direction only (so no one can retreat to
a previous location), function for items only when
held/worn/touched by a living creature (not thrown
or thrust), and operate only when the right spot is
reached, by a creature moving in the right direction.
(Note: the entire elfhold is so strongly magical that no
location or detection can “pick out” a gate, any magic
item, or even an ongoing manifestation of a spell from
the surroundings.)
and drunken state makes them impervious to pain and
reckless enough to try anything, and to go on fighting
when “dead on their feet,” until they pass 0 hit points
and literally drop in mid-action. There will be no
parleying, surrendering, or retreats on their part.
The three crossbows are all “fired” by pulling on
cords, the ends of which (tied around stones to form
easily-grabbed knobs) were resting in the guards’ laps
as they dozed. Drassauva was so disgusted by their
drunken state that she took all of their crossbow bolts
away (so none at all are left in the room), both their
spares for reloading and the bolts loaded and ready on
each weapon’s tracks. So when these three sterling
sentinels pull the firing-cords, the weapons will rock
and clack loudly as the strings let go, and fire—
nothing!
If the adventurers overcome this trio of idiots
(which can be done without killing them; they can be
slugged unconscious), the invisible gate onward is
found by walking into the back left corner of the room
(left-hand end of the back wall, behind where the
guards were setting). A DC 13 Survival check will
reveal disparate tracks leading to that corner of the
room then stopping. Anyone stepping into this corner
will be whisked to:

Forechamber
The gate from the stone circle in the forest leads into
this forty-foot-square room, its walls, floors, and
ceiling all of solid bedrock. The room is dank (damp)
and smells of earth and wet stone. The arrival of the
first character through the gate will awaken three
Dark Guards here who had been gaming (gambling
over cards) and drinking previously, and have fallen
into a doze on their stools, where they sit—with
empty wineskins strewn on the floor around them—
behind a row of heavy crossbows on wooden tripod
stands. There are no visible doors or other entrances
and exits from this room, and the 3 stools and 3
tripods are the only visible furniture.
They will scramble up, swearing blearily and
upsetting their three wooden stools and sending cards
flying in all directions, and try to attack the
adventurers. These three dolts (Ardran, Boreld, and
Kantavvur, are all Bandits, but should be played for
maximum pratfalls and situation comedy, tripping
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Skulljaw Hill 9
 Living Quarters
The gate from the forechamber leads into this twenty-
foot-square room. Its walls, floors, and ceiling are all of
solid bedrock. It is dank (damp) and smells of earth
and wet stone. It is deserted, and has no visible doors
or other entrances or exits.
Double-tier crude wooden bunk beds (six sleeping-spots in all,
each with a straw mattress, a duvet-like overblanket, and two
pillows) line the left-hand wall, three chamber pots with lids
and a handy pile of broad, drying leaves beside each line the
right-hand wall, right in front of you is a plain wooden table
with six plain wooden chairs drawn up around it and cards,
dice, and copper pieces strewn across it.
Beyond the table, in the center of the room, stands a
wooden greatchest: a rectangular ironbound wooden storage
chest of the sort many merchants use to carry cargo; about
three feet high and wide, and six feet long. It has a flat top and
two metal handles on each side and both ends. The top is
attached to the body of the chest by large hasps with metal
pegs through them. Like most such chests, a scraped-clean
central area of the top or lid acts as a label, and something has
been chalked on this one.
What’s written on the top of the chest (the
adventurers can’t read it until they get much closer, by
passing the table) is “Mind your fingers!” but this is a
hollow warning; the chest isn’t trapped and contains
nothing sharp. Inside it is a lining of dampened stones
as insulation around three large wooden buckets/tubs
set into the stones and “lidded” with wadded wet
leaves: a tub full of smoked sausages in brine; a tub full
of handwheels of cheese in brine; and a tub holding a
dozen skins of weak wine. Atop the skins is a shallow
metal coffer (no lock or latch) that stinks of smoked
fish—and that’s exactly what it contains: dried dark
brown smoked fish, for chewing. (This is a larder of
ready food for folks who lack any safe means of
cooking in this place.)
A total of 13cp is scattered across the table (and
whatever sorts of dice and game cards will amuse the
players).
The invisible gate onward (a DC 13 Survival check
will reveal disparate tracks leading to that corner of
the room, then stopping, but the gate will function for
anyone blundering into its space) is in the back right
corner of the room (where the back wall meets the
side wall). Anyone stepping into this corner will be
whisked to:
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
Storeroom
The gate from the living quarters leads into this 20-
foot-wide, 40-foot-long room. Its walls, floors, and
ceiling are all of solid bedrock. It is dank (damp) and
smells of earth and wet stone. It is deserted, and has
no visible doors or other entrances or exits.
Large open shelves, roughly made from squared timbers
pegged into lengths of tree trunk serving as uprights, stand
against both side walls, braced against falling by diagonal
saplings nailed to the uprights and jutting out into the room.
They fill the first 20 feet of walls, but are all empty, and the
room looks devoid of life except for something very small and
brown that’s scuttling along one of the shelves on your right.
The only other thing you can see in the room is a row of six
wooden 3-legged stools arranged neatly along the right-hand
wall, beyond the shelves.
This pantry and storage chamber has been cleaned
out. All that’s left is one bewildered mouse, fleeing for
its life from the adventurers.
The invisible gate onward (a DC 13 Survival check
will reveal disparate tracks leading to that corner of
the room, then stopping, but the gate will function for
anyone blundering into its space), is at the exact
center of the back wall. Anyone stepping into the five-
foot-area out from the center of the wall will be
whisked to:
Armory
The gate from the storeroom leads into this twenty-
foot-square room. Its walls, floors, and ceiling are all of
solid bedrock. It is dank (damp) and smells of earth
and wet stone. It is deserted, and has no visible doors
or other entrances or exits.
Skulljaw Hill 10
 Wooden racks have been affixed to both side walls of this
room, running the length of both walls. They are notched and
fitted to hold specific weapons, almost all of which have been
taken away and are missing, except for a row of 8 superbly-
made halberds racked on the right-hand shelves, and a small
metal box (about the size and dimensions of a real-modern-
world red brick), sporting a hinged top and keyhole. You can
see no key to it anywhere. The nearest sections of racks on
both walls evidently held complete suits of chainmail, because
they have the shape of open closets with carved wooden
“shoulders” jutting out from the back wall, for the armor to
hang from, each shoulder having a “neck peg” for a helm to rest
upon, and rows of side-shelves down the closet, for the (also
missing) gauntlets and greaves.
There doesn’t seem to be anything else in the room.
The halberds are all 5 (1d10) slashing damage.
The key to the metal box is missing, nowhere to be
found; its lock will have to be picked, (DC 15 Sleight of
Hand) or it will have to be broken open. Inside are its
loose contents: 42 split rings (like modern real-world
key-rings: each a tight spiral of metal forming a circle
but with two ends, so items to be threaded on the ring
can be slid between one end and the adjacent curve,
and pushed inward to end up “on the ring.” There’s
also a bladder of poison gas, fashioned from the
preserved stomach of some long-dead forest critter,
that will (no chance to avoid!) be ruptured if the box is
opened, letting out its contents: Malice; anyone
inhaling it must succeed on a DC 15 Constitution
saving throw or be blinded for 1 hour. Fortunately,
the area of effect before the gas dissipates into
harmlessness is only a 5-foot-radius sphere; only
those who are actively working on opening the box
will be affected.
The gate leading onwards is activated by standing in
front of the left-hand armor closet (a DC 13 Survival
check will reveal this location, but not the action
required), and touching its “shoulders” or their neck
peg. Anyone doing so will be whisked to:
Well Chamber
The gate from the armory leads into this twenty-foot-
square room. Its walls, floors, and ceiling are all of
solid bedrock. It is very dank (damp) and smells
strongly of earth and wet stone. It is also deserted,
with no visible doors or other entrances or exits.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
This room contains a 5-foot-diameter, 2-foot-high circular “lip
wall” well, descending some 40 feet into icy cold, clear, sweet-
tasting drinkable water, accessed by a wooden bucket tossed
down at the end of a thick rope that’s tied to the bucket at one
end, and to a solid, massive iron ring-bolt in the floor beside the
well, on the other. There are two buckets, each with its own
rope, both tied to the same ring-bolt, which is starting to rust
but has been coated with animal fat to slow the rusting.
Against the right-hand wall is a simple wooden bench littered
with 5 handkegs of ale (two-foot-high miniature wooden
hooped barrels, like a wooden version of a modern real-world
“bubba”) most of them are) and 11 tankards. A tall four-legged
barstool stands beside the bench.
Along the left-hand wall, projecting out a good eight feet into
the room, are a trio of “tuns” (huge casks) on their sides,
resting in massive wooden cradles. They are six feet across at
their ends and ten feet across at their middles, and have spigots
down at the floor end of their front sides (“tops” if they weren’t
lying down); words have been chalked above each spigot.
There doesn’t seem to be anything else in the room.
If and only if a character examines the underside of
the bench, they will find two thin wooden boards
affixed to it by swiveling wooden “tabs” that can be
turned “across” the boards to hold them to the
underside of the bench, or turned the other way to free
the boards. Sandwiched between the boards are three
sheets of parchment, all of them spell scrolls! The first
scroll is a fire bolt, the second is cloud of daggers, and
the third is vampiric touch.
Written on the closest tun to adventurers arriving
through the gate is “Winter Wine/Drink Now” and if
the spigot is opened, a pale yellow, rather sour wine
with a burning kick to it will spill out (an acquired
taste, but wonderfully fiery and warming once one is
used to it or too drunk to care).
Written on the middle tun is “Drinking Water/Curse
Our Luck,” and yes, the huge cask is full of pleasant
drinking water.
Written on the farthest tun is “Elven Mint Wine,”
and turning the spigot will cause a translucent green,
minty wine that smells of spring flowers and is sweet
and strong of taste to emerge. One sip of this heady
vintage will warn anyone of its potency.
There doesn’t seem to be any gate to move on from this
room, no matter where the adventurers search, but the party
will have to find the elusive gate or be trapped here until they
starve. The key to finding it is to either try to twist the spigots
(not turn them to open them, but swivel the entire tap around
in its hole); only the farthest (elven wine) cask has a spigot that
will swivel.
Skulljaw Hill 11
 Adventurers can also tap the casks, but only the sides of the
farthest (elven wine) cask will sound hollow; the other two
casks, and the front of the farthest cask, will sound full of liquid.
Turning the spigot of the elven wine tun unlatches a
door; under the foremost iron hoop surrounding the
tun, a catch will snap open, and hinges will squeal. The
entire front of the cask can be swung open like a door
to reveal an empty hiding-place within, where
discarded iron manacles on the floor (a harness of two
wrist- or ankle-cuffs joined by chain, and then joined
to each other by a third length of cuffed chain, its cuffs
enclosing each of the other lengths of chain) attest to
its sometime use as a cell. The front of the tun didn’t
sound hollow because a foot-thick “tank” of wine has
been built on the inside of this door, extending all over
it except where the locking mechanism runs from the
spigot back to the catch under the first barrel-hoop. A
successful DC 17 Investigation check on the farthest
(elven wine) cask will reveal all of the above details.
Or the party can figure this out through old fashioned
trial and error.
Treasure
Spell scrolls: Fire bolt, Cloud of Daggers, Vampric
Touch.
Walking to the back of this hidden room inside the
tun will cause any character who does it to be “taken”
by the gate onward, to:
Prisoner Chamber
The gate from the well chamber leads into this twenty-
foot-square room. Its walls, floors, and ceiling are all of
solid bedrock. It is very dry and brightly lit; a continual
light has been cast on its ceiling. As usual, there are no
visible doors or other entrances or exits.
Sitting on the floor, barefoot (and lacking footwear; it’s
nowhere to be seen in the room) and manacled to the wall
behind them by ten-foot-long left-ankle chains and neck-chains,
are five humans—no, a half elf male and four humans, one of
them a woman—clad in rags, hungrily eating food (handwheels
of cheese and small buns/roundloaves of bread) from the large
wicker basket with their bare hands. They look up, astonished
at your arrival.
There’s no sign of Drassauva or a woman with one emerald
green eye and one sky-blue eye, but standing guard over these
prisoners are two hulking men in studded leather armor, with
battleaxes in their hands. They charge you without hesitation!
The guardians are two senior members of the Dark,
hardened and vicious warriors who keep clear of the
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
prisoners in their initial charge, and will attack
fearlessly, fighting to the death. They wear golden
rings on their fingers and have two daggers each at
their belts. Each of them also has a full set of keys to
the prisoners’ manacles, on rings clipped to their belts.
Larrak has an additional 6 daggers securely sheathed
down a diagonal baldric across his chest.
Their first move will be to snatch small cloth bags
from their belts (snapping the fine cords that hold
them to the belts and hold the bags shut), and fling
them at the faces of the rearmost adventurers (DC 12
Dexterity save to avoid; a hit does 1 hp damage and
causes the bag to burst—a miss means the bag hits the
back wall of the room, and bursts. In either case, fine
oiled metal marbles (modern real-world ball bearings)
scatter everywhere, so adventurers must make a DC
16 Dexterity save to successfully move anywhere
without falling prone, or successfully launch any
weapon attack. This effect lasts for the entire combat.
The two guardians, Bordag and Larrak, must also
make saves, but have practiced fighting on rooms full
of metal marbles underfoot, so after their initial attack
(no checks needed for them, because no marbles have
reached where their running feet are), they make their
Dexterity saves at DC 11.
The adventurers must fight these two members of
the Dark to the death.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are the recommendations for adjusting these combat
encounters. They are not cumulative.
 Very Weak Party: Bordag AC 12 HP 90; Larrak AC 13 HP 70.
 Weak Party: Bordag AC 13 HP 105; Larrak AC14 80.
 Strong Party: Bordag AC 15 HP 140; Larrak AC 16 HP 95.
 Very Strong Party: Bordag AC 16 HP 150; Larrak AC 17 HP
105.
The prisoners are five of the six paying passengers
from the Elviir’s Kraeken. If they survive the battle,
they will gratefully and eagerly tell the adventurers
that “the woman who brings the food took the
Harper!” and point out where the gate onward (and
out, into the next adventure) is: the back left corner of
the room, just past two cheerful blue-flower-pattern
china chamber pots, with a handy pile of leaves.
The prisoners are all commoners, all unarmed and
without any tools, coins, or useful items, and they all
smell (unwashed). They are:
 A red-haired, fat, middle-aged woman, cheerfully
worldly, profane, and sarcastic: Althlea (“All-THLEE-
ah”) Shrukhand, a wealthy widow from Hillsfar who
owns a weaving business and always expects the
worst to happen—but is sneakily enjoying this
adventure.
Skulljaw Hill 12
  A black-bearded, tired-looking man (bags under his life. His name is Elondrar Nuthshine, and his name is
eyes), balding and thin (ribs can be seen): about all he owns.
Dondevvur Mrellar, a dealer in armor and shields
from Selgaunt who was on a trip around the The first three prisoners listed above may offer the
Moonsea to check on buyers who have been adventurers rewards, or try to hire them as escorts
“shorting” him in payments. He’s a depressed home.
pessimist who no longer expects to survive this trip.
If he does, he’ll never leave the safety of Selgaunt So ends Adventure Two.
again, he vows.
 A short, brown-haired, sickly-looking, hook-nosed,
freckled, and curly-haired man from Westgate who
gives his name as Alagondrur Maedel. His forearms
are covered with curling dragon tattoos that he’ll
pass off as “youthful indiscretions” but that look
both sinister and magical, and he’ll claim to be an
apothecary in training. He’s actually a poisoner
fleeing from captivity in the Moonsea, after he was
taken captive when his employer, the slaver Turuth
“Hammerhand,” was killed by a rival; Maedel, whose
real name is Lakrabar Dorth, managed to combine
some wines and perfumes into an acid to eat
through his manacles, got free, and has straggled his
way south, picking up clothes and coins by killing
along the way. He wants to get to Cormyr, change his
name, and “disappear” into a new life. No character
should turn their back on him and expect not to get
robbed—or worse.
 A big, burly man with a jutting lower jaw, brutish
features (brow ridge, flat nose), and near tusks of
lower teeth—in other words, some orc blood in his
past—named Gruth Immiltar, who has massive,
hairy forearms, and obviously broken upper arms
that are bruised, distorted, and leave him in
helpless, shuddering agony when he moves the
wrong way or knocks them against anything. He’s a
former miner who tried to steal some tradebars of
smelted silver, got caught and beaten almost to
death, and then flung into a midden-pit—where he
found the body of a murdered man with a purse of
coins, which he used to buy passage on the Kraeken
to get well away from Phlan. If someone will heal
him or pay for his healing, he’ll become their firm—
and trustworthy—friend, companion, or even
servant.
 A young half-elven male whose face is almost hidden
behind a tangled fall of inky-black hair. He says
almost nothing, and whispers when he does talk,
and his body is an ugly wreckage of many-times-
broken (and improperly set) bones. An escaped
slave (from Telos), he stole coins and food to make
his way south to Phlan and buy passage to get to the
Elven Court, where he hoped to convince someone
to take him in as a servant, so he could start a new

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Skulljaw Hill 13
 Rewards
Make sure note their rewards on their adventure log Treasure Awards
sheets. Give your name and DCI number (if applicable) Item Name GP Value
so players can record who ran the session.
Bordag’s Treasure 475
Experience Larrak’s Treasure 525

Total up all combat experience earned for defeated

foes, and divide by the number of characters present +1 Battle Axe
in the combat. For non-combat experience, the A description of this item can be found in the Dungeon
rewards are listed per character. Give all characters in Master's Guide.
the party non-combat experience awards unless
otherwise noted. Renown
All faction members earn one renown point for
Combat Awards participating in this adventure.
Name of Foe XP Per Foe
Ehrendil 3900 Downtime
Grick Alpha 2900
Stone Golem 5900 Each character receives 5 downtime days at the
Bordag 1800 conclusion of this adventure.
Larrak 450

The minimum total award for each character DM Rewards

participating in this adventure is 2,500 experience
You receive 450 XP, 225 gp and 5 downtime days for
points.
running this session.
The maximum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 3,500 experience
points.

Treasure
The characters receive the following treasure, divided
up amongst the party. Characters should attempt to
divide treasure evenly whenever possible. Gold piece
values listed for sellable gear are calculated at their
selling price, not their purchase price.
Consumable magic items should be divided up
however the group sees fit. If more than one character
is interested in a specific consumable magic item, the
DM can determine who gets it randomly should the
group be unable to decide.
Permanent magic items are divided according to a
system. See the sidebar if the adventure awards
permanent magic items.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Skulljaw Hill 14
 Appendix: Monster/NPC Claw (Tiger or Hybrid Form Only). Melee Weapon Attack:

Statistics
+5 to hit, reach 5ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d8+3) slashing
damage.

Dagger (Humanoid or Hybrid Form Only). Melee

Drassauva, Weretiger Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5ft., one target. Hit: 4
Medium humanoid (human, shapechanger) neutral
(1d4+2) piercing damage. Drassauva bears two daggers
Armor Class: 12 (at her belt, and down her left boot) and they are
Hit Points: 120 poisoned, with a tincture of her own making that is
Speed: 30ft. (40ft. in tiger form) equivalent to the poison known as Malice, only acting by
Injury (so, a successful dagger attack deals 1d4+2
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA piercing damage and the wounded target must make a
17 (+3) 15 (+2) 16 (+3) 10 13 (+1) 11 successful DC 15 Constitution saving throw or be blinded
for 1 hour).
Skills: Perception +5, Stealth +4
Damage Immunities: bludgeoning, piercing and slashing
damage from nonmagical weapons that aren’t
silvered.
Senses: darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 15
Languages: Common (can’t speak in tiger form)
Challenge: 4 (1100 XP)

Shapechanger. The weretiger can use its action to

polymorph into a tiger-humanoid hybrid or into a tiger,
or back into its true form, which is humanoid. Its
statistics, other than its size and AC, are the same in each
form. Any equipment it is earing or carrying isn’t
transformed. It reverts to its true form if it dies.

Keen Hearing and Smell. The weretiger has advantage

on Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on hearing or
smell.

Pounce (Tiger or Hybrid Form Only). If the Weretiger

moves at least 15 feet straight toward a creature and
then hits it with a claw attack on the same turn, that
target must succeed on a DC 14 Strength saving throw or
be knocked prone. If the target is prone, the Weretiger
can make one bite attack against it as a bonus action.

Actions
Multiattack (Humanoid of Hybrid Form Only). In
humanoid form, the Weretiger makes two dagger
attacks. In hybrid form, it can attack like a humanoid or
make two claw attacks.
Bite (Tiger or Hybrid Form Only). Melee Weapon Attack:
+5 to hit, reach 5ft., one target. Hit: 8 (1d10+3) piercing
damage. If the target is a humanoid, it must succeed on a
DC 13 Constitution saving throw or be cursed with
weretiger lycanthropy.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Skulljaw Hill 15
 Ehrendil (Assassin) Grick Alpha
Medium humanoid, neutral Large monstrosity, neutral
Armor Class: 15 (studded leather) Armor Class: 18 (natural armor)
Hit Points: 78 Hit Points: 75 (10d10+20)
Speed: 30ft. Speed: 30ft., climb 30ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
11 (+0) 16 (+3) 14 (+2) 13 (+1) 11 (+0) 10 18 (+4) 16 (+3) 15 (+2) 4 (-3) 14 (+2) 9 (-1)

Saving Throws: Dex +7, Int +5
Skills: Acrobatics +7, Deception +4, Perception +4,
Stealth +11
Damage Resistances: poison
Senses: passive Perception 14
Languages: Common, Thieves’ Cant
Challenge: 8 (3900 XP)
Assassinate. During her first turn, Ehrendil has advantage
on attack rolls against any creature that hasn't taken a
turn. Any hit she scores against a surprised creature is a
critical hit.
Evasion. If Ehrendil is subjected to an effect that allows
her to make a Dexterity saving throw to take only half
damage, she instead takes no damage if it succeeds on
the saving throw, and only half damage if it fails.
Damage Resistances: bludgeoning, piercing and slashing
damage from nonmagical weapons.
Senses: darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 12
Languages: ---
Challenge: 7 (2900 XP)
Stone Camouflage. The grick has advantage on Dexterity
(Stealth) checks made to hide in rocky terrain.
Actions
Multiattack. The grick makes two attacks: one with its
tail and one with its tentacles. If it hits with its tentacles,
the grick can make one beak attack against the same
target.
Tail. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 10ft., one
target. Hit: 11 (2d6+4) bludgeoning damage.

Sneak Attack (1/Turn). Ehrendil deals an extra 13 (4d6)
damage when it hits a target with a weapon attack and
has advantage on the attack roll, or when the target is
within 5 feet of an ally of her that isn't incapacitated and
she doesn't have disadvantage on the attack roll.
Tentacles. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 10ft.,
one target. Hit: 22 (4d8+4) slashing damage.
Beak. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 10ft., one
target. Hit: 13 (2d8+4) piercing damage.

Actions
Multiattack. Ehrendil makes two shortsword attacks.

Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft.,

one target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) piercing damage, and the
target must make a DC 15 Constitution saving throw,
taking 24 (7d6) poison damage on a failed save, or half as
much damage on a successful one.

Light Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, range

80/320 ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d8 + 3) piercing damage,
and the target must make a DC 15 Constitution saving
throw, taking 24 (7d6) poison damage on a failed save, or
half as much damage on a successful one

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Skulljaw Hill 16
 Stone Golem STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Large construct, unaligned 11 (+0) 13 (+1) 11 (+0) 9 (-1) 9 (-1) 11 (+0)

Armor Class: 17 (natural armor) Senses: passive Perception 9

Hit Points: 178 (17d10+85) Languages: Common
Speed: 30ft. Challenge: 1/8 (25 XP)

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Actions

22 (+6) 9 (-1) 20 (+5) 3 (-4) 11 (+0) 1 (-5)
Scimitar. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5ft., one
Damage Immunities: poison, psychic; bludgeoning, target. Hit: 4 (1d6+1) slashing damage.
piercing and slashing from nonmagical weapons that
aren’t adamantine. Dagger. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5ft., one
Condition Immunities: charmed, exhaustion, frightened, target. Hit: 3 (1d4+1) piercing damage.
paralyzed, petrified, poisoned.
Senses: darkvision 120ft., passive Perception 10 Stool. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5ft., one
target. Hit: 2 (1d4+1) bludgeoning damage. As an
Languages: understands the languages of its creator but
can’t speak improvised weapon, each blow has a chance of breaking
Challenge: 10 (5900 XP) on a 1-3 on a d8.

Bordag the Bold (Gladiator)

Immutable Form. The golem is immune to any spell or
Medium Humanoid, neutral evil
effect that would alter its form.
Armor Class: 14 (studded leather armor)
Magic Resistance. The golem has advantage of saving Hit Points: 128
throws against spells and other magical effects. Speed: 30ft.

Magic Weapons. The golem’s weapon attacks are STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
magical. 18 (+4) 15 (+2) 16 (+3) 10 (+0) 12 (+1) 15 (+2)

Actions Saving Throws: Str +7, Dex +5, Con +6

Multiattack. The golem makes two slam attacks. Skills: Athletics +10, Intimidation +5
Senses: passive Perception 11
Slam. Melee Weapon Attack: +10 to hit, reach 5ft., one Languages: Common
target. Hit: 19 (3d8+6) bludgeoning damage. Challenge: 5 (1800 XP)

Slow (Recharge 5-6). The golem targets one or more

creatures it can see within 10 feet of it. Each target must
make a DC 17 Wisdom saving throw against this magic.
On a failed save, a target can’t use reactions, its speed is
halved, and it can’t make more than one attack on its
turn. In addition, the target can take either an action or a
bonus action on its turn, not both. These effects last for 1
minute. A target can repeat the saving throw at the end
of each of its turns, ending the effect on itself on a
success.
Dark Guard (Bandit)
Medium Humanoid, neutral evil
Armor Class: 12 (leather armor)
Hit Points: 15
Speed: 30ft.
Brave. Bordag has advantage on saving throws against
being frightened.
Brute. A melee weapon deals one extra die of its damage
when the gladiator hits with it (included in the attack).
Actions
Multiattack. Bordag makes three attacks with his
battleaxe.
Battleaxe. Melee Weapon Attack: +8 to hit, reach 5ft.,
one target. Hit: 13 (2d8+5) slashing damage, or 15
(2d10+5) when used two-handed.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Skulljaw Hill 17
 Larrak (Berserker)
Medium Humanoid, neutral evil
Armor Class: 15 (studded leather armor)
Hit Points: 88
Speed: 30ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA

16 (+3) 12 (+1) 17 (+3) 9 (+1) 11 (+0) 9 (-1)

Senses: passive Perception 10

Languages: Common
Challenge: 2 (450 XP)

Reckless. At the start of its turn, Larrak can gain

advantage on all melee weapon attack rolls during that
turn, but attack rolls against it have advantage until the
start of its next turn.

Actions
Multiattack. Larrak makes two attacks with his scimitar
and one with his dagger, or 2 ranged attacks with his
daggers.
Scimitar. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5ft., one
target. Hit: 6 (1d6+3) slashing damage.

Dagger. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +5 to hit,

reach 5ft. or range 20/60ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d4+3)
piercing damage.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Skulljaw Hill 18
 FACING THE DARK
A captive Harper agent is being held by the criminal gang “Suldran’s Dark” in the depths of the Cormanthor forest.
Only the most stalwart and brave will be able to face this enemy and rescue the imprisoned Harper. Part Three of
the Gamehole Con 2016 adventure arc.

A 2-hour adventure for 5th-10th level characters

Ed Greenwood & Alex Kammer

Adventure Designers
Thomas Valley
Editing and Layout

Adventure Code: DDALGHC-03

Organized Play: Chris Lindsay

D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Mike Mearls, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall, Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks,
Alan Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League,
all other Wizards of the Coast product names, and their respective logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive
likenesses are property of Wizards of the Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America. Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material
or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the express written permission of Wizards of the Coast.

©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31, 2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4
The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Facing the Dark 1
 Introduction
Welcome to “Facing The Dark,” a D&D Expeditions
adventure, part of the official D&D Adventurers
League organized play system and the Gamehole Con
2016 adventure arc. This adventure is designed for
three to seven 5th-10th level characters, and is
optimized for six 7th-level characters. Characters
outside this level range cannot participate in this
adventure. The adventure is set in the Moonsea region
of the Forgotten Realms.
The D&D Adventurers
League
This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of the
D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure, players
track their characters’ experience, treasure, and other
rewards, and can take those characters through other
adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a store
event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a DCI
number. This number is your official Wizards of the
Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have a
number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to use to
create and advance their characters. Players can
continue to play their characters after the storyline
season has finished, possibly participating in a second
or third storyline with those same characters. A
character’s level is the only limitation for adventure
play. A player cannot use a character of a level higher
or lower than the level range of a D&D Adventurers
League adventure.
For more information on playing, running games as
a Dungeon Master, and organizing games for the D&D
Adventurers League, please visit the D&D Adventurers
League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
Preparing the Adventure
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
 Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
 Read through the adventure, taking notes of
anything you’d like to highlight or remind yourself
while running the adventure, such as a way you’d
like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d like to use in
a combat.
 Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
 Gather together any resources you’d like to use to
aid you in running this adventure--such as
notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and battlemaps.
 If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.
Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
 Character name and level
 Character race and class
 Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most common
passive ability check
 Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, and so on
Players that have characters outside the adventure’s
level range cannot participate in the adventure
with those characters. Players with ineligible
characters can make a new 1st-level character or use a
pregenerated character. Players can play an adventure
they previously played or ran as a Dungeon Master,
but not with the same character.
Ensure that each player has an official adventure
logsheet for his or her character (if not, get one from
the organizer). The player fills out the adventure
name, session number, date, and your name and DCI
number. In addition, the player also fills in the starting
values for experience, gold, downtime, renown, and
number of permanent magic items. He or she fill in the
Facing the Dark 2
 other values and write notes at the conclusion of the
session. Each player is responsible for maintaining an
accurate logsheet.
If you have time, you can do a quick scan of a
player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing looks
out of order. If you see magic items of very high
rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you can ask
players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict item
use or ask them to use a standard ability score array.
Point players to the D&D Adventurers League Player’s
Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and it’s the
beginning of an adventure or episode, they can declare
their activity and spend the days now. Alternatively,
they can do so at the end of the adventure or episode.
Players should select their characters’ spells and other
daily options prior to the start of the adventure, unless
the adventure specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread
the adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, sidebars provide
information to assist you in making adjustments for
smaller or larger groups and characters of higher or
lower levels than the adventure is optimized for. This
is typically used exclusively for combat encounters.
You may adjust the adventure beyond the guidelines
given in the adventure, or for other reasons. For
example, if you’re playing with a group of
inexperienced players, you might want to make the
adventure a little easier; for very experienced players,
you might want to make it a little harder. Therefore,
five categories of party strength have been created for
you to use as a guide. Use these as a guide, and feel
free to use a different adjustment during the
adventure if the recommended party strength feels off
for the group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of seven
5th to 10th level characters. To figure out whether
you need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
 Add up the total levels of all the characters
 Divide the total by the number of characters
 Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round fractions
of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
Determining Party Strength
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very weak
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very strong
Average party strength indicates no recommended
adjustments to the adventure. Each sidebar may or
may not offer suggestions for certain party strengths.
If a particular recommendation is not offered for your
group, you don’t have to make adjustments.
Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment of
the game for the players. You help guide the narrative
and bring the words on these pages to life. The
outcome of a fun game session often creates stories
that live well beyond the play at the table. Always
follow this golden rule when you DM for a group:
Make decisions and adjudications that enhance the
fun of the adventure when possible.
To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
 You are empowered to make adjustments to the
adventure and make decisions about how the group
interacts with the world of this adventure. Doing so
is especially important and applicable outside of
combat, but feel free to adjust the adventure for
groups that are having too easy or too hard of a
time.
 Don’t make the adventure too easy or too difficult
for a group. Never being challenged makes for a
boring game and being overwhelmed makes for a
frustrating one. Gauge the experience of the players
(not the characters) with the game, try to feel out
(or ask) what they like in a game, and attempt to
give each of them the experience they’re after when
they play D&D. Give everyone a chance to shine.
 Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game session
moving along appropriately. Watch for stalling, since
play loses momentum when this happens. At the
same time, make sure that the players don’t finish
Facing the Dark 3
 too early; provide them with a full play experience. Spell services generally available include healing
Try to be aware of running long or short. Adjust the and recovery spells, as well as information-gathering
pacing accordingly spells. Other spell services might be available as
 Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free to specified in the adventure. The number of spells
modify the text as you see fit, especially when available to be cast as a service is limited to a
dialogue is present. maximum of three per day total, unless otherwise
 Give the players appropriate hints so they can make noted.
informed choices about how to proceed. Players
should be given clues and hints when appropriate so SPELLCASTING SERVICES
they can tackle puzzles, combat, and interactions Spell Cost
without getting frustrated over lack of information. Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
Doing so helps to encourage immersion in the Identify 20 gp
adventure and gives players “little victories” for Lesser restoration 40 gp
figuring out good choices from clues. Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
In short, being the DM isn’t about following the Remove curse 90 gp
adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about facilitating Speak with dead 90 gp
a fun, challenging game environment for the players. Divination 210 gp
The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has more information on Greater restoration 450 gp
the art of running a D&D game. Raise dead 1,250 gp

Downtime and Lifestyle Acolyte Background

At the beginning of each play session, players must A character possessing the acolyte background requesting
declare whether or not they are spending any days of spellcasting services at a temple of his or her faith may request
downtime. The player records the downtime spent on one spell per day from the Spellcasting Services table for free.
the adventure logsheet. The following options are The only cost paid for the spell is the base price for the
available to players during downtime (see the D&D consumed material component, if any.
basic rules or the D&D Adventurers League Player’s
Guide for more information): Character Disease, Death, and
 Catching up Recovery
 Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
commit to crafting a single item)
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might not
 Practicing a profession
have the same characters return from session to
 Recuperating session, here are the rules when bad things happen to
 Spellcasting services (end of the adventure only) characters.
 Training
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating
Other downtime options might be available during
adventures or unlocked through play, including
Effects
A character still affected by diseases, poisons, and
faction-specific activities.
other similar effects at the conclusion of an adventure
In addition, whenever a character spends downtime
can spend downtime days recuperating until such time
days, that character also spends the requisite expense
as he or she resolves the effect to its conclusion (see
for his or her lifestyle. Costs are per day, so a character
the recuperating activity in the D&D Basic Rules).
that spends ten days of downtime also spends ten days
If a character doesn’t resolve the effect between
of expenses maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some
sessions, that character begins the next session still
downtime activities help with lifestyle expenses or add
affected by the debilitating effect.
lifestyle expenses.

Spellcasting Services Death

A character who is killed during the course of the
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can provide adventure has a few options at the end of the session
some spellcasting services. Characters need to be able (or whenever arriving back in civilization) if no one in
to travel to the settlement to obtain these services. the adventuring party has immediate access to a raise
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Facing the Dark 4
 Adventure Background
dead or revivify spell, or similar magic. A character
subject to a raise dead spell is affected negatively until
all long rests have been completed during an The adventurers are still trying to find and rescue the
adventure. Alternatively, each downtime day spent missing Harper agent, Tharaera, who has been
after raise dead reduces the penalty to attack rolls, kidnapped by the criminal band, Suldran’s Dark. In the
saving throws, and ability checks by 1, in addition to previous adventure, “Skulljaw Hill,” they followed
any other benefits the downtime activity might Drassauva, proprietress of the Den of Delights festhall
provide. in Elventree, to an old elfhold in the forest that is now
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead a lair of the Dark. There they rescued other captives,
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any of the but discovered that Drassauva had taken Tharaera on
other options, the player creates a new character. The to another hiding-place. The party must find and
new character does not have any items or rewards rescue her, despite not knowing that “Lady Drassauva”
possessed by the dead character. is a weretiger.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing any
vital organs and is mostly whole) and the player would
like the character to be returned to life, the party can
take the body back to civilization and use the dead
character’s funds to pay for a raise dead spell. A raise
dead spell cast in this manner costs the character
1,250 gp.
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As above,
except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for the raise
dead spell is paid for by the party at the end of the
session. Other characters are under no obligation to
spend their funds to bring back a dead party member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to 4
and a member of a faction, the dead character’s body
can be returned to civilization and a patron from the
faction ensures that he or she receives a raise dead
spell. However, any character invoking this charity
forfeits all experience and rewards from that session
(both those earned prior to and after death during that
session) and cannot replay that episode or adventure
with that character again. Once a character reaches
5th level, this option is no longer available.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Facing the Dark 5
 Part 1: Gone But Not
Without A Trace
This adventure begins in the forest, immediately after
the events of Skulljaw Hill (DDALGHC-02), with the
adventurers having used the last gate to emerge from
the elfhold. They likely brought the prisoners with
them, but their passage through the last gate was a
shuddering, tingling, blindingly golden moment quite
different from all of their earlier gate journeys, and it
has left them in the peak of health (restored to full hit
points, with all weariness and any poison effects or
lasting injuries—such as lopped-off fingers—wiped
away). No spells have been restored, but they face no
immediate threat, and can, if they want to, rest right
on the spot and ready themselves magically and make
plans before they rush off into danger again.
Fortunately, it is a short walk back to Elventree so
giving the rescued prisoners directions to town is easy
and gratefully received.
The Dark guards the adventurers just defeated, Bordag
and Larrak, told them nothing of the Dark’s plans,
members, or other lairs. The prisoners know almost
nothing about the Dark’s plans, but do know that there
are other “lairs” of the Dark nearby but “deeper in the
forest,” and that the Dark scares away woodcutters
and mushroom-pickers and curious explorers from
Elventree with something called “the Bone Trail,” a
route through the woods marked by human skeletons
left on display. It is “guarded” (by what, they don’t
know) and leads somewhere important to the Dark.
And sure enough, something bony is visible through
the trees from where the adventurers are right now:
You catch sight of something macabre adorning the hut-sized
trunk of a massive shadowtop tree deeper into the forest: a
bare-bones human skeleton that has been affixed to the tree
upright and more or less intact, by driving metal spikes into the
tree and bending them over the bones to form crude staples.
The skull grins at you endlessly, its jaw held up on a spike.
Peering past it, you can see another skeleton stapled to a
distant duskwood. And beyond that, something that’s probably
a third set of bones.
You have found the Bone Trail.
A very faint trail through the woods can be seen,
running from skeleton-tree to skeleton-tree. The forest
is quiet and seemingly devoid of life larger than the
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
occasional flitting bird or small, furry, scuttling thing.
It’s all very beautiful and peaceful.
Wise adventurers will trust none of this.
If and only if a character tries to examine one of the
spiked skeletons close up (and discover they are
human skeletons, neither animated nor undead), that
character should make a DC 17 Dexterity save; if
failed, a large (20 feet x 30 feet) section of forest floor
between the skeleton-tree roots will collapse under
their feet, spilling them into a waiting pit trap. If a
player says their character is looking for anything
suspicious or amiss underfoot, allow a Perception DC
17 to spot, and if successful, and they proceed anyway,
modify their Dexterity save down to DC 13 to escape.
The pit is 30 feet deep and its bottom is lined with a vicious
array of fire-hardened wooden spikes (10 (3d6) bludgeoning
damage plus 11 (2d10) piercing damage).
If no character approaches the skeletons closely (gets
near to the trees they are stapled to), they will avoid
these pit traps entirely.
The Bone Trail
If the adventurers proceed deeper into the forest
following the marked route of human skeletons
impaled on tree-trunks, they’ll soon encounter some
starving and ravenous caged guardian monsters
(released from vine-cloaked, well-concealed cages by
the adventurers striking hidden tripwires as they
walk; the tripwires open multiple cages at a time, so
the adventurers will face combinations of monsters
coming at them from different directions). The
tripwires are extremely well hidden making it
virtually impossible for any of the adventurers to
detect them without a dedicated search. Only a party
member with a passive perception score of 25 or
higher will spot them. After the first wave of creatures
are released, the characters may actively search as
they proceed looking for some sort of trigger
mechanism. If so, either a successful DC 23
Investigation or Perception check will reveal these
tripwires (if they are found, tripwires are easily
avoided).
These beasts were caged here by senior members of
the Dark, who will be alerted by small chiming bells in
their nearby underground lair that particular cages
have been opened, and will emerge to watch (from
afar, behind cover) to see what intruders are
approaching the lair.
The first monster encounter is with a grick alpha
and three lizardfolk.
Facing the Dark 6
 Adjusting the Encounter
Here are the recommendations for adjusting these combat
encounters. They are not cumulative.
 Very Weak Party: Remove grick alpha and lizardfolk; replace
with a grick.
 Weak Party: Remove lizardfolk.
 Strong Party: Remove lizardfolk; replace with owlbear.
 Very Strong Party: Add second grick alpha.
The second monster onslaught comes from a troll and
an ogre.

Adjusting the Encounter

Here are the recommendations for adjusting these combat
encounters. They are not cumulative.
 Very Weak Party: Remove the ogre
 Weak Party: Remove the ogre; replace with giant boar
 Strong Party: Remove ogre ; replace with couatl.
 Very Strong Party: Remove ogre; add second troll.

The third monster encounter is with a gorgon and an

owlbear.

Adjusting the Encounter

Here are the recommendations for adjusting these combat
encounters. They are not cumulative.
 Very Weak Party: Remove owlbear.
 Weak Party: Remove gorgon; replace with second owlbear.
 Strong Party: Remove owlbear; replace with ettin.
 Very Strong Party: Remove Owlbear; add second gorgon.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Facing the Dark 7
 Part 2: The Old Tower
After the escaping the hazards of the Bone Trail, the
party encounters a clearing in the forest that the forest
is beginning to reclaim; small saplings are plentiful. In
their midst stands an ancient and overgrown stone
keep: a tower surrounded by a simple wall that has
largely fallen; tumbled stone blocks are strewn
everywhere. The lone tower has been broken open by
duskwoods growing up through it.
After a couple of tense hours on the Bone Trail, you see at last
what appears to be a clearing ahead. As you emerge from the
deeper gloom of the full forest, you see what must have once
been some sort of small stone keep. It seems ancient, and is all
but completely overgrown. Blocks of some unfamiliar sort of
mottled black stone jut here and there out of the undergrowth,
almost certainly once part of the keep. The only portion of the
keep still standing is a small tower some twenty feet tall.
However, “standing” seems to be its temporary condition, for
the ruin looks like it could lose its battle with gravity at any
moment. It remains upright seemingly due to a large duskwood
that has grown right up through the middle of it, so what’s left
of the tower looks like a shabby suit of armor for the tree.
As you take in the scene, you notice a faint trail threading
through and around the fallen stonework and undergrowth, to
what appears to be a door at the base of the tower.
Nothing will menace the party as they approach the
tower. Despite its decrepit appearance, the door to the
tower seems to be intact. It is a heavy wooden
ironbound door that while heavily rusted and
weathered, appears quite functional. Listening at the
door will reveal nothing beyond the ordinary small
sounds of nature, coming from all around.
The door has a lock, but proves to be unlocked. Once
the door is opened, the adventurers will see a splendid
view of the roots and base of the flourishing duskwood
tree. Tall grasses and creeping vines are plentiful, as
the interior of the keep has long been open to the sky,
and they form a thick, undisturbed tangle, except
where a scrap of surviving board floor has thus far
resisted their incursions. Set into the middle of this
remnant of floor is a 4-foot-square trapdoor of fairly
recent construction.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
The trapdoor seems to be of ash, cross-banded in stout-looking
oak, and sports a large iron ring opposite a set of well-
lubricated hinges. Beyond the floor, the duskwood soars to the
sky, letting in only dappled light. You see nothing up there that
isn’t part of wild nature; any upper floors or other features of
the tower have long since succumbed to history. All is quiet.
The trapdoor is heavy but any character can lift it; it
moves easily and quietly, revealing a stone-lined shaft,
with a ladder of hand- and footholds worked into all of
the four stone walls. The shaft descends only twenty
feet, then opens out into a dark, stone-floored space.
Main Cellar
The main cellar room seems to be a thirty-foot-square
room, dank and smelling strongly of earth, with a
flagstone floor and a stone tile-and-massive beam
ceiling. “Seems to be” because the north and south
walls (the shaft descends the south wall) are bare
stone, but the east and west walls are made up of
heavy, opaque curtains that look like black sails from a
ship (i.e. oiled canvas, which is what they are).
So the real dimensions of this room are thirty feet
north to south, and ninety feet east to west (there’s a
thirty-foot-wide section of room behind each curtain).
The curtains aren’t continuous, but rather are
overlapping panels, with a “split” every ten feet that
has a 5-foot overlap. Aside from any light sources the
adventurers kindle or bring along, the room is in
darkness.
The two secret doors in the Main Cellar require a
successful DC 17 perception check to find. From
inside the Prison Room, the nine secret doors require
a DC 15 perception check to discover, but once one is
found the rest are easy to spot.
Waiting behind the east curtain is Drassauva, in her
Tiger form. If the adventurers discover her, she will
spring to the attack. If the adventurers investigate the
west curtain first, she will burst through the curtains
and attack them from behind (she knows how the
curtains are hung, and can readily pull them down to
shroud certain adventurers like a net: treat like a net
trap (adventurers caught under a curtain are
restrained if failing a DC 15 Dexterity save, and
knocked prone). Trapped adventurers can use an
action to make a DC 10 Strength check to free
themselves or another within-reach creature. A
curtain panel is AC 11 and has 18 hp (dealing the net 5
hp of slashing damage destroys a 5-foot-square
section, freeing anyone in that section).
Facing the Dark 8

Drassauva will fight adventurers in tiger form; if
sorely wounded, she will escape through a secret door
in the back wall of “her” section of curtained-off main
cellar, bar it to give herself time (DC 18 strength check
to force), drink a potion of supreme healing (restoring
10d4+20 lost hp) waiting in the room beyond, change
to human form there, use a disguise self spell (on a
scroll, cached there with the potion) to take on the
likeness of Tharaera, and rush along a passage that
goes around the main cellar, to the prison room
located beyond the west side of the main cellar
(reached through a secret door in the back wall of that
curtained-off section of cellar), where she will sit
down and act dejected, pretending to be Tharaera.
If the adventurers rescue her, the bandits (hiding
behind secret doors all around the prison room) will
rush out to attack the adventurers—and Drassauva
will attack adventurers at the same time.
If the adventurers don’t believe Drassauva is
Tharaera, and say so or reveal their disbelief by their
actions, Drassauva will cry out a signal, and the
bandits will rush out and attack.
Rothtor is a bandit captain and the six thugs are
Culdur, Draeven, Hothrun, Ingrar, Morvarr, and
Torsk.
Rothtor wants any adventurers who look like spell casters
killed as fast as possible, and then wants one character
captured alive for interrogation (who hired them? What’s their
business here, hunting members of the Dark?). Otherwise, they
will fight to the death.
Treasure – Rothtor carries 3 amethysts in his belt
pouch along with 100gp. The thugs carry a total of
300gp on them. Finally, there is Drassauva’s +1 Ring of
Protection.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are the recommendations for adjusting these combat
encounters. They are not cumulative.
 Very Weak Party: Remove the bandit captain
 Weak Party: Remove three of the bandits
 Strong Party: Remove the six bandits and add two additional
bandit captains.
 Very Strong Party: Remove bandit captain; replace with a
gladiator.
The real Tharaera is bound, gagged, and locked in a
room behind one of the secret doors opening into the
prison room (if still alive, the bandit captain Rothtor is
standing guard over her). At the back of this room is a
gate: a whirling, visible upright blue-white glowing
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only.
whorl of swirling light. It’s a one-way exit back to
Elventree, specifically to Drassauva’s bedchamber in
the Den of Delights, where Ehrendil awaits (no matter
what the adventurers may have done to her in
Skulljaw Hill, she’s whole and unharmed), behind a
line of twenty armed and armored thugs, who are all
holding loaded, ready heavy crossbows aimed at the
adventurers.
“If you’re contemplating making trouble,” she tells
the adventurers calmly, “the crossbow bolts are all
poisoned.”
She adds that she can speak for the Dark, being as
she leads it (“Yes, I am the infamous Suldran.”), and
tells the adventurers, “We of the Dark have no desire
to make enemies of Those Who Harp; acquiring a
Harper agent was a simple accident; she and you are
free to depart in peace, if peace you will have. Though I
admit to idle curiosity concerning the fate of
Drassauva . . .”
Ehrendil/Suldran really doesn’t care if the
adventurers killed Drassauva, and really means what
she says: they are free to go, with the rescued Harper.
If the adventurers can’t resist an attack, the
crossbows all loose at once—20 swiftsleep-poisoned
bolts (Swiftsleep (Injury). Creatures subjected to this
blend of three spider venoms must make a DC 17
Constitution saving throw or fall asleep instantly, their
unconsciousness lasting 1 hour unless wounded
awake; mere shaking won’t rouse). Then trapdoors
open in the floor under the adventurers, spilling them
only 2 feet down but onto oil of taggit-poison-tipped
spikes (1d2 piercing damage plus DC 13 Constitution
saving throw or be unconscious for 24 hours), and
more trapdoors open in the ceiling above them,
showering them with some 200 oil of taggit-coated
stones (for each stone that hits a character, 1 point of
bludgeoning damage plus DC 13 Constitution saving
throw or be unconscious for 24 hours).
As a result of this “overkill onslaught,” the
adventurers all sink into oblivion.
Only to awaken, a day later, unharmed and with all
their gear—and an unbound and intact Tharaera—in a
ditch beside the coast road, half a day’s ride toward
Hillsfar from Elventree. They can then continue to
Hillsfar and arrive at the Cloverwall Roadhouse to
collect the balance of their reward from Furjur (50 gp
each).
So ends Adventure Three.
Facing the Dark 9
 Rewards
Make sure note their rewards on their adventure log Treasure Awards
sheets. Give your name and DCI number (if applicable) Item Name GP Value
so players can record who ran the session.
Rothtor’s Treasure 500
Experience Thug’s Treasure
Furjur
300
50/each
Total up all combat experience earned for defeated
foes, and divide by the number of characters present
in the combat. For non-combat experience, the
+1 Ring of Protection
rewards are listed per character. Give all characters in A description of this item can be found in the Dungeon
the party non-combat experience awards unless Master's Guide.
otherwise noted.
Renown
Combat Awards All faction members earn one renown point for
participating in this adventure.
Name of Foe XP Per Foe
Grick Alpha 2900
Lizardfolk 300 Downtime
Troll 1800
Ogre 450 Each character receives 5 downtime days at the
Gorgon 1800 conclusion of this adventure.
Owlbear 700
Drassauva 2300
Rothtor 450 DM Rewards
Thugs 600
You receive 450 XP, 225 gp and 5 downtime days for
The minimum total award for each character running this session.
participating in this adventure is 2,000 experience
points.

The maximum total award for each character

participating in this adventure is 3,000 experience
points.

Treasure
The characters receive the following treasure, divided
up amongst the party. Characters should attempt to
divide treasure evenly whenever possible. Gold piece
values listed for sellable gear are calculated at their
selling price, not their purchase price.
Consumable magic items should be divided up
however the group sees fit. If more than one character
is interested in a specific consumable magic item, the
DM can determine who gets it randomly should the
group be unable to decide.
Permanent magic items are divided according to a
system. See the sidebar if the adventure awards
permanent magic items.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Facing the Dark 10
 Appendix: Monster/NPC Claw (Tiger or Hybrid Form Only). Melee Weapon Attack:

Statistics
+5 to hit, reach 5ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d8+3) slashing
damage.

Dagger (Humanoid or Hybrid Form Only). Melee

Drassauva, Weretiger Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5ft., one target. Hit: 4
Medium humanoid (human, shapechanger) neutral
(1d4+2) piercing damage. Drassauva bears two daggers
Armor Class: 12 (at her belt, and down her left boot) and they are
Hit Points: 120 poisoned, with a tincture of her own making that is
Speed: 30ft. (40ft. in tiger form) equivalent to the poison known as Malice, only acting by
Injury (so, a successful dagger attack deals 1d4+2
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA piercing damage and the wounded target must make a
17 (+3) 15 (+2) 16 (+3) 10 13 (+1) 11 successful DC 15 Constitution saving throw or be blinded
for 1 hour).
Skills: Perception +5, Stealth +4
Damage Immunities: bludgeoning, piercing and slashing
damage from nonmagical weapons that aren’t
silvered.
Senses: darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 15
Languages: Common (can’t speak in tiger form)

Shapechanger. The weretiger can use its action to

polymorph into a tiger-humanoid hybrid or into a tiger,
or back into its true form, which is humanoid. Its
statistics, other than its size and AC, are the same in each
form. Any equipment it is earing or carrying isn’t
transformed. It reverts to its true form if it dies.

Keen Hearing and Smell. The weretiger has advantage

on Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on hearing or
smell.

Pounce (Tiger or Hybrid Form Only). If the Weretiger

moves at least 15 feet straight toward a creature and
then hits it with a claw attack on the same turn, that
target must succeed on a DC 14 Strength saving throw or
be knocked prone. If the target is prone, the Weretiger
can make one bite attack against it as a bonus action.

Actions
Multiattack (Humanoid of Hybrid Form Only). In
humanoid form, the Weretiger makes two dagger
attacks. In hybrid form, it can attack like a humanoid or
make two claw attacks.
Bite (Tiger or Hybrid Form Only). Melee Weapon Attack:
+5 to hit, reach 5ft., one target. Hit: 8 (1d10+3) piercing
damage. If the target is a humanoid, it must succeed on a
DC 13 Constitution saving throw or be cursed with
weretiger lycanthropy.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Facing the Dark 11
 Ehrendil (Assassin) Grick Alpha
Medium humanoid, neutral Large monstrosity, neutral
Armor Class: 15 (studded leather) Armor Class: 18 (natural armor)
Hit Points: 78 Hit Points: 75 (10d10+20)
Speed: 30ft. Speed: 30ft., climb 30ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
11 (+0) 16 (+3) 14 (+2) 13 (+1) 11 (+0) 10 18 (+4) 16 (+3) 15 (+2) 4 (-3) 14 (+2) 9 (-1)

Saving Throws: Dex +7, Int +5 Damage Resistances: bludgeoning, piercing and slashing
Skills: Acrobatics +7, Deception +4, Perception +4, damage from nonmagical weapons.
Stealth +11 Senses: darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 12
Damage Resistances: poison Languages: ---
Senses: passive Perception 14
Languages: Common, Thieves’ Cant
Stone Camouflage. The grick has advantage on Dexterity
Challenge: 8 (3900 XP)
(Stealth) checks made to hide in rocky terrain.

Assassinate. During her first turn, Ehrendil has advantage

on attack rolls against any creature that hasn't taken a
turn. Any hit she scores against a surprised creature is a
critical hit.
Evasion. If Ehrendil is subjected to an effect that allows
her to make a Dexterity saving throw to take only half
damage, she instead takes no damage if it succeeds on
the saving throw, and only half damage if it fails.
Actions
Multiattack. The grick makes two attacks: one with its
tail and one with its tentacles. If it hits with its tentacles,
the grick can make one beak attack against the same
target.
Tail. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 10ft., one
target. Hit: 11 (2d6+4) bludgeoning damage.

Sneak Attack (1/Turn). Ehrendil deals an extra 13 (4d6)
damage when it hits a target with a weapon attack and
has advantage on the attack roll, or when the target is
within 5 feet of an ally of her that isn't incapacitated and
she doesn't have disadvantage on the attack roll.
Tentacles. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 10ft.,
one target. Hit: 22 (4d8+4) slashing damage.
Beak. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 10ft., one
target. Hit: 13 (2d8+4) piercing damage.

Actions
Lizardfolk
Multiattack. Ehrendil makes two shortsword attacks. Medium humanoid (lizardfolk), neutral

Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft., Armor Class: 15 (natural armor, shield)
one target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) piercing damage, and the Hit Points: 22
target must make a DC 15 Constitution saving throw, Speed: 30ft., swim 30ft.
taking 24 (7d6) poison damage on a failed save, or half as
much damage on a successful one. STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
15 (+2) 10 (+0) 13 (+1) 7 (-2) 12 (+1) 7 (-2)
Light Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, range
80/320 ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d8 + 3) piercing damage, Skills: Perception +3, Stealth +4, Survival +5
and the target must make a DC 15 Constitution saving Senses: passive Perception 13
throw, taking 24 (7d6) poison damage on a failed save, or Languages: Draconic
half as much damage on a successful one

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Facing the Dark 12
 Actions Ogre
Multiattack. The lizardfolk makes two melee attacks, Large giant, chaotic evil
each one with a different weapon. Armor Class: 11 (natural armor)
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5ft., one Hit Points: 59
target. Hit: 5 (1d6+2) piercing damage. Speed: 40ft.

Heavy Club. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5ft., STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
one target. Hit: 5 (1d6+2) bludgeoning damage. 19 (+4) 8 (-1) 16 (+3) 5 (-3) 7 (-2) 7 (-2)

Javelin. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5ft. or
range 30/120ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6+2) piercing
damage.
Spiked Shield. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach
5ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6+2) piercing damage.
Senses: darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 8
Languages: Common, Giant
Actions
Greatclub. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5ft.,
one target. Hit: 13 (2d8+4) bludgeoning damage.

Troll Claw. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5ft., one

Large giant, chaotic evil target. Hit: 11 (2d6+4) slashing damage.

Armor Class: 15 (natural armor) Javelin. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5ft. or
Hit Points: 84 range 30/120ft., one target. Hit: 11 (2d6+4) piercing
Speed: 30ft. damage.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA

Gorgon
18 (+4) 13 (+1) 20 (+5) 7 (-2) 9 (-1) 7 (-2)
Large monstrosity, unaligned
Skills: Perception +1 Armor Class: 19 (natural armor)
Senses: darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 11 Hit Points: 114
Languages: Giant Speed: 40ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA

Keen Smell. The troll has advantage on Wisdom
20 (+5) 11 (+0) 18 (+4) 2 (-4) 12 (+1) 7 (-2)
(Perception) checks that rely on smell.
Skills: Perception +4
Regeneration. The troll regains 10 hit points at the start
Condition immunities: petrified
of its turn. If the troll takes acid or fire damage, this trait
Senses: darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 14
doesn't function at the start of the troll's next turn. The
Languages: ----
troll dies only if it starts its turn with 0 hit points and
doesn't regenerate.
Trampling Charge. If the gorgon moves at least 20 feet
Actions straight toward a creature and then hits it with a gore
Multiattack. The troll makes three attacks: one with its attack on the same turn, that target must succeed on a
bite and two with its claws. DC 16 Strength saving throw or be knocked prone. If the
target is prone, the gorgon can make one attack with its
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5ft., one hooves against it as a bonus action.
target. Hit: 7 (1d6+4) piercing damage.
Actions
Claw. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5ft., one
Gore. Melee Weapon Attack: +8 to hit, reach 5ft., one
target. Hit: 11 (2d6+4) slashing damage.
target. Hit: 18 (2d12+5) piercing damage.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Facing the Dark 13
 Hooves. Melee Weapon Attack: +8 to hit, reach 5ft., one Languages: Common
target. Hit: 16 (2d10+5) bludgeoning damage.
Actions
Petrifying Breath (Recharge 5-6). The gorgon exhales Scimitar. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5ft., one
petrifying gas in a 30-foot cone. Each creature in that target. Hit: 4 (1d6+1) slashing damage.
area must succeed on a DC 13 Constitution saving throw.
On a failed save, a target begins to turn to stone and is Light Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, range
restrained. The restrained target must repeat the saving 80/320ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d8+1) piercing damage.
throw at the end of its next turn. On a success, the effect
ends on the target. On a failure, the target is petrified
until freed by the greater restoration spell or other Bandit Captain
magic. Medium humanoid, chaotic evil
Armor Class: 15 (leather armor)
Owlbear Hit Points: 65
Large monstrosity, unaligned Speed: 30ft.
Armor Class: 13 (natural armor)
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Hit Points: 59
15 (+2) 16 (+3) 14 (+2) 14 (+2) 11 (+0) 14 (+2)
Speed: 40ft.
Saving Throws: Str +4, Dex +5, Wis +2
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Skills: Athletics +4, Deception +4
20 (+5) 12 (+1) 17 (+3) 3 (-4) 12 (+1) 7 (-2)
Senses: passive Perception 10
Languages: Common
Skills: Perception +3
Senses: darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 13 Actions
Languages: ----
Multiattack. The captain makes three melee attacks: two
with its scimitar and one with its dagger. Or the captain
Keen Sight and Smell. The owl bear has advantage on makes two ranged attacks with its daggers.
Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on sight or smell.
Scimitar. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5ft., one
Actions target. Hit: 6 (1d6+3) slashing damage.
Multiattack. The owl bear makes two attacks: one with
Dagger. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +5 to hit,
its beak and one with its claws.
reach 5ft. or range 20/60ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d4+3)
Beak. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5ft., one piercing damage.
target. Hit: 10 (1d10+5) piercing damage.
Reactions
Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5ft., one Parry. The captain adds 2 to its AC against one melee
target. Hit: 14 (2d8+5) slashing damage. attack that would hit it. To do so, the captain must see
the attacker and be wielding a melee weapon.

Bandit
Medium humanoid, chaotic evil
Armor Class: 12 (leather armor)
Hit Points: 11
Speed: 30ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA

11 (+0) 12 (+1) 12 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0)

Senses: passive Perception 10

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Facing the Dark 14
 Appendix: Maps

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only. Facing the Dark 15
 THE SAGE OF
CORMANTHOR
Adventure Designers
JASON GONDING, ERIC MENGE, BEN HEISLER, AND PAIGE LEITMAN,
WITH AMPLE ASSISTANCE FROM JEREMY ARNOLD, DAVE BRAINARD,
ALBERT DEGENAAR, CALEB FOTH, JIM HARRISON, GINNY LOVEDAY, M.
SEAN MOLLEY, AND KEATON STAMPS.
Adventure Code: ELMW1-1
The grain has rotted in the town of Elmwood, which means people might
starve, businesses and banks might fail, and endanger the town’s already-
precarious existence. Brave adventurers are needed to travel through the
wild forest to seek the advice of the Sage of Cormanthor.
A four-hour adventure for 5th - 10th level characters

Producer: Baldman Games

Core Administrator: Shawn Merwin
Editing and Layout: Encoded Designs
Organized Play: Chris Lindsay
D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall,
Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks, Alan Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster
Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League, all other Wizards of the Coast product names, and their respective
logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive likenesses
are property of Wizards of the Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America.
Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the express written
permission of Wizards of the Coast.
©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31,
2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK.
 100% of the author share of the profits from these adventures
will be given to the following as a charitable donation:

Second Harvest Food Bank of East Tennessee

136 Harvest Lane
Maryville, TN 37801
https://secondharvestetn.org/

Second Harvest Food Bank is the East Tennessee region’s largest hunger-
relief charity; operating programs in 18 counties. The food bank secures and
distributes over 18 million pounds of food and grocery products annually
through a network of over 500 partnering non-profit organizations such as
food pantries, soup kitchens, emergency shelters and schools. This charity
has a near-perfect score on Charity Navigator.

(https://www.charitynavigator.org/index.cfm?bay=search.summary&orgid=5524)

Additionally, the food bank enthusiastically hosts the “Save Versus Hunger”
charity convention each spring, where a lot of D&D gets played.
 INTRODUCTION
Welcome to The Sage of Cormanthor, a D&D Adventurers League
adventure, Part One of the Misaligned Trilogy.

This adventure is designed for three to seven 5th - 10th level characters, and is
optimized for five 8th-level characters. Characters outside this level range cannot participate in
this adventure.
The adventure is set in Elmwood and in The Lost Vale.

The D&D Adventurers League Preparing the Adventure

This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of
the D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure,
players track their characters’ experience, treasure,
and other rewards, and can take those characters
through other adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a
store event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a
DCI number. This number is your official Wizards of
the Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have
a number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to
use to create and advance their characters. Players
can continue to play their characters after the
storyline season has finished, possibly participating
in a second or third storyline with those same
characters. A character’s level is the only limitation
for adventure play. A player cannot use a character
of a level higher or lower than the level range of a
D&D Adventurers League adventure.
For more information on playing, running
games as a Dungeon Master, and organizing games
for the D&D Adventurers League, please visit the
D&D Adventurers League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
• Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
• Read through the adventure, taking notes
of anything you’d like to highlight or remind
yourself while running the adventure, such as a
way you’d like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d
like to use in a combat.
• Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
• Gather together any resources you’d like to
use to aid you in running this adventure--such
as notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and
battlemaps.
• If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.

3 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
• Character name and level
• Character race and class
• Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most
common passive ability check
• Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, etc.)
Players that have characters outside the
adventure’s level range cannot participate in
the adventure with those characters. Players
with ineligible characters can make a new 1st-level
character or use a pregenerated character. Players
can play an adventure they previously played or
ran as a Dungeon Master, but not with the same
character.
Ensure that each player has an official adventure
logsheet for his or her character (if not, get one from
the organizer). The player fills out the adventure
name, session number, date, and your name and
DCI number. In addition, the player also fills in the
starting values for experience, gold, downtime,
renown, and number of permanent magic items. He
or she fill in the other values and write notes at the
conclusion of the session. Each player is responsible
for maintaining an accurate logsheet.
If you have time, you can do a quick scan of
a player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing
looks out of order. If you see magic items of very
high rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you
can ask players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict
item use or ask them to use a standard ability
score array. Point players to the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and
it’s the beginning of an adventure or episode,
they can declare their activity and spend the days
now. Alternatively, they can do so at the end of
the adventure or episode. Players should select
their characters’ spells and other daily options
prior to the start of the adventure, unless the
adventure specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread
the adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
4 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, you may see sidebars
to help make adjustments for smaller/larger
groups, and characters of higher/lower levels than
the optimized group. Most of the time, this is used
for combat encounters.
You may adjust the adventure beyond the
guidelines given. For example, if you’re playing
with a group of inexperienced players, you might
want to make the adventure a little easier; for
very experienced players, you may want to make
it a little harder. Therefore, five categories of
party strength have been created for you to use
as a guide. Feel free to use a different adjustment
during the adventure if the recommended party
strength feels off for the group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of
five 8th-level characters. To figure out whether
you need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
• Add up the total levels of all the characters
• Divide the total by the number of characters
• Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round
fractions of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table:
DETERMINING PARTY STRENGTH
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very Weak
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very Strong
I N T RO D U C T I O N
Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment
of the game for the players. You help guide the
narrative and bring the words on these pages
to life. The outcome of a fun game session often
creates stories that live well beyond the play at the
table. Always follow this golden rule when you DM
for a group:
Make decisions and adjudications that
enhance the fun of the adventure when
possible.
To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
• You are empowered to make adjustments to
the adventure and make decisions about how the
group interacts with the world of this adventure.
Doing so is especially important and applicable
outside of combat, but feel free to adjust the
adventure for groups that are having too easy or
too hard of a time.
• Don’t make the adventure too easy or too
difficult for a group. Never being challenged
makes for a boring game and being
overwhelmed makes for a frustrating one.
Gauge the experience of the players (not the
characters) with the game, try to feel out (or
ask) what they like in a game, and attempt to
give each of them the experience they’re after
when they play D&D. Give everyone a chance to
shine.
• Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game
session moving along appropriately. Watch for
stalling, since play loses momentum when this
happens. At the same time, make sure that the
players don’t finish too early; provide them with
a full play experience. Try to be aware of running
long or short. Adjust the pacing accordingly
• Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free
to modify the text as you see fit, especially when
dialogue is present.
• Give the players appropriate hints so they can
make informed choices about how to proceed.
Players should be given clues and hints when
appropriate so they can tackle puzzles, combat,
and interactions without getting frustrated over
5 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
lack of information. Doing so helps to encourage
immersion in the adventure and gives players
“little victories” for figuring out good choices
from clues.
In short, being the DM isn’t about following
the adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about
facilitating a fun, challenging game environment
for the players. The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has
more information on the art of running a D&D
game.
Downtime and Lifestyle
At the beginning of each play session, players must
declare whether or not they are spending any days
of downtime. The player records the downtime
spent on the adventure logsheet. The following
options are available to players during downtime
(see the D&D basic rules or the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for more information):
• Catching up
• Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
commit to crafting a single item)
• Practicing a profession
• Recuperating
• Spellcasting services
• Training
Other downtime options might be available during
adventures or unlocked through play, including
faction-specific activities.
In addition, whenever a character spends
downtime days, that character also spends the
requisite expense for his or her lifestyle. Costs
are per day, so a character that spends ten days of
downtime also spends ten days of expenses
maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some downtime
activities help with lifestyle expenses or add
lifestyle expenses.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Spellcasting Services
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can
provide some spellcasting services. Characters
need to be able to travel to the settlement to obtain
these services.
Acolyte Background
A character possessing the acolyte
background requesting spellcasting
services at a temple of his or her faith
may request one spell per day from the
Spellcasting Services table for free. The only
cost paid for the spell is the base price for
the consumed material component, if any.
Melvaunt is a large city where any
acolyte can find a friendly shrine or
temple.
Spellcasting Services
Spell Cost
Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
Identify 20 gp
Lesser restoration 40 gp
Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
Remove curse 90 gp
Speak with dead 90 gp
Divination 210 gp
Greater restoration 450 gp
Raise dead 1,250 gp
Spell services generally available include healing
and recovery spells, as well as information-
gathering spells. Other spell services might be
available as specified in the adventure. The number
of spells available to be cast as a service is limited
to a maximum of three per day total, unless
otherwise noted.
6 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
Disease, Death, and Recovery
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might
not have the same characters return from session
to session, here are the rules when bad things
happen to characters.
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating Effects
A character still affected by diseases, poisons,
and other similar effects at the conclusion of an
adventure can spend downtime days recuperating
until such time as he or she resolves the effect to
its conclusion (see the recuperating activity in the
D&D Basic Rules).
If a character doesn’t resolve the effect
between sessions, that character begins the next
session still affected by the debilitating effect.
Death
A character who is killed during the course of
the adventure has a few options at the end of the
session (or whenever arriving back in civilization)
if no one in the adventuring party has immediate
access to a raise dead or revivify spell, or similar
magic. A character subject to a raise dead spell is
affected negatively until all long rests have been
completed during an adventure. Alternatively, each
downtime day spent after raise dead reduces the
penalty to attack rolls, saving throws, and ability
checks by 1, in addition to any other benefits the
downtime activity might provide.
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any
of the other options, the player creates a new
character. The new character does not have any
items or rewards possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing
any vital organs and is mostly whole) and the
player would like the character to be returned to
life, the party can take the body back to civilization
and use the dead character’s funds to pay for a
raise dead spell. A raise dead spell cast in this
manner costs the character 1,250 gp.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As above,
except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for the raise
dead spell is paid for by the party at the end of the
session. Other characters are under no obligation
to spend their funds to bring back a dead party
member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to
4 and a member of a faction, the dead character’s
body can be returned to civilization and a patron
from the faction ensures that he or she receives a
raise dead spell. However, any character invoking
this charity forfeits all experience and rewards
from that session (both those earned prior to and
after death during that session) and cannot replay
that episode or adventure with that character
again. Once a character reaches 5th level, this
option is no longer available.
Elmwood Overview
Though Elmwood has been a peaceful neighbor of
Mulmaster for centuries, the town was destroyed
two years ago by a fire devastation orb that was
mishandled by the Cults of Elemental Evil (DDEX2-
2 Embers of Elmwood). There were few survivors.
Since then it’s been rebuilt and is a home for
many refugees from Phlan, Hillsfar, Mulmaster,
and the Underdark. The little town is growing
as it rebuilds, and is changing rapidly due to the
influence of the refugees.
Adventure Background
Over a thousand years ago, the elves of Myth
Drannor battled the avatar of Moander (an evil
deity of rot, corruption, and destruction) in its last
remaining major temple, located on present-day
Yûlash in the southwestern Moonsea area. The
elves slew the priests of Moander, banished the
Darkbringer, and sealed the essence of its avatar
beneath the ruins. However, Yûlash (and the rest
of the Moonsea) soon found more urgent problems
with the fall of Zhentil Keep, and the threat of the
ancient god was forgotten for more immediate
needs. The ancient god rose up from death only a
few decades ago, and was put down by a band of
brave adventurers in the events of the book Song of
the Saurials.
7 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
Zuggtmoy, the Demon Queen of Fungi, Lady of Rot
and Decay, has been active in Faerûn in the past
few years (given the events of Out of the Abyss).
This has allowed some vestige of the dead deity
Moander to stir in its slumber of death, which has
in turn empowered some of its ancient sites and
mad cult members. In Elmwood, this means that
the town’s grain has been magically contaminated
by the power of Moander so that when it is used
in the upcoming Greengrass festival, it can infect
many people with a rotting sickness that will
turn them into mindless vegetative slaves of the
Darkbringer.
Adventure Overview
The Sage of Cormanthor consists of 6 parts. It is
designed to be run in 4 hours.
Part 1: It’s All About the Beer -The five factions
communicate with the characters that they are
needed in Elmwood. The characters arrive in
Elmwood and learn that the grain has rotted.
Part 2: The Root of the Matter - The Constable,
Aliana Mathnir, and the high priestess of Chauntea,
Shayad, urge the characters to take a sample of
contaminated grain and seek out the reclusive sage
Salazar Bel Akash in Rimwood of the Cormanthor
Forest.
Part 3: The Rimwood - The characters set out into
Cormanthor Forest to seek out Salazar Bel Akash—
grandson of Akabar Bel Akash, an adventurer
who was once possessed by the spirit of Moander.
During their trek, the characters run afoul of
defenses that the elves of Myth Drannor created to
protect against a return by Moander to Toril. The
sample the characters are taking to the Sage has
triggered the defenses.
Part 4: Sage Advice - The characters arrive at the
home of Salazar Bel Akash. Salazar is disturbed by
what the tainted grain sample may portend, but
he is unwilling to make a definitive assessment
without another sample with which to compare it.
He tells the characters to go to the lost Temple of
Moander, to see if any plants in the area bear signs
of new activity or corruption. If the Darkbringer’s
presence is stirring, he asks the characters to bring
back another sample.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Part 5: The Seed of Moander - The characters
search among the ruins of the lost Temple of
Moander and encounter the corrupted plant
servitors of Moander. Upon defeating the creatures,
the characters collect the sample Salazar needs.
Part 6: Sometimes the Abyss Gazes Back at You -
The characters provide the sample of corruption to
Salazar. He confirms that the grain contamination
and the corruption are from the same source
– Moander. Salazar tells the characters that he
is going to attempt a ritual to banish Moander
back to the Astral Plane but that the ritual is very
risky. Salazar advises that if things go poorly, the
characters must go to the Varlaros Stones and
recover a contingency left behind by the wizard
Grypht. (Grypht, like Salazar’s grandfather, is
another individual with ties to Moander.) Salazar
falls prey to the psychic assault of Moander and,
instead of banishing the dead god, opens a portal
to the Astral Plane. The characters have to defeat
the transformed sage, now servitor of Moander,
and must close the portal before it is too late.
Afterwards, they return to Elmwood to inform the
Constable of what has transpired.
Pacing the Adventure
The adventure is designed for 4 hours of play. Use
the table below to budget your time, adjusting the
pace as necessary to keep on schedule. In a large
public event, you’ll need to keep an eye on the
clock.
Playing
Stage Time
Part 1: It’s All About the Beer 30 mins
Part 2: The Root of the Matter 15 mins
Part 3: The Rimwood 45 mins
Part 4: Sage Advice 20 mins
Part 5: The Seed of Moander 60 mins
Part 6: Sometimes the Abyss 60 mins
Gazes Back at You
8 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
Adventure Hooks
It’s all about the Beer. If none of the faction
introductions are suitable, then the characters
have heard that there’s a new brewery in the
Moonsea – Mystic Grove Brewery. Catlin
Littleleaf is the proprietor and the rumor is that
she’s about to uncask some really righteous brews
for the Greengrass Festival. The characters might
be there to sample them personally, or to pick up
a load of beer for interested buyers in a caravan
coming from Phlan or Hillsfar, or a noble house in
Mulmaster.
The Harpers have asked the characters to check
in with Catlin Littleleaf because they’re worried
that Catlin’s problems with the grain supply might
mean the refugees in town won’t have enough food.
The Order of the Gauntlet has asked the
characters to consult with Catlin Littleleaf
because they’re concerned that the rot in the grain
may be supernatural in origin.
The Emerald Enclave have asked the characters
to contact Catlin Littleleaf at Druid Brewing as
a special favor, since the halfling has asked them
directly for help.
The Lords’ Alliance wants characters to check
in with Catlin Littleleaf. They’re supposed to be
exporting her beers soon, and they are anxious to
understand what’s gone wrong with the trade deal.
The Zhentarim are affiliated with Semyon
and Daughters Bank, who owns the mortgage
on Mystic Grove Brewery. They’ve asked the
characters to check in on the brewery because the
mortgage payment is late.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 PART 1. IT’S ALL ABOUT
THE BEER
Expected Duration: 30 minutes.
As the characters enter town, read aloud the
following text.
Elmwood, up from the ashes. It’s common
knowledge around the Moonsea that the
place was burned to the ground a couple
of years ago by one of the Cults of Elemen-
tal Evil that were plaguing Mulmaster. There
were few survivors. You see the evidence of
the great fire all over – there are so many
ashes as part of the soil that the roads are
gray and black. But, for all that, it’s come
back stronger than ever. You hear the ac-
cents of Mulmaster, Phlan, and Hillsfar refu-
gees as you walk down the main street – as
well as the sounds of hammering and sawing
mixing in with the lapping of the waves of the
Moonsea as the rebuilding proceeds. All of
the buildings are painfully new and there are
few trees growing in town at all other than
a dense knot of fire-blackened elms on a
hill on the west side of town. The blue-violet
waters of the Moonsea are a sharp contrast
to the bright green of spring vegetation and
the gray of ashes. The scent of the Moonsea
mixes and mingles on the chilly spring breeze,
but you can always smell burned wood un-
derneath it. At the moment the sweet smell
of honeysuckle blends with roses and garde-
nias. Pure white, shocking pink, and ruby red
flowers overflow from planter boxes and flow-
er beds. Wreaths and garlands decorate the
windows and doorways of every house and
shop as far as the eye can see. Elmwood is
preparing for a spring festival.
General Features
The general features of the Mystic Grove Brewery
are as follows:
Terrain. The brewery has two large buildings
and a modest home sized for little folk. The
buildings are very new.
9 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
Light and Visibility. When the characters
arrive in Elmwood it is late morning. There is fair
visibility in all directions and minimal cloud cover.
The brewery is brightly lit with plenty of glassed-in
skylights.
Sounds. Elmwood is abuzz with activity. People
are talking and going about party preparations.
There is always hammering and sawing
somewhere as the rebuilding continues. The
sounds of the Moonsea waves lapping across the
shore is audible through the main parts of town.
The brewery is quiet other than Catlin’s rant. There
are sounds of fluid moving around in the kettles.
Climate. The temperature is typical for
Tarsakh, the fourth month (40-45 °F, 5-8 °C), with
a gentle cold breeze blowing in from the north
across the Moonsea.
Smell. There is a powerfully terrible smell
in the brewery. It’s got elements of black mold,
rot, and something left too long in the back of the
pantry gone bad.
Read or paraphrase the following when the
characters get close to the brewery.
Mystic Grove Brewery is not hard to find. It’s
a large building and several outbuildings just
south of the Grove of Eldath and near the
Temple of Chauntea. While the grove is qui-
et, the Temple is abuzz with activity.
The brewery is a new building with shiny new
copper boilers. The shingle that hangs by
the door reads, “The Mystic Grove Brewery –
Caitlin Littleleaf, Brewmistress & Proprietor.”
You see a few more people are converging
on the brewery at the same time.
Allow the players to introduce their characters to
each other.
PA RT 1
 When the characters investigate the rant, read the
following:
“Ruined! Another batch ruined! The Moon-
sea Pale Ale has fallen victim to this strange
growth!” You hear a metallic whack and
a string of wicked invective in a variety of
languages.
As you look inside, you see a halfling woman
looking disgustedly at a large kettle.
Even to those who aren’t brewers, it is readily
apparent that something is definitely wrong
with the smell coming from the wert in the
kettle.
Spying you entering her establishment, the
halfling gives you a shrewd, knowing look.
“I bet you’re adventurers. I know the type.”
The woman considers for a moment, tapping
her fingers on her leg. “I tell you what… I’ll
pay you free beer, ales, and cider… FOR LIFE
if you can help me save my brewery. This
Greengrass festival is going to make or break
me and I can’t have cruddy beer for this.
I just can’t. I have a mortgage to pay and
Semyon and Daughters doesn’t take IOUs.”
She tilts her head to the side, considering fur-
ther. “And I’ll even extend the discount past
death in the event you die and are brought
back from the dead. What do you say?”
As you approach, you hear the anguished cries of a
young woman inside.
Roleplaying Catlin
Catlin is a halfling that isn’t at all intimidated
by tall folk. She’s direct and pragmatic. The
typical halfling joviality is absent in her
demeanor, though she’s not rude or mean –
she’s just not bubbly. She is a survivor of the
burning and worried about her business.
Quote: “Oh hey, taste this? It’s the new pale ale.
I think it’s going to be a winner.”
• She’ll pay for the ingredients, of course, she
just needs them to be healthy. The last batch
was rotted, apparently. She does not have any
remaining samples of raw ingredients. She
would go get the ingredients herself, but she
desperately needs to get everything scrubbed
spotless to try to make another batch. She had
to let her help go after the last batch was ruined.
• The priestess of Chauntea is a nice lady named
Shayad. She put a spell on the grain silos to keep
the grain fresh, but maybe it failed?
• Shayad is helped by a priest named Kamik
Felicity. Catlin thinks Kamik is a really nice guy
because he and his partner adopted several of
the children that were orphaned by the Burning
– the explosion of a devastation orb in Elmwood
two years ago.
• The Grove of Eldath just north of here are the
only trees in town because the druids there
protected the grove from the Burning. They
also protected some of the townsfolk, including
Catlin, which is why she calls this the Mystic
Grove Brewery.
Developments
The characters proceed to the Temple of Chauntea
to meet High Priestess.
XP Award
For agreeing to go to the Temple of Chauntea, the
characters get 600 XP.

If the characters agree, Caitlin will tell them that

she bought her most recent batch of ingredients
from the Temple of Chauntea. She asks the
characters to go to the Temple and see what’s up
with the wheat, barley, and hops, and get her some
good clean ingredients. Here’s what she knows:

10 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
PA RT 1
 PART 2. THE ROOT
OF THE MATTER
Expected Duration: 15 minutes.
The characters meet with the Constable and the
High Priestess at the Temple of Chauntea.
General Features
The general features of the Temple of Chauntea are
as follows:
Terrain. The Temple of Chauntea is situated on
a rise near the center of town overlooking the
nearby Temple Gardens.
Light and Visibility. When the characters arrive
the room is well lit by sunny windows.
Climate. The air is cool with a cold breeze blowing
in from the north from the Moonsea.
Shayad and Aliana Mathnir
You are taken to a garden enclosed by a
small privacy fence. In the garden are two
women. One is a half-orc wearing an apron
over a roughspun robe and gloves while she
tends to the plants in a flower bed. She’s
talking in low, concerned tones to a human
woman dressed in plain clothes with the seal
of Elmwood embroidered on her doublet.
At your entry, both look up.
The half-orc rises, dusts the dirt off her hands
and onto her apron, and moves to greet
you.
“Ah… I had heard rumors that there were in-
teresting strangers in town and I thought you
might be heading this way. My name is Sha-
yad and welcome to the temple of Chaunt-
ea.” Her voice is rough, as you’d expect from
a half orc, but her manner is kind and rea-
sonable, and she looks over your group with
wise green eyes.
The human gives Shayad a glance, and
picks up where the priestess left off, introduc-
ing herself.
“I’m Aliana Mathnir, the constable of Elm-
wood. Closest thing you’ll get to mayor,
dogcatcher, purser, garbage collector, and
chief dishwasher in this town. A most serious
problem has presented itself at the worst
possible time. All of the grain the temple has
been storing—all of the wheat, barley, oats,
11
corn, and rice—has turned foul. It doesn’t
seem to matter if it had been freshly harvest-
ed or if it had been stored for quite some
time. All of it now reeks of decay and has
sprouted leafy tendrils.”
Shayad says, “This will ruin the Greengrass
festival, but worse, I fear the town may starve
if we don’t stop this now.”
Aliana continues. “I’m aware,” she says, pick-
ing her words carefully, “that some ‘powerful
groups’ in the Moonsea area have become
interested in our little town and seeing it
prosper for a variety of reasons. While I could
go to Mulmaster and ask for aid, that would
make it look like we’re not going to make
it, and give them more ammunition to try to
take us over as a wholly-owned protectorate
of the city. We’re not interested in having
that happen so I’m very amenable to out-
side assistance. If you’re here to help, then I’ll
disburse some funds to pay you to run a little
errand into the forest to get us some answers
for this particular problem.”
“There is a sage who lives in the Rimwood
of the Cormanthor forest named Salazar
Bel Akash. He is an expert on many unusual
types of plants and animals. Take a sample
of the tainted grain to him, perhaps he will
know what this is. I’ll get you a map to his
home. Please proceed with all haste, and
return with his information as quickly as you
can get it.”
E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
PA RT 2
 Roleplaying Aliana Mathnir
Aliana is a short, muscular woman with blue
eyes and brown hair that is kept at shoulder
length. Her skin is a rich brown color. She
has a scar along her face that she got in the
Burning. Prior to the Burning, she was a
deputy, and took over when the constable was
killed. She always offers a smile in greeting,
and tries to get along with everyone. She likes
to keep a neat and efficiently-running town,
and is more than happy to overlook minor,
nonviolent offenses, or let them go with some
time in the drunk tank or fines to make up for
damages. She is friendly and honest and likes
to make everyone feel that they can come to
her with any issues concerning the town.
Quote: “Look, just get along, okay? We have
bigger problems to deal with.”
Roleplaying Shayad
Shayad’s stern countenance belies a calm
serenity. Her main insecurity is the fact
that she is a half-orc minority in a beautiful
people’s world. If she gets any hint that
someone is surprised that she is the priestess
because she is a half-orc, then they will
find a cool welcome. If you engage her in
conversation around breaking stereotypes,
you will find she’s got a lot to say. Shayad is a
pacifist and loves to protect life. Even though
there are those who do great evil, she feels
that they can be shown the error of their
ways and so she will argue and discuss their
issues, but avoids physical fighting. Shayad
survived the Burning in Elmwood, and was
instrumental in getting the larger Temples
of Chauntea to put up seed money to get the
temple in Elmwood built.
Quote: “Life is sacred and should not be thrown
away, no matter how rotten the soul appears to
be.”
12
The characters will likely have many questions.
What Shayad knows:
• Chauntea protects the crops stored here. There
is a regular rotation of blessings and other
spells placed on the silos and grain bins to
supernaturally ward off rot and vermin.
• The rot was first discovered about a month
ago. The clergy have been working diligently
to try to contain and sterilize it, but have been
unsuccessful.
• Even treatment with holy water, purify food and
drink, hallow spells, and other magic doesn’t
reverse the rot.
• None of the other stored vegetables are
affected, yet. Shayad is worried that the rot will
spread.
• The Greengrass planting festival in a couple of
tendays is one of Chauntea’s most holy days.
Her energy will bless the land and the people
with fertility. Many local couples choose to get
married during the festival. The farmers all
celebrate it as a major holiday. If the grain is
rotted it will cast a pall over the entire festival,
which will be a major disappointment. The
town’s morale is still shaky after the Burning.
What Aliana Mathnir knows:
• Elmwood can almost support itself food-wise.
This is a terrible setback and affects nearly
everyone. The brewery can’t brew beer. The
bakery can’t make baked goods. The inns can’t
sell beer or baked goods. Everyone’s businesses
fail and this means that Semyon and Daughters
Bank is going to foreclose these businesses.
• The Greengrass festival is a chance for the town
to show off its goods and set up trade deals.
These trade deals are desperately needed to
fund the rebuilding.
• The bigger problem is that a lot of grain goes
to feed the refugees. Lack of grain could lead
to food riots. Of course, the High Blades of
Mulmaster would be delighted to send troops
to pacify any riots and then the troops would
never leave. Elmwood would just become Little
Mulmaster which is a disaster all around.
E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
PA RT 2
 • This sage isn’t someone who comes into town.
She learned about him from some of her elven
allies in the Cormanthor forest.
• She won’t just send townsfolk out to talk to
the sage because she needs everyone here to
get ready for the Greengrass festival. Plus, it’s
dangerous out there! All of the elven defenses
have been weird since the Netherese dropped
a flying city on Myth Drannor a few years ago.
And there are well-armed and violent treasure
seekers out there looking for relics from either
culture.
• The Cormanthor forest has been especially
dangerous in the last year or so. There was an
outbreak of demons and madness and all kinds
of problems in Hillsfar. While things seem to
have settled down, the stirrings of evil magic in
the ancient forest are enough to drive lesser folk
crazy.
• The characters are to get there and back with all
due haste. Aliana wants this handled well before
the Greengrass festival starts.
Sample of the Tainted Grain
After a bit of conversation Shayad has a
serious-looking wood elf underpriest go get
a sample of the tainted grain. He returns in
a few minutes with a lead box about eight
inches on a side. He hands it to Shayad with
obvious care.
“Thank you, Kamik,” Shayad says, and opens
the lid with deliberate, slow motions. Inside is
a mass of green leafy tendrils sprouting from
some fresh cut wheat and an ear of corn.
Both grains are producing the exact same
plant. The vegetation produces a acrid, foul
smell of black mold, rot, and something like
carrion. Both Shayad and Kamik draw back
from the olfactory assault.
13
Allow the characters to make the following skill
checks if they desire to do so:
An Intelligence (Nature) check reveals the
following:
• DC 10 - This isn’t even the right type of leaf for
this type of seed.
• DC 15 - This rate of growth is not natural.
Something is stimulating it.
• DC 20 - This species of plant hasn’t been seen
in Faerûn for over a century. It was supposed to
have been wiped out.
An Intelligence (Arcana) check reveals the
following:
• DC 15 - To overpower the warding magics on
the temple’s storehouses would require an
immense amount of energy.
What Shayad knows:
• All of the rot produces this type of foul smelling
plant.
• Even the grains that don’t have this growth on
them develop it rapidly after leaving the warded
grain silos.
Developments
Aliana Mathnir hands the characters a map to
the Sage’s house. The characters venture into the
Cormanthor Forest to see the sage Salazar Bel
Akash about the grain.
Treasure
Aliana Mathnir will offer the characters 300 GP
(total). Shayad says that the Temple of Bane, the
Temple of Chauntea, and the Temple of Selûne will
match funds and give the characters another 900
GP (total) as all of the major faiths in town want to
see this problem resolved. This is a total of 1,200
GP which is payable on the characters’ return with
the knowledge from the sage.
XP Award
If the characters accept the mission to visit the
sage with the sample, award each character 600 XP.
E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
PA RT 2
 PART 3.
THE RIMWOOD
Expected Duration: 45 minutes. the Rimwood, they are subject to the madness of
Having obtained a sample of the rot, the characters the Cormanthor.
venture into the vast forest to the south to speak Resting in Cormanthor
with the sage to learn more about the threat to The wood is unsettled by the influences of
Elmwood. the demonic taint of the Underdark, making
The initial travel to Cormanthor takes a day, and lingering there decidedly unpleasant. Travel
from there, the journey into the ancient wood is to the sage’s residence will take at least one
challenging. The demonic presences in the Hillsfar long rest.
area and Cormanthor forest have been sealed away Exhaustion: Resting within Cormanthor does
from the Moonsea following the end of Season 3. not permit a character to recover levels of
However, the changes to the woods have left them exhaustion. Long rests otherwise function as
twisted and perilous (as described in DDEX3-07 normal in terms of resources recovered.
Herald of the Moon).
Madness: Upon completing a long rest, each
The foul magics that sprang from the Underdark character must succeed on a DC 15 Wisdom
have been drawn into the roots, trunks, and leaves saving throw. On a failure, their madness level
of the forest’s ancient trees. Certain emotions are increases by 1 and they are affected by the
heightened within the wood, and any travelers who Madness of Cormanthor (see below).
linger there are likely to find themselves pushed to
the brink of insanity. Those who sleep in the forest Madness Level
find their dreams haunted with hopelessness from Level Effect
the many souls that have never returned from the 1 Short-term madness (lasts 1d10 minutes)
wood. 2 Long-term madness (lasts 1d10 x 10
General Features of the Rimwood minutes)
The general features of the Rimwood section of 3 Indefinite madness (lasts until cured)
Cormanthor are as follows:
Trees. The shallow-rooted blueridge and
needleleaf pines that grow here are well-suited to
the Rimwood’s sandy soil. The trees are around
fifty or more feet tall.
Light. The trees in the Rimwood are tall enough
and spaced close enough together that they only
allow dim light to penetrate to ground level.
Sounds. A thick carpet of springy pine needles
covers the Rimwood forest floor, reducing footfalls
to near silence and granting advantage to creatures
attempting to move silently.
Fauna. Thick vegetation makes larger mammals
less common in the Rimwood and winged insects
and the birds that prey upon them thrive.
Madness. Any time characters take a long rest in

14 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
PA RT 3
 Madness of Cormanthor
The lost souls of Cormanthor are able to exert
their influence on the region and those who
travel through it in the different forms of
madness that characters may develop. Upon
reaching madness level 3, instead of rolling
on the Indefinite Madness table on page 260
of the Dungeon Master’s Guide, roll on the
following table and the character gains the
madness listed below. Have the player note it
on his or her character sheet.
If the roll results in a madness already
possessed by the character, reroll until a new
result is reached.
01-20 Despair: “I often become withdrawn
and moody, dwelling on the insufferable state
of life.”
21-40 Hatefulness: “I am compelled to make
the weak suffer.”
41-60 Gloom: “l have no compunction against
tampering with the dead as we will all die
soon.”
6l-80 Discouragement: “All our efforts are for
naught as we will never escape this wood. “
81-100 Hopelessness: “I am awash in the
awareness of life’s futility.”
When the adventurers head into the Rimwood,
read the following:
It is 15 miles from Elmwood to the edge of
Cormanthor. The tilled fields near Elmwood
give way to pastures, which in their turn give
way to meadowlands. Storm clouds loom
on the northern horizon as civilization slides
away behind you until all that is left is a nar-
row path snaking its way through fields and
stands of trees. At some point, you realize
that there are no more fields, just trees as far
as the eye can see in all directions, and you
know you have entered the ancient elven
forest.
It’s another 20 miles from the edge of the forest
to the sage’s cottage. Traveling through the forest
counts as difficult terrain for overland travel (PHB
p182) even when they are on the path, because of
winding nature of the trail. Note this does not affect
druids with the Land Stride feature or parties with
a ranger with the forest favored terrain.
15
The forest is a tapestry of a thousand shades
of green. Bushes and saplings reach up for
any sunlight that peeks through the canopy
of the towering trees that rise up like giants
about you.
A sky heavy with clouds is partially obscured
by the foliage. You cannot see the lightning
through the trees, but thunder rolls overhead.
A slow, steady rain falls on the forest, patter-
ing on leaves and dripping down through the
branches.
The characters should have brought enough food
and water on their journey. If not, they will have
to forage along the way. Cormanthor has abundant
food and water sources and only requires a DC 10
Wisdom (Survival) check. However, this reduces
the character’s overland speed depending upon
how long they spend foraging.
Ancient Elven Defenses
Regardless of which path the characters take to
reach the sage, they encounter some of the residual
defenses the elves erected against the followers
of Moander. This encounter happens about three
miles away from the sage’s cottage.
The slow drizzle continues, making everything
damp. The path threads its way through a
steep ravine. The slopes of the ravine are
littered with exposed boulders that are cov-
ered in lichen.
In the center of the ravine, you see the glint
of white marble of the ruins of an elegant
elven pavilion. Time and the weather have
worn it down to a stone court, with tumbled
pillars, and a shattered roof. Standing among
the ruins is a statue of a male elf in ancient
armor. Runes inscribed in mirror-bright silver
metal shimmer down it’s body, even in the
gloomy rain. The head, shoulder guards, and
vambraces are inlaid with semiprecious gem-
stones that still sparkle under a coating of
grime and moss.
The elven ruins and the ravine are protected by a
shield guardian and two galeb duhr. The shield
guardian is the marble statue in the fallen pavilion.
The galeb duhr are posing as rocks at the top of the
ravine –- one on each side.
The shield guardian activates when it senses that
someone in the group is carrying a sample of
Moander’s rot (even if it is in an extra-dimensional
space). It waits until the party is directly on the
ruined pavilion before it acts.
E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
PA RT 3
 The guardian steps down from its pedestal and
informs them, in Elvish, that it has identified them
as corrupted by the touch of Moander. Accordingly,
they must be destroyed for the good of the Elven
Court. Attempts to persuade the shield guardian to
halt its attack are in vain.
Avoiding the Ravine
Avoiding the ravine requires the characters to scale
the steep slope of the ridges on either side. If the
characters attempt to do this, the galeb duhr notice
their efforts and animate boulders to move to the
top of the ridge and attack. Their efforts draw the
shield guardian.
The characters can go around the ridge to another
gap, but if they do, they stumble on another
pavilion like this one.
Features of the Area
The ravine has the following important features.
Slope. The sides of the ravine are very steep and
are difficult terrain. The slopes count as downhill
for galeb duhr and animated boulder movement.
Rain. A light rain falls throughout the encounter. It
has no effect on combat, but may matter for spells,
such as Call Lightning.
Elven Ruin. The elven ruin is made of crumbling
marble. The galeb duhr use the crumbled edges to
roll up onto the pavilion. Some of the areas are full
of marble chunks, making them difficult terrain.
Teleport Runes. If a creature touches these runes,
they activate and instantly teleport the creature to
the spaces indicated on the map at the top of the
ravine slope.
Traps. Three of the pillars still contain the
enchantments on them to protect the pavilion. It is
a DC 15 Wisdom (Perception) check to notice the
arcane writing on the side of the pillar. These areas
detect as magical.
The trap activates when more than 20 pounds of
weight is placed on the pressure plate, causing
the pillar to release a 30-foot cone of cold and
ice. Each creature in the cone must make a DC 13
Constitution saving throw, taking 22 (4d10) cold
damage on a failed save, or half as much damage
on a successful one. Wedging an iron spike or other
object under the pressure plate prevents the trap
from activating. A successful dispel magic (DC 13)
cast on the pillar destroys the trap.
16
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative
• Very weak party: Remove 2 galeb duhr
• Weak party: Remove 1 galeb duhr
• Strong party: Add 1 galeb duhr
• Very strong party: Add 1 galeb duhr and 1
shield guardian
Suggested Tactics
You may choose to use these tactics if you believe it
is appropriate for your game. The shield guardian
opens with a cone of cold and attempts to catch
as many of the characters in its area of effect as
possible. The shield guardian then engages with
the characters, confident in its regeneration ability.
If pressed, it may use the Disengage action at your
option to retreat to lure characters into triggering
the traps.
The galeb duhr are indistinguishable from a
normal bolder because of their False Appearance.
Both use their Animate Boulders ability to
animate two. Because they don’t want to chance
losing concentration, the galeb duhr do not move
(which would break their False Appearance)
until both of its boulders are destroyed or about
to be destroyed. They then join the attack on the
characters.
Once down at the bottom of the ravine with the
characters, the boulders and the galeb duhr attack
then try to reach the teleport runes to teleport
back up to the top of the ravine.
The shield guardian and galeb duhr will chase the
party for three rounds if the characters try to flee
or run through them.
If time is short, the galeb duhr de-animate when
the shield guardian is destroyed.
Treasure
The shield guardian‘s runes are inlaid with
mithril. In addition, the head, shoulder guards,
and vambraces are inlaid with semiprecious
gemstones. These pieces can be sold to an artificer
for 1,800 gp.
E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
PA RT 3
 PART 4.
SAGE ADVICE
Expected Duration: 20 minutes. A tall half elven man with amber skin, almond
The characters meet the Sage, Salazar Bel Akash, shaped brown eyes, and black hair comes to
and seek his advice. the door, looking bemused. He’s holding a book
in his hand, one finger acting as a bookmark.
General Features The goats bleat at him and he goes to pet one
The general features of the area are as follows: briefly.
“Hello,” he says, “I don’t often get visitors. What
Terrain. The sage’s house is packed with brings you here?”
bookshelves which are full of books and curiosities.
Light and Visibility. The house is well situated If the characters mention being sent by the
in a clearing, so there is ample light and visibility Constable or the High Priestess of Chauntea he
outside his home. The inside of his home is well lit will invite them into his home. If they mention the
by magical lights that provide bright illumination. tainted grain sample he will pale visibly, but invite
Climate. The air is cold with a gentle breeze them in nonetheless.
blowing in from the west. The sage’s cottage is a study in controlled
chaos. There are tables devoted to inspecting
Finally arriving at the home of Salazar Bel Akash
ancient fragments of Elvish pottery and sculp-
you find a pleasant cottage on a hill overlook-
ture. A bookshelf groans under the strain of so
ing a stream that meanders through the forest.
many books crammed into it. There are jars filled
The walls are stone and the roof is made of
with a collection of gruesome appendages,
wooden beams covered with slate shingles.
including a beholder eyestalk. In one corner of
Along one side of the house is a pen with three
the room near a window is a small potted plant,
brown and white goats with long floppy ears. All
it’s leaves and branches trimmed to exemplify
three regard you curiously, and baa for atten-
the ongoing struggle of taming nature.
tion. There is a bell on a post in the yard.
The sage clears off a table and asks to see the
If the characters attempt to approach the cottage sample. In fact, you can see some of the ten-
drils lengthening as the sage looks on in abject
without first ringing the bell, the goats all bleat horror.
more loudly and beg to be petted. They nibble
harmlessly and adorably on the characters fingers Unless one of the characters closes the lid first, he
and clothes and are looking for treats. In either will compose himself to snap the lid shut, place the
case, the door is opened by a Salazar Bel Akash in box on the table, and set several heavy books on
just a moment. top of it.
Roleplaying Salazar
He is a gentle soul but is more interested in
the past than the future. If his knowledge
seems to be important, or pertinent to any
conversation, he gets excited and his speech
accelerates to the point where he’s difficult to
understand.
Quote: “Oh, sorry I didn’t see you there, my
research keeps me so busy.”

17 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
PA RT 4
 Perhaps I should tell you about my grandfather.
I fear it is relevant to what is happening.
“He was possessed by the spirit of the dead god
Moander - lord of uncontrolled growth and rot.
Eventually - with the help of a few adventurous
individuals - he was able to free himself and
banish Moander forever. Unfortunately, I sus-
pect that he did not do as thorough a job as we
all would have liked.”
Salazar pauses for a moment in deep thought
then looks back up at you.
“There is only one way to know for sure. There is
a ruined temple to Moander on the far bank of
the river Lis. It’s only a few miles away. I actu-
ally chose to make my home here so I could
keep an eye on it. It is abandoned now, but
the plants growing all around it were corrupted
root, branch and stem. It is a shunned place.
There are remnants of Moander’s influence
growing there in the form of giant corpse flow-
ers. Bring me the seed of one of these so I can
compare it to the sample of rotted grain you
brought me. I pray that I’m mistaken. The seed
will dispel any doubts.”

“Salazar gives the characters directions to find

Moander’s lost temple and a fuller description of
what the flower looks like.
If asked why he doesn’t go himself, he points out
that he’s just a sage, not a field researcher, and
that sort of active work is far better suited for
adventurers.
Developments
The characters head back into the Cormanthor
Forest to seek out the Seed of Moander for the sage
Salazar Bel Akash. If the characters wish to take a
long rest, Salazar becomes agitated. He thinks it’s
very important to Elmwood that the characters
find out whether or not this is Moander’s influence
right now. However, he cannot and will not force
them to leave his house, and they can take a long
rest there if they insist on it.

18 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
PA RT 4
 PART 5. THE SEED
OF MOANDER
Expected Duration: 60 minutes.
Moander’s Lost Temple is a primitive ziggurat
squatting beside a foul meadow. The open area
is filled with a riot of plant life not meant to be.
Even the shapes of the plants are unsettling and
vaguely menacing. Scattered around the perim-
eter of the open area are shallow pools about 30
feet across. The air is thick with a putrid smell rem-
iniscent of black mold, rot, and the sickly-sweet
stench of rotting meat.
At this point, the plants that encircle Moander’s
Lost Temple are dormant and harmless. The
characters can hack away at them with no reaction.
The sheer size of the open area means that the
characters will have no real effect on the plant life,
which will grow back over the course of a few days.
Finding the Seed
The Seed of Moander can be found as the stamen of
a titan arum (also known as a corpse flower) that
grows in the center of one of the pools (DM should
pick one).
Searching through strange and twisted vegeta-
tion is exhausting work. The clear air of the forest
is gone, leaving you exposed to miserable clouds
of biting insects. Thick pollen settles on you, coat-
ing you in yellow dust.
But your efforts pay off. At the center of one of
the pools is an enormous flower that rises 8 feet
above the water. The seed itself is a cancerous
yellow stamen that projects from a bruise-pur-
ple bloom that nestles in the plant’s pale green
leaves, which are the color of moldy flesh.
The characters can approach the flower without
difficulty and plucking the Seed of Moander
requires a Strength of 10. It weighs about 15
pounds. Removing the Seed causes the plant life in
the area to animate and turn on the characters in
an effort to return the seed to the corpse flower.
19
As you pluck the seed loose, the plant life goes
mad and writhes to life. Long vegetative tenta-
cles sprout from the pool reaching for you, and
from the other pools as well. Incredibly large
dandelions bloom and go to seed in seconds,
and the fluffy white airborne seeds start drifting
around on the breeze, but they sweep toward
you with a malicious intelligence. Lurid purple
thistles twist and grow, shooting javelin sized
thorns at you in a wild frenzy.
The plant life that attacks the characters includes
three different corpse flowers (treat as Ropers),
20 dandelion puffballs (treat as gas spores), and
15 animated thistles (treat as needle blights).
The puffballs appear as enormous ripe dandelion
heads and do not resemble beholders. The
needle blights resemble overgrown thistles with
unnaturally vivid purple stalks.
The three corpse flowers (Ropers) are each
situated at the middle of their ponds and cannot
move.
Features of the Area
The Lost Temple of Moander has the following
important features.
Vegetation. The Seed of Moander creates a sphere
of Plant Growth (as per the spell) centered on
it. The land within 100 feet of the Seed becomes
extremely difficult terrain that requires 4 feet of
movement for every foot of actual movement. This
effect can be dispelled, but reasserts itself after one
round.
Pool. The pool is 2 feet deep. This counts as
difficult terrain but does not require an Athletics
check.
E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
PA RT 5
 Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative
• Very weak party: Remove 2 ropers
• Weak party: Remove 1 roper
• Strong party: Add 5 more gas spores
• Very strong party: Add 10 more gas
spores and 5 more needle blights
Tactics
You may choose to use these tactics if you believe
it is appropriate for your game. Given the large
number of delicate foes, have each group go on one
initiative (do not roll initiative for each individual).
Do not have all the dandelion seeds (gas spores)
and animated thistles (needle blights) appear
at the same time. Five dandelion seeds and five
animated thistles spawn each round on 20, and
act on their group’s initiative. The puffballs and
thistles form randomly within 60 feet of the Seed
of Moander. Note that the corpse flowers (Ropers)
are rooted and immobile.
All the plant life has the single focus of returning
the Seed of Moander to the corpse flower. They
concentrate their attacks on the character holding
the Seed. Remember that the Seed has an aura
of Plant Growth within 100 feet, which causes
everything to be extremely difficult terrain (4 feet
of movement per foot of actual movement) inside
of that area.
20
The corpse flowers use their tendrils to grab and
reel in the holder of the Seed back to them.
The dandelion puffballs float toward the person
with the seed and try to touch them. The thistles
use their needle attack to pop puffballs near a
character to trigger the puffball’s Death Burst
attack. The puffballs have a disease attack that can
potentially cause death. Unless the characters have
a way of curing disease, the affected characters
could face severe consequences on the way back to
the Sage.
The thistles also use their needle attacks to
attempt break spell casters’ concentrations.
The dandelions and thistles will chase the
characters for 10 rounds if they attempt to flee.
If time is short, the gas spores and needle blights
disintegrate when the roper is killed.
Developments
Ideally the characters will deal with the plants. If
the party is killed, the sage will beg some of the
elves that live in the Cormanthor forest to retrieve
their bodies and their equipment. An elven cleric
will be willing to raise the party for standard
spellcasting fees, then fade back into the forest.
E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
PA RT 5
 PART 6. SOMETIMES THE
ABYSS GAZES BACK AT YOU
Expected Duration: 60 minutes.
The goats greet you with friendly bleats as you
return to the sage’s residence. Salazar Bel Akash
greets you with equal enthusiasm, rapidly closing
the seed into a lead box.
Once upstairs, Salazar produces a tuning fork,
an ancient copper amulet, and a delicate rod
carved from a single piece of red crystal. He
proceeds to poke and prod the seed for sever-
al minutes. He pauses occasionally to weave a
complex pattern in the air over the seed with the
rod.
Eventually he sets his tools aside and turns to
regard you. “The tainted grain and Moander’s
Seed are both the product of the same foul
being - somehow it is exerting its influence on Toril
once more!”
“While you were gone I did some research.” He
smiles broadly, “I have good news and even
better news. The good news is that I’ve found
information related to an individual named Gry-
pht. He was instrumental in defeating Moander in
my grandfather’s time. My information indicates
that he left behind a contingency measure in a
place called the Varlaros Stones located deep
within the Rimwood of the Cormanthor forest.
This contingency should allow us to rid Elmwood
of Moander’s influence. The precise location isn’t
provided by my sources, but it is in this general
area.”
Salazar pulls out an atlas of Faerûn and indicates
where the contingency should be located.
“The even better news is that I believe I can rep-
licate the ritual Grypht used. If it works you won’t
have to take the long trip to find the old wizard’s
sanctuary.”
Salazar gestures at the warding circle on the far
side of his library. “Come, let me start this ritual.
Hopefully we can solve this here and now… I’m
going to create a magical link between this
sample of the tainted grain and all the other
grain that is similarly afflicted. The presence of
the seed will allow me to focus on just the taint
of Moander. Then I can open a portal to another
dimension and cast the taint into it. When the
seed goes through the portal the link will draw
the rest of the taint with it.”
21
His face becomes resigned. “Of course, should
things go completely awry… well… you must
inform the folk of Elmwood quickly. They’re to
quarantine the grain immediately. Subject it to
killing frost. That’s the sovereign remedy against
Moander’s servants. It’s imperative you let them
know as fast as you can. Also, if you would,
please take care of my goats. They’ve been my
only companions for so long and they’re terribly
useful. See that they’re cared for, please.”
The characters are welcome to ask Salazar a few
questions before he begins, but they will be unable
to dissuade him. Here is what he knows. He won’t
volunteer this information, but will happily answer
questions.
• The ritual is dangerous but far less dangerous
than letting a mostly-dead god of rot run
rampant around the Moonsea region.
• His famous grandfather was working on a
variant of this ritual, and Salazar thinks he’s
finally tweaked it to work.
• The characters cannot help with the ritual. If
an additional magic user was to help it would
set up unpredictable ripples through the weave
that would make the magic harder to control.
Intelligence (Arcana) Checks
• A DC 15 Intelligence (Arcana) check will
indicate that the theory is sound.
• A DC 20 Intelligence (Arcana) check will
indicate that any errors in the ritual could cause
a backlash of magical energies that is likely to
be fatal to Salazar.
The Ritual
Salazar has set up the library for the ritual.
The library has a large section of the floor cov-
ered in a silver, rune-inscribed circle. Precious
gemstones and candles mark the magically
significant points around the circle.
Salazar places the seed in the center of the cir-
cle next to the box containing the tainted grain.
The sage kneels at the edge of the circle and
begins to chant in an unknown liquid tongue.
E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
PA RT 6
 “Lä! Lä! Moander phiguli! Ayuk’vulgtmm vugt-
lagln! Moander phtagn!”
At the crescendo of his chanting, his eyes fly
wide open and he screams with inhuman in-
tensity. His body swells impossibly and flesh and
organs tear with a terrible sound. Rustling leaves
sprout out of rents in his skin. Whipping tendrils
issue forth from his eye sockets and ears, and an
immense, bilious green eye gazes out of what
was once Salazar’s mouth.
A sepulchral voice issues forth from the portal,
“You sought to unmake me, yet you are un-
made! Kill them all and open the way fully for my
return!”
As the creature that was the sage slimes forward
out of the tear in reality, black mold pours out of
the netherworld waving moist, sticky rhizomes at
you and bringing with it an overpowering stench
of mold and rot.
Salazar’s attempt to banish the taint of Moander to
the Astral Plane has failed and he has been turned
into a Yochlol for his temerity. Salazar the Yochlol
attacks with two black puddings. Salazar’s careful
summoning circle puts an effect on the room
where creatures with a connection to Moander are
vulnerable to cold damage.
General Features
Terrain. The sage’s library is very neat.
Light and Visibility. The room is well lit by
continual flame torches in the corners of the room.
Climate. The room is cool, but not cold.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative
• Very weak party: Replace the Yochlol with
a Barlgura
• Weak party: Reduce the Yochlol’s hit
points to 110
• Strong party: Add 2 tendrils (vine blights)
that come through the portal one per round.
• Very strong party: Add 6 tendrils (vine
blights) that come through the portal two
per round.
Tactics
You may choose to use these tactics if you believe
it is appropriate for your game. The Yochlol will
22
try to cast dominate person on the most powerful
rogue or fighter in the group. It will concentrate
physical attacks on lightly-armored spellcasters. If
time is short, the black puddings and vine blights
decay rapidly when the Yochlol is dead.
Developments
The characters defeat the hideous creature that
once was sage Salazar Bel Akash.
As Salazar’s remains crumple to the floor of his
library the portal begins to fold in on itself. The se-
pulchral voice you heard earlier rasps, “Fools! You
cannot contain me. I am loosed upon this world
again. Cower in fear for my wrath is unending.”
The characters can rest in Salazar’s house for as
long as they like, but remind them that Salazar
urged them to go to Elmwood as quickly as possible.
When the characters go outside Salazar’s goats
have turned into three small, ivory goat figurines.
As you recover and leave Salazar’s home, the
goat pen in the front of the house is eerily silent.
Instead, there are three small statues of goats on
the front step of the house, still warm to the touch.
The adventurers depart the sage’s home in the
forest with the notes he compiled about Grypht
and the contingency the wizard left behind.
Treasure
Figurines of Wondrous Power – Ivory Goats.
If the characters search Salazar’s library, they
find a scroll of Mass Healing Word (3rd level,
uncommon), and two potions of healing.
Conclusion
The characters return to Elmwood with the
information they have obtained. The characters
will either have to rest in the Cormanthor forest on
the way back to Elmwood or they will have to take
one level of exhaustion to force march through the
night.
You return to Elmwood with the information
about the threat Moander poses to the people
of Elmwood, and the whole Moonsea region.
The town is continuing with the preparations
for the Greengrass festival. The energetic bus-
tle of the town seems to present a nearly idyllic
image of peace and prosperity… but how long
can that last?
E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
PA RT 6
Rewards
Make sure note their rewards on their adventure
log sheets. Give your name and DCI number (if
applicable) so players can record who ran the
session.
Experience
Total up all combat experience earned for
defeated foes, and divide by the number of
characters present in the combat. For non-combat
experience, the rewards are listed per character.
Give all characters in the party non-combat
experience awards unless otherwise noted.
Combat Awards
Name of Foe XP per Foe
Barlgura 1,800
Black Pudding 1,100
Galeb Duhr 2,300
Gas Spore 100
Needle Blight 50
Roper 1,800
Shield Guardian 2,900
Vine Blight 100
Yochlol` 5,900
Non-Combat Awards
Task or accomplishment XP per Char.
Going to Mystic Grove Brewery
and talking to Catlin Littleleaf 600
Going to the Temple of Chauntea
and talking to Shayad and
Aliana Mathnir. 600
The minimum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 4,500
experience points.
The maximum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 6,000 experience
points.
Treasure
The characters receive the following treasure,
divided up amongst the party. Characters should
attempt to divide treasure evenly whenever
possible. Gold piece values listed for sellable
gear are calculated at their selling price, not their
purchase price.
23
Consumable magic items should be divided
up however the group sees fit. If more than one
character is interested in a specific consumable
magic item, the DM can determine who gets it
randomly should the group be unable to decide.
Treasure Awards
Encounter 2: 1,200 GP. Payment from the
Constable and major temples in town for going to
see Salazar Bel Akash.
Encounter 3: The Shield Guardian‘s runes
are inlaid with mithril. In addition, the head,
shoulder guards, and vambraces are inlaid with
semiprecious gemstones. These pieces can be sold
to an artificer for 1,800 gp.
Encounter 6: Figurine of Wondrous Power – Ivory
Goats. Scroll of Mass Healing Word. 2x Potions of
Healing.
Potion of Healing
Potion, common
A description of this item can be found in the
Player’s Handbook and Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Scroll Of Mass Healing Word (3rd Level)
Scroll, Rare
A description of this item can be found in the
Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Permanent magic items
D&D Adventurers League has a system in place to
determine who is awarded permanent magic items
at the end of a session. Each character’s logsheet
contains a column to record permanent magic
items for ease of reference.
If all the players at the table agree on one character
taking possession of a permanent magic item, that
character gets the item.
In the event that one or more characters indicate
an interest in possessing a permanent magic item,
the character that possesses the fewest permanent
magic items gets the item. If there is a tie in the
total number of permanent magic items owned
by contesting characters, the item’s owner is
determined randomly by the DM.
E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
R E WA R D S
 Figurine of Wondrous Power - Ivory Goats
Wondrous item, rare
These ivory statuettes are always created in sets
of three. Each goat looks unique and functions
differently from the others. Their properties are as
follows
• The goat of traveling can become a Large goat
with the same statistics as a riding horse. It has
24 charges, and each hour or portion thereof
it spends in beast form costs 1 charge. While
it has charges, you can use it as often as you
wish. When it runs out of charges, it reverts to
a figurine and can’t be used again until 7 days
have passed, when it regains all its charges.
• The goat of travail becomes a giant goat for up
to 3 hours. Once it has been used, it can’t be
used again until 30 days have passed.
• The goat of terror becomes a giant goat for up
to 3 hours. The goat can’t attack, but you can
remove its horns and use them as weapons.
One horn becomes a +1 lance, and the other
becomes a +2 longsword. Removing a horn
requires an action, and the weapons disappear
and the horns return when the goat reverts
24
to figurine form. In addition, the goat radiates
a 30-foot radius aura of terror while you are
riding it. Any creature hostile to you that starts
its turn in the aura must succeed on a DC 15
Wisdom saving throw or be frightened for 1
minute, or until the goat reverts to figurine
form. The frightened creature can repeat
the saving throw at the end of each of its
turns, ending the effect on a success. Once it
successfully saves against the effect, a creature
is immune to the effect for the next 24 hours.
Once the figurine has been used, it can’t be used
again until 15 days have passed.
Renown
Each character receives one point of renown..
Downtime
Each character receives 10 downtime days at the
conclusion of this adventure.
DM Rewards
You receive 300 XP, 150 gp, and ten downtime
days for running this session.
E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
APPENDIX
Appendix
Elmwood at a Glance
DMs can use this information as needed to help
flesh out encounters in Elmwood proper.
Population. Approximately 1,500 and growing.
Races. Humans are the most numerous
demographic (50%). Elves (15%) and half-elves
(25%) are the most common nonhumans.
Alignment. Elmwood tends toward lawful (as
influenced by Mulmaster) and towards neutral.
LAW NEUTRAL CHAOS
GOOD 8% 31% 8%
NEUTRAL 18% 18% 0%
EVIL 10% 7% 0%
History of Elmwood - Elmwood is an old town
which was founded 1,300 years ago. It has no
valuable natural resources worth stealing (like
gems or precious metals). The long history of the
town is both peaceful and boring. They have been
exporting fish and fine elm wood to Mulmaster
for centuries. As Mulmaster grew in size and
might, Elmwood became a vassal of the “City of
Danger”. The nobility of Mulmaster (particularly
the Culkin family) bought some of the land and
began to manage it directly. About two years
ago. The Cult of the Eternal Flame accidentally
detonated a devastation orb in Elmwood. When
the orb detonated, it created a 1-mile-wide area of
intense, extreme dry heat for a full day. Wildfires
started within the first hour. Anyone who didn’t
flee was caught in the fires. For the next hellish
day, people tried to save what they could from the
burning. Most of the population was killed, and the
vegetation and buildings were burned.
Elmwood Today - In the wake of “The Burning,”
Elmwood was destroyed, but the survivors
decided to rebuild. Since then, houses and inns and
industries have been rebuilt, and the land cleared
by the Burning has been turned into a patchwork
of farms. The area is alive with the sound of
hammering all day as new buildings are built.
25
The various disasters happening around the
Moonsea in Phlan, Hillsfar, Mulmaster, and the
Underdark have led to a refugee crisis in the area –
but Elmwood needs people! The unstated policy is
that anyone is welcome, as long as they are willing
to keep the peace and work the land.
Culture - Crime is relatively rare, due, to the Order
of the Gauntlet and the Lords’ Alliance lending
their influence and manpower to peacekeeping in
Elmwood. There is also a strong social pressure
for everyone to do their part for the common good
because the memories of the Burning are still
fresh.
There is friction between the survivors and the
refugees. The survivors are having to process their
whole social order changing. While the survivors
are sometimes not good hosts, the refugees are
sometimes not good guests.
Climate - Like the rest of the Moonsea region,
Elmwood is quite cool (consider the climate to be
similar to Montreal, Canada). Elmwood is cool in
the summer (highs about 70°F, 20°C) and cold in
the winter (highs around 20°F, -6°C).
Economy - Elmwood exports timber and fish and
there is a small merchant fleet that calls Elmwood
home. While Elmwood now produces some crops,
meat, and dairy, they still must import food until
agricultural production becomes self-sustaining.
Goats and sheep do well in Elmwood, as they are
small enough to be herded into barns during the
long cold winter. Industry in Elmwood is starting
to grow given the need to rebuild. Any complex
specialty items must be purchased in Mulmaster.
Government - Elmwood has never been big
enough to have much of a formal system of
government. In the past, a constable was chosen
by popular assent. Given that the rebuilding is a
much larger effort, Elmwood has expanded its
government services. The constable has appointed
six deputies. These officials can arrest lawbreakers,
as well as assemble and lead a militia.
E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
APPENDIX
 Organizations
Refugee Groups - There are semi-organized
groups of Phlan, Hillsfar, and Drow refugees.
Survivors - The Elmwood survivors tend to stick
together.
Elmwood Council - The Council meets every
week or so. The Elmwood council consists of:
Aliana Mathnir (Constable), Alksuth Cork (Head
of Sailfollowers), Aranda Fletcher (Head of
Greenstriders), Drake Holmstrumph (Leader of the
Survivors), Kala Namak (Deputy, Leader of Hillsfar
Refugees), Larissa Aerasumé (Priestess of Selûne),
Nils Sankt (Priest of Bane), Shayad (Priestess
of Chauntea), Thyra Stoneshoulders (Leader of
Phlan Refugees), and Yao Seiju (Head of the Shield
Trading Company).
Greenstriders - The Greenstriders are a semi-
official professional organization of foresters and
scouts that cooperate with each other to bring in
timber.
Sailfollowers - The Sailfollowers are a tightly
organized group of shipping captains, fishers and
sailors. They bargain as a group to make sure
shipping deals are handled fairly and to prevent
arguments over fishing grounds.
Semyon and Daughters Bank – This bank has
underwritten most of the loans in Elmwood, so
it’s in their best interest to see that the town
is protected, well managed, and prosperous so
people can pay back those loans.
Shield Trading Company – This is a small
merchant house that has opened up a warehouse,
an inn, and a trade office in Elmwood to capitalize
on trade in the area.
The Factions
The Harpers - want to make sure the refugees are
not abused and are not cultists of the dragon or
elemental evil, or mad. The contact for the Harpers
is Ragnir Nejit, the innkeep of the Silvery Gem.
The Order of the Gauntlet - has two major goals.
The first is to check the influence of the Church of
Bane and to promote justice and peace in Elmwood
during the rebuilding. The faction contact for the
Order of the Gauntlet is Granthar Copperhelm who
runs the local shrine to Tempus.
26
The Emerald Enclave - is making sure that the
farms are set up appropriately, and that people
aren’t taking too much timber from the forest for
rebuilding. Rogon Stragoth is the official faction
contact. The druids circle in the Grove of Eldath is
very friendly with the Emerald Enclave.
The Lords’ Alliance - want to boost trade
and security so that the area is peaceful and
prosperous. Norin Steelstrike is the faction contact
for the Lords’ Alliance. She works at the Shield
Trading Company.
The Zhentarim - are making money and gaining
influence over important people in the area. The
banker from Semyon and Daughters – Fiorei
Semyon – is the faction contact for the Zhentarim.
Important Locations
Elmwood Hall – is a new, sturdy two-story
building made out of elmwood. The downstairs
hosts the offices for the city officials. The upstairs
is the Constable’s office and home.
The Grove of Eldath - was a shelter during the
Burning, and the survivors are grateful to the
druids there. The grove itself was mostly burned to
the ground, except for thirteen giant elm trees.
Karsure’s Axelworks and Smithy – produces fine
elmwood: wagons, carriages, wheels, and various
metalwork (but not weapons). The smith can silver
weapons for normal costs.
The Last Book Boardinghouse (poor 2 sp/day)
- is a ramshackle mansion that was not burned
entirely to the ground, and has been partially
repaired. The rooms are very basic, but they’re
clean. The boardinghouse does not serve food.
Moline’s Sundries and Equipment – sells
adventuring gear, weapons and armor in the
Players Handbook worth less than 100 GP. A
variety of goods is displayed through the front
windows.
Oghma’s Ointments and Unguents – is run by
the only apothecary in town. It sells alchemist’s
supplies and other reasonable alchemy and
herbalism items.
E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
APPENDIX
The Phoenix House (wealthy 4 gp/day) - is a
large public house and inn that is elaborately and
expensively furnished. It caters to adventurers.
There are a few conference rooms as well as a well-
stocked wine cellar and extensive hot baths.
The Phoenix Monument - is a memorial marker
for all of the people who died in the Burning. It is
a large fountain with a golden phoenix rising from
ashes lit by continual flame spells.
The Refugee Barracks (squalid, 1 sp/day) - is
where refugees can live for free. The cost is paid by
taxes on the other citizens of Elmwood.
The Shield Trading Company – is a trading house
along the docks.
The Shrine to Tempus – is a small military field
camp and open pavilion.
The Sign of the Shield (aristocratic, 10 gp/day) -
is the finest inn in Elmwood. It is owned by Shield
Trading Company and is mainly used for their
business.
The Silvery Gem Inn (modest 1 gp/day) - is
comfortable, friendly, and has really delicious
cabbage soup. It is the official central meeting
place for the Phlan refugees.
Stone’s Dwarf Inn (comfortable 2 gp/day) - is a
whimsical inn run by a gnome illusionist. Children
go to school there in the mornings. There is a very
lifelike stone dwarf in the front yard.
The Temple of Chauntea “The Bounty of the
Goddess” - contains a large structure and elaborate
gardens. Many farmers and ranchers are adherents
of Chauntea.
The Temple of Selûne “The Path of Silver Light”
- is the center of faith in Elmwood, and the oldest
religious faith in town. The prior temple was
destroyed in the burning, and rebuilt with help
from the elves. Many survivors and elves pay their
respects here.
The Temple of Bane “The Black Lord’s Fist” - is
newly built by philanthropists from Mulmaster.
Given that this is the official faith of Mulmaster, the
Temple is very important in Elmwood.
The Wayfarer’s Rest Tavern (modest 1 gp/day)
- is a modestly priced inn that caters to the docks
area in specific. Ship captains and officers stay
here.
27
Elmwood Council
Aliana Mathnir, Constable – LN female human
Veteran. Brown hair, blue eyes, brown skin. Aliana
is more interested in the greater good than in
penalizing every small infraction. She likes to keep
a neat and efficiently running town. She is friendly
and honest. Likely at Elmwood Hall.
Alksuth Cork, Head of Sailfollowers – CG male
human Bandit Captain. Bald head, gray eyes, brown
skin. Alksuth has a sharp wit and a booming voice.
He’s gregarious, if somewhat ill-tempered. He
likes to ask a lot of questions and see what makes
people tick. Likely at the docks.
Aranda Fletcher, Head of the Greenstriders –
NG female half elf Scout. Blond hair, brown eyes,
golden skin. Aranda looks out for others but only
if they are willing to help themselves. Likely at
Wayfarer’s Rest Inn.
Drake Holmstrumph, Leader of the Survivors –
NE male human Guard. Gray hair, dark eyes, brown
skin. Drake is suspicious of anyone who’s not a
survivor of the Burning, and comes off as rather
cold until you get to know him. Likely at the docks.
Kala Namak, Deputy, Leader of Hillsfar
Refugees – LE female dragonborn Knight. Purple
eyes, black scales. She is patient, thoughtful, and
cunning. She uses her reputation and position as a
shield and is more likely to threaten her way into
finding what she wants/needs. Likely at Elmwood
Hall.
Larissa Aerasumé, Cleric of Selûne – NG female
half elf Cleric 9. Black hair, blue eyes, black skin.
Larissa is a calm and thoughtful woman. She has a
penchant for seeing all parts of life, the good and
the bad, as part of Selûne’s divine plan. Likely at
The Path of Silver Light temple to Selûne.
Nils Sankt, Cleric of Bane – LE male human Cleric
9. Bald head, blue eyes, white skin. Nils is quite
cranky about being old. He remembers better days
and likes to tell people about how it used to be.
He will argue about almost anything. Likely at The
Black Lord’s Fist temple to Bane.
E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
APPENDIX
 Shayad, Cleric of Chauntea – NG female half orc
Cleric -9. Brown hair, green eyes, gray skin. Shayad
is calm and peaceful woman. She reacts poorly to
those who make comments disrespectful of her
heritage. She is a pacifist at heart and will try to
dissuade others from violence if possible. Likely at
The Bounty of the Goddess temple to Chauntea.
Thyra Stoneshoulders, Leader of Phlan
Refugees – LN female dwarf Guard. Red hair,
brown eyes, rosy skin. Thyra is professional and
warm as a barkeep, and enjoys getting drawn into
philosophical conversations. Likely at the Silvery
Gem Inn.
Yao Seiju, Local Leader of the Shield Trading
Company – LE male half elf Noble. Black hair,
brown eyes, golden skin. Yao Seiju is a calculating
man that likes to live the luxurious life. He is
willing to make a deal on most anything as long as
he can get the better end of it. Likely at the Shield
Trading Company.
Faction Contacts
Ragnir Nejit, Harpers – NG male dragonborn
Knight. White eyes and white scales. He is
extremely secretive and serious about Harper
business. He owes his life to the Harpers for
rescuing him from the Hillsfar arena. Ragnir is a
no nonsense kind of guy. He knows the lay of the
land and so he expects to get what he deserves. He
doesn’t want to see anyone hurt, but a little cut or
bruise is just a learning experience. Likely at the
Silvery Gem Inn.
Granthar Copperhelm, Priestess of Tempus,
Order of the Gauntlet – N female dwarf Priest.
Black hair, brown eyes, brown skin. She’s a gruff
soldier, formerly from Phlan, but has taken well to
being a leader and protector in Elmwood. Likely at
the Shrine to Tempus.
28
Rogon Stragoth, Emerald Enclave – N male half
orc Scout. Brown hair, brown eyes, gray skin. He
works closely with Shevarra Dyernina and the
other druids in Eldath’s grove as well. Rogon
is very secretive with his association with the
Emerald Enclave. Rogon does not put up with
racial hatred – he got enough of that in Hillsfar to
last him his whole life. Likely at his ranch or out in
the forest.
Norin Steelstrike, Lord’s Alliance – LN female
dwarf Spy. Brown hair, black eyes, copper
skin. She keeps this work completely separate
from the Shield Trading Company and takes
her responsibilities deadly seriously. Norin is
inquisitive and asks questions whenever she
thinks it is appropriate. Likely at the Shield Trading
Company.
Fiorei Semyon, Zhentarim – LE female human
Noble. Black hair, dark eyes, mahogany skin. The
rest of Semyon and Daughters doesn’t know that
she’s in bed with the Black Network, so she’s
extremely circumspect with her dealings for
faction business. Fiorei thinks before she speaks,
and has a “can do” attitude. Of course, she always
makes sure that the things that get done benefit
Semyon and Daughters. Likely at the Sign of the
Shield.
E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
APPENDIX
Appendix: Galeb Duhr
Medium Elemental, Neutral
NPC / Monster Statistics Armor Class 16 (natural armor)
Hit Points 85 (9d8+45)
Barlgura Speed 15 ft. (30 ft. when rolling, 60 ft. rolling
Large fiend (demon), chaotic evil downhill)
Armor Class 15 (natural armor) STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
20 (+5) 14 (+2) 20 (+5) 11 (+0) 12 (+1) 11 (+0)
Hit Points 68 (8d10+24)
Speed 30 ft., climb 30 ft.
Damage Resistances bludgeoning, piercing, and
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA slashing from nonmagical weapons
18 (+4) 15 (+2) 16 (+3) 7 (-2) 14 (+2) 9 (-1)
Damage Immunities poison
Saving Throws Dex +5, Con +6 Condition Immunities exhaustion, paralyzed,
poisoned, petrified
Skills Perception +5, Stealth +5
Senses darkvision 60 ft., tremorsense 60 ft.,
Damage Resistances cold, fire, lightning
passive Perception 11
Damage Immunities poison
Languages Terran
Condition Immunities poisoned
Challenge 6 (2,300 XP)
Senses blindsight 30 ft., darkvision 120 ft., passive
False Appearance. While the galeb duhr remains
Perception 15
motionless, it is indistinguishable from a normal
Languages Abyssal, Telepathy 120 ft. boulder.
Challenge 5 (1,800 XP)
Rolling Charge. If the galeb duhr rolls at least 20
Innate Spellcasting. The barlgura’s spellcasting feet straight toward a target and then hits with a
ability is Wisdom (spell save DC 13). The barlgura slam attack on the same turn, the target takes an
can innately cast the following spells, requiring no extra 7 (2d6) bludgeoning damage. If the target
material components is a creature, it must succeed on a DC 16 Strength
1/day each: entangle, phantasmal force saving throw or be knocked prone.
2/day each: disguise self, invisibility (self only)
Actions
Reckless. At the start of its turn, the barlgura can
Slam. Melee Weapon Attack: +8 to hit, reach 5 ft,
gain advantage on all melee weapon attack rolls it
one target. Hit: 12 (2d6+5) bludgeoning damage.
makes during that turn, but attack rolls against it
have advantage until the start of its turn. Animate Boulder (1/Day). The galeb duhr
magically animates up to two boulders it can see
Running Leap. The barlgura’s long jump is up to
within 60 feet of it. A boulder has statistics like
40 feet and its high jump is up to 20 feet when it
those of the galeb duhr, except it has Intelligence 1
has a running start.
and Charisma 1. It can’t be charmed or frightened,
Actions and it lacks this action option. A boulder remains
Multiattack. The barlgura makes three attacks: animated as long as the galeb duhr maintains
one with its bite and two with its fists. concentration, up to 1 minute (as if concentrating
on a spell).
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft.
(10 ft. in demon form), one target. Hit: 11 (2d6+4)
piercing damage.
Fist. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft.
(10 ft. in demon form), one target. Hit: 9 (1d10+4)
bludgeoning damage.

29 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
APPENDIX
 Gas Spore Needle Blight
Large plant, unaligned Medium Plant, Neutral Evil
Armor Class 5 Armor Class 12 (natural armor)
Hit Points 1 (1d10+-4) Hit Points 11 (2d8+2)
Speed 0 ft., fly 10 ft. (hover) Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
5 (-3) 1 (-5) 3 (-4) 1 (-5) 1 (-5) 1 (-5) 12 (+1) 12 (+1) 13 (+1) 4 (-3) 8 (-1) 3 (-4)

Damage Immunities poison Condition Immunities blinded, deafened

Condition Immunities blinded, deafened, Senses blindsight 60 ft. (blind beyond this radius),
frightened, paralyzed, poisoned, prone passive Perception 9
Senses blindsight 30 ft. (blind beyond this radius), Languages understands Common but can’t speak
passive Perception 5 Challenge ¼ (50 XP)
Languages – Actions
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP) Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft,
Death Burst. The gas spore explodes when it one target. Hit: 6 (2d4+1) slashing damage.
drops to 0 hit points. Each creature within 20 feet
Needles. Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, range
of it must succeed on a DC 15 Constitution saving
30/60 ft., one target. Hit: 8 (2d6+1) piercing
throw or take 10 (3d6) poison damage and become
damage.
infected with a disease on a failed save. Creatures
immune to the poisoned condition are immune to
this disease.
Spores invade and infect a creature’s system,
killing the creature in a number of hours equal to
1d12+ the creature’s Constitution score, unless the
disease is removed. In half that time, the creature
becomes poisoned for the rest of the duration.
After the creature dies, it sprouts 2d4 Tiny gas
spores that grow to full size in 7 days.
Eerie Resemblance. The gas spore resembles a
beholder. A creature that can see the gas spore
can discern its true nature with a successful DC 15
Intelligence (Nature) check.
Actions
Touch. Melee Weapon Attack: +0 to hit, reach 5 ft,
one target. Hit: 1 poison damage, and the creature
must succeed on a DC 10 Constitution saving throw
or become infected with the disease described in
the Death Burst trait.

30 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
APPENDIX
Roper
Large Monstrosity, Neutral Evil
Armor Class 20 (natural armor)
Hit Points 93 (11d10+33)
Speed 10 ft., climb 10 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
18 (+4) 8 (-3) 17 (+3) 7 (-2) 16 (+3) 6 (-2)
Skills Perception +6, Stealth +5
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 16
Languages -
Challenge 5 (1,800 XP)
False Appearance. While the roper remains
motionless, it is indistinguishable from a normal
cave formation, such as a stalagmite.
Grasping Tendrils. The roper can have up to six
tendrils at a time. Each tendril can be attacked (AC
20; 10 hit points; immunity to poison and psychic
damage). Destroying a tendril deals no damage to
the roper, which can extrude a replacement tendril
on its next turn. A tendril can also be broken if a
creature takes an action and succeeds on a DC 15
Strength check against it.
Spider Climb. The roper can climb difficult
surfaces, including upside down on ceilings,
without needing to make an ability check.
Actions
Multiattack. The roper makes four attacks with its
tendrils, uses Reel, and makes one attack with its
bite.
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft, one
target. Hit: 22 (4d8+4) piercing damage.
Tendril. Ranged Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 50
ft., one target. The target is grappled (escape DC
15). Until the grapple ends the target is restrained
and has disadvantage on Strength checks and
Strength saving throws, and the roper can’t use the
same tendril on another target.
Reel. The roper pulls each creature grappled by it
up to 25 feet straight toward it.
Shield Guardian
Large Construct, Unaligned
Armor Class 17 (natural armor)
Hit Points 142 (15d10+60)
Speed 30 ft.
31
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
18 (+4) 8 (-1) 18 (+4) 7 (-2) 10 (+0) 3 (-4)
Damage Immunities poison
Condition Immunities charmed, exhaustion,
frightened, paralyzed, poisoned
Senses blindsight 10 ft, darkvision 60 ft., passive
Perception 10
Languages understands commands given in any
language but can’t speak
Challenge 7 (2,900 XP)
Bound. The shield guardian is magically bound to
an amulet. As long as the guardian and its amulet
are on the same plane of existence, the amulet’s
wearer can telepathically call the guardian to travel
to it, and the guardian knows the distance and
direction to the amulet. If the guardian is within
60 feet of the amulet’s wearer, half of any damage
the wearer takes (rounded up) is transferred to the
guardian.
Regeneration. The shield guardian regains 10 hit
points at the start of its turn if it has at least 1 hit
point.
Spell Storing. A spellcaster who wears the shield
guardian’s amulet can cause the guardian to store
one spell of 4th level or lower. To do so, the wearer
must cast the spell on the guardian. The spell
has no effect but is stored within the guardian.
When commanded to do so by the wearer or
when a situation arises that was predefined by the
spellcaster, the guardian casts the stored spell with
any parameters set by the original caster, requiring
no components. When the spell is cast or a new
spell is stored, any previously stored spell is lost.
Actions
Multiattack. The shield guardian makes two fist
attacks.
Fist. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft, one
target. Hit: 11 (2d6+4) bludgeoning damage.
Reactions
Shield. When a creature makes an attack against
the wearer of the guardian’s amulet, the guardian
grants a +2 bonus to the wearer’s AC if the
guardian is within 5 feet of the wearer.
E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
APPENDIX
 Yochlol Actions
Medium fiend (demon, shapechanger), chaotic evil Multiattack. The yochlol makes two melee attacks.
Armor Class 15 (natural armor) Slam (Bite in Spider form). Melee Weapon Attack:
Hit Points 136 (16d8+64) +6 to hit, reach 5 ft. (10 ft. in demon form), one
Speed 30 ft., climb 30 ft. target. Hit: 5 (1d6+2) bludgeoning (piercing
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
in Spider form) damage plus 21 (6d6) poison
15 (+2) 14 (+2) 18 (+4) 13 (+1) 15 (+2) 15 (+2) damage.
Mist Form. The yochlol transforms into toxic mist
Saving Throws Dex +6, Int +5, Wis +6, Cha +6 or reverts to its true form. Any equipment it is
Skills Deception +10, Insight +6 wearing or carrying is also transformed. It reverts
to its true form if it dies.
Damage Resistances cold, fire, lightning;
bludgeoning, piercing, and slashing from While in mist form, the yochlol is incapacitated
nonmagical weapons and can’t speak. It has a flying speed of 30 feet, can
hover, and can pass through any space that isn’t
Damage Immunities poison
airtight. It has advantage on Strength, Dexterity,
Condition Immunities poisoned and Constitution saving throws, and it is immune
Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 12 to nonmagical damage.
Languages Abyssal, Elvish, Undercommon While in mist form, the yochlol can enter a
Challenge 10 (5,900 XP) creature’s space and stop there. Each time that
Shapechanger. The yochlol can use its action creature starts its turn with the yochlol in its space,
to polymorph into a form that resembles a the creature must succeed on a DC 14 Constitution
female drow or giant spider, or back into its true saving throw or be poisoned until the start of its
form. Its statistics are the same in each form. next turn. While poisoned in this way, the target is
Any equipment it is wearing or carrying isn’t incapacitated.
transformed. It reverts to its true form if it dies.
Magic Resistance. The yochlol has advantage on
saving throws against spells and other magical
effects.
Spider Climb. The yochlol can climb difficult
surfaces, including upside down on ceilings,
without needing to make an ability check.
Innate Spellcasting. The yochlol’s spellcasting
ability is Charisma (spell save DC 14). The yochlol
can innately cast the following spells, requiring no
material components.
At will: detect thoughts, web
1/day: dominate person
Web Walker. The yochlol ignores movement
restrictions caused by webbing.

32 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
APPENDIX
Vine Blight
Medium Plant, Neutral Evil
Armor Class 12 (natural armor)
Hit Points 26 (4d8+8)
Speed 10 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
15 (+2) 8 (-1) 14 (+2) 5 (-3) 10 (+0) 3 (-4)

Skills Stealth +1
Condition Immunities blinded, deafened
Senses blindsight 60 ft. (blind beyond this radius),
passive Perception 9
Languages understands Common but can’t speak
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
False Appearance. While the blight remains
motionless, it is indistinguishable from a tangle of
vines.
Actions
Constrict. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach
10 ft, one target. Hit: 9 (2d6+2) bludgeoning
damage, and a Large or smaller target is grappled
(escape DC 12). Until this grapple ends, the target
is restrained, and the blight can’t constrict another
target.
Entangling Plants (Recharge 5-6). Grasping roots
and vines sprout in a 15-foot radius centered on
the blight, withering away after 1 minute. For
the duration, that area is difficult terrain for non-
plant creatures. In addition, each creature of the
blight’s choice in that area when the plants appear
must succeed a DC 12 Strength saving throw or
become restrained. A creature can use its action to
make another DC 12 Strength check, freeing itself
or another entangled creature within reach on a
success.

33 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
APPENDIX
 Maps
Elmwood – 100’ grid

34 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
APPENDIX
Travel through the Cormanthor Rimwood, 5 mile grid

35 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
APPENDIX
 Encounter 3, 5’ grid

36 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
APPENDIX
Encounter 5, 5’ grid

37 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
APPENDIX
 Encounter 6, 5’ grid

38 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
APPENDIX
Why are you in Elmwood?

39 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
APPENDIX
40 E L M 1 - 1 / T H E S AG E O F C O R M A N T H O R :
APPENDIX
 THE LOST
SANCTUM by
Ben Heisler & Paige Leitman
Puzzle design by M. Sean Molley
with ample assistance from
Jeremy Arnold, Dave Brainard, Albert Degenaar, Caleb Foth,
Jason Gonding, Jim Harrison, Ginny Loveday, Eric Menge, M.
Sean Molley, and Keaton Stamps.
Adventure Code: ELMW1-2
Terrible news indicates that some vestige of the long-dead god Moander might
be active in the forests near Elmwood. The Town Council is seeking clever
adventurers to brave the perils of the Cormanthor forest to breach a lost
wizard’s sanctum in search of a way to protect the town.
A four-hour adventure for 5th - 10th level characters

Producer: Baldman Games

Core Administrator: Ben Heisler & Paige Leitman
Editing and Layout: Encoded Designs
Cartography: The Elmwood Team
Organized Play: Chris Lindsay
D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall,
Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks, Alan Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster
Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League, all other Wizards of the Coast product names, and their respective
logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive likenesses
are property of Wizards of the Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America.
Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the express written
permission of Wizards of the Coast.
©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31,
2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK.
 100% of the author share of the profits from these adventures
will be given to the following as a charitable donation:

Second Harvest Food Bank of East Tennessee

136 Harvest Lane
Maryville, TN 37801
https://secondharvestetn.org/

Second Harvest Food Bank is the East Tennessee region’s largest hunger-
relief charity; operating programs in 18 counties. The food bank secures and
distributes over 18 million pounds of food and grocery products annually
through a network of over 500 partnering non-profit organizations such as
food pantries, soup kitchens, emergency shelters and schools. This charity
has a near-perfect score on Charity Navigator.

(https://www.charitynavigator.org/index.cfm?bay=search.summary&orgid=5524)

Additionally, the food bank enthusiastically hosts the “Save Versus Hunger”
charity convention each spring, where a lot of D&D gets played.
 Introduction
Welcome to Tales of Good & Evil, , a D&D Adventurers League
adventure, Part One of the Misaligned Trilogy.

This adventure is designed for three to seven 1st - 4th level characters, and is optimized
for five 3rd-level characters. Characters outside this level range cannot participate in this
adventure.
The adventure is set in the Moonsea region of the Forgotten Realms, in the city of Melvaunt..

The D&D Adventurers League Preparing the Adventure

This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of
the D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure,
players track their characters’ experience, treasure,
and other rewards, and can take those characters
through other adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a
store event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a
DCI number. This number is your official Wizards of
the Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have
a number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to
use to create and advance their characters. Players
can continue to play their characters after the
storyline season has finished, possibly participating
in a second or third storyline with those same
characters. A character’s level is the only limitation
for adventure play. A player cannot use a character
of a level higher or lower than the level range of a
D&D Adventurers League adventure.
For more information on playing, running
games as a Dungeon Master, and organizing games
for the D&D Adventurers League, please visit the
D&D Adventurers League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
• Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
• Read through the adventure, taking notes
of anything you’d like to highlight or remind
yourself while running the adventure, such as a
way you’d like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d
like to use in a combat.
• Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
• Gather together any resources you’d like to
use to aid you in running this adventure--such
as notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and
battlemaps.
• If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.

3 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:

I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
• Character name and level
• Character race and class
• Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most
common passive ability check
• Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, etc.)
Players that have characters outside the
adventure’s level range cannot participate in
the adventure with those characters. Players
with ineligible characters can make a new 1st-level
character or use a pregenerated character. Players
can play an adventure they previously played or
ran as a Dungeon Master, but not with the same
character.
Ensure that each player has an official adventure
logsheet for his or her character (if not, get one from
the organizer). The player fills out the adventure
name, session number, date, and your name and
DCI number. In addition, the player also fills in the
starting values for experience, gold, downtime,
renown, and number of permanent magic items. He
or she fill in the other values and write notes at the
conclusion of the session. Each player is responsible
for maintaining an accurate logsheet.
If you have time, you can do a quick scan of
a player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing
looks out of order. If you see magic items of very
high rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you
can ask players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict
item use or ask them to use a standard ability
score array. Point players to the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and
it’s the beginning of an adventure or episode,
they can declare their activity and spend the days
now. Alternatively, they can do so at the end of
the adventure or episode. Players should select
their characters’ spells and other daily options
prior to the start of the adventure, unless the
adventure specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread
the adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
4 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, you may see sidebars
to help make adjustments for smaller/larger
groups, and characters of higher/lower levels than
the optimized group. Most of the time, this is used
for combat encounters.
You may adjust the adventure beyond the
guidelines given. For example, if you’re playing
with a group of inexperienced players, you might
want to make the adventure a little easier; for
very experienced players, you may want to make
it a little harder. Therefore, five categories of
party strength have been created for you to use
as a guide. Feel free to use a different adjustment
during the adventure if the recommended party
strength feels off for the group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of
five 8th-level characters. To figure out whether
you need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
• Add up the total levels of all the characters
• Divide the total by the number of characters
• Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round
fractions of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table:
Determining Party Strength
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very Weak
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very Strong
I N T RO D U C T I O N
Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment
of the game for the players. You help guide the
narrative and bring the words on these pages
to life. The outcome of a fun game session often
creates stories that live well beyond the play at the
table. Always follow this golden rule when you DM
for a group:
Make decisions and adjudications that
enhance the fun of the adventure when
possible.
To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
• You are empowered to make adjustments to
the adventure and make decisions about how the
group interacts with the world of this adventure.
Doing so is especially important and applicable
outside of combat, but feel free to adjust the
adventure for groups that are having too easy or
too hard of a time.
• Don’t make the adventure too easy or too
difficult for a group. Never being challenged
makes for a boring game and being
overwhelmed makes for a frustrating one.
Gauge the experience of the players (not the
characters) with the game, try to feel out (or
ask) what they like in a game, and attempt to
give each of them the experience they’re after
when they play D&D. Give everyone a chance to
shine.
• Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game
session moving along appropriately. Watch for
stalling, since play loses momentum when this
happens. At the same time, make sure that the
players don’t finish too early; provide them with
a full play experience. Try to be aware of running
long or short. Adjust the pacing accordingly
• Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free
to modify the text as you see fit, especially when
dialogue is present.
• Give the players appropriate hints so they can
make informed choices about how to proceed.
Players should be given clues and hints when
appropriate so they can tackle puzzles, combat,
and interactions without getting frustrated over
5 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
lack of information. Doing so helps to encourage
immersion in the adventure and gives players
“little victories” for figuring out good choices
from clues.
In short, being the DM isn’t about following
the adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about
facilitating a fun, challenging game environment
for the players. The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has
more information on the art of running a D&D
game.
Downtime and Lifestyle
At the beginning of each play session, players must
declare whether or not they are spending any days
of downtime. The player records the downtime
spent on the adventure logsheet. The following
options are available to players during downtime
(see the D&D basic rules or the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for more information):
• Catching up
• Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
commit to crafting a single item)
• Practicing a profession
• Recuperating
• Spellcasting services
• Training
Other downtime options might be available during
adventures or unlocked through play, including
faction-specific activities.
In addition, whenever a character spends
downtime days, that character also spends the
requisite expense for his or her lifestyle. Costs
are per day, so a character that spends ten days of
downtime also spends ten days of expenses
maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some downtime
activities help with lifestyle expenses or add
lifestyle expenses.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Spellcasting Services
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can
provide some spellcasting services. Characters
need to be able to travel to the settlement to obtain
these services.
Acolyte Background
A character possessing the acolyte
background requesting spellcasting
services at a temple of his or her faith
may request one spell per day from the
Spellcasting Services table for free. The only
cost paid for the spell is the base price for
the consumed material component, if any.
Melvaunt is a large city where any
acolyte can find a friendly shrine or
temple.
Spellcasting Services
Spell Cost
Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
Identify 20 gp
Lesser restoration 40 gp
Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
Remove curse 90 gp
Speak with dead 90 gp
Divination 210 gp
Greater restoration 450 gp
Raise dead 1,250 gp
Spell services generally available include healing
and recovery spells, as well as information-
gathering spells. Other spell services might be
available as specified in the adventure. The number
of spells available to be cast as a service is limited
to a maximum of three per day total, unless
otherwise noted.
6 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
Disease, Death, and Recovery
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might
not have the same characters return from session
to session, here are the rules when bad things
happen to characters.
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating Effects
A character still affected by diseases, poisons,
and other similar effects at the conclusion of an
adventure can spend downtime days recuperating
until such time as he or she resolves the effect to
its conclusion (see the recuperating activity in the
D&D Basic Rules).
If a character doesn’t resolve the effect
between sessions, that character begins the next
session still affected by the debilitating effect.
Death
A character who is killed during the course of
the adventure has a few options at the end of the
session (or whenever arriving back in civilization)
if no one in the adventuring party has immediate
access to a raise dead or revivify spell, or similar
magic. A character subject to a raise dead spell is
affected negatively until all long rests have been
completed during an adventure. Alternatively, each
downtime day spent after raise dead reduces the
penalty to attack rolls, saving throws, and ability
checks by 1, in addition to any other benefits the
downtime activity might provide.
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any
of the other options, the player creates a new
character. The new character does not have any
items or rewards possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing
any vital organs and is mostly whole) and the
player would like the character to be returned to
life, the party can take the body back to civilization
and use the dead character’s funds to pay for a
raise dead spell. A raise dead spell cast in this
manner costs the character 1,250 gp.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As above,
except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for the raise
dead spell is paid for by the party at the end of the
session. Other characters are under no obligation
to spend their funds to bring back a dead party
member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to
4 and a member of a faction, the dead character’s
body can be returned to civilization and a patron
from the faction ensures that he or she receives a
raise dead spell. However, any character invoking
this charity forfeits all experience and rewards
from that session (both those earned prior to and
after death during that session) and cannot replay
that episode or adventure with that character
again. Once a character reaches 5th level, this
option is no longer available.
Elmwood Overview
Though Elmwood has been a peaceful neighbor of
Mulmaster for centuries, Elmwood was destroyed
two years ago by a fire devastation orb that was
mishandled by the Cults of Elemental Evil (DDEX2-
2 Embers of Elmwood). There were few survivors.
Since then it’s been rebuilt and is a home for
many refugees from Phlan, Hillsfar, Mulmaster,
and the Underdark. The little town is growing
as it rebuilds, and is changing rapidly due to the
influence of the refugees.
Adventure Background
Over a thousand years ago, the elves of Myth
Drannor battled the avatar of Moander (an evil
deity of rot, corruption, and destruction) in its last
remaining major temple, located on present-day
Yûlash in the southwestern Moonsea area. The
elves slew the priests of Moander, banished the
Darkbringer, and sealed the essence of its avatar
beneath the ruins. However, Yûlash (and the rest
of the Moonsea) soon found more urgent problems
with the fall of Zhentil Keep, and the threat of the
ancient god was forgotten for more immediate
needs. The ancient god rose up from death only a
few decades ago, and was put down by a band of
brave adventurers in the events of the book Song of
the Saurials.
7 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
Zuggtmoy, the Demon Queen of Fungi, Lady of Rot
and Decay, has been active in Faerûn in the past
few years (given the events of Out of the Abyss).
This has allowed some vestige of the dead deity
Moander to stir in its slumber of death, which has
in turn empowered some of its ancient sites and
mad cult members. In Elmwood, this means that
the town’s grain has been magically contaminated
by the power of Moander so that when it is used
in the upcoming Greengrass festival, it can infect
many people with a rotting sickness that will
turn them into mindless vegetative slaves of the
Darkbringer.
In the first adventure of the Elmwood Trilogy, the
characters go to Elmwood before the Celebration of
Greengrass, one of Chauntea’s high holy days, only
to discover the town’s grain has been magically
contaminated. The local town council asks the
adventurers to consult a sage who lives on the
River Lis. After an encounter with the awakened
forest guardians, the sage directs the adventurers
to investigate a lost temple of Moander in the
Rimwood, where the the Rotting God was once
worshipped. The sage tasks the characters with
checking to see if there is unusual activity on at
this lost temple to Moander, and bringing him
back a seed for study. The adventurers find that
there is much unusual and wrong with the local
plants and battle through the overgrowth to
extract a seed. Once the characters return, the
sage uses a divining ritual to determine the source
of the contamination. From the ritual, the sage
determines that some echo of Moander’s power
is stirring and that the characters must warn
Elmwood. This warning for the characters to return
to Elmwood and seek a way to stop the spread of
corruption is the last the sage is able to give before
the ritual drives the sage insane. Following their
return to Elmwood, the Constable assembles the
Elmwood Council to determine the best answer for
the potential rise of Moander’s cult.
This adventure, the second in the Elmwood
trilogy, begins with problem-solvers, adventurers,
mercenaries, and the characters invited to the
Elmwood Council meeting.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Adventure Overview
This adventure is divided into four parts: the
introduction and call to action, two encounters
with opposition in the Rimwood, three encounters
in the Saurial mage Grypht’s sanctum, and the
conclusion. It is designed to be run in 4 hours.
Part 1: Introduction – The characters meet with
part of the Elmwood Council, who reveal the
events of ELMW1-1. As they discuss possible paths
forward, it comes to their attention that an Saurial
mage, Grypht, once faced the evils of Moander and
may have left some ways of dealing with the god’s
agents. The town leaders direct the adventurers to
a section of the Rimwood where his sanctum was
rumored to be, and continue preparation for the
Greengrass Festival.
Part 2: Death Stalks the Woods – The characters
travel to the Rimwood and find they are not alone
in seeking ancient knowledge. The characters
must overcome a group of treasure-hunting
necromancers.
Part 3: We Got Here First – The characters come
to the site of Grypht’s sanctum only to find that the
necromancers have gotten there first. They must
battle through the evil mages and their minions to
reach the sanctum.
Part 4: A Chilly Reception – Grypht warded his
sanctum with portals that summon all manner
of ice creatures. The characters must be able to
overcome the chilly reception to advance.
Part 5: The Long Sea Voyage – This puzzle,
left behind by Grypht, challenges the characters
for their reasoning and creativity, two of the
first things to be impaired by the corruption of
Moander.
Part 6: Grypht’s Sanctum – Once the characters
overcome the ice creatures and the puzzle, they
need to interact with a Very Intelligent Magic
Mouth (a near-sentient programmed illusion).
VIMM shares the long dead mage’s methods for
protecting people and places against Moander.
Part 7: Conclusion – the characters travel back to
Elmwood to find that the Greengrass Festival is in
full swing. Armed with knowledge from the Saurial
Grypht, they realize that Elmwood is in imminent
danger.
8 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
Pacing the Adventure
The adventure is designed for 4 hours of play. Use
the table below to budget your time, adjusting the
pace as necessary to keep on schedule. In a large
public event, you’ll need to keep an eye on the
clock.
Stage Playing Time
Introduction 30 mins
Death Stalks the Woods 60 mins
We Got Here First 45 mins
A Chilly Reception 45 mins
The Long Sea Voyage 30 mins
Grypht’s Sanctum 25 mins
Conclusion 5 mins
Adventure Hooks
This adventure begins in Elmwood, a tenday before
the Greengrass Festival, a famous Chauntean
fertility festival. Use one of the following hooks
to draw the players into the story, or devise your
own. Note that multiple hooks could easily be used,
especially if the characters are not known to each
other.
A True Threat. If characters took part in ELMW1-
1, they are aware that the return of Moander poses
a true threat to the area. The Elmwood Council is
especially grateful to them for all they’ve done, and
trust them to do more.
Party Preparations. Characters with the
entertainer, charlatan, noble, or soldier
backgrounds may be in Elmwood to help with the
upcoming Greengrass Festival. When the danger
is discussed, the characters are identified as
adventurers and recruited to help keep the party
on schedule.
Out on the Raggedy Edge. Characters with the
Outlander or Hermit background may have heard
of or been to the Rimwood before. Such characters
are sought out by Shevarra Dyernina, a druid
from the Glade of Eldath. She uses birds as animal
messengers to reach the adventurers and guide
them safely to Elmwood.
Faction Assignments: Each of the factions has
been given a specific assignment ahead of time.
Hand each player the appropriate portion of Player
Handout 1.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Part 1.
Introduction
The adventure begins at midday, a tenday before
the proposed start of the Greengrass Festival in
Elmwood. Characters have either been invited by
one of their factions or have come in from one of
the other adventure hooks.
A Council Meeting
Read the text below when you are ready to
start. If any characters took part in ELMW1-
1, the Elmwood Council members thank those
characters for bringing this information to light.
For roleplaying notes for the available council
members, see Appendix: NPC Summary.
Elmwood Hall is a sturdy two story building of
new construction like most buildings in the
recovering town of Elmwood. As workers set
up ladders to hammer in the nails for bunting
and other decorations for the upcoming
Greengrass Festival, it’s clear that the build-
ing was quickly made, but made to last. The
double doors stand open and welcoming.
Upon entering the building, you are greeted
by a myriad of offices, with a small display
board identifying the different office holders
and their locations. The board identifies only
one office on the second floor, that of the
town constable.
You are soon collected by the bai-
liff, Ithsander Bashir, and guided to a large
room on the main floor that has the nascent
pungent scent that gives the town its name.
Within, seated at a long, curved table, are a
number of important people in the town of
Elmwood, including the Priestess of Chaunt-
ea, leaders of some of the various groups
that have come to call Elmwood home, and
the constable herself. When you take your
seats, refreshments are brought out and
Constable Aliana Mathnir speaks up, “I’m
sorry, we started early. A group of adventur-
ers brought news of a threat to the town and
we’ve been discussing how we can deal
with it and keep the festival on track – if it
doesn’t go off without a hitch, we may never
recover our prestige and importance to the
Moonsea.”
9 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
Roleplaying Ithsander Bashir, Bailiff
Ithsander is a male half-elf with gold hair,
green eyes, and tan skin. He’s a handsome,
clean cut, neatly dressed man with perfect
posture and an easy smile. He is Constable
Aliana’s secretary, clerk, accountant,
bodyguard, and court bailiff. His official duties
include keeping Aliana’s appointment book,
helping collect taxes, and keeping Elmwood
Hall secure.
Ithsander is dedicated to the job and to
Constable Aliana. He is confident and not
afraid to stop others from entering her office
when they lack an appointment.
Quote: “Only those that have an appointment
can see the Constable today, she is quite busy.”
General Features
Architecture. The central governmental building
of Elmwood is a two-story Elmwood-frame
building. It has been erected with a mix of human
and dwarven styles, official and also defensible in
the event of another disaster.
Light. The room is lit by windows that provide
ample sunlight.
Smells. The council chambers of Elmwood Hall
have a strong, soiled smell like many buildings in
town that are of recent construction from hardy
but smelly elm.
Sounds. The council chamber is quiet other
than when the council members or adventurers
are speaking. Outside, there are the sounds of
laborers working to put the decorations up for the
upcoming festival.
The Elmwood Council
The Elmwood Council meeting has the following
in attendance: Aliana Mathnir (Constable), Shayad
(Priestess of Chauntea), Drake Holmstrumph
(Leader of the Elmwood survivors), Thyra
PA RT 1
 Stoneshoulders (Leader of the Phlan Refugees),
and Yao Seiju (Shield Company leader). There are
other members (Alksuth Cork, Aranda Fletcher,
Kala Namak, Larissa Aerasumé, and Nils Sankt)
who have not been able to attend this meeting for
various mundane and legitimate reasons. For more
information about these individuals as well as RP
notes, see Appendix: NPC Summary.
During the discussions, the characters have
become aware of the following (if they haven’t
already from playing ELMW1-1):
• The grain in the silos has rotted. This is from
some magical influence because the silos are
warded by Chauntea to keep the grain ready
to last through the harsh Moonsea winter. This
means that the town has had to barter and seek
outside supplies.
• A group of adventurers were hired to look into
the matter and eventually found the Sage of
Cormanthor. The sage urged them to look deep
in the forest, and, upon their return, he was able
to confirm that the rot was caused by the The
Darkbringer, Moander, before the Sage fell prey
to the dread lord’s afflictions.
• Moander once plagued the area, particularly in
Shadowdale, but his cult was destroyed. After
the battle, one of the people who banished
Moander (a Saurial called Grypht), disappeared.
• Thyra, the leader of the Phlan refugees who has
heard plenty of tales of adventurers, speaks up
about some things she’s heard about Grypht.
There was a group that came back to Phlan
from seeking Grypht’s sanctum. They’d come
back without two members, and told stories
of making it deep into the Rimwood. They’d
found standing stones on the edge of one of
the entrances into the Midwood deeper into
the forest. These standing stones were clearly
part of a powerful mage’s sanctum. If she
remembers correctly, the standing stones were
called the Varlaros Stones.
• Yao Seiju of the Shield Trading Company claims
that he’s sent scouts and adventurers deep
into the Rimwood before—but not in search
of Grypht’s Sanctum. He’s heard about the
Varlaros Stones, and his scouts reported some
magical auras there before. He didn’t have his
10
scouts look into it—risky business like that
is what adventurers are for. His scouts are all
deployed elsewhere, and it would take too
long to recall them for this expedition, but the
characters could probably reach the Varlaros
Stones in a few days. He will share the scouting
reports and maps to the Varlaros Stones with
the adventurers with the agreement that they
will not make or sell copies of these proprietary
reports. If the characters make or sell copies,
they gain the story reward of “Blacklisted by
the Shield Trading Company,” in the rewards
summary of this document.
• Shayad points out that with the festival in a
tenday, the adventurers must go, find a way
to protect the festival, and return before the
festival begins. It isn’t possible to delay the
festival. Yao Seiju agrees, as they’ve already
made costly deals for supplies to keep the
festival on schedule.
At this point, Constable Aliana requests that the
adventurers go to Varlaros Stones to look for
Grypht’s sanctum in hopes of finding a way to
protect the festival from Moander’s influence. She
can pay 500 GP from the council’s contingency
fund to hire them on. To sweeten the pot, Shayad
will offer each PC one spellcasting service free of
charge once they have returned with the way to
protect the festival. The woods are treacherous and
difficult to traverse, and hiking by foot is the best
way to navigate the woods.
The characters may have additional questions,
and some Elmwood Council members have a few
answers that may be helpful:
• It takes a few days travel through the
Cormanthor forest to reach the Varlaros Stones
in the Rimwood. Passing through the edge of
the Cormanthor forest is to invite danger, as the
ancient woods have been home to threats that
have lasted longer than the elves. Characters
should be on the lookout for the predators, both
mundane and magical, that call the area home.
• With the fall of Netheril and Myth Drannor,
the tumult in the Underdark, and plenty of
other tales of loss in the Cormanthor forest, it
is surrounded by rumors of lost artifacts and
powerful relics. It’s a hotbed for adventurers
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
PA RT 1
 and fortune-seekers, though many never leave
the forest alive.
• In order to make the journey there and back in
time for the festival, the characters will need
to travel light through the magical woods.
Whatever the solution is, it will have to be light
as they won’t be able to return in time with
anything that requires a wagon.
• The festival can’t be delayed because it falls
on Chauntea’s most holy day when her energy
flows through the land. Even if they did move
the festival to when the goddess’ blessings
weren’t at their peak, there are people coming
in from all over to be married for the festival
and they can’t move the weddings. The
reputation of the rebuilt town also depends on
the festival going off without a hitch to rebuild
more of their economic and political alliances.
If the characters wish to recall information
about Grypht or the Rimwood, they can do so
by succeeding on the following ability checks,
remembering more information on higher results,
as indicated below:
Grypht
• DC 11 Intelligence (History): Grypht was
a Saurial mage of some power who was an
avowed foe of Moander. He rose to prominence
a few hundred years ago fighting the second
rise of Moander.
• DC 13 Intelligence (History): Moander actually
brought the Saurials to Faerûn and the Saurials
supposedly came from a mythic place called the
Lost Vale.
• DC 15 Intelligence (History): Grypht’s magical
research focused primarily on evoking the
power of ice. It would stand to reason that any
defenses to his sanctum would probably deal
with issues of cold.
11
The Rimwood
(Emerald Enclave members enjoy advantage on
this check.)
• DC 11 Intelligence (History): The Rimwood
is the outer area of the Cormanthor forest.
Rumored to be ten to twenty miles wide, it is
home to a variety of dangerous creatures.
• DC 13 Intelligence (History): There are rumors
of a few paths through the Rimwood that
were once elven trails or roads of even older
civilizations that have been reclaimed. If you
could find one of those, it might shave some
time off of your travels, but it would be hard to
make sure it’s going where you need to go.
• DC 15 Intelligence (History): You’ve heard
from some other adventurers that resting
in the Cormanthor is difficult at best. Tales
of the woods include playing tricks, such as
shifting roots to prevent a good night’s rest,
trees bending to confuse maps, and illusions to
thwart those that would explore it.
The Varlaros Stones
• DC 14 Intelligence (Arcana): You’ve heard of
standing stones like these being focal points for
magical energies and potent rituals. If Grypht
was keeping his sanctum hidden, it would
be easy to mask spells in the presence of the
stones.
• DC 16 Intelligence (Arcana): You recall a story
that the stones were the pivotal site of an
ancient battle, and likely contain energies which
would be potent if they could be harnessed.
Development
From here, the characters can stock up and
make preparations for their expedition into the
Cormanthor forest.
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
PA RT 1
 Part 2. Death
Stalks the Woods
The initial travel to the Cormanthor forest takes a
day, and from there, the journey into the ancient
wood is challenging. While demonic presences
have been largely sealed away from the Moonsea
following the end of Season 3, the changes to the
woods have left them more twisted and perilous
than could be easily undone.
While the demonic influence on the
Cormanthor forest is somewhat diminished, the
foul magics that sprang from the Underdark have
been drawn into the roots, trunks, and leaves of
the forest’s ancient trees. Certain emotions are
heightened within the wood, and any travelers who
linger there are likely to find themselves pushed
to the brink of insanity. Those who sleep in forest
find their dreams haunted with hopelessness from
the many souls that have never returned from the
wood.
When the adventurers head into the Rimwood,
read the following:
You leave Elmwood, taking the road south,
and reach the edge of the Cormanthor for-
est as the sun is setting. You find rest on your
first night of travel with one of the logging
camps that works the edge of the forest. It’s
a pleasant evening of timbercutters wanting
to hear tales of your bravery. You’re in fine
spirits the following morning that you set foot
into the forest itself.
Soon the trees blot out the sun and you find
yourselves making your way south toward
the Varlaros Stones. A second day passes
moving through the woods before there is a
clear demarcation of the forest and the Rim-
wood. You are struck by the age and majes-
ty of the place. There is power to be found in
the ancient places of the world, and it is easy
to imagine this wood standing sentinel at the
dawn of Faerûn.
At this point, characters that are “outdoorsy” may
want to use skills and spells to aid their passing
through the edge of the Cormanthor forest. Spells
work fine and may obviate the following skill
12
checks, DMs are encouraged to use their judgment
as to how effective they are here in the area of the
wood that is not magical. Characters can attempt
one roll or the other as they travel, as they cannot
split their attention between both.
A character who says they are using the Shield
Company Scouting Reports gain advantage on
this check. Only one character can use the Shield
Company Scouting Reports in this way.
Navigation
• Roll failed: If the characters do not make at least
a DC 13 Wisdom (Survival) check, they are lost
in the woods and suffer the additional rules for
“Resting in Cormanthor” and also gain the “Late
to the Party” story reward.
• DC 13 Wisdom (Survival): As you travel, you
find yourselves able to pick up part of an old
path here and there, but seem to lose it after
a few minutes again. You aren’t in danger of
getting lost despite the tricks the forest seems
to be playing on you. Characters who succeed
at this level are affected by the “Resting in
Cormanthor” rules.
• DC 16 Wisdom (Survival): You are able to find
one of the lost paths, and with it the ruins of
refuges heading south. As you move, the light
in the forest seems just a little brighter and
the trek a little safer. Characters who make
this check are not affected by the “Resting in
Cormanthor” rules.
Flora and Fauna
• Roll failed: If the characters do not gain at least
a DC 13 Intelligence (Nature) check, they are
lost in the woods and suffer the additional rules
for “Resting in Cormanthor” and also gain the
“Late to the Party” story reward.
• DC 13 Intelligence (Nature): fair is foul and
foul is fair, the forest in the Rimwood is
overpowering and unnaturally strong in some
places and completely wrong in others. Plants
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
PA RT 2
 that should not grow in this area are growing
at unprecedented rates, and the animals are of
unusual size and angry countenance at your
presence. You are able to make your way despite
the confusing and often contradictory signs to
go deeper south into the woods. Characters who
succeed at this level are affected by the “Resting
in Cormanthor” rules.
• DC 17 Intelligence (Nature): Your knowledge
of nature is able to lead you toward where it is
more in harmony with your learnings, which
happens to be along old paths that have grown
over. As you move, you find ruins that you can
rest in where the forest seems to contradict
itself less.
Characters who make this check are not
affected by the “Resting in Cormanthor” rules.
Resting in Cormanthor1
The wood is unsettled by the influences of
the demonic taint of the Underdark, making
lingering there decidedly unpleasant. If the
party decides to take a long rest within the
wood, and it assumed they make three on
their way to the Varlaros Stones, they may do
so. However, upon completing the rest, the
following applies:
Exhaustion: Resting within Cormanthor does
not permit a character to recover levels of
exhaustion. Long rests otherwise function as
normal in terms of resources recovered.
Madness: Upon completing a long rest, each
character must succeed on a DC 15 Wisdom
saving throw. On a failure, their madness
level increases by 1 and they are affected by
the Madness of the Cormanthor forest (see
below).
Madness Level
Level Effect
1) Short-term madness (lasts 1d10 minutes)
2) Long-term madness (lasts 1d10 x 10
minutes)
3) Indefinite madness (lasts until cured)
1. See DDEX3-7 Herald of the Moon.
13
Madness of the Cormanthor Forest
The lost souls of the Cormanthor forest are
able to exert their influence on the region and
those who travel through it in the different
forms of madness that characters may develop.
Upon reaching madness level 3, instead of
rolling on the Indefinite Madness table on page
260 of the Dungeon Master’s Guide, roll on
the following table and the character gains the
madness listed below. Have the player note it
on his or her character sheet.
If the roll results in a madness already
possessed by the character, reroll until a new
result is reached.
01-20 Despair: “I often become withdrawn
and moody, dwelling on the insufferable
state of life.”
21-40 Hatefulness: “I am compelled to
make the weak suffer.”
41-60 Gloom: “l have no compunction
against tampering with the dead as we will
all die soon.”
6l-80 Discouragement: “All our efforts
are for naught as we will never escape this
wood. “
81-100 Hopelessness: “I am awash in the
awareness of life’s futility.”
General Features
The general features of the Rimwood section of the
Cormanthor forest are as follows:
Trees. The shallow-rooted blueridge and
needleleaf pines that grow here are well-suited
to the Rimwood’s sandy soil. The trees are often
touching, and most are around fifty or more feet
tall.
Light. The trees in the Rimwood are tall enough
and spaced close enough together that they only
allow dim light for atmosphere.
Sounds. A thick carpet of springy pine needles
dampens the Rimwood forest floor, reducing
footfalls to near silence and granting advantage to
creatures attempting to move silently.
Fauna. Thick vegetation makes larger mammals
less common in the Rimwood, and winged insects
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
PA RT 2
 and the birds that prey upon them thrive.
Terrain. The area of the necromancer’s dig is on a
hill. Note the differences in elevation on the map.
Going up over an elevation change line on the map
requires a successful DC 12 Strength (Athletics)
check, and requires an extra square of movement.
Necromancers
As the adventurers move through the Cormanthor
forest, they will find that they are not alone in
the Rimwood. Soon they discover that a team of
necromancers are here on their own tasks. This
encounter will show the characters that there are
dangerous folk in the Rimwood and will perhaps
add some time pressure for the characters to get
the protection rituals of Grypht—and promptly
get out. Additionally, this encounter introduces
persons and plots important to future Elmwood
adventures.
You press through the thick growth of the
Rimwood on your travels, finding areas that
are overgrown with plants and danger. As
you travel, the woods get darker and it is
harder to find the path or make sense of
directions that lead you south towards the
Varlaros Stones.
As you travel, you find yourself hearing
noises that have so far not been present in
the forest. A rhythmic striking fills the air and
echoes around the trees, and soon you
come upon a curious sight:
A camp here in the Rimwood! There are
a number of large humanoids digging with
shovels and pickaxes at the base of a hill,
and on the top of it there are a number of
tents and a few people. You see a figure in
heavy armor and a few in dark robes farther
up the hill. There are a couple of tents you
can see at the top of the hill, as well as a
wagon and a few unsaddled horses. As you
get closer, the stink of rot hits your nose.
General Features
In addition to normal Rimwood general features,
the following applies to this area:
Wards. The necromancers have laid down wards
over a broad area. These wards give the undead
advantage on saving throws against effects that
turn undead. The Characters will notice these
wards with a Passive Perception of 15 or higher.
14
Any spellcaster entering the area should be
prompted to make a DC 13 Intelligence (Arcana)
check. On a success, the character will notice the
wards and discern that that these wards can be
partially undone by spending an action to make
a DC 15 Intelligence (Arcana) check or a DC 16
Dexterity (Thieves’ Tools) check. The wards are
disabled only after three successful checks. Each
check takes an action.
Learning More About the Competition
The others are a group of necromancers looking
for lost artifacts for their mage-lord. They are
unaware of any larger plot connected to Moander.
The necromancers are wary, but not immediately
intent on violence. They will make an effort to
talk to the characters first, if possible. Eventually,
they ultimately see the characters as a source of
additional undead labor. Give the players about 5
minutes to consider what they’re going to do; then
encourage them to make a decision in-character.
If they spend more than 10 minutes thinking
about what to do, then the necromancers spot
the characters and start heading toward them
but keep their labor between them and the player
characters.
Characters can glean further information
by succeeding on the following ability checks,
gathering more information on higher results, as
indicated below:
History
• DC 12 Intelligence (History): This group
looks well organized and like they have
good discipline. They also look relatively
unsupported, which means they must have
a larger vanguard somewhere nearby. It’s
possible if you engage these people, more will
come.
• DC 15 Intelligence (History): The crest on the
flag near the tents is an uncommon one, and it
doesn’t seem to belong to any of the factions or
major players around the Moonsea.
Arcana
• DC 10 Intelligence (Arcana): Those robes are
wizards robes of some sort.
• DC 12 Intelligence (Arcana): Judging by the
way he holds that staff, that’s a necromantic
overhand grip. Typical of the school.
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
PA RT 2
 • DC 15 Intelligence (Arcana): This isn’t the kind
of work appropriate for an archmage; these are
likely to be some wizard’s minions.
Religion
• DC 10 Intelligence (Religion): There’s
something off about how methodically those
diggers keep digging.
• DC 12 Intelligence (Religion): Only undead
or constructs have that kind of supernatural
endurance.
• DC 15 Intelligence (Religion): Those look more
like zombies than anything else. They’re tough
and strong, but easy to hit. You need to hit them
really hard or with holy power to make them
stay down.
Perception
• DC 7 Wisdom (Perception): It looks like a
variety of ogres.
• DC 10 Wisdom (Perception): If you can see the
group from here, it’s likely they can see you
right back unless you get into cover.
• DC 12 Wisdom (Perception): The workers don’t
seem to be armed, and the people don’t seem to
be paying any attention to them. What kind of
worker needs no supervision?
• DC 15 Wisdom (Perception): They don’t seem
to be actively looking around too much; they
probably think they’re alone here. If you went
around to that copse of woods, you could
probably get within 50 feet of them if you were
quiet.
Talking to the Necromancers
If approached by the characters, the necromancers
immediately call the zombies to attention and
put the creatures between the adventurers and
themselves. Despite this defensive posture, the
necromantic delegation is entirely happy to talk
to the characters for a while before resorting
to violence. They want to know more about the
characters and how they came to the Rimwood—
information potentially useful to their lord
Tyranne. Keep the necromancers’ agenda in
mind and try to extract that information from the
characters before giving them of the necromancers’
15
information. Some groups will immediately set
upon the necromancers and attack, which is also
an entirely valid way to approach the encounter.
What the necromancers know:
• They know the name and faction of the
character with the highest renown. If
the character’s faction is Zhentarim, the
necromancers don’t actually mention the
Zhentarim, but they indicate that they know for
whom the adventurer works.
• They are searching for ancient fragments of
prior civilizations here, particularly Netherese
magic items.
• It’s possible that Netherese relics rained down
here as part of the final fall when Elminister
brought Netheril down.
• They serve a necromancer mage-lord
named Tyranne Epaline. Julnar is one of her
apprentices. They speak of her with great
respect and are unwilling to give the characters
more information than that.
What the necromancers want to know:
• What are the characters doing here? Who sent
them? Where are they from?
• If the PCs mention the sanctum, the
necromancers want to know where it is.
• What do the characters know about the
contents and defenses of the sanctum?
• If Moander is mentioned, the necromancers
want to know as much as the characters will tell
them.
Roleplaying Hallvor, Deathguard
Hallvor is a brawny human man in his early
twenties with dark brown skin and dark,
perceptive eyes. His scalp is shaved bald, and
he has a filigree of bright yellow tattoos across
his scalp, face, and neck. He’s wearing a gold
torc, that sparkles with deep red rubies and
shining onyx—seemingly some sort of mark
of rank. He smiles quickly and has a friendly
easy-going demeanor. He’s not looking for
a fight, but he won’t back down from one,
either. He is a vicious combatant and prefers
to deliver a swift coup de grâce to downed
opponents—thereby making them
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
PA RT 2
 more susceptible to his masters’ necromantic
practices.
Quote: “Hah! Don’t mistake my reluctance to
start a fight to mean I’m unwilling to finish
one.”
Roleplaying Julnar, The Apprentice
Julnar is a handsome half-elven man in his
mid-thirties, with fair skin that tends to
freckle and dark hair down just past his ears.
His face and his brown eyes are thoughtful.
He’s extremely curious, and always looking
for his own advantage. While he is confident
his group can handle the characters in a fight,
he seeks to chat them up first to learn what
they know.
Quote: “I’m quite curious to know what you’re
doing so far from civilization. Perhaps we don’t
trust each other, but that’s no reason to draw
steel immediately.”
The Limits of Diplomacy
Once the necromancers feel that they’ve extracted
all the information they can from the characters,
they decide the conversation is over and intend
to add the adventurers’ bodies to the zombies
working for them—and any good pieces of gear
among them to their gift for mage-lord Tyranne.
“Hah,” Julnar the Apprentice says, “excel-
lent. Well, thank you for the intelligence.” He
rubs his hands together with eagerness. “We
will now use you to replace the manpower
we’ve lost. Thank you, from the bottom of my
heart, for your excellent service to the glory
of mage-lord Tyranne Epaline. Perhaps you’ll
even have a place of honor as a ghoul or a
wight in her vanguard someday.”
Julnar flicks his wrist and a spectral form
appears next to him. “Go to our mage-lord,
and tell Lady Epaline that soon we will have
a gift—the bodies of [Name of the charac-
ter with the highest renown] and [his/her]
minions. Tell her she was right: sooner or later
we’d need to bloody the nose of [charac-
ter’s faction].” The spectral form nods and
sinks into the earth, and the necromancer
and his forces turn to face you. “I’ll try to
make it quick in thanks for your cooperation.”
16
At that, the necromancer mage Julnar and his
knight defender Hallvor ready to fight. Between
them and the party are their workforce of eight
ogre zombies. Their six commoner servants scatter
away from the battlefield. Refer to the “Dig Site”
map.
Map Details
• Going up over an elevation change line on
the map requires a successful DC 12 Strength
(Athletics) check and counts as 1 square of
difficult terrain. If the check is failed, they
cannot pass at that square this turn.
• The pit is difficult terrain.
• The locations of the wards are shown on
the map. Those are the locations where the
characters can take actions to disable the wards.
• The starting locations of the mage, knight, and
ogre zombies are shown.
• The camp with the tents and wagon are in the
northwest corner of the map.
• The characters approach from the southeast.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Remove four ogre
zombies.
• Weak party: Remove three ogre zombies.
• Strong party: Replace the knight with a
gladiator and remove one ogre zombie.
• Very strong party: Replace the knight
with a gladiator, replace the mage with an
archmage, and remove five ogre zombies.
Suggested Tactics
You may choose to use these tactics if you believe
it is appropriate for your game. The necromancer
mage’s retinue will fight to the death. They have
no fear of death and they have much more fear of
Tyranne. If somehow captured by the characters,
they will say nothing. If charmed, they will tell the
characters about the glory of their mage-lord and
her plans to exploit and take over the nearby lands
to bring peace and the glory of undeath to the
Moonsea.
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
PA RT 2
The knight draws his greatsword and heads into
combat. His first action is to use his Leadership
ability which gives his allies 1d4 to attack rolls and
saving throws (critical to helping the mage make
concentration rolls to maintain invisibility). The
knight will focus on engaging the front line fighters.
He will save his reactions to parry attacks.
The mage is already under the effects of Mage
Armor. He opens with Greater Invisibility (cast
on himself) and then targets low-Constitution
spellcasters and ranged combatants in the back
line with Cone of Cold. He will seek to put Fireballs
on low-Dexterity characters in heavy armor or
lower hit point combatants. He will attempt to
Counterspell Spirit Guardians and healing spells,
as well as large area of effect spells that include
him in the area. If he is the last one alive, he
will stealthily flee (remember the advantage to
Dexterity (Stealth) checks to move silently in the
Rimwood) with invisibility if able.
The zombies are there as cannon fodder.
They’ll screen the mage to keep the characters off
him.
If the opposition is enhanced due to party APL:
Julnar the archmage has already cast Mage Armor
on himself. He will open with Time Stop. He will
then move to an appropriate distance away, cast
Greater Invisibility on himself and then catch
heavy armor characters or non-spellcasters in
a hemispherical Wall of Force (so the party is
separated), or as many characters as possible in
a Lightning Bolt cast as an 8th level spell. He will
attempt to Counterspell Spirit Guardians and
healing spells. He will seek to put Cone of Cold
on low-Constitution ranged combatants, try to
Banish particularly powerful combatants. If his
concentration is broken, his next spell will be
Globe of Invulnerability. If he is in melee combat,
he will cast Misty Step to escape or use Shocking
Grasp and then move away when his attacker can’t
use reactions. Remember that as an archmage, he
casts as an 18th level caster, meaning his cantrips
deal 4d10 damage (Fire Bolt) and 4d8 damage
(Shocking Grasp). If he is the last one alive, he
will stealthily flee (remember the advantage to
Dexterity (Stealth) checks to move silently in the
Rimwood) with Invisibility if able.
17
Hallvor the gladiator will try to shield bash
front line opponents to the ground, to try to set up
the ogre zombies to attack with advantage. He will
ready an attack action (if necessary) to go right as
the ogres move into melee range with a character.
He will save his reactions to parry attacks.
If the fight is too long because of the high hit
point values of the ogre zombies, then they will fall
apart when the necromancer is dead.
Developments
Following the encounter, if the characters go
looking for the scattered commoners, they find
their bodies full of self-inflicted wounds—and
that all of them are missing their tongues. If
the characters want to take a long rest after the
fight, they find that the necromancer’s wards
(if they are still intact) protect them from the
“Resting in Cormanthor” rules. Do remind them
that the situation in Elmwood is dire. From the
necromancers’ encampment, it is another day of
travel to reach the Varlaros Stones.
Treasure
The knight and mage have a cache of 200 gp of
travelling funds. Additionally, Hallvor (the knight)
has a heavy gold torc, with deep red rubies and
shining onyx worth 500 gp. Julnar (the mage) has
a silver dagger, which is largely worthless, but the
large amethyst in the pommel is flawless with deep
indigo highlights and is worth 500 gp. Additionally,
they’ve already dug up some interesting
Netherese artifacts including a white gold tiara
with moonstones, an ancient ivory wand chased
with platinum, and an ancient text of Netherese
history. To the right collector, the collective set
of these items would be worth a total of 300 gp.
Additionally, they find Julnar’s spellbook (with the
spells in his stat block, depending on whether he is
a mage or an archmage).
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
PA RT 2
 Part 3. We
Got Here First
This encounter also occurs in the Rimwood and the
conditions of the previous encounter still apply.
Paraphrase the following when the characters
press on depending on their actions:
The next day of travel passes more or less
uneventfully for a haunted, shifting wood.
Finally, you reach your destination: a large
clearing in the forest that feels like an oppor-
tunity to finally breathe after the claustropho-
bic confines of the forest.
The success is fleeting, though, as you find
that among the standing stones are a num-
ber of banners and a small camp – the ban-
ners of Mage-Lord Tyranne Epaline.
Unlike last confrontation, however, there is no
time for you to formulate or plan or attempt
diplomacy or stealth before the camp rises to
action to face you!
A figure in a dark robe emblazoned with the
symbol of mage-lord Tyranne Epaline emerg-
es from near the stones and points angrily in
your direction. As she does, ominous silhou-
ettes of floating orbs, crowned with waving
eyestalks, emerge from around the stones
near the robed figure. As you ready to face
the mage and its beholder allies, there is an
explosion of earth, as figures start digging
themselves out of the ground near you,
accompanied by a terrible stench of rotting
flesh and hungry hisses.
Warned by Julnar’s spirit (or by Julnar himself if
the mage apprentice escaped), this encampment
has prepared for the adventurers. Multiple Alarm
spells have been set in the wood to respond to any
who do not bow in supplication to the Mage Lord,
and have detected the characters in their approach.
The necromancers have found the Varlaros
Stones and are seeking to understand the magic
around them and trying to find the entrance to
Grypht’s sanctum.
A necromancer (one of Julnar’s rivals) is lying
in wait for the characters. She sees this as an
opportunity to both make up for Julnar’s foolish
ambition and to replace him as one of Tyranne’s
chosen servitors. This mage has called in favors to
command two zombie beholders and is directing a
pair of ghouls to slay the characters.
18
General Features
The general features of the Rimwood section of
Cormanthor are as follows:
Trees. The shallow-rooted blueridge and
needleleaf pines that grow here are well-suited
to the Rimwood’s sandy soil. The trees are often
touching, and most are around fifty or more feet
tall. The vegetation in the areas marked as difficult
terrain provides half cover (+2 AC) and is lightly
obscured (Wisdom (Perception) checks are at
disadvantage).
Light. The trees in the Rimwood are tall enough
and spaced close enough together that they only
allow dim light for atmosphere.
Sounds. A thick carpet of springy pine needles
dampens the Rimwood forest floor, reducing
footfalls to near silence and granting advantage to
creatures attempting to move silently.
Fauna. Thick vegetation makes larger mammals
less common in the Rimwood and winged insects
and the birds that prey upon them thrive.
Wards. The necromancers have laid down wards
over a broad area. These wards give the undead
advantage on saving throws against effects that
turn undead. The characters will notice these
wards with a passive perception of 15 or higher.
Any spellcaster entering the area should be
prompted to make a DC 13 Intelligence (Arcana)
check. On a success, the character will notice the
wards and discern that that these wards can be
partially undone by spending an action to make
a DC 15 Intelligence (Arcana) check or a DC 16
Dexterity (thieves’ tools) check. The wards are
disabled only after three successful checks. Each
check takes an action. The locations of the wards
are shown on the map. Those are the locations
where the characters can take actions to disable
the wards.
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
PA RT 3
Graves. The ghouls and ghasts dig themselves out
of the ground, leaving behind disturbed earth that
is difficult terrain. If there are additional undead,
place them as needed, with difficult terrain around
them.
The Standing Stones. The standing stones
resonate violence and bloodlust, and characters
standing inside the circle of stones enjoy the effects
of a critical hit on a natural roll of 19 in addition
to 20. The stones lose this ability if moved or
separated.
Foes. The starting locations of the mage, ghouls,
and beholder zombies are shown.
Characters. The characters approach from the
west.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Remove one beholder
zombie and two ghouls.
• Weak party: Remove one beholder
zombie.
• Strong party: Add one ghast and two
ghouls.
• Very strong party: Add three ghasts and
two ghouls.
Suggested Tactics
You may choose to use these tactics if you believe
it is appropriate for your game. The necromancer
(mage) and the zombie beholders start 80 feet
away if possible (well out of the range of most
undead turning effects and the short range of
crossbow snipers).
The beholder zombies target characters with
eyebeams every round. The mage casts Greater
Invisibility on herself (to protect herself), and
then casts Cone of Cold on apparent spellcasters in
the back. Ice Storm and Fireball require Dexterity
saves, so she will preferentially target spellcasters
and heavy armor fighters with those spells. She
will also attempt to Counterspell Spirit Guardians
and healing spells, or other spells as appropriate. If
the mage is the last one alive, she will stealthily flee
(remember the advantage to Dexterity (Stealth)
checks to move silently in the Rimwood) with
Invisibility if able.
19
The ghouls (and/or ghasts) take an action
each to dig themselves out of the ground, and then
move toward the characters. Their job is to make
sure the front line doesn’t reach the beholders and
the mage. The ghasts will move in to make sure as
many characters are in the stench aura as possible
(particularly low-constitution spellcasters).
Remember that ghasts (and ghouls within 30 feet
of ghasts) have advantage on saving throws versus
turning. The ghasts will let the ghouls attack first
(ready as needed) in the hopes that they can bite
paralyzed characters. Hits on paralyzed characters
are automatically critical hits.
As a reminder for your convenience, here is the
paralyzed condition:
PARALYZED
• A paralyzed creature is incapacitated, can’t take
actions or reactions, and can’t move or speak.
• The creature automatically fails Strength and
Dexterity saving throws.
• Attack rolls against the creature have
advantage.
• Any attack that hits the creature is a critical hit
if the attacker is within 5 feet of the creature.
The necromancer and all of her allies fight to the
death, and refuse to allow themselves to be taken
prisoner.
Treasure
The necromancer has a grotesque jeweled demon
skull among her belongings. It is plated with
electrum, and is covered in a pavé of moonstone,
quartz, chalcedony, and obsidian. The horns have
an elaborate scrimshaw of runes in infernal. It is
always warm to the touch. A particularly depraved
sort of collector would likely pay 1,000 gp for it.
She also has a scroll of blight (rare), a scroll
of speak with dead (uncommon), and a scroll of
bestow curse (uncommon).
Developments
If the characters want to take a long rest, they can
do so now without interruption. If the characters
take two long rests in the Rimwood outside of
normal travel, make note of it to give the characters
the story award “Late to the Party.”
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
PA RT 3
 Part 4.
A Chilly Reception
The old wizard knew that the followers of Moander
are particularly susceptible to cold. He set up
guardians that would capitalize on that weakness
and test anyone seeking his knowledge.
It takes cunning to find the remains of Gry-
pht’s tower, or stronghold, near the standing
stones. All you find are piles of worked stone,
perhaps the remains of a long-fallen structure,
all overgrown with decades, if not centuries,
of vegetation and lichen. An inspection of
the ruins shows, however, that some subsur-
face areas are still somewhat intact. You find
a gaping hole in the earth, at the bottom of
which is visible a gray and white tiled floor,
hidden behind a thicket of briars. As you en-
ter the tunnel, the temperature drops precip-
itously, chilling your equipment. Water con-
denses on metal buckles and weapons, and
your breath steams in the air. You notice the
condensation starting to turn to frost. There’s
a flicker of silvery white light ahead.
The characters can navigate the tunnel however
they like and take whatever reasonable
precautions they need. The tunnel walls and ceiling
are coated in brown mold (see checks below), but
there is a safe, if frigidly cold, path through the
middle of the 15-foot-wide tunnel.
The larger room ahead is cold but is lit by
some sort shimmering portals and a magical
barrier that closes off an arched doorway on
the far side of the room. The room is quiet as
a chilly tomb. There are a number of deep
scratches in the gray and white tile floors indi-
cating some long-ago conflict occurred here.
General Features of the Sanctum
Temperature. The whole complex is frigidly cold
because of brown mold (and other magics). The
ambient temperature is just above freezing. The
chill is intentional—to keep Moander’s faithful out,
or at least keep them at a disadvantage. Be sure to
remind the players that their characters’ breath
steams in the air, that they have goosebumps if
they have no cold weather gear, that the water in
their waterskins has turned to icy slush, and that
the cold is pervasive.
20
Lighting. The lighting is soft, watery, and eerie but
counts as bright light.
Brown Mold. Brown mold is growing in the
entrance tunnel. A passive Wisdom (Perception)
check of DC 13 or higher notices the growth. The
brown mold helps keep the sanctum cold. If the
players do not already know about brown mold,
the characters can make successful Intelligence
(Nature) checks to learn more about it, with
successively more information resulting from
higher check results, as indicated below.
• DC 10 Intelligence (Nature): The splotches of
fungal growth on the surfaces of this room are
brown mold.
• DC 12 Intelligence (Nature): The harmful effects
of brown mold extend a mere 5 feet from the
growths. The hazards should be simple enough
to avoid.
• DC 14 Intelligence (Nature): Brown mold
thrives on heat, undergoing sudden spurts of
growth in response to exposure to flame.
• DC 15 Intelligence (Nature): Despite an
apparent affinity for cold, brown mold
succumbs quickly to effects that chill or freeze.
Brown mold feeds on warmth, drawing heat
from anything around it. A patch of brown
mold typically covers a 10-foot square, and the
temperature within 30 feet of it is always frigid.
When a creature moves to within 5 feet of the
mold for the first time on a turn or starts its turn
there, it must make a DC 12 Constitution saving
throw, taking 22 (4d10) cold damage on a failed
save, or half as much damage on a successful one.
Brown mold is immune to fire, and any source
of fire brought within 5 feet of a patch causes it
to instantly expand outward in the direction of
the fire, covering a 10-foot-square area (with the
source of the fire at the center of that area). A patch
of brown mold exposed to an effect that deals cold
damage is instantly destroyed.
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
PA RT 4
Atmosphere. The underground ruins of Grypht’s
sanctum are cold, stony, and full of echoes. This is
a lonely, creepy place, with an ominous sense of
foreboding. It’s almost more of a mausoleum than a
wizard’s home.
Portals. The portals are silvery, shimmering, and
inert before the characters enter the room.
The Portals Open
Once at least one character enters the room, the
first set of portals opens. The DM should roll
initiative for all three of the following groups of
creatures. During the first round, five ice mephits
emerge on their initiative count. During the second
round, four winter wolves emerge on their
initiative count. During the third round a young
white dragon emerges on its initiative count. On
round four, the portals fail to allow frost giants
to enter, and on round 5, the portals open but
whatever was going to come through is gone.
Suggested Tactics
You may choose to use these tactics if you believe it
is appropriate for your game. The mephits will lay
down fog clouds to blind the characters and will
then try to herd them into a formation that makes
it easy for the dragon to catch them all in a breath
weapon. The dragon has blindsight, so the mephits’
Fog Clouds will give the dragon cover (and
advantage on attacks against blinded foes in the
fog cloud). The winter wolves will move in, breathe
on as many characters as they can and then focus
attacks on spellcasters and lightly-armored foes
in the back ranks. The wolves will stay together
so they have advantage on attacks and will try to
knock enemies prone, particularly if they can do so
in front of the dragon. The dragon uses its breath
weapon immediately when it enters combat, and
then savagely attacks the front line.
21
Round 1:
There is a wash of magical energy, and
concentric rings of blue-white light form in the
silvery portals along the walls. Bright motes of
power drift to the floor as the magical portals
flicker. Several small, fast creatures fly out of
one of the portals and zoom toward you,
giggling wickedly.
The portals let five ice mephits into the area as an
initial test.
Round 2:
The concentric circles of light pulse and sway,
and large wolves with bright blue eyes lope
out of the portals. Their icy-white fur is thick,
and they do not seem to be at all discomfort-
ed by the cold.
In the second round, a pack of four winter wolves
enter the area.
Round 3:
Again, the magic of the portals pulses, and
only one doorway has shifting movement
within it. A white, hissing, reptilian form comes
through the portal with an angry stride. The
creature’s body is 10 feet long, but its writhing
neck and tail extend past that. It looks at you
malevolently. Its jaws drop open and an icy
blast rolls through the room.
On the third round, a young white dragon enters
the fray.
Round 4:
Two exceptionally large portals activate, and
you hear drums and horns, and the crash of
giant footsteps. A pack of blue-skinned giants
in iron armor and furs start striding toward the
portals. One of them is bouncing a boulder
the size of a pony in the palm of her hand.
Suddenly, the portal makes a harsh static
buzz, and then a loud pop, and goes dark
before the giants are able to push through.
On the fourth round, there are no additional
combatants.
Round 5:
Another portal opens, and a blast of frozen
arctic air rolls through the already frigid room.
You see nothing but a blank, twilight arctic
tundra past the portal.
On the fifth round, there are no additional
combatants.
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
PA RT 4
 Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Remove four winter
wolves.
• Weak party: Remove three winter
wolves.
• Strong party: Add one young white
dragon and remove two winter wolves.
• Very strong party: Add one young white
dragon and add one winter wolf.
22
Developments
Once the chilly reception has been dealt with, the
shimmering barrier in the archway opens, and
characters can move to the puzzle in the next room.
They can take a short rest with no problems. If
they choose to take a long rest remind them that
the situation in Elmwood is dire but within the
sanctum they are immune to the effects of “Resting
in the Cormanthor.” If the characters take a long
rest in Grypht’s Sanctum, award them the “Late to
the Party” story reward.
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
PA RT 4
 Part 5. The
Long Sea Voyage
The characters enter the sanctum, only to discover
a wickedly clever puzzle.
As you move deeper into the ruined passage-
ways under the mountain, you emerge into
a wider chamber, some forty feet across and
sixty feet long with a ten-foot-high ceiling.
Dominating the center of the chamber is
a shallow, tiled pool at the base of a podium.
The top of the podium is etched with mark-
ings, and the tiles that make up the pool are
similarly marked.
On the other side of the podium, there
is a small stone boat about a foot and a half
long. There are a number of holes in the side
of the boat, perhaps indicating it was meant
to be manipulated without getting into the
surely frigid water.
Past that, there is an archway much like
the portals in the previous room on the oppo-
site wall. There must be a way here to open it.
If the characters approach the podium, hand them
Player Handout 2 – the Long Sea Voyage.
The “Ship Puzzle” map shows the general
conformation of the room.
General Features of the Room
Temperature. The whole complex is frigidly cold
because of brown mold (and other magics). The
ambient temperature is just above freezing. This
is intentional to keep Moander’s faithful out, or
at least keep them at a disadvantage. Be sure to
remind the players that their characters’ breath
steams in the air, that they have goosebumps if
they have no cold weather gear, the water in their
waterskins has turned to icy slush, and that the
cold is pervasive.
23
A. The Boat. The boat is warm to the touch and,
when examined, has the words “first”, “second”,
“third”, and “fourth” etched into it, which can be
made out from above. The holes on the sides and
top of the boat also look like they could easily fit
the tip of a 10-foot pole or the butt of a common
spear to make it easy to manipulate in the pool
without touching the water. The boat is about a
foot and a half tall.
B. The Pool. The pool is about eight inches deep,
and the floor of it is made of marked tiles that
correspond to the grid on page two of the Long Sea
Voyage Handout. The liquid of the pool is below
freezing temperatures and actively hazardous.
Anyone who touches the liquid must make a DC 15
Constitution saving throw. Characters who fail the
saving throw suffer 22 (4d10) cold damage, and
characters who succeed suffer half that amount.
On a failed attempt to speak the command
word jets spray the frigid liquid into the air, and
everyone in the room must make a Constitution
saving throw or suffer damage as if they had
touched the liquid. The spray doesn’t reach to the
ceiling, so the brown mold there is not killed.
C. The Portal. On the opposite end of the room,
there is an inactive portal. When the command
word “azure bonds” is spoken, it activates and
leads into the next area. If examined with a DC 13
Intelligence (Arcana) check, a character can tell the
activation mechanism linked to the pool, pillar and
boat. A DC 15 Intelligence (Arcana) check leads to
a character understanding that it is operated by a
command phrase.
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
PA RT 5
 D. The Podium. The podium is not magical, and its If you then look at the puzzle and read columns
etched story tells the tale on the Long Sea Voyage two and four, prime rows only (2, 3, 5, 7, and 11),
handout. you get the letters AZURE BONDS.
Watch the time – if the players are getting If someone looks at the puzzle and sees the
frustrated after a few minutes, give them a hint. words “AZURE BONDS” and correctly surmises
Give them another hint or two if they need it. that’s the password, then consider the puzzle
Reward good puzzle solving with inspiration. solved.
In order to solve the puzzle, the players must Developments
cut out the boat, and then put it on the proper
After completing the puzzle, another doorway
positions on the map. When they do, they should
magically opens revealing Grypht’s inner sanctum.
record the letters shown in the first, second, third,
If the characters take a long rest in Grypht’s
and fourth positions in that order. The captain’s
Sanctum, award them the “Late to the Party” story
log indicates that they ship should be pointed west
reward.
at the star in 1, 8 (READ). Then north towards the
heart in 6, 1 (ONLY). Then east toward the club in
12, 2 (COLS). Then south toward the smiley face
at 9,9 (TWOF). Then east toward the X at 11, 11
(OURP). Then south toward the X at 11, 11 (RIME).
Then north toward the Z at 2,3 (ROWS).
READ ONLY COLS TWO FOUR PRIME ROWS

24 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:

PA RT 5
 Part 6.
Grypht’s Sanctum
The sanctum is empty, as Grypht has long since
moved on. He has left a number of resources,
however, and a unique assistant to help him and
his disciples. This assistant remains here and can
provide the characters some exposition, a ritual to
protect against Moander, and a special gift to aid
them.
The rest of what is left of Grypht’s tower is a
few collapsed tunnels. You manage to find
enough open passages to travel about forty
feet, where another silvery ward fades in front
of you. Inside is a large room made of lighter
stone. It’s cool, clean, and there are many
large silver basins of water nearly five feet
across, with walkways between them.
General Features
Light. The room is full of silvery light that comes
from no apparent source. Everything is clear and
sharp edged in the light.
Atmosphere. There is no dust here. The room is
spotlessly clean, to the point that it looks unreal.
As the characters explore the room, a magic image
appears:
With a shimmer of bright yellow energy,
the figure of a dark-skinned human wom-
an with elaborately coiffed dark hair and
glowing yellow eyes flickers into existence.
The figure is translucent and insubstantial,
and is surrounded by yellow motes of light.
She looks over the group. “You must have
passed the tests that Grypht set. Excellent.
In that case, you are indeed the heroes that
I have been waiting for. I am not actually a
person, but rather a semi-autonomous spell.
You may think of me as a Very Intelligent
Magic Mouth.” The woman smiles pleasantly.
“Please tell me who you are, and why you
are here? Additionally, I must inspect your
ears, noses, and throats…”
It’s important the characters roleplay with VIMM
for a while. Doing so will help them internalize the
story narrative.
25
Roleplaying VIMM
VIMM is curious, intelligent, and possesses a
somewhat acerbic wit. It is direct, and doesn’t
possess much in the way of empathy. Its main
goal is to assist and inform those who make it
to the sanctum in defeating Moander.
Quote: “That question is irrelevant. What you
actually seek to know is…”
What VIMM knows:
• Before the VIMM will talk to the characters, it
must look into their ears, noses, and throats.
When asked about that, it points out that most
followers of Moander have plants growing
inside their heads, and it is just making sure
that the characters are not infected. Stress this
as an important diagnostic characteristic of
followers of Moander.
• Grypht set it up to become active when
someone passed the tests. It doesn’t know how
long it’s been because it doesn’t experience time
when inactive.
• VIMM doesn’t know where Grypht went or what
became of him.
• VIMM is insubstantial, and cannot move or
touch physical items.
“Please go to that cabinet, and take out all
three vials on the second shelf. Pour them into
this basin here. This will go much easier if one
or more of you can help with the scrying.”
Over the next while, the Very Intelligent Mag-
ic Mouth calls up and interprets images in the
basins of water.
In the water, you see a huge plant crea-
ture striding through a green forest leaving
a trail of destruction in its wake. The image
fades and then reappears, showing a group
of reptilian humanoids with oddly shaped frills
and horns building a huge pile of dead trees.
Again, the silent images shift, and you see an
eerie, low bog where the soil glows red with a
hellish hue, and a black river slides past like a
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
PA RT 6
 torrent of oil. A huge body of plant vines with
many mouths and eyes on stalks is quickly
covered in white ice, falling apart and crack-
ing into brittle pieces. This is some place not
in the mortal realm! The scrying pool is dark
for a long time, until you see a horrid, yet
lovely, female figure with long delicate veils
of lichen. Her whole body is made of mush-
rooms and fungus. It’s hard to guess at her
size until demons and myconids bow at her
feet, tiny in comparison to her gargantuan
stature. Where she walks in the Underdark,
plant life above her writhes and coils, burst-
ing with fecund rot, and some of the mutated
plants coil out of the ground, hauling human-
oid corpses up as they bloom. You can see
that some of them have mouths in the palms
of their hands, and that they are gnashing
their teeth hungrily, rotting tongues sticking
out and tasting the air. The grotesque tongues
grow into towering plants, each topped by a
pulsing seed.
Any character who wants to help may make a DC
15 Intelligence (Arcana) check. To determine how
many extra points of information are learned, sum
the total of checks that were made, minus the
checks that were failed. These successes add to the
clarity of the scrying and allowing VIMM to provide
more information.
Characters always learn that:
• “I will teach you a ritual that will ward off the
influence of Moander from an area. It’s a variant
on the hallow spell that takes some time to
Finally, the VIMM has a last gift for the characters
cast. It will also serve to remove or suppress
before they leave:
Moander’s influence on the recently infected if
you can get to them quickly enough, much like a
cure disease spell specifically for this purpose.”
VIMM teaches the characters the ritual over
the course of 8 hours, and gets them to write it
down.
• “I will also speed your journey out of the
Cormanthor forest, and protect you from the
insidious influence that has taken root among
the ancient trees.”
Extra information the characters may learn for
each successful check:
• “Apparently, a powerful demon lord associated
with rot and corruption, Zuggtmoy, has been
active in the world. Her presence—the woman
26
of mushrooms and fungus in the vision—stirred
up an echo of Moander’s power.”
• “What is stirring now… I cannot be sure what
it is. I believe it is merely an echo, a remnant of
Moander’s power. The spells woven into this
place cannot ascertain how ‘alive’ Moander
really is.”
• “One interesting thing about Moander’s
influence is that it thrives on decay. The undead
are immune to it, as are those things that were
never alive, like golems.”
• “Elmwood is the nexus of infection. That
makes sense. The town is a trade hub. Surely
the cultists of Moander will use the festival to
contaminate the food supplies of the region
with the Seeds of Moander.”
• “Seeds of Moander are semi-magical parasitic
plant seeds. They allow the dead god or one of
his powerful cultists to take over the mind of
a creature as they germinate and sprout. This
kills the host’s personality, drive, and artistic
sensibilities. The infected have plants growing
out of their ears or noses or mouths, and their
internal organs slowly transform into vegetable
matter.”
• “The persons and creatures infected by
Moander’s influence, and the creatures of its
cult, are generally quite sensitive to cold, hence
the defenses here.”
“Now, before you go, I have something else
for you that might help you resist the machi-
nations of Moander’s followers. Please open
this cabinet, and then open the false back.”
Behind the false back are two tubes of faintly
gleaming and intricately knotted gold wire.
“Those are Deft Armbands of Serendipitous
Magical Protection, constructed in the an-
cient Saurial way. They were originally a gift
for Grypht but as he’s nowhere to be found,
and Moander’s cultists are active, you should
have them.”
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
PA RT 6
Developments
If the characters want to take a long rest they
can do so without interruption, and within the
sanctum they are immune to the effects of “Resting
in the Cormanthor.” If the characters take a long
rest in Grypht’s Sanctum, award them the “Late to
the Party” story reward. At this point they should
be ready to leave the sanctum and go back to
Elmwood.
Conclusion
If the characters have gained the “Late to the Party”
story reward, read the following:
Realizing that the Greengrass festival is
starting, you force march through the night in
order to make it on time.
As the characters have finished in the Rimwood,
read the following:
As you depart the Rimwood, the thick growth
of trees does not seem as threatening and
misleading as it did on the way here. Though
the VIMM appeared to be an illusion, its gift
holds true and the paths out of the dense
Rimwood and into the edge of the Corman-
thor forest are without threat. Despite the gifts
from VIMM, it still takes a few days to pass
to the edge of the forest. The timber cutters’
camps are empty – everyone has left for the
celebration.
27
You press on and as you approach through
muddy roads, you can see that the prepara-
tions for the Greengrass festival were com-
pleted in your absence, with banners and
archways set along the road leading into the
town. As you draw nearer, off-beat music, just
out of tune, fills the air.
At the entrance to town, makeshift horse
stalls have been erected and plenty of carts
are parked, and people fill the streets. Hu-
mans, elves, dragonborn, and more are all
dressed for the occasion in what passes for
finery in greens and golds. And each of them
wears a wreath of vines or a crown of flowers.
Who knows how many of them could be in
Moander’s thrall, with their drunken dancing,
the loud and off-beat music, and festive garb
disguising the dread god’s influence
As the realization settles over you, a
young, dusty-skinned human girl and a
gnome approach, each wearing flowery
crowns and arms outstretched with coils of
vines and flowers. Excitedly they announce,
“The food came early and the party’s already
going. We made these just for you. Join us!”
Do you join the festivities or leave while you
still can?
The adventure continues in ELMW01-03
for those brave enough to join the festivities!
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
PA RT 6
 Rewards
Make sure note their rewards on their adventure
log sheets. Give your name and DCI number (if
applicable) so players can record who ran the
session.
Experience
Total up all combat experience earned for
defeated foes, and divide by the number of
characters present in the combat. For non-combat
experience, the rewards are listed per character.
Give all characters in the party non-combat
experience awards unless otherwise noted.
Combat Awards
Name of Foe XP per Foe
Archmage 8,400
Beholder Zombie 1,800
Ghast 450
Ghoul 200
Gladiator 1,800
Ice Mephit 100
Knight 700
Ogre Zombie 450
Mage 2,300
White Dragon, Young 2,300
Winter Wolf 700
Non-Combat Awards
Task or accomplishment XP per Char.
Puzzle 1,200
The minimum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 4,500
experience points.
The maximum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 6,000 experience
points.
Treasure
The characters receive the following treasure,
divided up amongst the party. Characters should
attempt to divide treasure evenly whenever
possible. Gold piece values listed for sellable
gear are calculated at their selling price, not their
purchase price.
28
Part 1: 200 gp. A heavy gold torc, with deep red
rubies and shining onyx worth 500 gp. A silver
dagger, which is largely worthless, but the large
amethyst in the pommel is flawless with deep
indigo highlights and worth 500 gp. Interesting
Netherese artifacts including a white gold tiara
with moonstones, an ancient ivory wand chased
with platinum, and an ancient text of Netherese
history. To the right collector, this collection would
be worth 300 gp.
Part 5: The necromancer has a grotesque
jeweled demon skull among her belongings. It
is plated with electrum, and is covered in a pave
of moonstone, quartz, chalcedony, and obsidian.
The horns have an elaborate scrimshaw of runes
in infernal. It is always warm to the touch. A
particularly depraved sort of collector would pay
1000 gp for it.
Consumable magic items should be divided
up however the group sees fit. If more than one
character is interested in a specific consumable
magic item, the DM can determine who gets it
randomly should the group be unable to decide.
Permanent Magic Item Distribution
D&D Adventurers League has a system in place to
determine who is awarded permanent magic items
at the end of a session. Each character’s logsheet
contains a column to record permanent magic
items for ease of reference.
• If all the players at the table agree on one
character taking possession of a permanent
magic item, that character gets the item.
• In the event that one or more characters indicate
an interest in possessing a permanent magic
item, the character that possesses the fewest
permanent magic items gets the item. If there is a
tie in the total number of permanent magic items
owned by contesting characters, the item’s owner
is determined randomly by the DM.
Bracers Of Defense
Wondrous item, rare (requires attunement)
While wearing these bracers, you gain a +2 bonus
to AC if you are wearing no armor and using no
shield.
The bracers are two arm-sized tubes of faintly
gleaming and intricately knotted gold wire.
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
R E WA R D S
Scroll of Blight (4th Level)
Scroll, Rare
This scroll contains a single blight spell. A
description of this item can be found in the
Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Scroll of Speak With Dead (3rd level)
Scroll, Uncommon
This scroll contains a single speak with dead spell.
A description of this item can be found in the
Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Scroll of Bestow Curse (3rd level)
Scroll, Uncommon
This scroll contains a single bestow curse spell.
A description of this item can be found in the
Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Mage Spellbook
Cantrips fire bolt, light, mage hand,
prestidigitation.
1st level detect magic, mage armor, magic
missile, shield.
2nd level misty step, suggestion. 3rd level
counterspell, fireball, fly.
4th level greater invisibility, ice storm.
5th level cone of cold.
Archmage Spellbook
Cantrips fire bolt, light, mage hand,
prestidigitation, shocking grasp.
1st level detect magic, identify, mage armor,
magic missile.
2nd level detect thoughts, mirror image, misty
step.
3rd level counterspell, fly, lightning bolt.
4th level banishment, fire shield, stoneskin.
5th level cone of cold, scrying, wall of force.
6th level globe of invulnerability.
7th level teleport.
8th level mind blank.
9th level time stop.
29
A Favors and Enmity
If the characters became lost in the Cormanthor,
took two long rests in the Rimwood this adventure
outside of normal travel, or took a long rest in
Grypht’s Sanctum give them the story reward
“Late to the Party”. The consequences of this story
reward will be made clear in a future adventure.
Because things have gone awry when the
characters get back to Elmwood, they cannot
collect their 500 GP from the council or their
free spellcasting service from Shayad. Give the
PCs the “We owe you one!” story reward. They
can exchange it for the gold and free spellcasting
service in any future Elmwood adventure, provided
that Shayad is alive.
If the characters made copies of or told people
about the Shield Trading Company maps and
scouting notes to the Varlaros Stones, give them
the story reward “Black Listed by the Shield
Trading Company.” This story reward gives them
disadvantage on social rolls with Shield Trading
Company members.
Renown
Each character receives one point of renown..
Downtime
Each character receives 10 downtime days at the
conclusion of this adventure.
DM Rewards
You receive 1,00 XP, 500 gp, and 10 downtime
days for running this session.
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
R E WA R D S
 DM Appendix: NPC Summary
The following characters feature prominently in this
adventure. Other town characters are available as
part of the backdrop; please refer to the Elmwood
Campaign Narrative for information about them as
needed.
Aliana Mathnir, Constable of Elmwood
(ah-lee-ANNA MATH-near)
A short, but muscular woman with blue eyes and
blond hair that is kept at shoulder length. She has a
scar along her face that she got in the Burning. Prior
to the Burning, she was a deputy, and took over
when the prior constable was killed. She always
offers a smile in greeting, and tries to get along with
everyone. She is well liked by all even when she is
enforcing the law. Can be found anywhere around
town as she likes to patrol the streets when she can.
When in town she will help townsfolk with small
tasks as she likes to be helpful. The Greengrass
festival is the pride of her town, and she’s not going
to let the festival be cancelled unless it’s absolutely
necessary.
Roleplaying Aliana: Aliana tries to make sure
that all get along with her, even when she is doing
something they do not like (such as collecting taxes).
She likes to keep a neat and efficiently running
town. She is friendly and honest and likes to make
everyone feel that they can come to her with any
issues concerning the town.
Quote: “Look, just get along, okay? We have bigger
problems to deal with.”
Why she is important to the story: Aliana is part
of the driving force to keep the Greengrass festival
going as planned. She also offers the characters a
monetary reward for finding the cure or way to stop
the spread of the blight that is suspected of being
caused by Moander.
Shayad, Priestess of Chauntea (shy-AD)
A half-orc of stern countenance, Shayad is an
exceedingly calm and rational woman. A pacifist, she
has devoted her life to the people and lands around
Elmwood. The Greengrass festival is the greatest
point of the year for her, and she is both worried
about the town and the festival due to the recent
troubles of supernatural rot.
30
Roleplaying Shayad: Shayad is calm and peaceful
woman. She does, however, react poorly to those
who make comments disrespectful of her heritage
or who act surprised that she is a high priestess. She
is a pacifist at heart and will try to dissuade others
from violence if possible. Though insecure about
being in the minority, she is still very confident in
her abilities and enjoys the love the village has given
her and Chauntea.
Quote: “Life is sacred and should not be thrown away,
no matter how rotten the soul appears to be.”
Why she is important to the story: Shayad is
part of the driving force to keep the Greengrass
festival going as planned. She offers to reward the
characters with a free spellcasting service if they can
return with protection before the festival begins.
Drake Holmstrumph
Drake is an aging man who’s gradually slowing
down. What he lacks in youthful energy, he makes
up in experience and wisdom. He lost his whole
family in the Burning and it’s turned him into a
bitter man. However, he’s one of the oldest Survivors
left in Elmwood and the town looks up to him. His
ship is the Red Lock (the bowsprit is a red-haired
sprite, who was carved to look like his wife). He is a
merchant captain, and is well versed in all the trade
routes of the Moonsea. Drake is a fearless captain,
and he regularly ran the Phlan blockade to get
supplies into the city (for an excellent price).
Roleplaying Drake: Drake is suspicious of anyone
who’s not a survivor of the Burning, and comes off
as rather cold until you get to know him. He’s got a
mercenary mindset.
Quote: “Aye, I can get you where you need to go. The
question is, what can ye pay for it?”
Why he is important to the story: The Survivors
of the Burning (the destruction of Elmwood
two years ago) are an important power bloc in
Elmwood. Drake is desperate to keep anything else
from happening to Elmwood just as it’s starting to
recover.
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
APPENDIX
Thyra Stoneshoulders
Thyra is tall for a dwarf, and has a lovely plump
figure. She dresses in nice gowns that show off her
figure in deep clear gem colors. She’s gracious and
has a very sharp wit that’s started more than a few
arguments. She’s the barkeep at the Silvery Gem.
Thyra is a refugee from Phlan, and keeps a sketch
of Fat Mar (a good friend of hers) in the bar behind
her. She used to serve drinks for him at the Laughing
Goblin before it was destroyed by Vorgansharax.
She’s become the unofficial speaker for the Phlan
refugees, and enjoys reminiscing about the good
times.
Roleplaying Thyra: Thyra is professional and
warm as a barkeep, and enjoys getting drawn into
philosophical conversations.
Quote: “Hah, that’s a good one. Want another round
of cabbage soup? Just like the good old days.”
Why she is important to the story: Thyra supplies
important details about the Varlaros Stones.
31
Yao Seiju, Shield Company Leader
(YA-ow See-Juu)
Yao Seiju is a half elf that strongly favors his
Shou ancestry. He is handsome, erudite, polite,
well-educated, good to his word, and a ruthless
businessman. He is popular around town, and
known to be generous, and often buying a round
for the whole bar at some establishments in town.
Yao Seiju is extremely friendly and enjoys chatting
up any person of quality that he meets to find out
more about what’s going on and who’s in town. He
is substantially invested in the Greengrass festival
occurring on time as it is one of the most fertile
times for making business deals, and he has already
paid for grain from rival towns on the Moonsea to
supply the festival.
Roleplaying Yao Seiju: Yao Seiju is a calculating
man that likes to live the luxurious life. He is willing
to make a deal on most anything as long as he can
get the better end of it. He is willing to do whatever
is necessary to make a profit.
Quote: “If I do this for you, what’s in it for me?”
Why he is important to the story: Yao is one of the
council members pushing for the Greengrass festival
to not be delayed. He knows about the Varlaros
Stones, and offers the characters the scouting
reports to lead them there.
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
APPENDIX
 Elmwood at a Glance
DMs can use this information as needed to help
flesh out encounters in Elmwood proper.
Population. Approximately 1,500 and growing.
Races. Humans are the most numerous
demographic (50%). Elves (15%) and half-elves
(25%) are the most common nonhumans.
Alignment. Elmwood tends toward lawful (as
influenced by Mulmaster) and towards neutral.
LAW NEUTRAL CHAOS
GOOD 8% 31% 8%
NEUTRAL 18% 18% 0%
EVIL 10% 7% 0%
History of Elmwood - Elmwood is an old town
which was founded 1,300 years ago. It has no
valuable natural resources worth stealing (like
gems or precious metals). The long history of the
town is both peaceful and boring. They have been
exporting fish and fine elm wood to Mulmaster
for centuries. As Mulmaster grew in size and
might, Elmwood became a vassal of the “City of
Danger”. The nobility of Mulmaster (particularly
the Culkin family) bought some of the land and
began to manage it directly. About two years
ago. The Cult of the Eternal Flame accidentally
detonated a devastation orb in Elmwood. When
the orb detonated, it created a 1-mile-wide area of
intense, extreme dry heat for a full day. Wildfires
started within the first hour. Anyone who didn’t
flee was caught in the fires. For the next hellish
day, people tried to save what they could from the
burning. Most of the population was killed, and the
vegetation and buildings were burned.
Elmwood Today - In the wake of “The Burning,”
Elmwood was destroyed, but the survivors
decided to rebuild. Since then, houses and inns and
industries have been rebuilt, and the land cleared
by the Burning has been turned into a patchwork
of farms. The area is alive with the sound of
hammering all day as new buildings are built.
32
The various disasters happening around the
Moonsea in Phlan, Hillsfar, Mulmaster, and the
Underdark have led to a refugee crisis in the area –
but Elmwood needs people! The unstated policy is
that anyone is welcome, as long as they are willing
to keep the peace and work the land.
Culture - Crime is relatively rare, due, to the Order
of the Gauntlet and the Lords’ Alliance lending
their influence and manpower to peacekeeping in
Elmwood. There is also a strong social pressure
for everyone to do their part for the common good
because the memories of the Burning are still
fresh.
There is friction between the survivors and the
refugees. The survivors are having to process their
whole social order changing. While the survivors
are sometimes not good hosts, the refugees are
sometimes not good guests.
Climate - Like the rest of the Moonsea region,
Elmwood is quite cool (consider the climate to be
similar to Montreal, Canada). Elmwood is cool in
the summer (highs about 70°F, 20°C) and cold in
the winter (highs around 20°F, -6°C).
Economy - Elmwood exports timber and fish and
there is a small merchant fleet that calls Elmwood
home. While Elmwood now produces some crops,
meat, and dairy, they still must import food until
agricultural production becomes self-sustaining.
Goats and sheep do well in Elmwood, as they are
small enough to be herded into barns during the
long cold winter. Industry in Elmwood is starting
to grow given the need to rebuild. Any complex
specialty items must be purchased in Mulmaster.
Government - Elmwood has never been big
enough to have much of a formal system of
government. In the past, a constable was chosen
by popular assent. Given that the rebuilding is a
much larger effort, Elmwood has expanded its
government services. The constable has appointed
six deputies. These officials can arrest lawbreakers,
as well as assemble and lead a militia.
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
APPENDIX
Organizations
Refugee Groups - There are semi-organized
groups of Phlan, Hillsfar, and Drow refugees.
Survivors - The Elmwood survivors tend to stick
together.
Elmwood Council - The Council meets every
week or so. The Elmwood council consists of:
Aliana Mathnir (Constable), Alksuth Cork (Head
of Sailfollowers), Aranda Fletcher (Head of
Greenstriders), Drake Holmstrumph (Leader of the
Survivors), Kala Namak (Deputy, Leader of Hillsfar
Refugees), Larissa Aerasumé (Priestess of Selûne),
Nils Sankt (Priest of Bane), Shayad (Priestess
of Chauntea), Thyra Stoneshoulders (Leader of
Phlan Refugees), and Yao Seiju (Head of the Shield
Trading Company).
Greenstriders - The Greenstriders are a semi-
official professional organization of foresters and
scouts that cooperate with each other to bring in
timber.
Sailfollowers - The Sailfollowers are a tightly
organized group of shipping captains, fishers and
sailors. They bargain as a group to make sure
shipping deals are handled fairly and to prevent
arguments over fishing grounds.
Semyon and Daughters Bank – This bank has
underwritten most of the loans in Elmwood, so
it’s in their best interest to see that the town
is protected, well managed, and prosperous so
people can pay back those loans.
Shield Trading Company – This is a small
merchant house that has opened up a warehouse,
an inn, and a trade office in Elmwood to capitalize
on trade in the area.
The Factions
The Harpers - want to make sure the refugees are
not abused and are not cultists of the dragon or
elemental evil, or mad. The contact for the Harpers
is Ragnir Nejit, the innkeep of the Silvery Gem.
The Order of the Gauntlet - has two major goals.
The first is to check the influence of the Church of
Bane and to promote justice and peace in Elmwood
during the rebuilding. The faction contact for the
Order of the Gauntlet is Granthar Copperhelm who
runs the local shrine to Tempus.
33
The Emerald Enclave - is making sure that the
farms are set up appropriately, and that people
aren’t taking too much timber from the forest for
rebuilding. Rogon Stragoth is the official faction
contact. The druids circle in the Grove of Eldath is
very friendly with the Emerald Enclave.
The Lords’ Alliance - want to boost trade
and security so that the area is peaceful and
prosperous. Norin Steelstrike is the faction contact
for the Lords’ Alliance. She works at the Shield
Trading Company.
The Zhentarim - are making money and gaining
influence over important people in the area. The
banker from Semyon and Daughters – Fiorei
Semyon – is the faction contact for the Zhentarim.
Important Locations
Elmwood Hall – is a new, sturdy two-story
building made out of elmwood. The downstairs
hosts the offices for the city officials. The upstairs
is the Constable’s office and home.
The Grove of Eldath - was a shelter during the
Burning, and the survivors are grateful to the
druids there. The grove itself was mostly burned to
the ground, except for thirteen giant elm trees.
Karsure’s Axelworks and Smithy – produces fine
elmwood: wagons, carriages, wheels, and various
metalwork (but not weapons). The smith can silver
weapons for normal costs.
The Last Book Boardinghouse (poor 2 sp/day)
- is a ramshackle mansion that was not burned
entirely to the ground, and has been partially
repaired. The rooms are very basic, but they’re
clean. The boardinghouse does not serve food.
Moline’s Sundries and Equipment – sells
adventuring gear, weapons and armor in the
Players Handbook worth less than 100 GP. A
variety of goods is displayed through the front
windows.
Oghma’s Ointments and Unguents – is run by
the only apothecary in town. It sells alchemist’s
supplies and other reasonable alchemy and
herbalism items.
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
APPENDIX
 The Phoenix House (wealthy 4 gp/day) - is a
large public house and inn that is elaborately and
expensively furnished. It caters to adventurers.
There are a few conference rooms as well as a well-
stocked wine cellar and extensive hot baths.
The Phoenix Monument - is a memorial marker
for all of the people who died in the Burning. It is
a large fountain with a golden phoenix rising from
ashes lit by continual flame spells.
The Refugee Barracks (squalid, 1 sp/day) - is
where refugees can live for free. The cost is paid by
taxes on the other citizens of Elmwood.
The Shield Trading Company – is a trading house
along the docks.
The Shrine to Tempus – is a small military field
camp and open pavilion.
The Sign of the Shield (aristocratic, 10 gp/day) -
is the finest inn in Elmwood. It is owned by Shield
Trading Company and is mainly used for their
business.
The Silvery Gem Inn (modest 1 gp/day) - is
comfortable, friendly, and has really delicious
cabbage soup. It is the official central meeting
place for the Phlan refugees.
Stone’s Dwarf Inn (comfortable 2 gp/day) - is a
whimsical inn run by a gnome illusionist. Children
go to school there in the mornings. There is a very
lifelike stone dwarf in the front yard.
The Temple of Chauntea “The Bounty of the
Goddess” - contains a large structure and elaborate
gardens. Many farmers and ranchers are adherents
of Chauntea.
The Temple of Selûne “The Path of Silver Light”
- is the center of faith in Elmwood, and the oldest
religious faith in town. The prior temple was
destroyed in the burning, and rebuilt with help
from the elves. Many survivors and elves pay their
respects here.
The Temple of Bane “The Black Lord’s Fist” - is
newly built by philanthropists from Mulmaster.
Given that this is the official faith of Mulmaster, the
Temple is very important in Elmwood.
The Wayfarer’s Rest Tavern (modest 1 gp/day)
- is a modestly priced inn that caters to the docks
area in specific. Ship captains and officers stay
here.
34
Elmwood Council
Aliana Mathnir, Constable – LN female human
Veteran. Brown hair, blue eyes, brown skin. Aliana
is more interested in the greater good than in
penalizing every small infraction. She likes to keep
a neat and efficiently running town. She is friendly
and honest. Likely at Elmwood Hall.
Alksuth Cork, Head of Sailfollowers – CG male
human Bandit Captain. Bald head, gray eyes, brown
skin. Alksuth has a sharp wit and a booming voice.
He’s gregarious, if somewhat ill-tempered. He
likes to ask a lot of questions and see what makes
people tick. Likely at the docks.
Aranda Fletcher, Head of the Greenstriders –
NG female half elf Scout. Blond hair, brown eyes,
golden skin. Aranda looks out for others but only
if they are willing to help themselves. Likely at
Wayfarer’s Rest Inn.
Drake Holmstrumph, Leader of the Survivors –
NE male human Guard. Gray hair, dark eyes, brown
skin. Drake is suspicious of anyone who’s not a
survivor of the Burning, and comes off as rather
cold until you get to know him. Likely at the docks.
Kala Namak, Deputy, Leader of Hillsfar
Refugees – LE female dragonborn Knight. Purple
eyes, black scales. She is patient, thoughtful, and
cunning. She uses her reputation and position as a
shield and is more likely to threaten her way into
finding what she wants/needs. Likely at Elmwood
Hall.
Larissa Aerasumé, Cleric of Selûne – NG female
half elf Cleric 9. Black hair, blue eyes, black skin.
Larissa is a calm and thoughtful woman. She has a
penchant for seeing all parts of life, the good and
the bad, as part of Selûne’s divine plan. Likely at
The Path of Silver Light temple to Selûne.
Nils Sankt, Cleric of Bane – LE male human Cleric
9. Bald head, blue eyes, white skin. Nils is quite
cranky about being old. He remembers better days
and likes to tell people about how it used to be.
He will argue about almost anything. Likely at The
Black Lord’s Fist temple to Bane.
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
APPENDIX
Shayad, Cleric of Chauntea – NG female half orc
Cleric -9. Brown hair, green eyes, gray skin. Shayad
is calm and peaceful woman. She reacts poorly to
those who make comments disrespectful of her
heritage. She is a pacifist at heart and will try to
dissuade others from violence if possible. Likely at
The Bounty of the Goddess temple to Chauntea.
Thyra Stoneshoulders, Leader of Phlan
Refugees – LN female dwarf Guard. Red hair,
brown eyes, rosy skin. Thyra is professional and
warm as a barkeep, and enjoys getting drawn into
philosophical conversations. Likely at the Silvery
Gem Inn.
Yao Seiju, Local Leader of the Shield Trading
Company – LE male half elf Noble. Black hair,
brown eyes, golden skin. Yao Seiju is a calculating
man that likes to live the luxurious life. He is
willing to make a deal on most anything as long as
he can get the better end of it. Likely at the Shield
Trading Company.
Faction Contacts
Ragnir Nejit, Harpers – NG male dragonborn
Knight. White eyes and white scales. He is
extremely secretive and serious about Harper
business. He owes his life to the Harpers for
rescuing him from the Hillsfar arena. Ragnir is a
no nonsense kind of guy. He knows the lay of the
land and so he expects to get what he deserves. He
doesn’t want to see anyone hurt, but a little cut or
bruise is just a learning experience. Likely at the
Silvery Gem Inn.
Granthar Copperhelm, Priestess of Tempus,
Order of the Gauntlet – N female dwarf Priest.
Black hair, brown eyes, brown skin. She’s a gruff
soldier, formerly from Phlan, but has taken well to
being a leader and protector in Elmwood. Likely at
the Shrine to Tempus.
35
Rogon Stragoth, Emerald Enclave – N male half
orc Scout. Brown hair, brown eyes, gray skin. He
works closely with Shevarra Dyernina and the
other druids in Eldath’s grove as well. Rogon
is very secretive with his association with the
Emerald Enclave. Rogon does not put up with
racial hatred – he got enough of that in Hillsfar to
last him his whole life. Likely at his ranch or out in
the forest.
Norin Steelstrike, Lord’s Alliance – LN female
dwarf Spy. Brown hair, black eyes, copper
skin. She keeps this work completely separate
from the Shield Trading Company and takes
her responsibilities deadly seriously. Norin is
inquisitive and asks questions whenever she
thinks it is appropriate. Likely at the Shield Trading
Company.
Fiorei Semyon, Zhentarim – LE female human
Noble. Black hair, dark eyes, mahogany skin. The
rest of Semyon and Daughters doesn’t know that
she’s in bed with the Black Network, so she’s
extremely circumspect with her dealings for
faction business. Fiorei thinks before she speaks,
and has a “can do” attitude. Of course, she always
makes sure that the things that get done benefit
Semyon and Daughters. Likely at the Sign of the
Shield.
ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
APPENDIX
 Appendix: Knight
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
NPC / Monster Statistics Armor Class 18 (plate)
Hit Points 52 (8d8 + 16)
Ape Speed 30 ft.
Medium beast, unaligned STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Armor Class 12 16 (+3) 11 (+0) 14 (+2) 11 (+0) 11 (+0) 15 (+2)
Hit Points 19 (3d8 + 6)
Speed 30 ft., climb 30 ft. Saving Throws Con +4, Wis +2
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Senses passive Perception 10
16 (+3) 14 (+2) 14 (+2) 6 (-2) 12 (+1) 7 (-2) Languages any one language (usually Common)
Challenge 3 (700 XP)
Skills Athletics +5, Perception +3
Brave. The knight has advantage on saving throws
Senses passive Perception 13
against being frightened.
Languages –
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP) Actions
Actions Multiattack. The knight makes two melee attacks.
Multiattack. The ape makes two fist attacks. Greatsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach
5 ft., one target. Hit: 10 (2d6 + 3) slashing damage.
Fist. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) bludgeoning damage. Heavy Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +2 to
hit, range 100/400 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d10)
Rock. Ranged Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, range
piercing damage.
25/50 ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) bludgeoning
damage. Leadership (Recharges after a Short or Long
Rest). For 1 minute, the knight can utter a special
Bandit command or warning whenever a nonhostile
Medium humanoid (any race), any non-lawful alignment creature that it can see within 30 feet of it makes
Armor Class 12 (leather armor) an attack roll or a saving throw. The creature
Hit Points 11 (2d8 + 2) can add a d4 to its roll provided it can hear and
understand the knight.
Speed 30 ft.
A creature can benefit from only one
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
11 (+0) 12 (+1) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) Leadership die at a time. This effect ends if the
knight is incapacitated.
Senses passive Perception 10 Reactions
Languages – Parry. The knight adds 2 to its AC against one
Challenge 1/8 (25 XP) melee attack that would hit it. To do so, the knight
must see the attacker and be wielding a melee
Actions weapon.
Scimitar. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5
ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d6 + 1) slashing damage.
Light Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit,
range 80 ft./320 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d8 + 1)
piercing damage.

36 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:

APPENDIX
Mage Gladiator
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
Armor Class 12 (15 with mage armor) Armor Class 16 (studded leather, shield)
Hit Points 40 (9d8) Hit Points 112 (15d8 + 45)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 30ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
9 (−1) 14 (+2) 11 (+0) 17 (+3) 12 (+1) 11 (+0) 18 (+4) 15 (+2) 16 (+3) 10 (+0) 12 (+1) 15 (+2)

Saving Throws Int +6, Wis +4
Skills Arcana +6, History +6
Senses passive Perception 11
Languages any four languages
Challenge 6 (2,300 XP)
Spellcasting. The mage is a 9th-level spellcaster.
Its spellcasting ability is Intelligence (spell save DC
14, +6 to
hit with spell attacks). The mage has the following
wizard spells prepared:
Cantrips (at will): fire bolt, light, mage hand,
prestidigitation
1st level (4 slots): detect magic, mage armor,
magic missile, shield
2nd level (3 slots): misty step, suggestion
3rd level (3 slots): counterspell, fireball, fly
4th level (3 slots): greater invisibility, ice storm
5th level (1 slot): cone of cold
Actions
Dagger. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +5 to
hit, reach 5 ft. or range 20/60 ft., one target. Hit: 4
(1d4 + 2) piercing damage.
Saving Throws Str +7, Dex +5, Con +6
Skills Athletics +10, Intimidation +5
Senses passive Perception 11
Languages any one language (usually Common)
Challenge 5 (1 ,800 XP)
Brave. The gladiator has advantage on saving
throws against being frightened.
Brute. A melee weapon deals one extra die of its
damage when the gladiator hits with it (included in
the attack).
Actions
Multiattack. The gladiator makes three melee
attacks or two ranged attacks.
Spear. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +7 to hit,
reach 5 ft. and range 20/60 ft ., one target. Hit: 11
(2d6 + 4) piercing damage, or 13 (2d8 + 4) piercing
damage if used with two hands to make a melee
attack.
Shield Bash. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach
5 ft., one creature. Hit: 9 (2d4 + 4) bludgeoning
damage. If the target is a Medium or smaller
creature, it must succeed on a DC 15 Strength
saving throw or be knocked prone.
Reactions
Parry. The gladiator adds 3 to its AC against
one melee attack that would hit it. To do so, the
gladiator must see the attacker and be wielding a
melee weapon.

37 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:

APPENDIX
 Archmage Ogre Zombie
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment Large undead, neutral evil
Armor Class 12 (1 5 with mage armor) Armor Class 8
Hit Points 99 (18d8 + 18) Hit Points 85 (9d10 + 36)
Speed 30ft. Speed 30ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
10 (+0) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 20 (+5) 15 (+2) 16 (+3) 19 (+4) 6 (-2) 18 (+4) 3 (-4) 6 (-2) 5 (-3)

Saving Throws lnt +9, Wis +6 Saving Throws Wis +0

Skills Arcana +13, History +13 Damage Immunities poison
Damage Resistance damage from spells; non Condition Immunities poisoned
magical bludgeoning, piercing, and slashing (from Senses darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 8
stoneskin) Languages understands Common and Giant but
Senses passive Perception 12 can’t speak
Languages any six languages Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Challenge 12 (8,400 XP) Undead Fortitude. If damage reduces the zombie
to 0 hit points, it must make a Constitution saving
Magic Resistance. The arch mage has advantage throw with a DC of 5 +the damage taken, unless
on saving throws against spells and other magical the damage is radiant or from a critical hit. On a
effects. success, the zombie drops to 1 hit point instead.
Spellcasting. The archmage is an 18th-level
spellcaster. Its spellcasting ability is Intelligence Actions
(spell save DC 17, +9 to hit with spell attacks). The Morningstar. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to
arch mage can cast disguise self and invisibility at hit, reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 13 (2d8 + 4)
will and has the following wizard spells prepared: bludgeoning damage.
Cantrips (at will): fire bolt, light, mage hand, Ghoul
prestidigitation, shocking grasp Medium undead, chaotic evil
1st level (4 slots): detect magic, identify, mage Armor Class 12
armor*, magic missile Hit Points 22 (5d8)
2nd level (3 slots): detect thoughts, mirror image, Speed 30 ft.
misty step STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
3rd level (3 slots): counterspell,fly, lightning bolt 13 (+1) 15 (+2) 10 (+0) 7 (−2) 10 (+0) 6 (−2)
4th level (3 slots): banishment, fire shield,
stoneskin* Damage Immunities poison
5th level (3 slots): cone of cold, scrying, wall of Condition Immunities charmed, exhaustion,
force poisoned
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 10
6th level (1 slot): globe of invulnerability
Languages Common
7th level (l slot): teleport
Challenge 1 (200 XP)
8th level (l slot): mind blank*
9th level (l slot): time stop Actions
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
*The archmage casts these spells on itself before
one creature. Hit: 9 (2d6 + 2) piercing damage.
combat.
Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
Actions one target. Hit: 7 (2d4 + 2) slashing damage. If the
Dagger. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, target is a creature other than an elf or undead, it
reach 5 ft. or range 20/60 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (ld4 must succeed on a DC 10 Constitution saving throw
+ 2) piercing damage. or be paralyzed for 1 minute. The target can repeat
the saving throw at the end of each of its turns,
ending the effect on itself on a success.

38 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:

APPENDIX
Ghast Saving Throws Wis +2
Medium undead, chaotic evil Damage Immunities poison
Armor Class 13 Condition Immunities poisoned
Hit Points 36 (8d8) Senses darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 9
Speed 30ft. Languages understands Deep Speech and
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Undercommon but can’t speak
16 (+3) 17 (+3) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 10 (+0) 8 (-1) Challenge 5 (1 ,800 XP)
Undead Fortitude. If damage reduces the zombie
Damage Resistances necrotic
to 0 hit points, it must make a Constitution saving
Damage Immunities poison throw with a DC of 5 +the damage taken, un less
Condition Immunities charmed, exhaustion, the damage is radiant or from a critical hit. On a
poisoned success, the zombie drops to 1 hit point in stead.
Senses darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 10
Actions
Languages Common
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
Challenge 2 (450 XP) one target.
Stench. Any creature that starts its turn within Hit: 14 (4d6) piercing damage.
5 feet of the ghast must succeed on a DC 10
Eye Ray. The zombie uses a random magical eye
Constitution saving throw or be poisoned until the
ray, choosing a target that it can see within 60 feet
start of its next turn. On a successful saving throw,
of it.
the creature is immune to the ghast’s Stench for 24
hours. 1. Paralyzing Ray. The targeted creature must
succeed on a DC 14 Constitution saving throw
Turning Defiance. The ghast and any ghouls
or be paralyzed for 1 minute. The target can
within 30 feet of it have advantage on saving
repeat the saving throw at the end of each of its
throws against effects that turn undead.
turns, ending the effect on itself on a success.
Actions 2. Fear Ray. The targeted creature must succeed
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., on a DC 14 Wisdom saving throw or be
one creature. Hit: 12 (2d8 + 3) piercing damage. frightened for 1 minute. The target can repeat
Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft., the saving throw at the end of each of its turns,
one target. Hit: 10 (2d6 + 3) slashing damage. If the ending the effect on itself on a success.
target is a creature other than an undead, it must 3. Enervation Ray. The targeted creature must
succeed on a DC 10 Constitution make a DC 14 Constitution saving throw, taking
saving throw or be paralyzed for 1 minute. The 36 (8d8) necrotic damage on a failed save, or
target can repeat the saving throw at the end of half as much damage on a successful one.
each of its turns, ending the effect on itself on a 4. Disintegration Ray. If the target is a creature,
success. it must succeed on a DC 14 Dexterity saving
throw or take 45 (10d8) force damage. If this
Beholder Zombie damage reduces the creature to 0 hit points, its
Large undead, neutral evil body becomes a pile of fine gray dust.
Armor Class 15 (natural armor) If the target is a Large or smaller non
Hit Points 93 (11d10 + 33) magical object or creation of magical force, it
Speed 0 ft., fly 20ft. (hover) is disintegrated without a saving throw. If the
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA target is a Huge or larger non magical object or
10 (+0) 8 (-1) 16 (+3) 3 (-4) 8 (+1) 5 (-3) creation of magical force, this ray disintegrates
a 10-foot cube of it.

39 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:

APPENDIX
 Ice Mephit Winter Wolf
Small elemental, neutral evil Large monstrosity, neutral evil
Armor Class 11 Armor Class 13 (natural armor)
Hit Points 21 (6d6) Hit Points 75 (10d10 + 20)
Speed 30 ft., fl y 30ft. Speed 50 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
7 (-2) 13 (+1) 10 (+0) 9 (-1) 11 (+0) 12 (+1) 18 (+4) 13 (+1) 14 (+2) 7 (−2) 12 (+1) 8 (−1)

Skills Perception +2, Stealth +3 Skills Perception +5, Stealth +3

Damage Vulnerabilities bludgeoning, fire
Damage Immunities cold, poison
Condition Immunities poisoned
Senses darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 12
Languages Aquan, Auran
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
Death Burst. When the mephit dies, it explodes in
a burst of jagged ice. Each creature within 5 feet
of it must make a DC 10 Dexterity saving throw,
taking 4 (1d8) slashing damage on a failed save, or
half as much damage on a successful one.
False Appearance. While the mephit remains
motionless, it is indistinguishable from an ordinary
shard of ice.
Innate Spellcasting (1/Day). The mephit can
innately cast fog cloud, requiring no material
components. Its innate spellcasting ability is
Charisma.
Actions
Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one creature. Hit: 3 (1d4 + 1) slashing damage plus
2 (ld4) cold damage.
Frost Breath (Recharge 6). The mephit exhales a
15-foot cone of cold air. Each creature in that area
must succeed on a DC 10 Dexterity saving throw,
taking 5 (2d4) cold damage on a failed save, or half
as much damage on a successful one.
Damage Immunities cold
Senses passive Perception 15
Languages Common, Giant, Winter Wolf
Challenge 3 (700 XP)
Keen Hearing and Smell. The wolf has advantage
on Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on
hearing or smell.
Pack Tactics. The wolf has advantage on an attack
roll against a creature if at least one of the wolf’s
allies is within 5 feet of the creature and the ally
isn’t incapacitated.
Snow Camouflage. The wolf has advantage on
Dexterity (Stealth) checks made to hide in snowy
terrain.
Actions
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target.
Hit: 11 (2d6 + 4) piercing damage. If the target is
a creature, it must succeed on a DC 14 Strength
saving throw or be knocked prone.
Cold Breath (Recharge 5–6). The wolf exhales
a blast of freezing wind in a 15-foot cone. Each
creature in that area must make a DC 12 Dexterity
saving throw, taking 18 (4d8) cold damage on a
failed save, or half as much damage on a successful
one.

40 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:

APPENDIX
Young White Dragon
Large dragon, chaotic evil
Armor Class 17 (natural armor)
Hit Points 133 (14d10 + 56)
Speed 40ft., burrow 20ft., fly 80ft., swim 40ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
18 (+4) 10 (+0) 18 (+4) 6 (-2) 6 (-2) 11 (+0)

Saving Throws Dex +3, Con +7, Wis +3, Cha +4

Skills Perception +6, Stealth +3
Damage Immunities cold
Senses blindsight 30ft., darkvision 120ft., passive
Perception 16
Languages Common, Draconic
Challenge 6 (2,300 XP)
Ice Walk. The dragon can move across and climb
icy surfaces without needing to make an ability
check. Additionally, difficult terrain composed of
ice or snow doesn’t cost it extra moment.
Actions
Multiattack. The dragon makes three attacks: one
with its bite and two with its claws.
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 10ft.,
one target. Hit: 15 (2d10 + 4) piercing damage plus
4 (1d8) cold damage.
Claw. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft .,
one target. Hit: 11 (2d6 + 4) slashing damage.
Cold Breath (Recharge 5-6). The dragon exhales
an icy blast in a 30-foot co ne. Each creature in that
area must make a DC 15 Constitution saving throw,
taking 45 (10d8) cold damage on a failed save, or
half as much damage on a successful one.

41 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:

APPENDIX
 Captain’s Log
Before I came to Finder and Crusader, I travelled far seeking knowledge of Moander. One part of
my journey was by sea to seek allies. If you can decipher the captain’s log, you may count yourself
among them in the unending fight against Moander.
Here begins the record of the voyage of the Passed Phrase, a fine two-masted schooner out of
Melvaunt. May Umberlee’s blessings always be upon this ship and her crew. As Captain ‘tis my
sacred duty to record all the landmarks we visited and events that transpired upon our journey on
the Moonsea.
As is the right and proper custom, whenever we drop the anchor, it will always be with our
bowsprit pointing directly at the island in front of us, not covering that island on our sea chart. We
don’t want the ship to run aground, after all! Also, at no time would any part of our ship ever leave
the confines of the sea chart. I’m not brave enough to take my vessel into uncharted waters.
Our voyage began, as all voyages should, with the navigator aiming us straight and true at
the brightest star on the horizon. We were facing West, praying for favorable winds.
Our course turned us to the North, where we found ourselves visiting an island filled with fair
maidens. Half the crew had declared their undying love and leapt overboard, before the ship’s wizard
realized that it was the foul magic of the sirens luring them to their deaths! Fortunately we were
able to recover most of the men, although I had to lash a few of them to the mast as we sailed away.
Okay, okay, I had to lash myself to the mast too.
Making a hasty getaway, I ordered the helmsman to point the ship East. We soon reached a
well-known haven for pirates and ne’er-do-wells of all sorts. I’m not ashamed to admit that I have a
few such types in my own crew. Still, we had to dip into the emergency rum stash and club a few
of the men unconscious to drag them out of the bars and back onto the ship.
The men were all smiles when we reached our next destination, on a heading due South. Quite a
pretty island it was, and the natives were friendly. We sold our cargo and made some repairs. Even
better, I traded a few worthless trinkets for a treasure map!
X marks the spot, they always say, and ‘twas true in this case also. The map was a bit unclear,
but I finally figured out the right island to dig on, because it was the only one on my sea chart
whose row and column numbers were the same. And they said all those years of Arr-ithmetic
wouldn’t help me in Captain School! Ha! We pulled up to the island facing East and started
digging.
The map turned out to be trickier than I realized, though. Several of the landmarks we needed
could only be found when the shadows were cast in the right direction. We had to pivot the ship
ninety degrees, but still pointed at the same island, before we were able to read the map properly and
dig up the treasure.
Our hold laden with riches, ‘twas time to take our ship and crew home. I needed a good night’s
sleep for sure after all those months at Zee. Er, I mean, sea. We had a few options, but I liked the
look of a little island where I could point the ship North and have the star that guided us when we
first set out covered by the stern. It’s always good luck when you can end a voyage on the same
omen where you started it.
And that’s the whole story! Mayhap by following this tale and reconstructing the stops we
made on our voyage, you can learn something of value.

ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:

42 APPENDIX
43 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
APPENDIX
 Map - Part 2 Death Stalks the Woods “Dig Site”

44 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:

APPENDIX
Map - Part 3 We Got Here First “Standing Stones”

45 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:

APPENDIX
 Map - Part 4 A Chilly Reception

46 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:

APPENDIX
Map - Part 5 Long Sea Voyage and Map - Part 6 Grypht’s Sanctum

47 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:

APPENDIX
 Travel Map

48 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:

APPENDIX
 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
49 APPENDIX
50 ELMW1-2 / THE LOST SANCTUM:
APPENDIX
 THE BATTLE OF
ELMWOOD
DAVE BRAINARD, BEN HEISLER, AND PAIGE LEITMAN, WITH AMPLE ASSISTANCE
FROM JEREMY ARNOLD, ALBERT DEGENAAR, CALEB FOTH, JASON GONDING, JIM
HARRISON, GINNY LOVEDAY, ERIC MENGE, M. SEAN MOLLEY, AND KEATON STAMPS.
Adventure Code: ELMW1-3

As the Greengrass Festival gets under way, one might have a sneaking suspicion
that something is awry. Will the adventurers be able to save their new home in
the Battle of Elmwood?
A four-hour adventure for 5th-10th Level Characters

Producer: Baldman Games

Core Administrator: Shawn Merwin
Editing and Layout: Encoded Designs
Cartography: The Elmwood Crew
Organized Play: Chris Lindsay
D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall,
Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks, Alan Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster
Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League, all other Wizards of the Coast product names, and their respective
logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive likenesses
are property of Wizards of the Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America.
Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the express written
permission of Wizards of the Coast.
©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31,
2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK.
 100% of the author share of the profits from these adventures
will be given to the following as a charitable donation:

Second Harvest Food Bank of East Tennessee

136 Harvest Lane
Maryville, TN 37801
https://secondharvestetn.org/

Second Harvest Food Bank is the East Tennessee region’s largest hunger-
relief charity; operating programs in 18 counties. The food bank secures and
distributes over 18 million pounds of food and grocery products annually
through a network of over 500 partnering non-profit organizations such as
food pantries, soup kitchens, emergency shelters and schools. This charity
has a near-perfect score on Charity Navigator.

(https://www.charitynavigator.org/index.cfm?bay=search.summary&orgid=5524)

Additionally, the food bank enthusiastically hosts the “Save Versus Hunger”
charity convention each spring, where a lot of D&D gets played.
 INTRODUCTION
Welcome to ELMW1-3 The Battle of Elmwood , a D&D Adventurers
League adventure, Part Three of the Misaligned Trilogy

This adventure is designed for three to seven 5th - 10th level characters, and is
optimized for five 8th-level characters. Characters outside this level range cannot participate in
this adventure.
The adventure is set in Elmwood and in The Lost Vale.

The D&D Adventurers League Preparing the Adventure

This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of
the D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure,
players track their characters’ experience, treasure,
and other rewards, and can take those characters
through other adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a
store event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a
DCI number. This number is your official Wizards of
the Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have
a number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to
use to create and advance their characters. Players
can continue to play their characters after the
storyline season has finished, possibly participating
in a second or third storyline with those same
characters. A character’s level is the only limitation
for adventure play. A player cannot use a character
of a level higher or lower than the level range of a
D&D Adventurers League adventure.
For more information on playing, running
games as a Dungeon Master, and organizing games
for the D&D Adventurers League, please visit the
D&D Adventurers League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
• Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
• Read through the adventure, taking notes
of anything you’d like to highlight or remind
yourself while running the adventure, such as a
way you’d like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d
like to use in a combat.
• Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
• Gather together any resources you’d like to
use to aid you in running this adventure--such
as notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and
battlemaps.
• If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.

3 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
• Character name and level
• Character race and class
• Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most
common passive ability check
• Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, etc.)
Players that have characters outside the
adventure’s level range cannot participate in
the adventure with those characters. Players
with ineligible characters can make a new 1st-level
character or use a pregenerated character. Players
can play an adventure they previously played or
ran as a Dungeon Master, but not with the same
character.
Ensure that each player has an official adventure
logsheet for his or her character (if not, get one from
the organizer). The player fills out the adventure
name, session number, date, and your name and
DCI number. In addition, the player also fills in the
starting values for experience, gold, downtime,
renown, and number of permanent magic items. He
or she fill in the other values and write notes at the
conclusion of the session. Each player is responsible
for maintaining an accurate logsheet.
If you have time, you can do a quick scan of
a player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing
looks out of order. If you see magic items of very
high rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you
can ask players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict
item use or ask them to use a standard ability
score array. Point players to the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and
it’s the beginning of an adventure or episode,
they can declare their activity and spend the days
now. Alternatively, they can do so at the end of
the adventure or episode. Players should select
their characters’ spells and other daily options
prior to the start of the adventure, unless the
adventure specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread
the adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
4 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, you may see sidebars
to help make adjustments for smaller/larger
groups, and characters of higher/lower levels than
the optimized group. Most of the time, this is used
for combat encounters.
You may adjust the adventure beyond the
guidelines given. For example, if you’re playing
with a group of inexperienced players, you might
want to make the adventure a little easier; for
very experienced players, you may want to make
it a little harder. Therefore, five categories of
party strength have been created for you to use
as a guide. Feel free to use a different adjustment
during the adventure if the recommended party
strength feels off for the group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of
five 8th-level characters. To figure out whether
you need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
• Add up the total levels of all the characters
• Divide the total by the number of characters
• Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round
fractions of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table:
DETERMINING PARTY STRENGTH
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very Weak
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very Strong
I N T RO D U C T I O N
Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment
of the game for the players. You help guide the
narrative and bring the words on these pages
to life. The outcome of a fun game session often
creates stories that live well beyond the play at the
table. Always follow this golden rule when you DM
for a group:
Make decisions and adjudications that
enhance the fun of the adventure when
possible.
To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
• You are empowered to make adjustments to
the adventure and make decisions about how the
group interacts with the world of this adventure.
Doing so is especially important and applicable
outside of combat, but feel free to adjust the
adventure for groups that are having too easy or
too hard of a time.
• Don’t make the adventure too easy or too
difficult for a group. Never being challenged
makes for a boring game and being
overwhelmed makes for a frustrating one.
Gauge the experience of the players (not the
characters) with the game, try to feel out (or
ask) what they like in a game, and attempt to
give each of them the experience they’re after
when they play D&D. Give everyone a chance to
shine.
• Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game
session moving along appropriately. Watch for
stalling, since play loses momentum when this
happens. At the same time, make sure that the
players don’t finish too early; provide them with
a full play experience. Try to be aware of running
long or short. Adjust the pacing accordingly
• Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free
to modify the text as you see fit, especially when
dialogue is present.
• Give the players appropriate hints so they can
make informed choices about how to proceed.
Players should be given clues and hints when
appropriate so they can tackle puzzles, combat,
and interactions without getting frustrated over
5 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
lack of information. Doing so helps to encourage
immersion in the adventure and gives players
“little victories” for figuring out good choices
from clues.
In short, being the DM isn’t about following
the adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about
facilitating a fun, challenging game environment
for the players. The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has
more information on the art of running a D&D
game.
Downtime and Lifestyle
At the beginning of each play session, players must
declare whether or not they are spending any days
of downtime. The player records the downtime
spent on the adventure logsheet. The following
options are available to players during downtime
(see the D&D basic rules or the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for more information):
• Catching up
• Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
commit to crafting a single item)
• Practicing a profession
• Recuperating
• Spellcasting services
• Training
Other downtime options might be available during
adventures or unlocked through play, including
faction-specific activities.
In addition, whenever a character spends
downtime days, that character also spends the
requisite expense for his or her lifestyle. Costs
are per day, so a character that spends ten days of
downtime also spends ten days of expenses
maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some downtime
activities help with lifestyle expenses or add
lifestyle expenses.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Spellcasting Services
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can
provide some spellcasting services. Characters
need to be able to travel to the settlement to obtain
these services.
Acolyte Background
A character possessing the acolyte
background requesting spellcasting
services at a temple of his or her faith
may request one spell per day from the
Spellcasting Services table for free. The only
cost paid for the spell is the base price for
the consumed material component, if any.
Melvaunt is a large city where any
acolyte can find a friendly shrine or
temple.
Spellcasting Services
Spell Cost
Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
Identify 20 gp
Lesser restoration 40 gp
Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
Remove curse 90 gp
Speak with dead 90 gp
Divination 210 gp
Greater restoration 450 gp
Raise dead 1,250 gp
Spell services generally available include healing
and recovery spells, as well as information-
gathering spells. Other spell services might be
available as specified in the adventure. The number
of spells available to be cast as a service is limited
to a maximum of three per day total, unless
otherwise noted.
6 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
Disease, Death, and Recovery
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might
not have the same characters return from session
to session, here are the rules when bad things
happen to characters.
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating Effects
A character still affected by diseases, poisons,
and other similar effects at the conclusion of an
adventure can spend downtime days recuperating
until such time as he or she resolves the effect to
its conclusion (see the recuperating activity in the
D&D Basic Rules).
If a character doesn’t resolve the effect
between sessions, that character begins the next
session still affected by the debilitating effect.
Death
A character who is killed during the course of
the adventure has a few options at the end of the
session (or whenever arriving back in civilization)
if no one in the adventuring party has immediate
access to a raise dead or revivify spell, or similar
magic. A character subject to a raise dead spell is
affected negatively until all long rests have been
completed during an adventure. Alternatively, each
downtime day spent after raise dead reduces the
penalty to attack rolls, saving throws, and ability
checks by 1, in addition to any other benefits the
downtime activity might provide.
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any
of the other options, the player creates a new
character. The new character does not have any
items or rewards possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing
any vital organs and is mostly whole) and the
player would like the character to be returned to
life, the party can take the body back to civilization
and use the dead character’s funds to pay for a
raise dead spell. A raise dead spell cast in this
manner costs the character 1,250 gp.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As above,
except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for the raise
dead spell is paid for by the party at the end of the
session. Other characters are under no obligation
to spend their funds to bring back a dead party
member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to
4 and a member of a faction, the dead character’s
body can be returned to civilization and a patron
from the faction ensures that he or she receives a
raise dead spell. However, any character invoking
this charity forfeits all experience and rewards
from that session (both those earned prior to and
after death during that session) and cannot replay
that episode or adventure with that character
again. Once a character reaches 5th level, this
option is no longer available.
Elmwood Overview
Though Elmwood has been a peaceful neighbor
of Mulmaster for centuries, it was destroyed two
years ago by a mishandled fire devastation orb by
the Cults of Elemental Evil (DDEX2-2 Embers of
Elmwood). There were few survivors. Since then
it’s been rebuilt and is a home for many refugees
from Phlan, Hillsfar, and the Underdark. The
little town is growing as it rebuilds, and changing
rapidly due to the influence of the refugees.
Adventure Background
Over a thousand years ago, the elves of Myth
Drannor battled the avatar of Moander (an evil
deity of rot, corruption, and destruction) in its last
remaining major temple, located on present-day
Yûlash in the southwestern Moonsea area. The
elves slew the priests of Moander, banished the
Darkbringer, and sealed the essence of its avatar
beneath the ruins. However, Yûlash (and the rest
of the Moonsea) had other problems with the fall
of Zhentil Keep, and the threat of Moander was
forgotten for more immediate needs. Moander
then rose from death a few decades ago, but was
put down by a band of brave adventurers in the
events of the book Song of the Saurials.
Zuggtmoy, the Demon Queen of Fungi, Lady
of Rot and Decay, has been active in Faerûn in
the past few years (given the events of Out of the
7 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
Abyss). This has allowed some vestige of the dead
deity Moander to stir in its slumber of death, which
has empowered some of its ancient sites and mad
cult members. In Elmwood, this means the town’s
grain has been magically contaminated by the
power of Moander so that when it is used in the
upcoming Greengrass festival, it can infect many
people with a rotting sickness that will turn them
into mindless vegetative slaves of the Darkbringer.
In the first adventure of the Elmwood Trilogy,
the characters went to Elmwood before the
Celebration of Greengrass, one of Chauntea’s high
holy days, and discovered the town’s grain was
magically contaminated. The local town council
asked the adventurers to consult a sage who
lives on the River Lis. After an encounter with
the awakened forest guardians, the sage directed
the adventurers to investigate a lost temple of
Moander in the Rimwood. There, the characters
checked for any unusual activity at this lost temple
to Moander, and brought back a seed for the sage
to study. The adventurers found a lot wrong with
the local plants and fought through the overgrowth
to extract a seed. Upon returning, the sage used
a divining ritual to determine the source of the
contamination. From the ritual, the sage learned
that some echo of Moander’s power is stirring
and that the characters must warn Elmwood.
This warning to find a way to stop the spread of
Moander’s corruption is the last the sage is able to
give before the ritual drives him insane. Following
their return to Elmwood, the Constable assembles
the Elmwood Council to determine the best answer
for the potential rise of Moander’s cult.
In the previous adventure (ELMW1-2: The
Lost Sanctum), the characters were asked by
the Elmwood Council to go into the Rimwood to
Grypht’s sanctum and retrieve a ritual that would
protect Elmwood from Moander. After tangling
with some necromancers, along with the guards
and puzzles of the Sanctum itself, the characters
were given the ritual. They arrive in Elmwood just
as the Greengrass festival is starting.
Characters who have the “Late to the Party” story
award from ELMW1-2 start this scenario with a
level of exhaustion, a consequence of rushing back
to Elmwood.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Adventure Overview
This adventure consists of five parts. See DM
Appendix 1 to help with understanding the flow of
the adventure. Encounters 3, 4, and 5 have multiple
options, and the players much choose which path
they will take in each encounter.
Part 1 The Greengrass Festival. The adventurers
find Elmwood in the midst of the Greengrass
Festival, with the cult of Moander already hard at
work stealthily capturing citizens and leaders. The
crowds of people are oblivious to the threat, and
proudly wear garlands and flower crowns which
colt hide cult influence. The adventurers meet with
Constable Aliana Mathnir, who fears the worst, and
asks them to gather up the council and keep an eye
out for trouble.
Part 2 Finding the Council Members. The
adventurers move about town, trying to locate the
councilors. As they do so, they have a chance to
notice some unusual events, and to intervene as
one of the councilors is spirited away by cultists
of Moander. After the characters rescue the
councilor, the Constable and rescued councilors
start devising a plan to deal with the threat. As the
discussion reaches a close, the cultists launch an
all-out attack on Elmwood.
Part 3 When Cultists Attack. The adventurers
rush to blunt the onslaught. They must choose
to either secure the Temple of Chauntea by
completing a ritual to protect it from Moander,
or to gather up villagers and bring them to safety
while the council takes care of the other.
Part 4 Gearing Up. With many of the townsfolk
gathered in the safety of the Temple, the Constable
asks the adventurers to help prepare the
counterattack. They must choose whether to escort
a group of militia to the armory so they can equip
for the battle, or to retrieve a cache of fireworks
and alchemist’s fire from the Stone’s Dwarf Inn to
burn away Moander’s growth.
Part 5 The Final Push. The party makes their way
into the Middens of Elmwood, where the Voice
of Moander has been raising monstrous plant
creatures from the trash. After breaking through
her final defenses, the adventurers confront the cult
leader to put an end to the menace facing Elmwood.
8 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
Pacing the Adventure
The adventure is designed for 4 hours of play. Use
the table below to budget your time, adjusting the
pace as necessary to keep on schedule. In a large
public event, you’ll need to keep an eye on the clock.
Stage Playing Time
Part 1: The Greengrass 15 mins
Festival
Part 2: Finding the 50 mins
Council Members
Part 3: When Cultists 50 mins
Attack
Part 4a/5a: Gearing 50 mins
Up/Final Push
OR Part 4b/5b: Gearing 50 mins
Up/Final Push
Part 5c: Voice of 50 mins
Moander
Conclusion 5 mins
Adventure Hooks
Ideally, the characters begin this adventure
immediately following ELMW 1-2 The Lost
Sanctum. If this is the case, then they have spent
the past few days returning to Elmwood from
Grypht’s Sanctum, carrying vital information
about the return of the dark god Moander, and
more importantly, a ritual that can protect against
the Darkbringer’s malevolence. The adventurers
start at the edge of town with various celebrations
around them.
Otherwise, the adventurers find themselves
in Elmwood with the Greengrass Festival in
full swing. After a few minutes of enjoying the
celebration, the adventurers are contacted by
Constable Aliana Mathnir. She is very well-
informed regarding the heroes of the Moonsea
region, and calls one of the adventurers by name
(either the one with the greatest Renown total, or
the most visually distinctive) and asks for help. The
Constable is concerned that followers of a dead god
are gathering in Elmwood, and she would like the
adventurers help her keep an eye out for potential
trouble.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 PART 1. THE
GREENGRASS FESTIVAL
Expected Duration: 15 minutes.
The adventure begins at midday on the first of
Kythorn, when Elmwood celebrates the Greengrass
Festival. If the adventurers have just completed
ELMW 1-2 The Lost Sanctum, and have successfully
collected the information about Moander from
Grypht’s sanctum, as well as the ritual to ward
off the Darkbringer’s influence. They have spent
several days traveling through the Cormanthor
forest, and have just completed a long rest, unless
they begin play with the “Late to the Party” story
reward from ELMW1-2, in which case they do not
gain the benefits of a long rest and instead begin
play with one level of exhaustion from the forced
march to return to Elmwood by the start of the
Greengrass Festival.
The adventurers who have not played ELMW 1-2
The Lost Sanctum are approached by Constable
Aliana Mathnir. She has just learned of the threat
posed by the Cult of Moander, and recognizes
the adventurers thanks to their renown. Adjust
interactions with the Constable appropriately if
this is the case.
General Features
The Common Gardens has the following general
features:
Light and Visibility. It is a bright, sunny spring
day, with a few fluffy white clouds drifting
overhead. A light haze of pollen gives everything a
golden glow.
Sounds. Singing, cheering, and the happy babble
of crowds. A group of musicians tune their
instruments in a bandstand near a wide area for
dancing, while hawkers, entertainers and food
stalls shout for attention.
Smells. The scent of flowers is heavy throughout
the town. Near the food stalls, this scent is
complemented by the aroma of roasting meat,
baking bread, sweet honey and exotic spices.
9 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
If the characters have or have not played the
previous adventures in this series (ELMW1-1 and
1-2) then their perceptions of Elmwood and the
reactions of the townsfolk will vary. If you have a
group that has a mix of characters that have and
have not played these adventures, the proceed as
if all characters had played the adventures, and
explain as needed to make the narrative make
sense to all of the players and characters.
Proceed with the following text if characters have
completed ELMW1-2:
It has been a hard few days of travel to
get back to Elmwood, with sporadic thun-
derstorms on the edge of town that have
churned the road to thick mud. Fortunately,
the sky is clear as Elmwood comes into sight.
Bright green leaves burst from the orchards
and fields surrounding the rebuilt town, and
the air is heavy with the powerful scent of
flowers and fresh growth. The broad earthen
streets of Elmwood are packed with throngs
of people who are singing, dancing, eating
and drinking to celebrate the beginning of
spring. Locals and visitors alike are bedecked
with garlands and crowns of flowers and
greenery.
If the characters have not played previous
Elmwood adventures, use this introduction:
You’ve heard of a great party all up and
down the Moonsea occurring at the rebuilt
town of Elmwood, the Greengrass Festival. A
celebration of Chauntea, life, love, marriage,
and the beginning of spring await you as you
spy the town on the Moonsea, surrounded
by orchards. As you approach there is the
powerful scent of flowers and fresh growth.
The broad earthen streets of Elmwood are
packed with throngs of people, singing,
dancing, eating and drinking to celebrate
the beginning of spring. Everyone is wearing
garlands and crowns of flowers and green-
ery. As you arrive, you are beckoned in to
join in the fun!
PA RT 1
 The Greengrass Festival is the grand celebration
in Elmwood that draws in families from nearby
farms, as well as travelers and merchants from the
Moonsea and beyond to celebrate spring and the
rebirth of the town. It is a long-standing tradition
for attendees to wear flowers in their hair and
about their bodies, which should be troubling
to characters who know that thralls of Moander
often have plants growing from their bodies.
Adventurers who have played ELMW1-2 should
be in a hurry to find Constable Aliana Mathnir and
report their findings. As they search the crowds,
use the following brief encounters to bring the
festival to life:
• A rush of dancers sweep through the party,
separating them briefly as they drag the
adventurers through a few steps.
• A lovely halfling woman offers the adventurers
a sample of delicious-smelling seed cakes.
(Make note of which characters eat some; those
characters must make a DC 10 Constitution
save when they confront the Voice of the
Darkbringer to avoid gaining a level of
exhaustion as the Dark Seeds they ate attempt
to subvert them).
• A group of musicians are tuning their
instruments. They seem to be drunk, as they are
all far off key.
• A group of dwarves hand the adventurers mugs
of herb-scented green beer from one of the kegs
on their wagon. It is delicious and refreshing.
After these encounters, the adventurers find
Constable Aliana Mathnir as she patrols the
festival, keeping an eye on things and working to
stop trouble before it starts. When she spots the
adventurers, she hurries them into a relatively
quiet alcove to receive their report. Once she has
the information from Grypht’s sanctum, she asks
the adventurers to help her gather the councilors
(give them Player Handout 1) at the Elmwood
Hall so they can decide what to do about the
Darkbringer’s threat.
If the table does not have characters who have
played a previous Elmwood adventure, the
Constable seeks them out based on their renown.
She then hurries them into a relatively quiet alcove
10
and explains that there has been a threat leveled
against the town by followers of the Darkbringer,
Moander. An adventurer that the Elmswood
Council hired to find a solution was found outside
of town, suffering from grievous wounds. He was
brought into the church of Chauntea to recover.
With a new group of adventurers in town, she’d
like to hire the characters to help defend the town
quietly. She offers to pay the party 750 gp to work
for her through the Greengrass Festival, at least
until she is certain of safety. If the characters
agree, she asks the adventurers to help her gather
the councilors (give them Player Handout 1)
at the Elmwood Hall by the time the next band
starts up so they can decide what to do about the
Darkbringer’s threat.
Roleplaying Aliana Mathnir
Aliana is a short and muscular dark-skinned
woman with blue eyes and brown hair that is
kept at shoulder length. She has a scar along
her face that she when cultists activated a
devastation orb in the town two years ago.
Aliana tries to make sure that all get along
with her, even when she is doing something
they do not like (such as collecting taxes).
She likes to keep a neat and efficient town.
She is friendly and honest and likes to make
everyone feel that they can come to her with
any issues concerning the town.
Quote: “Look, just get along, okay? We have
bigger problems to deal with.”
If the characters have played ELMW1-2, read or
paraphrase the following before explaining the
Constable’s offer:
Through a break in the crowd, you see the
Constable talking down a pair of red-faced
rowdies on the verge of coming to blows. Ali-
ana Mathnir is a dark-skinned human wom-
an, notable for her welcoming smile, slightly
marred by a burn scar down her cheek. She
has an air of command which easily cows
the much larger toughs. As the ruffians slink
away, Aliana catches your eye, and her
face brightens as she cocks her chin toward
a sheltered nook. The Constable seems to
desire a quiet word with you.
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
PA RT 1
Once the adventurers have a chance to share what
they learned in Grypht’s sanctum and to accept
the Constable’s offer to aid the town again, the
Constable asks them to help gather the other
councilors. Since the cult’s plans are already in
motion, she asks that the heroes spend no more
than an hour gathering who they can. They should
head to the Elmwood Hall (which she points out
to the characters if they are new to town) when
the band starts playing the beginning of the dance.
Read or paraphrase the following if they relay what
they learned in ELMW1-2:
“This news you bring is truly troubling. Thank
the merciful gods that you returned before
these madmen did anything more than taint
our grain. Please, help me gather the other
councilors to the Elmwood Hall so we can
decide how to respond. Time is pressing, so
join us there when the band starts playing,
regardless of who you have found.”
11
OR, if characters did not play previous Elmwood
adventures, read or paraphrase the following
before explaining the Constable’s offer:
Through a break in the crowd, you see the
Constable talking down a pair of red-faced
rowdies on the verge of coming to blows. Ali-
ana Mathnir is a dark-skinned human wom-
an, notable for her welcoming smile, slightly
marred by a burn scar down her cheek. She
has an air of command which easily cows
the much larger toughs. As the ruffians slink
away, Aliana catches your eye, and her
face brightens as she cocks her chin toward
a sheltered nook. The Constable seems to
desire a quiet word with you.
“Thank the merciful gods that you came to
join us! We have suspicions that the Dark-
bringer’s minions are here to disrupt the
festival. Please, help me gather the other
councilors to the Elmwood Hall so we can
decide how to respond to these potential
threats. Time is pressing, so join us there when
the band starts playing, regardless of who
you have found.”
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
PA RT 1
 PART 2. FINDING THE
COUNCILORS
Expected Duration: 50 minutes.
The adventurers make their way about the
Greengrass Festival seeking out the other
councilors. As they do so, Moander cultists are also
gathering up councilors in order to corrupt them.
Based on Player Handout 1: List of Council
Members, let the characters decide whom to
seek out. Regardless of their decisions, run each
of the following encounters in order, inserting the
chosen council member where appropriate. The
adventurers will only have time to find three of the
councilors before the band starts playing, signaling
the time to meet the Constable at the Elmwood Hall.
If the adventurers elect to “divide and
conquer” by splitting up, allow them to do so.
Choose one of the adventurers (using whatever
method you like) to find the first councilor, while
the rest of the party keeps searching; once the
first encounter has resolved, choose another
adventurer to find the second councilor. Hopefully,
that encounter raises some suspicions and the
players decide to reconvene; if not, choose another
adventurer to find the third councilor (ideally the
one least capable of handling a combat encounter
solo) and allow them to find the other adventurers
relatively quickly. If that adventurer chooses to
jump in alone, the other adventurers can hear the
sounds of combat and get involved a round or two.
Use some of the following interactions to spice
up the transitions from scene to scene:
• A gaggle of children rush past, shrieking as
they chase a clockwork bird trailing colorful
streamers.
• An elderly woman places garlands of flowers
around the necks of passersby, including the
adventurers, if they let her (Make note of any
characters who accept; those characters must
make a DC 10 Constitution save when they
confront the Voice of the Darkbringer to avoid
gaining a level of exhaustion as the Dark Seeds
in the flowers attempt to subvert them).
12
• An elven man offers samples of freshly fried
fish.
• A group of young women chatter happily about
being married that evening in the traditional
community wedding.
Easy-Peasy
The first councilor is right where Aliana expected
them to be, doing what she expected them to
be doing. It might take a few minutes to pull the
councilor away from whatever they are up to, but
once the adventurers mention the Constable’s
name and the danger facing the town, the council
member agrees to head to the Elmwood Hall
shortly.
Bad Apple
The second councilor is not where the adventurers
expect them to be. Asking around with a DC 12
Charisma (Persuasion) check allows a character to
quickly learn that the councilor they seek headed
off with some festival-goers a few hours ago,
walking towards the Middens. If the check is failed,
the adventurers are still asking around when the
councilor they seek comes ambling up.
This councilor has been implanted with a Dark
Seed, and has been sent back to the festival with
orders to bring other councilors to the Middens
so they can be corrupted as well. Any adventurer
with a passive Insight of 13 or higher immediately
recognizes that the councilor is acting odd.
During their interactions, roleplay or describe the
counselor as glassy-eyed, spaced-out, and generally
robotic. If the adventurers tell the councilor that
they are to escort them to a council meeting, the
council member is quite amenable to going along.
Should the adventurers accuse the councilor
of acting odd, or mention Moander or the cult, the
council member takes off running for the Middens.
If the adventurers subdue the councilor publicly,
word quickly spreads and they have disadvantage
on subsequent checks dealing with party-goers.
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
PA RT 2
If the adventurers let the councilor go, they hurry
off to inform the cult that meddlesome heroes are
about. Otherwise, a cultist witnesses the heroes
escorting or taking down the councilor. In either
case, the cult advances their plans in response to
the adventurers’ actions.
Rotten to the Core
The third councilor is not where the adventurers
expect them to be, either. Asking around with a
successful DC 12 Charisma (Persuasion) check
allows a character to quickly learn that the
councilor they seek just walked off with a some
festival-goers a few minutes before, heading
thataway. Similarly, a successful DC 12 Wisdom
(Perception) check allows a character to spot the
councilor heading around a building with a couple
of celebrants, just as they are suspiciously yanked
out of sight by an unseen party.
Rounding the corner, you see a dozen
festival-goers, gaily decked in garlands and
crowns of flowers. They are huddled around
a cart filled to overflowing with apple cores,
chicken bones, and other garbage. There is
no sign of (councilor), but when the revelers
spot you, they draw hidden blades and rush
to attack!
Twelve Darkbringer Cultists are led by a
Darkbringer Druid (the druid has already cast
charm person on the councilor, so has used a 1st
level spell slot). Each of the cultists is a willing
follower of Moander, and has been implanted with
a Dark Seed containing a fragment of the god’s
twisted power. When a Darkbringer Cultist or the
Darkbringer Druid is reduced to 0 hit points, the
Dark Seed consumes the last of their life energy
and grows rapidly, bursting from the body as a
Needle Blight or a Vine Blight (in the case of the
Darkbringer Cultists) or a Shambling Mound (in
the case of the Darkbringer Druid) at the start of
the cultist’s next turn.
13
A Vine Blight sprouts if the cultist fell within
10’ of an enemy, a Needle Blight if the cultist fell
more than 10’ away from the closest enemy; once
six of a particular kind of blight have sprouted, all
further cultists turn into the other, regardless of
distance from enemies.
The process of a person being consumed and
sprouting a blight is horrific; upon witnessing
the transformation for the first time, a character
must succeed on a DC 12 Wisdom saving throw or
become Frightened until the end of their next turn.
Confronted with capable heroes, the followers
of the Darkbringer are overjoyed by the chance to
capture and corrupt such powerful individuals.
The cultists open up with a volley of yellow mold
flasks to soften up the PCs, while the druid focuses
on dividing the heroes with spells. All are confident
of rebirth upon death, and fight without fear.
The cultists do not seek to kill the characters, far
preferring to take them alive so they can join the
ranks of those who worship Moander.
General Features
Light. This fight occurs late in the day under a clear
sky, so there is ample sunlight.
Sounds. While this is farther away from the stage,
the sounds of revelry are all around.
Houses. A row of neat houses stand on either side
of a broad, packed earth road. The homeowners
are all out enjoying the festival, so there are no
witnesses.
Fences. These low fences demarcate neat gardens,
but climbing over them in combat takes an extra
square of movement.
Hand-cart. This large vehicle filled with trash
stands at the corner, facing toward the Middens.
The unconscious councilor is partly buried in the
cart.
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
PA RT 2
 Adjusting the Adventure
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very Weak Party: remove 6 Darkbringer
Cultists, 3 Vine Blights and 3 Needle
Blight; none of the Darkbringer Cultists
have yellow mold spore flasks
• Weak Party: remove 4 Darkbringer
Cultists, 2 Vine Blights, and 2 Needle
Blight; only two of the cultists have yellow
mold spore flasks
• Strong Party: add 2 Darkbringer
Berserkers; after a berserker is reduced to
0 hit points, at the start of the berserker’s
next turn a gas spore erupts from its
body and immediately explodes. A DC 15
Intelligence (Nature) check can reveal the
danger posed by getting infected by a gas
spore’s disease.
• Very Strong Party: add 3 Darkbringer
Berserkers, who grow into gas spores upon
death, as above

.Developments
Once the party defeats the cultists, they can
find the kidnapped councilor unconscious but
otherwise unharmed, buried in the trash with a
number of strange pods placed about their head
and face. Just as the adventurers pull the councilor
out, once of the pods bursts in a spray of seeds
which quickly burrow into the trash.
Once the heroes get the councilor standing,
the sound of sprightly dance music drifts from the
town center, which is the signal to rendezvous with
the Constable.
Treasure
The council member asks that the party make a
brief stop at their home, which is on the way to
Elmwood Hall. The councilor fetches two vials of
antitoxin and a potion of fire breath as a reward.

14 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
PA RT 2
 PART 3. WHEN
CULTISTS ATTACK
Expected Duration: 50 minutes
Council Meeting
The Constable has gathered three councilors and
an acolyte of Chauntea, in addition to whomever
the adventurers managed to bring in. When
they hear of the cult attack and their monstrous
transformations, the council begins devising a
plan to deal with the threat. The heroes may take a
short rest while the council talks, and are welcome
to contribute to the discussion. If the characters do
not know about Moander already, distribute Player
Handout 2 with them as the council members
share what they know.
The council plan boils down to three steps:
gather the townsfolk in a central location; arm
the militia to secure the area; and enact the ritual
the adventurers (either the characters or the
lone survivor) retrieved to create a ward against
Moander’s influence (if the characters do not have
the ritual, then the acolyte of Chauntea reports
that the survivor has awoken and has shared the
ritual with the priestess there). Unfortunately, the
cultists have been making their own plans, and as
the councilors finalize their plans, screams ring out
from the town. The attack has begun!
The Constable leaps to her feet, drawing her
sword. The other councilors rise as well, some
nervous, others angry, but all determined to
protect their home.
“No time for more debate. We need
to secure the Temple of Chauntea; it is the
only place with the reagents necessary to
complete the protective ritual (you brought
back/the lone survivor returned with)! We
must also gather up as many of the people
as we can and get them to safety, here in
the Hall or at the Temple. You take one job,
we’ll handle the other.’
15
The adventurers have a choice of mission:
• Rush to the Temple of Chauntea to secure it.
Once secure, they’ll need to protect it while
either they or the priestess enact Grypht’s ritual
against Moander.
• Or, they may head into the chaos to rally
townsfolk and bring them to safety.
If the adventurers wish to secure the Temple, and
do not have a ritual caster among them, a councilor
tells them that Kamik Felicity, one of the priests,
should be there. Hopefully, he will be able to
perform the ritual.
If the characters wish to secure the temple
but have not played ELMW1-2, a survivor from the
group that brought the ritual back is convalescing
there and will be able to help.
3A: Secure the Temple of Chauntea
The adventurers rush into the madness that has
engulfed the Greengrass Festival. They are to make
their way to the Temple of Chauntea, gather the
necessary reagents from the stores there, and
complete Grypht’s ritual to create a secure refuge
against the Darkbringer’s forces.
The Greengrass Festival has descended into
utter madness. All around, cultists decked out
in festive greenery menace the townsfolk,
herding them south and east. The Consta-
ble and the other councilors spread out into
the crowds, rallying the people of Elmwood
as they go. You must make your way to the
Temple of Chauntea and use (Grypht’s/the)
ritual to create a refuge for the noncomba-
tants. The knowledge that their loved ones
are safe will allow the defenders of Elmwood
to fight all the harder.
The adventurers are able to make their way to
the Temple of Chauntea with little resistance. The
cultists seem focused on moving groups of villagers
out of town, and avoid those who appear able
to put up active resistance. The adventurers are
met at the door by one of the priests of Chauntea,
Kamik Felicity, a tall, red-haired elf. If any of
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
PA RT 3
 the adventurers have participated in ELMW1-
1 or ELMW1-2, Kamik recognizes them, and is
relieved that help has arrived. Otherwise, it takes
a successful DC 12 Charisma (Persuasion) check
to convince him to let armed strangers into the
sanctuary; mentioning Constable Aliana Manthir
grants advantage on this check.
Inside, thirty townsfolk mill about, anxious
and frightened. Kamik is happy to bring out the
temple’s supply of reagents, and is willing to act
as either the primary ritual caster, or a secondary
participant. See the Appendix: Monster/NPC
Statistics for Kamik’s abilities. Grypht’s ritual can
protect an area up to 100 feet on a side, which
is enough to encompass the sanctuary and the
courtyard.
If the characters did not play ELMW1-2, there
is also a bandaged human man with scraggly, curly
black hair and ripped robes. He is wounded and
paranoid. Kamik introduces him as the wizard
Golan, the only survivor of a past adventuring
party that the Elmwood Council hired to seek
the protective rituals from the Rimwood in the
Cormanthor. Despite his paranoia, Golan does have
the ritual and has begun making preparations
with Kamik, but he is very concerned that the
minions of the Darkbringer will be alerted as soon
as they begin. The priest and the mage will need
the characters to protect them and the innocents if
they are to succeed.
Roleplaying Golan
Golan is a young mage and has gotten more
than he bargained for, and is worse off for it.
Scarred and scared, he was unprepared to face
the minions of a dead god and a frighteningly
powerful group of necromancers so early in
his career. He is eager to help, and also eager
to warn others of the necromancers’ threat to
the area.
Quote: “If the Darkbringers don’t get us,
the forces of Tyranne Epaline will. The
necromancers were none too pleased we took
their treasure from the Rimwood.”
16
General Features
Sanctuary. The sanctuary of the Temple of
Chauntea is a wide, stone-floored area with thick,
wooden pillars supporting a 30-foot high roof. It is
used as a threshing floor during the harvest.
Furnishings. Furnishings are light and easy to
stack. Feel free to add them being broken by area
spells and missed weapon attacks to add to the
chaos and destruction in the narrative.
Doorways. There is a doorway, large enough for
a wagon to pass, in each wall, but the only way to
secure them is with light wooden shutters, meant
to keep out weather more than people. Breaking
the shutters open requires a DC 13 Strength check.
Light. The Sanctuary is lit by continual flame
spells, and is considered well-lit. Outside, it is still
daytime and natural sunlight.
Performing the ritual takes a total of 1 hour and
10 minutes, during which time the caster(s)
cannot leave the area, and must devote full time
to it like casting other ritual magic (it is suggested
that the characters have Kamik and/or Golan
perform the ritual if they are present). After 45
minutes, the Voice of Moander becomes aware of
the gathering power, and dispatches a force of a
Darkbringer Druid and 7 Darkbringer Cultists,
accompanied by a shambling mound, to disrupt
it. They attack from two sides, bursting through
the shutters. Adventurers who are outside may
attempt to engage the cultists before they breach
the sanctuary, so prepare to adjust the encounter
appropriately.
The cultists also carry two Dark Seed packs,
which they hurl into the crowd of villagers huddled
in the middle of the sanctuary. Each Dark Seed
pack corrupts four commoners, who then do what
they can to disrupt the ritual, focusing on grappling
the ritual casters and moving them outside the
sanctuary.
Two of the Darkbringer Cultists (choose
randomly) are hosts to fully-developed Dark Seeds;
when slain, the seeds consume the last of their
life energy and grow rapidly into Darkbringer
Horrors, bursting out at the beginning of the
cultist’s next turn and acting immediately.
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
PA RT 3
 Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very Weak Party: replace the Shambling
Mound with a Darkbringer Horror,
replace three Darkbringer Cultists with
Darkbringer Druids; none of the cultists
transform into Darkbringer Horrors
• Weak Party: replace the Shambling
Mound with a Darkbringer Grabber,
and only two of the cultists transform into
Darkbringer Horrors
• Strong Party: add a second Shambling
Mound
• Very Strong Party: add 2 Shambling
Mounds, and a total of 3 cultists transform
into Darkbringer Horrors.
Developments
If the party successfully repels the cultist attack
without the ritual being disrupted, any corrupted
townsfolk fall unconscious and the Dark Seeds
infecting them soon die. The ritual also cleanses
any dark seeds the adventures may have consumed
earlier in the adventure. With the Temple of
Chauntea as an unassailable stronghold, the
Constable is able to rally the town’s defenders and
start to mount a counter-attack. Kamik rewards the
party with a scroll of restoration, as well as using
his remaining spells to help the party recover.
If the ritual is disrupted but the cultists are
driven away, the ritual must be started anew. It
is eventually successful, but repelling additional
attackers depletes (Golan if he is present and)
Kamik’s stores, leaving him nothing to reward the
party.
In either case, the Constable meets the
adventurers at the temple shortly thereafter with a
new mission. Proceed to Part 4.
17
3B Rescue the Townsfolk
Read or paraphrase the following:
The Greengrass Festival has descended into
utter madness. All around, cultists bedecked
with festive greenery menace the townsfolk,
herding them south and east toward the
Downs. The Constable leads the priests of
the council toward the Temple of Chauntea,
hoping to enact Grypht’s ritual and create a
refuge.
It has been a harrowing hour, gathering
up small groups of villagers and directing
them toward safe havens. The cultists have
been herding people south and east, but
have thus far avoided facing armed oppo-
sition. You have seen members of the town
council and deputies leading people to the
Elmwood Hall or the Temple of Chauntea,
but now you spot a deputy leading a large
group west, toward the Firewood Glade in
the forest. Very strange…
General Features
Clearing. This encounter takes place in Firewood
Glade, a clearing in the woods roughly 60 feet
across.
Trail. A 10-foot wide trail leads through the forest
towards Elmwood. Beyond the edge of the clearing,
the woods are thick with undergrowth, providing
plenty of cover for the Darkbringer’s forces. Treat
the undergrowth as difficult terrain that provides
cover.
Light. The sun is low in the sky but it is still normal
light conditions outside.
Deputy Umbero Marivaldi has seen the horde
of plant monsters massing on the edge of the
Middens, and does not like his odds of survival.
Unfortunately, he was spotted by a group of
villagers as he legged it out of town, and has
acquired a growing train of terrified followers.
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
PA RT 3
 Umbero is a Turami man from the shore of
the Inner Sea who ended up in Elmwood decades
ago and survived the Burning. He is very large,
has close cropped hair, and has his ears pierced
numerous times. He has a sour look on his face,
and is arrogant, rude, and unkempt. When the
adventurers catch up with him in the Firewood
Glade, he is trying to convince the villagers to let
him leave “to scout” so he can desert in peace.
Unfortunately for him, Umbero’s chosen escape
route has taken him directly into a force of
Darkbringer plant monsters poised to outflank
Elmwood’s defenders.
Four Darkbringer Druids lead a force of 4
Awakened Trees and 8 Needle Blights, attacking
from either side of the glade. The druids open the
attack by hurling two Dark Seed packs into the
crowd of villagers, corrupting four commoners
who join the fight by attempting to grapple
adventurers and drag them into the surrounding
forest. Umbero Marivaldi (a veteran) makes a
show of protecting the townsfolk, but as soon as
an opening presents itself, he flees back down the
trail. Characters with a Passive Insight of 12 or
higher can recognize Umbero’s growing terror;
he can be persuaded to stay and fight by taking
an action to make a DC 12 Charisma (Persuasion)
check.
18
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very Weak Party: replace the Darkbringer
Druids with Darkbringer Cultists, remove
two of the Awakened Trees and four
Needle Blights
• Weak Party: remove one Darkbringer
Druid and one Awakened Trees
• Strong Party: add three Darkbringer
Druids
• Very Strong Party: add three Darkbringer
Druids and two Awakened Trees.”
Development
If the party manages to defeat the cultists and to
persuade Deputy Umbero Marivaldi to return to
his duties defending the town, they can escort
the villagers to the Temple of Chauntea, where
Constable Aliana Mathnir welcomes their return,
as well that of her deputy. She provides the party
with a scroll of restoration and two potions of
healing from the temple stores.
If the party allowed Umbero to flee, he had
plundered the Constable’s cache of supplies before
going. In either case, the Constable has another
mission for the heroes. Proceed to Part 4.
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
PA RT 3
 PART 4.
GEARING UP
Expected duration: 10 minutes (4a) or 40
minutes (4b).
With the Temple of Chauntea secure and some
of the people safe, the Constable meets up with
the heroes to make the next move in retaking the
town. She offers them another choice of missions:
recover incendiaries from the Stone’s Dwarf Inn,
OR escort a group of militia to the armory to get
arms and armor.
Your short breather in the relative safety of the
Temple of Chauntea is interrupted by the Con-
stable’s arrival. A trickle of dried blood mars
her cheek, but her voice is strong and sure.
“You have my thanks for all you have
done, getting the people of Elmwood to safe-
ty. At last we can begin our counterattack.
There are many who would fight, but they
lack weapons. Unfortunately, a strong force
of the enemy bars the way to the armory.
“I also believe that Tinker Nimbledigit,
our resident wizard, has a cache of incendiar-
ies which would be very helpful in burning our
way into the enemy stronghold. Unfortunate-
ly, we have lost contact with him, and we
cannot wait for him to disarm whatever tricks
he has in place at the Stone’s Dwarf Inn.
“So, which of these little jaunts appeals
to you?”
The adventurers have a choice between escorting
a group of militia to the armory, battling their
way through enemy forces, or getting past Tinker
Nimbledigit’s tricks and traps at the Stone’s
Dwarf Inn. Their choice here also determines
which encounter they will face in Part 5. If the
adventurers choose to undertake the “Arm the
Militia” mission (a combat encounter), in Part
5 they will face the “Slimes, Molds, and Fungi”
encounter (a skill-based encounter); if they
choose the “Fetch the Fireworks” mission (a skill-
based encounter), then in Part 5 they will face
“Gulguthra!” (a combat encounter).
19
4A Fetch the Fireworks
The Stone’s Dwarf Inn is an inn on the southern
edge of the town. The gnome wizard Tinker
Nimbledigit runs it in a fairly haphazard way, but
he is well loved for his humor and good cheer.
General Features
Construction. The Stone’s Dwarf Inn is three story
solid stone inn with on no rational floorplan, and is
full of odd angles and stairways that go nowhere.
Magical. The building radiates magic if examined.
The Stone Dwarf. Outside of the building is an
entirely too lifelike stone dwarf.
When the group of characters approach the
building, read or paraphrase the following:
Thanks to the Constable clearing the way,
you make it to the Stone’s Dwarf Inn virtually
unchallenged. The place is shuttered up tight.
As you walk up, the front door opens a crack,
and a wizened gnome peers out, barking ‘Go
away! We aren’t home!’ before slamming the
door closed. There is the sound of a heavy bar
slipping into place.
This is an illusion created by Tinker. If the
adventurers spend more than five minutes at the
door, the illusion repeats. The door is locked, DC 18
Dexterity (Thieves’ Tools) check to pick the lock,
or DC Strength check to bash it in. Once the door
is breached, a glyph of warding is triggered: the
two characters closest to the door must make DC
14 Charisma saving throws or be banished, as the
spell banishment, for 1 minute. When they return,
a magic mouth on the dwarf statue says “Mind your
manners or your next time-out may be a bit chilly.”
Once through the front door, the heroes find
themselves in an eclectic common room, filled with
knickknacks, curios, and bric-a-brac. It doesn’t take
long to look through the common room, kitchen,
and half-dozen guest rooms, leaving a small locked
door at the bottom of a short flight of stairs the
only unexplored option. The first adventurer to
set foot on the stairs must make a DC 14 Charisma
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
PA RT 4
 save or be teleported to the center of the Temple
Gardens, leaving all their clothing and gear behind.
Another magic mouth, this one on a stuffed
alligator hanging from the ceiling, says, “You’ll find
your embarrassed friend in the temple gardens.
Don’t come back if you value breathing.”
The victim of the trap finds themselves standing
naked in the gardens. They may get some pants
and a basic weapon from villagers sheltering in the
temple, and can rejoin the party by making a DC
10 ability check of some sort to avoid the cultists
(Athletics to outrun them, Bluff to seem corrupted,
Perception to notice approaching danger, ect). On
a failed check, the adventurer suffers 2d10 damage
from a run-in with the cult on the way.
The door itself is exquisitely crafted, with
a massive, complex-looking lock. An illusion of
an incredibly complex trap overlays the lock
mechanism, one that seems like it would defy any
attempt to bypass. A successful DC 14 Intelligence
(Investigation) check reveals the trap to be an
illusion, but if anyone says the word “illusion”, the
trap fades away and a dozen glyphs fade into view
on the doorframe, similar to the ones that held
the banishment and teleportation traps. They are
fakes, however, a fact that can be revealed by a
DC 16 Intelligence (Arcana) check. The lock itself
requires a DC 18 Dexterity (Thieves’ Tools) check,
or a DC 20 Strength check to bash in.
Inside is a crowded workroom, filled with all
kinds of tools, from watchmakers’ implements
to gardening hoes. There are several illusions
covering portions of the room; each can be found
with a DC 14 Intelligence (Investigation) check.
• An illusory rug covering a wooden chest sitting
in a hole in the floor in the northwestern corner
of the room. Inside the chest are a variety of
valuable-looking, but ultimately worthless,
trinkets, such as plated jewelry, glass gems, and
brass coins.
• An illusion covering a large portion of the
east wall. A section of shelving that appears to
hold rusty pipes of various lengths and widths
actually hold a large number of fireworks and
several cases of alchemist’s fire. An adventurer
who passes within 5’ of this section may notice
20
the smell of smokepowder with a DC 16 passive
Perception.
• An illusion conceals a stout door on the north
wall. If a creature touches the door, a magic
mouth angrily shouts “You have until the count
of five to leave this place. Linger and die! 5. 4.
3. 2. 1.” When the countdown reaches one, a
glyph of warding containing a cloud kill spell
goes off, filling the room with toxic gas. Any
creature in the room takes 5d8 poison damage,
DC 14 Constitution save for half damage. The
cloud moves away from the door at 10 feet per
round, into vents Tinker installed under the
stairs so the gas wouldn’t get into the kitchen or
common room.
• The door is strongly locked and barred; if the
adventurers decide to go through it, Tinker
uses a peephole to get a look at them. If he
recognizes any adventurers from ELMW1-1 or
ELMW1-2, he uses the message cantrip to tell
a bad joke, judging their reaction to determine
whether they are corrupted or not. An example:
“A ham sandwich walks into the Wayfarer’s
Rest and orders an ale. Halser Taletreader says
‘Sorry, we don’t serve food here.’” It takes a DC
13 Charisma (Persuasion) check to convince
Nimble to open up; any player who actually
laughed at the joke has advantage on the check.
Nimble and his wife are sheltering a dozen
small children hidden away in his safe room. He
is happy to hear that the Temple of Chauntea
is secure and promises to join the Constable
shortly with his fireworks.
Developments
If the adventurers bring the incendiaries back
to the Temple of Chauntea, they can take a short
rest while they are adapted for martial use. If they
manage to convince Nimble to join the Constable at
the Temple, he gives them two flasks of alchemist’s
fire. Otherwise, Nimble comes in later, having
contacted the Constable via sending. In either case,
while the adventurers are taking a well-earned
rest, he uses alchemist’s fire to turn the festive
fireworks into incendiary rockets. Proceed to Part
5, in which the adventurers will face the encounter
“Gulguthra!” before moving on to “The Voice of
Moander.”
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
PA RT 4
4B Arm the Militia
Many townsfolk are willing to fight, but have
no weapons or armor. The Constable asks the
adventurers to protect them as they make their
way to the Shrine of Tempus, where Hammer
Granthar Copperhelm keeps an armory hidden
beneath the altar.
Read the following when the characters take
on this mission:
Two dozen hard-eyed men and women stand
before you. Some carry broom handles, bro-
ken chairs, a few even have large rocks. They
are all determined to fight, but to survive long,
they will need proper gear. Fortunately, the
local priest of Tempus is the sort to be well-pre-
pared.
By this point, the cult has gained a more aggressive
footing. Roving bands of marauders infest
Elmwood, and a strong force is between the Temple
of Chauntea and the Shrine to Tempus. If the
adventurers have a scout ranging ahead, allow that
character to make a DC 11 Dexterity (Stealth) check
to get close enough to the shrine to spot the cultists
ransacking the place. Otherwise, the adventurers
and their charges just stumble into the area.
Features of the Area
Open Air. The Shrine to Tempus is an open-air
altar, surrounded by a ring of large pillars
Pillars. The pillars are hung with broken shields,
shattered blades, and tattered battle-flags. Any
creature that is pushed into a pillar takes 1d10
piercing damage from the jagged shards adorning it.
Hallow. The entire area is under the effects of a
hallow spell which provides all creatures within
immunity to being Frightened. (Also note that that
it hedges out celestials, elementals, fey, fiends,
and undead; this includes paladin mounts and
familiars).
Altar. Under the altar is a large hidden chamber
containing weapons, armor and shields to outfit
fifty. It takes a combined Strength of 35 to move
the altar (note that as long as enough townsfolk
survive, they can help to move the altar).
Light. The sun is setting and there is dim light.
21
A Darkbringer Druid commands four
Darkbringer Berserkers and three Corrupted
Owlbears captured in the forest. The berserkers are
host to fully developed Dark Seeds; when they are
reduced to 0 hit points, it consumes the last of their
life energy to quickly grow into a gas spore, which
explodes at the start of the berserker’s next turn.
The militia members are guards, but without
equipment they would be easy prey for the cultists.
If necessary, they can snatch up weapons dropped
by cultists, but until properly equipped, they are
not effective combatants.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very Weak Party: remove one
Darkbringer Berserker, one gas spore,
and two of the Corrupted Owlbears
• Weak Party: Remove two Corrupted
Owlbears
• Strong Party: Add a Darkbringer
Berserker and a gas spore
• Very Strong Party: The Darkbringer
Druid also has a fully-developed Dark Seed;
when the druid is reduced to 0 hit points, it
grows into a Shambling Mound at the start
of the druid’s next turn.
Developments
Once the cultists are eliminated, the adventurers
can open up the altar cache, allowing the militia to
arm themselves. If at least 20 of the militia survive,
the Constable gives the adventurers a potion of
greater healing out of the medical supplies she
had set aside for the mission. If the party lost more
than four of the militia to the cultists’ attack, the
supplies are used trying to get the fallen back into
the fight.
In either case, the party may take a short rest.
The Constable wants them as fit as possible for
the counterattack she is planning. Proceed to Part
5, where the adventurers will encounter “Slimes,
Molds, and Fungi” before moving on to “The Voice
of Moander.”
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
PA RT 4
 PART 5.
THE FINAL PUSH
Expected duration: 10 minutes (5a) or 40
minutes (5b). 50 min (5c).
The townsfolk are as safe as they can be, and those
willing to fight are as equipped as possible. The
Constable has identified the Middens as the most
likely location for the cult’s leaders, so she has
ordered an all-or-nothing attack.
If the adventurers completed 4B: Arm the
Militia encounter, Elmwood’s fighters cut a path
through the cult’s lines for them. However, the
party must deal with some insidious traps before
they can confront the Voice of Moander and break
the cult once and for all. Proceed to the encounter
5A: Slimes, Molds, and Fungi.
If the adventurers completed the 4A: Retrieve
Fireworks encounter, the adventurers must fight
their way through the cult’s line, but the makeshift
artillery barrage has burned away many defenses.
Proceed to the encounter 5B: “Gulguthra!”
Once the heroes have made their way past
either the active or passive defenses, they face the
leader of the cult in encounter 5C: The Voice of
Moander.
The sun has set after hours of fighting, but
there seems to be no end to the cultists and
their abominations. Lurching out of the smoke,
Constable Aliana Mathnir smiles when she sees
you, then winces as the opens a scabbed-
over gash on her cheek.
“We seem to have dealt with most of
the human cultists, but more and bigger
plant monsters keep joining the fray. With the
light dying, I fear that we are lost if we can-
not stop these creatures at their source. The
cultists seem to be protecting something in the
Middens, which also seems to be the birthing
place of these foul things. What say you, my
friends: one last push? For Elmwood!”
22
General Features
The following general features apply to all
encounters in part 5.
The Middens. The encounters take place in the
Middens. The ground is spongy and treacherous,
with broken farm implements, derelict furniture,
and all manner of garbage strewn about. Large
heaps of compost are connected by rough paths the
farmers use to drop off scraps and pick up fertilizer.
Light and Visibility. The sun has set, the red sky
providing dim light, for now. Intermittent fires
sputter among the damp undergrowth (if the
adventurers completed the Retrieve Fireworks
encounter, there are a number of larger fires and
many charred-out patches).
Sounds. The battle rages all around, with clashing
arms, screaming wounded, desperate battlecries and
a strange, rustling susurrus of the plant creatures
coming from all sides. Occasionally, bits of odd
chanting can be heard from deeper in the Middens.
Smells. Drifts of smoke and the tang of spilled
blood do little to distract from the overwhelming
smell of damp rot and decay that pervades the
Middens, like a compost heap turned over after a
long, wet spring.
5A Gulguthra!
If the adventurers completed the “Retrieve
Fireworks” encounter, read or paraphrase the
following:
Bloody and near exhaustion, the few remain-
ing defenders of Elmwood jog southeast. The
last rays of the setting sun turn Aliana Mathnir’s
sword into a blazing torch as she raises it high.
‘This ends NOW!’ The Constable breaks into a
run, charging straight at the cultists and mon-
sters massed around the garbage Middens.
With a ragged cry, the rest of the Elmwood’s
fighters lurch after her. A screaming flurry of
rockets suddenly shoots past, exploding in
huge blossoms of flame. The disoriented cultists
scatter, but hulking masses of filth burst out of
the heaps of trash. Time for action!
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
PA RT 5
As the few other defenders of Elmwood engage the
remaining cultists, the adventurers must deal with
a more monstrous threat: otyughs raised from the
filth of the Middens and infused with the
Darkbringer’s power by the Voice of Moander.
Three Darkbringer Otyughs burst out of the
compost heaps around the party, surrounding
them. The south-eastern edge of the map is a
raging inferno as marked on the tactical map; any
creatures entering or ending their turn in the area
suffer 2d10 fire damage.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very Weak Party: remove one
Darkbringer Otyugh; the Otyughs are
hit by the fireworks barrage, and start the
encounter with 80 hit points each
• Weak Party:The Otyughs are hit by the
fireworks barrage, and start the encounter
with 80 hit points each
• Strong Party: The Darkbringer Otyughs
surprise the party
• Very Strong Party: The Darkbringer
Otyughs surprise the party; in addition,
when they burst from the garbage heaps,
they fling burning garbage in all directions,
dealing 4d6 bludgeoning damage and 2d6
fire damage to other creatures within 20
feet; a DC 15 Dexterity saving throw allows
a creature to take half damage.
Treasure
The characters find a Staff of the Woodlands among
their vanquished foes. Note that this treasure is not
available twice. Characters can only do encounter
5A OR 5B, but not both.
Developments
After the characters have bypassed the challenges
here, proceed to section 5C The Voice of Moander.
23
5B Slimes, Molds and Fungi
If the adventurers completed the “Arm the Militia”
encounter, read or paraphrase the following:
Bloody and near exhaustion, the remaining
defenders of Elmwood jog southeast. The last
rays of the setting sun turn Aliana Mathnir’s
sword into a blazing torch as she raises it high.
‘This ends NOW!’ The Constable breaks
into a run, charging straight at the cultists and
monsters massed around the garbage Mid-
dens. With a roar, the people of Elmwood slam
into the writhing horde. They batter a gap in
the line of cultists and monstrosities. Now, it is
up to you to confront the source of this mad-
ness!”
The Constable and other defenders of Elmwood
have engaged the bulk of the cult defenders, but
the Voice of Moander has had days to augment
the defenses of her lair. Whichever path the
adventurers take, they encounter a patch of yellow
mold, carefully cultivated under a layer of mulch
to protect it from the sun, and a tripwire trap that
releases a barrage of clay pots filled with green
slime. Note that the dim light conditions apply
disadvantage on Perception checks, which reduces
Passive Perception by 5. If the party is using a
brighter light source, it will be impossible for
them to attempt stealth checks against the Voice of
Moander.
The approach to the Voice of Moander weaves
among massive piles and heaps of trash and rotting
compost. Pathways roughly 15 feet wide meander
among the mounds, limiting vision to no more than
60 feet at any given time.
Should the adventurers elect to clamber over
the mounds rather than go between, they find
them to be slow going, and they still need to cross
the trapped area between heaps. They can manage
a glimpse of a twisted tree near the south-eastern
edge of the Middens, which seems to be source of
the chanting.
Yellow Mold: The outer approach to the Voice
of Moander’s lair is carpeted with patches of
yellow mold, carefully protected from the sun by
thin layers of mulch. Unless the adventurers are
prodding the ground ahead of them, whoever is in
front steps right into a patch.
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
PA RT 5
 When disturbed, yellow mold ejects a cloud
of spores that fill a 10-foot cube centered on the
disturbed patch. Any creature in the area must
succeed on a DC 15 Constitution saving throw
or take 11 (2d10) poison damage and become
poisoned for 1 minute. While poisoned in this way,
the creature takes 5 (1d10) poison damage at the
start of each of its turns. The creature can repeat
the saving throw at the end of each of its turns,
ending the effect on itself on a successful save.
Sunlight or any amount of fire damage
instantly destroys one patch of yellow mold.
Green Slime Launcher: The inner approach to
the Voice of Moander’s lair is spiderwebbed with
tripwires. It takes a DC 15 Wisdom (Perception)
check to notice a slightly-raised tripwire among the
mulch, filth, and tangled vines that fill the Middens;
note that dim light imposes disadvantage on
Wisdom (Perception) checks based on sight. If the
trap is set off, a hail of clay pots rains down in a 30’
radius, centered on the triggering character, which
shatter in sprays of green slime. Each creature in
the area must make a DC 13 Dexterity saving throw;
on a failure, the creature is exposed to green slime;
if the creature fails by 5 or more they suffer a direct
hit, and any non-magical armor they are wearing
has its AC bonus permanently reduced by 1.
Green slime deals 5 (1d10) acid damage when
a creature is first exposed, and the creature takes
the damage again at the start of each of its turns
until the slime is scraped off or destroyed. Against
wood or metal, green slime deals 11 (2d10) acid
damage each round, and any nonmagical wood or
metal weapon or tool used to scrape off the slime is
effectively destroyed.
Sunlight, any effect that cures disease, and
any effect that deals cold, fire, or radiant damage
destroys a patch of green slime.
Treasure
The characters find a Staff of the Woodlands among
the trash in the Middens. Note that this treasure
is not available twice. Characters can only do
encounter 5A OR 5B, but not both.
Developments
After the characters have bypassed the challenges
here, proceed to section 5C The Voice of Moander.
24
5C The Voice of Moander
After battling through the cult’s last defenses,
the adventurers can finally confront the Voice of
Moander, the source of all the evil that has beset
Elmwood. At the southeast edge of the Middens,
the Voice raises wave after wave of plant creatures
to hurl against the defenders of Elmwood. If the
adventurers are not carrying a light source, they
can get within 60 feet before needing to make a
group Dexterity (Stealth) check to get closer. If
they are carrying lights, or fail to beat the passive
Perception of either the Voice of Moander (who has
disadvantage on her Passive Perception due to her
chanting) or of her corrupted treant companion.
If successful in their stealth, the Voice is on the
ground, but if unsuccessful, she begins hidden
among the treant’s foliage. Read or paraphrase the
following, adjusting as necessary depending upon
whether the Voice of Moander is hidden in the
treant or not.
The Corrupted Treant has already used its
Animate Trees ability, but the animated trees have
already been destroyed. The Voice of Moander
(drow priestess of Lolth) has lost her Summon
Demon ability once she severed her connection to
the Demon Goddess.
Pressing deeper into the Middens, the sounds
of battle fade behind the heaps of trash.
The sound of chanting is clearer now, a high,
hoarse voice calling out maddening syllables.
A line of trees stands on the far side of a clear
area, but the voice seems to be coming from
the top of a larger tree a few yards away from
the rest, covered in broad shelves of fungus
and patches of rot.
The Voice of Moander tries to remain hidden in the
branches of her corrupted treant ally, using her
spells to support its attacks by summoning beasts
and disrupting the enemy. If the party managed to
approach without alerting her, she uses her levitate
ability on her first turn to get among the branches
and take cover.
While in the corrupted treant’s branches, the
Voice of Moander has half cover (+2 to AC and
Dexterity saving throws), and enough concealment
to hide if she so desires. She moves about the
corrupted treant’s branches as if they were difficult
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
PA RT 5
terrain, but does not need to make an ability check
to do so as the treant is actively helping her; she
may improve her cover to three-quarters (+4 to AC
and Dexterity saving throws) by moving to put the
bulk of the treant’s crown between herself and an
enemy. She tends to remain 20 feet off the ground.
In order to confront the Voice of Moander
in melee while she is so protected, a character
must climb up the treant by first making a DC
16 Strength (Athletics) check to clamber up into
its branches, which will provoke an attack of
opportunity from the corrupted treant. Moving
about on the treant requires the same check, and
the character moves at half speed while climbing.
The corrupted treant has advantage on any attacks
it makes against an enemy in its branches, and
focuses its attacks on such creatures, as they are
the greatest threat to the Voice of Moander.
The Voice of Moander and her allies fight to the
death. Once she is slain, the plant monsters are no
longer motivated by her malice, and simply wander
off to a damp spot to put down roots. The surviving
cultists scatter.
25
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very Weak Party: replace the Corrupted
Treant with a Shambling Mound, the Voice
of Moander has already used all of her 4th
and 5th level spell slots
• Weak Party: Replace the Corrupted Treant
with a Shambling Mound; the Voice of
Moander has already used her 5th level
spell slots
• Strong Party: The Corrupted Treant has
the use of its Animate Trees ability, and has
already animated two nearby trees. The
Voice of Moander uses minor illusion to
make the chanting come from one of the
animated trees, and she and Corrupted
Treant wait to act until the adventurers
engage the trees
• Very Strong Party: The Corrupted Treant
has the use of its Animate Trees ability, and
has already animated two nearby trees.
The Voice of Moander uses minor illusion
to make the chanting come from one of the
animated trees, and she and Corrupted
Treant wait to act until the adventurers
engage the trees. Add a Shambling Mound
which enters the battle in the second round,
and approaches from the rear.
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
PA RT 5
 Conclusion
When the Voice of Moander falls, read or
paraphrase the following:
With a last, desperate shriek to a dead god,
the Voice of Moander falls. As she does,
the animated plants suddenly lose their
malevolent thirst for slaughter and simply
wander aimlessly.
Lacking their horrific allies, the people
of Elmwood are able to drive off or kill the
remaining followers of the Darkbringer over
the course of the night. The death toll was
surprisingly light, as the cultists were more
interested in converts than slaughter, but
many brave defenders were still slain battling
the plant monsters.
When the last of the mindless plant
monsters is cut down, Constable Aliana
Mathnir addresses the massed defenders of
Elmwood. ‘You have all done well. Our home
is safe. Now get some rest!’ Ignoring her
own order, the Constable hurries on to deal
with putting the town back together, pausing
briefly to give you a tired, thankful smile.
In the days that follow, Elmwood’s
Greengrass festival goes on at a much
26
subdued level, but the party does go on.
Catlin Littleleaf of Druid Brewery makes sure
everyone has more than enough libations, and
thanks to your efforts, there’s enough food
for everyone. There are many marriages over
the next few days and you are invited to all of
them as the heroes of Elmwood.
As the Greengrass festival winds to a close,
Aliana Mathir and some of the rest of the
townsfolk seek you out.
“Look, I’ve been talking to folks and,” she rubs
her chin as she smiles at you. “And folks want
you to stick around. I’ve been talking to the
platt-writer, the guy who figures out property
boundaries, and we’d like to give you a little
piece of Elmwood for your very own if you’d
like to stay here, and maybe build a house or
a shop on it, you know?” She gives you a grin.
“You make this place feel a little safer. It’s been
a rough couple of years, and you’re just the
kind of people we want to have here as we
rebuild.”
The constable gives you a wry smile, and
offers out a brand-new property deed.
“Welcome home, adventurer.”
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M W O O D :
PA RT 6
Rewards
Make sure note their rewards on their adventure
log sheets. Give your name and DCI number (if
applicable) so players can record who ran the
session.
Experience
Total up all combat experience earned for
defeated foes, and divide by the number of
characters present in the combat. For non-combat
experience, the rewards are listed per character.
Give all characters in the party non-combat
experience awards unless otherwise noted.
Combat Awards
Name of Foe XP per Foe
Awakened Tree 450
Corrupted Owlbear 700
Corrupted Treant 5,000
Darkbringer Berserker 450
Darkbringer Cultist 50
Darkbringer Druid 450
Darkbringer Grabber 1,100
Darkbringer Horror 700
Darkbringer Otyugh 1,800
Elmwood Commoner 25
Gas Spore 100
Needle Blight 50
Shambling Mound 1,800
Vine Blight 100
Voice of Moander 3,900
Non-Combat Awards
Task or accomplishment XP per Char.
Every Non-Named Elmwood Citizen
(commoners and guards) that
survives an encounter 100 xp
Kamik Felicity survives uninfected 200 xp
Golan Survives uninfected 200 xp
Deputy Umbero Marivaldi survives
uninfected 200 xp
Finding and saving Tinker and
the children 500 xp
Survive Encounter 5A: Slimes,
Molds, and Fungi 750 xp
27
The minimum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 4,500
experience points.
The maximum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 6,000 experience
points.
Treasure
The characters receive the following treasure,
divided up amongst the party. Characters should
attempt to divide treasure evenly whenever
possible. Gold piece values listed for sellable
gear are calculated at their selling price, not their
purchase price.
The grateful townsfolk take up a collection to
reward the heroes who saved Elmwood, which,
combined with some loot found on the cultists,
totals 3,000 GP.
Character with the story award “We Owe You
One” from ELMW1-2 receive an extra 500 GP and
can cross that portion of the story reward off.
Consumable magic items should be divided
up however the group sees fit. If more than one
character is interested in a specific consumable
magic item, the DM can determine who gets it
randomly should the group be unable to decide.
Permanent Magic Item Distribution
Permanent magic items are divided according to
a system. D&D Adventurers League has a system
in place to determine who is awarded permanent
magic items at the end of a session. Each
character’s logsheet contains a column to record
permanent magic items for ease of reference.
• If all the players at the table agree on one
character taking possession of a permanent
magic item, that character gets the item.
• In the event that one or more characters indicate
an interest in possessing a permanent magic
item, the character that possesses the fewest
permanent magic items gets the item. If there
is a tie in the total number of permanent magic
items owned by contesting characters, the item’s
owner is determined randomly by the DM.
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
R E WA R D S
 Staff of the Woodlands
Staff, rare (requires attunement by a druid)
This staff can be wielded as a magic quarterstaff
that grants a +2 bonus to attack and damage rolls
made with it. While holding it, you have a +2 bonus
to spell attack rolls.
The staff has 10 charges for the following
properties. It regains 1d6 + 4 expended charges
daily at dawn. If you expend the last charge, roll
a d20. On a 1, the staff loses its properties and
becomes a nonmagical quarterstaff.
Spells. You can use an action to expend 1 or more
of the staff’s charges to cast one of the following
spells from it, using your spell save DC: animal
friendship (1 charge), awaken (5 charges), barkskin
(2 charges), locate animals or plants (2 charges),
speak with animals (1 charge), speak with plants (3
charges), or wall of thorns (6 charges).
You can also use an action to cast the pass
without trace spell from the staff without using any
charges.
Tree Form. You can use an action to plant one end
of the staff in fertile earth and expend 1 charge to
transform the staff into a healthy tree. The tree is
60 feet tall and has a 5-foot-diameter trunk, and its
branches at the top spread out in a 20-foot radius.
The tree appears ordinary but radiates a faint aura
of transmutation magic if targeted by detect magic.
While touching the tree and using another action
to speak its command, word, you return the staff to
its normal form. Any creature in the tree falls when
it reverts to a staff
Scroll of Lesser Restoration (3rd Level)
Scroll, Uncommon
A description of this item can be found in the
Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Potion of Healing
Potion, Uncommon
A description of this item can be found in the
Player’s Handbook and Dungeon Master’s Guide.
28
Potion of Greater Healing
A description of this item can be found in the
Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Potion of Fire Breath
A description of this item can be found in the
Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Antitoxin x2
A description of this item can be found in the
Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Alchemists Fire x2
A description of this item can be found in the
Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Favors and Enmity
Characters that successfully completed this
adventure earn the story reward “Home Sweet
Home”. Reward them with Player Handout 3.
This character has been given a plot of land in
Elmwood by the Elmwood Council to use as their
permanent residence. This plot of land can be
either sized for a comfortably large house in the
main area of the town of Elmwood OR about an
acre of bare land out in the farmlands for some
crops or a ranch, a barn, and a farmhouse. Future
Elmwood adventures will have more information
about how to upgrade this residence.
Renown
Each character receives one point of renown.
Downtime
Each character receives 10 downtime days at the
conclusion of this adventure.
DM Rewards
You receive 300 XP, 150 gp, and ten downtime
days for running this session.
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
R E WA R D S
Appendix: Corrupted Treant
Huge plant, chaotic evil
NPC / Monster Statistics Armor Class 16 (natural armor)
Hit Points 138 (12d12+60)
Awakened Tree Speed 30 ft.
Huge plant, neutral evil STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Armor Class 13 (natural armor) 23 (+6) 8 (-1) 21 (+5) 12 (+1) 16 (+3) 12 (+1)
Hit Points 59 (7d12+14)
Damage Resistances bludgeoning, piercing
Speed 20 ft.
Damage Vulnerabilities fire
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Condition Immunities yellow mold spores
19 (+4) 6 (-2) 15 (+2) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 7 (-2)
Senses passive Perception 13
Damage Vulnerabilities fire Languages Common, Druidic, Elvish, Sylvan
Damage Resistances bludgeoning, piercing Challenge 9 (5,000 XP)
Senses passive Perception 10 False Appearance. While the corrupted treant
Languages understands Common but can’t speak remains motionless, it is indistinguishable from a
Challenge 2 (450 XP) normal tree.
Siege Monster. The treant deals double damage to
Actions objects and structures.
Slam. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 10 ft.,
one target. Hit: 14 (3d6+4) bludgeoning damage Actions
Multiattack. The corrupted treant makes two slam
Corrupted Owlbear attacks.
Large plant, neutral evil
Slam. Melee Weapon Attack: +10 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
Armor Class 13 (natural armor) one target. Hit: 16 (3d6+6) bludgeoning damage.
Hit Points 59 (7d10+21)
Rock. Ranged Weapon Attack: +10 to hit,
Speed 30 ft.
range 60/180 ft., one target. Hit: 28 (4d10+6)
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA bludgeoning damage.
20 (+5) 12 (+1) 17 (+3) 2 (-4) 6 (-2) 1 (-5)
Animate Trees (1/day). The corrupted treant
magically animates one or two trees it can see
Condition Immunities blinded, charmed, within 60’ of it. These trees have the same statistics
frightened, paralyzed as a treant, except they have Intelligence and
Senses blindsight 30 ft. (blind beyond this radius), Charisma scores of 1, they can’t speak, and they
passive Perception 8 have only the Slam action option. An animated
Languages - tree acts as an ally of the treant. The tree remains
Challenge 3 (700 XP) animate for 1 day or until it dies; until the treant
dies or is more than 120 feet from the tree; or
Actions until the treant takes a bonus action to turn it back
Multiattack. The corrupted owlbear makes two into an inanimate tree. The tree then takes root if
attacks: one with its beak and one with its claws. possible.
Beak Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 10 (1d10+5) piercing damage.
Claws Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 14 (2d8+5) slashing damage.

29 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
APPENDIX
 Darkbringer Cultist
Medium humanoid (any race), chaotic evil
Armor Class 12 (leather armor)
Hit Points 9 (2d8)
Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
11(+0) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 10 (+0)
Skills Deception +2, Religion +2
Condition Immunities yellow mold spores
Senses passive Perception 10
Languages Common
Challenge ⅛ (50 XP)
Dark Devotion. The cultist has advantage on
saving throws against being charmed or frightened.
Actions
Scimitar. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5
ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d6+1) slashing damage
Yellow Mold Flask. The cultist hurls a flask
containing yellow mold spores at a space within
15’, which bursts to fill a 10’ cube. Any creature
in the area must succeed on a DC 15 Constitution
saving throw or take 11 (2d10) poison damage and
become poisoned for 1 minute. While poisoned
in this way, the creature takes 5 (1d10) poison
damage at the start of each of its turns. The
creature can repeat the saving throw at the end of
each of its turns, ending the effect on itself with
a successful save. Each cultist carries one flask of
yellow mold spores; if the cultist is reduced to 0 HP
while carrying a flask, there is a 50% chance that
it shatters in a cloud extending 5’ from the cultist;
the flask automatically breaks in this fashion if the
cultist takes 5 or more Thunder damage from a
single effect.
30
Darkbringer Druid
Medium humanoid (any race), neutral evil
Armor Class 11 (16 with barkskin)
Hit Points 27 (5d8+5)
Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
10(+0) 12 (+1) 13 (+1) 12 (+1) 15 (+2) 11 (+0)
Skills Medicine +4, Nature +3, Perception +4
Condition Immunities yellow mold spores
Senses passive Perception 14
Languages Common, Druidic, Sylvan
Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Spellcasting. The druid is a 4th-level spellcaster.
Its spellcasting ability is Wisdom (spell save DC 12,
+4 to hit with spell attacks). It has the following
druid spells prepared.
Cantrips (at will): druidcraft, shillelagh, thorn
whip
1st level (4 slots): charm person, entangle,
longstrider, thunderwave
2nd level (3 slots): barkskin, hold person
Actions
Quarterstaff. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit
(+4 to hit with shillelagh), reach 5 ft., one target.
Hit: 3 (1d6) bludgeoning damage, or 4 (1d8)
bludgeoning damage if wielded in two hands, or 6
(1d8+2) bludgeoning damage with shillelagh
Yellow Mold Flask. The cultist hurls a flask
containing yellow mold spores at a space within
15’, which bursts to fill a 10’ cube. Any creature
in the area must succeed on a DC 15 Constitution
saving throw or take 11 (2d10) poison damage and
become poisoned for 1 minute. While poisoned
in this way, the creature takes 5 (1d10) poison
damage at the start of each of its turns. The
creature can repeat the saving throw at the end of
each of its turns, ending the effect on itself with
a successful save. Each cultist carries one flask of
yellow mold spores; if the cultist is reduced to 0 HP
while carrying a flask, there is a 50% chance that
it shatters in a cloud extending 5’ from the cultist;
the flask automatically breaks in this fashion if the
cultist takes 5 or more Thunder damage from a
single effect.
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
APPENDIX
Darkbringer Berserker Darkbringer Otyugh (Spore Servant Otyugh)
Medium humanoid (any race), chaotic evil Large plant, neutral evil
Armor Class 13 (hide armor) Armor Class 14 (natural armor)
Hit Points 67 (9d8+27) Hit Points 114 (12d10+48)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 20 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
16(+3) 12 (+1) 17 (+3) 9 (-1) 11 (+0) 9 (-1) 16 (+3) 11 (+0) 19 (+4) 2 (-4) 6 (-2) 1 (-5)

Condition Immunities yellow mold spores Condition Immunities blinded, charmed,

Senses passive Perception 10 frightened, paralyzed
Languages Common Senses blindsight 30’ (blind beyond) passive
Challenge 2 (450 XP) Perception 8
Reckless. At the start of its turn, the berserker can Languages - (can follow telepathic orders from the
gain advantage on all melee weapon attack rolls Voice of Moander)
during that turn, but attack rolls against it have Challenge 5 (1,800 XP)
advantage until the start of its next turn. Limiting Telepathy. The otyugh can magically
transmit simple messages and images to any
Actions creature within 120 feet of it that can understand a
Greataxe. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 language. This form of telepathy doesn’t allow the
ft., one target. Hit: 9 (1d12+3) slashing damage. receiving creature to telepathically respond.
Actions
Darkbringer Grabber (Spore Servant Chuul) Multiattack. The otyugh makes three attacks: one
Large plant, neutral evil with its bite and two with its tentacles.
Armor Class 16 (natural armor) Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
Hit Points 93 (11d10+33) one target. Hit: 12 (2d8+3) piercing damage. If
Speed 20 ft., swim 20 ft. the target is a creature, it must succeed on a DC
15 Constitution saving throw against disease or
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
19 (+4) 10 (+0) 16 (+3) 2 (-4) 6 (-2) 1 (-5) become poisoned until the disease is cured. Every
24 hours that elapse, the target must repeat the
Condition Immunities blinded, charmed, saving throw, reducing its hit point maximum
frightened, paralyzed by 5 (1d10) on a failure. The disease is cured on
a success. The target dies if the disease reduces
Senses blindsight 30 ft. (blind beyond this radius), its hit point maximum to 0. This reduction to the
passive Perception 8 target’s hit point maximum lasts until the disease
Languages understands Common, but can’t speak is cured.
Challenge 4 (1,100 XP) Tentacle. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 10
Actions ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d8+3) bludgeoning damage
plus 4 (1d8) piercing damage. If the target is
Multiattack. The darkbringer horror makes two Medium or smaller, it is grappled (escape DC 13)
pincer attacks. and restrained until the grapple ends. The otyugh
Pincer. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 10 ft., has two tentacles, each of which can grapple one
one target. Hit: 11 (2d6+4) bludgeoning damage. target.
The target is grappled (escape DC 14) if it is a
Large or smaller creature and the Darkbringer
grabber doesn’t have two other creatures grappled.

31 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
APPENDIX
 Darkbringer Horror (Spore Servant Hook Horror) Elmwood Commoner
Large plant, neutral evil Medium humanoid (human), neutral
Armor Class 15 (natural armor) Armor Class 10
Hit Points 75 (10d10+20) Hit Points 4 (1d8)
Speed 20 ft., climb 20 ft. Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
18 (+4) 10 (+0) 15 (+2) 2 (-4) 6 (-2) 1 (-5) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0)

Condition Immunities blinded, charmed, Senses passive Perception 10

frightened, paralyzed Languages Common
Senses blindsight 30 ft. (blind beyond this radius), Challenge 0 (10 XP)
passive Perception 8
Languages understands Common, but can’t speak
Actions
Challenge 3 (700 XP) Club. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 2 (1d4) bludgeoning damage
Actions
Multiattack. The darkbringer horror makes two
hook attacks.
Hook. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 10 ft.,
one target. Hit: 11 (2d6+4) piercing damage
Umbero Marivaldi, veteran
Medium humanoid (human), lawful neutral
Armor Class 17 (splint)
Hit Points 58 (9d8+18)
Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
16(+3) 13 (+1) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 10 (+0)

Skills Athletics +5, Perception +2

Senses passive Perception 12
Elmwood Guard
Medium humanoid (human), neutral
Languages Common, Draconic
Armor Class 11
Challenge 3 (450 XP)
Hit Points 11 (2d8+2)
Actions Speed 30 ft.
Multiattack. Nama makes two spear attacks; if STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Nama is wielding a spear in each hand, she may 13 (+1) 12 (+1) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 10 (+0)
make a third spear attack
Spear. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, Skills Perception +2
reach 5 ft. or range 20 ft./60 ft., one target. Hit: 7 Senses passive Perception 12
(1d6+3) piercing damage, or 8 (1d8+3 piercing Languages Common
damage) if wielded in two hands. Challenge 1/8 (25 XP)
Acid Breath. (1/short or long rest) creatures in a Actions
5 ft. by 30 ft. line must make a DC 14 Dex saving
Fist. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
throw, taking 3d6 acid damage on a failure, or half
target. Hit: 2 bludgeoning damage
that on a success.

32 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
APPENDIX
Gas Spore Giant Spider
Large plant, unaligned Large beast, unaligned
Armor Class 5 (natural armor) Armor Class 14 (natural armor)
Hit Points 1 (1d10-4) Hit Points 26 (4d10+4)
Speed 0 ft., fly 10 ft. (hover) Speed 30 ft., climb 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
5 (-3) 1 (-5) 3 (-5) 1 (-5) 1 (-5) 1 (-5) 14 (+2) 16 (+3) 12 (+1) 2 (-4) 11 (+0) 4 (-3)

Damage Immunities poison Skills Stealth +7

Condition Immunities blinded, deafened,
frightened, paralyzed, poisoned, prone
Senses blindsight 30 ft. (blind beyond this radius),
passive Perception 5
Languages -
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
Death Burst. The gas spore explodes when it
drops to 0 hit points. Each creature within 20 feet
of it must succeed on a DC 15 Constitution saving
throw or take 10 (3d6) poison damage and become
infected with a disease on a failed save. Creatures
immune to the poisoned condition care immune to
this disease.
Spores invade an infected creatures syste,
killing the creature in a number of hours equal to
1d12+the creature’s Constitution score, unless the
disease is removed. In half that time, the creature
becomes poisoned for the rest of the duration.
After the creature dies, it sprouts 2d4 Tiny gas
spores that grow to full size in 7 days.
Senses blindsight 10 ft., darkvision 60 ft., passive
Perception 10
Languages -
Challenge 1 (200 XP)
Spider Climb. The spider can climb difficult
surfaces, including upside down on ceilings,
without need to man an ability check.
Web Sense. While in contact with a web, the spider
know the exact location of any other creature in
contact with the same web.
Web Walker. The spider ignores movement
restrictions caused by webbing.
Actions
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 7 (1d8+3) piercing damage, and
the target must make a DC 11 Constitution saving
throw, taking 9 (2d8) poison damage on a failed
save, or half as much damage on a successful one.
If the poison damage reduces the target to 0 hit
points, the target is stable but poisoned for 1 hour,
even after regaining hit points, and paralyzed while
poisoned in this way.
Web (Recharge 5-6). Ranged Weapon Attack: +5 to
hit, range 30/60 ft., one target. Hit: The target is
restrained by webbing. As an action, the restrained
target can make a DC 12 Strength check, bursting
the webbing on a success. The webbing can also be
attacked and destroyed (AC 10; hp 5; vulnerability
to fire damage; immunity to bludgeoning, poison,
and psychic damage).

33 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
APPENDIX
 Kamik Felicity, Priest of Chauntea (Priest) Shambling Mound
Medium humanoid (half-elf), neutral good Large plant, neutral evil
Armor Class 13 (chain shirt) Armor Class 15 (natural armor)
Hit Points 27 (5d8+5) Hit Points 136 (16d10+48)
Speed 25 ft. Speed 20 ft., swim 20’
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
10 (+0) 10 (+0) 12 (+1) 13 (+1) 16 (+3) 13 (+1) 18 (+4) 8 (-1) 16 (+3) 5 (-3) 10 (+0) 5 (-3)

Skills Medicine +6, Persuasion +3, Perception +6, Skills Stealth +2

Religion +4
Senses passive Perception 16
Languages Common, Elvish, Sylvan
Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Fey Ancestry. Kamik has advantage on saving
throws against being Charmed, and is immune to
magical sleep.
Divine Eminence. As a bonus action, Kamik can
expend a spell slot to cause his melee weapon
attacks to magically deal an extra 10 (3d6) radiant
damage to a target on a hit. This benefit lasts until
the end of the turn. If the priest expends a spell slot
of 2nd level or higher, the extra damage increases
by 1d6 for each level above 1st.
Spellcasting. Kamik is a 5th-level spellcaster. His
spellcasting ability is Wisdom (spell save DC 13,
+5 to hit with spell attacks). He has the following
cleric spells prepared.
Cantrips (at will): light, sacred flame,
thaumaturgy
1st level (4 slots): cure wounds, healing word,
sanctuary
2nd level (3 slots): augury, lesser restoration
3rd level (2 slots): beacon of hope, dispel magic
Actions
Mace. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 3 (1d6) bludgeoning damage
Damage Resistances cold, fire
Damage Immunities lightning
Condition Immunities blinded, deafened,
exhaustion, yellow mold spores
Senses blindsight 60 ft. (blind beyond this radius),
passive Perception 10
Languages understands Common, Druidic and
Sylvan but can’t speak
Challenge 5 (1,800 XP)
Lightning Absorption. Whenever the shambling
mound is subjected to lightning damage, it takes no
damage and regains a number of hit points equal to
the lightning damage dealt.
Actions
Multiattack. The shambling mound makes two
slam attacks. If both attacks hit a Medium or
smaller target, the target is grappled (escape DC
14), and the shambling mound uses its Engulf on it.
Slam. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 13 (2d8+4) bludgeoning damage.
Engulf. The shambling mound engulfs a Medium
or smaller creature grappled by it. The engulfed
target is blinded, restrained, and unable to breathe,
and it must succeed on a DC 14 Constitution saving
throw at the start of each of the mound’s turns
or take 13 (2d8+4) bludgeoning damage. If the
mound moves, the engulfed target moves with it.
The mound can have only one creature engulfed at
a time.

34 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
APPENDIX
Voice of Moander (Drow Priestess of Lolth) Spellcasting The Voice of Moander is a 10th-level
Medium humanoid (elf), chaotic evil spellcaster. Her spellcasting ability is Wisdom
Armor Class 16 (scale mail) (spell save DC 14, +6 to hit with spell attacks). She
has the following spells prepared.
Hit Points 71 (13d8+13)
Cantrips (at will): guidance, minor illusion,
Speed 30 ft.
poison spray, shillelagh, thorn whip
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA 1st level (4 slots): charm person, cure wounds,
10 (+0) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 13 (+1) 17 (+3) 18 (+4)
entangle, longstrider
Saving Throws Con +4, Wis +6, Cha +7 2nd level (3 slots): hold person, spike growth,
Skills Nature +4, Perception +4, Religion +4, web
Stealth +5 3rd level (3 slots): conjure animals (2 giant
Condition Immunities yellow mold spores spiders), dispel magic
Senses darkvision 120’, passive Perception 16 4th level (3 slots): blight, confusion
Languages Elvish, Undercommon, Sylvan 5th level (2 slots): insect plague, mass cure
wounds
Challenge 8 (3,900 XP)
Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, Voice of
Fey Ancestry. The Voice of Moander has advantage
Moander has disadvantage on attack rolls, as well
on saving throws against being charmed, and
as on Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on
magic can’t put her to sleep.
sight.
Innate Spellcasting. The Voice of Moander’s innate
spellcasting ability is Charisma (spell save DC 15). Actions
She can innately cast the following spells, requiring Multiattack. The Voice of Moander makes two
no material components: quarterstaff attacks.
At will: dancing lights Quarterstaff. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit
1/day each: darkness, faerie fire, levitate (self (+6 to hit with shillelagh), reach 5 ft., one target.
only) Hit: 3 (1d6) bludgeoning damage, or 4 (1d8)
bludgeoning damage if wielded in two hands, or 7
(1d8+3) bludgeoning damage with shillelagh

35 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
APPENDIX
 Vine Blight Needle Blight
Medium plant, neutral evil Medium plant, neutral evil
Armor Class 12 (natural armor) Armor Class 12 (natural armor)
Hit Points 26 (4d8+8) Hit Points 11 (2d8+2)
Speed 10 ft. Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
15 (+2) 8 (-1) 14 (+2) 5 (-3) 10 (+0) 3 (-4) 12 (+1) 12 (+1) 13 (+1) 4 (-3) 8 (-1) 3 (-4)
Skills Stealth +1 Condition Immunities blinded, deafened, yellow
Condition Immunities blinded, deafened, yellow mold spores
mold spores Senses blindsight 60 ft. (blind beyond this radius),
Senses blindsight 60 ft. (blind beyond this radius), passive Perception 9
passive Perception 10 Languages understands Common but can’t speak
Languages Common Challenge ¼ (50 XP)
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
Actions
Actions Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
Constrict. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach one target. Hit: 6 (2d4+1) piercing damage
10 ft., one target. Hit: 9 (2d6+2) bludgeoning Needles. Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, range
damage, and a Large or smaller target is grappled 30/60 ft., one target. Hit: 8 (2d6+1) piercing
(escape DC 12). Until this grapple ends, the target damage
is restrained, and the blight can’t constrict another
target.
Entangling Plants (Recharge 5-6). Grasping roots
and vines sprout in a 15-foot radius centered on
the blight, withering away after 1 minute. For the
duration, the area is difficult terrain for nonplant
creatures. In addition, each creature of the blight’s
choice in that area when the plants appear must
succeed on a DC 12 Strength saving throw or
become restrained. A creature can use its action
to make a DC 12 Strength check, freeing itself or
another entangled creature within reach on a
success.

36 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
APPENDIX
Appendix: Adventure Flowchart

37 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
APPENDIX
 Appendix: Maps

38 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
APPENDIX
39 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
APPENDIX
40 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
APPENDIX
Fetch the Fireworks

41 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
APPENDIX
42 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
APPENDIX
43 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
APPENDIX
44 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
APPENDIX
Appendix: Player Handouts
Handout 1: List of Councilors and their Likely Locations
• Constable Aliana Mathnir (already found)
• Alksuth Cork, a bald human male, gnarled and heavily tattooed; he is likely to be overseeing the
wrestling matches near Black Hand Cheeses
• Aranda Fletcher, a very tall half-elven woman, with blond hair and a pronounced limp; she is one of
the judges at the Beautiful Pig competition at Prici’s Threads and Gowns
• Drake Holmstrumph, an older, gray-haired human man, most likely at the docks drinking with other
survivors of the Burning
• Deputy Kala Namak, a black-scaled dragonborn female, assigned to patrol the festival; she could be
anywhere
• Larissa Aerasumé, Priestess of Selune, a strikingly beautiful half-elf who strongly favors here moon
elf heritage; she is likely sketching festival goers in exchange for donations to charity at the Wayfarer’s
Rest Inn
• Nils Sankt, Priest of Bane, an extremely old human male, who hobbles about with the aid of a long
cudgel carved with a fist; he is likely heckling at the dunking booth near the Refugee Barracks
• Harvest Mother Shayad, Priestess of Chauntea: an imposing half-orc woman, likely to be found in the
temple gardens shooing people away from her prized flowerbeds
• Thyra Stoneshoulders, a tall, lovely dwarf woman, most likely serving food and drink at her inn, the
Silvery Gem
• Yao Seijou, head of the Shield Trading Company: a short, slender man with long, black hair in a
ponytail, wears expensive clothes, probably at the Shield Trading Company compound working

45 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
APPENDIX
 Handout 2: Moander the Darkbringer
The saurial archmage Grypht devoted a great deal
of time and energy to researching Moander the
Darkbringer, and even more to developing methods
to combat the god’s power.
The cult’s primary means of spreading its
influence is through the use of Dark Seeds. A
creature implanted with one of the corrupting pods
quickly falls under the thrall of the Darkbringer,
free will suppressed by the desire to serve.
Willing thralls retain a good deal of their prior
personalities, but unwilling victims are utterly
dominated by the dark god’s will. They tend to
have a fixed, glassy stare, slightly jerky movements,
and no sense of humor, or sense of anything that
brings joy.
The Dark Seeds continue growing in their
hosts, eventually replacing their flesh and even
vital organs. Unwilling victims can last as long
as a tenday before being fully corrupted, but the
seeds grow much more quickly in the willing. In
either case, those infected with a Dark Seed are
identifiable by the plant material that grows from
their bodies: green, leafy tendrils, even flowers.
The host grows sickly if these growths are denied
light and air for too long, so cultists trying to blend
in tend to wear corsages, boutonnieres, wreaths,
and such to camouflage the corrupting growths.
Grypht’s crowning achievement was a
powerful ritual that could hedge out creatures
imbued with Moander’s power, and even kill the
Dark Seeds within a host.
46
Any character with the Ritual Caster class
feature who is able to cast 3rd level spells can
enact Grypht’s ritual. It has a 1-hour casting time,
so ritually casting it will take 70 minutes. The ritual
requires pure water and healing herbs, worth 100
gp. When completed, the ritual wards an area up
to 100 feet on a side against creatures infected
with Moander’s power. Such creatures must make
a Charisma saving throw in order to enter the
warded area. If successful, repeat the saving throw
at the start of each of its turns or fall unconscious
for 1 minute. If an infected creature fails 3 such
saves, the Dark Seed within dies; the creatures
gains a level of Exhaustion for each day it has been
infected, so long-time cultists die when their Seed
does. Casting the ritual in the same place every day
for a year renders it permanent, or it can be tied to
a hallow spell.
While casting the ritual, the caster is
considered to be concentrating, as if on a spell. If
interrupted, the caster can defend herself, but must
use either an action or a bonus action each round
to maintain the ritual. If the caster leaves the area,
or loses concentration, the ritual ends and must be
started anew.
Several casters can undertake the ritual at
the same time. It doesn’t increase the speed of the
casting but the ritual is not interrupted unless
all the participants lose concentration or leave
the area. As long as one ritualist is continuing the
ritual, a caster who had lost concentration, or left
the area, may rejoin the ritual as an action.
E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
APPENDIX
Handout 3: Welcome Home, Adventurer!

47 E L M W 1 - 3 / T H E B AT T L E O F E L M WO O D :
APPENDIX
 arrival
JAY AFRICA
Adventure Designer
Adventure Code: HILL 1-1

Hillsfar struggles to stay aloft after the fall of First Lord Torin Nomerthal.
Trade is stagnant. Relations between the citizens and non-humans remain
strained. Tensions are rising as Sir Vuhm Yestral is unable to ease the
situation. The arrival of a charismatic stranger incites the populace to rebel
against the new ruler. A D&D Adventurers League adventure set in Hillsfar.

A 4-hour adventure for 5th-10th level characters

Producer: Baldman Games

Hillsfar Administrator: Cindy Moore
Development: Shawn Merwin
Editing and Layout: Encoded Designs
Cartography: Jay Africa
Organized Play: Chris Lindsay
D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall,
Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks, Alan Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster
Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League, all other Wizards of the Coast product names, and their respective
logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive likenesses
are property of Wizards of the Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America.
Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the express written
permission of Wizards of the Coast.
©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31,
2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK.
 Introduction
Welcome to Arrival, a D&D Adventurers League
adventure, Part One of the Dark Intentions Trilogy
This adventure is designed for three to seven 5th-10th level characters, and is optimized for five 6th-
level characters. The adventure is set in the Moonsea region of the Forgotten Realms, in and around
the city of Hillsfar.

The D&D Adventurers League Preparing the Adventure

This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of
the D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure,
players track their characters’ experience, treasure,
and other rewards, and can take those characters
through other adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a
store event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a
DCI number. This number is your official Wizards of
the Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have
a number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to
use to create and advance their characters. Players
can continue to play their characters after the
storyline season has finished, possibly participating
in a second or third storyline with those same
characters. A character’s level is the only limitation
for adventure play. A player cannot use a character
of a level higher or lower than the level range of a
D&D Adventurers League adventure.
For more information on playing, running
games as a Dungeon Master, and organizing games
for the D&D Adventurers League, please visit the
D&D Adventurers League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
• Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
• Read through the adventure, taking notes
of anything you’d like to highlight or remind
yourself while running the adventure, such as a
way you’d like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d
like to use in a combat.
• Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
• Gather together any resources you’d like to
use to aid you in running this adventure--such
as notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and
battlemaps.
• If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.
Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
• Character name and level
• Character race and class
• Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most
common passive ability check
• Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, etc.)

2 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : I N T R O D U C T I O N
Players that have characters outside the
adventure’s level range cannot participate in
the adventure with those characters. Players
with ineligible characters can make a new 1st-level
character or use a pregenerated character. Players
can play an adventure they previously played or
ran as a Dungeon Master, but not with the same
character.
Ensure that each player has an official
adventure logsheet for his or her character (if not,
get one from the organizer). The player fills out
the adventure name, session number, date, and
your name and DCI number. In addition, the player
also fills in the starting values for experience, gold,
downtime, renown, and number of permanent
magic items. He or she fill in the other values and
write notes at the conclusion of the session. Each
player is responsible for maintaining an accurate
logsheet.
If you have time, you can do a quick scan of
a player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing
looks out of order. If you see magic items of very
high rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you
can ask players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict
item use or ask them to use a standard ability
score array. Point players to the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and
it’s the beginning of an adventure or episode,
they can declare their activity and spend the days
now. Alternatively, they can do so at the end of
the adventure or episode. Players should select
their characters’ spells and other daily options
prior to the start of the adventure, unless the
adventure specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread
the adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, you may see sidebars
to help make adjustments for smaller/larger
groups, and characters of higher/lower levels than
the optimized group. Most of the time, this is used
for combat encounters.
3 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : I N T R O D U C T I O N
You may adjust the adventure beyond the
guidelines given. For example, if you’re playing
with a group of inexperienced players, you might
want to make the adventure a little easier; for
very experienced players, you may want to make
it a little harder. Therefore, five categories of
party strength have been created for you to use
as a guide. Feel free to use a different adjustment
during the adventure if the recommended party
strength feels off for the group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of
five 6th-level characters. To figure out whether
you need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
• Add up the total levels of all the characters
• Divide the total by the number of characters
• Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round
fractions of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table:
Determining Party Strength
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very Weak
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very Strong
Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment
of the game for the players. You help guide the
narrative and bring the words on these pages
to life. The outcome of a fun game session often
creates stories that live well beyond the play at the
table. Always follow this golden rule when you DM
for a group:
Make decisions and adjudications that
enhance the fun of the adventure when possible.
 To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
• You are empowered to make adjustments to
the adventure and make decisions about how the
group interacts with the world of this adventure.
Doing so is especially important and applicable
outside of combat, but feel free to adjust the
adventure for groups that are having too easy or
too hard of a time.
• Don’t make the adventure too easy or too
difficult for a group. Never being challenged
makes for a boring game and being
overwhelmed makes for a frustrating one.
Gauge the experience of the players (not the
characters) with the game, try to feel out (or
ask) what they like in a game, and attempt to
give each of them the experience they’re after
when they play D&D. Give everyone a chance to
shine.
• Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game
session moving along appropriately. Watch for
stalling, since play loses momentum when this
happens. At the same time, make sure that the
players don’t finish too early; provide them with
a full play experience. Try to be aware of running
long or short. Adjust the pacing accordingly
• Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free
to modify the text as you see fit, especially when
dialogue is present.
• Give the players appropriate hints so they can
make informed choices about how to proceed.
Players should be given clues and hints when
appropriate so they can tackle puzzles, combat,
and interactions without getting frustrated over
lack of information. Doing so helps to encourage
immersion in the adventure and gives players
“little victories” for figuring out good choices
from clues.
In short, being the DM isn’t about following
the adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about
facilitating a fun, challenging game environment
for the players. The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has
more information on the art of running a D&D
game.
4 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : I N T R O D U C T I O N
Downtime and Lifestyle
At the beginning of each play session, players must
declare whether or not they are spending any days
of downtime. The player records the downtime
spent on the adventure logsheet. The following
options are available to players during downtime
(see the D&D basic rules or the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for more information):
• Catching up
• Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
commit to crafting a single item)
• Practicing a profession
• Recuperating
• Spellcasting services
• Training
Other downtime options might be available during
adventures or unlocked through play, including
faction-specific activities.
In addition, whenever a character spends
downtime days, that character also spends the
requisite expense for his or her lifestyle. Costs
are per day, so a character that spends ten days
of downtime also spends ten days of expenses
maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some downtime
activities help with lifestyle expenses or add
lifestyle expenses.
Spellcasting Services
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can
provide some spellcasting services. Characters
need to be able to travel to the settlement to obtain
these services.
Spell services generally available include
healing and recovery spells, as well as information-
gathering spells. Other spell services might be
available as specified in the adventure. The number
of spells available to be cast as a service is limited
to a maximum of three per day total, unless
otherwise noted.
 Spellcasting Services
Spell Cost
Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
Identify 20 gp
Lesser restoration 40 gp
Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
Remove curse 90 gp
Speak with dead 90 gp
Divination 210 gp
Greater restoration 450 gp
Raise dead 1,250 gp
Acolyte Background
A character possessing the acolyte
background requesting spellcasting
services at a temple of his or her faith
may request one spell per day from the
Spellcasting Services table for free. The
only cost paid for the spell is the base price
for the consumed material component, if
any.
Disease, Death, and Recovery
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might
not have the same characters return from session
to session, here are the rules when bad things
happen to characters.
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating Effects
A character still affected by diseases, poisons,
and other similar effects at the conclusion of an
adventure can spend downtime days recuperating
until such time as he or she resolves the effect to
its conclusion (see the recuperating activity in the
D&D Basic Rules).
If a character doesn’t resolve the effect
between sessions, that character begins the next
session still affected by the debilitating effect.
5 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : I N T R O D U C T I O N
Death
A character who is killed during the course of
the adventure has a few options at the end of the
session (or whenever arriving back in civilization)
if no one in the adventuring party has immediate
access to a raise dead or revivify spell, or similar
magic. A character subject to a raise dead spell is
affected negatively until all long rests have been
completed during an adventure. Alternatively, each
downtime day spent after raise dead reduces the
penalty to attack rolls, saving throws, and ability
checks by 1, in addition to any other benefits the
downtime activity might provide.
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any
of the other options, the player creates a new
character. The new character does not have any
items or rewards possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing
any vital organs and is mostly whole) and the
player would like the character to be returned to
life, the party can take the body back to civilization
and use the dead character’s funds to pay for a
raise dead spell. A raise dead spell cast in this
manner costs the character 1,250 gp.
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As
above, except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for
the raise dead spell is paid for by the party at the
end of the session. Other characters are under no
obligation to spend their funds to bring back a
dead party member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to
4 and a member of a faction, the dead character’s
body can be returned to civilization and a patron
from the faction ensures that he or she receives a
raise dead spell. However, any character invoking
this charity forfeits all experience and rewards
from that session (both those earned prior to and
after death during that session) and cannot replay
that episode or adventure with that character
again. Once a character reaches 5th level, this
option is no longer available.
 Adventure Background
Hillsfar, the City of Trade, is in disarray. The Dark
Prince Graz’zt was banished from the Underdark
back to the Abyss, ending the madness that spread
throughout the area. The First Lord of Hillsfar,
Torin Nomerthal, perished under insurgents’
hands, and with him also fell the second Great Law
of Humanity.
Commandant Vuhm Yestral of the Red Plumes,
the military and police force of Hillsfar, has risen to
the position of First Lord. It falls upon his shoulders
to rebuild Hillsfar, drawing order out of disarray and
working to somehow reconcile conflicts between
the differing ideologies within the city. Many of the
City of Trade’s citizens remain deeply xenophobic—
former First Lord Nomerthal’s ideologies and
propaganda having planted deep roots. As a former
commandant of the Red Plumes, Lord Yestral is
still viewed by much of the public as the face of the
city’s peacekeeping militia. While Lord Yestral has
promoted Captain Jandra Gragdowel to the rank
of Commandant of the Red Plumes, it is the First
Lord’s name and reputation that are sullied when
a Red Plume patrol exhibits poor behavior toward
Hillsfarian or foreigner.
With no signs of tensions abating in the city,
First Lord Yestral has made it his priority to win
the favor of the tradespeople. However, a recent
spate of civic disturbances has been causing trouble,
disrupting the common folks’ efforts to return to
everyday life. More importantly, these troubles have
been disrupting the commerce protected by the
city’s Great Law of Trade.
The disturbances stem from a force at work
behind the scenes: Malkyn Grenefeld, the former
First Lord’s Chamberlain, harbors a passionate love
for the slain Lord Nomerthal and seeks revenge
on the current Lord Yestral. To that end, she has
made a pact with dark fey forces set on conquering
Cormanthor Forest. Over the past month, Grenefeld
has been planting misinformation, forging trade
records, and smuggling minions of the dark fey into
the city.
6 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : I N T R O D U C T I O N
With their forces at work within Hillsfar, the
dark fey are now positioned to escalate their plans
to capture the region. They have sent a night hag
named Granny Eve-canker to Hillsfar with the
mission of inciting dissent and rebellion. In the guise
of a foreign elven noble named Estrellae Moonglow,
Granny Eve-canker has been gathering allies within
the Hillsfar’s nobility.
Overview
This adventure is divided into three parts.
Part 1. The adventure begins with the
characters at the docks of Hillsfar. Trouble rears its
wicked head when monsters smuggled into the city
break out into the public. Subduing the beasts, the
adventurers witness open hostilities directed at
the hired dwarven sailors who unwittingly brought
the creatures into the city. The dwarves plead
ignorance of their dangerous cargo, but the trader
who hired them is nowhere to be found.
Impressed by the adventurers’ actions, a
noble named Estrellae Moonglow invites them
to her home for a gathering later that day. The
adventurers are also approached by a Red Plume
guard bearing a summons for them to meet with
Commandant Jandra Gragdowel at Hillsfar Castle.
The good Commandant has a job for them.
Part 2. At Hillsfar Castle, the adventurers
speak with Commandant Gragdowel. She believes
that the incidents are intentional acts of malice and
asks the adventurers to investigate further.
As the adventurers investigate various
locations around the city, they meet a number of
individuals, root out rumors, and perhaps get into a
fight or two. Attending Moonglow’s gathering, the
adventurers gain new insight about the growing
schism within the city populace. Eventually, they
find enough clues that point to the culprit they
have been searching for.
Part 3. The adventurers track the culprit to
a recently unearthed temple just outside the city
walls. There, they confront Granny Eve-canker and
her minions in her lair.
Adventure Hooks
Heroes of Hillsfar. Characters who have
adventured in Hillsfar and the surrounding region
have ties there. They have maintained their
presence in or have returned to the area to either
keep a vigilant eye out for danger or to assist with
the region’s recovery efforts.
Remuneration in Recuperation. Money-
minded characters find no shortage of work in
Hillsfar. Traders need guards and the rebuilding
efforts need labor. Characters hiring themselves
out in the city can maintain a comfortable lifestyle.
Faction Directive. The Factions know that
there is much work to be done to rebuild the City
of Trade. They have directed the adventurers to
Hillsfar to help First Lord Vuhm Yestral keep the
peace. This is particularly applicable to members
of the Lords’ Alliance, the Order of the Gauntlet,
and the Zhentarim.
Breaking Through Stigma. Both human
and non-human characters may be involved with
efforts to sway xenophobic Hillsfarians towards
open-mindedness. These characters speak in
public and seek audience with closed-minded
citizens in attempts to ease hostilities within the
populace. Harpers and members of the Emerald
Enclave may find this pursuit worthwhile.
7 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : I N T R O D U C T I O N
Designers Notes
On the Xenophobia of Hillsfar. The
xenophobic populace of Hillsfar exhibit behavior
that is hostile, oppressive, and racially charged.
Be aware of attitudes at your table. If portraying
NPCs’ xenophobia would make you or anyone at
your table feel uncomfortable, feel free to shift the
focus of the social conflict toward the politics and
economics of Hillsfar. Perhaps an NPC is unhappy
with Vuhm Yestral as the successor to Torin
Nomerthal. Or perhaps an NPC feels the influx of
new labor into Hillsfar is diverting resources or
employment from the long-time citizens of Hillsfar.
Maybe an NPC was slighted or wronged by the
Red Plumes and, with the Plumes being better
controlled by the current government, sees the
time as right to speak out against them. In any case,
feel free to paraphrase or alter any pertinent box
text within this adventure appropriately in order to
minimize or eliminate the portrayal of xenophobia,
should you feel the need.
 Part 1. Trouble Rears
Its Wicked Head
Danger At The Docks Characters engaging with tavern patrons or
listening in on the conversations around them
learn the following:
Expected Duration: 30 minutes
• Two local merchants debate the pros and cons
The adventurers find themselves at the docks of
of the Great Law of Humanity’s dissolution. One
Hillsfar in a tavern called the Rusty Nail. They are
of them blames the stagnant trade on the influx
either taking a break from patrolling the city, are
of non-humans, claiming that they are driving
taking repast, or are under the employ of the Rusty
away business from both local and foreign
Nail’s proprietor as guards (their payment having
merchants who only wish to deal with the
been settled “off-screen”).
human populace. The other trader advocates the
General Features return of non-humans to Hillsfar, claiming that
The general features of the Hillsfar docks are as the city’s commercial troubles are the result of
follows: the madness that gripped it not too long ago.
Light and Visibility. It is mid-morning, shortly • A group of sailors who have just returned
after nine bells. The sun is up but the sky is overcast, from a voyage discuss a recent spate of odd
setting a dreary tone to the day. occurrences: livestock falling ill and dying,
shipments of cargo going missing from various
Smells and Sounds. Sweaty laborers, barrels warehouses, and wild beasts being found within
of fish, merchants haggling with sailors, hoofs the city walls and terrorizing the public. Some
clattering on the pier, heated political conversation. sailors attribute these recent misfortunes to
Surrounding Activity. The docks are relatively the non-humans who have been allowed into
quiet, with few trade ships in port at the moment. the city, suspecting that these troubling events
Sailors and other hired-hands loiter, and traders and are acts of revenge against the city for having
merchants buy and sell wares. Both humans and enacted the now defunct Great Law of Humanity.
non-humans linger at the Rusty Nail, conducting • Nearby Red Plumes tell the story of several
business or looking for employment. within their ranks who went seemingly mad and
then abruptly passed away.
The waters of the Moonsea lap lazily against
• As the adventurers listen in on or speak with
Hillsfar’s docks as you sit at the Rusty Nail,
one of two dockside taverns. The docks of the tavern patrons, there is a sudden commotion
Hillsfar have seen busier days. Though built outside.
to accommodate up to a dozen cargo ships,
a recent slowdown in trade has left the piers
nearly empty for the past month. Fortunately
for you, your reputations as adventurers
have provided enough opportunities for
employment.
Three ships are currently anchored in
port, the one nearest the Rusty Nail unloading
several wagons onto the pier. All around,
Hillsfarians argue loudly and openly about the
recent resurgence of non-humans in the city.

8 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 1
9 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 1

Loud crashing noises and screams erupt
from outside and from the docks just below.
Panicked dockworkers scramble around
three wagons parked in the staging area and
at the edge of the pier. Off in the distance,
a frightened pair of draft horses about to get
hitched to the wagon on the left gallops up
the main path toward the city. What appear
to be two horse statues are hitched to the
center wagon. A many-legged lizard the size
of a small pony takes bites out of a statue
of a dwarf, posed in a posture of fear and
gesturing towards the center wagon, the side
of which has been smashed open from the
inside.
At the edge of the pier below, a third
wagon stands idle, a similar hole punched
through its side. Two statues lay smashed
on the pier nearby the fearful scene, as
dockworkers fend off more danger.
Two basilisks have awakened from magically-
induced sleep and have burst from the center
wagon and the wagon at the edge of the pier, both
having been unloaded from the moored ship.
Frightened dockworkers flee the scene, either
running up the pier, taking refuge in the ship, or
scattering from the staging area away from the two
resting wagons. A few Red Plumes assist with their
escape. The basilisks have plenty of dockworkers
and merchants within reach (use commoner
stats), and unless the adventurers act fast, a
dockworker or merchant perishes each round,
either turned to stone or ravaged by the beasts.
Tactics
The basilisks immediately shift their attention to
the adventurers if the characters advance. At the
start of the second round, a third basilisk awakens,
bursts out of the leftmost cart, and joins combat.
To keep combat from drawing on too long, consider
limiting the use of each basilisk’s petrifying gaze to
one character per round.
Crowd. The dock is filled with workers fleeing
for their lives. For the first two rounds of combat,
the pier and the staging area outside the Rusty
Nail are considered difficult terrain. In either zone,
ranged attacks made at a distance greater than 10
ft. are made at disadvantage, while attacks that
affect an area risk hitting civilians (use commoner
10
stats, as above). After the end of the first round,
the pier clears as the fleeing workers move into the
staging area. After the end of the second round,
the staging area clears.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Remove two
basilisks, add three cockatrices­that
begin combat by the cart on the pier
• Weak party: Remove one basilisk, add
three cockatrices that begin combat by
the cart on the pier
• Strong party: Add one basilisk
• Very strong party: Add two basilisks,
and each basilisk has 66 HP
Development
Once the monsters have been defeated or subdued,
the adventurers hear a crowd of raised voices.
A dozen or so dockworkers and merchants
drag three dwarves to the wagons.
“We know you brought these monsters
on board that ship,” shouts one furious
dockhand. “I knew they would be trouble,”
yells a seething merchant. A chorus of
agreement and accusations follows from the
rest of the crowd.
“We had no idea what our cargo was,”
pleads one of the dwarves. “We swear!
Find Eldeth. She hired us for this job.” But
the dwarf’s voice is lost in the clamor of the
crowd.
The dwarves are sincere in their claim of
ignorance, a DC 5 Wisdom (Insight) check
confirms. It takes a DC 12 Charisma (Persuasion)
or Charisma (Intimidation) to calm the crowd
and have them back away from the dwarves.
Otherwise, the crowd obstinately refuses to ease
off the dwarves.
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 1
Whether questioned by the adventurers or
by the crowd, the dwarves relay the following
information.
• The three dwarves were hired by another
dwarf named Eldeth Marblehead. Eldeth hired
them just outside of Mulmaster. They were
desperate for work and agreed to take on the
job, no questions asked.
• The ship was likewise chartered in similar
desperate conditions. None of the crew knew
the nature of the cargo.
• Eldeth kept to herself throughout the entire
journey, so no one knows anything about her. In
the heat of the struggle against the monsters, she
seems to have disappeared.
After a few minutes of interrogation, a squad of
Red Plumes arrives. They break up the crowd, take
the dwarves into custody, and march them off to
Hillsfar Castle for questioning. As the Red Plumes
leave with the dwarves, the adventurers are
approached by a stranger.
An elven noblewoman approaches you
gracefully. She is dressed in vibrant violet
robes adorned with rich green trim, matching
green gloves gracing her hands.
“Greetings. My name is Estrellae,” she
says as she extends a hand to you. A small,
velvet pouch rests in her outstretched palm.
“You deserve this… for saving the day.”
The pouch contains a reward of platinum pieces
(see Treasure below), and Estrellae gives it to the
adventurers without hesitation.
11
Roleplaying Estrellae Moonglow
Elven noble Estrellae Moonglow is one of
several personas Granny Eve-canker has
taken in her efforts to sow dissent in Hillsfar.
(Eldeth Marblehead being another).
As Estrellae, she is graceful, poised,
well-spoken, and speaks in calming tones.
She claims to be new to Hillsfar, having only
moved recently from Sembia to capitalize
on the trade opened up by the recently
dismissed Great Law of Humanity. Estrellae
wears her emerald kidgloves (see Rewards at
the end of this adventure for a description of
this magic item), making her prone to giving
compliments and being generous.
Granny Eve-canker is a night hag
from the Border Forest to the west of the
Moonsea. She is horrific in appearance,
shrill of voice, and wicked in demeanor. She
hides all this when she takes the form of
Estrellae. More details about role-playing
Granny Eve-canker can be found in Part 3
later in this adventure.
Estrellae asks the characters to visit her at her
home just north of the Vault of Swords, where
the noblewoman is hosting a small gathering.
Based on the valor the characters just displayed,
she would like the characters to attend as special
guests. She hands them a paper invitation written
in green ink, then excuses herself, citing business
to take care of at home before the guests arrive.
As she walks away, a Red Plume guard
approaches the adventurers. The guard tells the
characters that Commandant Jandra Gragdowel,
the new leader of the Red Plumes, wishes to speak
with them at Hillsfar Castle. Gragdowel would like
to recruit the adventurers for a special assignment.
The guard asks that the adventurers go see the
Red Plume leader at once, handing each a writ
that grants free passage into Hillsfar Castle for the
purpose of speaking with the commandant.
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 1
 XP and Intrigue Awards
If the characters successfully calm the crowd in
defense of the dwarves, award each character 100
XP.
Characters that interact warmly, flatteringly,
or otherwise positively with Estrellae receive
1 Hillsfar Dissidents Intrigue Point (see the
Intrigue sidebar). Characters who interact rudely,
dismissively, or otherwise negatively receive no
Intrigue Points.
Treasure
Estrellae gives the adventurers a small pouch filled
with 20 platinum pieces (equivalent to 200 gp) for
their display of bravery against the monsters.
12
Intrigue
Over the course of this adventure, characters
can earn the favor of two different and
conflicting political circles jockeying
for influence in Hillsfar: the Hillsfar
Government and the Hillsfar Dissidents.
The Hillsfar Government group supports
First Lord Vuhm Yestral and works toward
repairing the City of Trade through the
power of the current administration.
The Hillsfar Dissidents are a cadre of
nobles, traders, merchants, and guild leaders
who are actively amassing support against
the current government. Their aim is to
unseat First Lord Yestral and his supporters
in order to put their own leaders into power.
As the characters interact with various
individuals in this adventure, they will gain
Intrigue Points in categories matching
the two political circles. At the end of the
adventure, the number of Intrigue Points
each character bears will determine which
political circle finds them more favorable.
Their Intrigue Points may also determine
how particular NPCs react to them.
Whenever the adventure text indicates
that characters earn Intrigue Points, tell the
respective players which category applies
and how many they receive.
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 1
 Part 2.
Hillsfar explored
Hillsfar Castle
Expected Duration: 15 minutes
The adventurers arrive at Hillsfar Castle.
General Features
The general features of Hillsfar Castle are as follows:
Light and Visibility. The sky remains overcast.
Windows and arrow slits allow sunlight to enter the
castle halls. Wall mounted lamps cast light in halls
and rooms as needed.
Sounds. Red Plumes marching in the hallways,
city officials dealing with the public within various
offices, individuals debating politics, the dull thrum
of the protesting crowd outside bleeding through
the castle walls.
Surrounding Activity. The usual activity within
the castle walls consists of officials and scribes
tending to the day-to-day functions of the city, Red
Plumes patrolling the grounds, servants taking care
of the castle’s many rooms, and other civic matters.
Hillsfar Castle is an unusual but grand
and beautiful building. A mishmash of
primarily human architecture with elements
adopted from the styles of other races,
the castle stands as a symbol of a previous
government’s desire to distance itself from
the xenophobia of the original Great Law of
Humanity.
Its gates are mobbed by locals and
foreigners loudly protesting the current
administration’s inability to improve the city’s
situation. A platoon of Red Plumes keeps
the crowd at bay, clearing a path to the
castle’s gates and allowing you entry. You
are led to a large office, the far end of which
is occupied by an imposing and intricately
carved wooden desk. On the far side of the
desk sits Red Plume Commandant Jandra
Gragdowel.
13
Roleplaying Commandant Jandra
Gragdowel
Jandra, a human in her mid-30s, is small but
bears an imposing presence. She is young for
her position and places the highest stakes on
her success. She has sharp features, raven
black hair, and is physically fit. She is to-the-
point and all business when working.
Gragdowel shares the information below with the
adventurers.
• The past month has been difficult on the new
Hillsfarian government. In the midst of recovery
from the recently quelled demonic activity,
troublesome events have been occurring at
various places of commerce. These disturbances
are frightening merchants away to the degree
that local traders are being forced to make their
deals at other locations outside the city, and
much of the labor force is losing opportunities
for work.
• Local peacekeeping forces have their hands
tied with a number of matters (city rebuilding,
re-establishing Yulash, patrolling the outskirts,
etc.) and don’t have the manpower to deal with
these recent events.
• The situation has greatly strained First
Lord Yestral’s reputation. Gragdowel is a loyal
supporter of the new First Lord and knows that
he is doing everything within his resources to
restore Hillsfar.
Having relayed the circumstances, Commandant
Gragdowel asks the adventurers to investigate the
latest disturbances and gives them the following
details. The adventurers may have already heard
of these depending on who they spoke to or
eavesdropped on in the docks.
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 2
 • Earlier this morning, a herd of sheep were • Estrellae is new to Hillsfar, having taken up
found dead in a livestock trading house located residence within the city about a tenday ago.
within the Merchants Quarter. This is one of • A merchant by trade, she has been quite
several recent cases of animals mysteriously successful in doing business in the city despite
passing away. the stagnant commerce. Because of this, she has
• Crates of spices vanished from one of the gained the admiration of the nobility.
dockside warehouses the night before. The • Over the past five days, she has been publicly
entrance was broken into, but the trail ran cold speaking out against the First Lord. She accuses
just outside of the building. him of caring only for his own comfort, citing the
• Several Red Plumes have died after bouts of dwindling trade that plagues the city while Lord
madness. It was previously thought that this Yestral sits insulated within the Tower of the
madness was part of the epidemic that stemmed First Lord.
from the demonic presence of the Dark Prince Only if an Insight check is requested by a player
Graz’zt. The rest of the populace has recovered, should you have a character roll one. A successful
however, and Commandant Gragdowel believes DC 20 Wisdom (Insight) check reveals that
that the recent inflictions on the Red Plumes are Gragdowell is leaving something out. With that,
more than just coincidence. Another case was only a successful DC 25 Charisma (Intimidate or
reported several days ago. The afflicted Red Persuasion) check will get her to admit it. She will
Plume is currently bedridden at a guardhouse lie, and say that there is bad blood between them
by the city gates, where his companions wait and that it is rather personal. Nothing will convince
helplessly for him to die. her to confide in the characters.
• A grick burst out of a well by the Thayan If any of the characters mention being invited
Enclave in the south side of the city a tenday ago. into Estrellae’s home, Gragdowel encourages them
A number of the Faithful of Tempus from the to accept the invitation, asking them to report back
nearby Vault of Swords responded to the threat with whatever talk they might hear. Characters who
and killed the creature, but not before it killed agree to this request receive 2 Hillsfar Government
and injured several citizens. Intrigue Points.
• It is highly unlikely that these disturbances are
happening by chance. Commandant Gragdowel
suspects that there are hidden forces at work
behind these events. With so much happening,
surely some clues must have been left behind
somewhere.
These are only the most recent in a string of similar
events that have plagued Hillsfar over the past
month. To facilitate their investigation, Gragdowel
gives the adventurers a writ of her endorsement and
a city map noting the various locations above.
Gragdowel offers the adventurers a payment
of 500 gp up front (see Treasure below) to be split
The party can earn an additional 500 gp should they
succeed in apprehending a culprit (for a total of
reward of 1,000 gp).
If asked about Estrellae Moonglow, Gragdowel
gives an exasperated look. She reveals the following
to the adventurers:

14 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 2

Moving Forward
At this point, the adventurers have a number
of areas they can visit. For a four-hour game
session, the characters are expected to visit
Estrellae Moonglow’s Home, plus investigate
two of the leads below. If the session is
running without time constraints, the players
may opt to explore more locations.
• The livestock trading house in the
Merchants Quarter
• The warehouse at the docks (additionally,
they may think to re-visit the scene of the
basilisk attack in Part 1)
• The Red Plume guardhouse by the city
gates
• The well by the Thayan Enclave
• Estrellae Moonglow’s home
The following sections detail what the players
find at each of the areas above.
Treasure
Commandant Gragdowel gives the adventurers a
sack containing 500 gp.
The Merchants Quarter
Expected Duration: 15 minutes
Chattering voices fill the air in the Merchants
Quarter. In the past, the voices mostly
belonged to merchants and traders haggling
over assorted goods. Lately, though, the
majority of voices belong to laborers milling
about the quarter’s streets hoping to find
employment.
You come upon a squat, barn-like
building. Livestock neigh, bleat, and cluck
from within, while the pungent smell of
animal hide fills your nostrils.
The proprietor greets the adventurers warmly
and welcomes them to look around. The trade
house is a large, open building, the inside of which
is divided into six large animal enclosures. The
carcasses of the sheep have been removed.
As the adventurers look around the trade house,
15
a sprite named Gillun Glimmersting materializes
before the character with the highest Charisma. The
lone sprite relays the following tale.
• Gillun and three other sprites were captured
by strange spider-like creatures some weeks ago
as they cavorted in the woods of Cormanthor.
• His friends are being held in an abandoned
shop not far from the trade house and have been
promised a grisly end if Gillun doesn’t do as their
captors command.
• The captors have been sending him out to
poison animals throughout the city. Gillun’s
powers of invisibility allow him to get into
animal pens, and his poison-tipped arrows are
small enough to escape notice.
If asked why the sprite revealed himself to the
adventurers, he says that he saw good intentions
in the characters’ hearts. He implores the party to
rescue his friends. If the adventurers hesitate, he
entices them with talk of treasure the captors had
accumulated. A DC 10 Wisdom (Insight) check
confirms the sprite’s truthfulness. If the party
agrees to the rescue mission, Gillun directs them to
the abandoned shop, a nondescript building built
against the city’s south wall.
The Hostage-Takers’ Hideout
The hideout is a forgotten and largely ignored
building set back from the other buildings in the
area. It currently houses a number of creatures
Estrellae smuggled into the city. The windows are
shuttered and the doors are locked from inside.
The front door opens to a vestibule, which in
turn opens to the main room of the house. A human
spy and a bugbear keep begrudging company as
they watch over three ettercaps in this main room.
A door in the room’s southern wall leads into what
was once a kitchen, where a second bugbear is
stationed.
Three sprites (Gillun’s friends) are bound
within webbing that the ettercaps have spun in the
western half of the room. These web-filled areas are
difficult terrain. A creature entering a webbed area
for the first time on a turn or starting its turn there
must succeed on a DC 12 Dexterity saving throw
or become restrained by the webs. A restrained
creature can use its action to try to escape, doing
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 2
16 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 2
so with a successful DC 12 Strength (Athletics)
check. Each 10-foot cube of webbing has AC 10,
15 hit points, vulnerability to fire, and immunity to
bludgeoning, piercing, and psychic damage.
Like the front entrance, the rear entrance opens
up to a vestibule that then opens up to the kitchen.
A door on the north wall of the kitchen leads to the
house’s main room.
The spy and the bugbears are biding their time,
waiting for the command to set the ettercaps loose
on the populace.
Gillun discourages a direct or loud approach,
saying that anything that alerts the miscreants
inside may result in harm befalling his sprite
friends. Encourage creative thinking and let the
characters decide how to approach the hideout
and deal with the situation. It is possible to parlay
with the human, but more difficult to do so with the
bugbears.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Remove two bugbears
and one ettercap, and the spy flees combat
rather than participating
• Weak party: Remove one bugbear
• Strong party: Replace the spy with a
bugbear chief
• Very strong party: Replace the spy with
a half-black dragon veteran and add an
ettercap
Development
The spy, bugbears, and ettercaps attack the
adventurers on sight unless the characters give
them a compelling reason not to. If combat occurs,
the bugbears and ettercaps fight to the death, but
the spy attempts to escape when the battle goes
badly for his side.
If the party succeeds in overcoming the house’s
occupants and freeing the trapped sprites, Gillun
is grateful. He reveals a small chest wrapped up in
the webbing containing the treasures below, a deed
17
to the house signed by First Lord Yestral himself,
and Handout 1. If the players found Handout 1
at another location earlier in this adventure, they
instead find Handout 2.
Gillun and the other sprites leave the city and
return to the forest of Cormanthor if freed.
The bugbears and ettercaps were brought into
the city by a dwarf named Eldeth Marblehead and
taken straight into the hideout. The spy was hired
by Marblehead, who claimed to somehow be in
league with First Lord Yestral’s forces (this is false
but he does not know that). The deed to the hideout
signed by the First Lord himself was proof enough.
XP and Intrigue Awards
If the characters successfully free the sprites,
award each character 100 XP.
If the characters capture any of the creatures
in the hideout and turn them in either to Hillsfar
Castle or to the Red Plumes, they each receive 1
Hillsfar Government Intrigue Point. If the spy
escapes, they each receive 1 Hillsfar Dissidents
Intrigue Point.
Treasure
The small chest hidden in the webs contains a burl
wood sculpture of a goat’s head with milky pearls
for eyes (worth 40 gp) and 3 small coin purses
each containing 20 gp. Stitched on the coin purses
in green thread are the words, “With love, Granny.”
Additionally, the adventurers find a potion of
greater healing. If they were awarded the potion of
greater healing previously during this adventure,
they instead find a potion of acid resistance. If both
potions were awarded previously, they simply find
the sculptures and coin purses.
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 2
 The Docks Revisited
Expected Duration: 20 to 30 minutes
The docks have grown silent since you were
last here. The wagons that carried the
deadly cargo remain, as do the two petrified
horses and the partially-eaten stone dwarf.
Characters who inspect the wagons and
succeed in a DC 12 Intelligence (Investigation)
check find pieces of parchment glued inside the
crates. Spellcasters, characters who are proficient
in Arcana, or who use detect magic on the
parchment pieces sense the dwindling presence
of enchantment magic—the parchment pieces are
remnants of sleep wards that kept the monsters
contained.
The Dockside Warehouse
Red Plumes stand stationed at the dockside
warehouse’s broken doors, guarding the
goods within.
If the adventurers question the guards, they learn
the following details:
• The crates of spices arrived at the warehouse
yesterday afternoon, shortly before the
warehouse was locked for day. When the
warehouse foreman arrived this morning, the
door was broken down and the spices gone.
• While the crates of spices were the only items
stolen, although several other crates being
stored were moved, as if the perpetrators were
searching for something.
General Features
The general features of the Dockside Warehouse are
as follows:
Light and Visibility. The windows are
shuttered, allowing only dim inside through slits
and cracks. The only other light entering the
warehouse comes through the broken door.
Smells and Sounds. Wooden crates, dust,
ambient noise from the docks outside.
18
Investigating the Warehouse
Have the characters make DC 10 Wisdom
(Perception) or Intelligence (Investigation) check.
Each character who succeeds notices one of the
following details:
• Several sets of scrapes indicate that crates
were dragged back and forth across the floor
between the broken door and the interior of the
warehouse. There are no signs that point to any
crates being removed from the warehouse.
• The southwestern corner of the warehouse
shows more signs of crates being moved around,
although no crates actually occupy that area.
The broken door is a red herring. The thieves came
in through a tunnel underneath the warehouse.
Characters investigating the southwestern corner
of the warehouse find a series of loose boards. The
boards lift up to reveal an unlit tunnel that descends
westward towards the city. The tunnel is large
enough to accommodate the missing shipping crates.
A trail of flattened earth on the tunnel floor indicates
something heavy was dragged through the tunnel.
The drag marks obscure any footprints that might
have been left, indicating that the item was pulled
down the tunnel.
The tunnel extends 100 feet westward from the
warehouse and descends 15 feet before leveling off.
From there it extends another 200 feet west, where it
opens into a 30-foot-wide, 80-foot-long, torch-lit cave.
The point where the tunnel meets the cave is
trapped with a glyph of warding cast by Granny
Eve-canker. Her hired thugs know the passphrase
(“By the full moon’s glow”). The ward requires a
successful DC 15 Intelligence (Investigation) check to
detect and triggers if a creature gets within 5 feet of
it. It can only be removed by triggering it, speaking
the passphrase, or by casting dispel magic on it.
If triggered, the ward erupts with magical
energy in a 20-foot radius sphere centered on the
glyph. Each creature within that radius must make
a successful DC 15 Dexterity saving throw or take
22 (5d8) thunder damage as a painfully deafening
cackle fills the area. Characters that succeed on the
saving throw take only half damage.
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 2
The Smugglers’ Cave • His crew was given partial payment for
The cave is full of crates and barrels stolen their services up front, with a greater bounty
from various locations around the city. Another promised upon completion of the job. They
tunnel opening on the far wall of the cave (80 were to collect payment from Marblehead just
feet from where the characters enter) extends outside the city at a place called the Outcast’s
northwest 300 feet and ascends 100 feet to the Sanctuary.
city above. The tunnel exits out to a walled-off • The passphrase to gain access to the Sanctuary
property in the eastern quarter of the city near an is “Granny loves all her children”.
inn called the Diamond in the Dung. Old planks Characters who search the cave find Handout 1
from a demolished building conceal the tunnel where the thug laid sleeping. If the players found
entrance from public view. Signs plastered on the Handout 1 at another location, they instead find
surrounding wall declare the property as having Handout 2.
been seized in the name of First Lord Yestral.
XP and Intrigue Awards
A single thug lies snoring amidst a stack of
crates, about 40 feet from where the adventurers If the adventurers capture the thug, award each
enter. If the characters trigger the glyph of warding, character 100 XP.
the noise awakens the thug, who grabs a nearby Additionally, if the characters capture the thug
torch and attempts to escape via the western tunnel and turn him in to the Red Plumes, they each receive
leading up to the city. 1 Hillsfar Government Intrigue Point. If the thug
If the characters do not trigger the trap, they escapes, they receive no intrigue points for this
can sneak up on the sleeping thug. An opposed encounter.
Dexterity (Stealth) check against the Thug’s passive Treasure
Perception of 10 allows a character to get to the
A pouch containing 100 gp sits by the area where
thug without waking him. Since the thug is asleep,
the thug laid sleeping. The crates in the cave contain
characters making this check do so with advantage.
sundry supplies that are not valuable.
A failed check wakes the thug, who then attempts to
flee the scene. Additionally, the adventurers find a potion of
greater healing by the pouch of gold pieces. If they
If the adventurers take chase, feel free to run it
were already awarded the potion of greater healing
as you see fit, calling for ability and skill checks as
during this adventure, they instead find a potion of
needed. If the thug makes it out of the tunnel, he
acid resistance. If both potions were awarded, they
tosses the torch aside, bursts through the panels
simply find the pouch.
concealing the entrance, exits the property walls,
and disappears into the crowd.
Development
If the thug is captured, the characters can learn the
following information from him with a successful
DC 17 Charisma (Persuasion or Intimidate) check:
• He is part of a crew hired by a dwarf named
Eldeth Marblehead to steal goods from various
businesses and warehouses around Hillsfar.
• First Lord Vuhm Yestral is working with
Marblehead and has provided property in which
the stolen goods can be stored before being
transported to The First Lord’s Tower (this is
false, but they do not know that).

19 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 2
 The Red Plume Guardhouse
Expected Duration: 30 to 40 minutes
A rowdy crowd stands protesting by the
Red Plume guardhouse at the city gates.
Hillsfarians shout epithets at non-humans
entering the city and at the Red Plumes who
are allowing them passage. A number of
protestors lead a scathing chant against First
lord Yestral.
Pushing through crowds of protestors,
you make your way into the guardhouse to
see the afflicted Red Plume.
The adventurers are led to an infirmary towards the
rear of the station, where a dressed-down human
male lies tied to a bed. The lieutenant on duty, a
human female guard named Alis Maerr, introduces
the sick individual as Dern Gelnacht and recounts
the details below to the adventurers.
• Seven days ago, Dern reported having trouble
sleeping. He was fine for a few days afterward,
but his condition deteriorated until one night
he attacked and injured several of his fellow
Red Plumes. During the attack he ranted about
how someone called “Granny” was telling him to
punish the “bad, bad Red Plumes.”
• Alis shows the characters a heavily bandaged
arm, revealing that she was one of the Plumes
injured during the attack. This is painful
for her to report, as she and Dern have been
romantically involved for some time now.
• Dern continues to ramble madly about “doing
what Granny says” and maliciously about “the
wicked people running Hillsfar.”
• Five other Red Plumes had been struck by such
madness over the past weeks, though Dern’s is
the first time someone was driven to violence.
Characters who look around or who have a
passive Perception of 10 or higher notice a small,
clothbound journal sitting on the side table by
Dern’s bedside.
20
What’s Going On With These Red Plumes?
Dern and the other afflicted Red Plumes were
being visited in their sleep by an ethereal
Granny Eve-canker, falling prey to her
nightmare haunting ability, which she uses
to plant horrible and extreme thoughts into
her victims’ heads. Granny despises the Red
Plumes, seeing them as one of the forces that
upheld the Great Law of Humanity, whether
actively or not. During her final visit to Dern
three nights ago, Granny cast a ritual on his
body, the effect of which is about to manifest in
front of the adventurers.
A few minutes into the conversation with Alis,
Dern lets out a loud wail, moaning over and over
again that “Granny won’t come visit anymore. I
need to see her at the Outcast’s Sanctuary!” Shortly
after, his body violently convulses for a few seconds,
and then he dies. No amount of healing, magical or
otherwise, prevents this.
Characters who examine Dern’s body and
succeed in a DC 16 Wisdom (Perception or Medicine)
check notice a churning motion in the dead Plume’s
stomach and some sort of black ooze leaking from
his ears. Characters who do not examine the body
or who fail the check are caught surprised as a black
pudding magically bursts out of the dead body and
attacks. As this happens, a feeling of dread fills the
room as Dern’s spirit, corrupted by Granny Eve-
canker’s influence, appears as a wraith.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Replace the black
pudding with a swarm of insects
(centipedes) that bursts out of Dern
• Weak party: Replace the black pudding
with two swarms of insects (centipedes)
that burst out of Dern
• Strong party: Add one black pudding
• Very strong party: Add two black
puddings
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 2
Tactics
The wraith and black pudding fight to the death.
In the third round of combat, two Red
Plume guards rush onto the scene. They can
either participate in combat, rush out to call for
reinforcements, or drag unconscious characters
out of the room. If one of the Plumes leaves to call
for reinforcements, a squad of 6 Red Plume guards
arrives to help two rounds later.
If Alis is in the room, the wraith targets her first
at the start of combat for an easy kill, then uses its
create specter ability on its next turn to summon
an ally from Alis’ body. It does this when the other
guards arrive at the scene as well.
Development
If the party succeeds in defeating the ooze and the
undead, Alis (if she survived) and the other Red
Plumes express their gratitude. Alis pulls a necklace
from around her neck and gives it to the players as a
token reward. If Alis perished during combat, a Red
Plume officer instead gives the characters a reward
of gold pieces (see Treasure below for details
regarding either reward).
If the adventures examine the journal by Dern’s
bedside, hand the players Handout 3.
XP and Intrigue Awards
If the adventurers keep Alis and the other Red Plumes
from being killed, award each character 100 XP.
Additionally, each character receives 2 Hillsfar
Government Intrigue Points. If Alis or any of the
other Red Plumes perished, they do not receive the
extra 100 XP or Intrigue Points for this encounter.
Treasure
Alis’ necklace is a gold pendant mounted with
semiprecious stones worth 100 gp. It was a gift from
Dern and has their intertwined initials carved onto
its face. If Alis dies and the adventurers get the gold
piece reward instead, they receive 100 gp.
Additionally, one of the grateful Red Plumes gives
21
the adventurers a potion of greater healing. If they
were already awarded the potion of greater healing
during this adventure, they instead receive a potion
of acid resistance. If both potions were awarded they
simply receive the necklace or the gold pieces.
The Well
Expected Duration: 30 to 40 minutes
The sounds of heated debate greet your ears
as you arrive at the portion of the city just
outside the Thayan Enclave. A tradesperson
and a Red Wizard stand in the middle of a
rapt audience arguing over the dissolution
of the Great Law of Humanity. The crowd
maintains its distance from the well from
which the grick burst, where two Red Plumes
stand guard.
If the adventurers question the guards, they learn
the information below.
• This well was once a popular gathering place,
where Hillsfarians would socialize as they drew
water. Just over a week ago, the well’s water
level began to subside. No one thought anything
about it, expecting the water to rise again in
time.
• A few days later, a grick emerged from the
well and attacked the crowd. Stalwarts from the
nearby Vault of Swords (the temple of Tempus)
rushed to the scene and got to work subduing
the creature. The monster was killed, but it
killed and injured a number of citizens.
• Nothing has emerged since, but reports of odd
sounds coming out of the well (crumbling rocks,
splashing noises in the water) convinced the
authorities to post guards during daylight hours.
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 2
22 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 2
Descent Into Darkness
The well is 50 feet deep, with a few inches of water
remaining at the bottom. Sunlight penetrates 30
feet down into the well and darkness fills the rest
of the distance. Characters with darkvision or who
lower a light source down the shaft can see that a
portion of the well’s bottom wall has been smashed,
revealing a passageway beyond.
The opening at the bottom of the well leads
into a tunnel that extends 300 feet ahead before
connecting to a large catch basin that is part of
the city sewer system. As adventurers approach
the catch basin, they hear two voices in discussion
echoing through the tunnel. Characters succeeding
on a DC 12 Wisdom (Perception) check can pick out
the following phrases:
• “Watch yourself. One bite from these things will
leave you sick for days.”
• “Keep your crossbow handy as I open the flood
gate. I don’t want that big one getting any ideas…”
• “With these things loose in the sewers, I can’t
wait to get out of here. No wonder that dwarf
wanted to meet outside the city walls.”
The tunnel ends at an opening in the catch basin’s
western wall, 6 feet above a ledge. The ledge sits
1 foot above the water level and spans the entire
width of the wall. The basin itself is 40 feet wide by
60 feet across. The water is 2 feet deep, is difficult
terrain, and is filthy to the point that anything
submerged beneath is heavily obscured. On the
eastern end of the basin is a similar ledge that spans
the eastern wall. On the north end of the far ledge,
a ladder extends upward 10 feet into a hole in the
ceiling. The ladder ascends another 30 feet through
a chute that ends at a sewer passageway above. By
the ladder is a valve that opens flood gates built into
the basin’s southern wall. Opening the flood gates
causes the water in the basin to drain into the rest of
the sewer system.
Two human thugs are preparing to unleash
a giant constrictor snake and three swarms of
poisonous snakes into the city’s sewers to wreak
havoc. The giant constrictor snake has already
been released into the water. The three swarms of
snakes are contained in separate barrels. One barrel
has already been opened and the swarm dumped
23
into the water. When the adventurers arrive, the
thugs have opened the remaining two barrels and
are preparing to dump the swarms into the basin
waters.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Replace the giant
constrictor snake with a crocodile,
remove one swarm of poisonous snakes
• Weak party: Remove one swarm of
poisonous snakes
• Strong party: Replace the giant
constrictor snake with a giant crocodile
• Very strong party: Replace the giant
constrictor snake with three giant
crocodiles, remove one swarm of
poisonous snakes
Tactics
The thugs do not wish to confront the adventurers
and are only out to do what they’ve been paid to
do. If combat starts without them having dumped
the two barrels of snakes, they do so at the start of
combat. Then, one thug rushes to the ladder and
starts climbing while the other works on opening
the floodgates. It takes the thug working the valve
two rounds using her action to open the gates. Once
the floodgates are opened, the thug flees up the
ladder. A thug who makes it to the top of the ladder
40 feet above flees into the streets of the city and
cannot be apprehended.
The other creatures attack the characters on
sight and fight until defeated. Once the floodgates
are opened, the basin empties in two rounds. Once
the water has completely drained, the animals
escape through the now-open flood gate, diving
30 feet down into a larger basin that filters out
to the rest of the sewer system via a dozen or so
passageways. Animals that escape through the flood
gate effectively disappear as they swim through the
murky waters and flee through one of the many
passageways out.
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 2
 Development
If the thugs are captured, the characters can
learn the following information from them with
a successful DC 17 Charisma (Persuasion or
Intimidation) check:
• They were part of a crew hired by a dwarf
named Eldeth Marblehead to release smuggled
animals and beasts into the sewers.
• Marblehead specifically hired thugs aligned
against First Lord Yestral for one reason or other.
While they weren’t all keen on working with
a dwarf, the pay was good and her intentions
aligned with their own animosity against the
government.
• They were given partial payment for their
services up front, with a greater bounty
promised upon completion of the job. The thugs
were to collect payment from Marblehead at
someplace called the Outcast’s Sanctuary (show
the players Handout 2).
• The passphrase to gain access to the Sanctuary
is “Granny loves all her children.”
If the thugs are killed, the adventurers find a
roughly-drawn map on one of them. If the thugs
escaped, the adventurers instead find a satchel
containing the map and the treasure below on the
far ledge, left behind in the thugs’ flight.
XP and Intrigue Awards
If the adventurers capture either or both of the
thugs, award each character 100 XP.
Additionally, if the characters capture either or
both of the thugs and turn them in either to Hillsfar
Castle or to the Red Plumes, they each receive 1
Hillsfar Government Intrigue Point. If both of the
thugs escape, they receive no intrigue points for this
encounter.
Treasure
Each thug carries a coin purse containing 50 gp.
Additionally, one of the thugs carries a potion
of greater healing. If they were already awarded
the potion of greater healing during this adventure,
the thug instead carries a potion of acid resistance.
If both potions were awarded, the thug carries the
coin purse only.
If the thugs escaped, the treasures are instead
found in the satchel that was left behind.
24
Estrellae Moonglow’s Home
Expected Duration: 25 minutes
Estrellae’s home in the north side of the city
is humble for a noble’s dwelling. A servant
leads you into an atrium where a small crowd
has already gathered. Estrellae stands in the
center of a garden loudly criticizing the First
Lord. Choruses of approval issue from the
crowd as they listen to her speech.
General Features
The general features of Estrellae’s home are as
follows:
Light and Visibility. The atrium is open to the
sky and is brightly lit by natural light.
Sights. The house is not large, but is
comfortable and stylish. Fine furniture speaks of
Estrellae’s financial status. The guests come from
various walks of Hillsfarian life, from middle-class
laborers to upper-class elites.
Smells and Sounds. The aroma of flowers, the
scent of food wafting from the kitchen, servants
milling about the guests passing out hors d’oeuvres,
discussions about city politics, complaints against
the First Lord.
Seeds of Dissent
When the adventurers arrive, Estrellae stops her
speech and welcomes the party, presenting them
to the crowd. If the characters are bedraggled
from other exploits during this adventure, neither
Estrellae nor the guests acknowledge this, knowing
well that such is the state of adventurers sometimes.
The crowd is composed entirely of Hillsfar
Dissidents, individuals who oppose First Lord
Yestral’s administration. The reasons for these
oppositions are varied, and some oppose it more
vehemently than others.
Characters who socialize with Estrellae or the
Dissidents or who eavesdrop on the surrounding
conversations hear the opinions and rumors:
• The state of Hillsfar has hardly improved
since Yestral ascended to the title of First Lord.
While trouble did abound during First Lord
Nomerthal’s rule, the city prospered.
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 2
 • The dissolution of the Great Law of Humanity
was done too swiftly and suddenly. The influx of
non-humans has only served to dilute the labor
force and return unsettlingly foreign elements
into the city.
• The entrance of non-humans into Hillsfar
should be monitored and regulated. Priority
should (of course) go to nobles, tradespeople of
renown, and individuals who will guarantee the
growth of trade and commerce within the city.
• First Lord Yestral has been keeping himself
holed up in his tower. Practical folk see this for
what it is: an unsure leader protecting himself
from the public.
• It has been rumored that Yestral is hoarding
supplies within The First Lord’s Tower,
anticipating societal collapse if trade doesn’t
improve.
• It has also been rumored that Yestral is
participating in illicit trade activities. Though no
one will openly accuse him, it has been said that
he has something to do with the various troubles
plaguing the City of Trade (dying livestock,
stolen goods, etc.)
• Despite having only recently moved to Hillsfar,
Estrellae has been instrumental in unifying the
citizens opposed to the First Lord.
• Organized opposition to Yestral has grown to
the point that a group of dissidents are ready to
take action. A concerted effort to incite a civilian
uprising has begun.
Feel free to create NPCs as needed, keeping in mind
that almost every facet of society is represented
in the gathering. Call for social interaction checks
(Deception, Intimidation, or Persuasion) as the
interactions demand. Characters that have more
Hillsfar Dissidents Intrigue Points than Hillsfar
Government Intrigue Points make any such
checks at advantage. Characters who have more
Hillsfar Government Intrigue Points than Hillsfar
Dissidents Intrigue Points make any such checks
at disadvantage.
Note that the interaction and dialogue may be
influenced by details the characters learned earlier
in this adventure if they explored other locations
prior. As the characters interact with the attendees,
25
take note of how positively or negatively their
interactions go.
After some time speaking with the adventurers
and her guests, Estrellae excuses herself to make an
announcement.
Estrellae takes her position in the atrium as
the crowd falls silent to listen. “Friends and all
my gracious guests, Hillsfar is being put to the
test. Yestral mocks us from on high, openly
turning a blind eye upon the truth before his
face: poverty rises at a striking pace. The
time has come for all to act. Without fear
and without tact shall we, Hillsfarians, rise to
meet this fraud upon the ruler’s seat. Speak
against him openly, and march against
the powers that be. Tomorrow at nine bells
we’ll meet outside the castle, in the streets.
Demand that Yestral resign before our city’s
sure decline. Hillsfarians shall not stay quiet.
Meet our demands or else we riot!”
The crowd roars in approval and the
guests turn their attention to one another,
excitedly discussing plans for the next day’s
protest.
Estrellae’s speech marks the end of the gathering
and the guests start to leave. Estrellae has matters
to tend to before tomorrow’s activities. She bids the
characters farewell and sees them to the door.
As soon as she is out of sight, Estrellae slips into
the ethereal plane, takes on her true form as Granny
Eve-canker, and spirits herself away to the Outcast’s
Sanctuary where she has been keeping her base of
operations when not within the city walls. Granny
has to prepare some surprises to be unleashed on
the city tomorrow.
Crafty characters may get the idea to explore
Estrellae’s home. If they do so, they find nothing out
of the ordinary among the mundane goods and the
finery.
Intrigue Reward
Characters who interacted positively or supportively
with Estrellae and the Dissidents receive 2 Hillsfar
Dissidents Intrigue Points. Characters who
manage to sway a Dissident away from opposing the
First Lord (either via good roleplaying by the player
or through successful social interaction checks)
receive 3 Hillsfar Government Intrigue Points.
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 2
 Putting the Pieces Together Fenmarel Mestarine, God of Outcasts
Not much is known about the elven deity
After visiting the locations above, the adventurers known as Fenmarel Mestarine. The god of
should have gathered a few clues pointing toward outcasts is a member of the Seldarine and
Granny Eve-canker and the Outcast’s Sanctuary, just patron to castaways, exiles, pariahs, and
outside Hillsfar. derelict souls throughout the Realms. He
If the players missed any details (such as the is often portrayed as morose, reticent, and
map) or wish to investigate further, they may choose greatly distrustful of non-elves. Clergy who
to inquire about the clues in a number of ways: serve him have been known to train followers
Reporting to Jandra Gragdowel. Gragdowel in the ways of subterfuge (poisoning, guerilla
denies any allegations of the First Lord’s warfare, deception, etc.) His tenets include
involvement with illegal activity. If shown the letter fierce independence and self-sufficiency.
of instruction (Handout 1), she dismisses it as a
fake created to wrongly implicate the Lord Yestral. Once the adventurers decide to travel to the
She doesn’t know of the Outcast’s Sanctuary, but Outcast’s Sanctuary, move on to Part 3.
calls in a castle scholar who reveals it to be the
name of an old temple to Fenmarel Mestarine (see
sidebar below) that was lost to a sinkhole some few
hundred years ago. The scholar can provide the
location of the temple, several miles south of Hillsfar
and just west of the Moonsea Ride. Gragdowel
urges the adventurers to investigate the temple
immediately.
Researching. Adventurers trying to find
information around town can learn about the
Outcast’s Sanctuary from a local scholar or mage for
5 gp. (Characters with an appropriate background
may do so at a discount or for free.) Doing so
reveals the information and location noted above.
Asking the Dissidents. The characters may
possibly ask about these topics if they visit Estrellae
Moonglow’s home after finding clues. If so, one
of the attendees knows of the Outcast’s Sanctuary
and its location as given above. No one admits
to knowing about any criminal activity, though.
Estrellae herself may choose to reveal the lost
temple’s location, wishing to lure the adventurers
there and deal with them herself as Granny Eve-
canker. If shown the letter of instruction (Handout
1) or told of preparations being made concerning
the protest, the Dissidents ask the adventurers
to investigate the temple at once, hoping to stop
anything that may interrupt the next day’s activities.

26 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 2
 Part 3.
The Outcast’s Sanctuary
The Temple of Fenmarel Mestarine
Expected Duration: 90 minutes altogether,
between Areas 1 through 7.
General Features
The general features of the Outcast’s Sanctuary are
as follows:
Light and Visibility. The time of day varies
from late afternoon to evening, depending on when
the adventurers decide to go to the temple. Sunlight
or moonlight shines accordingly on the exposed
areas. Unless otherwise noted, the interior areas of
the temple are lit by torch light. Unlit interior areas
are pitch dark.
Sights. The temple walls, floors, and ceilings
are constructed of stone unless otherwise noted.
Having been submerged for a few hundred years,
the walls are overgrown with various flora and
fungi. Tree roots burst through in places.
Smells and Sounds. Vegetation, dank earth,
torch smoke, the pungent aroma of the creatures
that linger within.
The temple entrance is located amid a
nondescript copse of trees a few miles south
of the city. The tree line opens ahead of
you, revealing a statue-lined walkway that
descends into a group of sunken buildings.
The Outcast’s Sanctuary was consumed by a
sinkhole and abandoned several hundred years ago.
The same seismic activity that created the Waydown
unearthed the temple’s lost entrance, but it was not
discovered until recently by dark fey forces.
The temple entrance is obscured by the copse
of trees surrounding it. Characters who explore the
area and succeed on a DC 18 Wisdom (Perception)
check find a small, natural vent nearby from which
they hear faint, gruff voices. The vent is big enough
27
for medium or smaller sized creature to climb down
one at a time. The sides of the vent are slick and
muddy and it takes a successful DC 14 Strength
(Athletics) check to climb down. Climbers using
rope make the check at advantage. Characters who
fail the climb check slide down the vent into Area 5:
Garbage Disposal below and take 2d6 hit points of
bludgeoning damage from the fall.
If the adventurers approach the temple head-on,
they begin at Area 1: The Walk of Welcome. Area
1 and Area 2: Pilgrim’s Crossing are exposed. The
rest of the temple is a series of structures that have
either been partially or totally sunken into the earth.
Area 1: The Walk of Welcome
Expected Duration: 20 to 30 minutes
Austere statues line the main walkway into
the temple. Each depicts a monk with
its back turned toward the walkway—a
welcome fit for castaways. Three of the
statues have fallen off their bases. Much
of the walkway’s north side remains buried
in earth, the statues there peeking out of
mounds of rock and soil. An armed human
and three furry, humanoid creatures stand
guard.
A human veteran and three bugbears keep watch.
A druid stands behind a statue on the south side of
the walkway. If the characters speak the passphrase,
the guards do not attack. Otherwise, they attack
without any questions.
The area slopes from ground level on the east
down to 10 feet below ground level on the west.
The three fallen statues are difficult terrain. The
mounds of dirt are also difficult terrain and may be
scaled from the ground level above.
The walkway to the west goes five feet then
drops off five feet below before continuing onto
Area 2: Pilgrim’s Crossing.
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 3

Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Remove the veteran
and one bugbear
• Weak party: Remove one bugbear
• Strong party: Add one veteran
• Very strong party: Add one druid, one
veteran, and two bugbears
Treasure
Each creature carries a belt pouch containing
assorted coins totaling 40 gp. Additionally, the druid
has an exquisitely carved yew wand tipped with a
piece of blue jasper (that acts as a druidic focus)
worth 60 gp.
Area 2: Pilgrim’s Crossing
This intersection extends north, east, south,
and west.
The northern path drops down five feet
into a domed structure buried under a layer
of earth. It is dark within.
The southern path ends at a pile of
fallen earth that partially covers two stone
benches.
The western path leads into another
buried structure. A stone archway marks the
entrance into a large, torch-lit chamber. On
the archway’s capstone is carved a set of
peering eyes.
The stone benches to the south were part of a small
reflecting garden that was buried and destroyed
when the temple sank. Unless an enemy creature
from elsewhere in the temple escaped to this area,
there is nothing of interest here.
28
Area 3: Burnt Offerings
This area is unlit.
A simple, stone altar sits at the northern end
of this dome-roofed room. Burn marks cover
its unadorned surface. A small break in the
east wall leads into a naturally formed tunnel
that descends further underground.
Pilgrims visiting the temple used the altar to burn
offerings to Fenmarel and to forgotten souls before
entering the Chapel of the Outcast (Area 4). The
first character who burns an offering worth at least
1 sp on the altar feels the god’s blessing and gains
Inspiration.
Area 4: Chapel of the Outcast
Torchlight fills what was once a large
chapel. The south wall is caved in, soil and
rock intruding into the space. The chapel is
broken halfway through its length, the north
half of the room resting about 4 feet below
the southern half.
Two passageways flank a dais on the
north end of the room. On the wall above
the dais is a bas relief depicting a robed
figure with its back to the chapel, numerous
worshippers reaching out towards it.
Scattered throughout the chapel are an
assortment of bedrolls, supplies, and cooking
implements.
The various minions hired or brought in by Granny
Eve-canker use this chapel for lodging. The western
passageway on the north wall ends in rubble. The
eastern passageway on the north wall drops off five
feet into what was once the temple’s living quarters.
Characters who rummage through the various
belongings find nothing of value. Unless an enemy
creature from elsewhere in the temple escaped to
this area, there is nothing of interest here.
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 3
29 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 3
 Area 5: Garbage Disposal
Expected Duration: 20 to 30 minutes
The adventurers may find themselves here
after either climbing or falling down the natural
vent described at the opening of Part 3. Unless
unceremoniously dropped into the room from
falling, the first character that gets within 20 feet of
the area hears voices complaining about something
and catches the horrible stench of detritus.
The passageway opens up into a natural
cavern. A horrid stench fills the chamber.
Two humanoids dump what appear to be
dead bodies into a large, refuse-filled pit in
the center of the cave.
Two thugs on garbage duty are dumping some of
Granny Eve-canker’s slain victims into the refuse
pit so that the bodies may be devoured by the
otyugh that lives there. If the characters have
the passphrase, they can interact with the thugs.
Otherwise, the thugs attack any characters that
wander in or that fall down the natural vent into
this room. If combat begins, the otyugh rises out of
the pit and joins the fight against the adventurers,
protecting the thugs that have been feeding it.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Remove the two thugs
• Weak party: Remove one thug
• Strong party: Replace the two thugs with
three bugbears
• Very strong party: Replace the two
thugs with three bugbears and add one
bugbear chief
Treasure
At the edge of the pit, buried under a layer of filth,
are a handful of halfling teeth encrusted with
obsidian, altogether worth 100 gp.
30
Area 6: Holding Cells
Expected Duration: 20 to 30 minutes
This large chamber appears to be a kitchen.
A number of iron cauldrons—several filled
with some sort of pasty, yellow gruel—line the
west wall.
Three doorways line the north wall. The
leftmost and rightmost doorways lie shut. The
center doorway hangs open, revealing a
small storage room beyond.
The southeast wall has collapsed,
revealing a natural passageway that
descends into the earth beyond.
There are two narrow passageways
to the south. The western passageway is
blocked by debris. The eastern passageway
ends at a ledge 5 feet up that ascends into
another large room beyond.
The northernmost third of the room has
broken off from the rest and has sunk 3 feet
below the level of the southern portion of the
room. Two cages, 10 feet tall by 10 feet wide
and 10 feet deep, hang suspended by rusty
chains about 8 feet above the floor from the
vaulted, stone ceiling.
This chamber used to be the temple’s main living
area, acting as a common sleeping room, kitchen,
and dining room for the monks, chaplains, and
transient pilgrims. The three rooms to the north
were sleeping quarters for guests of note. Now,
Granny Eve-canker uses this room to store the
monsters she plans to smuggle into Hillsfar. Granny
Eve-canker’s minions are aware of the contents of
this room and avoid it unless commanded to enter
by the hag.
Currently, the room is set up to house a
number of oozes that Granny Eve-canker intends
to teleport into the city during tomorrow’s protest.
The “gruel” in the cauldrons are actually ochre
jellies kept at bay by continuous hold monster
spells. If this encounter is being run at strong or
very strong difficulty, the suspended cages each
contain a gelatinous cube also subject to similar
continuous hold monster spells. If the gelatinous
cubes are present, spotting them requires active
scrutiny of the cages and a successful DC 20 Wisdom
(Perception) check.
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 3
 Casting detect magic on the cauldrons and the
cages reveals the presence of enchantment magic.
The first time a creature that is not Granny Eve-
canker gets within five feet of a cauldron containing
an ochre jelly, two things happen simultaneously.
First, a hold person spell trap goes off. Any
character within five feet of a cauldron must make
a DC 13 Wisdom saving throw or be paralyzed
as if targeted by a hold person spell. Characters
paralyzed in this way may make the same saving
throw at the end of their turns, ending the paralysis
on a success.
Second, all hold monster spells keeping
the oozes in the room at bay deactivate, and
any creature present in the room being held
in a cauldron or cage surges out to attack the
adventurers. Gelatinous cubes slithering out of the
cages fall to the ground below and take 1d6 points
of bludgeoning damage from the fall.
Of the three small rooms to the north, the
westernmost and center room are being used as
storage for sundry supplies. Most of the contents
found in the crates and barrels are not noteworthy,
but there are a few valuables to be found (see
Treasure below).
Granny Eve-canker uses the easternmost room
as her private quarters.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Remove one ochre
jelly, and each ochre jelly begins combat
with 24 HP
• Weak party: Remove one ochre jelly
• Strong party: Add two gelatinous cubes
• Very strong party: Add one ochre jelly
and two gelatinous cubes
Treasure
Characters that search the western storage room
find a crate of burgundy silk robes lined with star
and moon motifs stitched in golden thread. The
robes are exquisitely made and are worth 120
31
gp altogether. Characters that search the center
storage room find a small box which contains
an assortment of gems, altogether worth 80 gp,
and a coin purse containing 10 platinum pieces
(observant characters may notice that these
platinum pieces match the ones given to them by
Estrellae Moonglow earlier in this adventure).
Area 7: Granny’s Room
This area is unlit.
Rotting animal furs covered in blood and
gore lie in a heap on the northwest corner
of the room. On the southwest corner sits
a dainty, white writing desk painted with
golden cloud motifs. An alabaster writing
set rests on the tabletop next to sheets of
parchment and a pair of delicate, emerald
green kidgloves.
A tunnel stretches down and east
through a collapsed section of the
northeastern corner of the room.
Granny Eve-canker has been using this room as her
private quarters, retiring to the heap of furs when
she gets tired of taking her disguised forms. The
door is enchanted, and Granny knows whenever
anyone enters the room, regardless of her location.
The writing desk is where the hag fabricates
her forged notes. The writing set is valuable
and the green gloves are magical (see Treasure
below). Characters who leaf through the sheets
of parchment find a number of noteworthy
documents:
• Several letters instructing hired thugs to receive
particular shipments from the docks and move
them to a number of locations throughout the city.
• A note titled “Granny’s Red Plume Sweethearts”.
Several names have been written in and crossed
off, the last name being Dern Gelnacht. Small
hearts are scribbled throughout the note.
• A number of shipping manifests signed either
by Eldeth Marblehead or Estrellae Moonglow.
The several sets of manifests bear the same dates,
and a DC 13 Intelligence (Investigation) check
reveals them to be well-crafted forgeries.
• A series of official-looking orders signed by
First Lord Yestral instructing the Red Plumes to
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 3
 arrest a half-dozen individuals, all of whom were
present at the Dissidents’ gathering at Estrellae’s
home. A DC 13 Intelligence (Investigation) check
reveals these orders to be forgeries as well.
Intrigue Reward
If the adventurers surrender the various forged
documents to either Commandant Jandra
Gragdowel or to First Lord Yestral at the conclusion
of this adventure, they each receive 3 Hillsfar
Government Intrigue Points.
Treasure
The alabaster writing set on the desk is worth 100
gp. The emerald kidgloves are gloves of thievery and
may come in handy should the characters attempt
to steal Granny Eve-canker’s heartstone (see the
Tactics section in Area 8 below).
Area 8: The Sunken Garden
Expected Duration: 20 to 30 minutes
A winding tunnel leads from Granny Eve-canker’s
private quarters to an old temple garden, once
buried, now cleared and restored. Granny uses this
area to cast rituals at a gory altar.
Having been warned by the enchantment on the
door, Granny expects the adventurers and cannot be
surprised.
The tunnel opens up to what appears to be a
large, underground garden. A stone walking
path lines the walls of this cave, with stairs
leading down to a lower section three feet
below. Lush greenery lines the walls. Tall,
wild growths spring out of four plots of soil
surrounding the garden’s lower level.
In the center of the lower level sits a four-
foot stack of bloody humanoid skulls, flesh still
on their bones and crawling with maggots.
A horrific, indigo-skinned creature dressed in
Estrellae’s clothing stands chanting with arms
outstretched by the gruesome collection of
skulls.
32
Granny is in the final stages of completing a ritual
to teleport the oozes in Area 6 into Hillsfar during
the crowded protest. If the adventurers destroyed
all of the oozes in Area 6, Granny is furious—she
and her allies attack the characters on sight. If any
oozes were spared, Granny is incensed but open to
parley. She is looking for only the slightest excuse
to attack the adventurers, though, and the slightest
provocation triggers her wrath.
Roleplaying Granny Eve-canker
Granny is wicked and ruthless. Two horns
grow out of her head, sweeping back to
sharpened points. Sagging indigo skin covers
her tall, thin body. She calls the adventurers
pet names such as “sweetie, deary, honey-
cake,” etc. Any interactions she makes with the
adventurers are done so in a parental fashion,
as if instructing children.
A character making a successful DC 20 Intelligence
check knows that Granny is a night hag, and recalls
the following about them.
• Night hags usually possess something called a
heartstone. This lustrous black gem allows her
to use her etherealness ability. If she does not
have possession of this gem, she can’t use that
ability.
• A night hag uses a soul bag to collect souls.
When a victim of her soul mongering dies, she
captures their soul in this bag made of human
flesh, if she was able to convince them to
perform evil deeds on her behalf.
Granny stands on the lower level of the garden, just
east of the skull altar. Two displacer beasts hide
in the plots of growth west of the altar. It takes a
passive Perception of 13 or better or a Wisdom
(Perception) check of the same difficulty to notice
the creatures there. The plots are difficult terrain.
If the skull altar is destroyed (AC 5, 5 hp), any
hag in the room takes 1d10 psychic damage. A
character that destroys the altar becomes the target
of Granny’s full wrath.
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 3
 Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Replace the two
displacer beasts with one cockatrice
• Weak party: Remove one displacer
beast
• Strong party: Add two displacer beasts
• Very strong party: Add two green hags
and one displacer beast, use coven rules
for shared spellcasting for the night hag
and green hags
Tactics
Granny stays out of melee range, retreating to other
portions of the room to sling spells and let her allies
get close. If combat turns against her, she uses
etherealness to escape. If her heartstone is somehow
taken from her, she cannot use etherealness and
instead focuses all of her efforts to retrieve the stone.
If this combat is being run on very strong
difficulty, the green hags begin on the upper level
walkways in the northeast and southeast corners
of the room. In this case, the three hags stay out of
melee range for as long as possible and cast their
coven spells without mercy. The hags support
Granny in any of her efforts to escape or retrieve her
heartstone. Unlike Granny, the hags fight to the death.
XP Award
If the adventurers prevent Granny Eve-canker
from escaping and slay or capture her, award each
character 100 XP.
Treasure
Buried in the skull altar are valuables taken from
Granny’s unfortunate victims. Characters searching
the altar find several coin purses containing a total
of 560 gp in coins, assorted pieces of jewelry valued
at 300 gp, and two ebony statuettes depicting
prancing satyrs worth 70 gp each.
Granny’s heartstone and soul bag may be taken
as trinkets. They are useless and have no magical
power to anyone but Granny Eve-canker herself.
33
Conclusion
Reporting back to Jandra Gragdowel at Hillsfar
Castle, the adventurers find her in audience with
First Lord Vuhm Yestral. The First Lord recognizes
characters who have encountered him in past
adventures (DDEX03-03 The Occupation of Szith
Morcane, DDEX03-14 Death on the Wall, and/or
DDEX03-15 Assault on Maerimydra).
Roleplaying First Lord Vuhm Yestral
Vuhm Yestral is a human in his early 60s
and a member of the Lords’ Alliance. While
kind and compassionate, Yestral is also loud,
opinionated, and a commanding presence. His
authoritative presence masks his discomfort
as the current leader of Hillsfar. Despite his
discomfort, he fervently works for the good of
the citizens of Hillsfar and the city.
Characters with Government Intrigue Points equal
or exceeding their Dissidents Intrigue Points earn
the In Yestral’s Service Story Award. Characters
whose Dissidents Intrigue Points exceed their
Government Intrigue Points earn the A Dissident
is Here Story Award.
Regardless of which story award a character
receives, both the First Lord and Commandant
Gragdowel express gratitude. If the adventurers
captured Granny Eve-canker or submit proof of her
defeat, they receive the additional reward promised
by Commandant Gragdowel (see Treasure below).
Capturing or slaying Granny Eve-canker
leaves the Hillsfar Dissidents leaderless and
disorganized (for the moment). The protest
occurs, but Estrellae’s absence leaves much of the
Hillsfar Dissidents demoralized: the event fizzles
out without violence. If Granny was captured, the
Mage’s Guild is capable of holding her prisoner.
The dark fey have other plans. The defeat of
the night hag is a mere setback for them. When
the adventurers wake the next day, they each find
vellum notes by their bedsides. Written in beautiful
and flowing script, the notes read:
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 3
 “Forces much greater than you
Are coming to collect their due.
Though our Granny did you quell,
Hillsfar yet shall see its hell.
Try and stop us, if you must.
Your bones shall be ground to dust.”

This story continues in HILL 1-2 Exodus.

Treasure
As promised earlier in the adventure, Commandant
Gragdowel awards the adventurers 500 gp if the
characters captured or defeated Granny Eve-canker.

34 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 3
Rewards Non-Combat Awards
Make sure players note their rewards on their Task or Accomplishment XP per Char.
adventure logsheets. Give your name and DCI
Talk the crowd down (Part 1) 100
number (if applicable) so players can record who
Free the sprites (Part 2) 100
ran the session.
Protect the Red Plumes (Part 2) 100
Experience Capture a thug (Part 2) 100
Total up all combat experience earned for defeated Capture Granny (Part 3) 100
foes, and divide by the number of characters present
in the combat. For non-combat experience, the The minimum total award for each character
rewards are listed per character. Give all characters participating in this adventure is 3,000 experience points.
in the party non-combat experience awards unless
otherwise noted. The maximum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 4,000 experience points.
Combat Awards
Name of Foe XP per Foe Treasure
Basilisk 700 The characters receive the following treasure,
Black Pudding 1,100 divided up amongst the party. Characters should
Bugbear 200 attempt to divide treasure evenly whenever
Bugbear Chief 700 possible. Gold piece values listed for sellable
Cockatrice 100 gear are calculated at their selling price, not their
Commoner 10 purchase price.
Crocodile 100
Displacer Beast 700 Consumable magic items should be divided
Druid 450 up however the group sees fit. If more than one
Ettercap 450 character is interested in a specific consumable
Gelatinous Cube 450 magic item, the DM can determine who gets it
Giant Constrictor Snake 450 randomly should the group be unable to decide.
Giant Crocodile 1,800 Permanent magic items are divided according
Green Hag (coven) 1,800 to a system. See the sidebar if the adventure awards
Guard 25 permanent magic items.
Half-Black Dragon Veteran 1,800
Night Hag 1,800
Night Hag (coven) 2,900 Treasure Awards
Ochre Jelly 450 Item Name/Location GP Value
Otyugh 1,800
Estrellae’s reward (Part 1) 200
Specter 200
Gragdowell’s reward (Part 2 & 3) 1,000
Sprite 50
Hostage Takers’ Hideout (Part 2) 100
Spy 200
Smugglers’ Cave (Part 2) 100
Swarm of Insects (Centipedes) 100
Red Plume Guardhouse (Part 2) 100
Swarm of Poisonous Snakes 450
Descent Into Darkness (Part 2) 100
Thug 100
Walk of Welcome (Part 3) 100
Veteran 700
Garbage Disposal (Part 3) 100
Wraith 1,800
Holding Cells (Part 3) 300
Granny’s Room (Part 3) 100
Sunken Garden (Part 3) 1,000

35 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 3
 Emerald Kidgloves (Gloves of Thievery)
Wondrous item, uncommon
These delicate, goatskin gloves are colored with a
bright green pigment and slip onto the wearer’s
hands effortlessly. While wearing these gloves,
the wearer experiences irresistible generosity,
expressing compliments to those around them and
spending coin for the benefit of others without
hesitation. Unlike conventional gloves of thievery,
these gloves do not turn invisible when worn, but
shrink or grow to accommodate a small or medium
wearer’s size.
Potion of Greater Healing
Potion, uncommon
A description of this item can be found in the
Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Potion of Acid Resistance
Potion, uncommon
A description of this item can be found in the
Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Renown
Each character receives one point of renown.
Downtime
Each character receives 10 downtime days at the
conclusion of this adventure.
36
Story Rewards
Characters have the opportunity to earn the
following story awards during this adventure.
In Yestral’s Service. Your actions supporting
Hillsfar’s current regime have been noticed by
the political factions in the City of Trade. You gain
advantage on Charisma-based ability checks that
involve interacting with any of Hillsfar’s government
officials and with the Red Plumes. Additionally, you
gain disadvantage on those checks when interacting
with anyone actively opposed to First Lord Yestral
and his government. If you later earn the A
Dissident is Here Story Award, you lose this Story
Award and any of its effects.
A Dissident is Here. Your actions subverting
Hillsfar’s current regime have been noticed by
the political factions in the City of Trade. You gain
advantage on Charisma-based ability checks that
involve interacting with anyone actively opposed to
First Lord Yestral and his government. Additionally,
you gain disadvantage on those checks when
interacting with any of Hillsfar’s government
officials and with the Red Plumes. If you later earn
the In Yestral’s Service Story Award, you lose this
Story Award and any of its effects.
DM Rewards
For running this adventure, you receive 875 XP,
437 gp, and ten downtime days.
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : PA RT 3
DM Appendix: NPC Summary
The following NPCs appear or are mentioned in this
adventure.

Estrellae Moonglow (ES-truh-lay). Female elf.

Noble and recent transplant to Hillsfar. Charismatic
and seemingly savvy in business and politics. De
facto leader and spokesperson of the dissidents
opposing First Lord Vuhm Yestral. Secretly Granny
Eve-canker in disguise.

Eldeth Marblehead (EL-dith). Female dwarf.

Trader who hired a company of dwarves to ship
questionable cargo into Hillsfar. Secretly Granny
Eve-canker in disguise.

Granny Eve-canker. Female night hag. Sent by the

dark fey to Hillsfar to cause chaos and subvert the
City of Trade’s government. Disguises herself as
Estrellae Moonglow and Eldeth Marblehead.

Commandant Jandra Gragdowel (JAN-druh).

Female human. Current Commandant of Hillsfar’s
Red Plumes. Assigned to her station by First Lord
Vuhm Yestral.

Gillun Glimmersting (GILL-uhn). Male sprite.

Forced to secretly kill livestock by Granny Eve-
canker’s minions. Originally from the forest of
Cormanthor.

Alis Maerr (AH-lis MARE). Female human. Red

Plume soldier. Lover of Dern Gelnacht.

Dern Gelnacht (DERN GUHL-nawkt). Male human.

Red Plume soldier. Lover of Alis Maerr. Afflicted by
madness by Granny Eve-canker.

First Lord Vuhm Yestral (VOOM YES-strill). Male

human. First Lord of New Hillsfar. Kind and
devoted to the City of Trade’s citizens. Member of
the Lords Alliance. Former Guard Commandant of
the Red Plumes and the Wall surrounding Yûlash.

37 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : D M A P P E N D I X
 Appendix: NPC/Monster Statistics Cockatrice
Small monstrosity, unaligned
Armor Class 11
Basilisk
Hit Points 27 (6d6 + 6)
Medium monstrosity, unaligned
Speed 20 ft., fly 40 ft.
Armor Class 15 (natural armor)
Hit Points 52 (8d8 + 16) STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
6 (-2) 12 (+1) 12 (+1) 2 (-4) 13 (+1) 5 (-3)
Speed 20 ft.
Senses darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 11
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
16 (+3) 8 (-1) 15 (+2) 2 (-4) 8 (-1) 7 (-2) Languages –
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
Senses darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 9
Languages – Actions
Challenge 3 (700 XP) Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
Petrifying Gaze. If a creature starts its turn within creature. Hit: 3 (1d4 + 1) piercing damage, and the
30 feet of the basilisk and the two of them can target must succeed on a DC 11 Constitution saving
see each other, the basilisk can force the creature throw against being magically petrified. On a failed
to make a DC 12 Constitution saving throw if the save, the creature begins to turn to stone and is
basilisk isn’t incapacitated. On a failed save, the restrained. It must repeat the saving throw at the
creature magically begins to turn to stone and is end of its next turn. On a success, the effect ends. On
restrained. It must repeat the saving throw at the a failure, the creature is petrified for 24 hours.
end of its next turn. On a success, the effect ends. On
a failure, the creature is petrified until freed by the
greater restoration spell or other magic. Commoner
A creature that isn’t surprised can avert its eyes Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
to avoid the saving throw at the start of its turn. If it Armor Class 10
does so, it can’t see the basilisk until the start of its Hit Points 4 (1d8)
next turn, when it can avert its eyes again. If it looks Speed 30 ft.
at the basilisk in the meantime, it must immediately
make the save. STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0)
If the basilisk sees its reflection within 30 feet
of it in bright light, it mistakes itself for a rival and Senses passive Perception 10
targets itself with its gaze. Languages - any one language (usually Common)
Actions Challenge 0 (10 XP)
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft., one Actions
target. Hit: 10 (2d6 + 3) piercing damage plus 7
Club. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
(2d6) poison damage.
target. Hit: 2 (1d4) bludgeoning damage.

38 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : D M A P P E N D I X
Bugbear Bugbear Chief
Medium humanoid (goblinoid), chaotic evil Medium humanoid (goblinoid), chaotic evil
Armor Class 16 (hide armor, shield) Armor Class 17 (chain shirt, shield)
Hit Points 27 (5d8 + 5) Hit Points 65 (10d8 + 20)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
15 (+2) 14 (+2) 13 (+1) 8 (-1) 11 (+0) 9 (-1) 17 (+3) 14 (+2) 14 (+2) 11 (-0) 12 (+1) 11 (+0)

Skills Stealth +6, Survival +2
Senses darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 10
Languages Common, Goblin
Challenge 1 (200 XP)
Brute. A melee weapon deals one extra die of its
damage when the bugbear hits with it (included in
the attack).
Surprise Attack. If the bugbear surprises a creature
and hits it with an attack during the first round of
combat, the target takes an extra 7 (2d6) damage
from the attack.
Actions
Morningstar. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach
5 ft., one target. Hit: 11 (2d8 + 2) piercing damage.
Javelin. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit,
reach 5 ft. or range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 9
(2d6 + 2) piercing damage in melee or 5 (1d6 + 2)
piercing damage at range.
Skills Intimidation +2, Stealth +6, Survival +3
Senses darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 11
Languages Common, Goblin
Challenge 3 (700 XP)
Brute. A melee weapon deals one extra die of its
damage when the bugbear hits with it (included in
the attack). [continued next page]
Heart of Hruggek. The bugbear has advantage on
saving throws against being charmed, frightened,
paralyzed, poisoned, stunned, or put to sleep.
Surprise Attack. If the bugbear surprises a creature
and hits it with an attack during the first round of
combat, the target takes an extra 7 (2d6) damage
from the attack.
Actions
Multiattack. The bugbear makes two melee attacks.
Morningstar. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach
5 ft., one target. Hit: 12 (2d8 + 3) piercing damage.
Javelin. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +5 to hit,
reach 5 ft. or range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 10
(2d6 + 3) piercing damage in melee or 6 (1d6 + 3)
piercing damage at range.

39 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : D M A P P E N D I X
 Ettercap Half-Black Dragon Veteran
Medium monstrosity, neutral evil Medium humanoid (human), lawful evil
Armor Class 13 (natural armor) Armor Class 18 (plate)
Hit Points 44 (8d8 + 8) Hit Points 65 (10d8 + 20)
Speed 30 ft., climb 30 ft. Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
14 (+2) 15 (+2) 13 (+1) 7 (-2) 12 (+1) 8 (-1) 16 (+3) 13 (+1) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 10 (+0)

Skills Perception +3, Stealth +4, Survival +3
Senses darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 13
Languages –
Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Spider Climb. The ettercap can climb difficult
surfaces, including upside down on ceilings, without
needing to make an ability check.
Web Sense. While in contact with a web, the
ettercap knows the exact location of any other
creature in contact with the same web.
Web Walker. The ettercap ignores movement
restrictions caused by webbing.
Actions
Multiattack. The ettercap makes two attacks: one
with its bite and one with its claws.
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
creature. Hit: 6 (1d8 + 2) piercing damage plus 4
(1d8) poison damage. The target must succeed on a
DC 11 Constitution saving throw or be poisoned for
1 minute. The creature can repeat the saving throw
at the end of each of its turns, ending the effect on
itself on a success.
Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 7 (2d4 + 2) slashing damage.
Web (Recharge 5-6). Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to
hit, range 30/60 ft., one Large or smaller creature.
Hit: The creature is restrained by webbing. As an
action, the restrained creature can make a DC 11
Strength check, escaping from the webbing on a
success. The effect ends if the webbing is destroyed.
The webbing has AC 10, 5 hit points, resistance to
bludgeoning damage, and immunity to poison and
psychic damage.
Saving Throws Str +5, Con +4
Skills Athletics +5, Perception +2
Damage Resistances acid
Senses blindsight 10 ft., darkvision 60ft., passive
Perception 12
Languages Common, Draconic
Challenge 5 (1,800 XP)
Actions
Multiattack. The veteran makes two longsword
attacks. If it has a shortsword drawn, it can also
make a shortsword attack.
Longsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5
ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d8 + 3) slashing damage, or 8
(1d10 + 3) slashing damage if used with two hands.
Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5
ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) piercing damage.
Heavy Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to
hit, range 100/400 ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d10 + 1)
piercing damage.
Acid Breath (Recharge 5-6). The veteran exhales
acid in a 15-foot line that is 5 feet wide. Each
creature in that line must make a DC 15 Dexterity
saving throw, taking 22 (5d8) acid damage on a
failed save, or half as much damage on a successful
one.
Reactions
Parry. The veteran adds 3 to its AC against one
melee attack that would hit it. To do so, the veteran
must see the attacker and be wielding a melee
weapon.

40 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : D M A P P E N D I X
Sprite Spy
Tiny fey, neutral good Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
Armor Class 15 (leather armor) Armor Class 12
Hit Points 2 (1d4) Hit Points 27 (6d8)
Speed 10 ft., fly 40 ft. Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
3 (-4) 18 (+4) 10 (+0) 14 (+2) 13 (+1) 11 (+0) 10 (+0) 15 (+2) 10 (+0) 12 (+1) 14 (+2) 16(+3)

Skills Perception +3, Stealth +8
Senses passive Perception 13
Languages Common, Elvish, Sylvan
Challenge 1/4 (50 XP)
Actions
Longsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5
ft., one target. Hit: 1 slashing damage.
Shortbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, range
40/160 ft., one target. Hit: 1 piercing damage, and
the target must succeed on a DC 10 Constitution
saving throw or become poisoned for 1 minute. If
its saving throw result is 5 or lower, the poisoned
target falls unconscious for the same duration, or
until it takes damage or another creature takes an
action to shake it awake.
Heart Sight. The sprite touches a creature and
magically knows the creature’s current emotional
state. If the target fails a DC 10 Charisma saving
throw, the sprite also knows the creature’s
alignment. Celestials, fiends, and undead
automatically fail the saving throw.
Invisibility. The sprite magically turns invisible until
it attacks or casts a spell, or until its concentration
ends (as if concentrating on a spell). Any equipment
the sprite wears or carries is invisible with it.
Skills Deception +5, Insight +4, Investigation +5,
Perception +6, Persuasion +5, Sleight of Hand +4,
Stealth +4
Senses passive Perception 16
Languages any two languages
Challenge 1 (200 XP)
Cunning Action. On each of its turns, the spy can
use a bonus action to take the Dash, Disengage, or
Hide action.
Sneak Attack (1/Turn). The spy deals an extra 7
(2d6) damage when it hits a target with a weapon
attack and has advantage on the attack roll, or
when the target is within 5 feet of an ally of the spy
that isn’t incapacitated and the spy doesn’t have
disadvantage on the attack roll.
Actions
Multiattack. The spy makes two melee attacks.
Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5
ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing damage.
Hand Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to
hit, range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2)
piercing damage.

41 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : D M A P P E N D I X
 Black Pudding
Large ooze, unaligned
Armor Class 7
Hit Points 85 (10d10 + 30)
Speed 20 ft., climb 20 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
16 (+3) 5 (-3) 16 (+3) 1 (-5) 6 (-2) 1 (-5)
Damage Immunities acid, cold, lightning, slashing
Condition Immunities blinded, charmed, deafened,
exhaustion, frightened, prone
Senses blindsight 60 ft. (blind beyond this radius),
passive Perception 8
Languages –
Challenge 4 (1,100 XP)
Amorphous. The pudding can move through a space
as narrow as 1 inch wide without squeezing.
Corrosive Form. A creature that touches the
pudding or hits it with a melee attack while
within 5 feet of it takes 4 (1d8) acid damage. Any
nonmagical weapon made of metal or wood that
hits the pudding corrodes. After dealing damage,
the weapon takes a permanent and cumulative -1
penalty to damage rolls. If its penalty drops to -5, the
weapon is destroyed. Nonmagical ammunition made
of metal or wood that hits the pudding is destroyed
after dealing damage.
The pudding can eat through 2-inch-thick, non
magical wood or metal in 1 round.
Spider Climb. The pudding can climb difficult
surfaces, including upside down on ceilings, without
needing to make an ability check.
Actions
Pseudopod. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5
ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) bludgeoning damage
plus 18 (4d8) acid damage. In addition, non magical
armor worn by the target is partly dissolved and
takes a permanent and cumulative -1 penalty to the
AC it offers. The armor is destroyed if the penalty
reduces its AC to 10.
Reactions
Split. When a pudding that is Medium or larger is
subjected to lightning or slashing damage, it splits
into two new puddings if it has at least 10 hit points.
Each new pudding has hit points equal to half the
original pudding’s, rounded down. New puddings
are one size smaller than the original pudding.
42
Specter
Medium undead, chaotic evil
Armor Class 12
Hit Points 22 (5d8)
Speed 0 ft., fly 50 ft. (hover)
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
1 (-5) 14 (+2) 11 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 11 (+0)
Damage Resistances acid, cold, fire, lightning,
thunder; bludgeoning, piercing, and slashing from
non magical weapons that aren’t silvered
Damage Immunities necrotic, poison
Condition Immunities charmed, exhaustion,
grappled, paralyzed, petrified, poisoned, prone,
restrained, unconscious
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 10
Languages understands all languages it knew in life
but can’t speak
Challenge 1 (200 XP)
Incorporeal Movement. The specter can move
through other creatures and objects as if they were
difficult terrain. It takes 5 (1d10) force damage if it
ends its turn inside an object.
Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the specter
has disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on
Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on sight.
Actions
Life Drain. Melee Spell Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5
ft. , one creature. Hit: 10 (3d6) necrotic damage.
The target must succeed on a DC 10 Constitution
saving throw or its hit point maximum is reduced
by an amount equal to the damage taken. This
reduction lasts until the creature finishes a long
rest. The target dies if this effect reduces its hit point
maximum to 0.
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : D M A P P E N D I X
Guard Wraith
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment Medium undead, neutral evil
Armor Class 16 (chain shirt, shield) Armor Class 13
Hit Points 11 (2d8 + 2) Hit Points 67 (9d8 + 27)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 0 ft., fly 60 ft. (hover)
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
13 (+1) 12 (+1) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 10 (+0) STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
6 (-2) 16 (+3) 16 (+3) 12 (+1) 14 (+2) 15 (+2)
Skills Perception +2 Damage Resistances acid, cold, fire, lightning,
Senses passive Perception 12 thunder; bludgeoning, piercing, and slashing from
Languages any one languages (usually Common) non magical weapons that aren’t silvered
Challenge 1/8 (25 XP)
Damage Immunities necrotic, poison
Actions
Condition Immunities charmed, exhaustion,
Spear. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft. or
grappled, paralyzed, petrified, poisoned, prone,
range 20/60 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d6 + 1) piercing
restrained
damage.
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 12
Swarm of Insects (Centipedes) Languages the languages it knew in life
Medium swarm of Tiny beasts, unaligned
Challenge 5 (1,800 XP)
Armor Class 12 (natural armor)
Incorporeal Movement. The wraith can move
Hit Points 22 (5d8) through other creatures and objects as if they were
Speed 20 ft., climb 20 ft. difficult terrain. It takes 5 (1d10) force damage if it
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA ends its turn inside an object.
3 (-4) 13 (+1) 10 (+0) 1 (-5) 7 (-2) 1 (-5) Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the wraith
has disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on
Damage Resistances bludgeoning, piercing,
Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on sight.
slashing
Condition Immunities charmed, frightened, Actions
paralyzed, petrified, prone, restrained, stunned Life Drain. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5
Senses blindsight 10 ft., passive Perception 8 ft., one creature. Hit: 21 (4d8 + 3) necrotic damage.
Languages – The target must succeed on a DC 14 Constitution
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP) saving throw or its hit point maximum is reduced
by an amount equal to the damage taken. This
Swarm. The swarm can occupy another creature’s
reduction lasts until the target finishes a long rest.
space and vice versa, and the swarm can move through
The target dies if this effect reduces its hit point
any opening large enough for a Tiny insect. The swarm
maximum to 0.
can’t regain hit points or gain temporary hit points.
Create Specter. The wraith targets a humanoid
Swarm of Centipedes. A creature reduced to 0
within 10 feet of it that has been dead for no longer
hit points by a swarm of centipedes is stable but
than 1 minute and died violently. The target’s spirit
poisoned for 1 hour, even after regaining hit points,
rises as a specter in the space of its corpse or in the
and paralyzed while poisoned in this way.
nearest unoccupied space. The specter is under the
Actions wraith’s control. The wraith can have no more than
seven specters under its control at one time.
Bites. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 0 ft., one
target in the swarm’s space. Hit: 10 (4d4) piercing
damage, or 5 (2d4) piercing damage if the swarm
has half of its hit points or fewer.

43 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : D M A P P E N D I X
 Crocodile Giant Crocodile
Large beast, unaligned Huge beast, unaligned
Armor Class 12 (natural armor) Armor Class 14 (natural armor)
Hit Points 19 (3d10 + 3) Hit Points 85 (9d12 + 27)
Speed 20 ft., swim 30 ft. Speed 30 ft., swim 50 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
15 (+2) 10 (+0) 13 (+1) 2 (-4) 10 (+0) 5 (-3) 21 (+5) 9 (-1) 17 (+3) 2 (-4) 10 (+0) 7 (-2)

Skills Stealth +2 Skills Stealth +2

Senses passive Perception 10 Senses passive Perception 10
Languages – Languages –
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP) Challenge 5 (1,800 XP)
Hold Breath. The crocodile can hold its breath for Hold Breath. The crocodile can hold its breath for
15 minutes. 30 minutes.
Actions Actions
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft., one Multiattack. The crocodile makes two attacks: one
creature. Hit: 7 (1d10 + 2) piercing damage, and the with its bite and one with its tail.
target is grappled (escape DC 12). Until this grapple Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +8 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
ends, the target is restrained, and the crocodile can’t target. Hit: 21 (3d10 + 5) piercing damage, and the
bite another target. target is grappled (escape DC 16). Until this grapple
ends, the target is restrained, and the crocodile can’t
bite another target.
Giant Constrictor Snake
Tail. Melee Weapon Attack: +8 to hit, reach 10ft., one
Huge beast, unaligned target not grappled by the crocodile. Hit: 14 (2d8 +
Armor Class 12 5) bludgeoning damage. If the target is a creature, it
Hit Points 60 (8d12 + 8) must succeed on a DC 16 Strength saving throw or
Speed 30 ft., swim 30 ft. be knocked prone.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
19 (+4) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 1 (-5) 10 (+0) 3 (-4)

Skills Perception +2
Senses blindsight 10 ft., passive Perception 12
Languages –
Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Actions
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 10 ft.,
one creature. Hit: 11 (2d6 + 4) piercing damage.
Constrict. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one creature. Hit: 13 (2d8 + 4) bludgeoning damage,
and the target is grappled (escape DC 16). Until this
grapple ends, the creature is restrained, and the
snake can’t constrict another target.

44 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : D M A P P E N D I X
Swarm of Poisonous Snakes Actions
Medium swarm of Tiny beasts, unaligned Multiattack. The thug makes two melee attacks.
Armor Class 14 Mace. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
Hit Points 36 (8d8) one creature. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) bludgeoning damage.
Speed 30 ft., swim 30 ft. Heavy Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +2 to hit,
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA range 100/400 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d10) piercing
8 (-1) 18 (+4) 11 (+0) 1 (-5) 10 (+0) 3 (-4) damage.
Damage Resistances bludgeoning, piercing,
slashing
Druid
Condition Immunities charmed, frightened,
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
paralyzed, petrified, prone, restrained, stunned
Armor Class 11 (16 with barkskin)
Senses blindsight 10 ft., passive Perception 10
Hit Points 27 (5d8 + 5)
Languages –
Speed 30 ft.
Challenge 2 (450 XP)
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Swarm. The swarm can occupy another creature’s 10 (+0) 12 (+1) 13 (+1) 12 (+1) 15 (+2) 11 (+0)
space and vice versa, and the swarm can move
through any opening large enough for a Tiny snake. Skills Medicine +4, Nature +3, Perception +4
The swarm can’t regain hit points or gain temporary Senses passive Perception 14
hit points.
Languages Druidic plus any two languages
Actions Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Bites. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 0 ft., one Spellcasting. The druid is a 4th-level spellcaster. Its
creature in the swarm’s space. Hit: 7 (2d6) piercing spellcasting ability is Wisdom (spell save DC 12, +4
damage, or 3 (1d6) piercing damage if the swarm to hit with spell attacks). It has the following druid
has half of its hit points or fewer. The target must spells prepared:
make a DC 10 Constitution saving throw, taking 14 Cantrips (at will): druidcraft, produce flame,
(4d6) poison damage on a failed save, or half as shillelagh
much damage on a successful one. 1st level (4 slots): entangle, longstrider, speak with
Thug animals, thunderwave
Medium humanoid (any race), any non-good 2nd level (3 slots): moonbeam, barkskin
alignment Actions
Armor Class 11 (leather armor)
Quarterstaff. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit (+4
Hit Points 32 (5d8 + 10)
to hit with shillelagh), reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 3
Speed 30 ft. (1d6) bludgeoning damage, or 4 (1d8) bludgeoning
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA damage with shillelagh or if wielded with two
15 (+2) 11 (+0) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) hands.

Skills Intimidation +2
Senses passive Perception 10
Languages any one language (usually Common)
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
Pack Tactics. The thug has advantage on an attack
roll against a creature if at least one of the thug’s
allies is within 5 feet of the creature and the ally isn’t
incapacitated.

45 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : D M A P P E N D I X
 Veteran Otyugh
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment Large aberration, neutral
Armor Class 17 (splint) Armor Class 14 (natural armor)
Hit Points 58 (9d8 + 18) Hit Points 114 (12d10 + 48)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
16 (+3) 13 (+1) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 10 (+0) 16 (+3) 11 (+0) 19 (+4) 6 (-2) 13 (+1) 6 (-2)
Skills Athletics +5, Perception +2 Saving Throws Con +7
Senses passive Perception 12 Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 11
Languages any one language (usually Common) Languages Otyugh
Challenge 3 (700 XP) Challenge 5 (1,800 XP)
Actions Limited Telepathy. The otyugh can magically
transmit simple messages and images to any
Multiattack. The veteran makes two longsword creature within 120 feet of it that can understand a
attacks. If it has a shortsword drawn, it can also language. This form of telepathy doesn’t allow the
make a shortsword attack. receiving creature to telepathically respond.
Longsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5
ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d8 + 3) slashing damage, or 8 Actions
(1d10 + 3) slashing damage if used with two hands. Multiattack. The otyugh makes three attacks: one
Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 with its bite and two with its tentacles.
ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) piercing damage. Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
Heavy Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, one target. Hit: 12 (2d8 + 3) piercing damage. If
range 100/400 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d10) piercing the target is a creature, it must succeed on a DC
damage. 15 Constitution saving throw against disease or
become poisoned until the disease is cured. Every
24 hours that elapse, the target must repeat the
saving throw, reducing its hit point maximum by
5 (1d10) on a failure. The disease is cured on a
success. The target dies if the disease reduces its hit
point maximum to 0. This reduction to the target’s
hit point maximum lasts until the disease is cured.
Tentacle. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach
10ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d8 + 3) bludgeoning
damage plus 4 (1d8) piercing damage. If the target
is Medium or smaller, it is grappled (escape DC 13)
and restrained until the grapple ends. The otyugh
has two tentacles, each of which can grapple one
target.
Tentacle Slam. The otyugh slams creatures
grappled by it into each other or a solid surface.
Each creature must succeed on a DC 14 Strength
saving throw or take 10 (2d6 + 3) bludgeoning
damage and be stunned until the end of the otyugh’s
next turn. On a successful save, the target takes half
the bludgeoning damage and isn’t stunned.

46 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : D M A P P E N D I X
Gelatinous Cube
Large ooze, unaligned
Armor Class 6
Hit Points 84 (8d10 + 40)
Speed 15 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
14 (+2) 3 (-4) 20 (+5) 1 (-5) 6 (-2) 1 (-5)
Condition Immunities blinded, charmed, deafened,
exhaustion, frightened, prone
Senses blindsight 60 ft. (blind beyond this radius),
passive Perception 8
Languages –
Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Ooze Cube. The cube takes up its entire space. Other
creatures can enter the space, but a creature that
does so is subjected to the cube’s Engulf and has
disadvantage on the saving throw.
Creatures inside the cube can be seen but have
total cover.
A creature within 5 feet of the cube can take an
action to pull a creature or object out of the cube.
Doing so requires a successful DC 12 Strength check,
and the creature making the attempt takes 10 (3d6)
acid damage.
The cube can hold only one Large creature or
up to four Medium or smaller creatures inside it at a
time.
Transparent. Even when the cube is in plain sight, it
takes a successful DC 15 Wisdom (Perception) check
to spot a cube that has neither moved nor attacked.
A creature that tries to enter the cube’s space while
unaware of the cube is surprised by the cube.
Actions
Pseudopod. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5
ft., one creature. Hit: 10 (3d6) acid damage.
Engulf. The cube moves up to its speed. While doing
so, it can enter Large or smaller creatures’ spaces.
Whenever the cube enters a creature’s space, the
creature must make a DC 12 Dexterity saving throw.
On a successful save, the creature can choose to
be pushed 5 feet back or to the side of the cube. A
creature that chooses not to be pushed suffers the
consequences of a failed saving throw.
47
On a failed save, the cube enters the creature’s
space, and the creature takes 10 (3d6) acid damage
and is engulfed. The engulfed creature can’t breathe,
is restrained, and takes 21 (6d6) acid damage at
the start of each of the cube’s turns. When the cube
moves, the engulfed creature moves with it.
An engulfed creature can try to escape by taking
an action to make a DC 12 Strength check. On a
success, the creature escapes and enters a space of
its choice within 5 feet of the cube.
Ochre Jelly
Large ooze, unaligned
Armor Class 8
Hit Points 45 (6d10 + 12)
Speed 10 ft., climb 10 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
15 (+2) 6 (-2) 14 (+2) 2 (-4) 6 (-2) 1 (-5)
Damage Resistances acid
Damage Immunities lightning, slashing
Condition Immunities blinded, charmed, deafened,
exhaustion, frightened, prone
Senses blindsight 60 ft. (blind beyond this radius),
passive Perception 8
Languages –
Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Amorphous. The jelly can move through a space as
narrow as 1 inch wide without squeezing.
Spider Climb. The jelly can climb difficult surfaces,
including upside down on ceilings, without needing
to make an ability check.
Actions
Pseudopod. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5
ft., one target. Hit: 9 (2d6 + 2) bludgeoning damage
plus 3 (ld6) acid damage.
Reactions
Split. When a jelly that is Medium or larger is
subjected to lightning or slashing damage, it splits
into two new jellies if it has at least 10 hit points.
Each new jelly has hit points equal to half the
original jelly’s, rounded down. New jellies are one
size smaller than the original jelly.
H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : D M A P P E N D I X
 Displacer beast Amphibious. The hag can breathe air and water.
Large monstrosity, lawful evil Innate Spellcasting. The hag’s innate spellcasting
Armor Class 13 (natural armor) ability is Charisma (spell save DC 12). She can
innately cast the following spells, requiring no
Hit Points 85 (10d10 + 30)
material components:
Speed 40 ft.
At will: dancing lights, minor illusion, vicious mockery
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Mimicry. The hag can mimic animal sounds and
18 (+4) 15 (+2) 16 (+3) 6 (-2) 12 (+1) 8 (-1)
humanoid voices. A creature that hears the sounds
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 11 can tell they are imitations with a successful DC 14
Languages – Wisdom (Insight) check.
Challenge 3 (700 XP) Actions
Avoidance. If the displacer beast is subjected to an Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
effect that allows it to make a saving throw to take one target. Hit: 13 (2d8 + 4) slashing damage.
only half damage, it instead takes no damage if it
Illusory Appearance. The hag covers herself and
succeeds on the saving throw, and only half damage
anything she is wearing or carrying with a magical
if it fails.
illusion that makes her look like another creature of
Displacement. The displacer beast projects a her general size and humanoid shape. The illusion
magical illusion that makes it appear to be standing ends if the hag takes a bonus action to end it or if
near its actual location, causing attack rolls against she dies.
it to have disadvantage. If it is hit by an attack, this
The changes wrought by this effect fail to hold
trait is disrupted until the end of its next turn. This
up to physical inspection. For example, the hag could
trait is also disrupted while the displacer beast is
appear to have smooth skin, but someone touching
incapacitated or has a speed of 0.
her would feel her rough flesh. Otherwise, a creature
Actions must take an action to visually inspect the illusion
and succeed on a DC 20 Intelligence (Investigation)
Multiattack. The displacer beast makes two attacks
check to discern that the hag is disguised.
with its tentacles.
Invisible Passage. The hag magically turns invisible
Tentacle. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach
until she attacks or casts a spell, or until her
10ft., one target. Hit: 7 (ld6 + 4) bludgeoning
concentration ends (as if concentrating on a spell).
damage plus 3 (1d6) piercing damage.
While invisible, she leaves no physical evidence of
Green Hag her passage, so she can be tracked only by magic.
Medium fey, neutral evil Any equipment she wears or carries is invisible with
her.
Armor Class 17 (natural armor)
Hit Points 82 (11d8 + 33)
Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
18 (+4) 12 (+1) 16 (+3) 13 (+1) 14 (+2) 14 (+2)

Skills Arcana +3, Deception +4, Perception +4,

Stealth +3
Senses darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 14
Languages Common, Draconic, Sylvan
Challenge 3 (700 XP)
Coven Challenge 5 (1,800 XP)

48 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : D M A P P E N D I X
Granny Eve-canker (Night Hag) Nightmare Haunting (1/Day). While on the
Medium fiend, neutral evil Ethereal Plane, the hag magically touches a sleeping
humanoid on the Material Plane. A protection from
Armor Class 17 (natural armor)
evil and good spell cast on the target prevents this
Hit Points 112 (15d8 + 45) contact, as does a magic circle. As long as the contact
Speed 30 ft. persists, the target has dreadful visions. If these
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA visions last for at least 1 hour, the target gains no
18 (+4) 15 (+2) 16 (+3) 16 (+3) 14 (+2) 16 (+3) benefit from its rest, and its hit point maximum
is reduced by 5 (1d10). If this effect reduces the
Skills Deception +7, Insight +6, Perception +6, target’s hit point maximum to 0, the target dies,
Stealth +6 and if the target was evil, its soul is trapped in the
Damage Resistances cold, fire; bludgeoning, hag’s soul bag. The reduction to the target’s hit
piercing, and slashing from nonmagical weapons point maximum lasts until removed by the greater
that aren’t silvered restoration spell or similar magic.
Condition Immunities charmed
Senses darkvision 120ft., passive Perception 16
Languages Abyssal, Common, Infernal, Primordial Night Hag Items
Challenge 5 (1,800 XP) A night hag carries two very rare magic items
that she must craft for herself If either object
Coven Challenge 7 (2,900 XP)
is lost, the night hag will go to great lengths to
Innate Spellcasting. The hag’s innate spellcasting retrieve it, as creating a new tool takes time
ability is Charisma (spell save DC 13, +5 to hit with and effort.
spell attacks). She can innately cast the following
Heartstone. This lustrous black gem
spells, requiring no material components:
allows a night hag to become ethereal while it
At will: detect magic, magic missile is in her possession. The touch of a heartstone
2/day each: plane shift (self only), ray of also cures any disease. Crafting a heartstone
enfeeblement, sleep takes 30 days.
Magic Resistance. The hag has advantage on saving Soul Bag. When an evil humanoid dies as a
throws against spells and other magical effects. result of a night hag’s Nightmare Haunting, the
hag catches the soul in this black sack made
Actions
of stitched flesh. A soul bag can hold only one
Claws (Hag Form Only). Melee Weapon Attack: evil soul at a time, and only the night hag who
+6 to hit, reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 13 (2d8 + 4) crafted the bag can catch a soul with it. Crafting
slashing damage. a soul bag takes 7 days and a humanoid
Change Shape. The hag magically polymorphs into sacrifice (whose flesh is used to make the bag).
a Small or Medium female humanoid, or back into
her true form. Her statistics are the same in each
form. Any equipment she is wearing or carrying isn’t
transformed. She reverts to her true form if she dies.
Etherealness. The hag magically enters the Ethereal
Plane from the Material Plane, or vice versa. To
do so, the hag must have a heartstone in her
possession.

49
 Player handout 1: Letter of Instructions

Our plans proceed apace.

Stay at your post and watch over the goods.

We make our move when the protestors’ cries echo throughout the city.
I will be at the Outcast’s Sanctuary, preparing something special for
the occasion.

Lord Yestral is incredibly pleased with the progress we’ve made. When
the smoke clears, your rewards will exceed anything you can imagine.

By the full moon’s glow,

E.M.

50 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : P L AY E R H A N D O U T 1
Player handout 2: Thug’s Map

51 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : P L AY E R H A N D O U T 2
 Player Handout 3: Entries from Dern Gelnacht’s Journal

TWO WEEKS AGO

“She visits me in my dreams, always beautiful. Alis has nothing to
fear from my dreams, though. I am hers and I shall always
be true to my love.”

TEN DAYS AGO

“These restless nights are taxing, but Granny’s nightly visits make
things better. It’s our special, little secret. She said last night that
she doesn’t appreciate my being a Red Plume. She says that the
Red Plumes are wicked and hurtful. But my Alis isn’t like that at
all, or is she? Perhaps I have gone down the wrong path.”

SEVEN DAYS AGO

“Granny said that I’m a bad, bad boy for staying within the Plumes’
ranks. I think my cohorts know of her nightly visits. They whisper
behind my back, even my beloved. But Granny is a true friend—
perhaps my only true friend. How long have my comrades-at-arms
been spreading rumors about me? How long must I put up with
their hushed words?”

FIVE DAYS AGO

“She says she won’t come back if I remain here. She is staying
somewhere called the Outcast’s Sanctuary. I need to find her.
My duty and my station can’t get in my way. The Red Plumes can’t
get in my way. I won’t let them…”

52 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : P L AY E R H A N D O U T 3
Player Handout 4: Emerald Kidgloves

Emerald Kidgloves (Gloves of Thievery)

Wondrous item, uncommon
These delicate, goatskin gloves are colored with a bright green pigment and slip onto your hands
effortlessly. Although these act as gloves of thievery, these gloves do not turn invisible when worn, but
shrink or grow to accommodate a small or medium wearer’s size.
While wearing these gloves, you gain a +2 bonus to Dexterity (Sleight of Hand) checks and
Dexterity checks made to pick locks. Additionally, you feel a sense of irresistible generosity, expressing
compliments to those around them and spending coin for the benefit of others without hesitation.

53 H I L L 1 - 1 / A R R I VA L : P L AY E R H A N D O U T 4
 EXODUS
Scott Moore
Adventure Designer
Adventure Code: HILL 1-2

The monster attacks have caused the citizens of Hillsfar to lack confidence in
the ability of the new government to protect them. Families and merchants
are leaving for a safer place. Vuhm Yestral has to prove that he has control of
the situation. He decides that a bit of recon needs to be undertaken. A D&D
Adventurers League adventure for characters levels 5-10 in Hillsfar.

A 4-hour adventure for 5th-10th level characters

Producer: Baldman Games

Hillsfar Administrator: Cindy Moore
Development: Shawn Merwin
Editing and Layout: Encoded Designs
Cartography: Jay Africa
Organized Play: Chris Lindsay
D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall,
Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks, Alan Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster
Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League, all other Wizards of the Coast product names, and their respective
logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive likenesses
are property of Wizards of the Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America.
Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the express written
permission of Wizards of the Coast.
©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31,
2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK.
 Introduction
Welcome to Exodus, a D&D Adventurers League
adventure, Part Two of the Dark Intentions Trilogy
This adventure is designed for three to seven 5th-10th level characters, and is optimized for
five 7th-level characters. The adventure is set in the Moonsea region of the Forgotten Realms, in and
around the city of Hillsfar.

The D&D Adventurers League Preparing the Adventure

This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of
the D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure,
players track their characters’ experience, treasure,
and other rewards, and can take those characters
through other adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a
store event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a
DCI number. This number is your official Wizards of
the Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have
a number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to
use to create and advance their characters. Players
can continue to play their characters after the
storyline season has finished, possibly participating
in a second or third storyline with those same
characters. A character’s level is the only limitation
for adventure play. A player cannot use a character
of a level higher or lower than the level range of a
D&D Adventurers League adventure.
For more information on playing, running
games as a Dungeon Master, and organizing games
for the D&D Adventurers League, please visit the
D&D Adventurers League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
• Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
• Read through the adventure, taking notes
of anything you’d like to highlight or remind
yourself while running the adventure, such as a
way you’d like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d
like to use in a combat.
• Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
• Gather together any resources you’d like to
use to aid you in running this adventure--such
as notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and
battlemaps.
• If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.
Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
• Character name and level
• Character race and class
• Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most
common passive ability check
• Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, etc.)

2 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : I N T R O D U C T I O N
Players that have characters outside the
adventure’s level range cannot participate in
the adventure with those characters. Players
with ineligible characters can make a new 1st-level
character or use a pregenerated character. Players
can play an adventure they previously played or
ran as a Dungeon Master, but not with the same
character.
Ensure that each player has an official
adventure logsheet for his or her character (if not,
get one from the organizer). The player fills out
the adventure name, session number, date, and
your name and DCI number. In addition, the player
also fills in the starting values for experience, gold,
downtime, renown, and number of permanent
magic items. He or she fill in the other values and
write notes at the conclusion of the session. Each
player is responsible for maintaining an accurate
logsheet.
If you have time, you can do a quick scan of
a player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing
looks out of order. If you see magic items of very
high rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you
can ask players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict
item use or ask them to use a standard ability
score array. Point players to the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and
it’s the beginning of an adventure or episode,
they can declare their activity and spend the days
now. Alternatively, they can do so at the end of
the adventure or episode. Players should select
their characters’ spells and other daily options
prior to the start of the adventure, unless the
adventure specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread
the adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, you may see sidebars
to help make adjustments for smaller/larger
groups, and characters of higher/lower levels than
the optimized group. Most of the time, this is used
for combat encounters.
3 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : I N T R O D U C T I O N
You may adjust the adventure beyond the
guidelines given. For example, if you’re playing
with a group of inexperienced players, you might
want to make the adventure a little easier; for
very experienced players, you may want to make
it a little harder. Therefore, five categories of
party strength have been created for you to use
as a guide. Feel free to use a different adjustment
during the adventure if the recommended party
strength feels off for the group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of
five 7th-level characters. To figure out whether
you need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
• Add up the total levels of all the characters
• Divide the total by the number of characters
• Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round
fractions of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table:
Determining Party Strength
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very Weak
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very Strong
Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment
of the game for the players. You help guide the
narrative and bring the words on these pages
to life. The outcome of a fun game session often
creates stories that live well beyond the play at the
table. Always follow this golden rule when you DM
for a group:
Make decisions and adjudications that
enhance the fun of the adventure when possible.
 To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
• You are empowered to make adjustments to
the adventure and make decisions about how the
group interacts with the world of this adventure.
Doing so is especially important and applicable
outside of combat, but feel free to adjust the
adventure for groups that are having too easy or
too hard of a time.
• Don’t make the adventure too easy or too
difficult for a group. Never being challenged
makes for a boring game and being
overwhelmed makes for a frustrating one.
Gauge the experience of the players (not the
characters) with the game, try to feel out (or
ask) what they like in a game, and attempt to
give each of them the experience they’re after
when they play D&D. Give everyone a chance to
shine.
• Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game
session moving along appropriately. Watch for
stalling, since play loses momentum when this
happens. At the same time, make sure that the
players don’t finish too early; provide them with
a full play experience. Try to be aware of running
long or short. Adjust the pacing accordingly
• Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free
to modify the text as you see fit, especially when
dialogue is present.
• Give the players appropriate hints so they can
make informed choices about how to proceed.
Players should be given clues and hints when
appropriate so they can tackle puzzles, combat,
and interactions without getting frustrated over
lack of information. Doing so helps to encourage
immersion in the adventure and gives players
“little victories” for figuring out good choices
from clues.
In short, being the DM isn’t about following
the adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about
facilitating a fun, challenging game environment
for the players. The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has
more information on the art of running a D&D
game.
4 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : I N T R O D U C T I O N
Downtime and Lifestyle
At the beginning of each play session, players must
declare whether or not they are spending any days
of downtime. The player records the downtime
spent on the adventure logsheet. The following
options are available to players during downtime
(see the D&D basic rules or the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for more information):
• Catching up
• Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
commit to crafting a single item)
• Practicing a profession
• Recuperating
• Spellcasting services
• Training
Other downtime options might be available during
adventures or unlocked through play, including
faction-specific activities.
In addition, whenever a character spends
downtime days, that character also spends the
requisite expense for his or her lifestyle. Costs
are per day, so a character that spends ten days
of downtime also spends ten days of expenses
maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some downtime
activities help with lifestyle expenses or add
lifestyle expenses.
Spellcasting Services
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can
provide some spellcasting services. Characters
need to be able to travel to the settlement to obtain
these services.
Spell services generally available include
healing and recovery spells, as well as information-
gathering spells. Other spell services might be
available as specified in the adventure. The number
of spells available to be cast as a service is limited
to a maximum of three per day total, unless
otherwise noted.
 Spellcasting Services
Spell Cost
Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
Identify 20 gp
Lesser restoration 40 gp
Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
Remove curse 90 gp
Speak with dead 90 gp
Divination 210 gp
Greater restoration 450 gp
Raise dead 1,250 gp
Acolyte Background
A character possessing the acolyte
background requesting spellcasting
services at a temple of his or her faith
may request one spell per day from the
Spellcasting Services table for free. The
only cost paid for the spell is the base price
for the consumed material component, if
any.
Disease, Death, and Recovery
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might
not have the same characters return from session
to session, here are the rules when bad things
happen to characters.
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating Effects
A character still affected by diseases, poisons,
and other similar effects at the conclusion of an
adventure can spend downtime days recuperating
until such time as he or she resolves the effect to
its conclusion (see the recuperating activity in the
D&D Basic Rules).
If a character doesn’t resolve the effect
between sessions, that character begins the next
session still affected by the debilitating effect.
Death
A character who is killed during the course of
the adventure has a few options at the end of the
session (or whenever arriving back in civilization)
if no one in the adventuring party has immediate
5 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : I N T R O D U C T I O N
access to a raise dead or revivify spell, or similar
magic. A character subject to a raise dead spell is
affected negatively until all long rests have been
completed during an adventure. Alternatively, each
downtime day spent after raise dead reduces the
penalty to attack rolls, saving throws, and ability
checks by 1, in addition to any other benefits the
downtime activity might provide.
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any
of the other options, the player creates a new
character. The new character does not have any
items or rewards possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing
any vital organs and is mostly whole) and the
player would like the character to be returned to
life, the party can take the body back to civilization
and use the dead character’s funds to pay for a
raise dead spell. A raise dead spell cast in this
manner costs the character 1,250 gp.
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As
above, except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for
the raise dead spell is paid for by the party at the
end of the session. Other characters are under no
obligation to spend their funds to bring back a
dead party member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to
4 and a member of a faction, the dead character’s
body can be returned to civilization and a patron
from the faction ensures that he or she receives a
raise dead spell. However, any character invoking
this charity forfeits all experience and rewards
from that session (both those earned prior to and
after death during that session) and cannot replay
that episode or adventure with that character
again. Once a character reaches 5th level, this
option is no longer available.
 Adventure Background
Since the death of First Lord Torin Nomerthal, his or out of it). Creatures arriving in the tower from
replacement First Lord Vuhm Yestral has dealt with a portal may not leave the tower except by passing
repeated attacks by evil fey creatures within the through a different portal.
city limits of Hillsfar. Adventurers, working under Grenefeld has been hard at work attempting
the employ of Red Plumes Commandant Jandra to stabilize the existing portals, create several
Gragdowel, were able to identify a hag named new ones, create port keys that allow travel
Granny Eve-canker as the source of the creatures. through them, and recruit the assistance of evil fey
Unfortunately, she must not have been the only creatures in unleashing chaos upon Hillsfar.
one smuggling monsters into the city. Confidence By the time the adventurers arrive at Abarat’s
in First Lord Yestral is waning, resulting in a Folly, Grenefeld’s preparations are nearly complete.
massive exodus of the population before its new
government can even establish a foothold.
Malkyn Grenefeld, former Chamberlain of the
previous First Lord, is attempting to take revenge
against Hillsfar and its new First Lord by releasing
monsters into the city to terrorize the population.
Granny was one of the ways Grenefeld was
accomplishing this. She has made an agreement
with several drow settlements and hag covens
in the Cormanthor Forest for their assistance in
forcing the city into chaos.
Grenefeld was secretly infatuated with Torin
Nomerthal and has found his death too great a
burden to bear. With the assistance of the drow,
she has rediscovered the remains of a long-
abandoned wizard’s tower known as Abarat’s Folly,
which she now uses as a base of operations.
Abarat was an elven mage who centuries ago
built the tower in hopes of it becoming a hub of
activity across the Moonsea’s Cormanthor region.
Abarat created magical portals within the tower
before the tower itself was even completed.
Eventually, something happened to Abarat and he
disappeared, leaving his tower unfinished.
Since that time, the high concentration of
conjuration magic (specifically teleportation) has
warped the area, as well as the magic within the
tower.
The rooms containing the portals are warped,
such that they appear larger on the inside than
would physically be possible based on the area
containing them. In addition, the portals do not
always function. When they do, they currently only
allow travel in one direction (either into the tower

6 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : I N T R O D U C T I O N
Overview
This adventure is divided into three parts.
Part 1: The Situation. The characters meet
with the new First Lord of Hillsfar, Vuhm Yestral,
who explains the recent incursions of monstrous
creatures into Hillsfar and the resulting exodus
of citizens as they no longer feel it to be safe. In
order to restore confidence in his new government,
Vuhm has reached out to Elanil Elassidil of
Elventree, whose scouts have confirmed that
monster activity within the Cormanthor Forest
to the south is on the rise and warrants further
attention. Vuhm offers to hire the adventuring
party to perform some reconnaissance within
the Cormanthor Forest, determine what types of
creatures they are dealing with, and locate any
cells or bases the creatures may have established
in the forest.
Part 2: Into the Woods. The party spends
several days exploring the Cormanthor Forest
and comes across evidence that other scouting
parties in the area have disturbed local wildlife.
The party is attacked by a scouting party of drow,
and discovering that they have captured a lone
human merchant named Gloria Brelliar. Upon
defeating the drow and freeing Gloria Brelliar, the
party discovers a map of the area marked with
the possible location of an enemy base. The party
continues through the forest in hopes of finding the
location marked on the map.
Part 3: Abarat’s Folly. The party finally
reaches the area marked on the map and discovers
the ruins of Abarat’s Folly. Exploring the tower,
the characters encounter numerous evil fey and
discover Grenefeld’s plan to usher in waves of
monsters from various areas around the Moonsea
by using portals to reach the heart of Hillsfar.
They also likely discover several of the portals
themselves, as well as catch a glimpse of Grenefeld
just as she departs the tower through a portal.
7 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : I N T R O D U C T I O N
Adventure Hooks
The following adventure hooks can be used to
draw the characters into the story.
I’m Familiar with Your Work. If the characters
played the first part of the Dark Intentions trilogy
(HILL1-1 Arrival) or have encountered Vuhm
Yestral before, either in DDEX3-03 The Occupation
of Szith Morcaine, or DDEX3-14 Death on the Wall,
he is familiar with them and reaches out to them
for a meeting with an offer of potential work. This
option could also be used for any characters that
have encountered Elanil Elassidil during any of the
various adventures she has appeared in.
Stop, Collaborate, and Listen. The Stop is one
of the best places in the region for an adventurer-
for-hire to find work. While there, the character
learns that the new First Lord of Hillsfar, Vuhm
Yestral, is looking to hire a group of adventurers for
a mission into the Cormanthor Forest.
The Harpers (Faction). Elanil Elassidil has
reached out to Harper agents in the area and told
them that the new First Lord of Hillsfar, Vuhm
Yestral, is in need of some hired hands to perform
some reconnaissance work in the Cormanthor
Forest. The character’s contacts have sent them to
meet with him.
The Lords Alliance (Faction). As a member
of the Lord’s Alliance, Vuhm has reached out to
his contacts in search of agents in the area who
he might be able to recruit for a reconnaissance
mission into the Cormanthor Forest. The
character’s contacts have sent them to answer the
call.
Cormanthor Refugee (Background).
Elanil Elassidil has suggested to Vuhm that any
exploratory mission into the Cormanthor Forest
could easily benefit from the experience of one
who has spent some time there. The character is
asked to a meeting at the First Lord’s Tower with
an offer of paid work that might be specially suited
to a person of their experience.
 Part 1.
The Situation
The Meeting
Expected Duration: 15 minutes
Upon your arrival at Hillsfar Castle, you are
questioned by a member of the Red Plumes
as to what business you have at the castle.
When you mention the appointment with
First Lord, Vuhm Yestral, another Red Plume
is called to escort you to the Tower of the
First Lord. You are led past the expansive
gardens and an elegant ballroom on your
way to the First Lord’s office, where you are
asked to wait patiently… along with several
other adventurers who must be here to
partake in the same discussion.
Upon your arrival at Hillsfar Castle, you are
questioned by a member of the Red Plumes as to
what business you have at the castle. When you
mention the appointment with First Lord, Vuhm
Yestral, another Red Plume is called to escort you
to the Tower of the First Lord. You are led past
the expansive gardens and an elegant ballroom on
your way to the First Lord’s office, where you are
asked to wait patiently… along with several other
adventurers who must be here to partake in the
same discussion.
The characters can take this opportunity to
introduce themselves to each other if they wish.
They are not kept waiting for very long before
Vuhm, quite spry for his six plus decades, enters the
room. He makes a point of engaging any characters
he has previously met, offering simple pleasantries
(“Thank you for coming; it is good to see you again.
You are looking well.”, etc.). He will also pass a
knowing glance and nod to any other members of
8 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 1
the Lord’s Alliance present. He then takes a seat
and suggests the others do the same if they have not
already. Vuhm wastes no further time in getting to
the point of this meeting:
“Thank to you all for coming,” Vuhm offers.
“Hillsfar has recently come under attack
from within. Drow, hags, and other strange
creatures appear unexpectedly around
the city and create chaos. With the recent
change in power within Hillsfar, the people
are nervous. Understandably so. There are
those who feel our new government cannot
keep them safe, even within the city walls.
Many have fled, and I am afraid for the
stability of the region should this continue.
We are already dealing with previous waves
of refugees from Cormanthor and what
happened under the old government of
Hillsfar, and I do not believe the region can
sustain these conditions for much longer.
I have reached out to our allies in
Elventree — some of you know Elanil
Elassidil — and her scouts have detected
an increase of unusual activity within the
Cormanthor Forest to the south. I cannot
spare the Red Plumes to investigate what
forces may be hiding in Cormanthor, as I
need them here for security.
That is why I have turned to you. As First
Lord, I am willing to offer your party 1000gp
to undertake a reconnaissance mission into
the Cormanthor Forest. Learn what you can
about the activities of any organized threats
gathering there, and return that information
to us. Any information on their forces, bases
of operations, or anything of value should
be of help. I do apologize for the short
notice, but this mission must be undertaken
immediately. The sooner we learn more
about the threat facing us, the sooner we
can respond to it. What do you say? Are
you interested?”
If the characters attempt to bargain for a better offer,
Vuhm will add:

“The best I can do is to pay you half in

advance and provide each of you with
a week’s rations from our military reserve
before you leave. That should save you
some preparation time and enable you to
get on your way a little quicker. As far as the
compensation offered, I believe it is more
than fair.”

Vuhm will answer any relevant questions the best

that he can, but will grow weary of those that waste
time as he does not suffer fools gladly. If the party
accepts the offer, they may make any preparations
necessary, including any last minute shopping for
adventuring gear, before leaving the city.
The most direct route to the Cormanthor Forest
is to follow the trade road that heads south out of
Hillsfar. Once the party is on their way, proceed to
Part 2.

9 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 1
 Part 2.
Into the Woods
Expected Duration: 90 minutes
General Features
The vast majority of the Cormanthor Forest is
ancient hardwood with a lush canopy and an
amazing assortment of wildlife. Some areas within
it, however, have seen centuries of magical abuse
that make it dangerous. Many of these areas are well
known, mapped, and heavily avoided.
Light and Visibility. The Cormanthor Forest
is densely wooded, but there are very few places
where is it thick enough to prevent any sunlight
from breaching the canopy. During the daytime,
there should be plenty of light available to see by.
Certain areas, however, may limit visibility at a
distance due to the density of the forest.
Smells and Sounds. The air is clean and moist,
with the occasional scent of flowering blooms
drifting through the air. Songbirds chirp almost
continually from an hour or so before sunrise until
just after the sun finally sets in the evening.
Taking the trade road south from Hillsfar, you
reach the northern edge of the Cormanthor
Forest. From there, your travels take you
off road and find many signs of spoor, both
humanoid and animal, to the west. This gives
you reason to suspect more activity in that
area of the forest.
Additional information may be obtained through the
use of the following ability checks:
Intelligence (History) DC 15. Much of the
Cormanthor Forest is densely populated by a
vast array of creatures: humanoid, animal, and
monster. Elves and drow were among the more
intelligent races known to dwell there, in addition
to the abundant natural wildlife and unusual
monstrosities.
10
Intelligence (Nature) DC 10. This much
humanoid travel off-road through the forest will
likely be adding stress to many of the woodland
creatures who call this area home.
Wisdom (Animal Handling) DC 10. Many of
the animals seem to be on high alert, based on their
actions and chatter.
Wisdom (Survival) DC 10. The berries, roots,
and nuts you would expect to be plentiful in the area
are significantly more difficult to find than expected.
It appears the forest is either supporting a larger
population than it should or more creatures are
feeding in this area than usual.
Day One
Two Heads Are Better Than One
A DC 15 Wisdom (Survival) check reveals that the
humanoid activity is unusual given that a much
easier way to travel lies not far away. It implies that
those leaving the tracks did not want to be detected.
While scanning the ground for more tracks
at the edge of a clearing, you hear a crash
of wood from the forest ahead. Looking up,
you see a large humanoid form, bearing
weapons in both hands, exploding from
the forest and charging you. The most
noteworthy feature of this creature is that it
supports a pair of two tusked heads upon its
shoulders.
There are a pair of ettins here that have been
pushed out of their regular lands by the movement
of drow patrols. They are hungry, angry, and
quite willing to take out their frustrations on the
characters.
H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 2
11 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 2
 Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: remove one ettin
• Strong party: add one ettin
Treasure
One of the ettins has a small sack affixed to its belt.
In the sack, hidden among the carcasses of several
dead squirrels, two chipmunks, and a small raccoon,
are a small, tied pouch of finely-ground jade powder
and a small silver rod, each worth 10 gp, as well as
a potion of hill giant strength (useless to the ettins).
Any character passing a DC 15 Intelligence (Arcana)
check will know the jade powder and silver rod are
material components for the spells magic mouth and
guards and wards respectively; odd things to find in
the possession of an ettin.
Ambush!
Night comes fast when you are away from
the comforts of the cit,y and after a day’s
travel through the woods you have found a
reasonably comfortable clearing where you
can make your camp for the night. As you
prepare, several dark-skinned, humanoid
figures drop from the trees and spill out of the
forest around you, weapons drawn.
This is one of the fey scouting parties that Elanil’s
forces have reported seeing. This group consists of
a drow mage (who hangs back by the edge of the
clearing) and four drow who move in to engage the
party in melee.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: replace the drow mage
with a drow elite warrior
• Strong or very strong party: replace the
drow mage with a drow priestess of Lolth
12
Once the drow mage and half of the drow are
defeated, the remaining creatures attempt to escape
into the forest. The drow mage carries a map
(described in the Treasure section below).
When the combat is over, the party hears
muffled shouting. Once the party decides to
investigate the source of the sounds, read the
following:
A bound and gagged human woman,
disheveled but clad in fine robes, has
somehow managed to loosen the binding on
her ankles. She now works to loosening the
binding on her hands as she motions to you
for help.
Once she is freed from her bonds, continue:
“Thank you, so kindly”, the woman says
with a warm smile before moving her hands
in the manner of a mage and whispering
a few arcane words. Her appearance is
immediately refreshed, leaving no indication
of her disheveled state only moments before.
“Allow me to introduce myself; my
name is Gloria Brelliar. I am but a simple
travelling merchant who was set upon by
those misguided creatures while travelling
along the road to Hillsfar. I would have given
them a good fight had they not caught me
unawares! But, here I go, rambling again.
Please, allow me to know the names of the
heroes who so bravely have come to my
rescue?”
The party may introduce themselves and ask any
questions they may have, handled below:
Who else was travelling with you?
No one; I was travelling alone.
Don’t you think that’s unsafe?
I can usually take care of myself; it’s just that
these brigands caught me unexpectedly.
H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 2
Where is the rest of your caravan if you are a
merchant?
I wasn’t travelling with a caravan; I was going
to surprise my cousin, Fortuna Brelliar, and
meet her on the road to Hillsfar.
So, you were walking the trade road alone?
Oh, no, dear; I teleported to one of the
frequent rest stops along the way I knew she
would be likely to stop at.
Do you have anything to sell or trade?
Sadly, no. My cousin keeps the inventory
and, truth be told, does most of the work.
Don’t tell her I told you that, though; it’ll go to
her head (she smiles broadly).
Do you know what the drow were doing in these
woods?
They spoke amongst themselves in
Undercommon, foolishly thinking I could
not understand them. They apparently saw
me teleport to the road. From the sounds
of it, there are several more exploring the
forest from here to Hillsfar. They did mention
heading back to “the tower,” but I don’t
know where that would be. They also talked
of scouting the way through the woods to
Hillsfar as a backup plan.
Can you tell us anything about this map (the one
carried by the drow mage)?
Hmmm…well, I’m sure this is supposed to be
north, making this the Moonsea…Hillsfar…the
Cormanthor Forest, which we are in now…
probably somewhere around here…and
this…I think I remember hearing stories about
an old abandoned wizard’s tower around
these parts.
13
After a sufficient amount of time has lapsed,
Gloria Brelliar takes her leave of the heroes:
“Oh, my dears, I’m sorry; I have taken you
away from your doings for too long, I’m
afraid. I wish there was more I could do
to thank you…oh, I have an idea.” Gloria
Brelliar pulls out several small envelopes from
a pocket in her robes. Conveniently, she
seems to have drawn out a number equaling
the number of people in your party.
“Please take these in case you ever
run into my cousin.” She gestures and
utters a few before adding, “Fare thee well,
adventurers!” Gloria Brelliar utters a few more
words and disappears.
Arcane spellcasters will recognize Gloria Brelliar
used the gestures and words associated with the
prestidigitation and teleport spells.
When the party sets up camp for the evening,
they find that their rations taste like the finest and
most delicious meal they have ever had in their
lives. The rest of the evening is uneventful and the
party may take a long rest. When the party decides
to follow the map and investigate in the direction of
the tower, move on to Day Two (below).
Treasure
One of the drow’s shortswords is silvered, making
it worth 125 gp. The drow mage carried a potion of
growth as well as a rough, unlabeled map showing
the locations of the western Moonsea, Hillsfar, the
main trade road south of the city, the Cormanthor
Forest, and Abarat’s Folly. Abarat’s Folly is given
prominence on the maps. The adventurers are
unfamiliar with the place, although a DC 20
Intelligence (History) check reveals a story of an old
wizard’s tower that was supposed to be in that area.
The envelopes from Gloria Brelliar each contain
a single card with a note written in Common using
extremely fancy calligraphy. It is essentially a
coupon for use at Fortuna Brelliar’s shop, Tity’s
Emporium. Each character receives the I Only Do
This for Special Customers story award.
H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 2
14 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 2
Day Two You Have Arrived At Your
Bearly Troubling Destination

Following the crude map you liberated from
the drow, you progress further west through
the Cormanthor Forest and away from any
semblance of civilization.
Around midday, the occasional chirp
of birds is broken by a low, rumbling growl,
followed by a booming “WHO!”, as several
large creatures charge out of the underbrush
toward your party.
This a family of three owlbears has been displaced
and agitated by the continued movement of fey
patrols through the area.
As the last glimmers of the sun’s afterglow are
finally extinguished and night sets in earnest,
you arrive at what must be your destination:
a ruined ivory tower that sits half-hidden at
the northern edge of the Cormanthor Forest.
The characters are still far enough away from the
tower to set camp. If they take precautions to hide
their camp, and/or set watch, they make it through
the evening hours without confrontation.
Once the characters are ready to investigate the
tower, proceed to Part 3: Abarat’s Folly.

Adjusting the Encounter

Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: remove one owlbear
• Weak or strong party: no change
• Strong party: add one owlbear, for a total
of four

The owlbears have been harried by the increased

amount of humanoid traffic in the area and have
decided to strike out. The creatures have no
treasure.
The remainder of the afternoon is uneventful. If
the characters continue to head towards the tower,
they can start the next section just as night falls.

15 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 2
 Part 3.
Abarat’s Folly
Abarat’s Folly
Expected Duration: 2 Hours
Abarat’s Folly was constructed centuries ago by
an elf wizard known as Abarat the Alabaster, and
was intended to serve as a hub of trade for the
region. Abarat’s intention to create a tower of
portals to allow easy and expeditious travel between
settlements was never completed, but several
portals were activated before Abarat disappeared.
Travel through any of the portals requires a
unique portal key for each. Although Grenefeld
has established what is needed for each portal,
the characters in this adventure do not have that
knowledge and are unable to travel through most of
the portals they discover.
The number and close proximity of portals
Abarat created at the site, as well as the amount of
magic expended trying to study them, have caused
several strange effects over the years:
• Those who enter the tower through a
teleportation portal may not leave the tower
except by exiting through a different portal.
• Several rooms on floors 3 and higher are larger
than expected on the inside, as the magics used
in the construction of the tower have somehow
managed to warp the space. This makes
mapping the tower difficult.
• Portals are currently one-way only. Some
lead into the tower, and some lead out. This is
an effect Grenefeld put into place to limit the
number of potential visitors.
• The entire inside of the tower bars
dimensional travel except for those using the
established portals. That means spells such as
dimension door, misty step, teleport, and similar
conjuration spells, as well as any magical effects
that summon creatures from other planes,
16
simply do not function. If a spell of this type is
cast, the appropriate slot is expended, but it has
no effect.
• Animals avoid the tower. Familiars or animal
companions are hesitant to approach, explore,
or enter the tower, even in the company of
their masters. Communication with these
companions will indicate that they wish to
remain outside and a short distance away.
General Features
Most space within the tower is what one would
expect of a long-abandoned ruin, although some
areas have been cleared and cleaned-up for the
creatures currently residing there.
Light and Visibility. Very few of the areas inside
the tower are illuminated, as most of the creatures
here are fey and have darkvision. Depending on the
time of day, parts of the 4th and 5th floors may receive
sunlight on the unfinished sections.
Smells and Sounds. There is an acrid mix of
mustiness and rot peppered with a tinge of wood
smoke. In the basement, it is quite intense; in the
higher floors, it tapers off to only mildly noticeable.
The tower is generally quiet, but floorboard
occasionally creak to indicate creatures moving
directly above.
The maps leads you to a small, cylindrical,
uncompleted tower — seemingly
constructed entirely of ivory — stands
partially obscured by the slowly advancing
Cormanthor Forest to the south. The tower
sits four or five stories tall, with the top floor
appearing incomplete and open to the
elements. No windows decorate the ground
floor, and a single closed ivory door offer
access.
H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 3
17 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 3
 The door is held fast by an arcane lock spell and
has a break DC of 30, an AC of 20, and 80 hp. The
exterior walls of the tower are extremely smooth,
making them difficult to climb (DC 30 Strength
[Athletics] check) unless a rope and grappling hook
are used (reducing the DC to 10) to attach to one
of the unfinished sections of wall on the 4th floor
(about 40 feet up).
A. The First Floor
A1. The Kitchen
This roughly 15-foot by 15-foot room is a
simple kitchen and has seen recent use, but
only the barest of cooking implements are
present. The cookware and utensils lying
around have seen better days, but would
suffice for making a meal in a pinch.
The door on the eastern wall leads
into a small pantry, where several jars of
unidentifiable foodstuff line the shelves, along
with several selections of salt-cured meats.
The meager amount of food here gives the
impression that the kitchen area has only
recently started to come back into use.
A2. Unused Bedroom/Storage
This small room may have served as a
bedroom or storage area at one time. Now,
debris and the remains of broken furniture
litter the floor. If there was anything of value,
it was stripped away long ago.
A3. Unused Bedroom
You enter this room through a door set into
the southeast corner. The space appears
to have been intended as a bedroom or
storage area at one time. Broken pieces of
furniture lie strewn about the floor. Near the
north wall, a small, metal ring lies attached to
the floor.
Pulling on the ring will lift a trapdoor which
provides access to room F1 in the tower’s basement.
18
B. The Second Floor
B1. Guest Bedroom
This room was probably intended to serve as
a bedroom at one time but now only broken
fragments of furniture and worthless debris
remain scattered across the floor.
B2. Used Bedroom
This bedroom’s rather spartan furnishings
include a pile of cushions, likely intended to
serve as bedding, a rather simple desk, and a
pair of chairs.
Treasure. In the first bedroom of this type (B2)
that the characters enter, there is a locked chest that
requires a DC15 Dexterity (Thieves Tools) check
to open. The chest is hidden behind the cushions
and can be discovered with a successful DC 15
Intelligence (Investigation) or Wisdom (Perception)
check. Inside the chest is a coin album with a
complete set of 550 Cormanthor silver pieces from
every year and mint going back over a century, a
magnifying glass, and small velvet drawstring pouch
that is tied in a knot. Sticking from the opening
of the pouch is a rolled up piece of parchment
which reads “use caution – deck of many things”
in Common, Elven, and Undercommon. Inside the
pouch is an unremarkable deck of tarokka cards.
B3. Master Bedroom
This is one of the best maintained areas
you have seen within the tower. A bed,
footlocker, desk, and two chairs are
positioned around the area and an extremely
large painting with a gilded filigree frame
hangs on the southeastern wall of this room.
This oil painting depicts a full moon reflecting
off a large body of water, possibly the
Moonsea, and the surrounding landscape.
H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 3
19 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 3
 Treasure. The painting was a favorite of former
First Lord of Hillsfar Torin Nomerthal, as well as
of Malkyn Grenefeld, and was proudly on display
in the Tower of the First Lord. Grenefeld stole it
as a souvenir and brought it here. It could easily
sell for 200 gp, but Vuhm would be happy to see it
returned to the Tower of the First Lord, as he has no
idea what happened to it. Characters who played
DDEX3-12 Hillsfar Reclaimed remember seeing this
on display during the masquerade in that adventure.
In the footlocker is a tiny ornate reliquary. If the
characters open it, read the following:
Inside the reliquary is an ancient scrap
of parchment that is part of an inventory
or requisition list. From the stylized script,
you can tell it was written long ago. The
parchment read “seven candles, bell, chalk
dust, signet ring, orb, wand, seven vials holy
water” and is signed “Midnight”.
A successful DC 15 Intelligence (Religion) check
reveals that “Midnight” was once the mortal
identity of the goddess Mystra and that the number
7 holds a special significance to that deity. The
reliquary was secretly in the possession of Torin
Nomerthal, although Grenefeld knew about it and
took it after Torin’s death. She has future plans for
using the reliquary. Any character passing a DC 20
Intelligence (Arcana or Religion) check know that
the reliquary could be utilized as a component for
the holy aura and magic jar spells.
Although valuable as treasure (1,000 gp), those
who realize the reliquary’s true nature know that
it is probably best served in the possession of the
church of Mystra.
B4. Skeleton Room
The remains of two humanoid skeletons lie
sprawled on the floor of this room, covered in
the tattered remains of clothing and leather
armor.
A DC 10 Intelligence (History) check reveals their
clothes were indicative of a wealthy couple that
lived at least 300 years ago. A DC 10 Wisdom
(Medicine) or Intelligence (Investigation) check
reveals that both were killed by blunt force trauma
20
to the head, and that one of the bodies was male and
the other female.
Previous occupants of the tower found this area
unnerving and left it as is through the years.
C. The Third Floor
C1. Foyer
The spiral staircase brings you to the center of
a room with a single door set into the center
of each of the four walls surrounding you.
Two small unkempt human girls dressed in
ragged clothes are startled by your arrival.
“Please don’t hurt us”, one of them
pleads, “we only left our room because
we were hungry. Can we please have
something to eat?”
The children are actually a pair of night hags.
Tactics
If the party does not immediately attack, one hag
casts sleep on the party on her initiative, hoping that
the party is too distracted by the other hag’s request
for food to notice. Once the deception has been
discovered, the second hag casts sleep and both
follow with either claw attacks (if in melee) or magic
missile followed by ray of enfeeblement (if ranged).
The hags do not have heartstones or soul bags.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak or weak party: replace one
night hag with one green hag
• Strong party: no change
• Very Strong party: add a drow elite
warrior who comes out of one of the
adjoining rooms the round after the hags
attack
Treasure
One of the hags has a pouch filled with 200 gp
worth of incense and powdered diamonds. A DC
20 Intelligence (Arcana or Religion) check knows
reveals these could be used as components for a
glyph of warding spell.
H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 3
21 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 3
 C2. Portal to the Drow
The unusual interior shape of this room does
not seem to match what you would expect
from observing the outside of the tower. The
room is empty save for a large wooden panel
affixed to one of the walls.
If the panel is removed, it reveals a ring of elven
runes carved into the shape of a circle. Any
character that can read Elven and passes a DC 20
Intelligence (Arcana) check can determine that the
runes refer to this as a teleportation portal to an
“Elven Court,” but nothing further can be gleaned
from it. If the opposite side of the panel is examined
once it is removed, it has the phrase “not yet”
written upon it in Elvish and Undercommon.
This portal is currently set to only allow passage
into the tower; individuals may not leave by passing
through it. The connecting portal is somewhere
near a drow settlement on the surface.
Grenefeld has already made arrangements to
bring a small army of drow through once the portals
to Hillsfar are stable enough to permit continued
exit from the tower.
C3. Portal to Myth Drannor
The irregular shape of this room does not
seem to match what you would expect from
observing the outside of the tower. The room
is empty save for a large wooden panel
affixed to one of the walls.
If the panel is removed, it reveals a ring of elven
runes carved into the shape of a circle. Any
character that can read Elven and passes a DC 20
Intelligence (Arcana) check can determine the
runes refer to this as a teleportation portal to Myth
Drannor, but nothing further can be gleaned from it.
If the opposite side of the panel is examined, it has
the phrase “not yet” written upon it in Elvish and
Undercommon.
This portal is set to only allow passage into the
tower; individuals may not leave by passing through
it. This portal is not stable and frequently becomes
inoperable for periods of varying duration.
22
Grenefeld has made arrangements to bring
through a small army of fey once the portals are
stabilized enough to permit regular entry and exit
from the tower.
C4. Portal to the House of Happiness
The unusual interior shape of this room does
not match what you would expect from
observing the outside of the tower. The
room is empty save for a circular ring of runes
carved into the wall. Lights dance and flicker
on the wall from the space within the runes.
Any character that can read Elven and passes a
DC 20 Intelligence (Arcana) check can determine
that the runes refer to this as a teleportation portal
to Myth Glaurach (its original destination, before
Grenefeld altered the portal). Unlike the portals in
rooms C2 and C3, this one currently allows passage
out of the tower, but it requires a portal key to do
so. It also doubles as a scrying device, allowing
characters to see (but not hear) the other side.
Closer examination of the scene within the
portal reveals an active pub, with drinks being
served, plenty of dancing, and a band playing in the
background.
Although originally a portal to Myth Glaurach,
Grenefeld has managed to alter this portal to peer
into the temple of Lliira in Hillsfar, better known as
the House of Happiness. Grenefeld plans to direct
some of her forces through this portal and into
Hillsfar once she is ready to move against the city.
Anyone passing a DC 20 Intelligence (Religion)
check recognizes the Joydancers (worshippers of
Lliira). Followers of Lliira or anyone exceeding the
skill check by 5 or more recognizes the scene takes
place in the House of Happiness in Hillsfar. The
knowledge that a portal into the heart of Hillsfar
exists within Abarat’s Folly is extremely valuable
information.
H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 3
C5. Portal to the Tower of the First Lord
This room’s unusual interior shape does not
match the outside of the tower. A circular
portal surrounded by a set of carved runes
decorates the southwest wall. The portal
peers into an enormous ballroom containing
several long oak tables and an elevated dais
to the side, backed by open patio doors that
overlook an expansive garden.
Bringing your attention back to this room,
four humanoids step out of the shadows. Two,
dressed in chain armor, raise their weapons.
Aware of the battle with the hags, several drow
hid here to protect Grenefeld long enough for her
to determine the outcome of the battle and escape
back to Hillsfar through this portal.
Characters that have played DDEX3-12 Hillsfar
Reclaimed recognize the only non-drow in the group
as Malkyn Grenefeld, former Chamberlain in First
Lord Torin Nomerthal’s court. They also recognize
the ballroom as the location of the masquerade
party portrayed in that adventure. Those who
did not play in that adventure but succeed at a DC
15 Wisdom (Perception) check recognize it from
passing by the room in Part 1 of this adventure.
Tactics
The four creatures in this room have taken can take
reactions unless the adventurers knew of their
presence before entering the room:
• Malkyn Grenefeld moves through the portal
into the Tower of the First Lord, effectively
removing her from this combat.
• Two drow fire their hand crossbows at the two
least-armored adventurers.
• A drow priestess of Lolth casts ray of sickness
at the most heavily armored adventurer.
23
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: replace the drow
priestess with a drow elite warrior
• Weak party: replace the drow priestess
with a drow mage
• Strong or very strong party: no change
Grenefeld was able to pass through the portal
because she possessed a portal key. None of the
other inhabitants currently know what portal
keys are needed to activate the portals to Hillsfar.
Grenefeld kept that information to herself just
because of possible situations like this.
Any character that can read Elven and passes
a DC 20 Intelligence (Arcana) check can determine
that the runes refer to this as a teleportation portal
to Myth Lharast (its original destination, before
Grenefeld altered the portal). Unlike the portals in
rooms C2 and C3, this one currently allows passage
out of the tower, but it requires a portal key to do
so. It also doubles as a scrying device, allowing
characters to see (but not hear) the other side.
Treasure
Each of the two drow have a vial of antitoxin on
them. The drow priestess wears a periapt of wound
closure.
H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 3
 D. The Fourth Floor
If the party climbs the outside or otherwise arrives
on this partial floor without attempting to be quiet,
they draw the attention of the drow in areas D1, D2,
and E1.
D1. Portal to Talarith’s Settlement
The irregular shape of this room does
not match what you would expect from
observing the outside of the tower. A circle
of newly carved runes can be seen on the
northwest wall.
If they have not previously joined a combat outside
this room, there are two drow present. If the party
is very weak or has already battled these drow, the
room is empty.
Any character that can read Elven and passes
a DC 20 Intelligence (Arcana) check can determine
that the runes refer to this as a teleportation portal
to Talarith’s Settlement (an area also known as
the “Ruins in Cormanthor,” south of Elventree).
Grenefeld has been working on this portal, getting
as far as completing the runes, but it is not yet
functional. It does not detect as magical. Grenefeld
is planning to bring more drow from the ruins into
Hillsfar.
24
D2. Portal to Arvandor
The unusual interior shape of this room does
not seem to match what you would expect
from observing the outside of the tower.
About 25 feet north of the door, a circle of
carved runes can be seen on the wall.
If they have not previously joined in a combat, there
are two drow present. If the party is very weak or
already battled these drow, the room is empty.
Any character that can read Elven and passes
a DC 20 Intelligence (Arcana) check can determine
that the runes refer to this as a teleportation portal
to Arvandor. An elf, half-elf, or any character
successfully passing a DC 15 Intelligence (Religion)
check know that Arvandor is the home of the elven
pantheon. This portal is active and permits exit
from the tower, but none of the inhabitants know
what portal key activates it. The key is actually a
gold or silver coin with Corellon’s symbol on one
side and Sehanine Moonbow’s symbol on the other.
Although coins of this exact design have not been
produced for years, there is a silver piece matching
this description in the coin collection found in one of
the used bedrooms (B2) on the second floor.
If a character possessing the proper coin
enters the portal, they return two rounds later
with no memory of what transpired except for an
overwhelming sense of peace and calmness. An
elven or half-elven character who does the same has
the same result, except that they are healed back to
full hit points (if they were injured) and have any
detrimental conditions (except a curse) removed. A
character may only receive this effect once.
H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 3
25 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 3
 E. The Roof
If the party climbs the outside of the tower or
otherwise arrives on this partial floor without
stealth, they draw the attention of all the drow in
areas D1, D2, and E1.
E1. Private Retreat
The partial roof of the tower is apparently a
good place to find some solitude as a single
drow reclines here, seemingly relaxing and
basking in the light.
This drow mage has decided to take a break and
relax on the roof. He has already used his daily
levitate to get up here. He starts the encounter
prone.
If the party arrives at night, he is basking in
the moonlight. If they arrive during the day, he is
basking in the sun. This may seem unusual for drow
(specifically, the allied drow of Szith Morcaine from
the Rage of Demons season 3 storyline that never see
the sun). This may (correctly) give the characters
the impression that the drow they are dealing with
here are not from the same place. Regardless, the
drow mage is still sensitive to the sunlight.
On his action, the drow mage stands, hurls a
poison spray at the closest character, and calls for
help, alerting the four drow in room D1 and D2 who
arrive on the 4th floor the following round, and up to
the roof on the round after that.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: replace the drow mage
with a drow priestess of Lolth, remove the
four additional drow
• Weak party: no change
• Strong or very strong party: replace the
drow mage with a drow priestess of Lolth
26
Treasure
The drow mage has with him a small pouch
containing 100 gp worth of diamond dust and a 100
gp pearl. Any character passing a DC 15 Intelligence
(Arcana) check will know that a pearl of that size
can be used as a spell component for the identify
spell. Any character passing a DC 20 Intelligence
(Arcana, Nature, or Religion) check will know that
the diamond dust can be used as a component for
the greater restoration spell.
F. The Basement
F1. Access
This room contains a ladder leading up to
trapdoor set in the floor of an unused room
above. The room is dark and smells musty.
Are doors in the western and southern walls.
F2. Unused Room
This room is unused, probably due to the
strong moldy/musty smell and the high level
of moisture in the room.
F3. Ivory Storage
This room is empty except for several long,
flat sections of sheets of ivory stacked against
the wall.
Abarat stored the ivory here that he used in the
creation of the tower’s exterior. Most of it has
been looted, leaving only these four small sections
remain. How Abarat managed to acquire ivory in
sheets is unknown.
Treasure
The four ivory sheets are worth a total of 200 gp. Any
character passing a DC 20 Intelligence (Arcana or
Religion) check realizes that this ivory could be used
as the material component for the legend lore spell.
H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 3
27 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 3
 F4. Writing Room
The walls of this room are covered with
arcane writings, many obscured by time
and water damage. Several sections have
overlapping handwriting, as if someone
attempt to preserve what rest underneath.
On the floor, several stubs of chalk and a
small book lie against the base of the wall.
The writings on the wall can be interpreted by a DC
15 Intelligence (Arcana) check. They are magical
research pertaining to teleportation, portals, and
portal keys, but nothing that a student of magic
wouldn’t already be familiar with.
The book on the floor details plans to bring
an army of fey creatures through the portals and
into Hillsfar to terrorize the city, once she has the
opportunity to stabilize the existing portals, create a
few new ones, and perfect the new portal keys.
Although Grenefeld is not mentioned by name
in the book, it includes enough detailed references
to Hillsfar for someone to conclude it belonged to
someone with a position of authority and/or power
within the city.
One key piece of information within the book
is that the author is looking to create new portal
keys that are ingestible, so that users do not have
to worry about losing them or having them stolen.
Although the exact formula to be used is not
detailed, there is the implication that there have
been several successful experiments done to try out
this idea.
other information they can provide (including
descriptions of the areas they saw through the
portals in rooms C4 and C5 and/or the book from
basement room F4) is greatly appreciated.
If the characters present Vuhm with the
landscape painting retrieved from Abarat’s Folly,
he is thankful for its return, but does not offer any
compensation for it, as it was stolen from the First
Lord’s Tower. If the characters decide to sell it
instead, Vuhm is indifferent. Characters can get the
gold piece value for selling the painting or the XP
award for returning it; they may not get both.
Similarly, if the characters recovered the
reliquary and turn it over to a temple of Mystra, they
earn the associated XP award for doing so, which
they do not get if they decide to sell it or keep it.
Vuhm pays the party the agreed upon amount
and attempts to entice them to stay by offering each
character their choice of the two You Should Stick
Around for a While story awards. He is certain he
will have more work for the party in the days ahead.
Those characters willing to stay in Hillsfar for
a little while after the completion of this adventure
may spend downtime preparing themselves for
what is to come by taking advantage of the Know
Your Enemy downtime activity quest as well.

Conclusion
Unless the characters have an expeditious way of
sending a message back to Vuhm Yestral (sending
stones, the animal messenger spell using a flying
messenger, the sending spell, etc., it takes at least
two days to journey back to Hillsfar. In that time,
Grenefeld accelerates her plans.
Upon their return, Vuhm happens to be meeting
with Elanil Elassidil but has the characters ushered
in to hear their report. If they name Grenefeld,
Vuhm is shocked to discover she is involved. Any

28 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 3
Rewards Treasure
The characters receive the following treasure, divided
Make sure the players note their rewards on their up amongst the party. Characters should attempt
adventure logsheets. Give your name and DCI to divide treasure evenly whenever possible. Gold
number (if applicable) so players can record who piece values listed for sellable gear are calculated at
ran the session. their selling price, not their purchase price.
Consumable magic items should be divided
Experience up however the group sees fit. If more than one
Total up all combat experience earned for the character is interested in a specific consumable
defeated foes and divide by the number of magic item, the DM can determine who gets it
characters present in the combat. For non-combat randomly should the group be unable to decide.
experience, the rewards are listed per character. Permanent magic items are divided according to
Give all characters in the party non-combat a system. See the sidebar if the adventure awards
experience awards unless otherwise noted. permanent magic items.
Treasure Awards
Combat Awards
Item Name GP value
Name of Foe XP per Foe Vuhm’s payment 1000
Basilisk 700 Silvered shortsword 125
Drow 50 Jade 10
Drow Elite Warrior 1800 Small silver rod 10
Drow Mage 2900 Coin collection 55
Drow Priestess of Lolth 3900 Magnifying glass 100
Ettin 1100 Grenefeld’s landscape painting 200
Green Hag 700 Grenefeld’s reliquary 1000
Night Hag 1800 Incense and powdered diamond 200
Owlbear 700 Antitoxins (two vials) 100
Diamond dust 100
Pearl 100
Ivory strips 200
Non-Combat Awards
Task or Accomplishment XP per Char.
Rescuing Gloria Brelliar 200
Discovering portals to Hillsfar 200
Alert Vuhm of Grenefeld’s escape 250
Giving the reliquary to a temple 500
Returning the painting to Vuhm 100

The minimum total award for each character

participating in this adventure is 3,750 experience
points.

The maximum total award for each character

participating in this adventure is 5,000 experience
points.

29 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 3
 Permanent Magic Item Distribution Influence
All characters earn five Hillsfar influence points
D&D Adventurers League has a system in place to
for participating in this adventure.
determine who is awarded permanent magic items
at the end of a session. Each character’s logsheet Renown
contains a column to record permanent magic items
All faction members earn one renown point for
for ease of reference.
participating on this adventure.
• If all the players at the table agree on one
character taking possession of a permanent Downtime
magic item, that character gets the item.
Each character receives ten downtime days at the
• In the event that one or more characters conclusion of this adventure.
indicate an interest in possessing a
permanent magic item, the character that
possesses the fewest permanent magic items
gets the item. If there is a tie in the total
number of permanent magic items owned
by contesting characters, the item’s owner is
determined randomly by the DM.

Periapt of Wound Closure

Wondrous item, uncommon (requires attunement)
This fine gold pendant boasts a small, golden charm
depicting two upturned, open hands with long, graceful
fingers holding a set of three small crystals. It does have
one minor drawback. Unless the wielder is a construct or
of fey origin (including elves and half-elves), they suffer
a non-life threatening allergic reaction during the entire
short rest they are attuning to the item, as well as for 2d4
rounds after each use. The allergic reaction may take the
form of sneezing, coughing, itching, or watery eyes and
may vary from use to use. A description of this item can
be found on page 184 of the Dungeon Master’s Guide.

Potion of Hill Giant Strength

Potion, uncommon
This murky green fluid seems to have a disturbingly large
amount of what appears to be cut grass mixed into it. A
description of this item can be found on page 187 of the
Dungeon Master’s Guide.

Potion of Growth
Potion, uncommon
This thick, golden fluid has an almost gelatinous
consistency to it and smells of a mixture of honey and
spinach. A description of this item can be found on page
187 of the Dungeon Master’s Guide.

30 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : PA RT 3
Story Awards Downtime Activity: Quest
The characters have the opportunity to earn the
following story awards during the adventure. Know Your Enemy
With access to the libraries of Hillsfar and the
I Only Do This for Special Customers. Upon knowledge of the citizens of Elventree, you may
presenting their coupon at Tity’s Emporium in spend 5 downtime days engaged in research on
Hillsfar, the character may select any one (and only evil fey creatures and gain advantage on any single
one) of the following benefits: skill check or attack against an evil fey creature.
• 10% off the total bill of any normal equipment Remove this story award from your adventure
purchase of 50 gp or more (before discount). logsheet once it has been used.
This includes everything in the armor, weapons,
adventuring gear, and tools tables from the
Equipment chapter of the Player’s Handbook. DM Rewards
• One weapon you already own silvered at half For running this adventure, you receive 1,250 XP,
price (50 gp instead of the usual 100 gp). 625 gp, and ten downtime days.
• Closeout special! You may purchase a single
potion of climbing for 50 gp. They do not usually
sell these potions, but Fortuna tells the character
she had a recent opportunity to purchase
another merchant’s remaining stock at the “end
of the season.”
Remove this story award from your logsheet once
it has been used.

You Should Stick Around for a While (Option 1).

Until the character either completes adventure
HILL 1-3 or reaches 11th level (whichever comes
first), the character enjoys a Comfortable lifestyle
without any expense while they are in Hillsfar.

You Should Stick Around for a While (Option 2).

Until the wizard either completes adventure HILL
1-3 or reaches 11th level (whichever comes first),
they are granted free access to the Mage’s Guild
library in Hillsfar Castle. The character may spend
downtime and gold to copy into their spellbook
any two PHB spells of level 4 or lower that they do
not currently have. The wizard must still spend
the lifestyle expenses associated with the total
downtime invested.

31
 Appendix: Monster Statistics
Note: creatures with abilities that will not function
within Abarat’s Folly due to the magical effects
therein have already had those abilities removed
from their statistics below.
Drow
Medium humanoid (elf), neutral evil
Armor Class 15 (chain shirt)
Hit Points 13 (3d8)
Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Fey Ancestry. The drow has advantage on saving
10 (+0) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 11 (+0) 12 (+1)
Skills Perception +2, Stealth +4
Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 12
Languages Elvish, Undercommon
Challenge 1/4 (50 XP)
Fey Ancestry. The drow has advantage on saving
throws against being charmed and magic can’t put
the drow to sleep.
Innate Spellcasting. The drow’s spellcasting
ability is Charisma (spell save DC 11). It can
innately cast the following spells, requiring no
material components:
At will: dancing lights
1/day each: darkness, faerie fire
Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the drow
has disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on
Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on sight.
Actions
Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach
5 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6+2) piercing damage.
Hand Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to
hit, range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6+2)
piercing damage and the target must succeed on a
DC 13 Constitution saving throw or be poisoned for
1 hour. If the saving throw fails by 5 or more, the Reactions
target is also unconscious while poisoned in this
way. The target wakes up if it takes damage or if
another creature takes an action to shake it awake.
32
Drow Elite Warrior
Medium humanoid (elf), neutral evil
Armor Class 18 (studded leather, shield)
Hit Points 71 (11d8+22)
Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
13 (+1) 18 (+4) 14 (+2) 11 (+0) 13 (+1) 12 (+1)
Saving Throws Dex +7, Con +5, Wis +4
Skills Perception +4, Stealth +10
Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 14
Languages Elvish, Undercommon
Challenge 5 (1,800 XP)
throws against being charmed and magic can’t put
the drow to sleep.
Innate Spellcasting. The drow’s spellcasting ability
is Charisma (spell save DC 12). It can innately
cast the following spells, requiring no material
components:
At will: dancing lights
1/day each: darkness, faerie fire, levitate (self only)
Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the drow
has disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on
Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on sight.
Actions
Multiattack. The drow makes two shortsword
attacks.
Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach
5 ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d6+4) piercing damage
plus 10 (3d6) poison damage.
Hand Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +7 to hit,
range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d6+4) piercing
damage and the target must succeed on a DC 13
Constitution saving throw or be poisoned for 1 hour.
If the saving throw fails by 5 or more, the target is
also unconscious while poisoned in this way. The
target wakes up if it takes damage or if another
creature takes an action to shake it awake.
Parry. The drow adds 3 to its AC against one melee
attack that would hit it. To do so, the drow must see
the attacker and be wielding a melee weapon.
H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : A P P E N D I X
Drow Mage
Medium humanoid (elf), neutral evil
Armor Class 12 (15 with mage armor)
Hit Points 45 (10d8)
Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
9 (-1) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 17 (+3) 13 (+1) 12 (+1)
Skills Arcana +6, Deception +5, Perception +4,
Stealth +5
Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 14
Languages Elvish, Undercommon
Challenge 7 (2,900 XP)
Fey Ancestry. The drow has advantage on saving
throws against being charmed and magic can’t put
the drow to sleep.
Innate Spellcasting. The drow’s spellcasting ability
is Charisma (spell save DC 12). It can innately
cast the following spells, requiring no material
components:
At will: dancing lights
1/day each: darkness, faerie fire, levitate (self
only)
Spellcasting. The drow is a 10th-level spellcaster.
Its spellcasting ability is Intelligence (spell save DC
14, +6 to hit with spell attacks). The drow has the
following wizard spells prepared:
Cantrips (at will): mage hand, minor illusion,
poison spray, ray of frost
1st level (4 slots): mage armor, magic missile,
shield, witch bolt
2nd level (3 slots): alter self, web
3rd level (3 slots): fly, lightning bolt
4th level (3 slots): Evard’s black tentacles, greater
invisibility
5th level (2 slots): cloudkill
Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the drow
has disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on
Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on sight.
Actions
Staff. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 2 (1d6-1) bludgeoning damage if
used with two hands, plus 3 (1d6) poison damage.
33
Drow Priestess of Lolth
Medium humanoid (elf), neutral evil
Armor Class 16 (scale mail)
Hit Points 71 (13d8+13)
Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
10 (+0) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 13 (+1) 17 (+3) 18 (+4)
Saving Throws Con +4, Wis +6, Cha +7
Skills Insight +6, Perception +6, Religion +4, Stealth
+5
Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 16
Languages Elvish, Undercommon
Challenge 8 (3,900 XP)
Fey Ancestry. The drow has advantage on saving
throws against being charmed and magic can’t put
the drow to sleep.
Innate Spellcasting. The drow’s spellcasting ability
is Charisma (spell save DC 15). It can innately
cast the following spells, requiring no material
components:
At will: dancing lights
1/day each: darkness, faerie fire, levitate (self only)
Spellcasting. The drow is a 10th-level spellcaster.
Its spellcasting ability is Wisdom (spell save DC
14, +6 to hit with spell attacks). The drow has the
following cleric spells prepared:
Cantrips (at will): guidance, poison spray,
resistance, spare the dying, thaumaturgy
1st level (4 slots): animal friendship, cure wounds,
detect poison and disease, ray of sickness
2nd level (3 slots): lesser restoration, protection
from poison, web
3rd level (3 slots): dispel magic
4th level (3 slots): divination, freedom of movement
5th level (2 slots): insect plague, mass cure wounds
Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the drow
has disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on
Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on sight.
Actions
Multiattack. The drow makes two scourge attacks.
Scourge. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 5 (1d6+2) piercing damage plus 17
(5d6) poison damage.
H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : A P P E N D I X
 Ettin Green Hag
Large giant, chaotic evil Medium fey, neutral evil
Armor Class 12 (natural armor) Armor Class 17 (natural armor)
Hit Points 85 (10d10+30) Hit Points 82 (11d8+33)
Speed 40 ft. Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
21 (+5) 8 (-1) 17 (+3) 6 (-2) 10 (+0) 8 (-1) 18 (+4) 12 (+1) 16 (+3) 13 (+1) 14 (+2) 14 (+2)

Skills Perception +4 Skills Arcana +3, Deception +4, Perception +4,

Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 14
Languages Giant, Orc
Challenge 4 (1,100 XP)
Two Heads. The ettin has advantage on Wisdom
(Perception) checks and on saving throws against
being blinded, charmed, deafened, frightened,
stunned, and knocked unconscious.
Wakeful. When one of the ettin’s heads is asleep, its
other head is awake.
Actions
Multiattack. The ettin makes two attacks: one with
its battleaxe and one with its morningstar.
Battleaxe. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5
ft., one target. Hit: 14 (2d8+5) slashing damage.
Morningstar. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach
5 ft., one target. Hit: 14 (2d8+5) piercing damage.
Stealth +3
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 14
Languages Common, Draconic, Sylvan
Challenge 3 (700 XP)
Amphibious. The hag can breathe air and water.
Innate Spellcasting. The hag’s spellcasting ability
is Charisma (spell save DC 12). She can innately
cast the following spells, requiring no material
components:
At will: dancing lights, minor illusion, vicious
mockery
Mimicry. The hag can mimic animal sounds and
humanoid voices. A creature that hears the sounds
can tell they are imitations with a successful DC 14
Wisdom (Insight) check.
Actions
Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 13 (2d8+4) slashing damage.
Illusionary Appearance. The hag covers herself
and anything she is wearing or carrying with a
magical illusion that makes her look like another
creature of her general size and humanoid shape.
The illusion ends if the hag takes a bonus action to
end it or she dies.
The changes wrought by this effect fail to hold
up to physical inspection. For example, the hag could
appear to have smooth skin, but someone touching
her would feel her rough flesh. Otherwise, a creature
must take an action to visually inspect the illusion
and succeed on a DC 20 Intelligence (Investigation)
check to discern that the hag is disguised.
Invisible Passage. The hag magically turns invisible
until she attacks or casts a spell, or until her
concentration ends (as if concentrating on a spell).
While invisible, she leaves no physical evidence of her
passage, so she can be tracked only by magic. Any
equipment she wears or carries is invisible with her.

34 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : A P P E N D I X
Night Hag Owlbear
Medium fiend, neutral evil Large monstrosity, unaligned
Armor Class 17 (natural armor) Armor Class 13 (natural armor)
Hit Points 112 (15d8+45) Hit Points 59 (7d10+21)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 40 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
18 (+4) 15 (+2) 16 (+3) 16 (+3) 14 (+2) 16 (+3) 20 (+5) 12 (+1) 17 (+3) 3 (-4) 12 (+1) 7 (-2)

Skills Deception +7, Insight +6, Perception +6, Skills Perception +3

Stealth +6 Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 13
Damage Resistances cold, fire; bludgeoning, Languages -
piercing, and slashing from nonmagical attacks that Challenge 3 (700 XP)
aren’t silvered
Keen Sight and Smell. The owlbear has advantage
Condition Immunities charmed on Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on sight or
Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 16 smell.
Languages Abyssal, Common, Infernal, Primordial
Actions
Challenge 5 (1,800 XP)
Innate Spellcasting. The hag’s innate spellcasting Multiattack. The owlbear makes two attacks: one
ability is Charisma (spell save DC 13, +5 to hot with with its bear and one with its claws.
spell attacks). She can innately cast the following Beak. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
spells, requiring no material components: one creature. Hit: 10 (1d10+5) piercing damage.
At will: detect magic, magic missile Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
2/day each: ray of enfeeblement, sleep one target. Hit: 14 (2d8+5) slashing damage.
Magic Resistance. The hag has advantage on saving
throws against spells and other magical effects.
Actions
Claws (Hag Form Only). Melee Weapon Attack:
+6 to hit, reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 13 (2d8+4)
slashing damage.
Change Shape. The hag magically polymorphs into
a Small or Medium female humanoid, or back into
her true form. Her statistics are the same in each
form. Any equipment she is wearing or carrying
isn’t transformed. She reverts to her true form if she
dies.

35 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : A P P E N D I X
 DM Appendix: NPC Summary
This section is provided to give the Dungeon
Master help in keeping track of the various NPCs
mentioned in the adventure.

Elanil Elassidil (EL-uh-kneel ul-LASS-ih-deel).

Female elf. Bard extraordinaire and member of
the Harpers. Moonsilver Herald of Elventree.
Based in Elventree.

Fortuna Brelliar (for-TOONA BREE-lier). Female

human. Cousin to Gloria Brelliar. Current
proprietor of Tity’s Emporium, a long-established
outfitter’s business in Hillsfar. Secret member of
the Rogues Guild.

Gloria Brelliar (GLOR-ee-uh BREE-lier). Female

human. Cousin and part-time assistant to Fortune
Brelliar, who currently runs Tity’s Emporium in
Hillsfar. Arcane spellcaster and former adventurer.
Member of the Mage’s Guild and secret member of
the Rogues Guild.

Malkyn Grenefeld (MALL-kinn GRENN-feld).

Female human. Former Chamberlain for First
Lord Torin Nomerthal. Member of the Cloaks of
Mulmaster. Whereabouts unknown at the start of
this adventure.

First Lord Torin Nomerthal (TOR-in NOME-er-

thol). Male human. Former supreme ruler of
Hillsfar. Currently deceased.

First Lord Vuhm Yestral (VOOM YES-strill). Male

human. Formerly Guard Commandant of the
Red Plumes military group serving as security in
charge of the Waydown, currently supreme ruler
of Hillsfar. Member of the Lord’s Alliance.

36 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : A P P E N D I X
Handout 1: Periapt of Wound Closure

Periapt of Wound Closure

Wondrous item, uncommon (requires attunement)
This fine gold pendant boasts a small, golden charm depicting two upturned, open hands with long,
graceful fingers holding a set of three small crystals. It does have one minor drawback. Unless the wielder
is a construct or of fey origin (including elves and half-elves), they suffer a non-life threatening allergic
reaction during the entire short rest they are attuning to the item, as well as for 2d4 rounds after each
use. The allergic reaction may take the form of sneezing, coughing, itching, or watery eyes and may vary
from use to use.
While you wear this pendant, you stabilize whenever you are dying at the start of your turn. In
addition, whenever you roll a Hit Die to regain hit points, double the number of hit points it restores. A
description of this item can be found on page 184 of the Dungeon Master’s Guide.

37 H I L L 1 - 2 / E XO D U S : H A N D O U T 1
 RESURGENCE
Cindy Moore
Adventure Designer
Adventure Code: HILL 1-3

There is a spy in Hillsfar! Your job is to find him or her before the city has
no defense against the oncoming Dark Fey that are fueled by a forgotten ally
of Torin Nomerthal and their lust for revenge. A D&D Adventurers League
adventure for characters levels 5-10 in Hillsfar.

A 4-hour adventure for 5th-10th level characters

Producer: Baldman Games

Hillsfar Administrator: Cindy Moore
Development: Shawn Merwin
Editing and Layout: Encoded Designs
Cartography: Jay Africa
Organized Play: Chris Lindsay
D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall,
Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks, Alan Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster
Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League, all other Wizards of the Coast product names, and their respective
logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive likenesses
are property of Wizards of the Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America.
Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the express written
permission of Wizards of the Coast.
©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31,
2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK.
 Introduction
Welcome to Resurgence, a D&D Adventurers League
adventure, Part Three of the Dark Intentions Trilogy
This adventure is designed for three to seven 5th-10th level characters, and is optimized for
five 8th-level characters. The adventure is set in the Moonsea region of the
Forgotten Realms, in and around the city of Hillsfar.

The D&D Adventurers League Preparing the Adventure

This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of
the D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure,
players track their characters’ experience, treasure,
and other rewards, and can take those characters
through other adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a
store event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a
DCI number. This number is your official Wizards of
the Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have
a number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to
use to create and advance their characters. Players
can continue to play their characters after the
storyline season has finished, possibly participating
in a second or third storyline with those same
characters. A character’s level is the only limitation
for adventure play. A player cannot use a character
of a level higher or lower than the level range of a
D&D Adventurers League adventure.
For more information on playing, running
games as a Dungeon Master, and organizing games
for the D&D Adventurers League, please visit the
D&D Adventurers League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
• Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
• Read through the adventure, taking notes
of anything you’d like to highlight or remind
yourself while running the adventure, such as a
way you’d like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d
like to use in a combat.
• Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
• Gather together any resources you’d like to
use to aid you in running this adventure--such
as notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and
battlemaps.
• If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.
Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
• Character name and level
• Character race and class
• Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most
common passive ability check
• Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, etc.)

2 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : I N T R O D U C T I O N
Players that have characters outside the
adventure’s level range cannot participate in
the adventure with those characters. Players
with ineligible characters can make a new 1st-level
character or use a pregenerated character. Players
can play an adventure they previously played or
ran as a Dungeon Master, but not with the same
character.
Ensure that each player has an official
adventure logsheet for his or her character (if not,
get one from the organizer). The player fills out
the adventure name, session number, date, and
your name and DCI number. In addition, the player
also fills in the starting values for experience, gold,
downtime, renown, and number of permanent
magic items. He or she fill in the other values and
write notes at the conclusion of the session. Each
player is responsible for maintaining an accurate
logsheet.
If you have time, you can do a quick scan of
a player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing
looks out of order. If you see magic items of very
high rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you
can ask players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict
item use or ask them to use a standard ability
score array. Point players to the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and
it’s the beginning of an adventure or episode,
they can declare their activity and spend the days
now. Alternatively, they can do so at the end of
the adventure or episode. Players should select
their characters’ spells and other daily options
prior to the start of the adventure, unless the
adventure specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread
the adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, you may see sidebars
to help make adjustments for smaller/larger
groups, and characters of higher/lower levels than
the optimized group. Most of the time, this is used
for combat encounters.
3 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : I N T R O D U C T I O N
You may adjust the adventure beyond the
guidelines given. For example, if you’re playing
with a group of inexperienced players, you might
want to make the adventure a little easier; for
very experienced players, you may want to make
it a little harder. Therefore, five categories of
party strength have been created for you to use
as a guide. Feel free to use a different adjustment
during the adventure if the recommended party
strength feels off for the group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of
five 8th-level characters. . To figure out whether
you need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
• Add up the total levels of all the characters
• Divide the total by the number of characters
• Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round
fractions of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table:
Determining Party Strength
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very Weak
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very Strong
Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment
of the game for the players. You help guide the
narrative and bring the words on these pages
to life. The outcome of a fun game session often
creates stories that live well beyond the play at the
table. Always follow this golden rule when you DM
for a group:
Make decisions and adjudications that
enhance the fun of the adventure when possible.
 To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
• You are empowered to make adjustments to
the adventure and make decisions about how the
group interacts with the world of this adventure.
Doing so is especially important and applicable
outside of combat, but feel free to adjust the
adventure for groups that are having too easy or
too hard of a time.
• Don’t make the adventure too easy or too
difficult for a group. Never being challenged
makes for a boring game and being
overwhelmed makes for a frustrating one.
Gauge the experience of the players (not the
characters) with the game, try to feel out (or
ask) what they like in a game, and attempt to
give each of them the experience they’re after
when they play D&D. Give everyone a chance to
shine.
• Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game
session moving along appropriately. Watch for
stalling, since play loses momentum when this
happens. At the same time, make sure that the
players don’t finish too early; provide them with
a full play experience. Try to be aware of running
long or short. Adjust the pacing accordingly
• Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free
to modify the text as you see fit, especially when
dialogue is present.
• Give the players appropriate hints so they can
make informed choices about how to proceed.
Players should be given clues and hints when
appropriate so they can tackle puzzles, combat,
and interactions without getting frustrated over
lack of information. Doing so helps to encourage
immersion in the adventure and gives players
“little victories” for figuring out good choices
from clues.
In short, being the DM isn’t about following
the adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about
facilitating a fun, challenging game environment
for the players. The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has
more information on the art of running a D&D
game.
4 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : I N T R O D U C T I O N
Downtime and Lifestyle
At the beginning of each play session, players must
declare whether or not they are spending any days
of downtime. The player records the downtime
spent on the adventure logsheet. The following
options are available to players during downtime
(see the D&D basic rules or the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for more information):
• Catching up
• Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
commit to crafting a single item)
• Practicing a profession
• Recuperating
• Spellcasting services
• Training
Other downtime options might be available during
adventures or unlocked through play, including
faction-specific activities.
In addition, whenever a character spends
downtime days, that character also spends the
requisite expense for his or her lifestyle. Costs
are per day, so a character that spends ten days
of downtime also spends ten days of expenses
maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some downtime
activities help with lifestyle expenses or add
lifestyle expenses.
Spellcasting Services
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can
provide some spellcasting services. Characters
need to be able to travel to the settlement to obtain
these services.
Spell services generally available include
healing and recovery spells, as well as information-
gathering spells. Other spell services might be
available as specified in the adventure. The number
of spells available to be cast as a service is limited
to a maximum of three per day total, unless
otherwise noted.
 Spellcasting Services
Spell Cost
Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
Identify 20 gp
Lesser restoration 40 gp
Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
Remove curse 90 gp
Speak with dead 90 gp
Divination 210 gp
Greater restoration 450 gp
Raise dead 1,250 gp
Acolyte Background
A character possessing the acolyte
background requesting spellcasting
services at a temple of his or her faith
may request one spell per day from the
Spellcasting Services table for free. The
only cost paid for the spell is the base price
for the consumed material component, if
any.
Disease, Death, and Recovery
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might
not have the same characters return from session
to session, here are the rules when bad things
happen to characters.
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating Effects
A character still affected by diseases, poisons,
and other similar effects at the conclusion of an
adventure can spend downtime days recuperating
until such time as he or she resolves the effect to
its conclusion (see the recuperating activity in the
D&D Basic Rules).
If a character doesn’t resolve the effect
between sessions, that character begins the next
session still affected by the debilitating effect.
5 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : I N T R O D U C T I O N
Death
A character who is killed during the course of
the adventure has a few options at the end of the
session (or whenever arriving back in civilization)
if no one in the adventuring party has immediate
access to a raise dead or revivify spell, or similar
magic. A character subject to a raise dead spell is
affected negatively until all long rests have been
completed during an adventure. Alternatively, each
downtime day spent after raise dead reduces the
penalty to attack rolls, saving throws, and ability
checks by 1, in addition to any other benefits the
downtime activity might provide.
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any
of the other options, the player creates a new
character. The new character does not have any
items or rewards possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing
any vital organs and is mostly whole) and the
player would like the character to be returned to
life, the party can take the body back to civilization
and use the dead character’s funds to pay for a
raise dead spell. A raise dead spell cast in this
manner costs the character 1,250 gp.
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As
above, except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for
the raise dead spell is paid for by the party at the
end of the session. Other characters are under no
obligation to spend their funds to bring back a
dead party member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to
4 and a member of a faction, the dead character’s
body can be returned to civilization and a patron
from the faction ensures that he or she receives a
raise dead spell. However, any character invoking
this charity forfeits all experience and rewards
from that session (both those earned prior to and
after death during that session) and cannot replay
that episode or adventure with that character
again. Once a character reaches 5th level, this
option is no longer available.
 Adventure Background
Hillsfar has been through a lot in recent years. The
Dark Prince Graz’zt’s influence brought the city
to the brink of complete madness. In the city’s
most desperate time of need, the Factions joined
together and orchestrated a coup of the oppressive
reign of First Lord Torin Nomerthal. The new
leader, First Lord Vuhm Yestral, then joined with
the Factions to defeat Graz’zt and bring sanity back
to the southern shore of the Moonsea.
Hillsfar and its fledgling government again
embarked on a military campaign, along with
the Factions and leaders of the once-great Phlan,
to wrest Phlan from the clutches of the Maimed
Virulence.
With the success of that great battle, First
Lord Yestral returned a victorious military leader.
His next goal was to tackle the role of government
leader. His revocation of the Great Law of
Humanity - the law that banned non-humans from
entering the city - was not popular with everyone.
Hillsfar had become xenophobic, and many citizens
actually liked it. Changing the law was easy.
Changing the hearts and minds of the people of
Hillsfar was a far more difficult task.
Then the attacks started. Monsters somehow
entered the city and wrought havoc on the city’s
livelihood: trade. With shipments being lost to
monstrous attacks, inventory being stolen, and the
needless loss of life, Yestral’s control is slipping.
Several prominent citizens and a large contingent
of Hillsfar citizens have called for Yestral’s
ouster. His Commandant of the Red Plumes,
Jandra Gragdowel, has secretly been leading that
underground rebellion.
Jandra Gragdowel holds First Lord Vuhm
Yestral for the loss of many Red Plumes during the
hostile takeover of the government. She feels that
a leader who betrays their sovereign, no matter
ideals the sovereign, is a traitor. A traitor cannot
be trusted to put the best interest of the citizens
foremost in the policies they implement.
6 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : I N T R O D U C T I O N
Jandra sees the withdraw of The First Law of
Humanity as proof that Yestral is endangering the
citizens of Hillsfar. Helping to destroy the city will
show the citizens and the council of merchants that
the safety of the city is at risk under the leadership
of Yestral. When she was approached by Malkyn
Grenefeld to help bring The First Lord down,
Jandra was more than willing to help.
A capable group of adventurers has stepped
up and taken on the tasks of righting this setback.
They quelled the monster attacks, investigated
the cause of them, and brought news of a growing
force of enemies in the Cormanthor Forest.
The adventurers also brought news of a
returning threat. Malkyn Grenefeld seeks revenge
for the death of her love, the former First Lord,
Torin Nomerthal. She is the impetus behind the
army amassing in the forest. She has also re-
inhabited the ruins of Abarat’s Folly, an ancient
arcane experiment that tried to create a point from
which travel through portals to many destinations
was possible from a single place. Grenefeld has
been able to alter some of the portals to breach
Hillsfar, and she plans to use these portals to
assault the city using enemy forces. Her plans
were further enhanced by Hillsfar defensive
secrets, obtained from a spy deep within the city
government.
Overview Adventure Hooks
This adventure contains 4 parts. You Should Stick Around a While or In Yestral’s
Chapter 1. The characters start the adventure Service (Story Award)
at the Classy Lady Inn, where they recover from The characters earned the trust of First Lord Vuhm
traveling to Hillsfar from the Cormanthor Forest. Yestral in HILL1-2 Exodus. He would like you to get
The First Lord summons them to discuss the next in touch with Elanil Elassidil at the Classy Lady Inn
course of action. He hires them to find the portals in Hillsfar. He wishes to discuss the information
that Malkyn Grenefeld has created and, with the you retrieved in prior missions.
help of the Mage’s Guild, destroy the connections. The Harpers (Faction). Elanil Elassidil contacts
If they come across any information about a spy in you and asks you to meet her at the Classy Lady
Hillsfar, they are to report back immediately. Inn in Hillsfar. Your work has brought your skills to
Chapter 2. The characters conduct an her attention and she may have a mission for you
investigation, looking for clues to where the portals inside of the city.
are located and how to render them useless. They The Lord’s Alliance (Faction). Your contacts in
pinpoint the location of two portals and enlist the the faction are in need of your help to ensure that
help of a Guild Mage to disrupt them. Commandant Vuhm Yestral remains in power. You are to find
Jandra Gragdowel has allowed Grenefeld to create Elanil Elassidil, who is expecting you at the Classy
a connection inside of the Red Plume garrison. She Lady Inn in Hillsfar.
is also the spy from whom Grenefeld is receiving
strategic military secrets.
Chapter 3. The group heads to The House of
Happiness, the Temple to Lliira in the city, where
one of the portals is located. They are faced with
portal travelers who try to stop the Guild mage
from rendering the portal unusable.
Chapter 4. The characters arrive at the Red Plume
garrison to take care of the other portal to find that
Gragdowel has put the facility on lockdown and has
refused to let the Hillsfarian Guard inside. Upon
entering, the adventurers find the Commandant
and Malkyn Grenefeld preparing the portal.

7 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : I N T R O D U C T I O N
 CHApter 1.
Urgent Matters
Hillsfar is on the brink. Monster attacks within the
city have caused trade to decline. An enemy army
is amassing in the Cormanthor Forest, just south of
the city. A rogue official of the former First Lord’s
court is attempting to open portals inside the city
for that army to march through. Those are not even
the worst of what the city faces! The worst? A spy,
likely lurking among the city’s fighting forces, is
passing secrets about crucial defense strategies to
the enemy. Hillsfar needs its heroes more than ever!
Reporting Back
The characters have procured lodging at the Classy
Lady Inn with some help from Elanil Elassidil.
The aroma of fresh baked bread and
cooked pork meets you in the common
room of the Classy Lady Inn. The space is
alive with activity. Servers carry platters full
of food to tables full of customers. The inn
guests converse over the morning’s meal
and get ready for their day in Hillsfar.
Your patron, Elanil Elassidil, sits at a table
listening to a small boy as he hands her a
message from within a satchel he wears
over his shoulder. She smiles at him, hands
him a coin, and he rushes out of the inn.
She proceeds to open the sealed letter and
reads it.
A character succeeding at a DC 10 Wisdom
(Perception) check notices that the boy is wearing
the livery of a messenger of the First Lord.
8 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 1
Elanil looks up from the message and sees
that you have come down from your rooms.
She motions to your group to join her at the
table.
She waves over the server and says,
“Give these fine heroes whatever they would
like. You can put it on my bill.” The girl takes
the orders and goes off to put it in with the
kitchen staff. Elanil gets right to the contents
of the message. “The First Lord requests
our presence after breakfast to discuss the
matter at hand. He is concerned about the
news brought from the Cormanthor Forest.”
Catching Up
If for some reason the characters have not played
the other parts of the Dark Intentions trilogy, an
advisor is also in the room with Yestral. He tells of
information that other adventurers were able to
obtain:
• A large number of creatures, the size of an
army, have gathered in the vicinity of Hillsfar.
• The numbers are well commanded and very
organized for wild creatures. The legion is led
by hags and drow.
• The creatures have gained access to the inside
of a tower. The tower is still very unstable due to
the magical “accidents” that happened therein.
Portals are open throughout the structure.
• These portals seem to be very unpredictable,
and can spit out creatures seemingly at random.
Some are inactive while others seem to never
sleep.
• While exploring the tower, the adventurers
came across someone who had been forgotten
about. Malkyn Grenefeld, the former First Lord’s
Chamberlain, was manipulating the portals. She
escaped through a portal that seemed to lead
to a ballroom that has mirrors on all the walls.
Once through, she must have shattered the
 mirror, breaking the connection.
• Evidence found in the tower indicates that
Malkyn is the one gathering creatures to attack
Hillsfar in retribution for the coup in which her
beloved (First Lord Torin Nomerthal) was killed.
• She is working to get the portals linked to
various places in Hillsfar in order bring enemy
legions directly into the city. She is working to
create ingested portal keys so creatures are less
likely to lose a key.
• Further investigation has produced suspicion
that someone within Hillsfar is feeding the
military leaders of the monstrous forces
strategies for the city’s defense.
When the characters are ready to head over to the
First Lord’s Tower, read the text below:
The streets of Hillsfar are not as busy as they
were before you left. The monster attacks
have subsided, but there is still tension in
the air. You are met with many sneers from
Hillsfarians along the way. The ingrained
xenophobia of the city’s population is slow
to subside, especially with the damage to
property and lives that the attacks brought
to their home. Even with that, the citizens are
not confrontational with a group that is as
heavily armed as you.
Elanil presents the message at the Castle
gates, and the guards bring you to the
Tower. You are led through the main doors
and past many rooms, including a ballroom
where men are measuring a large blank
space on a wall that is otherwise covered in
large mirrors.
With a successful DC 15 Intelligence check,
characters that played in HILL1-2 Exodus may
recognize the ballroom that was the other end of a
portal that Malkyn Grenefeld escaped through while
in Abarat’s Folly.
9 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 1
You make your way upstairs to what looks like
a meeting room. A large table surrounded
by chairs occupies the middle of a room
decorated with many maps of Hillsfar.
Partially filled bookshelves mostly contain
tomes covering military history and strategy.
A large office lies beyond. It is dimly lit by
the glow of a fireplace. A large mahogany
desk is the centerpiece, surrounded by even
more bookshelves. Papers litter the desk, on
top of which sits a pair of spectacles and a
quill.
In front of the fireplace, a set of
leather chairs and a couch surround a low
mahogany table. A man with greying hair, a
weathered face, and broad shoulders stands
staring into the fire. He wears a military
uniform with a sword at his side.
As you enter he turns his head. “Ah,
come in, come in. I am anxious to speak
with you!” He turns to a servant who has
been waiting quietly on the other side of the
room, “Fetch us a bottle of wine and some
refreshments, will you, Edmond?” The servant
exits with a “Yes sir” thrown over his shoulder
on the way out.
First Lord Yestral gets right to point of his summons:
• He has been meeting with his advisors all night
planning the defense of the city against the army
that threatens Hillsfar.
• They have what he believes to be a very good
plan to fend off any attack from outside the
city. This, of course, leaves the matter of portals
opening inside the city and attacks from within.
• Since the characters did such a commendable
job of obtaining this crucial piece of intelligence,
it is his opinion that they would be the best to
lead the search for portals in the city.
• However, that leaves the matter of a spy.
This is another disturbing issue that must be
addressed. He asks the adventurers, as they go
about other tasks, to look for clues about who
the spy might be.

He opens a desk drawer and takes out a
piece of parchment. Dipping his quill in the
ink pot, he writes. “This writ will allow you legal
access to the entire city. It says that you are
conducting an investigation on behalf of
the First Lord and should not be impeded in
doing.”
Yestral gives the writ to the characters and tells
them that finding all portals that provide access to
the city is their priority. He reaches into a drawer
in the desk and pulls out a sending stone. He tells
the characters that they are to use the stone if they
come across any information about a possible spy.
The first Lord gives the characters a couple of
suggestions on where to begin:
• The Hydra’s Den is a good place to find ale
and hear some gossip. The proprietor, Brendon
Tamesford, is a former adventurer and keeps his
ears open to what is going on in the city.
• Isthana Ro, the head of the Rogues Guild, has
eyes and ears throughout the city. She may have
information about Grenefeld being in the city.
• The Mage’s Guild has the largest library this
side of the Moonsea. You may be able to talk
with one of the sages there and figure out how
these portals will work.
one of the many portals. In the tavern there were
many dancers and a band playing. Some characters
may have identified the dancers as Joydancers,
the followers of Lliira. If they mention this, Elanil
speaks up and tells them this:
• There is a temple to Lliira in Hillsfar called the
House of Happiness. The character’s description
of the tavern they saw seems to describe what
the inside of the temple looks like.
First Lord Yestral offers 1,000 gp they find the spy
and bring them in for questioning. He offers half
now for the characters to use for equipment, and the
loosening of tongues.
Edmond, the servant, returns with food and
drink just as the characters are about to leave.
There is wine and Underbough Half-Cakes on
the tray he brings. There may be time for some
refreshments!
Treasure
The adventurers receive 1,000 gp for bringing in the
spy, half of which he provides them immediately.
They are also given a sending stone in order to
provide a direct line of communication to him.

Finding Grenefeld’s Journal

Characters that played HILL1-2 Exodus may
have come across Malkyn Grenefeld’s journal.
If the group (or the majority, if the group
did not play the adventure together) at the
table found the book Yestral also gives this
information:
• The Mage’s Guild was given the journal
to try and ascertain where Malkyn was
planning on putting the portals.
If the characters did not find the journal,
details are given in Chapter 2: Needle in a
Haystack in The Rogue’s Guild section on how
the journal was discovered.

If the characters played HILL1-2 Exodus, they may

recall that they were able to see a tavern through

10 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 1
 Chapter 2.
Needle in a Haystack
In order to find the places that Grenefeld is using
to link portals from Abarat’s Folly, the characters
venture into the city. Faced with trying to find such
places in a large city, the citizens of Hillsfar are not
always helpful.
Outside The First Lord’s Tower, the citizens of
Hillsfar go about their daily business. Some
greet you with the tip of a hat, while others
look at you with angry glares. One such man
is bold enough to say, “You lot goin’ ta’ do
sumthin’ ‘bout makin’ it safe for us? I ‘spect
not, since you comin’ outta there!” he points
to the Tower. “Al’ays knew you ‘venturin’
types only cared ‘bout fillin’ your pockets
from them that can pay ya’.” He walks
away continuing to grumble as he does so.
Roleplaying Isthana Ro
Isthana Ro is the leader of the thieves’ guild
in Hillsfar. In the new government, she is a
member of the senate. The role of the senate is
yet to be determined in its infancy.
She is wickedly smart and doesn’t care
about anything other than her guild. This
sense of self-preservation is tempered with an
amazingly acute business sense and the ability
to think ahead. With the new regime in place,
she hopes to use her connections among the
merchants to give First Lord Yestral what he
needs to get the city back on its feet. This will,
of course, put the new leader in her debt.

Each place the First Lord suggested they visit

will give the adventurers a pertinent piece of
information that will lead them to the location of
Grenefeld or one of her portals.
The group may decide to follow up on what
they learned from one of the suggested starting
points rather than move to the next. This adventure
is designed to allow the characters to finish all the
tasks in whichever order they choose. Acting on
information they receive from these roleplaying
options just requires a bit of going back and forth
between sections of the adventure.
The Rogues Guild is located in the
Merchant’s District of the city, a short
distance from Hillsfar Castle. A rather plain
building from the outside, it shows a lot of
activity. A plaque bolted to the wall near
the door has a simple black mask painted on
it, under which the letters “RG” are carved
into the wood.

The Rogues Guild

First Lord Yestral mentioned that Isthana Ro, the
leader of the Rogues Guild, is an excellent source of
information regarding the underbelly of the City of
Trade.

11 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 2
 When the group decides to enter the building, read:
The inside of the building is richly decorated.
Dark wood, warm paint tones, large
paintings, exquisite wall tapestries and rugs
complement luxurious furniture made for
lounging. A dramatic staircase winds its way
to the second floor, covered with a bright
blue runner. A hallway to the right of the
staircase extends further into the building. Its
walls are lined with portraits.
People lounge in a sitting room off of
the main foyer, while some play chess or
read books. Across from that room, on the
opposite side of the foyer, are a set of closed
doors that open to let a cloud of smoke out,
along with a person or two.
An older man in a servant’s uniform
greets you as you take in the scene,
“Welcome to The Guild. May I be of
assistance?”
If the characters ask for Isthana Ro, the gentleman
apologizes and says that, unfortunately, Miss Ro is
indisposed. If they bring out the writ, he looks a bit
flustered but bids you to wait a moment while he
goes to let Miss Ro know you are here. He ascends
the stairs and is gone for a fair amount of time.
A figure carrying a rapier and wearing a
chain shirt, black leather chaps, and a
helmet casually descends the stairs with the
servant walking a short distance behind.
As they get closer, the armored figure
takes off the helmet to reveal a woman,
whose hair is soaked with sweat, smiling
widely at your group.
“So, the First Lord stamps his foot and we
are all supposed to come running?” she says,
after which she attempts to blow a piece of
hair from her face. She looks your group over
and continues, “Well let’s not conduct this
interview here at the entrance. Let us go to
my office.” She turns on her heel and quickly
walks down the hallway to the left of the
stairs.
12
She stops at the end of the hall, opens a
door, and motions you through. She closes
the door behind her before moving to a
desk, which is bare save for a crystal globe
with a map etched into it.
She sets the helmet on a coat rack
next to the chair behind the desk and
removes the chain shirt revealing a black
shirt underneath. As she sits, the door opens
and the servant that greeted you comes in
with wine and several glasses. She says, “Oh
Fritz, you always know exactly what I need!”
She gives him a peck on the cheek as he
pours her a glass. She takes the glass and sits
back in her chair as Fritz leaves. “OK what
is so important that I needed to cancel my
fencing duel?”
If the characters bring out the writ again, she tells
them that bullying will get them nothing from her.
She is unimpressed by the First Lord using his
power to interrupt her day.
As the characters speak, she listens quietly,
sipping her wine. It seems intentional that she
has not offered any to the party. When they have
finished explanations, she puts her glass down and
smiles at them.
“So, the First Lord needs my help once more
to save his city. That’s what he calls it, you
know: his city. He will come to understand
that this city has never belonged to one man
alone. When he learns that, I am sure his
luck will turn. Vuhm is a good man. He just
needs to share.” She smiles widely, “Care
for some wine? I might be persuaded to
give you some information that will help your
investigation. Has the First Lord sent you with
payment? My help is never free.”
She will take nothing less than 50 gp to relay what
she knows. She starts the negotiation at 100 gp.
Once compensation is made, she gives the
characters the following information, all the while
sipping on her wine and pacing the floor:
• She has heard rumors that Malkyn Grenefeld
was traveling through the city in disguise.
Isthana’s “eyes” have seen Grenefeld frequenting
the Red Plume garrison just next door, as well as
the House of Happiness.
H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 2
 • On Isthana’s request, one of her boys followed
Grenefeld to a tavern at the docks, where she
met with a physically fit woman with long black
hair.
• She eventually learned this woman was
Commandant Jandra Gragdowel, the leader of
the Red Plumes. “The girl has never been seen
without a uniform on before.”
• The two met for hours, with Jandra doing most
of the talking. The Commandant looked nervous,
constantly scanning the room. Grenefeld took
notes the entire time.
• Just this morning, before the sun came
up, Jandra returned from the Tower looking
quite nervous. She entered the Red Plume
garrison, and minutes later a messenger left in
a hurry. It was the same messenger, Isthana’s
informants believe, she has been using for her
correspondences with Grenefeld.
Finding Grenefeld’s Journal
If the characters did not find Grenefeld’s
journal in HILL1-2 Exodus, Isthana tells the
characters the following:
• Feeling a little nimble-fingered, Isthana’s
informant thought it prudent to find out
what Grenefeld was writing down. They
followed Grenefeld for a bit after she left
Jandra, and managed to borrow the journal.
• The journal had strange notes about
portal magic and keys. Knowing that it was
of no use to her without translation, Isthana
took it to the Mage’s Guild to be interpreted
into “plain Common”. Master Ladron is still
looking it over.
Once Isthana is finished, she pours herself more
wine, and elegantly sits back in the chair once again.
If the characters have any questions, she will do her
best to answer them.
She goes not disclose the identity of her
informant. All she says is that she trusts them
and that there would be little reason for them to
misinform her. “People around here know the
consequences for making me look the fool.”
13
Fritz returns and clears his throat:
“Excuse me Miss Ro, your…upstairs guest is
getting a little
impatient. Shall I tell him you are nearly
finished?”
Isthana stands, puts her wine glass down,
and grabs her gear. “I believe we are done
here?” she asks. “Tell Vuhm I expect his
support at the next council meeting.” With
that she strides out of the room. Fritz waits to
escort you out.
If the characters would like to immediately go to
the Red Plume garrison, go to Chapter 4: The Spy
Revealed.
Otherwise, the characters can continue with
their investigation.
Hydra’s Den
The characters were told by First Lord Yestral
that the Hydra’s Den is a tavern they can go to find
rumors and a pint.
The sign outside of this tavern depicts a
mug of ale with the many heads of a hydra
popping out of it. It swings lightly in the
afternoon breeze, as a man stumbles out of
the establishment and starts down the street.
Once the characters decide to go in, read the
following:
The inside of the tavern is busy. The tables
are filled with merchants, laborers, and
guards. All seem to be enjoying the food and
atmosphere. The smell of roasted vegetables
mixes with the musty smell of ale to create a
unique fragrance. There are several open
tables, and a couple of open stools at the
bar.
H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 2
 There are several opportunities for the characters to
interact with the patrons and workers in the Hydra’s
Den. If they sit at a table or at the bar, a server asks
for their orders:
• Brendon Tamesford, the owner and manager
of the Hydra’s Den, works at the bar. He busily
fills mugs of ale and helps the servers clean the
tables as people finish their meal.
• There are a group of five men, laborers from
the looks of their clothing and grimy faces,
hurriedly eating their meal. The men are
friendly enough. They know nothing about
any portals, a spy, or anything pertinent to the
character’s investigation. When they finish
eating, they politely excuse themselves citing
that they have to get back to work.
• A couple sits near the front of the
establishment, lost in each other’s company.
They are so wrapped up in each other that they
never notice a server dropping an entire tray of
empty plates right behind them. If the characters
interrupt the couple rudely, they will get up,
give them a sneer, and walk out. This will cause
disadvantage on any Charisma checks the group
may have to make while talking with Brendon,
as he is not happy about the lost customers.
If the characters are polite, they will answer
the questions in passing, while gazing into
each other’s eyes. They remember Grenefeld,
“nice lady,” but haven’t seen her since the new
government took over.
• A group of three men sit at the bar, conversing
over their pints. One seems quite intoxicated
and talks loudly about the First Lord, about
how he refuses to keep “them” out of the city,
and because of that, his business has gone from
seven barrels of fish sold a day, to two. If the
characters confront the man, he is not happy
with being challenged, but his friends quickly
lead him away from the confrontation. This
makes Brendon start neutral to the characters
if they approach, resulting in the characters not
getting a free pint of ale during the talk.
14
Role Playing Brendon Tamesford
Brendon has long blond hair and deep blue
eyes, and a stocky, muscular build. He is polite
and kind to everyone that he meets. He is
especially fond of adventurers, having earned
the money to purchase the Hydra’s Den while
adventuring.
Tamesford is happy that Vuhm Yestral has
taken on the role of First Lord. He is especially
pleased that the first thing he did was get rid of
the Great Law of Humanity. As an adventurer
he had many non-human friends, and he is
happy to know that they will now be able to
visit him and have a few pints. His familiarity
with the plight of the common man in Hillsfar
has gained him a seat on the newly reformed
senate of the city.
Tamesford
Brendon Tamesford is busy but by no means
unapproachable. If a character tries to get his
attention, he politely tells them he would be happy
to talk with them in just a moment. They can wait at
the bar for him. Tamesford quickly finishes the task
at hand and joins the characters at the bar. As long
as the characters were friendly to the others in the
tavern while waiting, Brendon offers each of them a
mug of ale on the house.
Brendon Tamesford walks behind the bar
and sets out a mug for each of you. He fills
them to the brim with some ale from a keg,
and leans on it as he says, “So what can I do
for you?”
If the characters engage in pleasantries before
getting to the point, Brendon plays along. He gladly
engages about the weather, the new government, or
whatever subject the characters choose.
If the characters are rude to him, any staff, or
any patron, Brendon is reluctant to converse any
further than pleasantries. It takes a successful DC
15 Charisma (Persuasion) check to convince him
that helping them would be the right thing to do.
The characters will not, however, get out of the
Hydra’s Den without a lecture from him on the finer
H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 2
points of diplomacy.
If the characters show him the writ they
received from First Lord Yestral, he immediately
tells them to put it away and be careful where they
show it. “The First Lord is not a favorite of many
around here,” he says rather quietly. And gives them
the information below:
• The citizens of Hillsfar trust him enough to
reveal their true feelings about matters. They
know that, while in his company, there is no
danger of repercussions for speaking out against
the First Lord or the wealthy. They also know he
loves gossip and rumors, as it is what gives him
so much to talk about.
• The other day, a regular who usually comes in
at the end of the work day with a good friend of
his, came in by himself and looking a bit glum.
When asked what was bothering him, he said
that the two of them were attacked on the way
home from “The Den.”
• His friend recognized a woman walking toward
them and greeted her. This startled her and she
lashed out with some sort of energy spell. His
friend has been in the infirmary all night and
day. It all happened so fast, but he thinks his
friend called the woman “the Chamberlain.”
• The regular said that the woman just left
him there injured and laying in the street. She
continued to head into the House of Happiness.
He carried his friend to the infirmary.
• The only woman Chamberlain that Brendon
can remember was Malkyn Grenefeld. She was
First Lord Torin Nomerthal’s Chamberlain,
rumored to be in love with him. She hasn’t been
seen since she left with the former First Lord
to go to The Waydown for an inspection of the
fortress that was built there. On that trip, the
First Lord and his entourage ended up being
killed and Vuhm Yestral took command of the
city after that.
15
After relaying the information, and finishing his ale
in one last gulp, he wipes his mouth on his arm and
says:
“Well, it has certainly been a pleasure talking
with you all, but I must get back to work.
Come again and we can share stories of our
exploits.” A smirk creeps onto his face as
he continues, “Unless you have some juicy
information that I can hand out to the next
lucky fellow who sits down to have a pint with
me?”
If the characters relay rumors to him, he thanks
them with a broad smile and he moves to clear a
table of dishes from a group that is walking out the
door.
Brendon doesn’t know where the customers he
mentioned live or where the injured man may be
recovering.
If the group decides to head to the House of
Happiness go to Chapter 3: Dancing for Joy.
Otherwise, the characters can continue with their
suggested stops.
The Mage’s Guild
The First Lord told the party that the Mage’s Guild
may be able to help them make sense of the magic
behind the portals that Grenefeld is using.
The Mage’s Guild is a short distance from
the First Lord’s Tower in the Hillsfar Castle
complex. The guild seems like a mini fortress
on its own. It consists of five 3-story towers,
surrounded by a 10-foot-high stone wall. At
the entrance to the complex is a large two-
story gatehouse.
Entry into the gatehouse is fairly easy.
The doors open into a large common room.
The stone floor has two large carpets that
separate the room into sections. A large
fireplace, open on all sides, sits in the middle
of the room. The two carpeted sections
have several large leather chairs that are
well cushioned, complete with matching
ottomans. (continued)
H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 2
 A bar sits against one wall in an
uncarpeted area. Several small tables, with
two chairs at each, rest near the bar. Several
stools provide seating at the bar.
Lastly, in a non-carpeted area next to
the door is a counter at which a spectacled
man with grey hair is sitting half-asleep while
reading a book.
If the characters approach the man at the counter,
he lazily looks up at them from his book.
Rather surprised by your presence in front
of him the man stammers, “I-I-I apologize
for being in a daydream. W-w-welcome to
the Mage’s Guild, my friends! I am Zaberos.
How can I help you today?” Looking over
your group, he continues, “Are you looking
to converse with one of our sages? Their
subject knowledge is exceptional, and
I am sure you will find satisfaction in the
information they impart.”
When the characters tell them why they have come
and/or show him the writ from the First Lord, he
nervously comes out from behind the counter and
shouts for a boy of teen years to hurry over.
“Bring these important guests straight to
Master Ladron. And no bothering these
fine folks by asking about their exploits. They
don’t have time for your childish curiosity.”
Embarrassed, the young man shyly tells you
to follow him, and he leads you into the
Mage Tower gardens.
A stone pathway winds around the five
towers, with beds of flowers and topiary
decorating the open spaces. Benches and
small fountains make for a very tranquil
space among the looming towers.
He continues to the center tower,
where one large room encompasses the
entire diameter of the first floor. Your guide
continues up the stairs there, stopping to
knock on a heavy oak door. A grunt from
the other side indicates that he may enter.
The boy holds the door for you to enter and
closes it behind you. Every available surface
in this room is covered in books or papers.
There is not even a place for your group to
sit. (continued)
16
A middle-aged woman stands among
the sea of books, with a large tome held
open against her body with one hand. In the
other, she holds a journal. She looks back
and forth between the two as if comparing
them. After a moment, she shakes her head,
closes the tome, and places it on one of the
piles she is standing next to.
She looks up at your group, “There is just
one part that stumps me. The keys. They
are so very different from normal portal keys.
Nonetheless, I do have a way to change
how the portals interact with them.”
Roleplaying Master Torsha Ladron
Master Ladron is the ranking member of the
Mage’s Guild and regarded as one of the most
knowledgeable people in all of the Moonsea.
She also serves as First Lord Vuhm Yestral’s
Chancellor. Her knowledge on just about
everything makes her invaluable to him.
Torsha is very energetic and always has a
book in hand. A page within the library is often
assigned to walk with her in order to pick up
the pages that she accidentally drops as she
strolls. From the moment she starts talking,
it is apparent that this woman is a wealth of
information, trivial and pertinent.
Zaberos announced the groups arrival via a sending
stone so that Master Ladron would be ready. Torsha
knows it is urgent that the unfettered access to
the city be sealed quickly and has not slept since
receiving Grenefeld’s journal. She has learned
several important things from her research:
• Grenefeld is having a very difficult time
altering the portals inside of Abarat’s Folly. The
wild magic that caused its creator to disappear
was uncontrollable from the start. The magical
surge during the Spellplague further changed
them from their original design.
• Grenefeld has spent countless hours
deciphering Abarat’s original notes and dealing
with the alterations made through Faerûn’s
history.
H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 2
 • The former Chamberlain has been primarily
focused on creating portal keys that allow one
to use the portals. None of Abarat’s keys were
found in the tower’s ruins.
• In the short time she has had possession of
the journal, Master Ladron, without access to
Abarat’s notes, has been able to devise a method
to negate Greenfield’s link between the keys and
the portals.
• The concerning part about the keys is that each
affects the user in some way once it interacts
with the wild magic of the portal. Grenefeld has
been unable to stop this (sometimes harmful)
effect. Unfortunately, Master Ladron has been
unable to find a fix.
• Torsha has also ascertained the locations of the
portals that Grenefeld has successfully activated.
There is a portal that opens into the House of
Happiness and the second is located somewhere
inside of the Red Plume barracks.
17
Master Ladron tells the characters that she plans
to send a Guild mage to render the portals useless.
She asks if the characters would be willing to
accompany the mage, as the portals are active, and
any tampering may alert those that desire to keep
the portals open. If alerted, they may come through
the portals to intervene. If the characters do so,
she offers to make each character a potion of their
choice (uncommon).
If the characters agree to accompany the mage,
she informs them that the Guild mage has already
traveled to the House of Happiness to get started.
She has sent word to the First Lord that a portal is
in the Red Plume barracks. He has taken on the task
of securing the area until you arrive. However, she
acquiesces to wherever the characters wish to start.
If the group wishes to first head to the House
of Happiness, continue on to Chapter 3: Dancing
for Joy. If the characters would like to immediately
go to the Red Plume garrison, go to Chapter 4: The
Spy Revealed.
H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 2
 Chapter 3.
Dancing for Joy
The characters arrive at the House of Happiness
looking for a portal that leads into the festhall from
Abarat’s Folly in the Cormanthor Forest.
From the outside, the House of Happiness
looks like any tavern in the city. The sounds
of revelers enjoying the entertainment that
the clergy of Lliira bring rings forth from the
building. The only evidence of this being a
temple is the sign above the door that shows
a triangle made of six-pointed stars, Lliira’s
holy symbol.
Suddenly screams erupt from within
rather than laughter. Patrons flee through
the front door. One notices you and shouts,
“Monsters came right out of the wall!”
The characters enter into a chaotic scene. Change
the description to match the monsters based on
encounter difficulty.
Inside the building, people flee from a giant-
like creature and a dark-skinned elf. Tables
and chairs are overturned as the giant
knocks tries to get at the fleeing patrons. A
mage lies unconscious on the floor near the
door.
General Features
Ceilings. The ceilings in this room are 10 feet high.
Lighting. The room is lit by the candles of three
large crystal chandeliers, supplying dim light.
Smells. The room is an unusually pleasant mix of
perfume and stale ale.
Sounds. The sounds of the raging ettin and crying
from the patrons that remain fill the room.
Portal. The wall next to the entry door contains an
active portal. A black void is surrounded by a purple
energy. See Development for an explanation of the
portal’s part in this scene.
18
The House of Happiness is being destroyed by a
drow elite warrior and an ettin. They both came
out of the wall (a portal from Abarat’s Tower)
when the Guild mage attempted the ritual Master
Ladron instructed him to perform. There are five
commoners still in the temple. The dancers are
already unconscious on the stage, on which the ettin
now stands.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are some suggestions for adjusting this
encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very Weak Party: Remove one ettin
and one drow elite warrior and add two
hobgoblin captains
• Weak Party: Remove the ettin and add
one hobgoblin captain
• Strong Party: Remove the drow elite
warrior and add two hobgoblin captains
• Very Strong Party: Remove the ettin
and the drow elite warrior and add one
fomorian and one drow.
Tactics
The drow tries to command the ettin as much as
possible to fulfill his mission: disrupt any attempt
to tamper with the portal. He knew it was a suicide
mission before he came through. The corrupted wild
magic has given him renewed confidence that he
and the ettin can succeed. He fights to the death.
The ettin is determined to destroy anything in
its path. It attacks the commoners as if their cries
and pleas for help are actually causing it harm. It
fights to the death.
H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 3
Map: House of Happiness

19 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 3
 Developments
On initiative 0 of the first round, the portal
disappears. No additional enemies are able to come
through.
The ettin’s sense of hearing has increased
because of its travel through the portal. Because
of this, the slightest sound causes it pain. Every
round a commoner is still in the room, the ettin
breaks engagement with a combatant to attack
a commoner instead. If the characters make a
loud noise, the ettin attacks them instead, with
disadvantage. If a spell caster casts thunderwave or
any other loud spell, the ettin has disadvantage on
the saving throw and takes double the damage if it
fails, and full damage if it saves. Similarly, if deafen is
cast on the ettin, it doesn’t go after the commoners
at all.
If the characters are able to stabilize and heal
the Guild mage, he continues to work on the portal.
This causes the portal to once again become active.
The Guild mage needs to continue his ritual for four
rounds.
20
There are six more drow waiting on the other
side of the portal in Abarat’s Folly. They were given
orders to raise the alarm and go through the portal
if it activates. The alarm brings two more drow
through every three rounds. If the Guild mage is
able to finish his ritual, the portal no longer allows
passage. The keys they possess no longer work.
Treasure
The drow elite warrior has a belt pouch with 50 gp
and wears an onyx and gold spider cloak pin worth
100 gp.
Experience Points
The characters receive 100 xp each if the guild mage
is able to complete the ritual. They also receive 50
xp each for every commoner that was saved from
the ettin.
H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 3
 Chapter 4.
The Spy Revealed
The characters head to the Red Plume garrison in that it doesn’t matter who the attack is from,
Hillsfar Castle with evidence that Commandant they are only doing their duty. He asks that the
Jandra Gragdowel might be the spy giving military adventurers don’t kill anyone, including Jandra
secrets to Malkyn Grenefeld. Gragdowel. “Besides, we need them if there is an
army on the way, right?”
The Red Plume garrison at Hillsfar Castle
has been surrounded by a contingent
of the First Lord’s Guard. First Lord Yestral Yestral is able to give the characters a map of the
himself commands them, putting himself at garrison showing where everything is. He doesn’t
considerable risk by doing so. Elanil Elassidil is think the layout has been changed much from when
there as well, pleading with Yestral. Elanil sees he commanded it. He also insists that the Guild
your arrival and greets you: “Aren’t you a mage not go in until they have secured the area.
sight for sore eyes? Yestral is planning to lead
a charge into the garrison. He was worried The iron-banded double doors to the garrison
by what might happen if we waited for you. are barred from the inside. The city guard can
With you here, he will hand the reigns to you, provide a battering ram for the group to use to
I’m sure.”
break down the door. A successful DC 10 Strength
Yestral is speaking to a group of soldiers, check is required to break down the doors.
pointing to the garrison, and then to some of
the men. Elanil walks to them and bids you General Features
to follow. She says to Yestral, “They are here
now, so you can let them take point on this.” Ceilings. The ceilings in all the areas are 10 feet
Yestral looks up, and with a somewhat high.
disappointed look addresses you. “Ah, Lighting. The rooms are brightly lit with torch light,
wonderful, let me catch you up on what is except when indicated in the description of the
going on here.”
room.
Sounds. The buildings are unusually quiet. If
Yestral explains the situation to the group: the characters ask, a successful DC 20 Wisdom
• Yestral conducted his own investigation and (Perception) check is required to hear anything
learned that Jandra Gragdowel has been acting from the other parts of the complex.
strangely since Abarat’s Tower was discovered.
• Yestral didn’t want to wait to confront
Gragdowel, as she might try to escape. He sent a
contingent of City Guards to bring Jandra back.
They found that the garrison was on lockdown
and that they were not letting anyone inside—
especially those representing the usurper of the
title of First Lord.
• That is when Yestral decided that there was
no time to waste in breaking down the door and
taking back control of the garrison.
• The soldiers inside have vowed to protect the
garrison from attack. It is engrained in them

21 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 4
 Map: Red Plume Garrison at Hillsfar Castle

22 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 4
A. Administration
This large one roomed building has a
sign hanging above the door that reads,
“Administration”.
The inside is sparsly decorated. The
stone walls have no paintings or wall
coverings. The floor is wooden and there are
spaces between some of the more worn
boards. Some of the boards are newer than
others.
Three simple desks, with three chairs
around them, are the only furniture in the
room.The desks all have an ink pot and quill
on the desk. On one desk there is also a
book. A larger desk has a candle, a hunk of
wax, and a seal on it along with the writing
instruments.
There are three banded wooden doors
along one wall of the building. Each door
has a small barred opening in it. You can
hear cries of help coming from behind one of
the doors.
This building serves as the garrison’s administration
building. The Commandant, Warden,and senior
officers work here when not in the field. The
Commandant’s desk is the biggest in the room.
The Warden and senior officers’ desk drawers
are not locked. In the officer’s desk the group will
find scrolls that have orders from the Commandant
and the First Lord. There is nothing incriminatingin
the orders.
The Warden has a book on his desk that records
the prisoners, charges, and sentence for anyone in
the jail. The beginning of the book is quite full of
names. Most of the sentences in that part of the
book are “Death in Colosseum.” Recently dated
pages are not as full, and most sentences are only
for days in prison. The last entry in the book, dated
today, is Foster Grimes. His criime was pick-
pocketing. There is no sentence written next to his
name.
The Commandant’s desk drawers are locked. A
successful DC 10 Dexterity (Thieves’ Tools) checkor
a DC 10 Strength check is required to open or break
the lock. Inside the drawer are correspondences
from Malkyn Grenefeld. The correspondences are
23
to the Commandant, and threaten to tell the First
Lord that Jandra Gragdowel was the leader of a
growing resistance movement in the city if she did
not provide Grenefeld with key defense secrets of
thecity.
If the characters investigate the cries for help,
the door is locked. If they look through the barred
opening, read the following:
Beyond the door, is a small room with a pile
of straw along one wall. A face suddenly
appears just on the other side of the opening
inside the room. “Hey! Get me outta here
will ‘ya?’
The man in the cell is Foster Grimes. He is has
recently come to town and was caught pick-
pocketing in the market. He was not, exhonerated
for his crime, because he is not yet part of the
Rogue’s Guild in Hillsfar.
The keys are on the Warden’s belt. The Warden
is currently not in the garrison. He was meeting
with Isthana Ro when the garrison went on
lockdown.
A successful DC 25 Dexterity check is necessary
to open the lock on the door. If the characters do
manage to open the lock, Foster tries to escape past
them. He is easliy kept from getting out, no check
needed. If the characters let him go, Foster is able to
get away from the forces outside of the garrison.
XP
If the group finds the letters from Grenefeld to
Jandra Gragdowel, they each receive 100 xp.
B. Storage
The small storage building contains mostly
maintanence supplies for the garrison.
H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 4
 C. Barracks
This large building houses the members of the Red
Plumes that are not on duty.
1. Mess Hall
The large room contains many large tables and
benches. There is no one in the room, however,
there are many plates still full of food.
2. Kitchen
There is a hearth, a butcher’s block, and a table in
this small room. There is a door that looks to lead
into one of the back towers.
The door is locked. A successful DC 15 Strength
(Athletics) or Dexterity (Thieves’ Tools) check
breaks or opens the lock.
The round room is a food storage area. As
the door opens, you hear crying inside the
dark room. Hiding behind crates are a
man and a woman holding tightly to each
other. “P-p-please don’t hurt us! We are just
servants,” the man says.
The two do not know where everyone went. Two
Red Plume soldiers locked them in here when the
alarm was raised.
There are no other exits from this room. The
characters can escort the two from the garrison and
return without any consequences.
XP
If the characters escort the two servants out of the
garrison, they each receive 100 xp.
3a. Barracks
This large room houses many bunk beds.
There are approximately ten bunks, each
with a chest at each end.
The chests contain off duty clothing, cleaning
supplies for weapons, and tools for repairing
weapons and armor. None of the chests are locked.
24
Treasure
Among all of the chests, the characters find 50 gp
and a pair of ivory dice worth 75 gp.
3b. Commandant’s Quarters
This is a luxurious bedroom. The bed has a silk
canopy, curtains, and sheets. A thick rug lies
in the middle of the floor. An oak wardrobe
contains many beautiful gowns. There is a
fireplace that is lit in the room.
A door in the room leads to an office
with a table and comfortable chair.
There are no drawers in this desk. There is
parchment, ink, a quill, wax, a seal and a
candle on top of the desk. There is a small
bookshelf with some books on it.
The Commandant uses this area as her personal
office. She writes letters to family from here. One of
the books on the shelf is a first-edition signed copy
of a famous work. Another book is hollow. A DC 15
Wisdom (Perception) check finds it among the other
books.
Treasure
The First edition book is worth 300gp. Inside the
hollow book are 20 pp.
D. Courtyard
The doors fly open as the battering ram
breaks the bar that kept them closed.
Inside, soldiers wait for the attackers to
pour in. There are four soldiers and two large
dogs that ready to attack when you enter
the courtyard.
Three veterans and three mastiffs wait to keep
the intruders out. The combatants fight until
incapacitated.
H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 4

Adjusting the Encounter
Here are some suggestions for adjusting this
encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very Weak Party: Remove one veteran
and two mastiffs
• Weak Party: Remove one veteran and
three mastiffs, and add one dire wolf
• Strong Party: Remove three mastiffs,
and add one dire wolf
• Very Strong Party: Remove three
mastiffs, and add one veteran and two
dire wolves
Treasure
The soldiers have a total of 50 gp on them.
E and G. Towers
These two towers each have three floors that
are identical. The first floor simply has a staircase
that winds around the inside and goes up.
The room on the second floor is full of weapon
racks. Longswords, short swords, and heavy
crossbows are on the racks. There are six arrow
slits in the walls of this room as well. Barrels of
crossbow bolts are next to each slit.
The third floors of these towers also have
arrow slits with barrels of crossbow bolts next to
them.
As you emerge onto the second floor of this
tower, there are seven soldiers at the ready,
swords drawn and ready to defend their
garrison.
There is an opening in this room that
leads outside to the top of the wall that
surrounds the garrison. The wall leads to
another tower. Inside the room are several
arrow slits with barrels of crossbow bolts next
to them.
The two veterans and five guards fight till
incapacitated. The soldiers were keeping watch and
they saw the characters come into the barracks.
25
Ther opening in the tower on this floor leads
to the top of the crenalated wall that surrounds the
garrison. The wall along the southern side of the
garrison leads to Tower H.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are some suggestions for adjusting this
encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very Weak Party: Remove five guards
• Weak Party: Remove five guards, and
add one veteran
• Strong Party: Remove two guards, and
add one veteran
• Very Strong Party: Remove five guards,
and add two veterans
Treasure
The soldiers have a total of 50 gp among them.
F. Tower
The first floor of this tower differs from the others
in that it also has stairs going down. The stairs lead
to Area I. This tower also doesn’t have any soldiers
on the top floors.
H. Tower
This tower differs from the others in that the first
floor is a storage room in the barracks (see Area
C2). The other floors of this tower are the same as
the others. There are no soldiers in this tower.
I. Dungeon
This is where prisoners are kept to serve out their
sentences. Malkyn Grenefeld has successfully
connected a portal to the others waiting in Abarat’s
Folly. When the characters arrive, Malkyn is leaving
through a secret door in the room that leads to the
sewers.
H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 4
 Map: The Dungeon

26 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 4

This large room is damp, smells of waste,
and is lined with prison cells. A bright purple
light illuminates the otherwise dimly lit room.
Along with a Red Plume soldier and a
drow is a middle aged woman with raven
hair dressed in chainmail armor. Jandra
greets you, “Hello heroes of Hillsfar! It seems
that we are on different sides of this little
disagreement. First Lord Yestral will not take
me alive!”
The purple glow comes from an active
portal on the wall of the dungeon. A female
mage stands near the portal, opening a
secret door on the wall. “You may know the
onslaught is coming, but you have no idea
the strength of the storm coming toward
Hillsfar.” She steps through the door and the
warriors move to protect her escape.
There is no negotiating with the group. A human
veteran, a drow elite warrior, and Jandra
Gragdowel protect Malkyn Greenfield’s escape with
their lives.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are some suggestions for adjusting this
encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very Weak Party: Remove one drow
elite warrior, and add two drow
• Weak Party: Remove the veteran, and
add one drow
• Strong Party: Add one veteran
• Very Strong Party: Add two veterans
or using a spell to neutralize the poison can keep
Jandra from dying. The other combatants fight until
Jandra is dead. At that time, they surrender.
Treasure
Malkyn left spell components worth 500 gp at the
foot of the portal. A character can choose which
components they would like them to be, up to the
value given.
XP
The characters receive 100 xp each if they manage
to keep Jandra from dying.
Conclusion
First Lord Yestral is very grateful to the characters
for their help in closing the portals.
After you have secured the garrison, the
Guild mage is taken to the portal to perform
the ritual to disable it. First Lord Yestral thanks
you for again saving Hillsfar from itself. [If the
characters saved Jandra’s life, he says, “The
information we get from Jandra will help us
greatly in defending the city against what
Grenefeld has planned for us.”]
First Lord Vuhm Yestral pays the characters the
remainer of the fee he owes them.
The characters also receive the Savior of
Hillsfar story award, and 5 Hillsfar Government
Influence Points.

Tactics
The veteran and drow elite warrior move to engage
the characters, trying to target spell casters.
Jandra stays back waiting to engage a
character who attempts to give chase after Malkyn.
Otherwise, she engages the strongest-looking
character.
Development
If Jandra Gragdowel has 20 or less hit points left
on her turn, she uses her action to ingest a vial of
poison. Only characters administering an antitoxin

27 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 4
 Rewards
Make sure the players note their rewards on their
adventure logsheets. Give your name and DCI
number (if applicable) so players can record who
ran the session.
Experience
Total up all combat experience earned for the
defeated foes and divide by the number of
characters present in the combat. For non-combat
experience, the rewards are listed per character.
Give all characters in the party non-combat
experience awards unless otherwise noted.
Treasure
The characters receive the following treasure, divided
up amongst the party. Characters should attempt
to divide treasure evenly whenever possible. Gold
piece values listed for sellable gear are calculated at
their selling price, not their purchase price.
Consumable magic items should be divided
up however the group sees fit. If more than one
character is interested in a specific consumable
magic item, the DM can determine who gets it
randomly should the group be unable to decide.
Permanent magic items are divided according to
a system. See the sidebar if the adventure awards
permanent magic items.

Combat Awards Treasure Awards

Name of Foe XP per Foe Item Name/Location GP value
Dire Wolf 200 First Lord’s reward (C1) 1000
Drow 50 House of Happiness (C3) 150
Drow Elite Warrior 1800 Commandant’s Quarters (C4) 500
Ettin 1100 Courtyard (C4) 50
Fomorian 3900 Tower E(C4) 50
Guard 25 Tower G (C4) 50
Hobgoblin Captain 700 Dungeon (C4) 500
Jandra Gragdowel 700
Mastiff 25
Veteran 700 Permanent Magic Item Distribution
D&D Adventurers League has a system in place to
determine who is awarded permanent magic items
Non-Combat Awards at the end of a session. Each character’s logsheet
contains a column to record permanent magic items
Task or Accomplishment XP per Char.
for ease of reference.
Guild mage completes ritual (C3) 100 • If all the players at the table agree on one
Find Grenefeld’s letters to Jandra (C4, A) 100 character taking possession of a permanent
Escort Servants Out of Garrison (C4, C2) 100 magic item, that character gets the item.
Keep Jandra from Dying (Chapter 4) 100 • In the event that one or more characters
indicate an interest in possessing a
The minimum total award for each character permanent magic item, the character that
participating in this adventure is 4,500 experience possesses the fewest permanent magic items
points. gets the item. If there is a tie in the total
number of permanent magic items owned
The maximum total award for each character by contesting characters, the item’s owner is
participating in this adventure is 6,000 experience determined randomly by the DM.
points.

28 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 4
Audience Stones (Sending Stones)
Wondrous item, uncommon
These smooth stones made of marble have the crest
of Hillsfar carved into them. As well as the properties
described in the Dungeon Master’s Guide (pg. 199), these
stones also have the ability to directly contact the First
Lord of Hillsfar. You have been assured that he always
keeps the stone close at hand. Contacting the First Lord
expends the single use the stones gain every dawn.
Potion of Greater Healing
Potion, uncommon
A description of this item can be found in the Dungeon
Master’s Guide.
Potion of Growth
Potion, uncommon
A description of this item can be found in the Dungeon
Master’s Guide.
29
Renown
Each character receives one point of renown.
Downtime
Each character receives 10 downtime days at the
conclusion of this adventure.
Story Awards
Characters have the opportunity to earn the
following story awards during this adventure.
Savior of Hillsfar. Your actions in finding the
portals created by Malkyn Grenefeld have given
the army of Hillsfar a chance against the incoming
Dark Fey. The citizens of Hillsfar recognize you
when you are in a public tavern or inn. The first
round of drinks and food are paid for by grateful
patrons. Your first night of stay at any inn is on the
house as well.
Special Brew. Master Landon has promised to
brew one potion of your choice (common or
uncommon) to thank you for ensuring the safety of
her Guild Mage.
DM Rewards
For running this adventure, you receive 1500 XP,
750 gp, and 10 downtime days.
H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : C H A P T E R 4
 Appendix: Monster Statistics Drow Elite Warrior
Medium humanoid (elf), neutral evil
Armor Class 18 (studded leather, shield)
Commoner
Hit Points 71 (11d8+22)
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment Speed 30 ft.
Armor Class 10 STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Hit Points 4 (1d8) 13 (+1) 18 (+4) 14 (+2) 11 (+0) 13 (+1) 12 (+1)
Speed 30 ft.
Saving Throws Dex +7, Con +5, Wis +4
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) Skills Perception +4, Stealth +10
Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 14
Senses passive Perception 10 Languages Elvish, Undercommon
Languages any one language (usually Common) Challenge 5 (1,800 XP)
Challenge 0 (10 XP) Fey Ancestry. The drow has advantage on saving
Actions throws against being charmed and magic can’t put
the drow to sleep.
Club. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft., one Innate Spellcasting. The drow’s spellcasting ability
target. Hit: 2 (1d4) bludgeoning damage. is Charisma (spell save DC 12). It can innately
cast the following spells, requiring no material
components:
Ettin
At will: dancing lights
Large giant, chaotic evil
1/day each: darkness, faerie fire, levitate (self only)
Armor Class 12 (natural armor) Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the drow
Hit Points 85 (10d10+30) has disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on
Speed 40 ft. Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on sight.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
21 (+5) 8 (-1) 17 (+3) 6 (-2) 10 (+0) 8 (-1) Actions
Multiattack. The drow makes two shortsword
Skills Perception +4
attacks.
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 14
Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach
Languages Giant, Orc
5 ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d6+4) piercing damage
Challenge 4 (1,100 XP)
plus 10 (3d6) poison damage.
Two Heads. The ettin has advantage on Wisdom
(Perception) checks and on saving throws against Hand Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +7 to hit,
being blinded, charmed, deafened, frightened, range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d6+4) piercing
stunned, and knocked unconscious. damage and the target must succeed on a DC 13
Constitution saving throw or be poisoned for 1 hour.
Wakeful. When one of the ettin’s heads is asleep, its
If the saving throw fails by 5 or more, the target is
other head is awake.
also unconscious while poisoned in this way. The
Actions target wakes up if it takes damage or if another
Multiattack. The ettin makes two attacks: one with creature takes an action to shake it awake.
its battleaxe and one with its morningstar. (continued)
Battleaxe. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 Reactions
ft., one target. Hit: 14 (2d8+5) slashing damage.
Parry. The drow adds 3 to its AC against one melee
(continued) attack that would hit it. To do so, the drow must see
Morningstar. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach the attacker and be wielding a melee weapon.
5 ft., one target. Hit: 14 (2d8+5) piercing damage.

30 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : A P P E N D I X
Drow Fomorian
Medium humanoid (elf), neutral evil Huge giant, chaotic evil
Armor Class 15 (chain shirt) Armor Class 14 (natural armor)
Hit Points 13 (3d8) Hit Points 149 (13d12+65)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
10 (+0) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 11 (+0) 12 (+1) 23 (+6) 10 (+0) 20 (+5) 9 (-1) 14 (+2) 6 (-2)

Skills Perception +2, Stealth +4 Skills Perception +8, Stealth +3

Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 12 Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 18
Languages Elvish, Undercommon Languages Giant, Undercommon
Challenge 1/4 (50 XP) Challenge 8 (3,900 XP)
Fey Ancestry. The drow has advantage on saving Actions
throws against being charmed and magic can’t put
the drow to sleep. Multiattack. The fomorian attacks twice with its
Innate Spellcasting. The drow’s spellcasting ability greatclub or makes one greatclub attack and uses
is Charisma (spell save DC 11). It can innately Evil Eye once.
cast the following spells, requiring no material Greatclub. Melee Weapon Attack: +9 to hit, reach 15
components: ft., one target. Hit: 19 (3d8+6) bludgeoning damage.
At will: dancing lights Evil Eye. The fomorian magically forces a creature
1/day each: darkness, faerie fire it can see within 60 feet of it to make a DC 14
Charisma saving throw. The creature takes 27
Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the drow
(6d8) psychic damage on a failed save, or half as
has disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on
much on a successful one.
Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on sight.
Actions
Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach
5 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6+2) piercing damage.
Hand Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit,
range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6+2) piercing
damage and the target must succeed on a DC 13
Constitution saving throw or be poisoned for 1 hour.
If the saving throw fails by 5 or more, the target is
also unconscious while poisoned in this way. The
target wakes up if it takes damage or if another
creature takes an action to shake it awake.

31 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : A P P E N D I X
 Hobgoblin Captain Veteran
Medium humanoid (goblinoid), lawful evil Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
Armor Class 17 (half plate) Armor Class 17 (splint)
Hit Points 39 (6d8 + 12) Hit Points 58 (9d8 + 18)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA 16 (+3) 13 (+1) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 10 (+0)
15 (+2) 14 (+2) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 13 (+1)
Skills Athletics +5, Perception +2
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 10
Senses passive Perception 12
Languages Common, Goblin
Languages any one language (usually Common)
Challenge 3 (700 XP) Challenge 3 (700 XP)
Martial Advantage. Once per turn, the hobgoblin
can deal an extra 10 (3d6) damage to a creature Actions
it hits with a weapon attack if that creature is Multiattack. The veteran makes two longsword
within 5 feet of an ally of the hobgoblin that isn’t attacks. If it has a shortsword drawn, it can also
incapacitated. make a shortsword attack.
(continued) Longsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5
ft., one target. Hit:7 (1d8 + 3) slashing damage, or 8
(1d10 + 3) slashing damage if used with two hands.
Actions Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach
Multiattack. The hobgoblin makes two greatsword 5 ft., one target. Hit:6 (1d6 + 3) piercing damage.
attacks. Heavy Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit,
Greatsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach range100/400 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d10) piercing
5 ft., one target. Hit: 9 (2d6 + 2) piercing damage. damage.
Javelin. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit,
Mastiff
reach 5 ft. or range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit:5 (1d6
+ 2) piercing damage. Medium beast, unaligned
Leadership (Recharges after a Short or Long Armor Class 12
Rest). For 1 minute, the hobgoblin can utter a Hit Points 5 (1d8 + 1)
special command or warning whenever a non- Speed 40 ft.
hostile creature that it can see within 30 feet of it STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
13 (+1) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 3 (-4) 12 (+1) 7 (-2)
makes an attack roll or saving throw. The creature
can add a d4 to its roll provided it can hear and Skills Perception +3
understand the hobgoblin. A creature can benefit Senses passive Perception 13
from only one Leadership die at a time. This effect Languages
ends if the hobgoblin is incapacitated.
Challenge 1/8 (25 XP)
Keen Hearing and Smell. The mastiff has
advantage on Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely
hearing or smell.
Actions
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 4 (1d6 + 1) piercing damage. If
the target is a creature, it must succeed on a DC 11
Strength saving throw or be knocked prone.

32 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : A P P E N D I X
Dire Wolf Jandra Gragdowel
Large beast, unaligned Medium humanoid (human), chaotic neutral
Armor Class 14 (natural armor) Armor Class 17 (splint)
Hit Points 37 (5d10+ 10) Hit Points 65 (10d8 +20)
Speed 50 ft. Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
17 (+3) 15 (+1) 15 (+2) 3 (-4) 12 (+1) 7 (-2) 18 (+3) 15 (+2) 14 (+2) 14 (+2) 11 (+0) 14 (+2)

Skills Perception +3, Stealth +4 Saving Throws Str +6, Dex +4, Wis +2
Senses passive Perception 13 Skills Athletics+6, Deception +4
Languages - Senses passive Perception 12
Challenge 1 (200 XP) Languages Common, Elven
Keen Hearing and Smell. The dire wolf has Challenge 5 (1800 XP)
advantage on Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely
on hearing or smell. Actions
Pack Tactics. The dire wolf has advantage on an Multiattack. Jandra makes two melee attacks with
attack roll against a creature if at least one of the her longsword.
dire wolf’s allies is within 5 feet of the creature and Longsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach
the ally isn’t incapacitated. 5 ft., one target. Hit:8 (1d8 + 4) slashing damage, or
9 (1d10+4) slashing damage if used with two hands.
Actions
Dagger. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +6 to
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft., hit, reach 5 ft. or range 20/60 ft., one target. Hit: 5
one target. Hit: 10 (2d6 + 3) piercing damage. If (1d4 + 4) slashing damage, or 9 (1d10+4) slashing
the target is a creature, it must succeed on a DC 13 damage if used with two hands.
Strength saving throw or be knocked prone.
Reactions
Parry. Jandra adds 2 to her AC against one melee
Guard attack that would hit it. To do so, the captain must
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment see the attacker and be weilding a weapon.
Armor Class 16 (chain shirt, shield)
Hit Points 11 (2d8 + 2)
Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
13 (+1) 12 (+1) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 10 (+0)

Skills Perception +2
Senses passive Perception 12
Languages any one languages (usually Common)
Challenge 1/8 (25 XP)
Actions
Spear. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft. or
range 20/60 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d6 + 1) piercing
damage.

33 H I L L 1 - 3 / R E S U RG E N C E : A P P E N D I X
 Onslaught
Malkyn Grenefeld and her dark fey allies have vowed to destroy Hillsfar, and the attack is
imminent. The forces of evil have established traitors inside the city, have stolen secret defense
plans, and have some secret allies preparing to join the assault. The forces of good have only
brave adventurers willing to die for their cause. A D&D Adventurers League adventure set in
Hillsfar.

A 4-hour adaptable adventure for 5th-10th level characters

Baldman Games
Adventure Designer
Adventure Code: HILL 1-S

Producer: Baldman Games

Hillsfar Administrator: Cindy Moore
Organized Play: Chris Lindsay
D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall, Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks, Alan
Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League, all other Wizards
of the Coast product names, and their respective logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive likenesses are property of Wizards of the
Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America. Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the
express written permission of Wizards of the Coast.

©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31, 2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4 The Square,
Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 1
Introduction
Welcome to Onslaught, a D&D Adventurers League
adventure, the capstone event of the Dark Intentions
trilgoy.
This adventure is designed for three to seven 5th-
10th level characters, and is optimized for five 8th-
level characters.
The adventure is set in the Moonsea region of the
Forgotten Realms, in and around the city of Hillsfar.
The D&D Adventurers
League
This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of the
D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure,
players track their characters’ experience, treasure,
and other rewards, and can take those characters
through other adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a store
event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a DCI
number. This number is your official Wizards of the
Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have a
number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to use
to create and advance their characters. Players can
continue to play their characters after the storyline
season has finished, possibly participating in a
second or third storyline with those same characters.
A character’s level is the only limitation for
adventure play. A player cannot use a character of a
level higher or lower than the level range of a D&D
Adventurers League adventure.
For more information on playing, running games
as a Dungeon Master, and organizing games for the
D&D Adventurers League, please visit the D&D
Adventurers League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Preparing the Adventure
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
 Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
 Read through the adventure, taking notes of
anything you’d like to highlight or remind yourself
while running the adventure, such as a way you’d
like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d like to use
in a combat.
 Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
 Gather together any resources you’d like to use to
aid you in running this adventure--such as
notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and
battlemaps.
 If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.
Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
 Character name and level
 Character race and class
 Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most common
passive ability check
 Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, etc.)
Players that have characters outside the adventure’s
level range cannot participate in the adventure
with those characters. Players with ineligible
characters can make a new 1st-level character or use
a pregenerated character. Players can play an
adventure they previously played or ran as a
Dungeon Master, but not with the same character.
Ensure that each player has an official adventure
logsheet for his or her character (if not, get one from
the organizer). The player fills out the adventure
name, session number, date, and your name and DCI
number. In addition, the player also fills in the
starting values for experience, gold, downtime,
renown, and number of permanent magic items. He
or she fill in the other values and write notes at the
conclusion of the session. Each player is responsible
for maintaining an accurate logsheet.
If you have time, you can do a quick scan of a
player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing looks
HILL 1-S Onslaught 2
out of order. If you see magic items of very high
rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you can
ask players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict item
use or ask them to use a standard ability score array.
Point players to the D&D Adventurers League Player’s
Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and it’s
the beginning of an adventure or episode, they can
declare their activity and spend the days now.
Alternatively, they can do so at the end of the
adventure or episode. Players should select their
characters’ spells and other daily options prior to
the start of the adventure, unless the adventure
specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread the
adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, you may see sidebars to
help make adjustments for smaller/larger groups,
and characters of higher/lower levels than the
optimized group. Most of the time, this is used for
combat encounters.
You may adjust the adventure beyond the
guidelines given. For example, if you’re playing with
a group of inexperienced players, you might want to
make the adventure a little easier; for very
experienced players, you may want to make it a little
harder. Therefore, five categories of party strength
have been created for you to use as a guide. Feel free
to use a different adjustment during the adventure if
the recommended party strength feels off for the
group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of five
8th-level characters. To figure out whether you
need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
 Add up the total levels of all the characters
 Divide the total by the number of characters
 Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round
fractions of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table:
Determining Party Strength
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very Weak
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very Strong
Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment of
the game for the players. You help guide the
narrative and bring the words on these pages to life.
The outcome of a fun game session often creates
stories that live well beyond the play at the table.
Always follow this golden rule when you DM for a
group:
Make decisions and adjudications that enhance
the fun of the adventure when possible.
To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
 You are empowered to make adjustments to the
adventure and make decisions about how the
group interacts with the world of this adventure.
Doing so is especially important and applicable
outside of combat, but feel free to adjust the
adventure for groups that are having too easy or
too hard of a time.
 Don’t make the adventure too easy or too difficult
for a group. Never being challenged makes for a
boring game and being overwhelmed makes for a
frustrating one. Gauge the experience of the
players (not the characters) with the game, try to
feel out (or ask) what they like in a game, and
attempt to give each of them the experience
they’re after when they play D&D. Give everyone a
chance to shine.
 Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game session
moving along appropriately. Watch for stalling,
since play loses momentum when this happens. At
the same time, make sure that the players don’t
finish too early; provide them with a full play
experience. Try to be aware of running long or
short. Adjust the pacing accordingly
 Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free to
modify the text as you see fit, especially when
dialogue is present.
 Give the players appropriate hints so they can
make informed choices about how to proceed.
Players should be given clues and hints when
appropriate so they can tackle puzzles, combat,
HILL 1-S Onslaught 3
 and interactions without getting frustrated over Spellcasting Services
lack of information. Doing so helps to encourage Spell Cost
immersion in the adventure and gives players Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
“little victories” for figuring out good choices from Identify 20 gp
clues. Lesser restoration 40 gp
In short, being the DM isn’t about following the Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about Remove curse 90 gp
facilitating a fun, challenging game environment for Speak with dead 90 gp
the players. The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has more Divination 210 gp
information on the art of running a D&D game. Greater restoration 450 gp
Raise dead 1,250 gp
Downtime and Lifestyle
Acolyte Background
At the beginning of each play session, players must
A character possessing the acolyte background requesting
declare whether or not they are spending any days
spellcasting services at a temple of his or her faith may
of downtime. The player records the downtime request one spell per day from the Spellcasting Services table
spent on the adventure logsheet. The following for free. The only cost paid for the spell is the base price for
options are available to players during downtime the consumed material component, if any.
(see the D&D basic rules or the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for more information):
 Catching up
Disease, Death, and Recovery
 Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
commit to crafting a single item) poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might not
 Practicing a profession have the same characters return from session to
 Recuperating session, here are the rules when bad things happen
 Spellcasting services to characters.
 Training
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating
Other downtime options might be available during
adventures or unlocked through play, including
Effects
faction-specific activities. A character still affected by diseases, poisons, and
In addition, whenever a character spends other similar effects at the conclusion of an
downtime days, that character also spends the adventure can spend downtime days recuperating
requisite expense for his or her lifestyle. Costs are until such time as he or she resolves the effect to its
per day, so a character that spends ten days of conclusion (see the recuperating activity in the D&D
downtime also spends ten days of expenses Basic Rules).
maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some downtime If a character doesn’t resolve the effect between
activities help with lifestyle expenses or add lifestyle sessions, that character begins the next session still
expenses. affected by the debilitating effect.

Spellcasting Services Death

Any settlement the size of a town or larger can
provide some spellcasting services. Characters need
to be able to travel to the settlement to obtain these
services.
Spell services generally available include healing
and recovery spells, as well as information-gathering
spells. Other spell services might be available as
specified in the adventure. The number of spells
available to be cast as a service is limited to a
maximum of three per day total, unless otherwise
noted.
A character who is killed during the course of the
adventure has a few options at the end of the session
(or whenever arriving back in civilization) if no one
in the adventuring party has immediate access to a
raise dead or revivify spell, or similar magic. A
character subject to a raise dead spell is affected
negatively until all long rests have been completed
during an adventure. Alternatively, each downtime
day spent after raise dead reduces the penalty to
attack rolls, saving throws, and ability checks by 1, in
addition to any other benefits the downtime activity
might provide.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 4
 Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any of
the other options, the player creates a new character.
The new character does not have any items or
rewards possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing any
vital organs and is mostly whole) and the player
would like the character to be returned to life, the
party can take the body back to civilization and use
the dead character’s funds to pay for a raise dead
spell. A raise dead spell cast in this manner costs the
character 1,250 gp.
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As above,
except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for the raise
dead spell is paid for by the party at the end of the
session. Other characters are under no obligation to
spend their funds to bring back a dead party
member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to 4
and a member of a faction, the dead character’s body
can be returned to civilization and a patron from the
faction ensures that he or she receives a raise dead
spell. However, any character invoking this charity
forfeits all experience and rewards from that session
(both those earned prior to and after death during
that session) and cannot replay that episode or
adventure with that character again. Once a
character reaches 5th level, this option is no longer
available.
Adventure Background
Hillsfar, the City of Trade, is currently covered in
shadow: literally and figuratively. Malkyn Grenefeld,
the chamberlain of the former First Lord, Torin
Nomerthal, is mad with grief at his death. She has
vowed to bring the city down in retribution.
To that end, she has formed alliances with several
forces: predominately, the dark fey of the
Cormanthor Forest. These forces of evil have sowed
discord within the city, smuggled monsters and
other minions into the city proper, created portals to
move troops effectively, and gained the support of
some powerful monsters.
The adventure begins just hours before the evil
forces attack the city, and groups of heroes are called
upon to help defend Hillsfar.
Overview
Unlike other Adventurers League adventures you
may have run, this one is adaptable. The idea behind
the event is that each convention running it can
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
make it their own. Blank spaces have been left for
the convention coordinator—or even the DMs
themselves—to fill in with information, NPCs,
locations, and challenges that will make the event
unique to their convention.
For example, one of the Part 1 missions asks the
adventurers to leave the safety of the city walls,
infiltrate an enemy camp, and rescue an important
NPC. The convention coordinator can name that NPC,
detail the monsters guarding the prisoner, and even
create a layout for the camp.
This involves work on the part of the convention,
but it also gives the patrons of that convention a
unique experience and a personalized story. And the
convention should be willing to do the work for the
opportunity to provide such an experience.
This adventure is divided into three parts:
Part 1: The Missions. The adventurers are asked
to perform specific tasks to ready the city for the
attack. Success or failure at these missions affect the
story moving forward and the difficulty of
encounters is later parts.
Part 2: The Attack. The attack begins.
Adventurers must deal with threats within the city
while the Red Plumes defend the walls.
Part 3: The Final Onslaught. The full forces of the
invading army are brought to bear.
Adventure Hooks
Heroes of Hillsfar. Characters who have
adventured in Hillsfar and the surrounding region
have ties there. They have maintained their
presence in or have returned to the area to either
keep a vigilant eye out for danger or to assist with
the region’s recovery efforts.
Faction Directive. The Factions know that there is
much work to be done to rebuild the City of Trade.
They have directed the adventurers to Hillsfar to
help First Lord Vuhm Yestral keep the peace.
Survival. The adventurers just happen to be in
Hillsfar when the shadow falls over the city. As
heroes with reputations for skill and bravery, they
are looked upon to again rescue innocents from the
ravages of evil.
Introduction
When the players are ready, read the following. This
can be read individually by DMs to their tables, or to
all the players simultaneously by one reader. The
adventure assumes that all the characters are in the
same room.
HILL 1-S Onslaught 5
You find yourselves in an audience hall within the tower of
the First Lord, Vuhm Yestral. The broad-shouldered, gray-
haired old soldier enters the room, and everyone stands. “Be
seated,” he says in a hoarse voice. It is obvious he has not
slept much in the last ten-day. “I’m sure most of you know
what we face. An army of dark fey—and other things—waits
within a short distance of the city. Our security has been
breached in the most grievous way. Some within the city
want to return to the old ways to fear and hatred—“
The speech is interrupted as a guard drops his spear,
causing a crash that makes everyone start. “And, it appears
we are also cursed by clumsiness,” Yestral finishes with a
pained smirk. “But you are here! You are our hopes. The Red
Plumes defend the city walls, and they are prepared to a
soldier to die defending the citizens of this great city. But you
are our secret weapons.”
He waves his arm, and a middle-aged man dressed in splint
mail steps forward. “This is Bertram Mosslighter. With the
betrayal of our former Commandant, Mosslighter here is now
acting Commandant. He will provide you with the details
about your parts in winning the battlefield this day. Carry on,
and may Tempus himself guide our hand while Tymora
guides your fate.”
Roleplaying Bertram Mosslighter
Acting Commandant of the Red Plumes Bertram Mosslighter
is a no-nonsense, by-the-book, crime-will-be-punished kind
of guy. The fact that he is 6'5" tall and is only seen wearing
his armor, even in a casual setting, helps illicit fear and
respect from those around him. He expects nothing but
perfection from the soldiers under him, and he does not
hesitate to let them know he disagrees with something they
have done.
Mosslighter dismisses everyone in the room except
for the adventurers, as well as his closest advisors
and lieutenants. Without any pleasantries, he begins
listening the six missions that the adventurers must
undertake outside of the city walls to help with the
battle about to begin:
A. Retrieve the kidnapped
B. Scout the secret enemy
C. Destroy the siege engine
D. Elicit help from Elfhome
E. Disrupt the ritual
F. Intercept the plans
Use the details in Part 1 to give the basic background
information about the missions. Let the adventurers
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
choose the missions and debate which ones their
own parties should undertake. Even allow individual
adventurers to trade tables if they choose.
At the end of the missions in Part 1, the groups are
expected to turn to Hillsfar Castle for a thorough
debriefing and planning for the next part of the
battle of Hillsfar.
Part 1. The Missions
Expected Duration: 60 minutes
These missions are expected to run for 1 hour. Each
mission is described in general below. It is up to the
individual DM to create the map, decide on the
enemies, and work out the other encounter elements
based on the information provided. Each table
should play only 1 mission in this part, although
each mission may have multiple steps. There is a
drawback for any mission not completed
successfully.
At the end of the missions, each table should relate
their successes or failures to the rest of the tables.
Allow the interaction between tables to happen for a
length of time reasonable for the flow of the
adventure and the time left in the slot.
A. Retrieve the Kidnapped
The fey forces have kidnapped Heldred Masonarch
and her children. The dwarf architect was consulted
on reinforcing the walls of city, and now the fey
forces are attempting to get important information
out of her. The adventurers must rescue her before
she divulges the information.
Encounter Outline
The following must be overcome for this mission to
be successful:
 Find the place where Masonarch and her two
children are being held.
 Fight a battle with a scout party on the way.
 Defeat the guards at the enemy prison, and
rescue the dwarven family.
 The family should be locked in a cage that
requires avoid traps and picking locks to get
the family to safety.
 Escape from the area and get back to the city.
B. Scout the Secret Enemy
Information gathered from enemy soldiers revealed
that there is some secret ally that the fey forces plan
to level against the city. This secret enemy is waiting
HILL 1-S Onslaught 6
in a location within the Cormanthor Forest. The
party needs to find this location, learn the identity of
the secret enemy, and bring that information back.
There is no expectation on the group to try to defeat
this enemy at this point. The information is most
valuable.
Encounter Outline
The following must be overcome for this mission to
be successful:
 Find the place where the ally of the fey army is
being hidden. This could involve Nature and
Survival checks, or a brief encounter with
friendly natural creatures.
 Fight a battle with a scout party on the way.
 Sneak to get close enough to the encampment.
Use Stealth or other checks to avoid detection.
 The adventurers find that the secret enemy is
massive animated fungal growth with wings.
 Escape from the area and get back to the city.
C. Destroy the Siege Engine
The craft of war requires tools, and machinery like
siege engines and catapults are standard fare. The
Red Plumes have learned that the fey forces may
have created a magical siege engine. One group must
locate and destroy this piece of equipment.
Encounter Outline
The following must be overcome for this mission to
be successful:
 Find the camp where the siege engine is being
built. This could involve Nature and Survival
checks, or a brief encounter with friendly
natural creatures.
 Fight a battle with a scout party on the way.
 The siege engine is a large hollow wooden
structure that can fly. It is guarded by a couple
of different groups of enemies.
 Destroying the engine can be done with fire or
acid, or by getting inside it and disabling the
arcane runes that make it fly.
 Escape from the area and get back to the city.
 If the adventurers are very good and very
lucky, let them take it over and fly it back to
the city.
D. Elicit Help from Elfhome
The fey forces threaten not just Hillsfar. If the forces
of evil prevail, other settlements in the area are sure
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
to fall. You are asked to seek out the leaders and
Elfhome and get their support in the battle. Any
troops they can spare, even if it is just to harry the
fey forces from the flank during the battle, would
assist Hillsfar in defending the city.
Encounter Outline
The following must be overcome for this mission to
be successful:
 Fight a battle with a scout party on the way to
Elfhome.
 Use whatever persuasive tactics are necessary
to get an audience with the leaders of Elfhome
and convince them to assist in the war effort.
 Do a favor for the leaders of Elfhome to show
good faith. This could be fighting a battle for
them with nearby threats, remove the
corruption from a nearby stream that
provides water, etc.
 Return to the city through enemy lines with
the help secured.
E. Disrupt the Ritual
A days-long ritual has been undertaken by the fey
forces to summon a host of infernal allies in the
battle. A group must interrupt the ritual and make
sure the demonic allies are not summoned.
Encounter Outline
The following must be overcome for this mission to
be successful:
 Find the camp where the ritual is being
conducted. This could involve Nature and
Survival checks, or a brief encounter with
friendly natural creatures.
 Fight a battle with a scout party on the way.
 The ritual is close to completion, so not only
must the adventurers kill the enemy, they
must then take active steps to undo the ritual.
 Reversing the ritual could involve Arcana and
Religion checks, or other physical checks to
destroy the apparatus of summoning.
 Some demons could be added as enemies if
the ritual does not get stopped immediately.
 Escape from the area and get back to the city.
E. Intercept the Plans
The fey forces are currently divided into many
camps. Fearing spies and magical observation, plans
are being transferred the old-fashioned way: on
HILL 1-S Onslaught 7
paper via messenger. An important set of plans is
currently on route to the leadership of the fey forces,
and intercepting these plans could be invaluable.
Encounter Outline
The following must be overcome for this mission to
be successful:
 Find the path where the messengers will be
travelling. This could involve Nature and
Survival checks, or a brief encounter with
friendly natural creatures.
 Fight a battle with a scout party on the way.
 The messengers could be any creatures, from
typical enemy humanoids, to strange beasts of
the forest, to mundane animals that would not
draw attention.
 Messages found are in code, so Investigation
or History checks could be called to decipher
the message, that leads to the conclusion that
the real messages are being delivered
elsewhere. Use that information to find the
real messenger.
 Escape from the area and get back to the city.
Treasure
Each mission should reward the adventurers with
500 total gp in gems, coins, or other goods. In
additional, the adventurers should find 5 potions of
greater healing as treasure along the way.
Failure
For each mission that is not a total success, impose
one of the following restrictions in the final battle:
 Advantage on attack rolls in the first 3 rounds
for the enemies in Part 3.
 Double the hit points of the first enemies faced
in Part 3.
 Add numbers of enemies to make the
encounter more challenging.
 Eliminate any helpful NPCs the adventurers
would have otherwise had.
 Add something of your own devising that is
similar in scope to any of the above.
Rest
Groups should be allowed to take a short rest now,
because it is the last one they will be able to take.
They are provided with the opportunity to share the
results of their missions.
Part 2. The Portals
Expected Duration: 60 minutes
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
These missions are expected to run for 1 hour. Each
mission finds the adventurers rushing to the site of a
place where a portal is opening within the city, and
enemy forces are entering the city.
Each portal requires 2 groups of adventurers to
deal with a portal at a given location. Pair up with
another DM to detail the location. Each location pair
should be different, with a map you create on your
own, based on what kind of battle you want to run.
Each location should have unique terrain to interact
with. Here are some suggestions:
 The top of a rickety building with holes in the
roof and stirges in the attic
 A zoo full of exotic animals and reptiles
 An ancient sewer system beneath the city
 Training rooms beneath the arena with pits
and traps
 A garden with exotic plants, including some
that move and attack
 An alchemist’s lab full of equipment and
hazardous chemicals
 The docks where some of the piers and
scaffolding are being repaired
 Any other locale you can imagine
At least 2 waves of monsters should emerge from
the portal during this part for each party. The DM
Coordinator might also come around with special
encounters (additional monsters, special effects,
etc.) during the event.
In addition, the dark fey army has created a terrible
monstrosity: a huge flying myconid and a smaller
myconid army. These myconids share hit points
(500 for APL 8, 700 for APL 9, 900 for APL 10). The
huge myconid uses the stat block on an adult green
dragon reskinned to appear as a flying myconid.
Portals
At some point during the combat (close to the end of
this part), the portal should weaken, giving the
adventurers the chance to close them. The portals
are semi-physical entities, allowing them to be
closed with DC 15 checks with any of the following
skills: Arcana, Athletics, Religion, Sleight of Hand.
Allow other skills to work if players can make a good
argument. At least 3 successes must be made within
2 rounds. Failure to close the portal does not mean
the mission failed, but see Failure below.
HILL 1-S Onslaught 8
Treasure
Each mission should reward the adventurers with
500 total gp in gems, coins, or other goods from the
monsters. In additional, the adventurers are given 5
potions of healing by a Red Plume soldier surveying
the scene.
Failure
If any pair of tables fails to close their portal, some of
the monsters in the first wave of Part 3 appears out
of thin air, next to the most vulnerable adventurers,
and gain surprise.
Transition
At the end of this part, the adventures hear that the
city wall is under attack:
Before you have even a moment to catch your breaths, you
hear the sound of a great horn: the city walls are under
attack! Several enormous booms echo across the city, and
the sound of rocks striking earth and buildings resonates
inside your skulls. As dust billows in the distance, you realized
that several parts of the city wall have been breached. You
are going to be needed to plug those holes before too many
enemy troops can enter.
Part 3. The Onslaught
Expected Duration: 90 minutes
This part happens in three phases. In phase 1, the
adventurers must stop enemy troops from entering
the city through the breaches in the wall. Phase 2
sees an enormous ooze form within the city, forcing
the adventurers to fall back and deal with it and a
whole. Phase 3 begins after the destruction of the
large ooze, where the adventurers must clean up the
mess and drive the invaders back.
Phase 1
Each table finds that a 30 foot wide breach has been
made in the walls. One team of monsters is just
crossing through the breach when they arrive. In
addition, at the start of every round, three medium-
sized oozes come through the wall. The oozes move
at 40 feet and use their actions to Dash in order to
get past the adventurers. They have an AC of 12 and
a +4 to saves and 15 hp each. They do not attack.
Once they are past the PCs, they can wriggle into
cracks in the street. Let the Special Coordinator
know each round how many escaped from your
table. After a certain number escape, the Special
Coordinator will instruct you to move to phase 2.
Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only .
Phase 2
When phase 2 starts, read:
The blobs that have been slipping past you and disappearing
finally reappear, but not as the small blobs you had seen
earlier. A large blob, larger than any building in Hillsfar, rears
up and is visible above the building of the city. It clutches
innocent city-folk and Red Plume guards in awful
pseudopods, and the victims dissolve in goo before your very
eyes. Red Plume guards come to plug the breaches. The
Acting Commandant shouts at you. “My troops are no match
for that thing! Get over there and deal with it while we still
have a city to save!”
Each table will fight the same blob, doing damage to
their portion of the creature. Use the stats for blob of
death at the end of this document.
After the creature has taken x points of damage total,
read:
You relentless barrage of attacks finally phase the monstrous
ooze. It breaks into smaller parts, each set of smaller oozes
roiling off down city streets and into buildings. .
Phase 3
If a pair of tables fails to close their portal, some of
the monsters in the first wave of Part 3 appears out
of thin air, next to the most vulnerable adventurers,
and gain surprise.
Transition
At the end of this part, the adventures hear that the
city wall is under attack:
Conclusion
TBD
Treasure
TBD
HILL 1-S Onslaught 9
Rewards Renown
Make sure players note their rewards on their Each character receives one point of renown.
adventure logsheets. Give your name and DCI
number (if applicable) so players can record who Downtime
ran the session.
Each character receives 10 downtime days at the
Experience conclusion of this adventure.

Award experience based on the success of the table: Story Awards

Combat Awards Characters have the opportunity to earn the
Success XP per PC following story award during this adventure.
Total Success 6000
Partial Success 5500 Knight of the Plume
For bravery in the face of overwhelming odds, you
Failure 4500
have been awarded the title of “Knight of the Plume,
Protector of Hillsfar.” This new-found order has
The minimum total award for each character
established by First Lord Vuhm Yestral of Hillsfar,
participating in this adventure is 4500 experience
and you are the first group to have been awarded
points.
this honor. While within the jurisdiction of Hillsfar,
The maximum total award for each character
you can expect to be addressed with the honorific
participating in this adventure is 6000 experience
“Sir” or “Lady” depending on your preference. The
points.
doors of Hillsfar Castle are open to you, and you can
Treasure get lodging and a meal there.
In addition, you have been titled with a small plot
The characters receive the following treasure, of barren land on the outskirts of Hillsfar, outside
divided up amongst the party. Characters should the city walls. The land is currently in bad shape, as
attempt to divide treasure evenly whenever possible. the armies of the dark fey have ravaged it while
Gold piece values listed for sellable gear are approaching Hillsfar. The deed and title to this land
calculated at their selling price, not their purchase can be held for as long as the character is alive, but it
price. cannot be transferred to anyone else. In addition,
Consumable magic items should be divided up because of the current political unrest in Hillsfar, no
however the group sees fit. If more than one development can take place on this land until this
character is interested in a specific consumable character earns another story award which allows
magic item, the DM can determine who gets it for development of the land.
randomly should the group be unable to decide. In return for the title and the land, you are
Permanent magic items are divided according to expected to act in a manner befitting the title,
a system. See the sidebar if the adventure awards especially when you are representing Hillsfar to
permanent magic items. people outside of Hillsfar and the Moonsea region.
Reports of questionable behavior getting back to the
Treasure Awards leaders of Hillsfar could result in having this honor
Item Name/Location GP Value rescinded.
Part 1 Treasure 500
Part 2 Treasure 500
DM Rewards
TBD
Potion of Greater Healing
Potion, uncommon
A description of this item can be found in the
Dungeon Master's Guide.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 10
Appendix. NPC/Monster Statistics
Owlbear
Large monstrosity, unaligned
Team 1
Armor Class 13 (natural armor)
Druid (1)
Hit Points 59 (7d10 + 21)
Speed 40 ft.
Owlbear (1)
Shambling Mound (1) STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
20 (+5) 12 (+1) 17 (+3) 3 (−4) 12 (+1) 7 (−2)
Adjusting the Encounter
Skills Perception +3
Very Weak : Replace (1) Shambling Mound with (4) Vine Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 13
Blights. Add (1) Owlbear.
Languages —
Weak: Replace (1) Shambling Mound with (4) Vine Blights
and (2) Twig Blights. Add (1) Owlbear. Challenge 3 (700 XP)
Strong: Add (1) Owlbear. Keen Sight and Smell. The owlbear has advantage on
Very Strong: Add (2) Owlbears. Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on sight or smell.

Actions
Druid
Multiattack. The owlbear makes two attacks: one with
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
its beak and one with its claws.
Armor Class 11 (16 with barkskin) Beak. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
Hit Points 27 (5d8 + 5) creature. Hit: 10 (1d10 + 5) piercing damage.
Speed 30 ft.
Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA target. Hit: 14 (2d8 + 5) slashing damage.
10 (+0) 12 (+1) 13 (+1) 12 (+1) 15 (+2) 11 (+0)
Shambling Mound
Skills Medicine +4, Nature +3, Perception +4
Large plant, unaligned
Senses passive Perception 14
Languages Druidic plus any two languages Armor Class 15 (natural armor)
Challenge 2 (450 XP) Hit Points 136 (16d10 + 48)
Spellcasting. The druid is a 4th-level spellcaster. Its Speed 20 ft., swim 20 ft.
spellcasting ability is Wisdom (spell save DC 12, +4 to
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
hit with spell attacks). It has the following druid spells 18 (+4) 8 (−1) 16 (+3) 5 (−3) 10 (+0) 5 (−3)
prepared:
Skills Stealth +2
Cantrips (at will): druidcraft, produce flame, shillelagh Damage Resistances cold, fire
1st level (4 slots): entangle, longstrider, speak with Damage Immunities lightning
animals, thunderwave Condition Immunities blinded, deafened, exhaustion
2nd level (3 slots): animal messenger, barkskin Senses blindsight 60 ft. (blind beyond this radius),
passive Perception 10
Actions Languages —
Challenge 5 (1,800 XP)
Quarterstaff. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit (+4 to hit
with shillelagh), reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 3 (1d6) Lightning Absorption. Whenever the shambling mound
bludgeoning damage, or 4 (1d8) bludgeoning damage is subjected to lightning damage, it takes no damage
with shillelagh or if wielded with two hands. and regains a number of hit points equal to the
lightning damage dealt.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 11
Actions check, freeing itself or another entangled creature
within reach on a success.
Multiattack. The shambling mound makes two slam
attacks. If both attacks hit a Medium or smaller target,
the target is grappled (escape DC 14), and the Twig Blight
shambling mound uses its Engulf on it. Small plant, neutral evil
Slam. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft., one Armor Class 13 (natural armor)
target. Hit: 13 (2d8 + 4) bludgeoning damage. Hit Points 4 (1d6 + 1)
Engulf. The shambling mound engulfs a Medium or Speed 20 ft.
smaller creature grappled by it. The engulfed target is
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
blinded, restrained, and unable to breathe, and it must 6 (−2) 13 (+1) 12 (+1) 4 (−3) 8 (−1) 3 (−4)
succeed on a DC 14 Constitution saving throw at the
start of each of the mound’s turns or take 13 (2d8 + 4) Skills Stealth +3
bludgeoning damage. If the mound moves, the Damage Vulnerabilities fire
engulfed target moves with it. The mound can have Condition Immunities blinded, deafened
only one creature engulfed at a time. Senses blindsight 60 ft. (blind beyond this radius),
passive Perception 9
Vine Blight Languages understands Common but can’t speak
Medium plant, neutral evil Challenge 1/8 (25 XP)
Armor Class 12 (natural armor) False Appearance. While the blight remains motionless,
Hit Points 26 (4d8 + 8) it is indistinguishable from a dead shrub.
Speed 10 ft.
Actions
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
15 (+2) 8 (−1) 14 (+2) 5 (−3) 10 (+0) 3 (−4) target. Hit: 3 (1d4 + 1) piercing damage.
Skills Stealth +1
Condition Immunities blinded, deafened
Senses blindsight 60 ft. (blind beyond this radius),
passive Perception 10
Languages Common
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
False Appearance. While the blight remains motionless,
it is indistinguishable from a tangle of vines.

Actions
Constrict. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 10 ft.,
one target. Hit: 9 (2d6 + 2) bludgeoning damage, and a
Large or smaller target is grappled (escape DC 12). Until
this grapple ends, the target is restrained, and the
blight can’t constrict another target.
Entangling Plants (Recharge 5–6). Grasping roots and
vines sprout in a 15-foot radius centered on the blight,
withering away after 1 minute. For the duration, that
area is difficult terrain for nonplant creatures. In
addition, each creature of the blight’s choice in that
area when the plants appear must succeed on a DC 12
Strength saving throw or become restrained. A
creature can use its action to make a DC 12 Strength

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 12
Team 2 true form. Her statistics are the same in each form. Any
equipment she is wearing or carrying isn't transformed.
She reverts to her true form if she dies.
Night Hag (1)
Etherealness. The hag magically enters the Ethereal
Harpy (1)
Plane from the Material Plane, or vice versa. To do so,
Satyr (3)
the hag must have a heartstone in her possession.
Nightmare Haunting (1/Day). While on the Ethereal
Adjusting the Encounter Plane, the hag magically touches a sleeping humanoid
Very Weak : Replace (1) Night Hag with (2) Green Hags. on the Material Plane. A protection from evil and good
Remove (2) Satyrs. spell cast on the target prevents this contact, as does a
Weak: Replace (1) Night Hag with (2) Green Hags. magic circle. As long as the contact persists, the target
Strong: Add (1) Green Hag.
has dreadful visions. If these visions last for at least 1
Very Strong: Add (1) Night Hag.
hour, the target gains no benefit from its rest, and its
hit point maximum is reduced by 5 (1d10). If this effect
Night Hag reduces the target's hit point maximum to 0, the target
Medium fiend, neutral evil dies, and if the target was evil, its soul is trapped in the
hag's soul bag. The reduction to the target's hit point
Armor Class 17 (natural armor) maximum lasts until removed by the greater
Hit Points 112 (15d8 + 45) restoration spell or similar magic.
Speed 30 ft.
Night Hag Items
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA A night hag carries two very rare magic items that she must
18 (+4) 15 (+2) 16 (+3) 16 (+3) 14 (+2) 16 (+3) craft for herself If either object is lost, the night hag will go to
great lengths to retrieve it, as creating a new tool takes time
Skills Deception +7, Insight +6, Perception +6, and effort.
Stealth +6 Heartstone. This lustrous black gem allows a night hag to
Damage Resistances cold, fire; bludgeoning, piercing, become ethereal while it is in her possession. The touch of a
and slashing from non magical weapons that aren’t heartstone also cures any disease. Crafting a heartstone
silvered takes 30 days.
Soul Bag. When an evil humanoid dies as a result of a night
Condition Immunities charmed
hag's Nightmare Haunting, the hag catches the soul in this
Senses darkvision 120ft., passive Perception 16 black sack made of stitched flesh . A soul bag can hold only
Languages Abyssal, Common, Infernal, Primordial one evil soul at a time, and only the night hag who crafted
Challenge 5 (1,800 XP) the bag can catch a soul with it. Crafting a soul bag takes 7
Coven Challenge 7 (2,900 XP) days and a humanoid sacrifice (whose flesh is used to make
Innate Spellcasting. The hag's innate spellcasting the bag).
ability is Charisma (spell save DC 13, +5 to hit with spell
attacks). She can innately cast the following spells,
requiring no material components:
At will: detect magic, magic missile
2/day each: plane shift (self only), ray of enfeeblement,
sleep
Magic Resistance. The hag has advantage on saving
throws against spells and other magical effects.

Actions
Claws (Hag Form Only). Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to
hit, reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 13 (2d8 + 4) slashing
damage.
Change Shape. The hag magically polymorphs into a
Small or Medium female humanoid, or back into her

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 13
Harpy Skills Perception +2, Performance +6, Stealth +5
Medium monstrosity, chaotic evil Senses passive Perception 12
Languages Common, Elvish, Sylvan
Armor Class 11 Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
Hit Points 38 (7d8 + 7)
Magic Resistance. The satyr has advantage on saving
Speed 20 ft., fly 40 ft.
throws against spells and other magical effects.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
12 (+1) 13 (+1) 12 (+1) 7 (-2) 10 (+0) 13 (+1) Actions
Ram. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
Senses passive Perception 10 target. Hit: 6 (2d4 + 1) bludgeoning damage.
Languages Common
Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5
Challenge 1 (200 XP)
ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) piercing damage.
Actions Shortbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, range
80/320 ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) piercing damage.
Multiattack. The harpy makes two attacks: one with its
claws and one with its club.
Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one Green Hag
target. Hit: 6 (2d4 + 1) slashing damage. Medium fey, neutral evil
Club. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
target. Hit: 3 (1d4+1) bludgeoning damage. Armor Class 17 (natural armor)
Luring Song. The harpy sings a magical melody. Hit Points 82 (11d8+33)
Every humanoid and giant within 300 feet of the Speed 30 ft.
harpy that can hear the song must succeed on a DC STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
11 Wisdom saving throw or be charmed until the
18 (+4) 12 (+1) 16 (+3) 13 (+1) 14 (+2) 14 (+2)
song ends. The harpy must take a bonus action on its
subsequent turns to continue singing. It can stop
Skills Arcana +3, Deception +4, Perception +4, Stealth
singing at any time. The song ends if the harpy is
+3
incapacitated.
While charmed by the harpy, a target is Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 14
incapacitated and ignores the songs of other harpies. Languages Common, Draconic, Sylvan
If the charmed target is more than 5 feet away from Challenge 3 (700 XP)
the harpy, the target can take the Dash action on its Amphibious. The hag can breathe air and water.
turn to move toward the harpy by the most direct Innate Spellcasting. The hag’s spellcasting ability is
route. It doesn't avoid opportunity attacks, but Charisma (spell save DC 12). She can innately cast the
before moving into damaging terrain, such as lava or following spells, requiring no material components:
a pit, and whenever it takes damage from a source
other than the harpy, a target can repeat the saving At will: dancing lights, minor illusion, vicious mockery
throw. A creature can also repeat the saving throw at Mimicry. The hag can mimic animal sounds and
the end of each of its turns. If a creature's saving humanoid voices. A creature that hears the sounds can
throw is successful, the effect ends on it. A target tell they are imitations with a successful DC 14 Wisdom
that successfully saves is immune to this harpy's (Insight) check.
song for the next 24 hours.
Actions
Satyr Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
Medium fey, chaotic neutral target. Hit: 13 (2d8+4) slashing damage.
Armor Class 14 (leather armor) Illusionary Appearance. The hag covers herself and
Hit Points 31 (7d8) anything she is wearing or carrying with a magical
Speed 40 ft. illusion that makes her look like another creature of
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA her general size and humanoid shape. The illusion
12 (+1) 16 (+3) 11 (+0) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 14 (+2) ends if the hag takes a bonus action to end it or she
dies.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 14
 The changes wrought by this effect fail to hold up to
physical inspection. For example, the hag could appear
to have smooth skin, but someone touching her would
feel her rough flesh. Otherwise, a creature must take
an action to visually inspect the illusion and succeed on
a DC 20 Intelligence (Investigation) check to discern
that the hag is disguised.
Invisible Passage. The hag magically turns invisible
until she attacks or casts a spell, or until her
concentration ends (as if concentrating on a spell).
While invisible, she leaves no physical evidence of her
passage, so she can be tracked only by magic. Any
equipment she wears or carries is invisible with her.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 15
Team 3 Longsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 7 (1d8 + 3) slashing damage, or 8
(1d10+3) slashing damage when used with two hands.
Drider (1)
Longbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, range
Giant Spider (4)
120/600 ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d8 + 3) piercing
damage plus 4(1d8) poison damage.
Adjusting the Encounter
Very Weak : Remove (2) Giant Spiders. Giant Spider
Strong: Add (1) Giant Spider.
Large beast, unaligned
Very Strong: Add (2) Giant Spiders.
Armor Class 14 (natural armor)
Hit Points 26 (4d10+4)
Drider Speed 30 ft., climb 30ft.
Large Monstrosity, chaotic evil
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Armor Class 19 (natural armor) 14 (+2) 16 (+3) 12 (+1) 2 (-4) 11 (+0) 4 (-3)
Hit Points 123 (13d10+52) Skills Stealth +7
Speed 30 ft., Climb 30ft. Senses blindsight 10 ft., darkvision 60ft., passive
Perception 10
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Languages -
16 (+3) 16 (+3) 18 (+4) 13 (+1) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) Challenge 1 (200 XP)
Skills Perception +5, Stealth +9 Spider Climb. The spider can climb difficult surfaces,
Senses darkvison 120 ft., passive Perception 15 including upside down on ceilings, without needing to
Languages Elvish, Undercommon make an ability check
Challenge 6 (2300 XP)
Web Sense. While in contact with a web, the spider
Fey Ancestry. The drider has advantage on saving knows the exact location of any creature in contact
throws against being charmed and magic can’t put the with the same web.
drow to sleep.
Web Walker. The spider ignores movement restrictions
Innate Spellcasting. The drider’s spellcasting ability is caused by webbing.
Charisma (spell save DC 12). It can innately cast the
following spells, requiring no material components: Actions
At will: dancing lights Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
1/day each: darkness, faerie fire creature. Hit: 7 (1d8+3) piercing damage and the
Spider Climb. The drider can climb difficult surfaces, creature must make a DC 11 Constitution saving throw,
including upside down on ceilings, without needing to taking 9 (2d8) poison damage on a failed save, or half
make an ability check as much damage on a successful one. If the poison
Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the drider has damage reduces the target to 0 hit points, the target is
disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on Wisdom stable but poisoned for one hour, even after regaining
(Perception) checks that rely on sight. hit points, and is paralyzed while poison in this way.
Web Walker. The drider ignores movement restrictions
caused by webbing. Web (Recharge 5-6). Ranged Weapon Attack: +5 to hit,
range 30/60 ft., one creature. Hit The target is
Actions restrained by webbing. As an action, the restrained
target can make a DC 12 Strength check, bursting the
Multiattack. The drider makes three attacks, either webbing on a success. The webbing can also be
with its longsword or its longbow. It can replace one of attacked and destroyed (AC 10; hp5; vulnerability to
those attacks with a bite. fire damage, immunity to bludgeoning, poison, and
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft., one psychic damage).
creature. Hit: 2 (1d4) piercing damage plus 9 (2d8)
poison damage.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 16
Team 4 a weapon attack if that creature is within 5 feet of an
ally of the hobgoblin that isn’t incapacitated.

Ogre (2) Actions

Hobgoblin Captain (1)
Multiattack. The hobgoblin makes two greatsword
Hobgoblin (4)
attacks.
Greatsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5
ft., one target. Hit: 9 (2d6 + 2) piercing damage.
Adjusting the Encounter Javelin. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit,
Very Weak : Remove (2) Hobgoblins. reach 5 ft. or range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 +
Strong and Very Strong: Replace (1) Hobgoblin Captain with 2) piercing damage.
(1) Oni. Replace (2) Ogres with (1) Ettin. Remove (4)
Hobgoblins. Leadership (Recharges after a Short or Long Rest). For
1 minute, the hobgoblin can utter a special command
or warning whenever a nonhostile creature that it can
see within 30 feet of it makes an attack roll or a saving
Ogre throw. The creature can add a d4 to its roll provided it
Large giant, chaotic evil can hear and understand the hobgoblin. A creature can
Armor Class 11 (hide armor) benefit from only one Leadership die at a time. This
Hit Points 59 (7d10 + 21) effect ends if the hobgoblin is incapacitated.
Speed 40 ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Hobgoblin

19 (+4) 8 (−1) 16 (+3) 5 (−3) 7 (−2) 7 (−2) Medium humanoid (goblinoid), lawful evil

Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 8 Armor Class 18 (chain mail, shield)
Languages Common, Giant Hit Points 11 (2d8 + 2)
Challenge 2 (450 XP) Speed 30 ft.

Actions STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA

13 (+1) 12 (+1) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 9 (−1)
Greatclub. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 13 (2d8 + 4) bludgeoning damage. Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 10
Javelin. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, Languages Common, Goblin
reach 5 ft. or range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 11 (2d6 Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
+ 4) piercing damage. Martial Advantage. Once per turn, the hobgoblin can
deal an extra 7 (2d6) damage to a creature it hits with a
weapon attack if that creature is within 5 feet of an ally
Hobgoblin Captain of the hobgoblin that isn’t incapacitated.
Medium humanoid (goblinoid), lawful evil
Actions
Armor Class 17 (half plate)
Hit Points 55 (6d8 + 12) Longsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
Speed 30 ft. one target. Hit: 5 (1d8 + 1) slashing damage, or 6 (1d10
+ 1) slashing damage if used with two hands.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Longbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, range
15 (+2) 14 (+2) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 13 (+1) 150/600 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d8 + 1) piercing
damage.
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 10
Languages Common, Goblin
Challenge 3 (700 XP)
Martial Advantage. Once per turn, the hobgoblin can
deal an extra 10 (3d6) damage to a creature it hits with

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 17
Oni Ettin
Large giant, lawful evil Large giant, chaotic evil
Armor Class 16 (chain mail) Armor Class 12 (natural armor)
Hit Points 110 (13d10 + 39) Hit Points 85 (10d10 + 30)
Speed 30 ft., fly 30 ft. Speed 40 ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
19 (+4) 11 (+0) 16 (+3) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 15 (+2) 21 (+5) 8 (−1) 17 (+3) 6 (−2) 10 (+0) 8 (−1)

Saving Throws Dex +3, Con +6, Wis +4, Cha +5 Skills Perception +4
Skills Arcana +5, Deception +8, Perception +4 Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 14
Senses darkvision 60 ft., Passive Perception 14 Languages Giant, Orc
Languages Common, Giant Challenge 4 (1,100 XP)
Challenge 7 (2,900 XP) Two Heads. The ettin has advantage on Wisdom
Innate Spellcasting. The oni's innate spellcasting ability (Perception) checks and on saving throws against being
is Charisma (spell save DC 13). The oni can innately cast blinded, charmed, deafened, frightened, stunned, and
the following spells, requiring no material components. knocked unconscious.
Wakeful. When one of the ettin’s heads is asleep, its
At will: darkness, invisibility other head is awake.
1/day: charm person, cone of cold, gaseous form, sleep
Actions
Magic Weapons. The oni's weapon attacks are magical. Multiattack. The ettin makes two attacks: one with its
Regeneration. The oni regains 10 hit points at the start battleaxe and one with its morningstar.
of its turn if it has at least 1 hit point. Battleaxe. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 14 (2d8 + 5) slashing damage.
Actions
Morningstar. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5
Multiattack. The oni makes two attacks, either with its ft., one target. Hit: 14 (2d8 + 5) piercing damage.
claws or its glaive.
Claw (Oni Form Only). Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit,
reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 8 (1d8 + 4) slashing damage.
Glaive. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 10 ft.,
one target. Hit: 15 (2d10 + 4) slashing damage, or 9
(1d10 +4) slashing damage in Small or Medium form.
Change Shape. The oni magically polymorphs into a
Small or Medium humanoid, into a Large giant, or back
into its true form. Other than its size, its statistics are
the same in each form. The only equipment that is
transformed is its glaive, which shrinks so that it can be
wielded in humanoid form. If the oni dies, it reverts to
its true form, and its glaive reverts to its normal size.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 18
Team 5 Skills Perception +4
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 14
Languages Giant, Orc
Troll (1) Challenge 4 (1,100 XP)
Ettin (1)
Two Heads. The ettin has advantage on Wisdom
Bugbear (1)
(Perception) checks and on saving throws against being
blinded, charmed, deafened, frightened, stunned, and
Adjusting the Encounter knocked unconscious.
Very Weak : Remove (1) Troll and (1) Bugbear. Add (1) Ettin. Wakeful. When one of the ettin’s heads is asleep, its
Weak: Remove (1) Bugbear. other head is awake.
Troll Actions
Large giant, chaotic evil
Multiattack. The ettin makes two attacks: one with its
Armor Class 15 (natural armor) battleaxe and one with its morningstar.
Hit Points 84 (8d10 + 40)
Battleaxe. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
Speed 30 ft.
one target. Hit: 14 (2d8 + 5) slashing damage.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Morningstar. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5
18 (+4) 13 (+1) 20 (+5) 7 (−2) 9 (−1) 7 (−2) ft., one target. Hit: 14 (2d8 + 5) piercing damage.

Skills Perception +1
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 11 Ettercap
Languages Giant Medium monstrosity, neutral evil
Challenge 5 (1,800 XP) Armor Class 13 (natural armor)
Keen Smell. The troll has advantage on Wisdom Hit Points 44 (8d8 + 8)
(Perception) checks that rely on smell. Speed 30 ft., climb 30 ft.
Regeneration. The troll regains 10 hit points at the
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
start of its turn. If the troll takes acid or fire damage, 14 (+2) 15 (+2) 13 (+1) 7 (−2) 12 (+1) 8 (−1)
this trait doesn’t function at the start of the troll’s next
turn. The troll dies only if it starts its turn with 0 hit Skills Perception +3, Stealth +4, Survival +3
points and doesn’t regenerate. Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 13
Languages —
Actions
Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Multiattack. The troll makes three attacks: one with its Spider Climb. The ettercap can climb difficult surfaces,
bite and two with its claws. including upside down on ceilings, without needing to
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft., one make an ability check.
target. Hit: 7 (1d6 + 4) piercing damage. Web Sense. While in contact with a web, the ettercap
Claw. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft., one knows the exact location of any other creature in
target. Hit: 11 (2d6 + 4) slashing damage. contact with the same web.
Web Walker. The ettercap ignores movement
restrictions caused by webbing.
Ettin
Large giant, chaotic evil Actions
Armor Class 12 (natural armor) Multiattack. The ettercap makes two attacks: one with
Hit Points 85 (10d10 + 30) its bite and one with its claws.
Speed 40 ft. Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
creature. Hit: 6 (1d8 + 2) piercing damage plus 4 (1d8)
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
21 (+5) 8 (−1) 17 (+3) 6 (−2) 10 (+0) 8 (−1)
poison damage. The target must succeed on a DC 11
Constitution saving throw or be poisoned for 1 minute.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 19
The creature can repeat the saving throw at the end of
each of its turns, ending the effect on itself on a
success.
Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
target. Hit: 7 (2d4 + 2) slashing damage.
Web (Recharge 5–6). Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to
hit, range 30/60 ft., one Large or smaller creature.
Hit: The creature is restrained by webbing. As an
action, the restrained creature can make a DC 11
Strength check, escaping from the webbing on a
success. The effect ends if the webbing is destroyed.
The webbing has AC 10, 5 hit points, resistance to
bludgeoning damage, and immunity to poison and
psychic damage.

Bugbear
Medium humanoid (goblinoid), chaotic evil
Armor Class 16 (hide armor, shield)
Hit Points 27 (5d8 + 5)
Speed 30 ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA

15 (+2) 14 (+2) 13 (+1) 8 (−1) 11 (+0) 9 (−1)

Skills Stealth +6, Survival +2

Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 10
Languages Common, Goblin
Challenge 1 (200 XP)
Brute. A melee weapon deals one extra die of its
damage when the bugbear hits with it (included in the
attack).
Surprise Attack. If the bugbear surprises a creature and
hits it with an attack during the first round of combat,
the target takes an extra 7 (2d6) damage from the
attack.

Actions
Morningstar. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5
ft., one target. Hit: 11 (2d8 + 2) piercing damage.
Javelin. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit,
reach 5 ft. or range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 9 (2d6 +
2) piercing damage in melee or 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing
damage at range.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 20
Team 6 the saving throw fails by 5 or more, the target is also
unconscious while poisoned in this way. The target
wakes up if it takes damage or if another creature
Drow Elite Warrior (1) takes an action to shake it awake.
Drow (2)
Manticore (1) Reactions
Parry. The drow adds 3 to its AC against one melee
attack that would hit it. To do so, the drow must see
Adjusting the Encounter the attacker and be wielding a melee weapon.
Weak and Very Weak : Remove (2) Drow.
Strong and Very Strong: Remove (1) Manticore. Add (1) Drow
Elite Warrior. Drow
Medium humanoid (elf), neutral evil
Armor Class 15 (chain shirt)
Drow Elite Warrior Hit Points 13 (3d8)
Medium humanoid (elf), neutral evil Speed 30 ft.
Armor Class 18 (studded leather, shield) STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Hit Points 71 (11d8+22) 10 (+0) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 11 (+0) 12 (+1)
Speed 30 ft.
Skills Perception +2, Stealth +4
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 12
13 (+1) 18 (+4) 14 (+2) 11 (+0) 13 (+1) 12 (+1)
Languages Elvish, Undercommon
Challenge 1/4 (50 XP)
Saving Throws Dex +7, Con +5, Wis +4
Skills Perception +4, Stealth +10 Fey Ancestry. The drow has advantage on saving
Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 14 throws against being charmed and magic can’t put the
Languages Elvish, Undercommon drow to sleep.
Challenge 5 (1,800 XP) Innate Spellcasting. The drow’s spellcasting ability is
Fey Ancestry. The drow has advantage on saving Charisma (spell save DC 11). It can innately cast the
throws against being charmed and magic can’t put the following spells, requiring no material components:
drow to sleep. At will: dancing lights
Innate Spellcasting. The drow’s spellcasting ability is 1/day each: darkness, faerie fire
Charisma (spell save DC 12). It can innately cast the Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the drow has
following spells, requiring no material components: disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on Wisdom
At will: dancing lights (Perception) checks that rely on sight.
1/day each: darkness, faerie fire, levitate (self only)
Actions
Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the drow has
disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on Wisdom Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5
(Perception) checks that rely on sight. ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6+2) piercing damage.
Hand Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit,
Actions range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6+2) piercing
damage and the target must succeed on a DC 13
Multiattack. The drow makes two shortsword attacks.
Constitution saving throw or be poisoned for 1 hour. If
Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5
the saving throw fails by 5 or more, the target is also
ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d6+4) piercing damage plus 10
unconscious while poisoned in this way. The target
(3d6) poison damage.
wakes up if it takes damage or if another creature
Hand Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +7 to hit,
takes an action to shake it awake.
range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d6+4) piercing
damage and the target must succeed on a DC 13
Constitution saving throw or be poisoned for 1 hour. If

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 21
Manticore
Large monstrosity, lawful evil
Armor Class 14 (natural armor)
Hit Points 68 (8d10 + 24)
Speed 30 ft., fly 50 ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA

17 (+3) 16 (+3) 17 (+3) 7 (−2) 12 (+1) 8 (−1)

Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 11

Languages Common
Challenge 3 (700 XP)
Tail Spike Regrowth. The manticore has twenty-four
tail spikes. Used spikes regrow when the manticore
finishes a long rest.

Actions
Multiattack. The manticore makes three attacks: one
with its bite and two with its claws or three with its tail
spikes.
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
target. Hit: 7 (1d8 + 3) piercing damage.
Claw. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) slashing damage.
Tail Spike. Ranged Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, range
100/200 ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d8 + 3) piercing
damage.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 22
Team 7 remains for 10 minutes, until it or its summoner dies,
or until its summoner dismisses it as an action.

Malkyn Grenefeld (1)

Veteran (1) Veteran
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
Adjusting the Encounter Armor Class 17 (splint)
Weak and Very Weak : Replace (1) Veteran with (1) Spy Hit Points 58 (9d8 + 18)
Strong and Very Strong: Replace (1) Veteran with (1) Drow Speed 30 ft.
Elite Warrior.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Malkyn Grenefeld 16 (+3) 13 (+1) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 10 (+0)
Medium humanoid (human), neutral evil
Armor Class 12 (15 with mage armor) Skills Athletics +5, Perception +2
Hit Points 45 (10d8) Senses passive Perception 12
Speed 30 ft. Languages any one language (usually Common)
Challenge 3 (700 XP)
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
9 (-1) 14 (+2) 11 (+0) 17 (+3) 12 (+1) 11 (+0) Actions
Multiattack. The veteran makes two longsword attacks.
Saving Throws Int +6, Wis +4 If it has a shortsword drawn, it can also make a
Skills Arcana +6, Deception +3, Perception +4 shortsword attack.
Senses passive Perception 11
Languages Elvish, Common, Sylvan, Orcish Longsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
Challenge 6 (2,300 XP) one target. Hit: 7 (1d8 + 3) slashing damage, or 8 (1d10
+ 3) slashing damage if used with two hands.

Spellcasting. Malkyn is a 9th-level spellcaster. Her Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5
spellcasting ability is Intelligence (spell save DC 14, +6 ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) piercing damage.
to hit with spell attacks). Malkyn has the following Heavy Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit,
wizard spells prepared: range 100/400 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d10) piercing
Cantrips (at will): fire bolt, light, mage hand, damage.
prestidigitation.
1st level (4 slots): mage armor, magic missile, shield, Spy
mage armor Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
2nd level (3 slots): alter self, misty step
Armor Class 12
3rd level (3 slots): fly, lightning bolt, counterspell Hit Points 27 (6d8)
4th level (3 slots): banishment, greater invisibility Speed 30 ft.
5th level (2 slots): Wall of Force
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Actions 10 (+0) 15 (+2) 10 (+0) 12 (+1) 14 (+2) 16 (+3)

Staff. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft., one Skills Deception +5, Insight +4, Investigation +5,
target. Hit: 2 (1d6-1) bludgeoning damage if used with Perception +6, Persuasion +5, Sleight of Hand +4,
two hands, plus 3 (1d6) poison damage. Stealth +4
Summon Demon (1/Day). The drow magically Senses passive Perception 16
summons a quasit, or attempts to summon a shadow Languages any two languages
demon with a 50 percent chance of success. The Challenge 1 (200 XP)
summoned demon appears in an unoccupied space Cunning Action. On each of its turns, the spy can use a
within 60 feet of its summoner, acts as an ally of its bonus action to take the Dash, Disengage, or Hide
summoner, and can’t summon other demons. It action.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 23
Sneak Attack (1/Turn). The spy deals an extra 7 (2d6)
damage when it hits a target with a weapon attack and
has advantage on the attack roll, or when the target is
within 5 feet of an ally of the spy that isn’t
incapacitated and the spy doesn’t have disadvantage
on the attack roll.
damage and the target must succeed on a DC 13
Constitution saving throw or be poisoned for 1 hour. If
the saving throw fails by 5 or more, the target is also
unconscious while poisoned in this way. The target
wakes up if it takes damage or if another creature
takes an action to shake it awake.

Actions Reactions
Multiattack. The spy makes two melee attacks. Parry. The drow adds 3 to its AC against one melee
Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 attack that would hit it. To do so, the drow must see
ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing damage. the attacker and be wielding a melee weapon.
Hand Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit,
range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing
damage.

Drow Elite Warrior

Medium humanoid (elf), neutral evil
Armor Class 18 (studded leather, shield)
Hit Points 71 (11d8+22)
Speed 30 ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA

13 (+1) 18 (+4) 14 (+2) 11 (+0) 13 (+1) 12 (+1)

Saving Throws Dex +7, Con +5, Wis +4

Skills Perception +4, Stealth +10
Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 14
Languages Elvish, Undercommon
Challenge 5 (1,800 XP)
Fey Ancestry. The drow has advantage on saving
throws against being charmed and magic can’t put the
drow to sleep.
Innate Spellcasting. The drow’s spellcasting ability is
Charisma (spell save DC 12). It can innately cast the
following spells, requiring no material components:
At will: dancing lights
1/day each: darkness, faerie fire, levitate (self only)
Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the drow has
disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on Wisdom
(Perception) checks that rely on sight.

Actions
Multiattack. The drow makes two shortsword attacks.
Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5
ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d6+4) piercing damage plus 10
(3d6) poison damage.
Hand Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +7 to hit,
range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d6+4) piercing

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 24
Team 8 Senses passive Perception 15
Languages any one language (usually Common)
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
Veteran (3)
Keen Hearing and Sight. The scout has advantage on
Scout (1)
Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on hearing or
Guards (4)
sight.

Actions
Adjusting the Encounter Multiattack. The scout makes two melee attacks or
Weak and Very Weak : Remove (4) Guards. two ranged attacks.
Very Strong: Add (1) Scout Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5
ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing damage.
Longbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, ranged
Veteran 150/600 ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d8 + 2) piercing
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment damage.
Armor Class 17 (splint)
Hit Points 58 (9d8 + 18)
Speed 30 ft.
Guard
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Armor Class 16 (chain shirt, shield)
16 (+3) 13 (+1) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 10 (+0)
Hit Points 11 (2d8 + 2)
Speed 30 ft.
Skills Athletics +5, Perception +2
Senses passive Perception 12 STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Languages any one language (usually Common) 13 (+1) 12 (+1) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 10 (+0)
Challenge 3 (700 XP)
Skills Perception +2
Actions Senses passive Perception 12
Multiattack. The veteran makes two longsword attacks. Languages any one language (usually Common)
If it has a shortsword drawn, it can also make a Challenge 1/8 (25 XP)
shortsword attack.
Actions
Longsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 7 (1d8 + 3) slashing damage, or 8 (1d10 Spear. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit,
+ 3) slashing damage if used with two hands. reach 5 ft. or range 20/60 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d6 +
1) piercing damage.
Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5
ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) piercing damage.
Heavy Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to hit,
range 100/400 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d10) piercing
damage.

Scout
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
Armor Class 13 (leather armor)
Hit Points 16 (3d8 + 3)
Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
11 (+0) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 11 (+0) 13 (+1) 11 (+0)
Skills Nature +4, Perception +5, Stealth +6, Survival +5

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 25
Team 9 The changes wrought by this effect fail to hold up to
physical inspection. For example, the hag could appear
to have smooth skin, but someone touching her would
Sea Hag (1) feel her rough flesh. Otherwise, a creature must take
Kuo-Toa Archpriest (1) an action to visually inspect the illusion and succeed on
Kuo-Toa Whip (1) a DC 20 Intelligence (Investigation) check to discern
that the hag is disguised.
Adjusting the Encounter Invisible Passage. The hag magically turns invisible
until she attacks or casts a spell, or until her
Weak and Very Weak : Remove (1) Kuo-Toa Archpriest. Add
(3) Kuo-Toa Whips and (2) Kuo-Toa concentration ends (as if concentrating on a spell).
Very Strong: Replace (1) Sea Hag with a Coven of Sea Hags (3 While invisible, she leaves no physical evidence of her
hags). Remove (1) Kuo-Toa Whip and (1) Kuo-Toa Archpriest. passage, so she can be tracked only by magic. Any
equipment she wears or carries is invisible with her.
Sea Hag
Medium fey, Chaotic evil
Hag Covens
Armor Class 14 (natural armor)
When hags must work together, they form covens, in spite of
Hit Points 52 (7d8+21) their selfish natures. A coven is made up of hags of any type,
Speed 30 ft., swim 40 ft. all of whom are equals in the group. However, each of the
hags continue to desire more personal power.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA A coven consists of three hags so any arguments between
16 (+3) 13 (+1) 16 (+3) 12 (+1) 12 (+1) 13 (+1) two hags can be settled by the third. If more than three hags
ever come together, as might happen if two covens come
into conflict, the result is usually chaos.
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 11 Shared Spellcasting. While all three members of a hag
Languages Common, Aquan, Giant coven are within 30 feet of each other, they each can cast the
Challenge 2 (450 XP) following spells from the wizard’s spell list but must share the
spell slots among themselves.
Amphibious. The hag can breathe air and water.
Horrific Appearance. Any humanoid that starts its turn 1st level (4 slots): identify, ray of sickness
within 30 feet of the hag and can see the hag’s true 2nd level (3 slots): hold person, locate object
form must make a DC 11 Wisdom saving throw. On a 3rd level (3 slots): bestow curse, counterspell, lightning bolt
failed save, the creature is frightened for 1 minute. A 4th level (3 slots): phantasmal killer, polymorph
creature can repeat the saving throw at the end of 5th level (2 slots): contact other plane, scrying
6th level (1 slot): eyebite
each of its turns, with disadvantage if the hag is within
line of sight, ending the effect on itself on a success. If For casting these spells, each hag is a 12th level spellcaster
a creature’s saving throw is successful or the effect that uses Intelligence as her spellcasting ability. The spell
ends for it, the creature is immune to the hag’s Horrific save DC is 12 + the hag’s Intelligence modifier, and the spell
Appearance for the next 24 hours. attack bonus is 4 + the hag’s Intelligence modifier.

Actions
Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft., one Kuo-Toa Archpriest
target. Hit: 10 (2d6+3) slashing damage. Medium Humanoid (kuo-toa), neutral evil
Death Glare. The hag targets one frightened creature Armor Class 13 (natural armor)
she can see within 30 feet of her. If the target can see Hit Points 97 (13d8+39)
the hag, it must succeed on a DC 11 Wisdom saving Speed 30 ft., swim 30 ft.
throw against the magic or drop to 0 hit points. STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Illusionary Appearance. The hag covers herself and 16 (+3) 14 (+2) 16 (+3) 13 (+1) 16 (+3) 14 (+2)
anything she is wearing or carrying with a magical Skills Perception +9, Religion +6
illusion that makes her look like another creature of Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 19
her general size and humanoid shape. The illusion Languages Undercommon
ends if the hag takes a bonus action to end it or she Challenge 6 (2,300 XP)
dies. Amphibious. Kuo-Toa can breathe air and water.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 26
Otherworldly Perception. The kuo-Toa can sense the Speed 30 ft., swim 30 ft.
presence of any creature within 30 feet of it that is STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
invisible or on the Ethereal Plane. It can pinpoint such a 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 14 (+2) 11 (+0)
creature that is moving. Skills Perception +6, Religion +4
Slippery. The kuo-Toa has advantage on ability checks Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 16
and saving throws made to escape a grapple. Languages Undercommon
Sunlight Sensitivity. While in the sunlight, the kuo-toa Challenge 1 (200 XP)
has disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on Wisdom Amphibious. Kuo-Toa can breathe air and water.
(Perception) checks that rely on sight. Otherworldly Perception. The kuo-Toa can sense the
Spellcasting. The kuo-toa is a 10th level spell caster. Its presence of any creature within 30 feet of it that is
spellcasting ability is Wisdom (spell save DC 14, +6 to invisible or on the Ethereal Plane. It can pinpoint such a
hit with spell attacks). It knows the following cleric creature that is moving.
spells: Slippery. The kuo-Toa has advantage on ability checks
Cantrips (at will): guidance, sacred flame, thaumaturgy and saving throws made to escape a grapple.
1st level (4 slots): detect magic, sanctuary, shield of Sunlight Sensitivity. While in the sunlight, the kuo-toa
faith has disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on Wisdom
2nd level (3 slots): hold person, spiritual weapon (Perception) checks that rely on sight.
3rd level (3 slots): spirit guardians, tongues Spellcasting. The kuo-toa is a 2nd level spell caster. Its
4th level (3 slots): control water, divination spellcasting ability is Wisdom (spell save DC 12, +4 to
5th level (2 slots): mass cure wounds, scrying hit with spell attacks). It knows the following cleric
spells:
Actions Cantrips (at will): sacred flame, thaumaturgy
1st level (3 slots): bane, shield of faith
Multiattack. The kuo-toa makes two melee attacks
Scepter. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
Actions
one target. Hit: 6 (1d6+3) bludgeoning damage plus 14
(4d6) lightning damage. Multiattack. The kuo-toa makes two attacks: one with
Unarmed Strike. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, its bite and one with its pincher staff.
reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d4+2) bludgeoning Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
damage. target. Hit: 4 (1d4+2) piercing damage.
Pincher Staff. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach
10 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6+2) piercing damage. If the
Kuo-Toa Whip target is a medium or smaller creature, it is grappled
Medium Humanoid (kuo-toa), neutral evil (escape DC 14). Until the grapple ends, the kuo-toa
can't use its pincher staff on another target.
Armor Class 11 (natural armor)
Hit Points 65 (10d8+20)

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 27
Team 10 4th level (3 slots): Evard’s black tentacles, greater
invisibility

Drow Mage (1)

5th level (2 slots): cloudkill
Displacer Beast (1) Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the drow has
disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on Wisdom
(Perception) checks that rely on sight.

Adjusting the Encounter Actions

Very Weak : Remove (2) Giant Spiders. Staff. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
Strong: Replace (1) Drow Mage with (1) Drow Priestess of target. Hit: 2 (1d6-1) bludgeoning damage if used with
Lolth. Replace (1) Displacer Beast with (1) Giant Wolf Spider
two hands, plus 3 (1d6) poison damage.
Very Strong: Replace (1) Drow Mage with (1) Drow Priestess
Summon Demon (1/Day). The drow magically
of Lolth. Replace (1) Displacer Beast with (4) Giant Wolf
Spider. summons a quasit, or attempts to summon a shadow
demon with a 50 percent chance of success. The
summoned demon appears in an unoccupied space
Drow Mage within 60 feet of its summoner, acts as an ally of its
Medium humanoid (elf), neutral evil summoner, and can’t summon other demons. It
remains for 10 minutes, until it or its summoner dies,
Armor Class 12 (15 with mage armor)
or until its summoner dismisses it as an action.
Hit Points 45 (10d8)
Speed 30 ft.
Drow Priestess of Lolth
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Medium humanoid (elf), neutral evil
9 (-1) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 17 (+3) 13 (+1) 12 (+1)
Armor Class 16 (scale mail)
Hit Points 71 (13d8+13)
Skills Arcana +6, Deception +5, Perception +4, Stealth
Speed 30 ft.
+5
Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 14 STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Languages Elvish, Undercommon 10 (+0) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 13 (+1) 17 (+3) 18 (+4)
Challenge 7 (2,900 XP)
Fey Ancestry. The drow has advantage on saving Saving Throws Con +4, Wis +6, Cha +7
throws against being charmed and magic can’t put the Skills Insight +6, Perception +6, Religion +4, Stealth +5
drow to sleep. Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 16
Innate Spellcasting. The drow’s spellcasting ability is Languages Elvish, Undercommon
Charisma (spell save DC 12). It can innately cast the Challenge 8 (3,900 XP)
following spells, requiring no material components: Fey Ancestry. The drow has advantage on saving
At will: dancing lights throws against being charmed and magic can’t put the
drow to sleep.
1/day each: darkness, faerie fire, levitate (self only)
Innate Spellcasting. The drow’s spellcasting ability is
Spellcasting. The drow is a 10th-level spellcaster. Its
Charisma (spell save DC 15). It can innately cast the
spellcasting ability is Intelligence (spell save DC 14, +6
following spells, requiring no material components:
to hit with spell attacks). The drow has the following
wizard spells prepared: At will: dancing lights
Cantrips (at will): mage hand, minor illusion, poison 1/day each: darkness, faerie fire, levitate (self only)
spray, ray of frost Spellcasting. The drow is a 10th-level spellcaster. Its
1st level (4 slots): mage armor, magic missile, shield, spellcasting ability is Wisdom (spell save DC 14, +6 to
witch bolt hit with spell attacks). The drow has the following
cleric spells prepared:
2nd level (3 slots): alter self, misty step, web
Cantrips (at will): guidance, poison spray, resistance,
3rd level (3 slots): fly, lightning bolt
spare the dying, thaumaturgy

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 28
1st level (4 slots): animal friendship, cure wounds, disrupted until the end of its next turn. This trait is also
detect poison and disease, ray of sickness disrupted while the displacer beast is incapacitated or
2nd level (3 slots): lesser restoration, protection from has a speed of 0.
poison, web
Actions
3rd level (3 slots): conjure animals (2 giant spiders),
dispel magic Multiattack. The displacer beast makes two attacks
with its tentacles.
4th level (3 slots): divination, freedom of movement
Tentacle. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 10 ft.,
5th level (2 slots): insect plague, mass cure wounds
one target. Hit: 7 (1d6 + 4) bludgeoning damage plus 3
Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the drow has (1d6) piercing damage.
disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on Wisdom
(Perception) checks that rely on sight.
Giant Wolf Spider
Actions Medium beast, unaligned
Multiattack. The drow makes two scourge attacks. Armor Class 13
Scourge. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft., Hit Points 11 (2d8 + 2)
one target. Hit: 5 (1d6+2) piercing damage plus 17 Speed 40 ft., climb 40 ft.
(5d6) poison damage.
Summon Demon (1/Day). The drow attempts to STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
12 (+1) 16 (+3) 13 (+1) 3 (-4) 12 (+1) 4 (-3)
magically summon a yochlol with a 30 percent chance
of success. If the attempt fails, the drow takes 5 (1d10)
Skills Perception +3, Stealth +7
psychic damage. Otherwise, the summoned demon
Senses blindsight 10 ft., darkvision 60 ft., passive
appears in an unoccupied space within 60 feet of its
Perception 13
summoner, acts as an ally of its summoner, and can’t
Languages —
summon other demons. It remains for 10 minutes,
Challenge 1/4 (50 XP)
until it or its summoner dies, or until its summoner
dismisses it as an action. Spider Climb. The swarm can climb difficult surfaces,
including upside down on ceilings, without needing to
make an ability check.
Displacer Beast Web Sense. While in contact with a web, the swarm
Large monstrosity, lawful evil knows the exact location of any other creature in
contact with the same web.
Armor Class 13 (natural armor)
Hit Points 85 (10d10 + 30) Web Walker. The swarm ignores movement
Speed 40 ft. restrictions caused by webbing.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Actions

18 (+4) 15 (+2) 16 (+3) 6 (−2) 12 (+1) 8 (−1) Bites. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
creature. Hit: 4 (1d6 + 1) piercing damage, and the
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 11
target must make a DC 11 Constitution saving throw,
Languages —
taking 7 (2d6) poison damage on a failed save, or half
Challenge 3 (700 XP)
as much on a successful one. If the poison damage
Avoidance. If the displacer beast is subjected to an reduces the target to 0 hit points, the target is stable
effect that allows it to make a saving throw to take but poisoned for 1 hour, even after regaining hit points,
only half damage, it instead takes no damage if it and is paralyzed while poisoned in this way.
succeeds on the saving throw, and only half damage if
it fails.
Displacement. The displacer beast projects a magical
illusion that makes it appear to be standing near its
actual location, causing attack rolls against it to have
disadvantage. If it is hit by an attack, this trait is

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 29
Adult Green Dragon Legendary Actions
Huge dragon, lawful evil The dragon can take 3 legendary actions, choosing
Armor Class 19 (natural armor) from the options below. Only one legendary action
Hit Points 207 (18d12 + 90) option can be used at a time and only at the end of
Speed 40 ft., fly 80 ft., swim 40 ft. another creature’s turn. The dragon regains spent
legendary actions at the start of its turn.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
23 (+6) 12 (+1) 21 (+5) 18 (+4) 15 (+2) 17 (+3)  Detect. The dragon makes a Wisdom (Perception)
check.
Saving Throws Dex +6, Con +10, Wis +7, Cha +8  Tail Attack. The dragon makes a tail attack.
Skills Deception +8, Insight +7, Perception +12,  Wing Attack (Costs 2 Actions). The dragon beats its
Persuasion +8, Stealth +6 wings. Each creature within 10 feet of the dragon
Damage Immunities poison must succeed on a DC 19 Dexterity saving throw or
Condition Immunities poisoned take 13 (2d6 + 6) bludgeoning damage and be
Senses blindsight 60 ft., darkvision 120 ft., passive knocked prone. The dragon can then fly up to half its
Perception 22 flying speed.
Languages Common, Draconic
Challenge 15 (13,000 XP)

Amphibious. The dragon can breathe air and water.

Legendary Resistance (3/Day). If the dragon fails a
saving throw, it can choose to succeed instead.

Actions
Multiattack. The dragon can use its Frightful Presence.
It then makes three attacks: one with its bite and two
with its claws.
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +11 to hit, reach 10 ft.,
one target. Hit: 17 (2d10 + 6) piercing damage plus 7
(2d6) poison damage.
Claw. Melee Weapon Attack: +11 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 13 (2d6 + 6) slashing damage.
Tail. Melee Weapon Attack: +11 to hit, reach 15 ft., one
target. Hit: 15 (2d8 + 6) bludgeoning damage.
Frightful Presence. Each creature of the dragon’s
choice that is within 120 feet of the dragon and aware
of it must succeed on a DC 16 Wisdom saving throw or
become frightened for 1 minute. A creature can repeat
the saving throw at the end of each of its turns, ending
the effect on itself on a success. If a creature’s saving
throw is successful or the effect ends for it, the
creature is immune to the dragon’s Frightful Presence
for the next 24 hours.
Poison Breath (Recharge 5–6). The dragon exhales
poisonous gas in a 60-foot cone. Each creature in that
area must make a DC 18 Constitution saving throw,
taking 56 (16d6) poison damage on a failed save, or
half as much damage on a successful one.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 30
Blob of Death
Colossal ooze, unaligned
Armor Class 14 (natural armor)
Hit Points 300 (24d10 + 168)
Speed 20 ft.

STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA

26 (+8) 10 (+0) 24 (+7) -- (+4) 18 (+4) 10 (+0)

Saving Throws Dex +6, Con +13

Damage Resistances acid, cold, fire, poison
Condition Immunities poisoned, blinded, charmed,
deafened, exhaustion, prone, frightened
Senses blindsight 120 ft., passive Perception 14
Languages --

Legendary Resistance (3/Day). If the blob of death fails

a saving throw, it can choose to succeed instead.
Magic Resistance. The blob of death has advantage on
saving throws against spells and other magical affects.
Magic Weapons. The blob of death’s attacks are
magical.

Actions
Multiattack. The block of death makes 4 attacks: two
with its pseudopod and two with its maws.
Pseudopod. Melee Weapon Attack: +12 to hit, reach 20
ft., one target. Hit: 19 (2d10 + 8) bludgeoning damage
plus 7 (2d6) acid damage.
Maw. Melee Weapon Attack: +12 to hit, reach 10 ft.,
one target. Hit: 22 (4d6 + 4) slashing damage.

Not for resale. Permission granted to print or photocopy this document for personal use only . HILL 1-S Onslaught 31
 Hulburg
Rebuilding
Dave Zajac
Adventure Designer
Adventure Code: HULB 1-1

Since the rebirth of Hulburg, the strong have preyed upon the weak, with
only limited protection offered by the law. Recently, any resemblance of law
and order has been threatened, and even the town’s greedy callous ruler
cannot ignore the threat anymore. A war is brewing. Can you stop it before
it is too late? A D&D Adventurers League adventure set in Hulburg
A four-hour adventure for 5th-10th level characters

Producer: Baldman Games

Core Administrator: Pieter Sleijpen
Editing and Layout: Encoded Designs
Cartography: Andrew Smith
Organized Play: Chris Lindsay
D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall,
Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks, Alan Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster
Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League, all other Wizards of the Coast product names, and their respective
logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive likenesses
are property of Wizards of the Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America.
Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the express written
permission of Wizards of the Coast.
©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31,
2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK.
 Introduction
Welcome to Hulburg Rebuilding, a D&D adventure that is part of
the official D&D Adventurers League™ organized play system.

Hulburg will be a better place if the common folk know respected and capable adventurers have
taken an interest in its well-being.
—Lord Eorl Hulmaster
This adventure is designed for three to seven 5th-10th level characters, and is
optimized for five 8th-level characters. Characters outside this level range cannot participate in
this adventure.
The adventure is set in the Moonsea region of the Forgotten Realms, in the town of Hulburg.

The D&D Adventurers League Preparing the Adventure

This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of
the D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure,
players track their characters’ experience, treasure,
and other rewards, and can take those characters
through other adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a
store event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a
DCI number. This number is your official Wizards of
the Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have
a number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to
use to create and advance their characters. Players
can continue to play their characters after the
storyline season has finished, possibly participating
in a second or third storyline with those same
characters. A character’s level is the only limitation
for adventure play. A player cannot use a character
of a level higher or lower than the level range of a
D&D Adventurers League adventure.
For more information on playing, running
games as a Dungeon Master, and organizing games
for the D&D Adventurers League, please visit the
D&D Adventurers League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
2 H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
• Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
• Read through the adventure, taking notes
of anything you’d like to highlight or remind
yourself while running the adventure, such as a
way you’d like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d
like to use in a combat.
• Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
• Gather together any resources you’d like to
use to aid you in running this adventure--such
as notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and
battlemaps.
• If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.
Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
• Character name and level
• Character race and class
• Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most
common passive ability check
• Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, etc.)
I N T RO D U C T I O N
Players that have characters outside the
adventure’s level range cannot participate in
the adventure with those characters. Players
with ineligible characters can make a new 1st-level
character or use a pregenerated character. Players
can play an adventure they previously played or
ran as a Dungeon Master, but not with the same
character.
Ensure that each player has an official
adventure logsheet for his or her character (if not,
get one from the organizer). The player fills out
the adventure name, session number, date, and
your name and DCI number. In addition, the player
also fills in the starting values for experience, gold,
downtime, renown, and number of permanent
magic items. He or she fill in the other values and
write notes at the conclusion of the session. Each
player is responsible for maintaining an accurate
logsheet.
If you have time, you can do a quick scan of
a player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing
looks out of order. If you see magic items of very
high rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you
can ask players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict
item use or ask them to use a standard ability
score array. Point players to the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and
it’s the beginning of an adventure or episode,
they can declare their activity and spend the days
now. Alternatively, they can do so at the end of
the adventure or episode. Players should select
their characters’ spells and other daily options
prior to the start of the adventure, unless the
adventure specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread
the adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, you may see sidebars
to help make adjustments for smaller/larger
groups, and characters of higher/lower levels than
the optimized group. Most of the time, this is used
for combat encounters.
You may adjust the adventure beyond the
guidelines given. For example, if you’re playing
3 H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G
with a group of inexperienced players, you might
want to make the adventure a little easier; for
very experienced players, you may want to make
it a little harder. Therefore, five categories of
party strength have been created for you to use
as a guide. Feel free to use a different adjustment
during the adventure if the recommended party
strength feels off for the group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of
five 1th-level characters. To figure out whether
you need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
• Add up the total levels of all the characters
• Divide the total by the number of characters
• Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round
fractions of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table:
Determining Party Strength
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very Weak
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very Strong
Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment
of the game for the players. You help guide the
narrative and bring the words on these pages
to life. The outcome of a fun game session often
creates stories that live well beyond the play at the
table. Always follow this golden rule when you DM
for a group:
Make decisions and adjudications that
enhance the fun of the adventure when
possible.
To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 • You are empowered to make adjustments to
the adventure and make decisions about how the
group interacts with the world of this adventure.
Doing so is especially important and applicable
outside of combat, but feel free to adjust the
adventure for groups that are having too easy or
too hard of a time.
• Don’t make the adventure too easy or too
difficult for a group. Never being challenged
makes for a boring game and being
overwhelmed makes for a frustrating one.
Gauge the experience of the players (not the
characters) with the game, try to feel out (or
ask) what they like in a game, and attempt to
give each of them the experience they’re after
when they play D&D. Give everyone a chance to
shine.
• Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game
session moving along appropriately. Watch for
stalling, since play loses momentum when this
happens. At the same time, make sure that the
players don’t finish too early; provide them with
a full play experience. Try to be aware of running
long or short. Adjust the pacing accordingly
• Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free
to modify the text as you see fit, especially when
dialogue is present.
• Give the players appropriate hints so they can
make informed choices about how to proceed.
Players should be given clues and hints when
appropriate so they can tackle puzzles, combat,
and interactions without getting frustrated over
lack of information. Doing so helps to encourage
immersion in the adventure and gives players
“little victories” for figuring out good choices
from clues.
In short, being the DM isn’t about following
the adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about
facilitating a fun, challenging game environment
for the players. The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has
more information on the art of running a D&D
game.
Downtime and Lifestyle
At the beginning of each play session, players must
declare whether or not they are spending any days
of downtime. The player records the downtime
4 H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G
spent on the adventure logsheet. The following
options are available to players during downtime
(see the D&D basic rules or the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for more information):
• Catching up
• Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
commit to crafting a single item)
• Practicing a profession
• Recuperating
• Spellcasting services
• Training
Other downtime options might be available during
adventures or unlocked through play, including
faction-specific activities.
In addition, whenever a character spends
downtime days, that character also spends the
requisite expense for his or her lifestyle. Costs
are per day, so a character that spends ten days
of downtime also spends ten days of expenses
maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some downtime
activities help with lifestyle expenses or add
lifestyle expenses.
Spellcasting Services
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can
provide some spellcasting services. Characters
need to be able to travel to the settlement to obtain
these services.
Spell services generally available include
healing and recovery spells, as well as information-
gathering spells. Other spell services might be
available as specified in the adventure. The number
of spells available to be cast as a service is limited
to a maximum of three per day total, unless
otherwise noted.
Spellcasting Services
Spell Cost
Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
Identify 20 gp
Lesser restoration 40 gp
Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
Remove curse 90 gp
Speak with dead 90 gp
Divination 210 gp
Greater restoration 450 gp
Raise dead 1,250 gp
I N T RO D U C T I O N

Acolyte Background
A character possessing the acolyte
background requesting spellcasting
services at a temple of his or her faith
may request one spell per day from the
Spellcasting Services table for free. The only
cost paid for the spell is the base price for
the consumed material component, if any.
Melvaunt is a large city where any
acolyte can find a friendly shrine or
temple.
Disease, Death, and Recovery
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might
not have the same characters return from session
to session, here are the rules when bad things
happen to characters.
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating Effects
A character still affected by diseases, poisons,
and other similar effects at the conclusion of an
adventure can spend downtime days recuperating
until such time as he or she resolves the effect to
its conclusion (see the recuperating activity in the
D&D Basic Rules).
If a character doesn’t resolve the effect
between sessions, that character begins the next
session still affected by the debilitating effect.
Death
A character who is killed during the course of
the adventure has a few options at the end of the
session (or whenever arriving back in civilization)
if no one in the adventuring party has immediate
access to a raise dead or revivify spell, or similar
magic. A character subject to a raise dead spell is
affected negatively until all long rests have been
completed during an adventure. Alternatively, each
downtime day spent after raise dead reduces the
penalty to attack rolls, saving throws, and ability
checks by 1, in addition to any other benefits the
downtime activity might provide.
5 H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any
of the other options, the player creates a new
character. The new character does not have any
items or rewards possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing
any vital organs and is mostly whole) and the
player would like the character to be returned to
life, the party can take the body back to civilization
and use the dead character’s funds to pay for a
raise dead spell. A raise dead spell cast in this
manner costs the character 1,250 gp.
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As
above, except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for
the raise dead spell is paid for by the party at the
end of the session. Other characters are under no
obligation to spend their funds to bring back a
dead party member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to
4 and a member of a faction, the dead character’s
body can be returned to civilization and a patron
from the faction ensures that he or she receives a
raise dead spell. However, any character invoking
this charity forfeits all experience and rewards
from that session (both those earned prior to and
after death during that session) and cannot replay
that episode or adventure with that character
again. Once a character reaches 5th level, this
option is no longer available.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Hulburg Today
Over the centuries Hulburg was plundered and
razed many times, but each time industrious folk
returned to rebuild atop its ruins. Remnants of
its previous incarnations still exist beneath the
surface of the current remains as a disjointed
collection of old sewers, passageways, and even the
buried founda-tions and basements of destroyed
buildings.
While small in comparison to its former size,
mod-ern-day Hulburg is no exception to this cycle
of re-birth. Today, the town consists mainly of three
dis-tinct areas: Tent City, the Harbor District, and
Hul-master Manor.
A map can be found in Appendix II.
Tent City
The bulk of the town rests atop a tall plateau on the
northern banks of the Moonsea with the heights
of Thar rising to the north. A steep and rocky hill
blocks expansion to the east, and the stony cliffs
along the Moonsea lie to the south.
Known by Hulburg’s residents as Tent City, the
plateau is home to a haphazard collection of large
canvas tents and makeshift wooden buildings. This
fledgling residential district lies near the center
of the plateau, and it stands upon the ruins of a
former fortress. It contains a large natural well
and several older defenses constructed at the
height of Hulburg’s former glory. Several miles of
unoccupied ruins sur-round the area.
Many residents of Tent City work in Lord Eorl
Hulmaster’s gem mine, which is located in the hills
to the northeast of the town. The remaining resi-
dents survive by plying common trades to support
the miners or working as dockhands in the Harbor
District. Life in Tent City is rough, with most people
living in poverty. These conditions breed crime
and violence, but Lord Hulmaster’s small force of
guards and Hulburg’s larger gangs manage to keep
the town from falling into complete lawlessness.
6 H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G
Harbor District
The lifeline of Hulburg is its harbor, which lies to
the south of Tent City along the northern shore of
the Moonsea. A large, rocky bluff separates it from
Tent City, and travel between the two districts is
limited to a steep man-made trail that traverses the
stony face of the slope. Laborers, called hoppers,
carry loads of ore and other supplies up and down
the trail, which can be treacherous in poor weather.
Warehouses and rows of docks make up the
bulk of the Harbor District, but the area is also
home to a tariff office, guard post, and many other
smaller businesses built to service ships and their
crews. The district has seen recent investments
by Lord Eorl Hulmaster, making it opulent in
comparison to Tent City. Consequently, few tents
and temporary struc-tures lie within its palisades.
A handful of successful merchants, traders, and
ship captains live here, but even these individuals
live a modest lifestyle in comparison to other
towns and cities in the Moonsea region.
Hulmaster Manor
Lord Eorl Hulmaster’s manor lies a short thirty-
minute walk to the northwest of Tent City on
the outskirts of the ruins of old Hulburg. The
current lord and his trusted retainers live in a
small wooden fortress that backs up to a tall bluff.
Residents of Hulburg jokingly (and never in the
presence of the lord or his retainers) refer to the
structure as the Hedge Lord’s Manor.
Adventure Background
In spite of its lawless reputation, Hulburg
maintains a delicate balance that keeps it from
descending into complete chaos. This precarious
system is held in place by the presence of two
major criminal factions: the Ships Guild and
the Scarlet Fangs. These sizeable organizations
respectively control Hulburg’s Harbor District
and Tent City. Many other small gangs exist, but
none comes close to the same reach or power as
the Scarlet Fangs and the Ships Guild. The gangs
have coexisted in a state of dysfunctional harmony
for several years, with each feeding off a different
piece of Hulburg—until recently.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Tent City is home to nearly all of Hulburg’s
miners and other working-class residents.
Unfortunately, it rests directly atop the ruins of old
Hulburg. Roughly ten days ago, Harun Flatsteel, the
leader of a smaller gang of miners known as Clan
Stoneringer, discov-ered an entrance to some of
the ruins beneath the surface. To make some quick
coin and feed his gam-bling addiction, Harun and
his gnome companion, Bettle, mounted a small
expedition into the buried ruins.
In the eerie and disconcerting underground
pas-sages, Harun found little except an impending
sense of unease. He was about to abandon his
search when he stumbled upon a sealed doorway
covered in strange script and symbols. It did not
take the expe-rienced dwarven miner and his
helper long to break through the doorway, where
they discovered an an-cient crypt.
Inside, Harun found two stone cairns. Giving
little thought to the dead, he disassembled the
cairns and retrieved the valuables entombed
with the skeletons. Before he could leave with
the treasure, two ghosts appeared and attacked.
In spite of his battle prowess, Harun could not
prevent the ghosts from possessing him or his
gnome companion.
In life, the ghosts, Sythus and Darnik Handwyn,
were twin brothers. They were also Zhentarim
mem-bers and priests of Bane known for their
fervent ded-ication to the Black Lord. They fell
in battle in 1347 when a horde of orcs in alliance
with the forces of Zhentil Keep destroyed Hulburg.
Knowing their thirst for violence would not grant
them peace in death, their fellow Banite priests
entombed their corpses in a small room and sealed
it by performing a ritual that would keep their
spirits at rest. When Harun destroyed the doorway
sealing the tomb, the sanctity of their resting place
was shattered, and the brothers returned to the
realm of the living as ghosts.
Since that time, Sythus and Darnik have taken
turns possessing, restraining, and torturing Harun
and Bettle to learn all they can of Hulburg’s history
and current situation. The brothers believe they
hear the voice of Bane commanding them to make
war on the residents of Hulburg. As ghosts, their
grasp of reality is tenuous at best, and whether
7 H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G
they are cor-rect or not is questionable.
Regardless of the source, the ghosts have been
all too happy to oblige their violent appetites. After
learning of Hulburg’s power structure, they opted
to destroy the city from within, starting with its
gangs.
Sythus and Darnik began by killing members
of the Ships Guild and the Scarlet Fangs to build
tension and fuel hatred. To their surprise, the
gangs were slower to accuse and act than the
brothers expected.
To hasten their scheme, two nights ago they
left the bodies of Harun and Bettle chained in
the under-ground crypt and possessed two other
members of Clan Stoneringer. Their plan was to
start a bloody conflict at a popular drinking tent
called the Stum-bling Goat, thus plunging the gangs
into all-out war.
Their scheme somewhat failed when the Clan
Stoneringer dwarf Sythus had possessed was
inad-vertently slain during the fight, revealing his
ghostly form. Rather than let their true nature be
exposed, the ghosts opted to kill everyone in the
tent and con-tinue their machinations in a different
manner.
In addition to terrorizing Hulburg, the brothers
have (under the guise of Harun Flatsteel) been
using several loyal and unquestioning members of
Clan Stoneringer to clear rubble and debris from
key loca-tions beneath the ruins of Hulburg. They
believe Bane wants them to discover something
of great im-portance, but they do not know
specifically what.
Possession as a Plot Device
The ghosts of Sythus and Darnik Handwyn
serve as the catalyst for events in HULB1-1
Hulburg Rebuilding. The ghosts spread their
chaos by possessing Hulburg’s residents
and using them to commit acts of deceit and
violence, often disposing of them afterward.
While it is possible many of these
possession attempts would fail from a
gameplay perspective, the narrative assumes
most residents of Hulburg simply do not have
the resilience to resist the ghosts. They are
not adventuring material.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Adventure Overview Faction Assignment: Harpers, Lord’s
Alliance and Order of the Gauntlet. Hulburg
HULB 1-1 Hulburg Rebuilding consists of three ma-
is a recent at-tempt to establish civilization on
jor parts.
the northern shores of the Moonsea. As such its
Part 1: The Hedge Lord. Lord Erol Hulmaster
continued exist-ence of interest to these three
invites the characters to his manor to ask for
factions. They are also aware of recent trouble
their assistance. Violence has broken out between
within that threatens it.
several of the gangs in Hulburg, and with limited
resources, he needs a neutral party to locate and
remedy the source of the conflict.
Keeping Time
HULB1-1 Hulburg Rebuilding is designed to
Part 2: The Gangs of Hulburg. The characters play in a standard 4-hour convention timeslot.
investigate each of Hulburg’s gangs to find the If you need to reduce the time re-quired to
under-lying cause of the gang war. As they do, the play the adventure, consider eliminating
fighting escalates around them. Part 2 ends with encounters Retribution from Part 2 and
the charac-ters learning that something is afoot in Crawlers in the Dark in Part 3. Doing so
the ruins un-der Hulburg. shortens the adventure without upsetting the
Part 3: The Ruins of Hulburg. The characters story.
enter the ruins beneath Hulburg and make their Similarly, if things go faster than planned,
way to the tomb of Sythus and Darnik Handwyn, you can add Crawlers in the Dark regardless
where they have the opportunity to deal with the of the results of the checks, but keep in mind
ghosts once and for all. that this can be a serious drain on the party’s
Adventure Hooks re-sources.

The characters may already have their own reasons

for being in Hulburg, but if not, the following adven-
ture hooks are available to draw them into the story.
Summoned. Lord Eorl Hulmaster’s advisors
in-form him that capable adventurers are in the
area, and he sends an envoy asking the characters
to his manor to discuss the gang war.
Justice. The characters knew one of the
individu-als killed in the earlier gang fighting. They
have come to Hulburg to see justice served.
Travel. The characters are traveling via
ship from one location in the Moonsea region to
another, and their boat has docked in Hulburg’s
harbor for several days to unload and undergo
minor repairs. While exploring the town, they learn
of the gang war and offer their services to Lord
Hulmaster.
Faction Assignment: Zhentarim. The Scarlet
Fangs have drawn the attention of the Zhentarim,
who would like to incorporate the gang into their
organization. Members of the Zhentarim arrive
in Hulburg to gain the trust of the gang’s leader,
Gnarl Nosebiter, thus paving the way for a formal
meeting in the future.

8 H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Part 1.
The Hedge Lord
Expected Duration: 20 minutes
Either of their own volition or with an invitation
from Lord Hulmaster, the characters arrive at
Hulmaster Manor. If the characters arrive on their
own, simply stating that they wish to discuss the
gang war is enough for the manor’s guards to grant
them an audience with the lord, who is eager to see
the situation swiftly resolved.
Although the hour is early, the thirty-minute
walk from Hul-burg’s Tent City to Hulmaster
Manor has left you covered in a thin sheen
of sweat. The weather for the past several
weeks has been unseasonably warm, caus-
ing tempers to flair, and the town is abuzz
with talk of gang violence. As evidence, two
nights ago a particularly brutal fight left six
gang members and two innocents dead. In
response, Lord Eorl Hulmaster has posted a
summons for capable adventures, and you
have an-swered.
Upon arriving at the small well-defended
wooden manor house and announcing your
intentions, Lord Hulmaster’s guards escort
you and your companions to a waiting room.
To your surprise, only minutes pass before a
butler leads you to Lord Hulmaster’s meeting
chamber.
Roleplaying Lord Eorl Hulmaster
At thirty-five years of age, Lord Hulmaster
focuses on the ac-cumulation of wealth. He
owns the gem mine, most of the warehouses
in the Harbor District, and nearly all the
legitimate businesses in Tent City. He has a
wife and several young chil-dren, but they
remain in Mulmaster until he can bring
Hulburg to heel.
Lord Hulmaster has bold plans for
Hulburg but currently lacks the coin to see
those plans fully realized. While not an evil
man, his drive makes him a bit insensitive
toward the working condi-tions of the miners
and the living conditions in Tent City. He has
9 H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G
recently invested in the Harbor District, but
only because he expects a greater return on
his investment.
He considers himself better than the
characters except for other nobles, and while
blunt, he does not act in a rude or con-
descending manner. He realizes the sooner
the gang war is resolved, the sooner his
profits return to normal.
Lord Eorl Hulmaster
After formal introductions, Lord Hulmaster bids
the characters to sit at a long wooden table set
with cups and several pitchers of water.
Lord Hulmaster desires a swift resolution to
the gang war. He does not tarry or beat around the
bush. Instead, he prefers to cut straight to what he
knows and where he thinks the characters should
start their investigation.
In spite of his thriftiness, Lord Hulmaster
does not expect the characters to take on the task
for free. He offers them 500 gp if they can find
the source of the conflict and see it resolved. He
considers the pay-ment more than fair and does
not negotiate or pro-vide any of the amount in
advance.
If the characters accept his terms, Lord
Hulmaster relays the important information below.
• Lord Hulmaster’s resources are limited. He
gener-ally relies on Hulburg’s gangs to maintain
at least a semblance of law and order in the
frontier town. With the gangs fighting among
themselves, he needs help from a neutral party
to find the under-lying cause of the issue.
• The skirmishes started recently and escalated
quickly. It began almost a ten-day prior with the
isolated stabbings of several Ships Guild and
Scar-let Fang gang members. Each was found
dead be-hind tents or in alleys.
PA RT 1
 • Two nights ago, a fight in Tent City resulted in
eight people dead. Of the dead gang members,
three were Scarlet Fangs, two were Clan
Stoneringer la-borers, and one was a Ships Guild
member. A bar-keep and a barmaid also died in
the fight.
• The fight happened at a drinking tent in
Tent City called the Stumbling Goat. The tent
is dismantled. The bodies of the deceased are
at one of Hulburg’s older cemeteries a short
distance from the manor.
• Only the Scarlet Fangs, Ships Guild, and Clan
Stoneringer gangs have been involved in the
fighting so far.
• He provides the basic information on each of
the involved gangs, including the names of each
of the leaders (see the Hulburg’s Gangs sidebar).
• He is contemplating the appointment of a
sheriff to help deal with similar problems in the
future, since his captain of the guard simply does
not have the time. He asks the characters to keep
their eyes open for a possible candidate.
Lord Hulmaster provides the characters with direc-
tions to the cemetery. He suggests they visit it to
see if they can learn anything of significance by
examin-ing the corpses. The cemetery is a fifteen-
minute walk from the manor on the way to Tent
City. He also suggests the characters speak with
each leader of the gangs involved in the fighting.
Finally, he provides the characters with a
formal writ stating they are acting on his behalf.
Hulburg’s Gangs
The gangs below are featured prominently
in HULB 1-1 Hulburg Rebuilding, but many
others exist in the rough frontier town. Except
for the Scarlet Fangs and Ships Guild, most
are groups of small-time thugs or simply
residents who have joined together for
common protection.
Clan Stoneringer. Less a gang than a small
group of miners, Clan Stoneringer is what
the black-bearded mountain dwarf, Harun
Flatsteel, calls his crew of workers. Harun’s
crew consists of dwarves, gnomes, and a
smattering of humans he considers tough
10
enough to do “real work.”
Like most dwarves, Harun is fond of
his ale. When not work-ing in the mine, he
spends most of his time at a gambling tent
called the Sleeveless Charlatan. Aside from
pocketing the occa-sional uncut gem to sell
at the harbor’s black market, the members of
Clan Stoneringer are simply rough and tumble
laborers who like to work and play hard.
Scarlet Fangs. The Scarlet Fangs are your
run-of-the-mill thieves’ guild. They have their
hand in most of the gambling, drinking, and
prostitution that happens in Tent City. Their
lead-er is a 7-foot-tall half-orc by the name of
Gnarl Nosebiter. While Gnarl has a propensity
for solving conflicts with violence, he is as fair
and honorable as a thief can be in his business
deal-ings.
In exchange for a cut of the profits, he and
his crew quell fights, deal with cheaters, and
see that none of Tent City’s “working women”
are treated badly. Gnarl runs his operation
from the top floor of the only two-story
building in Tent City, a raucous tavern named
the Suckling Pup.
Ships Guild. Rumored to be an offshoot
of Luskan’s Ship Kurth, the Ships Guild
surprisingly has the best interests of Hulburg
at heart. The guild is prospering as the town
grows and attracts new settlers, and it hopes
to maintain a steady stream of profits from
that growth.
Its illicit activities consist mainly of
inflating tariffs, skimming cargo from
incoming ships, and buying and selling black
market items from a hidden shop within the
harbor district. Mara Be-try, a levelheaded
human in her mid-forties, heads the guild. She
oversees activities in the harbor from a large
stone ware-house near the water.
H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
PA RT 1
Hulburg’s Cemetery
Hulburg’s cemetery lies midway between Tent
City and Hulmaster Manor on the outskirts of
the former city’s ruins. If the characters stop to
investigate the bodies of those killed in the most
recent gang fight, they find Jarus Grainger digging
graves for the de-ceased.
The elderly priest of Tyr has called Hulburg
home for less than a year. He does his best to tend
to the health of the residents of Tent City and holds
small services to spread the word of the god of
justice.
Roleplaying Jarus Grainger
A native of the Dalelands, Jarus found his faith
in Tyr late in life, after losing his wife to a long
bout of wasting sickness. He is an honest man
with a good heart, but in his fifty-eight years
of living, he has developed a stubborn streak
and a penchant for speaking bluntly. In spite
of his flaws, the residents of Hulburg respect
him.
Jarus came to Hulburg because he knew
the town needed individuals who cared
more for people than profit. Even though
his is simply a low-ranking servant of Tyr,
he firmly believes in the god’s edicts. More
than anything, he wants to see the gang
war stopped and justice served to those
responsible.
Weeds and trees cover a large part of Hul-
burg’s cemetery, but several hundred feet
from its entrance is a neatly tended area
free of overgrowth. A gray-haired man digs a
grave near the middle of the space, pausing
occasionally to stretch his back. He wears a
sweat-soaked tunic that bears an embroi-
dered symbol of a balanced scale resting
atop a hammer. Two corpses wrapped in
sheets lie near the base of the new grave,
with six other freshly filled graves nearby.
Any character recognizes the tunic’s markings as
the symbol of Tyr, the god of justice. The corpses
are those of the individuals killed in the fight at
the Stumbling Goat drinking tent. If the characters
at-tempt to examine the bodies, Jarus stops them
and asks them what they want with the dead. As
long as they show Lord Hulmaster’s writ, he is
11
cooperative and even relieved to know someone is
taking the situation seriously.
Of the eight individuals killed in the fight, only
two corpses remain unburied, one is a male dwarf
and the other a burly human. A successful DC 10
Intelli-gence (Investigation) or DC 10 Wisdom
(Medicine) check reveals both seem to have died
from a single stab wound directly to the heart.
Jarus collected the dead after the incident
occurred and helped move them to the cemetery
for burial. If asked about the wounds on the
two corpses, he re-calls they were found a short
distance from the drinking tent. They were both
near a ruined wall and each had a knife protruding
from their chests.
Jarus assumes one of the two tried to flee,
the other gave chase, and they killed each other
fighting, but he admits the scenario seems odd.
He also informs the characters the other corpses
contained numerous significant stabs and cuts
typical of a swordfight.
In reality, the unburied corpses are two of
those possessed by the ghosts Sythus and Darnik.
After kill-ing everyone in the Stumbling Goat, the
phantom brothers made their way to the nearby
ruined wall. There they murdered the individuals
they possessed by plunging daggers into their
hearts. They then fled the scene.
Clever characters may attempt to learn what
hap-pened during the fight by casting speak with
dead on one of the remaining corpses. If this
happens, re-member to keep the corpse’s answers
brief and cryp-tic. It is fine for the characters to
learn something other than a simple gang fight
occurred, but they do not need to discover the
specifics.
The human corpse was a Scarlet Fang gang
mem-ber and the dwarf a member of Clan
Stoneringer. Both individuals were possessed
but did not see Sythus or Darnik’s spectral forms
approach. Both know something was controlling
them and that their actions before, during, and
after the fight were not their own. The dwarf is
aware of his gang digging around in the ruins, but
the spell is not precise enough for him to guide
the characters to the en-trance. He does not know
about the tomb, nor does he think his leader is
acting strangely.
H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
PA RT 1
 Part 2.
The Gangs of Hulburg
In Part 2 the characters investigate each of
Hulburg’s gangs. As they do, the fighting escalates
around them. Each of the main three encounters
contain a linked secondary encounter that occurs
immediately before or after the primary encounter.
The primary encounters can be played in any
order. The Suckling Pup deals with the Scarlet
Fangs. The Ship Guild obviously deals with the
Ship Guild. The Sleeveless Charlatan deals with
Clan Stoneringer.
When the characters have exhausted all
possible leads and witnessed firsthand the
violence gripping Hulburg, the A Watchful Eye
encounter directs them to the ruins beneath
Tent City, although they might not need the push
depending on how much information they gleaned
in earlier encounters.
The Suckling Pup
Expected Duration: 20 minutes
Gnarl Nosebiter runs the Scarlet Fangs from the
second story of a wooden tavern in Tent City
called the Suckling Pup. The tavern serves a steady
stream of customers from early morning until well
after midnight, with miners stopping by to quench
their thirsts both before and after their shifts.
A wooden sign painted with the image of
a puppy curled atop a barrel of ale hangs
from the second-floor balcony of a tall timber
building. The sounds of laughter and the
smell of pipe smoke spill from an open door
on the ground level into the hot, dry, and
dusty street.
Roleplaying Gnarl Nosebiter
With ample muscles and a clean-shaven head,
the 7-foot-tall half-orc leader of the Scarlet
Fangs makes an intimidating figure. He keeps his
gang of thugs and thieves in line using fear and
violence, but only when necessary. In spite of
his appearance, he is intelligent and calculating.
12
If asked about becoming a sheriff, he thinks
it is a joke at first. Still, he is intrigued.
Gnarl has little patience for those not involved in
his daily business, but if the characters display the
writ they received from Lord Hulmaster, his guards
begrudgingly escort them upstairs to meet with
their leader.
Gnarl’s office is surprisingly clean and orga-
nized. Stacks of papers rest neatly on several
tables lining the walls. In the middle of the
space, the large half-orc sits behind a sizeable
desk. Several small piles of copper, silver, and
gold coins rest on its surface. Gnarl eyes the
coins and looks irritably at a lanky teenage
boy with red hair standing before the desk.
“You aren’t pulling your weight, boy. I’ve no
use for dullards in the Fangs. If you can’t make
your marks, you are of no use to me. You have
a ten-day to make up your shortcomings or
things are going to get considerably worse for
you. Now get out of my sight!”
When the boy turns to leave, you see
a fresh bruise on his left cheek. He hangs his
head and scurries past you toward the steps
at a brisk pace.
The half-orc looks to you, sweat bead-
ing on his clean-shaven head. Visibly annoyed,
he says, “You’re here at Lord Hulmaster’s suf-
ferance, so let’s make this quick. It’s too damn
hot to dance around the issue at hand.”
If questioned about the gang war, Gnarl retells
what the characters already learned from Lord
Hulmaster. He honestly does not know what
happened to cause the fight that killed eight people
two nights earlier. He also does not know what
started the greater conflict, but given the current
situation, he is not surprised the incident occurred.
He is not happy about the deaths of his fellow
members and vows retribution. He suggests the
characters stay out of his way and mind their own
business.
H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
PA RT 2
A successful DC 10 Wisdom (Insight) check reveals
that, in spite of his gruff mannerisms, Gnarl is
holding something back. If the characters notice
this and inquire, the half-orc orders his guards
to leave so that he can speak with the characters
openly. When they have departed, Gnarl admits his
concern over the situation. He does not believe the
Ships Guild would make a play for his business, and
he does not consider Clan Stoneringer a serious
threat. Losing members is bad for his operation,
but given the recent events, he has no choice but
to respond with violence if he is to maintain his
reputation. He truly hopes the characters find a
resolution soon. His members are already on edge,
and it is just a matter of time until the situation
goes from bad to worse.
As the character wrap up their discussion with
Gnarl, proceed to A Fire Inside below.
Desperate Boy
The boy in front of Gnarl calls himself ‘Billy’ for
the moment, although it is not his real name.
He lacks the age and physique to become a
miner, but he desperately wants to become a
man and earn his own coin. He wants to join the
gang since it offers both family and protection,
and he is well aware that accepting favors from
outsiders is not going to help. Besides, the
adventurers are only going to stick around for
a short time. As such, he does not go into an
extensive discussion with the characters (and
Gnarl is certainly not going to wait).
The boy has a more important role in HULB
1-2 Hulburg Burning, so be sure to make his
presence memorable without overdoing it.
A Fire Inside
As the characters finish their meeting with Gnarl,
screams break out in the tavern below. By the time
they make it to the ground floor, the entire bar is
on fire, and they discover both exits barred from
the outside.
13
When you reach the first floor of the tavern,
you find its bar ablaze. Screaming and cough-
ing patrons run about searching frantically
for an exit. Several men struggle to open the
wooden door at the front of the building.
Behind you, you hear Gnarl barking orders
to his men to help him retrieve the valuables
from upstairs. He turns to you and yells, “Get
these people out of here!” before bounding
back up the steps.
Two doors provide exit from the tavern: one in
its front and one in its back. Unfortunately, both
are chained shut from the outside, and the fire is
already too large to be extinguished by ordinary
means. Well-prepared characters can douse the fire
using magic, provided the spell cast is capable of
extinguishing flames in an area equal to or greater
than a 20-foot cube.
To escape, the characters can force either door
open with a successful DC 20 Strength check. As
an alternative, they can throw a chair through one
of the tavern’s two large front windows. There are
also several smaller windows on the second floor,
but escaping through them and dropping 10 feet
to the ground would be difficult for the tavern’s
patrons.
Splitting the Party
If characters remain downstairs while others
go up to meet with Gnarl, there is a chance
they catch the dockworkers in the act of arson.
Sythus and Darnik move quickly upon entering
the tavern. They target the bar with their flasks
of oil, breaking the flammable bottles of spirits
and setting it ablaze before the characters can
react.
While the characters cannot stop the
possessed dockworkers from lighting the bar on
fire, there is a chance their presence and quick
action is enough to cause the ghosts to abandon
their plan to slaughter the patrons. Allow each
character remaining on the first floor to make a
DC 15 Dexterity or DC 15 Wisdom (Perception)
check. If half or more of the characters succeed,
the ghosts flee the tavern without chaining
the doors shut, and all of the patrons escape
without harm.
H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
PA RT 2
 The two dockworkers are commoners, and
as such can potentially be stopped before they
leave the tavern or kill themselves. If so, do not
worry. See the speak with dead information
below for what they know. Characters with a
passive Perception of 20 or higher observing
the two just after capture note some magical
energy leaving the captured dockworkers, but
it is too quick for any details. Keep in mind that
the ghosts are intelligent, and they prefer to
leave when no ranger or cleric type of character
is observing.
To maintain a sense of urgency, only give the
players about a minute to decide what actions to
take. If the characters manage to force open one
of the doors in three rounds or less, they (and all
the patrons) escape without harm. If they break a
window, they escape as well. However, the extra
time and care required to climb though the jagged
frame causes part of the tavern’s ceiling to collapse.
The collapse traps the establishment’s bartender,
an elderly man called Pour Pete.
A character can attempt to rescue Pete by
lifting the beam trapping him with DC 12 Strength
(Athletics) check. A success allows Pete to wriggle
free and escape. A failure causes the character
lifting the beam to suffer 2d6 fire damage. Two
characters can attempt to lift the beam by working
together. This grants the primary character
advantage, but if the check fails, both characters
suffer 2d6 fire damage. On the third failure,
another portion of the ceiling collapses, burying
the bartender in flaming rubble, and he perishes.
After the Fire
After the characters, Gnarl, and his men escape,
the Suckling Pup burns to the ground in a matter
of minutes. If questioned about the fire’s origin,
the surviving patrons report that two men in
dockworker clothing came in and hurled flasks
of flaming oil at the bar. They then yelled, “Death
to the Scarlet Fangs!” and each ran out a separate
entrance.
The dockworkers were the possessed pawns
of Sythus and Darnik, and after chaining the tavern
doors shut, the ghosts fled to a nearby tent. Inside,
they murdered the individuals they possessed by
14
driving daggers into their hearts. Once free from
the dockworkers’ bodies, the ghosts easily escaped
in ethereal form.
If the characters search for the criminals,
they discover their corpses in a nearby tent with
daggers protruding from their chests. If they noted
the different wounds on the two corpses at the
cemetery, they immediately recognize the same
wounds on the bodies.
As before, clever characters may attempt to
learn what happened by casting speak with dead
on one of the corpses. If this happens, remember
to keep the corpse’s answers brief and cryptic. It
is fine for the characters to learn the dockworkers
were compelled to act against their will, but they
do not need to discover the exact nature of the
compulsion.
Both individuals were Ships Guild members,
named Treemus and Ellisa. Sythus and Darnik were
careful to possess them so as not to be seen. Both
know something was controlling them and that
their actions were not their own. Neither knows
exactly what forced them to act. They neither saw
nor heard anybody casting a spell.
Faction Assignment: Zhentarim
Gnarl Nosebiter is fond of his bartender, Pour
Pete. If the elderly man survives the fire, the
half-orc is grateful. Since the Zhentarim helped
rescue his old friend, he agrees to a formal
meeting with them at a later date.
If Pour Pete perishes in the fire, Gnarl
refuses to meet with the Zhentarim, and the
faction assignment fails.
H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
PA RT 2
The Ships Guild
Expected Duration: 40 minutes
To reach the Ships Guild, the characters must travel
down the rocky cliff that separates Tent City from
the Harbor District. Doing so is a fifteen-minute
walk, but the return trip requires almost twice as
much time due to the steep incline of the trail.
While not cool, the breeze from the Moonsea
rustles through the Harbor District, provid-
ing a brief respite from the oppressive heat.
Warehouses, docks, and the tall masts of
ships dominate the waterfront. A smattering
of smaller businesses and alehouses fills in the
gaps.
After several minutes of wandering, you
finally locate the large stone warehouse near
the water that belongs to the Ships Guild.
The Ships Guild employs an impressive array
of informants, so the characters’ arrival is not a
surprise. Tiers of scaffolding stocked with crates
and barrels form a labyrinth inside the warehouse.
Upon entering, four solid dockworkers guide the
characters to an enclosed mezzanine in the center
of the large building. From inside, Mara Betry
oversees the day-to-day activities of the Ships Guild.
Roleplaying Mara Betry
Wisps of gray streak Mara Betry’s coal-black
hair. She is attractive for her forty-four years
of age and not afraid to use her charm to get
what she wants. Mara treats the members of
the Ships Guild with decency and respect, and
they are fiercely loyal to her in return.
The Ships Guild leader has a reputation
for being sensible and fair. She captained a
cargo vessel for many years. Consequently,
she knows how to handle people and how to
solve disputes without bloodshed.
If asked about becoming a sheriff, she
immediately takes the suggestion seriously.
She is genuinely concerned about the fate
of her people, and being a sheriff is going
to help. Of course, she is realistic enough to
realize her appointment would not go over
well with other gangs.
15
Mara is genuinely concerned about the gang
fighting and not simply because she recently lost
several dockworkers. She explains that the gangs
have always respected each other’s territories. She
has no interest in mining, gambling, or prostitution
and only wants to see things return to normal.
If asked about the other gangs or their leaders,
she mentions that Harun Flatsteel had been selling
more “extra” gems from the mine than usual. Ten
days ago, he stopped bringing gems to the black
market altogether, but she does not see how the
change could be related to the violence.
Retribution
As the characters make their way to or from the
harbor, they encounter a band of five Scarlet
Fang veterans taking vengeance on four Ships
Guild thugs, for each thug that escapes alive or is
disabled by the characters they gain xp as if they
defeated the thugs. The Ships Guild thugs are easily
outmatched, making the fight more of a slaughter.
The characters can choose to ignore the fight
or try to save the Ships Guild members by getting
involved.
As you navigate the streets near the harbor,
you hear the unmistakable ringing of metal
on metal. When you round the corner, you
see fighting at the end of an alleyway.
The Scarlet Fang veterans have the Ships Guild
thugs trapped at the end of the alley where they
are slowly cutting them to pieces. One of the Fangs
keeps guard on the roof, far enough away from the
rest to prevent area spells hitting both.
If the characters ignore the fight or watch from
a distance, it only takes the Scarlet Fangs moments
to cut them down. Once finished, they loot the
bodies and move on in search of other victims.
If the characters attempt to engage the Scarlet
Fangs verbally or physically, they turn on the party
and attack the characters instead. However, the
characters’ involvement is enough of a distraction
to allow the Ships Guild gang members to escape.
If the characters capture any of the Scarlet
Fang members, they learn nothing of interest. The
Scarlet Fangs were merely seeking vengeance for
the earlier deaths of their gang’s members.
The Scarlet Fangs are half-orcs and have the
H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
PA RT 2
 following powers in addition to regular veterans
and gladiator:
Senses. Darkvision 60 feet.
Relentless Endurance. When they are
reduced to 0 hit points but not outright killed, they
can drop to 1 hit point instead.
Savage Attack. When they score a critical
hit with a melee weapon attack, they deal one
extra weapon damage dice in addition to that of a
critical.
Adjusting the Encounter
While potentially a hard encounter, the intent
is more to let the characters know tension
is rising. They can try to put an end to the
fighting through social interaction though. If
they do talk, give them full XP for defeating
the opponents.
Here are recommendations for adjusting
this combat encounter. These are not
cumulative.
• Very weak party: Remove two veterans.
• Weak party: Remove one veteran.
• Strong party: Add one veteran and one
gladiator.
• Very strong party: Add two gladiators.
General Features
The area has the following features.
Light. Daylight.
Crates. Several crates lie scattered about the
alleyway. Each crate can provide half-cover.
Tactics
When the characters enter the fight, the Ships
Guild thugs use their actions to disengage and
flee. As long as the characters remain to fight, the
Scarlet Fangs do not give chase. If it becomes clear
the Fangs are overmatched, they try to flee or
surrender. They are not suicidal.
Treasure
If the characters kill, chase off, or otherwise
incapacitate the Scarlet Fangs, they find 250 gp in
various coins and one potion of greater healing on
the bodies.
16
The Sleeveless Charlatan
Expected Duration: 40 minutes
In spite of being possessed by a ghost, Harun
Flatsteel still spends part of his days working
in Hulburg’s mine. He also spends most nights
drinking and gambling at a gaming tent called the
Sleeveless Charlatan.
After possessing the dwarf in the underground
ruins, Sythus and Darnik chained the Clan
Stoneringer leader in their tomb and spent time
interrogating and torturing him. In doing so,
they learned a great deal about Hulburg’s power
structure and how its gangs interact.
Since then, the ghosts have taken care to
preserve Harun’s basic routine. Doing so allows
them to maintain control of Clan Stoneringer and
use its members for their own nefarious plans.
This means the brothers must routinely possess
the dwarf and keep up appearances by appearing
at the mine and the Sleeveless Charlatan.
If the characters seek an audience with Harun
at the mine, their request is denied. Even though
they have a writ from Lord Hulmaster, the mine
is simply too large and too dangerous for them
to be allowed inside. The mine’s guards suggest
the characters seek the dwarf at the Sleeveless
Charlatan at night.
On any given night, the possessed Harun
Flatsteel arrives at the gambling tent around dusk,
making him easy for the characters to locate.
The flaps of the large tent before you are tied
back, allowing a meager hot breeze to work
its way inside. Within, sweaty patrons sit around
circular tables holding hands of cards or rolling
dice. Bottles of spirits line a small corner bar.
Beside it rests an elevated wooden keg with a
tap at its base.
A black-bearded dwarf sits alone at a ta-
ble. Raising his mug, he calls to a middle-aged
woman wearing too much powder on her
face. “Fetch me another ale, Twilio.”
You watch as the woman pulls a dark-
brown ale from the keg and delivers it to the
dwarf. She places it on the table and says,
“It’s good to see you around, Harun. I’d hate
to think you were spending time with anoth-
er woman’s ale.” She adds a sultry wink and
makes her way back to the bar.
With a look of indifference, the dwarf
takes a drink from the mug.
H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
PA RT 2

Roleplaying Harun Flatsteel
When the characters encounter Harun
Flatsteel, he is possessed by Sythus
Handwyn’s ghost. The ghost has taken great
care to preserve the middle-aged dwarf’s
accent and mannerisms, but his presentation
is not flawless. He occasionally pauses while
talking, either searching for the correct words
or struggling to keep his thoughts together.
Because of this, Sythus keeps his answers
short and to the point.
To help with any lies he has to tell, the
ghost speaks about the dwarf in the third
person. He uses phrases like, “Old Harun
thinks all this violence is a terrible tragedy.”
If the characters ask Harun about the fight at the
Stumbling Goat, the dwarf replies that his workers
frequently drink there. He adds that they usually
keep to themselves.
If questioned about the gang war, he states
that he and his crew are a small-time operation. He
chalks their involvement up to being in the wrong
place at the wrong time.
If accused of stealing gems from the mine, Harun
confesses to the crime. He also points out that most
miners pocket a gem here and there. He admits to
having a gambling addiction, but he claims he has
not stolen any gems in nearly a tenday.
Sythus does his best to keep some truth in
Harun’s replies, hoping they hold up under scrutiny.
If a character specifically questions the truth of
his answers, allow them to make a DC 15 Wisdom
(Insight) check. Success on the check allows the
character to realize the dwarf is either lying or
holding something back.
If a character presses the dwarf about it, he
admits something strange is happening in Hulburg.
He confesses that his crew has recently seen several
Scarlet Fangs lurking around a ruined building on
the outskirts of Tent City. He offers the characters
directions to the site.
Harun asks that Clan Stoneringer’s name be left
out of whatever they find at the site. He states that
he cannot afford to lose any more members to gang
violence. A successful DC 15 Wisdom (Insight) check
reveals he is lying. In reality, the ghost hopes to
stage a trap in the ruins and eliminate the meddling
characters for good.
17
If the characters speak with the dwarf but do
not suspect he is lying or do not press him for
information, Harun volunteers the tale about the
Scarlet Fangs before they depart. He knows he must
deal with the characters before they learn too much.
Note that Sythus can be detected with a detect
evil and good, hinting something is wrong, but not
exactly what. A paladin of course knows of the
presence of an undead. Unless special precautions
are taken, Sythus is aware some kind of ability is
used and reacts accordingly. Casting spells without
permission is at best rude and at worse assault. It is
similar to drawing a weapon.
Development
If the characters start to suspect or accuse Harun
of lying, Sythus does his best to deceive them with
the story about the Scarlet Fangs. He then excuses
himself, claiming he only stopped by for a quick
drink and has other matters that need his attention.
If the characters attempt to restrain or detain
the possessed dwarf, he does his best to flee. As a
last resort, he pulls a dagger and stabs himself in the
heart. This action kills the dwarf and reveals Sythus’
true form. The ghost then enters the Ethereal Plane
and sinks into the ground, escaping into the ruins
beneath Tent City.
If the characters are perceptive enough to drive
the ghost from Harun’s body before he can flee (such
as by using turn undead or dispel evil and good),
Sythus attempts to kill the dwarf before escaping,
but not at the risk of his own unlife. He does so
to keep the location of his tomb a secret. Use the
commoner statistics for Harun’s physical form.
If the characters somehow manage to save
Harun, the dwarf knows the location of the ghosts’
tomb and tells them how to find it. If this happens,
skip It’s a Trap, and proceed directly to A Watchful
Eye and potentially Minions in the Dark in Part 3
afterwards.
The rest of the adventure assumes the
characters do not discover Harun’s possession or the
possessed dwarf escapes. If events unfold differently,
adjust the remaining encounters to fit.
Awarding XP
If the characters managed to save Harun Flatsteel
from the ghost in this encounter, award the same
XP as if defeating the dwarves in the ambush and
proceed to A Watchful Eye.
H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
PA RT 2
 It’s a Trap!
When the characters arrive at the ruined location
given to them by Harun Flatsteel, four seasoned
Clan Stoneringer veterans and their leader Barr
Flatsteel (a cousin of Harun), black earth priest,
are waiting for them. The group consists of the
same loyal and unquestioning dwarves Sythus and
Darnik have been using to excavate key locations
beneath the ruins.
Even at night, the heat remains oppressive.
Mosquitos and other insects swarm about,
adding to the misery. A thick, humid haze
quells the moonlight, making it difficult to spot
potential threats amid the foundations and
collapsed walls that fill the area.
The Clan Stoneringer dwarves begin combat
crouching behind the crumbled walls. Since the
characters are expecting possible trouble, allow
each of them to make a DC 15 Wisdom (Perception)
check with Advantage. Those who succeed hear
the slight clink of armor just before the Clan
Stoneringer dwarves attack. They are not surprised
and can act during the first round of combat
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Remove two veterans.
• Weak party: Remove one veteran.
• Strong party: Add two veterans.
• Very strong party: Use the stonemelder
version for Barr. Replace the veteran’s with
gladiators.
General Features
The area has the following features.
Light. Darkness.
Walls. Portions of crumbled walls and old
foundations dot the area. These three-foot-tall
obstacles provide half-cover. Climbing over a wall
requires a successful DC 10 Strength (Athletics)
or DC 10 Dexterity (Acrobatics) check. Characters
who fail the check slip and end their movement.
Characters who fail the check by 5 or more fall
prone and end their movement.
Stoneringers. The Stoneringers are dwarves
and as such they all have darkvision 60 ft.,
advantage on saving throws against poison, and
resistance against poison damage.
18
Tactics
Barr starts the fight with his area spells, potentially
cast at higher level for more damage. He is not afraid
of melee combat though, especially considering
his shield spell. The Clan Stoneringer veterans
concentrate on eliminating any characters they see
wielding divine or arcane magic (in that order).
The Clan Stoneringer dwarves are wholly
loyal to Harun, and have the typical stubbornness
of dwarves. Ultimately, they are not suicidal, and
if things go really badly they try to flee and/or
surrender. If the characters choose to knock one
or more of the dwarves unconscious and question
them, see Interrogating a Dwarf below.
Treasure
If the characters kill or capture the Clan
Stoneringer dwarves, they find 150 gp in various
coins, a ruby ring worth 100 gp, and a jade
statuette of a bear worth 50 gp on their bodies.
Interrogating a Dwarf
If the characters elect to spare one or more of the
Clan Stoneringer dwarves, they can attempt to gain
information from their captive. Doing so requires a
successful DC 15 Charisma (Intimidation) check. Each
Clan Stoneringer dwarf can convey the points below.
• Harun Flatsteel ordered the dwarves to ambush
the characters.
• The dwarves work for Harun at the mine. He is
their foreman.
• Harun found an entrance leading to the older
tunnels beneath the city. (The dwarves give the
characters the exact location - proceed directly to
Minions in the Dark in Part 3.)
• Harun hasn’t been himself since he found the
entrance. He disappears from the mine for hours
during the day and does not spend as much time
gambling as before.
• The dwarves have been digging under the city
at Harun’s request. So far, they have only found
empty passages and some strange trinkets, which
they have sold for a few silvers.
The Clan Stoneringer dwarves are not inherently
evil. They were only following Harun’s orders. It
is up to the characters to decide what to do with
any dwarves they spare. Hulburg has no jail, but if
necessary, Lord Hulmaster’s guards can detain the
captives and decide their fate.
H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
PA RT 2
A Watchful Eye
Expected Duration: 10 minutes
Immediately after exploring their final lead in Part
2, if Harun Flatsteel drew them into an ambush it
is after the trap the characters are approached by
Faylin Greenbaum. Since Faylin has been searching
for the characters, this encounter can occur
anywhere in Hulburg and at any time of the day
Roleplaying Faylin Greenbaum
In spite of her half-elven heritage, Faylin is
neither slender nor graceful. While the thirty-
two-year-old’s dusty blond hair, blue-gray
eyes, and stout build are somewhat plain, her
true beauty lies on the inside.
Faylin oversees Hulburg’s mine. Lord
Hulmaster pays her a pittance of her actual
worth, but she cares little for money. Her
heart lies with the town’s miners and other
working-class residents. She spends her free
time and money repairing tents, serving
meals, and performing other tasks to improve
the living conditions in Tent City.
Faylin holds no particular religious
devotion. While she admires Jarus Grainger
for his dedication to Tyr, she prefers to rely on
her own hard work and compassion to make
Hulburg a better place to live.
She was not aware Lord Hulmaster was
looking for a sheriff, but she is definitely
interested, and she considers herself a logical
candidate.
19
Faylin freely shares the information below:
• Harun started behaving strangely about ten days
ago after he missed a day of work. When his
attendance became even spottier, she decided
to question the dwarf, and Harun claimed to be
feeling ill.
• When other members of Clan Stoneringer started
missing shifts, the half-elf grew concerned. After
the deaths at the Stumbling Goat, she decided to
follow Harun to make certain his crew was not
the source of the trouble.
• Last night, Faylin tracked Harun and his friend
Bettle to the ruins on the outskirts of Tent City.
She saw them enter a tunnel in the basement
of a crumbled building. While she hid and
waited for the pair to emerge, several other Clan
Stoneringer dwarves arrived carrying picks
and shovels. They entered as well. The dwarves
departed the ruins near dawn, but Harun and
Bettle did not.
• So far, Faylin has not seen Clan Stoneringer
commit any crimes, but she knows something out
of the ordinary is happening.
• Since Lord Eorl Hulmaster has tasked the
characters with investigating the gangs, she
decided to bring the information directly to them.
• Faylin can show the characters the exact location
of the ruined building that holds the tunnel (A
Trail in the Dark in Part 3).
• Faylin asks the characters to leave her name out
of any official reports. She does not want the
other miners to feel like she cannot be trusted.
H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
PA RT 2
 Part 3.
The Ruins oF Hulburg
Miles of old passages and rooms lie beneath
Hulburg. Most are the product of many centuries
of destruction and rebuilding. These underground
ruins exist in small sections. Collapsed tunnels
connect some, but many remain as individual
dungeons either completely isolated or only
accessible from the surface. The tunnel Harun
Flatsteel found in the basement of the ruined
building outside Tent City leads to one of these
underground areas.
Unfortunately for the residents of Hulburg,
Clan Stoneringer’s recent excavation efforts have
opened several passages to the oldest levels of the
buried city, and undead are beginning to ascend
from its depths. Sythus and Darnik have brought
several of these undead horrors under their
control, and they now protect the ghosts’ tomb.
A Trail in the Dark
Expected Duration: 10 minutes
The entrance to Hulburg’s underground ruins
lies twenty minutes from Tent City. When the
characters arrive, they find the area and the
entrance unguarded.
Stone steps lead to the basement of a ruined
building. Splintered wood, rock, and other de-
bris lie scatter about. In the corner of the under-
ground room, a doorway leads into darkness.
To reach the ghosts’ tomb, the characters need to
navigate the underground ruins. To do so, they
need to follow the tracks left by Harun, Bettle,
and other dwarves of Clan Stoneringer. Since the
Clan Stoneringer dwarves have been excavating
different areas within this section of the ruins,
numerous tracks exist, making the path difficult to
follow.
If the characters learned the way to the tomb
from Harun in The Sleeveless Charlatan or from
a Clan Stoneringer dwarf in It’s A Trap in Part 2,
they can proceed directly to Minions in the Dark.
20
The initial trail of boot prints and moved
stones makes tracking simple, but after thirty-
minutes of walking, all signs of movement
disappear. Relocating the trail requires a group
Survival check. Each character must make an
individual DC 15 Wisdom (Survival) check. If half
or more of the characters succeed, they manage to
locate the trail again and follow it to Minions in
the Dark below. If half or more of the characters
fail, they become temporarily lost and stumble into
a room occupied by carrion crawlers (see Crawlers
in the Dark below).
Awarding XP
If the characters pass the group survival check
to rediscover the trail, award them 270 XP each.
Award the same amount if they learned the way to
the tomb from Harun or from a Clan Stoneringer
dwarf in Part 2.
Crawlers in the Dark
Expected Duration: 30 minutes
This encounter can be skipped if the adventurers
learn the exact path in Part 2, or if they made the
group Survival check at the start of Part 3.
The hallway you have been following opens to
a small landing before rising to an empty room
that is 20 feet wide and 40 feet deep. A short
flight of steps leads to a large 10-foot-square
with an open doorway on the room’s west wall.
Three carrion crawlers make their home in the
large divided room. One of the carrion crawlers
lurks above the room’s entrance, clinging to the
wall. When a character enters the room, it attacks.
Characters with a passive Perception of 15 or
lower are surprised by the attack and unable to act
during the first round of combat.
The remaining two creatures dwell beyond the
west doorway. The sound of combat draws them to
the fight.
H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
PA RT 3
 Adjusting the Encounter
The encounter should drain some resources, but
it should be relatively easy.
Here are recommendations for adjusting
this combat encounter. These are not
cumulative.
• Very weak party: Each carrion crawler has
25 hit points.
• Weak party: One carrion crawler has 25 hit
points.
• Strong party: Increase the AC, attack rolls,
damage rolls, the DC of the paralysis and
saves by 1 and the hit points by 20.
• Very strong party: Replace the carrion
crawlers with two bulettes.
General Features
The area has the following features.
Light. Darkness.
Ceilings. The ceilings in the hallways are 10
feet high. The ceilings in each room are 20 feet high.
Tactics
As mindless devourers of death and decay, the
carrion crawlers utilize little in the way of tactics.
They attempt to paralyze their prey and drag it into
the western room. If successful, they kill their meal
and leave it to ripen before returning to combat for
more food. The bulettes are slightly smarter, but
just as hungry.
Minions in the Dark
Expected Duration: 40 minutes
After almost an hour of navigating Hulburg’s
underground passages, the characters finally arrive
at the entrance to the rooms that hold Sythus and
Darnik’s tomb.
Hulburg’s underground ruins are cool and in
sharp contrast with the sweltering heat on the
surface.
After nearly an hour of navigating damp
and the dark tunnels, you arrive at an inter-
section. Stairs rise to the north and south. The
northern steps end at a pair of large stone
doors, the southern steps in a collapse of stone
and earth. Several picks and shovels rest near-
by. To the east, an alcove holds piles of dirt
and rock. The rubble appears to be from the
collapsed hallway to the south.
21
The Clan Stoneringer dwarves have been
excavating the southern hallway at the possessed
Harun’s request. The piles of rubble are the results
of their efforts. In spite of their persistence, they
have yet to break through the collapse in this
particular area of the ruins.
Not long after returning to the material plane,
the ghosts repaired both sets of stone doors in
the room to the north of the intersection. The
doors remain locked at all times to keep the Clan
Stoneringer dwarves from discovering what lies
beyond. Opening either set of doors requires a
successful DC 15 Dexterity (thieves’ tools) check.
If necessary, a character can force the doors open
with a successful DC 20 Strength check.
The ghosts have called a flameskull and four
ghasts from deeper in the ruins to guard the area
leading to their tomb. These undead minions
attack any living creature that enters the room,
providing they are not possessed by Sythus or
Darnik.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Remove one ghast. Each
ghast has 18 hit points.
• Weak party: Remove one ghast.
• Strong party: Add one flameskull. The
turning defiance of the ghast applies to the
flameskulls as well.
• Very strong party: Add a flameskull. Increase
the ghasts AC, attack rolls, damage and the
save DC of its claws by 2 and they have 50
hit points. The turning defiance of the ghasts
applies to the flameskulls as well.
General Features
The area has the following features.
Light. Darkness.
Ceilings. The ceiling in the hallway is 10 feet high.
The ceiling in the room to the north is 20 feet high.
Braziers. Old brass braziers rest in the corners of
the room. The wood they contain is too damp to burn.
H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
PA RT 3
 Statue. A 15-foot-tall stone statue of a robed
human holding a triangular tray occupies the
northern end of the room. Its significance has been
lost to time.
The statue is large enough to block line of sight
and provide full cover to those behind it. Climbing
the statue requires a successful DC 15 Strength
(Athletics) check.
Tactics
The ghasts swarm any character who enters the
room. They fight in a pack, hoping to take down
individual foes quickly.
The flameskull hovers near the middle of the
room just below the 20-foot-tall ceiling. When
the characters enter, it flairs to life, shedding
bright light in a 15-foot radius and dim light for an
additional 15 feet. It remains near the ceiling, using
its spells and fire ray to attack from a distance. If
the characters eliminate the ghasts before killing
the flameskull, it casts fireball at the center of the
room.
All the undead creatures fight until slain. If
driven off by the use of turn undead, they return
when the feature’s duration expires and attack the
characters again.
Development
Fighting in this area alerts the ghosts and wights in
the next room (Ghosts in the Dark) to intruders,
giving them time to prepare for battle. If the
characters unlock and open the doors leading to
the area during combat, the ghosts and wights join
fight.
If the characters pause for more than five
minutes after the fight, the ghosts and wights from
Ghosts in the Dark arrive and attack.
Ghosts in the Dark
This large 35-foot-by-75-foot room once
functioned as a worship hall. A small sacristy
exists at its southern end. The sacristy served as
Sythus and Darnik’s tomb until Harun Flatsteel
and his gnome companion broke through its sealed
doorway, destroying the runes that kept the ghosts
at rest.
The ghosts of Sythus and Darnik and four
wights wait inside the main room. The fighting
22
in the nearby area has given them ample time to
prepare for combat (see Tactics below).
Six thick stone columns rise thirty feet to the
ceiling of the large rectangular room before
you. A row of old wooden pews lies between
them. A doorway occupies the southern wall.
Rubble lies scattered about near it.
As you survey the space, several humanoid
forms with gaunt faces emerge from the shad-
ows and move purposefully toward you with
drawn swords.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Replace wights with ghasts.
Each ghost has 25 hit points.
• Weak party: Remove one wight. Each wight
has 25 hit points.
• Strong party: Add two wights.
• Very strong party: Add two wights. Each
wight has a +2 to AC, attack rolls, damage
and the saving throw of its life drain ability
and has 60 hit points. Each ghost has 68
hit points and a +2 to attack rolls, damage
rolls and the saving throw of its possession
ability.”.
General Features
The area has the following features.
Light. Darkness.
Ceilings. The ceiling in the main room is 30
feet high. The ceiling in the small sacristy to the
south is 10 feet high.
Columns. The large support columns block
line of sight and provide full cover to those hiding
behind them.
Pews. The wooden pews are bolted to the floor
and unmovable. They provide half-cover. Climbing
over a pew requires a successful DC 10 Strength
(Athletics) or DC 10 Dexterity (Acrobatics) check.
Characters who fail the check slip and end their
movement. Characters who fail the check by 5 or
more fall prone and end their movement.
Tactics
Both ghosts start the fight hovering just below
the ceiling behind the room’s northeastern
support columns. On his turn, Darnik moves to
an advantageous location and uses his horrifying
H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
PA RT 3
visage, hoping to scare off as many enemies as
possible. If he has enough movement remaining,
he flies into another room, remaining near the
ceiling. Sythus attempts to possess any character
that looks like an easy target, such as fighters and
barbarians, to then attack the group’s spellcasters.
The wights attack the strongest or most
heavily armored opponent. They fight as a group
to take down individual characters quickly. If hit
by a magical weapon, they change their focus and
attempt to eliminate the character wielding it.
The ghosts and wights fight until destroyed. If
driven off by the use of turn undead, they return
when the feature’s duration expires and attack the
characters again.
Combating Turn Undead
Because of their turn undead class feature,
clerics and paladins pose the greatest threat
to the ghosts and their wight allies. When
facing a party with multiple clerics or a cleric
and a paladin, repeated turn attempts can
easily decimate the undead’s ranks.
If you encounter this situation, consider
using etherealness to keep one or both of the
ghosts on the Ethereal Plane. You can bring
them back once the bulk of the party’s turn
undead attempts have been expended.
Another option is to let both ghosts
attempt to possess characters who can turn
undead as early as possible in the fight, thus
eliminating the greatest threats.
Rescue in the Dark
The ghosts have chained Harun Flatsteel (assuming
the characters have not caught or killed him) and
his gnome companion, Bettle, to the wall of the
small sacristy that once served as their tomb. A peg
on the opposite wall of the tiny room holds a ring
with a key that unlocks their manacles. Picking
the locks on the manacles requires a successful
DC 15 Dexterity (thieves’ tools) check. If needed,
a character can force the manacles open with a
successful DC 20 Strength check.
Harun is able to answer any questions about
the sequence of events that occurred over the past
ten days. He is genuinely remorseful for his actions
(both possessed and unpossessed) and willing to
cooperate in any way possible.
Two stone cairns occupy the western portion
of the room. Sythus and Darnik’s skeletal remains
still lie within. The cairns also hold the brothers’
23
holy symbols and all the items they were buried
with (see Treasure below). The holy symbols
depict a black fist squeezing green rays of light. Any
character proficient in the Religion skill recognizes
the symbols belong to Bane, the god of Tyranny.
If the ghosts were turned and not destroyed,
their holy symbols are the key to granting them
rest. Let any character proficient in the Religion
skill make a DC 15 Intelligence (Religion) check.
Those who succeed realize it is possible to perform
a quick ritual capable of forcing the spirits back
into their earthly forms.
To perform the ritual, a character must make
a successful DC 15 Intelligence (Religion) check
while touching one of the corpses and its holy
symbol. The ritual takes three rounds to complete,
and the character performing it must maintain his
or her concentration for the duration.
If a character attempts the ritual during the
fight with the ghosts, they immediately sense the
threat and attack the character in anger.
The ritual is not capable of putting Sythus and
Darnik’s spirits to rest permanently, but it does
grant the characters enough time to transport
their bones and holy symbols to Jarus Grainger.
The elderly priest can see the brothers finally find
eternal rest.
Treasure
Sythus and Darnik were buried with their favored
weapons: a wicked-looking mace fashioned from
razor-sharp metal and skulls (vicious weapon) and
a silvered warhammer etched with the holy symbol
of Bane worth 15 gp. In addition, their cairns hold
500 gp in gems and coins.
H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
PA RT 3
 Conclusion
While Lord Eorl Hulmaster’s greed typically
knows no bounds, the characters have done him a
considerable service by stopping the gang war. To
show his appreciation, he pays them the agreed
upon 500 gp.
Assuming the characters also dealt with the
gangs in a reasonable fashion they earn the reward
Gratitude of Hulburg’s Gangs: Clan Stoneringer
/ Scarlet Fangs / Ships Guild. Scratch the names
of the gangs if they were rude, aggressive, killed
their leaders or otherwise aggravated the gangs.
Use your judgment, but remember that the gangs
are not particularly forgiving.
He also asks the characters whether they have
a good candidate for the position of sheriff in mind.
He notes down their recommendation, keeping it
in consideration for the future.

24 H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
PA RT 3
Rewards
Make sure note their rewards on their adventure
log sheets. Give your name and DCI number (if
applicable) so players can record who ran the
session.
Experience
Total up all combat experience earned for
defeated foes, and divide by the number of
characters present in the combat. For non-
combat experience, the rewards are listed per
character. Give all characters in the party non-
combat experience awards unless otherwise
noted.
Combat Awards
Name of Foe XP per Foe
Barr Flatsteel (black earth priest) 700
Barr Flatsteel (stonemelder) 1,100
Bulette 1,800
Carrion Crawler 450
Carrion Crawler, advanced 700
Flameskull 1,100
Ghast 450
Ghost 1,100
Ghast, advanced 700
Ghost, advanced 1,800
Gladiator 1,800
Thug 100
Veteran 700
Veteran, advanced 1,100
Wight 700
Non-Combat Awards
Task or accomplishment XP per Char.
Avoided Clan Stoneringer ambush same as
defeating the Potion of Greater Healing
encounter
Avoided carrion crawler encounter same xp if they
defeated the A description of this item is in the Dungeon
creatures
Saving Sour Pete 500
The minimum total award for each
character participating in this adventure is 4,500
experience points.
The maximum total award for each
character participating in this adventure is 6,000
experience points.
25
Treasure
The characters receive the following treasure,
divided up amongst the party. Characters should
attempt to divide treasure evenly whenever
possible. Gold piece values listed for sellable
gear are calculated at their selling price, not their
purchase price.
Consumable magic items should be divided
up however the group sees fit. If more than one
character is interested in a specific consumable
magic item, the DM can determine who gets it
randomly should the group be unable to decide.
Permanent magic items are divided
according to a system. See the sidebar if the
adventure awards permanent magic items.
Treasure Awards
Item Name GP Value
Lord Hulmaster’s payment 500
Scarlet Fang veteran coins 250
Clan Stoneringer dwarf coins 150
Clan Stoneringer dwarf ring 100
Clan Stoneringer dwarf statuette 50
Coins from tomb 500
Silvered warhammer from tomb 115
Vicious Mace
Weapon (mace), rare
A description of this item is in the Dungeon
Master’s Guide. This mace is crafted into the image
of a clenched fist wearing spiked gauntlets. It
functions as a holy symbol of Bane when wielded.
A cleric or paladin of Bane has advantage on
Charisma (Intimidation) checks against followers
of Bane.
Potion, uncommon
Master’s Guide.
H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
R E WA R D S
 Permanent Magic Item Distribution
D&D Adventurers League has a system
in place to determine who is awarded
permanent magic items at the end of a
session. Each character’s log sheet contains a
column to record permanent magic items for
ease of reference.
• If the players at the table agree on one
character taking possession of a permanent
magic item, that character gets the item.
• In the event that one or more characters
indicate an interest in possessing a
permanent magic item, the character that
possesses the fewest permanent magic
items gets the item. If there is a tie in the
total number of permanent magic items
owned by contesting characters, the item’s
owner is determined randomly by the DM.
Renown
All faction members earn one renown point for
participating in this adventure.
Zhentarim characters earn one additional renown
point for saving Pour Pete and getting Gnarl
Nosebiter to agree to meet with the Zhentarim.
Downtime
Each character receives 10 downtime days at the
conclusion of this adventure.
DM Rewards
You receive 875 XP, 400 gp, and 10 downtime
days for running this session.

Gratitude of Hulburg’s Gangs

Write down on the campaign log the character
earned the gratitude of one or more of the
following gangs of Hulburg: Clan Stoneringer /
Scarlet Fangs / Ship Guild. Scratch the names of
those gangs the characters aggravated. In general,
the gangs keep the whole group responsible
for the behavior of one, but if any connection
is unclear or characters go out of their way to
apologize you can add or remove gangs from
individual PC’s rewards.

26
Appendix: Barr Flatsteel (stonemelder)
Medium humanoid (dwarf ), lawful neutral
NPC / Monster Statistics Armor Class 17 (splint)
Barr Flatsteel (black earth priest) Hit Points 75 (10d8 + 30)
Medium humanoid (dwarf ), lawful neutral Speed 25 ft.
Armor Class 17 (splint) STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Hit Points 45 (7d8 + 14) 15 (+2) 10 (+0) 16 (+3) 12 (+1) 11 (+0) 17 (+3)
Speed 25 ft.
Skills Intimidation +5, Perception +2
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
15 (+2) 11 (+0) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 10 (+0) 16 (+3) Damage Resistances poison
Senses tremorsense 30 ft., darkvision 60 ft.,
Skills Intimidation +5, Religion +3, Persuasion +5 passive Perception 12
Damage Resistances poison Languages Common, Dwarven
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 10 Challenge 4 (1,100 XP)
Languages Common, Dwarven Death Burst. When the stonemelder dies, it turns
Challenge 3 (700 XP) to stone and explodes in a burst of rock shards,
becoming a smoking pile of rubble. Each creature
Dwarven Resilience. Barr has advantage on saving
within 10 feet of the exploding stonemelder must
throws against poison.
make a DC 14 Dexterity saving throw, taking 11
Spellcasting. The priest is a 5th-level spell caster. (2d10) bludgeoning damage on a failed save, or
Its spellcasting ability is Charisma (spell save half as much damage on a successful one.
DC 13, +5 to hit with spell attacks). It knows the
Dwarven Resilience. Barr has advantage on saving
following sorcerer spells :
throws against poison.
• Cantrip (at will): acid splash, blade ward, light,
Spellcasting. The stonemelder is a 7th-level spell
mending, mold earth
caster. Its spellcasting ability is Charisma (spell
• 1st level (4 slots): earth tremor, expeditious save DC 13, +5 to hit with spell attacks). It knows
retreat, shield the following sorcerer spells :
• 2nd level (3 slots): shatter, spider climb • Cantrip (at will): acid splash, blade ward, light,
• 3rd level (2 slots): slow mending, mold earth
Actions • 1st level (4 slots): expeditious retreat, false life,
shield
Multiattack. The priest makes two glaive attacks.
• 2nd level (3 slots): Maximilian’s earthen grasp,
Glaive. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 10 ft.,
shatter
one target. Hit: 7 (1d10 +2) slashing damage.
• 3rd level (3 slots): erupting earth, meld into
Reaction stone
Unyielding. When the priest is subjected to an • 4th level (1 slot): stoneskin
effect that would move it, knock it prone, or both,
it can use its reaction to be neither moved nor Actions
knocked prone. Mace. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 +2) bludgeoning damage.
The stonemelder can also expend a spell slot
to deal extra damage, dealing 2d8 bludgeoning
damage for a 1st level slot, plus an additional 1d8
for each level of the slot above 1st.

27 H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
APPENDIX
 Bulette Senses passive Perception 10
Large monstrosity, unaligned Languages any one language (usually Common)
Armor Class 17 {natural armor) Challenge 0 (10 XP)
Hit Points 94 (9d10 + 45)
Actions
Speed 40 ft., burrow 40 ft.
Club. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA one target. Hit: 2 (1d4) bludgeoning damage.
19 (+4) 11 (+0) 21 (+5) 2 (-4) 10 (+0) 5 (-3)

Skills Perception +6 Carrion Crawler

Senses darkvision 60 ft., tremorsense 60 ft., Large monstrosity, unaligned
passive Perception 16 Armor Class 13 {natural armor)
Languages — Hit Points 51 (6d10 + 18)
Challenge 5 (1,800 XP) Speed 30 ft., climb 30 ft.
Standing Leap. The bulette’s long jump is up to
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
30 feet and its high jump is up to 15 feet, with or 14 (+2) 13 (+1) 16 (+3) 1 (-5) 12 (+1) 5 (-3)
without a running start.
Actions Skills Perception +3
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft., Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 13
one target. Hit: 30 (4d12 + 4) piercing damage. Languages —
Deadly Leap. If the bulette jumps at least 15 feet Challenge 2 (450 XP)
as part of its movement, it can then use this action Keen Smell. The carrion crawler has advantage on
to land on its feet in a space that contains one or Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on smell.
more other creatures. Each of those creatures Spider Climb. The carrion crawler can climb
must succeed on a DC 16 Strength or Dexterity difficult surfaces, including upside down on
saving throw (target’s choice) or be knocked prone ceilings, without needing to make an ability check.
and take 14 (3d6 + 4) bludgeoning damage plus
14 (3d6 + 4) slashing damage. On a successful Actions
save, the creature takes only half the damage, Multiattack. The carrion crawler makes two
Isn’t knocked prone, and is pushed 5 feet out of attacks: one with its tentacles and one with its bite.
the bulette’s space into an unoccupied space of Tentacles. Melee Weapon Attack: +8 to hit, reach
the creature’s choice. If no unoccupied space is 10 ft., one creature. Hit: 4 (1 d4 + 2) poison
within range, the creature instead falls prone in the damage, and the target must succeed on a DC
bulette’s space. 13 Constitution saving throw or be poisoned for
Commoner 1 minute. Until this poison ends, the target is
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment paralyzed. The target can repeat the saving throw
at the end of each of its turns, ending the poison on
Armor Class 10
itself on a success.
Hit Points 4 (1d8)
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
Speed 30 ft. one target. Hit: 7 (2d4 + 2) piercing damage.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0)

28 H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
APPENDIX
Flameskull Ghast
Tiny undead, neutral evil Medium undead, chaotic evil
Armor Class 13 Armor Class 13
Hit Points 40 (9d4 + 18) Hit Points 36 (8d8)
Speed 0 ft., fly 40 ft. (hover) Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
1 (-5) 17 (+3) 14 (+2) 16 (+3) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 16 (+-3) 17 (+3) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 10 (+0) 8 (-1)

Skills Arcana +5, Perception +2 Damage Resistances necrotic

Damage Resistances lightning, necrotic, piercing
Damage Immunities cold, fire, poison
Condition Immunities charmed, frightened,
paralyzed, poisoned, prone
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 12
Languages Common
Challenge 4 (1,100 XP)
Illumination. The flameskull sheds either dim
light in a 15-foot radius, or bright light in a 15-foot
radius and dim light for an additional 15 feet. It can
switch between the options as an action.
Magic Resistance. The flameskull has advantage
on saving throws against spells and other magical
effects.
Rejuvenation. If the flameskull is destroyed, it
regains all its hit points in 1 hour unless holy water
is sprinkled on its remains or a dispel magic or
remove curse spell is cast on them.
Spellcasting. The flameskull is a 5th-level spell
caster. Its spellcasting ability is Intelligence (spell
save DC 13, +5 to hit with spell attacks). It requires
no somatic or material components to cast its
spells. The flameskull has the following wizard
spells prepared:
• Cantrip (at will): mage hand
• 1st level (3 slots): magic missile, shield
• 2nd level (2 slots): blur, flaming sphere
• 3rd level (1 slot): fireball
Actions
Multiattack. The flameskull uses Fire Ray twice.
Fire Ray. Ranged Spell Attack: +5 to hit, range 30
ft., one target. Hit: 10 (3d6) fire damage.
Damage Immunities poison
Condition Immunities charmed, exhaustion,
poisoned
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 10
Languages Common
Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Stench. Any creature that starts its turn within
5 feet of the ghast must succeed on a DC 10
Constitution saving throw or be poisoned until the
start of its next turn. On a successful saving throw,
the creature is immune to the ghast’s Stench for 24
hours.
Turning Defiance. The ghast and any ghouls
within 30 feet of it have advantage on saving
throws against effects that turn undead.
Actions
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one creature. Hit: 12 (2d8 + 3) piercing damage.
Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 10 (2d6 + 3) slashing damage. If the
target is a creature other than an undead, it must
succeed on a DC 10 Constitution saving throw or
be paralyzed for 1 minute. The target can repeat
the saving throw at the end of each of its turns,
ending the effect on itself on a success.

29 H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
APPENDIX
 Ghost Horrifying Visage. Each non-undead creature
Medium undead, any alignment within 60 feet of the ghost that can see it must
Armor Class 11 succeed on a DC 13 Wisdom saving throw or
be frightened for 1 minute. If the save fails by 5
Hit Points 45 (10d8)
or more, the target also ages 1d4 x 10 years. A
Speed 0 ft., fly 40 ft. (hover) frightened target can repeat the saving throw at
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA the end of each of its turns, ending the frightened
7 (-2) 13 (+1) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 12 (+1) 17 (+3) condition on itself on a success. If a target’s
saving throw is successful or the effect ends for
Damage Resistances acid, fire, lightning, thunder; it, the target is immune to this ghost’s Horrifying
bludgeoning, piercing, and slashing from Visage for the next 24 hours. The aging effect can
nonmagical weapons be reversed with a greater restoration spell, but
Damage Immunities cold, necrotic, poison only within 24 hours of it occurring.Possession
Condition Immunities charmed, exhaustion, (Recharge 6). One humanoid that the ghost can
frightened, grappled, paralyzed, petrified, see within 5 feet of it must succeed on a DC 13
poisoned, prone, restrained Charisma saving throw or be possessed by the
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 11 ghost; the ghost then disappears, and the target
is incapacitated and loses control of its body. The
Languages any languages it knew in life
ghost now controls the body but doesn’t deprive
Challenge 4 (1,100 XP) the target of awareness. The ghost can’t be targeted
Ethereal Sight. The ghost can see 60 feet into the by any attack, spell, or other effect, except ones
Ethereal Plane when it is on the Material Plane, that turn undead, and it retains its alignment,
and vice versa. Intelligence, Wisdom, Charisma, and immunity to
Incorporeal Movement. The ghost can move being charmed and frightened. It otherwise uses
through other creatures and objects as if they were the possessed target’s statistics, but doesn’t gain
difficult terrain. It takes 5 (1d10) force damage if it access to the target’s knowledge, class features, or
ends its turn inside an object. proficiencies.
The possession lasts until the body drops to 0
Actions hit points, the ghost ends it as a bonus action, or
Withering Touch. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, the ghost is turned or forced out by an effect like
reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 17 (4d6 + 3) necrotic the dispel evil and good spell. When the possession
damage. ends, the ghost reappears in an unoccupied
Etherealness. The ghost enters the Ethereal Plane space within 5 feet of the body. The target is
from the Material Plane, or vice versa. It is visible immune to this ghost’s Possession for 24 hours
on the Material Plane while it is in the Border after succeeding on the saving throw or after the
Ethereal, and vise versa, yet it can’t affect or be possession ends.
affected by anything on the other plane.

30 H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
APPENDIX
Gladiator Thug
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment Medium humanoid (any race), any non-good
Armor Class 16 (studded leather, shield) alignment
Hit Points 112 (15d8 + 45) Armor Class 11 (leather armor)
Hit Points 32 (5d8 + 10)
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
18 (+4) 15 (+2) 16 (+3) 10 (+0) 12 (+1) 15 (+2) Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Speed 30 ft. 15 (+2) 11 (+0) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 11 (+0)
Saving Throws Str +7, Dex +5, Con +6
Skills Athletics +10, Intimidation +5 Skills Intimidation +2
Senses passive Perception 11 Senses passive Perception 10
Languages any one language (usually Common) Languages any one language (usually Common)
Challenge 5 (1,800 XP) Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
Brave. The gladiator has advantage on saving Pack Tactics. The thug has advantage on an attack
throws against being frightened. roll against a creature if at least one of the thug’s
Brute. A melee weapon deals one extra die of its allies is within 5 feet of the creature and the ally
damage when the gladiator hits with it (included in isn’t incapacitated.
the attack). Actions
Actions Multiattack. The thug makes two melee attacks.
Multiattack. The gladiator makes three melee Mace. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
attacks or two ranged attacks. one creature. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) bludgeoning damage.
Spear. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, Heavy Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +2 to
reach 5 ft. and range 20/60 ft., one target. Hit: 11 hit, range 100/400 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d10)
(2d6 + 4) piercing damage, or 13 (2d8 + 4) piercing piercing damage.
damage if used with two hands to make a melee
attack.
Shield Bash. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach
5 ft., one creature. Hit: 9 (2d4 + 4) bludgeoning
damage. If the target is a Medium or smaller
creature, It must succeed on a DC 15 Strength
saving or be knocked prone.
Reactions
Parry. The gladiator adds 3 to its AC against
one melee attack that would hit it. To do so, the
gladiator must see the attacker and be wielding a
melee weapon.

31 H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
APPENDIX
 Veteran Wight
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment Medium undead, neutral evil
Armor Class 17 (splint) Armor Class 14 (studded leather)
Hit Points 58 (9d8 + 18) Hit Points 45 (6d8 + 18)
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Speed 30 ft.
16 (+3) 13 (+1) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 10 (+0)
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
15 (+2) 14 (+2) 16 (+3) 10 (+0) 13 (+1) 15 (+2)
Speed 30 ft.
Skills Athletics +5, Perception +2 Skills Perception +3, Stealth +4
Senses passive Perception 12 Damage Resistances necrotic; bludgeoning,
Languages any one language (usually Common) piercing, and slashing from nonmagical weapons
that aren’t silvered
Challenge 3 (700 XP)
Damage Immunities poison
Actions Condition Immunities exhaustion, poisoned
Multiattack. The veteran makes two longsword Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 13
attacks. If it has a shortsword drawn, it can also
make a shortsword attack. Languages the languages it knew in life
Longsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach Challenge 3 (700 XP)
5 ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d8 + 3) slashing damage, Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the wight
or 8 (1d10 + 3) slashing damage if used with two has disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on
hands. Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on sight.
Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach Actions
5 ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) piercing damage. Multiattack. The wight makes two longsword
Heavy Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to attacks or two longbow attacks. It can use its Life
hit, range 100/400 ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d10 + 1) Drain in place of one longsword attack.
piercing damage. Life Drain. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5
ft., one creature. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) necrotic damage.
The target must succeed on a DC 13 Constitution
saving throw or its hit point maximum is reduced
by an amount equal to the damage taken. This
reduction lasts until the target finishes a long rest.
The target dies if this effect reduces its hit point
maximum to 0.
A humanoid slain by this attack rises 24 hours
later as a zombie under the wight’s control, unless
the humanoid is restored to life or its body is
destroyed. The wight can have no more than twelve
zombies under its control at one time.
Longsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach
5 ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d8 + 2) slashing damage,
or 7 (1d10 + 2) slashing damage if used with two
hands.
Longbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, range
150/600 ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d8 + 2) piercing
damage.

32 H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
APPENDIX
Appendix II: Hulburg

33 H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
APPENDIX
 Map: Crawlers in the Dark

34 H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
APPENDIX
Map: The Ghosts’ Tomb

35 H U L B 1 - 1 / H U L B U RG R E B U I L D I N G :
APPENDIX
 Hulburg
Burning
Mickey Tan
Adventure Designer
Adventure Code: HULB 1-2

Violence is on the on the rise, even more than expected. The heat is rising.
People run amok. But greed does not appear to be the flame behind it.
Something much colder appears to drive the chaos. Can you track it down
and remove it? A D&D Adventurers League adventure set in Hulburg.
A four-hour adventure for 5th-10th level characters

Producer: Baldman Games

Core Administrator & Developer: Pieter Sleijpen
Editing and Layout: Encoded Designs
Cartography: Andrew Smith
Organized Play: Chris Lindsay
D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall,
Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks, Alan Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster
Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League, all other Wizards of the Coast product names, and their respective
logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive likenesses
are property of Wizards of the Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America.
Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the express written
permission of Wizards of the Coast.
©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31,
2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK.
 Introduction
Welcome to Hulburg Burning, a D&D adventure that is part of the
official D&D Adventurers League™ organized play system.

This adventure is designed for three to seven 5th-10th level characters, and is
optimized for five 8th-level characters. Characters outside this level range cannot participate in
this adventure.
The adventure is set in the Moonsea region of the Forgotten Realms, in the town of Hulburg.

The D&D Adventurers League Preparing the Adventure

This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of
the D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure,
players track their characters’ experience, treasure,
and other rewards, and can take those characters
through other adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a
store event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a
DCI number. This number is your official Wizards of
the Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have
a number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to
use to create and advance their characters. Players
can continue to play their characters after the
storyline season has finished, possibly participating
in a second or third storyline with those same
characters. A character’s level is the only limitation
for adventure play. A player cannot use a character
of a level higher or lower than the level range of a
D&D Adventurers League adventure.
For more information on playing, running
games as a Dungeon Master, and organizing games
for the D&D Adventurers League, please visit the
D&D Adventurers League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
• Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
• Read through the adventure, taking notes
of anything you’d like to highlight or remind
yourself while running the adventure, such as a
way you’d like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d
like to use in a combat.
• Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
• Gather together any resources you’d like to
use to aid you in running this adventure--such
as notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and
battlemaps.
• If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.
Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
• Character name and level
• Character race and class
• Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most
common passive ability check
• Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, etc.)
Players that have characters outside the
adventure’s level range cannot participate in
the adventure with those characters. Players

2 H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R NIN G
I N T RO D U C T I O N
with ineligible characters can make a new 1st-level
character or use a pregenerated character. Players
can play an adventure they previously played or
ran as a Dungeon Master, but not with the same
character.
Ensure that each player has an official
adventure logsheet for his or her character (if not,
get one from the organizer). The player fills out
the adventure name, session number, date, and
your name and DCI number. In addition, the player
also fills in the starting values for experience, gold,
downtime, renown, and number of permanent
magic items. He or she fill in the other values and
write notes at the conclusion of the session. Each
player is responsible for maintaining an accurate
logsheet.
If you have time, you can do a quick scan of
a player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing
looks out of order. If you see magic items of very
high rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you
can ask players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict
item use or ask them to use a standard ability
score array. Point players to the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and
it’s the beginning of an adventure or episode,
they can declare their activity and spend the days
now. Alternatively, they can do so at the end of
the adventure or episode. Players should select
their characters’ spells and other daily options
prior to the start of the adventure, unless the
adventure specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread
the adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, you may see sidebars
to help make adjustments for smaller/larger
groups, and characters of higher/lower levels than
the optimized group. Most of the time, this is used
for combat encounters.
You may adjust the adventure beyond the
guidelines given. For example, if you’re playing
with a group of inexperienced players, you might
want to make the adventure a little easier; for
very experienced players, you may want to make
3 H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R NIN G
it a little harder. Therefore, five categories of
party strength have been created for you to use
as a guide. Feel free to use a different adjustment
during the adventure if the recommended party
strength feels off for the group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of
five 1th-level characters. To figure out whether
you need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
• Add up the total levels of all the characters
• Divide the total by the number of characters
• Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round
fractions of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table:
Determining Party Strength
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very Weak
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very Strong
Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment
of the game for the players. You help guide the
narrative and bring the words on these pages
to life. The outcome of a fun game session often
creates stories that live well beyond the play at the
table. Always follow this golden rule when you DM
for a group:
Make decisions and adjudications that
enhance the fun of the adventure when
possible.
To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
• You are empowered to make adjustments to
the adventure and make decisions about how the
group interacts with the world of this adventure.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Doing so is especially important and applicable
outside of combat, but feel free to adjust the
adventure for groups that are having too easy or
too hard of a time.
• Don’t make the adventure too easy or too
difficult for a group. Never being challenged
makes for a boring game and being
overwhelmed makes for a frustrating one.
Gauge the experience of the players (not the
characters) with the game, try to feel out (or
ask) what they like in a game, and attempt to
give each of them the experience they’re after
when they play D&D. Give everyone a chance to
shine.
• Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game
session moving along appropriately. Watch for
stalling, since play loses momentum when this
happens. At the same time, make sure that the
players don’t finish too early; provide them with
a full play experience. Try to be aware of running
long or short. Adjust the pacing accordingly
• Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free
to modify the text as you see fit, especially when
dialogue is present.
• Give the players appropriate hints so they can
make informed choices about how to proceed.
Players should be given clues and hints when
appropriate so they can tackle puzzles, combat,
and interactions without getting frustrated over
lack of information. Doing so helps to encourage
immersion in the adventure and gives players
“little victories” for figuring out good choices
from clues.
In short, being the DM isn’t about following
the adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about
facilitating a fun, challenging game environment
for the players. The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has
more information on the art of running a D&D
game.
Downtime and Lifestyle
At the beginning of each play session, players must
declare whether or not they are spending any days
of downtime. The player records the downtime
spent on the adventure logsheet. The following
options are available to players during downtime
(see the D&D basic rules or the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for more information):
4 H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R NIN G
• Catching up
• Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
commit to crafting a single item)
• Practicing a profession
• Recuperating
• Spellcasting services
• Training
Other downtime options might be available during
adventures or unlocked through play, including
faction-specific activities.
In addition, whenever a character spends
downtime days, that character also spends the
requisite expense for his or her lifestyle. Costs
are per day, so a character that spends ten days
of downtime also spends ten days of expenses
maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some downtime
activities help with lifestyle expenses or add
lifestyle expenses.
Spellcasting Services
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can
provide some spellcasting services. Characters
need to be able to travel to the settlement to obtain
these services.
Spell services generally available include
healing and recovery spells, as well as information-
gathering spells. Other spell services might be
available as specified in the adventure. The number
of spells available to be cast as a service is limited
to a maximum of three per day total, unless
otherwise noted.
Spellcasting Services
Spell Cost
Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
Identify 20 gp
Lesser restoration 40 gp
Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
Remove curse 90 gp
Speak with dead 90 gp
Divination 210 gp
Greater restoration 450 gp
Raise dead 1,250 gp
I N T RO D U C T I O N

Acolyte Background
A character possessing the acolyte
background requesting spellcasting
services at a temple of his or her faith
may request one spell per day from the
Spellcasting Services table for free. The only
cost paid for the spell is the base price for
the consumed material component, if any.
Melvaunt is a large city where any
acolyte can find a friendly shrine or
temple.
Disease, Death, and Recovery
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might
not have the same characters return from session
to session, here are the rules when bad things
happen to characters.
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating Effects
A character still affected by diseases, poisons,
and other similar effects at the conclusion of an
adventure can spend downtime days recuperating
until such time as he or she resolves the effect to
its conclusion (see the recuperating activity in the
D&D Basic Rules).
If a character doesn’t resolve the effect
between sessions, that character begins the next
session still affected by the debilitating effect.
Death
A character who is killed during the course of
the adventure has a few options at the end of the
session (or whenever arriving back in civilization)
if no one in the adventuring party has immediate
access to a raise dead or revivify spell, or similar
magic. A character subject to a raise dead spell is
affected negatively until all long rests have been
completed during an adventure. Alternatively, each
downtime day spent after raise dead reduces the
penalty to attack rolls, saving throws, and ability
checks by 1, in addition to any other benefits the
downtime activity might provide.
5 H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R NIN G
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any
of the other options, the player creates a new
character. The new character does not have any
items or rewards possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing
any vital organs and is mostly whole) and the
player would like the character to be returned to
life, the party can take the body back to civilization
and use the dead character’s funds to pay for a
raise dead spell. A raise dead spell cast in this
manner costs the character 1,250 gp.
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As
above, except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for
the raise dead spell is paid for by the party at the
end of the session. Other characters are under no
obligation to spend their funds to bring back a
dead party member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to
4 and a member of a faction, the dead character’s
body can be returned to civilization and a patron
from the faction ensures that he or she receives a
raise dead spell. However, any character invoking
this charity forfeits all experience and rewards
from that session (both those earned prior to and
after death during that session) and cannot replay
that episode or adventure with that character
again. Once a character reaches 5th level, this
option is no longer available.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Hulburg Today
Over the centuries Hulburg was plundered and
razed many times, but each time industrious folk
returned to rebuild atop its ruins. Remnants of
its previous incarnations still exist beneath the
surface of the current remains as a disjointed
collection of old sewers, passageways, and even the
buried founda-tions and basements of destroyed
buildings.
While small in comparison to its former size,
mod-ern-day Hulburg is no exception to this cycle
of re-birth. Today, the town consists mainly of three
dis-tinct areas: Tent City, the Harbor District, and
Hul-master Manor.
A map can be found in Appendix II.
Tent City
The bulk of the town rests atop a tall plateau on the
northern banks of the Moonsea with the heights
of Thar rising to the north. A steep and rocky hill
blocks expansion to the east, and the stony cliffs
along the Moonsea lie to the south.
Known by Hulburg’s residents as Tent City, the
plateau is home to a haphazard collection of large
canvas tents and makeshift wooden buildings. This
fledgling residential district lies near the center
of the plateau, and it stands upon the ruins of a
former fortress. It contains a large natural well
and several older defenses constructed at the
height of Hulburg’s former glory. Several miles of
unoccupied ruins sur-round the area.
Many residents of Tent City work in Lord Eorl
Hulmaster’s gem mine, which is located in the hills
to the northeast of the town. The remaining resi-
dents survive by plying common trades to support
the miners or working as dockhands in the Harbor
District. Life in Tent City is rough, with most people
living in poverty. These conditions breed crime
and violence, but Lord Hulmaster’s small force of
guards and Hulburg’s larger gangs manage to keep
the town from falling into complete lawlessness.
6 H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R NIN G
Harbor District
The lifeline of Hulburg is its harbor, which lies to
the south of Tent City along the northern shore of
the Moonsea. A large, rocky bluff separates it from
Tent City, and travel between the two districts is
limited to a steep man-made trail that traverses the
stony face of the slope. Laborers, called hoppers,
carry loads of ore and other supplies up and down
the trail, which can be treacherous in poor weather.
Warehouses and rows of docks make up the
bulk of the Harbor District, but the area is also
home to a tariff office, guard post, and many other
smaller businesses built to service ships and their
crews. The district has seen recent investments
by Lord Eorl Hulmaster, making it opulent in
comparison to Tent City. Consequently, few tents
and temporary struc-tures lie within its palisades.
A handful of successful merchants, traders, and
ship captains live here, but even these individuals
live a modest lifestyle in comparison to other
towns and cities in the Moonsea region.
Hulmaster Manor
Lord Eorl Hulmaster’s manor lies a short thirty-
minute walk to the northwest of Tent City on
the outskirts of the ruins of old Hulburg. The
current lord and his trusted retainers live in a
small wooden fortress that backs up to a tall bluff.
Residents of Hulburg jokingly (and never in the
presence of the lord or his retainers) refer to the
structure as the Hedge Lord’s Manor.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
Adventure Background
Hulburg is burning. The town is under siege, and
its fate is teetering on the edge. This miner town
built on a plateau at the northern banks of the
Moonsea is threatened by corpses coming to life,
animated by some unknown source. The people
are afraid and looking for answers.
Dealing with the ghosts in HULB 1-1 Hulburg
Rebuilding offered temporary relief and a glimmer
of hope to the town, but something is still stirring
up trouble. Cursed items appear among the people,
causing them to run amok before others are forced
to intervene.
Overview
This adventure is divided into an introduction and
three parts.
Part 1. The adventure begins with the
characters at the marketplace, where they witness
one of the cursed items transform a thieving
teenager into a menace to the town.
Part 2. Spurred on by grateful survivors,
the characters are asked to investigate further.
Lord Eorl Hulmaster offers a reward for their
services. In addition, Lord Hulmaster reminds
the characters he is still contemplating hiring a
sheriff and that he seeks good candidates (and the
adventurers are not eligible).
As the characters investigate a previous
incident at the mines, they are led to the Sleeveless
Charletan and witness another cursed item in the
possession of the festhall mistress, Twilio.
Part 3. The characters track the items to a
black market in the Harbor District, where they
have to deal with the merchant selling the items for
his undead master.
7 H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R NIN G
Series
HULB 1-2 Hulburg Burning is the second part of
a trilogy of adventures. The first part is HULB 1-1
Hulburg Rebuilding. The third part is HULB 1-3
Hulburg Rising. The adventures have been written
to be played in order. Part 1 and 2 could be played
in a different order with some minor difficulties.
Playing the third part before the others can be
confusing, since the force directing the undead
in the earlier parts is confronted in the final
adventure in the trilogy.
Make sure your players are aware of this being
a series and that playing them out of order might
make no sense. Nobody is stopping the players
from playing them out of order: either consider the
first two adventures as flashbacks or deal with the
after effects when played at a later date.
Adventure Hooks
Played Hulburg Rebuilding. After staving
off the gang war and dealing with the ghosts, the
characters find themselves at the market in Tent
City some days later to restock their supplies. Here
events progress as described below.
If they played other adventures in between,
news of undead still troubling the town likely
drew them back. Their faction contacts or Lord
Hulmaster asked to meet them at the market, and
events take place before the meeting starts.
First Time in Hulburg. Whether it be a layover
on a longer trip, a place to start fresh or the call of
someone you know, the characters find themselves
in Hulburg for the first time. Exploring Tent City,
the characters find themselves at the marketplace.
Alternatively, they can be at Tent City due to
the news of undead plaguing the area and the fact
that the locals are looking to hire adventurers to
deal with the issue. The marketplace is simply the
first place they look.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Part 1.
What goes up, must come down
The marketplace is in the center of Tent City. A
variety of merchants set up pop-up booths to
display their wares. It is fairly busy when the
characters arrive.
The smell of dried fish and various soups and
stews fills the hot, humid air. Eager vendors
dispense samples with promises of being the
best in Hulburg. Local fruits and vegetables
are also on display, along with all types of
supplies and goods for sale.
A dirty-faced teenage boy takes a bite of an
apple, then runs off as a fat, sweaty mer-
chant wielding a cutting knife chases him
crying,,. “Stop! Thief!” Some of you recog-
nize him as Billy of the Scarlet Fangs. The boy
stops and picks up an onyx dagger lying on
the ground, turning to face his accuser. A
black glow emanates from the dagger and
envelopes the boy. His eyes turn milky white
as dark tentacles shoot from the dagger and
attack the accusing merchant and other by-
standers. The merchant and others grappled
by the dark tentacles scream for help as they
are lifted into the air.
Billy made an appearance in HULB 1-1, where
the characters observed his interaction with
the Scarlet Fangs gang leader. Billy is clearly
not himself, and he does not react to talk. He is
obviously possessed by some kind of dark magic or
spirit.
Characters must deal with the threat of the
teenage boy possessed by the spirit of the dagger,
as well as save the levitated innocents from falling
to their deaths.
The amount of people in the air are half of the
party number rounded up. One of these is the fruit
vendor. Each person starts 20 feet in the air.
The people grabbed by the tentacles are listed
here (including extra ones if the tentacles get to
grab again):
8 H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
• Shamus, the fruit vendor
• Aubrey, the seamstress
• Redvin, the baker
• Orlissa, the flower seller
• Alfi, the rug merchant
• Brick, the soup vendor
General Features
The general features of the marketplace are as
follows:
Light and Visibility. It is mid-morning, and
the sun lights the area brightly despite overcast
skies.
Smells and Sounds. all kinds of food smells
fill the air, as do the sounds of vendors hawking
their wares.
Terrain. The marketplace is crowded. Each
stall provides partial cover and is difficult terrain.
Mechanics
The possessed dagger has taken over the boy and
is threatening innocent people. The adventurers
must make sure the people don’t fall to their deaths
while also removing the dagger from Billy.
Possessed Billy. Billy is a commoner, but the
spirit of the dagger grants him the following:
• Initiative 18, AC 18 and +5 to all saves and skill
checks as a black energy shield surrounds him.
• Immunity to necrotic damage and the
conditions charmed, frightened, and exhaustion
(including sleep effects).
• Each time the black energy shield is hit, the
adventurer rolls a DC 14 Intelligence saving
throw as black energy backlashes at them,
dealing 14 (4d6) psychic damage on a failed
save, or 7 (2d6) psychic damage on a successful
save.
• 100 temporary hit points. The temporary hit
points regenerate by 10 at the start of Billy’s
PA RT 1
 turn every round he hasn’t taken radiant
damage. As long as the shield is up, the dagger
can’t be removed from Billy.
• Once the temporary hit points are gone, all the
tentacles go down and anyone held immediately
falls. Any excess damage above the 100 hit
points is ignored. Go to Development for what
happens next.
• Effects like turn undead do not push the spirit
out of Billy, but make him and the dagger move
away from the PC - taking the levitated people
with him.
• The break enchantment effect of the spell
dispel evil and good, greater restoration or more
powerful similar spells causes the black energy
shield to immediately be destroyed. Go to
Development for what happens next.
• The tentacles each have AC 15 and 20 hit
points. The tentacles are immune to psychic and
necrotic damage, as well as all conditions. Once a
tentacle’s hit points are exceeded, the tentacle is
severed and the held person is dropped.
• At the end of each round, the victims are raised
10 more feet in the air until they reach 40 feet.
On the following round, they are dropped. On the
round after that, another bystander is targeted
and lifted 20 feet in the air.
Levitated Bystanders. Each person is a
commoner (4 hps).
The adventurers can use spells like feather fall
to save anyone from taking falling damage.
They can also use a reaction or ready an action
to catch a falling citizen. If they ready an action
they gain advantage to catch the falling citizen.
This requires a Strength (Athletics) check against
a DC of 10 + 1 per 10 feet in the air. On success, the
player takes the falling damage and the innocent
person takes none. On a failure, the innocent
person takes the damage as the adventurer misses.
If players come up with other creative methods
of catching falling people, such as moving carts or
creating a web to break the fall, adjudicate to the
best of your ability, rewarding creative play.
9 H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Decrease the
temporary hit points to 80 for Possessed
Billy
• Weak party: Decrease the temporary hit
points to 90 for Possessed Billy
• Strong party: Increase the temporary hit
points to 120 for Possessed Billy
• Very strong party: Increase the
temporary hit points to 150 for Possessed
Billy
Development
Read out loud or paraphrase when the adventurers
take down the black energy shield around Billy:
The black shield of energy is sucked back
into the dagger as you hear a high-pitched
cackling laugh from the weapon. A moment
later it explodes, and you see the black
energy seep into the ground. The boy’s eyes
return to normal as he slumps to the ground.
Billy is unconscious and can be revived after a
short rest or a lesser restoration or similar spell.
This is the first clue that there are cursed items in
Hulburg.
Roleplaying Billy
A native of the Phlan, Billy was separated from
his family during the escape when he stowed
away on a ship. He was discovered when
they got to Hulburg and kicked off the ship.
A lad of 15 years of age, he has been forced
to choose a gang for survival, so he chose the
Scarlet Fangs. He doesn’t like the crimes he is
asked to commit, but does it to survive and to
belong.
The lanky teenager with red hair is not
the most graceful kid, and always seems to be
apologizing for something he has done wrong.
Even though Gnarl Nosebiter berates him
constantly, he appreciates the attention and
sense of family that the Scarlet Fangs provide.
He is fiercely loyal to the gang for taking him
in when he had nowhere to turn.
PA RT 1
 Lord Eorl Hulmaster arrives on the scene once the
threat is neutralized.
His timing is impeccable as Lord Eorl Hulmas-
ter arrives on the scene to inspect the situa-
tion at the marketplace.
As he surveys the scene, he addresses
the adventurers, “I am grateful for your help
with this situation. Maybe I can interest you
with a proposition to investigate further. This
wasn’t the first time something like this hap-
pened.”
The lord asks the adventurers to investigate the
origin of the cursed items that have appeared in
town.
• He offers the adventurers 500 gp to investigate.
With a successful DC 15 Charisma (Persuasion)
check, he adds 100 gp to the initial total. The
players have advantage if they successfully
helped Lord Hulmaster in HULB 1-1.
• Yesterday, there was an incident at the mines.
A miner went crazy after putting on a ring and
started attacking his fellow miners.
• Faylin Greenbaum is in charge of the mines
and would have more information.
• Lord Hulmaster is even more convinced than
in HULB 1-1 that he needs to appoint a sheriff.
Once again, he asks the characters to keep their
eyes open for potential candidates. If asked what
he is looking for in a sheriff, he says he does not
know, which is why he is asking the characters.
• If a character volunteers, he laughs and
mentions that adventurers operate better
outside the organization of the guard. He is
mostly being polite in that he simply does not
trust adventurers to be good sheriffs.
10
Roleplaying Lord Eorl Hulmaster
At thirty-five years of age, Lord Hulmaster is
focused on the accumulation of wealth. He
owns the gem mine, most of the warehouses
in the Harbor District, and nearly all the
legitimate businesses in Tent City. He has a
wife and several young children, but they
remain in Mulmaster until he can bring
Hulburg to heel.
Lord Hulmaster has bold plans for
Hulburg but currently lacks the coin to see
those plans realized. While not an evil man,
his drive makes him a bit insensitive toward
the working conditions of the miners and the
living conditions in Tent City. He has recently
invested in the Harbor District, but only
because he expects a greater return on his
investment.
He considers himself better than the
characters, and while blunt, he does not act
rude or condescending. He realizes the sooner
the cursed item problem is resolved; the
sooner his profits return to normal.
Harpers
Characters belonging to the Harpers receive a note
that the Harpers would like them to retrieve one of
the cursed items for further study.
XP Award
Award each character 300 XP per NPC (including
Billy) saved to a maximum of 1500 XP.
H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
PA RT 1
 Part 2.
Digging up clues
The Hulburg Mines are some distance to the Hulburg Mines
northeast of town. The mines are worked
When the adventurers arrive at the Hulburg Mines,
throughout the day, but the miners leave about 1
read:
hour before sundown. Currently nobody dares to
The walk to the mines takes only 30 minutes,
wander around outside the three districts of town
but the heat and humidity make it seem
during the darkness of night. In fact, even during longer. You arrive at the foreman’s office at
the day people are extremely nervous to leave the the entrance of the mine where Faylin Green-
safety of the compounds. baum stands over a map of the mines on a
table. With his back to you, a sturdy looking
Approaching the mine gate at the pallisade
human stares over the map as well.
surrounding Tent City, you note a sergeant of
“Hern, I need you take your group to
the guard arguing loudly with another guard
the southern end of the mine to continue the
while a group of teamsters and their wagons
excavation. I know you lost some of your com-
wait nervously.
rades a few days ago, but we need to get it
“I am not getting paid enough to go
done.”
outside with just two guards. You protect those
The miner grunts in an attempt to show
wagons yourself. You know what happened
his displeasure, but is immediately dismissed as
last time.”
Faylin notices your arrival.
If the adventurers keep their distance, the
Faylin shares the information below with the
argument goes on for some time. Apparently
adventurers:
undead have been attacking people outside the
compounds, and the guard wants more backup • A miner named Grufton was showing off a ring
before going outside. No undead have been seen he bought for his girlfriend. When he modeled it
today, but that is no guarantee it stays that way. A on his finger, he was enveloped by a black mist.
single death in a mine accident could lead to the Then he went crazy and started attacking the
creation of a new undead, since a rumor says the other miners.
dead sometimes spontaneously animate unless • “We sent a group of large half-orcs to try to
a cleric arrives quickly enough to put the body to restrain him. They were able to put him down
rest. but not after he killed a half-dozen of them.”
As soon as the people at the gate become • The ring exploded and the black mist seeped
aware of the characters, the sergeant immediately into the wall of the tunnel.
turns toward them. If they tell him that they are • Grufton collapsed and has been unconscious
going to the mines, he smiles brightly before since, recovering in the infirmary tent.
turning to the protesting guards. The adventurers
have become the backup for the guard.
The characters probably have no reason to
refuse, but they do not get an additional reward for
the help. The trip itself is uneventful. No undead
roam the area at the moment.

11 H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
PA RT 2
 Roleplaying Faylin Greenbaum
In spite of her half-elven heritage, Faylin is
neither slender nor graceful. While the thirty-
two-year-old’s dusty blond hair, blue-gray
eyes, and stout build are rather plain, her true
beauty lies on the inside.
Faylin oversees Hulburg’s mine. Lord
Hulmaster pays her a pittance of her actual
worth, but she cares little for money. Her
heart lies with the town’s miners and other
working-class residents. She spends her free
time and money repairing tents, serving
meals, and performing other tasks to improve
the living conditions in Tent City.
Faylin holds no particular religous
devotion. While she admires Jarus Grainger
(see HULB 1-1 and HULB 1-3) for his
dedication to Tyr, she prefers to rely on her
own hard work and compassion to make
Hulburg a better place to live.
Faylin is aware Lord Hulmaster is
looking for a sheriff and she is happy about
it. She does not consider herself to be a good
candidate, proposing Grainger as the next
sheriff. Of course, if characters think she
makes a good candidate, she is honored and
she can be convinced to apply.
When they go to check on Grufton, he is still in
a coma. Nothing they can do revives him. If they
check through his mining pack by his bed, they
find a 5 sp gambling token from the Sleeveless
Charlatan. On one side there is the following
inscription written in Common:
Hope she likes the ring!
-Yours, Twilio.
Back to Town
While the characters talk with Faylin and check
on Grufton, the wagons they escorted are being
unloaded and loaded. By the time the adventurers
are ready to return, so are the guards and a group
of teamsters. As with the way to the mines, nothing
happens on the trip back to Tent City.
12
Charmed Life
The adventurers arrive at the Sleeveless Charlatan.
Entering the Sleeveless Charlatan, the table
games at the front of the gambling tent are
sparsely attended. There is a crowd gathering
at the far corner table around a female attired
in a fancy gown.
Twilio is surround by her new suitors: two
priestly suitors, two hotheaded suitors and one
dwarven suitor.
Twillio wears a black onyx necklace. To any
characters who are attracted to (human) women,
she is the most beautiful creature they have ever
seen (result of the cursed onyx necklace). To
others, she looks like any other human woman
they might come across in their travels, wearing a
simple necklace adorned with a single onyx.
She freely interacts with the adventurers, but
her suitors don’t let them get too close, as they are
always vying for her attention. She will not take off
the necklace for any reason.
If the adventurers try to remove the necklace,
read the following:
No,” Twilio says in a deep menacing voice.
“You’ll never have this necklace. Protect me.”
Her eyes turn milky white and black energy
surrounds her body.
All the men fawning over her turn to
you and draw their weapons to attack.
Roleplaying Twilio Othenium
The festhall mistress of the Sleeveless
Charlatan has been serving patrons since
it has opened, as the job gives her the best
opportunity to meet men. She longs to be
courted and eventually married. She feels that
once she is married, she will have the social
and economic stablity to expand her business.
Her black hair is always tied up in a bun,
which accentuates her round face and the
large mole over her right eye. She wears a lot
of makeup. Any attention given to her is met
with an overwhelming appreciation of drinks
and affection.
H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
PA RT 2
The Fight
The sentient necklace is now in complete control
of Twilio. It grants her suitors immunity to the
charmed condition until the necklace is removed
from Twilio.
Possessed Twilio. Twilio is a commoner,
but the spirit of the necklace grants Twilio the
following:
• Initiative 18, AC 18 and +5 to all saves and skill
checks as a black energy shield surrounds her.
• Immunity to necrotic damage and the
conditions charmed, frightened, and exhaustion
(including sleep effects).
• Each time a character attracted to Twilio
wants to attack her, the player must succeed on
a DC 12 Charisma saving throw. On a failure, the
character attacks with disadvantage and Twilio
gets advantage on her saving throws against
effects originating from the character.
• 100 temporary hit points. The temporary hit
points regenerate by 10 at the start of Twilio’s
turn every round she hasn’t taken radiant
damage. As long as the shield is up, the necklace
can’t be removed from Twilio.
• Once the temporary hit points are gone, the
suitors are no longer under Twilio’s spell. Any
excess damage above the 100 hit points is
ignored. Go to Development for what happens
next.
• Effects like turn undead do not push the spirit
out of Twilio but make her move away from the
adventurer.
• The break enchantment effect of the spell
dispel evil and good, greater restoration or
more powerful similar spells causes the black
energy shield to immediately be destroyed. Go to
Development for what happens next.
13
General Features
The general features of the Sleeveless Charlatan
are as follows:
Light and Visibility. The tent is brightly lit.
Smells and Sounds. Sounds of gambling are
heard. Men fawning over Twilio can also be heard
from the far corner.
Terrain. The tables and chairs are difficult
terrain and can be stood upon. The bar can provide
cover as well as overturned tables.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Remove one hotheaded
suitor and one priestly suitor
• Weak party: Remove one hotheaded suitor
• Strong party: Add one hotheaded suitor
• Very strong party: Add one hotheaded
suitor and one priestly suitor
`Tactics
All the suitors fight to the death for Twilio.
The hotheaded suitors open with fireball the
first two rounds and try to stay out of melee. The
priestly suitors cast spirit guardians and exclude
Twilio and all her suitors, then follow up with
spiritual weapon if spirit guardians is still in effect.
The dwarven suitor wades into melee and
uses action surge in the first round to take down
an adventurer quickly, targeting the closest
adventurer to Twilio.
Development
Read when the adventurers take down the black
energy shield around Twilio:
The black shield of energy is sucked back
into the necklace as you hear a high-pitched
cackling laugh from the necklace. A moment
later it explodes and you see the black energy
seep into the ground. Twilio’s eyes and form
return to normal as she falls to the ground.
The suitors continue to fight even when the charm
wears off. They are upset that the adventurers hurt
them and fight on.
H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
PA RT 2
 Twilio can be revived with any healing. If
questioned, she tells the adventurers she got the
necklace from Dr. Mingli at the black market in the
Harbor District. She doesn’t know where the black
market is, as she was blindfolded when she was
taken there and when she left. She arranged going
to the black market with Mara Betry. She gives
the adventurers directions to the warehouse that
houses Mara’s office.
More information on the Ships Guild gang
can be found in the sidebar. Characters having
played HULB 1-1 have dealt with the group before,
otherwise Twilio can provide them with the
information in the sidebar. Some characters might
have the gang’s favor, which impacts how they deal
with the characters in the next section.

Ships Guild
Rumored to be an offshoot of Luskan’s Ship
Kurth, the Ships Guild surprisingly has the
best interests of Hulburg at heart. The guild
is prospering as the town grows and attracts
new settlers, and it hopes to maintain a steady
stream of profits from that growth.
Its illicit activities consist mainly of
inflating tariffs, skimming cargo from
incoming ships, and buying and selling black
market items from a hidden shop within the
harbor district. Mara Betry, a level-headed
woman in her mid-forties, heads the guild.
She oversees activities in the harbor from a
large stone warehouse near the water.

Treasure
The suitors have a total of 300 gp. The dwarf suitor
carries a potion of greater healing.

14 H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
PA RT 2
 Part 3.
The man behind the curtain
The Harbor District is a fifteen-minute hike down
a steep slope to the harbors below. The soldiers
opening the palisade gate for the characters
mention they heard some odd noises outside.
Under Siege
About halfway to the Harbor District, the
characters suddenly smell the stench of rotting
corpses. From among the overgrown rubble
six large bloated corpses stumble toward the
characters.
The six ogre zombies are spread out,
attacking the closest targets. The fight takes place
on a steep slope on a winding dusty road. The road
is surrounded by overgrown rubble, bushes, and
crumbling walls.
Once the characters have dealt with the
zombies, they are free to proceed to the Harbor
District. The guards are worried if the characters
tell them about the incident, but they are glad the
adventurers dealt with problem. If pressed, they
grumble a bit about Lord Hulmaster not caring
much about the people of town. Hopefully the
characters can do something about the trouble.
Adjusting the Encounter
The encounter is intended to be Easy, its
purpose is to highlight the fact that the town
is under a siege of sorts.
Here are recommendations for adjusting
this combat encounter. These are not
cumulative.
• Very weak party: Remove two ogre
zombies.
• Weak party: Remove one ogre zombie.
• Strong party: Add one ogre zombie
• Very strong party: Add two ogre zombies.
For strong & very strong also add The ogre
zombies have 104 hit points each, a +2 bonus
on attack and damage rolls and they make
two attacks as an action.
15
The Magnificent Mara Betry
The characters arrive at Mara’s warehouse at the
edge of the dock. The labyrinth of crates inside lead
to Mara’s office, overlooking the entire warehouse.
Inside the office, Mara is busy looking over
a stack of paperwork. She looks up when the
adventurers enter her office.
Mara greets anyone she has met before by
name. If she doesn’t know any of the adventurers,
she assumes they have been sent by Lord
Hulmaster. She normally charges a fee for the
location of the black market, but if one of the
adventurers has the Gratitude of the Gangs – Ships
Guild story award from HULB 1-1, she gives them
the location immediately and at no charge.
Her normal fee for the location of the black
market is 100 gp for the characters. With a DC 15
Charisma (Persuasion) check, she lowers the price
to 75 gp.
If the adventurers imply that she has anything
to do with the cursed items that are causing
problems in Hulburg, Mara is offended but does
not show it. A successful DC 15 Wisdom (Insight)
check shows her displeasure at having her
business interrupted by such baseless accusations.
If the adventurers press with their accusations,
remove the Gratitude of the Gangs – Ships Guild
story award from any character that has it.
If asked about her connection to the black
market or Dr. Mingli’s Magical Emporium, Mara
honestly says that she has no connection to the
strange man. He is one of the people involved in
selling illegal goods, but she knows little about
him. He has been in the area for a few weeks, and
she has heard no complaints about his goods until
now.
H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
PA RT 3

Roleplaying Mara Betry
Wisps of gray streak Mara Betry’s coal-black
hair. She is attractive for her forty-four years
of age and not afraid to use her charm to get
what she wants. Mara treats the members of
the Ships Guild with decency and respect, and
they are fiercely loyal to her in return.
The Ships Guild leader has a reputation
for being sensible and fair. She captained
a Ship Kurth cargo vessel for many years.
Consequently, she knows how to handle people
and how to solve disputes without bloodshed.
Mara would look favorably on being
appointed a sheriff, although she fears the
reaction of the other gangs.
Dr. Mingli’s Magical Emporium
`The adventurers arrive at the black market under
the Harbor District in what were once the sewers
and cellars of Hulburg’s dockside area.
The black market of Hulburg is small, buying mostly
rough gems smuggled out of the mines, and selling
mostly luxurious foods, drugs, and weapons to the
miners.
Dr. Mingli is not hard to find as bystanders
direct you to his stall, where you find a crowd
formed. A short dwarf-looking humanoid in
purple leathers and a golden cloak, with
slicked back white hair and a neatly trimmed
goatee stands on top of the stall, leaning on
his hooked spear for support.
The purple-draped stall displays a wide
variety of items, mostly junk, but some odd
things look more valuable.
“Dr. Mingli has the perfect item for
whatever problem you face,” Dr. Mingli ex-
claims, “Looking for love, give the object of
your desire this potion and they will be yours
forever. I guarantee it or my name is not Dr.
Mingli. “
Dr. Mingli is the consummate salesman and loves
the show. He really believes he helps people with his
items. He distributes the cursed items only because
of the magic that a necromancer provides, which Dr,
Mingli needs to create his magical trinkets.
Dr. Mingli is willing to banter with the
adventurers and answer questions about his
16
products. When the adventurers start asking about
the cursed items, he knows that he has been found
out. Read the following:
Dr. Mingli doesn’t take too kindly to others besmirch-
ing Dr. Mingli’s products,” Dr. Mingli says in a serious
tone. “Dr. Mingli will not put up with such an affront to
his reputation.”
With that, Dr. Mingli raises his hooked spear
and calls out, “Rise, my minions, and defend the name
of Dr. Mingli. Show these unbelievers what true faith is
all about.”
The lids of two large crates flanking the stall
burst open, and the bones in them animate to form
large snake creatures. Onlookers flee at the horrors as
the undead snakes strike.
Two bone nagas form from the piles of bones in the
crates near the cart as two banshees lurk beneath
the surface. The banshees rise on their turn.
Dr. Mingli wants to escape. He knows if he can
get to the necromancer, his chances of survival
increase tremendously.
Roleplaying Dr. Mingli
Dressed in gold studded purple leathers with
a gold cloak, Dr. Mingli is a sophisticated derro
who always carries his hooked shortspear.
He has slicked back white hair with a neatly
trimmed mustache and goatee.
Dr. Mingli is the consummate salesman and
always speaks about himself in the third person.
He is very adept at perceiving the needs of a
person and offering just the right item to fulfill
them. He loves to sell and it shows.
Dr. Mingli works for a necromancer in
exchange for the dark magic that he imbues
into his items and the undead protection he
provides. Dealing with the necromancer is part
of HULB 1-3.
General Features
The general features of the marketplace are as
follows:
Light and Visibility. The sewers that house the
black market are dimly lit with the green moss that
is everywhere.
Smells and Sounds. Due to the proximity of the
water and abandoned cellars, there a mixed smell of
dark earth and ocean water.
H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
PA RT 3
 Terrain. The stall is difficult terrain. The
grate behind it that leads to the sewer can also be
squeezed through, but costs 15 feet of movement.
Sea Water. The water is slow moving but
very harmful. Each time someone moves into a
sewer water space, the creature takes 7 (2d6) acid
damage. Anyone who starts their turn in the water
also takes 7 (2d6) acid damage.
Tactics
Dr. Mingli casts invisibility before fleeing behind the
stall into the sewers. If trapped, he casts confusion
then continues to flee. If he gets off the map, he
escapes.
The bone nagas open with lightning bolts,
catching as many adventurers as possible, then
move to block the exit behind the stall to aid Dr.
Mingli’s escape. If any adventurers get past them,
they cast hold person.
The banshees arise from the ground in the
center of the adventurers and wail on the first
round. Then they move to use horrifying visage to
frighten the adventurers away from Dr. Mingli.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Remove one banshee,
and replace one bone nage with two ogre
zombies.
• Weak party: Replace one banshee with
two ogre zombies.
• Strong party: Add one banshee and two
ogre zombies. The ogre zombies have 105
hit points each, +2 bonus on attack and
damage rolls and make two attacks as an
action.
• Very strong party: Add one banshee and
four ogre zombies. The ogre zombies have
105 hit points each, a +2 bonus on attack
and damage rolls and make two attacks as
an action.
17
Development
If Dr. Mingli gets off the map at the exit, he
disappears and cannot be found. If the adventurers
slay or capture Dr. Mingli, he refuses to talk. It
is assumed the characters hand him over to the
authorities for questioning.
If the adventurers prevent Dr. Mingli from
escaping and slay or capture him, award each
character 1,000 XP.
Treasure
Dr. Mingli’s stall contains a range of items.
There are several cursed items worth a total of
1,000 gp. The mundane pieces of jewelry are worth
400 gp.
Of more interest is a note. Give the characters
Handout 1.
There is also a lantern of revealing and a potion
of resistance (necrotic) among the items.
Conclusion
Reporting back to Lord Eorl Hulmaster at his
manor, the Lord is eager to hear from them. Lord
Hulmaster is concerned about the necromancer
still being out there and asks the Adventurers to
stay in Hulburg as he may need their assistance in
the near future.
Harpers. The players must decide what to do
with the cursed items. Mara is willing to purchase
them and promises to sell them to a traveling
vendor, so the items don’t come back to haunt
Hulburg. The players can alternatively turn them in
to the Harpers, who also pay for them.
This story continues in HULB 1-3 Hulburg Rising.
Treasure
As promised earlier in the adventure, Lord
Hulmaster awards the adventurers 500 (or 600)
gp.
H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
PA RT 3
 Rewards
Make sure players note their rewards on their
adventure logsheets. Give your name and DCI number (if
applicable) so players can record who ran the session.
Experience
Total up all combat experience earned for defeated
foes, and divide by the number of characters
present in the combat. For non-combat experience,
the rewards are listed per character. Give all
characters in the party non-combat experience
awards unless otherwise noted.
Combat Awards
Name of Foe XP per Foe
Banshee 1,100
Bone Naga 1,100
Dr. Mingli 700
Dwarven Suitor 2,900
Hotheaded Suitor 700
Priestly Suitor 50
Ogre Zombie 450
Ogre Zombie, Advanced 700
Non-Combat Awards
Task or Accomplishment XP per Char
Each NPC saved from cursed dagger 300
Stop Dr. Mingli from escaping 1,000
The minimum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 4,500 experience points.
The maximum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 6,000 experience points.
Treasure
The characters receive the following treasure,
divided up amongst the party. Characters should
attempt to divide treasure evenly whenever
possible. Gold piece values listed for sellable
gear are calculated at their selling price, not their
purchase price.
Consumable magic items should be divided
up however the group sees fit. If more than one
character is interested in a specific consumable
magic item, the DM can determine who gets it
randomly should the group be unable to decide.
Permanent magic items are divided according
to a system. See the sidebar if the adventure
awards permanent magic items.
18
Treasure Awards
Item Name/Location GP Value
Lord Hulmaster’s payment (Intro) 500-550
Suitors gold (Part 1: Charmed Life) 300
Dr. Mingli’s jewelry (Part 2) 400
Cursed items 1,000
Permanent Magic Item Distribution
D&D Adventurers League has a system
in place to determine who is awarded
permanent magic items at the end of a
session. Each character’s log sheet contains a
column to record permanent magic items for
ease of reference.
• If the players at the table agree on one
character taking possession of a permanent
magic item, that character gets the item.
• In the event that one or more characters
indicate an interest in possessing a
permanent magic item, the character that
possesses the fewest permanent magic
items gets the item. If there is a tie in the
total number of permanent magic items
owned by contesting characters, the item’s
owner is determined randomly by the DM.
Lantern of Revealing
Wondrous item, uncommon
A description of this item can be found in the
Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Potion of Greater Healing
Potion, uncommon
A description of this item can be found in the
Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Potion of Resitance (necrotic)
Potion, uncommon
A description of this item can be found in the
Dungeon Master’s Guide.
H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
R E WA R D S
Renown
Each character receives one point of renown.
Harpers who retrieve cursed items and return
them to the Harpers receive an extra point of
renown.

Downtime
Each character receives 10 downtime days at the
conclusion of this adventure.

DM Rewards
You receive 875 XP, 400 gp, and 10 downtime
days for running this session.

19 H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
R E WA R D S
 Appendix: must make a DC 13 Constitution saving throw.
On a failure, a creature drops to 0 hit points. On a
NPC / Monster Statistics success, a creature takes 10 (3d6) psychic damage.
Banshee Bone Naga
Medium undead, chaotic evil Large undead, lawful evil
Armor Class 12 (natural armor) STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Hit Points 58 (13d8) 10 (+0) 12 (+1) 13 (+1) 12 (+1) 15 (+2) 11 (+0)
Speed 0 ft., fly 40 ft. (hover)
Armor Class 15 (natural armor)
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA Hit Points 58 (9d10 + 9)
1 (-5) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 12 (+1) 11 (+0)17 (+3)
Speed 30 ft.
Saving Throws Wis +2, Cha +4 Damage Immunities poison
Damage Resistance acid, fire, lightning, thunder; Condition Immunities charmed, exhaustion,
bludgeoning, piercing, and slashing from non- paralyzed, poisoned
magical weapons Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 12
Condition Immunities charmed, exhaustion, Languages Common and Undercommon
frightened, grappled, paralyzed, petrified, Challenge 4 (1,100 XP)
poisoned, prone, restrained
Spellcasting. The spirit naga is a 5th-level
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 10 spellcaster. Its spellcasting ability is Intelligence
Languages Common, Elvish (spell save DC 12, +4 to hit with spell attacks). It
Challenge 4 (1,100 XP) has the following wizard spells prepared:
Detect Life. The banshee can magically sense the Cantrips (at will): mage hand, minor illusion, ray
presence of living creatures up to 5 miles away. She of frost
knows the general direction they’re in but not their 1st level (4 slots): charm person, sleep
exact locations. 2nd level (3 slots): detect thoughts, hold person
Actions 3rd level (2 slots): lightning bolt
Corrupting Touch. Melee Spell Attack: +5 to hit, Actions
reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 12 (3d6 + 2) necrotic
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach 10 ft.,
damage.
one target. Hit: 10 (2d6 + 3) piercing damage plus
Horrifying visage. Each non-undead creature 10 (3d6) poison damage.
within 60 feet of the banshee that can see her must
succeed on a DC 13 Wisdom saving throw or be
frightened for 1 minute. A frightened target can
repeat the saving throw at the end of each of its
turns, with disadvantage if the banshee is within
line of sight, ending the effect on itself on a success.
If a target’s saving throw is successful or the effect
ends for it, the target is immune to the banshee’s
Horrifying Visage for the next 24 hours.
Wail (1/day). The banshee releases a mournful
wail, provided that she isn’t in sunlight. The wail
has no effect on constructs and undead. All other
creatures within 30 feet of her that can hear her

20 H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
APPENDIX
Commoner Cantrips (at will): friends, prestidigitation, vicious
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment mockery
Armor Class 10 1st level (4 slots): disguise self, dissonant
Hit Points 4 whispers, thunderwave
Speed 30 ft. 2nd level (3 slots): invisibility, shatter, silence
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA 3rd level (3 slots): nondetection, sending, tongues
10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 4th level (3 slots): confusion, dimension door

Senses passive Perception 10 Actions

Languages any one language (usually Common) Multiattack. Dr. Mingli makes two melee attacks.
Challenge 0 (10 XP) Hooked Shortspear. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to
hit, reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d4 + 3) piercing
Actions damage. If the target is a creature, Dr. Mingli can
Club. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft., choose to deal no damage and try to trip the target
one target. Hit: 2 (1d4) bludgeoning damage. instead, in which case the target must succeed on a
DC 10 Strength saving throw or fall prone.
Dr. Mingli* * Windharrow from Princes of the Apocalypse.
Small humanoid (derro), lawful evil Changed Windharrow from a half-elf to a derro.
Armor Class 15
Hit Points 55 (10d8 + 10)
Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
10 (+1) 16 (+3) 12 (+1) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 17 (+3)

Saving Throws Int +6, Wis +4

Skills Acrobatics +5, Deception +7, Persuasion +5,
Performance +7, Stealth +5
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 10
Languages Common, Dwarvish, Undercommon
Challenge 3 (700 XP)
Insanity. Dr. Mingli has advantage on saving
throws against being charmed or frightened.
Magic Resistance. Dr. Mingli has advantage on
saving throws against spells and other magical
effects.
Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, Dr. Mingli
has disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as Wisdom
(Perception) checks that rely on sight.
Spellcasting. The mage is a 8th-level spellcaster.
His spellcasting ability is Charisma (spell save DC
13, +5 to hit with spell attacks). It has the following
bard spells prepared:

21 H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
APPENDIX
 Dwarven Suitor* Hotheaded Suitor*
Medium humanoid (shield dwarf), neutral Medium humanoid (human), chaotic neutral
Armor Class 18 (plate) Armor Class 12 (15 with mage armor)
Hit Points 93 (11d8 + 44) Hit Points 52 (8d8 + 16)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
19 (+4) 10 (+0) 18 (+4) 11 (+0) 8 (-1) 12 (+1) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 12 (+1) 11 (+0) 14 (+2) 16 (+3)

Skills Athletics +7, Intimidation +4
Damage Resistances poison
Senses darkvision 60ft., passive Perception 9
Languages Common, Dwarvish
Challenge 7 (2,900 XP)
Action Surge (Recharges after short or long rest).
A dwarven suitor takes an additional action on his
turn.
Brute. A melee weapon deals one extra die of
its damage when the dwarven suitor hits with it
(included in the attack).
Dwarven Resilience. The dwarven suitor has
advantage on saving throws against poison.
Indomitable (Recharges after short or long rest).
The dwarven suitor can reroll a saving throw that
he fails. He must use the new roll.
Second Wind (Recharges after short or long rest).
The dwarven suitor can use a bonus action to
regain 16 (1d10 + 11) hit points.
Actions
Multiattack. The dwarven suitor makes three
melee attacks with his greataxe.
Greataxe. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5
ft., one target. Hit: 17 (2d12 + 4) slashing damage.
* Drannin from Princes of the Apocalypse
(removed his special equipment).
Skills Deception +5, Intimidation +5, Religion +2
Senses passive Perception 10
Languages Common, Igan
Challenge 3 (700 XP)
Spellcasting. The hotheaded suitor is a 5th-level
spellcaster. His spellcasting ability is Charisma
(spell save DC 13, +5 to hit with spell attacks). It
has the following sorcerer spells prepared:
Cantrips (at will): control flames, create bonfire,
fire bolt, light, minor illusion
1st level (4 slots): burning hands, expeditious
retreat, mage armor
2nd level (3 slots): blur, scorching ray
3rd level (2 slots): fireball
Actions
Dagger. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5
ft. or range 20/60 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d4 + 2)
piercing damage.
*Eternal Flame Priest from Princes of the
Apocalypse.

22 H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
APPENDIX
Priestly Suitor*
Medium humanoid (human), neutral
Armor Class 18 (chainmail, shield)
Hit Points 33 (6d8 + 6)
Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
12 (+1) 15 (+2) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 16 (+3)

Saving Throws Wis +4, Cha +5

Skills Persuasion +5, Religion +2
Senses passive Perception 12
Languages Common, Undercommon
Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Spellcasting. The priestly suitor is a 6th-level
spellcaster. His spellcasting ability is Wisdom (spell
save DC 12, +4 to hit with spell attacks). It has the
following cleric spells prepared:
Cantrips (at will): guidance, light, sacred flame,
thaumaturgy
1st level (4 slots): cure wounds, divine favor,
inflict wounds, protection from good and evil,
shield of faith
2nd level (3 slots): continual flame, hold person,
magic weapon, spiritual weapon
3rd level (3 slots): bestow curse, dispel magic,
spirit guardians
Actions
Multiattack. The priestly suitor makes two attacks
with his flail.
Flail. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 6 (1d8 + 2) bludgeoning damage.
* Grisha from Out of the Abyss (removed +1 flail).

23 H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
APPENDIX
 Appendix II: Hulburg

24 H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
APPENDIX
Map: What goes up must come down

B = Billy
A = Aubrey
S = Shamus
R = Redvin

25 H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
APPENDIX
 Map: The Charmed Life

T = Twilio Othenium
P = Priestly Suitor
H = Hotheaded Suitor
D = Dwarven Suitor

26 H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
APPENDIX
Map: Dr. Mingli’s Magical Emporium

B = Bone Naga
M = Dr. Mingli
Banshees start off the map.

27 H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
APPENDIX
 Player Handout: Letter from the Necromancer

The undead are growing.

Release the items to the citizens of Hulburg to

sow the seeds of what is to come. More orders
will follow.

When Hulburg is reborn, your rewards will

exceed anything you can imagine.

Let the dead rise,

Aesperus

H U L B 1 - 2 / H U L B U RG B U R N I N G
28 APPENDIX
 Hulburg
Rising
Merric blackman
Adventure Designer
Adventure Code: HULB 1-3

Since the rebirth of Hulburg, the strong have preyed upon the weak, with
only limited protection offered by the law. Recently, any resemblance of law
and order has been threatened, and even the town’s greedy callous ruler
cannot ignore the threat anymore. A war is brewing. Can you stop it before
it is too late? A D&D Adventurers League adventure set in Hulburg
A four-hour adventure for 5th-10th level characters

Producer: Baldman Games

Hulburg Administrator & Developer: Pieter Sleijpen
Editing and Layout: Encoded Designs
Cartography: Andrew Smith
Organized Play: Chris Lindsay
D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall,
Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks, Alan Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster
Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League, all other Wizards of the Coast product names, and their respective
logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive likenesses
are property of Wizards of the Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America.
Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the express written
permission of Wizards of the Coast.
©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31,
2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK.
 Introduction
Welcome to Hulburg Rising, a D&D adventure that is part of the
official D&D Adventurers League™ organized play system.

This adventure is designed for three to seven 5th-10th level characters, and is
optimized for five 8th-level characters. Characters outside this level range cannot participate in
this adventure.
The adventure is set in the Moonsea region of the Forgotten Realms, in the town of Hulburg.

The D&D Adventurers League Preparing the Adventure

This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of
the D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure,
players track their characters’ experience, treasure,
and other rewards, and can take those characters
through other adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a
store event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a
DCI number. This number is your official Wizards of
the Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have
a number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to
use to create and advance their characters. Players
can continue to play their characters after the
storyline season has finished, possibly participating
in a second or third storyline with those same
characters. A character’s level is the only limitation
for adventure play. A player cannot use a character
of a level higher or lower than the level range of a
D&D Adventurers League adventure.
For more information on playing, running
games as a Dungeon Master, and organizing games
for the D&D Adventurers League, please visit the
D&D Adventurers League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
• Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
• Read through the adventure, taking notes
of anything you’d like to highlight or remind
yourself while running the adventure, such as a
way you’d like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d
like to use in a combat.
• Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
• Gather together any resources you’d like to
use to aid you in running this adventure--such
as notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and
battlemaps.
• If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.
Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
• Character name and level
• Character race and class
• Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most
common passive ability check
• Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, etc.)
Players that have characters outside the
adventure’s level range cannot participate in
the adventure with those characters. Players

2 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
I N T RO D U C T I O N
with ineligible characters can make a new 1st-level
character or use a pregenerated character. Players
can play an adventure they previously played or
ran as a Dungeon Master, but not with the same
character.
Ensure that each player has an official
adventure logsheet for his or her character (if not,
get one from the organizer). The player fills out
the adventure name, session number, date, and
your name and DCI number. In addition, the player
also fills in the starting values for experience, gold,
downtime, renown, and number of permanent
magic items. He or she fill in the other values and
write notes at the conclusion of the session. Each
player is responsible for maintaining an accurate
logsheet.
If you have time, you can do a quick scan of
a player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing
looks out of order. If you see magic items of very
high rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you
can ask players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict
item use or ask them to use a standard ability
score array. Point players to the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and
it’s the beginning of an adventure or episode,
they can declare their activity and spend the days
now. Alternatively, they can do so at the end of
the adventure or episode. Players should select
their characters’ spells and other daily options
prior to the start of the adventure, unless the
adventure specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread
the adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, you may see sidebars
to help make adjustments for smaller/larger
groups, and characters of higher/lower levels than
the optimized group. Most of the time, this is used
for combat encounters.
You may adjust the adventure beyond the
guidelines given. For example, if you’re playing
with a group of inexperienced players, you might
want to make the adventure a little easier; for
very experienced players, you may want to make
3 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
it a little harder. Therefore, five categories of
party strength have been created for you to use
as a guide. Feel free to use a different adjustment
during the adventure if the recommended party
strength feels off for the group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of
five 1th-level characters. To figure out whether
you need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
• Add up the total levels of all the characters
• Divide the total by the number of characters
• Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round
fractions of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table:
Determining Party Strength
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very Weak
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very Strong
Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment
of the game for the players. You help guide the
narrative and bring the words on these pages
to life. The outcome of a fun game session often
creates stories that live well beyond the play at the
table. Always follow this golden rule when you DM
for a group:
Make decisions and adjudications that
enhance the fun of the adventure when
possible.
To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
• You are empowered to make adjustments to
the adventure and make decisions about how the
group interacts with the world of this adventure.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Doing so is especially important and applicable
outside of combat, but feel free to adjust the
adventure for groups that are having too easy or
too hard of a time.
• Don’t make the adventure too easy or too
difficult for a group. Never being challenged
makes for a boring game and being
overwhelmed makes for a frustrating one.
Gauge the experience of the players (not the
characters) with the game, try to feel out (or
ask) what they like in a game, and attempt to
give each of them the experience they’re after
when they play D&D. Give everyone a chance to
shine.
• Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game
session moving along appropriately. Watch for
stalling, since play loses momentum when this
happens. At the same time, make sure that the
players don’t finish too early; provide them with
a full play experience. Try to be aware of running
long or short. Adjust the pacing accordingly
• Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free
to modify the text as you see fit, especially when
dialogue is present.
• Give the players appropriate hints so they can
make informed choices about how to proceed.
Players should be given clues and hints when
appropriate so they can tackle puzzles, combat,
and interactions without getting frustrated over
lack of information. Doing so helps to encourage
immersion in the adventure and gives players
“little victories” for figuring out good choices
from clues.
In short, being the DM isn’t about following
the adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about
facilitating a fun, challenging game environment
for the players. The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has
more information on the art of running a D&D
game.
Downtime and Lifestyle
At the beginning of each play session, players must
declare whether or not they are spending any days
of downtime. The player records the downtime
spent on the adventure logsheet. The following
options are available to players during downtime
(see the D&D basic rules or the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for more information):
4 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
• Catching up
• Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
commit to crafting a single item)
• Practicing a profession
• Recuperating
• Spellcasting services
• Training
Other downtime options might be available during
adventures or unlocked through play, including
faction-specific activities.
In addition, whenever a character spends
downtime days, that character also spends the
requisite expense for his or her lifestyle. Costs
are per day, so a character that spends ten days
of downtime also spends ten days of expenses
maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some downtime
activities help with lifestyle expenses or add
lifestyle expenses.
Spellcasting Services
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can
provide some spellcasting services. Characters
need to be able to travel to the settlement to obtain
these services.
Spell services generally available include
healing and recovery spells, as well as information-
gathering spells. Other spell services might be
available as specified in the adventure. The number
of spells available to be cast as a service is limited
to a maximum of three per day total, unless
otherwise noted.
Spellcasting Services
Spell Cost
Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
Identify 20 gp
Lesser restoration 40 gp
Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
Remove curse 90 gp
Speak with dead 90 gp
Divination 210 gp
Greater restoration 450 gp
Raise dead 1,250 gp
I N T RO D U C T I O N

Acolyte Background
A character possessing the acolyte
background requesting spellcasting
services at a temple of his or her faith
may request one spell per day from the
Spellcasting Services table for free. The only
cost paid for the spell is the base price for
the consumed material component, if any.
Melvaunt is a large city where any
acolyte can find a friendly shrine or
temple.
Disease, Death, and Recovery
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might
not have the same characters return from session
to session, here are the rules when bad things
happen to characters.
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating Effects
A character still affected by diseases, poisons,
and other similar effects at the conclusion of an
adventure can spend downtime days recuperating
until such time as he or she resolves the effect to
its conclusion (see the recuperating activity in the
D&D Basic Rules).
If a character doesn’t resolve the effect
between sessions, that character begins the next
session still affected by the debilitating effect.
Death
A character who is killed during the course of
the adventure has a few options at the end of the
session (or whenever arriving back in civilization)
if no one in the adventuring party has immediate
access to a raise dead or revivify spell, or similar
magic. A character subject to a raise dead spell is
affected negatively until all long rests have been
completed during an adventure. Alternatively, each
downtime day spent after raise dead reduces the
penalty to attack rolls, saving throws, and ability
checks by 1, in addition to any other benefits the
downtime activity might provide.
5 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any
of the other options, the player creates a new
character. The new character does not have any
items or rewards possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing
any vital organs and is mostly whole) and the
player would like the character to be returned to
life, the party can take the body back to civilization
and use the dead character’s funds to pay for a
raise dead spell. A raise dead spell cast in this
manner costs the character 1,250 gp.
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As
above, except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for
the raise dead spell is paid for by the party at the
end of the session. Other characters are under no
obligation to spend their funds to bring back a
dead party member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to
4 and a member of a faction, the dead character’s
body can be returned to civilization and a patron
from the faction ensures that he or she receives a
raise dead spell. However, any character invoking
this charity forfeits all experience and rewards
from that session (both those earned prior to and
after death during that session) and cannot replay
that episode or adventure with that character
again. Once a character reaches 5th level, this
option is no longer available.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Hulburg Today
Over the centuries Hulburg was plundered and
razed many times, but each time industrious folk
returned to rebuild atop its ruins. Remnants of
its previous incarnations still exist beneath the
surface of the current remains as a disjointed
collection of old sewers, passageways, and even the
buried founda-tions and basements of destroyed
buildings.
While small in comparison to its former size,
mod-ern-day Hulburg is no exception to this cycle
of re-birth. Today, the town consists mainly of three
dis-tinct areas: Tent City, the Harbor District, and
Hul-master Manor.
A map can be found in Appendix II.
Tent City
The bulk of the town rests atop a tall plateau on the
northern banks of the Moonsea with the heights
of Thar rising to the north. A steep and rocky hill
blocks expansion to the east, and the stony cliffs
along the Moonsea lie to the south.
Known by Hulburg’s residents as Tent City, the
plateau is home to a haphazard collection of large
canvas tents and makeshift wooden buildings. This
fledgling residential district lies near the center
of the plateau, and it stands upon the ruins of a
former fortress. It contains a large natural well
and several older defenses constructed at the
height of Hulburg’s former glory. Several miles of
unoccupied ruins sur-round the area.
Many residents of Tent City work in Lord Eorl
Hulmaster’s gem mine, which is located in the hills
to the northeast of the town. The remaining resi-
dents survive by plying common trades to support
the miners or working as dockhands in the Harbor
District. Life in Tent City is rough, with most people
living in poverty. These conditions breed crime
and violence, but Lord Hulmaster’s small force of
guards and Hulburg’s larger gangs manage to keep
the town from falling into complete lawlessness.
6 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
Harbor District
The lifeline of Hulburg is its harbor, which lies to
the south of Tent City along the northern shore of
the Moonsea. A large, rocky bluff separates it from
Tent City, and travel between the two districts is
limited to a steep man-made trail that traverses the
stony face of the slope. Laborers, called hoppers,
carry loads of ore and other supplies up and down
the trail, which can be treacherous in poor weather.
Warehouses and rows of docks make up the
bulk of the Harbor District, but the area is also
home to a tariff office, guard post, and many other
smaller businesses built to service ships and their
crews. The district has seen recent investments
by Lord Eorl Hulmaster, making it opulent in
comparison to Tent City. Consequently, few tents
and temporary struc-tures lie within its palisades.
A handful of successful merchants, traders, and
ship captains live here, but even these individuals
live a modest lifestyle in comparison to other
towns and cities in the Moonsea region.
Hulmaster Manor
Lord Eorl Hulmaster’s manor lies a short thirty-
minute walk to the northwest of Tent City on
the outskirts of the ruins of old Hulburg. The
current lord and his trusted retainers live in a
small wooden fortress that backs up to a tall bluff.
Residents of Hulburg jokingly (and never in the
presence of the lord or his retainers) refer to the
structure as the Hedge Lord’s Manor.
Adventure Background
During the earlier days of Hulburg. a powerful
wizard named Aesperus lived in the region. Like
many necromancers, he was not the nicest person,
and he became a powerful leader. Eventually, an
invasion of orcs and giants destroyed Hulburg, and
Aesperus was knocked unconscious in the battle.
The bodies of the dead, and that of the
unconscious Aesperus, were placed in a mass grave
– the Vault of the Dead – and there he died. But
not for long. Soon Aesperus awoke as one of the
undead. Now a creature of great power, he was able
to build his strength and formed a legion of undead
followers beneath the earth.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 His plots to grow a kingdom of undeath on the
surface were thwarted over the years, and soon his
existence was lost to history. Although he has lost
some of his power, he still lurks beneath Hulburg,
plotting and planning his return.
Aesperus might have completely faded from
the world but for the discovery of an ancient relic:
the Teeth of Myrkul. The unholy relic has come
to Hulburg, and with its power Aesperus plans to
regain his dominion of the land.
Of course, having been defeated by
adventurers once, and well aware of the recently
resettled town, he did not expact things to go
smoothly. The events of HULB 1-1 and HULB
1-2 were his attempts to destabilize the town. If
successful, all the better. If not, they offered him
the opportunity to acquire the components for the
ritual without drawing attention. It also allowed
him to learn about the current conditions of the
town and prepare accordingly.
To achieve this, he has captured thirteen
townsfolk, and intends to sacrifice them to the
Teeth of Myrkul this day. The only people who
can stop him are the adventurers. Are they strong
enough to succeed?
Series
HULB 1-3 Hulburg Rising is the third part of a
trilogy of adventures. The first part is HULB 1-1
Hulburg Rebuilding. The second part is HULB
1-2 Hulburg Burning. The adventures have been
written to be played in order. Playing this part
before the others can create confusion, since the
force directing the undead in the earlier parts
is confronted here. Make sure your players are
aware of this being a series and the fact that
playing them out of order might make little
sense. Nobody is stopping the players from
playing them out of order: either consider the
first two adventures as flashbacks or deal with
the after-effects when played at a later date.
7 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
The Fate of Dr. Mingli
In HULB 1-2 Hulburg Burning, the characters
confront the mad merchant Dr. Mingli who
is selling cursed items. These items were
provided by Aesperus. Check with your group
before gameplay to see what happened to
the merchant during their adventures. If he
escaped for more than half of the players at
your table, he can be found in Room 3B of Part
2. (See that encounter for more details).
Adventure Overview
HULB 1-3 Hulburg Rising consists of three parts. In
each section, the danger from the ritual increases.
Part I: Home in Hulburg. The adventurers are
in a meeting with Jarus Grainger when Aesperus
begins his ritual, which they experience as a brief
wave of dizziness. They must quickly prepare to
descend into the depths of the ruined Temple
of Lathander, where they have learned their foe
awaits. They must deal with some gargoyles that
Aesperus has left for them before descending.
Part II: Hope under the Temple. The
adventurers descend into the temple vaults, where
they have the opportunity to gain aid from the
spirit of a Champion of Lathander. They must
defeat or evade a great clay golem of the church,
corrupted to the service of Aesperus, before
descending further.
Part III: Reign of the Dead. The adventurers
can enter a sealed room where treasures of
Lathander await, before finding the surviving
prisoners kidnapped by Aesperus’s minions,
and finally facing the potential lich himself.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Characters with a more mercenary bent might
Necrotic Waves
suspect the priest has no gold to pay for their
The adventure is on a countdown. Aesperus is
services, and they are correct. Their faction
conducting a ritual using a relic known as the
mentions that the lord of the city, Lord Eorl
Teeth of Myrkul.
Hulmaster, is aware of the trouble and he is paying
Roughly every 30 minutes a wave of the usual fee.
necrotic force rocks the town. After six hours
of this, the ritual is complete, the dead rise
with even more power than before, and the
adventure ends with the player characters
unsuccessful. Keep an eye on the time, but
unless the characters start taking short rests,
there should not be too many waves.
The wave of energy becomes more
powerful the deeper the party are in the
temple, as noted in the text of each part in a
sidebar like this one.
Make sure the players are aware of these
waves, even on the surface, since it impacts
how they approach the adventure.

Adventure Hooks
Played HULB 1-1 and/or HULB 1-2. Characters
that played the previous adventures of the series
should have a stake in learning what exactly is
going on. The dead are rising with no apparent
cause, and something seems to be directing them.
They might even have learned of a necromancer
providing cursed items to a mad merchant.
If the characters play this adventure
immediately after HULB 1-2, they are in town and
Father Jarus Grainger directs them to a tavern.
Otherwise they returned after an urgent message
from Jarus that he learned more and needs
adventurers before it is too late.
First Time in Hulburg. Characters who have
not yet played the first two parts are contacted
by their factions. Trouble is rising in Hulburg,
and nobody wants the city to be destroyed. The
adventurers are asked to wait in the appointed
tavern for Father Jarus Grainger of Tyr to contact
them. The priest of Tyr has more details about
what is going on and what needs to be done.

8 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Part 1.
Home in hulburg
Aesperus has begun his final plan: infuse the Teeth
of Myrkul with the life force of twelve sacrifices.
If successfully performed, the ritual gives him
the power to raise and control all of the dead in
Hulburg, as well as complete his transmogrification
into full lich status.
The adventure begins at noon with the party in
conversation with Jarus Grainger, who is concerned
about the recent disappearance of a number of
villagers. At that point, the first sacrifice is made
and the player characters become aware of the
danger. The ritual takes six hours to complete.
It is assumed that the characters have all their
normal adventuring gear. Allow them a chance to
buy additional equipment before the meeting. Once
the adventure starts properly, time is limited!
Encounter 1: The End Begins
The adventure starts with the characters waiting in
one of the many drinkholes in Tent City. Food and
drink is cheap, its quality reflected in the price.
You find yourself lunching in a hot sweltering
tavern, encompassed by the smell of ale, moldy
straw, and a sweaty crowd. Summer has been
hot, adding fuel to the tension within Hulburg.
The dead have been extremely restless in the
past few days, and people worry the town is
going to fall. You are here to meet Father Jarus
Grainger of Tyr, since he recently acquired infor-
mation needed to deal with the trouble.
Note that if the players played HULB 1-2, they
likely provided information to the authorities.
Jarus spent the last ten-day or so researching
and questioning people to learn enough to find
more information on the necromancer behind the
undead attacks.
Give the players some time to introduce their
characters before proceeding with the first wave of
necrotic energy.
9 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
You have been waiting for a few moments
when suddenly a wave of cold washes over
you, leaving you woozy for a heartbeat or
two. It is clear everybody present was af-
fected. Before you can react, an extremely
worried Jarus steps inside, rushing toward your
group when he spots you. “It seems the prob-
lem is even more pressing than I thought…”
The remainder of this adventure is on a
countdown. Aesperus has started the ritual. Every
30 minutes a wave of necrotic force rocks the town.
After six hours of this, the ritual is complete. On the
surface, the wave is noticeable primarily as a brief
darkening of sight and a wave of dizziness, neither
with any game effect.
Jarus is in a hurry and rather blunt. He learned
of Aesperus and the undead’s hideout at least
partially from what the characters found in HULB
1-2. The rest he aquired through his own research
and divination magic.
Jarus Grainger tells the following:
• The wave of dizziness is the result of some
kind of powerful ritual performed somewhere in
the ruins of Hulburg. The effects are weak here,
but likely nastier closer to the source.
• The ritual is performed by a powerful undead
wizard operating from the ruins of the Temple
of Lathander, or so Jarus hopes. He knows the
merchant Mingli, the lunatic selling cursed
items in HULB 1-2, got his orders at that spot.
The wave of dark energy originated from that
direction.
• The ritual is still going on, since otherwise an
army of undead would have erupted from the
earth. It must be stopped before it is too late.
• A champion of the faith named Kylina
Godsworn built the temple of Lathander. The
temple was destroyed in the war with Zhentil
Keep over a century ago. He is not sure what
happened with the place during or after the
PA RT 1
 battle, although it is unlikely the Banites would
have been kind to the place.
• There are crypts beneath the temple where the
devout of the faith were buried.
• He has heard of six residents of Hulburg being
snatched. Three were miners, two were guards,
and one was a beggar. In some cases, the earth
just opened and skeletons dragged them down.
In other cases, the victim was snatched by a
group of ghouls or zombies and dragged away –
still alive – towards the temple.
• He suspects the victims will be used as
sacrifices in the ritual.
• He is aghast if characters want some kind
of pay for saving the town, but is sure Lord
Hulmaster will reward them as is fitting for the
task at hand. There is no time to consult Lord
Hulmaster though. If the ritual concludes it will
be too late.
Roleplaying Jarus Grainger
A native of the Dalelands, Jarus found his faith
in Tyr late in life after losing his wife to a long
bout of wasting sickness. He is an honest man
with a good heart, but in his fifty-eight years
of living, he has developed a stubborn streak
and a penchant for speaking bluntly. In spite
of his flaws, the residents of Hulburg respect
him.
The gray-haired priest of Tyr has called
Hulburg home for less than a year. He does his
best to tend to the health of the residents of
Tent City and holds small services to spread
the word of the God of Justice.
Jarus came to Hulburg because he knew
the town needed individuals who cared
more for people than profit. Even though he
is simply a low-ranking servant of Tyr, he
firmly believes in the god’s edicts. More than
anything, he wants to see justice served to
those responsible.
10
Characters learn the following through ability
checks:
• Intelligence (Religion or History) DC
13: Kylina Godsworn was a holy warrior of
Lathander, known for her battles against the orcs
in the region. When she died, she was buried
beneath the temple in Hulburg.
• Intelligence (Religion or History) DC 18: For
a few years after Kylina’s death, the temple was
a place of pilgrimage for followers of Lathander.
That ended when Hulburg was destroyed.
The characters may prepare as much as they like,
although when it arrives the second wave of energy
should make them realise they are running out of
time. Feel free to describe it as slightly more potent
than the last...
Jarus Grainger has two potions of healing and
four vials of holy water at his residence. However,
it takes him 20 minutes to retrieve them if asked. It
costs 10 minutes if the characters come with him
to his house and leave for the ruins from there.
Timing
It takes 20 minutes for the players to reach the
ruined Temple of Lathander unless they find a way
to get there faster.
Encounter 2: Ruined Temple
Walking through the overgrown rubble that used
to be the city of Hulburg, the characters reach the
ruined temple of Lathander.
Before being destroyed this must have been
an impressive building, but that was long ago.
The walls still stand, but most of the temple’s
roof has collapsed, leaving the interior open
to the sky. Faded frescoes depicting the glory
of the Morninglord can still be made out on
the walls, and grotesque statues sit on the
remnants of the walls.
The statues are actually five gargoyles that have
been corrupted to serve Aesperus. They attack
intruders at a time that seems appropriate to them,
preferably with surprise and trying to prevent
clustering on one spot. Characters knowing of
Aesperus might try to fool them, but that would
only work if Dr. Mingli did not escape, and even
then it would only confuse them for a few moments.
H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
PA RT 1
 Note that the gargoyles’ goal is to prevent the
Adjusting the Encounter
characters from entering the stairs. They are happy
The encounter has a Medium difficulty.
to use their flight to their advantage, but they are
forced into melee if the adventurers go into area Here are recommendations for adjusting
2B. this combat encounter. These are not
cumulative.
2A: Altar – The side of the altar facing the church • Very weak party: There are two
is covered in dirt, but a design can be faintly gargoyles.
discerned below the encrustation. Cleaning the
• Weak party: There are four gargoyles.
altar properly, which takes 30 character-minutes
to perform, reveals the symbol of the Morninglord • Strong party: Add a flameskull. The
inscribed on that side. Doing so grants inspiration gargoyles have 67 hit points, +1 to attacks,
to each character who participated in the cleaning. damage, and saving throws.
• Very strong party: Add a flameskull. It is
2B: Grand Stair – The roof of this area still
infused with necrotic energy and as a result
stands, although the area has been looted and the
it has advantage on all its saving throws and
furniture destroyed. A large mural on the eastern
its fire spells and attacks also deal necrotic
wall depicts the sun rising above the Moonsea. A
damage. The gargoyles have 67 hit points
large set of stairs leads down into the chambers
each and a +1 to attacks, (10) +3d6 damage,
below.
and saving throws.
2C: Ruined Rooms – Rubble fills these rooms
from the ruined ceiling above, and grass and lichen
grow among the stones. Searching a room takes
10 minutes, and a successful DC 15 Intelligence
(Investigation) check allows the characters to find
a silver dagger.
2D: Sacristy – Tables, wardrobes, and cabinets
lie in smashed splinters on the floor, covered with
a thin layer of harmless mold. The roof above
is intact. Searching the room thoroughly takes
10 character-minutes, and a successful DC 10
Intelligence (Investigation) check reveals two
unbroken vials containing holy water.
2E: High Priest’s Chambers – The doors of
this room have been smashed, and the northern
portion of the roof is missing. A mass of sludge
covers the floor, the rotted remnants of the
furnishings. A proper search here (taking 10
character-minutes) reveals nothing of value.

11 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
PA RT 1
 Upper Temple

H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
12 PA RT 1
 Part 2.
Hope Under the temple
This section of the adventure takes place in the
basement of the Temple of Lathander, where a
number of crypts to the most devout followers of
Lathander were built, as well as various storage
chambers. They have all been despoiled and
desecrated, with the exception of one: the crypt of
Kylina, Knight of Lathander.
Dungeon Features
The walls are made of dressed stone. The floors are
of uneven slate, although the slate is often buried
under a thin layer of mud and grime.
Light and Visibility. There is no light in this
level except as noted.
Passages. The shaded passageways were dug by
the undead. They have walls made of packed earth
and rock; the ceiling is held up by supports made
of bone - structures of dark magic. The floors are
of earth and muddy rock. If the Tears of Myrkul are
destroyed, the bone supports break and crumble,
collapsing and trapping any characters within.
13
Doors. Doors are aged oak bound in metal;
unless denoted otherwise, they are stuck and require
a DC 10 Strength (Athletics) check to force open.
Necrotic Wave
In this level of the dungeon, the effects of the
necrotic waves are more pronounced. When
they occur, each living creature must make a
DC 13 Constitution saving throw. On a failure,
it takes 10 (3d6) necrotic damage and its
movement speed is reduced to 0 on its until
the end of their next turn. On a successful
saving throw, the creature takes half damage
and may move normally.
• Very Weak Party: The wave only deals 3
(1d6) necrotic damage.
• Very Strong Party: The wave deals 17
(5d6) necrotic damage.
H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
PA RT 2
 Encounter 3: The Upper Catacombs
The stairs in Area 2B take the characters down into
the upper catacombs.
The grand stairs go down to a number of in-
tersecting corridors, leading into the darkness.
From the east, you can make out a faint yel-
low glow illuminating where the passage turns.
You feel a strange sense of peace as you look
in that direction. You can hear strange clack-
ing noises reverberating softly through the
passages.
The clacking noises are made by a patrol of eight
skeletons that are currently north of 3B. They
come within sight of the party from the passage to
the south at a moment of your choosing.
This encounter is not meant to take too long,
nor drain much of their resources. It is primarily to
alert the players to the movement of undead in the
area.
3A: The main hallway here proceeds with a 15-
foot ceiling to a pair of great wooden doors at the
far end; they show the marks of axes and swords
having been used upon them, but they still stand
firm. A DC 12 Intelligence (Investigation) check
discerns the remnants of the rising sun holy
symbol of Lathander on the doors.
3B: A golden cloak hangs from a hook on the south
wall. It is of recent manufacture. Characters who
succeed at a DC 10 Intelligence (Investigation)
check also find slivers of onyx, too small to be of
any value. Combined with what can be found in 3C,
astute characters realize this is where the cursed
items from HULB 1-2 came from.
14
If Dr. Mingli escaped in HULB 1-2, he can
be found here, propped up against the wall in a
corner. He is at death’s door, drained of most of
his life energy. He is conscious but too feverish to
recognize the characters. A lesser restoration or
more powerful magic is required to get him back
on his feet. He is unlikely to survive the next wave.
Bringing him out of the temple costs 10 minutes.
Roleplaying Dr. Mingli
Dr. Mingli isn’t the derro he used to be. The
consummate salesman is now a rambling,
dying mad man. Betrayed by Aesperus, he is
angry for not getting his promised reward,
blaming everybody but himself. He wants to
get out, and he is willing to promise anything.
In his current condition he lacks self-control
though, thinking out loud and changing his
story abrubtly to something he thinks the
characters want to hear.
3C: This chamber contains several shelves filled
with commonplace items: toys, bracelets, necklaces
and cheap tools used to modify them. They are
worthless.
3D: The cells in this area were used as emergency
sleeping areas during the Siege of Hulburg over a
century ago. They show signs of fierce battle from
when the town was overrun, such as shattered
furniture and broken weapons, but have nothing of
value.
H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
PA RT 2
Encounter 4: Tears of Hope
The alcoves in the corridors to the north and
south contain memorials to important members of
Hulburg society from centuries ago.
At the northern end of the corridor is a
glowing marble door, a holy symbol of Lathander
carved onto its surface. Characters may make a
DC 12 Intelligence (Religion or Arcana) check to
determine that the glow wards away undead. The
door is unlocked and opens easily to the hand.
Beyond the door is a crypt, where a single
marble sarcophagus stands in dusty splendor.
It is adorned with the image of a noble knight,
the sunburst of Lathander displayed promi-
nently on her shield.
As you take this in, the dust swirls and
forms the spectral form of the knight, hover-
ing in front of her tomb. She addresses you
in a hollow voice: “I am Kylina, Knight of
Lathander! Who are you to disturb my rest?”
Kylina’s spirit has been disturbed by the presence
of the Teeth of Myrkul below. She is sympathetic to
the characters’ quest and wishes to aid them, but
she does not abide falsehoods. If the characters
are truthful, she provides them with the Tears of
Lathander, a special item that works as a vial of
holy water, but refills itself once used. She also
gives directions to the Vault of Sorrows, where
characters can find more items to aid them, as well
as the passphrase to enter: “Open to the Dawn of
Lathander’s Glory”.
15
Kylina knows the following:
• She was a champion of Lathander in Hulburg
around the year 1250 DR. She fought the orcs
and ogres of Thar that menaced the city until she
was finally killed in 1260 DR. Her remains were
entombed here by a sorrowing populace.
• The temple was built while she lived in
Hulburg.
• Hulburg fell to the invading orcs and ogres in
1275 DR, and the temple was looted. She felt the
desecration take places but could do nothing
about it.
• She felt the rise of a great evil below, and
her spirit rose to offer counsel and help to the
heroes who could save her city.
• The creature is known as Aesperus. He was an
evil necromancer who became a lich of sorts. He
was thrown down with the help of the Church of
Lathander, and he fears the artifacts the church
holds could destroy him.
• She recently petitioned Lathander for aid. His
reply was to bless a silver flask amongst Kylina’s
bones, filling it with the Tears of Lathander. The
Tears function as holy water, and for the next 24
hours the flask refills whenever it is used. Kylina
urges the players to take it.
H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
PA RT 2
 Encounter 5: Guardian of the Gates
Large iron-bound double oak doors lead to a big It is possible for an attentive party to lure the
circular vaulted room beyond. golem away and slip down the stairs while it
is distracted. The golem pursues or abandons
Ahead is a large chamber where many pas-
pursuit as noted above. Of course, the party could
sages converge. Standing in front of a flight of
rough-cut stairs leading down is a great statue just destroy the golem. Regardless of how the
of clay. It appears that a design was inscribed characters deal with the golem, they get xp for
on its chest, but that has been chipped away. bypassing it as if they defeated it in combat.
The image of a skull is written on its forehead.
The rest of the chamber shows signs of
a great battle having once taken place here. Adjusting the Encounter
Rusted weapons and armor litter the area, as The encounter has a medium challenge level,
do shattered bones. but the golem is stupid and its behavioral
pattern easily recognizable. Taking advantage
The chamber was the location of the final battle
of those to make the fight considerably
between the defenders of the temple and attackers
easier or even avoidable is the intent of the
that destroyed it.
encounter. Make sure the players are aware
Undead tunneled most of the corridors leading of this option if they lack magic weapons to
out of this room. Aesperus gave them orders to actually damage it, especially when dealing
tunnel to the Tomb of Kylina or down to the Vault with weaker parties.
of Sorrows, but the lingering blessing of Lathander
Here are recommendations for adjusting
caused them to turn away and tunnel randomly.
this combat encounter. These are not
The statue is a clay golem that once aided the cumulative.
priests of Lathander as a guardian and servant.
• Very weak party: The clay golem is
Aesperus has corrupted it. It attacks any creature
damaged, having only 80 hit points, and
that approaches, attacks it, or uses the stairs.
it lacks multiattack and haste. The saving
The golem is not intelligent, and does the throw against the hit point drain is 11.
following in battle:
• Weak party: The clay golem is
• Move toward the closest creature that damaged, having only 100 hit points and
damaged it last round and attack it (does not disadvantage on its attacks. The saving
need to be in line of sight). throw against the hit point drain is 13.
• If no creature damaged it, move toward the • Strong party: Add a clay golem.
closest creature in its line of sight and attack it
• Very strong party: The clay golems have
(random determination if two or more creatures
151 hit points each and a +2 to attack and
are equidistant).
damage rolls.
• If no creatures are in its line of sight, return
to the center of the chamber by the shortest
route and stand there. Do not activate again until
attacked or the chamber is entered.
• It does not move down the stairs.

16 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
PA RT 2
 Part 3.
Reign of the Dead
This section of the adventure takes place in the
lowest levels under the Temple of Lathander.
With the exception of the Vault of Sorrows, all
the tunnels were constructed by miners or (more
commonly) the undead.
The connection from the Temple to the Pit
of Bones was created so Aesperus could gain
access to the Vault of Sorrows, but his discovery
of the Teeth of Myrkul has meant that he has not
brought all his efforts to bear on opening the Vault.
The Vault itself is protected by the blessing of
Lathander, and requires Aesperus to be at his full
strength to penetrate it.
Generic Dungeon Features
The walls are made of packed earth and rock.
The ceiling is held up by supports made of bone,
structures of Aesperus’s dark magic. The floors are
of earth and muddy rock.
Light and Visibility. There is no light in this
level except as noted.
Smells and Sounds. The air smells foul, but is
breathable.
If Aesperus is slain, the bone supports break and
crumble. The adventurers are able to escape if they
hurry, but they are unable to spend much time
looting.
Necrotic Wave
In this level of the dungeon, the effects of the
necrotic waves are at their most pronounced.
When a wave occurs, each living creature
must make a DC 15 Constitution saving throw.
On a failure, the creature takes 17 (5d6)
necrotic damage and its movement speed is
reduced to 0 until the end of its next turn. On
a successful saving throw, the creature takes
half damage and may move normally.
• Very Weak Party: The wave only deals 7
(2d6) necrotic damage.
• Very Strong Party: adventuerers make
the saving throw at disadvantage.
17
Room 6: Vault of Sorrow
The Vault was the store of many treasures of the
Temple. During the attack that caused the fall
of the Temple, a few priests and acolytes were
trapped inside, and their spirits still linger.
The tunnel ahead must have collapsed long
ago, but a path has been cleared through it
by a number of skeletons who are standing
still, picks and shovels in hands, in the middle
of the tunnel. At the end of the tunnel is a
large stone door, the symbol of Lathander
carved prominently into its face.
Aesperus sent 10 skeletons to clear the tunnel,
which they have completed. The skeletons are
unresponsive and do not react to the characters,
not even to defend themselves if attacked.
The door is locked, but can be opened by
magic, a DC 15 Dexterity (thieves’ tools) check
or by using the passphrase “Open to the Dawn
of Lathander’s Glory.” The door is too solid to be
opened by brute strength. If the characters make
a loud noise, such as a knock spell, a group of 4
skeletons and 4 zombies arrive in 1d4 rounds
to investigate. If the party is inside the vault (and
the door closed) they remain for 1 minute before
leaving again. The fight is intended to give a feel of
the number of undead in the region, and defeating
them should not be a big challenge.
Read aloud or paraphrase once the characters
open the vault:
Behind the door is a room full of treasures,
weapons, suits of armor and more, most-
ly stacked neatly on shelves or arrayed on
stands, although a few lie scattered on the
floor.
As the room feels its first breath of new
air in decades, the dust swirls and forms into
the shape of three ghostly figures, attired in
the raiment of acolytes of Lathander, their
faces twisted in pain. One speaks, “Why do
you disturb our rest, mortals?”
H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
PA RT 3
 The three specters are confused and mad and The following items are in the Vault:
assume anything the characters say is intended • 10 vials of holy water
to deceive them. They were once acolytes of • Wand of magic missile
Lathander who hid in the Vault when the Temple
fell. Afterward they were unable to leave due to the • 1 silvered longsword
collapsed tunnel. They protect the contents of the • 1 silvered mace
vault as well as they can. The Tears of Lathander • 20 silver arrows
can release them from their eternal torment. • 3 art objects worth 100 gp each
If the characters roleplay well, or make a • 10 gold rings worth 10 gp each
successful DC 12 Charisma (Persuasion) check, the
• 3 silver holy symbols of Lathander worth 50 gp
specters can be convinced of the good nature of the
each.
adventuerers and allow them to take items from
the Vault. Clerics and paladins of Lathander gain
advantage on this check. If a character spends a
turn attempt, they succeed automatically.

18 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
PA RT 3
Room 7: Prison
While passing through the makeshift corridors, the
characters get to the prison.
Ahead is a makeshift prison - an alcove dug
into the wall with a number of wooden bars
preventing easy exit. Outside the bars stand
a number of descicated corpses armed with
ancient gear and intelligent red glowing eyes,
while inside you can hear the moans of fright-
ened people.
Four wights, who attack the adventurers if they
approach, hold the captured villagers here. A
character may use an action to attempt to remove
a bar with a DC 15 Strength (Athletics) check. Once
two bars are removed, the prisoners can leave.
Adjusting the Encounter
The encounter is intended to be a Medium
challenge. The cramped terrain can work in
favor of the characters. If things appear to
be too easy, you can have one or more of the
prisoners among the wights, or have the undead
boosted by the artifact, giving them advantage
on their saving throws and attack rolls.
Here are recommendations for adjusting
this combat encounter. These are not
cumulative.
• Very weak party: There are only two
wights.
• Weak party: There are only three wights.
• Strong party: The wights have 55 hit
points each and a +2 to attack and damage
rolls.
• Very strong party: The wights have
55 hit points each and a +2 to attack and
damage rolls. The are resistant to magic
and have advantage on any saving throw
against spells and other magical effects.
The number of prisoners depends on how long
the players have taken to get here. For every 30
minutes since the adventure began (not counting
the first sacrifice during Encounter 1), Aesperus
has taken one prisoner to the altar and sacrificed
him or her. At the beginning of the adventure, all
the prisoners were present. They are listed in the
order of their sacrifices.
19
1. Jhessail Carver –female human, wife of Kon
Carver, distressed, pessimistic
2. Kon Carver – male human miner, stubborn
3. Sylzana – female elf miner, aloof, calm
4. Rulgel Ironcoat – male dwarf miner, gruff, greedy
5. Gidrare Grimhorn – female dwarf mine overseer;
considerate, deceptive
6. Victakain – male half-orc miner, compassionate,
cowardly.
7. Marella – female human cook, gruff, competent
8. Janonna – female gnome gemsmith; cowardly,
slow-witted
9. Aluvre – female half-elf scout; wise, silent
10. Walhand – male halfling messenger; flighty,
talkative
11. Jannys – female human weaver; cowardly, flirty
12. Leoril – male human settler; cowardly,
impulsive
13. Petaver – male human baker; brave, witty
The remaining prisoners (if any) can tell the
adventurers that a pair of undead have come by
every thirty minutes and escorted one of them
away. A short time later they’ve felt something
happen; they’ve felt weak, as if their life force was
draining away. In fact, the cell is partially warded
by Aesperus, so that the prisoners are protected
from the full effects of the ritual. This can be
determined by detect magic or similar spells.
Most of the prisoners, especially the cowardly
ones, want the adventurers to escort them to the
surface immediately. To accomplish this and return
takes approximately 30 minutes. Persuading
the prisoners to remain or to attempt their own
escape requires the character to roleplay well or
make a successful DC 15 Charisma (Persuasion or
Intimidation) check.
The prisoners can point the characters in the
direction of the ritual chamber.
H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
PA RT 3
 Encounter 8: The Altar of Despair
Assuming the characters proceed down the
corridor and look around the corner, read or
paraphrase the following:
A terrible sight greets your eyes: a great
underground chamber, with human bones
protruding from the earth in the floor, walls
and ceiling.
In the center of the chamber, a spec-
tral man clad in dark, opulent robes stands
in front of a makeshift altar constructed from
dark stones piled together. A number of corps-
es lie nearby, spectral shapes floating above
them. On the altar, a black skull sits, gem-
stones glistening in its eyes. Its teeth are black,
although you can just make out that some are
discoloured.
The spectral figure turns to you and
speaks, “Welcome to my ascension. I am Aes-
perus, and you will serve me well - as the living
dead!”
Depending on when the characters arrive
here, they may find one of the prisoners being
prepared for sacrifice – being held by two wights.
Otherwise, the wights stand in the near corners of
the room, waiting until their master needs them.
Their master, Aesperus, is using the Teeth of
Myrkul to draw the life forces from the sacrifices
to infuse it with power. The spirits of the sacrifices
are twisted to become specters in the process;
although there has been one created for each
sacrifice since the start of the adventure, most have
gone to do Aesperus’s bidding. Three specters
remain and guard the relic.
The skull is made of a polished black stone,
but contains four human teeth, the Teeth of Myrkul,
the remnant of a one-time avatar of the dread
god. The skull protects all undead within 100
feet of it, granting them resistance to all damage
and advantage on all saving throws. This benefit
ends if the skull is destroyed. On initiative 20, it
sends out a wave of necrotic energy that causes
all living creatures within 30 feet of it to make a
DC 13 Constitution saving throw; on a failed save,
the creature takes 3 (1d6) necrotic damage and is
pushed back 10 feet. The creature is not affected
with a successful save.
20
The skull has AC 18 and 100 hit points; it
ignores the first 10 points of damage from any
attack that does not deal radiant damage. Holy
water affects it as if it were undead. An adjacent
character can pour the Tears of Lathander over it as
an action: this immediately destroys the Teeth.
As a side effect of the ritual, Aesperus is
infused with power and has 10 additional
temporary hit points for every sacrifice that has
been made.
At this point, Aesperus has been utterly
frustrated by how his plans have been undone by
the characters. He attacks them without mercy.
His servants attack as well, but with an eye toward
protecting the Teeth of Myrkul from attacks.
The areas marked on the map with T symbols
are traps – a character entering that area will find
skeletal hands attempting to grasp their ankles. For
every five feet an adventurer travels in the area,
that character must make a DC 12 Dexterity saving
throw or be grappled (Escape DC 12).
Adjusting the Encounter
The encounter is inteded to be a Hard, if not
deadly, encounter and should be challenging,
especially if the characters ignore the Teeth of
Myrkul. Having Aesperus or some of the other
undead ressurect as long as the skull is in one
piece is certainly an option if the characters
appear to have an easy time.
Here are recommendations for adjusting
this combat encounter. These are not
cumulative.
• Very weak party: The skull does not
ignore the first 10 damage per round and it
has only 60 hit points. There are no wights.
• Weak party: The skull does not ignore
the first 10 damage per round and it has
only 80 hit points. There are no specters.
• Strong party: The skull has 120 hit
points. Add a wight.
• Very strong party: The skull has 120 hit
points and deals 10 (3d6) necrotic damage
to the living within 10 feet and 3 (1d6)
necrotic damage from 10 to 30 feet. Add
two wights.
H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
PA RT 3
Epilogue
With the destruction of Aesperus and the skull, the
magic upholding the vault collapses.
With one last angry screech, Aesperus dissa-
pears in a wave of dark cold energy. Bones
move and creak, and the roof above you
begins to crack. Dirt and stones rain down.
With the undead’s magic gone, the vault is on
the verge of collapsing. You cannot stay lest
you be buried.
The destruction of the underground tunnels only
affects those reinforced by the bone supports, the
shaded areas on the map. The temple tunnels are
unaffected. The adventurers can escape easily, even
if they have to release the prisoners first, although
you may make the escape seem more difficult than
it is, calling for Strength (Athletics) and Dexterity
(Acrobatic) checks to navigate the crumbling
tunnels, and the occasional Dexterity saving throw.
Once outside, it is a short uneventful trip back
to Tent City. Once back in town, they get a hero’s
welcome. Everyone hopes that with Aesperus dead,
things will quiet down. Lord Eorl Hulmaster gives
the adventurers a small monetary reward, 500 gp
total, as a token of his gratitude, including a silver
signet ring with the city’s sigil on it. The ring is
worth 25 gp and it can be sold. If kept, showing
it to citizens of Hulburg in future adventures
generates at least some respect. The exact effects
depend on the DM.
Note that the silver flask with the Tears of
Lathander is only magical during the adventure.
The champion does not need the flask back. The
Order of the Gauntlet is interested in it, and are
willing to pay 100 gp for it.
Failure
While unlikely, it is always possible the characters
fail to stop Aesperus. In this case, the adventurers
have been forced to flee the ruins, assuming they
even survived, and Aesperus creates an army of the
dead. Obviously, the characters do not get a hero’s
welcome nor do they get any monetary reward
from Lord Hulmaster. Saving the town is up to
other heroes.

21 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
PA RT 3
 Rewards Consumable magic items should be divided
up however the group sees fit. If more than one
Make sure note their rewards on their adventure
character is interested in a specific consumable
log sheets. Give your name and DCI number (if
magic item, the DM can determine who gets it
applicable) so players can record who ran the
randomly should the group be unable to decide.
session.
Permanent magic items are divided according
Experience to a system. See the sidebar if the adventure
Total up all combat experience earned for awards permanent magic items.
defeated foes, and divide by the number of
characters present in the combat. For non-combat
experience, the rewards are listed per character. Treasure Awards
Give all characters in the party non-combat Item Name GP Value
experience awards unless otherwise noted.
Art object (3 total) 100 gp per
Combat Awards Gold ring (10 total) 10 gp each
Name of Foe XP per Foe Hulburg signet ring* x #PCs 25 gp each
Reward Lord Hulmaster 500 gp
Aesperus 1,800
Silver flask (remnant of Tears
Clay golem 5,000
of Lathander) 100 gp
Damaged clay golem 2,500
Silver Holy Symbols (3 total) 50 gp each
Flameskull 1,100
Silvered Longsword 115 gp
Gargoyle 450
Silvered Mace 105 gp
Gargoyle, Advanced 700
Silvered Arrows (per 10) 100 gp
Skeleton 50
Spectre 200 * Characters getting the signet ring can either sell it
Wight 700 for gold or keep it. They should note it down on the
Zombie 50 log sheet if they decide to keep it.

Non-Combat Awards
Task or accomplishment XP per Char. Wand of Magic Missiles
Per rescued NPC 50 Wand, uncommon
Disabling the Teeth of Myrkul 1,000 A description of this item is in the Dungeon
The minimum total award for each Master’s Guide.
character participating in this adventure is 4,500
experience points.
Vial of Holy Water
The maximum total award for each character
Potion, common
participating in this adventure is 6,000 experience
points. A description of this item is in the Player’s
Handbook.
Treasure
The characters receive the following treasure,
divided up amongst the party. Characters should
attempt to divide treasure evenly whenever
possible. Gold piece values listed for sellable
gear are calculated at their selling price, not their
purchase price.

22 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
R E WA R D S
 Permanent Magic Item Distribution
D&D Adventurers League has a system
in place to determine who is awarded
permanent magic items at the end of a
session. Each character’s log sheet contains a
column to record permanent magic items for
ease of reference.
• If the players at the table agree on one
character taking possession of a permanent
magic item, that character gets the item.
• In the event that one or more characters
indicate an interest in possessing a
permanent magic item, the character that
possesses the fewest permanent magic
items gets the item. If there is a tie in the
total number of permanent magic items
owned by contesting characters, the item’s
owner is determined randomly by the DM.

Renown
All faction members earn one renown point for
participating in this adventure.
Order of the Gauntlet members earn one renown
point if they return the Tears of Lathander to the
order.

Downtime
Each character receives 10 downtime days at the
conclusion of this adventure.

DM Rewards
You receive 875 XP, 400 gp, and 10 downtime
days for running this session.

23 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
R E WA R D S
 Appendix: NPC / Monster Statistics
Aesperus (mage/wraith)
Medium undead, neutral evil
Armor Class 13 (16 with mage armor)
Hit Points 67 (9d8 + 27)
Speed 0 ft., fly 60 ft. (hover)
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
6 (−2) 16 (+3) 16 (+3) 17 (+3) 14 (+2) 15 (+2)
Saving Throws Int +6, Wis +5
Skills Arcana +6, History +6
Damage Resistances acid, cold, fire, lightning,
thunder; bludgeoning, piercing, and slashing from
nonmagical attacks that aren’t silvered
Damage Immunities necrotic, poison
Condition Immunities charmed, exhaustion,
grappled, paralyzed, petrified, poisoned, prone,
restrained
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 12
Languages Common, Elven, Ogre, Orc.
Challenge 6 (1,800 XP)
Incorporeal Movement. Aesperus can move
through other creatures and objects as if they were
difficult terrain. He takes 5 (1d10) force damage if Create Specter. Aesperus targets a humanoid
he ends its turn inside an object.
Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, Aesperus
has disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on
Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on sight.
24
Spellcasting. Aesperus is a 9th-level spellcaster.
His spellcasting ability is Intelligence (spell save
DC 14, +6 to hit with spell attacks). Aesperus has
the following wizard spells prepared:
Cantrips (at will): fire bolt, light, mage hand,
prestidigitation
1st level (4 slots): detect magic, mage armor,
magic missile, shield
2nd level (3 slots): misty step, suggestion
3rd level (3 slots): counterspell, fireball, fly
4th level (3 slots): greater invisibility, ice storm
5th level (1 slot): cone of cold
Actions
Life Drain. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5
ft., one creature. Hit: 21 (4d8 + 3) necrotic damage.
The target must succeed on a DC 14 Constitution
saving throw or its hit point maximum is reduced
by an amount equal to the damage taken. This
reduction lasts until the target finishes a long rest.
The target dies if this effect reduces its hit point
maximum to 0.
within 10 feet of it that has been dead for no longer
than 1 minute and died violently. The target’s spirit
rises as a specter in the space of its corpse or in the
nearest unoccupied space. The specter is under the
wraith’s control. Aesperus can have no more than
seven specters under its control at one time.
H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
APPENDIX
Clay Golem
Large construct, unaligned
Armor Class 14 (natural armor)
Hit Points 133 (14d10 + 56)
Speed 20 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
20 (+5) 9 (-1) 18 (+4) 3 (-4) 8 (-1) 1 (-5)
Damage Immunities acid, poison, psychic;
bludgeoning, piercing and slashing from nonmagical
attacks that aren’t adamantine
Condition Immunities charmed, exhaustion,
frightened, paralyzed, petrified, poisoned
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 9
Languages understands the languages of its creator
but can’t speak
Challenge 9 (5,000 XP)
Acid Absorption. Whenever the golem is subjected to
acid damage, it takes no damage and instead regains a
number of hit points equal to the acid damage dealt.
Berserk. Whenever the golem starts its turn with 60
hit points or fewer, roll a d6. On a 6, the golem goes
berserk. On each of its turns while berserk, the golem
attacks the nearest creature it can see. If no creature is
near enough to move to and attack, the golem attacks
an object, with preference for an object smaller than
itself. Once the golem goes berserk, it continues to do
so until it is destroyed or regains all its hit points.
Immutable Form. The golem is immune to any spell
or effect that would alter its form.
Magic Resistance. The golem has advantage on saving
throws against spells and other magical effects.
Magic Weapons. The golem’s weapon attacks are
magical.
Actions
Multiattack. The golem makes two slam attacks.
Slam. Melee Weapon Attack: +8 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 16 (2d10 + 5) bludgeoning damage.
If the target is a creature, it must succeed on a DC
15 Constitution saving throw or have its hit point
maximum reduced by an amount equal to the
damage taken. The target dies if this attack reduces
its hit point maximum to 0. The reduction lasts until
removed by the greater restoration spell or other
magic.
Haste (Recharge 5-6). Until the end of its next turn,
the golem magically gains a +2 bonus to its AC, has
advantage on Dexterity saving throws, and can use its
slam attack as a bonus action.
25
Flameskull
Tiny undead, neutral evil
Armor Class 13
Hit Points 40 (9d4 + 18)
Speed 0 ft., fly 40 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
1 (-5) 17 (+3) 14 (+2) 16 (+3) 10 (+0) 11 (+0)
Skills Arcana +5, Perception +2
Damage Resistances lightning, necrotic, piercing
Damage Immunities cold, fire, poison
Condition Immunities charmed, frightened,
paralyzed, poisoned
Senses dakrvision 60 ft., passive Perception 12
Languages Common
Challenge 4 (1,100 XP)
Illunimination. The flameskull sheds either dim
light in a 15-foot radius, or bright light in a 15-
foot radius and dim light for an additional 15 feet.
It can switch between the options as an action.
Magic Resistance. The flameskull has advantage
on saving throws against spells and other magical
effects.
Rejuvenation. If the flameskull is destroyed, it
regains all its hit points in 1 hour unless holy
water is sprinkeled on its remains or a dispel
magic or remove curse spell is cast on them.
Spellcasting. The flameskull is a 5th-level
spellcaster. Its spellcasting ability is Intelligence
(spell save DC 13, +5 to hit with spell attacks). It
requires no somatic or material components to
cast its spells. The flameskull has the following
wizard spells prepared:
Cantrip (at will): mage hand
1st level (3 slots): magic missile, shield
2nd level (2 slots): blur, flaming sphere
3rd level (1 slot): fireball
Actions
Multiattack. The flameskull uses Fire Ray twice.
Fire Ray. Ranged Spell Attack: +5 to hit, range 30
ft., one target. Hit: 10 (3d6) fire damage.
H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
APPENDIX
 Gargoyle
Medium elemental, chaotic evil
Actions
Armor Class 15 (natural armor)
Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach
Hit Points 52 (7d8 + 21) 5 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing damage.
Speed 30 ft., fly 60 ft. Shortbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, range
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA 80/320 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing
15 (+2) 11 (+0) 16 (+3) 6 (−2) 11 (+0) 7 (−2) damage.
Damage Resistances bludgeoning, piercing, and Specter
slashing from nonmagical attacks that aren’t Medium undead, chaotic evil
adamantine
Armor Class 12
Damage Immunities poison
Hit Points 22 (5d8)
Condition Immunities exhaustion, petrified,
poisoned Speed 0 ft., fly 50 ft. (hover)
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 10 STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
1 (−5) 14 (+2) 11 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 11 (+0)
Languages Terran
Challenge 2 (450 XP) Damage Resistances acid, cold, fire, lightning,
thunder; bludgeoning, piercing, and slashing from
False Appearance. While the gargoyle remains
nonmagical attacks
motionless, it is indistinguishable from an
inanimate statue. Damage Immunities necrotic, poison
Condition Immunities charmed, exhaustion,
Actions grappled, paralyzed, petrified, poisoned, prone,
Multiattack. The gargoyle makes two attacks: one restrained, unconscious
with its bite and one with its claws. Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 10
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft., Languages understands all languages it knew in
one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing damage. life but can’t speak
Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft., Challenge 1 (200 XP)
one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) slashing damage.
Incorporeal Movement. The specter can move
Skeleton through other creatures and objects as if they were
Medium undead, lawful evil difficult terrain. It takes 5 (1d10) force damage if it
Armor Class 13 (armor scraps) ends its turn inside an object.
Hit Points 13 (2d8 + 4) Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the specter
has disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on
Speed 30 ft.
Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on sight.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
10 (+0) 14 (+2) 15 (+2) 6 (−2) 8 (−1) 5 (−3) Actions
Damage Vulnerabilities bludgeoning Life Drain. Melee Spell Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one creature. Hit: 10 (3d6) necrotic damage. The
Damage Immunities poison target must succeed on a DC 10 Constitution saving
Condition Immunities exhaustion, poisoned throw or its hit point maximum is reduced by an
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 9 amount equal to the damage taken. This reduction
Languages understands all languages it knew in lasts until the creature finishes a long rest. The
life but can’t speak target dies if this effect reduces its hit point
maximum to 0.
Challenge 1/4 (50 XP)

26 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
APPENDIX
Wight Zombie
Medium undead, neutral evil Medium undead, neutral evil
Armor Class 14 (studded leather) Armor Class 8
Hit Points 45 (6d8 + 18) Hit Points 22 (3d8 + 9)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 20 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
15 (+2) 14 (+2) 16 (+3) 10 (+0) 13 (+1) 15 (+2) 13 (+1) 6 (−2) 16 (+3) 3 (−4) 6 (−2) 5 (−3)

Skills Perception +3, Stealth +4 Saving Throws Wis +0

Damage Resistances necrotic; bludgeoning,
piercing, and slashing from nonmagical attacks
that aren’t silvered
Damage Immunities poison
Condition Immunities exhaustion, poisoned
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 13
Languages the languages it knew in life
Challenge 3 (700 XP)
Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the wight
has disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on
Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on sight.
Damage Immunities poison
Condition Immunities poisoned
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 8
Languages understands the languages it knew in
life but can’t speak
Challenge 1/4 (50 XP)
Undead Fortitude. If damage reduces the zombie
to 0 hit points, it must make a Constitution saving
throw with a DC of 5 + the damage taken, unless
the damage is radiant or from a critical hit. On a
success, the zombie drops to 1 hit point instead.

Actions Actions
Multiattack. The wight makes two longsword Slam. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
attacks or two longbow attacks. It can use its Life one target. Hit: 4 (1d6 + 1) bludgeoning damage.
Drain in place of one longsword attack.
Life Drain. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5
ft., one creature. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) necrotic damage.
The target must succeed on a DC 13 Constitution
saving throw or its hit point maximum is reduced
by an amount equal to the damage taken. This
reduction lasts until the target finishes a long rest.
The target dies if this effect reduces its hit point
maximum to 0.
A humanoid slain by this attack rises 24 hours
later as a zombie under the wight’s control, unless
the humanoid is restored to life or its body is
destroyed. The wight can have no more than twelve
zombies under its control at one time.
Longsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach
5 ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d8 + 2) slashing damage,
or 7 (1d10 + 2) slashing damage if used with two
hands.
Longbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, range
150/600 ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d8 + 2) piercing
damage.

27 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
APPENDIX
 Appendix II: Hulburg

28 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
APPENDIX
Upper Temple

29 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
APPENDIX
 Temple Catacombs

30 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
APPENDIX
Lower Vaults

The rough looking corridors have been dug by the undead

and look irregular and on the verge of collapse.

31 H U L B 1 - 3 / H U L B U RG RI S IN G :
APPENDIX
 Sepulture
Greg Marks
Adventure Designer
Adventure Code: PHLAN 1-1

Spirits in Phlan are high in the wake of Vorgansharax’s defeat. Reconstruction

plans are finally in motion, yet one threat looms. The Doomguide of Kelemvor
has descended into the shadows of the necropolis and gathers dark forces
around him. There is little he won’t anticipate. One should have their affairs
in order before accepting this mission

A four-hour adventure for 11th-16th level characters

Producer: Baldman Games

Phlan Administrator: Robert Alaniz
Editing and Layout: Encoded Designs
Cartography: Andrew Smith
Organized Play: Chris Lindsay
D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall,
Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks, Alan Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster
Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League, all other Wizards of the Coast product names, and their respective
logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive likenesses
are property of Wizards of the Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America.
Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the express written
permission of Wizards of the Coast.
©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31,
2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK.
 Introduction
Sepulture is the first installment of the
Baldman Games Alliances trilogy

This adventure is designed for three to seven 10th-16th level characters, and is
optimized for five 11th-level characters. The adventure is set in the Moonsea region of
the Forgotten Realms, in and around the city of Phlan.

The D&D Adventurers League Preparing the Adventure

This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of
the D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure,
players track their characters’ experience, treasure,
and other rewards, and can take those characters
through other adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a
store event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a
DCI number. This number is your official Wizards of
the Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have
a number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to
use to create and advance their characters. Players
can continue to play their characters after the
storyline season has finished, possibly participating
in a second or third storyline with those same
characters. A character’s level is the only limitation
for adventure play. A player cannot use a character
of a level higher or lower than the level range of a
D&D Adventurers League adventure.
For more information on playing, running
games as a Dungeon Master, and organizing games
for the D&D Adventurers League, please visit the
D&D Adventurers League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
• Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
• Read through the adventure, taking notes
of anything you’d like to highlight or remind
yourself while running the adventure, such as a
way you’d like to portray an NPC or a tactic you’d
like to use in a combat.
• Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
• Gather together any resources you’d like to
use to aid you in running this adventure—such
as notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and
battlemaps.
• If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as noted
throughout the adventure.
Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
• Character name and level
• Character race and class
• Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most
common passive ability check
• Anything notable as specified by the adventure

P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
2 INTRODUCTION
 (such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, etc.)
Players that have characters outside the
adventure’s level range cannot participate in
the adventure with those characters. Players
with ineligible characters can make a new 1st-level
character or use a pregenerated character. Players
can play an adventure they previously played or
ran as a Dungeon Master, but not with the same
character.
Ensure that each player has an official
adventure logsheet for his or her character (if not,
get one from the organizer). The player fills out
the adventure name, session number, date, and
your name and DCI number. In addition, the player
also fills in the starting values for experience, gold,
downtime, renown, and number of permanent
magic items. He or she fill in the other values and
write notes at the conclusion of the session. Each
player is responsible for maintaining an accurate
logsheet.
If you have time, you can do a quick scan of
a player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing
looks out of order. If you see magic items of very
high rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you
can ask players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict
item use or ask them to use a standard ability
score array. Point players to the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and
it’s the beginning of an adventure or episode,
they can declare their activity and spend the days
now. Alternatively, they can do so at the end of
the adventure or episode. Players should select
their characters’ spells and other daily options
prior to the start of the adventure, unless the
adventure specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread
the adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, you may see sidebars
to help make adjustments for smaller/larger
groups, and characters of higher/lower levels than
the optimized group. Most of the time, this is used
3 INTRODUCTION
for combat encounters.
You may adjust the adventure beyond the
guidelines given. For example, if you’re playing
with a group of inexperienced players, you might
want to make the adventure a little easier; for
very experienced players, you may want to make
it a little harder. Therefore, five categories of
party strength have been created for you to use
as a guide. Feel free to use a different adjustment
during the adventure if the recommended party
strength feels off for the group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of
five 11th-level characters. To figure out whether
you need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
• Add up the total levels of all the characters
• Divide the total by the number of characters
• Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round
fractions of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table:
Determining Party Strength
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very Weak
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very Strong
Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment
of the game for the players. You help guide the
narrative and bring the words on these pages
to life. The outcome of a fun game session often
creates stories that live well beyond the play at the
table. Always follow this golden rule when you DM
for a group:
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
 Make decisions and adjudications that
enhance the fun of the adventure when
possible.
To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
• You are empowered to make adjustments to
the adventure and make decisions about how the
group interacts with the world of this adventure.
Doing so is especially important and applicable
outside of combat, but feel free to adjust the
adventure for groups that are having too easy or
too hard of a time.
• Don’t make the adventure too easy or too
difficult for a group. Never being challenged
makes for a boring game and being
overwhelmed makes for a frustrating one.
Gauge the experience of the players (not the
characters) with the game, try to feel out (or
ask) what they like in a game, and attempt to
give each of them the experience they’re after
when they play D&D. Give everyone a chance to
shine.
• Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game
session moving along appropriately. Watch for
stalling, since play loses momentum when this
happens. At the same time, make sure that the
players don’t finish too early; provide them with
a full play experience. Try to be aware of running
long or short. Adjust the pacing accordingly
• Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free
to modify the text as you see fit, especially when
dialogue is present.
• Give the players appropriate hints so they can
make informed choices about how to proceed.
Players should be given clues and hints when
appropriate so they can tackle puzzles, combat,
and interactions without getting frustrated over
lack of information. Doing so helps to encourage
immersion in the adventure and gives players
“little victories” for figuring out good choices
from clues.
In short, being the DM isn’t about following
the adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about
facilitating a fun, challenging game environment for
the players. The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has more
information on the art of running a D&D game.
4 INTRODUCTION
Downtime and Lifestyle
At the beginning of each play session, players must
declare whether or not they are spending any days
of downtime. The player records the downtime
spent on the adventure logsheet. The following
options are available to players during downtime
(see the D&D basic rules or the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for more information):
• Catching up
• Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
commit to crafting a single item)
• Practicing a profession
• Recuperating
• Spellcasting services
• Training
Other downtime options might be available during
adventures or unlocked through play, including
faction-specific activities.
In addition, whenever a character spends
downtime days, that character also spends the
requisite expense for his or her lifestyle. Costs
are per day, so a character that spends ten days
of downtime also spends ten days of expenses
maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some downtime
activities help with lifestyle expenses or add
lifestyle expenses.
Spellcasting Services
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can
provide some spellcasting services. Characters
need to be able to travel to the settlement to obtain
these services.
Spell services generally available include
healing and recovery spells, as well as information-
gathering spells. Other spell services might be
available as specified in the adventure. The number
of spells available to be cast as a service is limited
to a maximum of three per day total, unless
otherwise noted.
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
 Spellcasting Services
Spell Cost
Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
Identify 20 gp
Lesser restoration 40 gp
Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
Remove curse 90 gp
Speak with dead 90 gp
Divination 210 gp
Greater restoration 450 gp
Raise dead 1,250 gp
Acolyte Background
A character possessing the acolyte
background requesting spellcasting
services at a temple of his or her faith
may request one spell per day from
the Spellcasting Services table for free.
The only cost paid for the spell is the
base price for the consumed material
component, if any.
Disease, Death, and Recovery
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might
not have the same characters return from session
to session, here are the rules when bad things
happen to characters.
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating Effects
A character still affected by diseases, poisons,
and other similar effects at the conclusion of an
adventure can spend downtime days recuperating
until such time as he or she resolves the effect to
its conclusion (see the recuperating activity in the
D&D Basic Rules).
If a character doesn’t resolve the effect
between sessions, that character begins the next
session still affected by the debilitating effect.
Death
A character who is killed during the course of
the adventure has a few options at the end of the
session (or whenever arriving back in civilization)
5 INTRODUCTION
if no one in the adventuring party has immediate
access to a raise dead or revivify spell, or similar
magic. A character subject to a raise dead spell is
affected negatively until all long rests have been
completed during an adventure. Alternatively, each
downtime day spent after raise dead reduces the
penalty to attack rolls, saving throws, and ability
checks by 1, in addition to any other benefits the
downtime activity might provide.
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any
of the other options, the player creates a new
character. The new character does not have any
items or rewards possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing
any vital organs and is mostly whole) and the
player would like the character to be returned to
life, the party can take the body back to civilization
and use the dead character’s funds to pay for a
raise dead spell. A raise dead spell cast in this
manner costs the character 1,250 gp.
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As
above, except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for
the raise dead spell is paid for by the party at the
end of the session. Other characters are under no
obligation to spend their funds to bring back a
dead party member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to
4 and a member of a faction, the dead character’s
body can be returned to civilization and a patron
from the faction ensures that he or she receives a
raise dead spell. However, any character invoking
this charity forfeits all experience and rewards
from that session (both those earned prior to and
after death during that session) and cannot replay
that episode or adventure with that character
again. Once a character reaches 5th level, this
option is no longer available.
Adventure Background
“The librarian was explaining the benefits of the
Dewey decimal system to her junior—benefits that
extended to every area of life. It was orderly, like
the universe. It had logic. It was dependable. Using
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
 it allowed a kind of moral uplift, as one’s own chaos
was also brought under control. ‘Whenever I am
troubled,’ said the librarian, ‘I think about the Dewey
decimal system.’ ‘Then what happens?’ asked the
junior, rather overawed. ‘Then I understand that
trouble is just something that has been filed in the
wrong place. That is what Jung was explaining of
course—as the chaos of our unconscious contents
strive to find their rightful place in the index of
consciousness.”
—Jeanette Winterson, Why Be Happy
When You Could Be Normal
When Doomguide Yorvir Glandon, high priest of
Kelemvor, first rose from the dead, he begged for
anyone to kill him and end his miserable state,
which he spent his lifetime trying to prevent in
others. But the closely lurking mists of Barovia
twisted his mind, and eventually he succumbed
to despair and hate. His fall completed, he
fully embraced his vampirism and hatched a
complicated plot to protect the town of Phlan,
in a perverse way that mortal men may not fully
comprehend.
Yorvir detected a corruption of mind and body
spreading through the populace but could not
determine the source. He still wishes to protect his
town and the only way he can think of to save it is
to convert the entire town to undeath so that they
remain pure and unchanging forever.
The former Doomguide’s power is well beyond
many vampires, and he now commands a sizable
force of undead, a force which he is using to scour
the tunnels and catacombs beneath Valhingen
Graveyard. Somewhere within lies the Shield of
Miltiades, a relic of his service to Tyr as both a
celebrated paladin and death knight. Yorvir seeks
to use the shield as a focus for a ritual to encase
the town in an endless night where all succumb
to the embrace of undeath. Unfortunately for him,
Yorvir was seen by members of the Silent Shroud
entering the tomb, and so the Kelemvorites seek
adventurers to assist in Yorvir’s interment, not
knowing his greater plan.
At the same time, the town of Phlan is experiencing
an event unprecedented in its history: an election.
6 INTRODUCTION
Jhessail Greycastle, the highest ranking member
of the Black Fists and the current de facto ruler of
Phlan has called for a popular democratic election,
declaring herself a candidate for First Minister.
Also declaring their candidacies are Barrett Sokol
of House Sokol, who seeks to be named High
Councilor and bring back the noble Council of Ten;
Colvin Doverson, who claims a tenuous lineage
to the original Cinnabar Throne and the Lord
Protector; and Graben Samulkin, a priest of Bane
who seeks to be named Ruinlord and make Phlan a
theocracy once again.
Further complicating things, citizens are
developing strange, uncontrollable powers that
are causing chaos in the streets. At the same time,
the defenses of the town have been devastated
following the defeat of the Maimed Virulence.
The town’s walls are rubble, and few capable
defenders remain.
Adventure Overview
“The librarian was explaining the benefits of the
Dewey decimal system to her junior—benefits
that extended to every area of life. It was orderly,
like the universe. It had logic. It was dependable.
Using it allowed a kind of moral uplift, as one’s
own chaos was also brought under control.
‘Whenever I am troubled,’ said the librarian, ‘I
think about the Dewey decimal system.’ ‘Then
what happens?’ asked the junior, rather overawed.
‘Then I understand that trouble is just something
that has been filed in the wrong place. That is what
Jung was explaining of course—as the chaos of our
unconscious contents strive to find their rightful
place in the index of consciousness.”
—Jeanette Winterson, Why Be Happy When You
Could Be Normal
When Doomguide Yorvir Glandon, high priest of
Kelemvor, first rose from the dead, he begged for
anyone to kill him and end his miserable state,
which he spent his lifetime trying to prevent in
others. But the closely lurking mists of Barovia
twisted his mind, and eventually he succumbed
to despair and hate. His fall completed, he
fully embraced his vampirism and hatched a
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
complicated plot to protect the town of Phlan,
in a perverse way that mortal men may not fully
comprehend.
Yorvir detected a corruption of mind and body
spreading through the populace but could not
determine the source. He still wishes to protect his
town and the only way he can think of to save it is
to convert the entire town to undeath so that they
remain pure and unchanging forever.
The former Doomguide’s power is well beyond
many vampires, and he now commands a sizable
force of undead, a force which he is using to scour
the tunnels and catacombs beneath Valhingen
Graveyard. Somewhere within lies the Shield of
Miltiades, a relic of his service to Tyr as both a
celebrated paladin and death knight. Yorvir seeks
to use the shield as a focus for a ritual to encase
the town in an endless night where all succumb
to the embrace of undeath. Unfortunately for him,
Yorvir was seen by members of the Silent Shroud
entering the tomb, and so the Kelemvorites seek
adventurers to assist in Yorvir’s interment, not
knowing his greater plan.
At the same time, the town of Phlan is experiencing
an event unprecedented in its history: an election.
Jhessail Greycastle, the highest ranking member
of the Black Fists and the current de facto ruler of
Phlan has called for a popular democratic election,
declaring herself a candidate for First Minister.
Also declaring their candidacies are Barrett Sokol
of House Sokol, who seeks to be named High
Councilor and bring back the noble Council of Ten;
Colvin Doverson, who claims a tenuous lineage
to the original Cinnabar Throne and the Lord
Protector; and Graben Samulkin, a priest of Bane
who seeks to be named Ruinlord and make Phlan a
theocracy once again.
Further complicating things, citizens are
developing strange, uncontrollable powers that
are causing chaos in the streets. At the same time,
the defenses of the town have been devastated
following the defeat of the Maimed Virulence. The
town’s walls are rubble, and few capable defenders
remain.
7 INTRODUCTION
Adventure Hooks
For each character, choose an appropriate reason
why the characters are meeting with the Lord Sage
of Phlan.
Follower of the Lord of the Dead. Followers of
Kelemvor, particularly clerics or paladins of that
deity, have been asked by their church to aid in the
expedition. These characters know the clerics of
Kelemvor CANNOT become undead. The blessing
of their god prevents it. So determining how
Yorvir became a vampire is very important to their
superiors. Other clerics with domains pertaining to
life and death are also interested.
Heroes of Phlan. Characters that have played a
number of adventures in Phlan, particularly ones
that featured the Lord Sage such as DDEX 1-5 The
Courting of Fire, DDEX 1-6 The Scroll Thief, or DDEX
1-14 Escape from Phlan, are known to the Lord
Sage as someone that has aided him in the past. He
personally reaches out to the characters to aid him
again.
Members of the Emerald Enclave: The Lord Sage
is playing a dangerous political game, attempting
to help one of our allies in taking control of Phlan’s
government. Colvin Doverson has always been
good to us, and now he needs our aid. Hurry to the
Lord Sage and aid him in finding proof of Colvin
Doverson’s claim to the Cinnabar Throne.
Mercenary. The Lord Sage is paying and the
character can always use more coin.
Vampire of the Mists
Despite the Quivering Forest’s return from Barovia,
the mists that twisted and corrupted Yorvir cling
to him and affect the way sunlight and divination
magic affect him. He also cannot be affected by
turn undead.
Sunlight: Surrounded by mist muting the effects
of light, Yorvir can stand in naturally or magically
produced sunlight with no ill effect. This negates
his sunlight hypersensitivity trait.
(continued)
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
 Divination Magic: Any magic that attempts to locate Yorvir, read his mind, or divine anything about him
or the object or location of his search always fails. Answers are still received, but they do not make sense.
Here are some examples; feel free to make up your own:
• Yorvir is in Waterdeep getting a sweet muffin that he will use to resurrect the dead god Sune.
• Yorvir seeks to rescue puppies from a shelter in Mulmaster and bring them back to orphans of
Bloodstone Village.
• There is no Yorvir. He is a made up story told to children to encourage them to become reporters when
they grow old and are bored.
• Yorvir is in the room with you, eating a scone.

P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
8 INTRODUCTION
 Part 1.
025
“Perhaps no place in any community is so
totally democratic as the town library. The only
requirement is interest.”
—Lady Bird Johnson
Front Desk
The adventure begins with the characters having
arrived at Mantor’s Library in the town of Phlan.
The smell of paint and new construction is
heavy in the air of the library. Signs of repair
following the recent troubles are clear. The
librarian at the front desk has asked you to
wait on the benches in the foyer while the
Lord Sage is summoned.
The characters have all been summoned by
the Lord Sage of Phlan. Give them a chance to
introduce themselves, speak to the librarian
Romaolt, or look around the area.
The characters are seated on long benches in a
small foyer in front of a tall desk where a librarian
is working. Behind the desk the characters can see
a number of tables on the main floor where a small
handful of librarians and patrons go about their
business. Shelves filled with books are scattered
around the sides of the room and hallways exit the
main room to side chambers.
Time Management
If you are running this adventure at a
convention or other location where time
is limited, it is recommended that after
character introductions, the DM skip directly to
Corruption and Politics below.
9 PA RT 1 : “ 0 2 5 ”
General Features
The following features apply to the library and
can be experienced by the characters from their
position in the foyer.
Illumination. Sunlight streams in through many
windows filling the room with bright light. A
number of unlit torches and lamps are placed
around the main room.
Sound. The scrapes of feet and rustles of paper are
ever present. Two humans, Siria and Maelan are
having a whispered discussion at one of the tables
just past the desk and it is rapidly growing more
heated. See Corruption and Politics for more.
Circulation Desk. The huge desk is firmly attached
to the floor and cannot be easily moved. It is large
enough to seek cover behind.
Librarian Romaolt
Romaolt looks up as the characters arrive but then
goes back to quietly reading and taking notes on
the volume in front of him, Vanul Ternis’ Migratory
Birds of the Northern Sword Coast. If a character
interrupts him, he will whisper in hushed tones,
answer questions as quickly as possible, as while
he is there to direct patrons, he would rather be
reading.
• What can you tell me about the Lord Sage?
The Lord Sage of Phlan has been the driving
force behind Mantor’s Library for several
decades and he is dedicated to expanding and
preserving the collection.”
• What’s with all the construction? “The last few
years have seen some troubling times for Phlan
and the occupation of the town by the dragon
Vorgansharax resulted in some damage to the
building and the collection. While the building is
easy to repair, we may never recover from losses
to the collection.”
• What’s going on in Phlan? “Of course the
biggest news is the ousting of the Maimed
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
 Virulence and the Cult of the Dragon. Most
recently there have been rumors of a spreading
sickness, causing madness I hear. Oh and of
course the silly election. If you seek the latest
gossip, I recommend you consult the Podal
Prophet broadsheet. The library is a place for
true learning, not current events and rumor.”
• Sickness? “There are stories that people have
been becoming ill, growing strange lesions, and
even gaining mental powers. It seems most likely
that it is some leftover taint of madness from
when the Demon Lords walked Faerûn. Some
folks are calling the sick the Godstouched.”
• Election? “Oh yes, an election. Can you believe
such madness? Letting uneducated people
decide who should lead them? Its insanity.
Jhessail Greycastle of the Black Fists, Barrett
Sokol of House Sokol, Colvin Doverson who
claims royal blood, and Graben Samulkin a priest
of Bane are all running. If forced to cast a ballot,
I suppose I will support Greycastle if for no
other reason than it will maintain the status quo
and that means stability. All that matters is the
library.”
Corruption and Politics
Two library patrons are having a heated,
whispered discussion when the characters arrive.
They have strong, differing opinions about the
upcoming election. A sickly human woman, Siria,
strongly supports Barrett Sokol. Siria is navigator
on the Shrouded Nixie out of Hillsfar, and she
believes that Sokol and his support for a return to
the Council of Ten will do the best for trade. The
target of her ire is a small human man with dark
hair and prominent widow’s peak. Maelan is a
follower of Bane and believes an iron fist is needed
to control the chaos that has tormented Phlan over
the last few years. He points to the many failures
of the previous governments as proof, and so he
supports Samulkin, hoping for more stability.
The more the two argue, the louder they
become and the more Siria coughs, blood staining
her hand. If the characters do not pay them any
attention, they will be forced to soon enough.
10
The sound of a fist pounding a table
thunders through the quiet cavernous
library. “How can you support that pig!” an
angry woman coughs out, wiping a trickle
of blood from her lip.
The small man across the table from
her eyes her obvious sickness warily. “I
simply think the clerisy of Bane will be better
equipped to bring stability to Phlan than the
youngest child of some money-grubbing
noble family. There is no need for this anger.”
The woman seethes with rage and the
man takes a step back from the obviously
stronger woman. “You, *cough*, will *cough*...”
The woman falls to her knees as her flesh begins
to melt and her arms droop like they were sacks
filled with water. “You *gurgling cough* will
never cast *cough* a vote!”
A tentacle from the pile of yellowed
flesh that was once the woman lashes out,
crushing the man, who dies screaming.
Siria has succumbed to the Godstouched taint
that infests Phlan and has become an aberrant
monstrosity that appears as a yellow, fleshy puddle
with two tentacles. The mutated Siria (as a
yochlol demon except that her type is aberration
and not fiend) is nearly mindless, using dominate
person to gain an ally and then moving to attack
the nearest uncontrolled character. She does not
change shape and fights to the death. This combat
is intended to be quick and easy, highlighting the
sickness plaguing Phlan.
When Siria is reduced to zero hit points, she
dissolves into a steaming puddle of goo. There
is nothing left to inspect to determine what
happened to her other than the obvious - whatever
this illness was: it was not entirely natural.
(continued)
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
PA RT 1 : “ 0 2 5 ”
 Adjusting this Encounter
Here are some suggestions for adjusting this
encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very Weak Party: Decrease Siria’s AC
and to hit by 1 and hit points by 30.
• Weak Party: Decrease Siria’s AC by 1 and
hit points by 15.
• Strong Party: Increase Siria’s AC by 1
and hit points by 15.
• Very Strong Party: Increase Siria’s AC by
1 and hit points by 30.
The Lord Sage has the following to impart:
Development
If during the fight the characters use fire- or
lightning-based attacks, several of the oil lamps
burst aflame and the librarians scramble to limit
the damage. In this case the party earns the
Barbarian story award. Any characters that break
off from the fight to also fight the fire may be
spared from this penalty at the DM’s discretion.
The Lord Sage
Once the combat has ended, proceed:
“We don’t normally allow fighting in the
library, but I suppose we’ll have to make an
exception in this case. If you’d come with
me.” The half-elven man turns and walks
through the door to the Lord Sage’s office.
Sitting behind a desk, he gestures to several
chairs and crosses his hands.
A young librarian comes in with pitchers
of ice water and beer, bowls of stew, and
loaves of bread. “Please enjoy a small
repast while we speak.”
The Lord Sage is bothered by what just
occurred, but he does not want the characters
to be distracted from why he asked them here.
Throughout the discourse he is clearly nervous and
constantly steers the conversation back to the job
he hopes the characters will complete for him.
11
Roleplaying the Lord Sage of Phlan
The Lord Sage is quite old but, thanks to
his half-elven blood, still retains a bit of
youthful vigor. Nevertheless, he is a taciturn
and reserved man, slow to display his
emotions. Any other man in his position
would have cracked long ago, but the Lord
Sage remains placid and stoic despite his
previous imprisonment at the hands of the
Maimed Virulence.
• There has been a sickness running through
town, but the Lord Sage has not paid it too much
mind as his attention has been elsewhere. It
appears that the woman in the reading room
was a victim of the Godstouched sickness that
deforms its victims and causes them to develop
strange aberrant mental powers. The Lord
Sage hopes that whomever is elected to rule
Phlan deals with the situation. He hopes the
characters are not distracted by the incident
from what he feels is a more pressing danger, the
vampire Yorvir Glandon, a former Doomguide of
Kelemvor.
• As the characters may know, when the
Maimed Virulence attacked, he destroyed the
Kelemvorite cathedral in Valhingen Graveyard
and Yorvir Glandon died during the attack.
• Somehow Yorvir returned from the dead as
a vampire, even though that is impossible for a
cleric of Kelemvor. He even managed to convince
adventurers to hand the Gulthias Stake, which
might have killed him permanently, over to him,
and he was most recently seen entering the
necropolis beneath Valhingen.
• The Lord Sage has contacted the home of the
Kelemvorite faith in Iriaebor and asked them
to send aid. He has also convinced Jhessail
Greycastle, who currently controls Phlan, to re-
deed the graveyard to the church of Kelemvor
if the clerics help dispatch the vampire. (Any
character with a Passive Insight of DC 15 or
higher notes unease from the Lord Sage when he
says this. If questioned, see below.)
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
PA RT 1 : “ 0 2 5 ”
 • Three clerics of Kelemvor have arrived from
Iriaebor to assist in putting the vampire down
permanently: Zindelo Chegari, Lene Reinhild,
and Cadeyrn Solemnstone. The clerics have
been researching in the library and believe they
know where the vampire is headed, and have
concocted a plan to defeat him.
• The Lord Sage would like to offer the
characters 3000 gp to accompany the clerics to
stop this foe.
• In addition, the town of Phlan is experiencing
an event unprecedented in its history: an
election. There are four candidates running,
though they do not even agree as to what they
are running for. (Give Handout 1 to the players.)
• Jhessail Greycastle, the highest ranking
member of the Black Fists and the current de
facto ruler of Phlan, has called for a popular
democratic election and has declared herself
a candidate for First Minister. She is a hero of
reclamation despite some corruption allegations
in her past. She seeks to reform the Black
Fists and continue a similar government of
the previous Lord Regent, with an additional
democratically elected parliament as a part of it.
• Barrett Sokol of House Sokol seeks to be
named High Councilor and return to power the
noble Council of Ten. He is very charismatic and
is out to an early lead by playing to the common
folk. He has his father’s wealth behind him, and
he strongly supports shoring up the decimated
defenses of the town immediately.
• Colvin Doverson claims a tenuous lineage
to the original Cinnabar Throne and the Lord
Protector. The Lord Sage has been looking into
his family history, and he believes that he may
actually be related to Anivar Daoran, cousin of
the Lord Protector. He would reinstate the old
monarchy, as well as renegotiate the ancient
trade deals with the cities of the Moonsea to
the benefit of Phlan’s economy. The Lord Sage
believes there may be proof of Colvin’s lineage
in the necropolis. He would very much like
the adventurers to recover any proof for him.
The best place to look would be in the tomb
of Miltiades, the man who served in the early
days of Phlan as a paladin of Tyr and death
12
knight. The Lord Sage offers a bonus of 2000 gp
if they can recover something. He has already
spoken with the clerics of Kelemvor, who would
normally not allow ANYTHING to be removed
from the burial sites. They are willing to allow
this one historical artifact, whatever it might
be, to be removed in exchange for the Lord
Sage’s aid in stopping the vampire Yorvir and
returning the graveyard to their control. Of
course the artifact would be returned once it is
properly studied. (Any character with a Passive
Insight of DC 15 or higher notes unease from the
Lord Sage when he says this. If questioned, see
below.)
• Graben Samulkin a priest of Bane who seeks to
be named Ruinlord and make Phlan a theocracy
once again. He emigrated from Mulmaster to
Phlan several decades ago in hopes of rebuilding
the Lyceum. To his credit, Graben could have fled
the city, but he opted to stay and help those who
were trapped. He did what he could, often under
great danger to himself, and many look to him
now with grateful hearts. With the devastation
in Mulmaster, many of the Bane faithful have
come to Phlan, some with deep pockets. Graben
has already secured the funds to reconstruct the
Lyceum, and its congregation is growing daily.
If the characters question what the Lord Sage is
holding back (because a character had a high
enough Passive Insight), he comes clean:
• The Lord Sage admits that he didn’t mention
that he was looking for proof that Colvin has a
hereditary claim to the Cinnabar Throne when
he asked for Jhessail Greycastle to grant the
graveyard back to the Kelemvorites. It is likely she
felt that she would be able to curry the religion’s
favor and thus gain their support in the election
by doing so.
• The Lord Sage believes that Colvin Doverson
may be the best candidate to lead Phlan. The
Black Fists have shown significant corruption.
The nobility and merchants of the Ten Families
seek to profit off the people without regard for
their welfare. The people have long since rejected
the theocracy of Bane and its ties to Zhentil
Keep. (continued)
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
PA RT 1 : “ 0 2 5 ”
 Supporting Colvin’s claim is partially why he has
undertaken organizing this expedition.
Development
Make note of any characters that consume any of
the food or drink offered. Those that do get the
Exposed story award at the end of the adventure.
Do not inform the players as to how or why they
received this award.
Treasure
The Lord Sage offers to pay 3000 gp if the
characters defeat the vampire Yorvir and an
additional 2000 gp if they can recover something
that proves or disproves Colvin’s claim.
If the characters press him for additional
pay, particularly in light of his lies of omission,
he is willing to offer the party a potion of greater
healing and a spell scroll of lesser restoration
immediately for their acceptance of his proposal.

P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
13 PA RT 1 : “ 0 2 5 ”
 Part 2.
204
“Believe me, the library is the temple of God.
Education is the most sacred religion of all.”
—Gene Simmons
The Clerics
Once the characters have completed their
discussion with the Lord Sage, he directs them to a
reading room in the library where the three clerics
are preparing their expedition.
Books are stacked high on the table of the
reading room. Three robed clerics of the
Master of the Crystal Spire look up from their
preparations. A swarthy Gur man smiles
wide and stands quickly with a welcoming
hand, a late middle-aged Damaran woman
stands quietly watching, and an elven man
does not rise from his place at the table but
regards you passively.
Zindelo quickly introduces the three clerics
and asks the adventurer’s names. He is quick to
make friends while the other two look on. Once
the pleasantries are over, he defers to Lene to
explain their plan and the rules of the expedition.
Deliberately, she lists off the following details,
answering questions the characters might pose as
she goes.
• The clerics have been dispatched by the Most
Solemn Order of the Silent Shroud in Iriaebor to
destroy the vampire who was once Doomguide
Yorvir Glandon. Doomguides cannot become
undead, so whatever has twisted what was Yorvir
must be powerful indeed.
• The heroes of Phlan once possessed a Gulthias
Stake that could have ended the vampire’s threat.
• For reasons the clerics cannot understand,
adventurers chose to give this powerful weapon
to the vampire. Lene is honest that this decision
makes it difficult to consider trusting any
14
adventurers from Phlan.
• The Lord Sage has provided information that
the vampire has been seen descending into
the necropolis beneath Valhingen Graveyard.
Unfortunately, a complete map or even detailed
records of the necropolis have long been lost, but
from what they have been able to determine, the
vampire is in the area of the tomb of Miltiades; a
former paladin of Tyr who became a death knight,
who some claimed still aided Phlan despite his
curse. They have been constructing a rough map
from various graves they have been able to locate
in the library’s records, which should set them
on a path to where the vampire is. It will be slow
going.
• The clerics believe the vampire seeks something
from this crypt. Unfortunately, they only know
roughly where that crypt is. No records of this
area remain, and there are no clerics of Kelemvor
or Tyr who have seen it that currently live. They
have, however, prepared a ritual that will allow
them to put the vampire down, and potentially
allow Yorvir’s soul to rest. The performance of
this ritual is a condition of the cleric’s help. The
vampire cannot simply be slain. Given the fact
that a Doomguide became an undead monstrosity,
it is unclear if normal methods can permanently
kill the beast.
• For the ritual to work, the vampire needs to
be immobilized with a specially prepared stake
driven into his heart while a special prayer to
Kelemvor is intoned. Immobilizing the vampire
is difficult given his likely ability to shapechange.
The characters must counteract that or be very
fast immobilizing and staking the vampire. If he
becomes a cloud of mist and tries to flee, he must
be contained so the ritual can be performed.
• The Lord Sage has generously allowed for
Valhingen Graveyard to return to the possession
of the church of Kelemvor. In exchange, the clerics
allow the characters to remove ONE artifact from
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
PA RT 2 : “ 2 0 5 ”
 the burial chambers of the necropolis, and only
if it is evidence of the lineage of Colvin Doverson,
and then only since the Lord Sage has promised
that the artifact will be eventually returned once
its evaluation is complete. Grave robbing or tomb
raiding will NOT be permitted or condoned, and
such behavior is cause for the immediate end of
the expedition.
• In addition, traveling in the company of undead
will NOT be permitted. Any undead encountered
MUST be destroyed. This is part of the
Kelemvorite faith, and they will not compromise
on it.
• The clerics have a backpack of goods that the
characters may divide among them if they wish.
Any additional payment must be negotiated with
the Lord Sage, as they are here at his invitation.
• The clerics wish to leave as soon as possible
since the vampire has a head start on them. They
may delay up to one hour if the characters have
items or gear they wish to retrieve or spells they
wish to cast.
Roleplaying the Clerics of Kelemvor
The three clerics of Kelemvor each have their
own personalities and goals. Following each
name is the gender, race, sub-race, and stat
block.
Zindelo Chegari (male, human (Vistani),
assassin): Zindelo claims to be an itinerate
cleric of Kelemvor, but he is a Vistani agent for
a darker power than the Lord of the Dead. He
defers to the other clerics in matters of dogma.
He is by far the most friendly and prone
to direct action. He is colorful and sees no
problem in enriching himself along the way to
completing his mission, and he has no special
opinions on the plague or politics. He tries to
avoid discussing dogma with any characters
who might be followers of Kelemvor. His goal is
not to destroy Yorvir, but rather forcibly extend
an invitation to Barovia as part of a future plot.
(continued)
15
Lene Reinhild (female, human (Damaran),
priest): Lene is as she appears: a reserved
cleric of Kelemvor. She is calm and methodical
and shows little outward emotion. Her goal is
the destruction of the vampire Yorvir, a better
understanding of how he could have been
turned, and the eventual restoration of the
Kelemvorite cathedral in Valhingen Graveyard.
She cares nothing for politics and only worries
about the plague as it affects her job as a cleric
of the Lord of the Dead.
Cadeyrn Solemnstone (male, elf (High),
priest): Cadeyrn is dour in his dealings
and prefers expedience to complicated
negotiations. He sees the characters as useful
pawns to protect him in the necropolis and
does what he can to keep them functioning
as long as they take his direction. He was
once a cleric of Kelemvor but has strayed
and now devotes himself to Bane, the Lord
of Strife, though he remains a plant in the
Kelemvorite church. Cadeyrn has been hired
by an intermediary to make sure that no proof
of Colvin’s heritage is recovered. He has NO
knowledge of who he really works for.
The Clerics in Combat
The clerics try to stay away from combat
and aid in ways that are helpful without
overshadowing the player’s actions. In
addition, since they are much lower level than
the characters, it is unlikely that they will have
much to offer in most encounters. As such
Cadeyrn or Lene might cast cure wounds to
bring a character back to consciousness or light
to help characters who cannot see in the dark,
but generally they do not cast offensive spells
unless absolutely necessary. Zindelo, as he is
not actually a cleric, might aid a PC or stabilize
them with a Wisdom (Medicine) check after
pulling them from combat.
Treasure
The clerics offer the characters an explorer’s pack
that also has two bottles of holy water, a holy
symbol of Kelemvor, and an additional five torches.
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
PA RT 2 : “ 2 0 5 ”
 Part 3.
911
“The venerable dead are waiting in my library to
entertain me and relieve me from the nonsense of
surviving mortals.”
—Samuel Davies
When the characters are ready to proceed, the
clerics light torches and follow them into one of the
many entrances to the necropolis beneath Valhingen
Graveyard.
The ruins of the cathedral loom over you as
you descend into the necropolis. Shadows
flicker along the walls of the simple stairwell
until you come into a vast cavern, the
endless night devouring the light.
As far as you can see there are
mausoleums, an entire city of the dead
that will never see the sun. The structures
closest to you seem newer than others in the
distance, suggesting that you might travel
back through history as you move deeper
into the cavern.
A: Locating the Path
The clerics consult their notes and disagree
on which way is the correct path. They ask the
characters to spread out and look for names or
dates on the buildings near the entrance, while the
clerics work to orient themselves. The characters
need four identifiers for the clerics to chart their
location and course. Some mausoleums are covered
in extravagant decorations, while others are blank
and stoic. A character can find one identifier with
a successful DC 12 Intelligence (Investigation)
check. One character (determine randomly) that is
searching notices graffiti scrawled on the side of a
tomb. If a character moves to where they can read
the writing, they see that it appears to be written
in fresh blood and says, “See you soon.” Below it
is a symbol (death) which activates as soon as a
16
character can see it, dealing 55 (10d10) necrotic
damage, DC 15 Constitution saving throw for half.
Once the characters locate the details of at
least four graves, the clerics take two minutes
to determine the path to the next landmark: the
shrine of Tyr.
Rests: If the characters try to rest, the clerics
are willing to wait for a short rest but if the
characters try to take a long rest, they stress the
need to catch up with Yorvir. If the characters
insist on a long rest, the clerics go on without
them. In this case the clerics are slain by Yorvir’s
forces and there is no way for the characters to
lay Yorvir permanently to rest.
B: The Shrine of Tyr
You have walked in the dark for more than
an hour. It is unclear how much further
you have to go, but the darkness remains
ever present. Turning down a wide avenue
between the monuments to mortality, your
light fills a plaza. In the center there is a
raised dais with a statue of a bearded man
missing one hand and both his eyes.
Zindelo smiles, “Looks like we have found
our first landmark my friends. Rest a moment
and look around. Perhaps you will find
something interesting?”
The clerics huddle together while leaving
you to investigate.
Those investigating the statue find the following:
• It is clearly a statue of the Maimed God, Tyr,
who judges wrong-doers and furthers the law.
A successful DC 10 Intelligence (Religion) check
recalls some basic details about Tyr (followers of
Tyr automatically succeed): Tyr’s faith died out
following the Time of Troubles when he lost faith
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
PA RT 3 : “ 9 1 1 ”
 in himself and passed his divinity on to Torm. He
later died fighting off a demonic invasion of the
upper planes. He was resurrected within the last
decade, and his faith is spreading again.
• Around the base of the statue are inscribed the
words “Reveal the truth, punish the guilty, right the
wrong, and be always true and just in your actions.”
• Searching the statue with a successful DC 20
Wisdom (Perception) check finds that the statue
can be slid to reveal a secret cache. Inside is a
wooden holy symbol of Tyr and a spell scroll of
zone of truth. As this is technically not a tomb,
the clerics do not stop the adventurers from
robbing it but each reacts in their own way. Lene
is disgusted at the characters’ behavior. Cadeyrn
shakes his head but seems more frustrated by
their delay than their behavior. Zindelo winks and
finds their blasphemy amusing.
• A successful DC 15 Wisdom (Perception) check
locates a number of footprints in the dust moving
through this area. Once found, those who succeed
in a DC 15 Wisdom (Survival) check note that
they are medium-sized boots and many of them
(but not all) shuffle, as if those making them were
very tired, injured, or possibly undead. If the
players ask, the prints move in the direction of the
tomb of Radomil the Crafter.
• The shrine radiates faint abjuration magic if
checked for. Any character that worships Tyr or
is lawful in alignment, and who prays to Tyr for
aid or guidance gains Inspiration. Characters
that do not worship Tyr and are not lawful but
pray to the Even-Handed find their alignment
forcibly changed to lawful (the Neutral or Good
moral portion says the same). This change may be
reversed when the adventure ends.
Development
While the characters investigate the area, it becomes
obvious that Lene and Cadeyrn are having a
disagreement over the direction to proceed. A DC
15 Wisdom (Insight) check notes that Zindelo finds
the situation humorous and is avoiding being part
of the discussion. If asked, he says that he is not
interested in arguments, but rather cares only for
the experience of the journey.
The arguers are quarrelling about how to best
17
proceed. Lene wishes to head toward the grave of
Adelajda Salko, a sage that was a follower of Jergal,
the Lord of the End of Everything. It is possible that,
as a follower of the god of burials and internment,
she may have been buried with records of older
vaults that could be consulted to locate Miltiades’s
tomb and possibly find information on Colvin
Doverson’s lineage.
Cadeyrn argues there is no proof anything
useful is in Adelajda’s tomb, and even if there is,
they have no time to go out of their way to it, much
less read through any records they might find. He
instead argues they should make for the next closest
landmark, the tomb of Radomil the Crafter, a wizard
whose tomb is an elaborate clock. It should be easy
to find and take them closer to the vampire, which is
their true goal.
The clerics allow the characters to make the
final decision. Proceed to C1 or C2 of this encounter
based on their choice.
C1: Adelajda’s Tomb
The smell of smoke reaches you before you
see the flickering light bouncing off nearby
mausoleums. One of the tombs, your goal,
stands open, and the roar of flames can be
heard from it.
Yorvir has used his charm ability on an archmage
who had come to Phlan to fight in its reclamation.
Everyone thought the man was lost in the fighting,
unaware he has been a slave to the vampire ever
since, helping him raise additional undead to
expand his forces and prepare the vampire’s ritual.
Illumination. The fire fills the room with bright
light. If the fire is put out, there is no light.
Campfire. A large fire burns atop the burial vault
in the center room. Books, tapestries, and other
flammables burn rapidly. Any creature entering
or ending their turn in the fire takes 10 (2d6 + 3)
points of fire damage.
Now ready to proceed, Yorvir has sent Eihim
the archmage and the mage’s stone golem, to
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
PA RT 3 : “ 9 1 1 ”
 Adelajda Salko’s Tomb to destroy any information
that might aid in locating the grave of Miltiades,
where Yorvir hopes to implement his plan. When
Eihim arrived, he used a spell scroll of alarm and
warded the area in front of the tomb’s entry with
a silent mental alarm, excepting himself and his
golem. He then cast invisibility upon himself and
built a campfire in the center of the room on top of
the burial vault. He is feeding records into the fire
when the characters arrive, and his stone golem is
just inside the door with orders to kill anyone who
enters.
Upon seeing Eihim, characters may attempt a
DC 20 Intelligence (History) check to recognize him.
He is a famous archmage known for his gentle soul,
his imposing stone golem, and his fierce devotion to
Phlan. He was last seen during the battle to reclaim
Phlan, when he went missing and was thought slain.
This may be a hint to clever players that Eihim is not
acting entirely under his own power. In addition,
a detect magic spell that targets him determines
Eihim is under a charm effect. Any character using
detect thoughts, telepathy, or similar effects may
attempt a DC 15 Wisdom (Insight) check while
reading Eihim’s mind to realize that his thoughts are
muddled, as if he is being controlled or compelled in
some way.
Tactics
During the combat, the golem tries to
bottleneck the door so it can use slow on multiple
targets. Eihim tries to eliminate dangerous foes
with spells like maze and then target others with
the most damaging spells in his arsenal. The golem
fights for as long as it is able, but if Eihim is below
half hit points, and it is clear that he is about to be
defeated, he uses teleport to arrive at the Fountain
of the Crying Angels and warn Yorvir. He then helps
defend him as they travel to Miltiades’s tomb.
18
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Eihim is a mage, not an
archmage.
• Weak party: Decrease Eihim’s hit points
by 15 and he does not have 8th- or 9th-level
spell slots.
• Strong party: Increase the stone golem’s
hit points by 15, its to hit by 1 and its
damage by 3.
• Very strong party: Increase Eihim’s hit
points by 30 and the DC of his spells by 1.
Increase the stone golem’s hit points by
15, its to hit by 1 and its damage by 3.
Development
If the characters realize that he is controlled and
manage to free Eihim from his charm (via any
number of possible spells), he immediately stops
attacking and calls off his stone golem if it is still
functional. He is very thankful for his freedom and
is very concerned about his family, which he has not
seen for several months. He tells the characters that
Yorvir is traveling to Miltiades’s tomb and should be
near the Fountain of the Crying Angels by now. He
can give directions directly there. Combined with
the maps in this tomb, the characters need not make
any checks to travel to Encounter 3D.
Eihim explains what he knows of Yorvir’s
current plan:
• Doomguide Yorvir Glandon is definitely a
vampire, but something is odd about him. He is
often surrounded by bits of mist. Yorvir is very
powerful. Eihim has seen him cast spells and
command a sizable force of undead.
• Yorvir is very concerned about the strange
corruption spreading through Phlan, twisting
and mutating body and mind. He has been
unable to learn how it is spread, but he has
determined that it does not seem to affect the
undead. Therefore, he has concocted a plan to
save his beloved Phlan: turn everyone in it into
an undead creature! Eihim is not entirely sure
why that sounded like such a good idea before,
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
PA RT 3 : “ 9 1 1 ”
 but thankfully the characters freed him from the
desire to help the vampire.
• Yorvir seeks the Shield of Miltiades, a relic
of Tyr that was buried with the celebrated
paladin and death knight. He will use the shield
as a focus for a ritual to encase the town in an
endless night, where all succumb to the embrace
of undeath. Eihim does not know how to use
the shield or specifically how to stop the ritual
beyond stopping the vampire.
Eihim is unwilling to face the vampire, fearful that
he will be separated from his wife and children
again. As a reward, he offers the party a copy of a
spell book.
Searching Adelajda’s Tomb
The tomb is a mess once characters take control
of the scene. A number of vaults have been broken
into. Glass and stone fragments are everywhere, the
contents thrown into the flames. The characters may
search the room with a DC 15 Wisdom (Perception)
check to find one thing. If the characters or Eihim
used elemental area of effect spells (such as fireball,
flamestrike, or lightning bolt) in the tomb, these
checks are made with disadvantage. Keep track
of the time spent searching, as you will need it
for Part 4. Making an ability check to search takes
a character ten minutes and each character that
succeeds finds one thing from the list below, in
order (do not duplicate if multiple characters
search - everyone should get a different piece of
information if bullet points remain):
• A carving on the wall that depicts Adelajda
Salko in her prime, along with the dates 728
DR-790 DR. She appears as a robed human of
average build with long hair pinned up. She
wears a holy symbol of Jergal and smiles slightly.
She holds a ledger in her arms.
• A ledger (that appears to be the ledger in
the carving) that describes the location of the
Fountain of the Crying Angels (along with a
map on how to get there from Adelajda’s Tomb)
and how to get to Miltiades’s tomb from that
location. It also describes someone hiding some
of their belongings under one of the benches in
the plaza and marking it with a holy symbol of
Tyr, the one closest the direction of the Tomb of
19
Miltiades. The ledger also contains a note that
drinking from the magical fountains is beneficial,
but warns the drinker not to be greedy and
return for more.
• Records worth up to 1000 gp if sold to
collectors or treasure hunters.
• A record that describes the Tomb of Radomil
the Crafter. It notes that it is defended by an iron
golem that activates if any living creature tries to
enter the tomb. Activating the golem also causes
the bells in its great clock spire to ring, echoing
throughout the entire necropolis.
• A record describing the Tomb of Miltiades. It
describes a gallery filled with burial mementos
and art, an arcade of statues, and a very large
tomb where the shield of Miltiades rests atop
the death knight’s sarcophagus. The record also
notes that Adelajda admired the lethalness of
the trap placed in the mausoleum, but it does not
mention what it was.
Treasure
If the characters defeat Eihim, or free him from his
charm, he offers them his traveling spell book. If
Eihim escapes to warn Yorvir, but the characters
defeat him later, they also find his traveling spell
book.
In addition, the tomb is filled with records on where
some of the oldest tombs are in the necropolis,
along with who is buried in them. These records
would be worth up to 1000 gp to collectors or
treasure hunters. Lene is absolutely horrified if the
characters take the records. Cadeyrn also feigns
being horrified, but a successful DC 20 Wisdom
(Insight) check suggests he is less horrified as he is
impatient. Zindelo sees no problem with it, figuring
the characters earned it for defeating the archmage
and the golem. If the characters rob Adelajda’s Tomb
and Lene lives to report it, the Blasphemer story
award is given to each character.
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
PA RT 3 : “ 9 1 1 ”
 C2: Radomil’s Tomb
The large tomb of Radomil the Crafter rises
several stories above the necropolis, its clock
face softly illuminated with a phosphorescent
glow from behind.
As the building comes into view, it is
clear the door stands open beneath the legs
of a large clockwork knight decorating the
facade.
Radomil’s tomb is protected by an iron golem with
orders to attack any living creature that tries to
enter. This unfortunate wording allowed the undead
in Yorvir’s service to break into the tomb without
challenge on their way through to the Fountain
of the Crying Angels. This does not apply to the
characters should they attempt to enter. The golem
fights to the death and follows the characters unless
they run out of sight of the building.
Illumination. The clock face fills the square with
dim light. There is no light inside.
Bells. If the iron golem is activated, the bells in the
clock ring loudly and can be heard throughout the
necropolis. This allows Yorvir to realize where the
characters are, and perhaps a bit of what they are
up to.
Tracks. There are a large number of humanoid
tracks in the area. A successful DC 10 Wisdom
(Perception) check locates them moving through
this area, and anyone can easily follow the trail.
Once found, those who succeed in a DC 15 Wisdom
(Survival) check note that they are medium-sized
boots with a few large-sized ones, and many of them
(but not all) shuffle, as if those making them were
very tired, injured, or possibly the undead. There are
more than twenty individuals. The prints move in
the direction of the Fountain of the Crying Angels.
20
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Decrease the iron
golem’s hit points by 30, AC by 1, to hit by 1
and damage by 3.
• Weak party: Decrease the iron golem’s
hit points by 15 and to hit by 1.
• Strong party: Increase the iron golem’s
hit points by 15, AC by 1, to hit by 1 and
damage by 3.
• Very strong party: Increase the iron
golem’s hit points by 30, AC by 1, to hit by
1, DC by 1 and damage by 6.
Searching Radomil’s Tomb
The inside of Radomil’s Tomb has been ransacked.
Clockwork creations are strewn about the floor,
and two walls of burial vaults that housed his many
servants, family, and apprentices are ajar.
The characters may search the room with a DC 15
Wisdom (Perception) check to find one thing in the
tomb. Keep track of the time spent searching, as
you will need it for Part 4. Making an ability check
to search takes a character ten minutes, and each
character that succeeds finds one thing from the list
below, in order. Do not duplicate results if multiple
characters search. Everyone should get a different
piece of information:
• There are a number of clockwork devices
spread throughout the room that are likely quite
valuable.
• All of the coffins are empty, despite showing
signs of stains or dust, having once housed the
dead.
• There are more footprints in the dust and
rubble leaving than entering the tomb.
• A smashed glass case is in one corner of the
room. A placard lies face down nearby. The
front of it says “Quaverranex, Eye Tyrant of the
Dragonspine Mountains. Slain 693 DR.” There is
no sign of the missing beholder’s body.
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
PA RT 3 : “ 9 1 1 ”
The Treasure
Inside the tomb are a number of beautiful clockwork
creations made by Radomil over the course of his
life: clocks, toys, and music boxes. These clockworks
would be worth up to 1000 gp to collectors. Lene
is absolutely horrified if the characters take them.
Cadeyrn also feigns being horrified, but a successful
DC 20 Wisdom (Insight) check suggests he is
less horrified as he is impatient. Zindelo sees no
problem with it, figuring the characters earned it for
defeating the golem. If the characters rob Radomil’s
Tomb and Lene lives to report it, the Blasphemer
story award is given to each character.
D: Fountain of the Crying Angels
The sounds of splashing water and weeping
echo through the marble streets of the dark
necropolis. When the fountain comes into
view, you see four low-walled pools, each
with a marble angelic figure in the center.
Two are male and silently scream in anguish,
water pouring from the mouths and eyes
of their long, drawn faces. The other two
are female and cover their faces, water
pouring from behind their hands. Decorative
archways stand between adjacent pools,
offering access to a central sitting area.
The Fountain of the Crying Angels was once
envisioned as a place where grieving visitors might
rest while paying their respects. The necropolis has
long since fallen into disuse and become a much
more dangerous place. The pools and the fountains
radiate faint abjuration magic.
General Features
The following applies to the fountain and square
around it.
Illumination. There is no light in the square save
what the characters bring with them.
Benches. There are four marble benches in the
center of the area enclosed by the pools. They can
be moved or flipped to provide low walls that can be
used for cover. The benches are heavy and require
a DC 10 Strength check to move. The bench to the
21
north has a holy symbol of Tyr crudely carved onto
its underside. It can be found with a successful DC 5
Wisdom (Perception) check, which is automatically
successful if the bench is flipped.
Pool, Female Angels. The one-foot-deep pools
contain cool, clean water, and are surrounded by a
two-foot-high wall that can be used to take cover if
the character is small-sized. The water in the two
pools with female statues can be consumed as an
action. Drinking from the fountain fills the character
with relaxation and gives the character the benefit
of a short rest without taking the time or increasing
the delay track in Part 4. A character may only
receive one benefit from a pool in a 24-hour period.
Any character that attempts to drink from this pool
while under the benefit of either pool must succeed
on a DC 15 Constitution saving throw or gain one
level of exhaustion.”
Pool, Male Angels. The one-foot-deep pools contain
cool, clean water, and are surrounded by a two-
foot-high wall that can be used to take cover if the
character is small-sized. The water in the two pools
with male statues can be consumed as an action.
The character is filled with a resolute, determined
feeling which gives the character the benefit of a
bless spell and an aid spell. A character may only
receive one benefit from a pool in a 24-hour period.
Any character that attempts to drink from this pool
while under the benefit of either pool must succeed
on a DC 15 Constitution saving throw or be blinded
for 8 hours.
The Attack
Yorvir has recently passed through the square that is
home to the fountain and left a dangerous surprise
for the adventurers. He has placed several of his
minions in ambush with the intent to wear down
their resources with wave after wave of foes. The
undead swarm forward and do not retreat. Should
any be turned and not destroyed, they follow the
adventurers to hound them until the adventurers
are dead or the undead are destroyed.
The attack begins when the characters move into
the square around the fountain. The first wave of 15
ghouls stream out of the surrounding mausoleums,
three groups of five each from opposite directions
to limit the effectiveness of area spells and turn
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
PA RT 3 : “ 9 1 1 ”
 undead attempts. Each group of ghouls tries to
surround and paralyze a single target and then
rip that victim apart, ignoring other foes until that
enemy is dead.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Remove two ghouls.
• Weak party: Remove one ghoul.
• Strong party: Add one ghoul.
• Very strong party: Add three ghouls.
Three rounds after the ghouls attack, or if all the
ghouls are destroyed, a second wave consisting of
a beholder zombie and six ogre zombies attack.
Four of the ogre zombies rush forward from one
boulevard to aid the chaos caused by the ghouls,
while the other two ogre zombies and the beholder
zombie approach from the opposite direction. The
beholder stays away from melee using its eye rays,
and the two ogres that arrive with it move to attack
a foe that is attacking the beholder zombie from
range, or failing that, the nearest foe.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Remove two ogre
zombies.
• Weak party: Remove one ogre zombie.
• Strong party: Add one ogre zombie.
• Very strong party: Add four ogre zombies.
Three rounds after the zombies attack, or if all the
zombies are destroyed, a third wave consisting of
five vampire spawn try to sneak up on an isolated
foe, such as a wizard or archer in the party’s rear
rank. They all try to grapple and bite that foe until it
is dead, or they are no longer able.
22
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Remove three vampire
spawn and add two banshees.
• Weak party: Replace one vampire
spawn with one banshee.
• Strong party: Add one banshee.
• Very strong party: Remove two vampire
spawn and add four banshees.
Treasure
Hidden under the bench marked with the holy
symbol of Tyr is a loose brick that can be located
with a successful DC 15 Wisdom (Perception)
check. Those who know of its location from their
investigation earlier find it automatically if they
look. Under the brick is a sack containing 1,000 gp
in old coins and a spell scroll of windwall. This is
not a burial offering, so it can be claimed without
drawing the ire of the clerics of Kelemvor.
Development
If somehow captured, the intelligent undead whine
and cower. None can tell the adventurers about
Yorvir’s plan, though they are confident their master
has something dreadful planned for them. All of
the intelligent undead were raised from remains in
Radomil’s Tomb.
From here, the clerics can calculate the course
to Miltiades’s tomb and their goal. Proceed to Part 4.
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
PA RT 3 : “ 9 1 1 ”
 Part 4.
726
“Being the evil undead wasn’t fun anymore. For one
thing, it was increasingly hard to get a library card.”
—Sharon Ashwood, Ravenous
Miltiades’s Mausoleum
One of the largest structures you have
seen in the necropolis, this entire building
is covered in a strange hemisphere of
darkness, making it even harder to see
than the endless darkness would make it.
Miltiades’s mausoleum is faced with several
large columns, each depicting an armored
skeletal warrior with a kite shield proudly
displaying the holy symbol of Tyr.
Yorvir has arrived prior to the characters,
breeched the tomb itself (C) and begun his ritual
to encase Phlan in endless darkness. So far it only
encompasses the mausoleum.
The Endless Darkness
Yorvir’s endless darkness has the following
effects:
• All undead within the darkness gain
turning defiance, which grants advantage
on saving throws against effects that turn
undead.
• Living creatures within the darkness
must attempt a DC 15 Constitution saving
throw when they enter the area and
for every full hour they remain within.
Those that fail gain a level of exhaustion.
Creatures that die due to exhaustion rise
as a ghoul within 1d4 rounds.
• All rooms are shrouded in shadow. While
the effect is magical, natural or magical light
can provide some measure of dim light. It is
not total darkness.
• Light-based spells or effects cannot dispel
the endless darkness, and the light level
cannot rise higher than dim. There are
always shadows for those attempting stealth.

General Features
The following features apply to the mausoleum
unless noted otherwise.
Illumination. There is no light save what the
characters bring. Nothing can raise the light level
above dim.
Ceilings. All of the ceilings are 20 feet high and
covered in complex, baroque decorations.
Doors. Unless noted, the doors are not locked.

P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
23 PA RT 4 : “ 7 2 6 ”
 Delay Track
When the characters arrive, the DM should
determine the value of the delay track using the
following formula:
• Start with 1.
• Subtract 1 if the party is Weak or 2 if Very Weak.
• Add 1 if the party is Strong or 2 if Very Strong.
• Add 1 for every Short Rest the party took.
• Add 2 if the characters chose to go the long way
to Adelajda Salko’s Tomb.
• Add 1 if the characters triggered the bells of
Radomil’s tomb, giving Yorvir a warning to hurry.
• Add 1 for every ten minutes searching Adelajda
Salko’s or Radomil the Crafter’s tomb.
• Add 1 for every ten minutes (round down) that
the characters spent in Miltiades’s Mausoleum
before entering The Tomb (area C).
• Add 1 if the party took a detour or otherwise
wasted time (DM discretion).
The final delay value is used to calculate how far
along Yorvir is in his ritual and how many undead it
has spawned.
A. The Gallery
This cross-shaped room is covered in
memorabilia of Miltiades’s past, trophies of
his battles, and gifts from his friends and allies.
A large painting is displayed prominently on
the northern wall. The ceiling is decorated
in a busy style with a riot of colors and many
carvings of finely dressed knights and nobles.
Two doors exit this room to the north.
This room is a cluttered memorial to the many lives
of Miltiades, from his fall from paladinhood in Turell,
the curse of his undeath, his redemption as a death
knight in Phlan recovering the Hammer of Tyr, and
his eventual journey into the east. If the characters
wish to search through the shelves for clues or proof
of Colvin’s lineage, see Searching the Room. If they
inspect the painting, see Picture of the Past. If they
approach the trapped doors, consult the Death’s
Grasp Trap.
24
Searching the Room
The room is VERY busy. Without searching, the
characters notice the walls are covered in shelves
with trophies and knickknacks, and a few paintings
here and there. There is a very large painting on
the northern wall (see below). If the characters
choose to search, they use ten minutes and increase
the delay track by 1. A successful DC 15 Wisdom
(Perception) check finds numerous trophies from
the city of Turell, Phlan, and the Utter East worth
2000 gp. If taken and Lene lives to report it, the
characters earn the Blasphemer story award. The
character also notices tracks, less than they might
previously have seen, have passed this way through
the northwestern door. In addition, if they have not
inspected it yet, they note the painting is placed
prominently and looks very valuable.
Note where the characters search the room,
consult the Death’s Grasp Trap below for more
they might “discover.”
Picture of the Past
Displayed prominently on the northern wall is
a painting that shows Cvaal Daoren, the Zhent
Hatemaster and Leader of the Brothers of the
Black Fist who started the Shadowbane war and
eventually become the first Lord Protector of Phlan.
Cvaal is easily recognized from the numerous
statues and memorials in Phlan. Seated next to
him appears to be his wife and two children, a boy
and a girl. In the background, there appear to be
some favored retainers including a few Knights of
the Black Fist and another woman holding a baby.
On the frame is a plaque that says “To Miltiades in
honor of the recovery of the Hammer of Tyr. Honor,
Dedication, Family.”
If the characters look on the back of the
painting, they find faded handwriting that lists the
names of all those in the painting. Of particular note
is the woman with the baby in the background:
Nycella Doverson and Kadr Doverson, her bastard
child by Cvaal. This suggests that Colvin is of the
blood of the original Lord Protector, though not of
the legitimate line. Given that no true blooded heir
remains, it is still a powerful argument for his right
to the Cinnabar Throne.
Transporting the Painting: The painting is 8’ by 10’
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
PA RT 4 : “ 7 2 6 ”
in the frame; much too large to fit in a bag of holding,
Heward’s Handy Haversack, or portable hole. Zindelo
suggests cutting the painting out of the frame to
transport it. Lene angrily complains that no burial
items can be defaced or damaged. Besides, without
the frame, the strength of the claim is weakened.
Cadeyrn offers to carry it and stand well in the
rear, as clearly the characters are more needed to
succeed in defeating the vampire.
Death’s Grasp Trap
Magical Trap
Among the carvings upon the ceiling, there is a
skeletal knight that looks like the columns in front
of the mausoleum (marked on the map). On the
knight’s shields there is necromantic symbol instead
of the holy symbol of Tyr like the ones previously
seen.
Detecting and Disabling: A character that
specifically inspects the ceiling and succeeds on
a DC 18 Intelligence (Investigation) check notices
that there is a six-inch-tall skeletal knight in front of
each door and their shields bear a strange-looking
magical symbol. After finding it, a DC 20 Intelligence
(Arcana) check or a detect magic can determine it is
some sort of necromantic magic.
If the character does not detect as a living
creature (or can disable from range such as an
Arcane Trickster), the symbol can be disabled with
a DC 20 Dexterity (Thieves’ Tools) check, assuming
the character can reach the symbol.
The symbol can also be disabled by dispel magic
or a similar effect. It can be dispelled as a 7th-level
spell, which deactivates it for 1d4 + 1 rounds, after
which the symbol reappears.
Effect: If a living creature approaches within 5 feet
of the door or the carving on the ceiling, the skeletal
knight reaches out toward the trespasser and two
effects are triggered. The trap resets at the end of
the next round after it is triggered. Triggering the
trap over one door does not trigger the trap above
the other door.
First a burst of black energy billows down
from the carving, filling all squares within 20 feet
of the door. Living creatures within the cloud must
succeed in a DC 18 Constitution saving throw or
become vulnerable to necrotic damage for 1 hour.
25
This vulnerability can be removed by dispel good
and evil or remove curse.
Second, necrotic rays fire from the miniature
knight’s outstretched hand, targeting every creature
that was within the cloud. Each victim is targeted by
one ray (+8 ranged spell attack) that does 22 (4d10)
necrotic damage.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Decrease the DC to
find the trap and the saving throw to 17.
Decrease the to hit of the rays to +7.
• Weak party: Decrease the DC to find the
trap and the saving throw to 17.
• Strong party: Increase the DC to find the
trap to 18.
• Very strong party: Increase the DC to find
the trap and the saving throw to 18. Increase
the to hit of the rays to +9.
Treasure
Numerous trophies from the city of Turell, Phlan,
and the Utter East worth 2000 gp fill the room. If
taken and Lene lives to report it, the characters earn
the Blasphemer story award.
Development
If the characters do not notice the painting, none
of the clerics of Kelemvor do either. It is simply left
behind.
B. The Arcade
The walls of this room are fronted by columns
like those outside, each depicting an
armored skeletal warrior with a kite shield
proudly displaying the holy symbol of Tyr. A
large set of double doors are to the north.
The arcade is dark and otherwise quiet. However,
the characters are not alone; three wraiths are
hiding behind the pillars. When the characters enter
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
PA RT 4 : “ 7 2 6 ”
 the hallway, the wraiths rush and attack the first
character , hoping to cause confusion and potentially
bottleneck characters in the trapped spaces of The
Gallery (area A). One of the wraiths immediately
moves through the wall into The Tomb (area C) to
warn Yorvir. If that wraith is destroyed by an attack,
a second wraith takes its place and also flees.
The Doors: The doors to The Tomb (area C) are
locked, but can be opened with a successful DC 20
Dexterity (Thieves’ Tools) or Strength check to break
down the doors. Note that attempting to break down
the doors and failing automatically warns Yorvir of
the party’s approach.
C. The Tomb
Miltiades’s Tomb lies across a sunken foyer
from you, with stairs descending nearest you
and then rising on the sides. Bodies have
been piled high at the tops of the stairs,
blocking access to the sarcophagus. Some
of them are beginning to move.
Next to the sarcophagus is a plain-
looking man in grey robes surrounded in
mist. He chants with his arms upraised, blood
dripping from his wrists and pouring over the
shield. The mists seem to lash out like angry
tentacles, and faces can be seen swirling in
the mists around him.
The man looks at you sadly, “You should
not have come, my friends. You didn’t kill
me when I begged you, when I didn’t know
how to deal with the curse, but now I know
my purpose. This is the only way we can save
Phlan. Kelemvor may have failed to save
Phlan, but the voices in the mists will not. They
will save you all!”
Yorvir is in the middle of his ritual when the
characters arrive. While he does not especially
wish to stop his ritual, there is no reason he
cannot resume it later, so if the characters insist on
attacking him, he quickly breaks off to deal with
them. If they instead try to speak or reason with
him, he is happy to stay his hand and try to convince
the characters to his side. He is crazed, and nothing
the characters say convinces him to put his plans
aside.
26
Roleplaying Former Doomguide
Yorvir Glandon, the Vampire
Yorvir was a firm believer in the god Kelemvor,
but when the Maimed Virulence attacked
the Valhingen Cathedral and its rubble fell
upon him, he found it rapidly crushing him.
Filled with grief, he cursed Kelemvor for not
giving him the strength to defend Phlan. In his
weakness, a voice asked “Do you want to live?”
Thinking Kelemvor had answered his plea, he
thankfully agreed. It was in this moment that
Esmae Amaratha, the witch of Barovia, joined
with the vestige of the Evening Glory, making
her first inroad into Faerûn, and the mists of
that evil and cursed place bubbled from his lips
(see the events in Season 4 Curse of Strahd of
the D&D Adventurer’s League). Yorvir died.
Sometime later he rose as a vampire. Filled
with despair at his betrayal and weakness, he
begged the adventurers of Phlan to end his
misery, but they failed him again. Eventually his
curse, coupled with the closeness of Barovia,
continued to corrupt his mind until the
normally reserved Yorvir has instead become
a driven, twisted version of himself dedicated
to saving Phlan the only way he knows how. He
is no longer calm and reserved but filled with
desperation. He truly thinks that what he is
doing is for the best.
In addition to the Former Doomguide Yorvir
Glandon (vampire) and any wraiths that have fled
from The Arcade (area B), there are also a number
of undead in the room, spawned from the ritual,
based on the current value of the Delay Track.
Spread the undead as you like throughout the raised
part of the room, paying special attention to block
the stairs up.
Yorvir sends his undead into the fight and then
uses his charm ability to try to add to his forces. He
then uses spells until he is engaged or must resort
to melee. The undead do not go out of their way to
target the clerics of Kelemvor, unless the characters
leave them no other choice.
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
PA RT 4 : “ 7 2 6 ”
Delay Track
Value Add the Following Undead
1 2 ogre zombies
2 4 ghouls
3 2 flameskulls
4 2 wraiths
5 2 vampire spawn
6 1 flameskull
7 1 beholder zombie
8+ 1 wraith and 1 banshee
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very weak party: Decrease Yorvir’s AC by
1, hit points by 15, damage by 3 and DC by 1.
• Weak party: No adjustment.
• Strong party: No adjustment.
• Very strong party: Increase Yorvir’s hit
points by 30, damage by 6, and DC by 1.
Yorvir has an additional 5th-level spell slot.
The “Clerics” of Kelemvor
During the final fight, the clerics have specific
actions they take that aid or complicate this
encounter.
Lene Reinhild: Lene behaves as she has throughout
the adventure. She stays in the second rank and tries
to assist with the occasional bless or cure wounds.
She is reliable and unaware of her compatriots’
other motives. Regardless of what the others do,
Lene remains committed to putting Yorvir to rest.
Cadeyrn Solemnstone: Cadeyrn behaves normally
the first round of combat to make sure the
characters have fully committed to the combat. In
the second round, he puts the painting down and
pulls out a metal vial and a box. In the third round
he douses the painting with oil and, if not stopped
in the fourth round, he uses the tinderbox to burn
the painting. At any point if the characters try to
stop him, he uses whatever force he can muster to
complete his mission.
27
The DM should make it clear that the characters
can see him so they have a chance to stop him. And
assuming a character isn’t carrying the painting, it
should not be destroyed in the various area spells
the undead might use. If the characters chose to
leave the painting behind to get it on their way out,
Cadeyrn “flees” combat (DC 16 Wisdom (Insight)
to realize that he is feigning fear) on the second
round to go destroy the painting. If the characters
used a creative method to keep the painting out of
his hands (such as using reduce and then putting
it into a bag of holding), Cadeyrn tries to take that
character by surprise and steal the container so he
can destroy it.
Zindelo Chegari: Zindelo moves forward with
any frontline characters, aiding their attacks. He is
especially interested in helping characters get their
sneak attack. Once he can get near Yorvir and the
vampire has been injured, he switches to aiding the
vampire. He explains that his master invites Yorvir
to join him in escape and the faces in the mists begin
whispering “Yes” and “Join us.”
Every round as his action, Zindelo aids Yorvir
and attempts to convince him to leave this place
with him, offers his outstretched hand, and begs that
he accept Zindelo’s Master’s invitation. He does not
say who his Master is but explains that his Master
has also been tricked in death and has much to
share with Yorvir.
Yorvir is not convinced until things seem dire, but
if Zindelo is still standing when the vampire agrees
(DM’s choice as to when the time seems right) and
is able to link hands with Yorvir, the mists transport
them both to Barovia, trapping Yorvir beyond the
reach of the characters, but effectively defeating
him. If Zindelo is defeated without taking Yorvir to
Barovia, he disappears in a swirl of mist.
Treasure
Yorvir is wearing two garnet and silver rings and
a gold and diamond necklace as foci for his ritual.
These pieces of jewelry are worth 2,000 gp. These
can be claimed without drawing the ire of the clerics
of Kelemvor.
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
PA RT 4 : “ 7 2 6 ”
 Conclusion
If Yorvir is Defeated
As the stake drives into the vampire’s heart,
Lene’s supplication to the Lord of the Crystal
Spire rises above the noise of combat. For a
moment Yorvir’s color returns and the angry
red is stripped away from his eyes. Looking
at you, he whispers, “Forgive me.” Then he is
engulfed in holy fire that rapidly burns away
the corrupting mists until there is nothing left
of him but ash and a few fragments of bone.
When the characters return to the Lord Sage, he
is very pleased that the characters have ended the
threat of Former Doomguide Yorvir Glandon. He
rewards the characters as promised and arranges
for Valhingen Graveyard to once again be returned
to the church of Kelemvor.
If Yorvir Escapes to Barovia
Reaching out, Yorvir takes Zindelo’s hand.
“It appears there is no choice but to leave
Phlan to fall. I accept the invitation of your
Master.” The contempt for the last word
can barely be heard over the squeals of
joy coming from the faces in the mist that
surrounds Yorvir. The mist quickly spreads
across the two of them as Zindelo intones
“Vezesse végig köd, annak a földnek ura.” A
moment later, they are gone.
When the characters return to the Lord Sage, he is
pleased that the characters have ended the threat of
Former Doomguide Yorvir Glandon but is worried
that it may only have delayed the threat. Still he
rewards the characters as promised and arranges
for Valhingen Graveyard to once again be returned
to the church of Kelemvor.
28
If Yorvir is Driven Off but Not Laid to Rest
The killing blow struck, the vampire
becomes a cloud of mist that flows away
through cracks in the wall. Lene screams
“No! We can’t let him escape! We cannot
have failed!”
When the characters return to the Lord Sage, he is
disappointed that the characters have not ended
the threat of Former Doomguide Yorvir Glandon.
In this case he rewards the characters half of what
was promised (1,500 gp) and does not arrange for
Valhingen Graveyard to be returned to the church of
Kelemvor.
If the Painting is Returned Intact
Returning the painting to the Lord Sage,
he is grateful. “This will go a long way to
solidifying Colvin’s claim to the throne, and
can only help his chances in the upcoming
election. I wonder why Cadeyrn tried
to destroy it? Who could he have been
working for?”
The Lord Sage is pleased the painting was found
and rewards the characters as promised. Members
of the Emerald Enclave receive a renown point for
recovering the painting successfully.
If the Painting is Not Returned Intact
Returning without the painting to the Lord
Sage, he is disappointed in your failure. “It
sounds as if that painting would have gone
a long way to solidifying Colvin’s claim to
the throne, and helping his chances in the
upcoming election. I wonder why Cadeyrn
tried to destroy it? Who could he have
been working for?”
The Lord Sage is disappointed that the painting was
not recovered and does not reward the characters.
The End
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
PA RT 4 : “ 7 2 6 ”
Rewards Treasure
The characters receive the following treasure,
Make sure players note their rewards on their divided up amongst the party. Characters should
adventure logsheets. Give your name and DCI attempt to divide treasure evenly whenever
number (if applicable) so players can record who possible. Gold piece values listed for sellable
ran the session. gear are calculated at their selling price, not their
purchase price.
Experience Consumable magic items should be divided
Total up all combat experience earned for defeated up however the group sees fit. If more than one
foes, and divide by the number of characters present character is interested in a specific consumable
in the combat. For non-combat experience, the magic item, the DM can determine who gets it
rewards are listed per character. Give all characters randomly should the group be unable to decide.
in the party non-combat experience awards unless Permanent magic items are divided according
otherwise noted. to a system. See the sidebar if the adventure awards
permanent magic items.
Combat Awards
Treasure Awards
Name of Foe XP per Foe
Assassin 3,900 Item Name GP Value
Archmage 8,400 Lord Sage’s Reward (Yorvir) 3,000 gp
Banshee 1,100 Lord Sage’s Reward (Painting) 2,000 gp
Beholder zombie 1,800 Adelajda’s Records 1,000 gp
Ghoul 200 or
Iron golem 15,000 Radomil’s Clockworks 1,000 gp
Mage 2,300 Hidden Fountain Cache 1,000 gp
Mutated Siria (Yochlol) 5,900 Yorvir’s Jewelry 2,000 gp
Ogre zombie 450 Miltiades’s Trophies 2,000 gp
Priest 450
Stone golem 5,900 The clerics gave the characters an explorer’s pack
Vampire spawn 1,800 that also has two bottles of holy water, a holy symbol
Yorvir Glandon (Vampire) 13,000 of Kelemvor, and an additional five torches. These
items may be kept.

Non-Combat Awards
Task or Accomplishment XP per Char.
Recover the Painting 500

The minimum total award for each character

participating in this adventure is 8,625 experience
points.
The maximum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 11,500
experience points.

P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
29 R E WA R D S

Permanent Magic Item Distribution
D&D Adventurers League has a system in place
to determine who is awarded permanent magic
items at the end of a session. Each character’s
logsheet contains a column to record
permanent magic items for ease of reference.
• If all the players at the table agree on one
character taking possession of a permanent
magic item, that character gets the item.
• In the event that one or more characters
indicate an interest in possessing a
permanent magic item, the character that
possesses the fewest permanent magic items
gets the item. If there is a tie in the total
number of permanent magic items owned
by contesting characters, the item’s owner is
determined randomly by the DM.
Miltiades’s Shield
Armor (shield), very rare
This shield is decorated with symbols of service and
fealty. The shield empathically encourages service
to others and whenever the bearer considers
performing a selfish act, the shield enhances pangs
of conscience. While holding this shield, you have
a +3 bonus to AC. This bonus is in addition to the
shield’s normal bonus to AC.
Potion of Greater Healing
Potion, Uncommon
A description of this item can be found in the
Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Spell Scroll, Lesser Restoration
Scroll, Uncommon
This scroll is inscribed with the spell lesser
restoration. A description of this item can be found
in the Dungeon Master’s Guide.
30
Spell Scroll, Windwall
Scroll, Uncommon
This scroll is inscribed with the spell lesser
restoration. A description of this item can be found
in the Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Spell Scroll, Zone of Truth
Scroll, Uncommon
This scroll is inscribed with the spell lesser
restoration. A description of this item can be found
in the Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Eihim’s Traveling Spellbook
This slim traveling spellbook is bound in heavy
leather with the mage sigil of Eihim the Archmage,
a star burst atop the heraldry of the town of Phlan,
embossed on the cover. It contains the following
spells:
1st - detect magic, identify, mage armor, magic
missile;
2nd - detect thoughts, mirror image, misty step;
3rd - counterspell, fly, lightning bolt;
4th - banishment, evard’s black tentacles, fire
shield, stoneskin;
5th - cone of cold, wall of force;
6th - disintegration;
7th - teleport;
8th - maze;
9th - time stop.
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
R E WA R D S
Downtime
Each character receives ten downtime days at the
conclusion of this adventure.

Renown
All faction members earn one renown point for
participating in this adventure. Members of the
Emerald Enclave receive a second renown point
if they recover the painting successfully.

DM Rewards
You receive 2,875 XP, 1,438 gp, and ten downtime
days for running this session.

Story Rewards
Characters have the opportunity to earn the
following story awards during this adventure.
Barbarian. You have shown a willful disregard for
the preservation of knowledge in Mantor’s Library.
The librarians remember your callous disregard for
the books and you have disadvantage on any ability
checks made to convince the librarians to assist you.
Blasphemer. You have robbed the Necropolis or
allowed others to do so and your behavior has
been reported back to the church of Kelemvor.
Your despised name is spread far and wide
among its clergy. Because of this, all members of
Kelemvor’s clergy are highly distrustful of you. So
long as you have this enmity, all future Charisma
(Deception, Intimidation, or Persuasion) checks
made against members of Kelemvor’s faithful are
made with disadvantage. Additionally, the cost for
any spellcasting services provided by the clergy of
Kelemvor is increased by 10%. If you have Enmity
of Doomguide Yovir Glandon from DDEX1-4 Dues
from the Dead, your costs instead increase by 50%.
Exposed. You have been previously exposed to
Godstouched disease. In any adventure where you
might contract this disease, increase your chance by
10%.

P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
31 R E WA R D S
 Appendix: NPC / Monster Statistics Banshee
Medium undead, chaotic evil
Assassin Armor Class 12
Medium humanoid (any race), any non-good alignment Hit Points 58 (13d8)
Armor Class 15 (studded leather) Speed 30 ft
Hit Points 78 (12d8 + 24) STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Speed 30 ft. 1 (-5) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 12 (+1) 11 (+0) 17 (+3)
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
11 (+0) 16 (+3) 14 (+2) 13 (+1) 11 (+0) 10 (+0) Saving Throws Wis +2, Cha +5
Damage Resistances acid, fire, lightning,
Saving Throws Dex +7, Int +5 thunder; bludgeoning, piercing, and slashing from
Skills Acrobatics +7, Deception +4, Perception +4, nonmagical attacks
Stealth +11 Damage Immunities cold, necrotic, poison
Damage Resistances poison Condition Immunities charmed, exhaustion,
Senses passive Perception 14 frightened, grappled, paralyzed, petrified, poisoned,
Languages Thieves’ cant plus any two languages prone, restrained
Challenge 8 (3,900 XP) Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 10
Assassinate. During its first turn, the assassin has Languages Common, Elvish
advantage on attack rolls against any creature that Challenge 4 (1,100 XP)
hasn’t taken a turn. Any hit the assassin scores Detect Life. The banshee can magically sense the
against a surprised creature is a critical hit. presence of living creatures up to 5 miles away. She
Evasion. If the assassin is subjected to an effect knows the general direction they’re in but not their
that allows it to make a Dexterity saving throw to exact locations.
take only half damage, the assassin instead takes no Incorporeal Movement. The banshee can move
damage if it succeeds on the saving throw, and only through other creatures and objects as if they were
half damage if it fails. difficult terrain. She takes 5 (1d10) force damage if
Sneak Attack (1/Turn). The assassin deals an she ends her turn inside an object.
extra 13 (4d6) damage when it hits a target with a
weapon attack and has advantage on the attack roll, Actions
or when the target is within 5 feet of an ally of the Corrupting Touch. Melee Spell Attack: +4 to hit,
assassin that isn’t incapacitated and the assassin reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 12 (3d6 + 2) necrotic
doesn’t have disadvantage on the attack roll. damage.
Actions Horrifying Visage. Each non-undead creature
within 60 feet of the banshee that can see her must
Multiattack. The assassin makes two shortsword attacks. succeed on a DC 13 Wisdom saving throw or be
Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 frightened for 1 minute. A frightened target can
ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) piercing damage, and repeat the saving throw at the end of each of its
the target must make a DC 15 Constitution saving turns, with disadvantage if the banshee is within
throw, taking 24 (7d6) poison damage on a failed line of sight, ending the effect on itself on a success.
save, or half as much damage on a successful one. If a target’s saving throw is successful or the effect
Light Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +7 to ends for it, the target is immune to the banshee’s
hit, range 80/320 ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d8 + 3) Horrifying Visage for the next 24 hours.
piercing damage, and the target must make a DC 15 Wail (1/Day). The banshee releases a mournful
Constitution saving throw, taking 24 (7d6) poison wail, provided that she isn’t in sunlight. This wail
damage on a failed save, or half as much damage on has no effect on constructs and undead. All other
a successful one. creatures within 30 feet of her than can hear her

P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
32 APPENDIX
must make a DC 13 Constitution saving throw. On a 4. Disintegration Ray. If the target is a creature, it
failure, a creature drops to 0 hit points. On a success, must succeed on a DC 14 Dexterity saving throw
a creature takes 10 (3d6) psychic damage. or take 45 (10d8) force damage. If this damage
reduces the creature to 0 hit points, its body
Beholder Zombie becomes a pile of fine gray dust.
Large undead, neutral evil If the target is a Large or smaller
Armor Class 15 (natural armor) nonmagical object or creation of magical force,
Hit Points 93 (11d10+33) it is disintegrated without a saving throw. If the
Speed 0 ft., fly 20 ft. (hover) target is a Huge or larger nonmagical object or
creation of magical force, this ray disintegrates
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
10 (+0) 8 (-1) 16 (+3) 3 (-4) 8 (-1) 5 (-3) a 10-foot cube of it.

Saving Throws Wis +2

Damage Immunities poison
Condition Immunities poisoned
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 9
Languages understands Deep Speech and
Undercommon but can’t speak
Challenge 5 (1,800 XP)

Undead Fortitude. If damage reduces the zombie

to 0 hit points, it must make a Constitution saving
throw with a DC of 5+the damage taken, unless the
damage is radiant or from a critical hit. On a success,
the zombie drops to 1 hit point instead.
Actions
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +3 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
target. Hit: 14 (4d6) piercing damage.
Eye Ray. The zombie uses a random magical eye ray,
choosing a target that it can see within 60 feet of it.
1. Paralyzing Ray. The targeted creature must
succeed on a DC 14 Constitution saving throw or
be paralyzed for 1 minute. The target can repeat
the saving throw at the end of each of its turns,
ending the effect on a success
2. Fear Ray. The targeted creature must succeed
on a DC 14 Wisdom saving throw or be
frightened for 1 minute. The target can repeat
the saving throw at the end of each of its turns,
ending the effect on itself on a success.
3. Enervation Ray. The targeted creature must
make a DC 14 Constitution saving throw, taking
36 (8d8) necrotic damage on a failed save, or
half as much damage on a successful one.

P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
33 APPENDIX
 Former Doomguide Yorvir Glandon
(Vampire Cleric)
Medium undead (shapechanger), lawful evil
Armor Class 16 (natural armor)
Hit Points 144 (17d8 + 68)
Speed 30ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
18 (+4) 18 (+4) 18 (+4) 15 (+2) 17 (+3) 18 (+4) at the start of its turn if it has at least 1 hit point
Saving Throws Dex +9, Wis +8, Cha +9
Skills Perception +8, Stealth +9
Damage Resistance necrotic; bludgeoning,
piercing, and slashing from nonmagical weapons
Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 17
Languages Common
Challenge 15 (13,000 XP)
Shapechanger. If the vampire isn’t in sun light or
running water, it can use its action to polymorph in
to a Tiny bat or a Medium cloud of mist, or back into
its true form.
While in bat form, the vampire can’t speak, its
walking speed is 5 feet, and it has a flying speed of
30 feet. Its statistics, other than its size and speed,
are unchanged. Anything it is wearing transforms
with it, but nothing it is carrying does. It reverts to
its true form if it dies.
While in mist form, the vampire can’t take
any actions, speak, or manipulate objects. It is
weightless, has a flying speed of 20 feet, can hover,
and can enter a hostile creature’s space and stop
there. In addition, if air can pass through a space,
the mist can do so without squeezing, and it can’t
pass through water. It has advantage on Strength,
Dexterity, and Constitution saving throws, and it
is immune to all nonmagical damage, except the
damage it takes from sunlight.
Legendary Resistance (3/Day). If the vampire fails a
saving throw, it can choose to succeed instead.
Misty Escape. When it drops to 0 hit points outside
its resting place, the vampire transforms into a
cloud of mist (as in the Shapechanger trait) instead
of falling unconscious, provided that it isn’t in sun
light or running water. If it can’t transform, it is
destroyed.
34
While it has 0 hit points in mist form, it can’t
revert to its vampire form, and it must reach its
resting place within 2 hours or be destroyed. Once
in its resting place, it reverts to its vampire form. It
is then paralyzed until it regains at least 1 hit point.
After spending 1 hour in its resting place with 0 hit
points, it regains 1 hit point.
Regeneration. The vampire regains 20 hit points
and isn’t in sun light or running water. lf the
vampire takes radiant damage or damage from holy
water, this trait doesn’t function at the start of the
vampire’s next turn .
Spider Climb. The vampire can climb difficult
surfaces, including upside down on ceilings, without
needing to make an ability check.
Vampire Weaknesses. The vampire has the
following flaws:
• Forbiddance. The vampire can’t enter a
residence without an invitation from one of the
occupants,
• Harmed by Running Water. The vampire takes
20 acid damage if it ends its turn in running
water.
• Stake to the Heart. If a piercing weapon made
of wood is driven into the vampire’s heart
while the vampire is incapacitated in its resting
place, the vampire is paralyzed until the stake is
removed.
• Sunlight Hypersensitivity. The vampire takes
20 radiant damage when it starts its turn in
sunlight. While in sun light, it has disadvantage
on attack rolls and ability checks.
Spellcasting. The vampire is a 9th-level spellcaster.
His spellcasting ability is Wisdom (save DC 14,
+6 to hit with spell attacks). The vampire has the
following cleric spells prepared:
Cantrips (at will): guidance, poison spray,
resistance, spare the dying, thaumaturgy
1st level (4 slots): cure wounds, guiding bolt, ray
of sickness
2nd level (3 slots): blindness/deafness, lesser
restoration, spiritual weapon
3rd level (3 slots): dispel magic, vampiric touch
4th level (3 slots): blight, banishment
5th level (1 slots): antilife shell, flame strike
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
APPENDIX
Actions Legendary Actions
Multiattack (Vampire Form Only). The vampire The vampire can take 3 legendary actions, choosing
makes two attacks, only one of which can be a bite from the options below. Only one legendary action
attack. option can be used at a time and only at the end of
Unarmed Strike (Vampire Form Only). Melee another creature’s turn. The vampire regains spent
Weapon Attack: +9 to hit, reach 5 ft., one creature. legendary actions at the start of its turn.
Hit: 8 (1d8 + 4) bludgeoning damage. Instead of Move. The vampire moves up to its speed without
dealing damage, the vampire can grapple the target provoking opportunity attacks.
(escape DC 18). Unarmed Strike. The vampire makes one unarmed
Bite (Bat or Vampire Form Only). Melee Weapon strike.
Attack: +9 to hit, reach 5 ft., one willing creature, Bite (Costs 2 Actions). The vampire makes one bite
or a creature that is grappled by the vampire, attack.
incapacitated, or restrained. Hit: 7 (1d6 + 4)
piercing damage plus 10 (3d6) necrotic damage.
The target’s hit point maximum is reduced by an
amount equal to the necrotic damage taken, and the
vampire regains hit points equal to that amount.
The reduction lasts until the target finishes a long
rest. The target dies if this effect reduces its hit point
maximum to 0. A humanoid slain in this way and
then buried in the ground rises the following night
as a vampire spawn under the vampire’s control.
Charm. The vampire targets one humanoid it
can see within 30 feet of it. If the target can see
the vampire, the target must succeed on a DC 17
Wisdom saving throw against this magic or be
charmed by the vampire. The charmed target
regards the vampire as a trusted friend to be heeded
and protected. Although the target isn’t under the
vampire’s control, it takes the vampire’s requests or
actions in the most favorable way it can, and it is a
willing target for the vampire’s bite attack.
Each time the vampire or the vampire’s
companions do anything harmful to the target, it can
repeat the saving throw, ending the effect on itself
on a success. Otherwise, the effect lasts 24 hours or
until the vampire is destroyed, is on a different plane
of existence than the target, or takes a bonus action
to end the effect.
Children of the Night (1/Day). The vampire
magically calls 2d4 swarms of bats or rats, provided
that the sun isn’t up. While outdoors, the vampire
can call 3d6 wolves instead. The called creatures
arrive in 1d4 rounds, acting as allies of the vampire
and obeying its spoken commands. The beasts
remain for 1 hour, until the vampire dies, or until the
vampire dismisses them as a bonus action.

P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
35 APPENDIX
 Eihim, Archmage
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
Armor Class 12 (15 with mage armor)
Hit Points 99 (18d8 + 18)
Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
10 (+0) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 20 (+5) 15 (+2) 16 (+3) 1 (−5) 17 (+3)
Saving Throws Int +9, Wis +6
Skills Arcana +13, History +13
Damage Resistance damage from spells;
nonmagical bludgeoning, piercing, and slashing
(from stoneskin)
Senses passive Perception 12
Languages any six languages
Challenge 12 (8,400 XP)
Magic Resistance. The archmage has advantage
on saving throws against spells and other magical
effects.
Spellcasting. The archmage is an 18th‐level
spellcaster. Its spellcasting ability is Intelligence
(spell save DC 17, +9 to hit with spell attacks). The
archmage can cast disguise self and invisibility* at
will and has the following wizard spells prepared:
Cantrips (at will): fire bolt, light, mage hand,
prestidigitation, shocking grasp
1st level (4 slots): detect magic, identify, mage
armor*, magic missile
2nd level (3 slots): detect thoughts, mirror image,
misty step
3rd level (3 slots): counterspell, fly, lightning bolt
4th level (3 slots): banishment, evard’s black
tentacles, fire shield, stoneskin*
5th level (3 slots): cone of cold, wall of force
6th level (1 slot): disintegration
7th level (1 slot): teleport
8th level (1 slot): maze
9th level (1 slot): time stop
*The archmage casts these spells on itself before
combat.
Actions
Dagger. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +6 to hit,
reach 5 ft. or range 20/60 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d4
+ 2) piercing damage.
36
Flameskull
Tiny undead, neutral evil
Armor Class 13
Hit Points 40 (9d4 + 18)
Speed 0 ft., fly 40 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
14 (+2) 16 (+3) 10 (+0) 11 (+0)
Skills Arcana +5, Perception +2
Damage Resistances lightning, necrotic, piercing
Damage Immunities cold, fire, poison
Condition Immunities charmed, frightened,
paralyzed, poisoned
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 12
Languages Common
Challenge 4 (1,100 XP)
Illumination. The flameskull sheds either dim light
in a 15-foot radius, or bright light in a 15-foot radius
and dim light for an additional 15 feet. It can switch
between the options as an action.
Magic Resistance. The flameskull has advantage
on saving throws against spells and other magical
effects.
Rejuvenation. If the flameskull is destroyed, it
regains all its hit points in 1 hour unless holy water
is sprinkled on its remains or a dispel magic or
remove curse spell is cast on them.
Spellcasting. The flameskull is a 5th-level
spellcaster. Its spellcasting ability is Intelligence
(spell save DC 13, +5 to hit with spell attacks). It
requires no somatic or material components to cast
its spells. The flameskull has the following wizard
spells prepared:
Cantrip (at will): mage hand
1st level (3 slots): magic missile, shield
2nd level (2 slots): blur, flaming sphere
3rd level (1 slot): fireball
Actions
Multiattack. The flameskull uses Fire Ray twice.
Fire Ray. Ranged Spell Attack: +5 to hit, range 30 ft.,
one target. Hit: 10 (3d6) fire damage.
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
APPENDIX
Ghoul Iron Golem
Medium undead, chaotic evil Large Construct, unaligned
Armor Class 12 Armor Class 20 (natural armor)
Hit Points 22 (5d8) Hit Points 210 (20d10 + 100)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
13 (+1) 15 (+2) 10 (+0) 7 (−2) 10 (+0) 6 (−2) 24 (+7) 9 (-1) 20 (+5) 3 (-4) 11 (+0) 1 (-5)

Damage Immunities poison Damage Immunities. fire, poison, psychic;

Condition Immunities charmed, exhaustion,
poisoned
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 10
Languages Common
Challenge 1 (200 XP)
Actions
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
creature. Hit: 9 (2d6 + 2) piercing damage.
Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 7 (2d4 + 2) slashing damage. If the
target is a creature other than an elf or undead, it
must succeed on a DC 10 Constitution saving throw
or be paralyzed for 1 minute. The target can repeat
the saving throw at the end of each of its turns,
ending the effect on itself on a success.
bludgeoning, piercing, and slashing from
nonmagical weapons that aren’t adamantine
Condition Immunities. charmed, exhaustion,
frightened, paralyzed, petrified, poisoned
Senses. darkvision 120 ft., Passive Perception 10
Languages. understands the languages of its
creator, but can’t speak
Challenge. 16 (15,000 XP)
Fire Absorption. Whenever the golem is subjected
to fire damage, it takes no damage and instead
regains a number of hit points equal to the fire
damage dealt.
Immutable Form. The golem is immune to any spell
or effect that would alter its form.
Magic Resistance. The golem has advantage on
saving throws against spells and other magical
effects.
Magic Weapons. The golem’s weapon attacks are
magical.
Actions
Multiattack. The golem makes two melee attacks.
Slam. Melee Weapon Attack: +13 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 20 (3d8 + 7) bludgeoning damage.
Sword. Melee Weapon Attack: +13 to hit, reach 10 ft.,
one target. Hit: 23 (3d10 + 7) slashing damage.
Poison Breath (Recharge 6). The golem exhales
poisonous gas in a 15-foot cone. Each creature in
that area must make a DC 19 Constitution saving
throw, taking 15 (10d8) poison damage on a failed
save, or half as much damage on a successful one.

P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
37 APPENDIX
 Mage Priest
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
Armor Class 12 (15 with mage armor) Armor Class 13 (chain shirt)
Hit Points 40 (9d8) Hit Points 27 (5d8 + 5)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 25 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
9 (−1) 14 (+2) 11 (+0) 17 (+3) 12 (+1) 11 (+0) 10 (+0) 10 (+0) 12 (+1) 13 (+1) 16 (+3) 13 (+1)

Saving Throws Int +6, Wis +4
Skills Arcana +6, History +6
Senses passive Perception 11
Languages any four languages
Challenge 6 (2,300 XP)
Spellcasting. The mage is a 9th-level spellcaster.
Its spellcasting ability is Intelligence (spell save DC
14, +6 to hit with spell attacks). The mage has the
following wizard spells prepared:
Cantrips (at will): fire bolt, light, mage hand,
prestidigitation
1st level (4 slots): detect magic, mage armor,
magic missile, shield
2nd level (3 slots): misty step, suggestion
3rd level (3 slots): counterspell, fireball, fly
4th level (3 slots): greater invisibility, ice storm
5th level (1 slot): cone of cold
Actions
Dagger. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack: +5 to hit,
reach 5 ft. or range 20/60 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d4
+ 2) piercing damage.
Skills Medicine +7, Persuasion +3, Religion +4
Senses passive Perception 13
Languages any two languages
Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Divine Eminence. As a bonus action, the priest
can expend a spell slot to cause its melee weapon
attacks to magically deal an extra 10 (3d6) radiant
damage to a target on a hit. This benefit lasts until
the end of the turn. If the priest expends a spell slot
of 2nd level or higher, the extra damage increases by
1d6 for each level above 1st.
Spellcasting. The priest is a 5th-level spellcaster.
Its spellcasting ability is Wisdom (spell save DC
13, +5 to hit with spell attacks). The priest has the
following cleric spells prepared:
Cantrips (at will): light, sacred flame,
thaumaturgy
1st level (4 slots): cure wounds, guiding bolt,
sanctuary
2nd level (3 slots): lesser restoration, spiritual
weapon
3rd level (2 slots): dispel magic, spirit guardians
Actions
Mace. Melee Weapon Attack: +2 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 3 (1d6) bludgeoning damage.

P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
38 APPENDIX
Stone Golem
Large construct, unaligned
Armor Class 17 (natural armor)
Hit Points 178 (17d10 + 85)
Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
22 (+6) 9 (-1) 20 (+5) 3 (-4) 11 (+0) 1 (-5)
Damage Immunities poison, psychic; bludgeoning,
piercing, and slashing from nonmagical weapons
that aren’t adamantine
Condition Immunities charmed, exhaustion,
frightened, paralyzed, petrified, poisoned
Senses darkvision 120 ft., passive Perception 10
Languages understands the language of its creator
but can’t speak
Challenge 10 (5,900 XP)
Immutable Form. The golem is immune to any spell
or effect that would alter its form.
Magic Resistance. The golem has advantage on
saving throws against spells and other magical
effects.
Magic Weapons. The golem’s weapon attacks are
magical.
Actions
Multiattack. The golem makes two slam attacks.
Slam. Melee Weapon Attack: +10 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 19 (3d8 + 6) bludgeoning damage.
Slow (Recharge 5‐6). The golem targets one or
more creatures it can see within 10 feet of it. Each
target must make a DC 17 Wisdom saving throw
against this magic. On a failed save, a target can’t
use reactions, its speed is halved, and it can’t make
more than one attack on its turn. In addition, the
target can take either an action or a bonus action on
its turn, not both. These effects last for 1 minute. A
target can repeat the saving throw at the end of each
of its turns, ending the effects on itself on a success.
39
Wraith
Medium undead, neutral evil
Armor Class 13
Hit Points 67 (9d8 + 27)
Speed 0 ft., fly 60 ft. (hover)
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
6 (-2) 16 (+3) 16 (+3) 12 (+1) 14 (+2) 15 (+2)
Damage Resistances acid, cold, fire, lightning,
thunder; bludgeoning, piercing, and slashing from
nonmagical attacks that aren’t silvered
Damage Immunities necrotic, poison
Condition Immunities charmed, exhaustion,
grappled, paralyzed, petrified, poisoned, prone,
restrained
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 12
Languages the languages it knew in life
Challenge 5 (1800 XP)
Incorporeal Movement. The wraith can move
through other creatures and objects as if they were
difficult terrain. It takes 5 (1d10) force damage if it
ends its turn inside an object.
Sunlight Sensitivity. While in sunlight, the wraith
has disadvantage on attack rolls, as well as on
Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on sight.
Actions
Life Drain. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5
ft., one creature. Hit: 21 (4d8 + 3) necrotic damage.
The target must succeed on a DC 14 Constitution
saving throw or its hit point maximum is reduced
by an amount equal to the damage taken. This
reduction lasts until the target finishes a long rest.
The target dies if this effect reduces its hit point
maximum to 0.
Create Specter. The wraith targets a humanoid
within 10 feet of it that has been dead for no longer
than 1 minute and died violently. The target’s spirit
rises as a specter in the space of its corpse or in the
nearest unoccupied space. The specter is under the
wraith’s control. The wraith can have no more than
seven specters under its control at one time.
P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
APPENDIX
 Vampire Spawn Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, range 5 ft., one
Medium undead, neutral evil willing creature, or a creature that is grappled by
the spawn, incapacitated, or restrained. Hit: 6 (1d6
Armor Class 15 (natural armor)
+ 3) piercing damage plus 7 (2d6) necrotic damage.
Hit Points 60 (11d6 + 22) The target’s hit point maximum is reduced by an
Speed 30 ft. amount equal to the necrotic damage taken, and
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA the spawn regains hit points equal to that amount.
16 (+3) 16 (+3) 14 (+2) 11 (+0) 10 (+0) 12 (+1) The reduction lasts until the target finishes a long
rest. The target dies if this effect reduces its hit point
Saving Throws Dex +6, Wis +3 maximum to 0.
Skills Perception +3, Stealth +6
Reactions
Damage Resistances necrotic
Insightful Defense. When an attacker the spawn
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 13
can see hits it with an attack, the spawn can halve
Languages Common the damage against it.
Challenge 4 (1,100 XP)
Ogre Zombie
Regeneration. The spawn regains 10 hit points at
the start of its turn if it has at least 1 hit point and Large undead, neutral evil
isn’t in direct sunlight or running water. If it takes Armor Class 8
radiant damage or damage from holy water, this Hit Points 85 (9d10+36)
trait doesn’t function at the start of her next turn. Speed 30 ft.
Spider Climb. The spawn can climb difficult STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
surfaces, including upside down on ceilings, without 19 (+4) 6 (-2) 18 (+4) 3 (-4) 6 (-4) 5 (-3)
needing to make an ability check.
Vampire Weaknesses. The spawn has the following Saving Throws Wis +0
flaws: Damage Immunities poison
• Forbiddance. The spawn can’t enter a residence Condition Immunities poisoned
with an invitation from one of the occupants. Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 8
• Harmed by Running Water. The spawn takes Languages understands Giant and Common but
20 acid damage when it ends its turn in running can’t speak
water. Challenge 2 (450 XP)
• Stake to the Heart. The spawn is destroyed if
a piercing weapon made of wood is driven into Actions
its heart while it is incapacitated in her resting Morningstar. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach
place. 5 ft., one target. Hit: 13 (2d8 + 4) bludgeoning
• Sunlight Hypersensitivity. The spawn takes 20 damage.
radiant damage when it starts its turn in direct
sunlight. While in direct sunlight, the spawn has
disadvantage on attack rolls and ability checks.
Actions
Multiattack. The spawn makes two melee attacks,
only one of which can be a bite attack.
Claws. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one creature. Hit: 8 (2d4 + 3) slashing damage.
Instead of dealing damage, the spawn can grapple
her target (escape DC 13).

P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
40 APPENDIX
Yochlol spider form) damage plus 21 (6d6) poison damage.
Medium fiend (demon, shapechanger), chaotic evil Mist Form. The yochlol transforms into toxic mist or
Armor Class 15 (natural armor) reverts to its true form. Any equipment it is wearing
Hit Points 136 (16d8 + 64) or carrying is also transformed. It reverts to its true
Speed 30 ft., climb 30 ft. form if it dies.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA While in mist form, the yochlol is incapacitated
15 (+2) 14 (+2) 18 (+4) 13 (+1) 15 (+2) 15 (+2) and can’t speak. It has a flying speed of 30 feet, can
hover, and can pass through any space that isn’t
Saving Throws. Dex +6, Int +5, Wis +6, Cha +6 airtight. It has advantage on Strength, Dexterity,
Skills. Deception +10, Insight +6 and Constitution saving throws, and it is immune to
Damage Resistances. cold, fire, lightning, nonmagic damage.
bludgeoning, piercing, and slashing from While in mist form, the yochlol can enter a
nonmagical weapons creature’s space and stop there. Each time that
Damage Immunities. poison creature starts its turn with the yochlol in its space,
the creature must succeed on a DC 14 Constitution
Condition Immunities. poisoned
saving throw or be poisoned until the start of its
Senses. darkvision 120 ft., Passive Perception 12 next turn. While poisoned in this way, the target is
Languages. Abyssal, Elven, Undercommon incapacitated.
Challenge. 10 (5,900 XP)
Shapechanger. The yochlol can use its action to
polymorph into a form that resembles a female
drow or giant spider, or back to its true form. Its
statistics are the same in each form. Any equipment
it is wearing or carrying its transformed. It reverts
to its true form if it dies.
Magic Resistance. The yochlol has advantage on
saving throws against spells and other magical
effects.
Spider Climb. The yochlol can climb difficult
surfaces, including upside down on ceilings, without
needing to make an ability check.
Innate Spellcasting. The yochlol’s spellcasting
ability is Charisma (spell save DC 14). The yochlol
can innately cast the following sells requiring no
material components.
At Will: detect thoughts, web
1/day: dominate person
Web Walker. The yochlol ignores movement
restrictions caused by webbing.
Actions
Multiattack. The yochlol makes two melee attacks.
Slam (Bite in Spider Form). Melee Weapon Attack:
+6 to hit, reach 5 ft. (10 ft. in demon form), one
target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) bludgeoning (piercing in

P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
41 APPENDIX
 Player Handout: Rewards
Magic Items
Miltiades’s Shield
Armor (shield), very rare
This shield is decorated with symbols of service and
fealty. The shield empathically encourages service
to others and whenever the bearer considers
performing a selfish act, the shield enhances pangs
of conscious. While holding this shield, you have
a +3 bonus to AC. This bonus is in addition to the
shield’s normal bonus to AC.
Potion of Greater Healing
Potion, Uncommon
A description of this item can be found in the
Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Spell Scroll, Lesser Restoration
Scroll, Uncommon
This scroll is inscribed with the spell lesser
restoration. A description of this item can be found
in the Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Spell Scroll, Windwall
Scroll, Uncommon
This scroll is inscribed with the spell lesser
restoration. A description of this item can be found
in the Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Story Awards
Characters have the opportunity to earn the
following story awards during this adventure.
Barbarian. You have shown a willful disregard for
the preservation of knowledge in Mantor’s Library.
The librarians remember your callous disregard for
the books and you have disadvantage on any ability
checks made to convince the librarians to assist you.
Blasphemer. You have robbed the Necropolis or
allowed others to do so and your behavior has
been reported back to the church of Kelemvor.
Your despised name is spread far and wide
among its clergy. Because of this, all members of
Kelemvor’s clergy are highly distrustful of you. So
long as you have this enmity, all future Charisma
(Deception, Intimidation, or Persuasion) checks
made against members of Kelemvor’s faithful are
made with disadvantage. Additionally, the cost for
any spellcasting services provided by the clergy of
Kelemvor is increased by 10%. If you have Enmity of
Doomguide Yovir Glandon from DDEX1-4 Dues from
the Dead, your costs instead increase by 50%.
Exposed. You have been previously exposed to
Godstouched disease. In any adventure where you
might contract this disease, increase your chance by
10%.

Spell Scroll, Zone of Truth

Scroll, Uncommon
This scroll is inscribed with the spell lesser
restoration. A description of this item can be found
in the Dungeon Master’s Guide.
Eihim’s Traveling Spellbook
This slim traveling spellbook is bound in heavy
leather with the mage sigil of Eihim the Archmage,
a star burst atop the heraldry of the town of Phlan,
embossed on the cover. It contains the following
spells: 1st-detect magic, identify, mage armor,
magic missile; 2nd-detect thoughts, mirror image,
misty step; 3rd-counterspell, fly, lightning bolt;
4th-banishment, evard’s black tentacles, fire shield,
stoneskin; 5th-cone of cold, wall of force; 6th-
disintegration; 7th-teleport; 8th-maze; 9th-time
stop.

42
Handout 1

P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
43 APPENDIX
 P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
44 APPENDIX
 P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
45 APPENDIX
 P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
46 APPENDIX
 P H L A N 1 - 1 / S E P U LT U R E :
47 APPENDIX
 ENEMY OF MY
ENEMY
Will Doyle
Adventure Designer
Adventure Code: PHLAN1-2

Something odd is happening to the citizens of Phlan. Some have

inexplicably gone mad and must be restrained, while others have
developed strange magical abilities. No one is immune as it has affected
young and old, rich and poor, strong and weak. Opinions about the cause
are plentiful, but some theories seem more solid than others. A D&D
Adventurers League adventure for character levels 11 to 16 set in and
around Phlan.
A four-hour adventure for 11th-16th level characters

Producer: Baldman Games

Hulburg Administrator & Developer: Robert Alaniz
Editing and Layout: Encoded Designs
Cartography: John Arcadian
Organized Play: Chris Lindsay
D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall,
Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks, Alan Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster
Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League, all other Wizards of the Coast product names, and their respective
logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive likenesses
are property of Wizards of the Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America.
Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the express written
permission of Wizards of the Coast.
©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31,
2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK.
 Introduction
Enemy of My Enemy is the second installment of the Baldman
Games Alliances trilogy.

This adventure is designed for three to seven 10th -16th level characters, and is
optimized for five 12th-level characters.
The adventure is set in the Moonsea region of the Forgotten Realms, in and around the city
of Phlan.

The D&D Adventurers League Preparing the Adventure

This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of
the D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure,
players track their characters’ experience, treasure,
and other rewards, and can take those characters
through other adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a
store event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a
DCI number. This number is your official Wizards of
the Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have
a number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to
use to create and advance their characters. Players
can continue to play their characters after the
storyline season has finished, possibly participating
in a second or third storyline with those same
characters. A character’s level is the only limitation
for adventure play. A player cannot use a character
of a level higher or lower than the level range of a
D&D Adventurers League adventure.
For more information on playing, running
games as a Dungeon Master, and organizing games
for the D&D Adventurers League, please visit the
D&D Adventurers League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
• Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
• Read through the adventure, taking notes of
anything you’d like to highlight or remind
yourself while running the adventure, such as
a way you’d like to portray an NPC or a tactic
you’d like to use in a combat.
• Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
• Gather together any resources you’d like to
use to aid you in running this adventure--such
as notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and
battlemaps.
• If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as
noted throughout the adventure.
Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
• Character name and level
• Character race and class
• Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most
common passive ability check
• Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, etc.)
Players that have characters outside the
adventure’s level range cannot participate in
the adventure with those characters. Players

2 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:

I N T RO D U C T I O N
with ineligible characters can make a new 1st-level
character or use a pregenerated character. Players
can play an adventure they previously played or
ran as a Dungeon Master, but not with the same
character.
Ensure that each player has an official
adventure logsheet for his or her character (if not,
get one from the organizer). The player fills out
the adventure name, session number, date, and
your name and DCI number. In addition, the player
also fills in the starting values for experience, gold,
downtime, renown, and number of permanent
magic items. He or she fill in the other values and
write notes at the conclusion of the session. Each
player is responsible for maintaining an accurate
logsheet.
If you have time, you can do a quick scan of
a player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing
looks out of order. If you see magic items of very
high rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you
can ask players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict
item use or ask them to use a standard ability
score array. Point players to the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and
it’s the beginning of an adventure or episode,
they can declare their activity and spend the days
now. Alternatively, they can do so at the end of
the adventure or episode. Players should select
their characters’ spells and other daily options
prior to the start of the adventure, unless the
adventure specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread
the adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, you may see sidebars
to help make adjustments for smaller/larger
groups, and characters of higher/lower levels than
the optimized group. Most of the time, this is used
for combat encounters.
You may adjust the adventure beyond the
guidelines given. For example, if you’re playing
with a group of inexperienced players, you might
want to make the adventure a little easier; for
very experienced players, you may want to make
3 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
it a little harder. Therefore, five categories of
party strength have been created for you to use
as a guide. Feel free to use a different adjustment
during the adventure if the recommended party
strength feels off for the group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of
five 1th-level characters. To figure out whether
you need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
• Add up the total levels of all the characters
• Divide the total by the number of characters
• Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round
fractions of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table:
Determining Party Strength
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very Weak
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very Strong
Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment
of the game for the players. You help guide the
narrative and bring the words on these pages
to life. The outcome of a fun game session often
creates stories that live well beyond the play at the
table. Always follow this golden rule when you DM
for a group:
Make decisions and adjudications that
enhance the fun of the adventure when
possible.
To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
• You are empowered to make adjustments to
the adventure and make decisions about how the
group interacts with the world of this adventure.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Doing so is especially important and applicable
outside of combat, but feel free to adjust the
adventure for groups that are having too easy or
too hard of a time.
• Don’t make the adventure too easy or too
difficult for a group. Never being challenged
makes for a boring game and being
overwhelmed makes for a frustrating one.
Gauge the experience of the players (not the
characters) with the game, try to feel out (or
ask) what they like in a game, and attempt to
give each of them the experience they’re after
when they play D&D. Give everyone a chance to
shine.
• Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game
session moving along appropriately. Watch for
stalling, since play loses momentum when this
happens. At the same time, make sure that the
players don’t finish too early; provide them with
a full play experience. Try to be aware of running
long or short. Adjust the pacing accordingly
• Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free
to modify the text as you see fit, especially when
dialogue is present.
• Give the players appropriate hints so they can
make informed choices about how to proceed.
Players should be given clues and hints when
appropriate so they can tackle puzzles, combat,
and interactions without getting frustrated over
lack of information. Doing so helps to encourage
immersion in the adventure and gives players
“little victories” for figuring out good choices
from clues.
In short, being the DM isn’t about following
the adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about
facilitating a fun, challenging game environment
for the players. The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has
more information on the art of running a D&D
game.
Downtime and Lifestyle
At the beginning of each play session, players must
declare whether or not they are spending any days
of downtime. The player records the downtime
spent on the adventure logsheet. The following
options are available to players during downtime
(see the D&D basic rules or the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for more information):
4 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
• Catching up
• Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
commit to crafting a single item)
• Practicing a profession
• Recuperating
• Spellcasting services
• Training
Other downtime options might be available during
adventures or unlocked through play, including
faction-specific activities.
In addition, whenever a character spends
downtime days, that character also spends the
requisite expense for his or her lifestyle. Costs
are per day, so a character that spends ten days
of downtime also spends ten days of expenses
maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some downtime
activities help with lifestyle expenses or add
lifestyle expenses.
Spellcasting Services
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can
provide some spellcasting services. Characters
need to be able to travel to the settlement to obtain
these services.
Spell services generally available include
healing and recovery spells, as well as information-
gathering spells. Other spell services might be
available as specified in the adventure. The number
of spells available to be cast as a service is limited
to a maximum of three per day total, unless
otherwise noted.
Spellcasting Services
Spell Cost
Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
Identify 20 gp
Lesser restoration 40 gp
Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
Remove curse 90 gp
Speak with dead 90 gp
Divination 210 gp
Greater restoration 450 gp
Raise dead 1,250 gp
I N T RO D U C T I O N

Acolyte Background
A character possessing the acolyte
background requesting spellcasting
services at a temple of his or her faith
may request one spell per day from the
Spellcasting Services table for free. The only
cost paid for the spell is the base price for
the consumed material component, if any.
Melvaunt is a large city where any
acolyte can find a friendly shrine or
temple.
Disease, Death, and Recovery
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might
not have the same characters return from session
to session, here are the rules when bad things
happen to characters.
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating Effects
A character still affected by diseases, poisons,
and other similar effects at the conclusion of an
adventure can spend downtime days recuperating
until such time as he or she resolves the effect to
its conclusion (see the recuperating activity in the
D&D Basic Rules).
If a character doesn’t resolve the effect
between sessions, that character begins the next
session still affected by the debilitating effect.
Death
A character who is killed during the course of
the adventure has a few options at the end of the
session (or whenever arriving back in civilization)
if no one in the adventuring party has immediate
access to a raise dead or revivify spell, or similar
magic. A character subject to a raise dead spell is
affected negatively until all long rests have been
completed during an adventure. Alternatively, each
downtime day spent after raise dead reduces the
penalty to attack rolls, saving throws, and ability
checks by 1, in addition to any other benefits the
downtime activity might provide.
5 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any
of the other options, the player creates a new
character. The new character does not have any
items or rewards possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing
any vital organs and is mostly whole) and the
player would like the character to be returned to
life, the party can take the body back to civilization
and use the dead character’s funds to pay for a
raise dead spell. A raise dead spell cast in this
manner costs the character 1,250 gp.
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As
above, except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for
the raise dead spell is paid for by the party at the
end of the session. Other characters are under no
obligation to spend their funds to bring back a
dead party member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to
4 and a member of a faction, the dead character’s
body can be returned to civilization and a patron
from the faction ensures that he or she receives a
raise dead spell. However, any character invoking
this charity forfeits all experience and rewards
from that session (both those earned prior to and
after death during that session) and cannot replay
that episode or adventure with that character
again. Once a character reaches 5th level, this
option is no longer available.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Background
For millennia, the death slaad Nethrex has
scrutinized Toril with one patient, envious eye.
Now he draws his plans against the world, reaching
out from the chaos of Limbo to poison Toril’s
oceans. Nethrex has developed a waterborne strain
of the Chaos Phage, and is testing it in the Stojanow
River.
Slaad larvae infect all who drink the polluted
river water. As each parasite grows, the personality
of its host changes. They master new skills, and
even manifest aberrant magic powers. In the final
stages of affliction, physical mutations tear their
body apart. Nethrex is yet to perfect the strain, but
yearns for it to evolve into a new breed of slaadi!
Nethrex’s minions recently seized Sorcerer’s
Isle (see DDEX1-11: Dark Pyramid of Sorcerer’s
Isle). Brave adventurers fought them off, but now
the slaadi have reclaimed the pyramid.
At the mouth of the Stojanow River, Phlan revels
in its victory over the Cult of the Dragon. They fete
their afflicted as “Godstouched”: heroes blessed
with divine boons. When the Godstouched start
dying, Knight Commander Greycastle deduces that
the water is to blame. She hatches a plan to save the
infected; including herself. But she needs help.
The State of Phlan
Phlan is an anchorage on the north coast of
the Moonsea. Its inhabitants are celebrating
the death of Vorgansharax: a green dragon
who laid claim to the town for many months.
Knight Commander Greycastle led the
alliance of heroes that slew the dragon (as
told in DDEP4: Reclamation of Phlan). In
doing so, she leaned on the neighboring
city states of Mulmaster and Hillsfar.
Masquerading as friends, these rival powers
circle hungrily, eager to steer Phlan’s future to
their own ends.
Yet the townsfolk grow weary of tyranny.
Veterans of the resistance demand a stake in
the town’s future. Merchants wish for fewer
regulations. Loyalists call for the return
of monarchy. With the militia too weak to
impose order, Greycastle has conceded to an
election. For the first time, Phlan’s citizens
have a say in their own destiny.
6 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
The Election
Four candidates have emerged as front-runners in
Phlan’s upcoming election.
Jhessail Greycastle
Knight Commander Greycastle is a hero, but her
loyalty to the Black Fists makes her vulnerable. She
pledges to:
• Establish a parliament of elected peers to
govern Phlan, and serve as First Minister.
• Reform the Black Fists and weed out
corruption in its ranks.
Barrett Sokol
The youngest scion of House Sokol has gained
popularity among the labor guilds. He pledges to:
• Reinstate the mercantile Council of Ten and
stand as High Councilor.
• Create jobs reconstructing Phlan and raising
the old city walls.
Colvin Doverson
Lord Doverson claims ancestry with the Royal
House of Daoran. If legitimized, this would make
him heir to the Cinnabar Throne. He pledges to:
• Reinstate the monarchy and crown himself
Lord Protector.
• Renegotiate trade deals with other Moonsea
ports for the benefit of Phlan’s merchants.
Graben Samaulkin
The religious fervor washing through town has
aided this priest of Bane. He pledges to:
• Establish theocratic rule and declare himself
Ruinlord of Phlan,
• Rebuild the Lyceum of the Black Lord and
appease the god with plentiful sacrifices.
The Godstouched
The townsfolk avoid drawing water from their
polluted river. Unfortunately, an explosion cracked
a cistern during the liberation, and river sludge
leaked through. Nethrex’s chaos strain has now
infected over a third of the populace.
In most folk, the affliction manifests as
personality changes and odd epiphanies. In others –
the so-called “Godstouched”– it is not so subtle. Few
are aware that the affliction ends in fatal mutation.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
Aberrant Powers
Each character in the group has a 50% chance of
starting the adventure infected by the chaos strain.
At least one character must be infected. The chaos
strain is a magical affliction, so even creatures
immune to poison or disease can be affected.
Characters infected by the strain gain access to one
of the aberrant powers listed below.
To activate an aberrant power, a character
must gain a level of exhaustion. No action is
required.
Aberrant Powers
d8 Power
1 Stoneskin. You gain resistance to
slashing and piercing damage until the
end of your next turn.
2 Fire Mind. Unattended flammable
objects within 5 ft. of your character
burst into flame.
3 Savant. You gain advantage on one
skill check made before the end of
your next turn.
4 Living Shadow. Your own shadow
uses the Help action to distract an
enemy you are fighting.
5 Lightning Rush. Your speed doubles
until the end of your next turn.
6 Time Shift. Reroll one attack, ability
check or saving throw (unless it is a
natural 1). You must keep the new
result.
7 Suckers. You gain a climb speed of
15ft. until the end of your next turn.
8 Strength. Your Strength increases to
30 until the end of your next turn (+10
ability modifier).
Characters with aberrant powers also experience
bizarre mutations. These manifest as brief “chaos
spasms” when the player rolls a natural 1 on any
ability check, attack roll, or saving throw. Roll on
the following table if this occurs:
7 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
Chaos Mutation
d8 Mutation
1 Fits. You fall prone and froth at the
mouth for 1 minute, counting as
stunned. At the end of each of your
turns, you make a DC 10 Constitution
saving throw to recover from the
effect.
2 Stench. You emit a cloud of ghastly
stench in a 15 ft. sphere around
yourself. The stench lasts for 1 minute.
All creatures inside the cloud have
disadvantage on attacks, ability checks
and saving throws.
3 Mania. On your next turn, you attack
a random creature in sight. After the
attack, you have no memory of the
event.
4 Warped Features. For 1 minute, your
nose, eyes and mouth switch positions
on your face. You cannot talk, and gain
disadvantage on ability checks that
rely on sight, hearing or smell.
5 Silly Walk. For 1 minute, your speed is
halved due to your ridiculous gait.
6 Brittle Body. Until the end of your
next turn, you are vulnerable to
bludgeoning, slashing and piercing
damage.
7 Hairy. Thick hair sprouts from
every pore. Until sheared, you have
disadvantage on ability checks and
saving throws that rely on movement.
8 Levitation. For 1 minute, you levitate
upwards at a speed of 20 ft. per turn.
Once airborne, you cannot move
unless you have a fly speed. At the
end of each of your turns, you make
a DC 15 Constitution saving throw to
recover from the effect.
Left unchecked, characters afflicted by the chaos
strain die within one month (or after 30 downtime
days have been awarded). Due to its alien nature,
only divine intervention or the magic of a wish
spell can cure the affliction. Doing so removes any
aberrant powers and chaos mutations from the
character.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Adventure Hooks
Use one of the following hooks to draw the
characters into the adventure, or devise your own.
Infected
The chaos strain has afflicted one or more
characters in the group. According to rumor,
Jhessail Greycastle has troubling theories about
the source of these powers. When the adventure
begins, the characters are on their way to meet her.
Spies
Spymasters from Hillsfar or Mulmaster have sent
the characters to spy on the election candidates.
The motives of Lord Commander Greycastle are of
particular interest.
Investigators
Characters with the Hero of the Welcomers story
award learn that the Black Fists have arrested
Glevith, king of thieves. When the adventure
begins, they are on their way to meet Greycastle
and negotiate his release.

8 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:

I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Part 1.
OUtbreak
Aesperus The adventure begins in Podol Plaza.
When everyone is ready to begin, read:
Sunlight melts the snow over Podol Plaza. With
the death of the dragon, election fever has
gripped the town. Posters plaster every wall,
and demagogues sing their candidates’ prais-
es from the soapboxes.
Just nearby, a beer tent plies its trade,
watched by thirsty laborers from the scaffolds.
Children wearing lion and eagle masks dash
underfoot, chasing a pantomime green drag-
on.
Introducing the Candidates
Ask the players to describe their characters. When
they’re done, read:
An acolyte of Bane howls at you from his
soapbox.
“A thousand curses rot Jhessail Greycastle,
betrayer of the Black Lord! She’s forsaken her
vows as a paladin! Our champion, Graben
Samalkin, calls on Greycastle to prove her
powers in public! Vote Samalkin – and bow
before the first Ruinlord of Phlan!”
One of the dwarves drinking nearby winks
at you. “Fat chance of that! So, who’re you
voting for?”
Give the players Handout 1: The Candidates.
Roleplay the scene with the friendly dwarf so the
players can express their loyalties. When the time
seems right, launch the following encounter.
The Mutated Priest
Samalkin’s demagogue is one of the “Godstouched.”
Midway through his diatribe, the chaos strain
destroys him.
The demagogue convulses mid-sentence. He
shrieks, and a mass of crab-like pincers bursts
from his stomach. As panic spreads through the
crowd, a suckered tentacle emerges from the
demagogue’s mouth, ripping his head apart in a
shower of gore.
9 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
In his death throws, the mutated priest attacks
the group. For this combat, refer to Map 1: Podol
Plaza. The mutated priest uses the statistics of a
marilith, with the following modifications:
• It is a Medium aberration with 240 hit points
• It speaks no languages, and has no telepathy
• Its longswords are pincers and its tail is a
tentacle. It does not need a longsword to use
parry.
Scaling the Encounter: Mutated Priest
Use the following recommendations to adjust
this combat encounter. These adjustments are
not cumulative:
• Very Weak Party: The mutated priest
loses 30 hit points at the start of each of
its turns.
• Weak Party: The mutated priest loses
15 hit points at the start of each of its
turns.
• Strong Party: Add another fallen child
(see complications, below
• Very Strong Party: Add two fallen
children (see complications, below).
General Features
Podol Plaza has the following important features:
Lighting. Sunlight.
Cover. Crates, barrels or wagons count as
difficult terrain. They grant half-cover to any
character hiding behind them (+2 AC and Dexterity
saving throws).
Gantries. Creatures traversing the gantries
move at half speed. To move faster, the creature
must succeed on a DC 10 Dexterity (Acrobatics)
check. On a failure, they fall to the plaza below,
taking 1d6 bludgeoning damage for every 10 feet
fallen.
PA RT 1
 Complications
The following complications add jeopardy to the
encounter. The first (Stampeding Oxen) is always
in play. If there are more than three characters,
add another complication for every additional
character.
Stampeding Oxen. Any creature that ends its
turn standing on the ground must succeed on a
DC 12 Dexterity saving throw or take 22 (4d10)
bludgeoning damage and fall prone. After 2 rounds,
the stampeding oxen thunder past.
Fallen Child. A child has fallen in the path
of the stampede. Plucking the child from danger
requires an action and a successful DC 10 Strength
(Athletics) check. The child dies under hoof if the
group fails to save them by the end of the second
round.
Overturned Cart. The oxen have overturned a
mason’s cart, crushing a halfling beneath it. Lifting
the cart requires an action and a successful DC 15
Strength check. While the halfling remains trapped,
make a death saving throw for her at the end of
each round (do not track successes).
Collapsing Gantries. As the workers flee, the
gantries collapse beneath them. At the end of each
round, there’s a 50% chance that a random section
of gantry collapses, dealing 33 (6d10) bludgeoning
damage to all creatures within 10 feet (half damage
on a successful DC 15 Dexterity saving throw). A
collapsed gantry counts as difficult terrain.
Behind the Curtain: Mutated Priest
This encounter gives players a chance to flex
their muscles and act like heroes. It should be
quick and easy: if the battle turns against the
group, the mutated priest explodes!
Aftermath
After the battle, the townsfolk gather around the
priest’s corpse. The group learns that:
• The priest was one of the “Godstouched.” Most
people believe that the gods have blessed
these townsfolk with supernatural powers.
• Others have wilder ideas about how the
Godstouched acquired their powers. Perhaps
they watched a star fall, or breathed spores
from the dragon’s thicket?
10
• Recently, some of the “Godstouched” have
disappeared. Others have shown signs of
madness.
• There are rumors of strange monsters
prowling the streets at night. The militia
remain tight-lipped on the subject but have
doubled their patrols.
Any character examining the priest’s corpse
discovers that the mutated appendages hatched
from the priest’s own stomach.
• Intelligence (Arcana) DC 18: A magical
disease mutated the priest’s flesh into a new
form. It seems extraplanar in origin.
Rescuing the Children
If the group rescues all the children, their mother
reveals herself as the wife of a local merchant. Any
characters belonging to the Lords’ Alliance gain 1
renown with their faction.
Greycastle’s Summons
A squad of Black Fist militia soon arrives on the
scene. Their sergeant, Bors Bartol, requests that
the group report to the Knight Commander. The
soldiers escort them to the Stojanow Gate.
Behind the Curtain: Mutated Priest
This encounter gives players a chance to flex their
muscles and act like heroes. It should be quick
and easy: if the battle turns against the group, the
mutated priest explodes!
The Knights of the Black Fist
After the unexpected death of the Lord
Protector, Phlan’s militia seized control
of the town. A coup tore them apart, and
half their members defected to the dragon
Vorgansharax. Lord Regent Ector Brahms died
in the revolt. Adventurers later slew Knight
Commander Aleyd Burralafter when she
succumbed to the Cults of Elemental Evil.
Command of the decimated order fell to
Jhessail Greycastle (DDEX1-10 Escape from
Phlan and DDEP4: Reclamation of Phlan).
Greycastle led the uprising against the dragon,
so most folk regard her as a hero. She is a
paladin of Bane, god of tyranny.
PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
PA RT 1
 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
11 PA RT 1
 Part 2.
Secrecy
The group meets Knight Commander Greycastle in
the dungeons beneath the Stojanow Gate.
Into the Dungeons
Read the following aloud:
The Stojanow Gate stands in ruin, its doors
blown apart during the Reclamation. When
you arrive, wooden cranes are hoisting the
mangled doors onto their hinges.
Sergeant Bartol leads you into the dun-
geons beneath the outer bailey. You arrive
outside an iron-bound door. As the sergeant
fishes for his keys, he glances back at you.
“What you’re about to see isn’t pleasant.
Keep your questions for the Lord Command-
er. All will become clear.”
Sergeant Bartol is troubled but unwilling to explain
further. He opens the door.
A dungeon hallway lined with barred cells
stretches before you. Dozens of civilians are
shackled inside the cells: men, women, and
children. As the sergeant leads you forward, a
cacophony of cries fills the air: pleas for mer-
cy, freedom, even death.
• Wisdom (Perception) DC 10: Strange,
mutant growths afflict many of the captives.
They have extra appendages, glowing eyes,
enlarged features, and worse.
Sergeant Bartol marches the group through the
cell block to Greycastle’s office. Twenty Black
Fist knights stand on guard, watching over the
afflicted. If the characters cause trouble, Greycastle
emerges to intercept them.
12
Meeting Jhessail Greycastle
Knight Commander Greycastle is the leader of
Phlan’s Black Fist militia. She’s a paladin of Bane,
but recent events have made her doubt her faith.
Knight Commander Greycastle is a wom-
an in her early thirties. She ties her hair in
a messy bunch, and her arms are knotted
with muscle. She assesses you with a single
glance, then turns to Sergeant Bartol.
“Another outbreak?”
Greycastle questions the group about the
incident in Podol Plaza. She reveals the following
information:
• “Godstouched” across town are showing signs
of aberrant mutation. Such mutations start as
brief “chaos spasms,” but soon become more
pronounced.
• There’s no cure: even divine magic doesn’t
help. As the mutations worsen, they tear their
victims apart.
• The “Godstouched” aren’t the only ones
afflicted. Hundreds of people across town
show signs of personality change. They too are
mutating.
• Her soldiers are quarantining the afflicted to
avoid mass panic, but rumors are spreading.
• Greycastle believes that the town’s drinking
water is to blame. One of the cisterns cracked
during the assault, and the polluted Stojanow
seeped through. By now, it could have infected
thousands.
PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
PA RT 2
The Silver Pyramid
Characters who’ve played DDEX1-11 Dark Pyramid
of Sorcerers Isle might guess the source of the
pollution. If not, Greycastle explains:
• Long ago, the sorcerer Yarash raised a silver
pyramid on an islet near the head of the
Stojanow. Within its walls, Yarash conducted
experiments on the local lizardfolk.
• Yarash’s experiments polluted the river
forever. In recent months, the Lord Sage
discovered that it corrupted the local flora and
fauna.
• The Lord Sage sent adventurers to investigate
the pyramid. They learned that a race of
extraplanar monsters called “slaadi” had
opened a gate to Limbo. The adventurers
closed the gate, and the pollution flushed into
the Moonsea.
• Greycastle suspects that the slaadi are back.
She offers the group 400 gp each to locate the
source of the corruption, with a bonus of 600
gp each if they discover a cure.
The characters may have fought the slaadi before.
If so, they’ll know the basics of their reproductive
cycle. Give the group Handout 2: Slaad Ecology.
If not, they’ll need a successful DC 18 Intelligence
(Arcana) check to recall the information.
If the characters have never been to Sorcerer’s
Isle, Greycastle tells them to speak to Ser Agin
Lamarck, a local historian (see below). He last
visited the silver pyramid and knows a little about
its inhabitants.
The Election
If the characters ask Greycastle about the election,
she admits that it’s a sham. By allowing the people
to vote for their leaders, they’ll remain compliant.
• Intelligence (Religion) DC 10: Such talk is
still antithetical to the teachings of Bane. The
god forbids democracy.
• Wisdom (Insight) DC 15: Greycastle doesn’t
seem convinced by her own words. The election
means more to her than she’s making out.
13
If pressured, Greycastle confesses that recent
events have made her question her faith. She wants
to reform the Black Fists as a force for justice, and
establish an honest government for Phlan. She’ll
only reveal this information if the characters seem
genuine.
Roleplaying Jhessail Greycastle
Jhessail Greycastle was once a loyal firebrand
of Bane. Like many of her militia comrades,
she wasn’t above corruption, but she was
loyal to the order. When Vorgansharax seized
the town, she led a failed uprising against her
traitorous brothers. Later, in Mulmaster and
Phlan, she helped assemble the alliance that
liberated Phlan.
The chaos strain has changed her
alignment from Lawful Evil to Chaotic Good.
Her divine powers have waned in step with
her loss of faith. She knows she is dying, and
wants to redeem herself before oblivion.
Establishing a parliament of elected peers is
her legacy to the people of Phlan.
Quote: “I’d rather have a laborer by my side,
with fire in his gut and pride in his heart, than
any one of those nobles.”
The leader of the Welcomers slumps at the
back of his cell. As he looks up, you see that
one of his bloodshot eyes has two overlapping
pupils.
“Not a pretty sight, eh?” he rasps.
Optional: Glevith, King of Thieves
If the group asks Greycastle about Glevith, she
admits to holding him in her dungeons. She won’t
release him but allows the characters to speak with
him under armed guard.
Glevith has accepted his lot. He fought alongside
Greycastle in the Reclamation and understands
why she’s imprisoned him. He promises to reward
any “Heroes of the Welcomers” if they can lift his
curse before it consumes him.
If the group finds a cure, Glevith awards each
character 200 gp. In addition, he grants them the
“Master of the Thieves’ Guild” story award.
PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
PA RT 2
 Optional: Ser Agin Lamarck Roleplaying Ser Agin Lamarck
Characters who’ve played DDEP4 Reclamation of Ser Agin is Phlan’s resident expert on history
Phlan or DDEX1-6 The Scroll Thief may have met and genealogy. The Red Wizards recently
Ser Agin before. kidnapped him to aid their investigation into
Ser Agin Lamarck’s store once specialized in the silver pyramid. At Sorcerer’s Isle, they sent
historical records. Buckets now catch meltwa- him to make peace with the pyramid’s mutant
ter from the leaky roof, and parchments litter inhabitants. Negotiations collapsed when
the floor. The noble glares at you from behind
a stack of soggy books. the wizards found another way into Yarash’s
“Oh no. You’re going to bother me with a laboratory. Shortly after, heroes from Phlan
load of questions, aren’t you?” fought off the wizards and rescued Ser Agin
(see DDEP4: Reclamation of Phlan).
Ser Agin can impart the following information:
Quote: “Darling, let me break this down into
• A clan of mutant lizardfolk inhabit the silver words you’re more likely to understand…”
pyramid. They are the descendants of Yarash’s
experiments.
• The mutants barely speak Common, so Ser
Agin invented a simple sign language to better
communicate with them. They responded well
to this.
• The mutants are dangerous but not overtly
hostile. Ser Agin advises that the characters
negotiate with them instead of fighting.
Ser Agin won’t escort the characters to the pyramid
for love nor money. He teaches the group the
following hand signals to aid communication with
the mutants:
• Thump your chest with your fist to emphasize
“Me” or “Us”. The harder you thump, the more
impressive you appear.
• Rub your belly for “Good” and slap your
forehead for “Bad”.
• Hop from foot-to-foot and wave your hands
above your head for “Go”.
• For “Kill”, slash your thumb across your neck
while hissing with your tongue.
• For “Help,” hug yourself. The harder you hug,
the more sincere you seem.

14 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:

PA RT 2
 Part 3.
Confusion
Sorcerer’s Isle is 50 miles upriver from Phlan. Due
to the urgency of the mission, Greycastle supplies
griffons for the journey. The group arrives after
two hours of flight.
A foreboding pyramid stands on an island in
the middle of the lake. Ravens flock around
its peak, and dark moss clings to its silvered
flanks.
Nothing moves on the boggy island. The lizardfolk
that camped here have retreated inside their
pyramid.
The Silver Pyramid
Steep stairs rise to doors on the north and
south sides of the pyramid. Orange waste
dribbles down the pyramid’s sides from holes
near its apex, and runs off into the river.
• Intelligence (Arcana) DC 15: The orange
waste is extraplanar in nature. It swirls with
tiny life forms.
The chaos strain infects any creature foolish
enough to drink the undiluted waste. These
creatures suffer mutations on all failed ability
checks, saving throws or attack rolls (see “The
Godstouched”, above).
Entering the Pyramid
The interior of the pyramid is too cramped to take
the griffons inside.
A labyrinth of dead-end passages and
cramped laboratories stretches before you.
•
The air in here is clammy and echoes with
strange noises.
Intelligence (Investigation) DC 12:
Hundreds of clawed footprints thread
throughout the labyrinth. Lizardfolk have been
here recently.
• Wisdom (Perception) DC 10: The strange
noises sound mechanical. They emanate from
somewhere above.
15
Any threats lurking here are long gone, so don’t
linger on exploration. Characters who’ve been here
before realize that the magic they encountered
previously is absent.
Antimagic Field
An oversized antimagic field emanates from the
planar gate at the apex of the pyramid. Nethrex
used a slaadi ritual to create the field, allowing his
minions to hide from prying eyes while they deploy
the chaos strain. The field functions as a normal
antimagic field with the following exceptions:
• The sphere has a 300-foot-radius, emanating
from the planar gate at the top of the pyramid,
and encompasses the entire pyramid.
• The planar gate occupies a “bubble” at the center
of the field, and is not subject to its effects.
• The antimagic field collapses if the gate closes.
Mutant Standoff
The mutants occupy the “Pump Room” at the
apex of the pyramid. When the group arrives, the
mutants are in the middle of a heated debate.
A large chamber opens ahead. Orange
goo surges through glass pipes on the ceil-
ing, pumped by a mechanism of cranks and
wheels. The pipes emerge from a doorway
opposite. Against the walls, pickled lizardfolk
specimens lurk inside glass tanks.
Dozens of white-scaled lizardfolk gather in
the chamber. The creatures yip and howl at
each other, snarling in an incomprehensible
language. The community has split in two.
One camp rallies behind a male with a single,
outsized tusk protruding from his lower jaw. The
other camp rallies behind a one-eyed female
wearing a bone necklace.
The debate has transfixed the whole community, so
the group can approach unseen. Sneaking past into
the gate chamber is impossible without magic.
• Wisdom (Insight) DC 15: The one-eyed
female is winning the argument.
PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
PA RT 3
 What Happened
A few weeks ago, Nethrex and his slaadi warriors
emerged through the planar gate and enslaved the
mutants. He forced them to work the pumps for his
poisoning operation.
Yesterday, githzerai hunters attacked the slaadi
forces on the other side of the gate. They forced
their way into the pyramid, but Nethrex drove
them back into Limbo, leaving the mutants alone
again.
With Nethrex gone, the mutants argue about
what to do next. They have separated into two
camps: one led by the warrior Big Tooth, and the
other by the mystic Blind Eye.
The Saviors Return
The mutants speak a degenerate form of Draconic,
but most know a little Common. If any characters
helped them in DDEX1-11 Dark Pyramid of
Sorcerers Isle or DDEP4: Reclamation of Phlan,
the argument stops at once – their saviors have
returned! The mutants reveal the following
information:
• Recently, the slaadi reopened the planar
gate and enslaved the mutants. Their leader,
“Nethrex”, forced them to pump the “chaos
strain” into the river.
• “Good men” came through the planar gate to
fight the slaadi. They drove the slaadi away,
and promised to cure all those on this world
that the strain had infected.
• Alas, the slaadi fought back. They forced the
“good men” back through the gate, leaving the
mutants alone.
The mutants take the group into the gate chamber
(see below). They say the “good men” must still be
fighting beyond.
16
Negotiating with the Mutants
If the characters are strangers, the mutants
refuse to let them near the gate chamber. They
explain what has happened and try to recruit the
characters to their cause:
• Big Tooth thinks the mutants should destroy
the planar gate.
• Blind Eye thinks they should remain at their
posts, else they risk death when Nethrex returns.
Neither option meets the group’s objectives, so the
players must find a way to win over both leaders.
Currently, Blind Eye has more support. She argues
that adventurers destroyed the gate before, yet the
slaadi returned. Big Tooth cannot counter this.
Roleplay the negotiation, only calling for
Charisma checks if the characters reach an impasse
(DC 15). The mutants can barely speak Common.
If the players make good use of sign language, they
gain advantage on Charisma checks when talking
to the mutants.
Fighting the Mutants
Combat ensues if negotiations fail badly. For this
battle, refer to Map 2: Apex of the Pyramid.
Tactics
All 45 lizardfolk rally together to drive off the
intruders. Big Tooth (a lizardfolk with 36 hit points
and 18 Strength) and Blind Eye (a lizard shaman)
attack from range. If the group kills more than 30
lizardfolk, the rest flee.
Features of the Area
The chamber has the following notable features.
Lighting. Dim light from the glowing pipes.
Glass Vats. These contain the lizardfolk “gods”:
the failed experiments of the sorcerer Yarash. A vat
shatters if it receives 10 or more points of damage
in a single attack. Any lizardfolk that sees this gains
advantage when attacking characters who harmed
their god.
PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
PA RT 3
 Scaling the Encounter: Mutant Standoff
Combat is not intended here, so no scaling
information is provided. If the lizardfolk
overwhelm the group, have them capture the
characters instead of killing them. Give the
players opportunity to negotiate their escape
or break free.
Entering the Gate Chamber
The Gate Chamber is a short walk from the
chamber where the adventurers spoke with the
mutants. When the characters enter the Gate
Chamber, read:
A planar rift hovers five feet above the floor.
Weird light emanates from the far side, bath-
ing the chamber in crimson and gold hues.
The glass pipes emerge from beyond, pump-
ing orange pestilence into your world.
17
The antimagic field emanates from the planar gate.
• Intelligence (Arcana) DC 10: Powerful magic
is at work here. Only a wish could close the gate,
but the antimagic field prevents spellcasting.
• Wisdom (Perception) DC 15: A magnificent
golden chamber is visible through the rift. The
chamber’s arched roof lies ahead, indicating
that the gate is set into the floor of the
chamber on the far side of the gate.
If a character moves within 5 ft. of the gate, it sucks
them into Limbo.
PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
PA RT 3
 Part 4.
siege
Characters who pass through the gate materialize
in Location 1 on Map 3: Limbo.
You emerge in a golden chamber. The glass
pipes snake across the mosaic floor and dis-
appear through a round window on the far
wall.
Chaos seethes beyond the window. Twist-
ing rivers of fire transform into shards of ice,
which explode into steam, then fuse into rock.
Familiar forms emerge briefly from the haze
- buildings, landscapes, creatures – before col-
lapsing into rubble.
There is no gravity in Limbo. A creature can move
up to its walking speed in any direction by merely
thinking of the desired direction of travel. Grant
the players a few moments to acclimate to their
new location. Before they leave the chamber, run
“Meeting Icelus”, below.
Meeting Icelus
A githzerai called Icelus greets the characters as
they emerge from the portal.
The mosaic floor shatters into pieces, and a
gaunt figure levitates from below. When it has
emerged, the tiles rearrange beneath its feet.
The mustard-skinned humanoid glares at you.
“You are not safe here, outlanders. State
your purpose, or be gone.”
• Intelligence (Arcana) DC 15: The creature is
a githzerai. These nomadic hunters prowl the
plane of Limbo.
Icelus is unafraid of the characters. If they attack,
he descends back through the floor. Icelus is a
githzerai zerth with 130 hit points and the ability
to speak Common.
18
Talking with Icelus
If the group parleys with Icelus, he reveals the
following information:
• Icelus belongs to a clan of githzerai hunters.
His leader Najwa is an anarch: a savant who
can create raw matter from the chaos of Limbo
and reshape it with her mind. So great are her
powers, she can even create living forms.
• Najwa learned that the death slaad Nethrex
had opened a planar gate to pump poison into
the Material Plane.
• Najwa seized the gate. She used her mental
powers to raise a citadel around it, and sent
her hunters through to kill Nethrex.
• Nethrex drove Najwa’s hunters back to Limbo.
He escaped her citadel, and regrouped with
his slaadi allies. During his assault, he mortally
injured Najwa.
• In her death throws, Najwa’s mind reshaped
the world around the gate. Her subconscious
is finding form, causing her to lose control of
the citadel’s structure.
• The githzerai know a chant that can heal her,
but it takes time to perform. With her mind
struggling to reinforce the citadel, they need
to ease her back to health gently. If not, the
citadel could implode.
• Nethrex’s slaadi are mustering to assault the
citadel. Icelus asks the characters to find a way
of stalling them until his people heal Najwa.
• If the characters buy time to save Najwa, she
can heal those afflicted by the “chaos strain.”
Icelus explains that the orange sludge comes
from a bloated slaad beyond the window.
Nethrex is experimenting on the beast to
hatch a new breed of slaad. If he perfects his
strain, the whole of Toril is in peril! (If needed,
Icelus can explain the ecology of the slaadi.
Give the players Handout 2: Slaad Ecology).
PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
PA RT 4
 Roleplaying Icelus
Icelus dresses in a long grey coat buttoned
up to the neck. He is cadaver-thin, bald, and
wears electrum rings in his beard. His speech
is precise, and his features are difficult to read.
As a species, the githzerai’s fanatical
beliefs make them difficult to reason with.
They operate with cold, merciless logic. Icelus
sees the characters as mere tools, and thinks
nothing of admitting it. For now, they can help
each other. That’s all.
Quote: “I can only light the path, outlander. It is
you who must walk it.”
The Dojo of the Mind
Before the characters leave, Icelus teaches them
how to fight in the strange world of Limbo.
“Before you go, a lesson.”
Icelus clenches one fist and gazes around
the room. The walls transform into a lacquered
wood, and reed mats appear underfoot. The
bas-reliefs morph into paper lanterns, and the
pillars into urns. Where there was a throne,
there is now a huge bronze dragon statue.
“Limbo can bend to your will, if you know
how.”
Icelus shows the group how to move and alter
objects with their mind (see the “Powers of Limbo”
sidebar). The following objects are present in the
dojo:
• Tiny candlesticks
• Small gongs
• Large urns
• Huge statue
Icelus encourages the characters to experiment
with their new powers.
19
Powers of Limbo
Limbo bends to the will of the creatures
inhabiting it.
Moving Objects: As an action, a creature
on Limbo can make an Intelligence check to
mentally move an object on the plane that it
can see within 30 feet of it. The DC depends
on the object’s size: DC 5 for Tiny, DC 10 for
Small, DC 15 for Medium, DC 20 for Large,
and DC 25 for Huge or larger. On a successful
check, the creature moves the object 5 feet
plus 1 foot for every point by which it beats
the DC.
Altering Objects: A creature can use an
action to make an Intelligence check to alter
a nonmagical object that isn’t being worn or
carried. The same rules for distance apply,
and the DC is based on the object’s size: DC 10
for Tiny, DC 15 for Small, DC 20 for Medium,
and DC 25 for Large or larger. On a success,
the creature changes the object into another
nonliving form of the same size, such as
turning a boulder into a ball of fire. Objects
altered in Limbo return to their true form if
removed from the plane. Spellcasters cannot
use altered objects as spell components, as
they are of unnatural origin.
Stabilizing Areas: A creature can use
an action to make an Intelligence check to
stabilize a spherical area centered on the
creature. The DC depends on the radius of the
sphere. The base DC is 5 for a 10-foot-radius
sphere; each additional 10 feet added to the
radius increases the DC by 5. On a successful
check, the creature prevents the area from
being altered by the plane for 24 hours, or
until the creature uses this ability again.
PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
PA RT 4
 Aberrant Powers
If any characters are infected by the chaos strain, Object Shield: As a reaction when it is targeted
Icelus explains that their control over Limbo is by an attack, an infected creature on Limbo can
greater than most. These characters can use the move a Medium object it can see within 30 feet to
powers of Limbo as a bonus action instead of an shield itself from the attack. The creature makes a
action. In addition, they gain use of the following DC 15 Intelligence check: on a success, it gains half-
powers: cover against the attack (+2 AC and Reflex saving
Hurl Object: As a bonus action, an infected throws).
creature on Limbo can hurl a Medium or Tiny object
within 30 feet at a creature it can see within 30 feet.
The creature makes an Intelligence check, with a
DC equal to the target’s AC. On a success, the target
takes 2d10 damage. The type of damage depends on
the object hurled e.g. bludgeoning damage for rocks,
and fire damage for hunks of lava.

20 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:

PA RT 4
 Part 5.
Treachery
When the players are ready to confront the slaadi, unite, yet he remains wary of their schemes. In the
read the following aloud: midst of battle, he chose to test them. Using a spell
scroll of polymorph to pose as a green slaad, he fed
Najwa’s citadel has shattered into pieces.
the same lie to each general. Both now believe that
High above, a crumbling tower drifts in the
ether. Crimson-skinned toad creatures gather Nethrex is dying and rests in the other general’s
around it, swimming expertly through the pla- care. True to form, the generals are plotting to
nar fog. A river of fire flows between them and destroy each other and feast upon Nethrex’s
the ruined wing where you now stand. corpse. Only the control gems stand in their way.
To your right, a lush ribbon of earth and
The characters soon become tools in their plans for
foliage corkscrews over to a strange ship.
The vessel hangs in a cloud of wreckage, its conquest.
torn sails fluttering in the winds. Hulking blue-
skinned creatures lurk on its deck.
The Messenger
The glass pipes that feed poison into your If the slaadi spot the characters, the closest general
world snake to a colossal crystal hand. A sends an envoy to parley. Read the following aloud:
bloated creature lurks in its palm, but its form
A large, green-skinned creature swims through
is tricky to discern through the swirling soup of
Limbo toward you. It holds a gnarled staff in
Limbo.
its clawed paw. As it glares at you, a strange
voice echoes inside your minds.
Give the players Handout 3: Limbo (this is the “Hold! My master demands to speak with
same as Map 3: Limbo, but lacks any notations). you.”
How they deal with the two scheming slaadi camps
is entirely up to them. They should know that time The green slaad– actually Nethrex in disguise -
is of the essence and there is no way of knowing explains that his master wants to negotiate the
when the attack will come, but it is certainly githzerai’s surrender. The general promises safe
inevitable. passage to and from his audience chamber. If
the group defies him, he threatens to attack and
Machinations of the Slaadi destroy them all.
A power struggle is playing out between two rival If the characters agree, Nethrex escorts them
gray slaad generals. Both serve Nethrex, but each to speak to his “master” (see “An Audience with…”,
plots to destroy him and take his place by eating below). If the group chooses to attack Nethrex, he
his corpse. tries to escape back to the camp. The characters
All slaadi born on Limbo have control gems are now in grave peril, as they must contend with
embedded inside their brains. If removed, these both factions!
gems can be used to dominate them. To ensure
stability in his ranks, Nethrex instated a system of
mutually assured destruction. He gave General Glyx
the control gems of General Zhote’s blue slaadi,
and gave General Zhote the control gems of Glyx’s
reds. If one plots against the other – or against him
– their counterpart can use the gems to dominate
the attackers.
Nethrex knows his generals are too chaotic to

21 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:

PA RT 5
 An Audience with General Glyx
If the characters agree to an audience with General
Glyx, read:
The green slaad leads you into the golden tower.
You pass through a hall of grinding cogs, and
enter an arched chamber. Conjured by Najwa’s
mind, a miniaturized city sprawls across the floor.
Thousands of tiny, living soldiers do battle in the
streets.
General Glyx is crushing the soldiers underfoot.
He’s small for a gray slaad - just under six feet tall
– and he wears a string of blue gems on a chain
around his neck. Larger, red-skinned slaad lurk
nearby, eyeing you up and down. The general
smiles.
“I have a proposal”, he growls inside your heads.
See location 7 for details of the creatures found
here. General Glyx explains the following:
• General Glyx serves Nethrex, but cares little
for his conquest of the Material Plane.
• Nethrex is dying, and his body lies in the camp
of Glyx’s rival: General Zhote. If Zhote eats
Nethrex, he’ll transform into a mighty death
slaad. Glyx promises to call off the attack if the
characters help him eat Nethrex before his
rival does.
• To prevent treachery, Nethrex gave Zhote
the control gems of Glyx’s red slaadi. If the
characters steal them, Glyx can overrun his
rival’s forces!
• General Glyx warns the group not to use the
control gems against him. If they do, his green
slaadi will attack the citadel.
If the group accepts, General Glyx gives them a
silver horn shaped like a screaming child. He tells
them to blow it when they’ve obtained the control
gems. Until the characters have the gems, Glyx
refuses to aid the assault in any way.
22
Roleplaying General Glyx
General Glyx is loud, ill-mannered, and
overbearing. He is also paranoid, reading
insults about his stature into anything anyone
says to him. As a green slaad, Glyx was
unusually large. When he transformed into
a gray slaad, he emerged smaller than most.
In this scene, he lashes out at the miniature
city to vent his anger: toppling towers and
stamping on soldiers.
Quote: “I’m bigger than him, ya hear?”
An Audience with General Zhote
If the characters agree to an audience with General
Zhote, read:
The green slaad escorts you to the wrecked
ship. You descend into its hold, where a group
of blue-skinned slaadi rifle through the cargo. A
green crystal hovers over the deck. As you enter,
gravity forces your feet onto the timbers.
General Zhote is a gray slaad: just taller than
a man, with a string of red gems on a chain
around his neck. Throbbing boils cover his ashen
flesh.
“We can help each other,” he hisses inside
your heads.
See location 8 for details of the creatures found
here. The general proposes the same plan to the
group as General Glyx. If the characters agree to his
bargain, he gives them an electrum horn shaped
like a flayed horse. He tells them to blow it when
they’ve destroyed the control gems.
Roleplaying General Zhote
General Zhote is sly and cringing. Tiny
versions of himself continually hatch from his
boils, scamper away, and dissolve. Zhote has
no idea what these monsters are, nor does he
care. All he wants is more power.
Quote: “Another cunning plan has hatched!”
PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
PA RT 5
Obtaining the Gems
Each general wears his control gems on a necklace.
To obtain the gems, a character must trick the
general into removing the necklace or tear it from
his neck.
If the group blows a horn, their general is true
to his word. He charges the location with his slaadi
henchmen, taking just 3 rounds to cross Limbo.
On arrival, he doesn’t attack unless the characters
prove they’ve got the control gems. If they betray
the deal – blowing the horn before they have the
gems, for example – the General acts as though he’s
here to reinforce his rival.
The red and blue slaadi must obey any
character that holds their control gems. If the
group can steal the gems, they can order the slaadi
to do as they please!
Nethrex Revealed
Nethrex tests his generals to see if they’ll rise
against him. Talk is cheap: but if one general
attacks the other, the death slaad makes a dramatic
appearance.
From nowhere, the green slaad envoy appears.
His body shrinks before your eyes into a hunched,
charcoal-skinned slaad. In place of one eye,
he has a jet-black stone. The general gasps in
horror. “Nethrex!”
“You failed my test, worm,” sneers the death
slaad. “Now you’ll learn how I deal with traitors.”
As he speaks, two green slaadi materialize be-
side him.
The following creatures join the battle:
• Nethrex the death slaad
• 3 green slaadi
Nethrex is a death slaad with 240 hit points. In
addition to his normal spellcasting abilities, he has
access to the following spells:
2/day each: counterspell, circle of death
1/day each: circle of power
Nethrex and his allies attack everyone in sight –
including the characters. If the battle turns against
the group, now is a good time to awaken Najwa
(see Najwa Reborn! below).
23
Treasure
Nethrex carries 3 spell scrolls of polymorph in a pouch
on his belt. His onyx eye stone is worth 500 gp.
Behind the Curtain: Machinations of
the Slaadi
This adventure provides plenty of scope for
roleplaying. If the characters play along, they
learn that both generals are mistaken about
Nethrex. They can exploit this in all manner of
ways! If the players find a clever way to trick
the generals, be ready to roll with it. They’ll
need to tread carefully: both generals can
detect thoughts at will, and are quick to attack
if they sense deception.
Limbo Locations
The following locations drift around the planar
gate. Most locations have their own gravity that
gently pulls objects toward the nearest floor
surface. Unless noted, this does not interfere with
the characters’ ability to move weightlessly.
1: Gate Chamber
This is where the characters emerge from the
Material Plane and meet Icelus. If a character
touches the planar gate it pulls them back home.
2: Riven Sanctuary
Beneath the Gate Chamber, Icelus and the other
githzerai hunters chant over Najwa. They have
sealed and stabilized the sanctuary while they
perform their ritual.
3: Elemental Soup
Both slaad camps immediately spot any creature
that flies out into the elemental soup. If spotted,
the nearest general sends his envoy to parley with
the intruders (see Machinations of the Slaadi
above). If the envoy is dead, both groups advance
to repel the characters.
PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
PA RT 5
 4: Crystal Claw
The crystal claw is a fragment of an ancient, astral
colossus. Nethrex’s “incubator” squats in its palm:
an obese, mutated red slaad called Fug. To reach
this location, the group must cross the Elemental
Soup (location 3).
When the group approaches, read:
The glass pipes plunge into the flesh of a huge,
toad-like monster. Its corpulent body roils and
seethes as the orange goo pumps from its stom-
ach. The creature looks at you and grins. “Fug!”
• 5 green slaadi defend Fug.
The green slaadi attack anyone who dares
approach the crystal claw. If the other slaadi see
combat break out here, they arrive after 3 rounds.
Slaying Fug
Fug is too huge to move or fight, and doesn’t feel
any pain. He is a Huge aberration with AC 13
(natural armor), and 200 hit points. If reduced to
0 hit points, he explodes. All creatures within 50
ft. must succeed on a DC 15 Dexterity saving throw
or take 52 (15d6) acid damage. The chaos strain
infects all creatures that suffer this damage. These
creatures suffer mutations on all failed ability
checks, saving throws or attack rolls (see “The
Godstouched” above).
5: Twisted Woods
Songbirds flit between the trees of this weird
woodland. Beautiful statuary emerges from the soil
before dissipating into clouds of butterflies.
Characters sneaking through the woods must
succeed on a DC 11 Dexterity (Stealth) check to
avoid General Zhote’s blue slaadi (see Location 8,
below).
6: River of Fire
The river of fire snakes through Limbo, changing
course every few hours. The intense heat ripples
the air, and drifting wreckage provides plenty of
cover.
Characters sneaking along the river must
succeed on a DC 11 Dexterity (Stealth) check to avoid
General Glyx’s red slaadi (see Location 7, below).
24
7: Tower of Contraption
General Glyx and his red slaadi have claimed the
sundered tower of Najwa’s citadel. When the group
approaches, read:
A cloud of wreckage swirls around the golden
tower. One wall gapes open, exposing huge
cogs within. Red-skinned monsters guard the
tower’s interior.
For this location, use Map 4: The Tower of
Contraption. The following monsters reside here:
• 4 red slaadi patrol the wreckage outside the
tower.
• 5 red slaadi guard the cog chamber.
• General Glyx – a gray slaad with 180 hit
points - and 3 red slaadi lurk above the
miniature city.
Tactics
If combat breaks out in this location, it alerts all
enemies listed above. General Glyx attempts to
parley with the group (see “Machinations of the
Slaadi”, above). If they refuse his terms or approach
from the rival camp, he chooses to attack instead. If
at least half his slaadi die, General Glyx retreats to
the miniature city to mount his last stand.
Unless the characters have an agreement with
General Zhote, the slaadi from Location 8 arrive
after 5 rounds of combat. If so, the players are in
for the fight of their lives!
Features of the Area
Ceiling. The tower’s ceiling is 35 feet above the floor.
Wreckage. Chunks of Small, Medium and Large
wreckage drift around the tower. A creature that
shelters behind wreckage larger than itself gains
half-cover against attacks (+2 AC and Dexterity
saving throws).
Golden cogs. Each giant cog rotates 45 degrees at
the end of the round. If a character is standing on a
cog, they move with it when it turns.
Spurs. The spurs protrude from the cogs, and slot
into mechanisms in the ceiling. A creature in the
path of a spur when the cog moves must succeed on
a DC 16 Dexterity saving throw or take 66 (12d10)
bludgeoning damage (half damage on a success).
PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
PA RT 5
Map 4: Tower of Contraption

25 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:

PA RT 5
 Miniature City. Najwa’s city is at war. During
combat, any creature that ends its turn in the
chamber must succeed on a DC 15 Constitution
saving throw or suffer one of the following effects.
The slaadi gain advantage on their saving throws
due to their familiarity with the city.
Miniaturized City Effects
d6 Effects
1 Catapult Salvo. A line of tiny catapults
hurl rocks at you, dealing13 (2d8 + 4)
bludgeoning damage.
2 Buzzed. Hang-gliders circle your head.
Until the end of your next turn, you
have disadvantage on all attacks.
3 Archer Tower. Archers scale your
shoulders and use you as a battle
platform. Until you next take damage,
any creature that starts its turn within
10 ft. of you takes 7 (2d6) piercing
damage.
4 Mage Wars. Tiny mages do battle
around you. Until you move, you take
11 (2d10) fire damage at the start of
each of your turns.
5 Smoke! Collapsing towers fill the air
with dust. You are blinded until the
end of your next turn.
6 Boarding Action. Balloons disgorge
dozens of tiny knights onto your
shoulders. At the start of each of
your turns, you must succeed on a
DC 12 Constitution saving throw or
be restrained for the duration of your
turn. If you beat the DC by 5 or more,
you shake off the invaders.
Treasure
The red slaadi have the following treasures: a
navel ring shaped like a grinning skull (200 gp), a
platinum fang (700 gp), and a dagger made from
a meteorite (100 gp). Zhote carries 5 blue slaad
control gems (100gp each). Glyx carries blue
control gems, (100 gp each), equal to the number
of blue slaadi in the opposing camp.
26
Scaling the Encounter: Tower of Contraption
Use the following recommendations to adjust
this combat encounter. These adjustments are
not cumulative:
• Very Weak Party: Remove 2 red slaadi
from outside the tower, and 2 red slaadi
from the miniature city
• Weak Party: Remove 1 red slaad from
the cog chamber and 1 red slaad from
the miniature city.
• Strong Party: Add 2 red slaadi outside
the tower, and 2 red slaadi to the
miniature city.
• Very Strong Party: Add 2 red slaadi to
each location.
8: Wrecked Ship
General Zhote and his blue slaadi occupy the
githzerai’s wrecked skiff. When the group
approaches, read:
A strange galleon hangs in a cloud of wreck-
age. Sails are mounted to it like oars, and
green light flickers from within its hull. As you
approach, the blue-skinned monsters disap-
pear below deck.
For this location, use Map 5: Wrecked Ship.
The crystal shard creates artificial gravity below
deck, nullifying the weightlessness of Limbo. The
following monsters lurk here:
• 4 blue slaadi defend the crew quarters.
• General Zhote - a gray slaad with 180 hit
points - and 5 blue slaadi are searching the
hold.
Tactics
General Zhote attempts to parley with the group
(see Machinations of the Slaadi, above). If they
refuse his terms or approach from the rival camp,
he chooses to attack instead.
Unless the characters have an agreement with
General Glyx, the slaadi from Location 7 arrive
after 5 rounds of combat. If so, the players are in
for the fight of their lives!
PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
PA RT 5
 Behind the Curtain: Tower of Contraption
On their own, each group of enemies shouldn’t
be too hard for characters of this level.
Together, they can present a deadly threat.
Bring reinforcements into the battle in waves:
if the group seem overwhelmed, slow the rate
of reinforcement. If things seem too easy, just
have more slaadi swim in from Limbo.
Features of the Area
Ceiling. Below deck, the ceiling is 25 feet high.
Gravity Shard. When combat begins, the shard
begins to malfunction. Read:
The ship shakes violently as a giant boulder
smashes through the hull. Green light strobes
through the ship’s interior, and the artificial
gravity begins to malfunction!
At the end of each round, roll 1d4 to see which
way is “down”: 1 for the west wall, 2 for the
deck, 3 for the east wall, and 4 for the roof. When
gravity shifts, all creatures fall to the new floor. If
a creature is within 10 ft. of an unoccupied floor
space when gravity shifts (i.e. near a “wall”), it can
step across on a successful DC 14 Dexterity saving
throw. The gravity shard has 50 hit points and a
hardness of 5. If a character destroys the shard, the
weightlessness of Limbo returns.
Treasure
The blue slaadi have the following treasures: a
petrified gnome mounted on a thong (200 gp), and
a gold belt buckle shaped like a grinning face (500
gp). Zhote carries red control gems equal to the
number of red slaadi in the opposing camp(100 gp
each).
27
Scaling the Encounter: Wrecked Ship
Use the following recommendations to adjust
this combat encounter. These adjustments are
not cumulative:
• Very Weak Party: Remove 1 blue slaad
from the crew quarters and 1 from the hold.
• Weak Party: Remove 1 blue slaad from
the hold.
• Strong Party: Add 1 blue slaad to the
crew quarters and 1 to the hold.
• Very Strong Party: Add 2 blue slaadi to
the crew quarters and 2 to the hold.
Najwa Reborn
As Dungeon Master, you determine when the
githzerai heal Najwa. If your players devise a
cunning plan to delay the attack, heal Najwa
whenever seems most dramatic. If the combat is
moving quickly and the players are enjoying the
battle, don’t allow the monks to rob that from
them. Likewise, if the characters are overwhelmed,
the githzerai’s chant can end just in time to spare
one or more characters. When Najwa is healed,
read the following aloud:
The broken citadel suddenly – and violently –
reforms into a colossal fortress. Githzerai monks
sally forth from the gate, chanting a hymn of
battle. Najwa has returned!
The githzerai monks sweep through the enemy
ranks, routing the slaadi into the depths of Limbo!
They insist on slaying any slaadi dominated by the
control gems.
PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
PA RT 5
 Conclusion
When the slaadi are gone, Icelus invites the group
inside the citadel to meet Najwa. The injured
anarch explains that her people know how to purge
the chaos strain from infected bodies. If the group
is willing, she can teach one of the characters how
to perform the rituals. This character receives a
tome of wisdom (see Rewards, below). In addition,
she offers to send Icelus back with the group to aid
the healing.
The journey back to Phlan is uneventful. If
Icelus travels with the group, he aids the bearer of
the tome of wisdom in curing the townsfolk of the
chaos phage. If not, Phlan suffers terrible losses in
the coming weeks.
If cured, Lord Commander Greycastle
publically renounces Bane and pledges her undying
loyalty to the people of Phlan. She promises total
reform of the Black Fists, and annual elections for
her parliament of peers. Whether her words bear
fruit is another story…

28 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:

PA RT 5
Rewards
Make sure note their rewards on their adventure
log sheets. Give your name and DCI number (if
applicable) so players can record who ran the session.
Experience
Total up all combat experience earned for
defeated foes, and divide by the number of
characters present in the combat. For non-combat
experience, the rewards are listed per character.
Give all characters in the party non-combat
experience awards unless otherwise noted.
Combat Awards
Name of Foe XP per Foe
Blue slaad 2,900
Death slaad 5,900
Githzerai zerth 2,300
Gray slaad 5,000
Green slaad 3,900
Knight 700
Lizardfolk 100
Lizardfolk shaman 450
Marilith (mutated priest) 15,000
Red slaad 1,800
Non-Combat Awards
Task or accomplishment XP per Char.
Communicate peacefully with
lizardfolk 1,000
With little or no combat, trick the
slaadi long enough to heal Najwa 3,500
Steal the control gems without
bloodshed 1,000
Destroy Fug 500
Return to Phlan with a cure 2,500
The minimum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 8,625
experience points.
The maximum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 11,500
experience points.
29
Treasure
This section summarizes the treasure awarded
during the adventure. Each award should be
divided up equally among the party members.
Gold piece values listed for sellable gear are
calculated at their selling price, not their purchase
price. Consumable magic items should be divided
up however the group sees fit. If more than one
character is interested in a specific consumable
magic item, the DM can determine who gets it
randomly should the group be unable to decide.
Permanent magic items are divided according to
a system. See the sidebar if the adventure awards
permanent magic items.
Treasure Awards
Item Name GP Value
Quest reward from Greycastle 1,000 gp per
character
Quest reward from Glevith 200 gp per
character
Treasure from Tower of Contraption 1,500 gp
Treasure from Wrecked Ship 1,500 gp
Electrum horn 500 gp
Silver horn 500 gp
Nethrex’s eye stone 500 gp
Spell Scroll, Polymorph
Scroll, rare
A description of spell scrolls can be found in the
Dungeon Master Basic Rules or the Dungeon
Master’s Guide.
PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
R E WA R D S
 Permanent Magic Item Distribution
D&D Adventurers League has a system
in place to determine who is awarded
permanent magic items at the end of a
session. Each character’s log sheet contains a
column to record permanent magic items for
ease of reference.
• If the players at the table agree on
one character taking possession of a
permanent magic item, that character
gets the item.
• In the event that one or more characters
indicate an interest in possessing a
permanent magic item, the character that
possesses the fewest permanent magic
items gets the item. If there is a tie in the
total number of permanent magic items
owned by contesting characters, the
item’s owner is determined randomly by
the DM.
Renown
Story Awards
This following story award is available in this
adventure. Characters can only earn this award
if they have the “Hero of the Welcomers” story
award, and successfully heal Glevith.
Master of the Thieves’ Guild
You have saved Glevith of the Welcomers from certain
death. In return, he makes you an honorary master of
the Welcomers. All purchases you make within Phlan
are 25% cheaper, including spell services.
In addition, up to five future characters that
you create in the Adventurers League gain a free
tool proficiency in Thieves’ Tools, and begin play
with a set of Thieves’ Tools.
Downtime
Each character receives 10 downtime days at the
conclusion of this adventure.
DM Rewards
You receive 2,875 XP, 1,500 gp, and ten
downtime days for running this session.

All faction members earn one renown point for

participating in this adventure. Characters allied
with the Lords’ Alliance gain an extra point
of renown if they rescue the children from the
stampede in Podol Plaza.

30 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:

R E WA R D S
Appendix: NPC / Monster Statistics
Blue Slaad Crocodile
Large aberration, chaotic neutral Large beast, unaligned
Armor Class 15 (natural armor) Armor Class 12 (natural armor)
Hit Points 123 (13d10 + 52) Hit Points 19 (3d10 + 3)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 20 ft., swim 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
20 (+5) 15 (+2) 18 (+4) 7 (−2) 7 (−2) 9 (−1) 15 (+2) 10 (+0) 13 (+1) 2 (−4) 10 (+0) 5 (−3)

Skills Perception +1 Skills Stealth +2

Damage Resistances acid, cold, fire, lightning, Senses passive Perception 10
thunder Languages —
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 11 Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
Languages Slaad, telepathy 60 ft. Hold Breath. The crocodile can hold its breath for
Challenge 7 (2,900 XP) 15 minutes.
Magic Resistance. The slaad has advantage on Actions
saving throws against spells and other magical Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
effects. one creature. Hit: 7 (1d10 + 2) piercing damage,
Regeneration. The slaad regains 10 hit points at and the target is grappled (escape DC 12). Until
the start of its turn if it has at least 1 hit point. this grapple ends, the target is restrained, and the
crocodile can’t bite another target.
Actions
Multiattack. The slaad makes three attacks: one
with its bite and two with its claws.
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +8 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 12 (2d6 + 5) piercing damage.
Claw. Melee Weapon Attack: +8 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 12 (2d6 + 5) slashing damage. If
the target is a humanoid, it must succeed on a DC
15 Constitution saving throw or be infected with
a disease called chaos phage. While infected, the
target can’t regain hit points, and its hit point
maximum is reduced by 10 (3d6) every 24 hours. If
the disease reduces the target’s hit point maximum
to 0, the target instantly transforms into a red slaad
or, if it has the ability to cast spells of 3rd level or
higher, a green slaad. Only a wish spell can reverse
the transformation.

31 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:

APPENDIX
 Death Slaad Claws (Slaad form only). Melee Weapon Attack:
Medium aberration (shapechanger), chaotic evil +9 to hit, reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 10 (1d10 + 5)
Armor Class 18 (natural armor) slashing damage plus 7 (2d6) necrotic damage.
Hit Points 170 (20d8 + 80) Greatsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +9 to hit,
reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 12 (2d6 + 5) slashing
Speed 30 ft. damage plus 7 (2d6) necrotic damage.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
20 (+5) 15 (+2) 19 (+4) 15 (+2) 10 (+0) 16 (+3) Githzerai Zerth
Medium humanoid (gith), lawful neutral
Skills Arcana +6, Perception +8 Armor Class 17
Damage Resistances acid, cold, fire, lightning, Hit Points 84 (13d8 + 26)
thunder Speed 30 ft.
Senses blindsight 60 ft., darkvision 60 ft., passive
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
Perception 18 13 (+1) 18 (+4) 15 (+2) 16 (+3) 17 (+3) 12 (+1)
Languages Slaad, telepathy 60 ft.
Challenge 10 (5,900 XP) Saving Throws Str +4, Dex +7, Int +6, Wis +6
Shapechanger. The slaad can use its action to Skills Arcana +6, Insight +6, Perception +6
polymorph into a Small or Medium humanoid, or Senses passive Perception 16
back into its true form. Its statistics, other than its Languages Gith
size, are the same in each form. Any equipment it is
Challenge 6 (2,300 XP)
wearing or carrying isn’t transformed. It reverts to
its true form if it dies. Innate Spellcasting (Psionics). The githzerai’s
spellcasting ability is Wisdom (spell save DC
Innate Spellcasting. The slaad’s innate spellcasting
14, +6 to hit with spell attacks). It can innately
ability is Charisma (spell save DC 15, +7 to hit
cast the following spells, requiring no material
with spell attacks). The slaad can innately cast the
components:
following spells, requiring no material components:

At will: mage hand (the hand is invisible)

At will: detect magic, detect thoughts, invisibility
(self only), mage hand, major image 3/day each: feather fall, jump, see invisibility,
shield
2/day each: fear, fireball, fly, tongues
1/day each: phantasmal killer, plane shift
1/day each: cloudkill, plane shift
Psychic Defense. While the githzerai is wearing
Magic Resistance. The slaad has advantage on
no armor and wielding no shield, its AC includes
saving throws against spells and other magical
its Wisdom modifier.
effects.
Magic Weapons. The slaad’s weapon attacks are Actions
magical. Multiattack. The slaad makes two unarmed
Regeneration. The slaad regains 10 hit points at strikes.
the start of its turn if it has at least 1 hit point. Unarmed Strike. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to
hit, reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 11 (2d6 + 4)
Actions bludgeoning damage plus 13 (3d8) psychic
Multiattack. The slaad makes three attacks: one damage. This is a magic weapon attack.
with its bite and two with its claws or greatsword.
Bite (Slaad form only). Melee Weapon Attack: +9 to
hit, reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 9 (1d8 + 5) piercing
damage plus 7 (2d6) necrotic damage.

32 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:

APPENDIX
Gray Slaad
Medium aberration (shapechanger), chaotic neutral
Armor Class 18 (natural armor)
Hit Points 127 (17d8 + 51)
Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
17 (+3) 17 (+3) 16 (+3) 13 (+1) 8 (-1) 14 (+2) 18 (+4) 15 (+2) 16 (+3) 11 (+0) 8 (-1)
Skills Arcana +5, Perception +6
Damage Resistances acid, cold, fire, lightning,
thunder
Senses blindsight 60 ft., darkvision 60 ft., passive
Perception 16
Languages Slaad, telepathy 60 ft.
Challenge 9 (5,000 XP)
Shapechanger. The slaad can use its action to
polymorph into a Small or Medium humanoid, or
back into its true form. Its statistics, other than its
size, are the same in each form. Any equipment it is
wearing or carrying isn’t transformed. It reverts to
its true form if it dies.
Innate Spellcasting. The slaad’s innate
spellcasting ability is Charisma (spell save DC 14).
The slaad can innately cast the following spells,
requiring no material components:
At will: detect magic, detect thoughts, invisibility
(self only), mage hand, major image
2/day each: fear, fireball, fly, tongues
1/day each: plane shift (self only)
Magic Resistance. The slaad has advantage on
saving throws against spells and other magical
effects.
Magic Weapons. The slaad’s weapon attacks are
magical.
Regeneration. The slaad regains 10 hit points at
the start of its turn if it has at least 1 hit point.
Actions
Multiattack. The slaad makes three attacks: one
with its bite and two with its claws or greatsword.
Bite (Slaad form only). Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to
hit, reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) piercing
damage.
Claws (Slaad form only). Melee Weapon Attack:
+7 to hit, reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 8 (1d10 + 3)
slashing damage.
Greatsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach
5 ft., one target. Hit: 10 (2d6 + 3) slashing damage.
33
Green Slaad
Large aberration (shapechanger), chaotic neutral
Armor Class 16 (natural armor)
Hit Points 127 (15d10 + 45)
Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
12 (+1)
Skills Arcana +3, Perception +2
Damage Resistances acid, cold, fire, lightning,
thunder
Senses blindsight 30 ft., darkvision 60 ft., passive
Perception 12
Languages Slaad, telepathy 60 ft.
Challenge 8 (3,900 XP)
Shapechanger. The slaad can use its action to
polymorph into a Small or Medium humanoid, or
back into its true form. Its statistics, other than its
size, are the same in each form. Any equipment it is
wearing or carrying isn’t transformed. It reverts to
its true form if it dies.
Innate Spellcasting. The slaad’s innate
spellcasting ability is Charisma (spell save DC 12).
The slaad can innately cast the following spells,
requiring no material components:
At will: detect magic, detect thoughts, mage hand
2/day each: fear, invisibility (self only)
1/day each: fireball
Magic Resistance. The slaad has advantage on saving
throws against spells and other magical effects.
Regeneration. The slaad regains 10 hit points at
the start of its turn if it has at least 1 hit point.
Actions
Multiattack. The slaad makes three attacks:
one with its bite and two with its claws or staff.
Alternatively, it uses its Hurl Flame twice
Bite (Slaad form only). Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit,
reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 11 (2d6 + 4) piercing damage.
Claws (Slaad form only). Melee Weapon Attack:
+7 to hit, reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d6 + 4)
slashing damage.
Staff. Melee Weapon Attack: +7 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 11 (2d6 + 4) bludgeoning damage.
Hurl Flame. Ranged Spell Attack: +4 to hit, range
60 ft., one target. Hit: 10 (3d6) fire damage. The
fire ignites flammable objects that aren’t being
worn or carried.
PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
APPENDIX
 Knight Lizardfolk
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment Medium humanoid (lizardfolk), neutral
Armor Class 18 (plate) Armor Class 15 (natural armor, shield)
Hit Points 52 (8d8 + 16) Hit Points 22 (4d8 + 4)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 30 ft., swim 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
16 (+3) 11 (+0) 14 (+2) 11 (+0) 11 (+0) 15 (+2) 15 (+2) 10 (+0) 13 (+1) 7 (−2) 12 (+1) 7 (−2)

Saving Throws Con +4, Wis +2
Senses passive Perception 10
Languages any one language (usually Common)
Challenge 3 (700 XP)
Brave. The knight has advantage on saving throws
against being frightened.
Actions
Multiattack. The knight makes two melee attacks.
Greatsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach
5 ft., one target. Hit: 10 (2d6 + 3) slashing damage.
Heavy Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +2 to
hit, range 100/400 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d10)
piercing damage.
Leadership (Recharges after a Short or Long
Rest). For 1 minute, the knight can utter a special
command or warning whenever a non-hostile
creature that it can see within 30 feet of it makes
an attack roll or a saving throw. The creature
can add a d4 to its roll provided it can hear and
understand the knight. A creature can benefit from
only one Leadership die at a time. This effect ends
if the knight is incapacitated.
Reactions
Parry. The knight adds 2 to its AC against one
melee attack that would hit it. To do so, the knight
must see the attacker and be wielding a melee
weapon.
Skills Perception +3, Stealth +4, Survival +5
Senses passive Perception 13
Languages Draconic
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
Hold Breath. The lizardfolk can hold its breath for
15 minutes.
Actions
Multiattack. The lizardfolk makes two melee
attacks, each one with a different weapon.
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack:+4 to hit, reach 5 ft., one
target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing damage.
Heavy Club. Melee Weapon Attack:+4 to hit, reach
5 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) bludgeoning
damage.
Javelin. Melee or Ranged Weapon Attack:+4 to hit,
reach 5 ft. or range 30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 5
(1d6 + 2) piercing damage.
Spiked Shield. Melee Weapon Attack:+4 to hit,
reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing
damage.

34 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:

APPENDIX
Lizardfolk Shaman
Medium humanoid (lizardfolk), neutral
Armor Class 13 (natural armor)
Hit Points 27 (5d8 + 5)
Speed 30 ft., swim 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
15 (+2) 10 (+0) 13 (+1) 10 (+0) 15 (+2) 8 (−1)
Skills Perception +4, Stealth +4, Survival +6
Senses passive Perception 14
Languages Draconic
Challenge 2 (450 XP)
Hold Breath. The lizardfolk can hold its breath for
15 minutes.
Spellcasting (Lizardfolk Form Only). The lizardfolk
is a 5th-level spellcaster. Its spellcasting ability
is Wisdom (spell save DC 12, +4 to hit with spell
attacks). The lizardfolk has the following druid
spells prepared:
Cantrips (at will): druidcraft, produce flame, thorn whip
1st Level (4 slots): entangle, fog cloud
2nd Level (3 slots): heat metal, spike growth
3rd Level (2 slots): conjure animals (reptiles only),
plant growth
Actions
Multiattack (Lizardfolk Form Only). The lizardfolk
makes two attacks: one with its bite and one with
its claws.
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack:+4 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing damage, or 7
(1d10 + 2) piercing damage in crocodile form. If
the lizardfolk is in crocodile form and the target is
a Large or smaller creature, the target is grappled
(escape DC 12). Until this grapple ends, the target
is restrained, and the lizardfolk can’t bite another
target. If the lizardfolk reverts to its true form, the
grapple ends.
Claws (Lizardfolk Form Only). Melee Weapon
Attack: +4 to hit, reach 5 ft., one target. Hit: 4 (1d4
+ 2) slashing damage.
Change Shape (Recharges after a Short or Long
Rest). The lizardfolk magically polymorphs into a
crocodile, remaining in that form for up to 1 hour.
It can revert to its true form as a bonus action. Its
statistics, other than its size, are the same in each
form. Any equipment it is wearing or carrying isn’t
transformed. It reverts to its true form if it dies.
35
Marilith
Large fiend (demon), chaotic evil
Armor Class 18 (natural armor)
Hit Points 189 (18d10 + 90)
Speed 40 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
18 (+4) 20 (+5) 20 (+5) 18 (+4) 16 (+3) 20 (+5)
Saving Throws Str +9, Con +10, Wis +8, Cha +10
Damage Resistances cold, fire, lightning;
bludgeoning, piercing, and slashing from
nonmagical weapons
Damage Immunities poison
Condition Immunities poisoned
Senses truesight 120ft., passive Perception 13
Languages Abyssal, telepathy 120ft.
Challenge 16 (15,000 XP)
Magic Resistance. The marilith has advantage on
saving throws against spells and other magical
effects.
Magic Weapons. The marilith’s weapon attacks are
magical.
Reactive. The marilith can take one reaction on
every turn in a combat.
Actions
Multiattack. The marilith makes seven attacks: six
with its longswords and one with its tail.
Longsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +9 to hit, reach
5ft., one target. Hit: 13 (2d8 + 4) slashing damage.
Tail. Melee Weapon Attack: +9 to hit, reach 10ft.,
one creature. Hit: 15 (2d10 + 4) bludgeoning
damage. If the target is Medium or smaller, it
is grappled (escape DC 19). Until this grapple
ends, the target is restrained, the marilith can
automatically hit the target with its tail, and the
marilith can’t make tail attacks against other
targets.
Teleport. The marilith magically teleports, along
with any equipment it is wearing or carrying, up to
120 feet to an unoccupied space it can see.
Reactions
Parry. The mutated priest adds 5 to its AC against
one melee attack that would hit it. To do so, the
marilith must see the attacker and be wielding a
melee weapon.
PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
APPENDIX
 Red Slaad
Large aberration, chaotic neutral
Armor Class 14 (natural armor)
Hit Points 93 (11d10 + 33)
Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
16 (+3) 12 (+1) 16 (+3) 6 (−2) 6 (−2) 7 (−2)

Skills Perception +1
Damage Resistances acid, cold, fire, lightning,
thunder
Senses darkvision 60 ft., passive Perception 11
Languages Slaad, telepathy 60 ft.
Challenge 5 (1,800 XP)
Magic Resistance. The slaad has advantage on
saving throws against spells and other magical
effects.
Regeneration. The slaad regains 10 hit points at
the start of its turn if it has at least 1 hit point.
Actions
Multiattack. The slaad makes three attacks: one
with its bite and two with its claws.
Bite. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 8 (2d4 + 3) piercing damage.
Claw. Melee Weapon Attack: +6 to hit, reach 5 ft.,
one target. Hit: 7 (1d8 + 3) piercing damage. If the
target is a humanoid, it must succeed on a DC 14
Constitution saving throw or be infected with a
disease—a minuscule slaad egg.
A humanoid host can carry only one slaad
egg to term at a time. Over three months, the egg
moves to the chest cavity, gestates, and forms a
slaad tadpole. In the 24-hour period before giving
birth, the host starts to feel unwell, its speed is
halved, and it has disadvantage on attack rolls,
ability checks, and saving throws. At birth, the
tadpole chews its way through vital organs and out
of the host’s chest in 1 round, killing the host in the
process.
If the disease is cured before the tadpole’s
emergence, the unborn slaad is disintegrated.

PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:

36 APPENDIX
Appendix: Notable NPCs

Election Candidates
Barrett Sokol (BAH-ret SO-kul). Scion of House
Sokol. Seeks to reinstate Council of Ten.
Colvin Doverson (COL-vin DO-ver-sun). Claims
lineage to Royal House of Daoran. Seeks return of
monarchy.
Graben Samaulkin (GRAY-bun Sa-MUL-kin).
Priest of Bane. Seeks theocratic rule.
Jhessail Greycastle (JESS-ale). Paladin of Bane
and liberator of Phlan. Seeks democratic rule.

Minor Characters
Glevith (GLEH-vith). Criminal gang leader of the
Welcomers.
Ser Agin Lamarck (AY-ginn Luh-MARK).
Historian and rare book expert.
Sergeant Bors Bartol (BORS BAR-tol). Black Fist
officer serving Jhessail Greycastle.

Pyramid Inhabitants
Big Tooth. Lizardfolk mutant. Wants to destroy the
planar gate.
Blind Eye. Lizardfolk mutant. Wants to keep peace
with the slaadi.

Creatures of Limbo
General Glyx (GLIX). Gray slaad general of the red
slaadi. Paranoid about his height.
General Zoht (ZOTE). Gray slaad general of the
blue slaadi. Scheming and conniving.
Nethrex (GETH-rex). Death slaad plotting to
inflict chaos strain upon Toril.
Icelus (ICE-lus). Githzerai zerth that meets the
group when they enter Limbo.
Najwa (NAH-jwah). Injured githzerai anarch.

37 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:

APPENDIX
38 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
APPENDIX
39 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
APPENDIX
 Map 3: Limbo

40 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:

APPENDIX
 Map 4: Tower of Contraption

PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:

41 APPENDIX
42 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
APPENDIX
 Handout 1: The Candidates

43 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:

APPENDIX
 Handout 2: Slaad Ecology

44 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:

APPENDIX
Handout 3: Limbo Handout

PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:

45 APPENDIX
 Subterfuge
Erik Scott de bie
Adventure Designer
Adventure Code: PHLAN1-3

An ambitious plan for the reconstruction of Phlan would expand the city
walls to protect all the citizens. Now a band of emissaries sent to acquire
necessary materials has gone missing in the wilds of the Dragonspine
Mountains, and only the Heroes of Phlan can find them. But will it be
in time to prevent catastrophe for the city? A D&D Adventurers League
adventure set in and around Phlan.
A four-hour adventure for 11th-16th level characters

Producer: Baldman Games

Hulburg Administrator & Developer: Robert Alaniz
Editing and Layout: Encoded Designs
Cartography: John Arcadian
Organized Play: Chris Lindsay
D&D Adventurers League Wizards Team: Adam Lee, Chris Lindsay, Matt Sernett
D&D Adventurers League Administrators: Robert Adducci, Bill Benham, Travis Woodall,
Claire Hoffman, Greg Marks, Alan Patrick

DUNGEONS & DRAGONS, D&D, Wizards of the Coast, Forgotten Realms, the dragon ampersand, Player’s Handbook, Monster
Manual, Dungeon Master’s Guide, D&D Adventurers League, all other Wizards of the Coast product names, and their respective
logos are trademarks of Wizards of the Coast in the USA and other countries. All characters and their distinctive likenesses
are property of Wizards of the Coast. This material is protected under the copyright laws of the United States of America.
Any reproduction or unauthorized use of the material or artwork contained herein is prohibited without the express written
permission of Wizards of the Coast.
©2016 Wizards of the Coast LLC, PO Box 707, Renton, WA 98057-0707, USA. Manufactured by Hasbro SA, Rue Emile-Boéchat 31,
2800 Delémont, CH. Represented by Hasbro Europe, 4 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET, UK.
 Introduction
Welcome to Subterfuge, a D&D Adventurers League adventure,
Part Three of the Alliances Trilogy set in Phlan.

This adventure is designed for three to seven 11th -16th level characters, and is
optimized for five 12th-level characters.
The adventure is set in the Moonsea region of the Forgotten Realms, in and around the city
of Phlan.

The D&D Adventurers League Preparing the Adventure

This adventure is official for D&D Adventurers
League play. The D&D Adventurers League is the
official organized play system for DUNGEONS &
DRAGONS®. Players can create characters and
participate in any adventure allowed as a part of
the D&D Adventurers League. As they adventure,
players track their characters’ experience, treasure,
and other rewards, and can take those characters
through other adventures that continues their story.
If you’re running this adventure as a part of a
store event or at certain conventions, you’ll need a
DCI number. This number is your official Wizards of
the Coast organized play identifier. If you don’t have
a number, you can obtain one at a store event. Check
with your organizer for details.
D&D Adventurers League play is broken up into
storyline seasons. When players create characters,
they attach those characters to a storyline season,
which determines what rules they’re allowed to
use to create and advance their characters. Players
can continue to play their characters after the
storyline season has finished, possibly participating
in a second or third storyline with those same
characters. A character’s level is the only limitation
for adventure play. A player cannot use a character
of a level higher or lower than the level range of a
D&D Adventurers League adventure.
For more information on playing, running
games as a Dungeon Master, and organizing games
for the D&D Adventurers League, please visit the
D&D Adventurers League home at:
www.dndadventurersleague.org
Before you show up to Dungeon Master this
adventure for a group of players, you should do the
following to prepare.
• Make sure to have a copy of the most current
version of the D&D Basic Rules or the Player’s
Handbook.
• Read through the adventure, taking notes of
anything you’d like to highlight or remind
yourself while running the adventure, such as
a way you’d like to portray an NPC or a tactic
you’d like to use in a combat.
• Get familiar with the monster statistics in the
Appendix.
• Gather together any resources you’d like to
use to aid you in running this adventure--such
as notecards, a DM screen, miniatures, and
battlemaps.
• If you know the composition of the group
beforehand, you can make adjustments as
noted throughout the adventure.
Before Play at the Table
Ask the players to provide you with relevant
character information:
• Character name and level
• Character race and class
• Passive Wisdom (Perception)—the most
common passive ability check
• Anything notable as specified by the adventure
(such as backgrounds, traits, flaws, etc.)
Players that have characters outside the
adventure’s level range cannot participate in
the adventure with those characters. Players

2 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:

I N T RO D U C T I O N
with ineligible characters can make a new 1st-level
character or use a pregenerated character. Players
can play an adventure they previously played or
ran as a Dungeon Master, but not with the same
character.
Ensure that each player has an official
adventure logsheet for his or her character (if not,
get one from the organizer). The player fills out
the adventure name, session number, date, and
your name and DCI number. In addition, the player
also fills in the starting values for experience, gold,
downtime, renown, and number of permanent
magic items. He or she fill in the other values and
write notes at the conclusion of the session. Each
player is responsible for maintaining an accurate
logsheet.
If you have time, you can do a quick scan of
a player’s character sheet to ensure that nothing
looks out of order. If you see magic items of very
high rarities or strange arrays of ability scores, you
can ask players to provide documentation for the
irregularities. If they cannot, feel free to restrict
item use or ask them to use a standard ability
score array. Point players to the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for reference.
If players wish to spend downtime days and
it’s the beginning of an adventure or episode,
they can declare their activity and spend the days
now. Alternatively, they can do so at the end of
the adventure or episode. Players should select
their characters’ spells and other daily options
prior to the start of the adventure, unless the
adventure specifies otherwise. Feel free to reread
the adventure description to help give players hints
about what they might face.
Adjusting the Adventure
Throughout this adventure, you may see sidebars
to help make adjustments for smaller/larger
groups, and characters of higher/lower levels than
the optimized group. Most of the time, this is used
for combat encounters.
You may adjust the adventure beyond the
guidelines given. For example, if you’re playing
with a group of inexperienced players, you might
want to make the adventure a little easier; for
very experienced players, you may want to make
3 PHLAN 1-2 / ENEMY OF MY ENEMY:
it a little harder. Therefore, five categories of
party strength have been created for you to use
as a guide. Feel free to use a different adjustment
during the adventure if the recommended party
strength feels off for the group.
This adventure is optimized for a party of
five 1th-level characters. To figure out whether
you need to adjust the adventure, do the following:
• Add up the total levels of all the characters
• Divide the total by the number of characters
• Round fractions of .5 or greater up; round
fractions of less than .5 down
You’ve now determined the average party level
(APL) for the adventure. To figure out the party
strength for the adventure, consult the following
table:
Determining Party Strength
Party Composition Party Strength
3-4 characters, APL less than Very Weak
3-4 characters, APL equivalent Weak
3-4 characters, APL greater than Average
5 characters, APL less than Weak
5 characters, APL equivalent Average
5 characters, APL greater than Strong
6-7 characters, APL less than Average
6-7 characters, APL equivalent Strong
6-7 characters, APL greater than Very Strong
Running the Adventure
As the Dungeon Master of the session, you have the
most important role in facilitating the enjoyment
of the game for the players. You help guide the
narrative and bring the words on these pages
to life. The outcome of a fun game session often
creates stories that live well beyond the play at the
table. Always follow this golden rule when you DM
for a group:
Make decisions and adjudications that
enhance the fun of the adventure when
possible.
To reinforce this golden rule, keep in mind the
following:
• You are empowered to make adjustments to
the adventure and make decisions about how the
group interacts with the world of this adventure.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Doing so is especially important and applicable
outside of combat, but feel free to adjust the
adventure for groups that are having too easy or
too hard of a time.
• Don’t make the adventure too easy or too
difficult for a group. Never being challenged
makes for a boring game and being
overwhelmed makes for a frustrating one.
Gauge the experience of the players (not the
characters) with the game, try to feel out (or
ask) what they like in a game, and attempt to
give each of them the experience they’re after
when they play D&D. Give everyone a chance to
shine.
• Be mindful of pacing, and keep the game
session moving along appropriately. Watch for
stalling, since play loses momentum when this
happens. At the same time, make sure that the
players don’t finish too early; provide them with
a full play experience. Try to be aware of running
long or short. Adjust the pacing accordingly
• Read-aloud text is just a suggestion; feel free
to modify the text as you see fit, especially when
dialogue is present.
• Give the players appropriate hints so they can
make informed choices about how to proceed.
Players should be given clues and hints when
appropriate so they can tackle puzzles, combat,
and interactions without getting frustrated over
lack of information. Doing so helps to encourage
immersion in the adventure and gives players
“little victories” for figuring out good choices
from clues.
In short, being the DM isn’t about following
the adventure’s text word-for-word; it’s about
facilitating a fun, challenging game environment
for the players. The Dungeon Master’s Guide™ has
more information on the art of running a D&D
game.
Downtime and Lifestyle
At the beginning of each play session, players must
declare whether or not they are spending any days
of downtime. The player records the downtime
spent on the adventure logsheet. The following
options are available to players during downtime
(see the D&D basic rules or the D&D Adventurers
League Player’s Guide for more information):
4 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
• Catching up
• Crafting (exception: multiple characters cannot
commit to crafting a single item)
• Practicing a profession
• Recuperating
• Spellcasting services
• Training
Other downtime options might be available during
adventures or unlocked through play, including
faction-specific activities.
In addition, whenever a character spends
downtime days, that character also spends the
requisite expense for his or her lifestyle. Costs
are per day, so a character that spends ten days
of downtime also spends ten days of expenses
maintaining his or her lifestyle. Some downtime
activities help with lifestyle expenses or add
lifestyle expenses.
Spellcasting Services
Any settlement the size of a town or larger can
provide some spellcasting services. Characters
need to be able to travel to the settlement to obtain
these services.
Spell services generally available include
healing and recovery spells, as well as information-
gathering spells. Other spell services might be
available as specified in the adventure. The number
of spells available to be cast as a service is limited
to a maximum of three per day total, unless
otherwise noted.
Spellcasting Services
Spell Cost
Cure wounds (1st level) 10 gp
Identify 20 gp
Lesser restoration 40 gp
Prayer of healing (2nd level) 40 gp
Remove curse 90 gp
Speak with dead 90 gp
Divination 210 gp
Greater restoration 450 gp
Raise dead 1,250 gp
I N T RO D U C T I O N

Acolyte Background
A character possessing the acolyte
background requesting spellcasting
services at a temple of his or her faith
may request one spell per day from the
Spellcasting Services table for free. The only
cost paid for the spell is the base price for
the consumed material component, if any.
Melvaunt is a large city where any
acolyte can find a friendly shrine or
temple.
Disease, Death, and Recovery
Sometimes bad things happen, and characters get
poisoned, diseased, or are killed. Since you might
not have the same characters return from session
to session, here are the rules when bad things
happen to characters.
Disease, Poison, and Other Debilitating Effects
A character still affected by diseases, poisons,
and other similar effects at the conclusion of an
adventure can spend downtime days recuperating
until such time as he or she resolves the effect to
its conclusion (see the recuperating activity in the
D&D Basic Rules).
If a character doesn’t resolve the effect
between sessions, that character begins the next
session still affected by the debilitating effect.
Death
A character who is killed during the course of
the adventure has a few options at the end of the
session (or whenever arriving back in civilization)
if no one in the adventuring party has immediate
access to a raise dead or revivify spell, or similar
magic. A character subject to a raise dead spell is
affected negatively until all long rests have been
completed during an adventure. Alternatively, each
downtime day spent after raise dead reduces the
penalty to attack rolls, saving throws, and ability
checks by 1, in addition to any other benefits the
downtime activity might provide.
5 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
Create a New 1st-Level Character. If the dead
character is unwilling or unable to exercise any
of the other options, the player creates a new
character. The new character does not have any
items or rewards possessed by the dead character.
Dead Character Pays for Raise Dead. If the
character’s body is recoverable (it’s not missing
any vital organs and is mostly whole) and the
player would like the character to be returned to
life, the party can take the body back to civilization
and use the dead character’s funds to pay for a
raise dead spell. A raise dead spell cast in this
manner costs the character 1,250 gp.
Character’s Party Pays for Raise Dead. As
above, except that some or all of the 1,250 gp for
the raise dead spell is paid for by the party at the
end of the session. Other characters are under no
obligation to spend their funds to bring back a
dead party member.
Faction Charity. If the character is of level 1 to
4 and a member of a faction, the dead character’s
body can be returned to civilization and a patron
from the faction ensures that he or she receives a
raise dead spell. However, any character invoking
this charity forfeits all experience and rewards
from that session (both those earned prior to and
after death during that session) and cannot replay
that episode or adventure with that character
again. Once a character reaches 5th level, this
option is no longer available.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Adventure Background Behind the scenes, one of Sokol’s rivals—
Graben Samulkin, a priest of Bane—has worked
Phlan is a city marked by dramatic change and
to undermine the meeting with the dwarves by
upheaval throughout its history. The centuries have
stirring up a local frost giant tribe and setting the
seen it demolished and rebuilt multiple times, and
emissaries up with a falsified map leading directly
Phlan’s continuing existence on the coast of the
into their territory. In doing so, he plans to kill two
turbulent Moonsea testifies to the perseverance
stirges with one sling bullet: squash the efforts
and pluck of its people.
of his opposition, as well as getting the pesky
Recently, four powerful would-be rulers have adventurers who’ve thwarted him thus far out of
vied for the Cinnabar Throne. They each have the city while he performs his coup.
plans for the reconstruction of Phlan, none more
ambitious or popular than those of Barrett Sokol. The State of Phlan
An up-and-coming lord, he leverages his noble Phlan is an anchorage on the north coast of
background and place in the city’s history against the Moonsea. Its inhabitants are celebrating
his general lack of political or business experience. the death of Vorgansharax: a green dragon
His plans to rebuild Phlan as an impregnable who laid claim to the town for many months.
fortress, complete with a towering wall to keep out
Knight Commander Greycastle led the
invaders, have earned him much love among the
alliance of heroes that slew the dragon (as
people. He has a reputation for standing up for the
told in DDEP4: Reclamation of Phlan). In
little guy.
doing so, she leaned on the neighboring
Charming, witty, and beloved among the city states of Mulmaster and Hillsfar.
common folk, Sokol has ridden far on his charisma Masquerading as friends, these rival powers
and promises, as well as shrewd, if not entirely circle hungrily, eager to steer Phlan’s future to
thought-out, bargains with the entrenched powers their own ends.
of the city. He has the support of The Welcomers,
Yet the townsfolk grow weary of tyranny.
The Order of the Gauntlet, and the Labor Guilds,
Veterans of the resistance demand a stake in
who expect him to reinstate the Council of Ten
the town’s future. Merchants wish for fewer
upon his elevation to High Councilor. Many see him
regulations. Loyalists call for the return
as a potential puppet they can easily manipulate.
of monarchy. With the militia too weak to
Sokol’s plan faces a hurdle, however.
impose order, Greycastle has conceded to an
Significant mining, transport, and careful
election. For the first time, Phlan’s citizens
diplomatic efforts to bring the needed stone from
have a say in their own destiny.
the Dragonspine Mountains are required. To this
end, he has dispatched representatives to strike
a crucial deal with the Hammersfell shield dwarf
clan for the stone and quarry, but his emissaries
have not returned. The delays have caused Guild
leaders to doubt the feasibility of the plan, and
support is wavering. The fate of the trade party
must be determined and a deal struck, or the plans
will surely fail before they’ve begun.

6 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:

I N T RO D U C T I O N
The Election Adventure Overview
Four candidates have emerged as front-runners in The adventure begins in Phlan, where Sokol
Phlan’s upcoming election. recruits the characters to assist him in finding his
Jhessail Greycastle missing emissaries. He wants to know what has
Knight Commander Greycastle is a hero, but her become of them and—more importantly—see
loyalty to the Black Fists makes her vulnerable. She their mission accomplished and the deal secured.
pledges to: He enlists the aid of a guide—one Aveen Seakin—
to see to it that the characters don’t get lost as well,
• Establish a parliament of elected peers to
and he promises a hefty reward and the support of
govern Phlan, and serve as First Minister.
Phlan’s next High Councilor (i.e. his own).
• Reform the Black Fists and weed out
The characters depart for the Dragonspine
corruption in its ranks.
Mountains and must explore the wilderness to
Barrett Sokol find signs of the missing emissaries. Their speed
The youngest scion of House Sokol has gained at this task determines in what state they find the
popularity among the labor guilds. He pledges to: missing travelers, who have been taken captive
• Reinstate the mercantile Council of Ten and by a frost giant clan. The characters must rescue
stand as High Councilor. the emissaries (or their equipment if they are all
dead), and then journey on to meet the dwarves
• Create jobs reconstructing Phlan and raising
of Clan Hammersfell in an attempt to complete the
the old city walls.
deal.
Colvin Doverson The adventure ends when they return to
Lord Doverson claims ancestry with the Royal Phlan to discover the city in chaos: Samulkin has
House of Daoran. If legitimized, this would make made his move, and the stage is set for a dramatic
him heir to the Cinnabar Throne. He pledges to: confrontation.
• Reinstate the monarchy and crown himself
Lord Protector.
• Renegotiate trade deals with other Moonsea
ports for the benefit of Phlan’s merchants.
Graben Samaulkin
The religious fervor washing through town has
aided this priest of Bane. He pledges to:
• Establish theocratic rule and declare himself
Ruinlord of Phlan,
• Rebuild the Lyceum of the Black Lord and
appease the god with plentiful sacrifices.

7 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:

I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Adventure Hooks
The characters meet with Barrett Sokol in Phlan,
having come for one of the following reasons.
Heroes of Phlan
Characters who participated in previous
adventures in Phlan (PHLAN 1-1 or PHLAN 1-2)
are especially sought after, and can look forward
to increasing their prestige within the city.
Barrett Sokol—a prominent political figure and
businessman—approaches these characters first,
leveraging their fame among the people of Phlan
to solicit their aid. He doesn’t expect them to work
strictly in the name of civic duty, of course, but he
suggests a statue in their honor, crafted of choice
dwarf-mined stone.
Exotic Treasures Wanted!
Explorers, treasure seekers, and characters of
a wilderness persuasion who live and work in
Phlan’s environs have run across Aveen Seakin, a
ranger and procurer for Aurora’s Whole Realms
Catalogue, who recruits them to meet with her
employer, Barrett Sokol, about a job she is anxious
to see done quickly and well.
Guild Interest: Order of the Gauntlet
The Order of the Gauntlet seeks to preserve peace
in Phlan, and Barrett Sokol’s plan to fortify the
city against invaders seems an excellent one.
Orders come down from the upper echelon to any
characters with ties to the Order: support Sokol’s
scheme to the best of their ability.
8 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
Guild Interest: Labor Guilds
If Barrett Sokol’s construction deal goes through,
the Labor Guilds stand to reap economic and
political benefits. Sokol has promised to use them
for the construction efforts, potentially netting
them a fortune, and if Sokol succeeds and is elected
High Councilor, he has promised to reinstate the
Council of Ten, with the Guilds controlling multiple
seats and thus a great deal of power. The Labor
Guilds haven’t had an opportunity like this in years.
Guild Interest: Welcomers
For all his sunny disposition, Barrett Sokol made
certain shady promises and cut certain deals, and
if this construction bid falls through, he can’t pay
his debts. The Welcomers stand to lose a great deal
of coin, and no amount of assurances from Sokol
will make them rest easy. Characters working with
the Welcomers are tasked to watch over the deal to
make sure it happens at any cost.
Pacing the Adventure
Keep track of the days that pass, as well as
any time the party takes a long rest (which
triggers a new day to begin), as it affects the
situation in Part Three. This determines how
many of the emissaries are alive, if any, and
how many the characters rescue (if any) in
turn affects the meeting with the dwarves in
Part Four: Sealed Deal.
I N T RO D U C T I O N
 Part 1.
leaving phlan
Expected Duration: 30 minutes
Ambition is the greatest human trait: both our
greatest strength and our most devastating
weakness.
—Catalan the Mad Bard, Complex Musings and
False Veracities (1383 DR, the Year of the Vindicated
Warrior)
Introduction
Arriving on the pier of Thorn Island, the characters
await their appointment with Barrett Sokol. Read:
From the water, Sokol Keep rises like a dark
mountain from the water on Thorn Island. Parts
of the keep are being repaired, notably the
tower, which sustained significant damage
in the reclamation efforts. The yard around
the keep is peppered with large craters - the
results of explosions of some kind - a com-
mon sight throughout the city, but the keep’s
survival has come to symbolize the town’s grit
as it stood tall after the smoke cleared. This
fact is not lost on its new resident, the young
Barrett Sokol. House Sokol is on the rise in Phlan
society, with its young heir Barrett on the short
list for the election of High Councilor.
Servants escort you through the func-
tional but well-appointed halls of the keep.
Tapestries depicting handsome men and
regal women watch you from above, always
seeming to look at you with pride that borders
on arrogance. A functionary ushers you into
a sumptuously decorated sitting room, where
you are alone but for a cloaked half-elf wom-
an with bright blue eyes and pale, blue-tinged
skin who watches you from a corner, arms
crossed.
You have barely passed a moment in this
place before your host, Barrett Sokol, bursts
through the doors, not waiting for his foot-
man to announce him. Grinning broadly and
flushed with excitement, he greets you mag-
nanimously. “A thousand times thank you for
coming!”
9 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
Sokol motions to the servants and requests
refreshments for his guests, and opens with some
small talk about the rebuilding efforts of the town.
Characters who have met Aveen Seakin before
(see Adventure Hooks) recognize the half-elf
immediately.
• Wisdom (Insight) DC12: On close inspection,
she seems to be attempting to hide some
unknown anxiety.
Roleplaying Barrett Sokol
Sokol is a young, dark-skinned human man
with a robust build, unruly dark hair, and an
excitable, yet confident manner. As a noble,
he’s accustomed to his position, and does
not shy from tough decisions. Like many
politicians, he appears obnoxious at first,
coming off as a backslapping glad-hander, but
his natural charisma and surprising business
savvy inevitably endear him to those whom
he meets. When he does stop talking, he is a
keen listener and offers a pointed assurance
that he has understood your needs.
Once the characters are settled, Sokol lays out the
basics of his plan. Read:
Sokol gazes out the window at Phlan across
the bay, the light gleaming in his dark hair.
“I love this city,” he says, “and she needs to
be defended. That’s why I’m rebuilding and
fortifying it, and that’s why I need the best
materials from the Dragonspine Mountains.”
He shakes his head sadly. “But now the emis-
saries I sent to seal the deal with the Hammers-
fell dwarves, the only ones able to extract the
stone, haven’t reported back, and I fear the
worst. I need someone to find them and help
them complete their mission. Or, if tragedy has
befallen them, I need someone to close the
deal for them.” He looks at you dramatically—
heroically. “I want that someone… to be you.”
PA RT 1
 Have Sokol answer questions if asked, but
otherwise relay the following information. Present
but preoccupied, Aveen stays silent during the
conversation, and Sokol steps in to answer any
questions directed to her.
• What exactly are we to do? (Or any question
about details): “Ah gods, I’ve got ahead of
myself again. My agents left Phlan a ten-day
ago to make contact with the Hammersfell
Clan of the Dragonspine Mountains. The
leader of my agents is a trusted friend, name
of Bruw Clangeddin—dwarf, stout-hearted
fellow, lots of scars, missing his left eye, deep
drinker, you’d like him. Anyway, I would
have expected them to make contact by now,
or at least send word of their progress. All
I’ve heard for the past six days is silence. I
want you to go after them, discover what’s
happened to them, and broker the deal. This
wall needs to be built!”
• Where does Clan Hammersfell reside? “As
I understand it, deep in the mountains, just
south of the Glacier of the Silver Blades.”
• What route did the emissaries take to
get there? “They tried for the most direct,
expeditious route: up the Stojanow River,
cutting through the western tip of the
Quivering Forest and into the Ticklebelly
Hills. (I know, I know, named by halflings, no
doubt!) From there, they meant to follow a
little-known pass skirting the Glacier of the
Silver Blades.”
• When was the last you heard of the
emissaries? “They sent word from the
Ticklebelly Hills, just south of the Glacier of
the Silver Blades. So I know they made it to
the foot of the mountain.”
• Who is that? (Aveen): “Oh right, almost
forgot about her. That’s Aveen Seakin—a
ranger operating in these parts. She set up
my boys with a map to lead them into the
mountains. I’ve enlisted her as your guide. She
knows the terrain as well as anyone. She’ll get
you where you need to go”
10
• How do we recognize the emissaries?
“Bruw is the most distinctive dwarf I’ve ever
seen: heavily scarred, tough, fair, missing his
left eye. He also took my personal steward,
Artora—about thirty winters, human, long
dark hair, silver-tongued lady. She bears a
silver House Sokol signet ring. The others
are servants of House Sokol, like the guard
you saw on your way in. Ringmail, swords,
crossbows. They wear the house colors,
which are green and gold.” He motions to an
impressive family crest on the wall.
Note: If this question is not asked by the
adventurers, Sokol will offer this information
at the end of the conversation.
• How many emissaries were there? “I didn’t
ask, honestly. Bruw likes to be cautious,
though, and I’m sure he took at least ten
armed companions.”
• What are the emissaries carrying? “As my
official proxy, Artora carries a silver signet
ring of House Sokol that seals documents with
my authority. There’s also a first payment
for the dwarves—a good faith gesture—of
platinum coins imprinted with the arms of
Phlan on one side and my face on the other.”
(He pulls a shiny coin from his pocket to
demonstrate.)
• Why is your face on the coins? “A little added
incentive to work with me. Platinum’s good,
but those coins will be worth more when I’m
High Councilor. Also, I’m dashing.” He strikes
an impressive pose.
• What do you think happened? “I fear they
were waylaid and their cargo taken.”
• Could they have stolen the cargo and
disappeared voluntarily? “No! Bruw would
never betray me like that. We’re good friends.”
This is true.
• What kind of dangers might we face? “I’ve
heard about river bandits on the Stojanow
and frost giants raiding the Ticklebelly Hills.
Bruw’s map should have kept them out of
trouble, though, and you’ll have Aveen. And of
course yourselves. You should be fine.”
PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
PA RT 1
 • What’s our reward for this? “Aside from the
gratitude and continued love of the people
of Phlan? Well, I plan to compensate you
handsomely, of course, and you’ll have the ear
of the next High Councilor of Phlan. A priceless
reward. But let us say, 5,000 pieces of gold,
payable in platinum or gems if you prefer.” A
successful DC 20 Charisma (Persuasion) check
convinces Sokol to part with up to 20% of the
reward up front (1,000 gp). Any more than
that will have to wait. Everything is riding on
this deal.
Faction Assignment (Lord’s Alliance): If there
are any Lord’s Alliance members present, Sokol
appeals to them away from the others. Even though
he is not affiliated, he is a noble after all. “You look
like you understand the importance of a signet ring
to a noble family. It’s vital to our credibility that the
ring not fall into the wrong hands. I will be in your
debt if you can return it to me.”
The Sendoff Parade
When the characters have asked all their questions,
a servant arrives and Sokol nods in recognition.
Read:
Sokol offers you a brilliant smile. “Well, my
friends, time waits for neither hero nor god,
and it is past time for you to be on your way!
The parade is all arranged.” Then, before you
can so much as question what he just said,
Sokol sweeps away and his servants beckon
you out to the front of the keep and to Sokol’s
waiting barge. Across the water, a huge
crowd starts cheering as soon as you become
visible.
It seems the would-be High Councilor has
gathered together an assemblage of towns-
folk and servants to see you off in style, tossing
flowers in the air, shaking ribbon streamers
in your direction, and shouting or stomping
their feet. Trumpets announce you, and Sokol
makes a great show of blessing your quest
and sending you on your way.
• DC 12 Wisdom or Intelligence (Insight
or History respectively): Sokol’s parade
serves two purposes. The first is political: to
enhance his image in the political campaign
by associating himself with the characters,
11
particularly if any are among the Heroes of
Phlan, demonstrating his confidence and
resolve in making his plan come to fruition.
Secondly, he means to get the characters on
their way as soon as possible, because any
delay could prove disastrous.
Last Minute Preparations
Once the characters land on the docks of the city
proper, they can slip away and take care of any
business before the quest proper.
• DC 15 Dexterity (Stealth): This check is
needed to go unnoticed. Being caught carries
no consequences for the characters. (Only
some potential political embarrassment for
Sokol, as he made such a show of sending
them off, and this undermines that.)
Time is of the essence, and characters can only do
one of the following things before the party should
get underway. If the players insist on doing more
than one, it costs them a long rest.
• Shopping Trip: Despite its recent upheavals
and history of conflict, Phlan soldiers on as
a significant port town on the Moonsea. The
reconstruction and influx of new residents
bring a steady stream of trade and healthy
economic competition from various interested
parties. Items found in the Player’s Handbook
can be acquired, including regular healing
potions. This outfitting requires precious time
however.
• Gathering Information: Characters may
wish to research the coming quest or look
into the backgrounds of one or more of the
non-player characters so far mentioned. In the
time allotted, a character can learn any one of
the following with 3d6 gp in bribes and drinks
and a successful Charisma check, depending
on what they’re asking about. Meeting
the higher DC grants all the lower level
information as well. Dwarves and characters
trained in History gain advantage on checks
to find out about the Hammersfell dwarves.
Characters with the following Background
features gain advantage on their checks: By
Popular Demand, PGuild
HLAN Membership,
1 - 3 / S U B T Military
ERFUGE:
Rank, and Privilege. PA RT 1
PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
PA RT 1
 The DM may also choose to hand out information Aveen Seakin
for good role-playing or bribes of an additional 100 • DC 10: Aveen Seakin keeps mostly to herself
gp or more during the investigation. and not much is known about her. A ranger
and procurer for various trade guilds in the
The Dragonspine
area, she’s recently brought in some good
• DC 12: The isolationist shield dwarves of scores for the company behind Aurora’s
Clan Hammersfell live in the Dragonspine, Whole Realms Catalog.
constantly at war with the cold and various
ugly creatures therein. They’ve a reputation • DC 15: Aveen is half-aquatic elf, the child of a
for being great miners and craftsmen, and it’s pirate captain on the Moonsea and an elf who
no great surprise Sokol would pick them as swam up alongside her ship and visited her
the suppliers for his ambitious reconstruction quarters every so often—or so the story goes.
plans. At least it explains her unusual appearance.
• DC 15: Recently, a tribe of frost giants has
stirred in the mountains, raiding settlements
in the Ticklebelly Hills. Something’s stung ‘em
pretty bad, and they’re spoiling for a fight.
Barrett Sokol and/or Bruw Clangeddin
• DC 5: The youngest son of House Sokol,
Barrett’s always been a dreamer—looking to
build bigger and better edifices, usually with
his name and coat-of-arms attached. He’s a
decent chap, able to back up all that hot air
with coin and drive.
• DC 10: Sokol’s right-hand dwarf is Bruw
Clangeddin, a retired adventurer who’s earned
a dozen scars over the years. He’s tough,
speaks his mind, and he’s trustworthy to a
fault. He’s named after a dwarf deity who
shares his silver beard.
• DC 15: It seems Sokol and Bruw might not
be on the best terms right now, as the dwarf
reportedly had some none-too-measured
words about one of Sokol’s rivals, Graben
Samulkin. Sokol might agree, but he cannot
have his hired staff being impolite in polite
society. Word is Sokol sent him on this latest
mission to get him out of the city to avoid
political embarrassment.

12 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:

PA RT 1
The Taciturn Guide: Aveen Seakin
others to do things, they may engage Aveen in
Once the parade is over, Aveen Seakin opens up to
conversation. She answers their questions as
the characters a little more, urging them to get a
needed, but doesn’t much want to talk about
move on to complete the job for Barrett Sokol. It is
herself, at least initially.
obviously very important to her that this get done
quickly and right.
Roleplaying Aveen
Thanks to her aquatic elf heritage, Aveen
is slim and wiry with blue-tinted skin and
vivid blue eyes. Naturally stand-offish, she
distrusts “civilized” folk (i.e. politicians,
urban characters, and those who dwell in
Phlan) but is more comfortable around those
who operate in the wilderness. She is very
independent and driven to do the right thing,
regardless of the means or consequences.
Aveen reveres Eldath, the goddess of Nature
and Tranquility.
Aveen in Combat
Aveen is a scout, but is not intended as a
combatant. If the characters attack her, it is
up to you if they overwhelm and defeat her or
if she escapes, likely never to return. She can
also breathe water innately and is resistant
to cold (due to her boots of the winterlands,
which can only be attuned to her).
Character Development
Make a note to refer to this section if/when
the characters have further questions for
Aveen or she takes part in encounters. She
opens up to them more as time goes on,
at your discretion, and she wants them to
succeed.
13
If one or more characters are waiting for the
“You want to talk? Very well.” The guide draws
back her hood, revealing silver hair that falls
to just below her shoulders, from which gen-
tly pointed ears protrude like tiny mountains.
“What would you know?”
• Who are you? “I work the land and procure
items for various interested parties,
particularly Aurora’s Whole Realms Catalog.”
• What are you? “My mother was a Chondathan
pirate, and my father a sea elf. I am not so
different from other half-elves you may have
encountered, but I am as comfortable in water
as on land.”
• What’s the Whole Realm’s Catalog? “It’s an
organization that collects rare treasures from
all over the Realms for sale to collectors and
adventurers like you. At least, in theory. It’s
still rebuilding to what it used to be.”
• What’s your connection to this business? “I
know my way around the region, and I want to
help people in trouble.”
• DC 15 Wisdom (Insight): Suggests Aveen
is holding something back, but she seems
earnest to help and opens up more if you win
her trust.
• DC 15 Charisma (Persuasion): Aveen opens
up more. This happens automatically if the
characters are generally kind and fair to her
and rescue at least one of the emissaries. At
that point, she admits to them her dark secret:
she made the false map (see below).
PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
PA RT 1
 Part 2.
The search
Expected Duration: 90 minutes Experience the Outdoors
Greed is a powerful motivator. It may not excuse While the characters are traveling, regardless
bloody means, but it certainly makes them seem less of the route they choose, they should
likely to stain. experience changing weather patterns,
—Arita, “Fox Among the Uthgardt” (1469 DR, the precipitation, etc. Read-aloud text is included
Year of Splendors Burning) for each day, but consult the Dungeon Master’s
Guide page 106-112 for added verisimilitude.
Assuming the characters don’t linger in Phlan for
the entire first day (i.e. each doing more than one
thing), the search begins in earnest on Day 1. If The Stojanow River
they insist on accomplishing multiple tasks in the This is the route the emissaries took when they left
city, they begin the search on Day 2. Phlan a ten-day past, and Aveen thinks she can find
Aveen advises the adventurers to follow the signs of their passing and make up for lost time.
river, as she expects it is faster. Additionally, the Adventures Along the River
party has a chance to find clues to the emissaries’
The first leg of the journey takes the characters
disappearance.
along the river that drains from the Dragonspine
• The Stojanow River: Following the emissaries,
into the Moonsea, through Phlan.
the characters follow the Stojanow River
The river’s current is too strong to permit
west, skirt the southern edge of the Quivering
effective travel by boat. It is easy to tell, however,
Forest, and then climb up into the Glacier of
that going the other way (toward Phlan) would be
the Silver Blades. This route is comparatively
ideal for transporting heavy materials, such as the
fast but also very perilous, dealing with any
stone Sokol plans to import.
number of hazards of the river and forest.
Travel along the river is difficult and carries
Aveen estimates the route takes 4-6 days. She
with it some hazards. Aveen advises them to set
strongly advises this route.
a watch every night and maintain a wary state of
• Alternate Route: At this tier of play, it is readiness.
entirely possible the characters have some
other means of covering the distance, like
flight, potentially negating the journey. If
this occurs, they can skip over much of the
adventure travel; however, Aveen, tells them
that they may also miss valuable clues left by
their quarry along the way. It is not advisable
to skip following the trail of the emissaries.

14 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:

PA RT 2

Travel Time along the River
It takes a base of five days to reach the foot
of the glacier. Every new day, the characters
also get a long rest to recover from the day’s
events. As a reminder, note the number
of days this journey takes. Also note the
following conditions:
• Horses: The terrain along the river is
difficult, and horses do not save the
characters any time. They do, however,
make the party more comfortable (granting
the characters advantage on Endurance
checks related to trekking).
• Vehicles: Wagons or carts get stuck in the
mud or break wheels on the rough terrain.
Their presence actually adds one day to the
duration of the journey.
• Aveen’s Guidance: If the characters heed
Aveen’s advice and allow her to guide them,
reduce the duration of the journey by one
day. If she is not present or the characters
pointedly ignore her advice (because they
don’t trust her or are being obstinate), they
do not get this bonus.
• Natural Explorer: The presence of a ranger
with this class feature grants the same
bonus as Aveen’s Guidance. (It’s the same
effect. The bonuses do not stack.)
• Magical Assistance: Adjudicate this using
your best judgment. The journey is less a
matter of speed than finding ways around
obstacles. Doubling their overland speed, for
instance, saves them about one day, not two.
Making Good Time
Traveling through the untamed wilderness while
searching can be arduous. The characters can
expedite their travel through the following means
(or others that the players might invent on the
spot, at your discretion).
Each character may attempt one of the
following actions each day, with the following
effects:
• If the party accomplishes at least four of these
actions over the course of their journey, they
save an entire day and arrive at the Quivering
15
Forest one day early (e.g., day 4 instead of day
5).
• Several of these actions can be failed badly
enough that they damage the characters who
attempt them or cost the party additional days
of travel.
Each of the below actions can only count toward
speeding the journey once.
• Find a shortcut: On a successful Intelligence
(Nature) DC 12 or Wisdom (Survival) DC 15
check, the character finds a deer trail, a set of
switchbacks, or a convenient ford that shaves
some time off the overall journey. Failing this
check by 5 or more leads the party down a
false trail, and by the time they realize their
mistake, they’ve lost a day of travel.
• Hunt: On a successful Dexterity (Stealth)
DC 20 or Wisdom (Survival) DC 20 check,
the character captures a particularly robust
quarry. Characters who partake in this meal
gain advantage on the next Constitution saving
throw they make during the adventure. If the
character fails this check by 5 or more, the
character suffers a minor hunting accident,
resulting in 3d6 damage.
• Forage: On a successful Wisdom (Perception)
DC 20 or Wisdom (Survival) DC 15 check,
the character finds a batch of succulent
mushrooms that induce odd and vivid dreams
in those who consume them, but see them
wakeful and refreshed in the morning. If the
character fails this check by 5 or more, the
mushrooms are secretly poisonous, leading
to vivid nightmares in those who eat them.
Characters then increase their exhaustion
level by 1.
• Find a strong shelter: On a successful
Wisdom (Survival) DC 20 check, the character
locates or constructs a particularly good
shelter from the elements, allowing the
party to rest in relative comfort for a night. A
character who fails this check by 5 or more is
convinced of the security of the shelter, only to
have it fall apart around midnight and drench
the party, raising everyone’s exhaustion level
by 1 for the following day.
PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
PA RT 2
 • Inspire the party: On a successful Charisma
(Performance) or Charisma (Musical
Instrument) DC 20 check, the character tells
a stirring or otherwise evocative tale or sings
a memorable song, infusing everyone with
strength and vitality to make it through the trip,
granting advantage on the next saving throw one
character makes during the trek. A character
who fails this check by 5 or more leaves
everyone dispirited and sad, using three Hit Dice
from each character but gaining no benefit.
• Prepare a fine meal: On a successful
Intelligence or Wisdom DC 20 check, a
character prepares a delicious meal for camp,
giving everyone added drive for further travel.
If more than half the party consumes the
meal, it counts toward speeding the journey.
A character who fails this check by 5 or more
poisons anyone who eats the meal, causing
them to be poisoned until they take a long rest.
• Endure hardship: On a successful
Constitution DC 15 check, a character can
soldier through difficult conditions, inspiring
the rest of the party to do the same. A
character who fails this check by 5 or more
suffers from exhaustion or sustains an injury,
taking 2d8 damage and increasing their
exhaustion level by 1.
• Commune with nature: On a successful
Intelligence (Religion) DC 20 check (or upon
utilizing a spell that would do something
similar), a character earns the favor of the
nature spirits in the region, who aid the party
along the way. If a character fails this check
by 5 or more, the spirits grow angry with the
character and lead the party in a series of
circles and switch-backs, costing them a full
day spent hopelessly lost.
• Tame a wild beast: On a successful Wisdom
(Animal Handling) DC 20 check or use of
an animal friendship spell or similar magic,
a character befriends a creature native to
the Stojanow River or the woods around it,
gleaning useful insights into its flow and the
safest, fastest paths to the mountains. If a
character fails this check by 5 or more, the
animal grows angry (inflict 2d6 damage to the
character) and flees.
16
Random Events
This table presents a number of options for events
that might occur as time passes. Once per day, roll
or choose from the random events table. Do not
repeat Random Events—if you get a repeat result,
nothing occurs or select another event.
Random Events on the Stojanow River
d6 roll Random Event
Party finds an abandoned campsite with
1
several animal-gnawed corpses and 200
gp worth of coin and gems scattered
among the ruins. A successful DC 12
Wisdom (Insight) or DC 12 Intelligence
(Investigation) check finds that the
travelers were an unaffiliated group of
adventurers, not the missing emissaries.
Heavy rain springs up suddenly and
2
sweeps the ground away into the river.
Every hero must make a DC 12 Dexterity
saving throw or suffer 2d10 damage from
falling and abrasions.
The party finds an abandoned campsite
3
that was used by the missing emissaries
on this path. Any investigation they do
suggests the emissaries were in good
health and had suffered no delay.
Drawn by the sound of thunderous roars,
4
the party witnesses an adult green dragon
in the distance attacking something in the
Quivering Forest to the north. If the party
pursues, the dragon escapes before they
arrive, and they discover only a destroyed
grove. Heading this direction costs them an
additional day of travel spent backtracking.
The party glimpses a unicorn in the
5
distance, but it only approaches if one or
more of them is Lawful Good or serves
Mielikki. If the characters befriend the
unicorn, it uses its healing touch (heal
11 [2d8+2 hp]) ability on up to three
characters who seem wounded, then
teleports away, never to return.
Party enters a befouled section of the
6
forest, and the air is noxious. Each
character must make a DC 10 Constitution
saving throw or be poisoned until they take
a long rest.
PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
PA RT 2
River Travel Montage
The descriptions provided herein are intended for
each day of the journey up to the Quivering Forest.
Feel free to improvise additional description,
particularly in and around Random Events.
It takes a base of five days to reach the forest.
At the end of the sixth day, they arrive at the
forest, regardless of accumulated delays.
Day One – Just Setting Out
Read:
You set out upon your journey with the warm
light of the sun on your face and the taste
of the cool air on your tongue. Free of the
cracked, crumbling walls and smoky haze of
Phlan, the world opens up around you and
you can perceive the rustic beauty of the
northland. The river becomes more wild, and
signs of civilization are less frequent.
Toward midday, you take a break in a
gully near a bend in the Stojanow, where you
watch brightly colored birds crush the cara-
pace of a squirming beetle the size of your
hand. Where the creature came from, you
can’t say for certain.
Check for random events at noon, and offer the
players a chance to act to speed up the journey.
Day Two – A Thick Fog
Read:
A thick fog sets in on the second day of your
trek along the Stojanow River, filling your
lungs with a persistent, cloying damp that no
amount of coughing or sneezing removes. The
day is marked by several hours spent navigat-
ing through and around some ground made
swampy by recent rain.
You break at midday where the river grows
wilder and splits into half a dozen tributaries.
Check for random events at noon, and offer the
players a chance to act to speed up the journey.
Day Three – The Mad Survivor
The adventurers may attempt to speed their
journey, but there is no random event for this day.
Instead, they encounter an injured mercenary
desperately fleeing back along the Stojanow
toward Phlan.
17
The third day dawns bleak, and the gray
clouds linger throughout the morning and
through the day. Thick brambles line the banks
of the river—not dangerous, but irritating. Your
hands sting from a multitude of small thorn
pricks.
A sudden squawking of forest birds draws
your attention, setting you on edge. The foli-
age rustles, and a wild-eyed woman staggers
into your midst, stooped and cradling her
injured side. She wears a cracked and broken
harness of studded leather and torn clothes
stained with black blood. Her stringy brown
hair hangs in mud-soaked ribbons around her
face, and she looks to be mad with terror.
She starts to say something, then vomits
blood and bile and collapses into a quivering
heap.
The woman is obviously injured and basically
incapable of fending for herself. She falls
unconscious but can be roused with a successful
DC 15 Wisdom (Medicine) check or any healing
magic. She is delirious, dehydrated, and half mad.
Awake, she mumbles about “mountains,” “frozen
giants,” and a “spear of ice.”
The characters might also take the following
actions (or something else they improvise):
• DC 15 Wisdom (Insight): Gain insight into
the woman’s trauma and how best to speak to
her: calm, soothing, and making her feel safe.
• DC 10 Wisdom (Medicine): Identify that she
has several poorly healed lacerations and is
evincing signs of frostbite in her fingers and
toes.
• DC 15 Intelligence (Investigation) or a
DC 15 Wisdom (Perception): Notice the
shredded green and gold tabard the woman is
wearing.
• DC 15 Intelligence (Investigation) or a DC
20 Wisdom (Perception): Notice a tattoo on
the woman’s hand of a stylized bat with razor-
sharp wings (the mark of the Razorhands
mercenaries).
If the players succeed in rousing her and
winning her trust, they learn the following
information:
• Her name is Meenar, and she is a mercenary in
the Razorhand Company out of Phlan, captained
by a human warrior named Rouse Blackbrand.
PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
PA RT 2
 • They were operating in the Glacier of the
Silver Blades, and a battle with some frost
giants went badly. Most of the company was
killed or captured, and Meenar barely escaped.
She watched several of her allies chopped up
and eaten raw.
• Blackbrand instructed them to wear the green
and gold tabards. She didn’t ask why.
• Meenar is too weak to assist in combat but can
travel if healed
Day Four – Cyclops Attack
Read:
Dense, impenetrable fog lingers from dawn
until midday, when it burns off only to emit
stinging clouds of mosquitoes and other in-
sects, their drone driving you a bit mad.
You break at midday at the base of a small
cliff wall that was carved by the river ages
ago.
Suddenly from the corner of your vision,
you see a shadow move. Looking up for the
source of the shadow, a large boulder is hur-
tling toward your location.
Six cyclops raiding in the area have laid an ambush
for the adventurers. Anyone with a passive
Perception of 17 or higher is not surprised but
is unable to prevent surprise for the rest of the
party. The cyclops use rocks to attack from the
cliff-top, which is 20 feet high, and they enjoy
partial cover from their elevated vantage. The cliff
may be climbed with a successful DC 17 Strength
(Athletics)check.
The cyclops have no treasure, but one of them
is wearing a necklace strung with human hands,
one of which bears the mark of the Razorhand
Company.
18
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very Weak – Remove two cyclops
• Weak - Remove a cyclops
• Strong - Add a cyclops
• Very Strong – Add two cyclops
Day Five – Heavy Rains
Read:
The journey is beginning to grow hard indeed.
It rains hard all day today, leaving you dispirit-
ed and uncomfortable.
You break at midday where the river grows
wilder and splits into several tributaries. Some
forest animal yowls in the distance. Your feet
ache from the damp and the distance.
Check for random events at noon, and offer the
players a chance to act to speed up the journey.
Day Six – Exhaustion Sets In
Read:
You’ve reached the end of your rope and just
want this journey to be over. The extreme rain,
winds, and lightning prevented anyone from
resting the previous evening. Endless twists
and turns have now left you exhausted. At
last, you arrive at the Quivering Forest.
If the journey has lasted six days, increase every
character’s exhaustion level by one.
PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
PA RT 2
The Quivering Forest
When the characters finally reach the spot where
the emissaries headed up into the Dragonspine
Mountains, they find themselves at a corner of the
Quivering Forest west of the Stojanow River, cut off
from the main stretch of the wood.
Here, they find a devastated campsite that
was used by Lord Sokol’s emissaries to Clan
Hammersfell. Also, a pixie called Ristamere lurking
nearby witnessed the attack and can provide clues.
The Devastated Campsite
Upon arrival in the Quivering Forest, the characters
easily locate the remains of a campsite used by
Sokol’s emissaries. The destruction is palpable—
the smell alone draws them in:
You come upon a smashed and ruined
clearing in the forest, where trees have been
ripped wide to make room for something
The following skills may also yield important clues:
massive to come through. The remains of
several tents and a smashed wagon, as well
as broken pieces of weapons and armor, lie
scattered across the shredded earth. In more
than one spot, deep chunks of sod as wide as
your hand and as long as your forearm have
been ripped out of the earth itself. The air is
unnaturally cold, leaving your breath visible
like an evil omen.
You find two moldering corpses—one a
dwarf half crushed under a fallen tree, the
other a human lying face-down in the middle
of the campsite with a huge, bloodless hole
through her chest. You see no obvious sign of
whatever impaled the latter. Both wear the
green-and-gold colors of House Sokol.
If six or more days have passed since the party
set out from Phlan, the elements have washed
away some of the evidence, giving the characters
disadvantage on all Wisdom (Perception) or
Intelligence (Investigation) checks made at the
campsite.
Searching the dead woman (Artora the
steward) automatically yields a silver signet ring
of House Sokol (important for Part Four).
A successful Intelligence (Investigation) check
reveals the following information based on the
result. If the party has found at least three clues
(see below) before the Investigation check, the
character makes the check with advantage:
19
• DC 10: The scene is chaotic but surprisingly
pristine, particularly considering its age (at
least a ten-day). The corpses have decayed
somewhat, but you would have expected
animal activity. Perhaps the strange chill
has kept them away. A successful Wisdom
(Nature) DC 15 check also yields this
information.
• DC 15: The signs of battle suggest a quick
assault. You think an overwhelming force
fell upon the camp by surprise, wiping them
out before they could mount an effective
resistance.
• DC 20: Based on the damage to the trees, the
divots in the ground (as though from massive
axes), and the lingering chill, you believe
this attack was perpetrated by a group of
frost giants. Survivors were taken into the
mountains.
• Wisdom (Perception) DC 15: The character
discovers tracks leading up into the mountains
that can be followed back to the giants’ camp.
(If none of the characters can make this check,
Aveen makes it automatically and points out
the trail.)
• Intelligence (Medicine) DC 15: Studying the
corpses, you think the human was killed by
some sort of weapon that instantly freezes
wounds as though cauterizing them.
• Wisdom (Insight) DC 15: Impact from
massive weapons caused those divots in the
ground, tearing up chunks of the earth like
wounds. The character suspects greataxes.
• Intelligence (Arcana) DC 20 or Intelligence
(Nature) DC 20: The chilling aura of this place
puts you in mind of frost giant magic, which
sometimes leaves a lingering mark on a place.
• Wisdom (Survival) DC 15: Tracks indicate
the attackers took prisoners into the
mountains.
• Wisdom (Survival) DC 20: The character reads
the campsite like a scroll, determining there
were five attackers, two of whom rushed in, two
hung back to hurl rocks, and a fifth cast spells.
PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
PA RT 2
 Trail of the Giants
In short order, the characters should determine
that they need to head into the Dragonspine
Mountains to find the giants who attacked the
emissaries. Go to Part 3: Coldest Steel.
Ristamere the Pixie
Optional Encounter: time permitting (20 minutes)
Once the characters have found the devastated
campsite, they may encounter a helpful pixie who
is lurking nearby, intrigued by their arrival. He’s
been in the area for some time and knows quite
a bit about what’s going on, even if he doesn’t
articulate it very well. He witnessed:
• Giants attacking Sokol’s emissaries.
• Graben’s mercenaries camping here a few
times.
• He doesn’t understand “big folk” behavior but
he knows enough to tell they were different
groups.
With his innate ability to become invisible
and natural stealth, Ristamere approaches the
characters only if they do not seem overtly
threatening. He flees immediately if they attempt
to intimidate or otherwise frighten him. (He
recognizes he’s no match for the characters.)
If, or when, Ristamere comes out of hiding,
read:
The air shimmers and a small, green-skinned,
elf-like creature appears before you, flitting
about in the air on gossamer butterfly wings.
“Hello, hail, well met, big folk!” he says, his
words rapid and high-pitched. “Are you after
the giants? I wager you are, all the coin in
your pockets and the secrets in your heads! I’ll
wager it!”
20
Roleplaying Ristamere
Ristamere is an excitable pixie who suffers
from a deficit of attention. As he sees it, the
frost giants were invaders into his wood, and
he would like to see them punished—but he
isn’t about to part with his information for free.
He’s generally good-hearted and wants
to do what’s right, but his tongue works
faster than his mind, and he sometimes says
impertinent things. Use the dialogue listed
below as inspiration for conversing in his voice.
Ristamere answers questions, though he demands
a prize in return for each answer. These may take
the form of “something shiny” (such as a gemstone
worth at least 10 gp or a platinum piece), or
“something shady” (such as a secret about that
character, to be proffered first).
In the latter case, he makes a random demand
in exchange for his information. Roll 1d8:
Ristamere’s Demands
Roll Demand
1 Tell me something no one here
knows!
2 Tell me something embarrassing
about yourself!
3 Tell me the worst thing you’ve ever
done!
4 Point to your favorite companion!
5 Point to your least favorite
companion!
6 Show me your favorite color!
7 Tell me your greatest fear!
8 Describe a victory from your
travels!
PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
PA RT 2
 • What happened here? “A horde of giant The Pixie’s Treasure
things, they were—skin blue as death and Ristamere keeps a small lair in a hollow
hair like ice—came and stomped on all the big tree nearby, which requires a Wisdom
folk. Smaller than them, bigger than me. It’s a (Perception) DC 20 check to find. It contains
relative measure.” odds and ends from various travelers over the
• Did the big folk kill any of the giants? “No, years:
but not for want of trying. Mostly they were • a tiny cameo portrait of a moon elf woman,
surprised and didn’t have the chance.” worth 50 gp
• Where did the giants go? “Back to their • a tiny scrap of a scroll that radiates potent
camp, I think. Not like I followed them. No no necromantic magic, worth 100 gp to a sage
no! That’d be bad for pixie. Bad bad bad!” • assorted coins of various mints, worth 200
• Did the giants take any of them? How gp total
many? “The giant things took half a dozen of • three random trinkets (Player’s Handbook
the big folk, hollering and struggling—at least page 160-1).
until they gave ‘em a slap or two. Shut ‘em
right up. Gods, I hope they’re all right.”
• How long ago did it happen? “A while.
Several dawns. Not a season. Just after the
others.”
• How long have you been here? “Many
seasons. I don’t really keep count. Long
enough to see your friends and the others that
came through.”
• What others? or Have you seen anyone else
in this area? “A few times before I saw your
friends, there were some very unfriendly big
folk who camped here. They wore green and
gold too, but not the same.”
• What were the mercenaries doing in the
area? “Fighting, mostly. They raided up into
the mountains, and came back with bloody
weapons. Riled up the giants good and true.”
• What happened to them? “One day, they
didn’t come back. Serves ‘em right, you ask
me.”
• Is there any treasure here? “The giant things
took it all away, ‘cept for mine. Which you’ll
never find. NEVER NEVER NEVER!”

21 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:

PA RT 2
 Part 3.
The coldest steel
Expected Duration: 80 minutes
“The world is a cold, hard place that does not bend
to your storybook expectations. The sooner you
learn that, the better.”
—The Fox-at-Twilight (1483 DR, the Year of the
Tasked Weasel)
The heroes have tracked the missing emissaries to
a frost giant camp on the Glacier of Silver Blades,
where any survivors are being held captive.
Fortress Freustragg
Chief Freustragg, Winter Priestess Pavrat, and
their clan of 14 frost giants make their dwelling
on the side of one of the Dragonspine Mountains,
overlooking the Glacier of the Silver Blades.
They’ve dwelled here for some time, hunting in
the wilds of the mountains and on the glacier, and
occasionally raiding into the Ticklebelly Hills. They
did not build the mountain fortress, which seems
sized more appropriately for humanoid residents,
but have made it their own. The fortress dates back
centuries to an unknown civilization, and its origin
is a mystery for another day.
The giants hadn’t met with much opposition
in their time in the mountains until the Razorhand
Company started launching concerted attacks
on them. Clad in the green and gold tabards and
cloaks of House Sokol, the mercenaries staged
raids on the giants—never enough to kill many,
but quite enough to provoke them into attacking
anyone wearing those colors.
The giants managed to capture most of
the mercenaries, including their leader, Rouse
Blackbrand, and have been eating them day by day.
They’ll get to the missing emissaries next, whose
party they attacked because of their colors.
22
General Features
The following apply throughout the mountain
fortress:
Light. Normal lighting from the sun filtering
through the clouds. The towers and main hall are
dimly lit inside.
Stairs. The main stairs up the mountain are
ten feet wide and carved for creatures of humanoid
size and shape. Smaller tracks of stairs snake up
around the towers. The stairs evince wear and tear
from the giants’ occupation.
Snowdrifts. The snow is heaped deep on the
mountain, making for difficult terrain off paved
areas. The giants ignore this restriction.
Steep drop-offs. Any creature knocked off one
of the paved sections of the mountain fortress has a
chance to slip and slide down the mountain. Such a
creature must succeed on a DC 12 Dexterity saving
throw to avoid falling. On a failure, the creature slips
and falls 2d6x10 feet down the mountain, suffering
normal falling damage. Climbing the snowy slope
unaided requires a successful DC 12 Strength
(Athletics) check.
Calendar Check
Count up the number of days it took the
characters to reach the frost giant camp. The
giants consume one captive each day, starting
with the mercenaries, and they had four
mercenaries and six emissaries, not counting
Rouse Blackbrand and Bruw Clangeddin
(whom they save for last).
Example: If the characters have taken
six days to reach the camp, the frost giants
have eaten all four mercenaries and two
emissaries, leaving four alive.
Each day the characters delay once they
have arrived, they see the giants eat another
captive. It’s a grisly sight—the giants like their
food alive and wriggling.
PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
PA RT 3
1. Guard Towers
When the characters come within sight of the
camp, read:
By midday, you have pushed up into the
mountains through shivering cold and deep
drifts of snow to come at last within sight of
your destination.
The frost giants have built a tiered fortress
on the side of a mountain: a series of buildings
of dark wood and ice. You see sentry towers
on rocky outcroppings near the base that
offer an excellent view of the surrounding
country side. You suspect that approaching
unseen might prove difficult.
Two frost giants keep watch on the sentry towers
at the base of the mountain, presenting the
characters’ first hurdle in infiltrating the fortress.
The towers are spaced approximately a hundred
feet apart, with a giant manning each one. They are
not paying strict attention, but they are also not
asleep.
Unless both are taken down unawares and
quickly, one sounds a thunderous bellow on a
massive bone horn to alert the mountain camp,
summoning three more frost giants, who arrive 3
rounds after the horn is blown.
The giants attack and flee only if frightened.
2. Gutted Towers
Stone steps wind their way up the mountain, many
of them crushed or chipped from the tread of
massive feet. Flanking the stairs are six crumbling
towers and the remains of more structures long
since weathered away. The towers are forty feet
in diameter, their doors widened to accommodate
residents larger than originally intended.
Eight frost giants dwell in the six functional
towers. At midday (when the characters arrive),
they gather higher on the mountain in the main
yard to feast upon one of the captives.
23
3. Main Yard
This wide open expanse of stone offers the giants
a logical gathering place. A central stone slab
serves as some kind of altar upon which they have
placed a series of skulls, blackened fingers, and
other such trophies and traced a bloody symbol to
their wintry goddess, Auril. The symbol requires
a successful DC 10 Intelligence (Religion) check to
identify.
Three frost giants keep watch in the main
yard in the morning and through the night, and
Priestess Pavrat can usually be found at the altar
intoning prayers to Auril for strength and victory.
Fanatical in her faith, she has convinced Chief
Freustragg that the frost giants shall act as the
goddess wills.
At midday, the entire clan (except for the
sentries in locations 1 and 5) gathers in the
main yard to feast upon one of the captives in a
gruesome fashion.
4. Chief’s Hall
A weathered, broken down hall of crumbling stone
stands above the main yard of the fortress, and it is
within its cavernous depths that Chief Freustragg
sits on a makeshift throne of stone and twisted
metal, brooding and awaiting an augury from Auril
the Frost Maiden to launch another raid. Three
frost giants attend him at all times as an honor
guard.
Stepping into the hall makes one feel colder
even compared to the wintry air outside. The
hall itself is massive—two hundred feet square—
and the side facing the main yard is open to the
elements, its walls and ceiling largely collapsed
decades or centuries ago. Perhaps the hall might
have seen merrier times, but they have long
passed.
PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
PA RT 3
 Treasure
Using the Prisoners
Freustragg collects all the clan’s treasure for Bruw Clangeddin is a gruff but good-heart-
himself, and keeps it in a locked room in the hall ed shield dwarf with a thick silver beard (he is
behind his throne. Contained in this room are a named for Clangeddin Silverbeard, a dwarf war-
dozen pieces of precious metal sculptures, bowls, rior deity) and numerous scars. A former war-
and cups worth a total of 2,400 gp, four flame agate rior known for his patience, he’s understandably
gems worth a total of 2,000 gp, and gold and silver upset by his current arrangements and would
totaling 2,600 gp. love to get revenge on the giants. He has little
The chamber also contains a slightly battered to offer the characters in exchange for their aid,
leather satchel containing the trade documents; other than his approval and the reward of “doing
(plans and a comprehensive listing of supply the right thing.”
requirements for the mined stone necessary for Rouse Blackbrand is a Sembian human
the reconstruction of Phlan, a contract signed by man in his early forties with black hair, a short
Barrett Sokol), and 2,000 gp worth of platinum black beard, and a smooth, charismatic manner.
coins marked with the arms of House Sokol and Something of a charmer, he has managed to talk
Barrett’s face. These coins are intended as a the giants into not eating him thus far. Describ-
first payment to Clan Hammersfell, and it is not ing himself as a mercenary, he keeps quiet on his
expected that the characters will claim them. If exact origins when first encountering the charac-
they do, that affects the negotiations with the ters, because they might not know who he is or
dwarves in Part Four. why he’s here. If they don’t immediately release
him, he promises to pay them in coin and/or
5. Fortress Gaol information, so long as they take him from this
A building set off behind the chief’s hall boast a awful place.
number of large, communal cells, each big enough Both men are anxious to get out. Bruw wants
to accommodate five or six captives. The cells are to avenge his fallen comrades and would like to
cold and drafty, but at least the building is largely
join in the fight. If necessary, Rouse promises to
sealed.
pay for his rescue in secrets, to “get back at that
A single frost giant keeps watch outside the
blaggard who got me into this.”
gaol building, often sleeping on the job (50%
chance he is asleep). If the gaolkeeper is awake, If equipped with their weapons and ar-
sneaking past him requires a successful DC 13 mor, they use the Veteran statistics.
Dexterity (Stealth) check. The sounds of battle
in the main yard or the chief’s hall rouse him
automatically, but he waits inside the gaol, hoping
to ambush would-be rescuers.
The number of prisoners depends on when
the characters arrive. Rouse Blackbrand is kept
in the mercenary cell and Bruw Clangeddin in the
emissaries’ cell. Both cells are locked (successful
DC 15 Strength check or to Thieves’ Tools to open).
Their equipment (comically small for the giants)
is scattered heedlessly across the floor, most of
it battered and crushed to uselessness. The only
surviving pieces are a suit of battered splint mail,
a scuffed breastplate, three mostly intact shields,
a couple notched longswords, and Bruw’s much-
scuffed battleaxe. These items are obviously
worthless for resale.

24 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:

PA RT 3
Against the Giants
How exactly the characters deal with the frost giants
is up to them, but take care that scheming doesn’t take
up too much game time. This section presents several
possibilities, which you can suggest to the characters
by way of Aveen’s advice on the matter:
Frontal Assault
Under this option, the characters attack brazenly,
potentially fighting every giant in the camp.
At the guard towers, the characters have
to overcome the sentries, as well as the three
frost giants that answer the warning horn. Chief
Freustragg keeps all other giants in reserve at the
main yard. His thinking is, if anything can make
it past his guards, he will listen to what they have
to say. He stands confidently waiting in the main
yard with the others. The gaolkeeper remains in
location #5.
If the guards are defeated, another guard is
sent to motion the adventurers forward to speak. If
they do not come, Freustragg comes to hunt them
down with the full force of his tribe, which is eight
frost giants in addition to himself and Pavrat.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very Weak – Remove two frost giant
reinforcements
• Weak - Remove a frost giant reinforcement
• Strong – Reinforcements arrive 2 rounds
after the warning
• Very Strong – Add a frost giant
reinforcement, and they arrive 2 rounds
after the warning
25
Stealth Incursion
The characters seek to rescue the emissaries
without being detected or by creating a distraction.
Unaware giants have a passive Perception of 13,
though Pavrat’s high Wisdom gives her a passive
Perception of 16. The prisoners themselves are too
weak to fight.
Climbing an area of the mountain that is not
observed (i.e. away from the paved area) is difficult on
the sheer slope, requiring a successful DC 18 Strength
(Athletics) check. Failure leads to 10d6 bludgeoning
damage in the course of a battering plunge.
Negotiation
Freustragg awaits the adventurer’s approach in his hall.
From his throne, he has a vantage to see the adven-
ture’s approach, and they are beckoned inside and
given a chance to speak. The characters may be able to
convince the giants to part with the prisoners peace-
fully.
• Charisma (Persuasion) DC 20: Chief
Freustragg demands no less than 1,000
gp worth of treasure in exchange for each
prisoner. A successful check can convince him
to lower the price to a minimum of 750 gp. He
considers their possessions his treasure and
will part with them for an additional 500 gp.
• Charisma (Intimidation) DC 22: Attempts
at intimidation result in an immediate attack,
unless the characters have showed their
prowess by killing at least five frost giants
thus far. If that’s the case, a successful check
results in Freustragg releasing one prisoner
per giant the characters have killed. If the
adventurers demand more, the giants attack.
• Wisdom (Insight) DC 16: The adventurers
pick up on tension between the chief and his
priestess advisor (see sidebar), granting them
advantage on Charisma checks if they can
leverage it.
PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
PA RT 3
 Honor Challenge
Freustragg may not be the most devout of frost giants,
but he has a powerful sense of honor that borders on
religious faith. He respects strength and courage and
sides with those who demonstrate such things. Under
no circumstances will he turn down a fair challenge,
and the characters might challenge him for the lives of
the prisoners.
After interacting with or observing the chief-
tain, the characters might learn of his love of honor
with a successful DC 15 Wisdom (Insight) check. If
they speak Giant or are familiar with giants (back-
ground or relevant class feature, etc.), they gain advan-
tage on this check.
If the adventurers successfully challenge Freus-
tragg, he selects an honor guard composed of Pavrat
and three frost giants to fight at his side.
Adjusting the Encounter
Here are recommendations for adjusting this
combat encounter. These are not cumulative.
• Very Weak – Remove two frost giants
• Weak – Remove one frost giant
• Strong – add one frost giant
• Very Strong – Add two frost giants
26
Freustragg and Pavrat
Frequent lovers and constant battle companions,
the chieftain and his spiritual advisor have led
the tribe to great success, but recently friction
has strained their relationship. Freustragg wants
to raid and kill at whim, but Pavrat insists they
act only with the blessing of Auril, and the chief
grows resentful over her increasing attempts to
undermine him. For her part, Pavrat would love
nothing more than to supplant Freustragg with a
more faithful servant of Auril.
Freustragg carries his spear with him
at all times. The head of the spear is actually a
human sized greatsword (frostbrand), which has
been fashioned into a spear, creating a very large
and deadly giant-sized magic weapon.
In combat, Freustragg uses the same stat block as
normal frost giants, with the following additions.
• Freustragg has 30 hit points more than a
typical frost giant and wields a frostbrand
greatsword that he has fashioned into a
spear and grants him resistance to fire.
The normal damage is the same, but his
affinity to cold causes the weapon to inflict
an additional 6 (2d6) cold damage. The
party can claim his spear and restore it to a
sword if they defeat him, but it is a normal
frostbrand in anyone else’s hands (1d6 cold
damage).
• Pavrat is a combination of a frost giant and a
mage. She is Challenge Rating 9, worth 5,000
xp.
PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
PA RT 3
Rescuing the Prisoners
Once the adventurers have dealt with the giants • What do we do now? “Finish the job,
and rescued the prisoners, take stock of the a’course. We need the platinum and the scrolls
situation. for Clan Hammersfell, and then we need to get
As a reminder, the giants have eaten one the deal done. Me friends won’t have died in
prisoner per day of the adventure, starting with the vain.”
four captive mercenaries and moving on to the six • What do you know about Clan
captive emissaries, saving Rouse and Bruw for last. Hammersfell? “More’n you’d think. I’ve a
If there is conflict between Bruw and Rouse cousin in the clan, and I know where to find
or the adventurers can only save some of the them. I don’t have a silver tongue, though, so
prisoners, it is important to note that shared you’ll need to lead the negotiation. I’ll be there
captivity has bred a gruff sort of friendship and to help.”
respect. Bruw doesn’t want to leave Rouse behind, • You’re not going to do the talking? “Artora
while the somewhat more morally flexible Rouse was killed at our camp. It’ll have to be you, or
advocates for the dwarf, at least until it becomes this deal won’t get done. I’d like to address
clear that leaving him is the only way to survive. ‘em, though. Pay my respects.”
• What do you know about Rouse? “The big
Bruw Clangeddin man’s a mercenary. He was here when we got
Once rescued, the dwarf wants to continue on and here, along with several of his own. The giants
complete the mission. He promised Barrett Sokol ate them afore starting on mine. He’s a good
that he would see this deal inked, and he intends to man, for a sellsword.”
see it done, whatever the cost. He is a tough dwarf,
but what he’s witnessed has left him shaken.
Most relevant is that the emissaries’ chief
negotiator, Artora, was killed in the giants’ attack,
and Bruw is unsuitable to negotiate the deal with
the Hammersfell dwarves. If this doesn’t come
out in conversation (see below), he makes this
perfectly clear before the party heads out.
Bruw answers questions as best he can:
• What happened to you? “Attacked by giants,
we were. Down in the wood before we could
climb into the mountains. Came upon us in the
night and dragged most of us off. I saw two
of me friends killed before they knocked me
senseless.”
• Where are the other survivors? “The giants
a’been eating folk since we arrived—one every
day. They made me watch.”

27 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:

PA RT 3
 Rouse Blackbrand
The mercenary is more circumspect than Bruw— A successful Wisdom (Insight) DC 15 check
he knows he did wrong, and revealing all might determines that Rouse isn’t saying everything (the
not be his best play. He knew about Samulkin’s characters have advantage on this check if they
ploy to stir up the giants and went along with it, have discovered the false uniforms or encountered
even if he didn’t expect this fallout. He got rid of his the maddened survivor in Part Two).
House Sokol tabards and wears non-descript black If the ploy is revealed to Rouse but not his
leathers. involvement, he feigns outrage and pretends to
Once rescued, his primary interest is in have been deceived. He flees when possible.
getting out of that awful place alive, and then If confronted and/or threatened, he reveals the
taking vengeance on the man who put him in that whole truth (that Samulkin hired his company to
situation: Graben Samulkin. He seeks to befriend provoke the giants into attacking anyone wearing
the party (as he has befriended Bruw) and cast House Sokol colors) and throws himself on the
himself as an innocent victim of a mutual foe. mercy of his rescuers, promising their payment
Rouse answers the party’s questions from Samulkin for the job (500 gp plus the 500 gp
cautiously. they have collected thus far for killing five giants).
• What happened to you? “I lead the Razorhand The coin is buried not too far from the destroyed
Company out of Phlan, which was operating campsite in the forest.
in the mountains. We were attacked by giants, Note: Aveen Seakin knows Rouse can reveal
and they dragged off several of us. It was her secret—and vice versa.
horrible.”
• Who hired you? “A priest in Phlan by the name
of Graben Samulkin paid us to kill giants: a
hundred gold coins for each pair of giant ears
we brought back. Obviously, it weren’t worth
the hassle.”
• How many were in your company? “Four plus
myself who made it here. A dozen others. I
don’t know how many might have survived.”
• What do you know about Graben Samulkin?
“Never liked or trusted that snake. Should
have listened to my gut. Is he your enemy
too?”

28 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:

PA RT 3
 Part 4.
sealed deal
Expected Duration: 30 minutes Clan Hammersfell
“Coin is more powerful than any sword or spell, but
Secure in their fortress in the icy depths of the
honor greater still.” – Cormyrian aphorism
Dragonspine, the dwarves of Hammersfell have
“What honor?” – Sembian rebuttal
a reputation for endurance and grit, particularly
when it comes to mining.
This section of the adventure should be relatively
short but important, as it represents the characters Having emigrated from the west, Clan
resolving Sokol’s plan to enter into an agreement Hammersfell made their home in the mountains
with the dwarves of Clan Hammersfell. about a century ago, and their clan now
numbers about two hundred. The dwarves have
The dwarves are not intended to be
occasionally struggled with orcs and frost giants
antagonists in any way, and this section of the
in the mountains, and have become increasingly
adventure is entirely a social encounter. If steel is
isolationist. They have a less than stellar history
ever drawn in earnest, end with the party failing
with those who seek them out, having been the
and being escorted out.
victim of various schemes and would-be thefts in
Adventure Pacing Check-in the past.
If time grows short, you can condense this part The dwarves are suspicious of outsiders,
to a single Charisma (Persuasion) check or rule and have tentatively agreed to meet with
that the characters automatically succeed. See Barrett Sokol’s emissaries only after months of
“Making the Pitch,” below. correspondence between the heir and themselves.
If the party is to have any luck of persuading them
Seeking Out the Dwarves to sign on to Sokol’s deal, they have to allay the
dwarves’ natural suspicions.
The journey from the frost giant mountain to Clan
Hammersfell’s fortress is automatic, assuming the
characters possess one of the following:
• Bruw Clangeddin knows the way.
• Aveen Seakin can lead the party there.
• The trade documents detail the location of the
holdfast well enough to locate it.
Barring these advantages, the party can attempt to
find the Hammersfell Holdfast with a successful DC
15 Wisdom (Survival) check.
If the characters cannot find the dwarves or
decide not to attempt to strike a deal with them,
they return to Phlan, having failed their mission.
Skip this section and go to Part 5: Phlan in Chaos.

29 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:

PA RT 4
 Entering Hammersfell Holdfast
When the characters approach the Holdfast,
read:
By midday, you have pushed up into the moun-
tains through shivering cold and deep drifts of
snow to come at last within sight of your destina-
tion.
At last, out of the cleft of two snow-choked
slopes you perceive a mass of intricately carved
black stone that lights up with gleaming blue
runes as you draw near. It opens into a yawn-
ing passage, from which the warm air of forges
billows forth.
A thickly muscled dwarf woman in fine,
gold-inlaid ringmail approaches you, flanked by
half a dozen bitter-faced guards. “You must be
the emissaries of Barrett Sokol,” she says. “You
are late.” Without another word, she ushers you
into the cramped, cold interior of the holdfast,
and the heavy doors scrape closed behind you.
The dwarf who greets them is named Rhuldir, none
other than the matriarch of the clan. She offers the
characters some light refreshment—dwarven ale,
hard brown bread, boiled meat—waiting
indifferently while they refresh themselves from
their journey.
Then, tight-lipped, she leads the characters to
the audience hall, answering questions gruffly and
in as few words as possible. She mostly lets them
speak, wanting to learn more of these would-be
negotiators before she has to bargain with them in
earnest.
Audience with the Matriarch
The journey to the audience hall is a short one, as
the holdfast is not large. During the journey, read:
You pass through the tight, low-ceilinged tun-
nels, at one point crossing a natural bridge over
a gaping chasm where you can see dwarves
mining great blocks of stone in the depths below,
secured with chains that gleam in the torchlight.
The pungent smell of chemicals assails your nos-
trils, and you are relieved when your guide bids
you on.
You come at length to a wide audience cham-
ber engraved with runic script along the walls and
inset with torches that burn with blue, smokeless
fire. A number of stone chairs fills the room, each
of them occupied with a grizzled dwarf who
stares at you with suspicion. The central chair,
30
where you would expect the clan’s chief to sit,
stands vacant—at least until your guide parts
from your group and sits there herself.
“I am Rhuldir, Warchief of Clan Hammersfell,”
she says. “Offer me your master’s terms, and we
shall do business.”
Making the Pitch
Roleplay the preliminary negotiation while you cal-
culate the difficulty of convincing the dwarves to take
Sokol’s deal. The negotiation requires no fewer than
three successful Charisma (Persuasion) skill checks
out of six attempts, using the following considerations:
• Charisma (Persuasion) check: DC 20,
minimum recalculated DC 15.
• Bruw Clangeddin: Having Bruw speak grants
advantage on one Charisma (Persuasion) check.
(Plus earns a bonus XP award for the party.)
• Surviving Emissaries: Seeing Sokol respect
the clan enough to send a number of proxies
reassures the dwarves. For each emissary
present (not including Bruw), lower the DC by 1.
• Dwarves in the Party: If at least one of the
members of the party is a dwarf, reduce the
DC by 1.
• Elves or Orcs in the party: For every member
of the party who appears to be at least part elf
or orc, increase the DC by 1.
• Sokol’s Signet: Showing this ring grants
the party advantage on one Charisma
(Persuasion) check.
• Payment: The dwarves are expecting the
2,000 gp for first payment. If it is not present,
the characters have disadvantage on all
Charisma (Persuasion) checks.
• Trade Documents: The dwarves care little
for the paperwork, so the presence of Sokol’s
documents makes no difference to the
negotiation, but it can offer the characters
important insights into how to address their
concerns (see below).
• Good Roleplaying: Grant advantage on the
check if the characters play out the pitch well.
• Other Skills: The characters may attempt
to win the dwarves over through numerous
indirect means. See sidebar for suggestions.
PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
PA RT 4
Even if the party amasses three successful
attempts or three failed attempts, keep playing
out the negotiation until they think they’ve made
a winning case, they give up, or six attempts have
been made. They should not know whether they
succeeded or failed until the dwarves render their
final decision.
Winning the Dwarves Over
The following skills (all at DC 15) may be
used to win the dwarves’ admiration or
respect, each time granting advantage to the
subsequent Charisma (Persuasion) check as
part of the negotiation:
• Knowledge of their history/customs:
Intelligence (History)
• Evocations of the dwarven gods: Intelligence
(Religion)
• Stirring tales of past heroics: Charisma
(Performance)
• Feats of strength or endurance: Strength
(Athletics)
• Boasting and crowing: Charisma
(Intimidation)
• A drinking contest: Constitution saving
throw
Each character may attempt to win over the
dwarves only once. Allow players to improvise
ways to impress the dwarves, using a DC 12
each time.
The Dwarves’ Concerns
Each time the party seeks to attempt a Charisma
(Persuasion) check, ask them to address one of the
dwarves’ concerns. Without the trade documents,
the checks are made at disadvantage. Failure on the
check makes the deal worse for Sokol on that point,
as noted below:
• How much is Sokol offering? Answer
requires the trade documents. It is a generous
sum: 1,000 gp for a ten-day’s worth of stone.
Failure on this point prompts the dwarves to
demand 2,000 gp per tenday instead.
• How is the payment to be delivered? Answer
requires the trade documents. The coin will
change hands in Phlan. Failure on this point
prompts the dwarves to demand a private
31
courier to bring the coin to them each tenday.
• How are we to ship the stone safely?
Answer requires the trade documents. Once
the stone comes down from the mountain,
Sokol provides servants to protect the
shipments along the river. Failure on this point
prompts the dwarves to demand protection all
the way from their quarry in the mountains.
• Who will work the stone in Phlan? Sokol’s
documents don’t cover this, but succeeding
on an easy Wisdom (Insight) DC 10 check, the
characters realize he means to give the guilds
these jobs. Failure on this point prompts the
dwarves to insist on doing the construction
themselves, because non-dwarven hands are
unsuited to work with their superior stone.
• Who will take charge of dealing with frost
giant attacks? Sokol’s documents have no
clause for this. If the party volunteers to
clean out the giants, they gain advantage on
this check. Failure on this point prompts the
dwarves to demand Sokol hire mercenaries to
destroy the giants.
Success or Failure
If the characters fail four or more Charisma
(Persuasion) checks (i.e. don’t address at least half
the dwarves’ concerns satisfactorily), then Rhuldir
rejects their pitch and refuses to ink Sokol’s deal.
If the party fails all six attempts, the dwarves
are angered by the negotiations and exile them
from their lands, never to return on pain of attack.
They have no choice but to leave in disgrace. (If
they stay and fight, they face a clan of fifty dwarves,
including several elite warriors of CR 8-10.
They may triumph handily, but they then gain a
reputation as butchers.)
If, however, the party succeeds at three or
more of the attempts, the dwarves accept the deal
(plus any consequences to Sokol for failures). The
party gains additional xp for sealing the deal (see
page 19).
If the party succeeds at all six checks, the
dwarves are impressed with their diplomatic
abilities and extend the warm hand of friendship to
them. They also gift the party with 1,000 gp worth
of cut gems.
PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
PA RT 4
 Part 5.
Phlan in chaos
The difference between good and evil is that good lays
down the sword when the quest is done. Evil never rests,
and neither must we.
—Kalen Dren, Watcher of the Eye of Justice (1484 DR,
the Year of the Awakened Sleepers)
This section of the adventure should be shorter than
the rest, as it consists entirely of a set of descriptive
text to end the trilogy of adventures and set up the
interactive event.
to Thorn Island, which fairly bristles with guards
posted with crossbows and spears at the ready.
Only when you are ushered into a meeting
with a harried and tired Barret Sokol, do you
learn the truth: the other candidates for the
throne are in prison or missing, the church of
Bane has seized control of the city, and Graben
Samulkin has declared himself the Ruinlord of
Phlan.
In your absence, Phlan has fallen, and its trou-
bles are only just beginning.

Return to Phlan • If Aveen Seakin has been treated well and

returned to Phlan safely, the adventurers earn
The heroes return to Phlan at the conclusion of the
the Insider Trading story reward.
adventure. If they attempt to contact anyone in the city
by magic, their attempts are unsuccessful (or at least • If Rouse Blackbrand is rescued and returned
do not yield any immediate reply). This may produce safely to Phlan, the adventurers earn the
some anxiety for them: play up the uncertainty as they Razorhand-shake story reward.
return. Conclusion
When the adventurers return to the city, read: Sokol has managed to find enough men loyal to his
family to fight off any efforts to arrest him. His loca-
After your long journey through the cold, bleak
northland, you are looking forward to a warm tion on the island helps a great deal, however he thinks
welcome in a city that celebrates you as heroes. it’s only a matter of time before they come for him in
That feeling ends when you crest a rise and full force. It is no doubt common knowledge that the
look upon Phlan, standing grim on the rocky adventures have acted as agents for each of the candi-
coast of the Moonsea. Something is fundamen-
dates.
tally darker about the city now. The wreckage of
half a dozen ships smolder in the bay and greasy
smoke rises from fires blazing in the heights like
beacons. An unknown banner depicting a raised
black fist waves from the pinnacle of the tallest
tower. Something definitely seems off.
Once inside the city walls, Phlan is notably
somber. Gone are the campaign posters for the
Cinnabar Throne, leaving only shreds affixed to
worn masonry. Fewer people walk the streets,
and those that do keep to the shadows and eye
you suspiciously. You hear dozens of whispers in
your wake, and somewhere a child wails pitifully.
The docks are choked with people arguing
heatedly on the verge of coming to blows.
Your arrival sweeps through them like a pebble
thrown into water, and they make way for you,
staring daggers in your direction. You take a skiff

32 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:

PA RT 5
Rewards
Make sure players note their rewards on their
adventure logsheets. Give your name and DCI
number (if applicable) so players can record who
ran the session.
Experience
Total up all combat experience earned for
defeated foes, and divide by the number of
characters present in the combat. For non-
combat experience, the rewards are listed per
character. Give all characters in the party non-
combat experience awards unless otherwise
noted.
Combat Awards
Name of Foe XP per Foe
Cyclops 2300
Pixie 50
Frost Giant 3900
Pavrat 5000
Non-Combat Awards
Task or Accomplishment XP per Frostbrand
Character
Discover Aveen’s secret 1000
Discover the signet ring 1000
Overcome giants without combat 2,000
Successful honor challenge 2,000
Each prisoner rescued 500
Allow Bruw to address the dwarves 500
Broker deal with dwarves 5,000
Return Rouse to Phlan 1000
The minimum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 8,625
experience points.
The maximum total award for each character
participating in this adventure is 11,000
experience points.
33
Treasure
The characters receive the following treasure,
divided up amongst the party. Characters should
attempt to divide treasure evenly whenever
possible. Gold piece values listed for sellable
gear are calculated at their selling price, not their
purchase price.
Consumable magic items should be divided
up however the group sees fit. If more than one
character is interested in a specific consumable
magic item, the DM can determine who gets it
randomly should the group be unable to decide.
Permanent magic items are divided
according to a system. See the sidebar if the
adventure awards permanent magic items.
Treasure Awards
Item Name GP Value
Barrett Sokol Reward 5,000
Ristamere’s Treasure 350
Frost Giants 7,000
Razorhand cache 1,000
Hammersfell bestowal 1,000
Greatsword, very rare (requires attunement)
When you hit with an attack using this magic
sword, the target takes an extra 1d6 cold damage.
In addition, while you hold the sword, you have
resistance to fire damage.
In freezing temperatures, the blade sheds
bright light in a 10-foot radius and dim-light for an
additional 10 feet.
When you draw this weapon, you can
extinguish all non-magical flames within 30 feet of
you. This property can be used no more than once
per hour.
Renown
All faction members earn one renown point for
participating in this adventure.
Lord’s Alliance characters earn one additional
renown point for safely returning the Sokol signet
ring to Barrett Sokol.
PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
R E WA R D S
 Story Rewards
The characters have the opportunity to earn the
following story rewards during the course of play.
Razorhand-shake. You have rescued Rouse
Blackbrand from certain demise. At the party’s
request, Rouse vows to support their choice of
candidate for Leader of Phlan. This may prove
useful in the future.
Insider Trading. Aveen Seakin is impressed with
your abilities and determination. She offers to
put in a good word if any of them want to become
procurers for Aurora’s Whole Realms Catalog at
some point in the future.

Downtime
Each character receives 10 downtime days at the
conclusion of this adventure.

DM Rewards
You receive 600 XP, 300 gp, and 10 downtime days
for running this session.

34 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:

APPENDIX
Appendix: Bestiary
Aveen Seakin (Scout) Veteran
Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment Medium humanoid (any race), any alignment
Armor Class 13 (leather armor) Armor Class 17 (splint)
Hit Points 16 (3d8 + 3) Hit Points 58 (9d8 + 18)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
11 (+0) 14 (+2) 12 (+1) 11 (+0) 13 (+1) 11 (+0) 16 (+3) 13 (+1) 14 (+2) 10 (+0) 11 (+0) 10 (+0)

Skills Nature +4, Perception +5, Stealth +6,
Survival +5
Senses passive Perception 15
Languages any one language (usually Common)
Challenge 1/2 (100 XP)
Keen Hearing and Sight. The scout has advantage
on Wisdom (Perception) checks that rely on
hearing or sight.
Actions
Multiattack. The scout makes two melee attacks or
two ranged attacks.
Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, reach
5 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d6 + 2) piercing damage.
Longbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +4 to hit, ranged
150/600 ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d8 + 2) piercing
damage.
Skills Athletics +5, Perception +2
Senses passive Perception 12
Languages any one language (usually Common)
Challenge 3 (700 XP)
Actions
Multiattack. The veteran makes two longsword
attacks. If it has a shortsword drawn, it can also
make a shortsword attack.
Longsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach
5 ft., one target. Hit: 7 (1d8 + 3) slashing damage,
or 8 (1d10 + 3) slashing damage if used with two
hands.
Shortsword. Melee Weapon Attack: +5 to hit, reach
5 ft., one target. Hit: 6 (1d6 + 3) piercing damage.
Heavy Crossbow. Ranged Weapon Attack: +3 to
hit, range 100/400 ft., one target. Hit: 5 (1d10)
piercing damage.

35 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:

APPENDIX
 Cyclops Pixie
Huge giant, chaotic neutral Tiny fey, neutral good
Armor Class 14 (natural armor) Armor Class 15
Hit Points 138 (12d12 + 60) Hit Points 1 (1d4 − 1)
Speed 30 ft. Speed 10 ft., fly 30 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
22 (+6) 11 (+0) 20 (+5) 8 (−1) 6 (−2) 10 (+0) 2 (−4) 20 (+5) 8 (−1) 10 (+0) 14 (+2) 15 (+2)

Senses passive Perception 8 Skills Perception +4, Stealth +7

Languages Giant
Challenge 6 (2,300 XP)
Poor Depth Perception. The cyclops has
disadvantage on any attack roll against a target
more than 30 feet away.
Actions
Multiattack. The cyclops makes two greatclub
attacks.
Greatclub. Melee Weapon Attack: +9 to hit, reach
10 ft., one target. Hit: 19 (3d8 + 6) bludgeoning
damage.
Rock. Ranged Weapon Attack: +9 to hit, range
30/120 ft., one target. Hit: 28 (4d10 + 6)
bludgeoning damage.
Senses passive Perception 14
Languages Sylvan
Challenge 1/4 (50 XP)
Magic Resistance. The pixie has advantage on
saving throws against spells and other magical
effects.
Innate Spellcasting. The pixie’s innate spellcasting
ability is Charisma (spell save DC 12). It can
innately cast the following spells, requiring only its
pixie dust as a component:
At will: druidcraft
1/day each: confusion, dancing lights, detect
evil and good, detect thoughts, dispel magic,
entangle, fly, phantasmal force, polymorph,
sleep
Actions
Superior Invisibility. The pixie magically turns
invisible until its concentration ends (as if
concentrating on a spell). Any equipment the pixie
wears or carries is invisible with it.

36 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:

APPENDIX
Frost Giant Pavrat (Frost Giant Priest)
Huge giant, neutral evil Huge giant, neutral evil
Armor Class 15 (patchwork armor) Armor Class 15 (patchwork armor)
Hit Points 138 (12d12 + 60) Hit Points 138 (12d12 + 60)
Speed 40 ft. Speed 40 ft.
STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA STR DEX CON INT WIS CHA
23 (+6) 9 (−1) 21 (+5) 9 (−1) 10 (+0) 12 (+1) 23 (+6) 9 (−1) 21 (+5) 9 (−1) 19 (+4) 12 (+1)

Saving Throws Con +8, Wis +3, Cha +4
Skills Athletics +9, Perception +3
Damage Immunities cold
Senses passive Perception 13
Languages Giant
Challenge 8 (3,900 XP)
Actions
Multiattack. The giant makes two greataxe attacks.
Greataxe. Melee Weapon Attack: +9 to hit, reach 10
ft., one target. Hit: 25 (3d12 + 6) slashing damage.
Rock. Ranged Weapon Attack: +9 to hit, range
60/240 ft., one target. Hit: 28 (4d10 + 6)
bludgeoning damage.
Saving Throws Con +8, Wis +7, Cha +4
Skills Athletics +9, Perception +3
Damage Immunities cold
Senses passive Perception 13
Languages Common, Giant
Challenge 9 (5,000 XP)
Spellcasting. Pavrat is a 9th-level spellcaster. Her
spellcasting ability is Wisdom (spell save DC 17,
+8 to hit with spell attacks). She has the following
spells prepared:
Cantrips (at will): light, resistance, sacred
flame(3d8) ray of frost(3d8)
1st level (4 slots): bless, fog cloud, entangle
(flavored as ice), shield
2nd level (3 slots): invisibility, cloud of daggers
(flavored as ice shards), shatter
3rd level (3 slots): counterspell, call lightning,
spirit guardians
4th level (3 slots): ice storm, greater invisibility
5th level (1 slot): cone of cold
Actions
Multiattack. The giant makes two greataxe attacks.
Greataxe. Melee Weapon Attack: +9 to hit, reach 10
ft., one target. Hit: 25 (3d12 + 6) slashing damage.
Rock. Ranged Weapon Attack: +9 to hit, range
60/240 ft., one target. Hit: 28 (4d10 + 6)
bludgeoning damage.

37 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:

APPENDIX
38 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
APPENDIX
39 PHLAN 1-3 / SUBTERFUGE:
APPENDIX